Copyright: Copyright (c) Corel 1996.
Citation: Copyright (c) Corel 1996. All Rights Reserved.


Quattro Pro Help Contents

Click an icon or underlined title to go to a topic.

Essentials - information for getting up to speed with Quattro Pro, including new features

How Do I - step-by-step instructions for using Quattro Pro

@Functions - @function reference

Macros - macro command reference

Additional Help - descriptions of menu commands, objects and properties, and glossary terms

Using Help - how to use Help


Essentials

Before attempting any tasks in Quattro Pro, read the following essential topics. For a step-by-step introduction to Quattro Pro, choose Coaches from the Quattro Pro Help menu.

New Features

Describes what is new in version 6.0 of Quattro Pro for Windows.

Using Quattro Pro Help

How to use Quattro Pro Help and Object Help for Toolbar button identification.

Coaches

Interactive lessons that work with your data.

Experts

An alternate way to perform certain spreadsheet tasks.

Using Notebooks

Use Notebooks to keep track of multiple sets of spreadsheet data.

Object Inspector

Provides direct access to the properties of each object.

Work Areas

Explains each major part of Quattro Pro.

Toolbars

Describes each of the Quattro Pro Toolbars.

Property Band

Describes how to use the Property Band that appears beneath the Toolbar.

Quattro Pro Graphs

Important background information for working with graphs.

Mouse Techniques

Teaches mouse skills that boost your productivity.

Keyboard Techniques

Lists shortcut key combinations.

Undoing Mistakes

Specifies those areas of Quattro Pro where you can use the Undo command.

DOS Spreadsheet Users

For users of DOS versions of Quattro Pro and Lotus 1-2-3.


@Functions

@Functions perform special calculations. @Function descriptions can be viewed in an alphabetically-sorted index, or in a series of lists for each major category:

Function Index

Step-By-Step Directions

Using @Functions

@Function Categories

Database	Perform analytic calculations on records in a database.

Date and Time	Calculate dates and times, or perform calculations involving business days.

Engineering	Perform number conversion, Boolean operations, and calculations involving complex numbers or Bessel functions.

Financial	Calculate investments and cash flow.

Logical	Compare and evaluate relationships between values.

Mathematical	Calculate trigonometric functions and other mathematical values.

Miscellaneous	Provide current information such as table values.

Statistical	Perform analytic calculations on a list of values.

String	Manipulate text strings or labels.

Tip:	To print a group of @function topics, choose File|Print Group Of @Functions from Quattro Pro Help.


Macros

A "macro" is a stored series of keystrokes, special keys, and commands that can be played back. You create macros by recording them or typing them in. Macro command descriptions can be viewed in an alphabetically-sorted index, or in a series of lists for each major category.

Macro Command Index

Step-By-Step Directions

Using Macros

Macro Command Categories

Keyboard	Emulate the action of various keys on the keyboard.

Screen	Affect the display.

Interactive	Let you create macros that display dialog boxes or pause for the user to enter data from the keyboard.

Program Flow	Let you branch and loop in a macro.

Cell	Affect the data stored in specified cells.

File	Work with data within files other than the active notebook file.

Command Equivalents	Emulate operations you can perform with menu commands.

OLE and DDE	Communicate with other Windows applications.

UI Building	Let you change the menu bar.

Object	Let you create, move, resize, select, and change the properties of objects.

Miscellaneous	Insert characters and comments, and perform a variety of other tasks.

Analysis Tools	Let you perform analyses of numerical data.

/ Commands are commands used by Quattro Pro for DOS to emulate menu commands. See the Quattro Pro for DOS User's Guide for more information on menu-equivalent commands.

Tip:	To print a group of macro command topics, choose File|Print Group Of Macros from Quattro Pro Help.


Keyboard Techniques

Throughout Quattro Pro documentation, instructions emphasize the use of a mouse. The following topics list Quattro Pro keyboard commands:

Special Keys	Useful keyboard shortcuts.

Edit Mode Keys	When Quattro Pro is in edit mode.

Point Mode Keys	When Quattro Pro is in point mode.

Print Preview Keys	When previewing a notebook before printing.

Navigation Keys	For moving around notebook pages.

Function Keys	Keys labeled F1, F2, through F12.

Formula Composer Keys	Keyboard shortcuts available when using the Formula Composer.

See Also

Mouse Techniques


Menu Commands

File	Open, save, close files; preview and print output; publish, subscribe, and send notebooks.

Edit	Undo, cut, copy, and paste; clear cells and formats; create links; find and replace; insert page breaks and objects.

View	Switch among available views for that window, toggle Group mode, set display options, enlarge or shrink the window (Zoom)

Block	Move, copy, fill, sort, name, transpose, and reformat blocks; insert and delete blocks and pages; copy values instead of formulas; limit movement to unprotected cells.

Notebook	Define custom styles, SpeedFill series, or groups; move pages; extract, import, parse, and combine data and text; update links.

Graphics	Create, edit, and display graphs and slide shows.

Slide Show	Create or add slides, and edit or run a slide show.

Toolbar	Work with custom Toolbars in the Toolbar Designer.

Dialog	Work with custom Toolbars and dialog boxes in the UI Builder.

Tools	Work with macros, spell check, activate Database Desktop and Data Modeling Desktop, query databases and tables, perform many types of data analysis, develop custom Toolbars and dialog boxes, and change the order of layered objects.

Window	Open additional views of the active window; tile, cascade, hide, and show windows; arrange icons; switch from one window to another.

Help	Display online Help, Experts, and Coaches.

Quattro Pro's menus change depending on the active window.

The Notebook and Block menus are available only from a notebook window.

The Slide Show menu is available only from a Light Table window.

The Toolbar menu is available only from a custom Toolbar window.

The Dialog menu is available only from a dialog window.


Objects and Properties

See Object Inspector Menus for an introduction to working with objects and properties in Quattro Pro.

Basic Properties

Active Block

Active Page

Active Notebook

Application

Properties in Each Window

Properties in the Notebook Window

Properties in the Graph Window

Properties in the Light Table Window

Properties in the Dialog Window

Objects You Can Inspect

Notebook Window Objects

Graph Window Objects

Light Table Window Objects

Dialog Window Objects

Reference Information

Property Reference


Additional Help

Common Questions

Corel Technical Services

Menu Commands

Objects and Properties

Glossary


Corel Technical Services
Corel Technical Support

Sales

To order additional products or supplementary materials, please call the Sales Center at (800) 772-6735.

Calling Customer Support

If you have questions or problems when using Corel products, you may want to call Customer Support.  When calling, please be at your computer and have your PIN or serial number available.

If you are an English version user within the United States, U.S. Territories, or Canada, you can get support by dialing the numbers listed below.  If you are outside the United States, Puerto Rico, the U.S. Virgin Islands, or Canada, please contact your local Corel affiliate or authorized reseller.

Classic Support

Unlimited, complimentary Classic Support is offered during normal business hours on toll telephone lines.  To receive Classic Support, you need to register your software.  If you reside within the United States, U.S. Territories, or Canada, please mail your registration card to:

Unique Data Services

7229 Olde Salem Circle

Hanover, IL 60103

If you reside outside the United States, Puerto Rico, the U.S. Virgin Islands, or Canada, please mail your registration card to:

International Registration

49B Bracken Rd.

Sandy Ford, Industrial Estates

Dublin, Ireland 1818

The first time you call Customer Support, you will receive a Personal Identification Number (PIN).   You will need to supply this number each time you call Classic Support.  This PIN will be the same for all products you own.

For additional information about our Classic Support, please call the Service Entitlement Group at (800) 861-2160.

To provide you with the best service, we have specialized support groups.  For help with any product included in the Corel WordPerfect Suite, please call (801) 765-4041.

Priority Support

This support is for those using Corel software who need immediate assistance, after-hours service, or support beyond Classic Service.  Priority Support provides priority queuing and access to second-level technicians.  The fee for Priority Support is calculated on a per minute, per incident, or annual basis, or in discounted multi-packs.

For additional information concerning Priority Support options, please call the Service Entitlement Group at (800) 861-2160.

To access fee-based Priority Support for any product included in the Corel WordPerfect Suite, please call the following numbers:

(800) 310-2122 (per-incident charge)

(900) 555-2120 (per-minute charge)

Additional Customer Support Services

IVAN 24-Hour Automated Support System

IVAN, our Interactive Voice Answering Network, contains answers to commonly asked technical questions and allows you to solve your own problems 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.  IVAN is regularly updated with the latest information, tips, and tricks.  You can also request that IVAN solutions be faxed to you.  There is no charge for the IVAN service beyond the cost of the telephone call.  To use this service, please call (801) 765-4038.

Fax-On-Demand Service

If you have a fax machine, you can get detailed information about Corel's WordPerfect products, supplementary materials and services, and Customer Support solutions to common problems, 24 hours a day, by calling (801) 765-4037.

Electronic Support for the Hearing Impaired

Customers with a telecommunications device for the deaf (TDD) or teletypewriter (TTY) can get support Monday through Friday during normal business hours by calling (801) 765-4032.

Corel's WordPerfect BBS

If you have a modem and communications software package, you can access Corel's WordPerfect Bulletin Board Service (BBS).  You can download files, including printer drivers, troubleshooting information, and utilities, and you can transfer problem files to Customer Support through the BBS.  For an explanation for how to access and use the BBS, call (801) 765-4033.

To access the BBS, call (801) 221-5197.

Make-It-Perfect

To record requests for product and policy enhancements, call (801) 765-4030.

CompuServe

If you have a CompuServe membership, you can access WordPerfect technical information by entering GOCOREL at the CompuServe prompt.  On this forum, you can quickly search the Corel WordPerfect technical information database for answers to many of your technical questions or problems.  This site also contains printer drivers and other files you can download.

Internet

The World Wide Web address for WordPerfect on the Internet is http://www.corel.com.  At this location, you can quickly search the Corel WordPerfect technical information database.  From the database, you can read, print, or download documents that contain answers to many of your technical questions or problems.  This site also contains printer drivers and other files you can download.

If you need to contact Corel in writing about your suite products, please use the following address:

ATTN CUSTOMER SUPPORT

COREL CORPORATION LIMITED

567 E. TIMPANOGOS PKWY

OREM, UT  84057

© Corel Corporation Limited 1996. All Rights Reserved.


SpeedFill Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you fill a block with the sequence of entries.

Dialog Box Options

Series

Lists the defined series. Below the series name is the list of entries in the series.

Series Elements

Displays the list of entries in the series.

Columns

Fills the cells in order from top to bottom of each column.

Rows

Fills the cells in order from left to right of each row.

Tabs

Fills page tab names with entries in the series. This option is available only if you chose SpeedFill with a single cell selected.

Create

Opens the Create Series dialog box, which lets you define a new series.

Modify

Opens the Modify Series dialog box, which lets you change the values in a series.

Delete

Deletes a series.


SpeedFill Columns/Rows Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you fill a block with the sequence of entries.

Dialog Box Options

Series

Lists the defined series. Below the series name is the list of entries in the series.

Series Elements

Displays the list of entries in the series.

Create

Opens the Create Series dialog box, which lets you define a new series.

Modify

Opens the Modify Series dialog box, which lets you change the values in a series.

Delete

Deletes a series.


Create Series Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you create a new series to be used to fill a block. The Define Series options in the dialog box vary depending on whether the series type is List or Formula.

Dialog Box Options

Name

The name of the current series you are defining; the name can be up to 200 characters.

List

Creates a series consisting of a list of values.

Repeating

When checked, repeats the list of values to fill a block.

Formula

Creates a series consisting of a sequence of formulas.

If the series type is List, the Series Element options appear.

If the series type is Formula, the Formula Definition options appear.


Series Element Options

If the series type is List in the Create Series dialog box, the Series Element options are:

Value

A text box for entering and editing series values. After you type a new value, click Add to add the value to the series. Each value can be up to 200 characters.

Insert

Inserts a value before the selected value in the series list.

Add

Adds a value after the selected value in the series list.

Delete

Removes a value from the series.

Modify

Changes a selected value in the series. Select a value from the list, edit the value in the text box, then choose Modify.

Extract

Draws values from a selected block on a notebook page.


Formula Definition Options

If the series type is Formula in the Create Series dialog box, the Formula Definition options are:

Seed Value

Starting value used as a constant in the formula. Seed Value can be any decimal value; a Seed Value that is a string is evaluated as 0.

Formula

A formula used to define a series of values. The formula can include @functions; see @Function Descriptions for a list of @function categories. The formula can use arithmetic operators (such as - and +) and logical operators (such as <, >, and #OR#); see Types of Operators for details. You can also use the Seed, Previous, and Iteration buttons, described below, to insert a specific constant or variable into the formula.

Seed

Inserts the seed value constant into the formula expression. The seed value constant is represented by #SEED#.

Previous

Inserts a variable into the formula representing the value of the previous element in the series list. The previous element variable is represented by #PREV#.

Iteration

Inserts a variable into the formula representing the value of the iteration number in the series list (for example, 1, 2, 3, and so on). The iteration number variable is represented by #ITER#.


Extract Values Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you select a block of values on a notebook page to be used as a defined series.

Dialog Box Options

Source Block

A block of values used as the source for the series. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Override Existing Values

When checked, replaces any existing series values with the values in the source block.


Modify Series Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you make changes to a series to be used to fill a block. The Define Series options in the dialog box vary depending on whether the series type is List or Formula.

Dialog Box Options

Series Info

Displays the series name. If the series type is List, a Repeating check box appears. When checked, this option repeats the list of values to fill a block.

If the series type is List, the Series Element options appear.

If the series type is Formula, the Formula Definition options appear.


Rename Series Dialog Box

This dialog box changes the name for a series. There is one option:

Series Name

Type a name for the defined series.


Paste Special Graph Dialog Box

The Paste Special Graph dialog box lets you copy the attributes of a graph (including the graph type, position of objects, titles, data, background style, color scheme, and annotations) and paste them over another graph.

Dialog Box Options

Style

Pastes the graph style of the copied graph.

Positions

Pastes the position of graph objects from the copied graph.

Titles

Pastes the graph title, subtitle, and axis title text from the copied graph.

Data Series

Pastes the data series from the copied graph. When you choose this option, Quattro Pro copies a reference to the data used in the copied graph. (Data is not physically copied to a different location in the notebook.) Data Series also pastes x-axis and legend series, legend label overrides, and label series.

Background

Pastes the graph background style used in the copied graph.

Color Scheme

Pastes the color scheme used in the copied graph. (Color Scheme does not affect the color of graph annotations.)

Annotations

Copies all text and drawings you created for the source graph using the drawing tools on the Graph Toolbar. Annotations also includes any graphics you imported for the source graph.

Caution: To preserve annotations that already exist in the destination graph, uncheck Annotations. Annotations erases all annotation items in the destination graph, even when there are none to copy from the source graph.

The options you choose can produce quite different results:

If you check all options, Quattro Pro builds an exact copy of the source graph. (You can copy the source graph through the Clipboard to get the same results.)

If you uncheck Data Series, but check all other options, Quattro Pro builds a graph that has the same graph type and properties as the source graph, but uses the data of the destination graph. (The source graph serves as a style template for the destination graph.)

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Enhancing Graphs


Paste Special Dialog Box (Quattro Pro Block)

This dialog box appears when you paste cells within a Quattro Pro notebook or from one notebook to another.

Dialog Box Options

Formula Cells

Pastes the formulas from the copied selection.

Label Cells

Pastes the labels from the copied selection.

Number Cells

Pastes the numbers from the copied selection.

Properties

Pastes the properties from the copied selection. This option does not copy row heights or column widths; use Block|Copy to copy row/column sizes.

Avoid Pasting Blanks

Avoids erasing data in the destination selection that otherwise would be replaced by blanks pasted from the source.

Transpose Rows and Columns

Switches the position of entries so that data listed in columns is placed in rows and vice versa. Be sure to allow enough room in the destination area for the changed size of the data. This option is equivalent to choosing Block|Transpose.

Paste Formulas As Values

When checked, pastes the formulas resulting from formulas, not the formulas themselves. Checking Paste Formulas As Values accomplishes the same thing as using Block|Values (see Converting Formulas to Values for details).

Paste

Pastes the copied selection.

Link

Pastes a link to each cell in the copied block. Each pasted cell contains a formula using the following format: +[Drive:\Path\File name]Page:Cell reference

See Also

Using Paste Special


Paste Special Format/OLE Dialog Box
Paste Special Dialog Box (Format/OLE)

This dialog box appears when you use Edit|Paste Special with an object from another application copied to the Clipboard.

Dialog Box Options

Source

The directory and file that the Clipboard object was copied from.

Paste

Lets you embed the object or paste it in another format listed in the As field.

Paste Link

Lets you create a linked object in one of the formats listed in the As field.

Display As Icon

If available, displays the object as an icon instead of data.


Convert Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select an OLE object and choose Edit|<OLE object>|Convert or right-click the object and choose <OLE object>|Convert in the QuickMenu.

Dialog Box Options

Current Type

The current type of the active OLE object.

Convert To

When chosen, lets you permanently change the object to the selected Object Type.

Activate As

When chosen, lets you activate the object as the selected Object Type.

Display As Icon

When checked, displays the converted object as an icon instead of data, text, or graphics.


Change Icon Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you check Display As Icon in a dialog box, then click the Change Icon button.

Dialog Box Options

Current

When chosen, displays the current icon selection.

Default

When chosen, displays the default icon selection.

From File

When chosen, lets you choose an executable file and select an icon from those available for it.

Label

Lets you specify text to identify the icon.

A sample of the icon selection and label text appears in the lower right corner of the dialog box.


Browse Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you click the Browse button in a dialog box. See File-Handling Options for further information on Browse dialog box options.

Dialog Box Options

Source

The target path and file.

File List

Lists all files in that directory that match the Type selection.

List Files Of Type

Lets you select a specific type of files to appear in the file list for your selection.

Directories

Lets you choose a different directory in the selected drive.

Drives

Lets you choose a different drive to browse in.


Add Format Dialog Box

The Add Format dialog box lets you specify a new format to add to the SpeedFormat list.

Dialog Box Options

Format Name

The name of the new format you want to add to the SpeedFormat list. The name can be up to 14 characters long and can include spaces and punctuation marks.

Example Block

A block that has the formatting properties for the new format. The block must be at least 3 rows by 3 columns in size. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.


Create Block Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify a spreadsheet block to add to a graph window. You can also set display options for the block.

Dialog Box Options

Select Block

Specifies the spreadsheet block you want to appear in a graph. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Row Borders

When checked, shows row borders.

Column Borders

When checked, shows column borders.

Horizontal

When checked, shows horizontal grid lines.

Vertical

When checked, shows vertical grid lines.

Maintain Aspect Ratio

When checked, maintains the same aspect ratio as the cells in the spreadsheet block. Uncheck this option to fit cells in the specified box, making each cell the same width.


Go To Slide Dialog Box

Select a slide that you want to go to, then choose OK.

See Also

Running a Slide Show


Execute Dialog Dialog Box

Activate Dialog

Lists the names of dialog boxes you can display.

Result Cell

Type a cell address or use the Point Mode button [image] to point to a cell in the notebook. After the dialog box is closed, this cell contains 1 or 0. The value 1 means the dialog box was closed by OK; the value 0 means it was canceled.

Values Range

Type a block address or use the Point Mode button to point to a block in the notebook that contains initial settings for the dialog box. When the dialog box is closed, its final settings are written back into this block. (See Setting a Control's Value for more information on the setting block.)

See Also

Creating Macro SpeedButtons


Functions Dialog Box

When you select a Function Category on the left, the Function list on the right changes to show the functions for that category in alphabetical order. Double-click an @function, or select an @function and choose OK.

Here are some tips to using the Functions dialog box:

Click an @function to see a brief description of it at the bottom of the dialog box.

When either the Function Category or Function list is selected, you can type a letter to jump to the first item in the list that begins with that letter.

The All category shows the list of all @functions.

The Recently Used category shows up to the last 10 @functions you used.

See Also

@Function Index

Using @Functions


Change Link Dialog Box

Type the path and filename you want to serve as the source of the link. To select a file from a different directory, click the Browse button.

See Also

Updating OLE and DDE Links


Coaches

Learning by doing is a most effective technique. Coaches teach procedures with your own "live" data so you can actually use a feature while learning about it.

To view a catalog of Coaches, click the Coaches button [image] on the Toolbar or choose Help|Coaches. The Coaches Catalog appears.

When you choose a topic, its first window appears.The buttons at the bottom control your actions. Click the X to cancel the current Coach; if you want, you can choose another. The arrow buttons at the right move forward and backward through the Coach windows. The Next button is the rightmost arrow at the edge of the window. Click it to advance to the next window.

When you complete a Coach, you are returned to the Coaches Catalog, and a check mark appears beside that Coach. These check marks are saved when you exit Quattro Pro. To erase the check marks, click the Options button at the bottom of the Catalog and check Clear Current Checkmarks. The other two options determine whether check marks are saved when you exit.

Coaches use Quattro Pro's standard interface, so you learn each feature as you use it. For a more basic approach to several procedures, try using the Experts.

See Also

How to Use Quattro Pro Help


Experts

Quattro Pro offers Experts to help you use some features at a basic level with virtually no learning required.

To activate an Expert, click the Experts button [image] on the Toolbar or choose Help|Experts to display a list of available Experts; choose one.

A window appears with a description of the first step. Follow the instructions and click the Next Step button when you are ready. You can request help and more information or cancel the session at any time. Just click one of the buttons at the bottom of the Expert window.

See Also

Coaches

Experts List

How to Use Quattro Pro Help


Quattro Pro Work Areas

Quattro Pro has six work areas:

Notebook window	is where you enter and display data. It contains all standard spreadsheet features along with many enhancements. This is where you will do most of your work in Quattro Pro.

Objects page	is where you link graphs together to make slide shows, or link dialog boxes you have created to build a custom application. The Objects page is the last page in each notebook.

Graph window	is where you can build and customize graphs based on data from the Notebook window.

Light Table window	is where you edit a slide show. It contains all of the slides you have selected, including the master slide.

Dialog window	is where you can build custom applications that run within Quattro Pro

Print Preview screen	is where you preview your work before printing.

See Also

Mouse Techniques

Notebooks

Object Inspector Menus


Toolbars

Just under the menu bar is a row of buttons and tools called the Toolbar. Toolbar buttons let you quickly choose commonly used commands or properties. Toolbar tools create objects.

As you point to each button or tool, its name appears beneath the button and a brief description appears in the Quattro Pro title bar.

For a longer description, point to the button, hold down Ctrl, and click the right mouse button. Object Help appears.

The Toolbar changes depending on the area of Quattro Pro you are using. For example, the default Toolbar for the notebook window is Main. You can choose a different Toolbar from the Toolbar list in the Property Band.

Tip:	To quickly cycle through the available Toolbars for any area of Quattro Pro, press Ctrl+Shift+T. To hide the standard Toolbar, choose View|Display, and uncheck the Show Toolbar option.

Notebook Window Toolbars

The following Toolbars are available when working in a notebook window:

Main	Tools for entering and editing data.

Format	Tools for changing the look of data.

Block	Tools for working with spreadsheet blocks.

Draw	Tools for drawing or inserts objects, and for arranging objects on a layer on top of the spreadsheet.

Modeling	Tools for performing data analysis, opening or refreshing notebook links, or selecting cells in a table.

Dialog/Toolbar Window Toolbars

The following Toolbars are available when working in a dialog or custom Toolbar window:

Controls	Controls that you can add to a dialog box or Toolbar.

Align	Tools for aligning dialog box or Toolbar controls.

Graph Window Toolbars

The following Toolbars are available when working in a graph window:

Graph	Tools for drawing objects in a graph window.

Palette	Tools for editing the color and fill pattern of graph objects.

Align	Tools for aligning graph objects.

Objects Page and Light Table Toolbars

The Objects page and Light Table each have a separate Toolbar, named Objects and Slides, respectively:

Objects	Tools for creating graphs, slide shows, and dialog boxes.

Slides	Tools for editing and running a slide show.

Print Preview Toolbar

When you choose File|Print Preview, the Toolbar changes. Use the Print Preview Toolbar to preview different pages, zoom in and out, set page setup and print options, and print the selected block, page, or notebook.

Template Tools Toolbar

If you create a new notebook based on a QuickTemplate, a secondary Toolbar named Template Tools appears, which helps you enter, print, save, clear, and highlight data. For more information, see Using Notebook Templates.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Opening and Closing Toolbars

Toolbar Control Menu


Property Band

The Property Band appears below the Toolbar. It contains pull-down lists and other controls for formatting and working with the active window.

To see what each Property Band control does, point to it. Its name appears beneath it and a brief description appears in the Quattro Pro title bar. For more information, point, then press Ctrl while you click the right mouse button. Object Help appears.

The Toolbar list in the Property Band lets you display other Toolbars that might be handy for working in the active window. For example, in the notebook window, you can click Main to pull down a list of several other Toolbars.

See Also

Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band


Using Notebooks

Notebooks provide a way to organize many spreadsheets together in the same file.

A notebook is a collection of 256 spreadsheet pages and the Objects page, which is the last page. Each spreadsheet page is a grid made up of columns and rows. The Objects page contains icons, each representing a graph, slide show, or dialog box you have created.

Each notebook is saved as its own file. The default file name for the first notebook is NOTEBK1.WB2.

There are three major ways to take advantage of notebooks:

by breaking up a spreadsheet into small pieces on separate pages

by gathering logically-related data into the same file

by consolidating similarly-formatted spreadsheets into the same file

Breaking Up a Large Spreadsheet

If you are translating a large spreadsheet from Quattro Pro for DOS or another application, you can make it much easier to work with by breaking it up into separate pieces for each page.

To reach an individual page, you can click the page's tab (this is easier than scrolling to different parts of one large spreadsheet). Also, when you write a formula that refers to cells on another page, the page name appears in the formula, making it easier to see what you are referencing.

Gathering Related Data

Instead of saving a budget, a schedule, an inventory, or other related information in different files on disk, you can make them separate pages in the same notebook. This gives you one file name to remember, not many.

By default, notebook pages are labeled A through IV, but you can give them descriptive names to remind you of their contents. See Naming a Page for details.

Consolidating Data

If you are working with data that conforms to a given template or layout, notebooks give you efficient ways to enter and format data. Grouping the pages together before entering standard column heading information or before making formatting changes, for example, speeds up your work. See Grouping Notebook Pages for details.

Moving Around Within a Notebook

To move to a different page in a notebook, click its tab. If its tab is not in view, use the tab scroll controls to reveal additional tabs. The tab scroll controls work like VCR controls.

To move quickly to the last page in a notebook (the Objects page), click the SpeedTab button [image]. The Objects page contains icons representing each of the graphs, slide shows, and dialog boxes you have created in the notebook. To switch back to the last active spreadsheet page, click the SpeedTab button again. Notice that the arrow on the SpeedTab button changes direction depending on whether the Objects page is active or not.

After you click the tab of the page you want, you can use the scroll bars to move to different parts of the page.

See Also

Mouse Techniques

Object Inspector Menus


Object Inspector Menus

Object Inspector menus provide a quick way to display all of the changes that can be made to individual objects. You just point to most objects and press the right mouse button (right-click) to display a QuickMenu. Choose its Properties command to list the object's properties. (For window title bars, the Object Inspector appears as soon as you right-click.)

An Object Inspector is available for these objects:

blocks

pages

notebooks

graphs in windows, and their elements, such as bars, axes, or text boxes

floating objects, such as graphs, graphic images, or SpeedButtons that appear in a layer above spreadsheet cells

dialog boxes you create and their elements, such as radio buttons or edit fields

the Quattro Pro application itself

Each of these objects has properties, which are characteristics particular to that type of object. For example, blocks have a Font property that can be set to Bold, so the text of entries in that block appear in boldface type. One property of a page is the name that appears on its tab. Each notebook has its own Palette property for controlling the colors available. Quattro Pro's system defaults, such as the default storage directory or file-name extension, are application properties.

To change the properties of an object, right-click it and choose the Properties command. A different Object Inspector menu appears depending on the type of object you right-click. From the left side of the Object Inspector, choose the property you want to change. The options displayed on the right change to correspond to the chosen property. Click Active Block Object Inspector for details.

Next, choose settings for the current property. You can go on to change other properties for the current object. To help you track changes, the property name turns blue if you change its setting. If the Object Inspector has an example box, it shows the result of your choices. When you are finished, choose OK.

You can also change properties of an object by clicking Property in the Property band. Property|Current Object displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected object. If no object is currently selected, the properties that control the active window are displayed. Property|Application displays the application Object Inspector. Other commands, such as Active Notebook or Active Page, are available depending on whether a notebook, graph, or dialog window is active.

Different properties are available in each Quattro Pro window. For examples showing how to locate objects in the notebook and graph windows, see the following topics:

Locating Notebook Window Objects

Locating Graph Objects

See Also

Mouse Techniques

Notebooks


Quattro Pro Graphs

Using graphs to analyze your data is faster and easier than examining the data cell-by-cell. A graph presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot, display a trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data in your spreadsheet.

A single graph can appear in three places in Quattro Pro: as a floating graph in a notebook window, in a separate graph window, and as an icon on the Objects page. Graphs always exist on the Objects page and in a graph window; only floating graph display is optional.

In a Notebook Window:

Create a floating graph directly on a spreadsheet page when you want to view or print your graph on the same page as your data. The Main Toolbar has a tool that creates floating graphs. You can also add titles to the graph, change the graph type, or redefine the data series plotted in the graph in this window. For all other changes, you must double-click the floating graph, or use Graphics|Edit Graph, to display the graph in a graph window. (The floating graph updates automatically as you modify the graph in a graph window.)

In a Graph Window:

Create a graph in its own graph window when you want the graph to appear in a slide show or on a printed page, but not on a spreadsheet. Every graph (including floating graphs) has its own window. Object Inspectors for graph elements are available ONLY when you display a graph in its graph window. You can also enhance graphs using the drawing tools and color palette on the graph window Toolbar. The graph window Draw menu lists commands you need to rearrange drawn elements and import and export graphics.

On the Objects page:

The Objects page displays an icon for each graph in the notebook. You can right-click an icon to rename a graph, delete or cut an icon to delete a graph, or copy and paste an icon through the Windows Clipboard to copy a graph. You can also print a series of graphs, or create an onscreen slide show with special effects. To see the Objects page, click the SpeedTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window.


Mouse Techniques

Quattro Pro for Windows fully supports standard Windows mouse functions, and also features several highly useful enhancements. Use the mouse as follows:

To select a:

cell	Click the cell.

block	Drag it by clicking a cell in one corner, holding down the left mouse button, moving to the opposite corner and releasing the mouse button. Or click one corner, hold down the Shift key, and click the opposite corner.

noncontiguous block	Hold down the Ctrl key while you drag blocks.

row 	Click the corresponding row number in the border.

column	Click the corresponding column letter in the border.

page	Click the Select-All box at the intersection of the row and column borders.

cell on another page	Click the page tab, then click the cell.

3-D block	First select the 2-D block in the first page in the 3-D block, then hold down the Shift key while clicking the last page in the 3-D block. A black line appears under the tabs of the selected pages.

To change object properties:

Right-click an object and choose the Properties command to display its Object Inspector. This lets you change many settings at once, rather than choosing commands one by one.

To move a block:

Select a block of cells, release the left mouse button, then left-click, hold down the button for a moment until the hand icon appears, and drag the selected block to move it to another location. This Drag and Drop procedure has the same result as the Block|Move command.

To copy a block:

Select a block of cells, release the left mouse button, then hold down the Ctrl key and, at the same time, left-click, hold down the button until the hand icon appears, and drag the selected block to another location. This Drag and Drop procedure has the same result as the Block|Copy command.

Toolbars

Quattro Pro includes Toolbars which allow you to bypass menu commands by clicking buttons. Each Quattro Pro window has its own unique Toolbar; for a definition of each Toolbar button and other parts of the screen, display Object Help.

See Also

Notebooks

Object Inspector Menus


Undoing Mistakes

The Edit|Undo command and the Undo/Redo button [image] on the Toolbar let you reverse most kinds of operations after you have carried them out. For example, if you make an entry in a cell, then change your mind and want to remove it, choose Edit|Undo immediately after making the entry. The entry will be removed and whatever was previously entered in the cell will be returned.

You can identify your last action by the wording of the Undo command. For example, after making a cell entry, the Undo command reads "Undo Entry." After changing the Zoom Factor property in the notebook Object Inspector, the Undo command reads "Undo Notebook Property."

If you change your mind again after using Undo and want to reinstate the first change, choose Edit|Redo. As with Undo, Redo specifies the type of operation available to be redone.

Some actions are undoable only if you enable Undo in the application Object Inspector. You can identify these actions because the Undo command is dimmed immediately after the action is taken. In all situations except where program speed and available memory is absolutely crucial, it is recommended that you keep Undo enabled.

To enable Undo for the maximum variety of actions,

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the Quattro Pro window title bar and click the right mouse button.

2.	Choose General.

3.	Check Undo Enabled in the Options box, and choose OK.

See Also

Mouse Techniques

Notebooks

Object Inspector Menus


DOS Spreadsheet Users

If you have used DOS-based versions of Quattro Pro or 1-2-3, read the following topics for guidelines on using files and macros created with those DOS spreadsheets. Be sure to read the other Essentials topics for a description of major new product features.

Alternative Menus

File Compatibility

Macro Compatibility

See Also

Mouse Techniques

Notebooks

Object Inspector Menus


Alternative Menu Systems

When you are first using Quattro Pro for Windows, you may want to load an alternative menu system. Display the Application properties and choose Macro and then Slash Key to display a list of available menu systems (see Application Macro Property for more information). Using an alternative menu system can help you maintain productivity while you learn the program, but using the default Quattro Pro for Windows interface makes it easier to access all commands and features.

See Also

File Compatibility

Macro Compatibility


File Compatibility

You can load files created with DOS versions of Quattro Pro, 1-2-3 (versions 2.x and 3.x), Excel, and several databases from within Quattro Pro. Just retrieve the file as you would any other; Quattro Pro automatically identifies the file type (by its extension or the first record in the file) and translates it. You can run most macros contained in the file.

To save a 1-2-3 file as a Quattro Pro file, just change the file's extension when you save it; Quattro Pro translates the file. The same is true for files in other formats.

If you do not include a file-name extension, Quattro Pro automatically adds the default file extension .WB2.

1-2-3 files

When loading a 1-2-3 file, linking is converted to the syntax. used by Quattro Pro.

Here is an example:

Quattro Pro syntax	1-2-3 2.x syntax

[filename]celladdress	<<filename>>celladdrs

+[BUDGET.WK1]B4	+<<BUDGET.WK1>>B4

See Also

Alternative Menu Systems

Macro Compatibility


Macro Compatibility

Running Quattro Pro for DOS macros

Macros using Quattro Pro for DOS menu equivalents are still compatible. For example, the statement {/Graph;Type} still executes as Graphics|Type. For details, see Quattro Pro for DOS Macros.

Running 1-2-3 macros

You can run keystroke macros created in 1-2-3 (release 2.x and 3.x) within Quattro Pro by choosing 1-2-3 / R 2.01 for the Slash Key option in the application Macro property. For details, see 1-2-3 Macros.


Graph Expert, Step 1

This dialog box lets you choose data to graph. If you include column and row labels in the graph data block, they appear in your graph as x-axis and y-axis labels.

Quattro Pro chooses a graph type for your data, based on the number of rows and columns and the total number of data points in the graph data block. You will have a chance to change the graph type later.

If plotted data is hidden in the graph, you may need to swap rows and columns or reverse the data series. Try checking the check boxes at the bottom of the right pane in Graph Expert, Step 1. See if the graph in the left pane looks better when you make a change. If not, change it back.

You can choose Tip to switch between the graph and an explanation pane.


Graph Expert, Step 2

This dialog box lets you choose a main graph type:

Certain graphs are best suited for plotting certain types of data:

Bar graphs	compare values of different items at specific points in time--to contrast monthly commissions for each sales representative, for example. Rotated bar graphs are plotted horizontally instead of vertically.

Line graphs	show the progression of values over time--to track sales, for example. Area graphs are like filled-in line graphs.

Pie graphs	compare individual values to other values and to the whole--how yearly expenses break down into categories, for example. Use them to focus on the individual values in a single series. Doughnut graphs, available through this type choice, are like pie graphs with a hole in the middle.

Specialty graphs	include high-low graphs, radar graphs, and combination graphs.

Choose Expert's Choice if you want the Graph Expert to choose an appropriate type for your graph.


Graph Expert, Step 3: Bar Graph

This dialog box offers a number of bar graph choices:

Bar graphs	compare values of different items at specific points in time--to contrast monthly commissions for each sales representative, for example.

Stacked bar graphs	show the relationship of each value to the total--how total sales are divided between regions, for example. 100% stacked bar graphs show the percentage each series contributes to the total.

Comparison graphs	have lines connecting the boundaries between series. This makes it easier to compare series values or proportions.

Multiple column graphs	plot each series as a separate sub-graph.

Choose a type and click Next Step to add titles.


Graph Expert, Step 3: Rotated Bar Graph

Rotated graphs are like standard graphs, but they are plotted horizontally instead of vertically. Choose from among these types of rotated graphs:

Bar graphs	compare values of different items at specific points in time--to contrast monthly commissions for each sales representative, for example.

Stacked bar graphs	show the relationship of each value to the total--how total sales are divided between regions, for example. 100% stacked bar graphs show the percentage each series contributes to the total.

Comparison graphs	have lines connecting the boundaries between series. This makes it easier to compare series values or proportions.

Choose a type and click Next Step to add titles.


Graph Expert, Step 3: Pie Graph

This dialog box lets you choose from among these graph types:

Pie graphs	compare individual values to other values and to the whole--how yearly expenses break down into categories, for example. Use them to focus on the individual values in a single series.

Doughnut graphs	like pie and column graphs, plot a single series with each value plotted as a percentage of the whole. You can add text or graphics to the interior "hole" with graph window drawing tools.

Multiple pie graphs	plot each series as a separate sub-graph.

Choose a type and click Next Step to add titles.


Graph Expert, Step 3: Line or Area Graph

This dialog box lets you choose from among various line, area, and surface graphs:

Line graphs	show the progression of values over time--to track sales, for example.

Area graphs	show the relationship of each value to the total over time--how each sales representative contributed to total sales over a 12 month period, for example.

Surface graphs	plot rows and columns as intersecting lines on a surface that is suspended in a 3-D frame. Surface graphs are useful for plotting functions such as f(x) and f(x,y), and parametric curves (x(t), yt(t)).

The graph in the upper right corner is an XY graph. It only plots data if the first column of your graph data block contains dates.

Choose a type and click Next Step to add titles.


Graph Expert, Step 3: Specialty Graph

This dialog box lets you choose from among these graph types:

Radar graphs	show x-axis values as imaginary lines radiating from a common center, like spokes of a wheel, with y-axis values plotted on each "spoke." They are useful for highlighting trends, depending on the shapes drawn by the plot lines, or simplifying series comparisons.

High-low graphs	illustrate the difference between corresponding values in two series. Though most often used in tracking daily stock prices, high-low graphs can be used whenever you want to compare the difference between pairs of values.

Combination Graphs	combine different types of graphs in one -- lines with bar, for example.

Choose a type and click Next Step to choose a color scheme.


Graph Expert, Step 4

This dialog box lets you choose a color scheme for your graph. The color scheme you select applies colors to all graph elements, such as the background, series, and graph walls.

You can experiment with different color schemes. Select one from the list and see how it affects the graph in the left panel.

Choose None if you do not want to use a color scheme.

Click Next Step to add titles.


Graph Expert, Step 5

This dialog box lets you add titles to your graph. The main title and subtitle appear above the graph. The y-axis title appears along the left side and the x-axis title runs along the bottom unless the axes are reversed or the graph is rotated.

Destination indicates how to display the graph.

Check Notebook Page to display the graph inserted in a notebook page. When you choose Create Graph, it appears over the selected data block. You can click inside its borders and drag it to a new location, if you prefer.

If you want to edit the graph, check Graph Window. When you choose Create Graph, the graph appears in a graph window, ready for editing. The Toolbar contains drawing tools so you can add drawn objects and text to the graph, or you can right-click any part of the graph and choose the Properties command to change its properties. For more information on customizing graphs, see Customizing Graph Properties.


Consolidate Expert, Step 1

This dialog box lets you choose two or more source blocks to be consolidated. Select a block, then choose Add to add it to the source block list. To delete a block from the list, highlight it and choose Delete. To choose a block in another notebook, click Browse. Find the notebook in the directory lists, then enter the block at the bottom of the dialog box and choose OK.

If your blocks include row or column labels, you can use them to sort the data. For example, if one block contains columns labeled Costs and Revenues, and the other block reverses the columns to show Revenues then Costs, when you specify a destination block in a later step and perform the consolidation, all the data under Costs will be combined and so will the data under Revenues, even though the columns are in a different order.

When you have selected all blocks to be combined, click Next Step to choose a consolidation operator: SUM, AVG (average), COUNT, MIN (minimum), MAX (maximum), STD (standard deviation), STDS (sample standard deviation), VAR (variance), and VARS (sample variance).


Consolidate Expert, Step 2

This dialog box lets you choose a consolidation operator: SUM, AVG (average), COUNT, MIN (minimum), MAX (maximum), STD (standard deviation), STDS (sample standard deviation), VAR (variance), and VARS (sample variance).

Each operator works like the statistical @function of the same name to combine equivalent cells of each source block.

Choose Next Step to specify a destination block.


Consolidate Expert, Step 3

This dialog box lets you specify a destination block. It can be the whole block or just the upper left cell of the block. If you choose just one cell, be sure there is enough room to the right and down from that cell to hold the combined blocks. Otherwise, data in unprotected cells is overwritten.

If the source blocks contain labels, you can use labels in the destination block to sort and filter data. Labeled data will appear beneath matching labels in the output block, so you can control the order of output by ordering labels in the destination block. Also, if you include labels in the destination block, but do not include every label used in the source blocks, consolidated data only appears for labels included in the destination block. If source blocks have labels, but you include no labels in the destination block, all source block labels appear in the consolidation.

When you have specified a destination block and checked whether to use column and/or row labels, choose Next Step.


Consolidate Expert, Step 4

This dialog box lets you name the consolidation setup and perform the consolidation. Enter a name, then click Consolidate to save the setup and enter combined data in the destination block. The consolidation setup is saved when you save the notebook.

Now, you can perform the same consolidation with different data. Add different data to the source blocks, Then, use Tools|Consolidator to display the Consolidator Toolbar. Select the name you gave to the consolidation setup and click the Consolidate button. For details, see Using the Consolidator.


Scenario Expert, Step 1

The Scenario Manager lets you create and save scenarios -- sets of conditions and results. For example, you might have a Worst Case scenario with sales revenues much lower than you expect, while the Best Case scenario shows greater-than-expected sales and how they boost profits.

Scenario "changing cells" are the cells you change for each scenario -- sales revenue, in the previous example. "Result cells" contain formulas that reference the changing cells. They show the results of entering different data in the changing cells. If you have not yet entered these into your notebook, close the Scenario Expert and create change and result cells for your scenario set.

In this dialog box, you specify one or more changing cells. They can be connected within a block or separated (noncontiguous). To specify noncontingous cells or blocks as changing cells, select the first then press Ctrl and drag or click the mouse to select the next, and so on.

When you are done, choose Next Step to name the scenario.


Scenario Expert, Step 2

This dialog box lets you name each scenario and enter values into its changing cells. You must enter a name, but you do not need to enter a different value into each changing cell--just change values as appropriate for the scenario you are defining.

When you are done, click Add Scenario and choose Next Step to highlight changing and result cells in the notebook or delete scenarios.


Scenario Expert, Step 3

This dialog box lets you highlight scenario values in your notebook and delete unwanted scenarios.

To show a scenario, highlight its name in the list and click Show Scenario. If values are hidden, click in the scenario title bar and drag the window out of the way. Changing cells are yellow and result cells are green.

If you do not want to keep a scenario, highlight it in the list and click Delete Scenario.

When you are done, click Next Step to create a Scenario Summary Report for all scenarios.


Scenario Expert, Step 4

This dialog box lets you create a Scenario Summary Report showing changing and result cells and their values for each scenario.

To create a report, click Create Report. The report appears and the Scenario Expert closes. The report appears on a new page, the Scenarios page. You can display it and print it just like any other notebook page.

If you already used the Scenario Expert to create a Scenario Summary Report, you will be prompted to replace the existing report. If you choose No, the Scenario Expert closes without creating a new report.

To close the Scenario Expert without creating a report, choose Exit.

Once you create scenarios in the Scenario Manager, you can use Tools|Scenario Manager to display and edit them. For details, see Using the Scenario Manager.


Experts List

Quattro Pro offers these Experts to help with various tasks:

Graph Expert

Builds a graph from the block of data you select. If you include labels in the block, they appear in the graph. If you select the data block before you use the Graph Expert, the graph appears as soon as you open the Expert.

Scenario Expert

Lets you create and display groups of scenarios (data conditions and results) based on models in your spreadsheet notebook. Before you use this Expert, enter a set of values (the conditions) and formulas based on them (the results).

Consolidate Expert

Lets you combine data blocks using statistical operators (SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, VARS). You can include column and row labels in the blocks to combine. Then, combined data is sorted according to label placement in the output block.

What-If Expert

Lets you create tables that show the effect of changing one or two variable cells referenced in a formula.

Performance Expert

Helps you determine if Quattro Pro's Compiled Formulas feature will speed up calculation times with your particular hardware and notebooks.

Analysis Expert

Offers 19 tools for financial, statistical, and engineering analysis.

Budget Expert

Offers 5 different budget templates for both home and business use.

Slide Show Expert

Lets you create slide shows that consist of bullet charts, slides with bulleted lists.

See Also

Experts


Performance Expert, Step 1

The Performance Expert helps determine if the active notebook will show improved performance if you use compiled formulas. This dialog box tests your computer hardware to see if its CPU, accessories, and memory are suitable for compiling formulas. The check beside each item in the right pane indicates suitability. If an item is not checked, it does not meet the requirements for compiling formulas.

The last item in the dialog box indicates whether the hardware is adequate. If Yes is checked, choose Next Step. If No, cancel this Expert; compiled formulas are not likely to improve performance on this computer system.


Performance Expert, Step 2

If other conditions are appropriate, compiled formulas show best performance improvements in large notebooks that take a long time to recalculate. This dialog box lets you indicate how long the notebook takes to recalculate with uncompiled formulas.

Check Yes if recalculation time is over 5 seconds. Otherwise, check No. Then choose Next Step.


Performance Expert, Step 3

Compiled formulas help the most when a notebook contains lots of basic mathematical operations. This dialog box lets you indicate the main type of formulas contained in the active notebook.

Check Math Calculations if you work mainly with numbers; check Text Manipulation if you work mainly with text strings using the string @functions (@MID, @LENGTH, and so on).


Performance Expert, Step 4

Compiled formulas are most effective when you create a notebook, then use it to calculate values in classic spreadsheet fashion, as an electronic ledger book.

If you often edit the notebook by adding and deleting columns and rows, moving blocks of data, and reformatting it, compiled formulas are less helpful.

This dialog box lets you indicate how you work with the active notebook. Check Entering Data if you use the notebook mainly to enter data into cells for calculation by standard formulas that reference those cells. Check Frequent Editing if you rearrange the notebook or change its formulas frequently.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Performance Expert, Step 5: Don't Compile

This Performance Expert step gives the results of the performance analysis. Read the recommendation in the right pane. Compiled formulas are not recommended; click the Exit button to close the Performance Expert.

If you want to try compiled formulas anyway, display Recalc Settings properties in the active notebook Object Inspector: right-click the notebook title bar, be sure Recalc Settings is selected in the property list at the left, then check Compile Formulas at the bottom of the right pane. For more information on this setting, see Compiling Formulas.


Performance Expert, Step 5: Compile

This Performance Expert step gives the results of the performance analysis. Read the recommendation in the right pane. Compiled formulas are recommended; you can click Try Out Compiled Formulas to use them.

If you want to go back to uncompiled formulas, display Recalc Settings properties in the active notebook Object Inspector: right-click the notebook title bar, be sure Recalc Settings is selected in the property list at the left, then uncheck Compile Formulas at the bottom of the right pane. For more information on this setting, see Compiling Formulas.


Analysis Expert, Step 1

For a brief description of an analysis tool, highlight its name in the list and read the description in the left pane. To use a tool, double-click its name or highlight the name and choose Next Step. For context-sensitive information within the Analysis Expert, click Tip.

To view detailed information on edit fields and controls in the right pane (Step 2 or higher), choose Tip, then choose Help.


Budget Expert, Step 1

For a brief description of each Budget Expert, highlight its name in the list and read the description in the left pane. To use a tool, highlight the name and choose Next Step. For context-sensitive information within the Budget Expert, click Tip. For more detailed information, click Help.


Budget Expert, Step 2: Home - Actual

To add an item to the Income List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Income List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 3: Home - Actual

To add an item to the Expenses List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Expenses List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 4: Home - Actual

Choose a Budget Period to indicate whether the budget should use monthly, quarterly, or yearly information. Then choose a starting time to set the starting month, quarter, or year for the budget.

Duration sets the time span of the budget. The default is one year.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 5: Home - Actual

The Budget Summation Options provide quarterly and yearly totals in the budget. You can choose both Quarter-to-date or Year-to-date options.

If the Budget Period selected in the previous step is quarterly, Quarter-to-date summation is unavailable. If the Budget Period is yearly, both summation options are unavailable.

If you do not want to show quarterly or yearly summaries, uncheck both summation options.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 6: Home - Actual

Type a Title and Subtitle for the budget. If your budget consists of multiple notebook pages, the same Title and Subtitle will appear on each page.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 7: Home - Actual

Choose New Notebook or Current Notebook for the location of the budget.

If you choose New Notebook, the budget will start at cell A1 of page A of the new notebook. If you choose Current Notebook, specify a starting cell or block address.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 8: Home - Actual

Choose a Page Break option to break up your budget into multiple pages by Month, Quarter, or Year. Choose None to create the budget on one notebook page.

Choose one of the following Format options:

None	Uses Quattro Pro's default block formatting.

Color	Formats the budget with text color, shading, and multiple fonts.

Laser Printer	Formats the budget in a monochrome format ideal for printing to laser printers.

When you are done, choose Build Budget to create the budget spreadsheet.


Budget Expert, Step 2: Home - Actual vs. Plan

To add an item to the Income List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Income List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 3: Home - Actual vs. Plan

To add an item to the Expenses List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Expenses List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 4: Home - Actual vs. Plan

One column in your budget will compare estimated values with actual values for each period. Select a variance style. You can show the variance as a dollar value or as a percentage.


Budget Expert, Step 5: Home - Actual vs. Plan

Choose a Budget Period to indicate whether the budget should use monthly, quarterly, or yearly information. Then choose a starting time to set the starting month, quarter, or year for the budget.

Duration sets the time span of the budget. The default is one year.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 6: Home - Actual vs. Plan

The Budget Summation Options provide quarterly and yearly totals in the budget. You can choose both Quarter-to-date or Year-to-date options.

If the Budget Period selected in the previous step is quarterly, Quarter-to-date summation is unavailable. If the Budget Period is yearly, both summation options are unavailable.

If you do not want to show quarterly or yearly summaries, uncheck both summation options.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 7: Home - Actual vs. Plan

Type a Title and Subtitle for the budget. If your budget consists of multiple notebook pages, the same Title and Subtitle will appear on each page.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 8: Home - Actual vs. Plan

Choose New Notebook or Current Notebook for the location of the budget.

If you choose New Notebook, the budget will start at cell A1 of page A of the new notebook. If you choose Current Notebook, specify a starting cell or block address.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 9: Home - Actual vs. Plan

Choose a Page Break option to break up your budget into multiple pages by Month, Quarter, or Year. Choose None to create the budget on one notebook page.

Choose one of the following Format options:

None	Uses Quattro Pro's default block formatting.

Color	Formats the budget with text color, shading, and multiple fonts.

Laser Printer	Formats the budget in a monochrome format ideal for printing to laser printers.

When you are done, choose Build Budget to create the budget spreadsheet.


Budget Expert, Step 2: Business - Actual

To add an item to the Cash Receipts List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Cash Receipts List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 3: Business - Actual

To add an item to the Cash Disbursements List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Cash Disbursements List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 4: Business - Actual

Choose a Budget Period to indicate whether the budget should use monthly, quarterly, or yearly information. Then choose a starting time to set the starting month, quarter, or year for the budget.

Duration sets the time span of the budget. The default is one year.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 5: Business - Actual

The Budget Summation Options provide quarterly and yearly totals in the budget. You can choose both Quarter-to-date or Year-to-date options.

If the Budget Period selected in the previous step is quarterly, Quarter-to-date summation is unavailable. If the Budget Period is yearly, both summation options are unavailable.

If you do not want to show quarterly or yearly summaries, uncheck both summation options.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 6: Business - Actual

Type a Title and Subtitle for the budget. If your budget consists of multiple notebook pages, the same Title and Subtitle will appear on each page.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 7: Business - Actual

Choose New Notebook or Current Notebook for the location of the budget.

If you choose New Notebook, the budget will start at cell A1 of page A of the new notebook. If you choose Current Notebook, specify a starting cell or block address.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 8: Business - Actual

Choose a Page Break option to break up your budget into multiple pages by Month, Quarter, or Year. Choose None to create the budget on one notebook page.

Choose one of the following Format options:

None	Uses Quattro Pro's default block formatting.

Color	Formats the budget with text color, shading, and multiple fonts.

Laser Printer	Formats the budget in a monochrome format ideal for printing to laser printers.

When you are done, choose Build Budget to create the budget spreadsheet.


Budget Expert, Step 2: Business - Actual vs. Plan

To add an item to the Cash Receipts List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Cash Receipts List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 3: Business - Actual vs. Plan

To add an item to the Cash Disbursements List, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Cash Disbursements List, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 4: Business - Actual vs. Plan

One column in your budget will compare estimated values with actual values for each period. Select a variance style. You can show the variance as a dollar value or as a percentage.


Budget Expert, Step 5: Business - Actual vs. Plan

Choose a Budget Period to indicate whether the budget should use monthly, quarterly, or yearly information. Then choose a starting time to set the starting month, quarter, or year for the budget.

Duration sets the time span of the budget. The default is one year.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 6: Business - Actual vs. Plan

The Budget Summation Options provide quarterly and yearly totals in the budget. You can choose both Quarter-to-date or Year-to-date options.

If the Budget Period selected in the previous step is quarterly, Quarter-to-date summation is unavailable. If the Budget Period is yearly, both summation options are unavailable.

If you do not want to show quarterly or yearly summaries, uncheck both summation options.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 7: Business - Actual vs. Plan

Type a Title and Subtitle for the budget. If your budget consists of multiple notebook pages, the same Title and Subtitle will appear on each page.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 8: Business - Actual vs. Plan

Choose New Notebook or Current Notebook for the location of the budget.

If you choose New Notebook, the budget will start at cell A1 of page A of the new notebook. If you choose Current Notebook, specify a starting cell or block address.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 9: Business - Actual vs. Plan

Choose a Page Break option to break up your budget into multiple pages by Month, Quarter, or Year. Choose None to create the budget on one notebook page.

Choose one of the following Format options:

None	Uses Quattro Pro's default block formatting.

Color	Formats the budget with text color, shading, and multiple fonts.

Laser Printer	Formats the budget in a monochrome format ideal for printing to laser printers.

When you are done, choose Build Budget to create the budget spreadsheet.


Budget Expert, Step 2: Business Income Statement

To add an item to the Cost of Goods Sold list, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the Cost of Goods Sold list, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 3: Business Income Statement

To add an item to the General/Administrative Expenses list, type the item in the New Item edit box, then click Add.

To delete an item from the General/Administrative Expenses list, select an item on the list, then click Delete.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 4: Business Income Statement

Choose a Budget Period to indicate whether the income statement should use monthly, quarterly, or yearly information. Then choose a starting time to set the starting month, quarter, or year for the budget.

The duration of the income statement is always one year.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 5: Business Income Statement

Check Prior Year Comparison to show a column for the same period from the prior year. A Variance column also shows the difference in values. For example, you can compare the first quarter revenue from this year with the first quarter revenue from last year.

When Prior Year Comparison is checked, select a variance style. You can show the variance as a dollar value or as a percentage.


Budget Expert, Step 6: Business Income Statement

Type a Title and Subtitle for the income statement. If your income statement consists of multiple notebook pages, the same Title and Subtitle will appear on each page.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 7: Business Income Statement

Choose New Notebook or Current Notebook for the location of the budget.

If you choose New Notebook, the budget will start at cell A1 of page A of the new notebook. If you choose Current Notebook, specify a starting cell or block address.

Note:	Because the Business Income Statement requires three notebook pages, the page of the starting cell and the next two pages should be blank. The first page will contain the income statement. The second and third pages will contain statements for Cost of Goods Sold and General/Administrative Expenses, respectively.

When you are done, choose Next Step.


Budget Expert, Step 8: Business Income Statement

Choose one of the following Format options:

None	Uses Quattro Pro's default block formatting.

Color	Formats the budget with text color, shading, and multiple fonts.

Laser Printer	Formats the budget in a monochrome format ideal for printing to laser printers.

When you are done, choose Build Budget to create the income statement.


What-If Expert, Step 1

Use What-If tables to substitute values in a formula to show a range of possibilities given different circumstances. You can substitute values for one or two variables in a formula. For one-variable What-If tables, you can substitute values for a variable used in multiple formulas.

Click Next Step to select a formula cell.

The following examples describe two applications of the What-If Expert:

Substituting for One Variable in a Formula

The following @PMT formula calculates the monthly payment for a 3-year loan of $10,000 at an annual interest rate specified in cell A1.

@PMT(10000,A1,36)

Instead of changing the value in A1 several times to see how different interest rates affect the formula result, you can use the What-If Expert to create a one-variable table, substituting values for A1. For example, you might want to show what the monthly payment would be given interest rates of 7.5%, 8%, 8.5%, and 9%. If cell A1 is referenced by other formulas, you can subsitute values for those formulas, too.

Substituting for Two Variables in a Formula

The following @PMT formula calculates the monthly payment for a loan of $10,000 given the annual interest rate specified in cell A1 and the number of periods specified in cell A1:

@PMT(10000,A1,A2)

Instead of changing the values in A1 and A2 to see how different interest rates and loan periods affect the formula result, you can use the What-If Expert to create a two-variable table, substituting values for A1 and A2. For example, you might want to show what the monthly payment would be given interest rates of 7.5%, 8%, 8.5%, and 9% for loans of 3, 4, 5, and 6 years.


What-If Expert, Step 2: One Variable

Type a cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

Select only one cell, not a block of cells. The next step lets you select additional formula cells.

The formula you select must reference at least one other cell. For example, the formula @PMT(10000,A1,36) references cell A1.


What-If Expert, Step 3: One Variable

If the formula you specified in the previous step references a cell that is also referenced by other formulas, you can substitute values for those other formulas in the What-If table. Specify another formula cell, then click Add. To skip this step, click Next Step.

Additional Formula Cells

Type a cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

Add

Adds the formula cell specified in Additional Formula Cells to the list.

Delete

Deletes the selected formula cell from the list.


What-If Expert, Step 4: One Variable

The input cell contains the value you want to substitute for to create the What-If table. For example, in the formula @PMT(10000,A1,36) cell A1 is the input cell. Type a cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a input cell from the notebook.

The input cell must be referenced by all formulas that you selected in Steps 2 and 3. The input cell cannot be blank and it must contain a numeric value.

You can specify a name (up to 30 characters) to identify the values substituted for the input cell in the What-If table. The default name is "My Input Cell."

Click Next Step to specify the values you want to substitute for the input cell.


What-If Expert

The What-If Expert displays this dialog box for Step 5 when creating a one-variable What-If table, and for Steps 4 and 6 when creating a two-variable What-If table.

Use the default range of values to substitute for the input cell, or click Calculate Different Values to create a different range.

When you click Calculate Different Values, additional options appear:

Start

The first value in the range of substitution values. Enter a number, a formula, or a date/time serial number.

Step

The constant value to add to the Start value. If you want the values to decrease, enter a negative number and a Stop value lower than the Start value.

Stop

The limit for the substitution values.

After entering values for Start, Step, and Stop, click Rebuild List to create a new list of substitution values.

When you're done, click Next Step


What-If Expert, Step 6: One Variable

Type the upper left cell of the block where you want to create the What-If table. Type a single cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

After you specify the table block, click Make Table to create the What-If table.

Note:	Quattro Pro prompts you if the What-If table would overwrite any existing data. You can then specify a different table block.

Tip:	After you create the table you can change the formula(s) or the substitution values, then press F8 to recalculate the table.


What-If Expert, Step 2: Two Variables

Type a cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

Select only one cell, not a block of cells.

The formula you select must reference at least two other cells. For example, the formula @PMT(10000,A1,A2) references cells A1 and A2.

Click Next Step to specify the first input cell.


What-If Expert, Step 3: Two Variables

The input cell contains the value you want to substitute for to create the What-If table. For example, in the formula @PMT(10000,A1,A2) cell A1 is one input cell. Type a cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a input cell from the notebook.

You can specify a name (up to 30 characters) to identify the values substituted for the input cell in the What-If table. The default name is "My Input Cell."

Click Next Step to specify the values you want to substitute for the first input cell.


What-If Expert, Step 5: Two Variables

The second input cell contains the value you want to substitute for to create the What-If table. For example, in the formula @PMT(10000,A1,A2) cell A2 is a second input cell.  Type a cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a input cell from the notebook.

You can specify a name (up to 30 characters) to identify the values substituted for the second input cell in the What-If table. The default name is "My 2nd Input Cell."

Click Next Step to specify the values you want to substitute for the second input cell.


What-If Expert, Step 7: Two Variables

Table Block

Type the upper left cell of the block where you want to create the What-If table. Type a cell reference in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

Flip Rows and Columns

When checked, the What-If table shows first substitution values in a row and second substitution values in a column. Otherwise, by default the What-If table shows first substitution values in a column and second substitution values in a row.

After you specify the table block, click Make Table to create the What-If table.

Note:	Quattro Pro prompts you if the What-If table would overwrite any existing data. You can then specify a different table block.

Tip:	After you create the table you can change the formula or the substitution values, then press F8 to recalculate the table.


Slide Show Expert, Step 1

Select a block containing up to three columns of text for one or more bullet charts. Type the block coordinates in the edit field, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Number Of Charts, a read-only field, indicates how many bullet charts are defined in the block.

When you select the bullet chart block, the first bullet chart in the block appears in the left panel.

To learn how to create bullet chart text using a Coach, click the Coach button.

Click Next Step to continue.

About Bullet Chart Blocks

The first column in the block contains the bullet chart title and subtitle, the second column contains major bulleted items, and the third column contains minor bulleted items. The third column is optional; you can create a bullet chart with only one level of bulleted items. However, you cannot create a bullet chart with more than two levels of bulleted items.

A label in the title/subtitle column of the block indicates both the end of one bullet chart and the start of another. If you want to create a bullet chart without a title and subtitle, separate the text from the previous bullet chart text with a blank row.


Slide Show Expert, Step 2

The first slide in a slide show is a master slide, which sets the template style for all other slides in a slide show. Select a template style for the master slide.

Select Gallery to choose a style from the Master Slide Gallery. Click one of the styles shown in the right panel.

Select User Defined to use a template style from a graph you created (such as a bullet chart with drawn objects). After you select User Defined, choose a graph from a list.

Select None to not use a Master Slide for the slide show. You can select a master slide after the slide show has been created, if you like.

Click Next Step to continue.


Slide Show Expert, Step 3

Type the name for the slide show (up to 15 characters). This is a required field; the Slide Show Expert cannot create the slide show without a name. The name you type appears with the slide show icon created on the Objects page.

Transition effects control the way a slide makes its appearance onscreen. Select Random to randomly apply a transition effect to each slide. Select From List to select a transition effect from the list. See Adding Transition Effects for more information about transition effects.

The Slide Show Expert uses a display time of 0 seconds, which displays a slide until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key. It also uses fast transition effects; you can later slow down the effects if necessary by changing a slide's properties.

Choose Create Show to create a slide show of bullet charts defined in the specified block. The Light Table window opens, letting you edit the slide show.


@@
@@ - Contents of Cell

Format

@@(Cell)

Cell	=	a single cell address or a block name for a single-cell block

@@ is used to reference a cell that contains another cell address or block name that is written as a label. @@ translates the label into a cell or single-cell block reference and returns the contents of that cell. @@ does not accept a block name for a block that is not a single-cell block.

Examples

@@("A15") = the contents of A15

@@("BLOCK_NAME") = the contents of the single-cell block named BLOCK_NAME

@@(A3) = 50 if A3 contains the label 'A1 and cell A1 contains the value 50

@@(A3) = the label 'Total if A3 contains the label 'Block, which is the name of cell C9, which contains the label 'Total

@@(A1) = ERR, where A1 contains the label 'B1..B5

@@("A1") = B1..B5, where A1 contains the label 'B1..B5

@@("[NOTEBK1]A1") = B1..B5, where A1 in the current page of NOTEBK1 contains the label 'B1..B5 and NOTEBK1 is open

@SUM(@@(A1)) = the sum of the values in B1..B5, where A1 contains the label 'B1..B5, because Quattro Pro translates the label into cell coordinates for a non-single cell block

@@("B1..B5") = ERR (not a single-cell block)

@SUM(@@("B1..B5")) = 5 if cells B1 through B5 each contain 1

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@ABS
@ABS - Absolute Value

Format

@ABS(X)

X	=	a numeric value

@ABS returns the absolute (positive) value of X.

Examples

@ABS(-100) = 100

@ABS(100) = 100

@ABS(0) = 0

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ACOS
@ACOS - Arc Cosine

Format

@ACOS(X)

X	=	a numeric value between -1 and 1

@ACOS returns the arc cosine of X. The result is the angle (in radians) whose cosine is X. To convert radians to degrees, use @DEGREES.

Examples

@ACOS(1) = 0

@ACOS(0.5) = 1.047198

@DEGREES(@ACOS(0.5)) = 60

@ACOS(@ABS(B10)) = the arc cosine of the absolute value of B10

@ACOS(2) = ERR (means that X is greater than 1)

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ASIN
@ASIN - Arc Sine

Format

@ASIN(X)

X	=	a numeric value between -1 and 1

@ASIN calculates the arc sine of X. The result is the angle (in radians) whose sine is X. To convert radians to degrees, use @DEGREES.

Examples

@ASIN(1) = 1.570796

@ASIN(0.25) = 0.25268

@DEGREES(@ASIN(0.5)) = 30

@ASIN(-2) = ERR (X is less than -1)

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ATAN
@ATAN - Arc Tangent

Format

@ATAN(X)

X	=	a numeric value

@ATAN calculates the arc tangent of X. The result is the angle (in radians) whose tangent is X. To convert radians to degrees, use @DEGREES.

Examples

@ATAN(0.5) = 0.463648

@ATAN(1) = 0.785398

@DEGREES(@ATAN(1)) = 45

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ATAN2
@ATAN2 - Arc Tangent of Two Points

Format

@ATAN2(X, Y)

X	=	a numeric value

Y	=	a numeric value

@ATAN2 calculates the arc tangent of the angle represented by the point with (x,y) coordinates X and Y. The result is the angle (in radians) whose tangent is Y/X. The result is between -pi and pi, with the quadrant chosen appropriately according to the sign of the result. If both X and Y are 0, the result is ERR.

Note:	The order of arguments is the same as for 1-2-3, but opposite that of the ATAN2 function in FORTRAN and other programming languages.

To convert radians to degrees, use @DEGREES.

Examples

@ATAN2(1,2) = 1.107149

@DEGREES(@ATAN2(1,1)) = 45

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@AVG
@AVG - Average

Format

@AVG(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

@AVG calculates the arithmetic mean of all values in List, using the formula:

Sum of List divided by N

If List contains more than one item, they must be separated by commas. If any of the cells referenced contains ERR, the resulting value is ERR.

Note:	@AVG ignores blank cells in a block when it makes its calculations. Cells containing blank labels, however, are treated as 0; make sure blank cells are empty.

Examples

B	C	D

1

2	January	February	March

3	$652	$833	$599

4	$456	$305	$522

5	$68	$59	$73

@AVG(5,20,10,5) = 10

@AVG(B3..D3) = $694.67

@AVG(225,B3..D5) = $379.20

@AVG(B3..B5,PART) = $395.50 when C3..C5 is named PART

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@CELL
@CELL - Cell Attribute

Format

@CELL(Attribute, Block)

Attribute	=	any one of the attributes listed for @CELL

Block	=	a block reference or name

@CELL returns the requested attribute of the upper left cell in Block. For details on types of attributes, see Attribute Arguments.

If you type in or point to a single-cell address when entering Block, Quattro Pro converts it to a block reference.

You can enter attributes in either upper- or lowercase, but you must surround them with double quotes. You can also reference a cell containing an attribute.

Note:	@CELL does not recalculate automatically; press F9 to obtain the current value.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	January	February	March

3	Advertising	$652	$833	$599

4	Car expenses	$456	$305	$522

5	Cleaning	$80	$80	$80

@CELL("prefix",A3) = '

@CELL("format",B5) = C0

@CELL("type",D4) = v

@CELL("address",A3) = $A$3

@CELL("row",B4) = 4

See Also

@CELLINDEX

@CELLPOINTER

Cell Attribute @Functions

Using @Functions


Attribute Arguments

You may enter any of these as Attribute arguments for @CELL, @CELLINDEX, and @CELLPOINTER:

"address"

The address of the upper left cell in Block.

"row"

The row number of the upper left cell in Block (1 to 8192).

"col"

The column number of the upper left cell in Block (1 to 256, corresponding to notebook pages A through IV).

"sheet"

Page number of the upper left cell in Block (1 to 256, corresponding to notebook pages A through IV).

"NotebookName"

Referenced notebook name, 8 characters or fewer.

"NotebookPath"

Full path name of the referenced notebook.

"TwoDAddress"

2-D address of the referenced cell--$G$23, for example. The page name is never returned, even if the referenced cell is on another page or in another notebook.

"ThreeDAddress"

3-D address of the referenced cell--$A:$G23, for example. The page name is always returned.

"FullAddress"

Full address of the referenced cell--[NOTEBK1]$A:$G$23, for example. The notebook and page names are always returned.

"contents"

The contents of the upper left cell in Block.

"type"

The type of data in the upper left cell in Block: b if the cell is blank, v if the cell contains a number or any formula, l if the cell contains a label.

"prefix"

The label-prefix character of the upper left cell in Block: ' if label is left-aligned, ^ if label is centered, " if label is right-aligned, \ if label is repeating.

"protect"

The protected status of the upper left cell in Block: 0 if cell is not protected, 1 if cell is protected.

"width"

The width of the column containing the upper left cell in Block (between 1 and 1024).

"rwidth"

The width of the block.

"format"

The numeric format code of the upper left cell in Block:

Fn	Fixed (n = 0-15)

Sn	Scientific (n = 0-15)

Cn	Currency (n = 0-15)

,n	Commas used to separate thousands (n = 0-15)

G	General

+	+/- (bar graph format)

Pn	Percent (n = 0-15)

D1-D5	Date

D1 = DD-MMM-YY

D2 = DD-MMM

D3 = MMM-YY

D4 = MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, DD.MM.YY, YY-MM-DD

D5 = MM/DD, DD/MM, DD.MM, MM-DD

D6-D9	Time

D6 = HH:MM:SS AM/PM

D7 = HH:MM AM/PM

D8 = HH:MM:SS-24hr, HH.MM.SS-24hr, HH,MM,SS-24hr, HHhMMmSSs

D9 = HH:MM-24hr, HH.MM-24hr, HH,MM, HHhMMm.

T	Show Formulas (Text)

H	Hidden

U	User-defined


@CELLINDEX
@CELLINDEX - Cell Attribute of Table Index

Format

@CELLINDEX(Attribute, Block, Col, Row, <Page>)

Attribute	=	any one of the attributes listed for @CELL

Block	=	a cell block reference or name

Col	=	the number of the referenced column, from 0 to 255 (the first column in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on)

Row	=	the number of the referenced row; if an offset, the first row in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on

Page	=	the number of the referenced page, from 0 to 255 (the first page in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on)

Same as @CELL, but returns the requested attribute of the cell in the specified column and row of Block on optional Page. (For details on types of attributes, see Attribute Arguments.) The upper left corner of Block is column 0, row 0.

Note:	@CELLINDEX does not recalculate automatically. Press F9 to obtain the current value.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	January	February	March

3	Advertising	$652	$833	$599

4	Car expenses	$456	$305	$522

5	Cleaning	$80	$80	$80

@CELLINDEX("prefix",A1..D5,0,2) = '

@CELLINDEX("format",B3..D5,0,2) = C0

@CELLINDEX("type",B3..D5,2,1) = v

@CELLINDEX("address",A1..D5,0,2) = $A$3

@CELLINDEX("row",A1..D5,1,3) = 4

See Also

@CELL

@CELLPOINTER

Cell Attribute @Functions

Using @Functions


@CELLPOINTER
@CELLPOINTER - Selected Cell Attribute

Format

@CELLPOINTER(Attribute)

Attribute	=	any one of the attributes listed for @CELL

@CELLPOINTER is similar to @CELL in that it returns the requested attribute of a cell. The only difference is that it reads the cell containing the selector. You cannot specify another cell. However, if you move the selector to a different cell and then press F9, the results of the @CELLPOINTER formula are updated.

You can enter attribute names in either upper- or lowercase, but each must be enclosed by double quotes. For details on types of attributes, see Attribute Arguments.

This @function is useful in macros and @IF statements for quickly determining certain characteristics about the current cell, such as whether there is a label or a value currently in it. For example, this function statement tells Quattro Pro to write "value" in the cell if the current cell is a value; otherwise, it writes "label":

@IF(@CELLPOINTER("type")="v","value","label")

Examples

These examples refer to cell A1, which contains the date value 11/19/91.

@CELLPOINTER("address") = $A$1

@CELLPOINTER("col") = 1

@CELLPOINTER("contents") = 33561

@CELLPOINTER("format") = D4

@CELLPOINTER("type") = v

See Also

@CELL

@CELLINDEX

@IF

Cell Attribute @Functions

Using @Functions


@CHAR
@CHAR - ANSI or ASCII Character

Format

@CHAR(Code)

Code	=	a numeric value between 1 and 255

@CHAR returns the onscreen character corresponding to the given code. This is useful in generating symbols not found on the keyboard.

Refer to any standard ANSI table for the codes corresponding to each character.

@CHAR can be used to set up an ANSI table in your notebook. Fill a column of cells with values from 1 to 255, using Block|Fill. In the cell to the right of the first number, use @CHAR to show the screen character for 1, for example, @CHAR(A1). Then copy the formula down the column for the next 255 cells. The copied formulas will display the screen character for each number. (The first 128 will be the same characters as in the ASCII character set.)

Examples

@CHAR(33) = !

@CHAR(34) = "

@CHAR(35) = #

@CHAR(36) = $

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@CHOOSE
@CHOOSE - Choose Value from List

Format

@CHOOSE(Number, List)

Number	=	a positive integer equal to or less than the number of items in List - 1

List	=	one or more numeric or string values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@CHOOSE selects and enters a value from the supplied list. The value it chooses depends on the value of Number: 0 chooses the first value in the list; 1 chooses the second; 2 chooses the third, and so on. If you specify a cell address for Number, Quattro Pro uses the number contained in the cell. If the cell is blank, the first value is chosen.

The List values can be cell addresses, strings, numbers, or a mixture of the three. The total characters entered cannot exceed 1024.

@CHOOSE operates on integers only. If you supply a non-integer (such as 1.6433), the decimal values are disregarded. @VLOOKUP and @HLOOKUP perform similar tasks in tables.

Examples

@CHOOSE(0,"Howie","Sarah","Chris") = Howie

@CHOOSE(1,"Howie","Sarah","Chris") = Sarah

@CHOOSE(2,"Howie","Sarah","Chris") = Chris

@CHOOSE(A15,"Howie","Sarah","Chris") = Howie, if A15 is 0; Sarah if A15 is 1; Chris if A15 is 2.

@CHOOSE(3,"Howie","Sarah","Chris") = ERR (Number is too large).

@CHOOSE(@MOD(@NOW,7),"Saturday","Sunday","Monday","Tuesday","Wednesday","Thursday","Friday") = Wednesday when @NOW has DateTimeNumber = 33625

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@CLEAN
@CLEAN - Remove Nonprintable Characters

Format

@CLEAN(String)

String	=	a string value

@CLEAN removes all nonprintable characters (0-31) from a string.

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@CODE
@CODE - ANSI Code

Format

@CODE(String)

String	=	a string value

@CODE returns the ANSI code of the first character in String. This is the opposite of @CHAR, which returns the character corresponding to the given code.

Examples

@CODE("!") = 33

@CODE("Sam") = 83 (code for S)

@CODE("#") = 35

@CODE("$") = 36

@CODE("?") = 63

@CODE(hello) = syntax error (missing quotes)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@COLS
@COLS - Columns

Format

@COLS(Block)

Block	=	a cell block reference or name

@COLS returns the number of columns within the given block.

Examples

@COLS(A1..IV1) = 256

@COLS(A1..A1) = 1

@COLS(NAME) = 30 (if the NAME block contains 30 columns)

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@COMMAND
@COMMAND - Value of Command Equivalent

Format

@COMMAND(CommandEquivalent)

CommandEquivalent	=	a Quattro Pro for Windows command equivalent; to display a list, press Shift+F3 and choose Command Equivalents

@COMMAND returns the current value of a Quattro Pro for Windows command equivalent. It is most often used in macros to base the next action on a particular menu setting or to save current settings so they can be restored later.

CommandEquivalent must be enclosed in double quotes. To view a list of acceptable arguments, press Shift+F3 and choose Command Equivalents.

@COMMAND returns strings; even if the setting is a number, it is returned as a string. Not all CommandEquivalent entries return a useful value. In general, @COMMAND only returns values for command equivalents that take arguments, usually menu commands that display a current setting or status.

Like @CELL, @COMMAND statements do not recalculate automatically as many other @functions do. Press F9 to obtain the current value.

A related @function that uses Quattro Pro for DOS menu equivalents is @CURVALUE. Another related @function, @PROPERTY, returns settings for requested object properties.

Examples

@COMMAND("Print.Block") = the currently specified print block

@COMMAND("Print.Copies") = the number entered after Copies in the Spreadsheet Print dialog box

See Also

Status @Functions

Using @Functions


@COS
@COS - Cosine

Format

@COS(X)

X	=	a numeric value

@COS returns the cosine of the angle X. X must be given in radians, not degrees. To convert degrees to radians, use @RADIANS.

Examples

@COS(@RADIANS(60)) = 0.5

@COS(@RADIANS(75)) = 0.258819

@COS(@RADIANS(45)) = 0.707107

@COS(@PI/3) = 0.5

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@COUNT
@COUNT - Count Non-Blank Cells

Format

@COUNT(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or string values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@COUNT returns the number of nonblank cells in List. If more than one block is listed, they must be separated by commas.

Any single cells in List are counted as 1, even if they are blank. You can work around this by always using blocks (for example, if A4 is blank, use A3..A4, instead of just A4).

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	January	February	March

2	John	$652	$833	$599

3	Mary	$456	$305	$522

4	Ralph	$68	$59	$73

5	Anna	$80	$80	$80

6

@COUNT(B2..B5) = 4

@COUNT(B1..B6) = 5

@COUNT(A6) = 1

@COUNT(A6..B6) = 0

@COUNT(C1..C5, D3..D6) = 8

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@CTERM
@CTERM - Compounding Periods

Format

@CTERM(Rate, Fv, Pv)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the current value of an investment (the present value)

@CTERM calculates the number of time periods required for an investment of Pv to reach a value of Fv, while earning interest of Rate per compounding period.

@CTERM assumes that the investment is an ordinary annuity. @NPER, which is calculated differently than but is related to @CTERM, uses an optional argument, Type, to indicate whether the investment is an ordinary annuity or an annuity due.

Examples

Assuming that your savings account has an annual interest rate of 7%, how long would it take a $3000 deposit to reach $5000? The answer is

@CTERM(7%,5000,3000) = 7.55 years

If the Rate figure is given for years, the result is in years as well. If you are working with monthly interest, multiply the answer by 12 to get a result in months.

You can also use @NPER to solve this problem:

@NPER(7%,0,-3000,5000,0) = 7.55

Other examples:

@CTERM(0.07,5000,3000) = 7.550042

@CTERM(0.10,5000,3000) = 5.359612

@CTERM(0.12,5000,3000) = 4.50747

@CTERM(0.12,10000,7000) = 3.147261

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@CURVALUE
@CURVALUE - Current Value of Quattro Pro/DOS Command

Format

@CURVALUE(GeneralAction, SpecificAction)

GeneralAction	=	a general menu category

SpecificAction	=	a menu item that requires setting

@CURVALUE returns the current value of a Quattro Pro for DOS menu command setting. It is used in macros, usually to base the next action on a particular menu setting, and is included for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS. To view a list of acceptable arguments, press Shift+F3 and choose / Commands.

A related @function that uses Quattro Pro for Windows command equivalents is @COMMAND. Another related @function, @PROPERTY, returns settings for requested properties.

Both GeneralAction and SpecificAction must be enclosed in double quotes. They must together create one of the Quattro Pro for DOS menu-equivalent commands.

Not all GeneralAction/SpecificAction combinations return a useful value. In general, only menu commands that display a current setting or status have menu equivalents that are useful for @CURVALUE. Some settings previously controlled with Quattro Pro for DOS commands are now set through Windows, particularly hardware options and printer settings. These don't return a setting in Quattro Pro for Windows.

Like @CELL, @CURVALUE statements do not recalculate automatically as many other @functions do. Press F9 to obtain the current value.

Examples

@CURVALUE("print","block") = the currently specified print block

@CURVALUE("file","save") = the name of the last file saved

See Also

Status @Functions

Using @Functions


@DATE

Format

@DATE(Yr, Mo, Day)

Yr	=	a numeric value between -300 and 1299; -300 = 1600, 0 = 1900, 1299 = 3199

Mo	=	a numeric value between 1 and 12

Day	=	a numeric value between 1 and 31

@DATE returns the date/time "serial number" of the date specified with year, month, and day arguments. This serial number can range from -109,571 (January 1,1600) to 474,816 (December 31, 3199). December 30, 1899 is 0, so a positive number represents the number of days from December 30, 1899 up to the date referenced in the formula.

Date/time serial numbers are used in notebook calculations. (The fractional portion of a serial number is used for the time @functions.)

To display a date/time serial number in a date format, choose Numeric Format in the Block Object Inspector. This shows the date in its more common form (for example, Jan-1-94 instead of 34335).

Any illegal dates return ERR as their value, for example, @DATE(87,2,29). (This date corresponds to February 29, 1987, which is impossible; 1987 was not a leap year.)

Examples

@DATE(93,1,1) = 33970 (January 1, 1993)

@DATE(91,9,13) = 33494 (September 13, 1991)

@DATE(0,1,1) = 2 (January 1, 1900)

@DATE(-300,1,1) = -109571 (January 1, 1600)

@DATE(1299,12,31) = 474816 (December 31, 3199)

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@DATEVALUE
@DATEVALUE - Value Corresponding to Date

Format

@DATEVALUE(DateString)

DateString	=	a numeric or string value in any valid date format, enclosed by quotation marks (or block coordinates or a block name for a block that contains a date string)

@DATEVALUE returns a serial date value that corresponds to the value in DateString. If the value in DateString is not in the correct format or is not enclosed in quotes, ERR or a syntax error message is returned. If DateString is entered using the international format, the year, month, and day must be in the same order as the current international date format (set in the application Object Inspector) and the separator character must also agree.

You can display resulting date string values in standard date formats by choosing Numeric Format in the block Object Inspector.

There are five valid formats for DateString:

DD-MMM-YY ("04-Jul-92").

DD-MMM ("04-Jul") (assumes the current year).

MMM-YY ("Jul-92") (assumes the first of the month).

The Long International date format specified as the system default, one of which is MM/DD/YY ("07/04/92").

The Short International date format specified as the system default, one of which is MM/DD ("07/18"). This format assumes the current year.

Note:	@DATEVALUE is included for compatibility with other products.

Examples

@DATEVALUE("07/04/92") = 33789

@DATEVALUE("JUL-92") = 33786 (July 1, 1992)

@DATEVALUE("04-may-93") = 34093

@DATEVALUE(07/04/94) = 0.018617 (no quotes makes Quattro Pro divide the numbers)

@DATEVALUE("May-04-1992") = ERR

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@DAVG
@DAVG - Database Average

Format

@DAVG(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field you want to average (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DAVG averages selected field entries in a database. It includes only those entries in Column whose records meet the criteria specified in Criteria.

The field specified in your criteria and the field being averaged need not be the same. The field averaged is that contained within the column you specify as Column.

You can specify all or part of your database as Block, but field names must be included for each field you include in the block. For more information about database blocks, see Setting Up a Database.

Examples

These examples refer to the database and criteria tables.

A	B	C	D

1

2	DATE	LOCATION	REP	AMOUNT

3	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ	$14,999

4	Jul-91	LA	RX	$28,725

5	Jul-91	Chicago	RX	$18,600

6	Jul-91	NY	CJ	$15,600

7	Aug-91	Chicago	CJ	$23,769

8	Aug-91	LA	RX	$34,345

9

10	Criteria Table

11	Date	Location	Rep

12	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ

13	LA

@DAVG(A2..D8,3,A11..A12) = $19,481 (average of July sales)

@DAVG(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $26,023 (average of California sales)

@DAVG(A2..D8,3 C11..C12) = $18,123 (average of CJ's sales)

@DAVG(A2..D8,4,A11..C13) = ERR (Column figure too high)

@DAVG(A2..D8,2,A11..A12) = 0 (labels are treated as 0)

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DAY
@DAY - Day Portion of Date Serial Number

Format

@DAY(DateTimeNumber)

DateTimeNumber	=	A numeric value between -109571 and 474816.9999999, representing a date/time serial number: -109571 = January 1, 1600; 0 = December 31, 1899; 474816 = December 31, 3199; the decimal = time (24 hr)

Converts the date/time serial number you supply as DateTimeNumber into the number associated with that day (1-31). Decimal (time) portions of the number are ignored.

Examples

@DAY(33508) = 27 (9/27/91)

@DAY(32134) = 23 (12/23/87)

@DAY(@DATE(93,9,10)) = 10

@DAY(474817) = ERR because the number you entered was larger than 474816.9999999

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@DCOUNT
@DCOUNT - Database Count

Format

@DCOUNT(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field you want to count (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DCOUNT counts selected field entries in a database. It includes only those entries in Column whose records meet the criteria specified in block Criteria.

The field specified in your criteria and the field being counted need not be the same. The field counted is that contained within the column you specify as Column.

You can specify all or part of your database as Block, but field names must be included for each field you include in the block. For more information about database blocks, see Setting Up a Database.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	DATE	LOCATION	REP	AMOUNT

3	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ	$14,999

4	Jul-91	San Jose	RX	$25,000

5	Jul-91	Chicago	RX	$18,998

6	Jul-91	NY	CJ	$15,600

7	Aug-91	Chicago	CJ	$23,769

8	Aug-91	LA	RX	$34,345

9

10	CRITERIA TABLE

11	Date	Location	Rep

12	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ

13	LA

These examples refer to the database and criteria tables.

@DCOUNT(A2..D8,3,A11..A12) = 4 (number of July sales)

@DCOUNT(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = 2 (number of San Fran and LA sales)

@DCOUNT(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = 3 (number of CJ's sales)

@DCOUNT(A2..D8,4,A11..C13) = ERR (Column figure too high)

@DCOUNT(A3..D8,3,A11..A12) = 6 (incorrect--field names not included)

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DDB
@DDB - Double-Declining Balance Depreciation

Format

@DDB(Cost, Salvage, Life, Period)

Cost	=	A numeric value representing the amount paid for an asset

Salvage	=	A numeric value representing the value of an asset at the end of its useful life

Life	=	A numeric value representing the expected useful life of an asset (in years)

Period	=	A numeric value representing the time period for which you want to calculate depreciation

These statements must be true:

Life ≥ Period ≥ 1

Life and Period must be integers

Cost ≥ Salvage ≥ 0

@DDB determines accelerated depreciation values for an asset, given the initial cost, life expectancy, end value, and depreciation period. It calculates depreciation using the double-declining balance method.

Depreciation value (DDB) and book value (BV) are calculated by:

BV = Cost

DDB = 2BV/Life

BV = BV - DDB

@SLN and @SYD offer other depreciation methods.

Examples

Suppose you just bought a new $4000 computer. The dealer says you can sell it back to the store for $350 after eight years, but no one would want to buy it after that. In other words, Salvage is $350 and Life is 8. To calculate the double-declining depreciation allowance of this computer by the second year, enter this formula:

@DDB(4000,350,8,2)

The result is $750.

These examples show depreciation values for the first five years of a $15,000 investment with a salvage value of $3000 and a life of 10 years:

@DDB(15000,3000,10,1) = $3,000

@DDB(15000,3000,10,2) = $2,400

@DDB(15000,3000,10,3) = $1,920

@DDB(15000,3000,10,4) = $1,536

@DDB(15000,3000,10,5) = $1,229

See Also

Depreciation Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@DDELINK

Format

@DDELINK([AppName | Topic]"DataToReceive", <nCols>, <nRows>, <nSheets>)

AppName	=	the DDE-server application to contact

Topic	=	the table, spreadsheet, document, or other file in the DDE-server application from which to retrieve data

DataToReceive	=	the field, block, bookmark, or other information to receive from the application (DDE Item string)

nCols	=	the number of columns in the data block (optional)

nRows	=	the number of rows in the data block (optional)

nSheets	=	the number of pages in the data block (optional)

@DDELINK creates a "live" data link from another Windows application that supports DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange). Using @DDELINK is equivalent to choosing Edit|Paste Special with data from another application copied to the Clipboard, and then choosing Paste Link from the Paste Special dialog box.

AppName and Topic are the same arguments used in {INITIATE}, except that "System" is not accepted as a substitute for Topic. DataToReceive is a string indicating the location of the target data in the server application.

When you enter @DDELINK into a cell, the linked data appears there. Unless you indicate otherwise, the data takes up as much space as it did in the original application. You can use nCols, nRows, and nSheets to specify smaller dimensions. If any of the arguments is 0 or omitted, the original dimension applies.

Caution: @DDELINK sets up a zone of cells that can be overwritten whenever data changes in the DDE-server application. Avoid storing other data near @DDELINK, and consider using the limit arguments.

Examples

The maximum size of the data block for the following formula is 5 cells by 5 cells:

@DDELINK([EXCEL|FILE1]"R1C1:R5C5")

With nRows = 3, the maximum size of the data block drops to 5 cells by 3 cells:

@DDELINK([EXCEL|FILE1]"R1C1:R5C5",0,3)

See Also

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions

Using OLE and DDE


@DEGREES
@DEGREES - Convert Radians to Degrees

Format

@DEGREES(X)

X	=	a numeric value representing radians

@DEGREES converts the given number of radians to degrees, using this formula:

180 times X divided by pi

Examples

@DEGREES(0.5) = 28.64789

@DEGREES(0.017) = 0.974028

@DEGREES(@PI/2) = 90

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@DMAX
@DMAX - Database Maximum Value

Format

@DMAX(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field for which you want to find the maximum value (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DMAX finds the maximum value of selected field entries in a database. It includes only those entries in Column whose records meet the criteria specified in block Criteria.

The field specified in your criteria and the field you are finding the maximum value for need not be the same. The field you are finding the maximum value for is that contained within the column you specify as Column.

You can specify all or part of your database as Block, but field names must be included for each field you include in the block. For more information about database blocks, see Setting Up a Database.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	DATE	LOCATION	REP	AMOUNT

3	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ	$14,999

4	Jul-91	LA	RX	$28,725

5	Jul-91	Chicago	RX	$18,600

6	Jul-91	NY	CJ	$15,600

7	Aug-91	Chicago	CJ	$23,769

8	Aug-91	LA	RX	$34,345

9

10	CRITERIA TABLE

11	Date	Location	Rep

12	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ

13	LA

@DMAX(A2..D8,3,A11..A12) = $28,725 (highest July sale)

@DMAX(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $34,345 (highest California sale)

@DMAX(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = $23,769 (highest of CJ's sales)

@DMAX(A2..D8,4,A11..C13) = ERR (Column figure too high)

@DMAX(A3..D8,3,A11..A12) = $34,345 (incorrect--field names not included)

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DMIN
@DMIN - Database Minimum Value

Format

@DMIN(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field for which you want to find the minimum value (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DMIN finds the minimum value of selected field entries in a database. It includes only those entries in Column whose records meet the criteria specified in block Criteria.

The field specified in your criteria and the field for which you are finding the minimum value need not be the same. The field for which you are finding the minimum value is that contained within the column you specify as Column.

You can specify all or part of your database as Block, but field names must be included for each field you include in the block. For more information about database blocks, see Setting Up a Database.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	DATE	LOCATION	REP	AMOUNT

3	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ	$14,999

4	Jul-91	LA	RX	$28,725

5	Jul-91	Chicago	RX	$18,600

6	Jul-91	NY	CJ	$15,600

7	Aug-91	Chicago	CJ	$23,769

8	Aug-91	LA	RX	$34,345

9

10	CRITERIA TABLE

11	Date	Location	Rep

12	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ

13	LA

@DMIN(A2..D8,3,A11..A12) = $14,999 (smallest July sale)

@DMIN(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $14,999 (smallest California sale)

@DMIN(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = $14,999 (smallest of CJ's sales)

@DMIN(A3..D8,3,A11..A12) = $15,600 (incorrect--field names not included)

@DMIN(A2..D8,4,A11..C13) = ERR (Column figure too high)

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DSTD
@DSTD - Database Standard Deviation

Format

@DSTD(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field for which you want to find the standard deviation (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DSTD finds the population standard deviation for selected field entries in a database. @DSTDS computes the standard deviation of sample data.

@DSTD includes only those entries in Column whose records meet the criteria specified in block Criteria.

The field specified in Criteria and the field for which you are finding the standard deviation need not be the same. The field for which you are finding the standard deviation is the field contained within Column.

You can specify all or part of your database as Block, but field names must be included for each field in Block. For more information about database blocks, see Setting Up a Database.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	DATE	LOCATION	REP	AMOUNT

3	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ	$14,999

4	Jul-91	LA	RX	$28,725

5	Jul-91	Chicago	RX	$18,600

6	Jul-91	NY	CJ	$15,600

7	Aug-91	Chicago	CJ	$23,769

8	Aug-91	LA	RX	$34,345

9

10	CRITERIA TABLE

11	Date	Location	Rep

12	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ

13	LA

@DSTD(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $8,126 (population SD of California sales)

@DSTD(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = $4,000 (population SD of CJ's sales)

@DSTD(A2..D8,4,A11..C13) = ERR (Column figure too high)

@DSTDS(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $9,952 (sample SD of California sales)

@DSTDS(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = $4,899 (sample SD of CJ's sales)

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DSTDS
@DSTDS - Database Sample Standard Deviation

Format

@DSTDS(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field for which you want to find the standard deviation (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DSTDS finds the sample standard deviation for selected field entries in a database. @DSTD computes the standard deviation of population data.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your file must be compatible with 1-2-3, use @DSTD instead.

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DSUM
@DSUM - Database Sum

Format

@DSUM(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field you want to total (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DSUM totals selected field entries in a database. It includes only those entries in Column whose records meet the criteria specified in Criteria.

The field specified in Criteria and the field you are finding the sum of need not be the same. The field you are finding the sum of is that contained within Column.

You can specify all or part of your database as Block, but field names must be included for each field you include in the block. For more information about database blocks, see Setting Up a Database.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	DATE	LOCATION	REP	AMOUNT

3	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ	$14,999

4	Jul-91	LA	RX	$28,725

5	Jul-91	Chicago	RX	$18,600

6	Jul-91	NY	CJ	$15,600

7	Aug-91	Chicago	CJ	$23,769

8	Aug-91	LA	RX	$34,345

9

10	CRITERIA TABLE

11	Date	Location	Rep

12	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ

13	LA

@DSUM(A2..D8,3,A11..A12) = $77,924 (total of July sales)

@DSUM(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $78,069 (total of California sales)

@DSUM(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = $54,368 (total of CJ's sales)

@DSUM(A2..D8,1,A11..A12) = 0

@DSUM(A2..D8,4,A11..C13) = ERR (Column figure too high)

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DVAR
@DVAR - Database Variance

Format

@DVAR(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field for which you want to compute variance (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DVAR calculates the population variance for selected field entries in a database. @DVARS computes the variance of sample data.

@DVAR includes only those entries in Column whose records meet the criteria specified in Criteria.

The field specified in Criteria and the field for which you are calculating the variance need not be the same. The field analyzed is the field contained within Column.

You can specify all or part of your database as Block, but field names must be included for each field you include in the block. For more information about database blocks, see Setting Up a Database.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1

2	DATE	LOCATION	REP	AMOUNT

3	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ	$14,999

4	Jul-91	LA	RX	$28,725

5	Jul-91	Chicago	RX	$18,600

6	Jul-91	NY	CJ	$15,600

7	Aug-91	Chicago	CJ	$23,769

8	Aug-91	LA	RX	$34,345

9

10	CRITERIA TABLE

11	Date	Location	Rep

12	Jul-91	San Fran	CJ

13	LA

@DVAR(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $66,028,355 (pop. variance of Calif. sales)

@DVAR(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = $16,000,740 (pop. variance of CJ's sales)

@DVAR(A2..D8,4,A11..C12) = ERR (Column figure too high)

@DVARS(A2..D8,3,B11..B13) = $99,042,532 (sample variance of Calif. sales)

@DVARS(A2..D8,3,C11..C12) = $24,001,110 (sample variance of CJ's sales)

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@DVARS
@DVARS - Database Sample Variance

Format

@DVARS(Block, Column, Criteria)

Block	=	the 2-D cell block (reference or name) containing the database, including field names

Column	=	the number of the column containing the field for which you want to compute variance (the first column in Block is 0, the second is 1, and so on)

Criteria	=	a 2-D block containing search criteria; the first row must be field names

@DVARS calculates the sample variance for selected field entries in a database. @DVAR computes variance with population data.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. To use the file in 1-2-3, use @DVAR instead.

See Also

Database @Functions

Using @Functions


@ERR
@ERR - Error Value

Format

@ERR

@ERR returns the value ERR in the current cell and in any other cells that reference the current cell, either directly or indirectly. (Exceptions to this are @COUNT, @DCOUNT, @ISERR, @ISNA, @ISNUMBER, @ISSTRING, and @CELL formulas; these will not result in ERR if they reference an ERR cell.)

The ERR value resulting from this @function is the same as the ERR value produced by Quattro Pro when it encounters an error. It is often used with @IF to bring attention to error conditions.

ERR is a unique number, not to be confused with the label ERR.

Examples

@ERR = ERR

@IF(B6>B7,0,@ERR) = 0 (if B6>B7) or ERR (if B6<B7)

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@EXACT
@EXACT - Test If Values Are Exactly Alike

Format

@EXACT(String1, String2)

String1	=	a valid string value

String2	=	a valid string value

@EXACT compares the values of String1 and String2. If the values are exactly identical, including capitalization and diacritical marks (such as ~), it returns 1. If there are any differences, it returns 0.

If you are comparing literal strings, surround them with double quotes. If you use a block name or cell address, no quotes are necessary. You can compare the contents of label cells only. If you try to compare one or more numbers or empty cells, the result is ERR. When you compare labels, label prefixes are ignored.

To compare strings or cell contents without regard to capitalization or diacritical marks, use @IF. For example, @IF(C3=B3,1,0) returns 1 if the contents of the cells are the same but are capitalized differently.

Examples

@EXACT("client","Client") = 0

@EXACT("client","client") = 1

@EXACT(29,"29") = ERR (the first string is a value)

@EXACT(A1,"yes") = 1 (if A1 contains the label yes)

@EXACT(client,client) = syntax error (no quotation marks)

@EXACT("client","client","client ") = syntax error (more than two strings)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@EXP
@EXP - e Raised to X Power

Format

@EXP(X)

X	=	a numerical value equal to or less than 709

@EXP returns the mathematical constant e, raised to the Xth power. This @function is the inverse of a natural logarithm, @LN.

Examples

@EXP(3.4) = 29.9641000474

@EXP(1) = 2.718281828459 (the actual value of e)

@SQRT(@EXP(2)) = 2.71828183

@LN(@EXP(2.5)) = 2.5

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FALSE
@FALSE - Logical Value 0

Format

@FALSE

@FALSE returns the logical value 0 and is usually used in @IF formulas. The zero that it returns is the same as any other zero, but @FALSE makes the formula easier to read.

@TRUE is a related @function.

Examples

@FALSE = 0

@IF(C3=100,10,@FALSE) = 10 (if C3 = 100) or 0 (if C3 is not equal to 100)

@IF(C3=100,@TRUE,@FALSE) = 1 (if C3 = 100) or 0 (if C3 is not equal to 100)

See Also

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FILEEXISTS
@FILEEXISTS - Test If File Exists

Format

@FILEEXISTS(FileName)

FileName	=	any file name

@FILEEXISTS returns a 1 if a file named FileName exists in the current file directory, and returns a 0 if it does not. FileName can be a block name containing a path or file name string. If entered as a literal string, FileName must be enclosed by quotes and must include any extension attached to the file name. To search for a file in a directory other than the default directory, include the directory path in FileName.

Examples

@FILEEXISTS("EXAMPLE.WB1") = 1 (if EXAMPLE.WB1 is in the working directory)

@FILEEXISTS("C:\DATA\EXAMPLE.WB1") = 1 (if EXAMPLE.WB1 is in the specified directory)

@FILEEXISTS(FILE_NAME) = 1 (if the block FILE_NAME contains a path and file-name label and if the file exists in that directory)

See Also

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FIND
@FIND - Search for String

Format

@FIND(Substring, String, StartNumber)

Substring	=	a valid string value, representing the value to search for

String	=	a valid string value, representing the value to search through

StartNumber	=	a numeric value ≥ 0, representing the character position to begin searching with; 0 = the first character

@FIND searches through String from left to right for Substring. If it finds Substring, it returns the character position of the first occurrence. StartNumber indicates where to begin the search: 0 = the first character in the string, 1 = the second, and so on. The value of StartNumber must not be more than the number of characters in String minus 1.

@FIND is case-sensitive and is also sensitive to diacritical marks used in non-English languages. You can overcome the case sensitivity of this @function by using @UPPER to force one or more of the strings into all uppercase letters. For example, the following formula forces both the substring in cell C3 and the string in cell C4 to uppercase, then searches for the substring:

@FIND(@UPPER(C3),@UPPER(C4),0)

@FIND is most often used in conjunction with two other string functions: @REPLACE (to perform "search and replace" operations on strings) and @MID (to access substrings).

If @FIND fails to find any occurrences of Substring, or if the StartNumber given is invalid, the result is ERR.

Examples

@FIND("i","find",0) = 1

@FIND("nd","find",2) = 2

@FIND("F","find",0) = ERR

@FIND("f","find",3) = ERR

@FIND("d","find",4) = ERR

@FIND(n,find,0) = syntax error (quote marks omitted from strings)

@FIND("hi",C4,0) = 1 (if C4 contains ship)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@FV
@FV - Future Value of Investment

Format

@FV(Pmt, Rate, Nper)

Pmt	=	a numeric value representing the amount of the periodic payment

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Nper	=	number of periods, which should be an integer ≥ 2

@FV returns the future value of an investment where Pmt is invested for Nper periods at the rate of Rate per period.

@FV assumes that the investment is an ordinary annuity. @FVAL, a related @function, uses an optional argument, Type, to indicate whether the investment is an ordinary annuity or an annuity due.

Examples

Assume you want to set aside $500 at the end of each year in a savings account that earns 15% annually. To determine what the account will be worth at the end of six years, enter this formula:

@FV(500,15%,6)

Your yearly payment of $500 will be worth $4,376.87 in six years. You could also use @FVAL:

@FVAL(15%,6,-500,0,0)

Note that in @FVAL, you have to be precise about whether a payment is out of your pocket (a negative number) or paid to you (a positive number).

Other examples:

@FV(200,.12,5) = $1,270.57

@FV(500,0.9,4) = $6,684.50

@FV(800,0.9,3) = $5,208.00

@FV(800,0.9,A3) = $40,929.67 (if A3 = 6)

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@FVAL
@FVAL - Future Value of Investment

Format

@FVAL(Rate, Nper, Pmt, <Pv>, <Type>)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Nper	=	number of periods, which should be an integer > 0

Pmt	=	a numeric value representing the amount of the periodic payment

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the current value of an investment (the present value)

Type	=	an optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

Like the related @function @FV, @FVAL returns the future value of an investment. The last two arguments, Pv and Type, are optional. If you omit the last one or both of them, Quattro Pro assumes their values are zero. These arguments let you define the problem as an annuity due (putting money into an account before it earns its interest for that year means you have an annuity due to you, which increases the future value). Be sure to enter negative numbers for money going out and positive numbers for money coming in to you.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your file must be compatible with 1-2-3, use @FV instead.

Examples

Assume you want to set aside $500 at the start of each year in a savings account that earns 15% annually. To determine what the account will be worth at the end of six years, starting at a present value of zero, enter this formula:

@FVAL(15%,6,-500,0,1)

Note that the payment is out of your pocket, so you enter a negative number. Your yearly payment of $500 will be worth $5,033.40 in six years, or $656.53 more than if you deposited the money at the last day of the year as in the example for @FV.

If the account already had $340 in it before your yearly deposits of $500, you could calculate the future value after six years with this formula:

@FVAL(15%,6,-500,-340,1) = $5,819.84

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@HEXTONUM
@HEXTONUM - Hexadecimal to Decimal

Format

@HEXTONUM(Hex)

Hex	=	a hexadecimal number enclosed by double quotes

@HEXTONUM converts the hexadecimal number in the string to the corresponding decimal value. @NUMTOHEX performs the opposite conversion, from decimal to hexadecimal.

Examples

@HEXTONUM("a") = 10

@HEXTONUM("10") = 16

@HEXTONUM("00FF") = 255

@HEXTONUM(A1) = 10 (if cell A1 contains the label 'a)

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@HLOOKUP
@HLOOKUP - Horizontal Lookup

Format

@HLOOKUP(X, Block, Row)

X	=	a numeric or string value

Block	=	a 2-D block value

Row	=	the number of the referenced row, from 0 to the number of rows in Block - 1 (the first row in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on)

The first row of Block contains the index values (comparison figures used to determine which column to search). Each cell of the index row must contain a value. If numbers, these values must be in ascending order.

@HLOOKUP provides an efficient way to access information stored in a table. @HLOOKUP searches horizontally through the first row of Block for the value X. When found, it returns the value itself (if Row = 0), or the value displayed the specified number of rows beneath it (as indicated by Row).

If X is a string, Quattro Pro looks for an exact case-sensitive match. If X is a number and Quattro Pro cannot find an equal number, it locates the highest number in the row not more than X. If X is a number and the index row contains only labels, Quattro Pro stops at the rightmost column.

@HLOOKUP returns 0 if the referenced cell is blank. ERR is returned if:

Row is less than 0 or greater than the number of rows minus 1 in Block.

X is less than the smallest value in the topmost row of Block.

X and the index row entries are string values and Quattro Pro fails to find a match in the top row of Block.

X is a string or label and the index row entries are numeric values.

Examples

You might have a table listing days of the week by number:

0	1	2	3	4	5	6

Saturday	Sunday	Monday	Tuesday	Wednesday	Thursday	Friday

You could use @HLOOKUP to enter the day of the week for a given date. For example,

@HLOOKUP(@MOD(@DATE(92,11,11),7),A1..G2,1) = Wednesday

Additional examples

A	B	C	D

1	1	5	10	15

2	43	53	32	67

3	92	42	18	22

4	45	83	76	47

In the first example, Quattro Pro searches across the first row of the specified block (row 1), looking for the largest number equal to or less than 17. It stops at cell D1, then moves down the specified number of rows (3). It stops at cell D4 and returns the value 47.

@HLOOKUP(17,A1..D4,3) = 47

@HLOOKUP(10,A1..D4,0) = 10

@HLOOKUP(6,A1..D4,2) = 42

@HLOOKUP(50,A1..D4,3) = 47

@HLOOKUP("18",A1..D4,2) = ERR (index row values are not strings)

@HLOOKUP(18,A1..D4,4) = ERR (row value > # rows-1 in block)

To search vertically through a table, use @VLOOKUP.

See Also

Table Lookup @Functions

Using @Functions


@HOUR
@HOUR - Hour Portion of Date Serial Number

Format

@HOUR(DateTimeNumber)

DateTimeNumber	=	a numeric value between -109571 and 474816.9999999, representing a date/time serial number: -109571 = January 1, 1600; 0 = December 31, 1899; 474816 = December 31, 3199; the decimal = time (24 hr)

@HOUR returns the hour portion of DateTimeNumber. DateTimeNumber must be a valid date/time serial number. Because only the decimal portion of a serial number pertains to time, the integer portion of the number is disregarded. The result is between 0 (12:00AM) and 23 (11:00PM).

To extract the hour portion of a string that is in time format (instead of serial format), use @TIMEVALUE with @HOUR to translate the time into a serial number. To return standard hours (1-12) instead of military hours (1-24), use @MOD with a parameter of 12.

Examples

@HOUR(.25) = 6

@HOUR(.5) = 12

@HOUR(.75) = 18

@HOUR(@TIMEVALUE("10:08am")) = 10

@MOD(@HOUR(@TIMEVALUE("9:31:52 PM")),12) = 9

See Also

@TIME

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@IF
@IF - Perform Logical Test

Format

@IF(Cond, TrueExpr, FalseExpr)

Cond	=	a logical expression representing the condition to be tested

TrueExpr	=	a numeric or string value representing the value to use if Cond is true

FalseExpr	=	a numeric or string value representing the value to use if Cond is false

@IF evaluates the logical condition given as Cond. If the condition is found to be true, it returns the value given as TrueExpr. If the condition is false, it returns the value given as FalseExpr. Cond is true if it evaluates to any nonzero numeric value.

The formula entered as Cond can be any logical expression that can be evaluated as true or false; for example, B6<0 or C3*D2=53.

You can use compound conditions by connecting expressions with #AND# or #OR#. If you use #AND#, both conditions given must be met to evaluate true. If you use #OR#, the expression is true if either of the conditions is met. For example, A3<10#OR#A3>5 means that the value in A3 must be either less than 10 or greater than 5 to evaluate true--6,9,1, and 15 are all true; A3<10#AND#A3>5 means that the value in A3 must be between 5 and 10 to evaluate true. If A3 contains a label, the expression evaluates true because labels have a value of 0 (zero).

You can also use the #NOT# operator to negate a condition. For example, #NOT#(B3>10) evaluates true if B3 is not greater than 10.

TrueExpr and FalseExpr can be numbers, formulas resulting in numbers, or text. If text, the string must be enclosed by double quotes; for example, @IF(D6=5,"John","Harry "). You can also use cell references to use the contents of other cells in the notebook. For example, @IF(B10<18,D5,C4) enters the contents of D5 if the condition is true, and enters the contents of C4 if the condition is false.

If the condition you specify with Cond searches a cell for a number and the cell contains a label, the label is evaluated as having a value of 0 and FalseExpr is returned. Likewise, if you search for a label and find a numeric value, TrueExpr results if the value of the referenced cell is 0; FalseExpr results if it is nonzero.

Although logical expressions typically reference other cells, this is not required. Any expression resulting in a numeric value is accepted; for example, A1=1 or A1="Fred". If the result of Cond is nonzero, TrueExpr is the result; otherwise, FalseExpr is the result.

@IF statements can be nested, or used within one another. In other words, TrueExpr can contain yet another test to further validate Cond.

For example, @IF(B5>C6,@IF(B5>C7,1,2),3) tells Quattro Pro to see if the contents of B5 are greater than C6. If they are, it then checks to see if B5 is greater than C7; if so, it enters a 1 in the cell. If not, it enters a 2. If B5 is not greater than C6, it enters a 3. There is no limit on the number of levels @IF expressions that you can nest, as long as the entire expression does not exceed 1024 characters.

Examples

@IF(8=7,4,5) = 5

@IF(B4<100,"Yes","No") = Yes if B4 < 100; otherwise, No

@IF(C10=BLOCK,45,50) = 45 if C10 = the cell named BLOCK; otherwise, 50

@IF(C10,1,0) = 0 if C10 = 0; otherwise, 1

See Also

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@INDEX
@INDEX - Return Value from Table Index

Format

@INDEX(Block, Column, Row, <Page>)

Block	=	a cell block reference or name

Column	=	the number of the referenced column, from 0 to 255 (the first column in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on)

Row	=	the number of the referenced row; if an offset, the first row in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on

Page	=	the number of the referenced page, from 0 to 255 (the first page in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on)

@INDEX searches through the table given as Block and returns the value specified with the Column, Row, and optional Page values. The upper left cell in Block is column 0, row 0. Likewise, the first page is 0. The Column and Row values are not the actual coordinates of the resulting cell, but instead are offset values. In other words, @INDEX begins in the top left cell of the given block, moves right the number of columns specified by Column, moves down the number of rows specified by Row, and through the number of pages specified by Page (if you have specified a Page). It then returns the value in the current cell.

The Column, Row, and Page values must be numbers equal to or greater than zero and less than the number of rows, columns, or pages in the block. If a fractional number is used (for example, 2.35), the fractional part is dropped (not rounded).

@HLOOKUP and @VLOOKUP are related functions.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	1	5	10	15

2	43	53	32	67

3	92	42	18	22

4	45	83	76	47

These examples reference cells in the data table:

@INDEX(A1..D4,3,2) = 22

@INDEX(A1..D4,1,2) = 42

@INDEX(C2..D3,0,1) = 18

@INDEX(C2..D3,1,3) = ERR (too many rows)

@INDEX(A1..D4,-2,3) = ERR (negative column number)

See Also

Table Lookup @Functions

Using @Functions


@INT
@INT - Integer

Format

@INT(X)

X	=	a numeric value

@INT drops the fractional portion of X, returning its integer value. @ROUND rounds X to the nearest integer.

Examples

@INT(499.99) = 499

@INT(0.1245) = 0

@INT(-2.3) = -2

@INT(C4) = 5 if C4 contains a value between 5 and 6

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@IPAYMT
@IPAYMT - Interest Portion of Payment

Format

@IPAYMT(Rate, Per, Nper, Pv, <Fv>, <Type>)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Per	=	the number of the loan period for which the interest is desired (where Nper is the total number of periods)

Nper	=	a numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the amount borrowed (the principal)

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Type	=	an optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

@IPAYMT and @PPAYMT tell what portion of a particular loan payment is interest and what portion is principal, respectively. For each month in the transaction period,

@PAYMT(Rate, Nper, Pv, Fv, Type) = @IPAYMT(Rate, Per, Nper, Pv, Fv, Type) + @PPAYMT(Rate, Per, Nper, Pv, Fv, Type).

@IPAYMT is calculated by computing the simple interest on the outstanding principal from the previous month. @PPAYMT then gives the principal portion of the payment for the current month, and is computed by subtracting @IPAYMT from @PAYMT. The calculation starts by using Pv as the outstanding principal at the beginning of the first month:

@IPAYMT(Rate, Per, Nper, Pv, Fv, Type) = Rate ∗ @FVAL(Rate, Per + (Type - 1), @PAYMT(Rate, Nper, PV, Fv, Type), Pv, Type)

The last two arguments, Fv and Type, are optional. If you omit one or both of them, their values are assumed to be zero.

Examples

If you are two years into a 30-year, 10% mortgage on a $100,000 loan and your interest payment is tax-deductible, then @IPAYMT(.1/12,2*12,30*12,100000) returns your current month's deduction: -824.03.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@IRATE
@IRATE - Interest Rate

Format

@IRATE(Nper, Pmt, Pv, <Fv>, <Type>)

Nper	=	a numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

Pmt	=	a numeric value representing the amount of the periodic payment

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the current value of an investment (the present value)

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Type	=	an optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

Be sure to enter a negative number for money that is out of your pocket and a positive number for money that's coming in to you.

Like @RATE, @IRATE calculates the interest rate required to pay off a principal (Pv) or reach an investment goal (Fv) in Nper payments of Pmt amount.

The last two arguments, Fv and Type, are optional. If you omit one or both of them, their values are assumed to be zero.

@IRATE requires that the initial cash flow (Pv + Type * Pmt) and the last cash flow (Fv + (1-Type) * Pmt) have opposite signs. Otherwise, @IRATE returns ERR because the transaction is not simple and there may not be a meaningful rate.

@IRATE is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your file must be compatible with 1-2-3, use @RATE instead.

Examples

Assume you are negotiating to buy a $15,000 new car. The salesperson says you can have the car for $500 a month for the next five years. To calculate the monthly percentage rate:

@IRATE(5*12,-500,15000,0,0) = 0.02632

Another example: Assume that you plan to deposit $2000 a year into a savings account that currently contains only $2.38. What interest rate must the account earn to generate $15,000 at the end of 5 years? Use this formula:

@IRATE(5,-2000,-2.38,15000,0) = 0.203773

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@IRR
@IRR - Internal Rate of Return

Format

@IRR(Guess, Block)

Guess	=	a numeric value that estimates the internal rate of return on an investment

Block	=	a cell block (reference or name) containing cash flow information for the investment

@IRR determines the internal rate of return on an investment. It references a block in your notebook that contains cash flow information and uses the supplied internal rate of return estimate to calculate the results.

Before using @IRR, you must set up a cash flow table, showing expected cash flow amounts over a period of time. Quattro Pro assumes that the amounts are received at regular intervals. Negative amounts are interpreted as cash outflows, and positive amounts as inflows. The first amount must be a negative number, to reflect the initial investment. These amounts can all be the same for each time period, or they can be different (including a mixture of negatives, positives, or zeros).

Simple Transactions

@IRR always returns ERR or a rate of return greater than or equal to -1. Some cash flows have no rate of return, and some have several. If it can be determined that the cash flow has a unique rate of return, then the Guess is ignored and @IRR gives that unique value.

Quattro Pro can determine unique rates of return for simple transactions or cash flow. A simple cash flow has two sets of values: a series of nonpositive values (negative values and zero) that is your cash outflow, and a series of nonnegative values (positive values and zero) that is your cash inflow. A simple cash flow must contain both a negative value (cash outflow) and a positive value (cash inflow).

Simple values have a unique rate of return, so you can safely use @NA as the Guess argument in most cases. Quattro Pro then tries to determine whether the root is unique and returns that rate without using a Guess argument. If Quattro Pro cannot find a unique root value, @IRR returns ERR.

Typically, you make an investment (a negative cash flow) and then receive several dividends (positive cash flows). This is an example of a simple transaction, and @IRR gives the unique rate of return for this without requiring a Guess. More complex transactions, in which the direction of money changes several times, often do not have a meaningful value for @IRR. For more information, see @IRR with Multiple Rates of Return.

@IRR(Guess,Block) gives the number Rate which satisfies @NPV(Rate,Block,0) = 0. For a simple transaction, @NPV(@IRR(Block),Block,0) will give a number close to 0 (it may not be exactly 0 due to how numbers are rounded off).

Guess can be any value greater than -1. Values that are NA or less than or equal to -1 are ignored. Use @NA for Guess unless your cash flow has multiple rates of return. If you use @NA, you will get ERR if your cash flow has more than one rate of return, rather than the rate of return that happens to be near your Guess.

There is no Type parameter to @IRR because the rate of return is the same regardless of whether the payments are at the end or the beginning of each period.

Examples

A	B	C

1	3000	-50000	-10000

2	700	-8000	1000

3	600	2000	1000

4	750	4000	1200

5	900	6000	2000

@IRR(0,A1..A5) = -1

@IRR(0,B1..B5) = -38.09%

@IRR(0,C1..C5) = -19.90%

See Also

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@IRR with Multiple Rates of Return

In unusual cases, @IRR may have as many as N-1 roots, where N is the number of terms in the block. Consider the Block that has the values ( -10, +150, -145). @IRR(@NA,Block) returns ERR because it is not simple. The two roots are 3.86% and 1296%, obtainable from guesses of 0 and 10, respectively. Both of these values are meaningful, if interpreted properly.

Maybe you invested $10 in an oil well. It struck oil, paying you $150, but then it ran into legal difficulties and required you to pay back $145. You had a net loss of $5, but your rate of return is quite large, as you had the use of a relatively large amount of money for a small investment. Or, maybe the real purpose of the transaction was to get a $150 loan from the bank. The bank required you to pay a $10 application fee ahead of time. After you got the loan, you paid back $145. Because you only paid back $155 on a $150 loan, the interest rate is fairly low. The difference in these two interpretations is that in one you're the lender, and in the other you're the borrower.

If you find a transaction with two roots, there is a mechanical way to determine which is the lender rate and which is the borrower rate. Pick a positive term in the Block, and increase it by a small amount. If the rate increases, it is a lender rate, and if the rate decreases, it is a borrower rate.

If Block has the values (-10,+150,-145), @IRR(0,Block) = 3.86%

If Block has the values (-10,+150,-145), @IRR(10,Block) = 1296%

If Block has the values (-10,+150.1,-145), @IRR(0,Block) = 3.78%

If Block has the values (-10,+150.1,-145), @IRR(10,Block) = 1297%

Because 3.78% < 3.86% and 1297 > 1296%, it follows from this rule that 3.86% is a borrower rate and 1296% is a lender rate.

Most uses of @IRR are for analyzing an investment in which the first cash flow is negative, and the rate is a lender rate.

Some transactions have no rate of return at all. @IRR(Guess,Block), with Block having the values (-1,+1,-1), returns ERR regardless of the Guess. There is no rate of return that is meaningful for this cash flow.

If there are more than two roots, the above analysis can still be used to determine if a particular root is a lender rate or a borrower rate. In some cases, it might still be possible to assign meaning to a root, but it is much more likely that the transaction should be interpreted as several transactions, with a rate of return for each. For example, the cash flow (-1,+6,-11,+6) has three roots, 0%, 100%, 200%. It is difficult to interpret such a transaction in terms of interest rates, and the roots are sensitive to small fluctuations.

See Also

@IRR

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@ISERR
@ISERR - Error Test

Format

@ISERR(X)

X	=	a cell address or expression

@ISERR is normally used to check the contents of a cell for errors. If the cell contains ERR, 1 is returned; otherwise, 0 is returned. You can also use formulas or numeric values with @ISERR.

Examples

@ISERR(C2)=1 if C2 contains ERR; otherwise, 0

@ISERR(10/0)=1

@ISERR(45+C3)=1 if C3 is ERR; otherwise, 0

@ISERR(C2/B3)=1 if B3 is 0 or ERR, or if C2 is ERR; otherwise, 0

@IF(@ISERR(A2),0,A5)=0 if A2 is ERR; otherwise, it returns the value in A5

See Also

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ISNA
@ISNA - NA Test

Format

@ISNA(X)

X	=	a cell address or expression

@ISNA tests for the special value NA in a cell. If the cell contains an NA value, it returns 1; otherwise, it returns 0. NA is considered a special value; it appears in the notebook only through the use of @NA. Cells containing the label "NA" typed directly (not produced by @NA) are not recognized by @ISNA.

Examples

@ISNA("NA") = 0

@ISNA(@NA) = 1

@ISNA(A18) = 1 if A18 contains NA produced by @NA

See Also

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ISNUMBER
@ISNUMBER - Number Test

Format

@ISNUMBER(X)

X	=	a cell address or expression

@ISNUMBER examines X and determines if it contains a numeric value. If X is blank or contains a numeric value, ERR, or NA, @ISNUMBER returns a 1. If X is a label or text, @ISNUMBER returns a 0. @ISNUMBER is usually used with @IF to determine whether an entry is a value.

Examples

@ISNUMBER(88) = 1

@ISNUMBER("88") = 0 (quotes signify a text string)

@ISNUMBER(9/15/87) = 1

@ISNUMBER(@ERR) = 1 (ERR and NA are numeric values)

See Also

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ISSTRING
@ISSTRING - String Test

Format

@ISSTRING(X)

X	=	a cell address or expression

@ISSTRING examines X and determines if it contains a label or text string. If X does (even if the string is empty), @ISSTRING returns 1. If X is blank or contains a numeric or date value, @ISSTRING returns 0.

Usually, @ISSTRING is used to test the contents of a cell. You can test any expression, however. Literal string arguments must be enclosed by double quotes.

Examples

@ISSTRING(55) = 0

@ISSTRING(2/5/88) = 0

@ISSTRING("Hello, world.") = 1

@ISSTRING("Hello, "&"world.") = 1

@ISSTRING("55") = 1

@ISSTRING(A15) = 1 if A15 contains a label or formula that results in a string, otherwise 0

@ISSTRING(A15&A16&"!!!") = 1 if A15 and A16 contain labels or formulas that result in strings

@ISSTRING("") = 1 ("" is an empty string)

@ISSTRING(@NA) = 0 (NA and ERR are considered numeric values)

See Also

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LEFT
@LEFT - Leftmost Characters

Format

@LEFT(String, Num)

String	=	a string value

Num	=	a numeric value equal to or greater than 0

@LEFT returns the leftmost Num characters of String. It lets you extract a specified number of characters starting from the left end of a string or label.

If String is a numeric or date value or a blank cell, @LEFT returns ERR. If Num is longer than the length of String, all of String is returned. The number of characters returned is never greater than the length of the string.

Examples

@LEFT("Jennifer",5) = Jenni

@LEFT("Jennifer",15) = Jennifer

@LEFT("155",1) = 1

@LEFT("     Jennifer",6) =      J (including five leading spaces)

@LEFT(123,1) = ERR (123 is a value)

@LENGTH(@LEFT("Jennifer",255)) = 8

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@LENGTH
@LENGTH - Number of Characters

Format

@LENGTH(String)

String	=	a string value

@LENGTH returns the number of characters in String, including spaces. You can combine strings or cell addresses with an ampersand (&). When String is a text string, it must be enclosed by double quotes.

If you try to reference a blank cell with this @function, Quattro Pro returns ERR.

Examples

@LENGTH("Hello, world.") = 13

@LENGTH(" Jennifer") = 9 (including preceding space)

@LENGTH("Greetings "&"earthling") = 19 (including space after Greetings)

@LENGTH(29584949) = ERR (29584949 is a value, not a string)

@LENGTH(A6&B10) = total number of characters in A6 and B10

@LENGTH(B10) = ERR (if B10 is blank or a value)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@LN
@LN - Natural Logarithm

Format

@LN(X)

X	=	a numeric value > 0

@LN returns the natural logarithm of X. A natural logarithm uses the mathematical constant e as a base. @LN produces the inverse of @EXP.

Examples

@LN(3) = 1.098612289

@LN(@EXP(10)) = 10

@LN(16)/@LN(2) = 4

@LN(-4) = ERR (-4 is less than 0)

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LOG
@LOG - Base 10 Logarithm

Format

@LOG(X)

X	=	a numeric value > 0

@LOG returns the base 10 logarithm of X.

Examples

@LOG(1000) = 3

@LOG(10^23.8) = 23.8

@LOG(16)/@LOG(2) = 4 (log to base 2 of 16)

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LOWER
@LOWER - String in Lowercase

Format

@LOWER(String)

String	=	a string value

@LOWER returns String in lowercase characters. Numbers and symbols within a string are unaffected. Numeric and date values return ERR.

Examples

@LOWER("UPPER") = upper

@LOWER("Hello, world.") = hello, world.

@LOWER("145 Bancroft Lane") = 145 bancroft lane

@LOWER(4839) = ERR

@LOWER(@LEFT("Johnson",1)) = j

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@MAX
@MAX - Maximum Value

Format

@MAX(List)

List	=	one or more numeric values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@MAX returns the largest numeric or date value in List. If more than one block is listed, commas must separate the blocks. If any of the cells referenced contain ERR, the resulting value is ERR.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	Jan.	Feb.	Mar.

2	JA	$652	$833	$599

3	MH	$456	$305	$522

4	RB	$68	$59	$73

5	PD	$379	$379	$379

------	------	------

6	$1,555	$1,576	$1,573

@MAX(B3..B5) = $456

@MAX(C3..C5,D3..D5) = $522

@MAX(A1..D6) = $1,576

@MAX(B2..C5,D3) = $833

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MEMAVAIL
@MEMAVAIL - Memory Available

Format

@MEMAVAIL

@MEMAVAIL returns the number of bytes of memory currently available.

Example

@MEMAVAIL = 47819 (if 47,819 bytes of memory are available)

See Also

Status @Functions

Using @Functions


@MEMEMSAVAIL
@MEMEMSAVAIL - Expanded Memory Available

Format

@MEMEMSAVAIL

This @function is included for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS; it always returns NA under Windows.

See Also

@MEMAVAIL

Status @Functions

Using @Functions


@MID
@MID - Number of Characters from String

Format

@MID(String, StartNumber, Num)

String	=	a string value

StartNumber	=	a numeric value equal to or greater than 0

Num	=	a numeric value equal to or greater than 0

@MID extracts the first Num characters of String starting at StartNumber, which is the number of characters to the right of the first character (character 0). It is similar to @LEFT, which extracts Num characters of String beginning with the first character. The difference is that you can specify a character other than the first character in the string.

String can be any text string (enclosed by quotes) or reference to a cell containing a label. If StartNumber is greater than or equal to the length of String or if Num is 0, the result is "", or an empty string.

Examples

@MID("Abraham Lincoln",8,7) = Lincoln

@MID("George Washington",7,4) = Wash

@MID("Theodore Roosevelt",19,5) = ""

@MID(A23,@FIND("Roosevelt",A23,0),@LENGTH("Roosevelt")) = Roosevelt (if A23 = Franklin Roosevelt)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@MIN
@MIN - Minimum Value

Format

@MIN(List)

List	=	one or more numeric values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@MIN returns the smallest numeric value in List. If List contains more than one value, commas must separate the values. Labels are treated in all statistical functions as 0 and should therefore be excluded from List.

If List is entered as a block and one or more cells in that block are blank, the blanks are excluded from the calculation; otherwise, blanks are treated as 0.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	Jan.	Feb.	Mar.

2	JA	$652	$833	$599

3	MH	$456	$305	$522

4	RB	$68	$59	$73

5	PD	$379	$379	$379

------	------	------

6	$1,555	$1,576	$1,573

@MIN(B3..B6) = $68

@MIN(B2..D2,B4..D4) = $59

@MIN(B3..D3) = $305

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MINUTE
@MINUTE - Minute Portion of Date Serial Number

Format

@MINUTE(DateTimeNumber)

DateTimeNumber	=	a numeric value between -109571 and 474816.9999999, representing a date/time serial number: -109571 = January 1, 1600; 0 = December 31, 1899; 474816 = December 31, 3199; the decimal = time (24 hr)

@MINUTE returns the minute portion of DateTimeNumber. DateTimeNumber must be a valid date/time serial number. Because only the decimal portion of a serial number pertains to time, the integer portion of the number is disregarded. The result is between 0 and 59.

To extract the minute portion of a string that is in time format (instead of serial format), use @TIMEVALUE with @MINUTE to translate the time into a serial number. You can also use @TIME to enter a time value instead of a serial number.

Examples

@MINUTE(.36554) = 46

@MINUTE(.2525) = 3

@MINUTE(35) = 0

@MINUTE(@TIME(3,15,22)) = 15

@MINUTE(@TIMEVALUE("10:08 am")) = 8

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@MOD
@MOD - Modulus (Remainder)

Format

@MOD(X, Y)

X	=	a numeric value

Y	=	a numeric value not equal to 0

@MOD divides the X value by Y and returns the remainder, or modulus, value. Because you cannot divide a number by zero, ERR results if the value of Y is zero.

Examples

@MOD(3,1) = 0 (3 divided by 1 leaves no remainder)

@MOD(5,2) = 1 (5 divided by 2 leaves a remainder of 1)

@MOD(3,1.1) = 0.8

@MOD(4,0) = ERR

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MONTH
@MONTH - Month Portion of Date Serial Number

Format

@MONTH(DateTimeNumber)

DateTimeNumber	=	a numeric value between -109571 and 474816.9999999, representing a date/time serial number: -109571 = January 1, 1600; 0 = December 31, 1899; 474816 = December 31, 3199; the decimal = time (24 hr)

@MONTH returns the month portion of DateTimeNumber. DateTimeNumber must be a valid date/time serial number. Only the integer portion is used. The result is between 1 (January) and 12 (December).

To extract the month portion of a string that is in date format (instead of serial format), use @DATEVALUE with @MONTH to translate the date into a serial number. You can also use @DATE to enter a date value instead of a serial number.

Examples

@MONTH(69858) = 4

@MONTH(58494) = 2

@MONTH(.3773) = 12

@MONTH(@DATEVALUE("3/5/88")) = 3

@MONTH(@DATE(88,3,5)) = 3

@MOD(@MONTH(@DATEVALUE("3/5/88")),12) = 3

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@N
@N - Numeric Value of Upper Left Cell

Format

@N(Block)

Block	=	a cell block reference or name

@N inspects Block and returns the numeric value of the upper left cell. If that cell contains a label or is blank, it returns a 0.

This @function is used by other spreadsheet programs to avoid unnecessary ERR values resulting from labels included in calculations. This is unnecessary with Quattro Pro, however, because labels are already considered zero values in calculations. @N is included in Quattro Pro only for compatibility with other products.

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@NA
@NA - NA Value (Not Available)

Format

@NA

@NA returns the special value NA (not available). Formulas that depend on a value entered as @NA return the value NA, unless there is an error, in which case they return ERR. NA is a unique number, not to be confused with the label NA.

@NA is used to indicate values not yet available (it will not work with labels). It ensures that formulas relying on information that is not provided do not display inaccurate data.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	QTR	North	South	West

2	1	$187,681	$151,136	$131,123

3	2	$170,072	NA	$149,181

4

5	YTD	$357,753	NA	$280,304

6	AVG	$178,877	NA	$140,152

@NA has been entered for the South's Qtr 2 results. As you can see, the NA cascades through to the totals. When the @NA is replaced with a valid value, the totals will immediately reflect the correct figures.

@NA = NA

@IF(B3=0,@NA,B3) = NA if B3 = 0; otherwise, the value of B3

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@NOW
@NOW - Current Date and Time

Format

@NOW

@NOW returns the serial number corresponding to the current date and time. To display the number as a date or time, choose Numeric Format in the block Object Inspector.

The value generated by @NOW is updated to the current date and time each time you press the Calc key (F9), or perform any operation that recalculates the notebook.

The integer part of a date/time serial number pertains to the date; the decimal portion pertains to time. To extract just the date portion, use @INT(@NOW) or @TODAY. To extract just the time portion, use @MOD(@NOW,1).

Examples

@NOW = 31905.572338 (5/8/87, 1:45 PM)

@INT(@NOW) = 31905 (5/8/87)

@MOD(@NOW,1) = 0.572338 (1:45 PM)

@INT(@MOD(@NOW,7)) = 6 (the number of the day of the week)

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@NPER
@NPER - Number of Periods

Format

@NPER(Rate, Pmt, Pv, <Fv>, <Type>)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Pmt	=	a numeric value representing the amount of the periodic payment

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the current value of an investment (the present value)

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Type	=	an optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

Like @CTERM and @TERM, @NPER computes the number of payments needed to reach Fv, given Pv, Pmt, and Rate. The last two arguments of @NPER, Fv and Type, are optional. If you omit one or both of them, Quattro Pro assumes their values are zero.

Be sure to enter a negative number for money that is out of your pocket and a positive number for money that is coming in to you.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your file must be compatible, use @CTERM or @TERM instead.

Examples

Assume you have an IRA account that earns 11.5% interest paid annually at the start of the year, and you deposit $2000 into the account at the end of each year. The present account balance is $633. To determine how many payment periods it will take to reach a nest egg of $50,000, use @NPER:

@NPER(11.5%,-2000,-633,50000,0) = 12.12

The fractional part of the answer is not very meaningful; you cannot be sure of having your nest egg until the end of the 13th year.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@NPV
@NPV - Present Value of Future Cash Flow

Format

@NPV(Rate, Block, <Type>)

Rate	=	A numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Block	=	A cell block (reference or name) containing cash flow information for the investment

Type	=	An optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

@NPV calculates the current value of estimated cash flow values (Block), discounted at the given interest rate (Rate). It is helpful in determining how much an investment is currently worth, based on expected earnings, although its accuracy is entirely dependent on the accuracy of the cash flow table.

The optional third argument, Type, can be 0 or 1, depending on whether the cash flows are at the beginning or the end of the period. The default value is 0, end of the period.

The formula for @NPV(Rate,Block,Type)--if Block consists of [image] --is given by

If Type = 0

If Type = 1

The cash flow table in Block should show expected income and debits over a period of time. If Type is 0, Quattro Pro assumes that the amounts are received at the end of regular intervals. If Type is 1, it assumes the amounts are received at the beginning of regular intervals. Quattro Pro also assumes that the length of this interval is the same as the period on which interest is compounded. In other words, if monthly cash flow is estimated, Rate needs to show monthly interest. To convert annual interest to monthly interest, simply divide by 12.

Examples

A	B	C	D	E

1	1992	1993	1994	1995	1996

2	-5000	+2000	+2000	+2000	+2000

Suppose you are considering investing $5000 this year, and you expect a return of $2000 in each of the next four years. Put the values -5000,+2000,+2000,+2000,+2000 in the block A2..E2. The net present value, using a discount rate of 10%, is @NPV(.1,A2..E2,1) which equals $1,340. Or, combine the initial investment with the present value of the four returns with +A2+@NPV(.1,B2..E2,0). The result is the same.

Additional examples

A	B	C	D

1	Jan	8000	200	3500

2	Feb	9000	350	4000

3	Mar	8500	-300	3000

4	Apr	9500	600	5000

@NPV(1.25%,B1..B4) = $33,908.92

@NPV(15%/12,C1..C4) = $820.83

@NPV(15%/12,D1..D4) = $15,006.51

-2000+@NPV(15%/12,D1..D4) = $13,006.51 (assumes an initial cash outflow of $2,000)

See Also

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@NUMTOHEX
@NUMTOHEX - Decimal to Hexadecimal

Format

@NUMTOHEX(Decimal)

Decimal	=	decimal number to convert

@NUMTOHEX converts the decimal number Decimal to its corresponding hexadecimal string value. @HEXTONUM performs the opposite conversion, from hexadecimal to decimal.

Examples

@NUMTOHEX(10) = 'A

@NUMTOHEX(16) = '10

@NUMTOHEX(65535) = 'FFFF

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@PAYMT
@PAYMT - Amortized Payment

Format

@PAYMT(Rate, Nper, Pv, <Fv>, <Type>)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Nper	=	a numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the amount borrowed (the principal)

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Type	=	an optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

@PAYMT calculates the periodic payment needed to reach Fv, given Rate, Nper, and Pv. The last two arguments of @PAYMT, Fv and Type, are optional. If you omit the last one or both of them, Quattro Pro assumes that their values are zero. Enter negative numbers for out-of-pocket money and positive numbers for money coming in.

Related @function @PMT is not as flexible, but can be used if your file must be compatible with 1-2-3.

Examples

Assume you want to take out a 30-year $175,000 mortgage with a 17.5% annual interest rate with 12 payments a year, and you would like to see the difference in your monthly payments if you paid at the start or at the end of the month. All you have to do is enter these two @functions:

@PAYMT(17.5%/12,12*30,175000,0,0) = -2566.07

@PAYMT(17.5%/12,12*30,175000,0,1) = -2529.19

If, on the other hand, your mortgage has a "balloon payment" that leaves you with unpaid principal at the end of the mortgage, you can still calculate the payment. Just insert the balloon payment amount (say, $80,000) as the future value component:

@PAYMT(17.5%/12,12*30,175000,-80000,0) = -2559.68

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@PI

Format

@PI

@PI returns the value of pi (3.141592653589794...), the classic ratio of a circle's circumference to its diameter.

To figure the area of a circle, given the radius in cell A1, enter this formula:

@PI*A1^2

Examples

@PI*13 = 40.84 (circumference of circle with a diameter of 13)

@PI*(7.5)^2 = 176.7146 (area of circle with a radius of 7.5)

@PI*B3 = the circumference of a circle whose diameter is in B3

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@PMT
@PMT - Amortized Payment

Format

@PMT(Pv, Rate, Nper)

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the amount borrowed (the principal)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Nper	=	a numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

@PMT calculates the fully amortized periodic payment needed to repay a loan with a principal of Pv dollars at Rate percent per period over Nper periods. It assumes that interest is paid at the end of each period and the investment is an ordinary annuity (not an annuity due).

You can enter the value for Rate as a percent or a decimal; for example, 9.5% or .095. The amount you specify for Rate must correlate with the unit used for Nper. In other words, if payments are made and interest calculated annually, the amount entered for Nper must represent years. If monthly, Nper must represent the number of months the loan covers. To calculate monthly payments using an annual interest rate, divide the interest rate by 12.

@PMT assumes that the investment is an ordinary annuity. Related @functions @PAYMT, @IPAYMT, and @PPAYMT let you use an optional argument, Type, to indicate whether the investment is an ordinary annuity or an annuity due.

Examples

To calculate a monthly payment (paid on the last day of the month) for a three-year loan of $10,000 at an annual 15% interest rate, enter

@PMT(10000,15%/12,3*12) = $346.65

You can also use @PAYMT to figure this payment (the negative result means the money is out of your pocket):

PAYMT(15%/12,3*12,10000,0,0) = $-346.65

Other examples:

@PMT(1000,0.12,5) = $277.41

@PMT(500,0.16,12) = $96.21

@PMT(5000,16%/12,12) = $453.65

@PMT(12000,0.11,15) = $1,668.78

@PMT(10000,15%/12,36) calculates a monthly payment for a three-year loan of $10,000 at an annual 15% interest rate

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@PPAYMT
@PPAYMT - Principal Portion of Payment

Format

@PPAYMT(Rate, Per, Nper, Pv, <Fv>, <Type>)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Per	=	the number of the loan period for which the principal is desired (where Nper is the total number of periods)

Nper	=	a numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

Pv	=	a numeric value representing the amount borrowed (the principal)

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Type	=	an optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

@PPAYMT calculates the amount of a particular payment that is going toward the loan principal or investment Pv and is not interest.

@IPAYMT gives the part of the payment which is interest; @PAYMT calculates the total payment for each period.

Examples

Assume you are two years into a 30-year, 10% mortgage on a $100,000 loan. To determine what portion of this month's payment is principal, enter

@PPAYMT(.1/12,2*12,30*12,100000) = $-53.54

The negative result indicates the money is out of your pocket.

Another example:

@PPAYMT (.15/4,24,40,10000,0,1) = $-250.83 quarterly payments for a $10,000 loan at 15% annual percentage rate adjusted to a quarterly basis over a 10-year term

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@PROPER
@PROPER - Initial Capital Letters

Format

@PROPER(String)

String	=	a string value

@PROPER converts the first letter of every word in String to uppercase, and the rest of the characters to lowercase. A word is defined as an unbroken string of alphabetic characters. Any blank spaces, punctuation symbols, or numbers mark the end of a word.

Examples

@PROPER("GEORGE washINGTON") = George Washington

@PROPER("FIRST QUARTER") = First Quarter

@PROPER("JOHN J.  SMITH") = John J. Smith

@PROPER("1979's results") = 1979'S Results

@PROPER(A1) = John J. Smith (where cell A1 contains JOHN J. SMITH)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@PROPERTY
@PROPERTY - Current Property Setting

Format

@PROPERTY(Object.Property)

Object	=	the name of the object whose property settings you are requesting

Property	=	the property whose settings you are requesting

@PROPERTY is similar to @COMMAND and @CURVALUE. It returns the current setting of Property for the requested Object.

Object.Property must be enclosed in double quotes. See Property Reference for lists of objects and properties you can enter as arguments.

@PROPERTY returns strings; even if the setting is a number, it is returned as a string.

@PROPERTY can be used in macros to read current settings so they can be restored at the end of the macro.

Like @CELL, @PROPERTY statements do not recalculate automatically. Press F9 to obtain the current value.

Examples

@PROPERTY("Active_Block.Selection") = the coordinates of the currently selected block.

@PROPERTY("Active_Block.Protection") = Protect if the currently selected block is protected; otherwise, it returns Unprotect.

@PROPERTY("Sales:A1..D12.Protection") = Protect if block A1..D12 on page Sales is protected; otherwise, it returns Unprotect.

@PROPERTY("Graph8:G$Pane.Fill_Style") = "Bitmap,Crop to fit,C:\QPW\tiger.bmp" if the Graph Pane Fill Style for Graph8 is a cropped bitmap named Tiger from directory C:\QPW.

@PROPERTY("B4.Font.Typeface") = Courier when cell B4 of the active page is set to display Courier type.

See Also

Status @Functions

Using @Functions


@PV
@PV - Present Value

Format

@PV(Pmt, Rate, Nper)

Pmt	=	a numeric value representing the amount of the periodic payment

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Nper	=	a numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

@PV calculates the present value of an investment where Pmt is received for Nper periods and is discounted at the rate of Rate per period.

@PV assumes that the investment is an ordinary annuity. Related @function @PVAL lets you use an optional argument, Type, to indicate whether the investment is an ordinary annuity or an annuity due.

Examples

Assume you want to buy a new van that costs $12,000. The dealer presents two offers: Pay $12,000 cash up front, or pay $350 per month for the next five years with 7% interest. The present value of the loan is

@PV(350,7%/12,5*12) = $17,675.70

The loan is worth over $5000 more than paying the cost all at once.

You can also use @PVAL. The car loan example becomes

@PVAL(7%/12,5*12,-350,0,0) = $17,675.70

Other examples:

@PV(277,0.12,5) = $998.52

@PV(600,0.17,10) = $2,795.16

@PV(100,0.11,12) = $649.24

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@PVAL
@PVAL - Present Value

Format

@PVAL(Rate, Nper, Pmt, <Fv>, <Type>)

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Nper	=	a numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

Pmt	=	a numeric value representing the amount of the periodic payment

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Type	=	an optional numeric value that indicates whether payments or cash flows occur at the beginning (1) or the end (0) of the period; default = 0

@PVAL calculates the present value of an investment where Pmt is received for Nper periods and is discounted at the rate of Rate per period.

Enter negative numbers for money that is out of your pocket and positive numbers for money coming in to you. The last two arguments, Fv and Type, are optional. If you omit the last one or both of them, Quattro Pro assumes their values are zero.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your file must be compatible, use the related @function @PV instead.

Examples

Your grandfather leaves you $24,000 in cash over the next 12 years ($2000 a year) or you can have all his government bonds, which mature in 15 years to a worth of $30,000. To determine which is worth more, compute the present value of the $24,000. Assume you can invest the money as you accumulate it in a 10% money market account.

@PVAL(10%,12,2000,0,0) = -13,627.38

The result is negative because the money you invest is considered an outgoing cash flow. Now compare this figure with the present value of the $30,000, which you will not receive for 15 years:

@PVAL(10%,15,0,30000,0) = -7,181.76

These results tell you that the $24,000 spread over 12 years is the more valuable choice.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@RADIANS
@RADIANS - Convert Degrees to Radians

Format

@RADIANS(X)

X	=	a numeric value representing degrees (0 to 360)

@RADIANS converts the given number of degrees to radians, using this formula:

pi times X divided by 180

One degree is equal to approximately 0.017 radians.

Examples

@RADIANS(1) = 0.017453

@RADIANS(57) = 0.994838

@RADIANS(@DEGREES(3.5)) = 3.5

@RADIANS(A4) = 0.994838 (where cell A4 contains the value 57)

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@RAND
@RAND - Fractional Random Number

Format

@RAND

@RAND returns a fractional random number between 0 and 1. This offers a sampling of figures, useful for generating sample data for simulated situations.

To generate random numbers in another range, multiply @RAND by the difference between the new high and low ends, then add the new low end number. The formula is @RAND * (high number - low number) + low number.

For example, to indicate a range of 10 to 100, enter @RAND*90+10. This extends the upper limit to 100 and the lower limit to 10.

@RAND generates a new random number with each recalculation.

Examples

@RAND = a random number between 0 and 1

@RAND*9+1 = a random number between 1 and 10

@RAND*1000 = a random number between 0 and 1000

@RAND+5 = a random number between 5 and 6

-@INT(@RAND*90+10) = a random integer between -10 and -100

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@RATE
@RATE - Interest Rate per Period

Format

@RATE(Fv, Pv, Nper)

Fv	=	A numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

Pv	=	A numeric value representing the current value of an investment (the present value)

Nper	=	A numeric value > 0, representing the number of periods of the loan (the number of payments to be made) or investment (the number of compounding periods)

@RATE calculates the interest rate required for an investment of Pv to be worth Fv within Nper compounding periods. If Nper represents years, an annual interest rate results; if Nper represents months, a monthly interest rate results, and so on.

@RATE assumes the investment is an ordinary annuity. The related @function @IRATE lets you use an optional argument, Type, to indicate whether the investment is an ordinary annuity or an annuity due.

Examples

This formula determines what yearly interest rate will double an initial investment of $2000 at the end of 10 years:

@RATE(4000,2000,10) = 7.18%

Other examples:

@RATE(10000,7000,6*12) = 0.50% (monthly)

@RATE(1200,1000,3) = 6.27% (yearly)

@RATE(500,100,25) = 6.65% (yearly)

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@REPEAT
@REPEAT - Repeat Copies of a String

Format

@REPEAT(String, Num)

String	=	a string value

Num	=	a numeric value equal to or greater than 0

@REPEAT returns Num copies of String as one continuous label. This @function is similar to the repeating label prefix (\) in that it repeats one or more characters. The difference is that you can specify exactly how many times you want the string to be repeated. The \ label prefix adjusts the display to fill the column, even when the width is changed. @REPEAT displays a fixed number of copies of String and does not change.

When you specify a text string with @REPEAT, it must be enclosed by double quotes.

Examples

@REPEAT("-",20) =  --------------------

@REPEAT("good day!",3) = good day!good day!good day!

@REPEAT(A5,5) = the contents of A5 repeated 5 times

@REPEAT("-",@CELL("width",A1..A1)) = ------------  if column A is 12 characters wide. If you change the column width, you can press F9 to adjust the repeat string to fill the cell.

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@REPLACE
@REPLACE - Replace Characters in a String

Format

@REPLACE(String, StartNum, Num, NewString)

String	=	a valid string value, representing the text to operate on

StartNum	=	a numeric value equal to or greater than 0, representing the character position to begin with

Num	=	a numeric value equal to or greater than 0, representing the number of characters to delete

NewString	=	a string value, representing the characters to insert at position Num

@REPLACE lets you replace characters in text with a new text string. It searches through the given String from left to right beginning with the first character (character 0) until it reaches character position StartNum. Then it removes Num number of characters from the string, replacing them with NewString.

Both String and NewString can be either cell references or text strings. If text strings, they must be enclosed by double quotes.

To replace one string with another, specify 0 as StartNum. For Num, enter a number equal to or greater than the number of characters in String.

To insert one string into another string, specify 0 as Num.

To add one string to the end of another, specify as StartNum a number one greater than the number of characters in String.

To delete part or all of a string, specify "" as NewString.

Examples

@REPLACE("McDougal Corp.",2,6,"Douglas") = McDouglas Corp.

@REPLACE("Leslie J. Cooper",7,3,"") = Leslie Cooper

@REPLACE("Sales Salaries",6,0, "Reps' ") = Sales Reps' Salaries (There must be a space between Reps and the final quotation mark.)

@REPLACE("355 Howard",11,0," St.") = 355 Howard St. (There must be a space between " and St.)

You can use @REPLACE with other string functions. For instance, to replace one word with another within a sentence, you can use @FIND and @LENGTH to simplify the search-and-replace operation. For example,

@REPLACE(A7,@FIND("man",A7,0),@LENGTH(   "man"),"person")

searches through A7 for man, then replaces man with person.

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@RIGHT
@RIGHT - Rightmost Characters

Format

@RIGHT(String, Num)

String	=	a string value

Num	=	a numeric value ≥ 0

@RIGHT returns Num characters of String counting from right to left. It extracts a specified number of characters from the right side of a string or label.

If String is a not a valid string, @RIGHT returns ERR. If Num is 0, the result is "", or an empty string. If Num is greater than or equal to the number of characters in String, the entire string is returned.

Examples

@RIGHT("Jennifer Meyer",5) = Meyer

@RIGHT("Jennifer Meyer",25) = Jennifer Meyer

@RIGHT("Jennifer   ",6) = fer    (including 3 subsequent spaces)

@RIGHT("155",1) = 5

@RIGHT(123,1) = ERR (123 is a value)

@RIGHT(A10,5) = the last five characters of A10

@RIGHT(A16,@LENGTH(A16) - @FIND("Roosevelt",A16,0)) = Roosevelt (if A16 = Theodore Roosevelt)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@ROUND

Format

@ROUND(X, Num)

X	=	a numeric value

Num	=	a numeric value between -15 and 15

@ROUND adjusts the precision of X to Num decimal places. Num specifies the power of 10 to which X is rounded. If Num is positive, X is rounded Num digits to the right of the decimal point. If Num is negative, X is rounded Num digits to the left of the decimal point. For example, if Num is -3, X is rounded to the nearest thousand.

If Num is 0, X is rounded to an integer. If Num is not an integer, it is truncated to an integer.

Examples

@ROUND(12345.54321,0) = 12346

@ROUND(12345.54321,2) = 12345.54

@ROUND(12345.54321,-2) = 12300

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ROWS

Format

@ROWS(Block)

Block	=	a cell block reference or name

@ROWS returns the number of rows within the given block.

Examples

@ROWS(A1..A1) = 1

@ROWS(A1..C15) = 15

@ROWS(B100..B8192) = 8093

@ROWS(NAME) = 30 (if the block NAME contains 30 rows)

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@S
@S - String Value of Upper Left Cell

Format

@S(Block)

Block	=	a cell block reference or name

@S returns the string value of the upper left cell of Block. If that cell contains a numeric or date value or is blank, it returns "" (an empty string).

Quattro Pro transforms cells prefixed with an exclamation point (as used in 1-2-3) to a one-cell range (!C3 changes to C3).

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	COMPANY	REP	SALES	COMMISSION

2	ABC Inc.	Jones	$123,630	$3,115

3	Rogers Co.	Marcus	$160,330	$4,040

4	Klein Sales	Wong	$145,330	$3,662

@S(A1..A6) = COMPANY

@S(A2..A2) = ABC Inc.

@S(C2..C4) = (blank)

@S(B1..B1)&" = "&@S(B2..B2) = REP = Jones

@S(B3)&@S(C3) = Marcus

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@SECOND
@SECOND - Second Portion of Date Serial Number

Format

@SECOND(DateTimeNumber)

DateTimeNumber	=	A numeric value between -109571 and 474816.9999999, representing a date/time serial number: -109571 = January 1, 1600; 0 = December 31, 1899; 474816 = December 31, 3199; the decimal = time (24 hr)

@SECOND returns the second portion of DateTimeNumber. DateTimeNumber must be a valid date/serial number. Because only the decimal portion of a serial number pertains to time, the integer portion of the number is disregarded. The result is between 0 and 59.

To extract the second portion of a string that is in time format (instead of serial format), use @TIMEVALUE with @SECOND to translate the time into a serial number. You can also use @TIME to enter a time value instead of a serial number.

Examples

@SECOND(.3655445) = 23

@SECOND(.2543222) = 13

@SECOND(35) = 0

@SECOND(@TIME(3,15,22)) = 22

@SECOND(@TIMEVALUE("10:08:45 am")) = 45

@SECOND(@TIMEVALUE("10:08 am")) = 0

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHEETS
@SHEETS - Number of Notebook Pages

Format

@SHEETS(Block)

Block	=	a cell block reference or name

@SHEETS returns the number of pages within the given block. This is most often used with 3-D blocks. @SHEETS always returns 1 for 2-D blocks. This @function is similar to @COLS and @ROWS.

Examples

@SHEETS(B:A1..D:IV1) = 3

@SHEETS(A1..C7) = 1

@SHEETS(A..E:NAME) = 5

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@SIN
@SIN - Sine

Format

@SIN(X)

X	=	a numeric value

@SIN returns the sine of the angle X. X must be given in radians, not degrees. To convert degrees to radians, use @RADIANS.

Examples

@SIN(@RADIANS(30)) = 0.5

@SIN(@PI/6) = 0.5

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SLN
@SLN - Straight-Line Depreciation

Format

@SLN(Cost, Salvage, Life)

Cost	=	a numeric value representing the amount paid for an asset

Salvage	=	a numeric value representing the value of an asset at the end of its useful life

Life	=	a numeric value representing the expected useful life of an asset (in years)

@SLN calculates the straight-line depreciation allowance for an asset over one period of its life, using this formula:

(Cost - Salvage) divided by Life

To compute accelerated depreciation with the sum-of-the-years'-digits method (allowing higher depreciation values in the first years of the asset's life), use @SYD. To calculate depreciation using the double-declining balance method, use @DDB.

Examples

Assume you just bought a new $4000 computer. The dealer says you can sell it back to the store for $350 after eight years, but that no one would want to buy it after that. In other words, the Salvage value of that computer is $350 and its Life is 8. To determine the depreciation allowance of the computer for each year of its life, enter this formula:

@SLN(4000,350,8) = 456.25

Other examples:

@SLN(15000,3000,10) = $1,200

@SLN(5000,500,5) = $900

@SLN(1800,0,3) = $600

See Also

Depreciation Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@SQRT
@SQRT - Square Root

Format

@SQRT(X)

X	=	a numeric value equal to or greater than 0

@SQRT returns the square root of X. If X is a negative value, the result of @SQRT is ERR. If X is a string or reference to a cell containing a label, the @function returns 0.

Examples

@SQRT(9) = 3

@SQRT(2) = 1.414213562

@SQRT(144) = 12

@SQRT(@SQRT(16)) = 2

@SQRT(-4) = ERR

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@STD
@STD - Population Standard Deviation

Format

@STD(List)

List	=	one or more numeric values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@STD returns the population standard deviation (the square root of the population variance) of all values in List. @STDS computes the standard deviation of sample data.

List can be any combination of single cell references, cell blocks, and numeric values. When more than one component is used, all components must be separated by commas. @STD treats any labels within a cell block as zero and ignores any blank cells. If the List contains only blank cells, however, @STD returns ERR.

@STD determines how much individual values in List differ from the average (mean) of all values in List. It can be used to verify the reliability of the average; the lower the value returned by @STD, the less individual values vary from the average.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	January	February	March

2	John	$652	$833	$599

3	Mary	$456	$305	$522

4	Ralph	$68	$59	$73

5	Anna	$80	$80	$80

6

@STD(B4..D4) = $5.79

@STD(C2..C5,260) = $279.97

@STD(B2..D5) = $270.20

@STD(A15..D20) = ERR (because the entire block is blank)

@STDS(B4..D4) = $7.09

@STDS(B2..D5) = $282.22

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@STDS
@STDS - Sample Standard Deviation

Format

@STDS(List)

List	=	one or more numeric values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@STDS returns the sample standard deviation (the square root of the sample variance) of all values in List. @STD computes population standard deviation.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your file must be compatible with 1-2-3, use @STD instead.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	January	February	March

2	John	$652	$833	$599

3	Mary	$456	$305	$522

4	Ralph	$68	$59	$73

5	Anna	$80	$80	$80

6

@STD(B4..D4) = $5.79

@STD(C2..C5,260) = $279.97

@STD(B2..D5) = $270.20

@STD(A15..D20) = ERR (because the entire block is blank)

@STDS(B4..D4) = $7.09

@STDS(B2..D5) = $282.22

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@STRING
@STRING - Convert Number to String

Format

@STRING(X, DecPlaces)

X	=	a numeric value

DecPlaces	=	a numeric value between 0 and 15

@STRING converts X to a string, rounding X to the decimal precision indicated by DecPlaces.

Once a number or date has been converted to a label using @STRING, no display formatting can be done with it. To format strings derived from numbers as anything other than General format, you must build a macro that uses the {CONTENTS} keyword.

Examples

@STRING(3.59,0) = 4

@STRING(98.6,2) = 98.60

@STRING(0.3902,0) = 0

@STRING("Harry",0) = 0

@STRING(A1,2) = 10.00 (where A1 = 10)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUM

Format

@SUM(List)

List	=	one or more numeric values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@SUM returns the total of all numeric values in List. List can be any combination of single cell references, cell blocks, and numeric values. When more than one component is used, they must be separated by commas. Any labels or blank cells within a cell block are ignored by @SUM.

Any dates in the block will be converted to serial numbers and included in the calculation. Since this will throw off your sum, avoid including dates in the @SUM argument block.

If you use a mouse, the SpeedSum button [image] on the Main Toolbar offers a convenient way to total columns, rows, or both. It can total rows and columns in the selected block, but you do not need to enter a formula.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	January	February	March

2	John	$652	$833	$599

3	Mary	$456	$305	$522

4	Ralph	$68	$59	$73

5	Anna	$80	$80	$80

6

@SUM(B4..D4) = $200

@SUM(C2..C5,260) = $1,537

@SUM(A5,534) = $534

@SUM(B2..B5,D2..D5) = $2,530

@SUM(B2..D5) = $3,807

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMPRODUCT
@SUMPRODUCT - Sum of Products of Corresponding Coordinates

Format

@SUMPRODUCT(Block1, Block2)

Block1	=	a cell block reference or name

Block2	=	a cell block reference or name

@SUMPRODUCT(Block1, Block2) returns the dot product of the vectors corresponding to the blocks. Quattro Pro multiplies each corresponding cell from Block1 and Block2 and then totals those results. The blocks must be the same size (same number of rows and same number of columns), or else the blocks must both be one-dimensional (either a row or a column) and they must have the same length. If the blocks do not match, @SUMPRODUCT returns ERR.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your notebook must be compatible with 1-2-3, do not use @SUMPRODUCT.

Examples

Assume the following values for these cells:

A1 = 1, B1 = 5, A2 = 2, B2 = 6, A3 = 3, B3 = 7, A4 = 4, B4 = 8

@SUMPRODUCT(A1..A2,B1..B2) = 17 (because 1*5 + 2*6 = 5+12 = 17)

@SUMPRODUCT(A1..A4,B1..B4) = 70

@SUMPRODUCT(A1..A4,B1..B5) = ERR (blocks are not the same size)

See Also

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SYD
@SYD - Sum-of-the-years'-digits Depreciation

Format

@SYD(Cost, Salvage, Life, Period)

Cost	=	A numeric value representing the amount paid for an asset

Salvage	=	A numeric value representing the value of an asset at the end of its useful life

Life	=	A numeric value representing the expected useful life of an asset (in years)

Period	=	A numeric value representing the time period for which you want to calculate depreciation

@SYD calculates depreciation amounts for an asset using an accelerated depreciation method. This allows higher depreciation in the earlier years of the asset's life. @SYD uses this formula to compute depreciation:

((Cost - Salvage)(Life - Period + 1)) divided by (Life(Life + 1)/2)

Cost must be equal to or greater than Salvage; both must be equal to or greater than 0. Life must be equal to or greater than Period; both must be equal to or greater than 1.

@DDB and @SLN offer other methods of calculating depreciation.

Examples

Assume you just bought a new $4000 computer. The dealer says you can sell it back to the store for $350 after eight years, but that no one would want to buy it after that. The Salvage value of that computer is $350 and its Life is 8. To see what the depreciation allowance of this computer will be by the second year (using this method of depreciation), enter this formula:

@SYD(4000,350,8,2) = 709.72

These examples show depreciation values for the first five years of an asset's life. These can be compared to those calculated with @DDB, which distributes more of the depreciation in the first year of life.

@SYD(12000,1000,5,1) = $3,667

@SYD(12000,1000,5,2) = $2,933

@SYD(12000,1000,5,3) = $2,200

@SYD(12000,1000,5,4) = $1,467

@SYD(12000,1000,5,5) = $733

@DDB(12000,1000,5,1) = $4,800

@DDB(12000,1000,5,2) = $2,880

@DDB(12000,1000,5,3) = $1,728

@DDB(12000,1000,5,4) = $1,037

@DDB(12000,1000,5,5) = $555

See Also

Depreciation Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@TAN
@TAN - Tangent

Format

@TAN(X)

X	=	a numeric value

@TAN returns the tangent of the angle X. X must be given in radians, not degrees. To convert degrees to radians, use @RADIANS.

Examples

@TAN(4) = 1.157821

@TAN(@PI/4) = 1

@TAN(@RADIANS(45)) = 1

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@TERM
@TERM - Number of Payment Periods for an Annuity

Format

@TERM(Pmt, Rate, Fv)

Pmt	=	a numeric value representing the amount of the periodic payment

Rate	=	a numeric value > -1, representing the periodic interest rate (the fixed interest rate per compounding period)

Fv	=	a numeric value representing the future value of an investment (the value the investment will reach at some point)

@TERM computes the number of payment periods required in order to accumulate an investment of Fv, making regular payments of Pmt and accruing interest at the rate of Rate.

@TERM uses this formula:

An equivalent for this formula using @NPER is

@NPER(Rate,-Pmt,0,Fv)

@TERM assumes the investment is an ordinary annuity. The related @function @NPER uses an optional argument, Type, to indicate whether the investment is an ordinary annuity or an annuity due.

Examples

To determine how long it will take to accrue $50,000 by depositing $2000 at the end of each year into a savings account that earns 11% annually, enter this formula:

@TERM(2000,11%,50000) = 12.67

Quattro Pro determines that it will take 12.67 years to accumulate $50,000 in your account. (Depending upon how your bank pays interest, your balance might not exceed $50,000 until the end of the 13th year.)

If, on the other hand, the money is not coming in to you but is being paid out by you, you can enter the future value as a negative number.

You can also use @NPER to calculate this example:

@NPER(11%,-2000,0,50000,0) = 12.67

Other examples:

@TERM(300,6%,5000) = 11.9 years

@TERM(500,7%,1000) = 1.94 years

@TERM(500,.07,1000) = 1.94 years

@TERM(1000,10%,50000) = 18.8 years

@TERM(100,5%,1000) = 8.3 years

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@TIME
@TIME - Date serial number for Hr:Min:Sec

Format

@TIME(Hr, Min, Sec)

Hr	=	a number between 0 and 23, representing Hour

Min	=	a number between 0 and 59, representing Minute

Sec	=	a number between 0 and 59, representing Second

@TIME returns the date/time serial number represented by Hr:Min:Sec. Any fractional portions of Hr, Min, and Sec are rounded. You can display the resulting time string values in standard time formats by choosing Numeric Format in the block Object Inspector.

Examples

@TIME(3,0,0) = 0.125 (3:00 am)

@TIME(3,30,15) = 0.14600694444 (3:30:15 am)

@TIME(18,15,59) = 0.76109953704 (6:15:59 pm)

@TIME(B15,23,45) = 0.099826388889 (when the value in B15 is 2)

@TIME(@HOUR(C3),A4,B10) = 0.5751388889 (1:48:12 pm) (when C3 = 01:23:13 pm (formatted date/time serial number), A4 = 48, and B10 =12)

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@TIMEVALUE
@TIMEVALUE - Value Corresponding to TimeString

Format

@TIMEVALUE(TimeString)

TimeString	=	a numeric value or a string value in any valid time format, enclosed by quotation marks

@TIMEVALUE returns a serial time value that corresponds to the value in TimeString. If the value in TimeString is not in the correct format, or is not enclosed in quotes (if entered as a literal string), an ERR value is returned.

You can display resulting time string values in standard time formats by choosing Numeric Format in the block Object Inspector.

There are four valid formats for TimeString:

HH:MM:SS AM/PM (03:45:30 PM)

HH:MM AM/PM (03:45 PM)

The Long International time format chosen as a system default, one of which is HH:MM:SS (15:45:30)

The Short International time format chosen as a system default, one of which is HH:MM (15:45)

Examples

@TIMEVALUE("03:30:15 AM") = 0.1460069444

@TIMEVALUE("03:00") = 0.125

@TIMEVALUE("18:15:59") = 0.76109953704

@TIMEVALUE("3.45") = ERR

@TIMEVALUE(@TIME(12,30,45)) = 0.521354

@TIMEVALUE(A1) = 0.125 if A1 contains the label '03:00

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@TODAY
@TODAY - Today's Date

Format

@TODAY

@TODAY enters the numeric value of the system's date. It is equal to the expression @INT(@NOW).

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@TRIM
@TRIM - Remove Extra Spaces

Format

@TRIM(String)

String	=	a string value

@TRIM removes any extra spaces from String; that is, spaces following the last nonspace character or preceding the first nonspace character, and duplicate spaces between words. Strings with no extra spaces are not affected. If String is empty or contains a numeric value, it returns ERR.

Examples

@TRIM(" too    many    spaces ") = too many spaces

@TRIM("no extra spaces") = no extra spaces

@TRIM(125) = ERR

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@TRUE
@TRUE - Logical Value 1

Format

@TRUE

@TRUE returns the logical value 1 and is usually used in @IF formulas. The 1 it returns is the same as the regular numeral 1, but @TRUE makes the formula easier to read.

Examples

@TRUE = 1

@IF(C3=100,@TRUE,10) = 1 (if C3 = 100) or 10 (if C3 is not equal to100)

@IF(C3=100,@TRUE,@FALSE) = 1 (if C3 = 100) or 0 (if C3 is not equal to 100)

See Also

@FALSE

Logical @Functions

Using @Functions


@UPPER
@UPPER - String in Uppercase

Format

@UPPER(String)

String	=	a string value

@UPPER returns String in uppercase characters. Numbers and symbols within a string are unaffected. If String is blank, or contains a numeric or date value, the result is ERR.

Examples

@UPPER(4839) = ERR

@UPPER(@LEFT("johnson",1)) = J

@UPPER("upper") = UPPER

@UPPER("Hello, world.") = HELLO, WORLD.

@UPPER("145 Bancroft Lane") = 145 BANCROFT LANE

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@VALUE
@VALUE - Value of a String

Format

@VALUE(String)

String	=	a string value

@VALUE converts String into a numeric value. String can contain arithmetic operators (but do not place arithmetic operators within quotes). String must not contain embedded spaces. Dollar signs, commas, and leading and trailing spaces are ignored.

This @function is useful for converting imported data that has not already been converted into values.

Examples

@VALUE("  3.59") = 3.59 (leading spaces are stripped)

@VALUE("  98.6  ") = 98.6 (leading and trailing spaces are stripped)

@VALUE("98.6 4") = ERR (an embedded space is not allowed)

@VALUE(3+4) = 7

@VALUE("3+4") = ERR (arithmetic operators within quotes are not allowed)

@VALUE(" 88.039") = 88.039

@VALUE(A10) = 56.34 (where cell A10 = '$56.34)

@VALUE("34,200") = 34200

@VALUE(A1) = ERR (where cell A1 = '1800 Green Hills Road)

See Also

String @Functions

Using @Functions


@VAR
@VAR - Population Variance

Format

@VAR(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or string values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@VAR calculates the population variance of all nonblank, numeric cells in List, using the n method (biased). Use @VARS to compute the variance of a data sample.

If List contains text, a reference to a single cell containing a label (for example, @VAR(B1) where B1 = Adam), or label cells within references to multiple cell blocks (such as @VAR(B1..B5)), @VAR treats the string as having a value of 0. @VAR ignores blank cells within a referenced block of cells, but returns ERR if every cell in the block is blank.

Examples

@VAR(23,24,25) = .666666667

@VAR("Adam",53) = 702.25 (same as for @VAR(0,53)

@VAR(B1..B4) = 54.6875 (if B1=10, B2=15, B3="Susan", B4=20; the string in B3 is treated as if it were 0)

@VARS(23,24,25) = 1

@VARS("Adam",53) = 1404.5 (same as for @VARS(0,53)

@VARS(B1..B4) = 72.9167 (if B1=10, B2=15, B3="Susan", B4=20; the string in B3 is treated as if it were 0)

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@VARS
@VARS - Sample Population Variance

Format

@VARS(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or string values, cell addresses, and block references or names, separated by commas

@VARS calculates the sample variance of all nonblank, numeric cells in List, using the n-1 method (unbiased). @VAR computes population variance.

This @function is not compatible with 1-2-3. If your file must be compatible with 1-2-3, use @VAR instead.

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@VERSION
@VERSION -Quattro Pro Version Number

Format

@VERSION

@VERSION returns the version number of Quattro Pro.

See Also

Status @Functions

Using @Functions


@VLOOKUP
@VLOOKUP - Vertical Lookup

Format

@VLOOKUP(X, Block, Column)

X	=	a numeric or string value

Block	=	a 2-D block value

Column	=	the number of the referenced column, from 0 to the number of columns in Block - 1 (the first column in Block = 0, the second = 1, and so on)

@VLOOKUP works along the same basic principles as @HLOOKUP, except that rows and columns are reversed.

@VLOOKUP searches (vertically) down the first column of the given Block for value X. Then, it counts over the specified number of columns (indicated by Column) and returns the value found in that cell. The first column has a value of 0; the second has a value of 1, and so on.

X can be a character string or a number, the address or block name of any cell containing a label or value, or any expression that results in a number or string. If X is a string, the match must be exact; the lookup is case-sensitive. If X is a number and @VLOOKUP cannot find an equal number, it locates the highest number in the column not greater than X.

The second argument (Block) specifies the coordinates of the table to be used for the lookup. This table must have its index values in the leftmost column. These values (if numbers) must be in ascending numerical order. Also, there must be no blank cells in the index column. Blanks in the table to the right of the index column are treated as 0.

@VLOOKUP looks through the index column of the table from top to bottom looking for a match to X. If it finds an exact match, the lookup stops at that column. If a match is not found and X is a number, the search stops at the value closest to but not greater than X. If X is a number and the index column contains only labels, or if X is a label and an exact match is not found, @VLOOKUP returns ERR.

The final argument (Column) tells @VLOOKUP how many columns to the right of the index column the return value is. This argument can be any value from 0 up to the number of columns in the table, or any expression or cell address resulting in such a value. A value of 0 tells @VLOOKUP to return the actual value found in the index column. A value of 1 instructs @VLOOKUP to return the value directly to the right of the one found in the index column; a value of 2 tells @VLOOKUP to return the value two columns to the right, and so on.

If X is a string value and Column = 0, @VLOOKUP returns the offset number of the row X is found in, not the value of X.

These instances result in ERR:

Column is less than 0 or greater than the number of columns in Block -1.

X is less than the smallest value in the first column of Block.

X is a string and an exact match in the index column is not found.

Examples

A	B	C	D

1	5	52	84	43

2	10	32	67	45

3	15	42	18	22

4	20	83	76	47

In the first example, @VLOOKUP searches down the first column of the specified block (column A), looking for the largest number equal to or less than 17. It stops at cell A3, then moves across the specified number of columns (3). It stops at cell D3 and returns the value 22.

@VLOOKUP(17,A1..D4,3) = 22

@VLOOKUP(10,A1..D4,0) = 10

@VLOOKUP(50,A1..D4,3) = 47

@VLOOKUP("18",A1..D4,2) = ERR (no labels in block)

@VLOOKUP(18,A1..D4,8) = ERR (col value > # cols)

@VLOOKUP(18,A1..C4,3) = ERR (col value > # cols in given block)

To search horizontally through a table, use @HLOOKUP.

See Also

Table Lookup @Functions

Using @Functions


@YEAR
@YEAR - Year Portion of Date Serial Number

Format

@YEAR(DateTimeNumber)

DateTimeNumber	=	A numeric value between -109571 (January 1, 1600) and 474816.9999999 (December 31, 3199)

@YEAR returns the year portion of DateTimeNumber. To display the actual year, just add 1900 to the result of @YEAR. If you want to extract the year portion of a string that is in date format, use @DATEVALUE with @YEAR to convert the string into a serial number.

Examples

@YEAR(22222) = 60 (1960)

@YEAR(A6)+1900 = 19nn, where nn is the year value in A6

@YEAR(@DATEVALUE("12-Oct-54")) = 54

@YEAR(-75000) = -206 (1694)

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@TABLELINK
@TABLELINK - Link to Database Table

Format

@TABLELINK(TableName,<Columns>,<Rows>)

TableName	=	path and filename of the database table

Columns	=	number of columns (fields) to show from the linked table

Rows	=	number of rows (records) to show from the linked table

@TABLELINK establishes a link to an external database table and displays the table in a Quattro Pro notebook. TableName is the filename of the database table to link to the notebook. By default, @TABLELINK links the entire table; to link selected columns and rows, enter values for the optional Columns and Rows arguments.

You can use Tools|Database Tools|Table Link to create a formula using @TABLELINK.

Examples

The following formula creates a link to a database table file named CUSTOMER.DB and displays seven columns and five rows of the table:

@TABLELINK("C:\OFFICE\QPW\SAMPLES\CUSTOMER.DB",7,5)

The next figure shows the resulting table. Cell A1 contains the @TABLELINK formula.

A	B	C	D	E	F	G

1	1386 	Aberdeen	F	45 Utah Street	Washington	DC	20032

2	1388 	Svenvald	I	Gouvernment House	Reykjavik

3	1784 	McDougal	L	4950 Pullman Ave NE	Seattle	WA	98105

4	2177 	Bonnefemme	S	128 University Drive	Stanford	CA	94323

5	2579 	Chavez	L	Cypress Drive	Palm Springs	FL	32938

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions

Tools|Database Tools|Table Link


Setting Holidays

Business date functions have three arguments to specify which dates are holidays: Saturday, Sunday, and Holidays. By default, Saturday and Sunday are holidays. Setting the argument Saturday to 1 specifies that Saturday is a business day; setting Sunday to 1 specifies that Sunday is a business day. Use the argument Holidays to specify holidays that do not fall on weekends (unless weekends are used as business days). You can set Holidays to a block containing holiday dates (see the next figure), the date of a single holiday, or 0 to specify no special holidays.

A	B	C

7	01/01/93	07/05/93	11/26/93

8	02/15/93	09/06/93	12/23/93

9	05/31/93	11/25/93	12/24/93

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Functions and Formulas

Date and Time @Functions

Entering Formulas


Entering Number Conversion Functions
Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Input numbers that include non-numeric characters (such as hexadecimal or ASCII values) must be enclosed in quotation marks (for example, "1AF3C"). Numbers that exceed 14 digits, except decimal numbers, must also be enclosed in quotation marks.

For the 64-bit number conversion @functions, numbers must be in the following ranges for each base:

64-bit Base Ranges

Base	Range

Signed decimal	-9223372036854775808 to +9223372036854775807

Unsigned decimal	0 to 18446744073709551615

Hexadecimal	0000000000000000 to FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

Octal	0000000000000000000000 to 1777777777777777777777

If a 64-bit number conversion @function results in a string value greater than [image], the @function returns ERR.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions


Entering Boolean @Functions

The shift @functions, @SHLB, @SHRB, @SHLH, and @SHRH, shift the bits in a number to the left or right. You can use the shift @functions to perform quick multiplication of integers. Each binary shift to the left is equivalent to multiplying the number by 2. Each binary shift to the right is equivalent to dividing the number by 2.

   Binary      Decimal

   00011    =      3

   00110    =      6

   01100    =     12

   11000    =     24

As you shift bits off one end of a number, bits are added to the other end. Shift, however, is not equal to rotate. For example, the binary number 1001 shifted left is 0010. The same number rotated left is 0011. To perform this rotation, you can use a nested bit test @function to set the BitIn argument:

@SHLB(1001,@BITTB(1001,3),1,4) = 0011

The addition @functions, @ADDB and @ADDH, return the sum of two numbers. The subtraction @functions, @SUBB and @SUBH, return the difference of two numbers.

Note:	To add or subtract negative numbers with the Boolean @functions, use two's complement notation. Two's complement notation is a code used to give meaning to a binary string. The sign bit of two's complement notation is the leftmost bit of the word. A number is positive if the sign bit is 0 and negative if it is 1. Negative integers are converted to two's complement by inverting each bit (that is, changing each 1 to a 0 and each 0 to a 1), and then adding 1.

The overflow @functions, @SHLBO, @SHRBO, @SHLHO, @SHRHO, @ADDBO, @ADDHO, @SUBBO, @SUBHO, return the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of a shift, addition, or subtraction operation. For example, if you shift the binary number 1001 to the left and maintain four places, the result is 0010. The overflow bit, that is, the bit that has shifted into the fifth place not shown, is 1.

The AND @functions, @ANDB and @ANDH, combine the zeros of the input words. Any bit that is 0 in either number sets the corresponding output bit to 0.

The OR @functions, @ORB and @ORH, combine the ones of the input words. Any bit that is 1 in either number sets the corresponding output bit to 1.

The exclusive OR @functions, @XORB and @XORH, set an output bit to 1 when two corresponding input bits are not equal.

The following table shows the results of AND, OR, and exclusive OR operations of Bit A and Bit B.

Bit A	Bit B	A AND B	A OR B	A XOR B

0	0	0	0	0

0	1	0	1	1

1	0	0	1	1

1	1	1	1	0

The invert @functions, @INVB and @INVH, invert individual bits of a number; that is, all bits with a value of 1 change to 0, and all bits with a value of 0 change to 1.

The bit manipulation @functions, @BITSB, @BITRB, @BITTB, @BITSH, @BITRH, and @BITTH, let you set or reset bits, or test the value of a bit in a number.

The concatenation @functions, @CATB, @CATH, @CATNB, and @CATNH, link numbers together in a chain. For example, the concatenation of the two binary numbers 11111 and 10101 is 1111110101.

The argument Bits defines the word size (in number of binary bits) for both input and output. The default for Bits is the number of bits in the largest input number. If you perform an operation with two numbers of different word size, the smaller number is left-padded with zeros. If Bits is less than the length of an input value, then the excess most significant digits are truncated. For Boolean @functions using hexadecimal numbers, note that each hexadecimal digit equals 4 bits.

The argument BitIn represents either the binary bit inserted during a shift, the carry bit for addition, or the borrow bit for subtraction; it can be either 0 (the default) or 1.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Functions and Formulas

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Formulas


Calendar Conventions

Financial @functions support four different calendar conventions to count the difference in days between two dates. The optional Calendar argument lets you specify which calendar convention to use.

Calendar	Description

30/360	The 30/360 calendar convention assumes all months have 30 days and every year has 360 days. Using the 30/360 calendar, the number of years, months and days between two dates are counted separately. Then, the number of days between two dates is the sum of three quantities: the number of years times 360, the number of months time 30, and the number of days.

Actual/Actual	The Actual/Actual calendar convention considers the actual number of days between two dates and the actual number of days in the year. For example, February 28, 1994 and August 31, 1994 are 184 days apart. February 28, 1994 and March 1, 1994 are 1 day apart.

Actual/360	The Actual/360 calendar convention considers the actual number of days in each month, but assumes 360 days in the year.

Actual/365	The Actual/365 calendar convention considers the actual number of days in each month, but assumes 365 days in the year, thus making no provision for leap year.


Annuity @Function Arguments

Argument	Description

Adv	Number of cash flows (payments, deposits) made before the annuity begins.

Fv	Future value.

Int	Interest charged on the loan per period (not per year; many loans quote annual interest rates that must be divided by the number of payments per year).

Nper	Number of periods of the loan or investment (should be an integer greater than 0).

Odd	Number ≥ 0 that specifies the number of periods between the start of a loan and the first payment (for example, if the loan is made two and a half months before the first monthly payment is due, use 2.5)

Payment	Cash flow made each period.

Per	A specified loan or investment period, 1 thorugh Nper.

Pmt	Payment.

Principal	Amount of money loaned or the initial deposit on an annuity that increases principal (like depositing $2,500 to open a savings account)

Pv	Present value.

Rate	Interest rate (should be greater than -1).

Residual	Remaining principal and interest at the end of a loan that the annuity did not take care of

ResOff	Number of periods after the annuity ends before the residual must be paid; express it as a fraction of a period (for example, in a monthly loan, 1.5 means 1.5 months before the residual is due)

Simp	Specifies how the interest is calculated: 0 for compounded interest, 1 for simple interest

Term	The total number of cash flows (payments or deposits) to make

Type	0 if payments are at the end of each period, 1 if at the beginning. This optional argument lets you use financial @functions to compute either an ordinary annuity, where periodic payments are made at the end of each period, or an annuity due, where payments are made at the beginning of each period. Quattro Pro assumes that Type = 0 unless you indicate otherwise.

Note:	In the following @functions, as well as @NPV and @IRR, amounts with positive signs represent money received, and amounts with negative signs represent money paid: @FVAL, @IRATE, @IPAYMT, @NPER, @PAYMT, @PPAYMT, and @PVAL. This convention applies to arguments and to the results of the @functions. In 1-2-3-compatible @functions (such as @PV, @PMT, @FV, @RATE, @TERM, and @CTERM) the amounts are usually all positive regardless of which way the money changes hands.

Non-integer values are allowed for Nper, and the @functions give results that are consistent with other spreadsheet programs, but which are actually not very meaningful. If you borrow money from a bank for, say, 15.2 months with interest paid monthly, giving Nper a value of 15.2 in the financial @functions will only be a rough indicator of what the bank will tell you to pay. In order to compute the figures the way the bank would, you have to consider two transactions, one for 15 months and one for 0.2 months.

The functions asume that there is no residual unless a nonzero value is specified for the optional argument Residual. When a residual is specified, the functions assume that it is paid along with the last payment. When it is not, a positive value should be specified for the optional argument ResOff. For example, if the residual is paid three months after the last monthly payment, ResOff = 3. Compound interest is used during any fractional component of ResOff unless Simp = 1.

Advance payments, specified by Adv, are made on or before the first day of the loan period. They are included in the total payment count. The functions assume zero advance payments unless a nonzero value is specified for the optional argument Odd.

Odd specifies the time period between the beginning of a loan (or issue of an annuity) and the date of the first periodic payment, and does not necessarily constitute exactly one normal payment period. For example, if a loan begins on March 19, 1993 and monthly payments are due the first of every month beginning April 5, 1993, the first payment period is 17 days long. Since the implied normal first payment period, March 5 to April 5, is 31 days long, Odd = [image].

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Functions and Formulas

Annuity Financial @Functions

Entering Formulas


Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Cash flow analysis is a process of listing a stream of cash gains and losses (positive and negative cash flows), modifying them using a percentage or percentages (discount rate(s)), and determining their future value, present value, or rate of growth (or decline; both are called the internal rate of return).

Unlike an annuity, this stream of cash flows does not always occur periodically, and does not have a fixed interest rate for each cash flow.

You can use cash flow functions to estimate the net present value of a cash flow stream, project the future value of the stream, compute the gains the stream is making as a percentage, or compute how the discount rates must change to achieve a specific future value.

Cash Flow @Function Arguments

For details on using cash flow @function arguments, choose one of the following topics:

Using the Discrate Argument

Using the Filter, Start, and End Arguments

Using the Flows Argument

Using the Odd and Periods Arguments

Using the Simp and PathDep Arguments

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Functions and Formulas

Cash Flow @Functions

Entering Formulas


Using the Flows Argument

In Quattro Pro, a stream of cash flows is specified by a column (or row) of values. The Flows argument of a cash flow function is set to this block. Positive values add cash to the stream; negative values subtract from it. For example, if your savings account had two deposits of $50, one withdrawal of $25, and one deposit of $75 (in that order), you could use A2..A5 or B2..E2 of the next figure to represent it in a cash flow function:

A	B	C	D	E

1	Cash Flows

2	$50	$50	$50	($25)	$75

3	$50

4	($25)

5	$75

If the stream contains a series of equal cash flows, you can add an additional column (or row) to specify how many times a given cash flow repeats. For example, you can replace A2..A5 of the previous figure with A2..B4 of the next figure:

A	B

1	Cash Flows

2	2	$50

3	1	($25)

4	1	$75

The first column (or row) of the block specifies how many times each cash flow occurs. For example, in the previous figure the value 2 (in A2) specifies that two cash flows of $50 occur in the stream, not one.

Note:	Quattro Pro uses the size of the cash flow block to determine whether you are specifying a column of cash flows or a row of cash flows. It assumes that blocks with more than two rows contain cash flows in the second column; blocks with more than two columns contain cash flows in the second row. In the case of a two-column, two-row block, Quattro Pro assumes that the cash flows are in the second row.

See Also

Cash Flow @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using the Discrate Argument

Using the Filter, Start, and End Arguments

Using the Odd and Periods Arguments

Using the Simp and PathDep Arguments


Using the Filter, Start, and End Arguments

You can use the argument, Filter, Start, and End to make Quattro Pro automatically exclude cash flows that do not fall in a certain range, such as all deposits, or any withdrawals less than $20. Excluded cash flows are not included in the function calculations. Use Filter to specify the rules for exclusion, as shown in the next table.

Filter	Cash flows are excluded when

0	No filtering (the default)

1	Cash flow < Start

2	Cash flow ≤ Start

3	Cash flow > Start

4	Cash flow ≥ Start

5	Start < Cash flow < End

6	Start ≤ Cash flow ≤ End

As shown, Start and End are used differently, depending on the setting of Filter. They always bind the cash flows in some way; Start and End could be a range of cash flows values to use (Filter set to 5) or an upper limit for values (Filter set to 1, Start set to the upper limit).

See Also

Cash Flow @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using the Discrate Argument

Using the Flows Argument

Using the Odd and Periods Arguments

Using the Simp and PathDep Arguments


Using the Discrate Argument

The Discrate argument of a cash flow function specifies how the cash flows are discounted to achieve their future or net present value. It can be a single percentage (like 0.05 for 5%) that applies to all the cash flows, or a column (or row) of discount rates, one for each cash flow in the Flows block (see the previous section). Positive discount rates decrease the cash flow; negative ones increase it. The next figure shows a stream of cash flows (in A2..B4) and their corresponding discount rates (in C2..C4).

A	B	C

1	Cash Flows	Discounts

2	2	$50	5.0%

3	1	($25)	-2.5%

4	1	$75	7.5%

The first two cash flows (specified by A2..B2) are discounted by 5% (as specified by C2). The third is discounted by -2.5% (an increase, as specified by the negative percentage in C3), and the final cash flow is discounted by 7.5% (as specified by C4).

See Also

Cash Flow @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using the Filter, Start, and End Arguments

Using the Flows Argument

Using the Odd and Periods Arguments

Using the Simp and PathDep Arguments


Using the Simp and PathDep Arguments

You can use the Simp argument to specify how Quattro Pro applies discount rates to cash flows. The next table shows the discounting methods available.

Simp	Discounting

0	Compounded

1	Mixture of compounded and simple

2	Simple

In addition to Simp, PathDep, which is used only when Discrate is a block, specifies whether path-dependent discounting is used. When path-dependent discounting is used (PathDep is set to 1), the set of discount rates are chained together to determine future or net present value. If the order of discount rates changes, the future or net present value can be affected.

When path-dependent discounting is not used (PathDep is set to 0, the default), each cash flow is affected by its associated discount rate; other discount rates in Discrate do not affect it.

See Also

Cash Flow @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using the Discrate Argument

Using the Filter, Start, and End Arguments

Using the Flows Argument

Using the Odd and Periods Arguments


Using the Odd and Periods Arguments

By default, cash flow functions assume that each cash flow occurs periodically (every month, every year, and so on). The arguments Odd and Periods let you specify irregular periods. You normally use one or the other, so these arguments appear in the function descriptions as Odd|Periods.

If the length of time of the first period is odd, specify a number for Odd. For example, if a series of cash flows are monthly, and the first period is half a month long, set Odd to 0.5; if the first period is one and a half months, set Odd to 1.5.

Note:	In @FUTV, Odd specifies the length of the last period.

If several cash flows are unevenly spaced, specify a block for Periods. Periods is a column (or row) of numbers that specify the duration of each cash flow in the Flows block. Like Odd, each value in the block is expressed as a fraction of the regular period. For example, the next figure shows a cash flow block in B2..B4, and a Period block in A2..A4.

A	B

1	Periods	Flows

2	1	$50

3	3.5	$75

4	2	($25)

The value 1 in A2 specifies that the first cash flow ($50) occurs at a regular period. You decide what this period is; it could be a week, a month, or a year. Assuming the regular period is a month, the value 3.5 (in A3) specifies that the second cash flow ($75) occurs three and a half months after the first. The final value, 2, specifies that two months elapse between the second cash flow and the third.

Like Flows, the Periods block can have an additional column (or row) added to specify how many times a given period length repeats. Periods does not have to be the same size as Flows. For example, in the next figure, the cash flow stream is A2..B5.

A	B	C	D

1	Cash flows	Periods

2	4	$5	1	0.56745

3	4	$10	11	1

4	7	$11	4	1.5

5	1	$110

Periods is C2..C4, and specifies that the first cash flow is 0.56745 periods away, the next 11 cash flows occur one period apart, and the last four cash flows are 1.5 periods apart.

See Also

Cash Flow @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using the Discrate Argument

Using the Filter, Start, and End Arguments

Using the Flows Argument

Using the Simp and PathDep Arguments


Bond @Function Arguments

Argument	Description

Settle	Settlement date for the trade

Maturity	Redemption date for the bond

Coupon	Annual coupon rate expressed as a decimal

Issue	Issue date, that is, the date at which the bond is first offered for sale and begins accruing interest

FirstCpn	Date on which the first coupon period ends; if the first coupon period is longer or shorter than the other periods, the first coupon payment date is explicitly specified at issue; the size of the first coupon payment is linearly prorated in accordance with the length of the first coupon period

Redemption	Redemption value per par of 100

Freq	Frequency of coupon payments in the number of payments per year; the default is 2 (semiannual)

Calendar	Calendar to observe; the default is 0 (30/360)

Yield	Internal rate of return expressed as a decimal

Price	Quoted price of the bond assuming a par value of 100 and not including accrued interest

LastCpn	Date on which the last coupon period ends

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Functions and Formulas

Bond Financial @Functions

Entering Formulas


@ABDAYS
@ABDAYS - Add/Subtract Business Days

Format

@ABDAYS(Date, Days, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

Date	=	number representing the date to which a number of business days should be added

Days	=	integer representing number of business days to add; can be negative

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@ABDAYS adds or subtracts Days business days from Date and returns a serial date number.

If Date falls on a weekend or a holiday, one business day out of Days is used to bring Date forward to the next business day; if Days is negative, Date is taken backward to the previous business day. For example, if 20 business days are added to June 5, 1993, the result is the same as adding 19 business days to June 7, 1993 since June 5 falls on a Saturday.

Example

This formula calculates the date that precedes January 12, 1994 by 90 business days, assuming that Saturday, Sunday, and the dates in the block A7..C9 are holidays:

@ABDAYS(@DATE(94,1,12),-90,A7..C9) = 34213 (September 1, 1993)

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@ACCRINT
@ACCRINT - Accrued Interest (Bond)

Format

@ACCRINT(Settle, Maturity, Coupon, <Issue>, <FirstCpn>, <Par>, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Coupon	=	coupon rate; 0 ≤ Coupon ≤ 1

Issue	=	number representing the issue date

FirstCpn	=	number representing the first coupon date

Par	=	par value (the default is 1000)

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in the number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@ACCRINT returns the accrued interest for a bond. Accrued interest represents an amount paid to the bond seller as compensation for owning the bond for a fraction of a coupon period. Interest accrues from the last coupon date to the settlement date. @ACCRINT returns the accrued interest per 1000 face value.

Dates for @ACCRINT must follow this pattern:

  Issue < Settle < FirstCpn < Maturity

Example

This formula returns the accrued interest, as of May 15, 1993, on an 8.875% bond with a $100,000 face value, maturing February 15, 1998, dated November 22, 1992, and paying its first coupon on August 15, 1993:

@ACCRINT(@DATE(93,5,15),@DATE(98,2,15),0.08875,@DATE(92,11,22),@DATE(93,8,15), 100000) = $4,264.93

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ACCRINTM
@ACCRINTM - Accrued Interest (CD)

Format

@ACCRINTM(Issue, Settle, Coupon, <Par>, <Calendar>)

Issue	=	number representing the issue date; must be < Settle

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date

Coupon	=	coupon rate; 0 ≤ Coupon ≤ 1

Par	=	par value (the default is 1000)

Calendar 	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@ACCRINTM calculates the amount of interest accrued per par value between the issue date of the coupon and the settle date.

Example

This formula returns the accrued interest on a certificate of deposit (CD) with $1,000,000 face value settling March 11, 1990, dated December 15, 1989, and paying a coupon of 10% on an actual/360 basis:

@ACCRINTM(@DATE(89,12,15),@DATE(90,3,11),0.10,1000000,2) = $23,888.89

See Also

CD Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ACDAYS
@ACDAYS - Add Calendar Days

Format

@ACDAYS(Date, Days, <Calendar>, <EndMnth>)

Date	=  number representing the date to add days to

Days	=  integer representing number of days to add; can be negative

Calendar 	=  flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

EndMnth	=  1 to indicate adherence to ends of months; 0 to indicate that ends of months are ignored (the default is 1)

@ACDAYS adds Days days to Date using an actual or 30/360 calendar and returns a serial date number. If Days is negative, @ACDAYS subtracts the absolute value of Days from Date.

With the 30/360 calendar, if the ending month is February and the remaining days push the result to the 29th or 30th, the result is forced to the true end of the month (28th or 29th, depending on whether Date is in a leap year).

More than one result is possible when using the 30/360 calendar. For example, adding 90 days to April 30 can yield either July 30 or July 31.

Examples

@ACDAYS(@DATE(93,1,1),120) = 34090 (May 1, 1993)

@ACDAYS(@DATE(93,11,15),-270) = 34015 (February 15, 1993)

See Also

@ABDAYS

@AMNTHS

@YDIV

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@ADDB
@ADDB - Add Binary Numbers

Format

@ADDB(Binary1, <Binary2>, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2	=	second binary number

BitIn	=	input carry bit; can be either 0 (the default) or 1

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary1 or Binary2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@ADDB returns the sum of two binary numbers. If Binary2 is omitted, @ADDB counts the bits in Binary1 that are set to 1; this bit counting operation is called addition reduction.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @ADDB adds one extra bit to the result.

Example

@ADDB(100,100) = 1000

@ADDB(100,100,1,4) = 1001

@ADDB(101) = 2

@ADDB(1100,1,1,5) = 01110

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@ADDBO
@ADDBO - Overflow of Binary Addition

Format

@ADDBO(Binary1, Binary2, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2	=	second binary number

BitIn	=	input carry bit; can be either 0 (the default) or 1

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for input; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary1 or Binary2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@ADDBO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the sum of two binary numbers. An overflow occurs when a bit is carried out of the word size specified by Bits. For example, if Binary1 = 10 and Binary2 = 10, the sum of the two numbers is 00, with 1 carry bit in the third place not shown.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @ADDBO adds one extra bit to the sum of the two numbers before returning the overflow.

Example

@ADDBO(1000,111) = 0

@ADDBO(1000,111,1) = 1

@ADDBO(1100,100,1,4) = 1

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@ADDH
@ADDH - Add Hexadecimal Numbers

Format

@ADDH(Hex1, <Hex2>, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

BitIn	=	input carry bit; can be either 0 (the default) or 1

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex1 or Hex2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@ADDH returns the sum of two hexadecimal numbers. If Hex2 is omitted, @ADDH counts the bits in Hex1 that are set to 1; this bit counting operation is called addition reduction.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @ADDH adds one extra bit to the result.

Example

@ADDH("E00","100") = F00

@ADDH("100","100",1,16) = 0201

@ADDH("9") = 2

@ADDH("C","1",1,8) = 0E

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@ADDHO
@ADDHO - Overflow of Hexadecimal Addition

Format

@ADDHO(Hex1, Hex2, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

BitIn	=	input carry bit; can be either 0 (the default) or 1

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for input; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex1 or Hex2, whichever is greater; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@ADDHO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the sum of two hexadecimal numbers. An overflow occurs when a bit is carried out of the word size specified by Bits. For example, if the binary equivalents for Hex1 and Hex2 are 10 and 10, the sum of the two numbers is 00 with 1 carry bit in the third place not shown.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @ADDHO adds one extra bit to the sum of the two numbers before returning the overflow.

Examples

@ADDHO("8","F") = 1

@ADDHO("8","F",1,5) = 0

@ADDHO("C","4",1,4) = 1

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMAINT
@AMAINT - Amortized Accumulated Interest

Format

@AMAINT(Principal, Int, Term, n, <Part>, <Residual>, <ResOff>, <Adv>, <Odd>, <Simp>)

Principal	=	initial loan principal

Int	=	periodic interest rate

Term	=	term of the loan, expressed in number of total payments

n	=	number of payments made; must be an integer from 0 to Term

Part	=	part of (n+1)th period passed (must be from 0 to 1; the default is 0)

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term (the default is 0)

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0); n - Adv must be an integer

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

@AMAINT calculates the accumulated interest paid on a loan after n payments. The accumulated interest is the sum of the interest portions of the first n payments plus the interest of an optional partial payment (specified by Part).

Term and n should include advance payments made at the beginning of the loan. Part handles payoff situations where the payoff date does not coincide with a periodic payment date. For example, if 20 out of 60 monthly payments of a loan have been made and 10 days have passed since the 20th payment date, Part = [image], assuming there are 31 days between the 20th and 21st monthly payments.

If Simp = 0, @AMAINT uses this formula:

If Simp = 1, @AMAINT uses this formula:

I = interest

Pa = payment

Pr = principal

B = balance

P = part

where Payment is the periodic payment and Balance is the remaining balance on the loan after n payments. Balance, like Principal, is the present value of an annuity paying Payment.

Examples

A loan of $10,000 was made on September 11, 1992 to be repaid in 48 monthly installments. The annual interest rate is 8.4% (8.4%/12 = 0.7% monthly rate). The first payment was paid in advance. This formula calculates the amount of paid interest after 15 regular payments:

@AMAINT(10000,0.007,48,15,0,0,0,1) = $840.74

For the same loan, this formula calculates how much interest accumulated on the loan as of March 3, 1993, assuming the borrower made regular payments. The previous payment (the 18th) fell on February 11, 1993; there are 21 days between the previous payment and March 3. Interest accrues as simple interest over fractional periods.

@AMAINT(10000,0.007,48,18,21/29,0,0,1,1,1) = $1,020.69

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMINT
@AMINT - Amortized Interest Rate

Format

@AMINT(Principal, Term, Payment, <Residual>, <ResOff>, <Adv>, <Odd>, <Simp>, <Prec>)

Principal	=	initial loan principal

Term	=	term of loan, expressed in number of total payments

Payment	=	periodic payment (for example, if Term is expressed in months, Payment must be a monthly payment)

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term (the default is 0)

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that Residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0)

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

Prec	=	required precision of result (the default is 0.000001); must be ≥ 0

@AMINT calculates the interest rate for one payment of an amortized loan. For example, if the arguments passed correspond to a monthly loan, the interest rate returned represents a monthly rate. Use Prec to specify how close @AMINT must be to the actual interest rate.

Example

A loan for $50,000 was made on March 15, 1993. Repayment terms stipulate ten annual payments of $7,500, each to be made on July 31, beginning 1993 and ending 2002, along with a final payment of $2,500 on December 31, 2003. Assuming interest is compounded during fractional periods, this formula calculates the interest rate at which the financing is performed:

@AMINT(50000,10,7500,2500,1.4180,0,0.3781) = 0.098915

A normal period is one year long, but the first period is 138 days long. Since there are 365 days between March 15, 1993 and March 15, 1994, the first period is [image] the length of a normal period (Odd = 0.3781). There is also a delay between the last periodic payment and the residual payment of $2,500. The length of the delay is one period (July 31, 2002 to July 31, 2003) plus 153 days (July 31, 2003 to December 31, 2003), so ResOff = 1 [image] (1.4180).

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMNTHS
@AMNTHS - Add Months

Format

@AMNTHS(Date, Months, <EndMnth>)

Date	=	number representing the date to add number of months to

Months	=	integer representing number of months to add; can be negative

EndMnth	=	1 to indicate adherence to ends of months; 0 to indicate that ends of months are ignored (the default is 1)

@AMNTHS adds the number of months specified by Months to Date and returns a serial date number. If Months is negative, @AMNTHS subtracts the absolute value of Months from Date.

Adding one month usually means going from a day in one month to the same day in the next month. However, adding one month to March 31 cannot result in April 31, since April 31 does not exist. In this case, the last day of the month, April 30, is returned. If Date falls on the 31st of a month, the result also falls on the last day of a month.

If Date falls on the last day of a month with less than 31 days, you can use EndMnth to specify one of two different results. To move ahead to the same day of the specified month, specify EndMnth as 0. To move ahead to the last day of the specified month, omit EndMnth or specify it as 1.

Examples

@AMNTHS(@DATE(93,4,30),3) = 34181 (July 31, 1993), which is the last day of the month three months from April 30, 1993.

Consider a loan with 120 payments that pays on the 30th of each month starting on June 30, 1993. In February, it pays on the last day of the month. This formula calculates the date of the 43rd payment:

@AMNTHS(@DATE(93,6,30),42,0) = 35429 (December 30, 1996)

See Also

@ABDAYS

@ACDAYS

@YDIV

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMPMT
@AMPMT - Amortized Payment

Format

@AMPMT(Principal, Int, Term, <Residual>, <ResOff>, <Adv>, <Odd>, <Simp>)

Principal	=	initial loan principal

Int	=	periodic interest rate (for example, if Term is expressed in months, Int must be a monthly rate)

Term	=	term of loan, expressed in number of total payments

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term (the default is 0)

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0)

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

@AMPMT calculates the payment (monthly, annual, and so on) for an amortized loan.

Examples

A loan for $35,000 has 48 monthly payments and a residual payment of $7,500 that is due three months after the last monthly payment. This formula calculates the monthly payment if the annual interest rate is 9% (9%/12 = 0.75% monthly rate):

@AMPMT(35000,0.0075,48,7500,3) = $743.48

An annuity with an investment of $250,000 makes quarterly payments starting five years from the date of investment for a period of 20 years. It also pays a lump sum of $50,000 three and a half years after the last quarterly payment. If the annualized yield from the investment is 8.4% (8.4%/4 = 2.1% quarterly rate), this formula calculates the quarterly payment:

@AMPMT(250000,0.021,80,50000,14,0,20) = $9,431.83

The term of the annuity is 80 quarters. A value of 14 for ResOff specifies, in quarters, the three-and-a-half year delay between the last quarterly payment and the residual payment. A value of 20 for Odd specifies the five year delay between investment and first payment, in quarters.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMPMTI
@AMPMTI - Amortized Interest Portion of Payment

Format

@AMPMTI(Principal, Int, Term, n, <Residual>, <ResOff>, <Adv>,  <Odd>, <Simp>)

Principal	=	initial loan principal

Int	=	periodic interest rate (for example, if Term is expressed in months, then Int must be a monthly rate)

Term	=	term of loan, expressed in number of total payments

n	=	number of payments made; must be an integer from 0 to Term

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term (the default is 0)

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0)

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

@AMPTI calculates the interest portion of the nth payment of an amortized loan. Term and n should include any advance payments made at the beginning of the loan.

If Simp = 0, @AMPMTI uses this formula:

If Simp = 1, @AMPMTI uses this formula:

I = interest

B = balance

Balance [image], like Principal, is the present value of an annuity. Both correspond to annuities with the same payment size but differing in number of payments. If Principal corresponds to an annuity with Term payments, Balance [image] corresponds to annuity with Term n + 1 payments.  equals 1 except when n equals Adv + 1, in which case [image] equals Odd.

Example

This formula calculates the portion of the 15th payment (the 15th after any advanced payments) of a 120 payment loan that constitutes interest, if the original principal of $100,000 is financed at a periodic rate of 4.5% and the first two payments are made in advance:

@AMPMTI(100000,0.045,120,17,0,0,2) = $4,106.92.

The value of 17 passed for n specifies the 15th payment after the two advance payments.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMPRN
@AMPRN - Amortized Initial Principal

Format

@AMPRN(Int, Term, Payment, <Residual>, <ResOff>, <Adv>, <Odd>, <Simp>)

Int	=	periodic interest rate (for example, if Term is expressed in half-years, Int must be a semiannual rate)

Term	=	term of loan, expressed in number of total payments

Payment	=	periodic payment

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term (the default is 0)

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0)

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

@AMPRN calculates the initial principal of an amortized loan.

Examples

A loan has an annualized monthly compounded interest rate of 10.8% (10.8%/12 = 0.9% monthly rate) over a period of 48 months, and the monthly payment is $525. Each payment is due at the beginning of the month, including the first payment which coincides with the loan's start date. This formula calculates the amount financed:

@AMPRN(0.009,48,525,0,0,1) = $20,573.04

A savings plan requires a monthly contribution of $1,000 for a period of 25 years. If the plan pays an annual interest rate of 6.6% (6.6%/12 = 0.55% monthly rate), this formula calculates what initial deposit (not payment), if any, is needed in order to accumulate $1,000,000 two and a half years after the last monthly payment:

@AMPRN(0.0055,300,-1000,1000000,30) = $16,907.93.

If the annuity is viewed as a loan and the investor as the lender, the original investment can be treated as the loan principal, the monthly payments as payments from lender to borrower, and the $1,000,000 future value as a residual payment from the borrower to the lender. The interest rate is 0.55%. The negative payment means payment from lender to borrower. A value of 30 for ResOff specifies the thirty month delay between the last monthly contribution and the date on which to measure the end balance.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMRES
@AMRES - Amortized Residual Payment

Format

@AMRES(Principal, Int, Term, Payment, <ResOff>, <Adv>, <Odd>, <Simp>)

Principal	=	initial loan principal

Int	=	periodic interest rate (for example, if Term is expressed in months, then Int must be a monthly rate)

Term	=	term of loan, expressed in number of total payments

Payment	=	periodic payment

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that Residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0)

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

@AMRES calculates the residual (or balloon) payment of an amortized loan or the future value of an annuity.

Example

A $10,000,000 loan is paid back in 20 payments of $1,000,000 and a final payment. The first payment is made at the start of the loan. The remaining 19 payments are made annually, starting 9 months after the first payment. The final payment is made 20 months after the last annual payment. If the loan has an annual interest rate of 9.68%, this formula calculates the final payment (assume compounding of interest over fractional periods):

@AMRES(10000000,0.0968,20,1000000,20/12,1,0.75) = $1,681,942.54.

ResOff is set to 20/12 to specify the 20 month delay between the last annual payment and the residual payment. Adv is set to 1 to specify the advance payment. Odd is set to [image] (0.75) to specify the nine month period between the start of the loan and the second payment.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMRPRN
@AMRPRN - Amortized Remaining Principal

Format

@AMRPRN(Principal, Int, Term, n, <Part>, <Residual>, <ResOff>, <Adv>, <Odd>, <Simp>)

Principal	=	initial loan principal

Int	=	periodic interest rate (for example, if Term is expressed in years, then Int must be a yearly rate)

Term	=	term of loan, expressed in number of total payments

n	=	number of payments made; must be an integer from 0 to Term

Part	=	part of (n+1)th period passed; 0 ≤ Part ≤ 1 (the default is 0)

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term (the default is 0)

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0)

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

@AMRPRN computes the balance remaining after n payments, accounting for possible interest accrual over part of the following payment period.

Term and n should include advance payments made at the beginning of the loan. Part handles payoff situations where the payoff date (date on which the remaining balance on a loan is fully paid) does not coincide with a periodic payment date. For example, if 15 out of 36 monthly payments of a loan have been made and 17 days have passed since the 15th payment date, Part = [image], assuming there are 30 days between the 15th and 16th monthly payments.

If Simp = 0, @AMRPRN uses this formula:

If Simp = 1, @AMRPRN uses this formula:

B = Balance

P = Part

Examples

A loan of $100,000 has an annual interest rate of 9.6% (9.6%/12 = 0.8% monthly rate). Repayment consists of monthly payments over ten years. This formula calculates the balance remaining after the 57th monthly payment:

@AMRPRN(100000,0.008,120,57) = $64,108.38

A loan of $2,000,000 was made on March 16, 1993, to be paid back in 40 quarterly payments and a final payment of $100,000. The annual interest rate is 9.96% (9.96%/4 = 2.49% quarterly rate). The first four payments are due at the start of the loan. The fifth payment is due July 1, 1993. Thereafter, a payment is due every three months. The final residual payment of $100,000 is due June 15, 2002. This formula calculates the remaining balance due on the loan as of September 23, 1996, assuming timely payments and simple interest accrual over fractional periods:

@AMRPRN(2000000,0.0249,40,17,84/92,100000,75/91,4,1+16/90,1) = $1,321,951.76.

September 23, 1994 falls in the middle of the payment period following the 17th quarterly payment. It falls 84 days into the quarter, which is 92 days long, so Part = [image]. The residual is paid 75 days after the 40th quarterly payment. The corresponding quarter (April 1, 2002 to July 1, 2002) contains 91 days, so ResOff = [image]. The first quarterly payment after the advance payments is paid one period and 16 days after loan inception. The 16 days correspond to the quarter containing the loan inception date, March 16, 1993. That quarter contains 90 days, so Odd = 1 [image].

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@AMTERM
@AMTERM - Amortized Term

Format

@AMTERM(Principal, Int, Payment, <Residual>, <ResOff>, <Adv> <Odd>, <Simp>)

Principal	=	initial loan principal

Int	=	periodic interest rate (for example, if term is expressed in quarters, Int must be a quarterly rate)

Payment	=	periodic payment

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term (the default is 0)

ResOff	=	number of periods after last periodic payment that residual is to be paid; can have fractional component (the default is 0)

Adv	=	number of advance payments made at loan inception (the default is 0)

Odd	=	number of periods between loan inception and date of first payment (not including advance payments); can have fractional component (the default is 1)

Simp	=	0 to specify compounded interest or 1 to specify simple interest (the default is 0)

@AMTERM calculates the duration of an amortized loan, expressed in number of payments.

Example

A loan for $50,000 was made on April 1, 1993. The loan is repaid monthly, starting on May 1, 1993, except for the first three payments, which are due at the start of the loan (April 1, 1993). If the monthly interest rate is 1.15%, this formula calculates the smallest number of payments that would allow repayment with a maximum allowable monthly payment of $600:

@AMTERM(50000,0.0115,600,0,0,3) = 228.18

The smallest number of payments to support such a loan is 229, which results in a monthly payment of $599.56. Using 228 payments results in a monthly payment of $600.10.

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ANDB
@ANDB - Binary AND

Format

@ANDB(Binary1, <Binary2>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2	=	second binary number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary1 or Binary2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@ANDB performs a bit-by-bit logical AND of each bit in Binary1 and Binary2. Use @ANDB to set bits to 0; any bit that is 0 in either Binary1 or Binary2 causes the resulting output bit to be 0.

If only one number is given, then @ANDB performs an all-ones test, or AND reduction, on Binary1; @ANDB returns 1 if all bits in Binary1 are set to 1; otherwise, it returns 0.

Examples

@ANDB(10,1) = 00

@ANDB(11,10) = 10

@ANDB(11) = 1

@ANDB(1100,111,5) = 00100

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@ANDH
@ANDH - Hexadecimal AND

Format

@ANDH(Hex1, <Hex2>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex1 or Hex2, whichever is greater; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@ANDH performs a bit-by-bit logical AND of each bit in Hex1 and Hex2. Use @ANDH to set bits to 0; any binary bit that is 0 in either Hex1 or Hex2 causes the resulting output bit to be 0.

If only one number is given, then @ANDH performs an all-ones test, or AND reduction, on Hex1; @ANDH returns 1 if all bits in Hex1 are set to 1; otherwise, it returns 0.

Examples

@ANDH("A","F") = A

@ANDH("A") = 0

@ANDH("C","4",8) = 04

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@ARRAY
@ARRAY - Array Formula

Format

@ARRAY(Expression, <Columns>, <Rows>)

Expression	=	formula or @function using array syntax; @functions can be nested, that is, you can have more than one @function in a single statement

Columns	=	number of columns in the output range, including the column of the current cell (the default Columns depends on dimensions of input array(s) in Expression)

Row	=	number of rows in the output range, including the row of the current cell (the default Rows depends on dimensions of input array(s) in Expression)

@ARRAY returns the result of Expression, which can be either a formula with array operands or an @function with array arguments. An array is a block of values treated as a single group. You do not need to type @ARRAY to create an array formula or @function; if an Expression requires array output, Quattro Pro converts it by surrounding it with the @ARRAY @function.

Note:	If an array expression returns an array, the @ARRAY @function appears only in the current cell, which is also the upper left cell of the output array; the other cells in the array contain calculated values.  Also, array formulas do not recognize 3-D block syntax; if you specify a 3-D block in Expression, @ARRAY recognizes only the block on the first page of the series of consecutive pages.

Columns and Rows are optional arguments; the size of an output array is dependent on the size of the input array(s) in Expression. Specify values for Columns and Rows only if you want to truncate or replicate portions of the output array.

By using arrays in formulas and @functions, you can perform an operation on multiple values or cells. You also save time by not having to repeat the same formula or @function in multiple cells. Arrays also save memory by reducing the number of formulas in a notebook.

Tip:	If you use many array formulas in a notebook, recalculation may become noticeably slower. Also, if you plan to share a notebook with other people, keep in mind that array formulas can make notebooks difficult to understand.

Examples

The next figure shows several examples using @ARRAY.

A	B	C	D

1	B1=@ARRAY({1;2;3}*12)	12	24	36

2

3	B3=@ARRAY({1|2|3}*12)	12

4	24

5	36

6

7	B7=@ARRAY(D7..D9*2)	16	8

8	20	10

9	24	12

10

11	B11=@ARRAY(D7..D9/{4;5;6})	2	1.6	1.333333

12	2.5	2	1.666667

13	3	2.4	2

14

15	1.23	-6.43	9

16	B16=@ARRAY(@ABS(B15..D15))	1.23	6.43	9

17

18	B18=@ARRAY(@SQRT(C18..C20))	6.78233	46

19	7.348469	54

20	6	36

21

22	B22=@ARRAY(@UPPER(C22..C25))	THIS	This

23	IS	is

24	A	a

25	TEST	Test

See Also

Array Features

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@ASCTOHEX
@ASCTOHEX - Convert ASCII to Hexadecimal

Format

@ASCTOHEX(ASCII, <Places>)

ASCII	=	ASCII character string to convert; can be up to 20 ASCII characters

Places	=	number of characters to return; can be from 1 to 40 characters

@ASCTOHEX returns the hexadecimal string equivalent of an ASCII number.

Note:	If the ASCII value includes nonnumeric characters, enclose it in quotation marks.

Examples

@ASCTOHEX("A") = 41

@ASCTOHEX("A",4) = 0041

@ASCTOHEX("01ABCDEF") = 3031414243444546

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@AVEDEV
@AVEDEV - Mean Absolute Deviation

Format

@AVEDEV(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

@AVEDEV returns the mean absolute deviation, that is, the average of the absolute deviation of the data points in List from their mean. Use @AVEDEV to measure the variability of a data set around the mean. @AVEDEV uses this formula:

Example

@AVEDEV(10,11,12,13,12,11,10) = 0.897959

See Also

@DEVSQ

@STD

@STDS

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@BASE
@BASE - Convert Number to Another Base

Format

@BASE(Decimal, <Base>, <Precision>)

Decimal	=	any decimal value to convert

Base	=	indicates the target base in which to express Decimal; can be any integer from 2 to 36, inclusive (the default is 16)

Precision	=	indicates the number of desired digits after the decimal point; can be any integer from 0 to 15, inclusive (the default is 0)

@BASE converts a number from base-10 to a string value in a target base from 2 to 36.

Examples

@BASE(128,8) = 200

@BASE(123.47,16,6) = 7B.7851EB

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BDAYS
@BDAYS - Business Days

Format

@BDAYS(StartDate, EndDate, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

StartDate	=	number representing the start date

EndDate	=	number representing the end date

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@BDAYS returns the number of business days between StartDate and EndDate inclusive of EndDate. If EndDate is less than StartDate, the result is negative.

If neither StartDate nor EndDate falls on a weekend or holiday, @BDAYS returns the number of business days from StartDate to EndDate, including EndDate.

If StartDate and EndDate are two consecutive business days, the result is 1. If StartDate and EndDate both fall on weekends or holidays, @BDAYS returns the number of business days between the two dates, excluding EndDate.

If StartDate or EndDate (but not both) falls on a weekend or holiday, the result depends on which date falls on a business day. If StartDate falls on the weekend, the result includes EndDate. For example, if StartDate is a Saturday and EndDate is the following Thursday, the result includes the Thursday and is 4. If EndDate falls on the weekend, the result does not include EndDate. For example, if StartDate is a Thursday and EndDate is the following Saturday, the result is 1.

Examples

This formula calculates how many business days pass from November 30, 1993 to November 14, 1993, assuming that the dates in the block A7..C9 are holidays:

@BDAYS(@DATE(93,11,30),@DATE(93,11,14),A7..C9) = -9

This formula calculates how many business days pass from June 2, 1993 to June 10, 1993, assuming no holidays other than weekends:

@BDAYS(@DATE(93,6,2),@DATE(93,6,10)) = 6

See Also

@CDAYS

@HOLS

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@BESSELI
@BESSELI - Modified Bessel In(x)

Format

@BESSELI(x, n)

x	=	numeric value at which to evaluate the function

n	=	number ≥ 0 representing the order of the Bessel function; if n is not an integer, it is truncated to an integer

@BESSELI calculates the nth order modified Bessel function of the variable x with this formula:

@BESSELI is equivalent to the Bessel function [image], but is evaluated for purely imaginary arguments.

Example

@BESSELI(1.5,0) = 1.646723

See Also

Bessel Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BESSELJ
@BESSELJ - Bessel Jn(x)

Format

@BESSELJ(x, n)

x	=	numeric value at which to evaluate the function

n	=	number ≥ 0 representing the order of the Bessel function; if n is not an integer, it is truncated to an integer

@BESSELJ calculates the Bessel function [image] using this formula:

, where [image] is the gamma function.

Example

@BESSELJ(1.5,0) = 0.511828

See Also

Bessel Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BESSELK
@BESSELK - Modified Bessel Kn(x)

Format

@BESSELK(x, n)

x	=	numeric value at which to evaluate the function; must be > 0

n	=	integer ≥ 0 representing the order of the Bessel function; if n is not an integer, it is truncated to an integer

@BESSELK calculates the nth order modified Bessel function of the variable x with this formula:

where [image] and [image] are @BESSELJ and @BESSELY, respectively.

Example

@BESSELK(1.5,0) = 0.213806

See Also

Bessel Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BESSELY
@BESSELY - Bessel Yn(x)

Format

@BESSELY(x, n)

x	=	nonnegative numeric value at which to evaluate the function

n	=	integer ≥ 0 representing the order of the Bessel function; if n is not an integer, it is truncated to an integer

@BESSELY calculates the Bessel function [image] (also called the Neumann or Weber function) using this formula:

where:

Example

@BESSELY(1.5,0) = 0.382449

See Also

Bessel Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BETA
@BETA - Beta Function

Format

@BETA(Z, W)

Z	=	α parameter to the function; must be > 0

W	=	β parameter to the function; must be > 0

@BETA returns the value of the beta function, which is widely used in mathematics and statistics. @BETA uses this formula:

Examples

@BETA(4,3) = 0.016667

@BETA(2,3) = 0.083333

@BETA(9,0.4) = 0.93348

@BETA(12,0.3) = 1.432072

See Also

@BETADIST

@BETAI

@BETAINV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@BETADIST
@BETADIST - Beta Distribution

Format

@BETADIST(X, Z, W, <A>, <B>)

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function over the interval A ≤ X ≤ B

Z	=	α distribution parameter; if W = 0, Z > 0

W	=	β distribution parameter; if Z = 0, W > 0

A	=	optional lower bound to the interval of X (the default is 0); A cannot equal B and must be ≤ X

B	=	optional upper bound to the interval of X (the default is 1); B cannot equal A and must be ≥ X

@BETADIST returns the cumulative beta probability density function. The cumulative beta probability density function is a bounded distribution that is useful for studying variables such as percentages that may only take on values within a restricted range. The optional arguments A and B set those bounds.

Examples

@BETADIST(0.5,3,4,0,1) = 0.65625

@BETADIST(0.4,3,4,0,1) = 0.45568

See Also

@BETA

@BETAI

@BETAINV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@BETAI
@BETAI - Incomplete Beta Function

Format

@BETAI(Z, W, X)

Z	=	α parameter to the function; if W = 0, Z > 0

W	=	β parameter to the function; if Z = 0, W > 0

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function; cannot exceed 1

@BETAI computes the incomplete beta function, that is, the probability that a standard beta-distributed variable will be less than X. @BETAI uses this formula:

Examples

@BETAI(3,4,0.5) = 0.65625

@BETAI(3,4,0.1) = 0.01585

@BETAI(3,4,0.98) = 0.999998

@BETAI(7,8,0.7) = 0.968531

See Also

@BETA

@BETADIST

@BETAINV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@BETAINV
@BETAINV - Inverse of Beta Distribution

Format

@BETAINV(Prob, Z, W, <A>, <B>)

Prob	=	cumulative probability value; 0 ≤ Prob ≤ 1

Z	=	α parameter to the Beta distribution; must be > 0

W	=	β parameter to the Beta distribution; must be > 0

A	=	optional lower bound to the interval of X (the default is 0); A cannot equal B and must be ≤ X

B	=	optional upper bound to the interval of X (the default is 1); B cannot equal A and must be ≥ X

@BETAINV computes the inverse of the cumulative beta distribution function. If Prob = @BETADIST(X...), then @BETAINV(Prob...) = X.

Examples

@BETAINV(0.65625,3,4,0,1) = 0.5

@BETAINV(0.45568,3,4,0,1) = 0.4

See Also

@BETA

@BETADIST

@BETAI

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@BINOMDIST
@BINOMDIST - Binomial Distribution

Format

@BINOMDIST(Successes, Trials, Prob, Cumulative)

Successes	=	number of successes in number of trial runs; must be ≥ 0

Trials	=	number of independent trial runs in sample; must be > Successes

Prob	=	probability of a success on each trial run; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

Cumulative	=	1 to return the cumulative distribution function; 0 to return the probability that there are exactly Successes successes.

@BINOMDIST returns the binomial probability mass function, which is the probability that the number of successes in the independent trials equals Successes. Use @BINOMDIST when the outcome of experiments is success or failure, when the experiments are independent of one another, and when the probability of success does not change in successive trials. For example, a coin toss experiment is a binomial experiment.

Example

Using a random sample, a polling organization asks 50 voters if they favor Candidate A for reelection. Given that 55% of the city's voters favor Candidate A, this formula returns the probability that 40 people from the sample will favor her:

@BINOMDIST(40,50,.55,0) = 0.000144

See Also

@CRITBINOM

@NEGBINOMDIST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@BINTOHEX
@BINTOHEX - Binary to Hexadecimal

Format

@BINTOHEX(Binary)

Binary	=	binary number to convert; denote negative numbers using a minus sign

@BINTOHEX returns the hexadecimal string equivalent of a binary number.

Examples

@BINTOHEX("1010") = A

@BINTOHEX("10000") = 10

@BINTOHEX("11110") = 1E

See Also

@BINTOHEX64

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BINTOHEX64
@BINTOHEX64 -Binary to Hexadecimal

Format

@BINTOHEX64(Binary, <Places>)

Binary	=	binary number to convert; must be positive

Places	=	number of characters to return; must be ≤ 16

@BINTOHEX64 returns the hexadecimal string equivalent of a binary number (up to 64 bits).

Examples

@BINTOHEX64(1001) = 9

@BINTOHEX64(1010,2) = 0A

@BINTOHEX64("11110000001111000") = 1E078

@BINTOHEX64("11110000001111000",2) = 78

See Also

@BINTOHEX

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BINTONUM
@BINTONUM - Binary to Decimal

Format

@BINTONUM(Binary)

Binary	=	binary number to convert; denote negative numbers using a minus sign

@BINTONUM returns the decimal equivalent of a binary number.

Examples

@BINTONUM("1010") = 10

@BINTONUM("10000") = 16

@BINTONUM("11110") = 30

See Also

@BINTONUM64

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BINTONUM64
@BINTONUM64 - Binary to Decimal

Format

@BINTONUM64(Binary, <Signed>)

Binary	=	binary number to convert

Signed	=	1 if the most significant bit of Binary is a sign bit; 0 (the default) if Binary is positive

@BINTONUM64 returns the decimal equivalent of a binary number (up to 64 bits).

If Signed is 1, the most significant bit of Binary is the sign bit. If the sign bit is 0, the number is positive; if it is 1, the number is negative.

Examples

@BINTONUM64(100) = 4

@BINTONUM64(1010) = 10

@BINTONUM64("11110000001111000") = 123000

@BINTONUM64("11110000001111000",1) = -8072

See Also

@BINTONUM

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BINTOOCT
@BINTOOCT - Binary to Octal

Format

@BINTOOCT(Binary)

Binary	=	binary number to convert; denote negative numbers using a minus sign

@BINTOOCT returns the octal string equivalent of a binary number.

Examples

@BINTOOCT("1010") = 12

@BINTOOCT("10000") = 20

@BINTOOCT("11110") = 36

See Also

@BINTOOCT64

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BINTOOCT64
@BINTOOCT64 - Binary to Octal

Format

@BINTOOCT64(Binary, <Places>)

Binary	=	binary number to convert; must be positive

Places	=	number of characters to return; must be ≤ 22

@BINTOOCT returns the octal string equivalent of a binary number (up to 64 bits).

Examples

@BINTOOCT64("0111") = 07

@BINTOOCT64("1000",3) = 010

@BINTOOCT64("11110000001111000") = 360170

@BINTOOCT64("11110000001111000",3) = 170

@BINTOOCT64("000001010011100101110111") = 01234567

See Also

@BINTOOCT

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@BITRB
@BITRB - Binary Bit Reset

Format

@BITRB(Binary, Position)

Binary	=	binary number

Position	=	bit position; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ number of bits in Binary - 1

@BITRB resets to 0 the given Position bit of a binary value.

Examples

@BITRB(1010,1) = 1000

@BITRB(1010,3) = 0010

@BITRB(1100,2) = 1000

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@BITRH
@BITRH - Hexadecimal Bit Reset

Format

@BITRH(Hex, Position)

Hex	=	hexadecimal number

Position	=	bit position; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ number of bits in Hex - 1

@BITRH resets to 0 the given Position bit of a hexadecimal value.

Examples

@BITRH("A",1) = 8

@BITRH("A",3) = 2

@BITRH("C",2) = 8

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@BITSB
@BITSB - Binary Bit Set

Format

@BITSB(Binary, Position)

Binary	=	binary number

Position	=	bit position; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ number of bits in Binary - 1

@BITSB sets to 1 the given Position bit of a binary number.

Examples

@BITSB(1010,2) = 1110

@BITSB(1010,0) = 1011

@BITSB(1100,0) = 1101

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@BITSH
@BITSH - Hexadecimal Bit Set

Format

@BITSH(Hex, Position)

Hex	=	hexadecimal number

Position	=	bit position; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ number of bits in Hex - 1

@BITSH sets to 1 the given Position bit of a hexadecimal number.

Examples

@BITSH("A",2) = E

@BITSH("C",0) = D

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@BITTB
@BITTB - Binary Bit Test

Format

@BITTB(Binary, Position)

Binary	=	binary number

Position	=	bit position; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ number of bits in Binary - 1

@BITTB returns the value of the bit of a binary number in the given Position.

Examples

@BITTB(1010,2) = 0

@BITTB(1001,0) = 1

@BITTB(1100,1) = 0

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@BITTH
@BITTH - Hexadecimal Bit Test

Format

@BITTH(Hex, Position)

Hex	=	hexadecimal number

Position	=	bit position; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ number of bits in Hex - 1

@BITTH returns the value of the bit of a hexadecimal number in the given Position.

Examples

@BITTH("A",2) = 0

@BITTH("9",0) = 1

@BITTH("C",0) = 0

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@BLOCKNAME

Format

@BLOCKNAME(Block)

Block	=	cell or block reference (for example, A1 or B1..B5)

@BLOCKNAME returns the name of a cell or block specified by Block. If Block does not contain a name, @BLOCKNAME returns ERR; if Block contains more than one name, @BLOCKNAME arbitrarily returns one of the names.

Note:	If the name for a block was created in another notebook, use @BLOCKNAME2.

Example

BLOCKNAME(D2..D15) = SALES (block D2..D15 is named SALES)

See Also

@BLOCKNAME2

@BLOCKNAMES

@BLOCKNAMES2

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@BLOCKNAME2

Format

@BLOCKNAME2(NotebookLink, Block)

NotebookLink	=	a reference to a page, cell, or block in another notebook (for example, [BUDGET]A:A1)

Block	=	cell or block reference (for example, A1 or B1..B5)

@BLOCKNAME2 returns the block name created in the notebook specified by NotebookLink that refers to Block, which can be in another notebook. If Block does not contain a name, @BLOCKNAME2 returns ERR; if Block contains more than one name, @BLOCKNAME2 arbitrarily returns one of the names.

Example

@BLOCKNAME2([BUDGET]A:A1,A:D2..D15) = SALES (block A:D2..D15 of the active notebook is named SALES in the name table of notebook BUDGET)

See Also

@BLOCKNAME

@BLOCKNAMES

@BLOCKNAMES2

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@BLOCKNAMES

Format

@BLOCKNAMES(Block)

Block	=	cell or block reference (for example, A1 or B1..B5)

@BLOCKNAMES returns a two-column table showing the block names that intersect with Block. The left column of the table contains block names, and the right column contains corresponding block coordinates.

If Block does not contain a name, @BLOCKNAMES returns ERR.

Because @BLOCKNAMES returns an array, it is automatically enclosed within an @ARRAY @function.

Caution: Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each block name. Quattro Pro overwrites existing data in cells it uses for the table.

Note:	If block names for a notebook were created in another notebook, use @BLOCKNAMES2.

Example

This example refers to cells in the next figure. Blocks B3..B7, C3..C7, D3..D7, and B3..D7 are named HOTEL, TRANS, MEALS, and TOTAL, respectively. The example is entered in cell A12.

@ARRAY(@BLOCKNAMES(B3..D7)) = table in A12..B15 shown in the next figure.

A	B	C	D

1	WEEKLY EXPENSE REPORT

2	DATE	HOTEL	TRANS	MEALS

3	05/11	$99.70	$774.23	$67.34

4	05/12	$99.70	$15.00	$89.50

5	05/13	$99.70	$23.00	$97.78

6	05/14	$99.70	$13.00	$75.41

7	05/15	$99.70	$32.00	$63.20

8	$498.50	$857.23	$393.23

9

10	TOTAL	$1,748.96

11

12	HOTEL	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:B3..B7

13	TRANS	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:C3..C7

14	MEALS	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:D3..D7

15	TOTAL	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:B3..D7

See Also

@ARRAY

@BLOCKNAME

@BLOCKNAME2

@BLOCKNAMES2

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@BLOCKNAMES2

Format

@BLOCKNAMES2(NotebookLink, Block)

NotebookLink	=	a reference to a page, cell, or block in another notebook (for example, [BUDGET]A:A1)

Block	=	cell or block reference (for example, A1 or B1..B5)

@BLOCKNAMES2 returns a two-column table showing the block names created in the notebook specified by NotebookLink that refer to blocks that intersect with Block. Use @BLOCKNAMES2 instead of @BLOCKNAMES if the block names for a notebook were created in another notebook. The left column of the output table contains block names, and the right column contains corresponding block coordinates.

If Block does not contain a name, @BLOCKNAMES2 returns ERR.

Because @BLOCKNAMES2 returns an array, it is automatically enclosed within an @ARRAY @function.

Caution: Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each block name. Quattro Pro overwrites existing data in cells it uses for the table.

Example

This example refers to cells in the next figure. Blocks B3..B7, C3..C7, D3..D7, and B3..D7 in the active notebook EXPENSES are named HOTEL, TRANS, MEALS, and TOTAL, respectively, in the notebook TRAVEL. The example is entered in cell A12.

@ARRAY(@BLOCKNAMES2([TRAVEL]A:A1,B3..D7)) = table in A12..B15 shown in the next figure

A	B	C	D

1	WEEKLY EXPENSE REPORT

2	DATE	HOTEL	TRANS	MEALS

3	05/11	$99.70	$774.23	$67.34

4	05/12	$99.70	$15.00	$89.50

5	05/13	$99.70	$23.00	$97.78

6	05/14	$99.70	$13.00	$75.41

7	05/15	$99.70	$32.00	$63.20

8	$498.50	$857.23	$393.23

9

10	TOTAL	$1,748.96

11

12	HOTEL	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:B3..B7

13	TRANS	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:C3..C7

14	MEALS	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:D3..D7

15	TOTAL	[C:\QPW\EXPENSES.WB1]A:B3..D7

See Also

@ARRAY

@BLOCKNAME

@BLOCKNAME2

@BLOCKNAMES

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@BUSDAY
@BUSDAY - Business Day

Format

@BUSDAY(Date, <Direction>, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

Date	=	number representing a date

Direction	=	flag specifying direction of adjustment; 0 = forward; 1 = backward; 2 = forward if in same month as Date, otherwise backward (the default is 0)

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@BUSDAY returns Date if it is a valid business day. If Date falls on a Saturday (and Saturday is set to 0 or omitted), Sunday (and Sunday is set to 0 or omitted), or holiday, @BUSDAY returns the date of the closest valid business day in the direction specified by Direction.

Example

This formula calculates the closest business day after December 25, 1993, assuming that the 25th is a holiday:

@BUSDAY(@DATE(93,12,25),0,@DATE(93,12,25)) = 34330 (December 27, 1993)

See Also

@FBDAY

@LBDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@CATB
@CATB - Concatenate Binary

Format

@CATB(Binary1, <HiBit1>, <LoBit1>, <Binary2>, <HiBit2>, <LoBit2>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

HiBit1	=	highest bit of the first number to use for concatenation; the default is the most significant bit

LoBit1	=	lowest bit of the first number to use for concatenation; the default is 0

Binary2	=	second binary number

HiBit2	=	highest bit of the second number to use for concatenation; the default is the most significant bit

LoBit2	=	lowest bit of the second number to use for concatenation; the default is 0

Bits	=	number of binary digits to return; must be ≤ 64

@CATB joins together two given binary numbers or extracts selected bits from one binary number. Specify high bit and low bit values if you want to use only a portion of a number for concatenation. For example, if HiBit1 = 2 and LoBit1 = 0, only the first three bits of Binary1 are joined with Binary2.

Examples

@CATB("1100",2,0,"0011",1,0) = 10011

@CATB("1100",2,0,"0011",1,0,3) = 011

@CATB("1100",3,0,"11",1,0,8) = 00110011

@CATB("101101",4,1) = 0110

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@CATH
@CATH - Concatenate Hexadecimal

Format

@CATH(Hex1, <HiBit1>, <LoBit1>, <Hex2>, <HiBit2>, <LoBit2>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

HiBit1	=	highest bit of the first number to use for concatenation; the default is the most significant bit

LoBit1	=	lowest bit of the first number to use for concatenation; the default is 0

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

HiBit2	=	highest bit of the second number to use for concatenation; the default is the most significant bit

LoBit2	=	lowest bit of the second number to use for concatenation; the default is 0

Bits	=	number of equivalent binary digits to return; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@CATH joins together two given hexadecimal numbers or extracts selected bits from one hexadecimal number. Specify high bit and low bit values if you want to use only a portion of a number for concatenation. For example, if HiBit1 = 2 and LoBit1 = 0, only the first three bits of Hex1 are joined with Hex2.

Examples

@CATH("C",2,0,"3",1,0) = 13

@CATH("C",2,0,"3",1,0,3) = 3

@CATH("C",3,0,"3",1,0,8) = 33

@CATH("CA",6,2) = 12

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@CATNB
@CATNB - Concatenate n Binary

Format

@CATNB(n, Binary1, <Binary2>, <Binary3>, ..., <BinaryN>, <Bits>)

n	=	number of binary numbers being concatenated; n ≤ 64

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2,Binary3,...,BinaryN	=	second through the nth binary numbers

Bits	=	number of binary digits to return; must be ≤ 64

@CATNB joins together n binary numbers.

Examples

@CATNB(3,1,0,1010) = 101010

@CATNB(3,1,0,1010,4) = 1010

@CATNB(3,11,"00",11,8) = 00110011

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@CATNH
@CATNH - Concatenate n Hexadecimal

Format

@CATNH(n, Hex1, <Hex2>, <Hex3>, ..., <HexN>, <Bits>)

n	=	number of hexadecimal numbers being concatenated; n ≤ 16

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2,Hex3,...,HexN	=	second through the nth hexadecimal numbers

Bits	=	number of equivalent binary digits to return; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@CATNH joins together n hexadecimal numbers.

Examples

@CATNH(3,"1","0","A") = 10A

@CATNH(3,"1","0","A",4) = A

@CATNH(3,"A","B","C",16) = 0ABC

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@CDAYS
@CDAYS - Calendar Days

Format

@CDAYS(StartDate, EndDate, <Calendar>, <February>)

StartDate	=	number representing the start date

EndDate	=	number representing the end date

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

February	=	0 to use 30-day treatment of February for 30/360 calendar; 1 to use the actual-day treatment (the default is 0)

@CDAYS returns the number of calendar days between StartDate and EndDate, including EndDate in the total. If EndDate precedes StartDate, the result is negative.

You can use Calendar to specify whether the actual or 30/360 day calendar is used. Under the actual calendar, Quattro Pro calculates the number of days by subtracting one date from the other.

To handle months with more than 30 days (and February), @CDAYS sometimes adjusts StartDate or EndDate before the sum is calculated. @CDAYS adjusts StartDate to fall on the 30th if either of the following two conditions are true: the day of the month on which StartDate falls is greater than 30, or StartDate falls on the last day of February (28th or 29th, depending on year) and February is 0.

If StartDate falls on the 30th (either because @CDAYS adjusted it or it falls on the 30th) and the day of the month on which EndDate falls is greater than 30, then EndDate also adjusts to fall on the 30th. By default, @CDAYS treats the last day of February as the 30th. To prevent this, set February to 1.

Example

@CDAYS(@DATE(93,1,23),@DATE(95,6,28)) = 875

See Also

@BDAYS

@HOLS

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@CEILING
@CEILING - Round Up to Nearest Multiple

Format

@CEILING(X, Y)

X	=	value to round

Y	=	value to make rounded x evenly divisible by

@CEILING rounds X up (away from zero) to the nearest value that is evenly divisible by Y. If X and Y have different signs, the result of @CEILING is ERR.

Examples

@CEILING(22,5) = 25

@CEILING(5.7,0.2) = 5.8

@CEILING(-3.2,-2) = -4

@CEILING(-3.2,2) = ERR

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@CHIDIST
@CHIDIST - Chi-squared Distribution

Format

@CHIDIST(X, DegFreedom)

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function; must be ≥ 0

DegFreedom	=	integer number of degrees of freedom in the distribution; must be ≥ 1

@CHIDIST returns the cumulative chi-square distribution, which is associated with a chi-square test. Chi-square tests allow you to compare the differences between observed and expected frequencies.

If DegFreedom is not an integer, @CHIDIST rounds it to the nearest integer.

Examples

@CHIDIST(36.41503,24) = 0.05

@CHIDIST(17.53455,8) = 0.025

See Also

@CHIINV

@CHITEST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@CHIINV
@CHIINV - Inverse of Chi-squared Distribution

Format

@CHIINV(Prob, DegFreedom)

Prob	=	cumulative probability value; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

DegFreedom	=	integer number of degrees of freedom; must be ≥ 1

@CHIINV computes the inverse of the cumulative one-tailed chi-square distribution. Use @CHIINV to compute the critical value for a test involving a chi-square variable.

If DegFreedom is not an integer, @CHIINV rounds it to the nearest integer.

Examples

@CHIINV(0.05,24) = 36.41503

@CHIINV(0.025,8) = 17.53455

See Also

@CHIDIST

@CHITEST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@CHITEST
@CHITEST - Test for Independence

Format

@CHITEST(Actual, Expected)

Actual	=	block containing actual values

Expected	=	block containing expected values

@CHITEST computes the probability that the actual and expected frequencies are similar by chance. @CHITEST returns the probability for a chi-square test distribution with (r - 1)(c - 1) degrees of freedom, where r = number of rows, and c = number of columns.

Actual and Expected must have the same number of values and must contain multiple rows or columns of data.

Example

This example refers to cells in the next figure. The chi-square statistic for the data in the next figure is 16.25813 and the degrees of freedom is 4.

@CHITEST(C3..E5,C7..E9) = 0.002692

A	B	C	D	E

1	Soft Drink Flavors

2	Age Ranges	Cola	Orange	Lemon-lime

3	Actual	Under 25	120	65	55

4	26-50	100	45	85

5	Over 50	75	35	70

6

7	Expected	Under 25	108.93	53.53	77.54

8	26-50	104.38	51.31	74.31

9	Over 50	81.69	40.16	58.15

See Also

@CHIDIST

@CHIINV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@COMB
@COMB - Combinations

Format

@COMB(R, N)

R	=	number of elements in each subgroup selected from group N; must be ≥ 0

N	=	number of elements in the group; must be ≥ 0

@COMB calculates the number of combinations (unordered subgroups of size R) that you can form out of a group of size N. If N < R @COMB returns 0.

The formula for calculating the number of combinations, if R ≤ N, is

Example

Given eleven marbles, this formula calculates how many ways a subset of 5 marbles can be constructed such that no two constructions contain the same 5 marbles:

@COMB(5,11) = 462

See Also

@PERMUT

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@COMPLEX
@COMPLEX - Complex Number

Format

@COMPLEX(X, Y)

X	=	numeric value representing real coefficient of complex number

Y	=	numeric value representing imaginary coefficient of complex number

@COMPLEX converts X and Y into a complex number.

Example

@COMPLEX(5,7) = "5+7i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@CONFIDENCE
@CONFIDENCE - Confidence Interval for Population Mean

Format

@CONFIDENCE(Alpha, SDev, Size)

Alpha	=	significance level; the percentage of the normal curve that is outside the confidence interval (1 - Alpha); for example, if the confidence interval is 95%, Alpha = 5%; must be > 0 and < 1

SDev	=	population standard deviation; must be > 0

Size	=	sample size; must be ≥ 1

@CONFIDENCE computes the confidence interval around the mean for a given sample size, using the normal distribution function. Given a specified degree of confidence, the confidence interval indicates that  the population mean will be within that interval. Use @CONFIDENCE to apply levels of confidence to sample data and to determine margins of error.

Example

Out of 1000 people sampled, 490 said they would vote for Candidate A. If the population standard deviation is 0.5, this formula returns the 95% confidence interval for the population mean:

@CONFIDENCE(0.05,0.5,1000) = 0.03099

Pollsters can report that Candidate A will receive 49% of the vote with a margin of error of 3.1%.

See Also

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@CONVERT
@CONVERT - Convert Number

Format

@CONVERT(X, FromUnit, ToUnit)

X	=	numeric value in FromUnit to convert, in the units specified by FromUnit

FromUnit	=	unit type of the value X (must be on the list of supported unit names)

ToUnit	=	units to convert the value X into; must be on the list of supported unit names

@CONVERT changes X, which is expressed in FromUnit units, to the equivalent value in ToUnit units. Column Unit of the following tables lists the measurement units that you can specify in FromUnit and ToUnit. Each argument is case sensitive.

Mass measurement units

Mass	Unit

Gram	"g"

Slug	"sg"

Pound mass (avoirdupois)	"lbm"

U (atomic mass unit)	"u"

Ounce mass (avoirdupois)	"ozm"

Pressure measurement units

Pressure	Unit

Pascal	"p"

Atmosphere	"at"

Distance measurement units

Distance	Unit

Meter	"m"

Statute mile	"mi"

Nautical mile	"Nmi"

Inch	"in"

Foot	"ft"

Yard	"yd"

Angstrom	"ang"

Time measurement units

Time	Unit

Year	"yr"

Day	"day"

Hour	"hr"

Minute	"mn"

Second	"sec"

Force measurement units

Force	Unit

Newton	"N"

Dyne	"dy"

Pound force	"lbf"

Energy measurement units

Energy	Unit

Joule	"J"

Erg	"e"

Thermodynamic calorie	"c"

IT calorie	"cal"

Electron volt	"ev"

Horsepower-hour	"hh"

Watt-hour	"wh"

Foot-pound	"flb"

BTU	"btu"

Power measurement units

Power	Unit

Horsepower	"h"

Watt	"w"

Magnetic measurement units

Magnetism	Unit

Tesla	"T"

Gauss	"ga"

Temperature measurement units

Temperature	Unit

Celsius	"cel"

Fahrenheit	"fah"

Kelvin	"kel"

Rankine	"ran"

Liquid measurement units

Liquid	Unit

Teaspoon	"tsp"

Tablespoon	"tbs"

Fluid ounce	"oz"

Cup	"cup"

Pint	"pt"

Quart	"qt"

Gallon	"gal"

Liter	"lt"

If a metric unit is used (for example, Gram, Meter, or Liter), you can preface it with one of the prefixes listed in the next table. Use the metric prefixes to multiply a metric unit by a power of 10.

Metric prefixes

Metric Prefix	Multiplier	Unit Prefix

exa	1E+18	"E"

peta	1E+15	"P"

tera	1E+12	"T"

giga	1E+09	"G"

mega	1E+06	"M"

kilo	1E+03	"k"

deka	1E+01	"e"

deci	1E-01	"d"

centi	1E-02	"c"

milli	1E-03	"m"

micro	1E-06	"u"

nano	1E-09	"n"

pico	1E-12	"p"

femto	1E-15	"f"

atto	1E-18	"a"

Whenever @CONVERT is used, both FromUnit and ToUnit must come from the same table.

To determine a specific conversion factor, use 1 for X.

Examples

@CONVERT(2,"day","hr") = 48

@CONVERT(3.5,"kg","lbm") = 7.71618

@CONVERT(2.5,"oz","mlt") = 73.94991

See Also

@IMAGINARY

@STRING

@VALUE

Miscellaneous Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@CORREL
@CORREL - Correlation

Format

@CORREL(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@CORREL computes the correlation coefficient of the numeric values in Array1 and Array2. Use @CORREL to ascertain the relationship between two sets of data. If two data sets change in a related matter based on the input that generates them, they are said to be correlated.

Array1 and Array2 must have the same number of values. Also, the values in Array1 and Array2 must show some variance.

@CORREL uses this formula:

Examples

These examples refer to cells in the next figure.

@CORREL(A2..A9,B2..B9) = 0.994135

@CORREL(A2..A9,C2..C9) = 0.460718

@CORREL(A2..A9,D2..D9) = -0.52494

@CORREL(B2..B9,C2..C9) = 0.547422

A	B	C	D

1	X1	X2	X3	X4

2	1	2	-1	-9

3	2	3	-7	-3

4	3	4	2	6

5	4	5	8	3

6	5	6	-4	-2

7	6	7	0	-21

8	7	8	-12	0

9	8	10	45	-33

See Also

@COVAR

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@COUPDAYBS
@COUPDAYBS - Coupon Days from Beginning to Settlement

Format

@COUPDAYBS(Settle, Maturity, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@COUPDAYBS returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period of a bond to the settlement date.

Example

A bond's settlement date is May 15, 1992 and its maturity date is February 15, 1996. This formula calculates the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date:

@COUPDAYBS(@DATE(92,5,15),@DATE(96,2,15)) = 90

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@COUPDAYS
@COUPDAYS - Coupon Days

Format

@COUPDAYS(Settle, Maturity, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@COUPDAYS returns the number of days in the coupon period of a bond that contains the settlement date.

Example

A bond's settlement date is May 15, 1992 and its maturity date is February 15, 1996. This formula calculates the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date.

@COUPDAYS(@DATE(92,5,15),@DATE(96,2,15)) = 180

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@COUPDAYSNC
@COUPDAYSNC - Coupon Days from Settlement to Next Coupon

Format

@COUPDAYSNC(Settle, Maturity, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@COUPDAYSNC returns the number of days from the settlement date of a bond to the next coupon date.

Example

A bond's settlement date is May 15, 1992 and its maturity date is February 15, 1996. This formula calculates the number of days between the settlement date and the next coupon date:

@COUPDAYSNC(@DATE(92,5,15),@DATE(96,2,15)) = 90

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@COUPNCD
@COUPNCD - Next Coupon Date after Settlement

Format

@COUPNCD(Settle, Maturity, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@COUPNCD returns the serial date number for the next coupon date after the settlement date of a bond.

Example

A bond pays a coupon semiannually and matures on August 31, 2003. This formula calculates the date of the next coupon payment after December 17, 1992:

@COUPNCD(@DATE(92,12,17),@DATE(103,8,31)) = 34028 (February 28, 1993)

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@COUPNUM
@COUPNUM - Number of Coupons

Format

@COUPNUM(Settle, Maturity, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@COUPNUM returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date of a bond.

Example

A bond's settlement date is March 15, 1994 and its maturity date is April 15, 2004. This formula calculates the number of annual coupon payments there are until the maturity date:

@COUPNUM(@DATE(94,3,15),@DATE(104,4,15),1) = 11

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@COUPPCD
@COUPPCD - Previous Coupon Date

Format

@COUPPCD(Settle, Maturity, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@COUPPCD returns the serial date number for the coupon date just before the settlement date of a bond.

Example

A bond's settlement date is December 17, 1992 and its maturity date is August 31, 1999. This formula calculates the date of the previous semiannual coupon payment before the settlement date:

@COUPPCD(@DATE(92,12,17),@DATE(99,8,31)) = 33847 (August 31, 1992)

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@COVAR
@COVAR - Covariance

Format

@COVAR(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@COVAR returns the covariance by taking the deviations for each corresponding element in Array1 and Array2, computing their products, and taking the average of their average. Array1 and Array2 must have the same number of values. Use @COVAR to analyze the relationship between two data sets. The covariance is calculated using this formula:

Examples

These examples refer to cells in the next figure.

@COVAR(A2..A9,B2..B9) = 5.6875

@COVAR(A2..A9,C2..C9) = 21.75

@COVAR(A2..A9,D2..D9) = 12.3125

@COVAR(B2..B9,C2..C9) = 26.21875

A	B	C	D

1	X1	X2	X3	X4

2	1	2	1	9

3	2	3	2	3

4	3	4	2	6

5	4	5	8	3

6	5	6	4	2

7	6	7	0	21

8	7	8	12	0

9	8	10	45	33

See Also

@CORREL

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@CRITBINOM
@CRITBINOM - Critical Probability of Binomial Distribution

Format

@CRITBINOM(Trials, Prob, Alpha)

Trials	=	integer number of Bernoulli trials; must be ≥ 0

Prob	=	probability of success per trial; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

Alpha	=	critical probability to test; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

@CRITBINOM calculates the maximum number of successes that can occur before the cumulative probability expressed by Alpha is exceeded for the number of Trials. @CRITBINOM has applications in quality assurance. For example, you could use @CRITBINOM to calculate the maximum number of defects allowed in a shipment.

Example

Company A tests a sample of 100 electrical circuits received from Company B. The probability that a circuit is defective is 7%. Using an Alpha value of 7.4%, this formula calculates the maximum number of defective circuits that can be expected.

@CRITBINOM(100,0.07,0.074) = 3

See Also

@BINOMDIST

@NEGBINOMDIST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@DELTA
@DELTA - Test If Two Numbers are Equal

Format

@DELTA(X, <Y>)

X	=	numeric value to check

Y	=	numeric value that X must equal for the function to return 1 (if omitted, assumed to be zero)

@DELTA tests whether X and Y are equal. If they are, @DELTA returns 1 (True); if not, @DELTA returns 0 (False).

Examples

@DELTA(1,2) = 0

@DELTA(2,2) = 1

@IF(@DELTA(2,2),"Equal","Not Equal") = Equal

See Also

@GESTEP

Miscellaneous Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@DEVSQ
@DEVSQ - Sum of the Squares of the Deviations

Format

@DEVSQ(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

@DEVSQ returns the sum of the squares of the deviations of the numbers in List from their mean value.

@DEVSQ uses this formula:

Example

@DEVSQ(9,10,12,14,15) = 26

See Also

@AVEDEV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@DFRAC
@DFRAC - Decimal to Fraction

Format

@DFRAC(Dec, Denom)

Dec	=	number to be converted, expressed as a decimal

Denom	=	denominator; must be an integer

@DFRAC converts a number expressed as a decimal to a fraction using the specified denominator. @DFRAC reverses the effect of @FRACD.

The result looks like a decimal, but the portion to the right of the decimal point is actually the numerator of the fraction using the specified denominator. For example, you can use @DFRAC to convert a decimal to 32nds. Converting 99.375 to 32nds results in 99.12, representing 99 [image].

Tip:	Format the cell that contains the @function to show the same number of decimal places as the number of digits in the desired Denom. For example, if Denom is 32, set the cell format to display two decimal places.

Example

@DFRAC(106.4375,32) = 106.14; the 14 to the right of the decimal place signifies [image].

See Also

@FRACD

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@DISC
@DISC - Discount Rate

Format

@DISC(Settle, Maturity, Price, <Redemption>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Price	=	settlement price per 100 face value; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 100

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value (must be > 0; the default is 100)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@DISC computes the discount rate for a security, which is the percentage discount offered on a security for a 360-day or 365-day term.

@DISC computes the discount rate using this formula:

D = discount rate

P = price

R = redemption

b = basis

M = maturity

S = settle

 is the number of days over which the discount rate applies (360 or 365).

Example

This formula calculates the discount rate for a bond with the following terms: Settle is May 27, 1995, Maturity is November 24, 1995, Price is 96.2492, Redemption is 100, and Calendar is 2 (actual/360).

@DISC(@DATE(95,5,27),@DATE(95,11,24),96.2492,100,2) = 0.074602

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@DURAT
@DURAT - Duration

Format

@DURAT(Discrate, Flows, <Initial>, <[Odd|Periods]>, <Simp>, <Pathdep>, <Filter>, <Start>, <End>)

Discrate	=	discount rate or a block containing discount rates that correspond to cash flows stored in Flows

Flows	=	block containing cash flows associated with the discount rates in Discrate

Initial	=	initial cash flow (the default is 0)

Odd|Periods	=	delay between initial and first cash flow, in number of periods (the default is 1) or block containing lengths of periods between cash flows (the default is 1)

Simp	=	flag specifying how to discount:

0 = compounded discounting (default)

1 = mixed compounded and simple discounting

2 = simple discounting

Pathdep	=	flag specifying whether to apply path-dependent compounding to each flow; 0 = no path (default); 1 = path

Filter	=	flag specifying filter type: 0 = no filter (default); 1 = cashflow < Start; 2 = cashflow ≤ Start; 3 = cashflow > Start; 4 = cashflow ≥ Start; 5 = Start < cashflow < End; 6 = Start ≤ cashflow ≤ End

Start	=	a starting cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

End	=	an ending cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

@DURAT calculates the duration of a given cash flow structure. Duration (also called Macaulay duration) is defined as the weighted average time to receipt of a cash flow where the present values of the cash flows are the weights. Each weight in the sum is the present value of a cash flow divided by the net present value of all the cash flows.

@DURAT computes Macaulay duration using this formula:

where

Di = Distance

Du = Duration

Fl = Flows

I = Initial

n is the number of cash flows.  is the discount factor corresponding to the ith flow.

Modified (or Hicks) duration is defined as a sensitivity of present value to change in the internal rate of return. Modified duration is not defined for multiple discount rates (when Discrate is a block of discount rates).

To convert Macaulay duration to Modified (or Hicks) duration, use this formula:

modified duration = Macaulay duration / (1 + Discrate)

Example

Consider a cash flow stream comprising four flows of $5, followed by four flows of $10, followed by seven flows of $11, followed by a final flow of $110. The first flow is 0.56745 periods away. The next 11 flows occur one period apart. The last four flows are 1.5 periods apart. This formula calculates the the duration, assuming compound discounting, no initial cash flow, and the data shown in the next figure:

@DURAT(D8,A2..B5,B8,C2..D4) = 10.28273

A	B	C	D	E

1	Cash Flows	Periods

2	4	$5	1	.056745

3	4	$10	11	1

4	7	$11	4	1.5

5	1	$110

6

7	Initial	Discount Rate

8	0	7.85%

9

See Also

@DURATION

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@DURATION
@DURATION - Macaulay Duration

Format

@DURATION(Settle, Maturity, Coupon, Yield, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Coupon	=	coupon rate; must be ≥ 0

Yield	=	annual yield; must be > 0 and ≤ 1

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in the number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@DURATION returns the Macaulay duration for a bond with an assumed par value of 100. Macaulay duration is the weighted average maturity of a bond's cash flow stream where the present values of all future cash receipts are used as weights.

Example

The following formula calculates the Macaulay duration of a bond with these terms: Settle is August 8, 1992, Maturity is November 15, 1998, Coupon is 9%, and Yield is 8.816%.

@DURATION(@DATE(92,8,8),@DATE(98,11,15),0.09,0.08816) = 4.836099

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@EMNTH
@EMNTH - Ending Day in Month

Format

@EMNTH(Date)

Date	=	number representing a date

@EMNTH returns the serial date number for the date of the last day of the month in which Date falls.

Example

@EMNTH(@DATE(96,2,14)) = 35124 (February 29, 1996), the last day of the month in which February 14, 1996 falls.

See Also

@LBDAY

@LWKDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@ERF
@ERF - Error Function

Format

@ERF(Lower, <Upper>)

Lower	=	lower bound for integrating @ERF; must be ≥ 0

Upper	=	upper bound for integrating @ERF; if omitted, @ERF integrates the error function between 0 and Lower

@ERF returns the error function integrated between Lower and Upper. The error function helps solve partial differential equations that involve convection or diffusion.

The equation for @ERF(z) is

The equation for @ERF(a,b) is

This is the same as @ERF(b) minus @ERF(a).

Example

@ERF(0,1) = 0.842701

See Also

@ERFC

Miscellaneous Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@ERFC
@ERFC - Complementary Error Function

Format

@ERFC(Lower)

Lower	=	lower bound for integrating @ERF; must be ≥ 0

@ERFC returns the complementary error function, which derives from the error function @ERF using this formula for @ERFC(x):

This is the same as 1 - @ERF(x).

Therefore, @ERFC(Lower) = 1 - @ERF(Lower,Upper).

Example

@ERFC(1) = 0.157299

See Also

@ERF

Miscellaneous Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@EVEN
@EVEN - Round Up to Even Number

Format

@EVEN(X)

X	=	value to round

@EVEN rounds X up (away from zero) to the nearest even integer.

Examples

@EVEN(3.2) = 4

@EVEN(-3.2) = -4

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@EXPONDIST
@EXPONDIST - Exponential Distribution

Format

@EXPONDIST(X, Lambda, Cum)

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function; must be ≥ 0

Lambda	=	value to indicate; Lambda = 1/Mean; must be > 0

Cum 	=	1 to perform cumulative distribution function; 0 to perform the probability density function

The exponential distribution, sometimes called the waiting-time distribution, describes the amount of time or distance between the occurrence of random events (such as the time between major earthquakes or the time between no hitters pitched in major league baseball). The exponential distribution calculated by @EXPONDIST is a continuous distribution with a probability density function whose formula is:

For the cumulative distribution function, the formula is:

Use this distribution in connection with estimating the length of material life, or the length of time a process might take.

Examples

On average, customers at a certain bank must wait 2 minutes before being served by a teller. This formula calculates the probability that someone would have to wait 3 minutes:

@EXPONDIST(3,1/2,0) = 0.111565

This formula calculates the probability that someone would wait only 1 minute for a teller:

@EXPONDIST(1,1/2,1) = 0.393469

See Also

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FACT
@FACT - Factorial

Format

@FACT(N)

N	=	integer ≥ 0 specifying the factorial to calculate

@FACT calculates the factorial of a number, N!, defined as follows: if N ≥ 0,

  N! = N × (N-1) × (N-2) × (N-3) ×...× (2) × (1)

@FACT(0) returns 1. If N is a non-integer or negative number, @FACT returns ERR.

Examples

@FACT(10) = 3628800

@FACT(128) = 3.9E+215

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FACTDOUBLE
@FACTDOUBLE - Double Factorial

Format

@FACTDOUBLE(N)

N	=	value ≥ 0 to calculate factorial of

@FACTDOUBLE returns the double factorial of N, N!!, defined as follows:

   If N is even, N!! = N(N-2)(N-4)...(4)(2)

   If N is odd, N!! = N(N-2)(N-4)...(3)(1)

If N is negative, @FACTDOUBLE returns ERR.

Examples

@FACTDOUBLE(12) = 46080

@FACTDOUBLE(13) = 135135

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FBDAY
@FBDAY - First Business Day

Format

@FBDAY(Date, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

Date	=	number representing a date

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@FBDAY returns the serial date number of the first business day of the month in which Date falls. If the first of the month is not a business day, @FBDAY returns the business day closest to it within the same month.

Example

This formula calculates the first business day in January 1993, assuming that Saturdays and some dates are holidays:

@FBDAY(@DATE(93,1,1),A7..C9,0,1) = 33972 (January 3, 1993)

See Also

@BUSDAY

@LBDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@FDIST
@FDIST - F-Distribution

Format

@FDIST(X, DegFreedom1, DegFreedom2)

X	=	positive value at which to evaluate the function

DegFreedom1	=	numerator degrees of freedom; must be ≥ 1

DegFreedom2	=	denominator degrees of freedom; must be ≥ 1

@FDIST returns the cumulative F-distribution function, which is the probability that a random variable will be less than X. Use @FDIST to compare two population variances.

Example

@FDIST(6.256057,5,4) = 0.05

See Also

@FINV

@FTEST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FEETBL
@FEETBL - Fee Table

Format

@FEETBL(Tu, Ppu, [StdTbl|Val], <[MinTbl|Val]>, <[MaxTbl|Val]>, <RndPlcs>)

Tu	=	total units; if Tu is negative, @FEETBL uses its absolute value

Ppu	=	price per unit

StdTbl|Val	=	fee table or a single value that defines the standard fee calculation

MinTbl|Val	=	fee table or a single value that defines the minimum fee calculation (if omitted, MinTbl equals StdTbl)

MaxTbl|Val	=	fee table or a single value that defines the maximum fee calculation (if omitted, MaxTbl equals StdTbl)

RndPlcs	=	number of places to which the final result is rounded; can be from 0 to 10 places (the default is no rounding)

@FEETBL returns fee calculations from tables. You can use @FEETBL to calculate fees or commissions for many types of stock transactions, taxes, sales commissions, and other types of fees and charges. To use @FEETBL, you need to create a table (or tables) that describe the fees.

@FEETBL is more powerful than other table lookup @functions such as @HLOOKUP and @VLOOKUP because it allows you to

Compare the standard fee with minimum and maximum values

Multiply the lookup value by the number of units or total price

Add a fixed value to the fee

Round the result to a specified number of decimal places

If the fee table is indexed by values of total units or price per unit, Tu or Ppu must be greater than the smallest value in the index; otherwise, @FEETBL cannot find a lookup value. If either Tu or Ppu is zero, @FEETBL returns zero.

If you specify an optional argument, such as RndPlcs, you must also specify all preceding optional arguments. If MinTbl and MaxTbl are not pertinent to the fee calculation, use StdTbl again for MinTbl and MaxTbl, or enter values that have no effect on the final result. For example, enter 0 for MinTbl and 1E+99 for MaxTbl.

Note:	For valid comparison, values for StdTbl, MinTbl, and MaxTbl arguments must have the same units.

The upper left cell of a fee table must contain a table header string that identifies the row index, column index, and cell contents of the table, and also specifies if the table contains an additive factor for the fee calculation. The table header string consists of three or four parameters separated by a space; each parameter has several possible values.

Table header parameters

Parameter	Description	Values

1	Row index	tu, ppu, tp, na

2	Column index	tu, ppu, tp, na

3	Cell contents	fpu, fpct, luo

4	Additive factor	fa

Description Values

tu	=	total units

fpu	=	fee per unit

ppu	=	price per unit

fpct	=	fee percentage

tp	=	total price

luo	=	lookup only

na	=	not applicable

fa	=	fixed adder

The first parameter of the table header identifies the contents of the row index, which appears in the first column of the table below the table header. The second parameter identifies the contents of the column index, which appears in the first row of the table to the right of the table header.

The third parameter of the table header determines if @FEETBL multiplies the lookup value from the table by another value. For example, "fpu" (fee per unit) indicates that @FEETBL multiplies the lookup value by the number of units; "fpct" (fee percentage) indicates that the lookup value is a percentage that @FEETBL multiplies by the total price; "luo" (lookup only) indicates that @FEETBL uses the lookup value without modification.

The fourth parameter of the table header is an optional additive factor; specify "fa" (fixed adder) to add a value to the result of the operation specified by the third parameter. If the fee table has no additive factor, omit the fourth parameter.

In the next figure, the table header in cell A3 is "tp na fpct fa"; "tp" indicates that A4..A9 represents the row index values for total price; "na" indicates that B3..C3 has no column index values; "fpct" indicates that the lookup values in B4..B9 are percentages that must be multiplied by the total price; "fa" indicates that the values in C4..C9 are "fixed adders", that is, one of these values must be added to the product of the fee percentage and the total price.

A	B	C	D

1	Standard Commission Rate Table

2	Principal	%Fee +	Fixed Adder

3	tp na fpct fa

4	$0	1.60%	$26.00

5	$2,500	0.60%	$51.00

6	$6,000	0.30%	$69.00

7	$22,000	0.20%	$91.00

8	$50,000	0.10%	$141.00

9	$500,000	0.08%	$241.00

10

In the next figure, the table header in cell A2 is "tu tp luo"; "tu" indicates that A3..A7 represents the row index values for total units; "tp" indicates that B2..E2 represents the column index values for total price; "luo" indicates that @FEETBL uses the lookup values in B3..E7.

A	B	C	D	E	F

1	Total Units	Total Price

2	tu tp luo	$0	$10,000	$15,000	$20,000

3	0	$250	$500	$750	$1,000

4	2	$200	$400	$600	$800

5	5	$175	$350	$525	$700

6	10	$150	$300	$450	$600

7	20	$125	$250	$375	$500

8

@FEETBL treats all string values (other than the table header) or empty cells in fee tables as zero.

Examples

A furniture manufacturer sells 100 bookcases at a price of $150 each to a retailer. This formula calculates the handling fee for the order based on the fee table in the next figure.

@FEETBL(100,150,A1..D5) = $300

Cell A4 is the row index value for 100 total units. Cell C1 is the column index value for $150 price per unit. Cell C4 is the lookup value, which is multiplied by the total units: $3 * 100 = $300.

This formula calculates the handling fee based on the fee table in the next figure for a sale of 5 end tables at a price of $75 each:

@FEETBL(5,75,A1..D5) = $25

Cell A2 is the row index value for 5 units (between 0 and 9). Cell B1 is the column index value for $75 price per unit. Cell B2 is the lookup value, which is multiplied by the total units: $5 * 5 = $25.

A	B	C	D	E

1	tu ppu fpu	$0	$100	$500

2	0	$5	$7	$8

3	10	$4	$5	$6

4	100	$2	$3	$4

5	1000	$2	$1	$2

6

See Also

@HLOOKUP

@STKOPT

@VLOOKUP

Stock Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@FIB
@FIB - Fibonacci Sequence

Format

@FIB(N)

N	=	integer ≥ 0 specifying the desired term of a Fibonacci sequence

@FIB calculates the Nth term of a Fibonacci sequence (1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21...), in which each number, after the first two, is the sum of the two numbers immediately preceding it. @FIB(0) is defined to be 0.

Examples

@FIB(4) = 3

@FIB(9) = 34

@FIB(15) = 610

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FINV
@FINV - Inverse of F-Distribution

Format

@FINV(Prob, DegFreedom1, DegFreedom2)

Prob	=	cumulative probability value; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

DegFreedom1	=	numerator degrees of freedom; must be ≥ 1

DegFreedom2	=	denominator degrees of freedom; must be ≥ 1

@FINV returns the inverse of the cumulative F-distribution function. Use this function to measure the degree of variability in two data sets.

Example

@FINV(0.05,5,4) = 6.256057

See Also

@FDIST

@FTEST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FIRSTBLANKPAGE

Format

@FIRSTBLANKPAGE(Block)

Block	=	a cell or block reference; can be a link to another opened notebook (for example, [BUDGET]A:A1)

@FIRSTBLANKPAGE returns a string that contains the letters for the first unnamed blank page in a notebook that is not part of a group.

Quattro Pro searches for the first unnamed blank page (that is not in a group) starting at page A and continuing toward page IV. If there are no unnamed blank pages (or they are all in groups), @FIRSTBLANKPAGE returns ERR.

Example

@FIRSTBLANKPAGE(B17) = "AA" (if it is the first page that is blank and unnamed)

See Also

@LASTBLANKPAGE

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@FIRSTINGROUP
@FIRSTINGROUP - First Page in Group

Format

@FIRSTINGROUP(Block, GroupName)

Cell	=	a cell or block of the notebook to check

GroupName	=	a string value representing a group name

@FIRSTINGROUP returns a string that contains the letters for the first page in the group named GroupName. @FIRSTINGROUP searches the notebook referenced by Block for the group. If the group does not exist, @FIRSTINGROUP returns ERR.

Example

@FIRSTINGROUP([REPORTQ4]A:C12,"Totals") = "A" (if the notebook REPORTQ4 contains a group named Totals that starts with page A)

See Also

@LASTINGROUP

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@FISHER
@FISHER - Fisher Transformation

Format

@FISHER(X)

X	=	numeric value; -1 < X < 1

@FISHER returns the Fisher transformation at the value X. Fisher's z-transformation is used to produce an approximately normally distributed variable (rather than skewed) from the correlation coefficient. The formula @FISHER uses is

Example

@FISHER(0.25) = 0.255413

See Also

@FISHERINV

@PEARSON

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FISHERINV
@FISHERINV - Inverse of Fisher Transformation

Format

@FISHERINV(Y)

Y	=	numeric value ≤ 354 for which you want the inverse of the Fisher transformation

@FISHERINV returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation. Use @FISHERINV to determine the confidence limits for a correlation coefficient.

Example

@FISHERINV(0.255413) = 0.25

See Also

@FISHER

@PEARSON

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FLOOR
@FLOOR - Round Down to Nearest Multiple

Format

@FLOOR(X, Y)

X	=	value to round

Y	=	value to make rounded X evenly divisible by

@FLOOR rounds X down (toward zero) to the nearest value that is evenly divisible by Y. If X and Y have different signs, the result of @FLOOR is ERR.

Examples

@FLOOR(3.2,3) = 3

@FLOOR(-3.2,-3) = -3

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FORECAST
@FORECAST - Linear Regression Forecast

Format

@FORECAST(X, KnownY, KnownX)

X	=	numeric value at which to evaluate the function

KnownY	=	dependent range of values

KnownX	=	independent range of values

@FORECAST returns a predicted Y value corresponding to X based upon a linear regression of KnownY and KnownX.

KnownY and KnownX must contain the same number of values. The variance of KnownX must not be 0.

Example

This example refers to cells in the figure below.

@FORECAST(1000,C2..C16,B2..B16) = $15,868.50

A	B	C

1	Date	Advertising	Sales

2	04/30/93	$435	$7,000

3	05/07/93	$400	$6,000

4	05/14/93	$505	$7,767

5	05/21/93	$470	$7,800

6	05/28/93	$610	$9,534

7	06/04/93	$540	$7,750

8	06/11/93	$575	$8,945

9	06/18/93	$715	$11,301

10	06/25/93	$645	$9,465

11	07/02/93	$680	$10,760

12	07/09/93	$785	$13,000

13	07/16/93	$750	$11,890

14	07/23/93	$855	$12,980

15	07/30/93	$820	$13,068

16	08/06/93	$890	$14,246

See Also

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FRACD
@FRACD - Fraction to Decimal

Format

@FRACD(Frac, Denom)

Frac	=	number to be converted

Denom	=	denominator; must be an integer

@FRACD converts the fraction Frac to a decimal number. For example, you can use this @function to convert a number with a fractional portion in 32nds to a decimal number. @FRACD reverses the effect of @DFRAC.

Frac looks like a decimal, but @FRACD does not use it that way. The portion to the right of the decimal point is the numerator of the fraction using the denominator specified by Denom. For example, if Denom is 32 and you want to find the decimal equivalent of 99 [image], set Frac to 99.12. If Denom were 100, setting Frac to 99.12 represents 99 [image].

Example

This formula finds the decimal equivalent of 106 [image].

@FRACD(106.14,32) = 106.4375

See Also

@DFRAC

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FTEST
@FTEST - F-test

Format

@FTEST(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@FTEST returns the results of an F-test run against the samples in Array1 and Array2. An F-test is a one-tailed probability that the differences in the sample variances in Array1 and Array2 are different. Use @FTEST to determine if two samples have significantly different variances (that is, if data sets were drawn from different parent populations).

Array1 and Array2 must have more than two values. The variance of Array1 or Array2 must not be zero.

Example

@FTEST({75,82,83,85,85,90},{80,86,92,93,95,96}) = 0.637248

See Also

@FDIST

@FINV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@FUTV
@FUTV - Future Value of Cash Flow

Format

@FUTV(Intrate, Flows, <[Odd|Periods]>, <Simp>, <Pathdep>, <Filter>, <Start>, <End>)

Intrate	=	interest rate or block containing interest (discount) rates

Flows	=	block containing cash flows

Odd|Periods	=	delay after last cash flow in number of periods (the default is 0) or block containing lengths of periods between cash flows (the default is 1)

Simp	=	flag specifying how to discount:

0 = compounded discounting (default)

1 = mixed compounded and simple discounting

2 = simple discounting

Pathdep	=	flag specifying whether to apply path-dependent compounding to each flow; 0 = no path (default); 1 = path

Filter	=	flag specifying filter type: 0 = no filter (default); 1 = cashflow < Start; 2 = cashflow ≤ Start; 3 = cashflow > Start; 4 = cashflow ≥ Start; 5 = Start < cashflow < End; 6 = Start ≤ cashflow ≤ End

Start	=	a starting cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

End 	=	an ending cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

@FUTV calculates the future value of a given cash flow structure. The future value of a stream of cash flows is the sum of the future values of each cash flow.

By default, @FUTV computes the future value at the time of the last cash flow. If you specify Periods, @FUTV calculates the future value at a time one period after the last cash flow. If you specify Odd, @FUTV calculates the future value at a time Odd periods after the last cash flow.

@FUTV computes future value using this formula:

where n is the number of cash flows, and [image] is the interest factor associated with the ith cash flow, [image].  is the @FUTV counterpart of the discount factor, [image], used in @NETPV. Unlike [image], which reduces the value of a flow, [image] increases the value.

FV = Future Value

Fl = Flows

Example

Suppose a portfolio has a bond that will make 15 annual interest payments of $1,500, and pay $20,000 in principal along with the last interest payment. If the interest earned on investing the annual interest payments (the reinvestment rate) is 8.5%, this formula calculates the amount in the portfolio at the end of 15 years, using the data shown in the next figure:

@FUTV(D2,A2..B3) = $62,348.40

A	B	C	D	E

1	Cash Flows	Interest Rate

2	14	$1,500	8.5%

3	1	$21,500

4

See Also

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@GAMMADIST
@GAMMADIST - Gamma Distribution

Format

@GAMMDIST(X, Alpha, Beta, Cum)

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function; must be ≥ 0

Alpha	=	parameter to the gamma distribution; must be > 0

Beta	=	parameter to the gamma distribution; must be > 0

Cum 	=	1 to return the cumulative gamma distribution function; 0 to return the probability density function

@GAMMDIST returns the gamma distribution function, which is the probability that a random variable will be less than X. Use @GAMMADIST to study random variables characterized by skewed and asymmetric distributions.

When Alpha = 1, @GAMMADIST returns the exponential distribution; see @EXPONDIST.

Examples

@GAMMADIST(18,8,2,1) = 0.676103

@GAMMADIST(18,8,2,0) = 0.058558

See Also

@GAMMAINV

@GAMMALN

@GAMMAP

@GAMMAQ

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@GAMMAINV
@GAMMAINV - Inverse of Gamma Distribution

Format

@GAMMAINV(Prob, Alpha, Beta)

Prob	=	probability associated with the gamma cumulative function; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

Alpha	=	a parameter to the gamma distribution; must be > 0

Beta	=	a parameter to the gamma distribution; must be > 0

@GAMMAINV returns the inverse of the cumulative gamma distribution function.

Example

@GAMMAINV(0.676103,8,2) = 18

See Also

@GAMMADIST

@GAMMALN

@GAMMAP

@GAMMAQ

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@GAMMALN
@GAMMALN - Natural Logarithm of Gamma Function

Format

@GAMMALN(X)

X	=	value for which you want to calculate @GAMMALN; must be > 0

Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function. Use @GAMMALN to build other common statistical functions such as the beta function (see @BETA) and the factorial function (see @FACT).

Example

@GAMMALN(6) = 4.787492

See Also

@GAMMADIST

@GAMMAINV

@GAMMAP

@GAMMAQ

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@GAMMAP
@GAMMAP - Incomplete Gamma Function

Format

@GAMMAP(A, X)

A	=	parameter to the function; must be > 0

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function; must be ≥ 0

@GAMMAP returns the incomplete gamma function, also known as the standard cumulative gamma distribution. @GAMMAP is equal to the cumulative gamma distribution when β = 1.

Example

@GAMMAP(3,4) = 0.761897

See Also

@GAMMADIST

@GAMMAINV

@GAMMALN

@GAMMAQ

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@GAMMAQ
@GAMMAQ - Complement to Incomplete Gamma Function

Format

@GAMMAQ(A, X)

A	=	parameter to the function; must be > 0

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function; must be ≥ 0

@GAMMAQ is a complement to the incomplete gamma function and equals (1 - @GAMMAP).

Example

@GAMMAQ(3,4) = 0.238103

See Also

@GAMMADIST

@GAMMAINV

@GAMMALN

@GAMMAP

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@GCD
@GCD - Greatest Common Divisor

Format

@GCD(X, Y)

X	=	positive integer to find greatest common divisor of

Y	=	positive integer to find greatest common divisor of

@GCD returns the greatest common divisor of X and Y (the largest integer that both numbers can be divided by without a remainder; it is also called the greatest common denominator).

Examples

@GCD(96,78) = 6

@GCD(112,42) = 14

See Also

@LCM

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@GEOMEAN
@GEOMEAN - Geometric Mean

Format

@GEOMEAN(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values; values in List must be positive

@GEOMEAN returns the geometric mean of a positive range of values. The geometric mean is the nth root of the product of a series of numbers. Use @GEOMEAN when you are interested in an average rate of change of values in a data set given a varying rate of change.

@GEOMEAN uses this formula:

Example

@GEOMEAN(3,4,5,6,7) = 4.789389

@GEOMEAN(C10..C14) = 1.129486, where C10=1.15, C11=1.08, C12=1.13, C13=1.18, and C14=1.11

See Also

@AVG

@HARMEAN

@MEDIAN

@MODE

@TRIMMEAN

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@GESTEP
@GESTEP - Test if X >= Y

Format

@GESTEP(X, <Y>)

X	=	numeric value to check

Y	=	numeric value that X must exceed for function to return 1 (if omitted, assumed to be 0)

@GESTEP tests whether X is greater than or equal to Y. If it is, @GESTEP returns 1 (true); if not, @GESTEP returns 0 (false).

Examples

@GESTEP(1,2) = 0

@GESTEP(2,1) = 1

@GESTEP(1) = 1

@GESTEP(-2) = 0

You can sum several @GESTEP functions to count the number of values that exceed a certain threshold (Y).

See Also

@DELTA

Miscellaneous Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@GETGROUP
@GETGROUP - Name of Group Containing Page

Format

@GETGROUP(Block, <PageName>)

Block	=	a cell or block of the notebook to check

PageName	=	a string value representing a page name or an address specifying the page name to check (optional)

@GETGROUP returns a string that is the name of the group that contains the page specified by Block (unless PageName is used, as discussed next).

If Block is used in conjunction with the optional argument PageName, @GETGROUP searches the notebook referenced by Block for the group that contains the page specified by PageName. PageName is a string or cell address.

If the page is not part of a group, @GETGROUP returns ERR.

Example

@GETGROUP([REPORTQ4]A:C12,"April") searches the notebook REPORTQ4 for the name of the group that contains the page named April

@GETGROUP([REPORTQ4]A:C12) searches the notebook REPORTQ4 for the name of the group that contains the page named A

See Also

@FIRSTINGROUP

@LASTINGROUP

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@HARMEAN
@HARMEAN - Harmonic Mean

Format

@HARMEAN(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values; none of the values in List can equal 0

@HARMEAN returns the harmonic mean of a data set. The harmonic mean is the reciprocal of the arithmetic mean of the reciprocals of a set of numbers.

@HARMEAN uses this formula:

Example

@HARMEAN(3,4,5,6,7) = 4.575163

See Also

@AVG

@GEOMEAN

@MEDIAN

@MODE

@TRIMMEAN

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@HEXTOASC
@HEXTOASC - Hexadecimal to ASCII

Format

@HEXTOASC(Hex)

Hex	=	hexadecimal number to convert; can be up to 40 hexadecimal digits

@HEXTOASC returns the ASCII equivalent of a hexadecimal number.

Note:	If the hexadecimal number includes nonnumeric characters, enclose it in quotation marks.

Examples

@HEXTOASC("2B") = +

@HEXTOASC("3031414243444546") = 01ABCDEF

@HEXTOASC("434F52454C") = COREL

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@HEXTOBIN
@HEXTOBIN - Hexadecimal to Binary

Format

@HEXTOBIN(Hex)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number to convert

@HEXTOBIN returns the binary string equivalent of a hexadecimal number. To convert a negative number, precede Hex with a minus sign.

Examples

@HEXTOBIN("A") = 1010

@HEXTOBIN("10") = 10000

@HEXTOBIN("1E") = 11110

See Also

@HEXTOBIN64

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@HEXTOBIN64
@HEXTOBIN64 - Hexadecimal to Binary

Format

@HEXTOBIN64(Hex, <Places>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number to convert

Places	=	number of characters to return; must be ≤ 64

@HEXTOBIN64 returns the binary string equivalent of a hexadecimal number (up to 64 bits).

Note:	If the hexadecimal number includes nonnumeric characters, enclose it in quotation marks.

Examples

@HEXTOBIN64("A",2) = 10

@HEXTOBIN64("A",6) = 001010

@HEXTOBIN64("1E078") = 00011110000001111000

@HEXTOBIN64("1E078",7) = 1111000

See Also

@HEXTOBIN

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@HEXTONUM64
@HEXTONUM64 - Hexadecimal to Decimal

Format

@HEXTONUM64(Hex, <Signed>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number to convert

Signed	=	1 if the most significant bit of Hex is a sign bit; 0 if Hex is positive (the default is 0)

@HEXTONUM64 returns the decimal equivalent of a hexadecimal number (up to 64 bits).

If Signed is 1, the most significant bit of Hex is the sign bit. If the sign bit is 0, the number is positive; if it is 1, the number is negative.

Note:	If the hexadecimal number includes nonnumeric characters, enclose it in quotation marks.

Examples

@HEXTONUM64("A") = 10

@HEXTONUM64("123456789ABCDEF0") = 1311768467463790320

@HEXTONUM64("FE4FA1",1) = -110687

See Also

@HEXTONUM

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@HEXTOOCT
@HEXTOOCT - Hexadecimal to Octal

Format

@HEXTOOCT(Hex)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number to convert

@HEXTOOCT returns the octal string equivalent of a hexadecimal number. To convert a negative number, precede Hex with a minus sign.

Examples

@HEXTOOCT("A") = 12

@HEXTOOCT("10") = 20

@HEXTOOCT("1E") = 36

See Also

@HEXTOOCT64

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@HEXTOOCT64
@HEXTOOCT64 - Hexadecimal to Octal

Format

@HEXTOOCT64(Hex, <Places>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number to convert

Places	=	number of characters to return; must be ≤ 22

@HEXTOOCT64 returns the octal string equivalent of a hexadecimal number (up to 64 bits).

Note:	If the hexadecimal number includes nonnumeric characters, enclose it in quotation marks.

Examples

@HEXTOOCT64("A") = 12

@HEXTOOCT64("7",2) = 07

@HEXTOOCT64("1E078",6) = 360170

@HEXTOOCT64("0123456789ABCDEF") = 0004432126361152746757

See Also

@HEXTOOCT

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@HOLS
@HOLS - Holidays

Format

@HOLS(StartDate, EndDate, Holidays, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

StartDate	=	number representing the start date

EndDate	=	number representing the end date

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays; to indicate no holidays, enter an empty cell or block

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@HOLS returns the number of holidays between StartDate and EndDate, including the given dates (if they appear in Holidays).

By default, @HOLS does not include holidays that fall on a Saturday or Sunday; if either Saturday or Sunday is passed as 1, the count also includes holidays falling on that day.

Example

This formula calculates the number of holidays between April 1, 1993 and December 14, 1993, assuming that the dates contained in block A7..C9 are holidays.

@HOLS(@DATE(93,4,1),@DATE(93,12,14),A7..C9) = 5

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@HYPGEOMDIST
@HYPGEOMDIST - Hypergeometric Distribution

Format

@HYPGEOMDIST(SampleSuccess, SampleSize, PopSuccess, PopSize)

SampleSuccess	=	successes in the sample; must be ≥ 0

SampleSize	=	sample size; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ PopSize

PopSuccess	=	successes in the population; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ PopSize

PopSize	=	population size; must be ≥ 0

@HYPGEOMDIST returns the hypergeometric distribution of a sample, which gives the probability of successes in a sample given the sample's size, the total population, and the number of successful trials in that population. Use @HYPGEOMDIST to determine the probability that a distribution contains exactly SampleSuccess items of a particular type.

SampleSuccess must be greater than or equal to 0, greater than the lesser of SampleSize or PopSuccess, and greater than the larger of 0 or (SampleSize-PopSize+PopSuccess)

@HYPGEOMDIST uses this formula:

where:

d = SampleSuccess

n = SampleSize

D = PopSuccess

N = PopSize

Examples

Five cards are drawn from a deck of 52 playing cards. This formula calculates the probability that one of the five cards drawn is an ace (assuming there are only four aces in the deck):

@HYPGEOMDIST(1,5,4,52) = 0.299474

See Also

@BINOMDIST

@COMB

@FACT

@NEGBINOMDIST

@PERMUT

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMABS
@IMABS - Absolute Value of Complex Number

Format

@IMABS(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want the absolute (modulus) value

@IMABS returns the absolute value (modulus) of a complex number with this formula:

Given Complex = x + yi

C = Complex

Example

@IMABS("-10+25.6j") = 27.48381

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMAGINARY
@IMAGINARY - Imaginary Coefficient of Complex Number

Format

@IMAGINARY(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy from which you want to extract the imaginary coefficient

@IMAGINARY returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number.

Examples

@IMAGINARY("2+8i") = 8

@IMAGINARY("-i") = -1

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMARGUMENT
@IMARGUMENT - Angle of Complex Number

Format

@IMARGUMENT(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the angle in the complex plane

@IMARGUMENT returns the angle Θ, in radians, of a number in the complex plane, such that

Example

@IMARGUMENT("5+12i") = 1.176005

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMCONJUGATE
@IMCONJUGATE - Complex Conjugate of Complex Number

Format

@IMCONJUGATE(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the complex conjugate

@IMCONJUGATE returns the complex conjugate of a complex number.

Example

@IMCONJUGATE("5+12i") = "5-12i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMCOS
@IMCOS - Cosine of Complex Number

Format

@IMCOS(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the cosine

@IMCOS returns the cosine of the complex number Complex. @IMCOS uses this formula:

Given Complex = x + yi

C = Complex

Example

@IMCOS("5+12i") = "23083.7+78034.8i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMDIV
@IMDIV - Quotient of Complex Numbers

Format

IMDIV(Complex1, Complex2)

Complex1	=	complex numerator or dividend in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy

Complex2	=	complex denominator or divisor in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy

@IMDIV returns the quotient of two complex numbers (Complex1 and Complex2) using this formula:

Given: Complex1 = a + bi and Complex2 = c + di

C = Complex

Example

@IMDIV("5+6i","3+4i") = "1.56-0.08i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMEXP
@IMEXP - Exponential of Complex Number

Format

@IMEXP(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the exponential

@IMEXP returns the exponential of a complex number using this formula:

Given Complex = x + yi,

C = Complex

Example

@IMEXP("5+12i") = "125.239-79.6345i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMLN
@IMLN - Natural Logarithm of Complex Number

Format

@IMLN(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the natural logarithm

@IMLN returns the natural logarithm of the complex number Complex using this formula:

Example

@IMLN("5+12i") = "2.56495+1.17601i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMLOG10
@IMLOG10 - Base 10 Logarithm of Complex Number

Format

@IMLOG10(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the base 10 log

@IMLOG10 returns the base 10 (common) logarithm of the complex number Complex using this formula:

Given Complex = x + yi

C = Complex

Example

@IMLOG10("5+12i") = "1.11394+0.510733i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMLOG2
@IMLOG2 - Base 2 Logarithm of Complex Number

Format

@IMLOG2(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the base 2 log

@IMLOG2 returns the base 2 logarithm of the complex number Complex using this formula:

Given Complex = x + yi

C = Complex

Example

@IMLOG2("5+12i") = "3.70044+1.69662i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMPOWER
@IMPOWER - Complex Number Raised to a Power

Format

@IMPOWER(Complex, Power)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy

Power	=	the power to which you want to raise Complex; can be a complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy

@IMPOWER returns the complex number Complex raised to the power Power. Power can be a value or a complex number.

Examples

@IMPOWER("5+12i",3) = "-2035-828i"

@IMPOWER("5+12i","3+2i") = "-150.575+145.094i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMPRODUCT
@IMPRODUCT - Product of Complex Numbers

Format

@IMPRODUCT(Complex1, Complex2)

Complex1	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy

Complex2	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy

@IMPRODUCT returns the product of two complex numbers (Complex1 and Complex2) using this formula:

Given Complex1 = a + bi and Complex2 = c + di

(Complex1)(Complex2) = (ac - bd) + (ad + bc)i

Example

@IMPRODUCT("5+12i","2-i") = "22+19i"

@IMPRODUCT("10+2i",5) = "50+10i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMREAL
@IMREAL - Real Coefficient of a Complex Number

Format

@IMREAL(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy from which you want to extract the real coefficients

@IMREAL returns the real coefficient of a complex number.

Examples

@IMREAL("2+8i") = 2

@IMREAL("-i") = 0

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMSIN
@IMSIN - Sine of a Complex Number

Format

@IMSIN(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy for which you want to calculate the sine

@IMSIN returns the sine of the complex number Complex using the formula:

Given Complex = x + yi,

C = Complex

Examples

@IMSIN("5+12i") = "-78034.8+23083.7i"

@IMSIN("1+i") = "1.29846+0.634964i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMSQRT
@IMSQRT - Square Root of a Complex Number

Format

@IMSQRT(Complex)

Complex	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy to calculate square root of

@IMSQRT returns the square root of a complex number using this formula:

Given Complex = x + yi

C = Complex

Example

@IMSQRT("5+12i") = "3+2i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMSUB
@IMSUB - Difference of Complex Numbers

Format

@IMSUB(Complex1, Complex2)

Complex1	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy from which to subtract Complex2

Complex2	=	complex number in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy to subtract from Complex1

@IMSUB returns the difference of two complex numbers (Complex1 and Complex2) with this formula:

Given Complex1 = (a + bi) and Complex2 = (c + di)

(a + bi) - (c + di) = (a - c) + (b - d)i

Example

@IMSUB("5+12i","2-i") = "3+13i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@IMSUM
@IMSUM - Sum of Complex Numbers

Format

@IMSUM(List)

List	=	one or more complex numbers in the format x + yi, x + iy, x + yj, or x + jy, separated by commas

@IMSUM returns the sum of a list of complex numbers using this formula:

Given Complex1 = (a + bi) and Complex2 = (c + di)

Complex1 + Complex2 = (a + c) + (b + d)i

Example

@IMSUM("5+12i","7+14i") = "12+26i"

See Also

Complex Number Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@INDEXTOLETTER
@INDEXTOLETTER - Letter(s) Corresponding to Page/Column Index

Format

@INDEXTOLETTER(Index)

Index	=	an integer number from 0 to 255 inclusive

@INDEXTOLETTER returns a one- or two-character string equivalent (for example, A, B, AA, AB, and IV) for the index number of a page or column.

If Index is < 0 or > 255, @INDEXTOLETTER returns ERR. If Index is not an integer, it is rounded to the nearest integer.

Examples

@INDEXTOLETTER(0) = A

@INDEXTOLETTER(1) = B

@INDEXTOLETTER(255) = IV

See Also

@LETTERTOINDEX

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@INTERCEPT
@INTERCEPT - Y-Intercept

Format

@INTERCEPT(KnownY, KnownX)

KnownY	=	dependent range of values

KnownX	=	independent range of values

@INTERCEPT returns the y-intercept of the linear regression line through two data sets. KnownY and KnownX must contain the same number of values. The formula @INTERCEPT uses is

, the slope, is calculated using this formula:

Example

@INTERCEPT({16,28,30,35,52,65},{11,15,18,22,35,43}) = 3.56304

See Also

@FORECAST

@PEARSON

@RSQ

@SLOPE

@STEYX

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@INTRATE
@INTRATE - Annualized Interest Rate

Format

@INTRATE(Settle, Maturity, Investment, Redemption, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Investment	=	amount invested; must be > 0

Redemption	=	redemption value; must be > 0

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@INTRATE returns the simple annualized yield for a fully invested security. @INTRATE computes yield using this formula:

Y = yield

R = redemption

I = investment

b = basis

M = maturity

S = settle

 is the number of days over which the discount rate applies (360 or 365).

Example

This formula calculates the interest rate for a bond with the following terms: Settle is November 11, 1995, Maturity is May 27, 1996, Investment is $10,000, Redemption is $10,397.50, and Calendar is 1 (actual/actual).

@INTRATE(@DATE(95,11,11),@DATE(96,5,27),10000,10397.50,1) = 0.073277

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@INVB
@INVB - Binary Bit Inversion

Format

@INVB(Binary, <Bits>)

Binary	=	binary number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary; must be ≤ 64

@INVB inverts the bits of a binary number. All bits that are 1 change to 0, and all bits that are 0 change to 1.

Examples

@INVB(0) = 1

@INVB(1010,5) = 10101

@INVB(1100,5) = 10011

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@INVH
@INVH - Hexadecimal Bit Inversion

Format

@INVH(Hex, <Bits>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@INVH inverts the binary bits of a hexadecimal number. All bits that are 1 change to 0, and all bits that are 0 change to 1.

Example

@INVH("A") = 5

@INVH("C",8) = F3

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@ISBDAY
@ISBDAY - Business Day Test

Format

@ISBDAY(Date, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

Date	=	number representing a date

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@ISBDAY tests whether Date is a business day. To qualify as a business day, Date cannot fall on a Saturday or Sunday (unless Saturday and Sunday are designated as business days by Saturday and Sunday), and cannot appear in the block specified by Holidays. If Date is a business day, @ISBDAY returns 1; otherwise, @ISBDAY returns 0.

Example

Given the block of holidays, A7..C9, and treating Saturday as a business day (except when it is a date included in A7..C9), this formula tests whether May 31, 1993 is a business day:

@ISBDAY(@DATE(93,5,31),A7..C9,1) = 0, since May 31, 1993 is Memorial Day.

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@ISLEGALPAGENAME
@ISLEGALPAGENAME - Legal Page Name Test

Format

@ISLEGALPAGENAME(PageName)

PageName	=	a string value

@ISLEGALPAGENAME returns 1 if PageName is a valid page name (even if the page name does not currently exist). Otherwise, it returns 0.

Example

@ISLEGALPAGENAME("A") = 1

@ISLEGALPAGENAME("1st Qtr") = 1

@ISLEGALPAGENAME("1st Qtr: Net Profit") = 0 (name contains a colon, an invalid character)

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@KURT
@KURT - Kurtosis

Format

@KURT(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

@KURT returns the kurtosis of List. The kurtosis of a data set measures a distribution's closeness to normality, indicating relative peakedness or flatness. A kurtosis greater than zero is referred to as leptokurtic. A kurtosis less than zero is referred to as platykurtic.

List must have four or more values. The standard deviation of List must not be 0.

@KURT uses this formula:

where s is the sample standard deviation.

Examples

@KURT(5,7,9,12,14,15,4,9,5,6) = -1.11117

@KURT(9.7,10,9.5,9.3,10.2,10,9.5,11) = 1.780277

@KURT(20,25,27,22,35,28) = 0.876754

See Also

@SKEW

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LARGEST
@LARGEST - Nth Largest Number

Format

@LARGEST(Array, N)

Array	=	a numeric array or a block of values

N	=	number that indicates the rank in size from the data set Array; must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to the number of values in Array

@LARGEST returns the Nth largest number in Array. Use @LARGEST to determine a value's rank in a data set from the top of that set.

Note:	If there are duplicates in Array, @LARGEST treats them as separate numbers.

Examples

@LARGEST({1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10},2) = 9

@LARGEST({1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10},4) = 7

@LARGEST({1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10},6) = 5

See Also

@PERCENTILE

@PERCENTRANK

@QUARTILE

@SMALLEST

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LASTBLANKPAGE

Format

@LASTBLANKPAGE(Block)

Block	=	a cell or block reference; can be a link to another opened notebook (for example, [BUDGET]A:A1)

@LASTBLANKPAGE returns a string that contains the letters for the last unnamed blank page in a notebook that is not part of a group.

Quattro Pro searches for the last unnamed blank page (that is not in a group) starting at page IV and continuing toward page A. If there are no unnamed blank pages (or if they are all in groups), @LASTBLANKPAGE returns ERR.

Example

@LASTBLANKPAGE(B17) = IG (if it is the last page that is blank and unnamed)

See Also

@FIRSTBLANKPAGE

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@LASTINGROUP
@LASTINGROUP - Last Page in Group

Format

@LASTINGROUP(Block, GroupName)

Block	=	a cell or block of the notebook to check

GroupName	=	a string value representing a group name

@LASTINGROUP returns a string that contains the letters for the last page in the group named GroupName. @LASTINGROUP searches the notebook referenced by Block for the group. If the group does not exist, @LASTINGROUP returns ERR.

Example

@LASTINGROUP([REPORTQ4]A:C12,"Totals") = "C" (if the notebook named REPORTQ4 contains a group named Totals that ends with page C)

See Also

@FIRSTINGROUP

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@LBDAY
@LBDAY - Last Business Day in Month

Format

@LBDAY(Date, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

Date	=	number representing a date

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@LBDAY returns the serial date number for the date of the last business day of the month in which Date falls.

Example

This formula calculates the last business day in November 1993, assuming that Sundays and the dates contained in block A7..C9 are holidays.

@LBDAY(@DATE(93,11,1),A7..C9,1) = 34303 (November 30, 1993)

See Also

@NBDAY

@PBDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@LCM
@LCM - Least Common Multiple

Format

@LCM(X, Y)

X	=	positive integer to find least common multiple of

Y	=	positive integer to find least common multiple of

@LCM returns the least common multiple of X and Y (the smallest positive integer into which both X and Y can divide without leaving a remainder).

Examples

@LCM(9,6) = 18

@LCM(24,12) = 24

See Also

@GCD

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LETTERTOINDEX
@LETTERTOINDEX - Page/Column Index Corresponding to Letter(s)

Format

@LETTERTOINDEX(Letters)

Letters	=	a one- or two-character string enclosed in quotation marks; column and page letters run in sequence from A to Z, and continue from AA to AZ, up to IV

@LETTERTOINDEX returns the index number (from 0 to 255) for column letters or page letters.

If Letters is a character string outside the range of page and column letters (for example, "IW"), @LETTERINDEX returns ERR.

Examples

@LETTERTOINDEX("A") = 0

@LETTERTOINDEX("B") = 1

@LETTERTOINDEX("IV") = 255

See Also

@INDEXTOLETTER

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@LINTERP
@LINTERP - Linear Interpolation

Format

@LINTERP(KnownX, KnownY, X)

KnownX	=	one-dimensional block containing X values in increasing order

KnownY	=	one-dimensional block containing Y values corresponding to the X values in KnownX

X	=	number for which the corresponding Y value is desired

@LINTERP interpolates a Y value corresponding to X using the XY pairs specified by KnownX (which contains the X coordinates) and KnownY (which contains the Y coordinates). If X lies between two values in KnownX, @LINTERP interpolates using those two values and their respective KnownY counterparts. If X is outside the range of KnownX, the Y value is extrapolated based on the slope of the line between the two closest points.

KnownX and KnownY do not have to be the same size. If KnownY is smaller than KnownX, the last value in KnownY is used as the corresponding Y value for extra KnownX values. If KnownY is larger than KnownX, its extra values are ignored.

Example

This formula calculates the Y value for the X value 6.7 if the data in the next figure is used.

@LINTERP(A3..A9,B3..B9,6.7) = 17.5976

A	B	C

1	x values	y values

2

3	-28.345	-9.7821

4	-17.89	-5.6667

5	0.9232	2.891

6	1.212	2.9978

7	4.552	13.67

8	10.75	25.003

9	30.8	33.33

10

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LOGINV
@LOGINV - Inverse of Cumulative Lognormal Distribution

Format

@LOGINV(Prob, Mean, SDev)

Prob	=	probability associated with the cumulative lognormal distribution function; 0 ≤ Prob < 1

Mean	=	mean of ln(x)

SDev	=	standard deviation of ln(x); must be > 0

@LOGINV returns the inverse of the cumulative lognormal distribution.

Example

@LOGINV(0.027985,2.5,0.8) = 2.640543

See Also

@LOGNORMDIST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LOGNORMDIST
@LOGNORMDIST - Cumulative Lognormal Distribution

Format

@LOGNORMDIST(X, Mean, SDev)

X	=	value to evaluate the function; must be > 0

Mean	=	mean of ln(x)

SDev	=	standard deviation of ln(x); must be > 0

@LOGNORMDIST returns the cumulative lognormal distribution.

Example

@LOGNORMDIST(3,2.5,0.8) = 0.03991

See Also

@LOGINV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@LWKDAY
@LWKDAY - Last Weekday

Format

@LWKDAY(Wkday, Month, Year, <AuxWkday>)

Wkday	=	number from 1 (Saturday) to 7 (Friday)

Month	=	number from 1 (January) to 12 (December)

Year	=	number from 0 (1900) to 199 (2099) or a standard year like 1993

AuxWkday	=	auxiliary day of the week that must fall in the same week as Wkday; 0 for no auxiliary day or a number from 1 (Saturday) to 7 (Friday) indicating the auxiliary day (the default is 0)

@LWKDAY returns the serial date number for the date of the last occurrence of Wkday in Month of Year (for example, the last Tuesday in November 1994).

You can use AuxWkday to specify that both Wkday and AuxWkday must fall in the same week of the same month. (See the second example.)

Examples

@LWKDAY(3,6,115) = 42184 (June 29, 2015), the date of the last Monday in June 2015.

@LWKDAY(4,11,94,7) = 34660 (November 22, 1994), the last Tuesday on which both the last Tuesday and a Friday fall on the same week of November 1994.

See Also

@LBDAY

@EMNTH

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@MDAYS
@MDAYS - Calendar Days in Month

Format

@MDAYS(Month, Year)

Month	=	number from 1 (January) to 12 (December)

Year	=	number from 0 (1900) to 199 (2099) or a standard year like 1993

@MDAYS returns the number of calendar days in Month of Year.

Example

@MDAYS(2,1996) = 29, the number of days in February 1996.

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@MDET
@MDET - Determinant of a Matrix

Format

@MDET(Array)

Array	=	a numeric array or a block of values specifying a square matrix; must have an equal number of rows and columns, and cannot contain blank cells

@MDET calculates the determinant of a matrix (Array). The determinant is obtained by taking any row or column of the matrix, forming the products of each element and its cofactor, and taking the sum of the products; @MDET uses this formula:

where [image] is the element in the ith row and jth column of A and the cofactor [image] is the product of the determinant of the minor matrix [image], formed by deleting row i and column j of A, and a power of -1:

If Array does not contain the same number of rows and columns, or if Array contains any blank cells, @MDET returns ERR. If any two rows or columns in Array are equal or have proportional elements, @MDET returns 0.

Examples

@MDET({12,15,21|8,13,17|16,32,44}) = 144

This formula calculates the determinant of the data shown in the next figure:

@MDET(C3..F6) = -2869.95

C	D	E	F	G

3	2.908	-2.253	6.775	3.97

4	1.212	1.995	2.266	8.008

5	4.552	5.681	8.85	1.302

6	5.809	-5.03	0.099	7.832

7

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MDURATION
@MDURATION - Modified Duration

Format

@MDURATION(Settle, Maturity, Coupon, Yield, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Coupon	=	coupon rate; 0 ≤ Coupon ≤ 1

Yield	=	annual yield; 0 < Yield ≤ 1

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@MDURATION returns the modified Macaulay duration for a bond with assumed par value of 100. Modified duration is calculated using this formula:

modified duration =
D = Duration

Y = Yield

F = Frequency

Example

This formula calculates the modified duration of a bond with these terms: Settle is August 8, 1992, Maturity is November 15, 1998, Coupon is 9%, and Yield is 8.816%.

@MDURATION(@DATE(92,8,8),@DATE(98,11,15),0.09,0.08816) = 4.631923

See Also

@DURATION

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@MEDIAN

Format

@MEDIAN(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

@MEDIAN returns the middle value in a range of values in a data set arranged in ascending or descending order. If the number of values in the data set is even, the median is the mean of the two middle values. Use @MEDIAN when you want a more robust estimation of the central value in a distribution than you obtain with @AVG.

Examples

@MEDIAN(10,12,15,25,30) = 15

@MEDIAN(2,4,5,5,6,8,9,9) = 5.5

See Also

@AVG

@COUNT

@DAVG

@MODE

@SUM

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MNTHS
@MNTHS - Months

Format

@MNTHS(StartDate, EndDate, <EndMnth>)

StartDate	=	number representing the start date

EndDate	=	number representing the end date

EndMnth	=	1 to indicate adherence to ends of months; 0 to indicate that ends of months are ignored; the default is 1

@MNTHS calculates the number of whole months between StartDate and EndDate. A whole month is the day of the month on which a given date falls to that same day in the next month, such as March 11 to April 11.

If the day of the month on which StartDate falls does not exist in the month in which EndDate falls, and EndDate falls on the last day of that month, the number of months returned includes that month. For example, the number of months returned for March 31, 1993 to June 30, 1993 is 3 and not 2.

If StartDate falls on the last day of a month with less than 31 days, and EndDate precedes StartDate, the result depends on the value of EndMnth; for example, when evaluating the period from February 29, 1992, to January 31, 1992, if EndMnth is 1, -1 is returned; if EndMnth is 0, 0 is returned.

Examples

@MNTHS(@DATE(93,4,9),@DATE(94,9,15)) = 17, the number of whole months between April 9, 1993 and September 15, 1994.

@MNTHS(@DATE(93,4,30),@DATE(93,1,31)) = -3

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@MODE

Format

@MODE(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

The mode is a measure of central tendency and represents the value in a sample or population that appears more frequently than any other value. The mode emphasizes data concentration and is best used to describe large data sets. It is commonly used to decide which resulting value is correct when the same measuring or computing process is repeated several times.

If the data set contains no duplicate data points, @MODE returns NA.

Examples

@MODE(2,2,5,7,9,9,9,10,10,11,12,18) = 9

@MODE(91,87,83,80,86,55,83,68,79,83) = 83

@MODE(1,2,3,4,5) = NA

See Also

@AVG

@MEDIAN

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MROUND
@MROUND - Round to Nearest Multiple

Format

@MROUND(X, Y)

X	=	value to round

Y	=	value to make rounded X divisible by

@MROUND rounds X to the nearest value that is evenly divisible by Y. If Y is zero, @MROUND returns zero. If X and Y do not have the same sign, @MROUND returns ERR.

Examples

@MROUND(2.36,0.25) = 2.25

@MROUND(2.47,0.25) = 2.5

See Also

@CEILING

@EVEN

@FLOOR

@INT

@ODD

@ROUND

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MTGACC
@MTGACC - Mortgage Acceleration

Format

@MTGACC(Int, TtlPer, Principal, Residual, ExtraPrin, <Fper>, <Lper>, <Rper>, <Option>)

Int 	=	number ≥ 0 representing the periodic interest rate

TtlPer	=	total periods in the loan from start to finish, or the total periods remaining from the chosen starting period forward

Principal	=	original loan balance; also can be any starting point in the loan

Residual	=	remaining balance on loan at end of loan term; enter 0 if the loan will be paid in full

ExtraPrin	=	extra principal amount to be paid each period (must be positive)

Fper	=	number of the first period, relative to the starting point, in which extra principal is paid; the default is 1 (the first period)

Lper	=	number of the last period, relative to the starting point, in which extra principal is paid; the default is until the end of the loan; you can set Lper to any number greater than or equal to the last period number when extra principal payments last the life of the loan (for example, Lper can be 400 for a loan which lasts 360 periods)

Rper	=	period for which the loan status is reported; the default is at loan end (any number greater than the end of the loan defaults to loan end); Rper does not affect the value @MTGACC returns if Option is 0 or 10

Option	=	specifies the output value type (the default is 0):

0 = number of periods to loan end, when balance equals Residual

1 = balance of loan at the Rper

2 = cumulative interest paid at Rper

3 = cumulative principal paid at Rper

10 = number of fewer periods in loan life, due to payment of extra principal

11 = balance reduction at Rper due to payment of extra principal

12 = reduction in cumulative interest paid at Rper due to payment of extra principal

13 = increase in cumulative principal paid at Rper due to payment of extra principal

@MTGACC calculates the effects of paying extra monthly principal for amortized loans. The value that @MTGACC returns depends on the Option you specify. For the specified Rper, you can find the loan balance, cumulative interest, or cumulative principal. You can also find how the number of periods, loan balance, and cumulative interest have been reduced, and how cumulative principal has increased, as a result of paying extra principal.

@MTGACC returns values for the end of the loan or for the end of any payment period. During calculation, @MTGACC rounds currency values to 2 decimal places, giving currency answers in whole cents, as is common with mortgage institutions.

You can use @MTGACC to return information about a loan on which you make no extra principal payments (ExtraPrin = 0); for example, @MTGACC returns exact values of the loan balance, cumulative interest paid, and cumulative principal paid.

Examples

For a mortgage with a yearly interest rate of 9%, monthly payments for 30 years, an original balance of $150,000, and a future value of $80,000, the following formulas calculate the effects of paying $300 extra principal per month starting at the beginning of the second year and continuing through the fourth year. The reporting period is the tenth year (when the home will be sold and the mortgage paid-off).

Number of periods to loan end:

@MTGACC(.09/12,30*12,150000,80000,300,2*12,4*12,10*12,0) = 357

Balance at Rper:

@MTGACC(.09/12,30*12,150000,80000,300,2*12,4*12,10*12,1) = $128,635.26

Cumulative interest paid at Rper:

@MTGACC(.09/12,30*12,150000,80000,300,2*12,4*12,10*12,2) = $125,724.06

Cumulative principal paid at Rper:

@MTGACC(.09/12,30*12,150000,80000,300,2*12,4*12,10*12,3) = $21,364.74

Number of fewer periods in loan life:

@MTGACC(.09/12,30*12,150000,80000,300,2*12,4*12,10*12,10) = 3

Reduction in balance at Rper due to ExtraPrin:

@MTGACC(.09/12,30*12,150000,80000,300,2*12,4*12,10*12,11) = $13,964.70

Reduction in cumulative interest paid at Rper due to ExtraPrin:

@MTGACC(.09/12,30*12,150000,80000,300,2*12,4*12,10*12,12) = $6,464.70

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@MULT
@MULT - Cumulative Product

Format

@MULT(List)

List	=	one or more numbers or blocks of numbers, separated by commas

@MULT calculates the cumulative product of a set of numbers (List). List is a comma separated list of numbers, blocks containing numbers, or both. The numbers in this list are multiplied by each other. Blank cells and cells containing strings in any of the blocks passed as arguments are ignored.

Example

This formula calculates the cumulative product 3.4, 5.7, -1.2, and the numbers shown in the next figure.

@MULT(A6..C10,3.4,5.7,-1.2) = 30037.32

A	B	C	D

6	3.467	0.123

7	134.23	0.034	1.238

8	87.65	6.54%	0,987

9	-2.35	79.11

10	101.93	0.005

11

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@MULTINOMIAL

Format

@MULTINOMIAL(List)

List	=	one or more numbers to calculate multinomial of; each number in List must be ≥ 0

@MULTINOMIAL returns the multinomial of the values in List using this formula for @MULTINOMIAL(a,b,c):

If any value in List is negative, @MULTINOMIAL returns ERR.

Example

@MULTINOMIAL(3,4,5) = 27720

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@NBDAY
@NBDAY - Next Business Day

Format

@NBDAY(Date, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

Date	=	number representing a date

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@NBDAY returns the serial date number of the next business day after Date.

Examples

@NBDAY(@DATE(93,2,26)) = 34029 (March 1, 1993)

@NBDAY(@DATE(93,12,24),A7..C9,0,1) = 34329 (December 26, 1993), assuming that Saturdays and the dates in block A7..C9 are holidays.

See Also

@LBDAY

@PBDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@NEGBINOMDIST
@NEGBINOMDIST - Negative Binomial Distribution

Format

@NEGBINOMDIST(Failures, Successes, Prob)

Failures	=	number of failures

Successes	=	threshold of successes

Prob	=	probability of a success; 0 ≤ Prob ≤ 1

@NEGBINOMDIST returns the negative binomial distribution. Use @NEGBINOMDIST to determine the distribution of the number of failures you experience before achieving a given number of successes.

Example

A polling organization asks a sampling of voters if they favor Candidate A for reelection. Given that 55% of the city's voters favor Candidate A, this formula calculates the probability that the polling organization will contact 10 voters who do not favor her for reelection before contacting 1 voter who does favor her:

@NEGBINOMDIST(10,1,0.55) = 0.000187

See Also

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@NETPV
@NETPV - Net Present Value

Format

@NETPV(Discrate, Flows, <Initial>, <[Odd|Periods]>, <Simp>, <Pathdep>, <Filter>, <Start>, <End>)

Discrate	=	discount rate or block containing discount rates corresponding to block of cash flows

Flows	=	block containing cash flows

Initial	=	initial cash flow (the default is 0)

Odd|Periods	=	delay between initial and first cash flow in number of periods (the default is 1) or block containing lengths of periods between cash flows (the default is 1)

Simp	=	flag specifying how to discount:

0 = compounded discounting (default)

1 = mixed compounded and simple discounting

2 = simple discounting

Pathdep	=	flag specifying whether to apply path-dependent compounding to each flow; 0 = no path (default); 1 = path

Filter	=	flag specifying filter type: 0 = no filter (default); 1 = cashflow < Start; 2 = cashflow ≤ Start; 3 = cashflow > Start; 4 = cashflow ≥ Start; 5 = Start < cashflow < End; 6 = Start ≤ cashflow ≤ End

Start	=	a starting cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

End 	=	an ending cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

@NETPV computes the net present value of a stream of cash flows.

Example

A firm is considering the purchase of two machines. Machine A requires an initial outlay of $40,000 and produces a cash flow of $23,000 for three years. Machine B requires an outlay of $50,000 and produces a cash flow of $22,000 for four years. The following formulas calculate the net present values of both machines, using the data shown in the next figure and a discount rate of 12%. The results are useful for determining which machine is a better purchase:

  Machine A: @NETPV(0.12,A13..B14,B12) = $15,242.12

  Machine B: @NETPV(0.12,C13..D14,D12) = $16,821.69

A	B	C	D	E

11	Machine A Income	Machine B Income

12	Initial	($40,000)	Initial	($50,000)

13	3	$23,000	4	$22,000

14

The net present value of the flows associated with Machine B is greater, so it should be purchased.

See Also

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@NORMDIST
@NORMDIST - Normal Distribution

Format

@NORMDIST(X, Mean, SDev, Cum)

X	=	value at which to evaluate function

Mean	=	mean of the normal distribution

SDev	=	standard deviation of the normal distribution; must be > 0

Cum 	=	1 to return the cumulative normal distribution function; 0 (the default) to return the probability density function

@NORMDIST computes the normal distribution function. A normal distribution is one that is perfectly symmetrical about its mean, and its spread is determined by the value of the standard deviation. The normal distribution describes many statistical phenomena, including the distribution of population means.

@NORMDIST uses this formula to calculate the cumulative normal distribution function:

To calculate the probability mass function for a normal distribution, @NORMDIST uses this formula:

Examples

@NORMDIST(50,48,1.2,1) = 0.95221

@NORMDIST(50,48,1.2,0) = 0.082898

See Also

@NORMINV

@NORMSDIST

@NORMSINV

@STANDARDIZE

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@NORMINV
@NORMINV - Inverse of Normal Distribution

Format

@NORMINV(Prob, Mean, SDev)

Prob	=	probability corresponding to the normal distribution; 0 < Prob < 1

Mean	=	mean of the normal distribution

SDev	=	standard deviation of the normal distribution; must be > 0

@NORMINV returns the inverse of the cumulative normal distribution function.

Example

@NORMINV(0.95221,48,1.2) = 50

See Also

@NORMDIST

@NORMSDIST

@NORMSINV

@STANDARDIZE

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@NORMSDIST
@NORMSDIST - Standard Normal Distribution

Format

@NORMSDIST(X)

X	=	value at which to evaluate the function

@NORMSDIST returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The standard normal cumulative distribution function has a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1.

@NORMSDIST uses this formula:

Example

@NORMSDIST(1.66667) = 0.95221

See Also

@NORMDIST

@NORMINV

@NORMSINV

@STANDARDIZE

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@NORMSINV
@NORMSINV - Inverse of Standard Normal Distribution

Format

@NORMSINV(Prob)

Prob	=	probability corresponding to the normal distribution; must be > 0 and < 1

@NORMSINV returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The standard normal cumulative distribution function has a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1.

Example

@NORMSINV(0.95221) = 1.66667

See Also

@NORMDIST

@NORMINV

@NORMSDIST

@STANDARDIZE

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@NUMTOBIN
@NUMTOBIN - Decimal to Binary

Format

@NUMTOBIN(Decimal)

Decimal	=	decimal number to convert

@NUMTOBIN returns the binary string equivalent of a decimal number. To convert a negative number, precede Decimal with a minus sign.

Examples

@NUMTOBIN(10) = 1010

@NUMTOBIN(16) = 10000

@NUMTOBIN(30) = 11110

See Also

@NUMTOBIN64

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@NUMTOBIN64
@NUMTOBIN64 - Decimal to Binary

Format

@NUMTOBIN64(Decimal, <Places>)

Decimal	=	decimal number to convert

Places	=	number of characters to return; must be ≤ 64

@NUMTOBIN64 returns the binary string equivalent of a decimal number (up to 64 bits).

Examples

@NUMTOBIN64(10) = 1010

@NUMTOBIN64(10,5) = 01010

@NUMTOBIN64(123000) = 11110000001111000

@NUMTOBIN64(123000,7) = 1111000

See Also

@NUMTOBIN

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@NUMTOHEX64
@NUMTOHEX64 - Decimal to Hexadecimal

Format

@NUMTOHEX64(Decimal, <Places>)

Decimal	=	decimal number to convert

Places	=	number of characters to return; must be ≤ 16

@NUMTOHEX64 returns the hexadecimal string equivalent of a decimal number (up to 64 bits).

Examples

@NUMTOHEX64(10) = A

@NUMTOHEX64(10,2) = 0A

@NUMTOHEX64(123000) = 1E078

@NUMTOHEX64(1000000000) = 3B9ACA00

@NUMTOHEX64(1311768467463790340) = 123456789ABCDF04

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@NUMTOOCT
@NUMTOOCT - Decimal to Octal

Format

@NUMTOOCT(Decimal)

Decimal	=	decimal number to convert

@NUMTOOCT returns the octal string equivalent of a decimal number. To convert a negative number, precede Decimal with a minus sign.

Examples

@NUMTOOCT(10) = 12

@NUMTOOCT(16) = 20

@NUMTOOCT(30) = 36

See Also

@NUMTOOCT64

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@NUMTOOCT64
@NUMTOOCT64 - Decimal to Octal

Format

@NUMTOOCT64(Decimal, <Places>)

Decimal	=	decimal number to convert

Places	=	number of characters to return; must be ≤ 22

@NUMTOOCT64 returns the octal string equivalent of a decimal number (up to 64 bits).

Examples

@NUMTOOCT64(8) = 10

@NUMTOOCT64(10,3) = 012

@NUMTOOCT64(123000) = 360170

@NUMTOOCT64(123000,3) = 170

@NUMTOOCT64(2^63) = 1000000000000000000002

See Also

@NUMTOOCT

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@NWKDAY
@NWKDAY - Nth Weekday in Month

Format

@NWKDAY(N, Wkday, Month, Year, <AuxWkday>)

N	=	number from 1 to 5

Wkday	=	number from 1 (Saturday) to 7 (Friday)

Month	=	number from 1 (January) to 12 (December)

Year	=	number from 0 (1900) to 199 (2099) or a standard year like 1993

AuxWkday	=	auxiliary day of the week that must fall in the same week as Wkday; 0 for no auxiliary day or a number from 1 (Saturday) to 7 (Friday) indicating the auxiliary day (the default is 0)

@NWKDAY returns the serial date number for the date of the Nth occurrence of Wkday in Month. If there is not an Nth occurrence, @NWKDAY returns ERR.

You can use AuxWkday to specify another day that must fall in the same week and month as Wkdday; see the second example.

Examples

@NWKDAY(2,3,4,99) = 36262 (April 12, 1999), the date of the second Monday in April 1999.

@NWKDAY(1,7,12,93,3) = 34313 (December 10, 1993), the first Friday on which both the first Friday and a Monday fall in the same week of December 1993.

See Also

@LWKDAY

@WKDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@OCTTOBIN
@OCTTOBIN - Octal to Binary

Format

@OCTTOBIN(Oct)

Oct 	=	octal number to convert; denote negative numbers using a minus sign

@OCTTOBIN returns the binary string equivalent of an octal number.

Examples

@OCTTOBIN("12") = 1010

@OCTTOBIN("20") = 10000

@OCTTOBIN("36") = 11110

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@OCTTOHEX
@OCTTOHEX - Octal to Hexadecimal

Format

@OCTTOHEX(Oct)

Oct 	=	octal number to convert; denote negative numbers using a minus sign

@OCTTOHEX returns the hexadecimal string equivalent of an octal number.

Examples

@OCTTOHEX("12") = A

@OCTTOHEX("20") = 10

@OCTTOHEX("36") = 1E

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@OCTTONUM
@OCTTONUM - Octal to Decimal

Format

@OCTTONUM(Oct)

Oct 	=	octal number to convert; denote negative numbers using a minus sign

@OCTTONUM returns the decimal equivalent of an octal number.

Examples

@OCTTONUM("12") = 10

@OCTTONUM("20") = 16

@OCTTONUM("36") = 30

See Also

Entering Number Conversion @Functions

Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

Using @Functions


@ODD
@ODD - Round Up to Nearest Odd Integer

Format

@ODD(X)

X	=	value to round

@ODD rounds X up (away from zero) to the nearest odd integer. If X is already an odd integer, @ODD returns X.

Examples

@ODD(3.2) = 5

@ODD(3) = 3

@ODD(-3.2) = -5

See Also

@CEILING

@EVEN

@FLOOR

@INT

@MROUND

@ROUND

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@ODDFPRICE
@ODDFPRICE - Price of Bond with Odd First Period

Format

@ODDFPRICE(Settle, Maturity, Issue, FirstCpn, Coupon, Yield, <Redemption>, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Issue	=	number representing the issue date

FirstCpn	=	number representing the first coupon date

Coupon	=	coupon rate; must be ≥ 0

Yield	=	annual yield; 0 < Yield ≤ 1

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value (must be > 0; the default is 100)

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@ODDFPRICE returns the price per 100 face value of a bond having an odd (short or long) first period. In an odd first coupon period, the first coupon payment is a prorated multiple of a normal coupon payment.

Dates for @ODDFPRICE must follow this pattern:

  Issue < Settle < Maturity

  Issue < FirstCpn < Maturity

Example

This formula returns the price per 100 face value of a bond with the following terms: Settle is March 15, 1993, Maturity is is November 15, 1995, Issue is January 4, 1992, FirstCpn is May 15, 1993, Coupon is 8.5%, Yield is 8.7%, Redemption is 100, Freq 2, and Calendar is 0 (30/360).

@ODDFPRICE(@DATE(93,3,15),@DATE(95,11,15),@DATE(92,1,4),@DATE(93,5,15),0.085, 0.087,100,2,0) = 99.40933

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ODDFYIELD
@ODDFYIELD - Yield of Bond with Odd First Period

Format

@ODDFYIELD(Settle, Maturity, Issue, FirstCpn, Coupon, Price, <Redemption>, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Issue	=	number representing the issue date

FirstCpn	=	number representing the first coupon date

Coupon	=	coupon rate; must be ≥ 0

Price	=	price of the security; must be > 0

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value (must be > 0; the default is 100)

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@ODDFYIELD returns the yield of a security having an odd (short or long) first period. In an odd first coupon period, the first coupon payment is a prorated multiple of a normal coupon payment.

Dates for @ODDFYIELD must follow this pattern:

  Issue < Settle < Maturity

  Issue < FirstCpn < Maturity

Example

This formula calculates the yield for a security with the following terms: Settle is March 15, 1993, Maturity is November 15, 1995, Issue is January 4, 1992, FirstCpn is May 15, 1993, Coupon is 8.5%, Price is 100, Redemption is 100, Freq is 2, and Calendar is 0 (30/360).

@ODDFYIELD(@DATE(93,3,15),@DATE(95,11,15),@DATE(92,1,4),@DATE(93,5,15),0.085, 100,100,2,0) = 0.084487

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ODDLPRICE
@ODDLPRICE - Price of Bond with Odd Last Period

Format

@ODDLPRICE(Settle, Maturity, LastCpn, Coupon, Yield, <Redemption>, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

LastCpn	=	number representing the last coupon date; must be < Maturity

Coupon	=	coupon rate; must be ≥ 0

Yield	=	annual yield; 0 < Yield ≤ 1

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value (must be > 0; the default is 100)

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@ODDLPRICE returns the price per 100 face value of a bond having an odd (short or long) last period. In an odd last coupon period, the last coupon payment is a prorated multiple of a normal coupon payment.

Example

This formula calculates the price per 100 face value of a bond with the following terms: Settle is June 1, 1992, Maturity is December 15, 2012, LastCpn is September 15, 2012, Coupon is 7.5%, and Yield is 5.25%.

@ODDLPRICE(@DATE(92,6,1),@DATE(112,12,15),@DATE(112,9,15), 0.075,0.0525) = 128.0663

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ODDLYIELD
@ODDLYIELD - Yield of Bond with Odd Last Period

Format

@ODDLYIELD(Settle, Maturity, LastCpn, Coupon, Price, <Redemption>, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

LastCpn	=	number representing the last coupon date; must be < Maturity

Coupon	=	coupon rate; must be ≥ 0

Price	=	price; must be > 0

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value (must be > 0; the default is 100)

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@ODDLYIELD returns the yield of a bond having an odd (short or long) last period. In an odd last coupon period, the last coupon payment is a prorated multiple of a normal coupon payment.

Example

This formula calculates the yield of a bond with the following terms: Settle is June 1, 1992, Maturity is December 15, 2012, LastCpn is September 15, 2012, Coupon is 7.5%, and Price is 128.0663.

@ODDLYIELD(@DATE(92,6,1),@DATE(112,12,15),@DATE(112,9,15),0.075, 128.0663) = 0.0525

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ORB
@ORB - Binary OR

Format

@ORB(Binary1, <Binary2>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2	=	second binary number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary1 or Binary2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@ORB performs a bit-by-bit logical OR of each bit in Binary1 and Binary2. Any bit that is set to 1 in either Binary1 or Binary2 causes the resulting output bit to be set to 1.

If only one number is given, then @ORB performs an any-ones test, or OR reduction, on Binary1; @ORB returns 1 if any bits in Binary1 are set to 1; otherwise, it returns 0.

Examples

@ORB(10,1) = 11

@ORB(10,10) = 10

@ORB(10) = 1

@ORB(1100,1,5) = 01101

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@ORH
@ORH - Hexadecimal OR

Format

@ORH(Hex1, <Hex2>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex1 or Hex2, whichever is greater; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@ORH performs a bit-by-bit logical OR of each bit in Hex1 and Hex2. Any binary bit that is set to 1 in either Hex1 or Hex2 causes the resulting output bit to be set to 1.

If only one number is given, then @ORH performs an any-ones test, or OR reduction, on Hex1; @ORH returns 1 if any bits in Hex1 are set to 1; otherwise, it returns 0.

Examples

@ORH("A","F") = F

@ORH("A") = 1

@ORH("C","1",8) = 0D

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@PAGEINDEX

Format

@PAGEINDEX(Name)

Name	=	a string corresponding to the name of a page; must be enclosed in quotation marks

@PAGEINDEX returns the index number (from 0 to 255) for a specified page name. If no page names match the string Name, @PAGEINDEX returns ERR.

Note:	To return the index number for a page in another notebook, use @PAGEINDEX2.

Example

@PAGEINDEX("EXPENSES") = 0 (the index number for the page named EXPENSES is 0)

See Also

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@PAGEINDEX2

Format

@PAGEINDEX2(NotebookLink, Name)

NotebookLink	=	a reference to a page, cell, or block in another notebook (for example, [BUDGET]A:A1)

Name	=	a string corresponding to the name of a page; must be enclosed in quotation marks

@PAGEINDEX2 returns the index number (from 0 to 255) for a specified page name in a notebook specified by NotebookLink. If no page names match the string Name, @PAGEINDEX2 returns ERR.

Example

@PAGEINDEX2([BUDGET]A:A1,"EXPENSES") = 0 (the index number for the page named EXPENSES in notebook BUDGET is 0)

See Also

@PAGEINDEX

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@PAGENAME

Format

@PAGENAME(Index)

Index	=	a number from 0 to 255 inclusive

@PAGENAME returns the name of a page specified by Index. If there is not a name for the specified page, @PAGENAME returns ERR.

Note:	To return a page name from another notebook, use @PAGENAME2.

Example

@PAGENAME(3) = EXPENSES (the page with index number 3 is named EXPENSES)

See Also

@PAGENAMES2

@PAGENAMES

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@PAGENAME2

Format

@PAGENAME2(NotebookLink, Index)

NotebookLink	=	a reference to a page, cell, or block in another notebook (for example, [BUDGET]A:A1)

Index	=	a number from 0 to 255 inclusive

@PAGENAME2 returns the name of a page specified by Index in a notebook specified by NotebookLink. If there is not a name for the specified page, @PAGENAME2 returns ERR.

Example

@PAGENAME2([BUDGET]A:A1,3) = EXPENSES (the page with index number 3 in notebook BUDGET is named EXPENSES)

See Also

@PAGENAME

@PAGENAMES2

@PAGENAMES

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@PAGENAMES

Format

@PAGENAMES(<ExcludedNames>)

ExcludedNames	=	a optional argument specifying page names to exclude from the table; enclose each page name in quotation marks, and separate page names with a comma

@PAGENAMES returns a two-column table showing the page letters and corresponding page names for the active notebook. The left column of the table contains page letters (from A to IV), and the right column contains corresponding page names.

Because @PAGENAMES returns an array, it is automatically enclosed within an @ARRAY @function.

If the active notebook does not have any named pages, @PAGENAMES returns ERR.

Caution: Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each page name. Quattro Pro overwrites existing data in cells it uses for the table.

Note:	To return page names for another notebook, use @PAGENAMES2.

Example

The active notebook consists of five named pages, Qtr1, Qtr2, Qtr3, Qtr4, and Totals, whose page letters are A, B, C, D, and E, respectively.

@ARRAY(@PAGENAMES) = table in A1..B5 shown in the next figure

A	B

1	A	Qtr1

2	B	Qtr2

3	C	Qtr3

4	D	Qtr4

5	E	Totals

See Also

@ARRAY

@PAGENAME2

@PAGENAME

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@PAGENAMES2

Format

@PAGENAMES2(NotebookLink, <ExcludedNames>)

NotebookLink	=	a reference to a page, cell, or block in another notebook (for example, [BUDGET]A:A1)

ExcludedNames	=	a optional argument specifying page names to exclude from the table; enclose each page name in quotation marks, and separate page names with a comma

@PAGENAMES2 returns a two-column table showing the page letters and corresponding page names for the notebook specified by NotebookLink. The left column of the table contains page letters (from A to IV), and the right column contains corresponding page names.

Because @PAGENAMES2 returns an array, it is automatically enclosed within an @ARRAY @function.

If the active notebook does not have any named pages, @PAGENAMES2 returns ERR.

Caution: Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each page name. Quattro Pro overwrites existing data in cells it uses for the table.

Example

A notebook named BUDGET consists of five named pages, Qtr1, Qtr2, Qtr3, Qtr4, and Totals, whose page letters are A, B, C, D, and E, respectively.

@ARRAY(@PAGENAMES2([BUDGET]F:A1)) = table in A1..B5 shown in the next figure

A	B

1	A	Qtr1

2	B	Qtr2

3	C	Qtr3

4	D	Qtr4

5	E	Totals

See Also

@ARRAY

@PAGENAME2

@PAGENAME

@PAGENAMES

Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

Using @Functions


@PBDAY
@PBDAY - Prior Business Day

Format

@PBDAY(Date, <Holidays>, <Saturday>, <Sunday>)

Date	=	number representing a date

Holidays	=	block containing dates that are holidays or the date of a single holiday or 0 to indicate no holidays (the default is 0)

Saturday	=	0 to specify that Saturday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Saturday is a business day (the default is 0)

Sunday	=	0 to specify that Sunday is not a business day; 1 to specify that Sunday is a business day (the default is 0)

@PBDAY returns the serial date number of the first business day before Date.

Examples

@PBDAY(@DATE(93,3,1)) = 34026 (February 26, 1993)

@PBDAY(@DATE(93,12,26),A7..C9,0,1) = 34325 (December 22, 1993), assuming that Saturdays and the dates in the block A7..C9 are holidays.

See Also

@LBDAY

@NBDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Setting Holidays

Using @Functions


@PEARSON
@PEARSON - Correlation

Format

@PEARSON(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	array of independent values

Array2	=	array of dependent values

@PEARSON returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient, which measures the linear association of two data sets. Array1 and Array2 must have the same number of values. @PEARSON uses this formula:

A value of r near or equal to 0 implies little or no linear relationship exists between the two lists of numbers. A value of r near or equal to 1 or -1 indicates a very strong linear relationship.

Example

This example refers to cells in the next figure.

@PEARSON(B2..B16,C2..C16) = 0.989324

A	B	C

1	Date	Advertising	Sales

2	04/30/93	$435	$7,000

3	05/07/93	$400	$6,000

4	05/14/93	$505	$7,767

5	05/21/93	$470	$7,800

6	05/28/93	$610	$9,534

7	06/04/93	$540	$7,750

8	06/11/93	$575	$8,945

9	06/18/93	$715	$11,301

10	06/25/93	$645	$9,465

11	07/02/93	$680	$10,760

12	07/09/93	$785	$13,000

13	07/16/93	$750	$11,890

14	07/23/93	$855	$12,980

15	07/30/93	$820	$13,068

16	08/06/93	$890	$14,246

See Also

@INTERCEPT

@RSQ

@SLOPE

@STEC

@STEYX

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@PERCENTILE

Format

@PERCENTILE(Array, X)

Array	=	a numeric array or a block of values

X	=	a percentile value between 0 and 1, inclusive

@PERCENTILE returns a number from Array at the percentile indicated by X.

Examples

@PERCENTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},0) = 4

@PERCENTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},0.25) = 6.5

@PERCENTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},0.50) = 9.5

@PERCENTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},0.75) = 12.25

@PERCENTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},1) = 16

The examples above return values from percentile increments of 0.25, which are equal to quartiles. See @QUARTILE.

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@PERCENTRANK
@PERCENTRANK - Percentage Rank

Format

@PERCENTRANK(Array, X, <Digits>)

Array	=	a numeric array or a block of values

X	=	number to rank in Array; if X does not match a value in Array, @PERCENTRANK interpolates to return a percentage rank

Digits	=	number of significant digits for returned percentage value; must be ≥ 1 (the default is 3)

@PERCENTRANK returns the percentage rank of X in Array. Use @PERCENTRANK to see where a value stands within a list of values based on a percentage.

Example

This example refers to cells in the next figure. This formula returns the rank of a student's score among the scores of all test takers in the block A2..A11, where the student's score is in A4:

@PERCENTRANK(A2..A11,A4,3) = 0.222

@PERCENTRANK sample data

A	B

1	Test Scores

2	78

3	80

4	85

5	85

6	86

7	87

8	91

9	92

10	95

11	98

12

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@PERMUT
@PERMUT - Permutations

Format

@PERMUT(N, R)

N	=	number of different objects; n ≥ 0

R	=	number of objects taken at a time; R ≤ N

@PERMUT returns the total number of arrangements of objects taken R at a time from a set of N objects. The formula @PERMUT uses is:

@PERMUT is similar to @COMB except that it takes into account the order that objects are selected.

Example

Given 11 different colored marbles, this formula calculates how many different ways an ordered subset of five marbles can be constructed such that no two constructions contain the same five marbles in the same order. (Different constructions can contain the same five marbles, but they cannot share the same ordering.)

@PERMUT(11,5) = 55,440

See Also

@COMB

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@PIRATE
@PIRATE - Internal Rate of Return

Format

@PIRATE(Npv, Flows, <Initial>, <[Odd|Periods]>, <Simp>, <Pathdep>, <Guess>, <Precision>, <Maxiter>, <Filter>, <Start>, <End>)

Npv	=	net present value

Flows	=	block containing cash flows

Initial	=	initial cash flow (the default is 0)

Odd|Periods	=	delay between initial and first cash flow, in number of periods (the default is 1) or block containing lengths of periods between cash flows (the default is 1)

Simp	=	flag specifying how to discount:

0 = compounded discounting (default)

1 = mixed compounded and simple discounting

2 = simple discounting

Pathdep	=	flag specifying whether to apply path-dependent compounding to each flow; 0 = no path (default); 1 = path

Guess	=	IRR guess for numerical search (useful for locating multiple roots); must be > -100%; the default is 0.10

Precision	=	minimum required precision; Precision > 0; the default is 0.000001

Maxiter	=	maximum number of iterations for search; Maxiter > 0; the default is 50

Filter	=	flag specifying filter type: 0 = no filter (default); 1 = cashflow < Start; 2 = cashflow ≤ Start; 3 = cashflow > Start; 4 = cashflow ≥ Start; 5 = Start < cashflow < End; 6 = Start ≤ cashflow ≤ End

Start	=	a starting cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

End 	=	an ending cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

@PIRATE computes the internal rate of return for a stream of cash flows. It is similar to @IRR, but @PIRATE accommodates more complex cash flow structures.

The initial Guess for the discount rate is 10%. For some cash flow streams, particularly those with both positive and negative flows, multiple solutions are possible. By specifying a different Guess, it is possible to locate other solutions. If no solution exists, @PIRATE returns ERR.

The default value of Precision is 0.000001; smaller values need more search iterations and may require a larger value for Maxiter, which specifies the maximum number of iterations to use when attempting to find a solution. If the net present value of the cash flows does not converge within Precision to the target value specified by Npv (within Maxiter iterations), @PIRATE returns ERR.

Example

In the next figure, the stream consists of four flows, specified in block A12..A15. The time lengths of the periods preceding each flow are specified in block C12..C15. The Npv is $98.34. This formula calculates the internal rate of return, assuming compounded interest:

@PIRATE(B17,A12..A15,0,C12..C15) = 0.050041

A	B	C	D

11	Cash Flows	Periods

12	$4.50	0.3455

13	$4.50	1.2

14	$4.50	1

15	$104.50	1.5

16

17	npv	$98.34

18

See Also

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@POISSON
@POISSON - Poisson Probability Distribution

Format

@POISSON(N, Mean, Cum)

N	=	number of events; must be ≥ 0

Mean	=	expected numeric value for the mean over the distribution; must be > 0

Cum 	=	1 to return the cumulative Poisson probability distribution that the number of random events will be in the range from zero to N; 0 to return the Poisson probability mass function that the number of events will be N

@POISSON returns the Poisson probability distribution, that is, the probability that N number of events will occur over a given time period. The Poisson distribution function uses this formula:

with

r ≥ 0

Example

On average, Company Z receives 30 customer service phone calls per hour. What is the probability that Company Z will receive 35 calls in one hour?

@POISSON(35,30,0) = 0.045308

See Also

@EXPONDIST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@PRICE
@PRICE - Price of a Bond

Format

@PRICE(Settle, Maturity, Coupon, Yield, <Redemption>, <Freq>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Coupon	=	coupon rate; must be ≥ 0

Yield	=	annual yield; must be > 0 and ≤ 1

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value; must be > 0

Freq	=	frequency of coupon payments in number of payments per year (can be 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 12; the default is 2)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@PRICE returns the price per 100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest.

Example

An 8.85% bond that matures August 17, 2017 has a yield-to-maturity of 7.5% for September 22, 1993 settlement. This formula calculates the price of the bond:

@PRICE(@DATE(93,9,22),@DATE(117,8,17),0.0885,0.075) = 114.8902

See Also

Bond Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@PRICEDISC
@PRICEDISC - Price of a Bill

Format

@PRICEDISC(Settle, Maturity, Discount, <Redemption>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Discount	=	rate of discount; 0 ≤ Discount ≤ 1

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value (must be > 0; the default is 100)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@PRICEDISC returns the dollar price per 100 face value of a discounted security. The dollar price of a bill is its value less the applicable dollar discount. The discount is the product of the redemption value and the quoted discount rate, prorated for the number of days between settlement and maturity. @PRICEDISC uses this formula:

P = price

R = redemption

D = discount

M = maturity

S = settle

b = basis

 is the number of days over which the discount rate applies (360 or 365).

Example

This formula calculates the dollar price of a bill with the following terms: Settle is January 17, 1993, Maturity is August 15, 1993, Discount is 8.897%, Redemption is 100, and Calendar is 2 (actual/360).

@PRICEDISC(@DATE(93,1,17),@DATE(93,8,15),0.08897,100,2) = 94.81008

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@PRICEMAT
@PRICEMAT - Price of a CD

Format

@PRICEMAT(Settle, Maturity, Issue, Coupon, Yield, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Issue	=	number representing the issue date; must be < Settle

Coupon	=	coupon rate; 0 ≤ Coupon ≤ 1

Yield	=	annual yield; 0 ≤ Yield ≤ 1

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@PRICEMAT returns the price per 100 face value (not including accrued interest) of a security that pays interest at maturity. The invoice price of a security that pays interest at maturity is the sum of the quoted price and accrued interest between issue and settlement dates.

Example

This formula calculates the price per 100 face value of a security with the following terms: Settle is February 1, 1993, Maturity is April 1, 1993, Issue is January 2, 1993, Coupon is 10%, Yield is 10%, and Calendar is 2 (actual/360).

@PRICEMAT(@DATE(93,2,1),@DATE(93,4,1),@DATE(93,1,2),0.10,0.10,2) = 99.986

See Also

CD Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@PROB
@PROB - Probability

Format

@PROB(XData, ProbRange, LowerLimit, UpperLimit)

XData	=	values of X associated with the probabilities

ProbRange	=	a block or array of probability values associated with XData; each value in ProbRange must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1; the sum of ProbRange values must equal 1

LowerLimit	=	lower limit on the value for the desired probability

UpperLimit	=	upper limit on the value for the desired probability

@PROB determines the probability that XData values are between two limits. If XData and ProbRange do not have the same number of values, @PROB returns ERR.

Example

@PROB({10,13,15,18,25},{0.1,0.2,0.4,0.2,0.1},10,13) = 0.3

See Also

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@QUARTILE

Format

@QUARTILE(Array, X)

Array	=	a numeric array or a block of values

X	=	number signifying what quartile value to return:

0 = minimum value in Array

1 = 25th percentile

2 = 50th percentile (median)

3 = 75th percentile

4 = maximum value in Array

@QUARTILE returns a number from Array at the quartile indicated by X. You create quartiles of a data set by partitioning the values into four groups containing an equal number of values.

If the quartile falls between two discrete values in the list, a fractional value is determined using linear interpolation.

Examples

@QUARTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},0) = 4

@QUARTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},1) = 6.5

@QUARTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},2) = 9.5

@QUARTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},3) = 12.25

@QUARTILE({4,5,7,9,10,12,13,16},4) = 16

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@QUOTIENT
@QUOTIENT - Integer Portion of Quotient

Format

@QUOTIENT(X, Y)

X	=	value to divide

Y	=	nonzero value to divide x by

@QUOTIENT is similar to @INT; it returns the integer portion of X/Y. If Y is zero, @QUOTIENT returns ERR.

Example

@QUOTIENT(7,2) = 3

See Also

@INT

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@RANDBETWEEN
@RANDBETWEEN - Random Number Between N and M

Format

@RANDBETWEEN(N, M)

N	=	integer value that random number must be greater than or equal to

M	=	integer value that random number must be less than or equal to

@RANDBETWEEN returns a random number between N and M using a uniform distribution. @RANDBETWEEN returns a new random number each time you recalculate a notebook.

See Also

@RAND

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@RANK
@RANK - Rank of Number in List

Format

@RANK(Number, Array, Order)

Number	=	a number from Array

Array	=	one or more numeric or block values

Order	=	flag indicating how to sort the list of numbers: any nonzero value = ascending order; 0 = descending order

@RANK returns the rank of Number in Array in either ascending or descending order.

Examples

Theses examples refer to the next figure.

@RANK(B6,B2..B10,0) = 1

@RANK(B2,B2..B10,1) = 3

@RANK(B9,B2..B10,1) = 1

A	B	C	D

1

2	HJ	117

3	MW	122

4	KM	125

5	WC	109

6	AD	137

7	MS	119

8	DP	125

9	MS	106

10	DM	121

11

See Also

@PERCENTRANK

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@RECEIVED
@RECEIVED - Redemption Value of a Bill

Format

@RECEIVED(Settle, Maturity, Investment, Discount, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date; must be > Settle

Investment	=	amount invested; must be > 0

Discount	=	rate of discount; 0 ≤ Discount ≤ 1

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@RECEIVED returns the redemption value (the amount received after maturity) of a discount security. @RECEIVED uses this formula:

R = redemption

I = investment

D = discount

M = maturity

S = settle

b = basis

 is the number of days over which the discount rate quote applies (360 or 365).

Example

This formula calculates the redemption value of a bill with the following terms: Settle is January 17, 1995, Maturity is June 15, 1995, Investment is $1,000,000, Discount is 7.922%, and Calendar is 2 (actual/360).

@RECEIVED(@DATE(95,1,17),@DATE(95,6,15),1000000,0.07922,2) = $1,033,899.79

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@RSQ
@RSQ - r-Squared Value of Linear Regression

Format

@RSQ(KnownX, KnownY)

KnownX	=	independent range of values

KnownY	=	dependent range of values

@RSQ returns [image], the square of the coefficient of correlation of the linear regression line through the data points in the arrays KnownX and KnownY. KnownX and KnownY must have the same number of values. Use @RSQ to test the linear relationship of KnownX and KnownY and to show the proportion of the variance of KnownY that can be attributed to a variance in KnownX. The [image] statistic measures the fraction of the variance explained by the regression equation.

Example

@RSQ({7,8,5,9,7,2},{10,5,4,9,6,7}) = 0.063962

See Also

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SCMARG
@SCMARG - Discount Scenario Margin

Format

@SCMARG(Npv, Discrate, Flows, <Initial>, <[Odd|Periods]>, <Simp>, <Pathdep>, <Guess>, <Precision>, <Maxiter>, <Filter>, <Start>, <End>)

Npv 	=	net present value

Discrate	=	discount rate or block containing discount rates corresponding to block of cash flows

Flows	=	block containing cash flows

Initial	=	initial cash flow (the default is 0)

Odd|Periods	=	delay between initial and first cash flow, in number of periods (the default is 1) or block containing lengths of periods between cash flows (the default is 1)

Simp	=	flag specifying how to discount:

0 = compounded discounting (default)

1 = mixed compounded and simple discounting

2 = simple discounting

Pathdep	=	flag specifying whether to apply path-dependent compounding to each flow; 0 = no path (default); 1 = path

Guess	=	initial margin for numerical search (useful for locating multiple roots) (must be > -100%; the default is 0)

Precision	=	minimum required precision (must be > 0; the default is 0.000001)

Maxiter	=	maximum number of iterations for search (must be > 0; the default is 50)

Filter	=	flag specifying filter type: 0 = no filter (default); 1 = cashflow < Start; 2 = cashflow ≤ Start; 3 = cashflow > Start; 4 = cashflow ≥ Start; 5 = Start < cashflow < End; 6 = Start ≤ cashflow ≤ End

Start	=	a starting cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

End 	=	an ending cash flow amount to compare against individual flows

@SCMARG computes the discount scenario margin, a value that must be added to the Discrate series so that the net present value of the cash flow series equals Npv. An initial guess is made for the margin and is refined until the difference between the computed net present value and Npv is less than Precision. If @SCMARG does not find a solution within Maxiter search iterations, it returns ERR.

If Discrate is a number, @SCMARG returns the difference between the internal rate of return and Discrate. If Discrate is a block of discount rates, the margin is the amount to add to each discount rate to make the net present value equal Npv.

Example

A stream of cash flows is indexed off the current London InterBank Offer Rate (LIBOR). The time distances between flows is specified in block C11..C15. The first flow is 1 period away, the second is 1.5 periods after that, and so on. If the current LIBOR is 8.5%, this formula calculates the margin to LIBOR if the net present value is $167,000 and compounded discounting is used:

@SCMARG(167000,0.085,A11..A15,0,C11..C15) = 0.02599

A	B	C	D	E

10	Cash Flows	Time Periods

11	25000	1

12	35000	1.5

13	23000	1.2

14	50000	1

15	134500	1.3

16

See Also

Cash Flow Financial @Functions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Using @Functions


@SERIESSUM
@SERIESSUM - Sum of a Power Series

Format

@SERIESSUM(X, N, M, Coefficients)

X	=	value in the power series

N	=	initial power to raise X to

M	=	increment of the power N for each successive term in the power series

Coefficients	=	a block or array of one or more numeric values by which each power of X is multiplied; the number of values in Coefficients sets the number of terms in the power series

@SERIESSUM returns the sum of a power series based on this formula for @SERIESSUM(X,N,M,A):

Example

If the block A1..A3 contains the values 1, 2, and 3, then @SERIESSUM(0.5,1,2,A1..A3) = 0.84375

See Also

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHLB
@SHLB - Binary Shift Left

Format

@SHLB(Binary, <ShiftBits>, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Binary	=	binary number

ShiftBits	=	number of bits to shift; 0 ≤ ShiftBits ≤ 64; the default is 1

BitIn	=	binary bit inserted during the shift (can be 0, 1, "S" or "I"; "S" = same as the least significant bit before shifting; "I" = inverse of the least significant bit before shifting; the default is 0)

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary; must be ≤ 64

@SHLB shifts the given binary number left by ShiftBits bits. @SHLB inserts the BitIn bit at the least significant bit (LSB).

Examples

@SHLB(1000,1,0,5) = 10000

@SHLB(1000,1,1,6) = 010001

@SHLB(1000,2,1,6) = 100011

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHLBO
@SHLBO - Overflow of Binary Shift Left

Format

@SHLBO(Binary, <Bits>)

Binary	=	binary number

Bits	=	number of input binary digits used during the shift operation; if omitted, Bits = the number of bits in Binary; must be ≤ 64

@SHLBO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the given binary number after it has been shifted left by one bit.

An overflow occurs when a bit is shifted out of the word size specified by Bits. For example, if Binary = 1000 and Bits = 4, shifting the number left one bit results in 0000 with an overflow of 1 bit shifted to the fifth place not shown.

Examples

@SHLBO(1000) = 1

@SHLBO(100,4) = 0

@SHLBO(1100,4) = 1

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHLH
@SHLH - Hexadecimal Shift Left

Format

@SHLH(Hex, <ShiftBits>, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number

ShiftBits	=	number of bits to shift; 0 ≤ ShiftBits ≤ 64; the default is 1

BitIn	=	binary bit inserted during the shift (can be 0, 1, "S" or "I"; "S" = same as the least significant bit before shifting; "I" = inverse of the least significant bit before shifting; the default is 0)

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@SHLH shifts the given hexadecimal number left by ShiftBits bits. @SHLH inserts the BitIn bit at the least significant bit (LSB).

Examples

@SHLH("41",1) = 82

@SHLH("41",1,0,12) = 082

@SHLH("C",1,1,12) = 019

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHLHO
@SHLHO - Overflow of Hexadecimal Shift Left

Format

@SHLHO(Hex, <Bits>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number

Bits	=	number of equivalent input binary digits used during the shift operation; if omitted, Bits = the number of bits in Hex; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@SHLHO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the given hexadecimal number after it has been shifted left by one bit.

An overflow occurs when a bit is shifted out of the word size specified by Bits. For example, if the binary equivalent of Hex = 1000 and Bits = 4, shifting the number left one bit results in 0000 with an overflow of 1 bit shifted to the fifth place not shown.

Examples

@SHLHO("A") = 1

@SHLHO("A",5) = 0

@SHLHO("C",4) = 1

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHRB
@SHRB - Binary Shift Right

Format

@SHRB(Binary, <ShiftBits>, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Binary	=	binary number

ShiftBits	=	number of bits to shift; 0 ≤ ShiftBits ≤ 64; the default is 1

BitIn	=	binary bit inserted during the shift (can be 0, 1, "S" or "I"; "S" = same as the most significant bit before shifting; "I" = inverse of the most significant bit before shifting; the default is "S")

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary; must be ≤ 64

@SHRB returns the result of shifting the given binary number right by ShiftBits bits. @SHRB inserts the BitIn bit at the most significant bit (MSB).

Examples

@SHRB(1000,1) = 1100

@SHRB(1000,1,1,5) = 10100

@SHRB(1100,1,0,6) = 000110

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHRBO
@SHRBO - Overflow of Binary Shift Right

Format

@SHRBO(Binary, <Bits>)

Binary	=	binary number

Bits	=	number of input binary digits used during the shift operation; if omitted, Bits = the number of bits in Binary; must be ≤ 64

@SHRBO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the given binary number after it has been shifted right by one bit.

An overflow occurs when a bit is shifted out of the word size specified by Bits. For example, if Binary = 1001 and Bits = 4, shifting the number right one bit results in 0100 with an overflow of 1 bit shifted off the right side.

Examples

@SHRBO(1001) = 1

@SHRBO(10010,4) = 0

@SHRBO(1100,4) = 0

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHRH
@SHRH - Hexadecimal Shift Right

Format

@SHRH(Hex, <ShiftBits>, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number

ShiftBits	=	number of bits to shift; 0 ≤ ShiftBits ≤ 64; the default is 1

BitIn	=	binary bit inserted during the shift (can be 0, 1, "S" or "I"; "S" = same as the most significant bit before shifting; "I" = inverse of the most significant bit before shifting; the default is "S")

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@SHRH returns the result of shifting the given hexadecimal number right by ShiftBits bits. @SHRH inserts the BitIn bit at the most significant bit (MSB).

Examples

@SHRH("41",1,1) = A0

@SHRH("41",1,1,4) = 8

@SHRH("C",1,0,12) = 006

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SHRHO
@SHRHO - Overflow of Hexadecimal Shift Right

Format

@SHRHO(Hex, <Bits>)

Hex 	=	hexadecimal number

Bits	=	number of equivalent input binary digits used during the shift operation; if omitted, Bits = the number of bits in Hex; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@SHRHO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the given hexadecimal number after it has been shifted right by one bit.

An overflow occurs when a bit is shifted out of the word size specified by Bits. For example, if the binary equivalent of Hex = 1001 and Bits = 4, shifting the number right one bit results in 0100 with an overflow of 1 bit shifted off the right side.

Examples

@SHRHO("A") = 0

@SHRHO("B",5) = 1

@SHRHO("C",4) = 0

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SKEW
@SKEW - Skewness of a Distribution

Format

@SKEW(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

@SKEW returns the skewness of a distribution. Skewness characterizes the degree of asymmetry of a distribution around its mean value. Use @SKEW when you want a non-dimensional quantity to measure the "shape" of a distribution rather than its moment, which is a measure in the same units as the elements of the distribution. @SKEW finds the skewness coefficient using this formula:

A positive result means that the distribution is skewed to the right (the median is less than the mean). A negative result means that the distribution is skewed to the left (the median is greater than the mean). @SKEW returns 0 when the distribution is symmetrical around its mean.

If there are less than three data points in List, or if the standard deviation is zero, @SKEW returns ERR.

Example

@SKEW(4,5,8,5,7,12,6,9,2,5) = 0.685055

See Also

@KURT

@STD

@STDS

@VAR

@VARS

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SLOPE
@SLOPE - Slope of the Linear Regression

Format

@SLOPE(KnownY, KnownX)

KnownY	=	dependent range of values

KnownX	=	independent range of values

@SLOPE returns the slope of the linear regression line through data points in x and y. The slope (the rate of change along the regression line) is the distance between the y values of two points, divided by the distance between their respective x values.

@SLOPE uses this formula:

Example

@SLOPE({1,2,3,4,5,6},{4,8,12,16,20,24}) = 0.25

See Also

@INTERCEPT

@PEARSON

@RSQ

@STEYX

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SMALLEST
@SMALLEST - Nth Smallest number

Format

@SMALLEST(Array, N)

Array	=	a numeric array or a block of values

N	=	number that indicates the rank in size from the data set Array; must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to the number of values in Array

@SMALLEST finds the Nth smallest number in Array. Use @SMALLEST to determine a value's rank in a data set from the bottom of that set.

Note:	If there are duplicates in Array, @SMALLEST treats them as separate numbers.

Example

@SMALLEST({3,45,8,4,7,6,13,2,87,23,58,14,17,21},5) = 7

See Also

@LARGEST

@PERCENTILE

@PERCENTRANK

@QUARTILE

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SQRTPI
@SQRTPI - Square Root of pi∗X

Format

@SQRTPI(X)

X	=	value ≥ 0 to multiply by pi

@SQRTPI returns the square root of (@PI * X). If X is negative, @SQRTPI returns ERR.

Example

@SQRTPI(2) = 2.506628

See Also

@PI

@SQRT

Mathematical @Functions

Using @Functions


@STANDARDIZE
@STANDARDIZE - Normalize Values from a Distribution

Format

@STANDARDIZE(X, Mean, SDev)

X	=	number to normalize

Mean	=	arithmetic mean of a distribution

SDev	=	standard deviation of a distribution

@STANDARDIZE normalizes the values from a distribution. A standard normal cumulative distribution assumes a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1. Use @STANDARDIZE to normalize values for use with other statistical @functions that require normally distributed variables (such as @ZTEST).

@STANDARDIZE uses this formula:

Example

@STANDARDIZE(2.6,1.6,0.5) = 2

See Also

@NORMDIST

@NORMINV

@NORMSDIST

@NORMSINV

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@STEC
@STEC - Standard Error of Regression Coefficients

Format

@STEC(KnownY, KnownX)

KnownY	=	dependent range of 3 or more values

KnownX	=	independent range of 3 or more values

@STEC computes the standard error of the regression coefficients.

@STEC is equal to (StdError divided by Std(x)) times

where StdError is:

and

v = values

@STEC returns ERR if KnownY and KnownX do not have the same number of values, or if KnownY and KnownX have less than 3 values each.

Example

This formula calculates the standard error of regression coefficients for range y (3,7,4,5) in block A1..A4 and range x (3.4,5.3,6,8) in block B1..B4:

@STEC(A1..A4,B1..B4) = 0.593769

See Also

@INTERCEPT

@PEARSON

@RSQ

@SLOPE

@STEYX

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@STEYX
@STEYX - Standard Error of Linear Regression

Format

@STEYX(KnownY, KnownX)

KnownY	=	dependent range of 3 or more values

KnownX	=	independent range of 3 or more values

@STEYX returns the standard error of a linear regression. The standard error is the deviation of the observed y values from the linear combinations. @STEYX uses this formula:

If KnownY or KnownX have a different number of data points, or if the variance of KnownX = 0, @STEYX returns ERR.

Example

@STEYX({4,6,7,9,8},{7,9,12,9,5}) = 2.215697

See Also

@INTERCEPT

@PEARSON

@RSQ

@SLOPE

@STEC

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@STKOPT
@STKOPT - Stock Options

Format

@STKOPT(OptCode, OptPrem, UndStkValue, Date, Load, CmdString)

OptCode	=	option code string with expiration month, strike-price, and put or call symbol enclosed in quotation marks (for example, "MAY 22.5 C"); the strike price can be a decimal or fractional number, but not both (for example, it can be 11/32 or 1.625, but not 2 3/8); valid month codes are JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JUL, AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, and DEC; you can add spaces between month, strike-price, and Put or Call symbol; the total string (not including quotation marks) must be 20 characters or less.

OptPrem	=	option premium or price

UndStkValue	=	value or price of the underlying stock

Date	=	serial date number between 2 (January 1, 1900) and 73050 (December 31, 2099) representing the date on which to evaluate the stock option

Load	=	load or commission involved in sale or purchase

CmdString	=	command string enclosed in quotation marks specifying the operations to perform; cannot exceed 20 characters (not including quotes); see the table below for a list of valid CmdString characters

@STKOPT calculates values useful in evaluating stock options. It takes as input the basic information for the option, such as the option code (expiration month, strike price, and call or put indicator), the premium, the underlying value, the date at which the option is evaluated, and the associated "load" or fee. It then calculates a value such as the expiration date of the option, the number of calendar days remaining until the option expires, or the intrinsic value of the option.

If the expiration month specified in OptCode is earlier in the year than the month specified by Date, the expiration date of the option occurs in the following year.

Note:	@STKOPT is valid only for options whose duration is 1 year or less

Load should be in the same units as OptPrem. You can use the Load argument as a general purpose value to incorporate any factor in the calculated result. For example, if you prefer a different annualization, such as 360/D, set Load to 360 and replace "A" in the CmdString formula with "L/D".

@STKOPT calculates output values according to a formula that you specify in the CmdString argument. The formula may include the following characters.

Character	Description

A	Annualization ratio (365.25/D); can be used to adjust percentages to equivalent yearly percentages

D	Days from DateTimeNum until expiration of option specified

E	Expiration date code of option specified

I	Intrinsic value of option

L	Load or fee to purchase or sell the option; can also be a general-purpose numeric constant

P	Premium or market value of the option

S	Strike or exercise price of the option

T	Time value of the option

U	Underlying value or price of the stock

+	Addition operator

-	Subtraction operator

*	Multiplication operator

/	Division operator

@STKOPT evaluates the command string formula from left to right with no operator precedence or associativity. The command string can be upper- or lowercase. The next table shows some examples of command strings.

String	Result

"D"	Outputs the number of days until option expiration

"I"	Outputs the intrinsic value

"L/P"	Outputs the ratio of the Load divided by the Premium

"T/U*A"	Time Value / Underlying value * Annualization ratio

"P-L/U*A"	((Premium - Load) / Underlying value) * Annualization ratio

For a call, the intrinsic value is the underlying value minus the strike price or zero, whichever is greater. For a put, the intrinsic value is the strike price minus the underlying value or zero, whichever is greater. The time value is equal to the premium minus the intrinsic value. The load is an expense for either the buyer or the seller. A positive time value is considered to be an expense for the buyer and income for the seller of the option.

Examples

A November put-option on stock of company XYZ has a strike price of $65 and a premium of $2.625, with an average load of $.12 per share. XYZ's stock is currently trading at $67 per share, and the date of evaluation is June 8, 1993.

Expiration date:

@STKOPT("NOV65P",2.625,67,@DATE(93,6,8),.12,"E") = 34293 (November 20, 1993)

Number of days to expiration:

@STKOPT("NOV65P",2.625,67,@DATE(93,6,8),.12,"D") = 165

Time value/stock price:

@STKOPT("NOV65P",2.625,67,@DATE(93,6,8),.12,"T/U") = 0.039179

Percentage load:

@STKOPT("NOV65P",2.625,67,@DATE(93,6,8),.12,"L/P") = 0.045714

See Also

@FEETBL

Stock Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUBB
@SUBB - Subtract Binary Numbers

Format

@SUBB(Binary1, Binary2, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2	=	second binary number

BitIn	=	input borrow bit (either 0 or 1); the default is 0

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary1 or Binary2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@SUBB returns the difference of two binary numbers.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @SUBB subtracts one extra bit from the result.

Examples

@SUBB(100,100,0,1) = 0

@SUBB(1000,100,1,3) = 011

@SUBB(1100,1,1,5) = 01010

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUBBO
@SUBBO - Overflow of Binary Subtraction

Format

@SUBBO(Binary1, Binary2, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2	=	second binary number

BitIn	=	input borrow bit (either 0 or 1); the default is 0

Bits	=	number of input binary digits used for subtraction; if omitted, Bits = the number of bits in Binary1 or Binary2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@SUBBO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the difference of two binary numbers. An overflow occurs when a bit is borrowed from outside the word size specified by Bits. For example, if Binary1 = 10 and Binary2 = 110, the difference of the two numbers is 100 with 1 borrow bit in the fourth place not shown.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @SUBBO subtracts one extra bit from the difference of the two numbers before returning the overflow.

Examples

@SUBBO(1000,1111) = 1

@SUBBO(1000,111,1,5) = 0

@SUBBO(1100,1101,1,4) = 1

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUBH
@SUBH - Subtract Hexadecimal Numbers

Format

@SUBH(Hex1, Hex2, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

BitIn	=	input borrow bit (either 0 or 1); the default is 0

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex1 or Hex2, whichever is greater; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@SUBH returns the difference of two hexadecimal numbers.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @SUBH subtracts one extra bit from the result.

Examples

@SUBH("1000","100",1) = 0EFF

@SUBH("1000","100",0) = 0F00

@SUBH("C","1",1,8) = 0A

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUBHO
@SUBHO - Overflow of Hexadecimal Subtraction

Format

@SUBHO(Hex1, Hex2, <BitIn>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

BitIn	=	input borrow bit (either 0 or 1); the default is 0

Bits	=	number of input binary digits used for subtraction; if omitted, Bits = the number of bits in Hex1 or Hex2, whichever is greater; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@SUBHO returns the overflow bit (either 0 or 1) of the difference of two hexadecimal numbers. An overflow occurs when a bit is borrowed from outside the word size specified by Bits. For example, if the binary equivalent for Hex1 and Hex2 are 10 and 110, respectively, the difference of the two numbers is 100 with 1 borrow bit in the fourth place not shown.

Use two's complement notation to represent negative numbers. If BitIn is 1, @SUBHO subtracts one extra bit from the difference of the two numbers before returning the overflow.

Examples

@SUBHO(8,"F") = 1

@SUBHO(8,7,1,5) = 0

@SUBHO("C","D",1,4) = 1

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMSQ
@SUMSQ - Sum of the Squares

Format

@SUMSQ(List)

List	=	one or more numeric or block values

@SUMSQ returns the sum of the squares of the values in List.

Example

@SUMSQ(2,3)

See Also

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMX2MY2

@SUMX2PY2

@SUMXMY2

@SUMXPY2

@SUMXY

@SUMXY2

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMX2MY2
@SUMX2MY2 - Sum of the Difference of the Squares

Format

@SUMX2MY2(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@SUMX2MY2 returns the sum of the difference of the squares of the corresponding values in Array1 and Array2.

@SUMX2MY2 uses this formula:

If Array1 and Array2 have a different number of values, @SUMX2MY2 ignores extra values in the larger array.

Example

@SUMX2MY2({3,4,5},{2,3,4}) = (9 - 4) + (16 - 9) + (25 - 16) = 21

See Also

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMSQ

@SUMX2PY2

@SUMXMY2

@SUMXPY2

@SUMXY2

@SUMXY

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMX2PY2
@SUMX2PY2 - Sum of the Sum of Squares

Format

@SUMX2PY2(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@SUMX2PY2 returns the sum of the sum of squares of the corresponding values in Array1 and Array2.

@SUMX2PY2 uses this formula:

If Array1 and Array2 have a different number of values, @SUMX2PY2 ignores extra values in the larger array.

Example

@SUMX2PY2({3,4,5},{2,3,4}) = (9 + 4) + (16 + 9) + (25 + 16) = 79

See Also

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMSQ

@SUMX2MY2

@SUMXMY2

@SUMXPY2

@SUMXY2

@SUMXY

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMXMY2
@SUMXMY2 - Sum of the Squares of the Differences

Format

@SUMXMY2(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@SUMXMY2 returns the sum of the squares of the differences of corresponding values in Array1 and Array2.

@SUMXMY2 uses this formula:

If Array1 and Array2 have a different number of values, @SUMXMY2 ignores extra values in the larger array.

Example

@SUMXMY2({3,4,5},{2,3,4})
See Also

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMSQ

@SUMX2MY2

@SUMX2PY2

@SUMXPY2

@SUMXY2

@SUMXY

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMXPY2
@SUMXPY2 - Sum of the Squares of the Sums

Format

@SUMXPY2(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@SUMXPY2 returns the sum of the squares of the sums of the corresponding values in Array1 and Array2.

@SUMXPY2 uses this formula:

If Array1 and Array2 have a different number of values, @SUMXPY2 ignores extra values in the larger array.

Example

@SUMXPY2({3,4,5},{2,3,4})
See Also

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMSQ

@SUMX2MY2

@SUMX2PY2

@SUMXMY2

@SUMXY2

@SUMXY

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMXY
@SUMXY - Sum of the Products

Format

@SUMXY(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@SUMXY returns the sum of the products of the corresponding numbers in Array1 and Array2.

@SUMXY uses this formula:

If Array1 and Array2 have a different number of values, @SUMXY ignores extra values in the larger array.

Example

@SUMXY({3,4,5},{2,3,4}) = (3 * 2) + (4 * 3) + (5 * 4) = 38

See Also

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMSQ

@SUMX2MY2

@SUMX2PY2

@SUMXMY2

@SUMXPY2

@SUMXY2

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@SUMXY2
@SUMXY2 - Sum of the Squares of the Products

Format

@SUMXY2(Array1, Array2)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

@SUMXY2 returns the sum of the squares of the products of the corresponding values in Array1 and Array2.

@SUMXY2 uses this formula:

If Array1 and Array2 have a different number of values, @SUMXY2 ignores extra values in the larger array.

Example

@SUMXY2({3,4,5},{2,3,4})
See Also

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMSQ

@SUMX2MY2

@SUMX2PY2

@SUMXMY2

@SUMXPY2

@SUMXY

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@TBILLEQ
@TBILLEQ - Bond Equivalent Yield of a Treasury Bill

Format

@TBILLEQ(Settle, Maturity, Discount)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Discount	=	rate of discount expressed as a decimal fraction; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

@TBILLEQ returns the bond equivalent yield (also called coupon equivalent yield) of a Treasury bill. Use @TBILLEQ to compare the yields of Treasury bills and bonds.

Example

This formula calculates the bond equivalent yield of a bill quoted at 9.35% with a maturity date of October 16, 1996 for settlement on April 9, 1996:

@TBILLEQ(@DATE(96,4,9),@DATE(96,10,16),0.0935) = 0.099524

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@TBILLPRICE
@TBILLPRICE - Price of a Treasury Bill

Format

@TBILLPRICE(Settle, Maturity, Discount)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Discount	=	rate of discount expressed as a decimal fraction; must be ≥ 0 and ≤ 1

@TBILLPRICE calculates the price per 100 face value of a Treasury bill. The dollar price of a Treasury bill is its face value less the applicable dollar discount. @TBILLPRICE uses this formula:

P = price

D = discount

M = Maturity

S = Settle

Example

This formula calculates the price per 100 face value for a bill maturing August 1, 1996 and trading at 9.14% for January 3, 1996 settlement:

@TBILLPRICE(@DATE(96,1,3),@DATE(96,8,1),0.0914) = 94.64294

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@TBILLYIELD
@TBILLYIELD - Yield of a Treasury Bill

Format

@TBILLYIELD(Settle, Maturity, Price)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Price	=	the Treasury bill's price per 100 face value

@TBILLYIELD returns the yield of a Treasury bill.

Example

This formula calculates the yield of a bill maturing August 1, 1996 and trading at a price of 94.64294 for January 3, 1996 settlement:

@TBILLYIELD(@DATE(96,1,3),@DATE(96,8,1),94.64294) = 0.096574

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@TDIST
@TDIST - Student's t-Distribution

Format

@TDIST(X, DegFreedom, Tails)

X	=	value at which to evaluate the distribution

DegFreedom	=	integer number of degrees of freedom; must be ≥ 1

Tails	=	1 to return a one-tailed distribution; 2 to return a two-tailed distribution

@TDIST returns the one-tailed or two-tailed Student's t-distribution, which is the probability that a given realization will be greater than X. Use the t-distribution when comparing the means of small samples. The single-tailed t-distribution yields a probability of deviation in a single direction from the mean; a two-tailed t-distribution yields a probability of deviation in two directions.

If DegFreedom is not an integer, @TDIST rounds it to the nearest integer.

Example

@TDIST(2.228139,10,2) = 0.05

See Also

@TINV

@TTEST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@TINV
@TINV - Inverse of Student's t-Distribution

Format

@TINV(Prob, DegFreedom)

Prob	=	cumulative probability value; 0 ≤ Prob ≤ 1

DegFreedom	=	number of degrees of freedom

@TINV returns the inverse of the t-distribution. Use the t-distribution when comparing the means of small samples.

Example

@TINV(0.05,10) = 2.228139

See Also

@TDIST

@TTEST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@TRIMMEAN
@TRIMMEAN - Mean, with Fraction Excluded

Format

@TRIMMEAN(Array, Fraction)

Array	=	numeric array or a block of values

Fraction	=	decimal fraction of data points to exclude; 0 ≤ Fraction < 1

@TRIMMEAN computes the mean of a data set, with a fraction of the points excluded. @TRIMMEAN is helpful when you want to exclude outlying values from your analysis. Because the function excludes an equal number of data points from the top and bottom of the data set, it rounds the number of excluded data points down to the nearest multiple of 2.

Example

@TRIMMEAN({3,6,7,8,10,11,11,14,15,20},0.2) = 10.25

See Also

Descriptive Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@TTEST
@TTEST - Probability of Student's t-Test

Format

@TTEST(Array1, Array2, Tails, Type)

Array1	=	first array of numeric values

Array2	=	second array of numeric values

Tails	=	1 to return a one-tailed test; 2 to return a two-tailed test

Type	=	a discrete variable specifying the type of test to conduct; 1 = a paired test; 2 = a two-sample equal variance test; 3 = a two-sample unequal variance test

@TTEST returns the probability associated with the Student's t-Test. Use @TTEST to test the means of two small samples.

If Array1 and Array2 have a different number of data points, @TTEST returns ERR.

Example

@TTEST({62,77,73,69,54,67,59,76},{64,80,72,53,69,63,76,74},2,2) = 0.68502

See Also

@TDIST

@TINV

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@WEIBULL
@WEIBULL - Weibull Distribution (Mean Time to Failure)

Format

@WEIBULL(X, Alpha, Beta, Cum)

X	=	function parameter to evaluate

Alpha	=	parameter to the distribution; must be > 0

Beta	=	parameter to the distribution; must be > 0

Cum	=	a numeric value (0 or 1) indicating whether to use the cumulative distribution function (1) or the probability density function (0)

@WEIBULL returns the Weibull distribution, which is used to calculate the mean time to failure of a device. If Alpha = 1, @WEIBULL returns the same value as @EXPONDIST with Lambda = 1/Beta.

Examples

@WEIBULL(20,2,15,1) = 0.830987

@WEIBULL(20,2,15,0) = 0.030047

See Also

@EXPONDIST

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


@WKDAY
@WKDAY - Number of the Weekday

Format

@WKDAY(Date)

Date	=	number representing a date to check

@WKDAY returns a number (from 1 for Saturday to 7 for Friday) representing the day Date falls on.

Example

@WKDAY(@DATE(95,6,22)) = 6 (Thursday), since June 22, 1995 falls on a Thursday.

See Also

@LWKDAY

@NWKDAY

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@XORB
@XORB - Binary Exclusive OR

Format

@XORB(Binary1, <Binary2>, <Bits>)

Binary1	=	first binary number

Binary2	=	second binary number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Binary1 or Binary2, whichever is greater; must be ≤ 64

@XORB performs a bit-by-bit logical exclusive OR of each bit in Binary1 and Binary2. Use @XORB to set bits to 1 if the bits being compared in Binary1 and Binary2 are different.

If only one number is given, then @XORB performs an exclusive OR operation on the bits in Binary1; this parity test, or XOR reduction, returns 1 or 0 based on successive bit comparisons.

Examples

@XORB(10,1) = 11

@XORB(11,10) = 01

@XORB(11) = 0

@XORB(1100,110,5) = 01010

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@XORH
@XORH - Hexadecimal Exclusive OR

Format

@XORH(Hex1, <Hex2>, <Bits>)

Hex1	=	first hexadecimal number

Hex2	=	second hexadecimal number

Bits	=	number of binary bits used for both input and output; if omitted, Bits = number of bits in Hex1 or Hex2, whichever is greater; 4 binary digits = 1 hexadecimal digit; must be ≤ 64

@XORH performs a bit-by-bit logical exclusive OR of each bit in Hex1 and Hex2. Use @XORH to set bits to 1 if the bits being compared in Hex1 and Hex2 are different.

If only one number is given, then @XORH performs the exclusive OR operation on the bits in Hex1; this parity test, or XOR reduction, returns 1 or 0 based on successive bit comparisons.

Examples

@XORH("A","A") = 0

@XORH("E") = 1

@XORH("C","6",8) = 0A

See Also

Boolean Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Using @Functions


@YDAYS
@YDAYS - Calendar Days in Year

Format

@YDAYS(Year)

Year	=	number from 0 (1900) to 199 (2099) or a standard year like 1993

@YDAYS returns the number of calendar days in a specified year.

Example

@YDAYS(1996) = 366, the number of days in 1996, since it is a leap year.

See Also

@BDAYS

@CDAYS

@HOLS

@MDAYS

@MNTHS

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@YDIV
@YDIV - Beginning of Year Division

Format

@YDIV(Date, <Numdiv>, <Months>, <Anchor>, <Endmnth>)

Date	=	number representing the date about which to calculate year division

NumDiv	=	integer representing number of divisions away from beginning of division in which date falls; can be negative

Months	=	number of months per division; does not have to be a divisor of 12; can be longer than 1 year; must be an integer ≥ 0 (the default is 3)

Anchor	=	date to anchor division boundaries on (the default is January 1, 1900)

EndMnth	=	1 to indicate adherence to ends of months; 0 to indicate that ends of months are ignored (the default is 1)

@YDIV returns the date of the beginning of the year division (quarter, half-year, or some other fixed period of months, specified by Months) in which Date falls.

If NumDiv is used, @YDIV returns the date that is NumDiv divisions away from the beginning of the division in which Date falls. For example, @YDIV can calculate the beginning of the second quarter after the quarter containing March 21, 1993.

By default, divisions start at January 1, 1900; all other boundaries are some number of divisions away from January 1, 1900. For example, the default quarter boundaries are January 1, April 1, July 1, and October 1 of each year. Use Anchor to specify an alternate start date.

Division cycles can be changed to coincide with any date specified by Anchor. For example, you can change the quarter boundaries to February 23, May 23, August 23, and November 23 by setting Anchor to one of these dates in any year. When the division length is an integral divisor of 12, the year component of Anchor is ignored since the boundary dates repeat each year.

Examples

@YDIV(@DATE(94,8,19)) = 34516 (July 1, 1994), the date of the beginning of the quarter in which August 19, 1994, falls (assuming that quarters begin January 1, April 1, July 1 and October 1).

A bond pays interest every six months until the bond's maturity, at which time it pays the final interest. The next formula calculates the date of the next coupon payment after September 12, 1994 if the bond matures July 15, 1999:

@YDIV(@DATE(94,9,12),1,6,@DATE(99,7,15)) = 34714 (January 15, 1995)

The value 1 (NumDiv), passed as the second argument, designates the beginning of the next division (next coupon payment date). The value 6 (Months), passed as the third argument, designates that divisions are six months long. The fourth argument (Anchor) designates that year divisions must coincide with that date; in this case, that coupon dates coincide with the maturity date.

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@YEARFRAC
@YEARFRAC - Fraction of Year

Format

@YEARFRAC(StartDate, EndDate, <Calendar>)

StartDate	=	number representing the start date

EndDate	=	number representing the end date

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@YEARFRAC returns the fraction of the year covered between StartDate and EndDate.

Example

This formula calculates the fraction of a year between August 15, 1993 and November 4, 1993:

@YEARFRAC(@DATE(93,8,15),@DATE(93,11,4)) = 0.222222

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Using @Functions


@YIELD
@YIELD - Yield of a Bond

Format

@YIELD(Settle, Maturity, Issue, Coupon, Price, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Issue	=	number representing the issue date

Coupon	=	coupon rate; must be ≥ 0

Price	=	price; must be > 0

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@YIELD returns the annual yield of a security that pays periodic interest.

Dates for @YIELD must follow this pattern:

Issue < Settle < Maturity

Example

This formula calculates the annual yield of an 11.75% bond that was issued January 15, 1993 and matures November 15, 2014. The bond was priced at 126.1875 for settlement on January 23, 1993.

@YIELD(@DATE(93,1,23),@DATE(114,11,15),@DATE(93,1,15),0.1175,126.1875) = 0.089877

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@YIELDDISC
@YIELDDISC - Yield of a Bill

Format

@YIELDDISC(Settle, Maturity, Price, <Redemption>, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Price	=	settlement price; must be > 0

Redemption	=	redemption value per 100 face value (must be > 0; the default is 100)

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@YIELDDISC returns the annualized yield for a discount security. @YIELDDISC uses this formula:

Y = yield

R = redemption

P = price

b = basis

M = maturity

S = settle

 is the number of days over which the discount rate applies (360 or 365).

Example

This formula calculates the yield on a bill maturing October 15, 1993 and trading at a price of 97.8 for July 15, 1993 settlement, using an actual/360 calendar:

@YIELDDISC(@DATE(93,7,15),@DATE(93,10,15),97.8,100,2) = 0.088023

See Also

Bill Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@YIELDMAT
@YIELDMAT - Yield of a CD

Format

@YIELDMAT(Settle, Maturity, Issue, Coupon, Price, <Calendar>)

Settle	=	number representing the settlement date; must be < Maturity

Maturity	=	number representing the maturity date

Issue	=	number representing the issue date; must be < Settle

Coupon	=	coupon rate; 0 ≤ Coupon ≤ 1

Price	=	price per 100 face value

Calendar	=	flag specifying which calendar to observe (0 = 30/360, 1 = actual/actual, 2 = actual/360, 3 = actual/365; the default is 0)

@YIELDMAT returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity.

Example

This formula calculates the annual yield of a security with the following terms: Settle is March 7, 1993, Maturity is November 3, 1993, Issue is November 8, 1992, Coupon is 6.247%, Price is 100, and Calendar is 3 (actual/365).

@YIELDMAT(@DATE(93,3,7),@DATE(93,11,3),@DATE(92,11,8),0.06247,100,3) = 0.06122

See Also

CD Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@YLD2YLD
@YLD2YLD - Convert Yield

Format

@YLD2YLD(Y1, F1, F2, <Q1>, <Q2>)

Y1	=	given yield to be converted to another compounding frequency

F1	=	number of times given yield is compounded per year

F2	=	number of times target yield is compounded per year

Q1	=	number of periods for quoted yields (F1 is the default)

Q2	=	number of periods for quoted yields (F2 is the default)

@YLD2YLD converts a yield expressed in one compounding frequency to another. For example, since bond yields are compounded twice per year while mortgage yields are compounded 12 times per year, some conversion is necessary to compare the two different yield figures.

To use @YLD2YLD, you supply Y1, F1, F2 and the optional arguments Q1 and Q2. The result is Y2. @YLD2YLD solves this equation for Y2:

Examples

This formula converts an annual yield of 6.5% into a semiannual yield:

@YLD2YLD(0.065,1,2) = 0.063977

See Also

Annuity Financial @Functions

Using @Functions


@ZTEST
@ZTEST - Two-tailed Probability of a z-Test

Format

@ZTEST(Array, X, <S>)

Array	=	a numeric array or a block of values

X	=	a value to test against the mean of the values in Array

S	=	population standard deviation; if omitted, @ZTEST uses the sample standard deviation

@ZTEST returns the two-tailed probability of a z-test. @ZTEST calculates a z-score, which is the distance between X and the mean for Array, and then returns the two-tailed probability of the z-score for a normal distribution. Use @ZTEST to test whether a value is drawn from a large sample population.

@ZTEST(Array,x) is equal to 1 minus @NORMDIST times

Example

@ZTEST({10,12,14,17,19,21,22,25},15) = 0.087352

See Also

@NORMDIST

@NORMINV

@NORMSDIST

@NORMSINV

@STANDARDIZE

Inferential Statistical @Functions

Using @Functions


Using @Functions

Quattro Pro provides many built-in functions that perform calculations and return values. These functions, called @functions because they are preceded by an at-sign (@), are special commands entered in cells, either alone or in formulas.

Entering @Functions

Syntax Rules

Nesting @Functions

Comments in @Functions

Arguments in @Functions

Recalculation

Using the Formula Composer


Entering @Functions

It is important to enter @functions in the proper format, or syntax:

@FUNCTION(Argument1, Argument2,...)

Syntax Rules lists the rules to follow when entering @functions.

The type of information entered as an argument depends on the specific @function. For more information on arguments, see Arguments in @Functions.

@Function formulas

An @function formula is the complete command string, including arguments and punctuation. You enter an @function formula in a cell just as you would any other value; select the cell and type the entry. The @function displays on the input line. When you press Enter, the result of the @function displays in the cell. If the result is a numeric value, it becomes a value entry. If the result is a string, it becomes a label entry.

These features can help you construct @function formulas:

The @Functions button appears in the input line when you start to type. Choose it to display the list of @functions categories. Click an @function category to display the @functions for that category. The All category lists all @functions. The Recently Used category lists the last 10 @functions you selected from the Functions dialog box. When you click an @function, a brief description of it appears at the bottom of the dialog box. Double-click an @function to place it in the input line. The Functions key (Alt+F3) also displays the @function list.

Block names make it easier to reference blocks of cells. Once you have assigned a name to a block, you can reference it by name instead of coordinates. For details, see Using Blocks in Formulas.

Pointing lets you insert cell references in a function formula by pointing to them, either with the selector or the mouse. See Pointing Out Links for information on pointing out blocks in other open notebooks.

Input-line parenthesis matching makes it easier to enter @functions with proper syntax. If you type one of these characters: ( [ { , it is colored red in the input line until you type the matching character: ) ] }. Then, they both turn green. If you forget to type a matching parenthesis in a complex formula with several sets of parentheses or brackets, for example, it is easy to pinpoint the error. Press F2 to display the selected formula in Edit mode, then move the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red. You can check the formula and insert the matching character where it belongs. You know when you are right. The new character and its match both turn green.

@Function Help is available from the input line; type any @function, then press F1 to display help for it.

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Comments in @Functions

Entering Formulas

Nesting @Functions

Using Arrays in Formulas


Syntax Rules

An @function formula's syntax must meet these rules:

There must be a leading at-sign (@), plus sign (+), or equal sign (=) at the beginning of the formula.

You can enter the @function in either uppercase or lowercase letters.

If there are arguments, enclose them in parentheses.

When there are multiple arguments, separate them by a semicolon or the argument separator specified by the punctuation setting of the International property in the application Object Inspector. (In the @function examples in Help, we use a comma to separate multiple arguments.)

Enter arguments in the specified order.

If you specify an optional argument for an @function, you must also specify all preceding optional arguments for the @function.

There must be no spaces between @ and the @function name. There can be spaces between arguments, parentheses, and the @function name, but Quattro Pro deletes them.

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Nesting @Functions

You can use more than one @function in a single formula. For example,

@ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2)

This @function formula calculates the average of block C14 to F24, then rounds the average to two decimal places.

This is called nesting @functions. You can nest as many @functions as you like in a formula (up to 1022 characters), but it is more difficult to debug complex @function formulas if there is a problem. It is best to break them down into several smaller formulas, which you can reference with a final formula. The smaller pieces make it easier to pinpoint an error, and are available for use with other formulas, so they use memory more efficiently.

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Comments in @Functions

Regardless which @function you are using, you can include an onscreen comment along with it. Typically, comments serve as memory jogs, asides, or annotations that you do not want to appear in the notebook itself.

To enter a comment, type a semicolon (;) after the @function, then type in the text. The @function and comment together can be up to 1022 characters long.

Examples

@DMAX(A2..E10,4,A13..A14); computes the top sale in July

@MOD(@NOW,7); 0=Sun,1=Mon,2=Tues,3=Wed,4=Thurs,5=Fri,6=Sat

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Arguments in @Functions

"Argument" refers to the information required by an @function. Most @functions need at least one argument. There are three general types of arguments:

Numeric values

Block values

String values

Most arguments require one of these types of values. Some @functions accept a combination or choice of types for a single argument. For example, @SUM accepts a block in combination with numeric values:

@SUM(B10..C25,50) totals numeric entries in block B10..C25 plus 50

The specific types of arguments for each @function are listed in the description for that @function.

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Numeric @Function Arguments

A numeric value can be used as an @function argument in any of these forms:

an actual value: @SIN(1.571)

the coordinates of a cell containing a numeric value: @SIN(B5)

the name of a cell block containing a single numeric value: @INT(TOTAL)

a formula resulting in a numeric value: @INT(B4*10)

another @function resulting in a numeric value: @INT(@PI)

a combination of these: @ABS(@INT(C4)+35-TOTAL)

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Block Arguments

Entering Formulas


Block @Function Arguments

A block of cells can be entered as an @function argument in a number of ways:

the coordinates of a block of cells: @SUM(A1..B3)

the address of a single cell: @SUM(B3)

a block name: @SUM(JANUARY)

You can use a combination of these in a list: @SUM(JANUARY,C15..D25,F10)

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

String Arguments


String @Function Arguments

A string value can be used as an @function argument in these ways:

an actual string, in double quotes: @PROPER("ACME Company")

the address of a cell containing a label: @PROPER(G13)

the name of a single-cell block containing a label: @PROPER(COMPANY NAME)

a formula resulting in a string: @LOWER(+MONTH&"Sales")

another @function resulting in a string: @LENGTH(@PROPER("ACME Industries"))

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Recalculation

By default, Quattro Pro calculates formulas in a spreadsheet when you enter them, and recalculates them each time you change the data involved. Quattro Pro offers three options for formula recalculation:

F9 CalcBackground (the default) recalculates between keystrokes.

Automatic pauses operation while Quattro Pro recalculates formulas.

Manual recalculates the formulas only when you press F9. (Quattro Pro still calculates formulas when you enter or edit them, but not when values in the cells they reference change.)

You change the recalculation mode in the Notebook property list.

The CALC indicator on the status line tells you that data has been added or changed, and Quattro Pro has not recalculated the spreadsheet. To recalculate a single cell in Manual recalculation mode, select the cell, press F2, then press Enter.

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Database @Functions

 Print Group

The database @functions are similar to the statistical @functions. Instead of taking a simple list of values, these @functions all take three arguments, as in the following example:

@DMAX(Block,Column,Criteria).

@DAVG 	The average (mean) of all numeric values in a given block.

@DCOUNT	The number of nonblank cells in a given block.

@DMAX 	The largest numeric or latest date value in a given block.

@DMIN 	The smallest numeric or earliest date value in a given block.

@DSTD 	The population standard deviation of all values in a given block.

@DSTDS 	The sample standard deviation of all values in a given block.

@DSUM 	The total of all numeric values in a given block.

@DVAR 	The population variance of all values in a given block.

@DVARS 	The sample variance of all values in a given block.

See Also

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Statistical @Functions


Date and Time @Functions

 Print Group

The date and time @functions calculate dates and times, or perform calculations involving business days.

For calculation purposes, Quattro Pro stores all dates as serial integers beginning with 0 for December 30, 1899. The minimum, -109,571, equals January 1, 1600; the maximum, 474,816, equals December 31, 3199.

The way a date appears onscreen is a matter of formatting. See Entering Dates and Times for details on formatting dates.

Quattro Pro stores times as decimal fractions; 0.000 represents 00:000:00, and 0.99999 represents 23:59:59. To format time expressions in your notebook, choose Numeric Format in the block Object Inspector.

For example, @TODAY returns the current date as an integer, and @NOW returns the current date with the current time added as a fraction.

@ABDAYS	Adds (or subtracts) a given number of business days to a given date.

@ACDAYS	Adds a given number of calendar days to a given date.

@AMNTHS	Adds a given number of months to a given date.

@BDAYS 	Returns the number of business days between two dates, inclusive of the second date.

@BUSDAY 	Returns a given date if it is a business day, or the closest business day before (or after) the date.

@CDAYS	Returns the number of calendar days between two dates, inclusive of the second date.

@DATE	Returns the date number for a given year, month, and day; 0 = December 30, 1899.

@DATEVALUE	Returns the date number for a given formatted date string.

@DAY 	Returns the day of the month (1-31) represented by a given date/time serial number.

@EMNTH	Returns the date of the last day of the month in which a specified date falls.

@FBDAY	Returns the date of the first business day of a month in which a specified date falls.

@HOLS	Returns the number of holidays between two dates, excluding holidays that fall on weekends.

@HOUR 	Returns the number of hours past midnight (0-23) represented by a given date/time serial number.

@ISBDAY 	Returns 1 if the specified date is a business day, or 0 if it is not.

@LBDAY 	Returns the date of the last business day of a month in which a specified date falls.

@LWKDAY	Returns the date of the last given weekday in a given month.

@MDAYS	Returns the number of calendar days in a given month of a given year.

@MINUTE 	Returns the number of minutes past the hour (0-59) represented by a given date/time serial number.

@MONTH 	Returns the month in number form (1-12) represented by a given date/time serial number.

@MNTHS	Returns the number of whole months between two dates.

@NBDAY 	Returns the date of the first valid business day after a given date.

@NOW 	Returns the date and time serial number for the current system date and time.

@NWKDAY	Returns the date of the nth occurence of a given weekday in a given month.

@PBDAY 	Returns the date of the first valid business day before a given date.

@SECOND 	Returns the number of seconds past the minute (0-59) represented by a given date/time serial number.

@TIME	Returns the time number for a given hour, minute, and second. The hour is a numeric value between 0 and 23.

@TIMEVALUE	Returns the time number for a given formatted time string.

@TODAY	Returns the date number for the current system date.

@WKDAY	Returns the day of the week that a given date falls on.

@YDAYS	Returns the number of calendar days in a given year.

@YDIV	Returns the date of the beginning of the year division in which a given date or given number of divisions always falls.

@YEAR 	Returns the year number (-300 to 1299; 0 = 1900) represented by a given date/time serial number.

@YEARFRAC	Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between a given starting and ending date.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Setting Holidays


Engineering @Functions

 Print Group

Bessel 	These @functions return values that satisfy the Bessel equation or the modified Bessel equation. Bessel functions have various applications in physics and engineering.

Boolean	These @functions handle applications of digital logic and bitwise operations, which involve the testing, setting, or shifting of actual bits in a number.

Complex number 	These @functions convert or modify a complex number (a number whose square is a negative real number).

Miscellaneous	These @functions have various applications in engineering, including converting values to different measures, testing the relationship of two numeric values, and returning error functions.

Number conversion	These @functions convert a value from one number system to another.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Bessel Engineering @Functions

 Print Group

@BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function In(x).

@BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function Jn(x).

@BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function Kn(x).

@BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function Yn(x).

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Engineering @Functions

Entering Formulas


Boolean Engineering @Functions

 Print Group

@ADDB	Returns the sum of two binary numbers.

@ADDBO	Returns the overflow bit of the sum of two binary numbers.

@ADDH	Returns the sum of two hexadecimal numbers.

@ADDHO	Returns the overflow bit of the sum of two hexadecimal numbers.

@ANDB	Returns the AND operation of two binary numbers.

@ANDH	Returns the AND operation of two hexadecimal numbers.

@BITRB	Returns a binary number with a specified bit reset to 0.

@BITRH	Returns a hexadecimal number with a specified bit reset to 0.

@BITSB	Returns a binary number with a specified bit set to 1.

@BITSH	Returns a hexadecimal number with a specified bit set to 1.

@BITTB	Returns the value of a specified bit in a binary number.

@BITTH	Returns the value of a specified bit in a hexadecimal number.

@CATB	Returns the concatenation of two binary numbers.

@CATH	Returns the concatenation of two hexadecimal numbers.

@CATNB	Returns the concatenation of n binary numbers.

@CATNH	Returns the concatenation of n hexadecimal numbers.

@INVB	Returns the inverse of a binary number.

@INVH	Returns the inverse of a hexadecimal number.

@ORB	Returns the OR operation of binary numbers.

@ORH	Returns the OR operation of hexadecimal numbers.

@SHLB	Returns a binary number shifted left by a specified number of bits.

@SHLBO	Returns the overflow bit of a binary number after it has been shifted left one bit.

@SHLH	Returns a hexadecimal number shifted left by a specified number of bits.

@SHLHO	Returns the overflow bit of a hexadecimal number after it has been shifted left one bit.

@SHRB	Returns a binary number shifted right by a specified number of bits.

@SHRBO	Returns the overflow bit of a binary number after it has been shifted right one bit.

@SHRH	Returns a hexadecimal number shifted right by a specified number of bits.

@SHRHO	Returns the overflow bit of a hexadecimal number after it has been shifted right one bit.

@SUBB	Returns the difference of two binary numbers.

@SUBBO	Returns the overflow bit of the subtraction of one binary number from another.

@SUBH	Returns the difference of two binary numbers.

@SUBHO	Returns the overflow bit of the subtraction of one hexadecimal number from another.

@XORB	Returns the exclusive OR operation of binary numbers.

@XORH	Returns the exclusive OR operation of hexadecimal numbers.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Engineering @Functions

Entering Boolean @Functions

Entering Formulas


Complex Number Engineering @Functions

 Print Group

@COMPLEX	Converts real & imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

@IMABS	Returns the distance from the origin on a complex plane for a complex number.

@IMAGINARY	Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number.

@IMARGUMENT	Returns the argument theta, an angle expressed in radians.

@IMCONJUGATE	Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number.

@IMCOS	Returns the cosine of a complex number.

@IMDIV	Returns the quotient of two complex numbers.

@IMEXP	Returns the exponential of a complex number.

@IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number.

@IMLOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a complex number.

@IMLOG2	Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number.

@IMPOWER	Returns a complex number raised to a complex power.

@IMPRODUCT	Returns the product of two complex numbers.

@IMREAL	Returns the real coefficient of a complex number.

@IMSIN	Returns the sine of a complex number.

@IMSQRT	Returns the square root of a complex number.

@IMSUB	Returns the difference of two complex numbers.

@IMSUM	Returns the sum of complex numbers.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Engineering @Functions

Entering Formulas


Miscellaneous Engineering @Functions

 Print Group

@CONVERT	Converts from one measurement system to another.

@DELTA	Tests whether two numbers are equal.

@ERF	Returns the error function.

@ERFC	Returns the complementary function.

@GESTEP	Tests whether a number is greater than a threshold value.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Engineering @Functions

Entering Formulas


Number Conversion Engineering @Functions

 Print Group

@ASCTOHEX	Returns the hexadecimal string equivalent of an ASCII value

@BASE	Converts a base-10 number into another base.

@BINTOHEX	Converts a binary number to hexadecimal.

@BINTOHEX64	Converts a binary number (up to 64 bits) to hexadecimal.

@BINTONUM	Converts a binary number to decimal.

@BINTONUM64	Converts a binary number (up to 64 bits) to decimal.

@BINTOOCT	Converts a binary number to octal.

@BINTOOCT64	Converts a binary number (up to 64 bits) to octal.

@HEXTOASC	Converts a hexadecimal number to ASCII.

@HEXTOBIN	Converts a hexadecimal number to binary.

@HEXTOBIN64	Converts a hexadecimal number (up to 64 bits) to binary.

@HEXTONUM 	Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal.

@HEXTONUM64	Converts a hexadecimal number (up to 64 bits) to decimal.

@HEXTOOCT	Converts a hexadecimal number to octal.

@HEXTOOCT64	Converts a hexadecimal number (up to 64 bits) to octal.

@NUMTOBIN	Converts a decimal number to binary.

@NUMTOBIN64	Converts a decimal number (up to 64 bits) to binary.

@NUMTOHEX 	Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal.

@NUMTOHEX64	Converts a decimal number (up to 64 bits) to hexadecimal.

@NUMTOOCT	Converts a decimal number to octal.

@NUMTOOCT64	Converts a decimal number (up to 64 bits) to octal.

@OCTTOBIN	Coverts an octal number to binary.

@OCTTOHEX	Converts an octal number to hexadecimal.

@OCTTONUM	Converts an octal number to decimal.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Engineering @Functions

Entering Formulas

Entering Number Conversion @Functions


Financial @Functions

 Print Group

Annuity 	The investment @functions involve a series of periodic payments over a term measured in the number of payment periods. This set of @functions allows you to compute one value, knowing three of the other values.

Bill 	These @functions compute values for Treasury billls.

Bond	These @functions compute values for bonds.

Cash Flow	These @functions operate on tables of data that record income and expenditures.

CD	These @functions compute values for certificates of deposit.

Depreciation	These @functions compute depreciation over time.

Stock	These @functions compute values for common stock.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Calendar Conventions

Entering Formulas


Annuity Financial @Functions

 Print Group

@AMAINT	Calculates the accumulated interest paid on an amortized loan after n payments.

@AMINT	Calculates the periodic interest rate for an amortized loan.

@AMPMT	Calculates the periodic payment for an amortized loan.

@AMPMTI	Calculates the interest portion of the nth periodic payment of an amortized loan.

@AMPRN	Calculates the initial principal of an amortized loan.

@AMRES	Calculates the end value of an amortized loan or the future value of an annuity.

@AMRPRN	Calculates the remaining balance of an amortized loan after n payments.

@AMTERM	Calculates the length of an amortized loan, expressed as number of payments.

@CTERM	Returns the number of compounding time periods required to achieve a specified future value, given the present value and interest rate.

@FV	Returns the future value of an investment at the end of the term, given the payment, interest rate, and number of payments.

@FVAL	Returns the future value of an investment, given the interest rate, number of payments, periodic payment rate, and optional present value and type.

@IPAYMT	Returns the interest portion of a single payment given the interest rate, period, number of periods, present value, and optional future value and type.

@IRATE	Returns the interest rate given the number of payments, payment amount, present value, and optional future value and type.

@MTGACC	Returns the new loan term, the payoff-date, or interest saved by paying extra monthly principal for a home loan.

@NPER	Returns the number of periods given the interest rate, payment amount, present value, and optional future value and type.

@PAYMT	Returns periodic payments given the rate, number of payments, present value, and optional future value and type.

@PMT	Returns the periodic payment required to fully amortize the principal during the term, given present value, interest rate, and number of payments.

@PPAYMT	Returns the principal portion of a single payment.

@PV	Returns the present value of an investment, given periodic payment, interest rate, and number of periods.

@PVAL	Returns the present value of an investment, given the interest rate, number of payments, periodic payment rate, and optional future value and type.

@RATE	Returns the interest rate required to achieve a given future value, given the future value, present value, and number of payments.

@TERM	Returns the number of periodic payments required to achieve a specified future value, given the periodic payment amount and interest rate.

@YLD2YLD	Converts a yield expressed in one compounding frequency and time length to that in another frequency and/or time length.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Annuity @Function Arguments

Calendar Conventions

Entering Formulas

Financial @Functions


Bill Financial @Functions

 Print Group

@DISC	Returns the discount rate for a security.

@INTRATE	Returns the simple annualized yield for a fully invested security.

@PRICEDISC	Returns the price per 100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest.

@RECEIVED	Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security.

@TBILLEQ	Returns the bond equivalent yield for a Treasury bill.

@TBILLPRICE	Returns the price per 100 face value for a Treasury bill.

@TBILLYIELD	Returns the yield for a Treasury bill.

@YIELDDISC	Returns the annual yield for a discounted security.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Calendar Conventions

Entering Formulas

Financial @Functions


Bond Financial @Functions

 Print Group

@ACCRINT	Returns the accrued interest for a bond.

@COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date.

@COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date.

@COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date.

@COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date.

@COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date.

@COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date.

@DURATION	Returns the Macaulay duration of a security with par value of 100.

@MDURATION	Returns the modified Macauley duration for a security with an assumed par value of 100.

@ODDFPRICE	Returns the price per 100 face value of a security with an odd first period.

@ODDFYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd first period.

@ODDLPRICE	Returns the price per 100 face value of a security with an odd last period.

@ODDLYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd last period.

@PRICE	Returns the price per 100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest.

@YIELD	Returns the yield on a security that pays periodic interest.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Bond @Function Arguments

Calendar Conventions

Entering Formulas

Financial @Functions


Cash Flow Financial @Functions

 Print Group

@DURAT	Calculates the Macaulay duration of a cash flow stream.

@FUTV	Calculates the future value of a cash flow stream.

@IRR 	Returns the internal rate of return of an investment.

@NETPV	Calculates net present value of a stream of cash flows.

@NPV 	Returns the net present value of a future cash flow.

@PIRATE	Calculates the internal rate of return for a stream of cash flows.

@SCMARG	Calculates the discount scenario margin, the margin to add to each discount rate in order to arrive at a given net present value.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Calendar Conventions

Entering Cash Flow @Functions

Entering Formulas

Financial @Functions


CD Financial @Functions

 Print Group

@ACCRINTM	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity.

@PRICEMAT	Returns the price per 100 face value of a security that pays interest at maturity.

@YIELDMAT	Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Calendar Conventions

Entering Formulas

Financial @Functions


Depreciation Financial @Functions

 Print Group

@DDB	Returns the double-declining balance depreciation of an asset during the given period.

@SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset over each period in its given useful life.

@SYD	Returns the sum-of-the-years'-digits depreciation of an asset during the given period.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Calendar Conventions

Entering Formulas

Financial @Functions


Stock Financial @Functions

 Print Group

@FEETBL	Returns fee calculations for stock transactions.

@STKOPT	Returns the time value and earnings value of a stock option.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Calendar Conventions

Entering Formulas

Financial @Functions


Logical @Functions

 Print Group

@FALSE 	Always returns the logical value 0.

@FILEEXISTS	Checks to see whether the named file exists. Returns a logical true (1) or false (0) value.

@IF	Evaluates a given condition, and returns the specified expression if it is true, or another specified expression if it is false.

@ISERR 	Returns 1 if a given cell contains ERR (error indicator), otherwise 0.

@ISNA 	Returns 1 if a given cell is NA (not available), otherwise 0.

@ISNUMBER 	Returns 1 if a given cell contains a number, otherwise 0.

@ISSTRING 	Returns 1 if a given cell contains a label or text string, otherwise 0.

@TRUE 	Always returns the logical value 1.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Mathematical @Functions

 Print Group

Mathematical @functions take one or more numeric values as arguments, and return a numeric value. You must enter all angles in radians for @COS, @SIN, and @TAN. Accordingly, @ASIN, @ATAN, and @ATAN2 return all angles in radians. To convert radians to degrees, use @DEGREES; to convert degrees to radians, use @RADIANS.

@ABS 	Returns the absolute value of a given number.

@ACOS 	Returns the angle whose cosine is a given value.

@ASIN 	Returns the angle whose sine is a given value.

@ATAN 	Returns the angle whose tangent is a given value.

@ATAN2 	Returns the angle represented by a given pair of coordinates.

@CEILING	Rounds a number up to the nearest integer.

@COS 	Returns the cosine of  a given angle.

@DEGREES	Converts a given value from radians to degrees.

@DFRAC	Converts a decimal number to a whole number and fractional component.

@EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer.

@EXP 	Returns the exponential of a given value, which is the value of e (the mathematical constant) raised to the power of the given value. The value must be less than or equal to 709.

@FACT	Calculates the factorial of a number.

@FACTDOUBLE	Returns the double factorial of a number.

@FIB	Calculates the nth term of a Fibonacci sequence.

@FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero.

@FRACD	Converts a number with a fractional component to a decimal.

@GCD	Calculates the greatest comman divisor of x and y.

@INT 	Returns the integer portion of of a given value. In this @function, the number is simply truncated, not rounded off.

@LCM	Calculates the least common multiple of x and y.

@LINTERP	Performs linear interpolation between sets of xy pairs.

@LN 	Returns the natural logarithm of a given value. This is the logarithm of the number to the base e; @LN is the inverse of @EXP (the value must be greater than 0).

@LOG 	Returns the logarithm of a given value to base 10 (the value must be greater than 0).

@MDET	Calculates the determinant of a matrix.

@MOD 	Returns the modulus of a given value with respect to another. (Modulus is the remainder when the first is divided by the second.)

@MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple.

@MULT	Calculates cumulative product of a set of numbers.

@MULTINOMIAL	Returns the multinomial of a set of numbers.

@ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer.

@PI 	Returns the value of pi.

@QUOTIENT	Returns the integer portion of a division.

@RADIANS 	Converts a given value from degrees to radians.

@RAND 	Returns a fractional random number between 0 and 1.

@RANDBETWEEN	Returns a random number between the numbers you specify.

@ROUND 	Rounds off a given value (with up to 15 digits) to a given number of decimal places.

@SERIESSUM	Returns the sum of a power series based on a formula.

@SIN 	Returns the sine of a given angle.

@SQRT 	Returns the square root of a given value (the value must be greater than or equal to 0).

@SQRTPI	Returns the square root of a number multiplied by pi.

@TAN 	Returns the tangent of a given angle.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Miscellaneous @Functions

 Print Group

Attribute	Each cell has a number of attributes, including its address, contents, type, protection status, format, etc. These @functions return the attributes of a specified cell. If a block of cells is given, they use the top left cell in the block.

Cell and Table	These @functions generally return simple information from a cell or block of cells.

Status	Return the current setting for commands, properties, and other elements.

Table Lookup	These @functions are used to search for a value in a block of cells that has been specified as a data table.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Cell Attribute @Functions

 Print Group

The attribute @functions return the requested attribute of a cell (or of the upper left cell in a block).

@CELL 	Returns the requested attribute of the upper left cell in a given block of cells.

@CELLINDEX 	Returns the requested attribute of the cell at the intersection of a given column and row in a block of cells.

@CELLPOINTER 	Returns the requested attribute of the active (currently selected) cell.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Miscellaneous @Functions


Miscellaneous Cell and Table @Functions

 Print Group

@@ 	Returns the contents of a given cell.

@ARRAY	Returns the result of an expression (a formula or @function) using array syntax.

@BLOCKNAME	Returns the name of a specified block.

@BLOCKNAME2	Returns the block name created in a given notebook for a specified block.

@BLOCKNAMES	Returns a two-column table showing the block names that intersect with a specified block.

@BLOCKNAMES2	Returns a two-column table showing the block names created in a given notebook that intersect with a specified block.

@CHOOSE 	Returns the element from a given list in the specified position.

@COLS 	Returns the number of columns in a given block of cells.

@DDELINK	Creates a "live" data link from another Windows application that supports DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange).

@ERR 	Always returns ERR (the error indicator).

@FIRSTBLANKPAGE	Returns the page letters for the first unnamed blank page in a notebook that is not part of a group.

@FIRSTINGROUP	Returns the page letters for the first page in the specified group.

@GETGROUP	Returns the name of the group that contains the page for a specified block, or the name of the group in the specified block that contains a specified page name.

@INDEXTOLETTER	Returns a one- or two-character string for the index number of a page or column.

@ISLEGALPAGENAME	Returns 1 if the specified page name is valid (whether it exists or not); otherwise, returns 0.

@LASTBLANKPAGE	Returns the page letters for the last unnamed blank page in a notebook that is not part of a group.

@LASTINGROUP	Returns the page letters for the last page in the specified group.

@LETTERTOINDEX	Returns the index number for column letters or page letters.

@NA 	Always returns NA (not available).

@PAGEINDEX	Returns the index number for a notebook page with a specified name.

@PAGEINDEX2	Returns the index number for a notebook page with a specified name in a given notebook.

@PAGENAME	Returns the name of a notebook page with a given index number.

@PAGENAME2	Returns the name of a notebook page with a given index number in a specified notebook.

@PAGENAMES	Returns a two-column table showing the page letters and corresponding page names for the active notebook.

@PAGENAMES2	Returns a two-column table showing the page letters and corresponding page names for a specified notebook.

@ROWS 	Returns the number of rows in a given block of cells.

@SHEETS	Returns the number of pages in a given block of cells.

@TABLELINK	Establishes a link to an external database table and displays the table in a Quattro Pro notebook.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Miscellaneous @Functions


Status @Functions

 Print Group

@COMMAND	Returns current settings for the given command equivalent.

@CURVALUE	Returns the current value of a given menu command setting.

@MEMAVAIL	Returns the number of bytes of available memory.

@MEMEMSAVAIL	Under DOS, returns the number of bytes of available expanded memory; under Windows, returns NA (included for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS).

@PROPERTY	Returns current property settings for the given object and property.

@VERSION	Returns the version number of Quattro Pro.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Miscellaneous @Functions


Table Lookup @Functions

 Print Group

@HLOOKUP	Searches for a given value in the first row of a given block of cells. Returns the value a given number of rows from the first.

@INDEX	Returns the value at the intersection of a given column and row in a specified block of cells.

@VLOOKUP	Searches for a given value in the first column of a given block of cells. Returns the value from a given number of columns from the first.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Miscellaneous @Functions


Statistical @Functions

 Print Group

The statistical @functions perform aggregation, counting, and analysis operations on a group of values expressed as a list (or lists) of one or more arguments.  These arguments can be numeric values or block values.

Descriptive	These @functions return a value that helps you summarize and describe a group of values.

Inferential	These @functions return a value (or values) that helps you draw conclusions about a group (or groups) of values.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Descriptive Statistical @Functions

 Print Group

@AVG 	Returns the average (mean) of all numeric values in a list.

@COUNT 	Returns the number of nonblank cells in a list.

@GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean of all numeric values in a list.

@HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean of all numeric values in a list.

@KURT	Returns the kurtosis (peakedness or flatness) of a data set.

@LARGEST	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set.

@MAX 	Returns the largest numeric or last date value in a list.

@MEDIAN	Returns the median of a data set.

@MIN 	Returns the smallest numeric or earliest date value in a list.

@MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set.

@PERCENTILE	Returns the value from a group of values at a specified percentile.

@PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set.

@QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set.

@RANK	Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers.

@SKEW	Returns the skewness of a distribution.

@SMALLEST	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set.

@STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value.

@STD 	Returns the population standard deviation of all values in a list.

@STDS 	Returns the sample standard deviation of all values in a list.

@SUM	Returns the total of all numeric values in a list.

@TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of all numeric values in a list with a fraction of values excluded.

@VAR 	Returns the population variance of all values in a list.

@VARS 	Returns the sample variance of all values in a list.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Statistical @Functions


Inferential Statistical @Functions

 Print Group

@AVEDEV	Performs the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their means.

@BETA	Returns the beta function.

@BETADIST	Returns the cumulative beta probability density function.

@BETAI	Returns the incomplete beta function.

@BETAINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function.

@BINOMDIST	Returns the binomial probability mass function.

@CHIDIST	Returns the cumulative chi-square distribution.

@CHIINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative chi-square distribution.

@CHITEST	Computes the probability that the actual and expected frequencies are similar by chance (chi-square test).

@COMB	Calculates the number of unordered subgroups of given size in a group.

@CONFIDENCE	Returns the confidence interval for a population mean.

@CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient of two data sets.

@COVAR	Returns the covariance of two data sets.

@CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value.

@DEVSQ	Returns the sum of the squares of the deviations.

@EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution.

@FDIST	Returns the F distribution function.

@FINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative F distribution function.

@FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation.

@FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation.

@FORECAST	Returns a value along a linear trend.

@FTEST	Returns the result of the F-test.

@GAMMADIST	Returns the gamma distribution function.

@GAMMAINV	Computes the inverse of the cumulative Gamma distribution function.

@GAMMALN	Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function.

@GAMMAP	Returns the incomplete gamma function.

@GAMMAQ	Returns the complement of the incomplete gamma function.

@HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution.

@INTERCEPT	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line.

@LOGINV	Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution.

@LOGNORMDIST	Returns the lognormal distribution.

@NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution.

@NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution.

@NORMINV	Computes the inverse of the cumulative normal distribution function.

@NORMSDIST	Computes the standard normal cumulative distribution.

@NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution.

@PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient.

@PERMUT	Calculates the number of ordered subgroups of given size in a group (permutations).

@POISSON	Returns the Poisson probability distribution.

@PROB	Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits.

@RSQ	Returns the square of the coefficient of correlation of the linear regression line through data points in known xs and known ys.

@SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line.

@STEC	Returns the standard error of the regression coefficient.

@STEYX	Standard error of the predicted y-value for each x.

@SUMPRODUCT 	The dot (scalar) product of the vectors corresponding to a block of cells.

@SUMSQ	Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments.

@SUMX2MY2	Returns the sum of the differences of the squares of the corresponding values in two arrays.

@SUMX2PY2	Returns the sum of the sum of the squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

@SUMXMY2	Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays.

@SUMXPY2	Returns the sum of the squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

@SUMXY	Sum of the products of the corresponding numbers in two arrays.

@SUMXY2	Sum of the product of values and the squares of the corresponding numbers in two arrays.

@TDIST	Returns the Student's t-distribution.

@TINV	Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution.

@TTEST	Returns the probability associated with the Student's t-test.

@WEIBULL	Returns the Weibull distribution.

@ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed probability value of a z-test.

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas

Statistical @Functions


String @Functions

 Print Group

String @functions work on strings of characters, or text. They include one or more strings as arguments, and return either a string or a numerical value.

@CHAR 	Returns the ANSI character that corresponds to the decimal code given as the argument.

@CLEAN 	Returns a given string with any non-printable ASCII codes removed.

@CODE 	Returns the ANSI code of the first character in a given string.

@EXACT 	Returns 1 if two given strings are identical (including capitalization), otherwise returns 0.

@FIND	Looks for a given substring in a given string, beginning with the character in the specified position. Returns the position of the first matched character in the string.

@LEFT 	Returns a given number of characters from the beginning of a given string.

@LENGTH 	Returns the length of a given string, including spaces.

@LOWER 	Returns a given string with all the alphabetic characters converted to lowercase (small letters).

@MID 	Returns a given number of characters from a given string, starting with the character in the specified position.

@N 	Returns the numeric value of the top left cell of a block of cells.

@PROPER 	Returns a given string with the first letter of each word capitalized, and with all other letters lowercase.

@REPEAT	Returns a string made up of a given number of repetitions of a given string.

@REPLACE	Deletes a given number of characters in a given string, beginning with a specified position, and replaces them with a specified string. Returns the modified string.

@RIGHT	Returns a given number of characters from the end of a given string.

@S 	Returns the string value of the top left cell of a block of cells.

@STRING 	Converts a given numeric value into a string, rounding to a given number of decimal places.

@TRIM 	Returns a given string without leading or trailing spaces, and without multiple spaces.

@UPPER 	Returns a given string with all of the alphabetic characters converted to uppercase (capital letters).

@VALUE 	Returns the numeric value of a given string. (Returns ERR if the argument is not a simple number string.)

See Also

@Function Arguments

@Function Index

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


@Function Index

Symbols

@@

A

@ABDAYS

@ABS

@ACCRINT

@ACCRINTM

@ACDAYS

@ACOS

@ADDB

@ADDBO

@ADDH

@ADDHO

@AMAINT

@AMINT

@AMNTHS

@AMPMT

@AMPMTI

@AMPRN

@AMRES

@AMRPRN

@AMTERM

@ANDB

@ANDH

@ARRAY

@ASCTOHEX

@ASIN

@ATAN

@ATAN2

@AVEDEV

@AVG

B

@BASE

@BDAYS

@BESSELI

@BESSELJ

@BESSELK

@BESSELY

@BETA

@BETADIST

@BETAI

@BETAINV

@BINOMDIST

@BINTOHEX

@BINTOHEX64

@BINTONUM

@BINTONUM64

@BINTOOCT

@BINTOOCT64

@BITRB

@BITRH

@BITSB

@BITSH

@BITTB

@BITTH

@BLOCKNAME

@BLOCKNAME2

@BLOCKNAMES

@BLOCKNAMES2

@BUSDAY

C

@CATB

@CATH

@CATNB

@CATNH

@CDAYS

@CEILING

@CELL

@CELLINDEX

@CELLPOINTER

@CHAR

@CHIDIST

@CHIINV

@CHITEST

@CHOOSE

@CLEAN

@CODE

@COLS

@COMB

@COMMAND

@COMPLEX

@CONFIDENCE

@CONVERT

@CORREL

@COS

@COUNT

@COUPDAYBS

@COUPDAYS

@COUPDAYSNC

@COUPNCD

@COUPNUM

@COUPPCD

@COVAR

@CRITBINOM

@CTERM

@CURVALUE

D

@DATE

@DATEVALUE

@DAVG

@DAY

@DCOUNT

@DDB

@DDELINK

@DEGREES

@DELTA

@DEVSQ

@DFRAC

@DISC

@DMAX

@DMIN

@DSTD

@DSTDS

@DSUM

@DURAT

@DURATION

@DVAR

@DVARS

E

@EMNTH

@ERF

@ERFC

@ERR

@EVEN

@EXACT

@EXP

@EXPONDIST

F

@FACT

@FACTDOUBLE

@FALSE

@FBDAY

@FDIST

@FEETBL

@FIB

@FILEEXISTS

@FIND

@FINV

@FIRSTBLANKPAGE

@FIRSTINGROUP

@FISHER

@FISHERINV

@FLOOR

@FORECAST

@FRACD

@FTEST

@FUTV

@FV

@FVAL

G

@GAMMADIST

@GAMMAINV

@GAMMALN

@GAMMAP

@GAMMAQ

@GCD

@GEOMEAN

@GESTEP

@GETGROUP

H

@HARMEAN

@HEXTOASC

@HEXTOBIN

@HEXTOBIN64

@HEXTONUM

@HEXTONUM64

@HEXTOOCT

@HEXTOOCT64

@HLOOKUP

@HOLS

@HOUR

@HYPGEOMDIST

I

@IF

@IMABS

@IMAGINARY

@IMARGUMENT

@IMCONJUGATE

@IMCOS

@IMDIV

@IMEXP

@IMLN

@IMLOG10

@IMLOG2

@IMPOWER

@IMPRODUCT

@IMREAL

@IMSIN

@IMSQRT

@IMSUB

@IMSUM

@INDEX

@INDEXTOLETTER

@INT

@INTERCEPT

@INTRATE

@INVB

@INVH

@IPAYMT

@IRATE

@IRR

@ISBDAY

@ISERR

@ISLEGALPAGENAME

@ISNA

@ISNUMBER

@ISSTRING

K

@KURT

L

@LARGEST

@LASTBLANKPAGE

@LASTINGROUP

@LBDAY

@LCM

@LEFT

@LENGTH

@LETTERTOINDEX

@LINTERP

@LN

@LOG

@LOGINV

@LOGNORMDIST

@LOWER

@LWKDAY

M

@MAX

@MDAYS

@MDET

@MDURATION

@MEDIAN

@MEMAVAIL

@MEMEMSAVAIL

@MID

@MIN

@MINUTE

@MNTHS

@MOD

@MODE

@MONTH

@MROUND

@MTGACC

@MULT

@MULTINOMIAL

N

@N

@NA

@NBDAY

@NEGBINOMDIST

@NETPV

@NORMDIST

@NORMINV

@NORMSDIST

@NORMSINV

@NOW

@NPER

@NPV

@NUMTOBIN

@NUMTOBIN64

@NUMTOHEX

@NUMTOHEX64

@NUMTOOCT

@NUMTOOCT64

@NWKDAY

O

@OCTTOBIN

@OCTTOHEX

@OCTTONUM

@ODD

@ODDFPRICE

@ODDFYIELD

@ODDLPRICE

@ODDLYIELD

@ORB

@ORH

P

@PAGEINDEX

@PAGEINDEX2

@PAGENAME

@PAGENAME2

@PAGENAMES

@PAGENAMES2

@PAYMT

@PBDAY

@PEARSON

@PERCENTILE

@PERCENTRANK

@PERMUT

@PI

@PIRATE

@PMT

@POISSON

@PPAYMT

@PRICE

@PRICEDISC

@PRICEMAT

@PROB

@PROPER

@PROPERTY

@PV

@PVAL

Q

@QUARTILE

@QUOTIENT

R

@RADIANS

@RAND

@RANDBETWEEN

@RANK

@RATE

@RECEIVED

@REPEAT

@REPLACE

@RIGHT

@ROUND

@ROWS

@RSQ

S

@S

@SCMARG

@SECOND

@SERIESSUM

@SHEETS

@SHLB

@SHLBO

@SHLH

@SHLHO

@SHRB

@SHRBO

@SHRH

@SHRHO

@SIN

@SKEW

@SLN

@SLOPE

@SMALLEST

@SQRT

@SQRTPI

@STANDARDIZE

@STD

@STDS

@STEC

@STEYX

@STKOPT

@STRING

@SUBB

@SUBBO

@SUBH

@SUBHO

@SUM

@SUMPRODUCT

@SUMSQ

@SUMX2MY2

@SUMX2PY2

@SUMXMY2

@SUMXPY2

@SUMXY

@SUMXY2

@SYD

T

@TABLELINK

@TAN

@TBILLEQ

@TBILLPRICE

@TBILLYIELD

@TDIST

@TERM

@TIME

@TIMEVALUE

@TINV

@TODAY

@TRIM

@TRIMMEAN

@TRUE

@TTEST

U

@UPPER

V

@VALUE

@VAR

@VARS

@VERSION

@VLOOKUP

W

@WEIBULL

@WKDAY

X

@XORB

@XORH

Y

@YDAYS

@YDIV

@YEAR

@YEARFRAC

@YIELD

@YIELDDISC

@YIELDMAT

@YLD2YLD

Z

@ZTEST


Control Menu

The Control menu is common to all Windows applications. To display it, click the Control-menu box [image] in the upper left corner of a window. Commands are

Restore	Returns a window to its previous size and position

Move	Moves a window

Size	Changes window size

Minimize	Reduces a window to an icon

Maximize	Expands a window to fill the screen

Close	Closes a window

Next	Switches to the next window in the series of current windows

Test	Tests a custom application

Switch To	Switches to another window that you pick from a list


Help Error

To get help on this topic, click the Help Contents button above, then select the appropriate Help subject area.


Help Error No. 2

To get help on this topic, click the Help Contents button above, then select the appropriate Help subject area.


3-D block

A block that spans multiple pages.


@function

One of a set of special commands you can enter in a cell, either alone or in a formula. @Functions perform calculations and return the resulting value.


absolute cell reference

A cell reference in a formula that always references the same cell, even if the formula is copied to a different part of the notebook. To make a cell reference absolute, use the Abs key (F4) to insert dollar signs in its address--for example, $A$5. See also relative cell reference.


active cell

The cell affected by commands you choose. The selector distinguishes the active cell from other cells in the page.


active window

The window affected by commands you choose. In Quattro Pro, the active window is on top and its title bar and frame are the same color as the Quattro Pro application title bar.


address

The identifier for the location of a cell in a notebook. Within a spreadsheet page, a cell address is the letter of its column followed by the number of its row. For example, D5 is the address of the cell in column D and row 5. From one spreadsheet page to another within the same notebook, the address begins with the page letter or name. For example, B:D5 is the address of the cell in column D, row 5 of page B. From one notebook to another, the address begins with the notebook file name in brackets. For example, [EAST]B:D5 is the address of the cell in a notebook named East in page B, column D, row 5.


ANSI

The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) character set used in Windows products. ANSI characters can be translated into decimal and hexadecimal numbers.


argument

Information required by many @functions and macro commands. It supplies information to the command. For example, in @SUM(A4..A10), the block coordinates A4..A10 is the argument; it indicates what values to add together.


array

Rows and columns of data you can work with independently, not just as a whole block. @ARRAY is used in most array calculations.


arrow keys

Keys on the numeric keypad (usually on the right side of the keyboard) used to move the selector or insertion point. They are usually marked with arrows: Up, Down, Left, Right.


ASCII

Acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange, the accepted standard for translating the first 128 alphabetic and numeric characters, symbols, and control instructions into 7-bit binary code. The ASCII character set is different from ANSI, the standard character set used in Windows products.


aspect ratio

The proportion of width to height of a graph. There are several ways to control a graph's aspect ratio, depending on where you want to display or print the graph.


autoload file

A file that opens automatically when you start Quattro Pro. You specify it with the Autoload File option of the application Startup property.


axis

Most graphs contain two axes: The x-axis usually runs horizontally along the bottom of the graph; the y-axis usually runs vertically on the left. (On rotated graphs, x-axis and y-axis positions are reversed.)


balloon help

An identifying name that appears when you use the mouse to point to an object, such as a Toolbar button.


binary file

A file that contains instructions in your printer's native language for creating a printout. By default, binary files have the .PRN extension.


bitmap image

A picture in one of many graphic file formats (such as .BMP) that you can use to fill bars, backgrounds, or graphic elements.


bitmap object

A floating object containing an image in bitmap format that was pasted from another application.


block

Any rectangular group of cells, which can be selected by dragging the mouse. A block is identified in formulas by its coordinates or by its name.


border (graphic)

The outer edge of a graphic element, as opposed to its fill.


borders (notebook)

The lettered row at the top of the notebook page (A to IV) and the numbered column at the left (1 to 8192) used to identify cell addresses.


buttons

Rectangles that look like "push buttons" on the Toolbar or in dialog boxes. Clicking a button performs a particular action. Most dialog boxes have at least three buttons: OK, Cancel, and Help.

You can also create SpeedButtons, which run a macro when clicked.


cascade

To arrange the open Quattro Pro windows in cascade formation, where the bottom window in the stack is nearest to the upper left corner of the screen. The command for this is Window|Cascade.


cell

A single unit of a spreadsheet, used to store a formula or data. A notebook is made up of many spreadsheet pages, each containing more than two million cells identified by row and column location.


cell address

The identifier for the location of a cell in a notebook. Within a spreadsheet page, a cell address is the letter of its column followed by the number of its row. For example, D5 is the address of the cell in column D and row 5. From one spreadsheet page to another within the same notebook, the address begins with the page letter or name. For example, B:D5 is the address of the cell in column D, row 5 of page B. From one notebook to another, the address begins with the notebook file name in brackets. For example, [EAST]B:D5 is the address of the cell in a notebook named East in page B, column D, row 5.


cell identifier

The left part of the input line that displays the active cell's address.


cell selector

The black-bordered rectangle that indicates the active cell; called "selector" in the documentation.


check box

A control in a dialog box that switches a feature on and off. It displays a mark when on. Click the check box to turn it on or off.


client application

The application receiving data from another through a DDE or OLE link. See also server application.


Clipboard

A temporary storage area used to hold data for transfer between locations or between Windows applications.


Clipboard commands

The Edit|Cut, Copy, and Paste commands. In Quattro Pro, you can choose these commands quickly by clicking the Cut, Copy, and Paste buttons in the Toolbar.


Coaches

Online lessons that help you learn Quattro Pro features using your own data. To use them, choose Help|Coaches or click the Coaches button in the Toolbar.


command equivalents

Special commands that correspond to menu commands, used in macros.


command object

A collection of properties and actions that defines a menu command.


Consolidator

A Quattro Pro tool that combines source blocks using your choice of several statistical @functions, such as @SUM. To activate it, choose Tools|Consolidator.


constraint

A formula that defines a limit in a mathematical problem. For example, +A4 > 50 is a constraint formula which states that the value in cell A4 must be greater than 50.


contiguous

A rectangular block of adjoining cells.


Control menu

A menu common to all Windows applications that lets you move, size, and switch between windows. To display the Control menu, click the Control-menu box [image] in the upper left corner of the window.


controls

The elements of a dialog box or Toolbar that affect program actions: buttons, check boxes, and edit fields are examples of controls.


coordinates

The two addresses that define a block. The upper left and lower right addresses are always used. For example, the coordinates of the block stretching from column B,row 5 to column E, row 9 are B5..E9.


criteria table

The block in a spreadsheet that specifies what field(s) to search and what data to search for (the search criteria). Quattro Pro looks for all database records that match search criteria in the specified criteria table.


database

An organized collection of information. In Quattro Pro, a database is organized by rows, or records, of information, divided into separate columns, or fields.


database block

A Quattro Pro database, including field names in the first row and data records in the remaining rows. Each column is a data field.


data label

The label (or the part of the label) that states the value of the slice of a pie graph, or the section of a column graph. This is usually expressed as a percentage of the entire pie or column. The Data Label property in the pie or column graph Object Inspector controls the format of these labels, and has four options: Currency, Value, Percent, and None.


data point

A single cell value displayed in a graph.


data series

A block of data plotted as a group on a graph. Each value in a data series is represented by a bar in a bar graph, by a point on a line in a line graph, by a "slice" in a pie graph, and so forth. A data series is usually just called a "series," except when contrasted to a label series.


date/time number
date/time serial number

A number assigned to a date or time. The number counts the number of days before or after December 30, 1899 (day 0), and the portion of the day that has elapsed. The integer portion is for the date; the fractional portion is used for time (with .00000=12:00 midnight, .5=12:00 noon, and .999999=11:59 p.m.).


DDE

Dynamic Data Exchange. A method of exchanging data between Windows applications. You can use it to set up dynamic links between applications so that if the data in one application changes, it also changes in the other.


default

A standard setting used "by default" when no other is specified. For example, Quattro Pro's default file extension is .WB2. You can change a default setting. You can also depart from the default setting for specified areas of the notebook.


destination block

The target block for an action, such as a copy or move operation.


dialog box

A type of window used to exchange information with Quattro Pro (and other Windows applications). Most dialog boxes have options you set to control application behavior.


dialog builder

A tool used to create dialog boxes. Choose Tools|UI Builder to access it.


dialog objects

Buttons and controls in dialog boxes.


dimmed

The state of a menu command when it is unavailable for choosing. The command name appears in dimmed (gray) type on the menu.


dithered

A pattern of various colors that approximate a new color that could not otherwise be displayed by the video driver.


DLL

Dynamic Link Library. Contains functions written in a programming language. You can use functions in DLLs as custom functions in a Quattro Pro for Windows spreadsheet.


DOS

The computer operating system required to run Windows 3.x and Quattro Pro.


Drag and Drop

The method of moving a selected block of cells, graph, floating object, page tab, or other Quattro Pro object by dragging it to a new location with the mouse. You can also press Ctrl while you drag certain objects to copy them to another location.


drill

To enter data through several grouped pages at the same time. After creating a group and activating Group mode, you can select a cell and make an entry. Instead of pressing Enter, you can press Ctrl+Enter to drill the entry through all corresponding pages in the group.


drop-down list box

A dialog box area that consists of an edit field with a list. The list appears only when you click or press the down arrow at the right.


edit field

A dialog box field where you can enter data by typing or pointing.


ellipses (...)

Following a menu command or dialog box button name, these indicate that the command or button leads to a dialog box.


event

A user interface action that triggers a link command (for example, mouse clicks, keystrokes, values changing, and so on).


Experts

An alternate way to perform certain spreadsheet tasks; Experts help you use some features at a basic level with no learning required. To activate an Expert, choose Help|Experts or click the Experts button.


explode

To move a pie graph slice away from the center of the graph to emphasize it.


extended selection

A block selected by clicking a cell, then holding down the Shift key while clicking the opposite corner cell or while pressing arrow keys.


extension

A code of up to three characters attached to the end of a file name and separated from the rest of the name by a period. A file's extension often identifies the type of file it is. For example, Quattro Pro notebook files have the default extension .WB2.


field

A category of information in a database. In a Quattro Pro database, fields are set up as columns of information.


field name

The name used to identify a field. In Quattro Pro, field names are the headings of the columns of information.


file

A collection of data, stored under one name on a disk.


fill

The interior of a graphic element, as opposed to its border.


find string

In a find and replace operation, the group of characters to be found. You enter the find string in the Find edit field. See also replacement string.


floating graph

A graph that appears on a spreadsheet page. You can create a floating graph directly on a spreadsheet, or place an existing graph on a spreadsheet using Graphics|Insert Graph.


floating object

A rectangular object that can be placed on top of cells. Quattro Pro has floating graphs, arrows, ellipses, lines, rectangles, rounded rectangles, text boxes, SpeedButtons, OLE objects, bitmap objects, and picture objects.


font

A set of type used to print or display text. In Quattro Pro, you can assign different fonts to blocks of a spreadsheet and to different parts of a graph. You can change the fonts by choosing a different typeface, point size, and style (bold, italics, and so on). For example, you can change the font of a block using the block Font property.


format line

A line used with Notebook|Parse to break text into separate cells. Symbols on the line tell Quattro Pro how to break down and interpret the data.


frequency distribution

The number of times numbers within given ranges are found in a block of data. To build a frequency distribution, choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency.


function

One of a set of special commands you can enter in a cell, either alone or in a formula. Quattro Pro documentation refers to these as "@functions." @Functions perform calculations and return the resulting value.


function keys

The keys labeled F1 through F10 or F12 at the left or top of the keyboard, used to perform special actions and commands.


graph

A visual representation of numerical information, often used to show trends and relationships in data.


graph button

A special type of text box that appears in a graph.You can click it to branch to another graph (using visual transition effects if desired), run a macro, or run a macro and then branch to another graph. The background area of a graph can also be programmed as a graph button. Graph buttons are active only when a graph is viewed in a slide show or with the Graphics|View Graph command.


graph objects

Graph parts that are selectable during editing. Graph objects include integral parts of a graph (for example, axes, legend, title, and bars or lines) plus drawn objects and text boxes added with the graph Toolbar buttons. These drawn objects and text boxes are called graphic elements in the documentation.


graph pane

The area bordered by the x- and y- axes in a 2-D graph. Grid lines and the bars, lines, or areas that represent series, are drawn on top of this area.


graph type

The plotting style of a graph, such as line, bar, pie, 3-D ribbon, or text.


graph window

An area where you enhance graphs and change their properties. Graph windows have two properties of their own: Aspect Ratio and Grid options. Since each graph has its own unique graph window, you set properties for each window individually.


graphic element

Drawn object or explanatory text added to a graph. Types of graphic elements include lines, arrows, polylines, polygons, rectangles, ellipses, freehand shapes, and text boxes.


grid

In a spreadsheet page, the lines that separate rows and columns.

In a graph window, the dotted lines spaced at regular intervals in the background. You can use the grid to line up elements in a graph window.


grid lines

Lines that separate cells of a spreadsheet. Also lines extending at regular intervals from axes across a graph frame, dialog window, or Toolbar window. Graph grid lines help show the values represented by lines, bars, or areas on 2-D, 3-D, and combination graphs.


group

In a notebook window, a series of contiguous pages gathered together with Notebook|Define Group. To activate the group, choose View|Group Mode or press Alt+F5; a blue line indicates that Group mode is on and the group is active. Changes made to one page in the group affect others while the Group mode is on.

In a graph window, you can select multiple drawn elements and tie them together into one group. You can then move, resize, or change properties of the group as a whole.


handles

Small black squares, also called nibs, that appear on the border of an object when the object is selected. Drag a handle to resize the object. Drag within the selected object to move it.


headings

Descriptive label entries that appear at the top of columns or at the left of rows. You can specify that these entries be repeated on the left or top of each printed page.


hint

Text on the title bar that briefly describes the highlighted menu command. There are also Toolbar hints that appear when you point at a Toolbar button.


hotspot

This term is specific to Help. It can mean either green-colored text or part of an illustration that, when clicked,  takes you to a new topic or displays a popup window like the one in which this explanation is displayed.


indicator

An uppercase word on the right-hand side of the status line that indicates the current state, or mode, of the program. For example, when you press F2 to edit a cell's contents, the EDIT indicator appears.


input line

The line below the Toolbar where Quattro Pro displays information about the active cell. In Edit mode, the input line shows the data you are entering or editing, and it contains @ (@functions), {} (macros), X (Cancel), and checkmark (Enter) buttons.


insertion point

A flashing vertical bar indicating where text will be inserted as you type.


key

A column used to sort records. In Quattro Pro, you can sort records in a database by the entries in a given field, such as Date.


label

In a notebook cell, any entry that begins with a letter or a label-prefix character. You can type a label, or it can result from a string formula.

In a graph, entries of any type that you assign to the graph to define plotted values.


label-prefix character

A character preceding a label entry that indicates how to align the entry. A single quote (') left-aligns a label entry, a double quote (") right-aligns it, and a caret (^) centers it.


label series

A block of cells containing the labels that correspond to the values in a data series. These labels are placed over bars in a bar graph, or over data points in a line graph. In pie and column graphs, the label series is the same as the x-axis series, which places a text label next to the data label on each pie slice or column section.


legend

A key displayed beside or beneath a graph that specifies the colors, marker symbols, or fill for each series graphed.


legend series

A block of cells that provides the labels that indicate what each data series represents. In 2-D and some 3-D graphs, these labels appear beside the series markers in the legend box. In many 3-D graphs, legend labels appear along the z-axis. In multiple graphs, legend labels appear as the "titles" of the sub-graphs that represent each data series. Legend labels do not appear in pie and column graphs.


Light Table

A sizeable window that shows all the graphs in a slide show in miniature form, in the order in which they will appear. Use the Light Table window to change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.


link

A reference to a cell or block in another notebook, or a DDE or OLE operation with another application. You can also link a custom dialog box control to a notebook cell or another control.

For example, this notebook link refers to block D6..E7 on page C of notebook SALES: [SALES]C:D6..E7. If that block is named February, you could also enter the link as [SALES]C:February.


link command

A command attached to a dialog object that runs when an event occurs.


list box

Part of a dialog box that shows a list of choices.


locked titles

Columns or rows fixed onscreen at the left and/or above spreadsheet data to serve as identification headings. They remain onscreen when you scroll the spreadsheet page.


macro

A sequence of keystrokes or commands, stored in a notebook, that Quattro Pro can run to perform an action. Macros are useful whenever a long or complicated procedure is done frequently.


macro command

One of a set of special commands that can be used within macros.


macro library

A notebook used to store macros. When you run a macro, if it is not stored in the active notebook, Quattro Pro looks for it in any open macro libraries. You designate a notebook as a macro library with the notebook Macro Library property.


master slide

An optional slide selected in the Light Table window of a slide show. The master slide maintains common elements (such as a corporate logo and other graph annotations) and renders a common background style for all slides in a slide show. The master slide does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.


matrix

A rectangular array of numbers used to solve linear formulas and equations. Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert and Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply to invert and multiply matrices, respectively.


maximize

To enlarge the active window to the fullest possible size in the available workspace. Choose Maximize from the window control menu or click the up arrow in the upper right corner of the window.


menu

A list of items. Quattro Pro offers pull-down command menus accessed through the menu bar. To display a menu, click its title or press Alt plus the menu's underlined letter.


menu bar

The horizontal line just below the title bar of Quattro Pro for Windows that offers program command menus.


menu-equivalent commands

See command equivalents.


menu tree
menu system

The arrangement of commands that appear at the top of the Quattro Pro window, and their subcommands and options. You can edit the Quattro Pro menu system.


menu system definition

A notebook block containing the information that makes up a menu system: menu titles, menu commands, their shortcuts, and their underlined letters.


minimize

To reduce the active window to an icon. Choose Minimize on the window control menu or click the down arrow in the upper right corner of the window.


mode

A state the spreadsheet can be in. Actions you take have different effects depending on the current mode. For example, pressing the arrow keys in READY mode moves the selector between cells; doing so in EDIT mode moves the insertion point in the entry. The current mode is shown by an indicator on the status line.


multiple selection

A series of blocks simultaneously selected by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging each block. Any action you perform will affect all the separate blocks. You may give the multiple selection a single name (see named block).


named block

A block of cells that has been assigned a name. You can reference such blocks by name instead of by coordinates.


noncontiguous block

A block consisting of more than one rectangular notebook area selected by holding down Ctrl while dragging each area. You can reference such a block in a formula as a list of area coordinates separated by commas or by a single name (see named block).


notebook

A Quattro Pro data file that is a collection of pages. The default file-name extension for a notebook is .WB2.


numeric format

The format in which Quattro Pro displays a value. To change it for a selected cell or block, display the block Object Inspector by right-clicking and choosing Block Properties, or by choosing Property|Current Object in the Property Band, then choosing Numeric Format.

Changing the display of a value does not affect the actual value in the cell.


object

Quattro Pro objects are cells, blocks, pages, notebooks, graphs, graph objects, dialog box objects, floating objects, and the application itself. To modify an object, point to it and right-click the mouse (choose the Properties command if a QuickMenu appears) or choose Property|Current Object in the Property Band.


object group

In a graph, a set of objects that have been grouped using the Tools|Group command.


Object Help

Information on a screen object, such as a button on the Toolbar. To display Object Help, point to an object, hold down Ctrl, then right-click the mouse.


object ID

The number attached to an object upon creation, enabling it to be manipulated by macros and link commands.


Menus On Demand
object inspection

Quattro Pro's innovative way to change the characteristics of objects. By right-clicking most objects and choosing the Properties command in a QuickMenu, you display an Object Inspector and can change the setting for any of the properties listed there.


Object Inspector

The dialog box or list that appears when you right-click a selected object and choose the Properties command in a QuickMenu (except for title bars and page tabs, which have no QuickMenu) or choose one of the Property menu commands. Object Inspectors contain properties you can set to change the characteristics of objects.


Objects page

The last page in a notebook. It contains icons representing the graphs, dialog boxes, and slide shows you have created. You can create and modify graphs, slide shows, and dialog boxes in the Objects page.

To immediately display the Objects page, choose the SpeedTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window to the right of the tab scroll controls, or choose View|Objects Page. Choose the SpeedTab button again to return to the current notebook page, or choose View|Spreadsheet.


OLE

Object Linking and Embedding. A method of bringing data objects (such as a notebook block, text selection, graph, drawing or other document element) from one Windows application into another.


OLE object

An object created in another Windows application that can be inserted into Quattro Pro for Windows as a floating object. Double-clicking an OLE object in Quattro Pro starts the application in which the object was created so you can use the object.


operating system

The base software your computer uses to control application programs such as Quattro Pro.


operator

A mathematical symbol used in a formula to express a relationship between two values. For example, + and / are operators in the formula +A6+10/B2.


Optimizer

A Quattro Pro tool that lets you solve models for an optimal solution based on constraints. To use it, choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer.


orientation

The direction that Quattro Pro prints. Landscape orientation prints sideways across the length of the paper and Portrait orientation prints across the width of the paper (the default).


output block

In a database query operation, an area of the notebook where Quattro Pro copies records that match the specified search criteria. The output block must include the names of the fields you want copied for those records.

In a parse operation, an area where Quattro Pro copies the parsed data.


page

One layer of a notebook. Each notebook has 256 spreadsheet pages and one Objects page. Select pages using the tabs at the bottom of the notebook.


page break

The place where one printed page ends and another begins. You can have soft page breaks (those that Quattro Pro calculates for you) and hard page breaks (those that you create yourself with Edit|Insert Break).


pane

Part of a window. In Quattro Pro, you can break a notebook window into two panes and view different parts of the notebook in each.


parse

To split a column of long labels (such as those created by importing a text file) into two or more columns of data, usually by copying the data to a new destination. To do this, use Notebook|Parse.


paste

To place something from the Windows Clipboard into the active area.


picture object

A floating object containing an image in the metafile format that was pasted from another application.


play

To give control of an OLE object to its server application by double-clicking the object. The activity that begins when you play an object (such as playing a sound, displaying a slide show, or editing the object) is determined by the server application.


plotter

A printing device that uses colored ink jets or pens to print multicolored text and graphs.


pointer

The onscreen indicator (arrow, double-arrow, graph icon, and so on) that tracks mouse movement.


pointing

The act of indicating a cell, menu selection, or other object by moving the mouse pointer to it. Also the method of adding a block reference to a formula or to an edit field in a dialog box by dragging with the mouse or by moving the selector to its location.


precedence

The order in which operators are handled in a formula. For example, the multiplication operator (*) has a higher precedence than the addition operator (+); values are multiplied first, then added. Use parentheses to override default precedence. For example, in the following expression, the values will be added first, then multiplied: 7*(6+9).


primary notebook

A notebook containing a link to another notebook. See also supporting notebook.


properties

The characteristics of an object. For example, two of a cell's properties are Alignment and Numeric Format. To change the properties of most objects, select it; then right-click and choose the Properties command in a QuickMenu, or choose Property|Current Object in the Property Band. An Object Inspector appears, containing a list of the object's properties.


Property Band

A band directly below Quattro Pro's Toolbar that lets you change the properties of objects, set format options, and switch Toolbars.


protection

A security measure that prevents the contents of an entire notebook page from being changed. Specific blocks and floating objects (such as graphs and OLE objects) within the page can then be unprotected.


query

To find specific information in a database. In Quattro Pro, you use Tools|Database Tools|Query or Tools|Database Tools|Table Query to look for and extract information in a database.


QuickMenu

A menu that appears when you right-click most objects in Quattro Pro. For example, if you right-click the selected block, the QuickMenu displays the active block Object Inspector and performs other block tasks such as Cut and Copy.


QuickTemplate

A predesigned template file you can use to serve as the basis for a new notebook when you choose File|New. QuickTemplates provide the formatting and structural skeleton for some common spreadsheets and data entry forms used in business and at home. You can create your own customized QuickTemplates.


radio button

A type of control in a dialog box. Only one radio button can be chosen in a given group of radio buttons.


recalculation

The act of recomputing formulas after a change in a spreadsheet.


record

A set of information in a database. In a Quattro Pro for Windows database, records are rows of data.


regression analysis

A kind of analysis that shows how one set of variables is affected by one or more other sets of variables. To do a regression analysis, choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression. For advanced regression analysis, choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools, then click the Advanced Regression tool.


relative cell reference

A cell reference Quattro Pro tracks by its position in relation to the cell containing the formula, not by its absolute address. When you move or copy a formula containing a relative cell reference, the reference is adjusted to reflect its new location. See also absolute cell reference.


scale
replacement string

In a search-and-replace operation, the group of characters to replace the find string.


scale

The range of values assigned to an axis and used for plotting data on a graph. Quattro Pro scales each numeric axis to best display the data plotted on it. You can also adjust the scale manually.


scenario

A set of conditions and results displayed in the notebook as changing and result cells. You can create and save groups of scenarios with Tools|Scenario Manager or the Scenario Expert.


scroll bars

Bars along the right and lower right edges of a notebook window. Use these bars with a mouse to scroll the active notebook page: Drag the scroll box until the display is where you want it, click the scroll arrows, or click in the scroll bar itself.


scroll indicators

A small window showing the row number or column letter that corresponds to the current scroll box position in the vertical or horizontal scroll bar. When you drag the scroll box, the row or column in the scroll indicator changes.


secondary y-axis
search criteria

The specification of which field(s) in a database to search and what data to search for. The first row of the criteria table  includes fields to use as search keys. The following rows may include exact values and strings or conditional formulas to match.


search criteria
secondary y-axis

An optional vertical scale on the right side of standard (non-rotated) 2-D graphs. You can plot any series in 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low graphs on a secondary y-axis by choosing this series option in the y-axis Object Inspector. When a graph has a secondary y-axis, the scale on the left side is called the primary y-axis.


select

To activate an object before working with it in some way. Most objects are selected by pointing with the mouse and clicking the left mouse button. To select a block, drag with the mouse from the upper left cell to the lower right cell.


selector

The bordered rectangle that indicates the active cell.


sensitivity table

A table that shows the results of varying one or two essential values in a formula. Also called a what-if table, because it shows what would happen to other figures if certain values change. To build one, choose Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If.


series

A block of data plotted as a group on a graph. Each value in a series is represented by a bar in a bar graph, by a point on a line in a line graph, by a "slice" in a pie graph, and so forth.


series labels

A group of text labels, one of which is placed over each bar in a bar graph, or over each data point in a line graph. To add series labels to a graph, define a Label Series in the bar series or line series Object Inspector.


server application

The application sending data to another through a DDE or OLE link. See also client application.


shortcut

A key sequence assigned to a menu command that appears to the right of the command name in the menu. See also underlined letter.


slide show

A series of text and data graphs shown full screen in a sequence you choose. You can change the sequence, add transition effects, and control the amount of time each graph stays visible.


sort key

A column used to sort records. In Quattro Pro, you can sort records in a database by the entries in a given field, such as Date. In other applications, sort keys are sometimes called "sort fields."


source block

The original location of data to be copied or moved to a destination block.


SpeedButton

A button you can create to run macros. You can use the SpeedButton tool [image] in the Main Toolbar to create SpeedButtons, which float in a notebook page. Clicking the SpeedButton runs the macro.


SpeedTab button

A button at the bottom of the notebook window that jumps back and forth between the current notebook page and the Objects page, which contains icons for all graphs, slide shows and custom dialog boxes in the notebook.

On notebook pages A through IV, the SpeedTab button looks like this: .

On the Objects page, the SpeedTab button looks like this: .


spillover text

Part of a long label displayed in empty cells to the left or right of where the label was entered.


spreadsheet

A page of a notebook organized by rows and columns into cells.


startup directory

The directory used by default for saving and loading files. The startup directory is the directory from which you installed Quattro Pro unless you specify a different directory with the Directory option of the application File Options property.


status line

The bottom line of the Quattro Pro screen, showing CAP (if Caps Lock is on), OVR (if Overwrite mode is on), and the mode (such as READY or EDIT).


style

A set of Block property settings (such as font, shading, and alignment) gathered under a name. You use a style by choosing it from the Style list in the Toolbar. You can create new styles with Notebook|Define Style.


supporting notebook

A notebook that is referenced by a link from another notebook. See also primary notebook.


syntax

The rules for the way formulas, @functions, and macros must be entered.


system notebook

A notebook that, when hidden, remains open when you close all other notebooks. Application developers can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Quattro Pro is running. To make a notebook a system notebook, choose Property|Active Notebook in the Property Band, then choose System.


tab

A marker you can click to move to the associated page of the notebook. Initially, tabs contain the letters of pages, but you can specify full page names with the page Name property. Tabs display at the bottom of the notebook window. Also called page tab.


tab scroller
 tab scroll controls

Controls at the bottom-left of a notebook window that work like VCR (video cassette recorder) controls. The first button displays a group of pages ahead of the active page (backward toward the first page), the last button at the right displays a group of pages behind the active page (forward toward the last page), and the middle buttons move forward and backward one page at a time. To move directly to the Objects page, choose the SpeedTab button, the button to the right of the tab scroll controls.


template

A notebook file you can save to serve as a basis for other notebooks. You may want to use a template to save standard property settings or column headings, for example.


text box

A graphic design element that can contain word-wrapped text.


tick mark

A small line on a graph axis indicating a value.


tile

To divide the available space in the Quattro Pro workspace between all open windows. The command for this is Window|Tile.


title bar

The line at the top of a window that displays the name of the window. The title bar is a different color or intensity when a window is active. The title bar also shows hints when you highlight menu commands or point to Toolbar buttons.


titles

In a spreadsheet page, row or column headings that you can lock into view.

In a graph window, lines of explanatory text. You can have two major titles above the graph and one each along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the secondary y-axis.


Toolbar

The row of buttons and tools you can click just below the menu bar. The contents of the Toolbar change according to the current activity. You can also create your own Toolbars using Tools|Toolbar Designer or Tools|UI Builder.


twip

A unit of measurement equal to 1/1440th of an inch.


typeface

A design of a set of type. Times and Helvetica are examples of different typefaces. Typeface is one attribute of a font. Style (bold, italic, and so on) and point size are other attributes. Each combination of typeface, style, and size makes up a different font.


underlined letter

The character in a command or dialog box control that you can type to choose the command or control. In the Block menu, C is the underlined letter for Copy. To open a menu using its underlined letter, press Alt, then the letter. See also shortcut.


user interface (UI)

The system of interaction through which you communicate with the computer. In Quattro Pro, some elements of the UI are dialog boxes, pull-down menus, and the Toolbar. You can define your own UI using Tools|UI Builder.


value

Any numeric entry in the notebook, entered either as a number, a date, or a formula that calculates a number.


value (of an object)

The current value of a dialog box control.


variable

Part of a formula that can have more than one value. For example, in the formula +B3+8, B3 is a variable whose value changes depending on what is entered in cell B3. The other part of this formula, 8, is a constant. Its value never changes.


what-if table

A table that shows the results of varying one or two essential values in a formula. Also called a sensitivity table, because it is sensitive to value changes. To build one, choose Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If.


wildcard

Placeholder characters that can stand for one or more characters. In Quattro Pro, you can use wildcards in search conditions in a find string, when querying a database, when accessing files, and when linking notebooks. There are two wildcards: * represents any number of characters, and ? represents a single character.


workspace

The arrangement of windows and files in Quattro Pro, including the position and size of all windows, and the files contained in each. You can save the current workspace with File|Workspace|Save. Workspace files have a .WBS file-name extension.


x-axis

The horizontal line, usually at the bottom of a graph, used to plot values.


x-axis series

A block of cells that contains the labels that are placed at each division of the x-axis. (In XY graphs, the x-axis series contains data, instead of labels.) In pie and column graphs, the x-axis series places a text label next to the data label on each pie slice or column section.


y-axis

The vertical line, usually at the left of a graph, used to plot values.


z-axis

Present in many 3-D graphs, the z-axis projects from the right edge of the x-axis to the back wall of the graph. If a legend series is defined, the legend labels appear along this axis.


zoom factor

The enlargement or reduction of the screen display of cells in a notebook. You can change the zoom factor for the entire notebook or for individual pages. Percentage settings greater than 100% enlarge cells, and settings under 100% reduce them. Zoom factor settings only affect the screen display, not printed size.


Glossary

Symbols

3-D block

A

@function

absolute cell reference

active cell

active window

address

ANSI

argument

array

arrow keys

ASCII

aspect ratio

autoload file

axis

B

balloon help

binary file

bitmap image

bitmap object

block

border (graphic)

borders (notebook)

buttons

C

cascade

cell

cell address

cell identifier

cell selector

check box

client application

Clipboard

Clipboard commands

Coaches

command equivalents

command object

Consolidator

constraint

contiguous

Control menu

controls

coordinates

criteria table

D

database

database block

data label

data point

data series

date/time number

DDE

default

destination block

dialog box

dialog objects

dimmed

dithered

DLL

DOS

Drag and Drop

drill

drop-down list box

E

edit field

ellipses (...)

event

Experts

explode

extended selection

extension

F

field

field name

file

fill

find string

floating graph

floating object

font

format line

frequency distribution

function

function keys

G

graph

graph button

graph objects

graph type

graph window

graphic element

grid

grid lines

group

H

handles

headings

hint

hotspot

I

indicator

input line

insertion point

K

key

L

label

label-prefix character

label series

legend

legend series

Light Table

link

link command

list box

locked titles

M

macro

macro command

macro library

master slide

matrix

maximize

menu

menu bar

menu-equivalent commands

menu tree

minimize

mode

multiple selection

N

named block

noncontiguous block

notebook

numeric format

O

object

object group

Object Help

object ID

Object Inspector

Objects page

OLE

OLE object

operating system

operator

Optimizer

orientation

output block

P

page

page break

pane

parse

paste

picture object

play

plotter

pointer

pointing

precedence

primary notebook

properties

Property Band

protection

Q

query

QuickMenu

QuickTemplate

R

radio button

recalculation

record

regression analysis

relative cell reference

replacement string

S

scale

scenario

scroll bars

scroll indicators

search criteria

secondary y-axis

select

selector

sensitivity table

series

series labels

server application

shortcut

slide show

sort key

source block

SpeedButton

SpeedTab button

spillover text

spreadsheet

startup directory

status line

style

supporting notebook

syntax

system notebook

T

tab

tab scroll controls

template

text box

tick mark

tile

title bar

titles

Toolbar

tree definition

typeface

U

underlined letter

user interface (UI)

V

value

value (of an object)

variable

W

what-if table

wildcard

workspace

X

x-axis

x-axis series

Y

y-axis

Z

z-axis

zoom factor


How Do I

Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

Create Graphs and Slide Shows

Build Applications

The How Do I topics for each of the following components of Quattro Pro are contained in separate help files:

Use Database Desktop

Use Data Modeling Desktop

Use Workgroup Desktop


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Basic Data Entry

Types of Data

Entering Labels

Entering Labels

Aligning Labels

Entering Numbers in Labels

Entering Wide Labels

Repeating Characters in Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Numbers

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas

Formula Basics

Types of Formulas

Using Values in Formulas

Using Operators in Formulas

Types of Operators

Using @Functions in Formulas

Using the @Functions Button

Input Line Parenthesis Matching and Closing

Creating Totals

Adding Comments to Entries

Using Array Features

Working with Blocks

Using Blocks in Formulas

Pointing to Blocks

Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Using Noncontiguous Blocks

Using 3-D Blocks

Using SpeedSelect, the Navigation Tools, and Zoom To Fit

Filling a Block with Data

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Filling with Dates or Times

Using SpeedFill

Using SpeedFill with a Seed Value

Using SpeedFill on an Empty Block

Using SpeedFill on Page Tabs

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Selecting Cells and Blocks

Editing Entries

Erasing Entries

Copying and Moving Data

Overview

Dragging and Dropping

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Using the Abs Key (F4)

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving

Using the Model Copy Option

Model Copy Option Settings

Moving Pages

Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells

Inserting and Deleting

Overview of Inserting

Inserting Rows or Columns

Inserting Pages

Inserting Blocks

Overview of Deleting

Deleting Rows or Columns

Deleting Pages

Deleting Blocks

Using Named Blocks

Overview

Naming Blocks

Using Block Names in Formulas

Maintaining Block Names

Naming Blocks from Labels

Naming Multicell Blocks Automatically

Making a Table of Named Blocks

Deleting Block Names

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using the Go To Command

Extending Blocks with Go To

Tracing Errors with Go To

Finding and Replacing Data

Find and Replace Options

Using the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Selecting a Window

Duplicating a Window

Resizing and Arranging Windows

Hiding and Showing Windows

Splitting a Window into Panes

Resizing Panes

Unsynchronizing Panes

Closing the Second Pane

Locking Rows and Columns

Grouping Notebook Pages

Overview

Creating a Group

Group Mode Tips

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Defining Styles

Guidelines for Defining Custom Numeric Formats

Using Numeric Format Codes

Numeric Format Symbols

Date/Time Format Symbols

Miscellaneous Format Symbols

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Reformatting Text Entries in a Block

Transposing Columns and Rows

Converting Formulas to Values

Pasting Data

Variations on Pasting

Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted

Pasting Different Data Types

Creating Floating Objects

Overview

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Drawing Lines and Shapes on the Spreadsheet

Creating Text Boxes on the Spreadsheet

Arranging Drawn Objects

Moving and Resizing Floating Objects

Protecting Floating Objects from Change

Making Floating Objects Transparent

Adding Drop Shadows to Floating Objects

Changing Floating Object Properties

Layering Floating Objects

Copying Quattro Pro Images

Format Blocks and Pages

Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band

Overview

Setting Type Fonts and Sizes

Aligning Labels and Values

Centering Text Over Blocks

Multiple Entries with Block Centering

Underlining Blocks

Using Styles

Using SpeedFormat

Resizing Rows and Columns

Changing Block Properties

Overview

Setting Numeric Format

Choosing a Font

Shading Blocks of Cells

Aligning Entries in Cells

Drawing Lines Around Blocks

Changing Text Color

Setting Exact Column and Row Sizes

Hiding Rows and Columns

Protecting Cells

Limiting Data Input Types

Changing Page Properties

Overview

Suppressing Zeros

Removing Row and Column Borders

Hiding Spreadsheet Grid Lines

Zooming In or Out

Naming a Page

Enabling Page Protection

Coloring Conditional Cells

Setting Default Column Width

Changing Page Tab Color

Use Files

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

File-Handling Options

Loading Files

Creating a New File

Opening a File

Saving Files

Closing Files

Using Passwords

Assigning a Password to a File

Using a Password At Startup

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Using Notebook Templates

Creating a New QuickTemplate

Using Workspaces

Importing and Exporting Data

Translating Files

Saving Text Files

Importing Text

Inserting a File into a Notebook

Combining Files

Extracting Part of a Notebook

Linking Notebooks

Why Use Links?

Creating Links

Typing Links

Pointing Out Links

Pasting Links

Naming Links

Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks

Linking to Closed Notebooks

Moving and Copying Links

Loading Supporting Data

Maintaining Links

Print

Printing Notebooks and Graphs

Setting Up a Printer

Printing Notebooks

Basic Notebook Printing

Printing Graphs

Previewing a Print Job

Changing Print Settings

Selecting a Print Area

Setting Paper Type and Print Orientation

Entering Headers and Footers

Setting Margins

Inserting Page Breaks

Changing Print Size

Adding Headings

Making Printouts More Like Notebooks

Printing Cell Contents

Saving and Restoring Print Settings

Restoring and Saving Default Print Settings

Saving Print Settings

Printing to a File

Printing to a Binary File

Printing to an ASCII File

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Scenario Management Overview

Planning Scenarios

Scenario Manager Guidelines

The Capture Area

The Scenario Baseline

Scenario Cells

Finding Scenario Cells Automatically

Manually Identifying Scenario Cells

Naming and Saving Scenarios

Scenario Groups

Displaying and Editing Scenarios

Scenario Summary Report

Deleting Scenarios

Deleting Scenario Groups

Tracking Versions

Using the Consolidator

Consolidator Overview

Consolidator Guidelines

Source Blocks

Operators

Destination Blocks

Consolidator Results

Consolidator Options

Naming and Saving Consolidations

Deleting Consolidations

Creating Frequency Distributions

Guidelines for Creating Frequency Distributions

Setting Up a Frequency Bin Block

Other Basic Analyses

Graphing Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Performing Regression Analysis

Introducing Matrix Operations

Multiplying Two Matrices

Inverting a Matrix

Solving Matrix Problems

Creating What-If Tables

Introducing "What-if" Tables

One-Variable "What-if" Tables

Two-Variable "What-if" Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Guidelines for Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Entering and Editing Constraints

Setting Optimizer Options

Loading and Saving Optimizer Models

Producing Optimizer Reports

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Goal-seeking with Solve For

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Application Properties

Setting Display Options

Setting International Options

Setting Macro and Menu Options

Setting File Options

Setting General Options

Active Notebook Properties

Hiding Parts of the Notebook Display

Setting the Zoom Factor

Setting Recalculation Options

Changing the Notebook Color Palette

Making a Notebook a Macro Library

Assigning a Password to a File

Creating System Notebooks

Use OLE and DDE

Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

Overview

OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts

Embedding Information

Linking Information

Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Overview

Dragging Objects

Pasting Objects

Inserting Objects

Using and Changing Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Playing, Editing, and Opening Objects

Updating OLE and DDE Links

Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects

Using OLE Automation Features

Creating and Using Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

Overview

Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

Use Databases

Creating a Quattro Pro Database

What Is a Database?

Setting Up a Database

The Database Block

The Criteria Table

The Output Block

Searching for Records

Guidelines for Searching for Records

Highlighting Matching Records

Copying Matching Records

Deleting Matching Records

Using Database Forms

Overview

Creating and Editing Records

Searching for Records

Editing and Clearing Search Criteria

Using External Databases

Overview

Querying External Tables with the Query Command

Querying External Tables with QBE

Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

Managing Aliases

Sorting Data

Guidelines for Sorting Data

Sort Keys

Sort Order

SpeedSort Button

Sorting Tips


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Formulas

Working with Blocks

Filling a Block with Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Basic Data Entry

Types of Data

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Formulas

Working with Blocks

Filling a Block with Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Entering Labels

Entering Labels

Aligning Labels

Entering Numbers in Labels

Entering Wide Labels

Repeating Characters in Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Formulas

Working with Blocks

Filling a Block with Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Numbers

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas

Working with Blocks

Filling a Block with Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Formulas

Formula Basics

Types of Formulas

Using Values in Formulas

Using Operators in Formulas

Types of Operators

Using @Functions in Formulas

Using the @Functions Button

Input Line Parenthesis Matching and Closing

Creating Totals

Adding Comments to Entries

Using Array Features

Working with Blocks

Filling a Block with Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Formulas

Working with Blocks

Using Blocks in Formulas

Pointing to Blocks

Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Using Noncontiguous Blocks

Using 3-D Blocks

Using SpeedSelect, the Navigation Tools, and Zoom To Fit

Filling a Block with Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Introduction to Entering Data

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers, Dates, and Times

Entering Formulas

Working with Blocks

Filling a Block with Data

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Filling with Dates or Times

Using SpeedFill

Using SpeedFill with a Seed Value

Using SpeedFill on an Empty Block

Using SpeedFill on Page Tabs

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Selecting Cells and Blocks

Editing Entries

Erasing Entries

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Overview

Dragging and Dropping

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Using the Abs Key (F4)

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving

Using the Model Copy Option

Model Copy Option Settings

Moving Pages

Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Overview of Inserting

Inserting Rows or Columns

Inserting Pages

Inserting Blocks

Overview of Deleting

Deleting Rows or Columns

Deleting Pages

Deleting Blocks

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Overview

Naming Blocks

Using Block Names in Formulas

Maintaining Block Names

Naming Blocks from Labels

Naming Multicell Blocks Automatically

Making a Table of Named Blocks

Deleting Block Names

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using the Go To Command

Extending Blocks with Go To

Tracing Errors with Go To

Finding and Replacing Data

Find and Replace Options

Using the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Selecting a Window

Duplicating a Window

Resizing and Arranging Windows

Hiding and Showing Windows

Splitting a Window into Panes

Resizing Panes

Unsynchronizing Panes

Closing the Second Pane

Locking Rows and Columns

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Overview

Creating a Group

Group Mode Tips

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Defining Styles

Guidelines for Defining Custom Numeric Formats

Using Numeric Format Codes

Numeric Format Symbols

Date/Time Format Symbols

Miscellaneous Format Symbols

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Reformatting Text Entries in a Block

Transposing Columns and Rows

Converting Formulas to Values

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Variations on Pasting

Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted

Pasting Different Data Types

Creating Floating Objects

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Selecting, Editing, and Erasing

Copying and Moving Data

Inserting and Deleting

Using Named Blocks

Using Go To, Find And Replace, and the Spell Checker

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Grouping Notebook Pages

Defining Styles and Custom Numeric Formats

Reformatting, Transposing, and Converting Data

Pasting Data

Creating Floating Objects

Overview

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Drawing Lines and Shapes on the Spreadsheet

Creating Text Boxes on the Spreadsheet

Arranging Drawn Objects

Moving and Resizing Floating Objects

Protecting Floating Objects from Change

Making Floating Objects Transparent

Adding Drop Shadows to Floating Objects

Changing Floating Object Properties

Layering Floating Objects

Copying Quattro Pro Images

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band

Changing Block Properties

Changing Page Properties

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band

Overview

Setting Type Fonts and Sizes

Aligning Labels and Values

Centering Text Over Blocks

Multiple Entries with Block Centering

Underlining Blocks

Using Styles

Using SpeedFormat

Resizing Rows and Columns

Changing Block Properties

Changing Page Properties

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band

Changing Block Properties

Overview

Setting Numeric Format

Choosing a Font

Shading Blocks of Cells

Aligning Entries in Cells

Drawing Lines Around Blocks

Changing Text Color

Setting Exact Column and Row Sizes

Hiding Rows and Columns

Protecting Cells

Limiting Data Input Types

Changing Page Properties

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band

Changing Block Properties

Changing Page Properties

Overview

Suppressing Zeros

Removing Row and Column Borders

Hiding Spreadsheet Grid Lines

Zooming In or Out

Naming a Page

Enabling Page Protection

Coloring Conditional Cells

Setting Default Column Width

Changing Page Tab Color

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

Using Passwords

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Importing and Exporting Data

Linking Notebooks

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

File-Handling Options

Loading Files

Creating a New File

Opening a File

Saving Files

Closing Files

Using Passwords

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Importing and Exporting Data

Linking Notebooks

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

Using Passwords

Assigning a Password to a File

Using a Password At Startup

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Importing and Exporting Data

Linking Notebooks

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

Using Passwords

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Using Notebook Templates

Creating a New QuickTemplate

Using Workspaces

Importing and Exporting Data

Linking Notebooks

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

Using Passwords

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Importing and Exporting Data

Translating Files

Saving Text Files

Importing Text

Inserting a File into a Notebook

Combining Files

Extracting Part of a Notebook

Linking Notebooks

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

Using Passwords

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Importing and Exporting Data

Linking Notebooks

Why Use Links?

Creating Links

Typing Links

Pointing Out Links

Pasting Links

Naming Links

Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks

Linking to Closed Notebooks

Moving and Copying Links

Loading Supporting Data

Maintaining Links

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Printing Notebooks and Graphs

Changing Print Settings

Saving and Restoring Print Settings

Printing to a File

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Printing Notebooks and Graphs

Setting Up a Printer

Printing Notebooks

Basic Notebook Printing

Printing Graphs

Previewing a Print Job

Changing Print Settings

Saving and Restoring Print Settings

Printing to a File

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Printing Notebooks and Graphs

Changing Print Settings

Selecting a Print Area

Setting Paper Type and Print Orientation

Entering Headers and Footers

Setting Margins

Inserting Page Breaks

Changing Print Size

Adding Headings

Making Printouts More Like Notebooks

Printing Cell Contents

Saving and Restoring Print Settings

Printing to a File

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Printing Notebooks and Graphs

Changing Print Settings

Saving and Restoring Print Settings

Restoring and Saving Default Print Settings

Saving Print Settings

Printing to a File

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Printing Notebooks and Graphs

Changing Print Settings

Saving and Restoring Print Settings

Printing to a File

Printing to a Binary File

Printing to an ASCII File

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Creating What-If Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Scenario Management Overview

Planning Scenarios

Scenario Manager Guidelines

The Capture Area

The Scenario Baseline

Scenario Cells

Finding Scenario Cells Automatically

Manually Identifying Scenario Cells

Naming and Saving Scenarios

Scenario Groups

Displaying and Editing Scenarios

Scenario Summary Report

Deleting Scenarios

Deleting Scenario Groups

Tracking Versions

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Creating What-If Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Consolidator Overview

Consolidator Guidelines

Source Blocks

Operators

Destination Blocks

Consolidator Results

Consolidator Options

Naming and Saving Consolidations

Deleting Consolidations

Creating Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Creating What-If Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Guidelines for Creating Frequency Distributions

Setting Up a Frequency Bin Block

Other Basic Analyses

Graphing Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Creating What-If Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Performing Regression Analysis

Introducing Matrix Operations

Multiplying Two Matrices

Inverting a Matrix

Solving Matrix Problems

Creating What-If Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Creating What-If Tables

Introducing "What-if" Tables

One-Variable "What-if" Tables

Two-Variable "What-if" Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Creating What-If Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Guidelines for Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Entering and Editing Constraints

Setting Optimizer Options

Loading and Saving Optimizer Models

Producing Optimizer Reports

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis and Matrix Operations

Creating What-If Tables

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Using Solve For and Analysis Tools

Goal-seeking with Solve For

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Application Properties

Active Notebook Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Application Properties

Setting Display Options

Setting International Options

Setting Macro and Menu Options

Setting File Options

Setting General Options

Active Notebook Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Application Properties

Active Notebook Properties

Hiding Parts of the Notebook Display

Setting the Zoom Factor

Setting Recalculation Options

Changing the Notebook Color Palette

Making a Notebook a Macro Library

Assigning a Password to a File

Creating System Notebooks

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Creating and Using Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

Overview

OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts

Embedding Information

Linking Information

Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Creating and Using Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Overview

Dragging Objects

Pasting Objects

Inserting Objects

Using and Changing Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Playing, Editing, and Opening Objects

Updating OLE and DDE Links

Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects

Using OLE Automation Features

Creating and Using Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Creating and Using Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

Overview

Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

Use Databases


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases

Creating a Quattro Pro Database

Searching for Records

Using Database Forms

Using External Databases

Sorting Data


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases

Creating a Quattro Pro Database

What Is a Database?

Setting Up a Database

The Database Block

The Criteria Table

The Output Block

Searching for Records

Using Database Forms

Using External Databases

Sorting Data


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases

Creating a Quattro Pro Database

Searching for Records

Guidelines for Searching for Records

Highlighting Matching Records

Copying Matching Records

Deleting Matching Records

Using Database Forms

Using External Databases

Sorting Data


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases

Creating a Quattro Pro Database

Searching for Records

Using Database Forms

Overview

Creating and Editing Records

Searching for Records

Editing and Clearing Search Criteria

Using External Databases

Sorting Data


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases

Creating a Quattro Pro Database

Searching for Records

Using Database Forms

Using External Databases

Overview

Querying External Tables with the Query Command

Querying External Tables with QBE

Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

Managing Aliases

Sorting Data


How Do I
Use Spreadsheet Notebooks

 Open Books	 Close Books

Enter Data

Edit Data

Format Blocks and Pages

Use Files

Print

Analyze Data

Set Global Properties

Use OLE and DDE

Use Databases

Creating a Quattro Pro Database

Searching for Records

Using Database Forms

Using External Databases

Sorting Data

Guidelines for Sorting Data

Sort Keys

Sort Order

SpeedSort Button

Sorting Tips


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Graph Basics

The Graph Window

The Objects Page

Creating Numeric Graphs

Using the Graph Expert

Creating a Floating Graph

Creating a Graph in a Window

How Series are Plotted

Choosing Graph Styles

Using the Graph Gallery

Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing a Graph Type

Changing the Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Rearranging Data Series

Adding a Series

Graphing Grouped or Linked Data

Deleting a Series

Adjusting Legend and X-Axis Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Adding Titles to the Graph

Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points

Saving Graphs

Editing Graphs

Renaming Graphs

Deleting Graphs

Copying Graphs Within a Notebook

Copying Graphs Between Notebooks

Copying Graphs Using Drag and Drop

Inserting an Existing Graph on a Page

Moving and Resizing Floating Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Creating Bullet Charts

Creating a Blank Graph

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Customizing Graph Properties

Displaying Graph Object Inspectors

Graph Setup and Background Properties

Floating Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the Graph Type

Changing the Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Adjusting 3-D View

Changing 3-D Options

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Graph Background Appearance

Graph Pane Properties

Changing Axis Properties

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties

Axis Title Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Fill and Border Properties

Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors

Selecting a Fill Style

Changing Box or Border Style

Filling an Object with a Bitmap

Making an Object Transparent

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Legend Properties

Changing Graph Series Options

Changing the Data Series

Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points

Changing Label Properties

Overriding a Legend Label

Creating a Custom Combination Graph

Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis

Changing Graph Title and Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Bar Graphs

Customizing Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing Area and Surface Graphs

Customizing Pie and Doughnut Graphs

Customizing Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Customizing High-Low Graphs

Customizing Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Drawing Freehand Shapes

Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

Working with Graph Objects

Selecting Objects

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

Arranging Object Layers

Aligning Objects

Moving and Resizing Objects

Changing Object Properties

Creating Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Creating Text Boxes in a Graph

Referencing a Cell on a Notebook Page

Entering Text from the Clipboard

Adding Bullets to Text

Changing Text Properties

Presetting Text and Box Properties

Creating 3-D Text

Adding Spreadsheet Blocks to a Graph

Using Color

Using Color Palettes

Creating Custom Colors

Creating Custom Color Palettes

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Importing Graphics

Cropping, Resizing, and Tiling Bitmaps

Modifying .CGM and .CLP Graphics

Exporting Graphics

Create Slide Shows

Creating and Running a Slide Show

Creating a Slide Show

Using the Slide Show Expert

Setting Default Effects and Display Times

Adding Transition Effects

Adding Slides to a Slide Show

Running a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Overview

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window

Selecting a Master Slide

Using the Master Slide Gallery

Changing Slide Show Effects and Display Times

Editing a Slide

Closing the Light Table Window

Slide Show Shortcuts

Using Graph Buttons

Creating a Graph Button

Creating a Background Graph Button

Analytical Graphing

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing

Aggregation

Moving Average

Linear Fit

Exponential Fit

Result Tables

Multiple Relationships in One Graph


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Creating Numeric Graphs

Choosing Graph Styles

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Graph Basics

The Graph Window

The Objects Page

Creating Numeric Graphs

Choosing Graph Styles

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Creating Numeric Graphs

Using the Graph Expert

Creating a Floating Graph

Creating a Graph in a Window

How Series are Plotted

Choosing Graph Styles

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Creating Numeric Graphs

Choosing Graph Styles

Using the Graph Gallery

Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Creating Numeric Graphs

Choosing Graph Styles

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing a Graph Type

Changing the Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Creating Numeric Graphs

Choosing Graph Styles

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Rearranging Data Series

Adding a Series

Graphing Grouped or Linked Data

Deleting a Series

Adjusting Legend and X-Axis Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Creating Numeric Graphs

Choosing Graph Styles

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Adding Titles to the Graph

Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points

Saving Graphs

Editing Graphs

Renaming Graphs

Deleting Graphs

Copying Graphs Within a Notebook

Copying Graphs Between Notebooks

Copying Graphs Using Drag and Drop

Inserting an Existing Graph on a Page

Moving and Resizing Floating Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Getting Started with Graphs

Creating Numeric Graphs

Choosing Graph Styles

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Creating Bullet Charts

Creating a Blank Graph

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Customizing Graph Properties

Displaying Graph Object Inspectors

Graph Setup and Background Properties

Floating Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the Graph Type

Changing the Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Adjusting 3-D View

Changing 3-D Options

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Graph Background Appearance

Graph Pane Properties

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties

Axis Title Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Fill and Border Properties

Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors

Selecting a Fill Style

Changing Box or Border Style

Filling an Object with a Bitmap

Making an Object Transparent

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Legend Properties

Changing Graph Series Options

Changing the Data Series

Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points

Changing Label Properties

Overriding a Legend Label

Creating a Custom Combination Graph

Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis

Changing Graph Title and Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Bar Graphs

Customizing Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing Area and Surface Graphs

Customizing Pie and Doughnut Graphs

Customizing Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Introduction to Graph Properties

Changing the Graph Type and Legend Position

Changing the 3-D View

Changing the Graph Background and Graph Pane

Changing Axis Properties

Changing Fill, Background, Box, and Border Style

Changing Legend, Series, and Title/Subtitle Properties

Customizing Bar and Line Graphs

Customizing Area, Surface, Pie, Doughnut, and Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs and Bullet Charts

Customizing High-Low Graphs

Customizing Bullet Charts

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Working with Graph Objects

Creating Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Using Color

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Drawing Freehand Shapes

Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

Working with Graph Objects

Creating Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Using Color

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Working with Graph Objects

Selecting Objects

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

Arranging Object Layers

Aligning Objects

Moving and Resizing Objects

Changing Object Properties

Creating Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Using Color

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Working with Graph Objects

Creating Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Creating Text Boxes in a Graph

Referencing a Cell on a Notebook Page

Entering Text from the Clipboard

Adding Bullets to Text

Changing Text Properties

Presetting Text and Box Properties

Creating 3-D Text

Adding Spreadsheet Blocks to a Graph

Using Color

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Working with Graph Objects

Creating Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Using Color

Using Color Palettes

Creating Custom Colors

Creating Custom Color Palettes

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Drawing Lines and Shapes

Working with Graph Objects

Creating Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Using Color

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Importing Graphics

Cropping, Resizing, and Tiling Bitmaps

Modifying .CGM and .CLP Graphics

Exporting Graphics

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Creating and Running a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Using Graph Buttons

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Creating and Running a Slide Show

Creating a Slide Show

Using the Slide Show Expert

Setting Default Effects and Display Times

Adding Transition Effects

Adding Slides to a Slide Show

Running a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Using Graph Buttons

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Creating and Running a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Overview

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window

Selecting a Master Slide

Using the Master Slide Gallery

Changing Slide Show Effects and Display Times

Editing a Slide

Closing the Light Table Window

Slide Show Shortcuts

Using Graph Buttons

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Creating and Running a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Using Graph Buttons

Creating a Graph Button

Creating a Background Graph Button

Analytical Graphing


Create Graphs and Slide Shows

 Open Books	 Close Books

Build Graphs

Change Graph Properties

Enhance Graphs

Create Slide Shows

Analytical Graphing

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing

Aggregation

Moving Average

Linear Fit

Exponential Fit

Result Tables

Multiple Relationships in One Graph


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

What is an Application

Understanding Application Components

Designing Dialog Boxes

Designing Toolbars

Designing Menus

Designing Macros

Preparing to Build an Application

Using Developer Mode

Create Dialog Boxes

Dialog Box Guidelines

Opening a New Dialog Box

Adding Dialog Controls

Labeling Controls

Customizing Controls

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command

Linking Commands to Dialog Controls

Testing Dialog Boxes

Working with Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

About Basic Toolbars

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Using Button Palettes

Setting Button Properties

Adding Custom Buttons and Labels

Assigning Macros

Removing Toolbar Objects

Setting Toolbar Properties

Saving Custom Toolbars

Closing Toolbars in the Toolbar Designer

Editing Custom Toolbars

Using Custom Toolbars

Exiting Toolbar Designer

Opening and Closing Toolbars

Toolbar Control Menu

Build Complex Toolbars

About Complex Toolbars

Complex Toolbar Guidelines

Opening a New Toolbar

Adding Controls to the Toolbar

Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls

Saving and Displaying the Toolbar

Editing Toolbars

Testing Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Selecting Several Controls

Copying and Moving Controls

Moving and Sizing Controls

Using the Dimension Options

Moving Overlapping Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Aligning Controls

Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting a Control's Value

Changing a Control's Text

Using the Clipboard with Controls

Assigning a Key to a Control

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Setting Tab Order

Group Box Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, and Grouping Controls

Disabling and Hiding Controls

Grouping Controls

Resizing Grouped Controls

Connecting Controls to Cells or Other Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Providing Hints

Creating Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Overview

The Object Link Dialog Box

Link Events

Assigning a Link Command to a Control

Link Command Examples

Linking a Dialog Box to Help

Build Menus

Introduction to Building Menus

What is a Menu?

Menu Design Tips

Customizing the Menu Bar

Adding Menus to the Menu Bar

Replacing the Menu Bar

Changing Command Properties

Using Command Definitions

Overview

Naming a Menu Command

Making Menu Commands Act

Menu Hints and Help

Assigning a Shortcut Key

Graying Menu Commands

Inserting Check Marks

Adding and Deleting Menus and Commands

Deleting Menus

Adding and Deleting Menu Commands


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

What is an Application

Understanding Application Components

Designing Dialog Boxes

Designing Toolbars

Designing Menus

Designing Macros

Preparing to Build an Application

Using Developer Mode

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Dialog Box Guidelines

Opening a New Dialog Box

Adding Dialog Controls

Labeling Controls

Customizing Controls

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command

Linking Commands to Dialog Controls

Testing Dialog Boxes

Working with Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

About Basic Toolbars

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Using Button Palettes

Setting Button Properties

Adding Custom Buttons and Labels

Assigning Macros

Removing Toolbar Objects

Setting Toolbar Properties

Saving Custom Toolbars

Closing Toolbars in the Toolbar Designer

Editing Custom Toolbars

Using Custom Toolbars

Exiting Toolbar Designer

Opening and Closing Toolbars

Toolbar Control Menu

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

About Complex Toolbars

Complex Toolbar Guidelines

Opening a New Toolbar

Adding Controls to the Toolbar

Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls

Saving and Displaying the Toolbar

Editing Toolbars

Testing Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, Grouping, and Connecting Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Selecting Several Controls

Copying and Moving Controls

Moving and Sizing Controls

Using the Dimension Options

Moving Overlapping Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, Grouping, and Connecting Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Aligning Controls

Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, Grouping, and Connecting Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting a Control's Value

Changing a Control's Text

Using the Clipboard with Controls

Assigning a Key to a Control

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, Grouping, and Connecting Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Setting Tab Order

Group Box Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, Grouping, and Connecting Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, Grouping, and Connecting Controls

Disabling and Hiding Controls

Grouping Controls

Resizing Grouped Controls

Connecting Controls to Cells or Other Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Selecting, Copying, and Moving Controls

Aligning and Repositioning Controls

Changing the Properties of Controls

Setting Tab and Selection Order

Disabling, Hiding, Grouping, and Connecting Controls

Creating Hints and Object Help

Providing Hints

Creating Object Help

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Overview

The Object Link Dialog Box

Link Events

Assigning a Link Command to a Control

Link Command Examples

Linking a Dialog Box to Help

Build Menus


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus

Introduction to Building Menus

Customizing the Menu Bar

Using Command Definitions

Adding and Deleting Menus and Commands


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus

Introduction to Building Menus

What is a Menu?

Menu Design Tips

Customizing the Menu Bar

Using Command Definitions

Adding and Deleting Menus and Commands


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus

Introduction to Building Menus

Customizing the Menu Bar

Adding Menus to the Menu Bar

Replacing the Menu Bar

Changing Command Properties

Using Command Definitions

Adding and Deleting Menus and Commands


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus

Introduction to Building Menus

Customizing the Menu Bar

Using Command Definitions

Overview

Naming a Menu Command

Making Menu Commands Act

Menu Hints and Help

Assigning a Shortcut Key

Graying Menu Commands

Inserting Check Marks

Adding and Deleting Menus and Commands


Build Applications

 Open Books	 Close Books

Application Basics

Create Dialog Boxes

Build Basic Toolbars

Build Complex Toolbars

Work with Controls

Work with Link Commands

Build Menus

Introduction to Building Menus

Customizing the Menu Bar

Using Command Definitions

Adding and Deleting Menus and Commands

Deleting Menus

Adding and Deleting Menu Commands


Special Keys

The following keys provide useful shortcuts for many Quattro Pro tasks:

Key(s)	Description

Ctrl+N	File|New

Ctrl+O	File|Open

Ctrl+W	File|Close

Ctrl+S	File|Save

Ctrl+P	File|Print

Ctrl+Q	File|Exit

Ctrl+Z	Edit|Undo

Ctrl+X	Edit|Cut

Ctrl+C	Edit|Copy

Ctrl+V	Edit|Paste

Ctrl+B	Boldface

Ctrl+I	Italic

Ctrl+E	Center

Ctrl+U	Underline

Ctrl+L	Left align

Ctrl+R	Right align

Alt+P	Property list (on Property Band)

Alt+Right Arrow	Displays a list of formats to apply to the selected block; equivalent to clicking the SpeedFormat button.

Backspace	Erases the character to the left of the cursor.

Caps Lock	Enters Caps mode, in which all letters you type are displayed in uppercase letters. Press again to exit Caps mode.

Ctrl+Backspace	Clears an existing entry in a dialog box, or on the input line in Edit mode.

Ctrl+Break	If pressed while a macro is executing, terminates the macro.

Del	Erases the contents (but not properties) of the current cell or selected block. To delete both contents and properties, use Edit|Clear.

Ctrl+Del	In Group mode, acts like Del, but "drills" the deletion through the group (deletes the selected cell, block, or object on all grouped pages).

/ (Slash)	Activates the active menu system, set with the Slash Key option of the Macro property in the Application Object Inspector.

\ (Backslash)	Lets you enter one or more characters to repeat across an entire cell width.

Enter	In the notebook, writes the entry on the input line into the current cell and returns to Ready mode. In a menu, choice list, or dialog box, chooses the highlighted item.

Esc	Cancels whatever you are doing. For example, it can back you out of a menu, exit a dialog box, or erase any changes you made to an entry on the input line.

Num Lock	Toggles performance of the numeric keypad keys. When you first press Num Lock, the NUM indicator displays and you can use the keypad for entering numbers. When you press it again you can use these keys as direction keys.

Pause	Enters macro Debug mode (works like Ctrl+F2).

Scroll Lock	Toggles performance of the arrow keys. When you first press Scroll Lock, the SCR indicator displays and the arrow keys scroll the contents of the active window without moving the selector. When you press it again you can move the selector with the arrow keys.

Ctrl+PgDn or PgUp	Moves from one page to the next or previous page; In an Object Inspector or dialog box with multiple settings, changes panes (groups of property options).

Ctrl+Shift+PgDn or PgUp	Selects multiple pages.

Up or Down Arrows	In a dialog box edit field, enters Point mode.

Tab	In the notebook, moves right one cell. In a dialog box, Tab moves between controls. In a graph window, Tab inserts a tab space in text boxes; use Ctrl+Tab to select the next object.

Shift+Tab	In the notebook, moves left one cell. In a dialog box, Shift+Tab moves to the previous control. In a graph window, Shift+Tab moves to the start of the current word in a text box; use Ctrl+Shift+Tab to select the previous object.

Ctrl+Left	In the notebook, moves left one screen.

Ctrl+Right	In the notebook, moves right one screen.

Ctrl+Shift+F	Displays a list of formats to apply to the selected block; equivalent to clicking the SpeedFormat button (same as pressing Alt+Right Arrow).

Ctrl+Shift+L	Displays a list of series names you can choose to fill a block with a sequence of entries; equivalent to clicking the SpeedFill button.

Ctrl+Shift+S	Displays a list of styles to apply to the selected block.

Ctrl+Shift+T	Cycles through available Toolbars for the active window.

See Also

Mouse Techniques


Edit Mode Keys

The following keys are available when Quattro Pro is in Edit mode.

Key(s)	Function

Esc	Exits Edit mode; if General|Compatible Keys is checked in the application Object Inspector, the first Esc erases the contents of the input line, and a second Esc exits Edit mode.

Enter	Enters the data and exits Edit mode.

Ctrl+Enter	In Group mode, acts like Enter, but "drills" data through all grouped pages at once.

Up	Moves the insertion point up a line (if data is wrapped on more than one line). If General|Compatible Keys is checked in the application Object Inspector, Up enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves up one cell. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.

Down	Moves the insertion point down a line (if data is wrapped on more than one line). If General|Compatible Keys is checked in the application Object Inspector, Down enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves down one cell. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.

PgDn	Enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves down one screen. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.

PgUp	Enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves up one screen. When the insertion point follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.

Ins	Toggles between Insert and Overwrite modes. (Insert mode is the default.)

Backspace	Deletes characters to the left of the insertion point.

Del	Deletes characters to the right of the insertion point, or the selected cell block or floating object.

Ctrl+Backspace	Erases the contents of the input line.

Tab or Ctrl+Right	Moves to the next word (or five spaces to the right if General|Compatible Keys is checked in the application Object Inspector).

Shift+Tab or Ctrl+Left	Moves to the previous word (or five spaces to the left if General|Compatible Keys is checked in the application Object Inspector).

Ctrl+Shift+Right	Highlights from the insertion point to the next word (or highlights five characters to the right of the insertion point if General|Compatible Keys is checked in the application Object Inspector).

Ctrl+Shift+Left	Highlights from the insertion point to the previous word (or highlights five characters to the left of the insertion point if General|Compatible Keys is checked in the application Object Inspector).

F2	Toggles to display an indicator on the status line that tells you what type of data you are editing--either value or label.

F3	With the insertion point positioned after an operator, displays a list of block names.

Shift+F3	Displays a list of macro commands.

Alt+F3	Displays a list of @functions.

F9	Calculates and then displays result of formulas on the input line.

See Also

Mouse Techniques


Point Mode Keys

The following keys are available when Quattro Pro is in point mode.

Key(s)	Function

Period key + block	To point to a block, move to one corner, press the period key to "anchor" the block, move to the opposite corner, then press Enter.

To extend the selection from a different corner of the highlighted block, press the period key to move clockwise around the corners of the block.

Enter	Enters the highlighted block in the formula or dialog box and exits Point mode.

Esc	If pressed while pointing to a cell block, returns you to the anchor cell.

Backspace	If pressed while pointing to a cell block, returns you to the cell that was current before you entered Point mode.

F4	Makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute. Press repeatedly to cycle through the absolute combinations; for example, $A:$B$4, $A:B$4. (Does not disturb the position of the selector.)

Alt+F5	Toggles Group mode.

F6	If the window is split into two panes, jumps to the other pane.

Ctrl+F6	If multiple windows are open, jumps to the next window.

See Also

Mouse Techniques

Pointing from Dialog Boxes


Print Preview Keys

The following table lists keys you can use while previewing:

Key	Effect

Esc	Exits the preview.

F1	Displays online help.

PgUp	Displays the previous page.

PgDn	Displays the next page.

+	(plus key) Zooms in a level, increasing detail.

-	(minus key) Zooms out a level, decreasing detail.

Up arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display up.

Down arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display down.

Right arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display right.

Left arrow	Scrolls the zoomed display left.

Home	Displays the top left of a zoomed page.

End	Displays the bottom right of a zoomed page.

See Also

Mouse Techniques


Navigation Keys

The following keys allow you to move easily through Quattro Pro notebooks:

Key(s)	Description

Left arrow	Moves left one cell.

Right arrow	Moves right one cell.

Up arrow	Moves up one cell.

Down arrow	Moves down one cell.

Ctrl+PgDn	Moves forward one page.

Ctrl+PgUp	Moves backward one page.

PgUp	Moves up one screen.

PgDn	Moves down one screen.

Home	Moves to upper left cell (A1) of the active page.

Ctrl+Home	Moves to upper left cell (A1) of the first page.

End	Must be used with another direction key.

End+Home	Moves to lower right corner of the non-blank part of the notebook page.

End+Ctrl+Home	Moves to the last nonblank cell in the notebook.

End + arrow key	If in a filled cell, the selector moves in the direction of the arrow to the next non-blank cell before an empty one; if the next cell in the direction of the arrow is empty, moves to the next filled cell in that direction.

Tab	In the notebook, moves right one cell. In a dialog box, Tab moves between controls. In a graph window, Tab inserts a tab space in text boxes; use Ctrl+Tab to select the next object.

Shift+Tab	In the notebook, moves left one cell. In a dialog box, Shift+Tab moves to the previous control. In a graph window, Shift+Tab moves to the start of the current word in a text box; use Ctrl+Shift+Tab to select the previous object.

Ctrl+Left arrow	Moves left one screen.

Ctrl+Right arrow	Moves right one screen.

F5 (Go To)	Moves to the cell you specify.

See Also

Mouse Techniques


Function Keys

The following list describes the use of each function key when pressed alone, or together with the Control, Shift,or Alt keys.

Key(s)	Description

F1	Activates the Help system.

Ctrl+F1	Activates the Spell Checker (equivalent to Tools|Spell Check).

F2	Activates Edit mode so you can change a cell entry.

Shift+F2	Activates Debug mode so you can execute a macro step by step.

Alt+F2	Displays the Tools|Macro|Play dialog box.

Ctrl+F2	Activates the Formula Composer (equivalent to Tools|Formula Composer).

F3	When you are prompted for a block, or in Edit mode with the insertion point positioned after an operator, press F3 to display a list of block names. To expand the list of block names to show their coordinates, press the Expand key (+). Press the Contract key (-) to remove coordinates. Press F3 again to "zoom" the names list to full screen or to shrink it back down.

Shift+F3	Displays a list of available macros, by category.

Alt+F3	In Value or Edit mode, displays a list of @functions, by category.

Ctrl+F3	Lets you create a named block; the keyboard equivalent of Block|Names.

F4	In Edit, Value, or Point mode, makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute. Press repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations; for example, $A:$B$4, $A:B$4. You can use F4 when entering or editing a formula. You can also use it in Point mode without disturbing the position of the selector.

Alt+F4	Exits Quattro Pro.

Ctrl+F4	Closes a window (notebook, dialog box, graph window, Light Table window, or dialog window).

F5	Moves the selector to a specified cell address.

Shift+F5	Works like the SpeedTab button; displays the Objects page, then returns to a spreadsheet page.

Alt+F5	Switches Group mode on and off.

F6	If the window is split into two panes, jumps to the other pane.

Ctrl+F6	Displays the next open window.

F7	Repeats the previous Query command.

Shift+F7	Press Shift+F7 and use the arrow keys to select a block of text in Ext mode.

F8	Repeats the last Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If command.

F9	In Ready mode, recalculates the notebook. In Edit mode, calculates and then displays result of formulas on the input line. For example, if you type 8*9 on the input line, then press F9, Quattro Pro replaces the formula with the result, 72. To recalculate the entire notebook afterwards, press F9 again in Ready mode.

F10	Works like / or Alt; moves the selector to the menu bar.

F11	Displays the current graph (equivalent to Graphics|View Graph). Press Esc to return to the notebook.

F12	Displays an Object Inspector for the selected object.

Shift+F12	Displays an Object Inspector for the active window.

Alt+F12	Displays the application Object Inspector.

See Also

Mouse Techniques


Formula Composer Keys

The following list describes the shortcut keys available when working in the formula outline pane of the Formula Composer dialog box.

Key(s)	Description

Ctrl++	Expands the outline one level

Ctrl+*	Expands the whole outline for the formula.

Ctrl+-	Collapses the current branch of the outline.

Ctrl+F	Goes to a referenced cell in the formula.

Ctrl+B	Returns to the previous cell containing a formula that references the current cell.

Ctrl+E	Converts the current expression to a value.

Ctrl+O	Replaces the current expression with an @function.

Ctrl+P	Switches to Point mode to specify a cell reference by pointing to a cell (or cells) on a notebook page.

Ctrl+N	Replaces the current expression with a block name.

See Also

Using the Formula Composer


{Blank Line}
{  }

{  } does nothing; use it to reserve space or insert blank lines in the macro without stopping it. Quattro Pro continues running the macro command following {  }.

See { ; } and {STEPON} for examples.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{;}

Format

{;String}

String	=	numbers or letters up to 1020

{ ; } lets you add explanatory remarks or comments to a macro. When Quattro Pro encounters this macro command, it skips over it.

{ ; } is a convenient way to temporarily hide other macro commands, such as a branch to an incomplete macro.

Example

This example runs the _int_update subroutine, which calculates interest to date, then branches to the_print_inv subroutine to print the invoice. Notice how the comments embedded in the macro help make it easier to follow.

{; calculate interest to date}

{_int_update}

{  }

{; print the invoice}

{BRANCH _print_inv}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ ? }

{ ? } pauses macro execution and lets macro users press function keys, access menus, and choose commands until Enter is pressed. At that point the macro resumes execution.

Since this command gives users complete program control, use it with caution.

You must append a {CR} or ~ command after the { ? } to complete any user entry that requires Enter. For example, if the macro { ? } was used, and the user typed 67 then pressed Enter, the value would remain on the input line at the top of the application window even though the macro resumes. {CR} or ~ (or pressing Enter again) would then enter 67 into the cell.

Example

This macro selects cell E15, enters the label Check Number? in the cell to act as a prompt, then passes control to the keyboard so the user can enter a check number. The information the user enters replaces the Check Number? prompt.

{EditGoto E15}

{PUTCELL "Check Number?"}

{?}~

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ABS}

Format

{ABS <Number>}

Number	=	1 through 8; 1 = pressing F4 once, 2 = pressing F4 twice, and so on (optional)

{ABS} is equivalent to the Abs key, F4. The {ABS} macro converts relative cell addresses to absolute addresses. Number provides control over what part of the formula converts to an absolute address. {ABS 1} is equivalent to pressing F4 one time with the cell address selected; {ABS 2} is equivalent to pressing F4 twice, and so on, up to 8. If Number is missing, {ABS 1} is assumed.

{ABS} is most commonly used to create absolute addresses, which are handy for referencing a constant value that appears in only one place in a notebook but is copied in several formulas. The advantage of using absolute addresses is that formulas do not have to be edited if the absolute addresses are created before the formula is copied.

Example

The following example converts the formula in the active cell with a relative cell address to an absolute cell address. Then it copies the formula to a new location five cells below and five cells to the right of the active cell.

\A	{EDIT}{ABS}~

{BlockCopy C(0)R(0),C(5)R(5)}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ACTIVATE}

Format

{ACTIVATE WindowName}

WindowName	=	name of the window to make active

You can find the name of a window on its title bar.

{ACTIVATE} makes the window specified by the string WindowName active. For example, to make the named graph PROFITS (in the notebook REPORT.WB2) active, use

{ACTIVATE "C:\SALES\REPORT.WB2:PROFITS"}

Use the same syntax for activating dialog windows. To make the notebook itself active, use

{ACTIVATE "C:\SALES\REPORT.WB2"}

See Also

{CHOOSE}

{WINDOW}


{ADDMENU}

Format

{ADDMENU MenuPath, MenuBlk}

MenuPath	=	location in the menu system to insert a new menu

MenuBlk	=	block containing a menu definition

{ADDMENU} lets you add menus to the active menu system. (Use {ADDMENUITEM} to add individual menu commands to the active menu system.) MenuPath is a string that specifies where the new menu should appear. For example, to insert a menu before the Block menu, use /Block; to insert a menu before the Copy command on the Block menu, use /Block/Copy. You can use <- and -> to place a menu at the top or before the bottom of a menu, respectively. For example, /File/<- specifies the first item on the File menu.

You can also use numbers to identify menu commands. For example, /File/0 specifies the first item on the File menu (the ID numbers start at zero). When identifying a menu item with numbers, divider lines are considered menu items (for example, /File/5 specifies the first divider line on the File menu, not Print).

MenuBlk is a block containing a menu definition. The block must include all cells in the new menu.

Note:	You can only add new menus to the menu bar on either side of the Edit and Tools menus--that is, one position to the left or right of the Edit menu and one position to the left or right of the Tools menu. The area between these menu positions is reserved for context-sensitive menus that change depending on the active window. Likewise, you cannot delete menus within the context-sensitive area, either. You can add menu items to menus between the Edit and Tools menus, but the new menu items will be swapped out of the menu when the context changes.

Caution: Changes made to the menu system using this command are not saved; they are lost when you exit Quattro Pro. Each time you run a macro containing {ADDMENU}, the menu changes appear again.

See Also

{DELETEMENU}

{MENUBRANCH}

{MENUCALL}

Building Menus


{ADDMENUITEM}

Format

{ADDMENUITEM MenuPath, Name, <Link>, <Hint>, <HotKey>, <DependString>, <Checked>}

MenuPath	=	location in the menu system to insert a new menu item

Name	=	name of the command to add

Link	=	action to perform when the command is chosen (optional)

Hint	=	help text to display on the status line when the command is highlighted (optional)

HotKey	=	shortcut key that chooses the command (optional)

DependString	=	areas in which the command is available (optional)

Checked	=	type "Yes" if the command should have a checkmark display by it (optional)

{ADDMENUITEM} is like {ADDMENU}, but inserts a single menu item before MenuPath instead of a new menu.

See the description of {ADDMENU} for the syntax of MenuPath. Name is the name of the new menu item; if a command, precede its underlined letter with an ampersand (&).

Link specifies the actions the menu command performs (for example, "MACRO _remove_file" runs the macro _remove_file). See Building Menus for more information on link commands and other menu parts.

Note:	You can add menu items to any menu, but if you change a context-sensitive menu (all menus between Edit and Tools on the menu bar), the change only applies to the menu in the active window. For example, suppose you use a macro to change the View menu when the notebook window is active. If you then open a graph window, the graph View menu appears--without the change. If you want the change to apply to that View menu as well, you must run the macro again.

Caution: Changes made to the menu system using this command are not saved; they are lost when you exit Quattro Pro. Each time you run a macro containing {ADDMENUITEM}, the menu changes appear again.

Example

The following macro adds the menu command Erase to the top of the Block menu and places a divider line between it and Block|Move. Whenever Erase is chosen, the macro _erase_it runs.

\A	{ADDMENUITEM "/Block/<-","&Erase", "MACRO _erase_it"}

{ADDMENUITEM "/Block/Move","--------"}

See Also

{DELETEMENUITEM}


{ALT}

Format

{ALT+Key <Number>}

Key	=	keyboard macro command (PGUP, DOWN, and so on)

Number	=	number of times to repeat the operation (optional)

{ALT} emulates holding down the Alt key while pressing the key specified by Key. Uses of {ALT} that would perform Windows task-switching functions (like Alt+Tab and Alt+Esc) are ignored.

You can combine {ALT}, {CTRL}, and {SHIFT}. For example, {CTRL+SHIFT+D} is equivalent to pressing Ctrl+Shift+D, the Date keys.

Example

{ALT+F} emulates pressing Alt+F, which could display the File menu, or activate a control in a dialog box with an underlined letter of F.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ANOVA1}

Format

{ANOVA1 InBlock, OutBlock, <Grouped>, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>}

InBlock	=	input block containing two or more sets of numeric data arranged in columns or rows

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Grouped	=	"C" to group results by column or "R" to group results by row; the default is "C"

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

Alpha	=	the significance level at which to evaluate values for the F-statistic; the default is 0.05

{ANOVA1} performs a one-way analysis of variance. Use {ANOVA1} to test whether two or more samples come from the same population. {ANOVA1} is equivalent to the Anova: One-Way analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{ANOVA2}

Format

{ANOVA2 InBlock, OutBlock, SampleRows, <Alpha>}

InBlock	=	input block containing two or more sets of numeric data arranged in columns; the first row must contain labels for each group; the first column must contain row labels indicating the beginning of each sample

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

SampleRows	=	the number of rows in each sample

Alpha	=	the significance level at which to evaluate values for the F-statistic; the default is 0.05

{ANOVA2} performs a two-way analysis of variance, with more than one sample for each group of data. {ANOVA2} is equivalent to the Anova: Two-Way with Replication analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{ANOVA3}

Format

{ANOVA3 InBlock, OutBlock, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>}

InBlock	=	input block containing two or more sets of numeric data arranged in columns or rows

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

Alpha	=	the significance level at which to evaluate the F-statistic; the default is 0.05

{ANOVA3} performs a two-way analysis of variance, with only one sample for each group of data. {ANOVA3} is equivalent to the Anova: Two-Way Without Replication analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{ANSIREAD}

Format

{ANSIREAD #Bytes, Location}

#Bytes	=	number of bytes of characters to read from a file

Location	=	cell in which to store the characters read

{ANSIREAD} reads #Bytes bytes of characters from a file previously opened using {OPEN} (starting at the current position of the file pointer), and stores them as a label in Location, like {READ} but without any character mapping. This macro is provided for international users. See {READ}, for more information.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ANSIREADLN}

Format

{ANSIREADLN Location}

Location	=	cell in which to store the characters read

{ANSIREADLN} is like {ANSIREAD}, but instead of using a number of bytes to determine the amount of text to read, {ANSIREADLN} reads forward from the current file pointer location up to and including the carriage-return/linefeed at the end of the line, like {READLN} but without any character mapping. This macro is provided for international users. See {READLN}, for more information.

See Also

{WRITELN}

Macros

Using Macros


{ANSIWRITE}

Format

{ANSIWRITE String,<String2>,<String3,...>}

String	=	string of characters to be written into the open file

{ANSIWRITE} copies String(s) to a file opened with the {OPEN} command, starting at the location of the file pointer, like {WRITE} but without any character mapping. This macro is provided for international users. See {WRITE}, for more information.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ANSIWRITELN}

Format

{ANSIWRITELN String,<String2>,<String3,...>}

String	=	string of characters to be written into the open file as a single line

{ANSIWRITELN} copies String(s) to a file opened with {OPEN}, starting at the location of the file pointer, and ends the string(s) with the carriage-return and linefeed characters, like {WRITELN} but without any character mapping. This macro is provided for international users. See {WRITELN}, for more information.

See Also

{WRITE}


{BACKSPACE}
{BACKSPACE} and {BS}

Format

{BACKSPACE <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer or the address of a cell containing a positive integer (optional)

{BACKSPACE} and {BS} are equivalent to the Backspace key, which deletes one character to the left of the insertion point in Edit mode. The optional argument Number specifies how many times to repeat the operation; for example, {BACKSPACE 2} is equivalent to pressing Backspace twice.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BACKTAB}

Format

{BACKTAB <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer or the address of a cell containing a positive integer (optional)

{BACKTAB} is equivalent to the Shift+Tab key. It is the same as {BIGLEFT}, which moves one cell to the left.

Note:	When the Compatible Keys option of the application General property is checked, {BACKTAB} selects the leftmost cell of the screen that is to the left of the current one.

The optional argument Number specifies how many times to repeat the operation; for example, {BACKTAB 3} is equivalent to pressing Shift+Tab three times.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BEEP}

Format

{BEEP <Number>}

Number	=	1 to 10 (optional)

{BEEP} sounds the computer's built-in speaker.

Number dictates the tone of the beep. If Number is omitted, {BEEP 1} sounds. If Number is larger than 10, the pattern repeats; for example, {BEEP 11} is the same as {BEEP 1}.

Use {BEEP} to catch the user's attention. You can use it in interactive macros to introduce a prompt for information or to indicate a macro has finished.

Example

The following macro checks a block named error_check for an error condition (indicated by error_check containing zero). If there is no error, it branches to a macro called _continue, which carries on the previous procedure. If there is an error, it gives a low beep, then a medium beep, and moves the selector to the block called message_area, where an error message is stored.

{IF error_check = 0}{BRANCH _continue}

{BEEP 1}{BEEP 5}{EditGoto message_area}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BIGLEFT}

Format

{BIGLEFT <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer or the address of a cell containing a positive integer (optional)

{BIGLEFT} is equivalent to the Shift+Tab key. It is the same as {BACKTAB}, which moves one cell to the left.

Note:	When the Compatible Keys option of the application General property is checked, {BIGLEFT} selects the leftmost cell of the screen that is to the left of the current one.

The optional argument Number specifies how many times to repeat the operation; for example, {BIGLEFT 2} is equivalent to pressing Shift+Tab twice.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BIGRIGHT}

Format

{BIGRIGHT <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer or the address of a cell containing a positive integer (optional)

{BIGRIGHT}, like {TAB}, is equivalent to the Tab key, which moves one cell to the right.

Note:	When the Compatible Keys option of the application General property is checked, {BIGRIGHT} selects the leftmost cell of the screen that is to the right of the current one.

The optional argument Number specifies how many times to repeat the operation; for example, {BIGRIGHT 2} is equivalent to pressing Tab twice.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BLANK}

Format

{BLANK Location}

Location	=	cell or block you want erased

{BLANK} erases the contents of the block referred to as Location. You can also use the command equivalents {ClearContents} and {EditClear} to erase the contents of the currently selected block.

Example

This macro erases the block named part_list:

\F	{BLANK part_list}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BRANCH}

Format

{BRANCH Location}

Location	=	location or name of another macro

{BRANCH} runs the macro stored in Location. If Location references a block, Quattro Pro starts with the macro command in the top left cell.

{BRANCH} can change the flow of execution based on a condition test. For example, you can use it to run a different macro depending on the contents of a certain cell.

{BRANCH} is like {Subroutine} in that it passes control to another macro. Unlike {Subroutine}, it does not hold your place in the original macro, waiting for control to return. Use {BRANCH} when you do not intend to return to the original macro. To run another macro and then return to the calling macro, use {Subroutine}.

Example

The following macro branches to a macro named _high if the value in cell D10 is greater than 1000; otherwise, it continues to run the macro on the next line:

{IF D10 > 1000}{BRANCH _high}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BREAK}

{BREAK} clears any displayed dialog boxes or prompts and returns Quattro Pro to Ready mode. It does not stop macro execution; use {QUIT} for that operation.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BREAKOFF}

{BREAKOFF} disables Ctrl+Break, which can be used to end a macro before it is done. After {BREAKOFF}, the user will not be able to exit a macro until the end of the macro or until {BREAKON} is used.

Caution: Use {BREAKOFF} only when necessary. Without access to Ctrl+Break, the only way to stop a "runaway" macro is to reboot or turn off the computer.

Example

This macro disables Ctrl+Break while the user inputs a name:

{PUTCELL "Enter your name here:"}

{BREAKOFF}

{?}~

{BREAKON}

{PUTCELL "Try again: "}

{?}~

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BREAKON}

{BREAKON} enables Ctrl+Break after a previous {BREAKOFF} command has disabled it.

{BREAKON} should be used as soon as possible after {BREAKOFF}, because with Ctrl+Break disabled, the only way to halt a "runaway" macro is to reboot or turn off the computer.

See {BREAKOFF} for an example of {BREAKOFF} and {BREAKON}.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{CALC}

{CALC} is equivalent to the Calc key, F9, which recalculates the active notebook, or converts the formula on the input line into its result when editing a cell.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{CAPOFF} and {CAPON}

{CAPOFF} and {CAPON} are equivalent to Caps Lock off and Caps Lock on, respectively.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{CHOOSE}

{CHOOSE} displays a pick list of open windows. Your choice becomes the active window.

See Also

{ACTIVATE}

Macros

Using Macros


{CLEAR}

{CLEAR} is the equivalent of Ctrl+Backspace, which erases any previous entry in a prompt line or on the input line in Edit mode. This command is useful when loading or retrieving files.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{CLOSE}

{CLOSE} ends access to a file previously opened using {OPEN}. This lets another file be opened (only one can be open at a time). {CLOSE} completes the process of writing information to a file, including an update of the disk directory. This step is crucial to the integrity of any file. If your computer is turned off before a file is closed, that file's contents may become corrupted or lost.

{CLOSE} fails in the event of a disk error, such as when a disk is removed from the disk drive before the file is closed. In this case, {ONERROR} is useful in intercepting the error. If {CLOSE} succeeds, macro execution continues in the cell below the cell containing the {CLOSE} command, ignoring any other commands in that cell. If {CLOSE} fails, macro execution continues in the same cell as the {CLOSE} command.

Example

The following macro opens a new file in drive A called AFILE, writes the text line Hello, world! to the file, and closes the file.

\F	{OPEN "A:\AFILE",W}

{WRITELN "Hello, world!"}

{CLOSE}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{COLUMNWIDTH}

Format

{COLUMNWIDTH Block, FirstPane?, Set/Reset/Auto, Size}

Block	=	block containing columns to resize

FirstPane?	=	1 to resize columns in left or top window pane; 0 to resize columns in right or bottom window pane

Set/Reset/Auto	=	0 to set the column width; 1 to reset the column width; 2 to automatically size the column(s)

Size	=	new width (in twips) if Set/... = 0; not needed if Set/... = 1; resetting size; extra characters (optional) if Set/... = 2

{COLUMNWIDTH} provides three ways to change the width of a column or block of columns (it is equivalent to the block property Column Width). The columns to change are specified by Block. FirstPane? is used when the active window is split into panes (using Window|Panes). To resize the columns in the left or top pane, set FirstPane? to 1; to resize the columns in the right or bottom pane, set FirstPane? to 0.

The argument Set/Resize/Auto specifies how to change the width. To set a column width, use this syntax: {COLUMNWIDTH Block, FirstPane?, 0, NewSize}.

NewSize is the new column width, in twips (a twip is 1/1440th of an inch). The maximum width is 20 inches (28,800 twips).

To reset a column to the default width (set by Default Width in the page Object Inspector) use this syntax: {COLUMNWIDTH Block, FirstPane?, 1}.

To automatically size a column based on what is entered in it, use this syntax: {COLUMNWIDTH Block, FirstPane?, 2, ExtraCharacters}

ExtraCharacters is the number of characters to add on to the calculated width. If this argument is omitted, the default is used (1 character).

Examples

{COLUMNWIDTH A:A..B,1,0,1440} sets the width of columns A and B (on page A) to one inch (1,440 twips).

{COLUMNWIDTH A:A..B,0,0,2160} sets the width of columns A and B (on page A) to one and a half inches (2,160 twips). If the window is split, the columns are resized in the left or top pane.

{COLUMNWIDTH A:C,1,1} resets the width of column C (on page A) to the default width.

{COLUMNWIDTH A:C,1,2,3} automatically sizes column C (on page A) and adds three characters to the calculated width.

See Also

{ROWCOLSHOW}

{ROWHEIGHT}

Column Width Property

Macros

Using Macros


{CONTENTS}

Format

{CONTENTS Dest, Source, <Width#>, <Format#>}

Dest	=	cell you want data written to

Source	=	cell you want data copied from

Width#	=	optional column width (1 to 1023)

Format#	=	optional format code

{CONTENTS} copies the contents of Source into Dest, but unlike {LET} or other copy commands, if Source contains a value entry, it translates the copied value into a label and stores it in Dest. It also lets you specify a different numeric format and column width using the Width# and Format# arguments.

Width# can be any number from 1 to 1023. Quattro Pro will not alter the width of the destination column but will treat the resulting string as if it came from a column with the specified width. For example, if a value is displayed as ***** in the source column because the column is not wide enough, specifying a wider Width# will let the value be copied as it would be displayed within that width, not as *****. Width# is optional, but must be provided if Format# is used. If you do not specify Width#, the width of the source column is assumed. Use the maximum width if you want all values to come across properly. You can use @TRIM with a {LET} command to remove any leading spaces from the label.

Format# can be any number from 0 to 127. Each number in this range corresponds to a specific numeric format and decimal precision. Format# affects the Dest entry only, not the Source value. See Numeric Format Codes for a list of special codes used to indicate numeric formats with Format#.

Examples

The following examples assume cell C18 contains the value 48,988 in comma format with a column width of 12.

{CONTENTS A18,C18}	places the 12-character label '      48,988 in cell A18 (six spaces are inserted at the beginning).

{CONTENTS E10,C18,3}	places the 3-character label '*** in cell E10. (Only asterisks are copied because the value does not fit within three spaces.)

{CONTENTS A5,C18,15,34}	places the 15-character label '     $48,988.00 in cell A5 (five spaces are inserted at the beginning).

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{Numeric Format Codes}
Numeric Format Codes

  Code	Description

    0-15	Fixed (0-15 decimals)

  16-31	Scientific (0-15 decimals)

  32-47	Currency (0-15 decimals)

  48-63	% (percent; 0-15 decimals)

  64-79 	, (comma; 0-15 decimals)

     112	+/- (bar graph)

     113	General

     114	Date [1] (DD-MMM-YYYY)

     115	Date [2] (DD-MMM)

     116	Date [3] (MMM-YYYY)

     117	Text

     118	Hidden

     119	Time [1] (HH:MM:SS AM/PM)

     120	Time [2] (HH:MM AM/PM)

     121	Date [4] (Long International)

     122	Date [5] (Short International)

     123	Time [3] (Long International)

     124	Time [4] (Short International)

     127	Default (set with Normal style)


{CR}
{CR} or ~

{CR} or ~ (tilde) are equivalent to the Enter key.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{CREATEOBJECT}

Format

{CREATEOBJECT ObjectType, x1, y1, x2, y2<, x3, y3, ...>}

ObjectName	=	type of object to create

x1, y1	=	xy coordinates for the starting point of the object; the upper left corner for rectangles and objects bounded by rectangles

x2, y2	=	xy coordinates for the end point or next point of the object; the width and height for rectangles and objects bounded by rectangles

x3, y3	=	xy coordinates for the next or last point of a polyline or polygon object

With {CREATEOBJECT} you can add objects to the active window normally added using the Toolbar. {CREATEOBJECT} is context-sensitive, letting you create lines in a graph window or check boxes in a dialog window. Quattro Pro interprets the coordinates specified after ObjectType differently based on the object type. The following table lists the possible graph object settings for ObjectType, and how each graph object uses the (x,y) coordinates.

Graph Objects {CREATEOBJECT} Can Generate

Object	# of (x,y)'s	Coordinates

Line	2	1st: Start point, 2nd: End point

Arrow	(same as for Line)

Block	2	1st: Upper left corner, 2nd: Width and height of the objects (in relative coordinates)

Rect (Rectangle)	2	(same as for Block)

Ellipse	2	1st: Upper left corner of a rectangle bounding the ellipse; 2nd: Width and height of the bounding rectangle

Rounded_Rect	(same as for Block)

Text	(same as for Block)

Polyline	Varies	1st: Start point, 2nd: End point of first segment and start of second segment; 3rd: End point of second segment and start of third segment, ... nth: End point

Polygon	(same as for Polyline)

Freehand_Polyline	(same as for Polyline)

Freehand_Polygon	(same as for Polyline)

Block Objects

The Block object has additional arguments for {CREATEOBJECT}:

{CREATEOBJECT ObjectType, x1, y1, x2, y2, "Block", "RowBorders?(Yes|No), ColBorders?(Yes|No), HorzGridLines?(Yes|No), VertGridLines?(Yes|No), AspectRatio?(Yes|No)"}

Block sets the notebook block to use. The remaining arguments specify whether to show borders and grid lines and whether to maintain the block's aspect ratio.

Dialog Controls {CREATEOBJECT} Can Generate

You can create these dialog controls listed in the order they appear on the Dialog Toolbar: Button, CheckBox, RadioButton, BitmapButton, Label, EditField, SpinCtrl, Rectangle, GroupBox, RangeBox, ComboBox, PickList, FileCtrl, ColCtrl, ScrollBar, HScrollBar, TimeCtrl. When creating a control, x1 and y1 specify the upper-left corner of the control; x2 and y2 specify the width and height of the control, in pixels.

ObjectType is enclosed in quotes. The x and y coordinates for each point follow, separated by commas.

Examples

{CREATEOBJECT "Rect",86,11,94,74} creates a rectangle with upper-left corner = (86,11), width = 94, and height =74 (pixels).

{CREATEOBJECT "Block", 363, 260, 1278, 1139, "A:B2..D9", "No,No,Yes,Yes,Yes"} creates a notebook block in a graph window with upper-left corner = (363, 260), width = 1278, and height = 1139; the other arguments specify the notebook block, turn off row and column borders, show grid lines, and maintain the block's aspect ratio.

{CREATEOBJECT "Line",260,238,356,228} creates a line that starts at (260,238) and ends at (356,228).

{CREATEOBJECT "Polyline",2,2,23,59,11,26} creates a polyline that starts at (2,2), draws a line to (23,59), and then draws a line from that point to (11,26).

See Also

{MOVETO}

{RESIZE}


{CTRL}

Format

{CTRL+Key <Number>}

Key	=	keyboard macro command (PGUP, DOWN, and so on)

Number	=	number of times to repeat the operation (optional)

{CTRL} emulates holding down the Ctrl key while pressing a keystroke. For example, {CTRL+PGDN 5} emulates pressing Ctrl+PgDn five times to move down five notebook pages. Keystrokes that would perform Windows task switching, such as Ctrl+Esc, are ignored.

You can combine {ALT}, {CTRL}, and {SHIFT}. For example, {CTRL+SHIFT+D} is equivalent to pressing Ctrl+Shift+D, the Date keys.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{DATAMODEL}

Format

{DATAMODEL SourceBlock, DestBlock, Cold|Hot, 3-DColName}

SourceBlock	=	cell block to send to Data Modeling Desktop

DestBlock	=	upper left cell of data returned from Data Modeling Desktop

Cold|Hot	=	"Cold" to specify cold links; "Hot" to specify hot DDE links; if you specify hot links, changes made to Quattro Pro are automatically reflected in Data Modeling Desktop

3-DColName	=	column name given to an additional column of data in Data Modeling Desktop if SourceBlock is a 3-D block; "" if passing a 2-D block

{DATAMODEL} is the command equivalent for Tools|Data Modeling Desktop. It lets you quickly view data from different perspectives and arrange the data for crosstabular reports.

See Also

Tools|Data Modeling Desktop

Macros

Using Macros


{DATE}

{DATE} is equivalent to pressing Ctrl+Shift+D, which lets users enter a date or time into the active cell.

Note: You can enter a date in a cell without using Ctrl+Shift+D. Just type a date in one of Quattro Pro's date formats--for example, 6/1/95.

Examples

{DATE}8/6/90~	enters 8/6/90 in the active cell as a date.

{DATE}{?}~	pauses to let the user enter a date, then enters that date into the active cell.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{DEFINE}

Format

{DEFINE Location1<:Type1>, Location2<:Type2>,...}

Location	=	cell in which you want to store the argument being passed

Type	=	string or value; string (or s) stores the value or formula as a label, and value (or v) stores the actual value or value resulting from a formula (optional)

When you pass control to a subroutine with the {Subroutine} command, you can also pass arguments for use by that subroutine. If you do, you must include a {DEFINE} command in the subroutine's first line. This command defines the data type of each argument passed and indicates which cells to store the arguments in. If no {DEFINE} command is included, the arguments are ignored.

{DEFINE} sequentially defines the arguments passed to the subroutine. The first location and type given are assigned to the first argument passed, the second location and type to the second argument, and so on.

You must specify a location for each argument. This tells Quattro Pro where to copy them. If there are more locations given than arguments passed, or more arguments than locations, the macro ends immediately, and an error message displays.

Type is optional. It tells Quattro Pro whether the argument is a value or string. If no data type is given, the argument is assumed to be a literal string (even if it is a valid block name, cell address, or value). If you add :string (or :s) to the location, any argument passed is stored as a label. If you add :value (or :v), Quattro Pro treats the coming argument as a number or value resulting from a numeric formula. It it is not a numeric value, Quattro Pro treats it as a string (or string value from a formula).

Example

In the following example, the \F macro passes three arguments (principal, interest, and term) to the subroutine _calc_loan, which stores the arguments in named blocks and defines them as values. It then

uses the arguments to calculate the monthly payment on a loan

stores the result in a cell named amount

creates a label in a cell named payment displaying that amount as currency

returns control to the main macro

The main macro (\F) displays the result in the active cell preceded by the string "The monthly payment will be ".

\F	{_calc_loan 79500,12%,30}

_calc_loan	{DEFINE prin:value,int:value,term:value}

{LET amount,@PMT(prin,int/12,term*12)}

{CONTENTS payment,amount,9,34}{EditGoto txt_area}{RETURN}

prin	79500

int	0.12

term	30

amount	817.747

payment	$817.75

txt_area	+"The monthly payment will be "&@TRIM(payment)

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{DEL} and {DELETE}

{DEL} and {DELETE} are equivalent to the Del key.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{DELETEMENU}

Format

{DELETEMENU MenuPath}

MenuPath	=	menu in the tree to delete

{DELETEMENU} removes the menu specified by MenuPath from the menu system. See the description of {ADDMENU} for the syntax of MenuPath. Use {DELETEMENUITEM} to remove an individual menu command.

Note:	You cannot delete menus on either side of the Edit and Tools menus--that is, one position to the left or right of the Edit menu and one position to the left or right of the Tools menu. The area between these menu positions is reserved for context-sensitive menus that change depending on the active window. You can add menu items to menus between the Edit and Tools menus, but the new menu items will be swapped out of the menu when the context changes.

Caution: Changes made to the menu system using this command are not saved; they are lost when you exit Quattro Pro. Each time you run a macro containing {DELETEMENU}, the menu changes appear again.

Example

{DELETEMENU "/File"} removes the File menu from the active menu system.

See Also

Building Menus

Macros

Using Macros


{DELETEMENUITEM}

Format

{DELETEMENUITEM MenuPath}

MenuPath	=	menu item in the tree to delete

{DELETEMENUITEM} removes the menu command specified by MenuPath from the menu system. Use {DELETEMENU} to remove entire menus from the active menu system. See {ADDMENU} for the syntax of MenuPath.

Note:	You can delete menu items from any menu, but if you change a context-sensitive menu (all menus between Edit and Tools on the menu bar), the change only applies to the menu in the active window. For example, suppose you use a macro to change the View menu when the notebook window is active. If you then open a graph window, the graph View menu appears--without the change. If you want the change to apply to that View menu as well, you must run the macro again.

Caution: Changes made to the menu system using this command are not saved; they are lost when you exit Quattro Pro. Each time you run a macro containing {DELETEMENUITEM} the menu changes appear again.

Examples

{DELETEMENUITEM "/Edit/Clear"} removes the Edit|Clear command.

{DELETEMENUITEM "/Edit/<-"} removes the first item on the Edit menu.

See Also

{ADDMENUITEM}

Building Menus


{DESCR}

Format

{DESCR InBlock, OutBlock, Grouped, <Labels(0|1)>, <Summary(0|1)>, <Largest>, <Smallest>, <Confidence>}

InBlock	=	one or more numeric block values representing the input block

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Grouped	=	"C" to group results by column or "R" to group results by row; "C" is the default

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

Summary	=	1 to display summary statistics; 0 to omit summary statistics; the default is 0

Largest	=	a value n which, if present, makes {DESCR} report the nth largest data point; if omitted, the largest data point is not reported

Smallest	=	a value n which, if present, makes {DESCR} report the nth smallest data point; if omitted, the smallest data point is not reported

Confidence	=	confidence level of the mean; the default is 0.95

{DESCR} returns a table of descriptive statistics that characterize a sample. {DESCR} is equivalent to the Descriptive Statistics analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{DISPATCH}

Format

{DISPATCH Location}

Location	=	a single cell containing the address or block name of another macro

{DISPATCH} is similar to {BRANCH}, except it uses Location differently:

If Location is a cell address or one cell named block, {DISPATCH} branches to the address stored in that cell.

If Location is a text formula resulting in a cell or one cell named block, {DISPATCH} branches to that result address.

If Location is a multi-celled block or a text formula resulting in a multi-celled block, {DISPATCH} branches to the first cell of that block.

{DISPATCH} is useful when you want to branch to one of several alternative macros, depending on circumstances. You can also set up a macro that modifies the contents of Location, depending on user input or test conditions.

Example

The macro _continue in the following example uses {DISPATCH jump_cell} to create a form letter that changes depending on the result of a credit check.

Type the line to the right of \F with no hard returns until after the first {BRANCH _continue}, then press Enter to insert the text into one cell.

credit	OK

\F	{EditGoto text_area}

{IF credit="OK"}{LET jump_cell,"_ok_note"}{BRANCH _continue}

{LET jump_cell,"_bum_note"}{BRANCH _continue}

_continue	{PUTCELL "Because of your current standing with P.K."}

{DOWN}

{PUTCELL "Finance, we have decided to"}{DOWN}

{DISPATCH +jump_cell}

jump_cell	_ok_note

_ok_note	{PUTCELL "extend your credit limit."}{DOWN 2}

{BRANCH _finish}

_bum_note	{PUTCELL "CANCEL your account."}{DOWN 2}

{BRANCH _finish}

_finish	{PUTCELL "Please call our office for details."}

{DOWN 2}

{PUTCELL "Sincerely,"}

{DOWN 3}

{PUTCELL "James Madison (Account Officer)"}

{DOWN}

text_area	Because of your current standing with P.K.

Finance, we have decided to

extend your credit limit.

Please call our office for details.

Sincerely,

James Madison (Account Officer)

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{DLL}

Format

{DLL <DLLName.>FunctionName, Argument1, Argument2,...}

DLLName	=	the name of a DLL file (if not already loaded)

FunctionName	=	the name of an @function contained in the DLL

Argument1,Argument2...	=	arguments to the @function

{DLL} runs a macro or returns a value from an add-in @function contained in a dynamic-link library file. The @function can have up to 16 arguments.

Example

This statement calls the @function AMPLITUDE, included in the DLL Math, with two blocks as arguments:

{DLL Math.AMPLITUDE,A1..A10,B1..B10}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{DLL.Load}

Format

{DLL.Load DLLName}

DLLName	=	the name of a DLL file to load

{DLL.Load} loads a dynamic-link library (DLL) program. You can use {DLL.Load} to load a DLL containing add-in @functions or macros. When the DLL is loaded, you can reference add-in @functions contained in the DLL without typing the DLL name. Similarly, macros contained in the DLL become resident in memory.

You can use {DLL.Load} to define a startup macro in QPW.INI.

Example

{DLL.Load MYDLL} loads a DLL program named MYDLL

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using Startup and Exit Macros


{DODIALOG}

Format

{DODIALOG DialogName, OKExit?, <Arguments>, <MacUse?>}

DialogName	=	name of dialog box to display

OKExit?	=	cell to store how the dialog box closed (1 for OK, 0 for Cancel)

Arguments	=	block to store the initial settings for controls in the dialog box and their final settings (optional)

MacUse?	=	1 if the user should manipulate the dialog box, 0 if the macro manipulates it (optional; 1 is the default)

{DODIALOG} displays a dialog box for the user or the macro to manipulate. MacUse? specifies how the dialog box is manipulated; if 0, the macro manipulates the dialog box, if 1, the macro pauses so the user can manipulate the dialog box.

DialogName is the name of the dialog box to display. Arguments is a block containing initial settings for controls in the dialog box. Each cell in Arguments corresponds to one control in the dialog box with a Process Value property set to Yes; the order of controls in the dialog box determines which cell maps to which control (the first cell maps to the first control, the second cell maps to the second, and so on).

If a dialog box is under macro control (MacUse? set to 0), you can make it revert to user control using {PAUSEMACRO}.

Once the dialog box closes (performing its function), Quattro Pro writes the new control settings into their respective cells. OKExit? is a cell containing the result of the dialog box operation; 1 if OK was chosen, 0 if the dialog box was canceled.

See Also

{GETLABEL}

{GETNUMBER}

Process Value property

Working with Controls


{DOWN} and {D}

Format

{DOWN <Number>} or {D <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer (optional)

{DOWN} and {D} are equivalent to the Down key. The optional argument Number moves the selector down the corresponding number of rows. You can also use cell references or block names as arguments.

Examples

{DOWN}{DOWN}	moves the selector down two rows.

{DOWN 4}	moves the selector down four rows.

{DOWN G13}	moves down the number of rows specified in cell G13.

{DOWN count}	moves down the number of rows specified in the first cell of the block named count.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{EDIT}

{EDIT} is equivalent to the Edit key, F2. Its main use is in Edit mode, where it lets you edit the contents of the active cell. You can also use it to search for items in a long list.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{END}

{END} is equivalent to the End key.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ESC} and {ESCAPE}

{ESC} and {ESCAPE} are equivalent to the Esc key, which is useful for clearing menus or dialog boxes from the screen, one at a time. To clear all prompts and return Quattro Pro to Ready Mode, use {BREAK}.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{EXEC}

Format

{EXEC AppName, WindowMode, <ResultLoc>}

AppName	=	name (in quotes) of the application to run (up to 100 characters)

WindowMode	=	size state of the application's window: 1 or 101 for normal size, 2 or 102 for minimized, 3 or 103 for maximized; use 101, 102, 103 to suspend macro execution until the application terminates

ResultLoc	=	cell containing the coded explanation of the operation's success

{EXEC} lets you run other Windows applications or DOS commands. AppName can be any valid command string you could type in the Program Manager's File|Run command. AppName can contain the path of the application. If no path is given, then the application must be in the system path so Windows can find it.

ResultLoc is useful in some cases where the started application supports DDE along with an instance number. For example, Excel and Quattro Pro respond to their names and also respond to their names concatenated with an instance number.

Examples

{EXEC "C:\OFFICE\WPWIN61\WPWIN.EXE",2} runs WordPerfect for Windows as a minimized application

{EXEC "NOTEPAD.EXE",1} runs the Windows Notepad and displays it just as if it were run from the Program Manager.

{EXEC "C:\COMMAND.COM /C DIR>TEST.TXT",1} stores the current directory listing in the file TEST.TXT.

See Also

{INITIATE}


{EXECUTE}

Format

{EXECUTE DDEChannel,Macro,<ResultLoc>}

DDEChannel	=	channel ID number of the application to run a macro in

Macro	=	string containing the macro command(s) to run

ResultLoc 	=	a cell indicating the result of the operation

With {EXECUTE} you can make other applications that support DDE run their macros. The macro to run is stored in the string Macro. It must be in the syntax the application normally uses (refer to the documentation for each application). You must open a channel of conversation with the other application using {INITIATE} (which determines the value of DDEChannel) before using {EXECUTE}.

The contents of ResultLoc depend on the application you are contacting. Most often, if a macro succeeds, ResultLoc contains 1. If a macro fails, {EXECUTE} results in an error.

See {REQUEST} and {POKE} for more information on receiving data from and sending data to other applications using DDE.

Example

The following example initiates a DDE conversation with WordPerfect's macro server and opens REPORT.DOC in WordPerfect.

channel	1

{INITIATE "WPWIN61_MACROS","COMMANDS",channel}

{EXECUTE channel,"FileOpen(""report.doc"")"}

{TERMINATE channel}

See Also

About DDE Macro Commands

Macros

Using Macros


{EXPON}

Format

{EXPON InBlock,OutBlock,<Damping>,<StdErrs>}

InBlock	=	input block containing a single column or row with at least four numeric values; the block must not contain labels

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Damping	=	damping factor used as the exponential smoothing constant; indicates the percentage for error to adjust each prior forecast value; must be ≥ 0; the default is 0.3

StdErrs	=	flag indicating whether standard errors are included in the output table: yes (1) or no (0); the default is 0

{EXPON} performs exponential smoothing on a series of values. {EXPON} is equivalent to the Exponential Smoothing analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{FILESIZE}

Format

{FILESIZE Location}

Location	=	any cell address or block name

{FILESIZE} calculates the number of bytes in a file previously opened using {OPEN} and places the result in Location as a value. If Location is a block, the result is placed in the upper left cell of the block. If the command is successful, macro execution continues in the cell below the cell containing the {FILESIZE} command, ignoring any other commands in that cell. If {FILESIZE} fails (for example, when no file is open), macro execution continues in the cell containing the {FILESIZE} command.

Example

The following example opens the file MYFILE.TXT and places its size (in bytes) in the cell named num_bytes.

\F	{OPEN "MYFILE.TXT",R}

{FILESIZE num_bytes}

{CLOSE}

num_bytes	45

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{FLOATCREATE}

Format

{FLOATCREATE Type, UpperCell, xoffset, yoffset, LowerCell, xoffset2, yoffset2, <Text>|StartCorner}

Type 	=	floating object to create: Graph, Button, Line, Arrow, Rect, Rounded_Rect, Ellipse, or Text

UpperCell	=	cell containing the upper left corner of the graph or macro button

xoffset	=	offset in twips from the left edge of UpperCell to the left edge of the floating object

yoffset	=	offset in twips from the top edge of UpperCell to the top edge of the floating object

LowerCell	=	cell containing the lower right corner of the graph or macro button

xoffset2	=	offset in twips from the left edge of LowerCell to the right edge of the floating object

yoffset2	=	offset in twips from the top edge of LowerCell to the bottom edge of the floating object

Text	=	for Graph, the named graph to display; for Button, the button text

StartCorner	=	for Line or Arrow, a number representing the starting corner; 1 = northwest, 2 = northeast, 3 = southeast, 4 = southwest (for example, an arrow pointing up and to the right would have a StartCorner of 4)

{FLOATCREATE} lets you create macro buttons, floating graphs, or a draw layer objects (lines, arrows, rectangles, rounded rectangles, ellipses, or text boxes) in the active notebook window. Use {CREATEOBJECT} to create objects in dialog windows or graph windows.

All positions in {FLOATCREATE} are positive offsets from cells in the notebook containing the upper left and lower right corners of the object.

If you need to modify the floating object after creating it, change the property settings immediately after creation. It is selected then, so you will not need to click it or use {SELECTFLOAT}. You might also want to change the name at this time and document it for later use with {SELECTFLOAT}.

Example

The following macro creates a macro button that covers the block A1..B2, then stores the name of the button in A26. The button reads Save File:

{FLOATCREATE Button,A1,0,0,C3,0,0, "Save File"}

{GETPROPERTY A26, "Object_Name"}

The following macro creates a button 50 twips to the right and 50 twips below the upper left corner of the button in the previous example. It reads Open File:

{FLOATCREATE Button,A1,50,50,C3,50,50, "Open File"}

The following macro creates a floating graph that is offset 35 twips from the block C2..E10, but the same size:

{GraphNew Graph3}

{FLOATCREATE Graph,C2,35,35,E10,35,35,"Graph3"}

The following macro creates a floating arrow over the block B8..Dll . The arrow starts at the southwest corner of the block, and ends with an arrowhead at the northwest corner.

{FloatCreate Arrow,A:B8,0,0,A:D11,945,45,4}

The following macro creates a floating ellipse over the block E10..E13, then fills the ellipse with a red color.

{FloatCreate Ellipse,A:E10,0,120,A:E13,945,240}

{Setproperty Fill_Color, "255,0,0"}

See Also

{FLOATMOVE}

{FLOATSIZE}


{FLOATMOVE}

Format

{FLOATMOVE UpperCell,xoffset,yoffset}

UpperCell	=	cell containing the new upper left corner of the floating object

xoffset	=	offset in twips from the left edge of UpperCell to the left edge of the floating object

yoffset	=	offset in twips from the top edge of UpperCell to the top edge of the floating object

{FLOATMOVE} lets you move a floating object in the active notebook window. The item to move is selected using {SELECTFLOAT}. The new position in {FLOATMOVE} is specified as a positive offset from a cell in the notebook.

To move a floating graph to another notebook, specify a notebook as well as a cell for UpperCell.

Examples

The following macro selects the floating graph Inserted1 and moves it to [SALES]A:C10.

{SELECTFLOAT Inserted1}

{FLOATMOVE [SALES]A:C10,0,0}

See Also

{FLOATCOPY}

{FLOATSIZE}

{MOVETO}


{FLOATSIZE}

Format

{FLOATSIZE UpperCell,xoffset,yoffset,LowerCell,xoffset2,yoffset2}

UpperCell	=	cell containing the new upper left corner of the graph or macro button

xoffset	=	offset in twips from the left edge of UpperCell to the left edge of the floating object

yoffset	=	offset in twips from the top edge of UpperCell to the top edge of the floating object

LowerCell	=	cell containing the new lower right corner of the graph or macro button

xoffset2	=	offset in twips from the left edge of LowerCell to the right edge of the floating object

yoffset2	=	offset in twips from the top edge of LowerCell to the bottom edge of the floating object

{FLOATSIZE} lets you resize a floating object in the active notebook window. The item to resize is selected using {SELECTFLOAT}.

All positions in {FLOATSIZE} are positive offsets from a cell in the notebook.

See Also

{FLOATCOPY}

{FLOATMOVE}

{RESIZE}


{FOR}

Format

{FOR CounterLoc,Start#,Stop#,Step#,StartLoc}

CounterLoc	=	cell used to track the number of macro iterations

Start#	=	initial value to place in CounterLoc

Stop# 	=	maximum value for CounterLoc

Step# 	=	amount added to CounterLoc after each iteration

StartLoc	=	cell containing the subroutine to run

{FOR} repeatedly runs a macro subroutine beginning at StartLoc, creating a macro loop. Quattro Pro keeps track of how long the macro runs using CounterLoc. At the start of the loop, CounterLoc is set to Start#. Each time an iteration of the loop runs, CounterLoc is increased by Step#. When CounterLoc reaches or exceeds Stop#, execution stops.

Examples

{FOR D15,1,5,1,E30}	runs the subroutine beginning in cell E30 five times.

{FOR D15,1,10,2,E30}	runs the subroutine five times because the counter increments by two during each iteration.

{FOR D15,1,5,0,E30}	runs the subroutine continuously until you press Ctrl+Break, because adding 0 to the start value of 1 can never make the counter exceed 5.

{FOR D15,1,0,1}	results in an error because no subroutine is specified.

The following macro creates "Qtr" labels for reports; the year displays above Qtr1:

\Q	{; position cursor where labels should appear}

{FOR counter, 1994,1997,1,_list}

{; return to original position}

{LEFT}{END}{LEFT}

counter

_list	{PUTCELL +counter}

{DOWN}

{PUTCELL "Qtr1"}{RIGHT}

{PUTCELL "Qtr2"}{RIGHT}

{PUTCELL "Qtr3"}{RIGHT}

{PUTCELL "Qtr4"}{RIGHT 2}{UP}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{FORBREAK}

{FORBREAK} cancels the subroutine run by a {FOR} command and ends the processing of {FOR}. Macro execution continues normally with the command following the {FOR} command.

If {FORBREAK} appears anywhere other than in a subroutine called by {FOR}, macro execution ends, and Quattro Pro displays an error message.

{FORBREAK} is usually used in conjunction with {IF} to exit the macro if a specific condition is reached; for example, if an error condition is found.

Example

The following example shows {FORBREAK} terminating a loop used to enter names into a list. Enter STOP to stop the loop.

\F	{EditGoto list_top}

{FOR counter,1,10000,1,_get_name}

_get_name	{GETLABEL "Enter next name: ",name_cell}

{IF name_cell="STOP"}{FORBREAK}

{LET @CELLPOINTER("Address"),name_cell}{DOWN}

name_cell	STOP

counter	4

list_top

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{FORM}

Format

{FORM <Block>}

Block	=	a database block, including field labels and records

{FORM} is the command equivalent for Tools|Database Tools|Form. It creates forms for entering and finding data records without programming. Block defaults to the current selected block.

See Also

Tools|Database Tools|Form

Macros

Using Macros


{FOURIER}

Format

{FOURIER InBlock,OutBlock,<Inverse>}

InBlock	=	one or more numeric block values representing the input block; can be real or complex numbers; the number of values in InBlock must be a power of 2 between 2 and 1024 inclusive (for example, 2, 4, 8, 16,...); if the number of values in InBlock does not equal a power of 2, pad the block with additional zeros

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Inverse	=	0 to perform a Fourier transformation; 1 to perform the inverse Fourier transformation; the default is 0

{FOURIER} performs a fast Fourier transformation on a block of data. {FOURIER} is equivalent to the Fourier analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{FTESTV}

Format

{FTESTV InBlock1,InBlock2,OutBlock,<Labels>}

InBlock1	=	the first input block containing a column or row of numeric values

InBlock2	=	the second input block containing a column or row of numeric values

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

{FTESTV} performs a two-sample F-test to compare population variances. {FTESTV} is equivalent to the F-Test analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{FUNCTIONS}

{FUNCTIONS} is equivalent to the Functions key, Alt+F3, which displays a list of @functions to enter in the input line.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{GET}

Format

{GET Location}

Location	=	cell in which to store the keystroke entered by the user

{GET} pauses macro execution, accepts one keystroke from the user (no carriage return is necessary), and stores the keystroke as a macro command in Location. It then continues macro execution. Any Quattro Pro keystroke can be recorded with {GET} except Shift+F2, Pause, Caps Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock. Unlike { ? }, the keystroke is not passed to Quattro Pro.

{GET} is useful for creating macros that run in the background while the user works. It can detect each key, and restrict the actions the user performs. You can use {LOOK} with {GET} to check the typeahead buffer for user response.

Example

The following example asks users if they want to continue.

\F	{RIGHT 10}

{; display msg_area in top left of screen}

{GOTO}msg_area~

_again	Press Y to continue...~

{GET keystroke}

{IF keystroke<>"Y"}{BEEP2}{HOME}{QUIT}

{BEEP 4}{BRANCH _again}

keystroke

msg_area	Press Y to continue...

See Also

{GETLABEL}

{GETNUMBER}

{LOOK}

{MENUBRANCH}

{MENUCALL}


{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS}

Format

{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS Block,<Path>}

Block	=	block to enter list of files into

Path	=	path and wildcard specifying the list (optional)

{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS} enters an alphabetized list of file names (determined by the path and DOS wildcard specified by Path) into Block; if Path is not included, {GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS} lists all the files in the current directory. Path must contain a DOS wildcard like *.BAT or *.*.

Caution: If Block is one cell, {GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS} overwrites any information beneath the cell (if it finds more than one file). To restrict the file names to a specific block, set Block to a block larger than one cell.

Examples

{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS A2,"C:\*.*"} fills column A (starting at row 2) with a list of the files in the root directory of drive C.

{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS A2..C7,"C:\QPW\*.*"} fills the block A2..C7 with a list of the files in the QPW directory on drive C. The first filename is stored in A2, the second in B2, and so on. If more than 18 files are found, the block is only filled with the first 18.

{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS C7,"C:\QPW\SAMPLES\*.W??"} fills column C (starting at row 7) with a list of the files in the QPW\SAMPLES directory on drive C that have file extensions beginning with W.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{GETLABEL}

Format

{GETLABEL Prompt,Location}

Prompt	=	string displayed to the user as a prompt

Location	=	cell in which to store the user's response; when {GETLABEL} is used in OLE automation, Location can also be a named variable

{GETLABEL} pauses macro execution, displays Prompt in a dialog box, and accepts keystrokes until the user chooses OK or presses Enter. At that time, Quattro Pro stores the characters typed as a label in Location. Unlike {GET}, it does not accept Quattro Pro's special keys (for example, Home).

Prompt can be a literal string, such as "Enter date:", or a text formula such as +B6 (which contains a label). The prompt string itself can be up to 70 characters long, and is truncated if longer. The response can be as long as 160.

If {PANELOFF} is in effect, {GETLABEL} ignores it, letting the menus, status line, and input line be viewed and updated as the input is typed. Once input is completed (indicated by Enter or choosing OK), then these portions of the display are turned off again.

Examples

This example displays the label in B6 as the dialog box prompt, and then stores the result in cell D1:

{GETLABEL +B6,D1}

The following example stores the user's last name in the cell named last_cell:

\F	{GETLABEL "Enter your last name:",last_cell}

last_cell

See Also

{GETNUMBER}

Using OLE Automation Features


{GETNUMBER}

Format

{GETNUMBER Prompt,Location}

Prompt	=	string displayed to the user as a prompt

Location	=	cell in which to store the user's response; when {GETNUMBER} is used in OLE automation, Location can also be a named variable

{GETNUMBER} is like {GETLABEL}, but accepts only a numeric value, a formula resulting in a numeric value, or the cell address or block name of a cell returning a value. If a text value is input, ERR is entered in the cell. The prompt can be up to 70 characters long, and the response can be as long as 160 characters.

Example

The following example stores the user's age in the cell named age_cell. If a number is not entered, which the macro detects by checking to see whether age_cell contains ERR, it prompts again.

\F	{GETNUMBER "Enter your age:",age_cell}

{IF @ISERR(age_cell)}{BRANCH \F}

age_cell

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using OLE Automation Features


{GETOBJECTPROPERTY}

Format

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY Cell,Object.Property}

Cell	=	cell in which to store the property setting

Object	=	name of the object to study

Property	=	property of the object to study

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY} lets you view objects in Quattro Pro without using the mouse, including objects normally not selectable (like the application title bar). Selectable objects, such as blocks and annotations, can also be studied with {GETPROPERTY}. See {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} for the syntax of Object.Property.

Examples

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY A23,"Active_Notebook.Zoom_Factor"} stores the Zoom Factor property's current setting in cell A23.

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY B42,"/File/Exit.Enabled"} stores whether File|Exit is operational or not in the cell B42.

See Also

{GETPROPERTY}

{SETPROPERTY}

Property Reference


{GETPOS}

Format

{GETPOS Location}

Location	=	cell in which to store the retrieved value

{GETPOS} places the position of the file pointer in Location as a value. If no file has been opened using {OPEN}, the command is ignored.

The file pointer is a number corresponding to the position at which the next character written to the file will be placed. If the file pointer is 0, the next character written to the file with {WRITE} or {WRITELN} is placed at the beginning of the file. If the file already contains information, it is overwritten, beginning at the first position in the file. After the file is written to, the file pointer is positioned immediately after the last character written. If a file is newly created, then written to for the first time, the file pointer will be the size of the file.

If {GETPOS} succeeds, macro execution continues in the cell below the cell containing the {GETPOS} command, ignoring any commands in the same cell as {GETPOS}; if {GETPOS} fails, macro execution continues in the same cell.

Example

The following example opens the text file TEST.TXT, reads in a line, and calculates the length of the line by subtracting the starting position from the ending position and subtracting 1 from the result. This adjustment is necessary because the carriage return and linefeed characters (found at the end of each line in a typical text file) are stripped away by Quattro Pro when the text is read into cells. So, the calculated length is one character longer than the actual length. The text file read here was created by the macro example provided in the {WRITELN} command description.

\F	{OPEN "A:TEST.TXT",R}

{GETPOS start}

{READLN input}

{GETPOS end}

{CLOSE}

{LET num_char,+(end-start)-1}

input	This is a short line.

start	0

end	22

num_char	21

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{GETPROPERTY}

Format

{GETPROPERTY Cell,Property}

Cell	=	cell in which to store the property setting

Property	=	property of the selected object to study

{GETPROPERTY} lets you study the property settings of whatever object is selected. Property is the property to view (see Property Reference for a list of properties); its setting is stored in Cell.

Examples

{GETPROPERTY A23,"Text_Color"} stores the Text Color setting of the selected object in the cell A23.

{GETPROPERTY B42,"Box_Type"} stores the border style of the selected object in cell B42.

See Also

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETPROPERTY}


{GETWINDOWLIST}

Format

{GETWINDOWLIST Block}

Block	=	block to store window names in

{GETWINDOWLIST} stores a list of the windows open on the Quattro Pro desktop in Block, including dialog windows and graph windows. Windows hidden by Window|Hide are not included.

Caution: If Block is one cell, {GETWINDOWLIST} overwrites any information beneath the cell (if it finds more than one window open). To restrict the window names to a specific block, set Block to a block larger than one cell.

Example

{GETWINDOWLIST A2..C5} stores a list of open windows in the block A2..C5. The first window name is stored in A2, the second in B2, and so on. If more than twelve windows are open, only the first twelve are stored in the block.

See Also

{CHOOSE}

Macros

Using Macros


{GOTO}

{GOTO} lets you move the selector to a specific location.

A related macro, {QGOTO}, selects the cell or block specified as its destination, while {GOTO} moves to the cell in the upper-left corner of the specified block.

This command is for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS; use {EditGoto} as the command equivalent for Edit|Go To.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{GRAPH}

{GRAPH} is equivalent to the Graph key, F11, which displays the current graph.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{GRAPHCHAR}

Format

{GRAPHCHAR Location}

Location	=	cell address or the block name where the returned character should be stored

{GRAPHCHAR} returns the key a user presses to leave a graph or to remove a message box. The character is stored at Location. This command lets you create a graph or message that functions as a menu of choices. The character returned can be used to branch or display any other data.

{GRAPHCHAR} works with {MESSAGE} to record what key the user pressed to remove a message box. It captures only characters the user can normally type into a cell; special characters such as Esc are not stored.

Examples

The following example displays a message box (its contents being the_msg) and returns the character the user pressed to remove it. The key pressed is stored in a block named the_key.

\A	{MESSAGE the_msg,5,5,0}

{GRAPHCHAR the_key}

the_key

the_msg	Press C to continue or any other key to quit...

The next example displays a graph and waits for the user to press a key. If the user presses P, B, or A, Quattro Pro displays a (predefined) pie graph, bar graph, or area graph, respectively. The process repeats until the user presses any key but those three.

the_graph	bar

the_key	b

_graphic	{GraphView}

_continue	{GRAPHCHAR the_key}

{if @UPPER(the_key)="P"}{_draw "pie"}

{if @UPPER(the_key)="B"}{_draw "bar"}

{if @UPPER(the_key)="A"}{_draw "area"}

_draw	{DEFINE the_graph}

{GraphView the_graph}

{BRANCH _continue}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{HELP}

{HELP} is equivalent to the Help key, F1. It displays a help topic.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{HISTOGRAM}

Format

{HISTOGRAM InBlock, OutBlock, <BinBlock>, <Pareto>, <Cum>}

InBlock	=	input block containing one or more columns or rows of numeric values; the block must not contain labels

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

BinBlock	=	set of numbers defining the bin ranges; BinBlock numbers must be in ascending order; if BinBlock is omitted, bins are distributed evenly from the minimum to the maximum values in InBlock, with the number of bins equal to the square root of the number of values in InBlock

Pareto	=	1 to arrange the output table in both descending frequency order and ascending BinBlock order; 0 to arrange the output table in ascending BinBlock order; the default is 0

Cum 	=	flag indicating whether to generate a column in OutBlock showing cumulative percentages: yes (1) or no (0); the default is 0

{HISTOGRAM} calculates the probability and cumulative distributions for a sample population, based on a series of bins. {HISTOGRAM} is equivalent to the Histogram analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{HLINE}

Format

{HLINE Distance}

Distance	=	distance in columns to scroll the active notebook horizontally

{HLINE} scrolls the active notebook horizontally by Distance columns. If the number is positive, it scrolls right; if negative, it scrolls left. {HLINE} does not move the selector; only the view of the notebook is altered, just as if the scroll bars were used. Use the commands {RIGHT} or {LEFT} to move the selector horizontally.

Examples

{HLINE 10}	scrolls the display 10 columns to the right.

{HLINE -5}	scrolls the display 5 columns to the left.

See Also

{HPAGE}

{VLINE}

{VPAGE}

Macros

Using Macros


{HOME}

{HOME} is equivalent to the Home key.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{HPAGE}

Format

{HPAGE Distance}

Distance	=	distance in screens to scroll the active notebook horizontally

{HPAGE} scrolls the active notebook horizontally by Distance screens. If the number is positive, it scrolls right; if negative, it scrolls left. {HPAGE} does not move the selector; only the view of the notebook is altered. Use {BIGRIGHT} or {BIGLEFT} to move the selector horizontally.

See Also

{HLINE}

{VLINE}

{VPAGE}

Macros

Using Macros


{IF}

Format

{IF Condition}

Condition	=	a logical expression (or the address of a cell containing a label, value, or expression)

{IF} operates like @IF. {IF} evaluates Condition; if it is numeric and nonzero, it is considered to be TRUE and macro execution continues in the same cell; if Condition is anything else, it is considered FALSE, and macro execution continues in the cell directly below the {IF} command. Unlike @IF, {IF} commands cannot be nested within each other.

Examples

The following example says, in English, "If the value stored in gpa is greater than 0.59, run the macro _pass_student; otherwise, run the macro _fail_student."

\F	{IF gpa>.59}{BRANCH _pass_student}

{BRANCH _fail_student}

If you do not want both the true and false clauses executing, be sure to include {BRANCH} or {QUIT} in the same cell as {IF}, as shown in both examples. The following example uses a string of {IF} commands to award a grade based on a test result:

\G	{IF result>=.90}{BRANCH _give_a}

{IF result>=.80}{BRANCH _give_b}

{IF result>=.70}{BRANCH _give_c}

{IF result>=.56}{BRANCH _give_d}

{BRANCH _give_f}

See Also

@IF

Macros

Using Macros


{IFKEY}

Format

{IFKEY String}

String	=	any macro name for a key (such as PGUP, END, GRAPH, and so on) without braces, or a string that returns a key macro name without braces

{IFKEY} is like {IF}, but runs the next macro command in the current cell if String is the name of a key macro command (such as {ESC} or {HOME}). Do not enclose the name stored in String in braces. For example, {IFKEY "HOME"} evaluates as true because HOME is the name of a macro command; {IFKEY "A"} evaluates as false because it is not the name of a macro command. String can be a string or a text formula.

See Also

{IF}

Macros

Using Macros


{IMFORMAT}

Format

{IMFORMAT Format}

Format	=	flag indicating what suffix and format to use for imaginary coefficient of complex number; the default is 1; 1 = x + yi, 2 = x + yj, 3 = x + iy, 4 = x + jy

{IMFORMAT} specifies how complex numbers display in the active notebook, and returns a label showing the selected format.

Examples

{IMFORMAT 1} returns "x+iy"

{IMFORMAT 2} returns "x+jy"

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{INDICATE}

Format

{INDICATE String}

String	=	any seven-character string

{INDICATE} sets the mode indicator in the lower right corner of the screen to read whatever is given as String. If String is longer than seven characters, only the first seven are used. To restore the mode indicator to its normal setting, use {INDICATE} with no arguments. To hide the mode indicator, use {INDICATE ""}.

Example

{INDICATE "Save!"} changes the indicator to read Save!.

{INDICATE " Go! "} changes the indicator to read Go! with a space preceding and following it.

{INDICATE E14} changes the indicator to E14 because cell references are ignored.

{INDICATE} restores the normal mode indicator.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{INITIATE}

Format

{INITIATE AppName,Topic,ChannelLoc}

AppName	=	name of the Windows application to communicate with

Topic 	=	name of the file within the Windows application to communicate with

ChannelLoc	=	cell to contain the Channel ID number of the conversation if communication succeeds

{INITIATE} requests a channel of communication with the application AppName. This application must support Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). If the request succeeds, the identification number of the conversation (DDE communication) is stored in the cell ChannelLoc. Topic can be a WordPerfect document, an Excel spreadsheet, an ObjectVision form, or other DDE server-application file. If there is no specific file to communicate with in the other application, you can set Topic to System.

AppName, Topic, or both can be an empty string (""). The empty string works as a wildcard to display a list of possible conversations to choose from.

You can use {INITIATE} multiple times with the same application; if you do this, use a different ChannelLoc for each conversation. Once a channel opens, you can use {REQUEST}, {EXECUTE}, or {POKE} to communicate with the application.

When the DDE conversation is complete, use {TERMINATE} to end it. See {EXECUTE} for an example of {INITIATE}.

See Also

About DDE Macro Commands

Macros

Using Macros


{INS}, {INSERT}, {INSOFF}, and {INSON}

{INS} and {INSERT} toggle the Ins key on or off. {INSOFF} is equivalent to Ins off, and {INSON} to Ins on.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{INSPECT}

{INSPECT} is equivalent to the Inspect key, F12. It displays an Object Inspector for the current object.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{LEFT}
{LEFT} and {L}

Format

{LEFT <Number>} or {L <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer (optional)

{LEFT} and {L} are equivalent to the Left Arrow key. The optional argument Number moves the selector the corresponding number of columns to the left.  You can use cell references or block names as arguments.

Examples

{L}{L}{L} moves the selector left three columns.

{LEFT 6} moves the selector six columns to the left.

{LEFT D9} moves to the left the number of columns specified in cell D9.

{LEFT count} moves to the left the number of columns specified in the first cell of the block named count.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{LET}

Format

{LET Location,Value<:Type>}

Location	=	cell in which to store the specified value

Value	=	numeric or string value to be stored in Location

Type	=	string or value; string (or s) stores the value or formula as a label, and value (or v) stores the actual value or value resulting from a formula (optional)

With {LET}, you can enter a value into Location without moving to it. {LET} enters the value or string you specify with Value in Location.

You can use the optional Type argument to specify whether to store Value as an actual number or as a string. If you specify a formula as a string, the formula is written into Location as a string, not the resulting value. For example, {LET A1,B3*23:string} stores the formula B3*23 as a label in cell A1. If you omit Type, Quattro Pro tries to store the value as a numeric value; if unsuccessful, it stores the value as a string.

Location must be a cell address or cell name; you can use functions such as @CELLPOINTER as a Location in {LET} commands only if they return a cell address or cell name.

Note:	Value cannot be an @ARRAY formula. {LET} does not not enter array values. Use {PUTCELL} or {PUTCELL2} to enter array values.

You can use {LET} to invoke add-in @functions or macros contained in DLLs. Specify the add-in as Value, using this syntax for functions:

@dllname.functionname(functionargument1, functionargument2, ...)

For example, this statement calls the @function MEDIAN, included in DLL Stats, with a five-item list as an argument and stores the result in Location G6:

{LET G6,@Stats.MEDIAN(2,4,6,8,10)}

The macro syntax is identical:

@dllname.macroname(macroargument1, macroargument2, ...)

Examples

{LET(@CELLPOINTER("address")),99} makes the value of the active cell 99.

The examples below assume A1 contains the label 'Dear, A2 contains the label 'Sir, and A3 contains the value 25. The result is shown to the right of each {LET}.

\M	{LET F1,25}	25

{LET F2,A3}	25

{LET F3,+A1&""&A2}	Dear Sir

{LET F4,+A1&""&A2:value}	Dear Sir

{LET F5,+A1&""&A2:string}	+A1&""&A2

{LET F6,+A1&A3}	ERR (because A3 is a value)

See Also

{PUT}

Macros

Using Macros


{LOOK}

Format

{LOOK Location}

Location	=	a cell in which to store a typed character

When Quattro Pro runs a macro, it does not respond to keystrokes the user enters (except Ctrl+Break). If the user presses keys during macro execution, those keystrokes are stored in the computer's type-ahead buffer and are responded to when the macro pauses for input or ends.

{LOOK} checks this type-ahead buffer for stored keystrokes. If any are found, it places the first keystroke the user typed in Location as a macro command.

{LOOK} can be used while processing long macros to check for a keystroke that might signal the user wants to quit (see the next example).

{LOOK} does not remove the keystroke from the buffer. If a macro does nothing other than {LOOK}, the key still passes to Quattro Pro when the macro ends. To remove pending keystrokes from the buffer, use {GET}.

Example

In the following example, the macro gives you 15 seconds to choose the next menu choice. If you do not, you must reenter the password. Important: Type the line to the right of _check_it with no hard returns until after {BRANCH _password}, then press Enter to insert it into one cell (the macro commands from {LOOK keystroke} to {BRANCH -password} are shown here on separate lines for readability).

\M	{QGOTO}msg_area~

A. Add name{DOWN}

B. Edit name{DOWN}

C. Delete name{DOWN}

Enter choice: {RIGHT}

{ }

{LET start_time,@NOW}

_check_it	{LOOK keystroke}

{IF keystroke=""}

{IF @NOW>start_time + @TIME(0,0,15)}

{BRANCH _password}

{IF keystroke<>""}{BRANCH _take_action}

{BEEP 4}

{BRANCH _check_it}

_password	{; get password from user}

{GETLABEL "Enter password : ",pass}

_take_action	{ }

{BEEP 3}

start_time

keystroke

pass

msg_area

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{MACROS}

{MACROS} is equivalent to the Macros key, Shift+F3, which displays a menu of macro commands to type into the input line.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{MARK}

{MARK} is equivalent to the Select key, Shift+F7, which lets you begin selection of a block.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{MCORREL}

Format

{MCORREL InBlock, OutBlock, <Grouped>, <Labels>}

InBlock	=	input block containing two or more sets of numeric data arranged in columns or rows

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Grouped	=	"C" to group results by column or "R" to group results by row; the default is "C"

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

{MCORREL} computes the correlation matrix between two or more data sets. {MCORREL} is equivalent to the Correlation analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{MCOVAR}

Format

{MCOVAR InBlock, OutBlock, <Grouped>, <Labels>}

InBlock	=	input block containing two or more sets of numeric data arranged in columns or rows

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Grouped	=	"C" to group results by column or "R" to group results by row; the default is "C"

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

{MCOVAR} returns the covariance matrix between two or more data sets. {MCOVAR} is equivalent to the Covariance analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{MENU}

{MENU} is equivalent to the Menu key (Alt or F10). This command moves the selector to the menu bar and highlights the first menu.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{MENUBRANCH}

Format

{MENUBRANCH Location}

Location	=	block containing a menu block

{MENUBRANCH} pauses macro execution to display the custom pop-up menu stored at Location. After the user chooses an item from the menu, macro execution continues with the cell below the description of the menu choice. Often this is a {BRANCH}. The only exception is if the user presses Esc, or clicks outside the menu; in this case, the macro continues in the {MENUBRANCH} cell.

With the exception of the Esc key, a custom pop-up menu acts the same as one of Quattro Pro's own menus. Users can press the arrow keys to look at each item, and can choose a menu item by either pressing Enter while highlighting it, pressing the first letter of the menu item's name, or choosing it with the mouse.

See Menu Design Tips for information on how to design a custom menu. See {ADDMENU} and {ADDMENUITEM} for information on adding menus or menu commands to the Quattro Pro menu bar.

Example

The following macro  displays a custom menu that offers the user three choices. If the user presses Esc, the menu is redisplayed with {BRANCH \F}.

quit_menu	Continue	Return	Quit

Continue macro	Return to Ready	Leave Quattro Pro

{BRANCH \F}	{BRANCH _continue}	{MENUBRANCH sure}

sure	No	Yes

Stay in Quattro Pro	Return to DOS

{BRANCH \F}	{FileExit}

\F	{MENUBRANCH quit_menu}

{BRANCH \F}

_continue

See Also

{MENUCALL}


{MENUCALL}

Format

{MENUCALL Location}

Location	=	block containing a custom Quattro Pro menu

{MENUCALL} pauses macro execution and displays the custom pop-up menu stored at Location. It treats the called menu as a subroutine. After the user chooses an item from the menu, macro execution continues in the cell containing {MENUCALL}.

See {ADDMENU} and {ADDMENUITEM} for information on adding menus or menu commands to the Quattro Pro menu bar.

Example

The following macro uses two consecutive custom menus to let the user change search criteria for a database. It then copies records that meet the criteria to the output block and branches to another macro to print the output block as labels. The block name stat references the cell in the criteria table containing A in the example; pay references the cell in the criteria table containing F.

m_status	Active	Retired

Active Members 	Retired Members

{LET stat, "A"}	{LET stat, "R"}

m_paid	Paid	Unpaid

Dues are paid	Dues are unpaid

{LET pay, "T"}	{LET pay, "F"}

\M	{;Choose members for label print}

{MENUCALL m_status}

{MENUCALL m_paid}

{Query.Extract}

{BRANCH print_labels}

Database Criteria Block:

STATUS	PAID

A	F

See Also

{MENUBRANCH}


{MESSAGE}

Format

{MESSAGE Block,Left,Top,Time}

Block	=	block name or coordinates of the text and/or floating object to display in the message box

Left	=	screen column number (counting from 0) where the top left corner of the box should appear

Top	=	screen line number (counting from 0) where the top left corner of the box should appear

Time	=	Quattro Pro time serial number

{MESSAGE} displays the contents of Block in a dialog box until Time is reached; Time is a standard Quattro Pro date/time serial number (decimal portion). The window appears at the screen (not the notebook) coordinates Left,Top.

The message box contains a "snapshot" of current Block contents, including all fonts, colors, and other formatting. If Block includes a floating graph, bitmap, or macro button, its image displays in the message block.

The height and width of the message box depend on the defined width and depth of Block. If text overflows the cell it is typed into, be sure to include adjoining cells in Block. Otherwise, the message will be truncated at the edge of Block.

The message box always appears over the frontmost window, even if that window is not a notebook (for example, a graph window).

If you enter 0 for Time, Quattro Pro displays the box until the user presses any key. (You can use {GRAPHCHAR} to test for which key is pressed.)

Example

This example displays a message box for 15 seconds and then displays another box indefinitely. If the user presses Y, the macro closes the notebook without saving it. If the user, presses N (which is returned in the block the_key), the user removes the second message box.

the_key

\A	{MESSAGE msg1,15,5,+@NOW+@TIME(0,0,15)}

_warning	{MESSAGE msg2,15,5,0}

{GRAPHCHAR the_key}

{IF @UPPER(the_key)="Y"}{BRANCH _lose_data}

msg1	Warning! You may lose data if you continue.

msg2	Are you sure you want to continue?

Press Y to continue or any other key to cancel...

_lose_data	{FileClose 0}

See Also

{DODIALOG}


{MOVEAVG}

Format

{MOVEAVG InBlock, OutBlock, <Interval>, <StdErrs>}

InBlock	=	input block containing a single column or row with at least four numeric values; the block must not contain labels

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Interval	=	number of values to include in the moving average; the default is 3

StdErrs	=	flag indicating whether to include standard error values in the OutBlock: yes (1) or no (0); the default is 0

{MOVEAVG} returns a moving average for a specified Interval based on the values for the preceding periods in InBlock. {MOVEAVG} is equivalent to the Moving Average analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{MOVETO}

Format

{MOVETO x,y}

x,y	=	position to move the currently selected object(s) to in pixels

{MOVETO} moves all selected objects in the active window (dialog, graph, or Objects page window) to the position specified by x,y. Since {MOVETO} is context-sensitive, you can use it to move controls in a dialog window or drawings in a graph window. It also moves graph icons on the Objects page. (Use {FLOATMOVE} to move floating objects in a notebook window.)

The coordinates x and y represent where to move the upper left corner of the object(s). Object size does not change.

See Also

{RESIZE}

{SELECTOBJECT}


{MTGAMT}

Format

{MTGAMT <OutBlock>, <Rate>, <Term>, <OrigBal>, <EndBal>, <LastYear>}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Rate	=	yearly interest rate; the default is 0.12

Term	=	number of years in the loan; the default is 30 years; can be a fractional value to designate months (for example, 3+5/12)

OrigBal	=	original loan balance; the default is $100,000

EndBal	=	balance at loan completion; the default is $0

LastYear	=	last year through which the amortization period is generated; the default is equal to Term (the end of the loan); can be a fractional value to designate months (for example, 3+5/12)

{MTGAMT} generates an amortization schedule for a mortgage. {MTGAMT} is equivalent to the Amortization Schedule analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{MTGREFI}

Format

{MTGREFI <OutBlock>, <CurrBal>, <CurrRate>, <RemTerm>, <CandPctFees>, <CandRate>}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

CurrBal 	=	remaining principal on the current loan

CurrRate	=	annual interest rate on the current loan

RemTerm 	=	remaining term on the current loan

CandPctFees	=	percentage fees ("points") for the candidate loan

CandRate	=	annual interest rate for the candidate loan

{MTGREFI} generates a table of information relating to refinancing a mortgage. {MTGREFI} is equivalent to the Mortgage Refinancing analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{NAME}

{NAME} is equivalent to the Choices key, F3, which displays a list of block names in the current notebook.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{NEXTPANE}

Format

{NEXTPANE <CellAtPointer?>}

CellAtPointer?	=	specifies which cell should be active when the pane switches (0 or 1, optional)

{NEXTPANE} switches between the panes of a notebook window previously split using View|Panes. The optional argument CellAtPointer? specifies whether the active cell in the pane will be at the location of the selector (1) or its previous position (0). This command is equivalent to the Pane key, F6.

See Also

{ACTIVATE}


{NEXTTOPWIN}

Format

{NEXTTOPWIN <Number>}

Number	=	number of times to repeat the operation (optional)

{NEXTTOPWIN} is equivalent to the Next Window key, Ctrl+F6. It makes the next window active and moves the selector to it.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{NEXTWIN}

Format

{NEXTWIN <Number>}

Number	=	number of times to repeat the operation (optional)

{NEXTWIN} is equivalent to Shift+F6. It makes the bottom window active and moves the selector to it. This macro is included for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{NUMOFF} and {NUMON}

{NUMOFF} and {NUMON} are equivalent to Num Lock off and Num Lock on, respectively.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ONERROR}

Format

{ONERROR BranchLocation, <MessageLocation>, <ErrorLocation>}

BranchLocation	=	first cell of the macro to run in case of an error

MessageLocation	=	cell in which to store any error message (optional)

ErrorLocation	=	cell in which to store the address of the cell containing the macro error (optional)

Normally, if an error occurs during macro execution, the macro ends and you see an error message. {ONERROR} tells Quattro Pro to branch to a different location (BranchLocation) if an error is encountered and store the error message in MessageLocation for future reference. Quattro Pro stores the location of the error in ErrorLocation. MessageLocation and ErrorLocation are optional. If MessageLocation is omitted, no error message will be displayed or stored.

Only one {ONERROR} command can be in effect at a time, so each time it is called, the most recent {ONERROR} replaces the previous one. If an error occurs, the {ONERROR} state is "used up" and must be redeclared. It is best to declare {ONERROR} at the very beginning of your macro, or at least before any procedure is likely to result in an error.

In general, {ONERROR} will not capture macro programming errors, such as an incorrect sequence of commands, or an attempt to call a nonexisting subroutine. Nor will it detect syntax errors within a macro itself, such as an error resulting from the incorrect use of a macro keyword.

Typical errors that {ONERROR} detects include

disk errors, such as a disk drive door left open, a full disk, or failure to find a file of a given name

attempts to copy to a protected cell when a notebook's protection property is enabled

attempts to insert a row that would push a nonblank cell off the bottom of the notebook

Example

The following macro uses {ONERROR} by first deliberately causing an error (trying to insert a row that would push text off the bottom of the notebook), and then beeps when that error occurs.

\G	{ONERROR _on_err,err_msg,err_loc}

{EditGoto A8192}

{PUTCELL "This is the end"}

{UP}

{BlockInsert.Rows C(0)R(0), "Entire"}

_on_err	{BEEP 5}

err_msg

err_loc

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{OPEN}

Format

{OPEN Filename,AccessMode}

Filename	=	file name

AccessMode	=	R, M, W, A, or L

{OPEN} establishes a connection to Filename so you can use other file-access macro commands ({READ}, {WRITE}, and so on) on it. There are four different access modes:

R (Read-Only)	Allows only reading from this file, ensuring no changes are made to it. {WRITE} and {WRITELN} cannot be used with a file opened as read-only.

M (Modify)	Opens an existing file for modification. All reading and writing commands can be used with a file opened for modification. You can also use this access mode to open a stream to a communications port (for example, "COM1") or a printer port (for example, "LPT1").

W (Write)	Opens a new file with the name given in {OPEN}. If a file already exists with that name, the existing file is erased. All reading and writing commands can be used with a file opened for writing.

A (Append)	Opens an existing file for modification. Allows writing to the selected file only, and positions the file pointer at the end of the file.

L (Locate)	Opens and closes a file to locate it.

Filename's full name and access path must be given, and the entire name must be in quotes. For instance, to open and modify the file DATA.TXT in the subdirectory called FILES on drive C, use the command {OPEN "C:\FILES\DATA.TXT",M}. If any part of the access path or file name is left out, the file might not be found.

Caution: Although {OPEN} can provide access to any type of file (including .WB2 spreadsheet files), Quattro Pro's file-access macro commands are designed to work only with plain text files. Using these commands with any other file type is not recommended and can result in corruption of that file. Make a backup copy of your file before using {OPEN} on it.

Once {OPEN} runs successfully, Quattro Pro skips to the next row of the macro and continues executing instructions there. {OPEN Filename,R}, {OPEN Filename,M}, and {OPEN Filename,A} fail if the file is not found. {OPEN Filename,W} fails if the supplied access path or file name is invalid. If {OPEN} fails, Quattro Pro continues executing commands in the same cell as the {OPEN} command. (See the third macro below for an example.) You can use {ONERROR} to trap some errors that occur in {OPEN}.

Examples

The following example opens the file named MYDATA.TXT for reading. If the file does not exist in the default data directory, the command fails.

{OPEN "MYDATA.TXT",R}

The next example creates a file MYDATA.TXT on drive A for writing. If there is already a file on drive A with that name, it is erased. This command will fail only if there is no disk in drive A.

{OPEN "A:MYDATA.TXT",W}

The last example demonstrates how to do error trapping in an {OPEN} macro. When you press Ctrl+H, Quattro Pro attempts to open the file C:\MYDIR\DATA.TXT. If that succeeds, the macro stops, since there are no more commands in the row below. If {OPEN} fails (meaning the file does not exist), the adjacent {BRANCH} runs. The subroutine _try_again then attempts to create the file. If that succeeds, the macro restarts, since {OPEN} should succeed now that the file has been created. If _try_again fails, probably an invalid directory path was given. Therefore, the adjacent {BRANCH} goes to _bad_dir, which displays a relevant error message with pertinent instructions.

\H	{OPEN "C:\MYDIR\DATA.TXT",M}{BRANCH _try_again}

{CLOSE}

_try_again	{OPEN "C:\MYDIR\DATA.TXT",W}{BRANCH _bad_dir}

{CLOSE}

{BRANCH \H}

_bad_dir	{EditGoto err_loc}{BEEP 4}

{PUTCELL "The directory C:\MYDIR\ does not exist."}

{DOWN}

{PUTCELL "Create it, then try again."}

{DOWN}

err_loc

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{PANELOFF}

{PANELOFF} disables normal display of menus and prompts during macro execution when Quattro Pro's Macro Suppress-Redraw property is set to None. It can significantly speed up execution for macros that use keystrokes to walk through menus, since it saves Quattro Pro the time normally needed to draw its menus on the screen. Its effect is canceled by Quattro Pro once the macro stops executing, so you need not worry about locking macro users out of the menus. To cancel its effect during macro execution, use {PANELON}.

{PANELOFF} does not disable menus created by {MENUCALL} and {MENUBRANCH} or subroutine calls that use menus or dialog boxes. Use this command with {WINDOWSOFF} to completely disable normal screen updating.

See Also

{WINDOWSON}


{PANELON}

{PANELON} enables display of menus and prompts that have been disabled with {PANELOFF}. {PANELON} has no effect if used without an accompanying {PANELOFF}. Therefore, it can be used repeatedly with no ill effects.

Use this command with {WINDOWSON} to completely restore normal screen updating.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{PAUSEMACRO}

{PAUSEMACRO} is used with {DODIALOG} or a command equivalent invoked with ! to pause the macro so that the user can "finish up" whatever dialog box is displaying. Once the user finishes using the dialog box (by choosing OK, or canceling it), macro execution resumes with any macro commands following the {PAUSEMACRO}.

Caution: Use {PAUSEMACRO} only when a dialog box is displaying, Quattro Pro is in FIND mode (using Tools|Database Tools|Query), or Quattro Pro is in INPUT mode (using Block|Restrict Input). Otherwise, the macro pauses indefinitely.

Example

The following macro displays the Block|Copy dialog box, sets the From edit field to A1, activates the To edit field, and then waits for the user to complete the copy operation. Once the user finishes the dialog box, the macro beeps and moves down a cell.

_copy_a1	{BlockCopy!}

{ALT+F}

A1

{ALT+T}

{PAUSEMACRO}

{BEEP}{DOWN}

See Also

{DODIALOG}


{PGDN}
{PGDN} and {PGUP}

Format

{PGDN <Number>},{PGUP <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer or address of a cell containing a positive integer (optional)

{PGDN} and {PGUP} are equivalent to PgDn and PgUp, respectively. Use Number to specify how many times the operation is repeated; for example, {PGUP 7} is equivalent to pressing PgUp seven times.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{POKE}

Format

{POKE DDEChannel, Destination, DataToSend}

DDEChannel	=	channel ID number of the application to send information to

Destination	=	location in the application that receives the information being sent

DataToSend	=	block of cells containing the information to send to the application

{POKE} sends information to an application that supports Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). This application is identified by DDEChannel. The type of application determines what Destination is; it could be a block of cells in Excel or a bookmark in Word for Windows. DataToSend is a block containing the information to send. You must use the command {INITIATE} to open a channel of conversation before you can use {POKE} (this also determines the value of DDEChannel).

Example

This example starts a conversation with TASKLIST.OVD, which is a file open in ObjectVision. It sets the ObjectVision field Task to the label stored in new_task, and unchecks the Completed check box. Then the new task is inserted into the task list. The command block contains an ObjectVision command not available in Quattro Pro:

dde_channel	10

command	[@INSERT("tasks")]

exec_result	0

new_task	Call Jim re: task priorities

task_status	No

_new_vision	{INITIATE "VISION","TASKLIST.OVD",dde_channel}

{POKE dde_channel,"Task",new_task}

{POKE dde_channel,"Completed",task_status}

{EXECUTE dde_channel,+command,exec_result}

See Also

{REQUEST}

About DDE Macro Commands


{PTTESTM}

Format

{PTTESTM InBlock1, InBlock2, OutBlock, <Labels>, <Alpha>, <Difference>}

InBlock1	=	the first input block containing a column or row of numeric values

InBlock2	=	the second input block containing a column or row of numeric values

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

Alpha	=	significance level of the test; the default is 0.05

Difference	=	hypothetical mean difference; the default is 0

{PTTESTM} performs a paired two-sample Student's t-Test for means. Each value from InBlock1 is paired with a value from InBlock2. InBlock1 and InBlock2 must have the same number of values.

{PTTESTM} is equivalent to the t-Test analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{PTTESTV}

Format

{PTTESTV InBlock1,InBlock2,OutBlock,<Labels>,<Alpha>}

InBlock1	=	the first input block containing a column or row of numeric values

InBlock2	=	the second input block containing a column or row of numeric values

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

Alpha	=	significance level of the test; the default is 0.05

{PTTESTV} performs a Student's t-Test using two indepependent (rather than paired) samples with unequal variances. {PTTESTV} is equivalent to the t-Test analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{PUT}

Format

{PUT Location,Column#,Row#,Value<:Type>}

Location	=	block within which Value will be stored, either as a value or label, as specified by Type

Column#	=	number of columns into the specified block to store Value

Row#	=	number of rows into the specified block to store Value

Value	=	string or numeric value

Type	=	string or value; string (or s) stores the value or formula as a label, and value (or v) stores the actual value or value resulting from a formula (optional)

{PUT}, like {LET}, copies a value to a particular cell. However, instead of placing the value directly in the specified cell, {PUT} copies Value into the cell that is offset Column# columns and Row# rows into Location.

{PUT} processes Value the same way {LET} does, including the use of :string (or :s) and :value (or :v). If neither of these two optional arguments is supplied, {PUT} tries to store the value as a numeric value; if unsuccessful, it stores the value as a label.

The values for Column# and Row# can be any number between 0 and one less than the number of columns or rows within Location, respectively. A value of 0 implies the first column or row, 1 implies the second, and so on. If Column# or Row# exceeds the number of columns or rows in the block, the macro stops. ({ONERROR} cannot trap this error.)

Examples

Each of the following examples assumes cell A41 contains the value 25, the block named numbers has been defined as A44..B50, and data is a cell containing the value 295.

{PUT numbers,1,4,A41:value} copies the value 25 into the cell at the intersection of the second column and the fifth row of the block numbers (cell B48).

{PUT numbers,1,5,A41:s} copies the string "A41" into the cell at the 2nd column and the 6th row of the block numbers (cell B49).

{PUT numbers,1,6,data} copies the contents of the block data to the 2nd column and 7th row of numbers (cell B50). If there is no block named data, this example instead places a label ("data") into cell B50.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{PUTBLOCK}

Format

{PUTBLOCK Data,<Block>,<Date?(0|1)>}

Data	=	entry to type

Block	=	block to type Data in (optional)

Date?	=	whether to enter Data as a date (1) or a label (0)

{PUTBLOCK} lets you quickly enter the same value, label, or formula in multiple cells. Data is a string or value to place in Block. If Block is not specified, the currently selected block is used. Block can be noncontiguous; if so, be sure to enclose it in parentheses. If Data is a formula containing relative addresses, those addresses are adjusted automatically.

Examples

{PUTBLOCK "Quarter 1",A..D:A1} enters the label Quarter 1 in cells A:A1 through D:A1.

{PUTBLOCK 1990,A..D:B1} enters the value 1990 in cells A:B1 through D:B1.

{PUTBLOCK "+A1",C3..C12) enters the formula +A1 in C3, +A2 in C4, and so on.

{PUTBLOCK "11/01/94", (A:D3,B:D3,C:D3,D:D3),1} enters the date 11/01/94 in cell D3 of pages A through D.

See Also

{LET}

{PUT}

{PUTBLOCK2}

{PUTCELL}

{PUTCELL2}


{PUTCELL}

Format

{PUTCELL Data,<Date?(0|1)>}

Data	=	string to type into the active cell

Date?	=	whether to enter Data as a date (1) or a label (0)

{PUTCELL} is an easy way to store information in the active cell.

Examples

{PUTCELL "Peggy Danderhoff"} stores Peggy Danderhoff as a label in the active cell.

{PUTCELL 45067} stores the number 45067 as a value in the active cell.

{PUTCELL "@SUM(A1..A27)"} stores the formula @SUM(A1..A27) in the active cell.

{PUTCELL "11/01/94",1} stores the date 11/01/94 in the active cell

See Also

{GETLABEL}

{GETNUMBER}

{LET}

{PUT}

{PUTBLOCK}

{PUTBLOCK2}

{PUTCELL2}


{QGOTO}

{QGOTO} displays and selects the specified block. This command is equivalent to the Go To key, F5. You can also use the command equivalent {EditGoto Block}. A related command, {GOTO}, moves to the upper-left cell of a destination block, but does not select the block.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{QUERY}

{QUERY} is equivalent to the Query key, F7, which repeats the last Tools|Database Tools|Query operation performed.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{QUIT}

{QUIT} ends all macro execution, and returns control of Quattro Pro to the user.

Use {QUIT} in conjunction with {IF}, {LOOK}, {MENUBRANCH}, or {MENUCALL} to end a macro under user control.

Example

The following macro displays a menu that has a "Quit" option, which returns the user to Ready mode.

quit_menu	Continue	Quit

Keep going	Quit to Ready mode

{BRANCH \G}	{QUIT}

\G	{MENUBRANCH quit_menu}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{RANDOM}

{RANDOM} generates a block of random values drawn from a selected distribution. It is equivalent to the Random Number analysis tool. {RANDOM} has a different format for the following distribution types:

Uniform	every value has an equal probability of being selected.

Normal	has the qualities of a symmetrical, bell-shaped curve.

Bernoulli	has two possible outcomes, failure or success, represented by 0 and 1

Binomial	represents the distribution of successful outcomes in a given number of independent Bernoulli trials.

Poisson	the distribution of values in any interval depends on the length of the interval and the constant Lambda, the expected number of occurrences in an interval

Patterned	a pattern of repeated values and sequences.

Discrete	every value in a designated block has a specified probability of being selected (the cumulative probabilities equal 1).

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANDOM} - Uniform Distribution

Format

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 1, Seed, LowerBound, UpperBound}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Columns 	=	a value indicating the number of random number sets to generate; default is the number of columns in OutBlock

Rows	=	a value indicating the number of rows of random numbers to generate for each column

1	=	indicates uniform distribution

Seed	=	starting number for the random number generation algorithm

LowerBound	=	a value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate

UpperBound	=	a value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate

When the Distribution argument equals 1, {RANDOM} generates random values drawn from a uniform distribution.

See Also

{RANDOM}

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANDOM} - Normal Distribution

Format

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 2, Seed, Mean, SDev}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Columns 	=	a value indicating the number of random number sets to generate; default is the number of columns in OutBlock

Rows	=	a value indicating the number of rows of random numbers to generate for each column

2	=	indicates normal distribution

Seed	=	starting number for the random number generation algorithm

Mean	=	a value indicating the mean of the set of numbers to generate

SDev	=	a value indicating the standard deviation of the set of numbers to generate

When the Distribution argument equals 2, {RANDOM} generates random values drawn from a normal distribution.

See Also

{RANDOM}

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANDOM} - Bernoulli Distribution

Format

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 3, Seed, Prob}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Columns 	=	a value indicating the number of random number sets to generate; default is the number of columns in OutBlock

Rows	=	a value indicating the number of rows of random numbers to generate for each column

3	=	indicates Bernoulli distribution

Seed	=	starting number for the random number generation algorithm

Prob	=	a value indicating the probability of success on each trial run; must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 1

When the Distribution argument equals 3, {RANDOM} generates random values drawn from a Bernoulli distribution.

See Also

{RANDOM}

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANDOM} - Binomial Distribution

Format

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 4, Seed, Prob, Trials}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Columns 	=	a value indicating the number of random number sets to generate; default is the number of columns in OutBlock

Rows	=	a value indicating the number of rows of random numbers to generate for each column

4	=	indicates binomial distribution

Seed	=	starting number for the random number generation algorithm

Prob	=	a value indicating the probability of success on each trial run; must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 1

Trials	=	a value indicating the number of trials

When the Distribution argument equals 4, {RANDOM} generates random values drawn from a binomial distribution.

See Also

{RANDOM}

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANDOM} - Poisson Distribution

Format

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 5, Seed, Lambda}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Columns 	=	a value indicating the number of random number sets to generate; default is the number of columns in OutBlock

Rows	=	a value indicating the number of rows of random numbers to generate for each column

5	=	indicates Poisson distribution

Seed	=	starting number for the random number generation algorithm

Lambda	=	a parameter to the Poisson distribution representing the expected number of events in each unit

When the Distribution argument equals 5, {RANDOM} generates random values drawn from a Poisson distribution.

See Also

{RANDOM}

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANDOM} - Patterned Distribution

Format

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 6, Seed, LowerBound, UpperBound, Step, RepeatNumber, RepeatSequence}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Columns 	=	a value indicating the number of random number sets to generate; default is the number of columns in OutBlock

Rows	=	a value indicating the number of rows of random numbers to generate for each column

6	=	indicates patterned distribution

Seed	=	starting number for the random number generation algorithm

LowerBound	=	a value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate

UpperBound	=	a value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate

Step	=	increment value between LowerBound and UpperBound

RepeatNumber	=	a value indicating the number of times to repeat each value

RepeatSequence	=	a value indicating the number of times to repeat each sequence of values

When the Distribution argument equals 6, {RANDOM} generates random values drawn from a patterned distribution.

See Also

{RANDOM}

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANDOM} - Discrete Distribution

Format

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 7, Seed, InBlock}

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Columns 	=	a value indicating the number of random number sets to generate; default is the number of columns in OutBlock

Rows	=	a value indicating the number of rows of random numbers to generate for each column

7	=	indicates discrete distribution

Seed	=	starting number for the random number generation algorithm

InBlock 	=	one or more numeric block values representing the input block, which contains a range of values and their probabilities, each in a separate column

When the Distribution argument equals 7, {RANDOM} generates random values drawn from a discrete distribution.

See Also

{RANDOM}

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{RANKPERC}

Format

{RANKPERC InBlock,OutBlock,<Grouped>,<Labels(0|1)>}

InBlock	=	input block containing one or more columns or rows of numeric values

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Grouped	=	"C" to group results by column or "R" to group results by row; the default is "C"

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

{RANKPERC} returns the ordinal and percent rank of each value in InBlock. {RANKPERC} is equivalent to the Rank and Percentile analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{READ}

Format

{READ #Bytes,Location}

#Bytes	=	number of bytes of characters to read from a file

Location	=	cell in which to store the characters read

{READ} reads #Bytes bytes of characters from a file previously opened using {OPEN} (starting at the current position of the file pointer), and stores them as a label in Location. The file is left unchanged, and the file pointer moves to the position following the last character read. (See {GETPOS} for a discussion of the file pointer.)

{READ} is similar to {READLN}, except for two differences. While {READLN} reads one line of characters (terminated by a carriage-return/linefeed pair), {READ} reads the precise number of characters specified. This lets you read, for example, fields within a record rather than an entire record. The second difference is that while {READLN} strips out the carriage-return/linefeed pair at the end of a line, {READ} manipulates these as if they were no different from other characters. If you use {READ} to read a file created by {WRITELN}, you will see two graphics characters at the end of each string read. These are the carriage return and linefeed characters. {READ} is best used only in conjunction with {WRITE}, or when you know the text file structure in detail.

If {READ} succeeds, macro execution continues in the cell below the cell containing the {READ} command; if {READ} fails, macro execution continues in the same cell.

Example

This macro opens a text file containing a phone directory database, and reads a name and phone number from the third record. The macro that created this text file is shown in the description of {WRITE}:

\L	{OPEN "A:PHONEDIR.PRN",R}

{SETPOS rec_length*(rec_number-1)}

{READ name_length,name}

{READ phone_length,phone}

{CLOSE}

rec_number	3

rec_length	28

name_length	14

phone_length	12

name	Hall, Sue Ann

phone	617-555-5678

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{READLN}

Format

{READLN Location}

Location	=	cell in which to store the characters read

{READLN} is like {READ}, but instead of using a number of bytes to determine the amount of text to read, {READLN} reads forward from the current file pointer location up to and including the carriage-return/linefeed at the end of the line. Unlike {READ}, it does not read the carriage return/linefeed into the cell. (See {GETPOS} for a discussion of the file pointer.)

Use {READ} to read lines from a record-structured file, where the lines are of uniform length. {READLN} can read the contents of a file one row at a time, making formatting of the data easier than {READ}.

Like the other file-access macros, if {READLN} fails, the macro continues execution in the current cell. If it is successful, the macro skips to the row below, and execution continues there. {ONERROR} can be used to trap disk and file errors, such as a disk drive door being left open.

Example

The following macro opens the text file TEST.TXT, reads in a line, and calculates the length of the line by subtracting the starting position from the ending position, then subtracting 1 from the result. This adjustment is necessary because the carriage-return and linefeed characters found at the end of each line in a typical text file are stripped away by Quattro Pro when the text is read into cells. The macro that created the file TEST.TXT is shown in the description of {WRITELN}.

\M	{OPEN "A:TEST.TXT",R}

{GETPOS start}

{READLN input}

{GETPOS end}

{CLOSE}

{LET num_char,+(end-start)-1}

start	0

end	22

num_char	21

input	This is a short line.

See Also

{WRITELN}

Macros

Using Macros


{RECALC}

Format

{RECALC Location,<Condition>,<Iteration#>}

Location	=	block to recalculate

Condition	=	condition to be met before recalculation is halted (optional)

Iteration#	=	maximum number of times to recalculate Location trying to meet Condition (optional)

{RECALC} causes Quattro Pro to recalculate a specified portion of the notebook in a row-by-row order. This is different from normal recalculation, where Quattro Pro recalculates the entire notebook in natural order; that is, before a formula calculates, each cell it references is recalculated first.

With the optional Condition argument you can tell Quattro Pro to recalculate formulas in a block repeatedly until the specified condition is met. You can also supply Iteration# to specify the maximum number of times to recalculate formulas trying to satisfy Condition. To use Iteration#, Condition must also be supplied.

{RECALC} is useful for rapid recalculation of specified parts of a notebook, particularly when the notebook is so large that global recalculations would significantly slow your work.

{RECALC} overrides the recalculation method specified for the notebook, enforcing row-by-row recalculation. If all the formulas reference only cells above, or to the left in the same row, the notebook will be correctly calculated. If there are references to cells to the left and below, you must use {RECALCCOL}. If there are references to cells below or to the right in the same row as your formula, you must use {CALC} to recalculate the entire notebook.

{RECALC} displays the results of recalculation.

Caution: If there are formulas within the block being recalculated that depend on formulas outside of the block, they might not evaluate correctly. Make sure Location encompasses all the cells referenced by formulas within the block.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{RECALCCOL}

Format

{RECALCCOL Location,<Condition>,<Iteration#>}

Location	=	cell block to recalculate

Condition	=	condition to be met before recalculation is halted (optional)

Iteration#	=	maximum number of times to recalculate Location trying to meet Condition (optional)

{RECALCCOL} recalculates the specified portion of a notebook in column-by-column order. It is similar to {RECALC}, which recalculates row by row. See {RECALC} for information on when {RECALCCOL} is appropriate and when you need to use {CALC} instead.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{REGRESS}

Format

{REGRESS InBlockY, InBlockX, YIntZero(0|1), Labels(0|1), Confidence, SumOutBlock, Residuals(0|1), StdResiduals(0|1), <ResidualOutBLock>, <ProbOutBlock>}

InBlockY 	=	input block containing a single column of y values (the dependent variables)

InBlockX	=	input block containing one or more columns of x values (the independent variables)

YIntZero 	=	1 if the y-intercept is 0 (the line of regression passes through the origin); 0 if the y-intercept is not 0

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the InBlockY and InBlockX; 0 if the input blocks do not contain labels

Confidence	=	a value indicating the confidence level to apply to the regression

SumOutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block for the summary table (allow at least seven columns)

Residuals	=	1 or 0; if 1, includes residuals in the output table

StdResiduals	=	1 or 0; if 1, includes standardized residuals in the output table

ResidualOutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block for the residuals table (allow at least four columns)

ProbOutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block for the probabilities table (allow at least two columns)

{REGRESS} performs multiple linear regression analysis. {REGRESS} is equivalent to the Advanced Regression analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{REQUEST}

Format

{REQUEST DDEChannel,DataToReceive,DestBlock}

DDEChannel	=	DDE channel number of the application to receive data from

DataToReceive	=	information to receive from the application

DestBlock	=	block to store the data received into

{REQUEST} gets information specified by DataToReceive from applications that support Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). This information is stored in DestBlock. DataToReceive is a string representing the location of the data to receive in the other application. In Quattro Pro, this could be a block such as A2..A7 or a property such as "(Application.Display)". If requesting a property, the property must be enclosed in parentheses. You must use {INITIATE} to open a channel of communication and obtain the value DDEChannel before using {REQUEST}.

If your conversation is not within a specific topic (in other words, you opened the channel using the command {INITIATE AppName,"System",DDEChannel}), you can use the following strings in DataToReceive, depending on the application:

Arguments for DataToReceive

String	Purpose

"SysItems"	A listing of all strings you can use with DataToReceive. You can use this command first to view other choices offered by AppName.

"Topics"	A listing of all topics open. For example, a list of open documents under Word for Windows.

"Status"	The current status of the application. For example, READY in Excel or EDIT in Quattro Pro when a cell is being edited.

"Formats"	A list of all Clipboard formats supported by the application or DDE link.

"Selection"	A list of all items currently selected in the application. For example, in Excel cells A3..A47 could be selected.

Examples

This macro gets the major and minor version numbers of GroupWise, which is already running.

dde_channel	0

get_vernumber	{INITIATE "GroupWise","Command",dde_channel}

{REQUEST dde_channel,"GetOfficeData(ID;MajorVersion!)",G1}

{REQUEST dde_channel,"GetOfficeData(ID;MinorVersion!)",G2}

{TERMINATE dde_channel}

This macro gets information from the fields Task and Completed in ObjectVision file TASKLIST.OVD and stores the data in the active notebook.

dde_channel	10

command	[@NEXT("TASKS")]

exec_result	0

vision_task	Print out third quarter report

task_complete	Yes

_get_vision_task	{INITIATE "VISION","TASKLIST.OVD",dde_channel}

{REQUEST dde_channel,"Task",vision_task}

{REQUEST dde_channel "Completed",task_complete}

{EXECUTE dde_channel,+command,exec_result}

See Also

{POKE}

About DDE Macro Commands


{RESIZE}

Format

{RESIZE x,y,NewWidth,NewHeight,<VertFlip?>,<HorizFlip?>}

x and y	=	xy coordinates of the new upper left corner, in pixels

NewWidth	=	the new width, in pixels, of the object or group

NewHeight	=	the new height, in pixels, of the object or group

VertFlip?	=	1 if the object or group is flipped vertically from its previous position

HorizFlip?	=	1 if the object or group is flipped horizontally from its previous position

{RESIZE} resizes all selected objects in the active window (dialog or graph window).

See Also

{FLOATSIZE}

{MOVETO}


{RESTART}

{RESTART} changes the current subroutine to the starting routine (or the main routine) by removing all preceding For loops and subroutine calls.

{RESTART} is typically used for error handling. If an application is already nested to near the maximum number of levels and a severe error occurs that requires the macro to end, {RESTART} ensures that additional subroutine calls can be made. If you use the {RESTART} command often, you may want to use {BRANCH} to run subroutines.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{RETURN}

{RETURN} ends the executing subroutine and returns control to the macro that called it. If the macro executing is not a subroutine, execution stops.

A {RETURN} command at the end of a subroutine is optional, since a macro automatically returns from a subroutine when it reaches a blank cell or a cell containing a value. {RETURN} is usually used with {IF} to return to the main macro if a certain condition is met.

See {Subroutine} for an example of using {RETURN}.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{RIGHT}
{RIGHT} and {R}

Format

{RIGHT <Number>} or {R <Number>)

Number	=	any positive integer (optional)

{RIGHT} and {R} are equivalent to the Right Arrow key. The optional argument Number moves the selector the corresponding number of columns to the right. You can also use cell references or block names as arguments.

Example

{RIGHT}{RIGHT} moves right two columns.

{R 6} moves right six columns.

{RIGHT D9} moves right the number of columns specified in cell D9.

{RIGHT count} moves right the number of columns specified in the first cell of the block named count.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ROWCOLSHOW}

Format

{ROWCOLSHOW Block,Show?,Row or Col,FirstPane?}

Block	=	block containing rows or columns to hide or show

Show?	=	1 to reveal rows or columns; 0 to hide rows or columns

Row or Col	=	1 to reveal or hide a row; 0 to reveal or hide a column

FirstPane?	=	1 to affect rows or columns in left or top window pane; 0 to affect them in the right or bottom window pane

{ROWCOLSHOW} lets you hide or reveal rows and columns (it is equivalent to the block property Reveal/Hide). Show? specifies whether to reveal (1) or hide (0). Row or Col specifies whether to affect rows (1) or columns (0). Block contains the rows or columns to affect. FirstPane? is used when the active window is split into panes (using Window|Panes). To affect the columns or rows in the left or top pane, set FirstPane? to 1; to affect rows or columns in the right or bottom pane, set FirstPane? to 0.

Examples

{ROWCOLSHOW A:A..B,1,0,1} reveals columns A and B on page A.

{ROWCOLSHOW A:1..7,0,1,1} hides rows 1 through 7 on page A.

{ROWCOLSHOW A:1..7,1,1,0} reveals rows 1 through 7 on page A. If the window is split, the rows are revealed in the right or bottom pane.

See Also

{COLUMNWIDTH}

{ROWHEIGHT}

Macros

Using Macros


{ROWHEIGHT}

Format

{ROWHEIGHT Block,FirstPane?,Set/Reset,Size}

Block	=	block containing rows to resize

FirstPane?	=	1 to resize rows in left or top window pane; 0 to resize rows in right or bottom window pane

Set/Reset	=	0 to set the row height; 1 to reset the row height

Size	=	new height (in twips) if setting size; not needed if resetting size

{ROWHEIGHT} provides two ways to change the height of a row or block of rows (it is equivalent to the block property Row Height). The rows to change are specified by Block. FirstPane? is used when the active window is split into panes (using Window|Panes). To resize the rows in the left or top pane, set FirstPane? to 1; to resize the rows in the right or bottom pane, set FirstPane? to 0.

Set/Reset specifies how to change the height. To set a row height, use this syntax: {ROWHEIGHT Block, FirstPane?, 0, Size}

Size is the new row height, in twips. The maximum height is ten inches (14,400 twips).

To reset a row to the default height (determined by font sizes in the row), use this syntax: {ROWHEIGHT Block, FirstPane?, 1}

Examples

{ROWHEIGHT A:1..A:2,1,0,1440} sets the height of rows 1 and 2 (on page A) to one inch (1,440 twips).

{ROWHEIGHT A:1..A:2,0,0,2160} sets the height of rows 1 and 2 (on page A) to one and a half inches (2,160 twips). If the window is split, the top or left pane is affected.

{ROWHEIGHT A:5,1,1} resets the height of row 5 (on page A) to the default height.

See Also

{COLUMNWIDTH}

{ROWCOLSHOW}

Macros

Using Macros


{SAMPLE}

Format

{SAMPLE InBlock,OutBlock,Type,Rate}

InBlock	=	one or more numeric or block values representing the input block

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Type	=	"P" to specify periodic sample; "R" to specify random sampling

Rate	=	a value indicating a sampling rate; if Type = "P", Rate indicates the periodic interval used for sampling; if Type = "R", Rate indicates the number of samples

{SAMPLE} returns a periodic or random sample from values in InBlock. {SAMPLE} is equivalent to the Sampling analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{SCROLLOFF} and {SCROLLON}

{SCROLLOFF} and {SCROLLON} are equivalent to Scroll Lock off and Scroll Lock on, respectively.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{SELECTBLOCK}

Format

{SELECTBLOCK Block}

Block	=	coordinates of the block(s) to select

{SELECTBLOCK} lets you select a contiguous or noncontiguous block within the active notebook. Parts of a noncontiguous block must be enclosed in parentheses.

Examples

{SELECTBLOCK A4..B23} selects the block A4..B23 in the active notebook window.

{SELECTBLOCK (A:A1..A:B12,B:B13..B:C34)} selects the noncontiguous block A:A1..A:B12, B:B13..B:C34.

See Also

{SELECTFLOAT}

{SELECTOBJECT}


{SELECTFLOAT}

Format

{SELECTFLOAT ObjectID1<,ObjectID2,...>}

ObjectIDx	=	name of the notebook object(s) to select

With {SELECTFLOAT} you can select floating objects in the active notebook window using their names. (To find the name of an object, view it and study its Object Name property.) Use {SELECTOBJECT} to select objects in a graph or dialog window.

Example

{SELECTFLOAT "Button1"} selects the macro button in the the active notebook window with the object name Button1.

See Also

{FLOATMOVE}

{FLOATSIZE}

{SELECTBLOCK}

About Object Macro Commands


{SELECTOBJECT}

Format

{SELECTOBJECT ObjectID1<,ObjectID2,...>}

ObjectIDx	=	identification number or name of the object(s) to select

With {SELECTOBJECT} you can select objects in the active window using their ID numbers or names. (To find the ID number of an object, view it and study its Object ID property. Its name is stored in its Name property.) Since {SELECTOBJECT} is context-sensitive, you can select controls in a dialog window, drawings in a graph window, or icons in the Objects page.

Example

{SELECTOBJECT 2,5,7} selects the objects in the active window with the IDs 2, 5, and 7.

See Also

About Object Macro Commands

Macros

Using Macros


{SETGRAPHATTR}

Format

{SETGRAPHATTR FillColor,BkgColor,FillStyle,BorderColor,BoxType}

FillColor	=	new fill color of the selected object(s)

BkgColor	=	new background color of the selected object(s)

FillStyle	=	new fill style of the selected object(s)

BorderColor	=	new border color of the selected object(s)

BoxType	=	new border style of the selected object(s)

{SETGRAPHATTR} lets you quickly set the properties of all selected objects in the active graph window. If one of the arguments specified in the {SETGRAPHATTR} command is not appropriate for an object, that argument is ignored.

Each color (FillColor, BkgColor, and BorderColor) is in quotes, and specified in RGB format. For FillStyle, use any of the strings for that option in the appropriate Object Inspector.

BoxType specifies the new border style for the object; use any Border Style property string included in a graph Object Inspector.

See Also

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETPROPERTY}

{SPEEDFORMAT}

Macros

Using Macros


{SETMENUBAR}

Format

{SETMENUBAR <SystemDefinition>}

SystemDefinition	=	block containing a menu system definition

{SETMENUBAR} lets you specify which menu system displays on the menu bar. SystemDefinition is a block containing the new menu system definition. See Building Menus for a discussion of menu system definitions.

You can use {SETMENUBAR} without an argument to restore the default Quattro Pro menu system.

Examples

{SETMENUBAR "A3..C324"} makes the system defined in A3..C324 the active menu system.

See Also

{ADDMENU}

{ADDMENUITEM}


{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

Format

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY Object.Property,Value}

Object	=	object to alter property of

Property	=	property to alter

Value	=	new property setting (or another instance of Object.Property to copy the new setting from)

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY} can change the property settings of many Quattro Pro objects. Selectable objects such as blocks and annotations can also be changed using {SETPROPERTY}. {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} can affect:

Dialog controls. Use this syntax to specify a control to manipulate in a dialog window: [Notebook]DialogName:ObjectID.Property. [Notebook] is optional. For example, the following macro sets the Fill Color property of the control Rectangle1 in the dialog ColorPick to red:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "ColorPick:Rectangle1.Fill_Color", "255,0,0"}

Graph objects. Use the same syntax as for dialog controls, but substitute the name of the graph in place of DialogName. For example, the following macro changes the size of a rectangle named ColorPick in the graph 1QTR92:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "1QTR92:ColorPick.Dimension", "0,0,25,25"}

Menu items. Use the syntax MenuPath.Property. See the description of {ADDMENU} for the syntax of MenuPath; Changing Command Properties lists the properties available for a menu item.

For example, the following macro disables File|Save in the active menu system:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Disabled", "Yes"}

Value is the new setting for the property. You can also substitute another instance of Object.Property for this argument to copy property settings between objects. For example, this macro copies the text color of the active block to the text color of A23:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "A23.Text_Color","Active_Block.Text_Color"}

See Property Reference for a list of properties you can use.

See Also

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{GETPROPERTY}

About Object Macro Commands


{SETPOS}

Format

{SETPOS FilePosition}

FilePosition	=	the number of bytes into a file to set the file pointer to

{SETPOS} moves the file pointer of a file previously opened using {OPEN} to the value FilePosition. (See {GETPOS} for a discussion of the file pointer.) FilePosition refers to the offset, in number of bytes, where you want to position the file pointer. Therefore, the first position in the file is numbered 0, not 1.

If no file is open when {SETPOS} is encountered (or some other problem occurs), macro execution begins with the next command in the same cell as {SETPOS}. If {SETPOS} succeeds, the rest of that cell's commands are ignored, and execution continues in the next row of the macro.

For an example using {SETPOS}, see {READ}.

See Also

{ONERROR}


{SETPROPERTY}

Format

{SETPROPERTY Property,Setting}

Property	=	string representing the property to change

Setting	=	string representing the setting to apply to the property

{SETPROPERTY} alters the properties of the active object (use {SELECTBLOCK}, {SELECTFLOAT}, or {SELECTOBJECT} to select objects).

To find Property, view the object and use the name of the control that sets the property. If the control name is more than one word, connect the words with underscores (_). See Property Reference for a list of properties you can use.

Examples

{SETPROPERTY "Text_Color", "3"} sets the selected block's Text Color property to the fourth color on the notebook palette (the first color is 0).

The following macro selects the macro button named PushButton1 and renames it Button1.

name_float	{SELECTFLOAT "PushButton1"}

{SETPROPERTY "Object_Name","Button1"}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{SHIFT}

Format

{SHIFT+Key <Number>}

Key	=	keyboard macro command (PGUP, DOWN, and so on)

Number	=	number of times to repeat the operation (optional)

{SHIFT} emulates holding down the Shift key while pressing a keystroke. It is handy for selecting blocks, portions of a text box, or parts of a formula being edited.

You can combine {ALT}, {CTRL}, and {SHIFT}. For example, {CTRL+SHIFT+S} is equivalent to pressing Ctrl+Shift+S, which displays a list of styles to apply to the selected block.

Examples

{SHIFT+DOWN 5} emulates pressing the Shift key while moving down five cells.

{EDIT}{END}{SHIFT+LEFT 3} edits the active cell, and selects the last three characters of the cell contents.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{SPEEDFILL}

{SPEEDFILL} is equivalent to the SpeedFill button [image] on the Toolbar. It fills the selected block with sequential data, based on entries in the upper-left portion of the block.

To create or modify a series used with SpeedFill, use {SeriesManager.Option}.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{SPEEDFORMAT}

Format

{SPEEDFORMAT FmtName, NumFmt?(0|1), Font?(0|1), Shading?(0|1), TextColor?(0|1), Align?(0|1), LineDraw?(0|1), AutoWidth?(0|1), ColHead?(0|1), ColTotal?(0|1), RowHead?(0|1), RowTotal?(0|1), <SubTotals?(0|1)>}

FmtName	=	name of the format to apply

NumFmt?	=	1 to apply the numeric format; 0 otherwise

Font?	=	1 to apply the font; 0 otherwise

Shading?	=	1 to apply the shading; 0 otherwise

TextColor?	=	1 to apply the text color; 0 otherwise

Align?	=	1 to apply the alignment; 0 otherwise

LineDraw?	=	1 to apply the line drawing; 0 otherwise

AutoWidth?	=	1 to automatically size the columns; 0 otherwise

ColHead	=	1 to apply the column heading format; 0 otherwise

ColTotal?	=	1 to apply the column total format; 0 otherwise

RowHead?	=	1 to apply the row heading format; 0 otherwise

RowTotal?	=	1 to apply the row total format; 0 otherwise

SubTotals?	=	1 to apply the subtotal format; 0 otherwise

{SPEEDFORMAT} applies the format FmtName to the selected block; it is equivalent to the SpeedFormat button [image] on the Toolbar. The arguments NumFmt? through SubTotals? each specify a part of the format to apply; use 1 to apply the part or 0 to omit the part.

Note:	To add or remove formats, use {SPEEDFORMAT.Option}.

See Also

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETPROPERTY}

Macros

Using Macros


{SPEEDSUM}

Format

{SPEEDSUM Block}

Block	=	coordinates of the block to sum, including blank cells for results

{SPEEDSUM} is equivalent to selecting a block and choosing the SpeedSum button [image] from the Toolbar. Block includes rows and/or columns to sum, plus adjacent empty cells to hold the results; the default Block is the current selection.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{STEP}

{STEP} is equivalent to the Debug key, Shift+F2.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{STEPOFF}

{STEPOFF} exits Debug mode, which runs the macro in slow-motion for debugging. The macro then runs at normal speed.

See {STEPON} for more information.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{STEPON}

{STEPON} activates Debug mode, which runs macros one step at a time for debugging. When Quattro Pro encounters a {STEPON} command, it pauses and waits for the user to press any key or click the mouse before it runs the next macro command and pauses again. Debug mode continues until {STEPOFF} is encountered or the macro ends.

{STEPON} is like using the Debug key (Shift+F2) to enter Debug mode, but you can embed it within a macro. The Debug key must be used before a macro begins executing.

Example

This example uses {STEPON} and {STEPOFF} to debug the last routine of a macro. Notice that the empty pairs of braces, placed at the beginning and end of the routine, make it easy to add {STEPON} and {STEPOFF} commands when there is a problem, because you can delete them when you want to debug, and insert them when you do not.

_clean_up	{; Save notebook to disk and say goodbye}

{ }{STEPON}

{FileSave}

{BRANCH _quit_msg}

_quit_msg	{ }{STEPOFF}

{QUIT}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{Subroutine}

Format

{Subroutine <ArgumentList>}

Subroutine	=	name of the subroutine being called (which can be a block name or a cell address)

ArgumentList	=	list of one or more arguments to be passed to the specified subroutine (optional)

{Subroutine} calls the subroutine of the specified name, passing along any arguments given in ArgumentList. (Those arguments are then defined within the subroutine using the {DEFINE} command.)

Any macro can be a subroutine. The macro commands in the subroutine run until {RETURN}, a blank cell, or a value is encountered. Then Quattro Pro returns control to the calling routine, continuing execution with the macro command in the next cell. If the subroutine ends with {QUIT}, both the subroutine and the calling macro(s) end.

Example

The following example invokes a subroutine that forces the user to verify printing twice before it begins.

_print	{GETLABEL "Do you want to print this (Y/N)?",ans_cell}

{IF @UPPER(ans_cell)="Y"}{_chk_twice}

{HOME}

_chk_twice	{; Double-check the print request}

{GETLABEL "Are you certain (Y/N)?",ans_cell}

{IF @UPPER(ans_cell)="N"} {RETURN}

{GETLABEL "Ready to print now (Y/N)?",ans_cell}

{IF @UPPER(ans_cell)="Y"}{Print.DoPrint}

{RETURN}

ans_cell	Y

See Also

{BRANCH}

{DISPATCH}


{TAB}

Format

{TAB <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer or the address of a cell containing a positive integer (optional)

{TAB}, like {BIGRIGHT}, is equivalent to the Tab key, which moves one cell to the right.

Note:	When the Compatible Keys option of the application General property is checked, {TAB} selects the leftmost cell of the screen that is to the right of the current one.

The optional argument Number specifies how many times to repeat the operation; for example, {TAB 2} is equivalent to pressing Tab twice.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{TABLE}

{TABLE} is equivalent to the Table key, F8, which repeats the last Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If operation.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{TERMINATE}

Format

{TERMINATE DDEChannel}

DDEChannel	=	channel number of the DDE conversation to terminate

{TERMINATE} closes down a DDE conversation opened with {INITIATE}.

For an example using {TERMINATE}, see {EXECUTE}.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{TTESTM}

Format

{TTESTM InBlock1,InBlock2,OutBlock,<Labels>,<Alpha>,<Difference>}

InBlock1	=	one or more numeric block values representing the first input block

InBlock2	=	one or more numeric block values representing the second input block

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

Alpha	=	significance level of the test; the default is 0.05

Difference	=	value indicating the hypothetical difference in the means between InBlock1 and InBlock2; the default is 0

{TTESTM} performs a Student's t-Test using two indepependent (rather than paired) samples with equal variances. {TTESTM} is equivalent to the t-Test analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{UNDO}

{UNDO} "takes back" the last command given and restores the previous state for most commands.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{UP}
{UP} and {U}

Format

{UP <Number>} or {U <Number>}

Number	=	any positive integer (optional)

{UP} and {U} are equivalent to the Up Arrow key. The optional argument Number moves the selector up the corresponding number of rows. You can use cell references or block names as arguments.

Example

{UP}{UP}{UP}	moves the selector up three rows.

{UP 4}	moves the selector up four rows.

{UP C13}	moves the selector up the number of rows specified in cell C13.

{UP temp}	moves the selector up the number of rows specified in the first cell of the block named temp.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{VLINE}

Format

{VLINE Distance}

Distance	=	number of rows to scroll the active notebook vertically

{VLINE} scrolls the active notebook vertically by Distance rows. If the number is positive, it scrolls down; if negative, it scrolls up. {VLINE} does not move the selector; only the view of the notebook is altered. Use {DOWN} or {UP} to move the selector vertically.

Examples

{VLINE 11} scrolls the display 11 rows down.

{VLINE -4} scrolls the display 4 columns up.

See Also

{HLINE}

{HPAGE}

{VPAGE}

Macros

Using Macros


{VPAGE}

Format

{VPAGE Distance}

Distance	=	number of screens to scroll the active notebook vertically

{VPAGE} scrolls the active notebook vertically by Distance screens. If the number is positive, it scrolls down; if negative, it scrolls up. {VPAGE} does not move the selector; only the view of the notebook is altered. Use the commands {PGDN} or {PGUP} to move the selector vertically.

See Also

{HLINE}

{HPAGE}

{VLINE}

Macros

Using Macros


{WAIT}

Format

{WAIT DateTimeNumber}

DateTimeNumber	=	the date and time at which macro execution can resume

{WAIT} pauses macro execution until the time corresponding to DateTimeNumber arrives. DateTimeNumber is a standard date/time serial number (both date and time portions must be included). If the current date is already later than the date specified in DateTimeNumber, macro execution continues immediately.

While execution is suspended, the macro is inactive, a WAIT indicator displays on the status line, and normal notebook operation can be restored only by pressing Ctrl+Break.

Examples

The following macro beeps, displays a "Go home" message, and suspends all execution until 8:00 a.m. the next day:

{BEEP 3}

{PUTCELL "Time to go home!"}

{DOWN}

{WAIT @TODAY+1+@TIMEVALUE("8:00 AM")}

This macro waits for one day:

{WAIT @NOW+1}

This macro uses {WAIT} to alert the user by sounding five short beeps, spaced two seconds apart:

\H	{FOR counter,1,5,1,_loop_here}

_loop_here	{BEEP 3}

{WAIT @NOW+@TIME(0,0,2)}

counter 6

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{WINDOW}

Format

{WINDOW<Number>}

Number	=	number of an open notebook window (1-9)

{WINDOW} switches to the specified open notebook window (1-9). This command is for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS; use {ACTIVATE} to activate windows when developing macros for Quattro Pro for Windows.

The argument Number is optional; {WINDOW} without an argument is equivalent to the Pane key, F6.

See Also

{ACTIVATE}

{CHOOSE}


{WINDOWSOFF}

{WINDOWSOFF} disables normal screen updating during macro execution when Quattro Pro's Macro Suppress-Redraw property is set to None. It can significantly speed up execution for most macros because it saves Quattro Pro the time normally needed to redraw the screen each time a cell changes. Quattro Pro cancels it once the macro stops executing, so the user is not "locked out" of the screen. To cancel its effect within the same macro, use {WINDOWSON}.

Use {WINDOWSOFF} with {PANELOFF} to completely disable normal screen updating.

Caution: After a {WINDOWSOFF} command, avoid letting users point to a block in response to an Edit command. The selector may be in a different cell than the "frozen" display indicates. If users must point to a block, precede it with a {WINDOWSON} command.

Example

The following macro uses {WINDOWSOFF} and {WINDOWSON} to turn off screen updating while Quattro Pro sorts a list of vendors with the block name vendor_name, thereby speeding up the sort operation.

sort_blk	vendor_name

key_nm	vendor_name

\W	{QGOTO}sort_message~

{WINDOWSOFF}

{_sort vendor_name}

{WINDOWSON}

_sort	{DEFINE sort_blk}

{Sort.Block @@(sort_blk)}

{BlockCopy sort_blk,key_nm}

{Sort.Key_1 @@(key_nm)}

{Sort.Order_1 "Ascending"}

{Sort.Go}

sort_message	SORT IS IN PROGRESS

vendor_name	General Cement Co.

Alveoli Mfg., Inc.

Sandab Development

Consolidated Dust

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{WINDOWSON}

{WINDOWSON} reenables normal screen updating during macro execution, canceling the effects of a previous {WINDOWSOFF}. However, the screen will not be updated until {CALC} is encountered or the macro ends. If {WINDOWSON} is called when screen updating is already in effect, the command is ignored.

See {WINDOWSOFF} for an example using {WINDOWSON}.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{WRITE}

Format

{WRITE String<,String2,String3,...>}

String	=	string of characters to be written into the open file

{WRITE} copies String to a file opened with the {OPEN} command, starting at the location of the file pointer. The file pointer is advanced to the position following the last character written, and the file's size increases if necessary. See {GETPOS} for a discussion of the file pointer.

{WRITE} does not place the carriage return and linefeed characters at the ends of lines. To include these characters, use {WRITELN}.

String can be a quoted string or text formula. If using more than one String, separate them with commas. For example, to write the label Dear Ms. followed by the contents of B6 into the file, use the following:

{WRITE "Dear Ms. ",+B6}

You can use an unlimited number of String arguments with {WRITE}.

If no file is open, or if there is insufficient room on the disk to increase the file's size, {WRITE} fails. Macro execution then continues with the first command after {WRITE} (in the same cell). If {WRITE} is successful, the rest of that cell's commands are ignored, and execution continues on the next row below.

If you try to reference a cell that does not contain a label, an error message displays.

Caution: After you finish accessing a file with {WRITE}, it must be closed with {CLOSE}. Otherwise, the file could become corrupted if the computer is turned off or otherwise interrupted.

Example

The following example creates a text file with fixed-length fields that will serve as a phone list database. After the macro runs, the file will look like this:

Golden, David 415-555-7774;Hack, Edmund  201-555-3511;Hall, Sue Ann 617-555-5678

See the description of {READ} to see how to read a file like this.

\K	{OPEN "A:PHONEDIR.PRN",W}

{WRITE "Golden, David "}

{WRITE "415-555-7774;"}

{WRITE "Hack, Edmund  "}

{WRITE "201-555-3511;"}

{WRITE "Hall, Sue Ann "}

{WRITE "617-555-5678"}

{CLOSE}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{WRITELN}

Format

{WRITELN String<,String2,String3,...>}

String	=	string of characters to be written into the open file as a single line

{WRITELN} copies String(s) to a file opened with {OPEN}, starting at the location of the file pointer, and ends the string(s) with the carriage-return and linefeed characters. The file pointer advances to the position following the last character written, and the file's size increases if necessary. (See {GETPOS} for a discussion of the file pointer.)

To enter a blank line in the file, use {WRITELN ""}. To enter characters without carriage-return/linefeed characters, use {WRITE}.

String can be a quoted string or a text formula. If using more than one String, separate them with commas. For example, to write the label Dear Ms. followed by the contents of B6 into the file you would use

{WRITELN "Dear Ms. ",+B6}

A carriage return and linefeed character are placed at the end of all strings combined, not after each. You can use an unlimited number of String arguments with {WRITELN}.

If no file is open, or if there is insufficient room on the disk to increase file's size, {WRITELN} fails. Macro execution then continues with the first command after {WRITELN} in the same cell. If {WRITELN} succeeds, the rest of that cell's commands are ignored, and execution continues on the next row below.

Caution: After you finish accessing a file with {WRITELN}, you must close the file with {CLOSE}. Otherwise, the file could become corrupted if the computer is turned off or otherwise interrupted.

Example

The following example shows how {WRITELN} is used to write a line of text to the file TEST.TXT. This line is terminated by the CR (carriage-return) and LF (linefeed) characters.

\Z	{OPEN "A:TEST.TXT",W}

{WRITELN "This is a short line."}

{CLOSE}

See Also

{WRITE}


{ZOOM}

{ZOOM} maximizes and restores the active window.

This command is for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS; use {WindowMaximize} and {WindowRestore} when developing macros for Quattro Pro for Windows.

Note:	To change the zoom factor for a notebook or page, use {Notebook.Zoom_Factor} or {Page.Zoom_Factor},, respectively.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{ZTESTM}

Format

{ZTESTM InBlock1, InBlock2, OutBlock, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>, <Difference>, <Variance1>, <Variance2>}

InBlock1	=	one or more numeric block values representing the first input block

InBlock2	=	one or more numeric block values representing the second input block

OutBlock	=	upper left cell of the output block

Labels	=	1 if labels are located in the first column or row of the input block; 0 if the input block does not contain labels; the default is 0

Alpha	=	significance level of the test; the default is 0.05

Difference	=	a value indicating the hypothetical difference in the means between InBlock1 and InBlock2; the default is 0

Variance1	=	a value indicating the variance of data set one; the default is 0

Variance2	=	a value indicating the variance of data set two; the default is 0

{ZTESTM} performs a two-sample z-Test for means, assuming known variances for each sample. {ZTESTM} is equivalent to the z-Test analysis tool.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


{ADDSERIES}

Format

{ADDSERIES Block, Name}

Block	=	a block containing a data series

Name	=	name of the graph to which you want to add a series

{ADDSERIES} adds a data series to a floating graph. Use {ADDSERIES} as an equivalent to dragging a block onto a floating graph to add a series.

Examples

The following macro adds the series contained in the block A:E3..E13 to the floating graph named BUDGET:

{ADDSERIES A:E3..E13, BUDGET}

See Also

{FLOATCREATE}

{Series.Option}

Macros

Using Macros


{AnalysisExpert}

{AnalysisExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|Analysis Tools. The macro has no arguments. {AnalysisExpert} displays the first Analysis Tools Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{ASSIGN}

Format

{ASSIGN VarExpr, ValExpr}

VarExpr	=	a variable expression

ValExpr	=	a value expression

The {ASSIGN} macro command is equivalent to the assignment statement variable=value in a programming language.

Examples

{ASSIGN calc, CreateObject("DispCalc.Application")} creates an object of the DispCalc application and assigns it to a named variable calc.

{ASSIGN calc.accum, 0} clears the accumulated value of DispCalc.

{ASSIGN calc.accum, @SUM(A1..A10)} assigns the sum of A1..A10 to the accumulated value of DispCalc.

For more details on using {ASSIGN} and other OLE automation macro commands, Using OLE Automation Features.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{BudgetExpert}

{BudgetExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|Budget. The macro has no arguments. {BudgetExpert} displays the first Budget Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{ChartExpert}

{ChartExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|Graph. The macro has no arguments. {ChartExpert} displays the first Graph Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{ComposeFormula}

{Compose Formula} is the command equivalent for Tools|Formula Composer. The macro has no arguments. {ComposeFormula} displays the Formula Composer dialog box.

See Also

Macros

Tools|Formula Composer

Using Macros


{ConsolidateExpert}

{ConsolidateExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|Consolidate. The macro has no arguments. {ConsolidateExpert} displays the first Consolidate Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{DbAlias}

Format

{DbAlias WORK | PRIV, Path}

WORK | PRIV	=	WORK to specify a Working directory; PRIV to specify a Private directory

Path	=	path for the Working directory or the Private directory

{DbAlias} is the command equivalent for Tools|Database Tools|Aliases, which lets you specify a private directory to hold temporary files, or a working directory where external data tables are most likely to be found.

See Also

Macros

Tools|Database Tools|Aliases

Using Macros


{DELVAR}

Format

{DELVAR VarName1<,VarName2,...>}

VarName	=	a named variable

{DELVAR} deletes unused named variables. Named variables are used to control OLE objects. OLE objects are released from control at the end of macro execution, but named variables remain until you exit Quattro Pro. You can delete the unused named variables to free an object assigned to that name, and then control the object using another macro.

Examples

{DELVAR} deletes all named variables

{DELVAR calc} deletes a named variable calc

{DELVAR calc 0, calc 1, calc 3} deletes the named variables calc 0, calc 1, and calc 3.

For more details on using {DELVAR} and other OLE automation macro commands, Using OLE Automation Features.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{DUPLICATE}

Format

{DUPLICATE xoffset, yoffset}

xoffset	=	offset from the left edge of UpperCell to the left edge of the floating object

yoffset	=	offset from the top edge of UpperCell to the top edge of the floating object

{DUPLICATE} copies selected graph annotations or dialog box controls. If no object is selected, {DUPLICATE} does nothing.

xoffset and yoffset are measured in relative coordinates for objects in a graph window, and in pixels for dialog box objects.

Examples

The following macro activates a floating graph for editing, creates a rectangle in the graph, makes a copy of the rectangle, then deactivates editing.

{GraphEdit Graph1, 1}

{CreateObject Rect,147,176,416,427}

{Duplicate 269,338}

{GraphDeactivate}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{EXECAUTO}

Format

{EXECAUTO AutoExpr1<,AutoExpr2>}

AutoExpr1,2...	=	one or more automation expressions

{EXECAUTO} executes one or more methods in another application, but drops any return values.

Examples

{EXECAUTO calc.Display()} asks DispCalc to display its current input value.

{EXECAUTO calc.Button(A1), calc.Display()} passes the value in A1 as an input to DispCalc and asks DispCalc to diplay it.

For more details on using {EXECAUTO} and other OLE automation macro commands, Using OLE Automation Features.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{FileSend}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to

{FileSend <Filename>}	File|Send

{FileSend.MAPI <Filename>}	File|Send|MS Mail

{FileSend.GroupWise <Filename>}	File|GroupWise|Send

{FileSend.VIM <Filename>}	File|Send|Notes/cc:Mail

{FileSend} is the command equivalent for File|Send, which lets you send notebook pages via one of your mail systems.

Example

{FileSend.GroupWise MYSTATUS.WB2} sends the notebook MYSTATUS.WB2 to another user via GroupWise.

See Also

File|Send

Macros

Using Macros


{FLOATCOPY}

Format

{FLOATCOPY UpperCell, xoffset, yoffset}

UpperCell	=	cell containing the new upper left corner of the floating object

xoffset	=	offset in twips from the left edge of UpperCell to the left edge of the floating object

yoffset	=	offset in twips from the top edge of UpperCell to the top edge of the floating object

{FLOATCOPY} lets you copy a floating object in the active notebook window. The item to copy is selected using {SELECTFLOAT}. The new position in {FLOATCOPY} is specified as a positive offset from a cell in the notebook.

To copy a floating graph to another notebook, specify a notebook as well as a cell for UpperCell.

Examples

The following macro selects the floating graph Inserted1 and copies it to [SALES]A:C10.

{SELECTFLOAT Inserted1}

{FLOATCOPY [SALES]A:C10,0,0}

See Also

{FLOATCREATE}

{FLOATMOVE}

{FLOATSIZE}

{MOVETO}

Macros

Using Macros


{FLOATTEXT}

Format

{FLOATTEXT String}

String	=	string of characters used to replace text in the text box

{FLOATTEXT} replaces the text in the selected text box with the specified string. The text box can be on a notebook page or in a graph window.

Examples

The following macro selects a floating text box named Text1 and replaces the text in it with "Quarterly Sales Report".

{SELECTFLOAT Text1}

{FLOATTEXT "Quarterly Sales Report"}

See Also

{FLOATCREATE}

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphDeactivate}

{GraphDeactivate} deactivates a floating graph that has been activated for editing.

Examples

The following macro activates a floating graph for editing, creates a rectangle in the graph, makes a copy of the rectangle, then deactivates editing.

{GraphEdit Graph1, 1}

{CreateObject Rect,147,176,416,427}

{Duplicate 269,338}

{GraphDeactivate}

See Also

{GraphEdit}

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphGallery}

Format

{GraphGallery GraphStyle, ColorScheme}

GraphStyle	=	the style of graph; see {GraphSettings.Type} for a list of graph types

ColorScheme	=	the color scheme used for the graph

{GraphGallery} is the command equivalent for Graphics|Graph Gallery, which applies a graph style and color scheme to selected graphs.

Available choices for ColorScheme are:

No change	Pastels

Default	Fire and Ice

Grayscale	Bright and Bold

Icy Blues	Color Washes

Deep Reds	Black and White Patterns

Autumn Leaves	Color Patterns

Tangerine	Tiled Men

Examples

The following macro selects a 3-D Bar graph style and a "Tangerine" color scheme:

{GraphGallery "3dbar","Tangerine"}

See Also

Graphics|Graph Gallery

Macros

Using Macros


{IFAUTOOBJ}

Format

{IFAUTOOBJ ObjectExpression}

ObjectExpression	=	object expression resulting from an OLE automation object

{IFAUTOOBJ} is like {IF}, but instead evaulating a logical condition it expects the object expression resulting from an OLE automation object. If ObjectExpression is true, {IFAUTOOBJ} runs the macro in the same cell; otherwise, it skips to the next cell.

Examples

{ASSIGN OLE2App, GetObject("DispCalc.Application")}

{IFAUTOOBJ OLE2App}{BRANCH A10}

{ASSIGN OLE2App, CreateObject("DispCalc.Application")}

For more details on using {IFAUTOOBJ} and other OLE automation macro commands, Using OLE Automation Features.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{MainToolbar.Replace}

Format

{MainToolbar.Replace Toolbar}

Toolbar	=	name of the standard Quattro Pro Toolbar to use; available Toolbar names are Main, Block, Format, Draw, Modeling, Align, Controls, Graph, Palette, Objects, and Slide (not all Toolbars are available in every Quattro Pro window; see Toolbars for a list of which Toolbars are available in each window)

{MainToolbar.Replace} replaces the standard Quattro Pro Toolbar with one of the other available toolbars. Toolbar must be valid for the current context; for example, the Objects Toolbar is available only on the Objects page.

To show or hide the standard Toolbar, use {Application.Display.Show_Toolbar Yes|No}

To insert, append, remove, or replace one custom Toolbar at a time, use {Toolbar.Option}.

To load multiple custom Toolbars at once, replacing any that were loaded, use {Application.SpeedBar}.

Examples

The following macro replaces the current Toolbar in the notebook window with the Draw Toolbar.

{MainToolbar.Replace Draw}

See Also

{Application.Property}

{Toolbar.Option}

Macros

Toolbars

Using Macros


{Navigate.Option}

Command	Description
{Navigate.SelectTable}	Expands selection to the table boundaries
{Navigate.Zoom2Fit}	Zooms so that a table fits into the visible part of the screen
{Navigate.GoTo Up | Left | Right | Down | TopLeft | TopRight | BottomLeft | BottomRight | <Extend?(0|1)>}	Go to the sides or corners of a table
{Navigate.Jump Up | Left | Right | Down}	Jump to the next table in a given direction, or jump to the current table boundary if in the middle of a table.
{Navigate.Option} is equivalent to the navigation tools available on the Modeling Toolbar. {Navigate.SelectTable} is equivalent to the SpeedSelect button [image] on the Modeling Toolbar, which expands selection from a cell or block within a table to the entire table. {Navigate.Zoom2Fit} is equivalent to the Zoom To Fit button [image]. {Navigate.GoTo} performs the same actions as the Top Left Of Table [image], Top Right Of Table [image], Bottom Left Of Table [image], and Bottom Right Of Table [image] buttons. {Navigate.Jump} jumps to the next table or to the selected boundary of the current table.

Examples

The following macro selects cell C6 in the table below, then selects the entire table that C6 belongs to, and zooms to fit the table on the page.

{SelectBlock A:C6}

{Navigate.SelectTable}

{Navigate.Zoom2Fit}

A	B	C	D

1	Sales	Expenses	Profits

2	Jan	1580	700	880

3	Feb	2474	545	1929

4	Mar	2570	656	1914

5	Apr	2876	454	2422

6	May	3223	489	2734

7	Jun	2987	470	2517

8	Jul	3178	500	2678

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{PerformanceExpert}

{PerformanceExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|Performance. The macro has no arguments. {PerformanceExpert} displays the first Performance Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{PUTBLOCK2}

Format

{PUTBLOCK2 Data,<Block>}

Data	=	entry to type

Block	=	block to type Data in (optional)

{PUTBLOCK2} enters the same value, label, or formula in multiple cells like {PUTBLOCK} but parses date formats automatically and requires a formula prefix before numeric values. Data is a string or value to place in Block. If Block is not specified, the currently selected block is used. Block can be noncontiguous; if so, be sure to enclose it in parentheses. If Data is a formula containing relative addresses, those addresses are adjusted automatically.

Examples

{PUTBLOCK2 "Quarter 1",A..D:A1} enters the label Quarter 1 in cells A:A1 through D:A1.

{PUTBLOCK2 +1990,A..D:B1} enters the value 1990 in cells A:B1 through D:B1.

{PUTBLOCK2 "+A1",C3..C12) enters the formula +A1 in C3, +A2 in C4, and so on.

{PUTBLOCK2 "11/01/94", (A:D3,B:D3,C:D3,D:D3)} enters the date 11/01/94 in cell D3 of pages A through D.

See Also

{LET}

{PUT}

{PUTBLOCK}

{PUTCELL}

{PUTCELL2}


{PUTCELL2}

Format

{PUTCELL2 Data}

Data	=	string to type into the active cell

{PUTCELL2} stores information in the active cell like {PUTCELL} but parses date formats automatically and requires a formula prefix before numeric values.

Examples

{PUTCELL2 "Peggy Danderhoff"} stores Peggy Danderhoff as a label in the active cell.

{PUTCELL2 +45067} stores the number 45067 as a value in the active cell.

{PUTCELL2 "@SUM(A1..A27)"} stores the formula @SUM(A1..A27) in the active cell.

{PUTCELL2 "11/01/94"} stores the date 11/01/94 in the active cell

See Also

{GETLABEL}

{GETNUMBER}

{LET}

{PUT}

{PUTBLOCK}

{PUTBLOCK2}

{PUTCELL}


{ScenarioExpert}

{ScenarioExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|Scenario. The macro has no arguments. {ScenarioExpert} displays the first Scenario Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{SeriesManager}
{SeriesManager.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to
{SeriesManager.Define Name, Formula, FormulaText, SeedText}	Notebook|Define Series|Create (Formula series)
{SeriesManager.Define Name, List, Repeating?(0|1), Value1 <,Value2, Value3,...>}	Notebook|Define Series|Create (List series)
{SeriesManager.Go Name, Rows | Columns | Tabs, Block}	Equivalent to using the SpeedFill button on the Main Toolbar
{SeriesManager.Remove Name}	Notebook|Define Series|Delete
{SeriesManager.Rename OldName, NewName}	Notebook|Define Series|Rename
{SeriesManager.Option} is the command equivalent for Notebook|Define Series. Use {SeriesManager.Define Name, Formula,...} to create a formula series and {SeriesManager.Define Name, List,...} to create a list series.

Examples

The following macro creates a SpeedFill series named "First of Month" that consists of the first day of each month in 1995, then fills a column starting at A:A2 with the dates.

{SeriesManager.Define "First of Month", List, No, "01/01/95", "02/01/95", "03/01/95", "04/01/95", "05/01/85", "06/01/95", "07/01/95", "08/01/95", "09/01/95", "10/01/05", "11/01/95", "12/01/95"}

{SpeedFill}

{SeriesManager.Go "First of Month",Columns, A:A2}

See Also

{SPEEDFILL}

Macros

Notebook|Define Series

Using Macros


{SETLCID}

Format

{SETLCID <LocaleID>}

LocaleID	=	value for a locale ID

{SETLCID} sets the locale ID to the default locale ID or to one specified by LocaleID. The locale ID is a fixed number which specifies language, separator character, and a variety of other international settings; use {SETLCID} to ensure that the automation controller is using the default ID or the ID of a specific target object.

For more details on using {SETLCID} and other OLE automation macro commands, Using OLE Automation Features.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{SlideShowExpert}

{SlideShowExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|Slide Show. The macro has no arguments. {SlideShowExpert} displays the first Slide Show Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{SPEEDFORMAT.Option}

Command	Description
{SPEEDFORMAT.Add Name, ExampleBlock}	Adds a new format based on a specified block
{SPEEDFORMAT.Remove Name}	Removes a format
{SPEEDFORMAT.Option} adds formats to the SpeedFormat dialog box, or removes them. {SPEEDFORMAT.Add} lets you specify a name for the new format and the example block that defines the format. {SPEEDFORMAT.Remove} deletes a specified format.

Examples

The following macro adds a format named "Strauss" to the SpeedFormat dialog box. The format is based on the example block A:C10..H25.

{SPEEDFORMAT.Add "Strauss",A:C10..H25}

See Also

{SPEEDFORMAT}

Macros

Using Macros


{TableLink.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools | Database Tools | Table Link...
{TableLink.Block Block}	...|Block
{TableLink.Name TableName}	...|Table
{TableLink.Go}	...|OK
{TableLink.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Database Tools|Table Link. It establishes a link to an external database table and displays the table in a Quattro Pro notebook.

See Also

Macros

Tools|Database Tools|Table Link

Using Macros


{WhatIfExpert}

{WhatIfExpert} is the command equivalent for Help|Experts|What-If. The macro has no arguments. {WhatIfExpert} displays the first What-If Expert dialog box.

See Also

Experts

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowQPW.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to the Quattro Pro Control menu|...
{WindowQPW.Maximize}	...|Maximize
{WindowQPW.Minimize}	...|Minimize
{WindowQPW.Restore}	...|Restore
{WindowQPW.Option} is the command equivalent for the Maximize, Minimize, and Restore commands on the Quattro Pro Control menu.

{WindowQPW.Maximize} enlarges the Quattro Pro window so it fills the screen.

{WindowQPW.Minimize} shrinks the Quattro Pro window to an icon.

{WindowQPW.Restore} restores the Quattro Pro window to its original size.

See Also

{WindowMaximize}

{WindowMinimize}

{WindowRestore}

Macros

Using Macros


{Align.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to

{Align.Bottom}	Tools|Align|Bottom

{Align.Horizontal_Center}	Tools|Align|Horizontal Center

{Align.Horizontal_Space Value}	Tools|Align|Horizontal Space

{Align.Left}	Tools|Align|Left

{Align.Right}	Tools|Align|Right

{Align.Top}	Tools|Align|Top

{Align.Vertical_Center}	Tools|Align|Vertical Center

{Align.Vertical_Space Value}	Tools|Align|Vertical Space

{Align.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Align; its action depends on whether a graph or dialog window is active.

Value is the amount of space to leave between controls, in pixels.

See Also

Aligning Controls

Aligning Objects

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.Property}

{Application.Property} is equivalent to choosing Property|Application in the Property Band (the application Object Inspector). The next table lists the possible settings for Property. Items marked with an asterisk (*) appear only in Developer mode.

To display a property description with syntax, choose that property in the following list:

Property	Property|Application option

Country_Settings	Currency|Change

Current_File	none

Display	Display

Enable_Inspection	Enable Inspection*

File Options	File Options

General	General

International	International

Macro	Macro

SpeedBar	none

Title	Title*

See Also

Application Properties

Macros

Using Developer Mode

Using Macros


{Application.Country_Settings}
{Application.Country_Settings "Symbol, Prefix|Suffix, Country"}

{Application.Country_Settings} sets the type of currency symbol and its placement before or after values for a particular country.

Note:	This macro replaces previous Quattro Pro macros, {Application.International.Currency_Symbol} and {Application.International.Placement}.

Examples

The following macro sets the currency symbol to $ and places the symbol before values for United States currency values.

{Application.Country_Settings "$,Prefix,United States}

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.Current_File}

{Application.Current_File} returns the name of the active notebook. This command equivalent is only used with @COMMAND and has no equivalent menu command.

See Also

@COMMAND

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.Display<.Option>}

{Application.Display<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Application...
{Application.Display "Clock, Toolbar, InputLine, Status, RangeSyntax, PropBand, ScrollIndicator, Hint"}	...|Display
{Application.Display.Clock_Display International|None|Standard}	...|Display|Clock Display
{Application.Display.Range_Syntax "A..B:A1..B2"|"A:A1..B:B2"}	...|Display|3-D Syntax
{Application.Display.Show_InputLine Yes|No}	...|Display|Show Input Line
{Application.Display.Show_Property_Band Yes|No}	...|Display|Show Property Band
{Application.Display.Show_Scroll_Indicator Yes|No}	...|Display|Show Scroll Indicators
{Application.Display.Show_StatusLine Yes|No}	...|Display|Show Status Line
{Application.Display.Show_Tool_Hint Yes|No}	...|Display|Show Balloon Hints
{Application.Display.Show_Toolbar Yes|No}	...|Display|Show Toolbar
{Application.Display.Option} is equivalent to choosing Property|Application|Display in the Property Band. It lets you specify block syntax and display parts of the Quattro Pro user interface. The arguments of {Application.Display} (which sets all options of the Display property in one command) use the same syntax as those in the {Application.Display.Option} commands. For example,the Clock argument can be International, None, or Standard, the same settings that {Application.Display.Clock_Display} accepts.

Examples

The following macro command hides the time, hides the standard Toolbar, displays the input line and status line, sets the block syntax to standard, hides the Property Band, and displays the scroll indicators and Toolbar hints.

{Application.Display "None,No,Yes,Yes,A..B:A1..B2,No,Yes,Yes"}

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.Enable_Inspection}
{Application.Enable_Inspection Yes|No}

{Application.Enable_Inspection} enables (Yes) or disables (No) Object Inspector menus. It is the command equivalent for choosing Property|Application|Enable Inspection in the Property Band, which is only available in Developer mode.

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Developer Mode

Using Macros


{Application.File_Options<.Option>}

{Application.File_Options<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Application...
{Application.File_Options "StartupDir, AutoFile, FileExt, AutoBackup?(Yes|No), AutoBackupTime, FullPathTitles?(Yes|No), UseWPDialogs?(Yes|No), QuickTemplates?(Yes|No)"}	...|File Options
{Application.File_Options.AutoBack_Enabled Yes|No}	...|File Options|Auto-backup time (Activate)
{Application.File_Options.AutoBack_Time Integer}	...|File Options|Auto-backup time
{Application.File_Options.Autoload_File String}	...|File Options|Autoload File
{Application.File_Options.File_Extension String}	...|File Options|File Extension
{Application.File_Options.Full_Path_Titles Yes|No}	...|File Options|Enable Full Path Titles
{Application.File_Options.QuickTemplates Yes|No}	...|File Options|Enable QuickTemplates
{Application.File_Options.Startup_Directory String}	...|File Options|Directory
{Application.File_Options.WPDialogs Yes|No}	...|File Options|WordPerfect File Dialogs
{Application.File_Options.Option} is equivalent to choosing Property|Application|File Options in the Property Band. It lets you specify the startup directory, autoload file, default file extension, and other options. The arguments of {Application.File_Options} (which sets all options of the File Options property in one command) use the same syntax as those in the {Application.File_Options.Option} commands.

{Application.File_Options.AutoBack_Enabled} and {Application.File_Options.AutoBack_Time} enable the creation of temporary backup files at a specified time interval.

{Application.File_Options.Autoload_File} sets the file to be loaded every time Quattro Pro is started.

{Application.File_Options.File_Extension} sets the default file extension to be used with file-handling commands.

{Application.File_Options.Full_Path_Titles} shows the full path of notebook files in the title bar of the notebook window.

{Application.File_Options.QuickTemplates} enables or disables the use of notebook templates when you choose File|New.

{Application.File_Options.Startup_Directory} sets the directory initially displayed by file-handling commands.

{Application.File_Options.WPDialogs} lets you use shared file-handling dialog boxes from WordPerfect or GroupWise, if they are installed.

Examples

The following macro command sets the startup directory to C:\OFFICE\QPW, sets the autoload file to QUATTRO.WB2, sets the file extension to .WB2, enables autobackup at 15 minute intervals, enables the display of full path titles, does not use shared file-handling dialog boxes, and enables QuickTemplates.

{Application.File_Options "C:\OFFICE\QPW,QUATTRO.WB2,WB2,Yes,15,Yes,No,Yes"}

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.General<.Option>}

{Application.General<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Application...
{Application.General "UseUndo?(Yes|No), CompatibleKeys?(Yes|No), MoveCellSelectorOnEnter?(Yes|No), SaveToolbarsOnExit?(Yes|No), DelayTime"}	...|General
{Application.General.Compatible_Keys Yes|No}	...|General|Compatible Keys
{Application.General.Delay_Time Integer}	...|General|Cell Drag and Drop Delay Time
{Application.General.MoveCellOnEnterKey Yes|No}	...|General|Move Cell Selector on Enter Key
{Application.General.Save_Toolbar_Arrangement Yes|No}	...|General|Save Toolbars on Exit
{Application.General.Undo Yes|No}	...|General|Undo
{Application.General.Option} is equivalent to choosing Property|Application|General in the Property Band. It lets you

enable the Edit|Undo command

makes a variety of keys work in the same way as in Quattro Pro for DOS

sets the behavior of the cell selector when you press Enter

saves the Toolbar arrangement when you exit Quattro Pro

specifies how long to wait before changing from block selection to Drag-and-Drop mode

Examples

The following macro command enables Undo, makes the cell selector move down when you enter data, saves the Toolbar arrangement when you exit Quattro Pro, and sets the cell drag and drop delay time to 400 milliseconds.

{Application.General "Yes,No,Yes,Yes,400"}

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.International<.Option>}

{Application.International<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Application...
{Application.International ", Currency, , Negative, Punctuation, DateFmt, TimeFmt, Language, Conversion, Country"}	...|International
{Application.International.Currency "Windows Default"|"Quattro Pro"}	...|International|Currency
{Application.International.Date_Format String}	...|International|Date Format
{Application.International.Language String}	...|International|Language
{Application.International.LICS_Conversion Yes|No}	...|International|Conversion
{Application.International.Negative Signed|Parens}	...|International|Negative Values
{Application.International.Punctuation "1 234,56 (a1.a2)" | "1 234,56 (a1;a2)" | "1 234.56 (a1,a2)" | "1 234.56 (a1;a2)" | "1,234.56 (a1,a2)"| "1,234.56 (a1;a2)" | "1.234,56 (a1;a2)" | "1.234,56 (a1.a2)" | "Windows Default"}	...|International|Punctuation
{Application.International.Time_Format String}	...|International|Time
{Application.International.Option} is equivalent to choosing Property|Application|International in the Property Band, which lets you specify the punctuation, sort order, and numeric formats used by Quattro Pro. The arguments of {Application.International} (which sets all options of the International property in one command) use the same syntax as those in the {Application.International.Option} commands. For example, the Negative argument can be Signed or Parens, the same settings that {Application.International.Negative} accepts.

Note:	To set the currency symbol and its placement either before or after values, use the {Application.Country_Settings} macro.

Examples

The following macro command specifies that the Quattro Pro currency format is used with parentheses to indicate negative values, sets the punctuation, sets the date and time formats to Windows defaults, sets the sort order to English, disables LICS conversion, and sets the country used for currency to United States. The entire string must be enclosed within a set of quotes. (Enter all of the example into one cell.)

{Application.International ", Quattro Pro,, Parens,""1,234.56 (a1,a2)"", Windows Default, Windows Default, Quattro Pro, English (American), No, United States"}

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.Macro<.Option>}

{Application.Macro<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Application...
{Application.Macro "MacSuppress,, SlashKey, StartupMacro"}	...|Macro
{Application.Macro.Macro_Redraw Both|None|Panel|Window}	...|Macro|Suppress-Redraw
{Application.Macro.Slash_Key MenuName}	...|Macro|Slash Key
{Application.Startup_Macro String}	...|Macro|Startup Macro
{Application.Macro.Option} is equivalent to choosing Property|Application|Macro in the Property Band, which lets you control screen updates, display alternative menu systems, and run startup macros when you open a notebook. The arguments of {Application.Macro} (which sets all options of the Macro property in one command) use the same syntax as those in the {Application.Macro.Option} commands.

Example

The following macro command specifies that windows should not display when a macro runs, makes the slash key display the Quattro Pro for DOS menu system, and sets the startup macro to BUDGET (Quattro Pro will run a macro named BUDGET whenever a notebook is opened containing a macro by that name).

{Application.Macro "Window,,Quattro Pro - DOS,BUDGET"}

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.SpeedBar ToolbarName}
{Application.SpeedBar <ToolbarName1,ToolbarName2,...>}

{Application.SpeedBar ToolbarName} displays or removes a custom Toolbar (below the standard Quattro Pro Toolbar). Use this macro to load multiple custom Toolbars at once, replacing any that were loaded. To remove all custom Toolbars, use {Application.Toolbar ""}

To insert, append, remove, or replace one custom Toolbar at a time, use {Toolbar.Option}.

To show or hide the standard Toolbar, use {Application.Display.Show_Toolbar Yes|No}.

You can use @Property to get a list of currently loaded Toolbars:

@Property("Application.SpeedBar")

Examples

The following macro hides the standard Quattro Pro Toolbar, and replaces all currently loaded custom Toolbars with MYTOOLS.BAR and ANALYSIS.BAR:

{Application.Display.Show_Toolbar No}

{Application.SpeedBar "MYTOOLS.BAR","ANALYSIS.BAR"}

The following macro checks whether a Toolbar named STATS.BAR is loaded, and if it's not, it appends it beneath the standard Quattro Pro Toolbar.

{IF #NOT#  @FIND("STATS.BAR", @PROPERTY("Application.SpeedBar"), 0)}

{Toolbar.Append "STATS.BAR"}

See Also

{Application.Property}

{Toolbar.Option}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{Application.Title Title}

{Application.Title Title} sets the title appearing in the Quattro Pro title bar. It is equivalent to choosing Property|Application|Title in the Property Band, and it is only available in Developer mode.

See Also

{Application.Property}

Application Properties

Macros

Using Developer Mode

Using Macros


{BlockCopy}

Format

{BlockCopy SourceBlock, DestBlock, <ModelCopy?(0|1)>, <Formula?(0|1)>, <Values?(0|1)>, <Properties?(0|1)>, <Objects?(0|1)>, <Row/Col_Sizes?(0|1)>, <Labels?(0|1)>, <Numbers?(0|1)>}

SourceBlock	=	block to copy

DestBlock	=	location to copy block

ModelCopy?	=	whether to use Model Copy option; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 0

Formula?	=	whether to copy formula cells; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 1

Values?	=	whether to copy value cells; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 1

Properties?	=	whether to copy properties; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 1

Object?	=	whether to copy objects; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 1

Row/Col_Sizes?	=	whether to copy row and column sizes; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 1

Labels?	=	whether to copy label cells; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 1

Numbers?	=	whether to copy number cells; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 1

{BlockCopy} is the command equivalent for Block|Copy. It copies the source block to the specified destination. If ModelCopy? is 1, absolute references to cells within the copied block adjust to reflect the new location. Formula?, Values?, Properties?, Object?, Row/Col_Sizes?, Labels?, and Numbers? apply only if ModelCopy? is 1.

See Also

Block|Copy

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockDelete.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Block|Delete...
{BlockDelete.Columns Block, Entire|Partial}	...|Columns
{BlockDelete.Pages Block, Entire|Partial}	...|Pages
{BlockDelete.Rows Block, Entire|Partial}	...|Rows
{BlockDelete.Option} is the command equivalent for Block|Delete. It deletes entire or partial columns, rows, and pages. Block is the 2-D or 3-D block where material is deleted.

See Also

Block|Delete

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockFill.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Block| Fill...
{BlockFill.Block Block}	...|Blocks
{BlockFill.Go}	...|OK
{BlockFill.Order Column|Row}	...|Fill|Order
{BlockFill.Series Linear | Growth | Power | Year | Month | Week | Weekday |Day | Hour | Minute | Second}	...|Fill|Series
{BlockFill.Start Value}	...|Fill|Start
{BlockFill.Step Value}	...|Fill|Step
{BlockFill.Stop Value}	...|Fill|Stop
{BlockFill.Option} is the command equivalent for Block|Fill. It fills Block with sequential data. You can use numbers, dates, times, or even formulas for Value.

If {BlockFill.Start} is a number or formula, you can enter one of these strings for {BlockFill.Series}:

"Linear" adds the step value to the previous value (defined at first to be the start value).

"Growth" multiplies the step value by the previous value.

"Power" uses the step value as the exponent of the previous value.

If {BlockFill.Start} is a date or time, the fill operation is always linear, but you can specify the step unit as "Year", "Month", "Week", "Weekday", "Day", "Hour", "Minute", or "Second". For example, with a start value of 6/20/92, a step value of 2, and "Month" as the {BlockFill.Series Option} setting, the second cell in the filled block contains August.

You can enter the date and time directly as a serial number or use one of the date and time @functions.

Example

The following macro uses @DATEVALUE to enter 6/20/92 as the start value. The 3-D block to fill is B..C:B1..D4 with a step value of 2. Fill order is "Row".

{BlockFill.Block B:B1..C:D4}

{BlockFill.Start @DATEVALUE("6/20/92")}

{BlockFill.Step 2}

{BlockFill.Stop @DATEVALUE("12/31/2099")}

{BlockFill.Order Row}

{BlockFill.Series Month}

{BlockFill.Go}

See Also

Block|Fill

Date and Time @Functions

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockInsert.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to...
{BlockInsert.Columns Block, Entire|Partial}	Block|Insert|Columns
{BlockInsert.File FileName, BeforeBlock}	Notebook|Insert
{BlockInsert.Pages Block, Entire|Partial}	Block|Insert|Pages
{BlockInsert.Rows Block, Entire|Partial}	Block|Insert|Rows
{BlockInsert.Option} is the command equivalent for Block|Insert and Notebook|Insert. It inserts entire or partial columns, rows, and pages, or complete files. Block is the 2-D or 3-D block where material is inserted. In {BlockInsert.File}, Filename is inserted into the active notebook before block BeforeBlock.

See Also

Block|Insert

Macros

Notebook|Insert

Using Macros


{BlockMove}

Format

{BlockMove SourceBlock, DestBlock}

SourceBlock	=	block to move

DestBlock	=	new location for the block

{BlockMove} is the command equivalent for Block|Move. It moves the contents of a block from one location to another. Any data already in DestBlock is overwritten by the contents of SourceBlock. Block properties move with the data. Nonabsolute formulas are adjusted.

To move pages, use {BlockMovePages}.

See Also

{BlockMovePages}

Block|Move

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockMovePages}

Format

{BlockMovePages SrcPages, BeforePage, CopyOption?(0|1)}

SrcPages	=	range of pages to move

BeforePage	=	new location for SrcPages

CopyOption?	=	1 to copy pages or 0 to move them

{BlockMovePages} is the command equivalent for Notebook|Move Pages. It reorders pages within a notebook. Moved pages appear before BeforePage.

See Also

Notebook|Move Pages

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockName.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Block|Names...
{BlockName.Autogenerate Block, LabelsTop?(0|1), LabelsLeft?(0|1), LabelsBottom?(0|1), LabelsRight?(0|1), Intersection?(0|1)}	...|Generate
{BlockName.Create BlockName, Block}	...|Add
{BlockName.Delete BlockName}	...|Delete
{BlockName.Labels Block,Left|Right|Up|Down}	...|Labels
{BlockName.MakeTable Block}	...|Output
{BlockName.Reset}	...|Delete All
{BlockName.Option} is the command equivalent for Block|Names. It creates, deletes, and displays names for contiguous and noncontiguous blocks.

BlockName is the block name to create or delete. In {BlockName.Create}, Block is the block to name; in {BlockName.MakeTable}, Block indicates where to create the name table. {BlockName.Reset} clears all block names in the notebook.

You can use {BlockName?} or {BlockName!} to display the Block Names dialog box. {BlockName?} lets the user manipulate the dialog box, whereas {BlockName!} relies on the macro to manipulate it.

See Also

Block|Names

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockReformat}

Format

{BlockReformat Block}

Block	=	the block to reformat

{BlockReformat} is the command equivalent for Block|Reformat. It adjusts word wrapping in a series of label entries (contained in Block) as though they were in a paragraph.

See Also

Block|Reformat

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockTranspose}

Format

{BlockTranspose SourceBlock,DestBlock}

SourceBlock	=	block to transpose

DestBlock	=	block to hold transposed copy

{BlockTranspose} is the command equivalent for Block|Transpose. It copies SourceBlock to another location and reverses its rows and columns. Existing data in DestBlock is overwritten.

See Also

Block|Transpose

Macros

Using Macros


{BlockValues}

Format

{BlockValues SourceBlock,DestBlock}

SourceBlock	=	block to copy as values

DestBlock	=	block to hold converted copy

{BlockValues} is the command equivalent for Block|Values. It copies a block to another location and converts its formulas to values. Existing data in DestBlock is overwritten.

See Also

Block|Values

Macros

Using Macros


{ClearContents}

Format

{ClearContents fPageOnly?(0|1)}

fPageOnly?	=	if Group mode is off, enter 0; if Group mode is on, and the active page belongs to a group, enter 1 to operate on only the active page or 0 to act on all pages in the group

{ClearContents} is the command equivalent for Edit|Clear Values. It erases the contents of the selected block but leaves block property settings intact.

See Also

Edit|Clear Values

Macros

Using Macros


{Consolidate.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Consolidator...
{Consolidate.Add_Source_Block <Block>}	...|Add
{Consolidate.Destination <Block>}	...|Destination Block
{Consolidate.Function SummaryFunction}	...|Operation
{Consolidate.Go}	...|Consolidate
{Consolidate.Options OutputWithFormulas?(0|1), LabelsInTopRow?(0|1), LabelsInLeftCol?(0|1)}	...|Options
{Consolidate.Remove Name}	...|Delete
{Consolidate.Remove_Source_Block <Block>}	...|Remove
{Consolidate.Reset}	No equivalent; clears Source Blocks and Destination Block, and resets Options to default values in the Consolidation dialog box.
{Consolidate.Save Name}	...|Save As
{Consolidate.Use Name}	...|Consolidations
{Consolidate.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Consolidator. It combines data from multiple blocks into one using your choice of operators. Block defaults to the current block selected if the argument is not supplied.

Example

The following macro adds the values in the source blocks B2..B4, C2..C3, and D2..D4, and returns values in the destination block F2..F4.

{Consolidate.Add_Source_Block A:B2..B4}

{Consolidate.Add_Source_Block A:C2..C3}

{Consolidate.Add_Source_Block A:D2..D4}

{Consolidate.Function SUM}

{Consolidate.Destination A:F2..F4}

{Consolidate.Options 1,0,0}

{Consolidate.Go}

{Consolidate.Save CONSOL1}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Consolidator


{Controls.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Object Order...
{Controls.Order}	...|Order Controls
{Controls.OrderFrom}	...|Order From
{Controls.OrderTab}	...|Order Tab Controls
{Controls.OrderTabFrom}	...|Order Tab From
{Controls.Option} is equivalent to Tools|Object Order. It affects selected objects in the dialog window.

See Also

Tools|Object Order

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogView}

Format

{DialogView Window}

Window	=	dialog window to make active

{DialogView} lets you edit an existing dialog box.

See Also

Dialog Box and Toolbar Overview

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Property}

{DialogWindow.Property} is equivalent to choosing Property|Dialog (the dialog window Object Inspector) in the Property Band.

{DialogWindow} commands affect the active dialog window. The next table lists the possible settings for Property. To display a property description with syntax, choose that property in the following list:

Property	Property|Dialog option

Dimension	Dimension

Disabled	Disabled

Grid_Options	Grid Options

Name	Name

Position_Adjust	Position Adjust

Title	Title

Value	Value

See Also

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Dimension<.Option>}

{DialogWindow.Dimension<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Dialog...
{DialogWindow.Dimension "XPos, YPos, Width, Height"}	...|Dimension
{DialogWindow.Dimension.Height Height}	...|Dimension|Height
{DialogWindow.Dimension.Width Width}	...|Dimension|Width
{DialogWindow.Dimension.X XPos}	...|Dimension|X Pos
{DialogWindow.Dimension.Y YPos}	...|Dimension|Y Pos
{DialogWindow.Dimension.Option} is equivalent to the dialog window property Dimension, which lets you move and resize the active dialog window. Each argument is specified in pixels. XPos and YPos specify the distance in pixels from the left side of the Quattro Pro window and bottom of the input line, respectively.

Example

The following macro command positions the active dialog window two pixels from the left edge of the Quattro Pro window, five pixels below the input line, sets the width to 150 pixels, and sets the height to 250 pixels.

{DialogWindow.Dimension "2,5,150,250"}

See Also

{DialogWindow.Property}

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Disabled Yes|No}

{DialogWindow.Disabled Yes|No} disables (Yes) or enables (No) the active dialog box or Toolbar. This command only works when the user is viewing a dialog box or Toolbar; it does not work when editing one.

See Also

{DialogWindow.Property}

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Grid_Options GridSize, ShowGrid, SnapToGrid}

{DialogWindow.Grid_Options GridSize, ShowGrid, SnapToGrid} sets the grid size of the active dialog window. Use GridSize to specify the distance between grid points in pixels; ShowGrid specifies whether the grid is visible; SnapToGrid specifies whether objects snap to the grid.

Example

The following macro sets the distance between grid points to 10, shows the grid, and enables it.

{DialogWindow.Grid_Options "10,Yes,Yes"}

See Also

{DialogWindow.Property}

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Name Name}

{DialogWindow.Name Name} sets the name of the active dialog window. This name is used by macro commands, @functions, and link commands to identify the dialog box (or Toolbar).

See Also

{DialogWindow.Property}

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Position_Adjust Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel, BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer}

{DialogWindow.Position_Adjust Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel, BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer} specifies how the active dialog box resizes when the Quattro Pro window is resized. The arguments are equal to options in the Position Adjust dialog box; for directions on using the Position Adjust property, see Resizing Grouped Controls.

See Also

{DialogWindow.Property}

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Position Adjust Property

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Title String}

{DialogWindow.Title String} specifies the title that appears on the dialog box when the user is viewing it (the title does not appear when editing the dialog box).

See Also

{DialogWindow.Property}

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{DialogWindow.Value String}

{DialogWindow.Value String} sets the initial settings of the dialog box (or Toolbar). You can use it with @COMMAND to find the current settings of the dialog box. String is a comma separated list of settings. Each setting sets the initial value of one control. Control values appear in this list if their Process Value property is set to Yes. You can set the order of the settings while editing the dialog box.

Example

The following macro command sets the initial values of a dialog box with three controls. Each setting maps to one control.

{DialogWindow.Value "25000,5,1st of month"}

See Also

@COMMAND

{DialogWindow.Property}

Active Dialog Window Properties

Macros

Using Macros


{EditClear}

{EditClear} is the command equivalent for Edit|Clear. It erases the contents and properties of the current block, deletes selected objects from dialog and graph windows, and deletes selected floating objects. To erase a block while leaving its properties intact, use {ClearContents}.

See Also

{ClearContents}

Edit|Clear

Macros

Using Macros


{EditCopy}

{EditCopy} is the command equivalent for Edit|Copy. It copies the selected object to the Clipboard.

See Also

Edit|Copy

Macros

Using Macros


{EditCut}

{EditCut} is the command equivalent for Edit|Cut. It removes the selected object from the spreadsheet and moves it to the Clipboard.

See Also

Edit|Cut

Macros

Using Macros


{EditGoto}

Format

{EditGoto Block,<Extend?(0|1)>}

Block	=	block to display and select

Extend?	=	whether to extend the selection from the current selection to the specified block; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 0

{EditGoto} is the command equivalent for Edit|Go To. It selects and displays Block within spreadsheet pages, but not the Objects page.

See Also

Edit|Go To

Macros

Using Macros


{EditPaste}

{EditPaste} is the command equivalent for Edit|Paste. It copies data and its properties from the Clipboard into the notebook.

To paste only values or properties, use {PasteSpecial}. {PasteLink} creates a live DDE link, and {PasteFormat} adds many types of data from other applications (including embedded OLE objects).

See Also

{PasteFormat}

{PasteLink}

{PasteSpecial}

Edit|Paste

Macros

Using Macros


{ExportGraphic}

Format

{ExportGraphic Filename,<GrayScale?(0|1)>,<Compression?(0|1)>}

Filename	=	name of the graphic file to export

GrayScale?	=	whether to gray-scale: no (0), yes (1); the default is 0

Compression?	=	type of .TIF file compression to use: none (0) or PackBits (1); the default is 0

{ExportGraphic} is the command equivalent for Tools|Export Graphics. It saves selected graphic objects to one of several file types with optional gray-scaling and compression.

See Also

Tools|Export Graphics

Macros

Using Macros


{FileClose} and {FileCloseAll}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to ...
{FileClose <DoSave? (0|1)>}	File|Close
{FileCloseAll <DoSave? (0|1)>}	no equivalent
{FileClose} closes all views of the active notebook; {FileCloseAll} closes all open notebooks. The optional argument DoSave? indicates whether to display a save prompt before closing files with changes. Use 1, the default, to prompt for changes; 0 suppresses save prompts.

See Also

{FileSave}

File|Close

Macros

Using Macros


{FileCombine}

Format

{FileCombine Filename, <Blocks>, Add | Subtract | Multiply | Divide | Copy}

Filename	=	name of the file to combine

Blocks	=	block or blocks within Filename to combine (optional)

{FileCombine} is the command equivalent for Notebook|Combine. If you use the "Copy" option, it copies all or part of a notebook into the active notebook (starting at the selected cell). Omit Blocks to combine an entire file. Use "Add", "Subtract", "Multiply", or "Divide" to perform mathematical operations; the incoming data operates on existing data.

See Also

Macros

Notebook|Combine

Using Macros


{FileExit}

Format

{FileExit <DoSave?(0|1)>}

DoSave?	=	whether to display a save prompt for modified files: no (0), yes (1); 1 is the default

{FileExit} is the command equivalent for File|Exit. It closes Quattro Pro. The optional argument DoSave? indicates whether to display a save prompt before closing files with changes. Use 1, the default, to prompt for changes; 0 suppresses save prompts.

See Also

{FileSave}

File|Exit

Macros

Using Macros


{FileExtract Formulas|Values, <,Replace|Backup|Confirm>}
{FileExtract}

Format

{FileExtract Formulas | Values, Blocks, Filename, <Replace | Backup | Confirm>}}

Blocks	=	block or blocks to extract

Filename	=	name of the new file containing Blocks

{FileExtract} is the command equivalent for Notebook|Extract. It saves part of a notebook to a separate file, leaving the original file intact. Use "Formulas" to retain formulas; use "Values" to convert formulas to values. The optional argument--"Replace", "Backup", or "Confirm"--indicates how to treat an existing file with the same name (without displaying a prompt).

See Also

Macros

Notebook|Extract

Using Macros


{FileImport}

Format

{FileImport "Filename","ASCII Text File"|"Comma and "" Delimited File"|"Only Commas"|"Parse Expert"}

{FileImport} is the command equivalent for Notebook|Text Import. It copies a text file into the active page of a notebook. Enter the option string that describes the type of file to import.

See Also

Macros

Notebook|Text Import

Using Macros


{FileNew}

Format

{FileNew <TemplateName>}

TemplateName	=	the name of a QuickTemplate

{FileNew} is the command equivalent for File|New. It opens a blank notebook or a notebook based on a QuickTemplate.

Examples

The following macro opens a blank notebook:

{FileNew}

The following macro opens a new notebook based on the Travel Expense Report QuickTemplate:

{FileNew "Travel Expense Report"}

See Also

File|New

Macros

Using Macros

Using Notebook Templates


{FileOpen}

Format

{FileOpen Filename,<"Open Supporting"|"Update References"|"None ">}

Filename	=	name of the file to open

{FileOpen} is the command equivalent for File|Open. It opens the specified file.

See Also

File|Open

Macros

Using Macros


{FileRetrieve}

Format

{FileRetrieve Filename, <"Open Supporting" | "Update References" |"None ">}

Filename	=	name of the file to retrieve

{FileRetrieve} loads a notebook into the active notebook, replacing any existing data there.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{FileSave}, {FileSaveAll}, and {FileSaveAs}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to...
{FileSave <Replace|Backup|Confirm>}	File|Save
{FileSaveAll <Replace|Backup|Confirm>}	no equivalent
{FileSaveAs Filename, <Replace | Backup | Confirm>,, <FileType>}	File|Save As
{FileSave} saves the active notebook, {FileSaveAll} saves all open notebooks, and {FileSaveAs} lets you save the active notebook under another name (Filename). The optional argument--"Replace", "Backup", or "Confirm"--indicates how to treat a previous version of the file (without displaying a prompt).

The optional <FileType> argument for {FileSaveAs} specifies the type of file to save and is equivalent to the Save File As Type option in the Save File dialog box. If you do not specify a file type, the default is "QPW v6".

The following table shows the available file types. For file types with abbreviated names, a short description is provided.

File Types	Description

QPW v6	Quattro Pro for Windows, version 6.0

QPW	Quattro Pro for Windows, version 1.0 and 5.0

QP/DOS	Quattro Pro for DOS

Excel

1-2-3 v3.x	1-2-3, Version 3x and 1-2-3 for Windows

1-2-3 v2.x

1-2-3 Ed.	1-2-3, Educational Version

Paradox

dBASE IV

dBASE III

dBASE II

Reflex v2

Reflex v1

Text	tab-delimited text

DIF	VisiCalc

SYLK	Multiplan

Sym v2.0	Symphony, version 1.2

Sym v1.2	Symphony, version 2.0

Example

To close all files and save without confirmation, use this macro:

{FileSaveAll Replace}

{FileCloseAll 0}

See Also

File|Save As

File|Save

Macros

Using Macros


{FloatOrder.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Object Order...

{FloatOrder.ToBack}	...|Send To Back

{FloatOrder.Backward}	...|Send Backward

{FloatOrder.ToFront}	...|Bring To Front

{FloatOrder.Forward}	...|Bring Forward

{FloatOrder.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Object Order. It works on selected objects to arrange layers of floating graphs and other floating objects in the notebook window.

See Also

Tools|Object Order

Macros

Using Macros


{Frequency.Option}

Equivalent to Tools|Numeric
Command equivalent	Tools|Frequency...

{Frequency.Bin_Block Block}	...|Bin Block

{Frequency.Go}	...|OK

{Frequency.Reset}	...|Reset

{Frequency.Value_Block Block}	...|Value Blocks

{Frequency.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency. It counts the number of cases in the value Block that fall within each interval specified in the bin Block. Use {Frequency.Bin_Block} and {Frequency.Value_Block}, then {Frequency.Go}. You can use {Frequency.Reset} before or after the other commands to clear current settings.

Example

The following macro counts the data in block C1..E13 of page A and groups it according to the intervals given in G1..G7; frequencies display in column H.

{Frequency.Value_Block A:C1..E13}

{Frequency.Bin_Block A:G1..G7}

{Frequency.Go}

See Also

Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphCopy}

Format

{GraphCopy FromGraph, DestGraph, <Style?(0|1)>, <Data?(0|1)>, <Annotations?(0|1)>}

FromGraph	=	graph containing the style, data, or annotation objects to copy

DestGraph	=	new graph (the copy)

Style?	=	whether to copy properties that affect the appearance of the graph: yes (1), no (0)

Data?	=	whether to copy graph data: yes (1), no (0)

Annotations?	=	whether to copy annotation objects: yes (1), no (0)

{GraphCopy} copies the style, data, and/or annotation objects from one graph to another (within a notebook or between notebooks). It is equivalent to copying graph attributes using Edit|Copy and Edit|Paste Special.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphDelete}

Format

{GraphDelete Name}

Name	=	name of the graph to delete

{GraphDelete} is the command equivalent for Graphics|Delete Graph. It deletes the specified graph from the active notebook.

See Also

Graphics|Delete Graph

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphEdit}

Format

{GraphEdit Name,<InPlace?(0|1)}

Name	=	name of the graph to edit

InPlace?	=	whether to edit the graph in place on a notebook page; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 0

{GraphEdit} is the command equivalent for Graphics|Edit Graph. It displays the specified graph in a graph window for editing. Use the InPlace? argument to edit a floating graph on the notebook page.

Examples

The following macro selects the floating graph named Inserted1 and then activates its source graph (Graph1) for editing on the notebook page.

{SelectFloat Inserted1}

{GraphEdit Graph1,1}

See Also

Graphics|Edit Graph

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphNew}

Format

{GraphNew Name,<UseCurrentBlock?(0|1)>}

Name	=	name of the new graph

UseCurrentBlock?	=	whether to graph the current selected block; 0 = no, 1 = yes; the default is 0

{GraphNew} is the command equivalent for Graphics|New Graph. It creates a new graph and displays it in a graph window. If UseCurrentBlock? is 1, any selected data is shown in the graph; if it is 0, {GraphNew} creates a new graph without data.

See Also

Graphics|New Graph

Macros

Using Macros


{OBJECTSPAGEGOTO}

{OBJECTSPAGEGOTO} displays the Objects page of the active notebook and is equivalent to View|Objects Page (or pressing Shift+F5 when a spreadsheet page is active). When the Objects page is active, you can use {SELECTOBJECT} to select icons, and other object commands to manipulate them.

You can use {SELECTBLOCK} to move from the Objects page to a spreadsheet page.

See Also

{GOTO}

{QGOTO}

{SELECTBLOCK}

{SELECTOBJECT}

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphSettings.Titles}

Format

{GraphSettings.Titles Main, Sub, X-Axis, Y-Axis, Y2-Axis}

Main	=	main title of the graph

Sub 	=	title appearing below the main title of the graph

X-Axis	=	title of the graph's x-axis

Y-Axis	=	title of the graph's y-axis

Y2-Axis	=	title of the graph's secondary y-axis

{GraphSettings.Titles} is equivalent to Graphics|Titles, which sets the titles of the active graph (or selected floating graph or graph icon). Each argument is a string; to reset a title, use an empty string ("").

Example

The following macro command displays the graph Profit99 in a graph window and sets its main title and subtitles. The empty strings ("") indicate that there are no axis titles.

{GraphEdit Profit99}

{GraphSettings.Titles "Projected Profits","1999","","",""}

See Also

Graphics|Titles

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphSettings.Type (Class)}
{GraphSettings.Type Type<,Class>}

{GraphSettings.Type} is equivalent to Graphics|Type, which lets you specify how the data in a graph is displayed. It affects the active graph (or graph icon or floating graph). Class is an optional argument that specifies the class of graph type being used. Class can be one of six settings: 2-D, 3-D, Combo, Rotate, Bullet, and Blank.

When Class is "Bullet," the only Type setting available is also "Bullet". Use this syntax to specify a bullet chart: {GraphSettings.Type "Bullet, Bullet"}.

When Class is "Blank," the only Type setting available is also "Blank". Use this syntax to specify a blank graph: {GraphSettings.Type "Blank, Blank"}.

To display Type setting options for the other Class settings, choose a setting from this list:

2-D

3-D

Combo

Rotate

Example

{GraphSettings.Type "Pie"} and {GraphSettings.Type "Pie,2-D"} make the active graph a 2-D pie graph.

See Also

Graphics|Type

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphSettings.Type (2-D)}
{GraphSettings.Type Type <,2-D>}

{GraphSettings.Type} is equivalent to Graphics|Type, which lets you specify how the data in a graph is displayed. The following table lists Type settings for 2-D graphs:

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Graphics|Type...
{GraphSettings.Type "100 Stacked Bar, 2-D"}	...|2-D|100% Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "100 Stacked Line, 2-D"}	...|2-D|100% Stacked Bar Comparison
{GraphSettings.Type "Area,2-D"}	...|2-D|Area
{GraphSettings.Type "Bar,2-D"}	...|2-D|Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "Column,2-D"}	...|2-D|Column
{GraphSettings.Type "Doughnut,2-D"}	...|2-D|Doughnut
{GraphSettings.Type "HiLo,2-D"}	...|2-D|High Low
{GraphSettings.Type "Line,2-D"}	...|2-D|Line
{GraphSettings.Type "Pie,2-D"}	...|2-D|Pie
{GraphSettings.Type "Polar Radar,2-D"}	...|2-D|Radar
{GraphSettings.Type "Stacked Bar,2-D"}	...|2-D|Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "Stacked Line,2-D"}	...|2-D|Stacked Bar Comparison
{GraphSettings.Type "Variance,2-D"}	...|2-D|Variance
{GraphSettings.Type "XY,2-D"}	...|2-D|XY
These are other available settings for Class besides "Bullet", "Blank", and "2-D":

3-D

Combo

Rotate

Example

{GraphSettings.Type "Pie"} and {GraphSettings.Type "Pie,2-D"} make the active graph a 2-D pie graph.

See Also

{GraphSettings.Type}

Graphics|Type

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphSettings.Type (3-D)}
{GraphSettings.Type Type <,3-D>}

{GraphSettings.Type} is equivalent to Graphics|Type, which lets you specify how the data in a graph is displayed. The following table lists Type settings for 3-D graphs:

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Graphics|Type...
{GraphSettings.Type "2DHalf Bar,3-D"}	...|3-D|2.5-D Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "3D100 Stacked Bar,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D 100% Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Area,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Area
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Bar,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Column,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Column
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Contour,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Contour
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Doughnut,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Doughnut
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Marker,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Floating Marker
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Pie,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Pie
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Ribbon,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Ribbon
{GraphSettings.Type "3D ShadedSurface,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Shaded Surface
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Stacked Bar,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Step,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Step
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Surface,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Surface
{GraphSettings.Type "3D Unstacked Area,3-D"}	...|3-D|3-D Unstacked Area
These are other available settings for Class besides "Bullet", "Blank", and "3-D":

2-D

Combo

Rotate

Example

{GraphSettings.Type "3D Step"} and {GraphSettings.Type "3D Step,3-D"} make the active graph a 3-D step graph.

See Also

{GraphSettings.Type}

Graphics|Type

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphSettings.Type (Combo)}
{GraphSettings.Type Type<,Combo>}

{GraphSettings.Type} is equivalent to Graphics|Type, which lets you specify how the data in a graph is displayed. The following table lists Type settings for Combo graphs:

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Graphics|Type...
{GraphSettings.Type "Area_bar,Combo"}	...|Combo|Area-Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "Hilo_bar,Combo"}	...|Combo|High Low-Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "Line_bar,Combo"}	...|Combo|Line-Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "Multiple 3D columns,Combo"}	...|Combo|Multiple 3-D columns
{GraphSettings.Type "Multiple 3D Pies,Combo"}	...|Combo|Multiple 3-D Pies
{GraphSettings.Type "Multiple Bar,Combo"}	...|Combo|Multiple Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "Multiple Columns,Combo"}	...|Combo|Multiple Columns
{GraphSettings.Type "Multiple Pies,Combo"}	...|Combo|Multiple Pies
These are other available settings for Class besides "Bullet", "Blank", and "Combo":

2-D

3-D

Rotate

Example

{GraphSettings.Type "Multiple Pies"} and {GraphSettings.Type "Multiple Pies,Combo"} make the active graph a combo pie graph.

See Also

{GraphSettings.Type}

Graphics|Type

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphSettings.Type (Rotate)}
{GraphSettings.Type Type<,Rotate>}

{GraphSettings.Type} is equivalent to Graphics|Type, which lets you specify how the data in a graph is displayed. The following table lists Type settings for Rotate (rotated) graphs:

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Graphics|Type...
{GraphSettings.Type "R2D Bar,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 2-D Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "R2D Stacked Bar,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 2-D Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "R2D Stacked Line,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 2-D Comparison
{GraphSettings.Type "R2D100 Stacked Bar,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 2-D 100% Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "R2D100 Stacked Line,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 2-D 100% Comparison
{GraphSettings.Type "R2DHalf Bar,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 2.5-D Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "R3D bar,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 3-D Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "R3D Stacked Bar,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 3-D Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "R3D100 Stacked Bar,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated 3-D 100% Stacked Bar
{GraphSettings.Type "Rotated Area,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated Area
{GraphSettings.Type "Rotated Line,Rotate"}	...|Rotate|Rotated Line
These are other available settings for Class besides "Bullet", "Blank", and "Rotate":

2-D

3-D

Combo

Example

{GraphSettings.Type "R2D Bar"} and {GraphSettings.Type "R2D Bar,Rotate"} make the active graph a rotated 2-D bar graph.

See Also

{GraphSettings.Type}

Graphics|Type

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphView}

Format

{GraphView <GraphName1,GraphName2,...>}

GraphName1	=	name of the first graph to display (optional)

GraphName2	=	name of the second graph to display (optional)

{GraphView} is equivalent to Graphics|View Graph, which displays a graph (or series of graphs) full-screen. {GraphView} without an argument displays the active graph (or graph icon or floating graph).

Example

The following macro displays the named graphs Profit90 through Profit94.

{GraphView Profit90,Profit91,Profit92,Profit93,Profit94}

See Also

Graphics|View Graph

Macros

Using Macros


{GraphWindow.Property}

{GraphWindow.Property} is equivalent to choosing Property|Graph Window (the graph window Object Inspector) in the Property Band. Property can be Aspect_Ratio or Grid.

{GraphWindow.Aspect_Ratio Option} sets the aspect ratio of the active graph. Option can be one of the following settings: "35mm Slide", "Floating Graph", "Full Extent", "Printer Preview", or "Screen Slide".

{GraphWindow.Grid GridSize,DisplayGrid,SnapToGrid} sets the grid size of the active graph window. Use GridSize to specify the percent of graph window between grid points; DisplayGrid specifies whether the grid is visible; SnapToGrid specifies whether the grid is active.

Example

This macro sets up a 10 by 10 grid, displays the grid, and enables it.

{GraphWindow.Grid "10,Yes,Yes"}

See Also

Macros

Property|Graph Window

Using Macros


{Group.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to
{Group.Define GroupName, StartPage, EndPage}	Notebook|Define Group
{Group.Delete GroupName}	Notebook|Define Group|Delete
{Group.ResetNames}	Clears all group names in the notebook; no equivalent command
{Group.Option} is the command equivalent for Notebook|Define Group, which creates and deletes page groups.

Once you have defined a page group, you can use {Notebook.Group_Mode "On"} to activate Group mode. Use "Off" to cancel Group mode.

See Also

Macros

Notebook|Define Group

Using Macros


{GroupObjects}

{GroupObjects} is the command equivalent for Tools|Group. It groups selected objects in a graph window so they can be treated as one object in subsequent operations. Use {UngroupObjects} to treat them independently again.

See Also

{UngroupObjects}

Tools|Group

Macros

Using Macros


{ImportGraphic}

Format

{ImportGraphic Filename}

Filename	=	name of the bitmap or other graphics file to import

{ImportGraphic} is the command equivalent for Tools|Import Graphics. It imports graphics files into a graph window.

See Also

Tools|Import Graphics

Macros

Using Macros


{InsertBreak}

{InsertBreak} is the command equivalent for Edit|Insert Break. It inserts a new line and a hard page break into notebook print blocks at the current selector location.

See Also

Edit|Insert Break

Macros

Using Macros


{InsertObject}

Format 1: Embedding/Linking from a File

{InsertObject Filename, <DisplayAsIcon?(0|1)>, <Linked?(0|1)>}

Filename	=	file that you want to link/embed as an object

DisplayAsIcon	=	whether to display the object as an icon; 0 to show the object as it looks in the server application; 1 to display the object as an icon

Linked?	=	whether to link to the file; 0 to not link; 1 to link; the default is 0

Format 2: Embedding a New Object

{InsertObject ObjectType, <DisplayAsIcon?(0|1)>}

ObjectType	=	type of object to insert (the name of an OLE server)

DisplayAsIcon	=	whether to display the object as an icon; 0 to show the object as it looks in the server application; 1 to display the object as an icon

{InsertObject} is equivalent to Edit|Insert Object, which inserts an OLE object into the active notebook without using the Clipboard.

Example

This macro inserts a picture created in Paintbrush into the active notebook.

{InsertObject "Paintbrush Picture"}

See Also

Edit|Insert Object

Macros

Using Macros


{Invert.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Numeric Tools|...
{Invert.Destination Block}	...Invert|Destination
{Invert.Go}	...Invert|OK
{Invert.Source Block}	...Invert|Source
{Invert.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert. It inverts a square matrix (indicated by {Invert.Source Block}) and stores the invert matrix in another block (indicated by {Invert.Destination Block}). Use {Invert.Go} after the other two matrix-inversion command equivalents to complete the operation.

You can use this command equivalent with {Multiply.Option} to solve sets of linear equations.

See Also

{Multiply.Option}

Macros

Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert

Using Macros


{Links.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Notebook| Update Links|...
{Links.Change OldName, NewName}	|Change Link
{Links.Delete LinkName|*} (* = all links)	|Delete Links
{Links.Open LinkName|*} (* = all links)	...|Open Links
{Links.Refresh LinkName|*} (* = all links)	...|Refresh Links
{Links.Option} is equivalent to commands on the Notebook|Update Links menu, which refresh, change, or delete links in the active notebook.

LinkName is the name of the file being linked to. You can set LinkName to * to affect all links in the active notebook. If LinkName is omitted, the dialog box that normally performs the operation appears (and is under macro control; use {PAUSEMACRO} to pass control to the user).

Examples

{Link.Refresh *} refreshes all links in the active notebook.

The following macro displays the Open Links dialog box and lets the user select the name of a linked notebook to open.

{Links.Open}

{PAUSEMACRO}

See Also

{PAUSEMACRO}

Macros

Notebook|Update Links

Using Macros


{Multiply.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools| Numeric Tools|...
{Multiply.Destination Block}	...Multiply|Destination
{Multiply.Go}	...|OK
{Multiply.Matrix_1 Block}	...Multiply|Matrix 1
{Multiply.Matrix_2 Block}	...Multiply|Matrix 2
{Multiply.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply. It multiplies one matrix ({Multiply.Matrix_1 Block}) by another ({Multiply.Matrix_2 Block}) and stores the product in another block ({Multiply.Destination Block}). Use {Multiply.Go} after the other matrix-multiplication command equivalents to complete the operation.

You can use this command equivalent with {Invert.Option} to solve sets of linear equations.

Example

This macro multiplies block C2..D6 by block C18..G19 and stores the results in the block with upper-left cell F1.

{Multiply.Matrix_1 A:C2..D6}

{Multiply.Matrix_2 A:C18..G19}

{Multiply.Destination A:F1}

{Multiply.Go}

See Also

{Invert.Option}

Macros

Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply

Using Macros


{NamedStyle.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Notebook|Define Style...
{NamedStyle.Alignment "HorizAlignment(General | Left | Right | Center | Center Across Block), VertAlignment(Top | Center | Bottom), WrapText?(0|1), Orientation(Horizontal | Vertical)"}	...|Included Properties|Alignment
{NamedStyle.Define "StyleName", Align?, NumericFormat?, Protection?, Lines?, Shading?, Font?, TextColor?}	...|Define Style For
{NamedStyle.Delete StyleName}	...|Delete
{NamedStyle.Font "FontName, PointSize, Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikeout"}	...|Included Properties|Font
{NamedStyle.Line_Drawing "LeftLine(None | Single | Double | Thick), TopLine, RightLine, BottomLine, LeftColor, TopColor, RightColor, BottomColor"}	...|Included Properties|Line Drawing
{NamedStyle.Numeric_Format NumericFormat}	...|Included Properties|Format
{NamedStyle.Protection Protect|Unprotect}	...|Included Properties|Protection
{NamedStyle.Shading ForegroundColor, BackgroundColor, Pattern}	...|Included Properties|Shading
{NamedStyle.Text_Color 0-15}	...|Included Properties|Text Color
{NamedStyle.Option} is equivalent to Notebook|Define Style, which lets you create styles in the active notebook.

These command equivalents do not take effect until the command {NamedStyle.Define} is used to create (or modify) a style. The arguments Align? through TextColor? each specify one property to include in the style; use 1 to include the property, 0 to exclude the property.

{NamedStyle.Font} sets the new typeface and size of text in the cell. Bold, Italic, Underline and Strikeout can be "Yes" to include that type feature or "No" to omit it.

{NamedStyle.Shading} sets the shading of the cell; ForegroundColor and BackgroundColor are numbers from 0 to 15; each specifies a color on the notebook palette to use; Pattern is a string ("Blend1" through "Blend7").

Example

This macro creates a new style named RedNote, which makes the active block red, and sets a new font.

{NamedStyle.Font "Courier,10,Yes,No,No,No"}

{NamedStyle.Text_Color "4"}

{NamedStyle.Define RedNote,0,0,0,0,0,1,1}

See Also

Notebook|Define Style

Macros

Using Macros


{Notebook.Property}

{Notebook.Property} is equivalent to choosing Property|Active Notebook (the notebook Object Inspector) in the Property Band. Each command affects the active notebook. The next table lists the possible settings for Property. To display a description with syntax, choose that property in the following list:

Property	Property|Active Notebook option

Display	Display

Group_Mode	none

Macro_Library	Macro Library

Palette	Palette

Password	none

Password_Level	Password Level

Recalc_Settings	Recalc Settings

System	System

Zoom_Factor	Zoom Factor

See Also

Macros

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Display<.Option>}

{Notebook.Display<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property| Active Notebook...
{Notebook.Display "VertScroll, HorizScroll, Tabs, Objects"}	...|Display
{Notebook.Display.Objects Show All|Show Outline|Hide}	...|Display|Objects
{Notebook.Display.Show_HorizontalScroller Yes|No}	...|Display|Horizontal Scroll Bar
{Notebook.Display.Show_Tabs Yes|No}	...|Display|Page Tabs
{Notebook.Display.Show_VerticalScroller Yes|No}	...|Display|Vertical Scroll Bar
{Notebook.Display.Option} is equivalent to options of the notebook property Display.

Example

This macro command hides the vertical and horizontal scroll bars of the active notebook, reveals the page tabs, and shows all objects.

{Notebook.Display "No,No,Yes,Show All"}

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Group_Mode On|Off}

{Notebook.Group_Mode On|Off} activates or deactivates group mode. This command is equivalent to using the View|Group Mode command (or pressing Alt+F5).

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Macro_Library Yes|No}

{Notebook.Macro_Library Yes|No} is equivalent to options of the notebook property Macro Library. To make the active notebook a macro library, use Yes.

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Palette<.Option>}

{Notebook.Palette<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property| Active Notebook...
{Notebook.Palette Color1,Color2,...,Color16}	...|Palette
{NoteBook.Palette.Color_n "RedValue,GreenValue,BlueValue"}	...|Palette
{NoteBook.Palette.Color_n.Green GreenValue}	...|Palette|Edit Color
{NoteBook.Palette.Color_n.Blue BlueValue}	...|Palette|Edit Color
{NoteBook.Palette.Color_n.Red RedValue}	...|Palette|Edit Color
{Notebook.Palette.Option} is equivalent to the notebook property Palette, which lets you set the colors of the active notebook. The arguments of {Notebook.Palette} (Color1 through Color16) each have three parts, separated by commas: RedValue, GreenValue, and BlueValue. Each part is a number from 0 to 255. You can also edit a part individually (see the second example).

Examples

{Notebook.Palette.Color_3 "255,0,255"} sets the third color on the notebook palette to violet (Red 255, Blue 255).

{Notebook.Palette.Color_5.Blue "135"} sets the amount of blue in the fifth color to 135.

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Password Password}

{Notebook.Password Password} sets the password of the active notebook. The next save operation encrypts the file on disk.

Note:	Before specifying a password, set the password level using {Notebook.Password_Level}.

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Password_Level}
{Notebook.Password_Level None|Low|Medium|High}

{Notebook.Password_Level} sets the password level of the active notebook. If you specify a password level of Low, Medium, or High, you must also specify a password using {Notebook.Password}.

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Recalc_Settings Mode, Order, Iterations}
{Notebook.Recalc_Settings "Mode, Order, Iterations, <CompileFormulas?(0|1)>, <AuditErrors?(0|1)>"}

{Notebook.Recalc_Settings} is equivalent to options of the notebook property Recalc Settings. This command equivalent sets the recalculation options of the active notebook. Mode options are "Automatic", "Background", and "Manual". Order can be "Column-wise", "Row-wise", or "Natural". Iterations specifies the number of times formulas are recalculated before calculation is considered complete (relevant only if Order is changed, or if you use circular references).

To compile formulas in the active notebook for faster calculation, set the optional argument CompileFormulas? to 1. To highlight the source of error for each cell containing NA or ERR in the active notebook, set the optional argument AuditErrors? to 1.

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.System}
{Notebook.System Yes|No}

{Notebook.System Yes|No} makes the active notebook a system notebook.

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{Notebook.Zoom_Factor}
{Notebook.Zoom_Factor 10-400}

{Notebook.Zoom_Factor} is equivalent to options of the notebook property Zoom Factor, which sets the zoom factor of the active notebook (from 10% to 400%). This setting is for display only and does not affect printed output.

See Also

Macros

Notebook.Property

Property|Active Notebook

Using Macros


{OLE.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to...

{OLE.ActivateAs ObjectType}	Edit|<OLE Object>|Convert|Activate As

{OLE.AutomaticResize 0|1}	OLE Object properties|Automatic Resizing

{OLE.AutomaticUpdate 0|1}	OLE Object properites|Automatic Update

{OLE.Change_Link FileName}	Edit|<OLE Object>|Change Link

{OLE.Change_To_Picture}	Edit|<OLE Object>|Convert (to picture object)

{OLE.Convert ObjectType}	Edit|<OLE Object>|Convert

{OLE.DisplayAsIcon 0|1}	Edit|<OLE Object>|Convert|Display As Icon

{OLE.DoVerb Action}	Edit|<OLE Object>|Play, Edit, or Open

{OLE.OpenEdit}	Alt+Double-click an OLE object to open it in the server application (instead of editing it in place)

{OLE.Update}	Edit|<OLE Object>|Update Link

{OLE.Option} is equivalent to Edit|<OLE Object> commands and to some options in the Object Inspector menus of OLE objects. Each command affects the selected OLE object. The type of OLE object determines what command equivalents affect it:

OLE type	Commands

Embedded	{OLE.DoVerb}, {OLE.Convert}, {OLE.Change_To_Picture}, {OLE.DisplayAsIcon}, {OLE.ActivateAs}

Linked	{OLE.DoVerb}, {OLE.Change_Link}, {OLE.Update}, {OLE.Convert}, {OLE.Change_To_Picture}, {OLE.DisplayAsIcon}, and {OLE.ActivateAs}

Example

This macro selects an OLE object named Embedded1, lets the user edit the data (in the OLE server), and then converts the object into a picture (disabling the OLE link).

{SELECTFLOAT Embedded1}

{OLE.DoVerb Edit}

{OLE.Change_To_Picture}

See Also

Macros

OLE Object

Using Macros


{Optimizer.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer...
{Optimizer.Add Constraint#, Cell, <=|>=|=|Integer, Constant}	...|Constraints|Add
{Optimizer.Answer_Reporting Cell}	...|Options|Reporting|Answer Report Block
{Optimizer.Auto-scale 0|1}	...|Options|Automatic Scaling
{Optimizer.Change Constraint#, Cell, <=|>=|=|Integer, Constant}	...|Constraints|Change
{Optimizer.Delete Constraint#}	...|Constraints|Delete
{Optimizer.Derivatives Central|Forward}	...|Options|Derivatives
{Optimizer.Detail_Reporting Cell}	...|Options|Reporting|Detail Report Block
{Optimizer.Estimates Quadratic|Tangent}	...|Options|Estimates
{Optimizer.Linear 0|1}	...|Optimizer|Options|Assume Linear
{Optimizer.Load_Model}	...|Options|Load Model
{Optimizer.Max_Iters Value}	...|Options|Max Iterations
{Optimizer.Max_Time Value}	...|Options|Max Time
{Optimizer.Model_Cell Cell}	...|Options|Load Model, Save Model
{Optimizer.Precision Value}	...|Options|Precision
{Optimizer.Reset}	...|Reset
{Optimizer.Save_Model}	...|Options|Save Model
{Optimizer.Search Conjugate|Newton}	...|Options|Search
{Optimizer.Show_Iters 0|1}	...|Options|Show Iteration Results
{Optimizer.Solution_Cell SolutionCell}	...|Goal|Solution Cell
{Optimizer.Solution_Goal Max|Min|None|Target Value}	...|Goal
{Optimizer.Solve}	...|Solve
{Optimizer.Target_Value Value}	...|Target Value
{Optimizer.Tolerance Value}	...|Options|Tolerance
{Optimizer.Variable_Cells Cell(s)}	...|Variable Cells
{Optimizer.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer. It performs goal-seeking calculations and solves sets of linear and nonlinear equations and inequalities.

Constraint# refers to a constraint's order in the constraint list. Constant may be a value or a cell containing a value. The Value for Target_Value may also be a value or a cell. Use {Optimizer.Solve} after the other commands to calculate the solution.

To save an Optimizer model, use {Optimizer.Model_Cell Cell} {Optimizer.Save_Model}. To load a model, use {Optimizer.Model_Cell Cell}{Optimizer.Load_Model}

Example

The following macro sets up an Optimizer problem designed to maximize the formula in D6 by varying cells B8..B10. Seven constraints limit the solution. All options have been changed from their default settings. T2 and G13 are the upper-left cells of the report blocks.

{Optimizer.Solution_cell A:D6}

{Optimizer.Solution_goal Max}

{Optimizer.Variable_cells A:B8..A:B10}

{Optimizer.Add 1,"A:D8..A:D8",<=,"1000"}

{Optimizer.Add 2,"A:B8..A:B8",>=,"100"}

{Optimizer.Add 3,"A:B9..A:B9",>=,"100"}

{Optimizer.Add 4,"A:B10..A:B10",>=,"100"}

{Optimizer.Add 5,"A:D8..A:D8",>=,"500"}

{Optimizer.Add 6,"A:D9..A:D9",<=,"900"}

{Optimizer.Add 7,"A:D10..A:D10",<=,"110000"}

{Optimizer.Max_Time 50}

{Optimizer.Max_Iters 300}

{Optimizer.Precision 5E-05}

{Optimizer.Linear 1}

{Optimizer.Show_Iters 1}

{Optimizer.Estimates Quadratic}

{Optimizer.Derivatives Central}

{Optimizer.Search Conjugate}

{Optimizer.Detail_Reporting A:T2..A:T2}

{Optimizer.Answer_Reporting A:G13..A:G13}

{Optimizer.Solve}

See Also

Macros

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer

Using Macros


{Order.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to ...

{Order.Backward}	Tools|Object Order|Send Backward

{Order.Forward}	Tools|Object Order|Bring Forward

{Order.ToBack}	Tools|Object Order|Send to Back

{Order.ToFront}	Tools|Object Order|Bring to Front

{Order.Option} is equivalent to Tools|Object Order, which reorder overlapping objects in a graph or dialog window. Each command affects selected objects in the active window.

See Also

{FloatOrder.Option}

Tools|Object Order

Macros

Using Macros


{Page.Property}

{Page.Property} is equivalent to choosing Property|Active Page (the page Object Inspector) in the Property Band. Each command affects the active page(s). The next table lists the possible settings for Property. To display a property description with syntax, choose the property in the following list:

Property	Property|Active Page option

Conditional_Color	Conditional Color

Default_Width	Default Width

Display	Display

Name	Name

Protection	Protection

Tab_Color	Tab Color

Zoom_Factor	Zoom Factor

See Also

Macros

Property|Active Page

Using Macros


{Page.Conditional_Color<.Option>}

{Page.Conditional_Color<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Active Page...
{Page.Conditional_Color "Enable, SmallVal, GreatVal, BelowColor, NormalColor, AboveColor, ERRColor"}	...|Conditional Color
{Page.Conditional_Color.Above_Normal_Color 0-15}	...|Conditional Color|Above Normal Color
{Page.Conditional_Color.Below_Normal_Color 0-15}	...|Conditional Color|Below Normal Color
{Page.Conditional_Color.Enable Yes|No}	...|Conditional Color|Enable
{Page.Conditional_Color.ERR_Color 0-15}	...|Conditional Color|ERR Color
{Page.Conditional_Color.Greatest_Normal_Value Value}	...|Conditional Color|Greatest Normal Value
{Page.Conditional_Color.Normal_Color 0-15}	...|Conditional Color|Normal Color
{Page.Conditional_Color.Smallest_Normal_Value Value}	...|Conditional Color|Smallest Normal Value
{Page.Conditional_Color.Option} is equivalent to the page property Conditional Color, which makes cells change text color (based on the value in the cell). Each color specified in these commands is a number from 0 to 15, corresponding to which color of the notebook palette to use (1 through 16).

Example

The following macro makes negative values red, values greater than 10,000 green, ERR cells cyan, and positive values less than 10,000 black (assuming the default notebook palette is used).

{Page.Conditional_Color "Yes,0,10000,4,3,5,7"}

See Also

Macros

Page.Property

Property|Active Page

Using Macros


{Page.Default_Width Width}

{Page.Default_Width Width} is equivalent to the page property Default Width. It sets the default column width of the active page. Width is the new column width in twips (a twip is 1/1440th of an inch).

Example

{Page.Default_Width "720"} makes the default column width a half inch (720 twips).

See Also

Macros

Page.Property

Property|Active Page

Using Macros


{Page.Display<.Option>}

{Page.Display<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Active Page...
{Page.Display DisplayZeros?(Yes|No), RowBorders?(Yes|No), ColumnBorders?(Yes|No), HorzGridLines?(Yes|No), VertGridLines?(Yes|No)}	...|Display
{Page.Display.Borders "RowBorders?(Yes|No), ColumnBorders?(Yes|No)}	...|Display|Border Options
{Page.Display.Borders.Column_Borders Yes|No}	...|Display|Border Options|Column Borders
{Page.Display.Borders.Row_Borders Yes|No}	...|Display|Border Options|Row Borders
{Page.Display.Display_Zeros Yes|No}	...|Display|Display Zeros
{Page.Display.Grid_Lines "HorizGridLines?(Yes|No), VertGridLines?(Yes|No)"}	...|Display|Grid Lines
{Page.Display.Grid_Lines.Horizontal Yes|No}	...|Display|Grid Lines|Horizontal
{Page.Display.Grid_Lines.Vertical Yes|No}	...|Display|Grid Lines|Vertical
{Page.Display.Option} is equivalent to the page property Display, which sets the display of zeros, borders, and grid lines. The arguments of {Page.Display} (which sets all options of the Display property in one command) use the same syntax as those in the {Page.Display.Option} commands. All {Page.Display} arguments take Yes|No string values.

Example

The following macro displays zero values on the page, but hides borders and grid lines.

{Page.Display "Yes,No,No,No,No"}

See Also

Macros

Page.Property

Property|Active Page

Using Macros


{Page.Name NewName}

{Page.Name NewName} is equivalent to the page property Name. It sets the name of the active page to NewName.

See Also

Macros

Page.Property

Property|Active Page

Using Macros


{Page.Protection<.Option>}
{Page.Protection<.Option>}}

{Page.Protection<.Option>}	Equivalent to Property|Active Page...
{Page.Protection "CellLocking?(Yes|No), ObjectLocking?(Yes|No)"}	...|Protection
{Page.Protection.Cells Yes|No}	...|Protection|Enable Cell Locking
{Page.Protection.Objects Yes|No}	...|Protection|Enable Object Locking
{Page.Protection} is equivalent to the page property Protection. It enables or disables cell and object protection on the active page.

See Also

Macros

Page.Property

Property|Active Page

Using Macros


{Page.Tab_Color}
{Page.Tab_Color "Red, Green, Blue"}

{Page.Tab_Color} changes the tab color of the active page; Red, Green, and Blue are integers from 0 to 255.

See Also

Macros

Page.Property

Property|Active Page

The Color Property

Using Macros


{Page.Zoom_Factor}
{Page.Zoom_Factor 10-400}

{Page.Zoom_Factor} is equivalent to the page property Zoom Factor (and the View|Zoom command), which sets the zoom factor of the active page (from 10% to 400%). This setting is for display only and does not affect printed output.

See Also

Macros

Page.Property

Property|Active Page

Using Macros


{Parse.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Notebook|Parse...
{Parse.Create}	...|Create
{Parse.EditLine}	...|Edit
{Parse.Go}	...|OK
{Parse.Input Block}	...|Input
{Parse.Output Block}	...|Output
{Parse.Reset}	...|Reset
{Parse.Option} is the command equivalent for Notebook|Parse. It breaks long text strings into data fields according to a format line.

{Parse.Input} indicates the block to parse. {Parse.Output} indicates the block to hold parsed data. Use {Parse.Create} to build the format line. {Parse.Create} and {Parse.EditLine} act on the active block. {Parse.EditLine} lets you specify a new format line.

Use {Parse.Go} after setting up input and output blocks and creating a format line. {Parse|Reset} clears previous settings.

Examples

The macro in the next figure selects a text block, builds a format line in the first line of the selected block, identifies the format line and text as the parse input block, specifies an output block, and performs the parse:

A	B	C	D	E	F	G	H

6	V>>>*L>>>>>*L>>>******L>>>>>>>>>>*L	{SelectBlock A:A6..A:D7}

7	1968 Davis, John      Harisburg,  PA	{Parse.Input A:A6..A:D7}

8	1972 Lee,   Elizabeth New York,   NY	{Parse.Output A:A10}

9	{Parse.Create}

10	{Parse.Input A:A7..A:D8}

11	1968	Davis,	John	Harrisburg,	PA	{Parse.Output A:A11}

12	1972	Lee,	Elizabeth	New York,	NY	{Parse.Go}

To use {Parse.EditLine}, follow the macro with a {CLEAR} macro command, then the string for the new format line, and a {CR} macro, as shown in the following example:

{Parse.EditLine}{CLEAR}V>>>*L>>>>>>>>>>******L>>>>>>>>>>*L{CR}

See Also

Notebook|Parse

Macros

Using Macros


{PasteFormat}

Format

{PasteFormat LinkType}

LinkType	=	format to paste object as

{PasteFormat} is equivalent to Edit|Paste Special, which lets you paste data in a specific format (for example, an OLE object) into a notebook. Use LinkType to specify the paste format.

Example

{PasteFormat Bitmap} pastes the data in the Clipboard as a bitmap into the active notebook.

See Also

{EditPaste}

{PasteLink}

{PasteSpecial}

Edit|Paste Special

Macros

Using Macros


{PasteLink}

{PasteLink} is equivalent to using Edit|Paste Special to set up a DDE link to another application.

See Also

{EditPaste}

{PasteFormat}

{PasteSpecial}

Edit|Paste Special

Macros

Using Macros


{PasteSpecial}

Format

{PasteSpecial <"Properties"|"","Formula Cells"|"", "Label cells"|"", "Number cells"|"", "Formula Values"|"", "Transpose"|"", "NoBlanks"|"">}

Properties	=	Properties to paste properties from Clipboard; "" otherwise

Formula Cells	=	Formula cells to paste from Clipboard, "" otherwise

Number Cells	=	Number cells to paste from Clipboard, "" otherwise

Formula Values	=	Pastes formula cells as values, "" otherwise

Transpose	=	Switches the position of entries (data listed in columns is placed in rows and vice versa), "" otherwise

NoBlanks	=	Avoids pasting blank cells from Clipboard; "" otherwise

{PasteSpecial} is equivalent to using Edit|Paste Special to paste certains aspects of Quattro Pro data from the Clipboard.

Example

The following macro  pastes properties, formula cells, and numbers from the Clipboard, and skips any blank cells.

{PasteSpecial Properties, Formula Cells,"",Number cells,"","",NoBlanks}

See Also

{EditPaste}

{PasteFormat}

{PasteLink}

Edit|Paste Special

Macros

Using Macros


{Preview}

{Preview} is equivalent to File|Print Preview, which lets you preview a printout onscreen.

See Also

{Print.Option}

File|Print Preview

Macros

Using Macros


{Print.Option}

{Print.Option} is equivalent to the menu commands in the following list. To display specific command equivalents, choose one of the following.

Command equivalents for...

File|Page Setup

File|Page Setup|Named Settings

File|Print

File|Print|Sheet Options

The command equivalent {Print.PrintReset} resets print settings in all the dialog boxes displayed by these commands.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


File | Page Setup | Named Settings Command Equivalents

File|Page Setup|Named Settings command equivalent	Equivalent to File|Page Setup|Named Settings...
{Print.Create NamedSetting}	...|Add, ...|Update
{Print.Delete NamedSetting}	...|Delete
{Print.Use NamedSetting}	...|Use
These command equivalents are equivalent to File|Page Setup|Named Settings. NamedSetting is the named print setting to affect. To update an existing named setting, use {Print.Create}. {Print.Delete} removes a named setting from the active notebook. {Print.Use} sets the current print settings to those stored under the name.

See Also

File|Page Setup

Macros

Using Macros


File | Page Setup Command Equivalents

File|Page Setup command equivalent	Equivalent to File|Page Setup...
{Print.Bottom_Margin Value}	...|Print Margins|Bottom
{Print.Footer FooterString}	...|Header/Footer|Footer
{Print.Footer_Margin Value}	...|Print Margins|Footer
{Print.Footers_Font "Typeface, PointSize, Bold(Yes|No), Italic(Yes|No), Underline(Yes|No), Strikeout(Yes|No)"}	...|Header/Footer|Footer Font
{Print.Header HeaderString}	...|Header/Footer|Header
{Print.Header_Margin Value}	...|Print Margins|Header
{Print.Headers_Font "Typeface, PointSize, Bold (Yes|No), Italic (Yes|No), Underline (Yes|No), Strikeout (Yes|No)"}	...|Header/Footer|Header Font
{Print.Left_Margin Value}	...|Print Margins|Left
{Print.Orientation Landscape|Portrait}	...|Paper Type|Portrait or Landscape
{Print.Page_Breaks Yes|No}	...|Print Margins|Break Pages
{Print.PageSetupReset}	...|Load Defaults
{Print.Paper_Type PaperSize}	...|Paper Type
{Print.Print_To_Fit Yes|No}	...|Print Scaling|Print to Fit
{Print.Right_Margin Value}	...|Print Margins|Right
{Print.Scaling 1-1000}	...|Print Scaling|Scaling
{Print.Top_Margin Value}	...|Print Margins|Top
These command equivalents are equivalent to File|Page Setup. When specifying a margin, the default measurement system is used (set in the Windows Control Panel). To use a specific measurement system, place in (for inches) or cm (for centimeters) after the new margin setting (see the example). The new setting is converted into the default measurement system.

Example

This macro sets the top and bottom margins to three centimeters, specifies landscape orientation, and sets the paper size to Legal.

{Print.Top_Margin "3 cm"}

{Print.Bottom_Margin "3 cm"}

{Print.Orientation Landscape}

{Print.Paper_Type "Legal 8 1/2 x 14 inch"}

See Also

File|Page Setup

Macros

Using Macros


File | Print Command Equivalents

File|Print command equivalent	Equivalent to File|Print...
{Print.All_Pages Yes|No}	...|Print Pages|All Pages
{Print.Area Notebook | Selection | Current Page}	...|Print Area
{Print.Block Block}	...|Print Area|Block Selection
{Print.Copies Value}	...|Copies
{Print.DoPrint}	...|Print
{Print.DoPrintGraph}	...|Print (selected graph)
{Print.End_Page_Number Value}	...|Print Pages|To
{Print.Start_Page_Number Value}	...|Print Pages|From
{PrinterSetup Printer, Port, PrintToFile(Yes|No), Filename, CancelOverwrite (0) | Replace (1) | Backup (2) | Append (3)}	...|Select Printer|Printer and Port
These command equivalents are equivalent to File|Print (for the commands available for print options, see File|Print|Sheet Options.) {Print.DoPrint} prints the active notebook (or active graph) using current print settings. {Print.DoPrintGraph} provides a quick way to print a graph. If a floating graph is selected, {Print.DoPrintGraph} prints the graph being shown; if a graph icon is selected, {Print.DoPrintGraph} prints the graph represented by that icon; if a graph window is active, {Print.DoPrintGraph} prints the graph shown.

Examples

This macro selects an icon on the Objects page named Report3 and prints the graph it represents.

{OBJECTSPAGEGOTO}

{SELECTOBJECT Report3}

{Print.DoPrintGraph}

This macro prints pages seven through twelve of a document. The print block is A3..C234.

{Print.Block A3..C234}

{Print.All_Pages No}

{Print.Start_Page_Number 7}

{Print.End_Page_Number 12}

{Print.DoPrint}

See Also

File|Print

Macros

Using Macros


File|Print|Options Command Equivalents
File | Print | Sheet Options Command Equivalents

File|Print|Sheet Options command equivalent	Equivalent to File|Print|Sheet Options...
{Print.Between_Block_Formatting "Lines"|"Page Advance"}	...|Print Between Blocks
{Print.Between_Page_Formatting "Lines"|"Page Advance"}	...|Print Between 3D Pages
{Print.Cell_Formulas Yes|No}	...|Print Options|Cell Formulas
{Print.Center_Block Yes|No}	...|Print Options|Center Blocks
{Print.Left_Heading Block}	...|Left Heading
{Print.Lines_Between_Blocks Value}	...|Print Between Blocks|Lines
{Print.Lines_Between_Pages Value}	...|Print Between 3D Pages|Lines
{Print.Print_Borders Yes|No}	...|Print Options|Row/Column Borders
{Print.Print_Gridlines Yes|No}	...|Print Options|Gridlines
{Print.PrintOptionsReset}	...|Load Defaults
{Print.Top_Heading Block}	...|Top Heading
{Print.PrintReset}	Resets all print settings
These command equivalents are equivalent to the options available in the Spreadsheet Print Options dialog box (click the Sheet Options button in the File|Print dialog box). {Print.Between_Page_Formatting} and {Print.Lines_Between_Pages} control the amount of space left between notebook pages (if the print block spans multiple pages).

{Print.Between_Block_Formatting} and {Print.Lines_Between_Blocks} control space between the subblocks that make up a noncontiguous print block.

Example

This macro specifies that three lines should be printed between each notebook page (if the print block spans multiple pages), and that row and column borders should print.

{Print.Between_Page_Formatting "Lines"}

{Print.Lines_Between_Pages 3}

{Print.Print_Borders Yes}

See Also

File|Print

Macros

Using Macros


{PrinterSetup}

Format

{PrinterSetup Printer, Port, PrintToFile, Filename, ReplaceOption}

Printer	=	printer to send print jobs to

Port	=	port where the printer is connected

PrintToFile	=	1 to send all print jobs to a binary file; 0 otherwise

FileName	=	name of the binary file to send print jobs to

ReplaceOption	=	specifies what to do when the binary file already exists

{PrinterSetup} is equivalent to File|Print|Select Printer, which specifies the destination for Quattro Pro print jobs. It also lets you create binary files. To create a binary file, set PrintToFile to 1, FileName to the name of the binary file, and use ReplaceOption to tell Quattro Pro what to do if the binary file already exists. The following table lists the possible settings for ReplaceOption.

Setting	Description

0	Cancels the operation. The file will not be overwritten.

1	Overwrites the file.

2	Makes a backup copy of the file before overwriting it.

3	Appends the new printing to the end of the existing file. This option is only available when printing plain text files.

Example

The following macro creates a binary file using current print settings. The binary file is named REPORT.PRN. If the binary file already exists, it is overwritten.

{PrinterSetup "Epson LQ-2500","LPT1:",1,"REPORT.PRN",1}

{Print.DoPrint}

{PrinterSetup "Epson LQ-2500","LPT1:",0,"",1}

See Also

Macros

Printer Setup Dialog Box

Using Macros


{Query.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools| Database Tools|Query...
{Query.Assign_Names}	...|Field Names
{Query.Criteria_Table Block}	...|Criteria Table
{Query.Database_Block Block}	...|Database Block
{Query.Delete}	...|Delete
{Query.Extract}	...|Extract
{Query.Locate}	...|Locate
{Query.Output_Block Block}	...|Output Block
{Query.Reset}	...|Reset
{Query.Unique}	...|Extract Unique
{Query.Option} is equivalent to Tools|Database Tools|Query, which lets you set up a Quattro Pro database and search for records in that database. {Query.Locate} enters FIND mode and stays under macro control until {PAUSEMACRO} is used or {Query.EndLocate}, which exits FIND mode.

Examples

The following macro sets up a database block and criteria table (A2..G37 and H1..H2), searches for records using the criteria table, sets up an output block at J2..P2, and copies any records found there.

{Query.Database_Block A2..G37}

{Query.Criteria_Table H1..H2}

{Query.Locate}

{Query.EndLocate}

{Query.Output_Block J2..P2}

{Query.Extract}

See Also

{PAUSEMACRO}

Tools|Database Tools|Query

Macros

Using Macros


{Regression.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Numeric Tools|...
{Regression.Dependent Block}	...Regression|Dependent
{Regression.Go}	...Regression|OK
{Regression.Independent Block}	...Regression|Independent
{Regression.Output Block}	...Regression|Output
{Regression.Reset}	...Regression|Reset
{Regression.Y_Intercept Compute|Zero}	...Regression|Y Intercept
{Regression.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression. It performs a regression analysis to show the relationship between a set of independent variables and a dependent variable.

{Regression.Dependent} indicates the dependent-variable block. {Regression.Independent} defines the independent variables. In {Regression.Independent}, Block can be noncontiguous with one variable to a column. The dependent and independent blocks must all have the same number of rows.

{Regression.Output} indicates where to store the table of regression results. {Regression.Y_Intercept} specifies whether to compute the Y-intercept, or set it to zero. You can use {Regression.Reset} to clear all settings. Use {Regression.Go} after the other command equivalents to perform the regression analysis. If data changes within the independent or dependent data blocks, use {Regression.Go} again to calculate a new regression table.

Example

The following macro sets these data blocks: Independent, B2..D16; Dependent, F2..F16. The last statement performs the regression analysis and stores the results in the block with upper-left cell H2.

{Regression.Independent A:B2..A:D16}

{Regression.Dependent A:F2..A:F16}

{Regression.Output A:H2}

{Regression.Go}

See Also

Macros

Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression

Using Macros


{ResizeToSame}

{ResizeToSame} is equivalent to Tools|Align|Resize to Same, which lets you resize selected objects in the dialog window to the same size as the first object selected.

See Also

Tools|Align

Macros

Using Macros


{RestrictInput.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to...

{RestrictInput.Enter Block}	Block|Restrict Input (enters INPUTmode)

{RestrictInput.Exit}	Any operation that ends INPUT mode

{RestrictInput.Option} is equivalent to Block|Restrict Input, which confines selector movement to a specific block of unprotected cells.

{RestrictInput.Enter} enters INPUT mode and stays under macro control until {PAUSEMACRO} is used or {RestrictInput.Exit}, which exits INPUT mode.

See Also

{PAUSEMACRO}

Block|Restrict Input

Macros

Using Macros


{Scenario.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Scenario Manager...
{Scenario.AddCells <Block>}	...|Add
{Scenario.Capture ScenarioName}	...|Capture
{Scenario.CaptureArea Area,Block}	...|Modify|Capture Area
{Scenario.Close}	Closes a Scenario Manager session; no equivalent command
{Scenario.DeleteGroup GroupName}	...|Modify|Delete
{Scenario.Find}	...|Find
{Scenario.Highlight Highlight?(0|1), ChangeCellColor(0-15), ResultCellColor(0-15)}	...|Highlight
{Scenario.NewGroup GroupName}	...|Modify|New
{Scenario.Open}	Initializes a Scenario Manager session; no equivalent command
{Scenario.Remove ScenarioName}	...|Delete
{Scenario.RemoveCells <Block>}	...|Remove
{Scenario.RenameGroup OldGroupName,NewGroupName}	...|Modify|Rename
{Scenario.Report AllGroups(0|1), LeftLabels(0|1), TopLabels(0|1), <Block>}	...|Report
{Scenario.Show ScenarioName}	...|Scenarios list
{Scenario.Update_On_Block Update?(0|1)}	...|Modify|Options
{Scenario.UseGroup GroupName}	...|Group Management
{Scenario.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Scenario Manager. It lets you change values in a model, saving the conditions and results for different scenarios. {Scenario.Open} must be used prior to using other {Scenario.Option} commands; use {Scenario.Close} when you are finished using the Scenario Manager. For {Scenario.AddCells} and {Scenario.RemoveCells}, Block defaults to the currently selected block. For {Scenario.Report}, Block defaults to the first empty page in the notebook.

Example

The following macro captures the base scenario and two additional scenarios for a car loan.

{Scenario.Open}

{Scenario.Capture Base Scenario}

{Scenario.Update}

{SelectBlock A:F4}

{PutCell ".096"}

{SelectBlock A:C5}

{PutCell "60"}

{Scenario.Find}

{Scenario.Highlight 1,7,9}

{Scenario.Capture APR96-60}

{Scenario.Update}

{SelectBlock A:F4}

{PutCell ".085"}

{SelectBlock A:C5}

{PutCell "48"}

{Scenario.Find}

{Scenario.Highlight 1,7,9}

{Scenario.Capture APR85-48}

{Scenario.Update}

{Scenario.Report 0,1,0}

{FileSaveAs "C:\QPW\CARS.WB2"}

{Scenario.Close}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Scenario Manager


{Search.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Edit| Find And Replace...
{Search.Block Block}	...|Blocks
{Search.Case Any|Exact}	...|Case Sensitive
{Search.Direction Column|Row}	...|Columns First
{Search.Find String}	...|Find
{Search.Look_In Condition | Formula | Value}	...|Look In
{Search.Match Part|Whole}	...|Match Whole
{Search.Next}	...|Next
{Search.Previous}	...|Previous
{Search.Replace}	...|Replace button
{Search.ReplaceAll}	...|Replace All
{Search.ReplaceBy String}	...|Replace edit field
{Search.Reset}	...|Reset
{Search.Option} is equivalent to Edit|Find And Replace, which searches for strings in the active page. Use {Search.ReplaceBy} to specify the replacement string; {Search.Replace} replaces the string.

Example

The following macro searches the active page for 1993 in formulas and replaces it with 1994.

{Search.Reset}

{Search.Block ""}

{Search.Look_In Formula}

{Search.Match Part}

{Search.Find "1993"}

{Search.ReplaceBy "1994"}

{Search.ReplaceAll}

See Also

Edit|Find And Replace

Macros

Using Macros


{Series.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Graphics| Series...
{Series.Data_Range SeriesNumber | "XAxisLabelSeries" | "LegendSeries", Block <,CreateIfNotExist? (0|1)>}	...|Number or X-Axis or Legend
{Series.Delete SeriesNumber <,AndAllSeriesFollowing?>}	...|Delete
{Series.Go}	...|OK
{Series.Insert SeriesNumber, Block}	...|Add
{Series.Label_Range SeriesNumber, Block <,CreateIfNotExist? (0|1)>}	[series Object Inspector]|Label Series
{Series.Legend SeriesNumber, LegendText}	[series Object Inspector]|Legend
{Series.Reverse_Series 1|0}	...|Reverse Series
{Series.Swap_Row_Col 1|0}	...|Row/Column Swap
{Series.Option} is equivalent to Graphics|Series and options in a series Object Inspector, which creates or deletes graph series.

When you manipulate a series using command equivalents, the changes are not made until the command {Series.Go} is used. In all the commands, SeriesNumber is the number of the series to affect (1 for the first series, 2 for the second, and so on).

{Series.Data_Range} changes the values of an existing series. Block is the new block the series should take values from. If you are not sure whether the series exists, set CreateIfNotExist? to 1. Then the series will be created if it does not already exist. You can also use {Series.Data_Range} to set the x-axis series (use "XAxisLabelSeries") or set the legend series (use "LegendSeries").

{Series.Delete} removes an existing series. Set AndAllSeriesFollowing? to 1 if you also want to remove all series following SeriesNumber.

{Series.Insert} creates a new series. The series is inserted at the position specified by SeriesNumber. Block is the block containing the new series' data.

{Series.Label_Range} sets up the labels for each value in a series. Block is the block containing the labels. If you are not sure whether the series exists, set CreateIfNotExist? to 1. Then the series will be created if it does not already exist.

{Series.Legend} sets the legend text for a series (LegendText is the new text).

Note:	You can add series to a floating graph using {ADDSERIES}.

Example

The following macro creates a graph named Profit99 with two series. The series values are in A:A1..A27 and A:C1..C27. The series labels are in A:B1..B27 and A:D1..D27. The x-axis is stored in A:E1..E27.

{GraphNew Profit99}

{GraphEdit Profit99}

{Series.Data_Range 1,A:A1..A27,1}

{Series.Data_Range 2,A:C1..C27,1}

{Series.Label_Range 1,A:B1..B27}

{Series.Label_Range 2,A:D1..D27}

{Series.Data_Range "XAxisLabelSeries",A:E1..E27}

{Series.Go}

The following macro inserts a new series between the two series in the last example.

{GraphEdit Profit99}

{Series.Insert 2,A:G1..G27}

{Series.Go}

See Also

Graphics|Series

Macros

Using Macros


{Slide.Option}

Command equivalent	Action

{Slide.Effect Effect}	Specifies the transition effect to use when displaying the next slide in a slide show; no equivalent command

{Slide.Goto SlideName}	Takes the active slide show directly to the slide SlideName; no equivalent command

{Slide.Next}	Advances the active slide show to the next slide; no equivalent command

{Slide.Previous}	Returns the active slide show to the previous slide; no equivalent command

{Slide.Run SlideShowName}	Graphics|Run Slide Show

{Slide.Speed 0-15}	Specifies the transition speed to use when displaying the next slide in a slide show; no equivalent command

{Slide.Time Time}	Specifies the time in seconds to display the next slide in a slide show; no equivalent command

{Slide.Option} lets you build, edit, and present graphic slide show sequences. Effect, Speed, and Time are the same options offered in the Slide Effect property in the Light Table window. {Slide.Effect}, {Slide.Speed}, {Slide.Time}, {Slide.Goto}, {Slide.Next}, and {Slide.Previous} can be in the spreadsheet macro which started the slide show, in a spreadsheet macro run from a graph button, or attached directly to a SpeedButton or custom dialog box button.

See Also

Graphics|Run Slide Show

Macros

Slide Effect Property

Using Macros


{SolveFor.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For...

{SolveFor.Accuracy Value}	...|Accuracy

{SolveFor.Variable_Cell Cell}	...|Variable Cell

{SolveFor.Formula_Cell Cell}	...|Formula Cell

{SolveFor.Go}	...|OK

{SolveFor.Max_Iters Value}	...|Max Iterations

{SolveFor.Reset}	Clears all Solve For settings; no equivalent menu command

{SolveFor.Target_Value Value}	...|Target Value

{SolveFor.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For. It solves goal-seeking problems with one variable.

{SolveFor.Formula_Cell} indicates the location of the formula to evaluate. {SolveFor.Target_Value} is the goal to reach, either a number or a cell containing a number. {SolveFor.Variable_Cell} indicates the formula variable (a referenced cell) that can change to reach the target value.

{SolveFor.Max_Iters} and {SolveFor.Accuracy} control how many calculation passes to make and how closely the solution must match the target value. Use {SolveFor.Go} after the other commands. {SolveFor.Reset} clears previous settings.

See Also

Macros

Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For

Using Macros


{Sort.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Block|Sort...
{Sort.Block Block}	...|Block
{Sort.Data "Labels First"|"Numbers First"}	...|Data
{Sort.Go}	...|OK
{Sort.Key_1-5 Block}	...|Column|1st - 5th
{Sort.Labels "Character Code"|"Dictionary"}	...|Labels
{Sort.Order_1-5 Ascending|Descending}	...|Ascending|1st - 5th
{Sort.Reset}	...|Reset
{Sort.Option} is equivalent to Block|Sort, which sorts the entries in a block. To perform the sort, use {Sort.Go} after the other sort command equivalents.

Example

The following macro sorts the block A3..C35 using two sort keys (columns A and C). The sort is in ascending order, and values in a column are placed in a group before labels in the column. The labels are sorted in dictionary order.

{Sort.Reset}

{Sort.Block A3..C35}

{Sort.Key_1 A25}

{Sort.Order_1 Ascending}

{Sort.Key_2 C23}

{Sort.Order_2 Ascending}

{Sort.Data "Numbers First"}

{Sort.Labels Dictionary}

{Sort.Go}

See Also

Block|Sort

Macros

Using Macros


{Toolbar.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Toolbar Control Menu...
{Toolbar.Append BarName,<Position>}	...|Append
{Toolbar.Insert BarName,<Position>}	...|Insert
{Toolbar.Remove BarName}	...|Remove
{Toolbar.Replace BarName,Position}	...|Replace
{Toolbar.Option} is the command equivalent for the Toolbar Control Menu. To display the Toolbar Control Menu, right-click any blank area of a Toolbar. Position can be a bar name or number. For {Toolbar.Insert}, the default Position is 1. For {Toolbar.Append}, the default Position is below all other Toolbars.

See Also

{Application.SpeedBar}

Macros

Using Macros


{SpellCheck.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Spell Check...
{SpellCheck <SourceBlock>}	...|Start button
{SpellCheck.UserDictName DictName}	...|Options|Supplementary Dictionary
{SpellCheck.IgnoreNumbers Yes|No}	...|Options|Ignore Words with Numbers
{SpellCheck.IgnoreUppercase Yes|No}	...|Options|Ignore UPPERCASE words
{SpellCheck.Language Name}	...|Options|Language
{SpellCheck.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Spell Check. It checks the spelling of text in SourceBlock (or the current selection if SourceBlock is not supplied). Option corresponds to the options available when you click the Options button in the Spell Checker dialog box.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Using the Spell Checker


{TableQuery.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Database Tools|Table Query...
{TableQuery.Destination Block}	...|Destination
{TableQuery.FileQuery Yes|No}	...|Query in File
{TableQuery.Go}	...|OK
{TableQuery.QueryBlock Block}	...|QBE Block
{TableQuery.QueryFile Filename}	...|QBE File
{TableQuery.Option} is equivalent to Tools|Database Tools|Table Query, which lets you search external databases for records. The query is not performed until {TableQuery.Go} is used.

Examples

The following macro searches the external table TASKLIST.DB using the query file TASKLIST.QBE. The results of the search are stored in A:A2.

{TableQuery.FileQuery Yes}

{TableQuery.QueryFile TASKLIST.QBE}

{TableQuery.Destination A:A2}

{TableQuery.Go}

The next macro searches the same database, but uses the query defined in the named block task_query.

{TableQuery.FileQuery No}

{TableQuery.QueryBlock task_query}

{TableQuery.Destination A:A2}

{TableQuery.Go}

See Also

{Query.Option}

Tools|Database Tools|Table Query

Macros

Using Macros


{TableView}

{TableView} is equivalent to Tools|Database Desktop, which launches the Database Desktop.

See Also

Data|Table Query

Macros

Using Macros


{UngroupObjects}

{UngroupObjects} is the command equivalent for Tools|Ungroup. It separates the selected group of graph annotation objects so each can be moved or modified without affecting the others.

See Also

Tools|Ungroup

Macros

Using Macros


{WhatIf.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If...
{WhatIf.Block Block}	...|Data Table
{WhatIf.Input_Cell_1 Cell}	...|Input Cell (Column Input Cell)
{WhatIf.Input_Cell_2 Cell}	...|Row Input Cell
{WhatIf.One_Way}	...|One Free Variable, ...|Generate
{WhatIf.Reset}	...|Reset
{WhatIf.Two_Way}	...|Two Free Variables, ...|Generate
{WhatIf.Option} is the command equivalent for Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If. It builds one- or two-variable "what-if" tables that display a range of results for different conditions.

If you are creating a one-variable table, use these command equivalents: {WhatIf.Input_Cell_1}, {WhatIf.Block}, {WhatIf.One_Way}. For two-variable tables, use {WhatIf.Input_Cell_2} after indicating the first input cell; use {WhatIf.Two_Way} instead of {WhatIf.One_Way}.

Example

The following macro defines A4..H18 as the "what-if" block, B1 as Input Cell 1, B2 as Input Cell 2, and builds a two-variable table.

{Whatif.Block A:A4..A:H18}

{Whatif.Input_cell_1 A:B1}

{Whatif.Input_cell_2 A:B2}

{Whatif.Two_Way}

See Also

Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowArrIcon}

{WindowArrIcon} is equivalent to Window|Arrange Icons, which lines up minimized windows on the Quattro Pro desktop or icons on the Objects page.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Window|Arrange Icons


{WindowCascade}

{WindowCascade} is equivalent to Window|Cascade, which rearranges all open windows on the Quattro Pro desktop.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Window|Cascade


{WindowClose}

{WindowClose} is equivalent to Close in a Control menu, which closes the active window (if the active window is not saved, a prompt appears to confirm the operation).

See Also

{FileClose}.

Control Menu|Close

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowHide}

{WindowHide} is equivalent to Window|Hide, which conceals the active notebook window.

See Also

Control Menu|Close

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowMaximize}

{WindowMaximize} is equivalent to Maximize in a Control menu, which enlarges the active window so it fills the screen.

See Also

Control Menu|Maximize

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowMinimize}

{WindowMinimize} is equivalent to Minimize in a Control menu, which shrinks the active window to an icon on the Quattro Pro desktop.

See Also

Control Menu|Minimize

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowMove}

Format

{WindowMove UpperLeftX, UpperLeftY}

UpperLeftX	=	distance between the left side of the Quattro Pro window and the left side of active window, in pixels

UpperLeftY	=	distance between the bottom of the input line and the top of active window, in pixels

{WindowMove} is equivalent to Move in a Control menu, which lets you move the active window. UpperLeftX and UpperLeftY are the new coordinates of the upper-left corner of the window.

See Also

Control Menu|Move

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowNewView}

{WindowNewView} is the command equivalent for Window|New View. It displays a duplicate copy of the active notebook in a new window.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Window|New View


{WindowNext}

{WindowNext} is equivalent to choosing Next in a Control menu or pressing Ctrl+F6. It makes the next window active.

See Also

Control Menu|Next

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowPanes Horizontal | Vertical | Clear}
{WindowPanes}

Format

{WindowPanes Horizontal|Vertical|Clear, Synch?(0|1), Width, Height}

Synch?	=	whether the panes are synchronized: yes (1) or no (0)

Width	=	width of the left pane or height of the upper pane

Height	=	width of the right pane or height of the lower pane

{WindowPanes} is the command equivalent for View|Panes. It splits a notebook window into two horizontal or vertical panes; use Clear to restore a single pane.

Width and Height indicate the ratio relationship between the panes.

Example

{WindowPanes Vertical,0,2,1} splits the notebook window into two vertical panes, not synchronized. The first pane is twice as wide as the second.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Window|Panes


{WindowRestore}

{WindowRestore} is equivalent to Restore on the Control Menu. It restores minimized windows to their original size.

See Also

Control Menu|Restore

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowShow}

Format

{WindowShow Name}

Name	=	name of the hidden window to show

{WindowShow} is the command equivalent for Window|Show. It shows hidden window Name and makes it active.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Window|Show


{WindowSize}

Format

{WindowSize X,Y}

X	=	new window width, in pixels

Y	=	new window height, in pixels

{WindowSize} is equivalent to Size in the Control menu. It sizes the active window to the specified width and height.

See Also

Control Menu|Size

Macros

Using Macros


{WindowTile Horizontal | Vertical | Both | Clear}
{WindowTile}

{WindowTile} is the command equivalent for Window|Tile. It displays all open windows without overlapping them.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

Window|Tile


{WindowTitles}
{WindowTitles Horizontal | Vertical | Both | Clear}

{WindowTitles Horizontal|Vertical|Both|Clear} is the command equivalent for View|Locked Titles. It locks specific rows and/or columns of a spreadsheet page onscreen as titles. When you scroll, the titles remain fixed onscreen while the rows below (or columns to the right) scroll as usual. "Horizontal" locks rows above the active cell, "Vertical" locks columns to the left of the active cell, and "Both" locks both rows and columns. Use "Clear" to unlock the titles.

See Also

Macros

Using Macros

View|Locked Titles


{WorkSpace.Option}

Command equivalent	Equivalent to File|Workspace...

{Workspace.Restore Filename}	...|Restore

{Workspace.Save Filename}	...|Save

{Workspace.Save} saves all open notebooks as a group with the specified Filename (Quattro Pro's default file extension for workspaces is .WBS). {Workspace.Restore} opens the specified file.

See Also

File|Workspace

Macros

Using Macros


Keyboard Macro Commands

 Print Group

When you record a macro, Quattro Pro translates special keystrokes into keyboard commands. When you type in a macro, use these commands in place of keystrokes. There are four categories:

Movement Keys	Home, End, and arrows

Function Keys	F1 through F12

Status Keys	Caps Lock, Scroll Lock, and other indicator keys

Other Keys	Break, Esc, Del, plus other keys and key combinations.

Keyboard commands emulate the keys of the keyboard. You can repeat many of these macro commands by specifying a repeat number as an argument. For example, to move the selector down five cells, use {DOWN 5}.

You can combine key commands for a variety of purposes. For example, the following macro replaces a formula in the active cell with its result and then moves down one cell:

{EDIT}{CALC}~{DOWN}

The following macro deletes the last three characters of whatever is in the active cell:

{EDIT}{END}{SHIFT+LEFT 3}{DEL}{CR}

You can also use keystroke commands to choose menu commands. Keystrokes step through the menu commands one key at a time. For example, the keystroke macro for copying A1 to A2..A46 is

{ALT+B}CA1~A2..A46~

See Also

Using Macros


Movement Key Macro Commands

 Print Group

Use these macro commands in place of arrows and other movement keys:

{HOME}	Home

{END}	End

{LEFT <Number>} or

{L <Number>}	Left arrow

{RIGHT <Number>} or

{R <Number>}	Right arrow

{UP <Number>} or

{U <Number>}	Up arrow

{DOWN <Number>} or

{D <Number>}	Down arrow

{PGUP <Number>}	PgUp

{PGDN <Number>}	PgDn

{BIGLEFT <Number>} or

{BACKTAB <Number>}	Ctrl+Left arrow or Shift+Tab

{BIGRIGHT <Number>} or

{TAB <Number>}	Ctrl+Right arrow or Tab

See Also

Function Key Macro Commands

Macro Commands for Other Keys

Status Key Macro Commands

Using Macros


Function Key Macro Commands

 Print Group

These macro commands are equivalent to Quattro Pro function keys and key combinations:

{ABS}	F4

{CALC}	F9

{EDIT}	F2

{FUNCTIONS}	Alt+F3

{GRAPH}	F11

{HELP}	F1

{INSPECT}	F12

{MACROS}	Shift+F3

{MARK}	Shift+F7

{MENU}	F10

{NAME}	F3

{NEXTPANE}	F6

{NEXTTOPWIN}	Ctrl+F6

{NEXTWIN}	Shift+F6

{OBJECTSPAGEGOTO}	Shift+F5

{QGOTO}	F5

{QUERY}	F7

{STEPOFF}	Shift+F2

{STEPON}	Shift+F2

{TABLE}	F8

See Also

Macro Commands for Other Keys

Movement Key Macro Commands

Status Key Macro Commands

Using Macros


Status Key Macro Commands

 Print Group

These macro commands are equivalent to the status indicator keys:

{CAPOFF}	Caps Lock off

{CAPON}	Caps Lock on

{INS} or {INSERT}	Toggles Ins on or off

{INSOFF}	Ins off

{INSON}	Ins on

{NUMOFF}	Num Lock off

{NUMON}	Num Lock on

{SCROLLOFF}	Scroll Lock off

{SCROLLON}	Scroll Lock on

See Also

Function Key Macro Commands

Macro Commands for Other Keys

Movement Key Macro Commands

Using Macros


Macro Commands for Other Keys

 Print Group

These macro commands are used for building key combinations and for entering or editing data:

{ALT+Key <Number>}	The keystroke Key while Alt is held down

{BACKSPACE <Number>}

 or {BS <Number>}	Backspace

{BREAK}	Returns Quattro Pro to Ready mode

{CLEAR}	Ctrl+Backspace (Clears any existing entry from a prompt line or from the input line in Edit mode)

{CR} or ~	Enter

{CTRL+Key <Number>}	The keystroke Key while Ctrl is held down

{DATE}	Ctrl+Shift+D

{DEL} or {DELETE}	Del

{ESC} or {ESCAPE}	Esc

{SHIFT+Key <Number>}	The keystroke Key while Shift is held down

See Also

Function Key Macro Commands

Movement Key Macro Commands

Status Key Macro Commands

Using Macros


Screen Macro Commands

 Print Group

These macro commands affect the display:

{BEEP <Number>}

Sounds the computer's bell

{INDICATE String}

Sets the mode indicator to display String

{PANELOFF}

Suppresses menus and prompts

{PANELON}

Restores menus and prompts disabled by {PANELOFF}

{WINDOWSOFF}

Prevents screen updating

{WINDOWSON}

Restores screen updating disabled by {WINDOWSOFF}

{ZOOM}

Maximizes or restores the active window

Screen commands can control the status line, suppress screen redraws, or sound the computer's bell. For example, {INDICATE "WAIT"} changes the status line indicator to WAIT; {INDICATE} resets the status line to its default.

See Also

Using Macros


Cell Macro Commands

 Print Group

These macro commands affect the data stored in specific cells. They can enter and read data, recalculate specific blocks, or convert values into formatted labels:

{BLANK Location}

Erases a cell or block

{CONTENTS Dest,Source,<Width#>,<Format#>}

Copies the contents of one cell to another as a formatted label

{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS Block,<Path>}

Enters into Block an alphabetized list of files in the directory specified by Path; if Path is not included, lists the current directory

{GETWINDOWLIST Block}

Lists open windows in Block

{LET Location,Value<:Type>}

Places a number or string in the given location; Type lets you store Value as a number or string

{NAVIGATE.SelectTable}

Expands selection of table boundaries.

{NAVIGATE.Zoom2Fit}

Zooms a table so that it fits in the visible part of the screen.

{NAVIGATE.GoTo Location,<Extend?>}

Navigates to the sides or corners of a table.

{NAVIGATE.Jump}

Jumps to the next table in a given direction, or to the current table boundary if currently within a table.

{PUT Location,Column#,Row#,Value<:Type>}

Places a number or string in a given location offset by the specified number of columns and rows; Type lets you store Value as a number or string

{PUTBLOCK Data,<Block>,<Date?(0|1)>}

Stores Value in each cell of Block

{PUTBLOCK2 Data, <Block>}

Stores Data in each cell of Block; same as {PUTBLOCK} except it parses date formats and requires a formula prefix before values

{PUTCELL Data, <Date?(0|1)>}

Stores Data in the active cell

{PUTCELL2 Data}

Stores Data in the active cell; same as {PUTCELL} except it parses date formats and requires a formula prefix before values.

{RECALC Location,<Condition>,<Iteration#>}

Recalculates formulas in Location in rowwise order for a specified number of times, or until Condition is reached

{RECALCCOL Location,<Condition>,<Iteration#>}

Recalculates formulas in Location in columnwise order for a specified number of times, or until Condition is reached

{SPEEDFILL}

Fills the selected block with sequential data

{SPEEDFORMAT Arguments}

Applies a standard format to the selected block

{SPEEDFORMAT.Add Name,ExampleBlock}

Adds a new format based on a specified block

{SPEEDFORMAT.Remove Name}

Removes a format

{SPEEDSUM Block}

Sums filled cells in Block, writes results in adjacent empty cells (right/bottom)

See Also

Using Macros


Interactive Macro Commands

 Print Group

Interactive commands let you create macros that accept users' input. These commands can display dialog boxes and pop-up menus, pause the macro and request input, and prevent users from breaking out of the macro during a crucial period:

{ ? }

Pauses the macro and accepts input from the keyboard until you press Enter

{ACTIVATE WindowName}

Makes the specified window active

{BREAKOFF}

Disables the Ctrl+Break key used to cancel a macro

{BREAKON}

Restores the Ctrl+Break key disabled by {BREAKOFF}

{CHOOSE}

Displays a pick list of open windows

{DODIALOG DialogName,OKExit?,<Arguments>,<MacUse?>}

Displays the dialog box DialogName for use

{GET Location}

Pauses the macro, accepts one keystroke and stores it in Location

{GETLABEL Prompt,Location}

Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores the subsequent keystrokes as a label in Location

{GETNUMBER Prompt,Location}

Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores the subsequent keystrokes as a numeric value in Location

{GOTO}

Moves the selector to a specified location

{GRAPHCHAR Location}

Stores the character a user presses to leave a graph or message in Location

{IFKEY String}

Returns true if String is the macro name for any key macro command

{LOOK Location}

Places the first keystroke typed in Location

{MENUBRANCH Location}

Passes macro control to a custom menu at Location

{MENUCALL Location}

Pauses the macro, and runs a customized menu as a subroutine

{MESSAGE Block,Left,Top,Time}

Displays contents of Block in a pop-up window for Time seconds

{PAUSEMACRO}

Pauses the macro for dialog box entries, then resumes the macro when the user closes the dialog box

{STEPOFF}

Exits Debug mode, executing the macro at normal pace

{STEPON}

Enters Debug mode, in which Quattro Pro runs the macro step by step, advancing when you press the spacebar

{UNDO}

"Takes back" the last command; cancels its effects

{WAIT DateTimeNumber}

Pauses the macro until the time specified in DateTimeNumber arrives

{WINDOW}

Makes the next pane active

{WINDOW<Number>}

Makes the specified window active

See Also

Using Macros


Program Flow Macro Commands

 Print Group

Program flow commands let you branch and loop in a macro. Use these commands to create macros that behave differently based on logical decisions, to break down complicated macros, or to consolidate repetitious macros into subroutines:

{BRANCH Location}

Passes execution control to another macro at Location

{DEFINE Location1<:Type1>,..}

Defines the type of arguments passed to a subroutine and tells where to store them

{DISPATCH Location}

Branches indirectly to an alternate macro branch

{FOR CounterLoc, Start#, Stop#, Step#, StartLoc}

Runs a subroutine the specified number of times

{FORBREAK}

Terminates execution of a {FOR} command

{IF Condition}

Checks to see if a condition is TRUE or FALSE before continuing execution

{IFAUTOOBJ ObjectExpression}

Checks to see if ObjectExpression is TRUE or FALSE before continuing execution; like {IF}, but results in an OLE automation object

{ONERROR BranchLocation, <MessageLocation>, <ErrorLocation>}

Continues execution at a specified location after Quattro Pro detects an error

{QUIT}

Terminates macro execution and returns keyboard control

{RESTART}

Changes the current subroutine to the starting or main routine

{RETURN}

Terminates the current subroutine and returns control to main routine

{Subroutine <ArgumentList>}

Calls the specified subroutine, and passes any given arguments

See Also

Using Macro Subroutines

Using Macros


File Macro Commands

 Print Group

File macro commands work with data in files other than the active notebook. These commands can open files and read their data character by character, or create custom data files. If a file command succeeds, the macro command in the next cell is run, ignoring any other commands in the same cell as the file command. Commands in the same cell as the file command run only if the file command fails. Use this feature to trap errors such as the disk being full or reading data past the end of the file:

{ANSIREAD #Bytes, Location}

Reads the specified number of bytes and stores them in Location, without any character mapping

{ANSIREADLN Location}

Reads a line of characters and stores it in Location, without any character mapping

{ANSIWRITE String, <String2,...>}

Writes a string of characters to the current file, without any character mapping

{ANSIWRITELN String, <String2,...>}

Writes a string of characters to the current file and ends it with a carriage return/linefeed, without any character mapping

{CLOSE}

Closes a file opened by {OPEN}

{FILESIZE Location}

Calculates the number of bytes in the current file, and stores the value in Location

{GETPOS Location}

Places the position of the file pointer in Location

{OPEN Filename, AccessMode}

Opens a file for reading, writing, modifying, or appending

{READ #Bytes, Location}

Reads the specified number of bytes and stores them in Location

{READLN Location}

Reads a line of characters and stores it in Location

{SETPOS FilePosition}

Sets the file pointer to the value of FilePosition

{WRITE String, <String2,...>}

Writes a string of characters to the current file

{WRITELN String, <String2,...>}

Writes a string of characters to the current file and ends it with a carriage return/linefeed

See Also

Using Macros


OLE and DDE Macro Commands

 Print Group

OLE and DDE macro commands communicate with other Windows applications:

{ASSIGN VarExpr, ValExpr}

Assigns a value to a variable

{DELVAR VarName1<,VarName2,...>}

Deletes the named variable VarName and frees any object assigned to that variable

{EXEC AppName, WindowMode, <ResultLoc>}

Runs the application AppName

{EXECAUTO AutoExpr1<,AutoExpr2>}

Evaluates one or more automation expressions, but drops any returned values from expressions

{EXECUTE DDEChannel, Macro, <ResultLoc>}

Runs the macro Macro in a server application

{IFAUTOOBJ ObjectExpression}

Checks to see if ObjectExpression is TRUE or FALSE before continuing execution; like {IF}, but results in an OLE automation object

{INITIATE AppName, Topic, ChannelLoc}

Initiates a conversation with a DDE application

{POKE DDEChannel, Destination, DataToSend}

Sends data to a DDE application

{REQUEST DDEChannel, DataToReceive, DestBlock}

Requests data from a DDE application

{SETLCID <LocaleID>}

Specifies a locale ID for automation expressions

{TERMINATE DDEChannel}

Ends a DDE conversation

For information on how to use these commands to use OLE automation features, see Using OLE Automation Features.

For information on how to use these commands to initiate DDE conversations, see About DDE Macro Commands.

See Also

Using Macros


UI Building Macro Commands

 Print Group

UI building commands can add or remove menu commands from the active menu bar:

{ADDMENU MenuPath, MenuBlock}

Adds the menu MenuBlock to the menu system at MenuPath

{ADDMENUITEM MenuPath, Name, <Options>}

Adds the menu command Name to the menu system at MenuPath

{DELETEMENU MenuPath}

Deletes the menu MenuPath from the active menu system

{DELETEMENUITEM MenuPath}

Deletes the menu item MenuPath from the active menu system

{SETMENUBAR <SystemDefinition>}

Sets the active menu system

See Also

Using Macros


Object Macro Commands

 Print Group

Object commands let you move and resize objects on the Objects page either in a graph window, in a notebook window, or in a dialog window. These commands can also create objects or change the property settings of Quattro Pro objects. Object commands can affect objects in any Quattro Pro window. See Property Reference for a list of objects and properties you can manipulate with Object macro commands:

{ADDSERIES Block, Name}

Adds a data series to a floating graph.

{COLUMNWIDTH Block, FirstPane?, Set/Reset/Auto, Size}

Sets the width of columns in Block

{CREATEOBJECT ObjectName, x1, y1, x2, y2, <x3, y3,...>}

Creates graph or dialog objects

{DUPLICATE xoffset, yoffset}

Duplicates selected graph annotations or dialog box controls

{FLOATCOPY UpperCell, xoffset, yoffset}

Copies a floating object in the active notebook window

{FLOATCREATE Type, UpperCell, xoffset, yoffset, LowerCell, xoffset2, yoffset2, <Text> | StartCorner}

Creates a floating graph, SpeedButton, or drawn object

{FLOATMOVE UpperCell, xoffset, yoffset}

Moves a floating object in the active notebook window

{FLOATSIZE UpperCell, xoffset, yoffset, LowerCell, xoffset2, yoffset2}

Resizes a selected floating object in the active notebook window

{FLOATTEXT String}

Replaces the string in the selected floating text box with the specified string.

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY Cell, Object.Property}

Gets property setting from an object

{GETPROPERTY Cell, Property}

Gets property setting from the object currently selected

{MOVETO x,y}

Moves selected objects to coordinates x, y

{RESIZE x, y, NewWidth, NewHeight, <VertFlip?>, <HorizFlip?>}

Resizes selected objects in the active window

{ROWCOLSHOW Block, Show?, Row or Col, FirstPane?}

Shows or hides rows or columns in Block

{ROWHEIGHT Block, FirstPane?, Set/Reset, Size}

Sets the height of rows in Block

{SELECTBLOCK Block}

Selects a contiguous or noncontiguous block within the active notebook

{SELECTFLOAT ObjectID1<,ObjectID2, ...>}

Selects floating objects in the active notebook window using their object names

{SELECTOBJECT ObjectID1<,ObjectID2, ...>}

Selects objects in active window

{SETGRAPHATTR FillColor, BkgColor, FillStyle, BorderColor, BoxType}

Equivalent to setting Graph Setup and Background properties (colors are comma-separated RGB triplets in quotes)

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY Object.Property, Value}

Sets properties of objects

{SETPROPERTY Property, Setting}

Sets properties of selected object

See Also

Using Macros


Miscellaneous Macro Commands

 Print Group

These commands insert characters, comments, and perform a variety of other tasks. The slide commands at the end of the list are used to build and run slide shows:

} or { } }

Inserts a right brace, }

{ { }

Inserts a left brace, {

{ ~ }

Inserts a tilde, ~

{ }

Does nothing; lets you reserve space in a macro without stopping macro execution

{ ; String}

Lets you enter explanatory remarks in a macro

{HLINE Distance}

Scrolls window horizontally Distance lines

{HPAGE Distance}

Scrolls window horizontally Distance pages

{VLINE Distance}

Scrolls window vertically Distance lines

{VPAGE Distance}

Scrolls window vertically Distance pages

For slide show commands, see {Slide.Option}.

See Also

Using Macros


Command Equivalent Macros

 Print Group

Use the following command equivalent macros in place of menu commands. When used with @COMMAND, they return current command settings. For a list of command equivalents sorted by menu command, see Command Equivalents by Command.

Command Equivalent Macro	Menu Command

{Align.Option}	Tools|Align

{AnalysisExpert}	Help|Experts|Analysis Tools

{Application.Property}	Property|Application (Property Band)

{BlockCopy Argument(s)}	Block|Copy

{BlockDelete.Option}	Block|Delete

{BlockFill.Option}	Block|Fill

{BlockInsert.Option}	Block|Insert

{BlockMove Argument(s)}	Block|Move

{BlockMovePages Argument(s)}	Notebook|Move Pages

{BlockName.Option}	Block|Names

{BlockReformat Argument(s)}	Block|Reformat

{BlockTranspose Argument(s)}	Block|Transpose

{BlockValues Argument(s)}	Block|Values

{BudgetExpert}	Help|Experts|Budget

{ChartExpert}	Help|Experts|Graph

{ClearContents Argument(s)}	Edit|Clear Values

{ComposeFormula}	Tools|Formula Composer

{Consolidate.Option}	Tools|Consolidator

{ConsolidateExpert}	Help|Experts|Consolidate

{Controls.Option}	Tools|Object Order

{DataModel Arguments}	Tools|Data Modeling Desktop

{DbAlias Arguments}	Tools|Database Tools|Aliases

{DialogView Window}	Tools|UI Builder

{DialogWindow.Property}	Property|Dialog Box

{EditClear}	Edit|Clear

{EditCopy}	Edit|Copy

{EditCut}	Edit|Cut

{EditGoto Argument(s)}	Edit|Go To

{EditPaste}	Edit|Paste

{ExportGraphic Argument(s)}	Tools|Export Graphics

{FileClose} 	File|Close

{FileCloseAll}	no equivalent command

{FileCombine Argument(s)}	Notebook|Combine

{FileExit Argument(s)}	File|Exit

{FileExtract Argument(s)}	Notebook|Extract

{FileImport Argument(s)}	Notebook|Text Import

{FileNew}	File|New

{FileOpen Argument(s)}	File|Open

{FileRetrieve Argument(s)}	no equivalent command

{FileSave}	File|Save

{FileSaveAll}	no equivalent command

{FileSaveAs Argument(s)}	File|Save As

{FileSend<.Option>}	File|Send

{FloatOrder.Option}	Tools|Object Order

{Form <Block>}	Tools|Database Tools|Form

{Frequency.Option}	Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency

{GraphCopy Argument(s)}	Edit|Paste Special

{GraphDeactivate}	no equivalent command

{GraphDelete Argument(s)}	Graphics|Delete Graph

{GraphEdit Argument(s)}	Graphics|Edit Graph

{GraphGallery Arguments}	Graphics|Graph Gallery

{GraphNew Argument(s)}	Graphics|New Graph

{GraphSettings.Titles Argument(s)}	Graphics|Titles

{GraphSettings.Type Argument(s)}	Graphics|Type

{GraphView}	Graphics|View Graph

{GraphWindow.Property}	Property|Graph Window

{Group.Option}	Notebook|Define Group

{GroupObjects}	Tools|Group

{ImportGraphic Argument(s)}	Tools|Import Graphics

{InsertBreak}	Edit|Insert Break

{InsertObject Argument(s)}	Edit|Insert Object

{Invert.Option}	Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert

{Links.Option}	Notebook|Update Links

{MainToolbar.Replace Toolbar}	no equivalent command

{Multiply.Option}	Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply

{NamedStyle.Option}	Notebook|Define Style

{Notebook.Property}	Property|Active Notebook

{ObjectsPageGoto}	View|Objects Page

{OLE.Option}	OLE Object

{Optimizer.Option}	Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer

{Order.Option}	Tools|Object Order

{Page.Property}	Property|Active Page

{Parse.Option}	Notebook|Parse

{PasteFormat Argument(s)}	Edit|Paste Special

{PasteLink}	Edit|Paste Special

{PasteSpecial Argument(s)}	Edit|Paste Special

{PerformanceExpert}	Help|Experts|Performance

{Preview}	File|Print Preview

{Print.Option}	File|Page Setup, and File|Print

{PrinterSetup Argument(s)}	File|Print|Change Printer

{Query.Option}	Tools|Database Tools|Query

{Regression.Option}	Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression

{ResizeToSame}	Tools|Align

{RestrictInput.Option}	Block|Restrict Input or any operation that ends INPUT mode

{Scenario.Option}	Tools|Scenario Manager

{ScenarioExpert}	Help|Experts|Performance

{Search.Option}	Edit|Find And Replace

{Series.Option}	Graphics|Series

{SeriesManager.Option}	Notebook|Define Series

{Slide.Run SlideShowName} 	Graphics|Run Slide Show

{SlideShowExpert}	Help|Experts|Slide Show

{SolveFor.Option}	Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For

{Sort.Option}	Block|Sort

{SpellCheck.Option}	Tools|Spell Check

{TableQuery.Option}	Tools|Database Tools|Table Query

{TableLink.Option}	Tools|Database Tools|Table Link

{TableView}	Tools|Database Desktop

{Toolbar.Option}	Toolbar Control Menu

{UngroupObjects}	Tools|Ungroup

{WhatIf.Option}	Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If

{WhatIfExpert}	Help|Experts|What-If

{WindowArrIcon}	Window|Arrange Icons

{WindowCascade}	Window|Cascade

{WindowClose}	Control Menu|Close

{WindowHide}	Window|Hide

{WindowMaximize}	Control Menu|Maximize

{WindowMinimize}	Control Menu|Minimize

{WindowMove Argument(s)}	Control Menu|Move

{WindowNewView}	Window|New View

{WindowNext}	Control Menu|Next

{WindowPanes}	View|Panes

{WindowQPW.Option}	Quattro Pro Control Menu

{WindowRestore}	Control Menu|Restore

{WindowShow Argument(s)}	Window|Show

{WindowSize Argument(s)}	Control Menu|Size

{WindowTile}	Window|Tile

{WindowTitles Argument(s)}	View|Locked Titles

{WorkSpace.Option}	File|Workspace

See Also

Using Macros


Command Equivalents by Command

 Print Group

The following list shows the command equivalent macro for each menu command. Use the command equivalents in place of menu commands. When used with @COMMAND, they return current command settings.

Menu Command	Command Equivalent Macro

Block|Copy	{BlockCopy Argument(s)}

Block|Delete	{BlockDelete.Option}

Block|Fill	{BlockFill.Option}

Block|Insert	{BlockInsert.Option}

Block|Move	{BlockMove Argument(s)}

Block|Names	{BlockName.Option}

Block|Reformat	{BlockReformat Argument(s)}

Block|Restrict Input	{RestrictInput.Option}

Block|Sort	{Sort.Option}

Block|Transpose	{BlockTranspose Argument(s)}

Block|Values	{BlockValues Argument(s)}

Control Menu|Close	{WindowClose}

Control Menu|Maximize	{WindowMaximize}

Control Menu|Minimize	{WindowMinimize}

Control Menu|Move	{WindowMove Argument(s)}

Control Menu|Next	{WindowNext}

Control Menu|Restore	{WindowRestore}

Control Menu|Size	{WindowSize Argument(s)}

Edit|Clear	{EditClear}

Edit|Clear Values	{ClearContents Argument(s)}

Edit|Copy	{EditCopy}

Edit|Cut	{EditCut}

Edit|Find And Replace	{Search.Option}

Edit|Go To	{EditGoto Argument(s)}

Edit|Insert Break	{InsertBreak}

Edit|Insert Object	{InsertObject Argument(s)}

Edit|Paste	{EditPaste}

Edit|Paste Special	{PasteSpecial Argument(s)}, {PasteFormat Argument(s)}, {PasteLink}, and {GraphCopy Argument(s)} (depending on what kind of data is on the Clipboard)

Edit|Undo	{Undo}

File|Close	{FileClose}

File|Exit	{FileExit Argument(s)}

File|New	{FileNew}

File|Open	{FileOpen Argument(s)}

File|Page Setup	{Print.Option}

File|Print Preview	{Preview}

File|Print|Change Printer	{PrinterSetup Argument(s)}

File|Print	{Print.Option}

File|Save	{FileSave}

File|Save As	{FileSaveAs Arguments}

File|Send	{FileSend}

File|Workspace	{WorkSpace.Option}

Graphics|Delete Graph	{GraphDelete Argument(s)}

Graphics|Edit Graph	{GraphEdit Argument(s)}

Graphics|Graph Gallery	{GraphGallery Arguments}

Graphics|New Graph	{GraphNew Argument(s)}

Graphics|Run Slide Show	{Slide.Option}

Graphics|Series	{Series.Option}

Graphics|Titles	{GraphSettings.Titles Argument(s)}

Graphics|Type	{GraphSettings.Type Argument(s)}

Graphics|View Graph	{GraphView}

Help|Experts|Analysis Tools	{AnalysisExpert}

Help|Experts|Budget	{BudgetExpert}

Help|Experts|Consolidate	{ConsolidateExpert}

Help|Experts|Graph	{ChartExpert}

Help|Experts|Performance	{PerformanceExpert}

Help|Experts|Scenario	{ScenarioExpert}

Help|Experts|Slide Show	{SlideShowExpert}

Help|Experts|What-If	{WhatIfExpert}

Notebook|Combine	{FileCombine Argument(s)}

Notebook|Define Group	{Group.Option}

Notebook|Define Series	{SeriesManager.Option}

Notebook|Define Style	{NamedStyle.Option}

Notebook|Extract	{FileExtract Argument(s)}

Notebook|Insert	{BlockInsert.Option}

Notebook|Move Pages	{BlockMovePages Argument(s)}

Notebook|Parse	{Parse.Option}

Notebook|Text Import	{FileImport Argument(s)}

Notebook|Update Links	{Links.Option}

<click Property|Active Notebook>	{Notebook.Property}

<click Property|Active Page>	{Page.Property}

<click Property|Application>	{Application.Property}

<click Property|Dialog Box>	{DialogWindow.Property}

<click Property|Graph Window>	{GraphWindow.Property}

Quattro Pro Control menu	{WindowQPW.Option}

Toolbar Control Menu|Append	{Toolbar.Append Argument(s)}

Toolbar Control Menu|Insert	{Toolbar.Insert Argument(s)}

Toolbar Control Menu|Remove	{Toolbar.Remove BarName}

Toolbar Control Menu|Replace	{Toolbar.Replace Argument(s)}

Tools|Align	{Align.Option}

Tools|Align|Resize To Same	{ResizeToSame}

Tools|Consolidator	{Consolidate.Option}

Tools|Data Modeling Desktop	{DataModel Arguments}

Tools|Database Desktop	{TableView}

Tools|Database Tools|Form	{Form <Block>}

Tools|Database Tools|Aliases	{DbAlias Arguments}

Tools|Database Tools|Query	{Query.Option}

Tools|Database Tools|Table Link	{TableLink.Option}

Tools|Database Tools|Table Query	{TableQuery.Option}

Tools|Export Graphics	{ExportGraphic Argument(s)}

Tools|Group	{GroupObjects}

Tools|Import Graphics	{ImportGraphic Argument(s)}

Tools|Macro|Debugger	{STEPON}

Tools|Macro|Disable Debugger	{STEPOFF}

Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools	See Analysis Tools Macro Commands

Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency	{Frequency.Option}

Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert	{Invert.Option}

Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply	{Multiply.Option}

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer	{Optimizer.Option}

Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression	{Regression.Option}

Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For	{SolveFor.Option}

Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If	{WhatIf.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Bring Forward	{FloatOrder.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Bring To Front	{FloatOrder.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Order Controls	{Controls.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Order From	{Controls.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Order Tab Controls	{Controls.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Order Tab From	{Controls.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Send Backward	{FloatOrder.Option}

Tools|Object Order|Send To Back	{FloatOrder.Option}

Tools|Scenario Manager	{Scenario.Option}

Tools|Spell Check	{SpellCheck.Option}

Tools|UI Builder	{DialogView Window}

Tools|Ungroup	{UngroupObjects}

View|Locked Titles	{WindowTitles Argument(s)}

View|Objects Page	{ObjectsPageGoto}

View|Panes	{WindowPanes Arguments}

Window|Arrange Icons	{WindowArrIcon}

Window|Cascade	{WindowCascade}

Window|Hide	{WindowHide}

Window|New View	{WindowNewView}

Window|Show	{WindowShow Argument(s)}

Window|Tile	{WindowTile}

See Also

Using Macros


Analysis Tools Macro Commands

 Print Group

Analysis Tools commands let you perform analyses of numerical data. They are equivalent to the tools available when you choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools.

{ANOVA1 InBlock, OutBlock, <Grouped>, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>}

One-way analysis of variance

{ANOVA2 InBlock, OutBlock, SampleRows, <Alpha>}

Two-way analysis of variance with replication

{ANOVA3 InBlock, OutBlock, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>}

Two-way analysis of variance without replication

{DESCR InBlock, OutBlock, <Grouped>, <Labels(0|1)>, <Summary(0|1)>, <Largest>, <Smallest>, <Confidence>}

Creates a table of descriptive statistics that characterize one or more samples

{EXPON InBlock, OutBlock, <Damping>, <StdErrs(0|1)>}

Exponentially smooths a series of values

{FOURIER InBlock, OutBlock, <Inverse(0|1)>}

Performs a fast Fourier transformation on a block of data

{FTESTV InBlock1, InBlock2, OutBlock, <Labels(0|1)>}

Performs a two-sample F-Test to compare population variances

{HISTOGRAM InBlock, OutBlock, <BinBlock>, <Pareto(0|1)>, <Cum(0|1)>}

Calculates the probability and cumulative distributions for a sample based on a series of bins

{MCORREL InBlock,OutBlock,<Grouped>,<Labels(0|1)>}

Returns the correlation matrix between two or more data sets

{MCOVAR InBlock,OutBlock,<Grouped>,<Labels(0|1)>}

Returns the covariance matrix between two or more data sets

{MOVEAVG InBlock,OutBlock,<Interval>,<StdErrs(0|1)>}

Returns a moving average for the values in a sample

{MTGAMT <OutBlock>,<Rate>,<Term>,<OrigBal>,<EndBal>,<LastYear>}

Generates an amortization schedule for a mortgage

{MTGREFI <OutBlock>, <CurrBal>, <CurrRate>, <RemTerm>, <CandPctFees>, <CandRate>}

Generates a table of information relating to refinancing a mortgage

{PTTESTM InBlock1, InBlock2, OutBlock, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>, <Difference>}

Performs a paired two-sample Student's t-Test for means

{PTTESTV InBlock1, InBlock2, OutBlock,<Labels(0|1)>,<Alpha>}

Performs a Student's t-Test using two independent samples with unequal variances

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 1, Seed, LowerBound, UpperBound}

Returns random values from a uniform distribution

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 2, Seed, Mean, SDev}

Returns random values from a normal distribution

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 3, Seed, Prob}

Returns random values from a Bernoulli distribution

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 4, Seed, Prob, Trials}

Returns random values from a binomial distribution

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 5, Seed, Lambda}

Returns random values from a Poisson distribution

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 6, Seed, LowerBound, UpperBound, Step, RepeatNumber,RepeatSequence}

Returns random values from a patterned distribution

{RANDOM OutBlock, Columns, Rows, 7, Seed, InBlock}

Returns random values from a discrete distribution

{RANKPERC InBlock, OutBlock, <Grouped>, <Labels(0|1)>}

Computes the ordinal and percent rank of each value in a sample

{REGRESS InBlockY, InBlockX, YIntZero(0|1), Labels(0|1), Confidence, SumOutBlock, Residuals(0|1), StdResidual(0|1), <ResidualOutBlock>, <ProbOutBlock>}

Performs multiple linear regression analysis

{SAMPLE InBlock, OutBlock, Type, Rate}

Returns a periodic or random sample of values from InBlock

{TTESTM InBlock1, InBlock2, OutBlock, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>, <Difference>}

Performs a Student's t-Test using two independent samples with equal variances

{ZTESTM InBlock1, InBlock2, OutBlock, <Labels(0|1)>, <Alpha>, <Difference>, <Variance1>, <Variance2>}

Performs a two-sample z-Test for means, assuming known variances for each sample

See Also

Using Macros

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Macro Command Index

Symbols

{ }

{ ; }

{?}

A

{ABS}

{ACTIVATE}

{ADDMENU}

{ADDMENUITEM}

{ADDSERIES}

{Align.Option}

{ALT}

{AnalysisExpert}

{ANOVA1}

{ANOVA2}

{ANOVA3}

{ANSIREAD}

{ANSIREADLN}

{ANSIWRITE}

{ANSIWRITELN}

{Application.Property}

{ASSIGN}

B

{BACKSPACE}

{BACKTAB}

{BEEP}

{BIGLEFT}

{BIGRIGHT}

{BLANK}

{BlockCopy}

{BlockDelete.Option}

{BlockFill.Option}

{BlockInsert.Option}

{BlockMove}

{BlockMovePages}

{BlockName.Option}

{BlockReformat}

{BlockTranspose}

{BlockValues}

{BRANCH}

{BREAK}

{BREAKOFF}

{BREAKON}

{BS}

{BudgetExpert}

C

{CALC}

{CAPOFF}

{CAPON}

{ChartExpert}

{CHOOSE}

{CLEAR}

{ClearContents}

{CLOSE}

{COLUMNWIDTH}

{ComposeFormula}

{Consolidate.Option}

{ConsolidateExpert}

{CONTENTS}

{Controls.Option}

{CR}

{CREATEOBJECT}

{CTRL}

D

{D}

{DATAMODEL}

{DATE}

{DbAlias}

{DEFINE}

{DEL}

{DELETE}

{DELETEMENU}

{DELETEMENUITEM}

{DELVAR}

{DESCR}

{DialogView Window}

{DialogWindow.Property}

{DISPATCH}

{DLL}

{DLL.Load}

{DODIALOG}

{DOWN}

{DUPLICATE}

E

{EDIT}

{EditClear}

{EditCopy}

{EditCut}

{EditGoto}

{EditPaste}

{END}

{ESC}

{ESCAPE}

{EXEC}

{EXECAUTO}

{EXECUTE}

{EXPON}

{ExportGraphic}

F

{FileClose}

{FileCloseAll}

{FileCombine}

{FileExit}

{FileExtract}

{FileImport}

{FileNew}

{FileOpen}

{FileRetrieve}

{FILESIZE}

{FileSave}

{FileSaveAll}

{FileSaveAs}

{FileSend}

{FLOATCOPY}

{FLOATCREATE}

{FLOATMOVE}

{FloatOrder.Option}

{FLOATSIZE}

{FLOATTEXT}

{FOR}

{FORBREAK}

{FORM}

{FOURIER}

{Frequency.Option}

{FTESTV}

{FUNCTIONS}

G

{GET}

{GETDIRECTORYCONTENTS}

{GETLABEL}

{GETNUMBER}

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{GETPOS}

{GETPROPERTY}

{GETWINDOWLIST}

{GOTO}

{GRAPH}

{GRAPHCHAR}

{GraphCopy}

{GraphDeactivate}

{GraphDelete}

{GraphEdit}

{GraphGallery}

{GraphNew}

{GraphSettings.Titles}

{GraphSettings.Type}

{GraphView}

{GraphWindow.Property}

{Group.Option}

{GroupObjects}

H

{HELP}

{HISTOGRAM}

{HLINE}

{HOME}

{HPAGE}

I

{IF}

{IFAUTOOBJ}

{IFKEY}

{IMFORMAT}

{ImportGraphic}

{INDICATE}

{INITIATE}

{INS}

{INSERT}

{InsertBreak}

{InsertObject}

{INSOFF}

{INSON}

{INSPECT}

{Invert.Option}

L

{L}

{LEFT}

{LET}

{Links.Option}

{LOOK}

M

{MACROS}

{MainToolbar.Replace}

{MARK}

{MCORREL}

{MCOVAR}

{MENU}

{MENUBRANCH}

{MENUCALL}

{MESSAGE}

{MOVEAVG}

{MOVETO}

{MTGAMT}

{MTGREFI}

{Multiply.Option}

N

{NAME}

{NamedStyle.Option}

{NAVIGATE.Option}

{NEXTPANE}

{NEXTTOPWIN}

{NEXTWIN}

{Notebook.Property}

{NUMOFF}

{NUMON}

O

{OBJECTSPAGEGOTO}

{OLE.Option}

{ONERROR}

{OPEN}

{Optimizer.Option}

{Order.Option}

P

{Page.Property}

{PANELOFF}

{PANELON}

{Parse.Option}

{PasteFormat}

{PasteLink}

{PasteSpecial}

{PAUSEMACRO}

{PerformanceExpert}

{PGDN}

{PGUP}

{POKE}

{Preview}

{Print.Option}

{PrinterSetup}

{PTTESTM}

{PTTESTV}

{PUT}

{PUTBLOCK}

{PUTBLOCK2}

{PUTCELL}

{PUTCELL2}

Q

{QGOTO}

{QUERY}

{Query.Option}

{QUIT}

R

{R}

{RANDOM}

{RANKPERC}

{READ}

{READLN}

{RECALC}

{RECALCCOL}

{REGRESS}

{Regression.Option}

{REQUEST}

{RESIZE}

{ResizeToSame}

{RESTART}

{RestrictInput.Option}

{RETURN}

{RIGHT}

{ROWCOLSHOW}

{ROWHEIGHT}

S

{SAMPLE}

{Scenario.Option}

{ScenarioExpert}

{SCROLLOFF}

{SCROLLON}

{Search.Option}

{SELECTBLOCK}

{SELECTFLOAT}

{SELECTOBJECT}

{Series.Option}

{SeriesManager.Option}

{SETGRAPHATTR}

{SETLCID}

{SETMENUBAR}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETPOS}

{SETPROPERTY}

{SHIFT}

{Slide.Option}

{SlideShowExpert}

{SolveFor.Option}

{Sort.Option}

{SPEEDFILL}

{SPEEDFORMAT}

{SPEEDFORMAT.Option}

{SPEEDSUM}

{SpellCheck.Option}

{STEP}

{STEPOFF}

{STEPON}

{Subroutine}

T

{TAB}

{TABLE}

{TableLink.Option}

{TableQuery.Option}

{TableView}

{TERMINATE}

{Toolbar.Option}

{TTESTM}

U

{U}

{UNDO}

{UngroupObjects}

{UP}

V

{VLINE}

{VPAGE}

W

{WAIT}

{WhatIf.Option}

{WhatIfExpert}

{WINDOW}

{WindowArrIcon}

{WindowCascade}

{WindowClose}

{WindowHide}

{WindowMaximize}

{WindowMinimize}

{WindowMove}

{WindowNewView}

{WindowNext}

{WindowPanes}

{WindowQPW.Option}

{WindowRestore}

{WindowShow}

{WindowSize}

{WINDOWSOFF}

{WINDOWSON}

{WindowTile}

{WindowTitles}

{WorkSpace.Option}

{WRITE}

{WRITELN}

Z

{ZOOM}

{ZTESTM}


Quattro Pro DOS Compatible Commands

This command or menu equivalent is provided for compatibility with the DOS version of Quattro Pro. To learn more about it, see the Quattro Pro for DOS @Functions and Macros guide.

See Also

Macros

Quattro Pro for DOS Macros

Using Macros


New Macro Commands

For the complete list of Quattro Pro macro commands, see the Macro Command Index.

{ADDSERIES}

{AnalysisExpert}

{ASSIGN}

{BudgetExpert}

{ChartExpert}

{ComposeFormula}

{ConsolidateExpert}

{DbAlias}

{DELVAR}

{DUPLICATE}

{EXECAUTO}

{FileSend}

{FLOATCOPY}

{FLOATTEXT}

{GraphDeactivate}

{GraphGallery}

{IFAUTOOBJ}

{MainToolbar.Replace}

{Navigate.Option}

{PerformanceExpert}

{PUTBLOCK2}

{PUTCELL2}

{ScenarioExpert}

{SeriesManager}

{SETLCID}

{SlideShowExpert}

{SPEEDFORMAT.Option}

{TableLink.Option}

{WhatIfExpert}

{WindowQPW.Option}

See Also

Macros

Using Macros


Block Menu

The Block menu is available only from a notebook window.

Move 	Lets you move data from one area to another.

Copy 	Lets you copy data from one area to another.

Insert 	Lets you insert blank rows, columns, blocks, or pages.

Delete 	Lets you delete rows, columns, blocks, or pages.

Fill 	Automatically enters a series of values into a block.

Sort 	Arranges records in a database block according to entries in specified fields.

Names 	Lets you name blocks so that you can refer to them by name instead of by their coordinates.

Transpose	Reverses columns and rows.

Values	Copies values calculated by formulas.

Reformat 	Formats a block of text to fill given columns.

Restrict Input 	Restricts movement of the selector to cells that are not protected.


Block | Move

The Block|Move command moves the contents and properties of a block from one location to another. It overwrites existing data in the new location.

Dialog Box Options

From

The block to be moved. Legal entries are block coordinates or named blocks (but not noncontiguous blocks). Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

To

The destination block for the moved data. Enter the upper left cell of the target block.

As when you use the Clipboard commands, Edit|Cut and Edit|Paste, in sequence, using Block|Move moves a cell or a block, including any floating objects fully enclosed in the block. However, to move data or objects other than cell blocks, use the Clipboard commands.

The advantages of Block|Move over the Clipboard commands are

You can specify blocks to be moved by name.

Block|Move works a bit faster than Edit|Cut followed by Edit|Paste.

If you are already familiar with Block|Move, or if you have macros that use it, it is more convenient.

See Also

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Dragging and Dropping

Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving

Using Named Blocks


Block | Copy

The Block|Copy command copies the contents and properties of a block from one location to another. It overwrites existing data in the new location.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Model Copy button (Block Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

From

The block to be copied. Legal entries are block coordinates or named blocks, including noncontiguous blocks. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

To

The destination block for the moved data. Enter the upper left cell of the target block to make a single copy. If the source block is single cell,  column, or row, you can make multiple copies by selecting a block of cells as the destination.

Model Copy

If the source block contains formulas with absolute references to cells within it, the formulas are adjusted, but remain absolute. See Using the Model Copy Option for details.

Block|Copy copies a cell, a block, or noncontiguous blocks the same as using the Clipboard commands, Edit|Copy and Edit|Paste, in sequence. To copy objects other than cell blocks, use the Clipboard commands. The advantages of Block|Copy over the Clipboard commands are

You can specify blocks to be copied by name.

Block|Copy works a bit faster than Edit|Copy followed by Edit|Paste.

Block|Copy provides a unique, time-saving feature called Model Copy. Use it to copy blocks that contain absolute references to cells within the copied block.

If you are already familiar with Block|Copy, or if you have macros that use it, it is more convenient.

See Also

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving

Using Named Blocks


Block | Insert

The Block|Insert command inserts blank columns, rows, or pages anywhere in the notebook. You can also insert partial rows, columns, or pages. Wherever you insert, existing data is pushed down, to the right, or to the back of the notebook to make room.

Note:	To insert the contents of a different notebook file into the active notebook, choose Notebook|Insert.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Insert button (Main or Block Toolbars)

Dialog Box Options

Block

The size of the block to be inserted; the upper left cell is the first cell entry to be shifted down. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

To insert only one row, enter any cell address in the row to insert before, such as A:B3. To insert multiple rows, enter coordinates of a block that spans the same number of rows you want to insert. For example, to insert three rows before row 3 (on page A), enter A:B3..B5.

To insert only one column, enter any cell address in the column to insert before, such as A:B3. To insert multiple columns, enter coordinates of a block that spans the same number of columns you want to insert. For example, to insert three columns before column B (on page A), enter A:B3..D3.

To insert only one page, enter any cell address on the page to insert before, such as B:B3. To insert multiple pages, enter a 3-D block starting with the page to insert before and spanning the same number of pages you want to insert. For example, to insert three pages before page B, enter B:B3..D:B3.

Dimension

The dimension of the block to be inserted. Select either Columns, Rows, or Pages.

Entire

Inserts whole rows, columns, or pages.

Partial

Inserts only partial rows, columns, or pages (the Block option entry).

See Also

Inserting a File into a Notebook

Inserting Blocks

Inserting Pages

Inserting Rows or Columns


Block | Delete

The Block|Delete command deletes entire or partial columns, rows, or pages anywhere in the notebook. Deleting space is different from erasing data with Edit|Clear, Clear Contents, or the Del key. Deleting with Block|Delete (or with the Delete button in the Toolbar) makes remaining rows, columns, or pages move to take up the deleted space.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Delete button (Main or Block Toolbars)

Dialog Box Options

Block

The size of the block to be deleted. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

To delete only one row, enter any cell address in the row to delete, such as A:B3. To delete multiple rows, enter coordinates of a block that spans rows you want to delete. For example, to delete three rows starting with row 3 (on page A), enter A:B3..B5.

To delete only one column, enter any cell address in the column to delete, such as A:B3. To delete multiple columns, enter coordinates of a block that spans the columns you want to delete. For example, to delete three columns starting with column B (on page A), enter A:B3..D3.

To delete only one page, enter any cell address on the page to delete, such as B:B3. To delete multiple pages, enter a 3-D block spanning the pages you want to delete. For example, to delete three pages starting with page B, enter B:B3..D:B3.

Dimension

The dimension of the block to be deleted. Select either Columns, Rows, or Pages.

Entire

Deletes whole rows, columns, or pages.

Partial

Deletes only partial rows, columns, or pages (the Block option entry).

Caution: If you delete space that is within the boundaries of a named block or a block referenced by a formula, Quattro Pro adjusts all references to the block. However, if one of the deleted cells is a coordinate cell that defines a block, the block becomes invalid and any formulas or names referencing the block show ERR. Any formulas that reference a cell within a deleted column, row, or page also appear as ERR.

See Also

Deleting Blocks

Deleting Pages

Deleting Rows or Columns

Using Named Blocks


Block | Fill

The Block|Fill command automatically fills a block with values that increase or decrease in a specific pattern.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 SpeedFill button (Main or Block Toolbars)

Dialog Box Options

Blocks

The block to fill with values. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Start

The first value in the series. Enter a number, a formula, a date, or a time.

Step

The constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with the Start value or the previous value.

Stop

The limit for the fill values.

Order

The Column setting fills by moving down columns, starting with the leftmost column. The Row setting fills across rows, starting with the top row.

Series

The type of fill operation to perform. If the Start value is a number or a formula, you can choose Linear (addition), Growth (multiplication), or Power (exponentiation). If the Start value is a date or time, addition is assumed, and you can use one of the remaining Series settings to determine the time unit (Year, Month, and so on) to use.

See Also

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Using SpeedFill


Block | Sort

Block|Sort arranges records (rows) in the order you specify, based on the entries in one or more fields (sort keys). This command displays the Sort dialog box.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 SpeedSort button (Main or Block Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

Block

The block to be sorted, including row labels, if any, but excluding column headings. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Column

Up to five columns of sort keys, in the order they are to be sorted. For example, if you want to sort a sales prospect file, the first key might be postal zip code with the last name of your contact as the second key.

Ascending

By default, each key is sorted in ascending order from smallest to largest (A-Z and 0-9). To sort in descending order, uncheck the box.

Data

Whether values or labels appear first in the sorted column. The values are placed in a sorted group separate from the labels (which are also sorted).

Labels

Whether text sorts in Dictionary order (ordinary alphabetizing rules) or Character Code order (according to character number--for example, uppercase letters before lowercase).

Reset

Clears all entries and restores defaults.

See Also

Performing a Sort

Sort Keys

Sort Order

Tips on Sorting


Block | Names

The Block|Names command assigns and deletes block names, and lets you create a table of block names in a notebook. Block names provide a more efficient way of referencing a block than using its coordinates.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+F3

Dialog Box Options

Name

The name to assign to the block. The name can be up to 63 characters long. For more information, see Guidelines for Naming Blocks.

Block(s)

The coordinates of the block to be named. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Add

Adds a name for the specified block to the block names list.

Delete

Deletes a selected block name. When you delete a block name, the entries in the block itself are unaffected. Also, formulas referencing the name change to reference the block's coordinates; their results do not change.

Delete All

Deletes all existing block names from the notebook. Formulas that reference named blocks change so they refer to block coordinates instead of names.

Generate

Opens the Generate Block Names dialog box, which lets you creates block names from adjacent labels. See Generate Block Names Dialog Box for details.

Labels

Assigns names to single cells using adjacent labels. See Create Names from Labels Dialog Box for details.

Output

Creates a table in the notebook listing all named blocks by name and location. See Name Table Dialog Box for details.

See Also

Deleting Block Names

Making a Table of Named Blocks

Naming Blocks and Cells from Labels

Naming Blocks

Naming Single-Cell Blocks from Labels

Using Block Names in Formulas

Using Named Blocks


Create Names from Labels Dialog Box

The Create Names From Labels Dialog Box assigns names to single cells using adjacent labels.

Dialog Box Options

Blocks

The coordinates of the labels to use as block names. If the entries are values instead of labels, they are ignored. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Directions

The direction from the Blocks entry to find the cells to be named. For example, the Right setting assigns names to cells to the right of the cells in the Blocks entry.

See Also

Deleting Block Names

Making a Table of Named Blocks

Naming Blocks and Cells from Labels

Naming Blocks

Naming Single-Cell Blocks from Labels

Using Block Names in Formulas

Using Named Blocks


Name Table Dialog Box

The Name Table Dialog Box creates a table of entries in the notebook listing all named blocks by name and location. The option is:

Block

The address of the upper left cell where you want the table to be placed. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Caution: Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each block name. Quattro Pro overwrites existing data in cells it uses for the table.

The first column of the table lists block names alphabetically. The second indicates the corresponding block coordinates.

Quattro Pro does not update a named block table. If you add, change, or delete block names, you must re-create the table to reflect the changes. Putting a SpeedButton next to this table is a handy way of updating the table quickly.

See Also

Creating SpeedButtons

Deleting Block Names

Naming Blocks and Cells from Labels

Naming Blocks

Naming Single-Cell Blocks from Labels

Using Block Names in Formulas

Using Named Blocks


Generate Block Names Dialog Box

The Generate Block Names dialog box automatically uses selected labels as names for adjacent blocks and cells.

Dialog Box Options

Blocks

Specifies the block of cells to name, including the labels to use. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

When checked:

Under Top Row

Names each column included in Blocks by the label in its first row.

Right of Leftmost Column

Names each row included in Blocks by the label in its leftmost column.

Above Bottom Row

Names each column included in Blocks by the label in its bottom row.

Left of Rightmost Column

Names each row included in Blocks by the label in its rightmost column.

Name Cells at Intersections

Names each cell included in Blocks by the label in the top row of each column combined with the label in the leftmost cell of each row.

Names can be up to 63 characters long. Quattro Pro truncates longer names.

See Also

Deleting Block Names

Naming Blocks and Cells from Labels

Naming Blocks

Naming Single-Cell Blocks from Labels

Using Block Names in Formulas

Using Named Blocks


Block | Transpose

The Block|Transpose command reverses columns and rows within a selected block.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Transpose button (Block Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

From

The block to be transposed. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

To

The upper left cell of the block to which you want to copy the transposed data. Do not specify a cell within the source block--you will disarrange the data if you do. Be sure also that there is enough room for the transposed data, which overwrites any existing data in the destination block.

Caution: Do not transpose cells containing formulas. Cell references are not adjusted properly when you use Block|Transpose.

See Also

Transposing Columns and Rows


Block | Values

The Block|Values command copies the values calculated by formulas without copying the formulas. Resulting values are usually numeric, but they can also be string values, depending on your formulas. You can copy these values to another part of the notebook or copy them over the formulas that computed them.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Values button (Block Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

From

The block of values to be copied. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

To

The upper left cell of the block to which you want to copy the values. Be sure that there is enough room for the copied values, which overwrite any existing data in the destination block.

See Also

Converting Formulas to Values


Block | Reformat

The Block|Reformat command lets you adjust word wrapping in a series of label entries as though they were in a paragraph. You can enter text as a long label or a series of long labels, then reorganize the text as a paragraph, taking up as many cells or columns as you want. The option is:

Block

The coordinates of the block to contain the reformatted text. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

The upper left cell should be the first cell to reformat. If the lower right cell is in the same row, the text fills up as many rows as necessary to display the text within the columns containing those cells. If the lower right cell is in a row below, the text is reformatted within the block if there is enough room.

See Also

Reformatting Text Entries


Block | Restrict Input

The Block|Restrict Input command limits movement of the selector to a selected block of cells that are not protected. It also deactivates menus, so that the only changes that can be made to the notebook are to data in the unprotected cells.

This command is used mostly in macro applications, to limit access to the notebook. To return to Ready mode and restore full notebook access, press Esc or press Enter with no data on the input line.

The Restrict Input dialog box displays a single option:

Input Block

Enter the name of the block where you want to allow data entry. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

See Also

Limiting Data Entry


Dialog Menu

The Dialog menu appears when you open a dialog window.

New Dialog	Creates a new dialog box.

New Toolbar	Creates a new Toolbar.

Open Toolbar	Displays an existing Toolbar for editing.

Save Toolbar	Saves the active Toolbar under its current name.

Save Toolbar As	Saves the active Toolbar to a user-specified name and location.

Close Toolbar	Closes the active Toolbar.


Dialog | New Dialog

The Dialog|New Dialog command opens a new dialog window. You can have several dialog windows open at once.

New dialog boxes contain an OK button and a Cancel button. A default name is automatically assigned to the dialog. All dialog boxes are stored on the Objects page and are saved with the notebook.

From the dialog window, you can add a name and title for the dialog box, and then add controls.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 New Dialog button (Objects Toolbar)

See Also

Creating a Dialog Box


Dialog | New Toolbar

The Dialog|New Toolbar command displays an empty Toolbar window that you can use to build a custom Toolbar. Use the Controls Toolbar to add controls to the custom Toolbar. Use Tools|Links to make Toolbar controls perform various functions.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Dialog | Open Toolbar

The Dialog|Open Toolbar command displays an existing Toolbar for editing. Use the dialog window Toolbar to add controls to the Toolbar and use Dialog|Links to make Toolbar controls perform various functions.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Dialog | Save Toolbar

The Dialog|Save Toolbar command saves the active Toolbar under its current name. If the dialog still has its default name (for example, TLBAR1.BAR), Dialog|Save Toolbar displays the Save File dialog box.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Dialog | Save Toolbar As

The Dialog|Save Toolbar As command saves the active Toolbar under a specified name, in a specified location.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Dialog | Close Toolbar

The Dialog|Close Toolbar command closes the active Toolbar. If you have not yet saved recent changes, Quattro Pro prompts you to save the Toolbar file.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Edit Menu

Undo 	Reverses the last "undoable" action you took.

Cut	Moves data from the notebook to the Windows Clipboard.

Copy	Places a copy of selected data in the Windows Clipboard.

Paste	Inserts data from the Windows Clipboard.

Clear 	Erases the contents and resets the properties of a block of cells.

Clear Values 	Erases the values but retains the properties of a block of cells.

Paste Special 	Pastes the properties or values of a Quattro Pro block; creates links between notebook cells, or creates DDE links to other Windows applications; pastes the Clipboard selection in the format you choose; or pastes the attributes of a copied graph into another graph(s).

Select All	Selects all cells on a notebook page, objects in a graph window, or controls in a dialog window.

Go To 	Selects the specified block or cell and displays it onscreen.

Find and Replace 	Searches for values and optionally replaces them.

Insert Break	Forces a page break during output.

Insert Object	Inserts an embedded OLE object into the active page.


Edit | Undo

The Edit|Undo command lets you reverse most kinds of operations after you have carried them out. For example, if you make an entry in a cell, then change your mind and want to remove it, choose Edit|Undo immediately after making the entry. The entry will be removed and whatever was previously entered in the cell will be returned.

You can identify your last action by the wording of the Undo command. For example, after making a cell entry, the Undo command reads "Undo Entry." After changing the Zoom Factor property in the notebook Object Inspector, the Undo command reads "Undo Notebook Property."

If you change your mind again after using Undo and want to reinstate the first change, choose Edit|Redo. As with Undo, Redo specifies the type of operation available to be redone.

Some actions are undoable only if you enable Undo in the application Object Inspector. You can identify these actions because the Undo command is dimmed immediately after the action is taken. In all situations except where program speed and available memory is absolutely crucial, it is recommended that you keep Undo enabled.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+Z

Toolbar:	 Undo/Redo button

See Also

Enabling the Undo Command


Edit | Cut

The Edit|Cut command removes the selected data or object and its properties from the notebook and places it on the Windows Clipboard. The Clipboard entry can then be pasted with Edit|Paste. The Clipboard holds only one entry at a time, so if you cut or copy another selection to the Clipboard, your previous entry is replaced.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+X

Toolbar:	 Cut button

See Also

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Edit|Paste Special

Edit|Paste

Using Named Blocks


Edit | Copy

The Edit|Copy command makes a copy of the selected data or object and places the copy on the Windows Clipboard. The Clipboard entry can then be pasted with Edit|Paste. The Clipboard holds only one entry at a time, so if you cut or copy another selection to the Clipboard, your previous entry is replaced.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+C

Toolbar:	 Copy button

See Also

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Edit|Paste Special

Edit|Paste

Using Named Blocks


Edit | Paste

The Edit|Paste command inserts data or an object from the Windows Clipboard into the selected location in the active notebook. You can continue to paste the same data to different locations until you cut or copy another selection to the Windows Clipboard; it replaces the previous Clipboard entry.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+V

Toolbar:	 Paste button

See Also

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Edit|Copy

Edit|Cut

Edit|Paste Special

Using Named Blocks

Variations on Pasting


Edit | Clear

The Edit|Clear command erases the contents and resets the properties of a block of cells to current defaults. To erase contents but retain a block's properties, use the Edit|Clear Values command.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Clear button (Block Toolbar)

See Also

Erasing Entries

Using Named Blocks


Edit | Clear Values

The Edit|Clear Values command erases the values but retains the properties of a block of cells. To erase values and reset a block's properties, use the Edit|Clear command.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Del

Toolbar:	 Clear Values button (Block Toolbar)

See Also

Erasing Entries

Using Named Blocks


Edit | Paste Special

Edit|Paste Special performs several different functions depending on the data that has been copied to the Clipboard. You can use Edit|Paste Special to

Paste either the properties or data of a Quattro Pro block that has been placed on the Clipboard.

Create links between notebook cells, or create DDE links to other Windows applications.

Paste the Clipboard selection in the format you choose.

Paste the attributes of a copied graph into one or more other graphs.

The dialog box that appears when you choose Edit|Paste Special depends on the type of data that has been copied to the Clipboard.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Paste Link button (Block Toolbar)

See Also

Choosing the Data Type to Paste

Copying Graphs Within a Notebook

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Edit|Copy

Edit|Cut

Edit|Paste

Pasting Links

Using Paste Special


Edit | Select All

The Edit|Select All command selects all cells on a notebook page, objects in a graph window, or controls in a dialog window.

You can also select all cells on a notebook page by clicking the area just to the left of the Column A label (above Row 1).

Note:	To keep the size of your notebook files small, format only cells that contain data. Do not use Edit|Select All to select and format entire notebook pages.

Shortcuts

Select All button (upper left of notebook window)


Edit | Go To

The Edit|Goto command lets you move to named blocks (to identify or modify them) or move quickly to distant parts of the notebook. The selector moves to whatever location you choose with the command.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	F5

Dialog Box Options

Reference

The cell address or block coordinates to go to. You can include a page prefix and a notebook prefix, for example, [BUDGET]D:Z36.

Block Names

The named block to go to.

Pages

The page to go to.

See Also

Using Named Blocks

Using the GoTo Command


Edit | Find and Replace

Edit|Find and Replace searches for the specified value or string in the selected block. If it finds a match you can replace it with a new value or continue to the next match.

Dialog Box Options

Block(s)

The block or blocks to search. To search the entire page, this edit field should be blank. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block(s) from the notebook.

Find

The group of characters to be found in labels, values, or formulas. These characters are called the find string.

Replace

The group of characters to substitute for characters found. This is called the replacement string.

Formula

Looks at the formulas as they appear in the input line.

Value

Looks at the results of the formulas, as they appear in the cells.

Condition

Treats the find string as a conditional expression. For example, a find string of B13>500 with Condition chosen looks for the first value that is greater than 500, starting with cell B13. To search starting from the active cell (which is usually the upper left cell), substitute a question mark for the cell address, for example, ? > 500. See Types of Operators for the list of logical operators that can be used in conditional find strings.

Columns First

Sets the direction of the search. By default, this option is unchecked for searching across rows starting with row 1. When checked, searching occurs down columns starting with column 1.

Match Whole

Determines whether the find string must be all or part of a cell entry. When this option is unchecked (the default), searching will find partial matches as well as exact matches. For example, if the find string is cat, catamaran and scatter are found as well as cat.

Case Sensitive

Controls whether entries must exactly match the find string. When this option is unchecked (the default), searching will find strings regardless of capitalization. For example, if the find string is HARPER, Harper, harper, and HaRpEr are found as well as HARPER.

Next

Begins or resumes a forward search without replacing found entries.

Previous

Begins or resumes a backward search without replacing found entries.

Replace

Lets you decide on an individual basis whether to replace each string found.

Replace All

Replaces all found strings without stopping.

Reset

Clears any entries in the dialog box and reinstates the defaults.

Close

Cancels the find operation without making a change.

If you are using a conditional expression, you can only find values; they are not replaced when found. If you are searching for a label with Match Whole checked, you must either include the label prefix or set Look In to Value.

See Also

Creating Formulas

Find and Replace Options

Searching for Records


Edit | Insert Break

The Edit|Insert Break command manually inserts a page break for printing. Quattro Pro automatically inserts page breaks when printing, but those page breaks may not fall in the ideal location for the layout of your data. Page breaks inserted this way are stored with the notebook and remain there until you delete them.

See Also

Inserting Page Breaks


Edit | Insert Object

The Edit|Insert Object command inserts an embedded OLE object into the active page.

When you choose Edit|Insert Object, the Insert Object dialog box appears. The Object Type list displays the list of available OLE server applications from the Windows 3.1 registration database. When you choose a server, it opens a window on top of Quattro Pro where you can create an object. When you finish work on the object and choose File|Exit or Update, the object is inserted at the position of the active cell in Quattro Pro. The size of the object is determined by the server application.

Like other floating objects, OLE objects can be resized by selecting one of the object's handles. While the handle is selected (when the object has not been activated for in-place editing), the current size is displayed in the input line as a percentage of the size specified by the OLE server.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Insert Object button (Draw Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

Create New

When selected, provides server application tools and commands so you can create a new object of the selected Object Type in the active notebook.

Create From File

When selected, lets you specify a file to insert as an OLE object into the active notebook. You can click the Browse button to locate the file and check the Link box to link the new object for automatic updating. Otherwise, an embedded object is created.

Object Type

Displays the list of available OLE server applications.

Display As Icon

When checked, displays the new OLE object as an icon instead of data, text, or graphics.

Change Icon

When Display As Icon is checked, Change Icon lets you select another icon for the OLE object.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Edit|Paste Special

Layering Floating Objects

Using OLE and DDE


File Menu

New	Opens a new, blank notebook window, or a notebook based on a QuickTemplate.

Open	Opens a new window and loads a file into it.

Close	Closes the active window along with its notebook.

Save	Stores the current notebook under the current name.

Save As	Stores the current notebook under the name you give it.

Print	Sends output to the specified destination.

Print Preview	Displays the current output selection onscreen for review.

Page Setup	Specifies the page format of output.

Send	Sends notebook pages or entire notebooks to another user through a variety of communications services.

Publish	Makes a notebook available to other workgroup members.

Subscribe	Inserts mailed and published notebook pages into your own notebook, and saves mailed notebooks to disk.

GroupWise	Access messages, personal and group appointments, tasks, and notes; this command is available only if you have GroupWise installed when you install Quattro Pro.

Workspace	Saves or loads a group of notebooks.

Exit	Closes all open windows and exits Quattro Pro.

See Also

File-Handling Options


File | New

File|New creates a new, blank notebook window or a notebook window based on a QuickTemplate.

Note:	If the Enable QuickTemplates option in the application File Options property is unchecked, QuickTemplates are not available when you choose File|New; instead, a new, blank notebook appears (see Enabling QuickTemplates for details).

The new notebook, which overlays existing windows, is named NOTEBK#.WB2, where # is the number of windows you have opened since starting Quattro Pro. You can change the name when you save the file.

You can have multiple windows open at a time, with different notebooks in each. Each new window overlays other open windows. You can reselect an open window by clicking any visible part of it, or by selecting it from the list at the bottom of the Window menu.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+N

Toolbar:	 New Notebook button

Dialog Box Options

Plain Notebook

Creates a new, blank notebook window.

From QuickTemplate

Creates a new notebook window based on the selected template from the QuickTemplates list.

QuickTemplates

Displays the list of QuickTemplates you can use. When you select a QuickTemplate, the Description and File Name fields change to provide information about the template. To create a new QuickTemplate, select the template named QuickTemplate Builder; see Creating a New QuickTemplate for details.

Description

Describes the selected QuickTemplate.

File Name

Displays the file name for the selected QuickTemplate.

See Also

Creating a New File

Using Notebook Templates

Using Quattro Pro Windows


File | Open

The File|Open command loads an existing notebook file into Quattro Pro. The new window overlays other open notebook windows.

If the file has a password, a dialog box appears with space for entering it. If the password is incorrect, Quattro Pro displays an error message and cancels the Open command.

See File-Handling Options for further information on File|Open dialog box options.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+O

Toolbar:	 Open Notebook button

See Also

Opening a File

Translating Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


File | Close

The File|Close command removes the active Quattro Pro notebook window and its associated graph and dialog windows and views from the desktop. This command is especially useful when system memory resources are strained by keeping large files open.

If a notebook has unsaved changes, a dialog box appears asking if you want to save your changes. If you choose Yes, the File|Save As dialog box appears; choosing No closes the file without saving it.

To close all open notebook windows and exit Quattro Pro at the same time, choose File|Exit.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4

See Also

File|Exit

Saving Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


File | Save

The File|Save command saves the notebook under its current name. If you use File|Save on a notebook that has not yet been saved, Quattro Pro displays the File|Save As dialog box.

When Quattro Pro saves the notebook, it stores the data along with all its properties, named blocks, graphs, slide shows, and dialog boxes you have created. Application properties are not stored with individual notebooks; a notebook assumes the current settings for these properties the next time it is loaded.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+S

Toolbar:	 Save Notebook button

See Also

File-Handling Options

File|Workspace Command

Saving Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


File | Save As

The File|Save As command saves the notebook under a new name you specify, and in the drive and directory of your choice. Use File|Save As when you want to change a file name or save the file to a different location.

If the file name you enter already exists, Quattro Pro warns you and gives you these options:

Replace	Overwrites the existing file.

Cancel	Stops the command and returns you to the notebook.

When Quattro Pro saves the notebook, it stores the data along with all its properties, named blocks, graphs, slide shows, and dialog boxes you have created.

After you name a notebook, you can store changes to it with File|Save. Quattro Pro assumes you want to save the file under the same name. If you use File|Save on a notebook that has never been saved, Quattro Pro displays the File|Save As dialog box.

To save a notebook for use with another program, such as Paradox, Reflex, 1-2-3, or dBASE, include the program's data file extension when you save the notebook (see Translating Files for more information).

File names can be up to eight characters long and can consist of both letters and numbers. You can enter file names using either upper- or lowercase letters. You cannot use spaces in a file name. You can use the underscore character to simulate spaces; for example, 94_SALES.

See File-Handling Options for further information on File|Save As dialog box options.

Caution: If you assign a name longer than eight characters, Quattro Pro shortens it to the first eight characters.

Unless you specify a different file type, Quattro Pro saves files to QPW v6 (*.WB2) format. To save a file in a different format, select a format other than *.WB2 from the Save File As Type list.

See Also

Password Protecting a File

Saving Files


File | Print

The File|Print command prints out parts of a notebook.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+P

Toolbar:	 Print button

Dialog Box Options

Print Area

Indicates the area of the notebook to be printed.

Current Page	Prints the entire contents of the current notebook page.

Notebook	Prints all notebook pages.

Block Selection	Prints a selected block. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook. If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells onscreen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise, only part of the entry will print.

Copies

Specifies the number of copies to print.

All pages

Specifies that all pages in the document be printed.

From...To

Specifies the beginning and ending pages in the document to print.

Select Printer

Opens the Printer Setup dialog box for specifying the print destination.

Print Preview

Opens the same Print Preview window opened by File|Print Preview, which lets you examine the document's appearance before you actually print it. See Print Preview for details.

Sheet Options

Opens a dialog box for controlling placement of headings, gridlines, row and column borders, spacing between blocks or pages, or whether cell contents are printed. See File|Print|Sheet Options for details.

Page Setup

Opens the Page Setup dialog box for specifying the page format of output. See File|Page Setup for details.

Print

Sends the document to the printer.

See Also

Defining a Print Block

Printing a Spreadsheet


Graph Print Dialog Box

The Graph Print dialog box appears when you choose File|Print if a graph window is active or if a graph or slide show icon in the Objects page is selected.

Dialog Box Options

Change Printer

Opens the Printer Setup dialog box for specifying the print destination. See Printer Setup for details.

Print Preview

Opens the same Print Preview window opened by File|Print Preview, which lets you examine the graph's appearance before you actually print it. See Print Preview for details.

Copies

Specifies the number of copies to print.

Print

Sends the document to the printer.

See Also

Creating a Blank Graph

Creating a Floating Graph

Creating a Graph in a Window

Creating a Slide Show

Creating Bullet Charts

Printing Graphs


Printer Setup Dialog Box

The Printer Setup dialog box, which appears when you choose Select Printer from the Spreadsheet Print or Graph Print dialog boxes, lets you choose the print destination.

Dialog Box Options

Printer and Port

Specifies which of the available printers to use. Before printing from Quattro Pro, use the Windows Control Panel to specify the printers available. These printers will then be available to all Windows applications.

Redirect to File

Creates a binary file to store the printed document instead of sending the document to a printer. You can type the file name or choose it using the Browse option.

Browse

Opens a dialog box from which you can choose the destination for the binary file.

Setup

Opens a dialog box for specifying default print settings. See below for details.

By choosing the Setup option, you can specify default print settings such as:

paper type (wide, letter, envelope)

paper source on the printer (manual, bin 1, bin 2)

print orientation (landscape, portrait)

output size using a percentage (50%, 200%, and so on)

pen colors in a plotter

number of copies

fonts available in the printer (cartridge fonts, soft fonts, internal fonts)

output resolution (300 dpi, 150 dpi)

color or black-and-white printing

the amount of memory in the printer

Since many of these settings are printer-specific, they will not all be available for your printer. Consult your Windows documentation and printer manual for more information on these and additional settings.

Note:	Changes made to printer defaults affect printing in all Windows applications. You can use File|Page Setup and the Options dialog box of File|Print to set many of these options (output size, paper type, number of copies) for only Quattro Pro.

See Also

Printing Graphs

Printing Notebooks


Spreadsheet Print Options Dialog Box

The Spreadsheet Print Options dialog box, which appears when you choose Sheet Options from the Spreadsheet Print dialog box, controls inclusion of headings, borders, gridlines, and cell contents, and specifies spacing between blocks in the printed document.

Dialog Box Options

Headings

Adds the cell entries you specify as headings to print at the top or left of each printed page. See Adding Headings for details.

Cell Formulas

Prints each cell's address and contents instead of its calculated results. When Cell Formulas is checked, the Center Blocks option (in the Print|Page Setup dialog box) and the Top and Left Heading, Gridlines, and Row/Column Borders options are disabled.

Gridlines

Includes the spreadsheet grid in the printed document.

Row/Column Borders

Includes row and column borders in the printed document.

Center Blocks

Centers each contiguous block of the print block between the left and right margins of the printed page. (By default, the first column of each contiguous block prints flush against the left margin.)

Print Between Blocks

Choose Lines and type an entry in the edit field to separate subblocks of noncontiguous blocks with blank lines. Choose Page Advance to separate them with page breaks.

Print Between 3D Pages

Choose Lines and type an entry in the edit field to separate pages of 3-D blocks with blank lines. Choose Page Advance to separate them with page breaks.

Load Defaults

Resets the dialog box to its default settings, replacing all selections in the dialog box.

Save Settings

Saves the current dialog box selections as the default settings.

See Also

Entering Headers and Footers


File | Print Preview

The File|Print Preview command gives you an onscreen preview of how a document will appear in print.

The current zoom level displays to the right of Zoom. When previewing, left-clicking the page zooms in a level, increasing detail; right-clicking zooms out a level, decreasing detail. You can use scroll bars to adjust the section of the page viewed.

The Toolbar provides a variety of tools for controlling a document while previewing. For more information on a tool, point to it, press and hold down Control, then right-click the mouse.

See Print Preview Window Keys for a list of keys you can use while previewing.

See Also

Printing Graphs

Printing Notebooks


File | Page Setup

The File|Page Setup command controls printed margins, paper type and orientation,, scaling, and lets you enter and position headers and footers. You can also store current print settings under a name to use again later.

Dialog Box Options

Paper Type

Type	The type of paper loaded into your printer.

Portrait	Prints data vertically, on individual pages.

Landscape	Prints data horizontally, on individual pages.

When switching orientation, margins switch as well; for example, the top margin stays with the top of the notebook data printed, along with the header and top heading (if any).

Header/Footer

Header/Footer	Enter text for the headers or footers in the edit fields. See Entering Headers and Footers for details.

Header Font	The typeface, point size and type style for header text. See Select Font Dialog Box for details.

Footer Font	The typeface, point size and type style for footer text.

Print Margins

Margins	Controls the amount of space between the edge of the page and the document text. See Setting Margins for details.

Break Pages	Specifies whether to start a new printed page at each soft page break. See Inserting Page Breaks for details.

Print Scaling

Print To Fit	Shrinks the print block to fit on as few pages as possible. See Changing Print Size for details.

Scaling	The percentage (1-1000) to increase or decrease the size of notebook data on the printed page. The margins (except for header and footer margins) do not change.

Named Settings

The Named Settings options lets you store the current print settings under a name so that you can easily reuse them. All settings in the File|Print and File|Page Setup dialog boxes are saved under the name specified.

New Set	Type the name for a new print setting. Click Add to add the setting to the list.

Add	Creates a named print setting using the name in the New Set text box. The name is added to the named print setting list.

Use	Uses the selected named print setting. When you click Use, the selected named print setting replaces the current print settings with those stored under the name.

Update	Replaces the settings stored under the selected name with the current print settings.

Delete	Deletes the selected named setting.

Since named settings are saved with the notebook, use File|Save to save your file after changing named settings.

Load Defaults

Resets the dialog box to its default settings, replacing all selections in the dialog box.

Save Defaults

Saves the current dialog box selections as the default settings, without clearing named settings.

See Also

Printing Graphs

Printing Notebooks

Saving Print Settings


Select Font Dialog Box

Specifies the typeface, size, and type style for both the header and footer.

Dialog Box Options

Typeface

Determines the typeface for the header/footer. Some typefaces, such as Symbol and Zapf Dingbats, are not appropriate for headers and footers as they consist of symbols rather than alphanumeric characters.

Point Size

Determines the size of the header/footer in points. Typical font sizes for text in a letter are 10 or 12 point. Headers and footers are usually not much larger than this, and almost always smaller than titles.

Options

Determines the style of the header/footer font. If you do not check any of the options, the header/footer is in the normal font.

See Also

Entering Headers and Footers


File | Send

The File|Send command displays a submenu of commands you can use to send notebook pages via one of your mail systems. You will see one or more of these commands depending on the mail systems you specified during installation:

GroupWise	Sends notebooks via GroupWise (formerly WordPerfect Office).

Object Exchange	Sends notebooks via the Object Exchange (OBEX). You can use a variety of mail systems, including MCI and MHS, from within OBEX.

MS Mail	Sends notebooks via Microsoft Mail and Windows for Workgroups.

Notes/cc:Mail	Sends notebooks via Notes or cc:Mail.

See Also

Sending Notebooks


File | Send | GroupWise

This command sends messages and attachments, such as Quattro Pro notebooks, through GroupWise (formerly named WordPerfect Office).

The dialog box is the same one used by GroupWise. For details, click Help when viewing the dialog box.

Once sent, mail goes directly to the addressee's mailbox and is read in the usual way.

See Also

Sending Notebooks


File|Send|OBEX
File | Send | Object Exchange

This command sends messages and attachments, such as Quattro Pro notebooks, through the Object Exchange (OBEX) over one of several supported mail systems:

Novell MHS, NGM

GroupWise (WordPerfect Office)

MCI Mail

cc:Mail, Notes (VIM)

MS Mail, Windows for Workgroups (MAPI)

This command displays the Object Exchange Send Dialog Box.

If you have GroupWise, Notes, cc:Mail, or MS Mail installed on your system, you can use File|Send to mail directly through it without using OBEX (see File|Send).

Once sent, mail goes directly to the addressee's mailbox and is read in the usual way.

See Also

Sending Notebooks


File | Send | MS Mail

This command sends messages and attachments, such as Quattro Pro notebooks, through MS Mail, included with Windows for Workgroups.

The dialog box is the same one used by MS Mail. For details, click Help when viewing the dialog box.

Once sent, mail goes directly to the addressee's mailbox and is read in the usual way.

See Also

Sending Notebooks


File | Send | Notes/cc:Mail

This command sends messages and attachments, such as Quattro Pro notebooks, through Notes or cc:Mail mail systems.

The dialog box is the same one used by Notes or cc:Mail. For details, click Help when viewing the dialog box.

Once sent, mail goes directly to the addressee's mailbox and is read in the usual way.

See Also

Sending Notebooks


File | Publish

This command establishes ongoing sharing of the active notebook between you and remote users of OBEX-enabled applications. When you publish notebook pages and other workgroup members subscribe to them, the data in your pages appears in their notebooks exactly as it appears in your own. To distribute graphs, graphics, and formulas, use File|Send to mail the entire notebook.

Before you use File|Publish, you need to set up a group of OBEX accounts. For more information, see Getting Started.

The first time you publish an object, the Publish dialog box appears. When you issue another version of a publication, the Publication dialog box appears.


File | Subscribe

This command displays the Use Notebooks and Pages dialog box, which inserts published pages into a notebook. You can insert published pages from many sources into a single notebook, limited only by the number of available blank pages. You can insert a set of pages into a notebook, or you can insert selected pages from the set. You can also insert the same page or set of pages simultaneously into several notebooks.

Before you use File|Subscribe, choose Tools|Object Exchange|Poll Now to retrieve all objects sent to your OBEX Object Store.


File | GroupWise

The File|GroupWise command appears only if you have GroupWise installed when you install Quattro Pro. If you have GroupWise, File|GroupWise displays a cascading menu with the following commands:

New Mail	send a mail message

New Appointment	schedule appointments and meetings

New Note	write notes that are scheduled to appear in your calendar

New Task	assign a task, or enter a task on your task list

New Phone Message	send a phone message

New Routed Mail	send a mail message or task to several users in turn

In Box	list all incoming mail, phone messages, appointments, tasks, and notes

Out Box	list all outgoing mail, phone messages, appointments, tasks, and notes

Calendar	check your schedule

Address Book	add user IDs and resources to your GroupWise address book

For information about GroupWise features, see your GroupWise documentation, or refer to online help while using GroupWise.


File | Workspace

The File|Workspace command saves or restores workspaces. A workspace is the arrangement of windows onscreen. It includes the position and size of all notebook windows and the files contained in each window. The positions of graph and dialog windows are not saved as part of a workspace.

File|Workspace|Save Command

File|Workspace|Restore Command

See Also

Saving Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


File | Workspace | Save

The File|Workspace|Save command saves workspaces. A workspace is the arrangement of windows onscreen. It includes the position and size of all notebook windows and the files contained in each window. The positions of graph and dialog windows are not saved as part of a workspace.

When saving a workspace, do not include a file-name extension; Quattro Pro includes the .WBS extension for workspace files.

Caution: Saving a workspace does not save the contents of the files within it; use Save, Save As, or Save All for this. Also, if you use File|Save As, you must use File|Workspace Save afterward so that Quattro Pro can load the correct file the next time you retrieve the workspace.

See File-Handling Options for further information on File| Workspace|Save dialog box options.

See Also

File|Workspace|Restore Command

Saving Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


File | Workspace | Restore

The File|Workspace|Restore command restores workspaces. A workspace is the arrangement of windows onscreen. It includes the position and size of all notebook windows and the files contained in each window. The positions of graph and dialog windows are not saved as part of a workspace.

When restoring a workspace Quattro Pro overlays any existing windows with the windows stored in the workspace file, then retrieves the appropriate file for each.

Quattro Pro always retrieves the latest saved version of files when you retrieve a workspace. If you leave the workspace and save a file included in the workspace, Quattro Pro retrieves the updated version of the file when you choose File|Workspace|Restore.

See File-Handling Options for further information on File|Workspace|Restore dialog box options.

See Also

File|Workspace|Save Command

Saving Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


File | Exit

The File|Exit command closes all windows and exits Quattro Pro. If a notebook has unsaved changes, a dialog box appears asking if you want to save your changes.  If you choose Yes, the Save File dialog box appears; choosing No closes the file without saving it.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+Q, Alt+F4

See Also

Saving Files


Graphics Menu

The Graphics menu, which is available in the notebook window, in the graph window, and on the Objects page, lists most of the commands used with graphs.

Type	Changes the graph type (line, pie, 3-D ribbon, and so on).

Series 	Redefines the spreadsheet data plotted in the graph.

Titles 	Adds a title, a subtitle, and axis titles to the graph.

New Graph	Creates a graph from the selected data. If no data is selected, Quattro Pro creates a blank graph.

Edit Graph	Brings a graph into a graph window, ready for editing.

View Graph 	Displays a full-screen view of a graph. Graph buttons and graph button macros become active, so you can test them. You can also select a group of graphs, either on the notebook page or the Objects page, then choose Graphics|View Graph to preview a slide show.

Delete Graph	Erases a graph from the active notebook.

Insert Graph	Places an existing graph as a floating graph on a spreadsheet page.

Graph Gallery	Applies a graph style and color scheme to selected graphs.

New Slide Show	Creates a new slide show.

Edit Slide Show	Opens the Light Table window for the selected slide show.

Run Slide Show	Starts a selected slide show from any window.

You must select a graph before you can use the Graphics|Type, Graphics|Series, or Graphics|Titles commands (see Selecting Graphs for Editing for details).


Graphics | Type

The Graphics|Type command changes the active graph to a different graph type.

Dialog Box Options

2-D

Choose from the Bar, Variance, Stacked Bar, High Low, Line, XY, Area, Column, Pie, 100% Stacked Bar, Stacked Bar Comparison, 100% Stacked Bar Comparison, Doughnut, and Radar graph types.

3-D

Choose from the 3-D Bar, 3-D Stacked Bar, 2.5-D Bar, 3-D Step, 3-D Unstacked Area, 3-D Ribbon, 3-D Area, 3-D Column, 3-D Pie, 3-D Surface, 3-D Contour, 3-D Shaded Surface, 3-D 100% Stacked Bar, 3-D Doughnut, and 3-D Floating Marker graph types.

Rotate

Choose from the Rotated 2-D Bar, Rotated 3-D Bar, Rotated 2.5-D Bar, Rotated Area, Rotated Line, Rotated 2-D Stacked Bar, Rotated 2-D 100% Stacked Bar, Rotated 2-D Comparison, Rotated 2-D 100% Comparison, Rotated 3-D Stacked Bar, and Rotated 3-D 100% Stacked Bar graph types.

Combo

Choose from the Line-Bar, Multiple Columns, Area Bar, Multiple 3-D Columns, High Low-Bar, Multiple Pies, Multiple Bar, and Multiple 3-D Pies graph types.

Bullet

Choose Bullet to create a bullet chart, a graph that displays a list of bulleted items.

Blank

Choose Blank to create a blank graph to serve as the foundation for text and pictures you add using tools in the Graph Toolbar.

See Also

2-D Graphs

3-D Graphs

Blank Graphs

Bullet Charts

Changing the Graph Type

Choosing a Graph Type

Combination Graphs

Multiple Graphs

Rotated Graphs


Graphics | Series

The Graphics|Series command lets you change how data is plotted in the graph. To use this command, select the graph, then choose Graphics|Series.

Dialog Box Options

Edit fields

(X-Axis, Legend, 1st, 2nd, and so on) Display the block coordinates of the series. A series can be a single cell, a contiguous block, or a noncontiguous block. Type the block coordinates in the series edit fields, or use the Point Mode button [image] to point to a block on the spreadsheet. (You can also double-click an edit field to activate Point mode.)

Add button

Adds a series after the selected series.

Delete button

Deletes the selected series.

Reverse Series

Plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order. This is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked area graphs, for example, when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the graph, obscuring other series.

Row/Column Swap

Plots columns as series when Quattro Pro assigns series by rows, and plots rows as series when Quattro Pro would plot columns. Row/column swap also puts x-axis series labels in the legend, and places legend series labels along the x-axis.

See Also

Adding a Series

Deleting a Series

Graphing Grouped or Linked Data


Graphics | Titles

The Graphics|Titles command lets you create titles in standard locations in graphs.

Note: The Graphics|Titles command is unavailable for bullet charts and blank graphs.

Dialog Box Options

Main Title

Available in all numeric graph types.

Subtitle

Available in all numeric graph types.

X-Axis Title

Available in all numeric graphs with axes.

Y1-Axis Title

(The primary y-axis) Available in all numeric graphs with axes.

Y2-Axis Title

(The secondary y-axis) Available in all numeric graphs with axes except 3-D graphs.

Tip:	If your y-axis scale labels are greater than 1000, you can use the Show Units option to simplify the scale and add an appropriate title--"(thousands)" for example--between the y-axis title and the axis itself. Show Units is one of the Scale property options in the y-axis Object Inspector.

You can change the font, color, or other properties of the Graph Title and the Graph Subtitle, through their Object Inspectors. You can edit the main title and subtitle text directly on the graph, or change the title or subtitle in the edit field of either the Graphics|Titles dialog box or the Object Inspector.

You can edit axis title text in the Graphics|Titles dialog box, or in the Axis Title Object Inspector. This Object Inspector also lets you change the font, color, and other properties of axis titles.


Graphics | New Graph

The Graphics|New Graph command creates a graph in its own window. Graphics|New Graph is available from a spreadsheet page, from the Objects page, and when a graph window is active.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 New Graph button (Objects Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

Graph Name

The name assigned to the graph. You can use the default name, or change it to a more descriptive one. The graph name appears on the Objects page, and you can choose it from the dialog boxes of other Graphics menu commands (such as Graphics|Edit Graph).

Edit fields

(X-Axis, Legend, 1st, 2nd, and so on) Display the block coordinates of the series. A series can be a single cell, a contiguous block, or a noncontiguous block. Type the block coordinates in the series edit fields, or use the Point Mode button [image] to point to a block on the spreadsheet. (You can also double-click an edit field to activate Point mode.)

Add button

Adds a series after the selected series.

Delete button

Deletes the selected series.

Reverse Series

Plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order. This is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked area graphs, for example, when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the graph, obscuring other series.

Row/Column Swap

Plots columns as series when Quattro Pro assigns series by rows, and plots rows as series when Quattro Pro would plot columns. Row/column swap also puts x-axis series labels in the legend, and places legend series labels along the x-axis.

See Also

Creating a Graph in a Window


Graphics | Edit Graph

The Graphics|Edit Graph command places a graph into a graph window for editing. The option is:

Select Graph

Displays the list of graphs in the active notebook.

The Graph Toolbar displays tools and a palette for customizing the graph with drawings and text. Object Inspectors for graph elements are also available only in the graph window. To display an Object Inspector, right-click the part of the graph you want to change and choose the Properties command in the QuickMenu that appears.

Graphics|Edit Graph is available from a spreadsheet page, from the Objects page, and when a graph window is active.

Tip:	You can edit a floating graph directly on a notebook page by double-clicking it, by selecting the floating graph and choosing Graphics|Edit Graph, or by right-clicking the floating graph and choosing Edit from the QuickMenu.

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Editing Graphs

Enhancing Graphs


Graphics | View Graph

Graphics|View Graph gives you a full-screen view of selected graphs as they would appear in a slide show. (On the spreadsheet page, select a floating graph by clicking it. On the Objects page, select a graph by clicking its icon. Shift+click to select multiple graphs. A graph displayed in the active graph window is automatically selected.) Graph buttons and graph button macros are active, so you can test them.

Press any key or click the mouse to go to the next graph. When the last graph is displayed, a mouse or key click returns you to the active window.

Note:	When you use Graphics|View Graph, the same keys that let you move to different slides in a slide show are available. See Running a Slide Show for details.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	F11

See Also

Creating a Graph Button


Graphics | Delete Graph

Graphics|Delete Graph lets you select and erase any graph in the active notebook. This command is available from a spreadsheet page, a graph window, and the Objects page. The option is:

Select Graph

Displays the list of graphs in the active notebook. After you select a graph and choose OK, the corresponding graph icon is removed from the Objects page, and all floating graphs based on that graph are deleted.

As an alternative, you can select a graph icon on the Objects page, then choose Edit|Cut or press Del to delete the graph.

If you select a floating graph, then choose Edit|Cut, the graph is erased from the spreadsheet page, but it is not deleted from the notebook. You must use Graphics|Delete Graph, or cut the graph icon on the Objects page, to delete a graph from the notebook.


Graphics | Insert Graph

Graphics|Insert Graph lets you take any graph in the active notebook and place it as a floating graph on a spreadsheet page. The command is available from any spreadsheet page. The option is:

Select Graph

Displays the list of graphs in the active notebook. After you choose a graph and choose OK, the mouse pointer changes to a miniature graph. Click the upper left corner of the area where you want the graph to appear, or drag the mouse to specify the size and placement of the graph.

You can insert the same graph in more than one place in the notebook. Any time you make changes to a graph, all floating graphs associated with that graph reflect the changes.

To replace a floating graph with a different graph, see Source Graph.

If the graph appears to have too much background area, change the Aspect Ratio to Floating Graph.


Graphics | Graph Gallery

The Graphics|Graph Gallery command applies a graph style and color scheme to selected graphs. The Graph Gallery dialog box lets you quickly change the overall appearance of a graph, which is easier and faster than changing the properties of individual graph elements. You can use the Graph Gallery to format multiple graphs at once.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Graph Gallery button (Graph or Slides Toolbars)

Dialog Box Options

Category

Displays the list of graph categories. Choose from Bar, Rotated Bar, Pie, Line Or Area, Specialty, Templates.

Style

Displays the list of graph styles for the selected category. For all categories except Templates, the styles are equivalent to graph types. You can also use Graphics|Type to change a graph type. When you select a style, the picture of your graph on the right side of the Graph Gallery dialog box updates to reflect your selection.

Color Scheme

Displays the list of color schemes. The color scheme you select determines colors used for all graph elements and objects. Choose No Change to not use a color scheme. If you selected Templates for the graph category, Color Scheme is unavailable.

Advisor

Opens an Advisor dialog box appropriate for the graph category you selected; the two separate Advisors are Graph Advisor and Template Advisor. The Advisor presents a selection of styles based on stylistic criteria you specify.

Note:	If you have multiple graphs selected, the graph that appears on the right side of the Graph Gallery dialog box is a picture of the first graph selected.


Graph Advisor Dialog Box

The Graph Advisor helps you pick the best type of graph for your data and audience. You tell the Graph Advisor what effect you want your graph or slide to have, and the Advisor suggests the best graph template for your purposes.

Dialog Box Options

Constraints

Sets the criteria used to suggest appropriate graph styles for your data. Slide the boxes left or right to set the constraints.

Choose whether to graph the data series individually or cumulatively.

Choose whether the graph style should highlight differences in the data series or trends.

Choose whether you want the graph style to be simple or fancy.

Data Series

Sets the number of data series that you are graphing.

Data Points

Sets the number of data points per series that you are graphing.

Advise

Suggests appropriate graph styles given the constraints you specified.

Suggestions

Displays suggested graph styles after you click Advise. Select a style and choose Apply.

Apply

Applies the selected style to your graph or slide.


Template Advisor Dialog Box

The Template Advisor helps you create the most effective template to use for your presentation. Use slider bars to tell the Template Advisor what effect you want, and the Template Advisor suggests the best templates for your criteria.

Dialog Box Options

Constraints

Sets the criteria used to suggest appropriate slide template styles. Slide the boxes left or right to set the constraints. For the Template Advisor, the constraints are subjective; choose between informal/formal, entertaining/serious, sophisticated/simple, vivid/subdued, and plain/fancy.

Onscreen

When checked, the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing onscreen.

B&W Paper

When checked, the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in black and white.

B&W Trans.

When checked, the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing on black and white transparencies.

35mm Slide

When checked, the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing in 35 millimeter slides.

Color Paper

When checked, the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in color.

Darkened Room

When checked, the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing in a darkened room.

Lighted Room

When checked, the Advisor suggests slide templates appropriate for viewing in a lighted room.

Advise

Suggests appropriate template styles given the constraints you specified.

Suggestions

Displays suggested template styles after you click Advise. Select a style and choose Apply.

Apply

Applies the selected template style to your graph or slide.


Graphics | New Slide Show

The Graphics|New Slide Show command creates a new slide show and opens the slide show in the Light Table window for editing.

The New Slide Show dialog box has one option:

Slide Show Name

Type the name (up to 15 characters) of new slide show.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Create Slide Show button (Objects or Slides Toolbars)


Graphics | Edit Slide Show

The Graphics|Edit Slide Show command opens the Light Table window for the selected slide show. You can also edit a slide show by double-clicking its icon on the Objects page.

The Light Table shows all graphs in the slide show in miniature form, in the order in which they will appear. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

From the Light Table you can

Drag and drop slides from one slide show to another.

Add, move, delete, or view slides.

Change transition effects or timing parameters for one or more slides.

Choose a master slide that serves as the background template for all slides in the slide show. You can also select a background for the master slide using the Master Slide Gallery.

Edit slides.

Show slides in small, medium, or large size in the Light Table, or show only the names of slides.

Change the name of the slide show.

Show or hide the pointer while running the slide show.

Run a slide show.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Edit Slide Show button (Main or Slides Toolbars)

See Also

Editing a Slide Show


Graphics | Run Slide Show

Graphics|Run Slide Show runs any slide show in the active notebook; the command is available from any window. The option is:

Select Slide Show

Displays the list of slide shows in the active notebook.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Run Slide Show button (Objects or Slides Toolbars)

See Also

Creating a Slide Show


Help Menu

Contents	Lists available Help topics; also accessible with the Contents button in the Help window.

Search	Displays the Search dialog box; also accessible with the Search button in the Help window.

Experts	Displays available Experts. Each Expert offers an alternative way to perform a task. You can also display Experts by clicking the Experts button [image] on the Toolbar.

Coaches	Displays available Coaches. Each Coach teaches you how to perform a task using your own "live" data. You can also display Coaches by clicking the Coaches button [image] on the Toolbar.

About Quattro Pro	Gives the copyright date and system memory use.


Notebook Menu

Define Style	Defines styles for spreadsheet data.

Define Series	Defines a pattern of entries to be used to fill a block. After you define a series, you can use the SpeedFill button to fill a block with the sequence of entries.

Define Group	Defines page groups for simultaneous operations on several pages.

Move Pages	Lets you reposition pages in a notebook.

Extract	Copies part of a notebook into a separate file.

Insert	Inserts the contents of a file anywhere in the notebook.

Text Import	Imports plain text or comma and quote delimited files.

Parse	Breaks down long labels into separate cell entries.

Combine	Merges two notebook files into one notebook.

Update Links	Opens, updates, changes, or deletes notebook links.


Notebook | Define Style

Notebook|Define Style lets you modify Quattro Pro's predefined styles, or create new ones.

Dialog Box Options

Define Style For

The style to be revised or created.

Included Properties

Adds settings for the checked properties to the new style definition. Click the property name button for each checked property to choose the particular setting you want.

Delete

Deletes the style selected in the Define Style For option. Cells to which you had applied the deleted style revert to Normal style.

Merge

Opens a dialog box in which you specify to copy property settings from a cell or another style.

The Merge Style dialog box contains these options:

Merge From

Specifies whether to copy from an existing style or a cell.

Select Cell/Style

Enter the cell address, or style name, as appropriate.

Note:	Only checked properties are included in the style you define. The unchecked properties will have no effect in the cells to which you apply this new style. This lets you create partial styles that affect only a few properties at a time and apply them in combination with properties already existing in cells.

To use the new style, select the cells to which you want to apply it and select the name from the Style list in the Toolbar.

If you redefine a style that is already in use in the notebook (such as Normal, which is applied to all cells by default), all cells using that style change to reflect the new property settings. Cells in which you set individual properties with the block Object Inspector do not change. This is because styles act as default settings that are overridden by block property settings.

To copy a style to another notebook, copy a cell formatted in that style, and paste it into the new notebook. The style name then appears in the Style list for that notebook.

The predefined styles are described in Using Styles.

See Also

Active Block Properties

Defining Styles


Notebook | Define Series

The Notebook|Define Series command defines a pattern of entries to be used to fill a block. After you define a series, you can use the SpeedFill button to fill a block with the sequence of entries.

To create a new series, click Create. To edit a series, select one from the list, then click Modify to change the series or Rename to rename it. Click Delete to delete a selected series.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 SpeedFill button (Main or Block Toolbars)

Dialog Box Options

Series

Lists the defined series.

Create

Opens the Create Series dialog box, which lets you define a new series.

Modify

Opens the Modify Series dialog box, which lets you change the values in the selected series.

Delete

Deletes the selected series.

Rename

Changes the name for the selected series.

See Also

Using SpeedFill


Notebook | Define Group

Notebook|Define Group lets you set up a series of pages to be acted on as a group. After you define a group, you can turn on Group mode by choosing View|Group Mode. A blue line appears below the page tabs included in the group.

You can define more than one group in a notebook, but any page can belong to only one group.

Dialog Box Options

Group Name

Enter a name for the group (up to 15 characters). You can use letters, numbers, and spaces.

First Page

Enter the name of the first page in the group.

Last Page

Enter the name of the last page in the group.

Defined Groups

Lists the groups defined in the active notebook.

Delete

Lets you delete the group currently selected in the Defined Groups list box.

When Group mode is on, changes to block and page properties affect all pages in the group, pointing from within formulas and dialog boxes point to 3-D blocks, and you can enter or delete data by "drilling" through the pages in the group with Ctrl+Enter and Ctrl+Delete, respectively.

See Also

Creating a Group

Group Mode Tips


Notebook | Move Pages

The Notebook|Move Pages command changes the order of pages within a notebook.

Dialog Box Options

Move Page

The page(s) to be moved.

To Before Page

The page before which the moved pages will be placed.

See Also

Moving Pages

Using Named Blocks


Notebook | Extract

Notebook|Extract saves part of a notebook to a separate file leaving the original file intact. Notebook|Extract is similar to File|Save As, with two major differences:

With Extract you can choose to copy values only. When you choose the Values option, the actual formulas are not copied--just the resulting values.

Extract saves the notebook's block names and graphs along with the specified block. Some block names or graphs may not be meaningful if they refer to cells outside the extracted block. You can delete them, reassign them, or ignore them.

Dialog Box Options

The standard options in the File Extract dialog box are explained in File-Handling Options. In addition, there are these options:

Block(s)

The coordinates or name of the block to be saved. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Password Protection

The password to be assigned to the saved file.

Formulas

When checked, saves an exact copy of the block, including formulas.

Values

When checked, converts formulas to their resulting values.

With the Formulas option, formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even if they are absolute. (Absolute formulas remain absolute for the new notebook after their initial adjustment; they retain the $ signs, but the references adjust.) If the formulas reference cells outside the block being saved, problems can arise. In this case, it is best to use the Values option.

See Also

Extracting Part of a Notebook


Notebook | Insert

The Notebook|Insert command inserts the contents of a file anywhere in the notebook. Wherever you insert, existing data is pushed onto following pages to make room. Only the pages from the inserted file that contain data are inserted into the active notebook.

The standard options in the Insert File dialog box are explained in File-Handling Options. In addition, there is another option:

Before Page

Any cell on the page before which you want to insert the file.

See Also

Inserting a File into a Notebook

Inserting Blocks


Notebook | Text Import

Notebook|Text Import copies a text file into the active page of a notebook. A text file contains plain text (no control characters) with minimal formatting.

Dialog Box Options

The standard options in the Import File dialog box are explained in File-Handling Options. In addition, there are these options:

ASCII Text File

Imports a plain, unformatted text file. Quattro Pro converts the data into a single column of labels. Each line in the file becomes a label.

Comma & "

Imports a file containing text enclosed in double quotes. Fields are delimited by commas or slashes to separate text in rows. The delimiters are used to place text in columns in the notebook page.

Only Commas

Imports a file delimited only with commas.

Parse Expert

Imports a text file and breaks it into columns, database fields, at the same time. You may need to do some editing when the parse is complete.

After you have your text file in the notebook, you can break up the entries into separate columns with the Notebook|Parse command.

Tip:	After you use Database Desktop to create an external query file (see Database Desktop Help for details), you can use the ASCII Text File option of Tools|Import to copy the query text into a notebook.

Note:	You do not need to use Import to load Paradox, Reflex, 1-2-3, dBASE, or Symphony files. These files translate when you access them (see Translating Files for more information).

See Also

Combining Files

Importing Text


Notebook | Parse

The Notebook|Parse command breaks down long labels into individual cells. This is often necessary after you have imported an ASCII text file, since Quattro Pro interprets each line of text as a single label.

You can also use Parse to break down data in a regular notebook. For example, you could turn a single column containing a first and last name into two columns: one containing the first name and the second containing the last name.

Dialog Box Options

Input

Specifies the block containing the data to be parsed and the format line(s) to parse it.

Output

Specifies the destination for the parsed data.

Create

Inserts a format line in the active cell, moving existing rows down.

Edit

Opens a dialog box for changing format lines.

Reset

Blanks the input and output entries.

See Also

Importing Text Files

Notebook|Text Import Command

Using Format Lines

Using Input and Output Blocks


Notebook | Combine

Notebook|Combine lets you copy all or part of a notebook into any area of the active notebook. Combine does not erase the active notebook; it affects only the portion of the pages covered by the inserted block.

You can also perform arithmetic operations with Notebook|Combine to add, subtract, multiply, or divide cells from one notebook to another.

Dialog Box Options

The standard options in the File Combine dialog box are explained in File-Handling Options. In addition, there are these options:

Operation

Determines how the data will be combined. Copy inserts data from a file into the active notebook; the other options determine the operations to be performed on combined data.

Source

Entire File copies the entire file into the existing one; Block(s) copies a specified block(s) of the file. If you choose Block(s), enter a block name or coordinates in the edit field. You can also specify multiple blocks by separating them with commas. (Because the block names are from another file, you cannot display a list of the names.)

The contents of the specified file or block appear in the active notebook. If you copied the data, Quattro Pro also copies any properties. It copies the contents of named blocks, but to avoid confusion with names in the active notebook, it converts references to named blocks into block coordinates.

Caution: Notebook|Combine overwrites any cells in the destination block, even if they are protected.

See Also

Copying Combined File Data

Extracting Part of a Notebook

Operating on Combined File Data

Translating Files


Notebook | Update Links

Notebook|Update Links displays these commands related to formula links between notebooks:

Open Links	Opens any or all supporting notebooks linked to the current notebook.

Refresh Links	Updates data in the current notebook based on data in any or all unopened supporting notebooks.

Delete Links	Removes all link references to any or all supporting notebooks.

Change Link	Switches all links that reference one supporting notebook to another.

See Also

Changing Notebook Links

Linking Notebooks

Opening Supporting Notebooks

Removing Links

Updating Link Values


Notebook | Update Links | Open Links

The Notebook|Update Links|Open Links command opens any or all supporting notebooks linked to the current notebook. The option is:

Hotlinks

Choose the supporting notebook to open. You can select multiple notebooks by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual notebooks) or the Shift key (as you click the last notebook in a range to be selected).

Open Links opens only notebooks that are directly linked to the active notebook. If additional notebooks are linked to those directly linked, you need to activate the directly linked notebooks and choose Open Links again. For example, suppose Notebook A refers to Notebook B, which refers to Notebook C. Activating Notebook A and choosing Open Links lists only Notebook B. To open Notebook C, activate Notebook B and choose Open Links.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Open Links button (Modeling Toolbar)

See Also

Linking Notebooks


Notebook | Update Links | Refresh Links

The Notebook|Update Links|Refresh Links command updates data in the current notebook based on data in any or all unopened supporting notebooks. The option is:

Hotlinks

Choose the closed supporting notebook from which you want to update values. You can select multiple notebooks by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual notebooks) or the Shift key (as you click the last notebook in a range to be selected).

Refresh Links is similar to the Update References option offered when you access a primary notebook, except you can use it at any time, and you can specify one notebook at a time from which to access values.

Refresh Links is also useful when you are working on a network. While you are using one notebook, others can be working on supporting notebooks (which remain closed to you). If people announce over the network when they save or close a file, you can use Refresh Links to access updated values in the primary notebook.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Refresh Links button (Modeling Toolbar)

See Also

Linking Notebooks


Notebook | Update Links | Delete Links

The Notebook|Update Links|Delete Links command removes all link references to any or all supporting notebooks. The option is:

Hotlinks

Choose the supporting notebook from which you want to delete links. You can select multiple notebooks by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual notebooks) or the Shift key (as you click the last notebook in a range to be selected).

All link formulas from the active notebook to the supporting notebook you choose will result in ERR values.

See Also

Linking Notebooks


Notebook | Update Links | Change Link

The Notebook|Update Links|Change Link command switches all links that reference one supporting notebook to another. This is especially useful after you rename a notebook.

Dialog Box Options

Change Link From

Choose the supporting notebook from which you want to change links.

To

Enter the name of the notebook you want to change links to.

In the active notebook, all link references to the selected notebook change to the new notebook name.

Note:	The new supporting notebook must have the same layout as the previous one because the same relative cells are referenced. If it does not, formulas that reference linked cells may show errors or produce meaningless values. To avoid this, enter all links as block names so the correct values are included.

See Also

Linking Notebooks


Property List

The Property drop-down list in the Property Band changes depending on which Quattro Pro window is active. When a notebook window is active, the Property drop-down list includes the commands listed below. The graph and dialog windows have different commands (see Graph Window Property List and Dialog Window Property List.)

Notebook Window Property List

Current Object	Displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected object in the active window.

Application	Displays the application Object Inspector.

Active Notebook	Displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected notebook.

Active Page	Displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected page.

See Also

Object Inspector


Graph Window Property List

The Property drop-down list in the Property Band changes depending on which Quattro Pro window is active. When the graph window is active, the Property drop-down list includes the following commands.

Current Object	Displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected object in the active window.

Application	Displays the application Object Inspector.

Graph Window	Displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected graph window

Graph Setup	Displays the graph setup Object Inspector

Graph Pane	Displays the graph pane Object Inspector

Legend	Displays the legend box Object Inspector

X Axis	Displays the non-scaling axis Object Inspector

Y Axis	Displays the scaling axis Object Inspector

Series	Lets you select a series from the active graph

See Also

Dialog Window Property List

Notebook Window Property List

Object Inspector


Property | Series

When you click Property in the Property Band, the Series item in the drop-down list lets you select a series, slice, or section in the active graph. Enter the number of your selection to display its Object Inspector.

See Also

Graph Window Property List

Object Inspector


Dialog Window Property List

The Property drop-down list in the Property Band changes depending on which Quattro Pro window is active. When the dialog window is active, the Property drop-down list includes the following commands.

Current Object	Displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected object in the active window.

Application	Displays the application Object Inspector.

Dialog	Displays the Object Inspector for the currently selected Dialog window.

See Also

Graph Window Property List

Notebook Window Property List

Object Inspector


Slide Show Menu

The Slide Show menu appears when you edit a slide show in a Light Table window.

New Slide	Creates a new graph and adds it as a slide to the slide show.

Insert Slide	Inserts a slide before the selected slide.

New Master Slide	Creates a new graph that serves as the master slide in the slide show.

Edit Slide	Brings a slide into a graph window, ready for editing.

View Slide	Displays a full-screen view of selected slides. Graph buttons and graph button macros become active, so you can test them.

Graph Gallery	Applies a graph style and color scheme to selected slides.

Master Slide Gallery	Applies a template style to the selected master slide.

New Slide Show	Creates a new slide show.

Edit Slide Show	Opens the Light Table window for the selected slide show.

Run Slide Show	Starts a selected slide show.


Slide Show | New Slide

The Slide Show|New Slide command creates a new graph and adds it as a new slide to a slide show. The New Slide command opens the Graph New dialog box. For a description of the dialog box options, see Graphics|New Graph.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 New Slide button (Slides Toolbar)


Slide Show | Insert Slide

The Slide Show|Insert Slide command inserts a slide before the selected slide in the Light Table window. When you choose Insert Slide, the Select Graph For New Slide dialog box appears. Select a graph, then choose OK.


Slide Show | New Master Slide

The Slide Show|New Master Slide command creates a new bullet chart that serves as the master slide in the slide show. The New Master Slide command opens a graph window for a bullet chart. The window displays sample text to show where the titles and bulleted items will appear in each slide.

To customize the bullet chart, right-click the title box or sample bullet text and choose the Properties command, or use the Master Slide Gallery to choose a template style.


Slide Show | Edit Slide

The Slide Show|Edit Slide command places a slide into a graph window for editing.

The Graph Toolbar displays tools for customizing the graph with drawings and text. Object Inspectors for graph elements are also available only in the graph window. To display an Object Inspector, right-click the part of the graph you want to change and choose the Properties command in the QuickMenu that appears.


Slide Show | View Slide

The Slide Show|View Slide command gives you a full-screen view of selected slides as they would appear in a slide show. Graph buttons and graph button macros are active, so you can test them.

Press any key or click the mouse to go to the next slide. When the last slide is displayed, a mouse or key click returns you to the active window.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	F11

Note:	When you use Graphics|View Graph, the same keys that let you move to different slides in a slide show are available. See Running a Slide Show for details.

See Also

Creating a Graph Button


Slide Show | Master Slide Gallery

The Slide Show|Master Slide Gallery command applies a template style to the selected master slide. The Master Slide Gallery command is available only when the master slide is selected in the Light Table window.

Style

Select a template style for the master slide.

Advisor

Opens the Master Slide Advisor dialog box, which shows suggested template styles based on stylistic criteria you specify.


Slide Show | New Slide Show

The Slide Show|New Slide Show command creates a new slide show and opens the slide show in the Light Table window for editing.

The New Slide Show dialog box has one option:

Slide Show Name

Type the name (up to 15 characters) of new slide show.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Create Slide Show button (Slides Toolbar)


Slide Show | Edit Slide Show

The Slide Show|Edit Slide Show command opens the Light Table window for the selected slide show. You can also edit a slide show by double-clicking its icon on the Objects page.

The Light Table shows all graphs in the slide show in miniature form, in the order in which they will appear. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

From the Light Table you can

Drag and drop slides from one slide show to another.

Add, move, delete, or view slides.

Change transition effects or timing parameters for one or more slides.

Choose a master slide that serves as the template for all slides in the slide show. You can also select a template for the master slide using the Master Slide Gallery.

Edit slides.

Change the name of the slide show.

Show or hide the pointer when running the slide show.

Show small, medium, or large slides in the Light Table, or show only the names of slides.

Run a slide show.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Edit Slide Show button (Main or Slides Toolbars)


Slide Show | Run Slide Show

Slide Show|Run Slide Show runs any slide show in the active notebook. The option is:

Select Slide Show

Displays the list of slide shows in the active notebook.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Run Slide Show button (Objects or Slides Toolbars)

See Also

Creating a Slide Show


Toolbar Menu

When you choose Tools|Toolbar Designer, the Toolbar menu appears in the menu bar. It offers the following options:

New	Opens a blank Toolbar window.

Open	Offers a list of custom Toolbars for editing.

Close	Closes the active Toolbar in Edit mode.

Save	Saves the active Toolbar under the same name.

Save As	Saves the active Toolbar under another name.

Save All	Saves all Toolbars currently open for editing.

Close All	Closes all Toolbars currently open for editing.

Tile	Arranges all open Toolbars so none overlap.

See Also

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Using Custom Toolbars


Toolbar | New

Opens a blank Toolbar window.

See Also

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Toolbar Menu


Toolbar | Open

Offers a list of custom Toolbars for editing.

See Also

File-Handling Options

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Toolbar Menu

Using Custom Toolbars


Toolbar | Close

Closes the active Toolbar in Edit mode.

See Also

Exiting Toolbar Designer

Toolbar Designer Guidelines


Toolbar | Save

Saves the active Toolbar under the same name.

See Also

File-Handling Options

Saving Custom Toolbars

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Toolbar Menu


Toolbar | Save As

Saves the active Toolbar under another name.

See Also

File-Handling Options

Saving Custom Toolbars

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Toolbar Menu


Toolbar | Save All

Saves all Toolbars currently open for editing.

See Also

File-Handling Options

Saving Custom Toolbars

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Toolbar Menu


Toolbar | Close All

Closes all Toolbars currently open for editing.

See Also

Closing Toolbars

File-Handling Options

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Toolbar Menu


Toolbar | Tile

Arranges all open Toolbars so none overlap.

See Also

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Toolbar Menu

Using Button Palettes


Tools Menu

The Tools menu commands change depending on which Quattro Pro window is active. When a notebook window is active, the Tools menu includes the commands listed below. The graph, dialog, and custom Toolbar windows have different Tools menu commands; see Graph Window Tools Menu, Dialog Window Tools Menu, and Custom Toolbar Window Tools Menu, respectively.

Notebook Window Tools Menu Commands

Macro	Provides commands for creating, running, and debugging macros.

Formula Composer	Displays a visual tool for creating, editing, and debugging formulas.

Spell Check	Checks spelling in notebooks and graphs.

Scenario Manager	Allows naming and saving of notebook variations.

Consolidator	Merges blocks, altering the data with functions you select.

Object Order	Reorders layers of overlapping floating objects.

Database Desktop	Opens a window in which you can access an external database.

Data Modeling Desktop	Opens a window in which you can create crosstabs.

Database Tools	Provides tools for creating data entry and query forms, searching the database for records that meet given requirements, and performing a query-by-example operation in an external data table.

Numeric Tools	Provides tools for financial, statistical, and numerical analysis; for creating What-If tables and frequency distribution tables; for performing regression analysis and matrix operations; for solving sets of equations or inequalities to find optimum solutions; and for calculating a formula backwards, starting with the desired result and solving for a variable that produces that result.

Toolbar Designer	Allows you to create your own custom Toolbars.

UI Builder	Provides tools for customizing Quattro Pro's user interface (UI).

Object Exchange	Create and configure Object Exchange messaging accounts.


Tools | Macro

A macro is a stored series of keystrokes, special keys, and commands that can be played back. The Tools|Macro command displays a submenu of commands you can use with macros:

Play	Plays back the macro you specify.

Record	Puts Quattro Pro in Macro Record mode.

Options	Sets how addresses are recorded.

Debugger	Enters Debug mode, so you can work out problems in your macros.

See Also

Macros

Special Macro Commands


Tools | Macro | Play

Tools|Macro|Play lets you run a macro. The macro can be stored in the active notebook, or in an open notebook designated as a macro library.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Alt+F2

Dialog Box Options

Location

Enter the address of the cell containing the macro you want to run, or use the Macros/Namedblocks option to choose the macro. Use full linking syntax ([LIBRARY]A:C2) if the cell address is not in the active notebook (linking is not needed when entering a block name).

Macro Library

If the macro is stored in a notebook designated as a macro library, choose the notebook name here. Macros/Namedblocks changes to display the macros available from the notebook.

Macros/Namedblocks

You can choose the name of a macro to run from this list. Use Macro Library to specify the list displayed.

OK

Runs the macro. The MACRO indicator appears in the status line.

To stop a macro while it is running, press Ctrl+Break and choose OK to clear the break message and return to Ready mode.

You can also run macros by first attaching them to key combinations, SpeedButtons, graph buttons, or objects in a dialog window.

See Also

Macros

Making a Notebook a Macro Library


Tools | Macro | Record

Tools|Macro|Record lets you record actions as you perform them. Recording converts actions into macro commands and stores them as labels in a block.

Dialog Box Options

Location

Enter the coordinates where you want to store the macro. If there is no chance of overwriting data in cells below, select a single cell; Quattro Pro fills the cells below as necessary. Selecting a block larger than a cell confines recorded commands to that block only and stops recording when the block is full.

Macro Library

To store the macro in a notebook designated as a macro library, choose the library name here, and then choose a location for the macro from Macros/Namedblocks.

Macros/Namedblocks

You can give the macro a name, or choose a named block in which to store it.

OK

Starts recording the macro. The REC indicator appears in the status line. As you perform tasks, Quattro Pro records each action, writing it as one or more macro commands in the first column of the block previously specified.

To stop recording, choose Tools|Macro|Stop Recording.

See Also

Macros

Making a Notebook a Macro Library


Tools | Macro | Options

Tools|Macro|Options lets you control the notation method used when you record macros.

Dialog Box Options

Absolute

Uses standard cell addressing notation, like A1..C6.

Relative

Uses relative referencing, which specifies cells as offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector's relative reference is P(0):C(0)R(0).

See Also

Macros


Tools | Macro | Debugger

Tools|Macro|Debugger begins Debug mode so that you can isolate and fix problems in a macro. After you choose Tools|Macro|Debugger, run the macro you want to examine.

A debug window appears in the bottom half of the screen. The first cell of the macro appears in the middle of the debug window.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Shift+F2

See Also

Debugging a Macro

Macros


Tools | Formula Composer

Tools|Formula Composer displays the Formula Composer dialog box, a visual tool for creating, editing, and debugging formulas. The Formula Composer dialog box provides multiple views of a formula, including

a formula outline pane to examine the structure of a formula, edit parts of the formula, and trace cell refererences and block names

an @function pane to make entering @functions easy

a calculator pane to perform calculations within a formula

For details on how to use the Formula Composer, see Using the Formula Composer.

Tip:	You can resize the Formula Composer dialog box to make it smaller or larger. Just drag a side or corner of the dialog box to change its size. To resize the panes within the Formula Composer dialog box, drag the vertical pane divider to the left or right.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+F2

Toolbar:	 Formula Composer button (Main Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

Cell Value

Displays the calculated value for the current cell.

Expression

Displays the current expression selected within the formula. You can type an entire formula here, or select parts of a formula in the outline pane. Click the down arrow to the right of the Expression edit field to insert a block name into the formula. Click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell or block address from the notebook.

Value

Displays the value of the current Expression.

Outline Pane

Displays an expandable/collapsible outline of the formula. The outline works like the Windows File Manager. Double-click part of the outline to expand or collapse it. For details on using the outline pane, see Working in the Outline Pane.

You can also right-click the outline to select a QuickMenu command; see Formula Composer QuickMenu Commands.

Calculator Pane

Performs calculations within a formula or expression. For details, see Using the Calculator.

@Function Pane

Provides information about the current @function being edited in the Expression edit field. For help about an @function, click the @Help button. For details on using the @function pane, see Working in the @Function Pane.

Enters the formula you created in the current cell and closes the Formula Composer.

Closes the Formula Composer dialog without entering the formula.

Provides help on using the Formula Composer.

Provides help on the currently selected @function in the Expression edit field.


Tools | Spell Check

Tools|Spell Check checks the spelling of text in selected notebook blocks or graphs.

The Spell Check dialog box is modeless. You can use other Quattro Pro features while it is open. It stays open until you click the Close button.

To Spell Check an entire page, choose Tools|Spell Check with a single cell selected. To Spell Check a block, select the block and choose Tools|Spell Check. You can select other blocks to spell check while the Spell Check dialog box is open.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Ctrl+F1

Dialog Box Options

Spell-check: Document/Misspelled/No Error

Before you click Start, "Spell-check: Document" displays at the top left of the dialog box. After you click Start, this field displays a suspected misspelling. When no misspelling is detected, "No Error" displays.

Replace With

Specifies the word you want to replace the misspelled word with. You can select a word from the Suggestions list, or type a word.

Suggestions

Lists suggested words that you might want to use to replace a suspected misspelled word.

Start

Begins or ends the spell check on text in the selected block or graph.

Replace All

Replaces all occurrences of the suspected misspelling in the selected block with the word in Replace With.

Replace

Replaces the suspected misspelling with the word in Replace With.

Skip Once

Skips the current instance of the suspected misspelling.

Skip Always

Skips all occurrences of the suspected misspelling in the selected block. If you choose Skip Always, the Spell Checker follows that instruction as long Quattro Pro remains open.

Add

Adds the suspected misspelling to the current Spell Check dictionary. When you add a word to the dictionary, the Spell Checker no longer treats it as a suspected misspelling.

Options

Lets you specify rules for the Spell Checker to follow, or switch languages or personal dictionaries.

See Also

Using the Spell Checker


Tools | Scenario Manager

Tools|Scenario Manager displays the Scenario Manager dialog box, which lets you save "snapshots" of data models when values are varied.

The Scenario Manager dialog box is modeless. You can use other Quattro Pro features while it is open. It stays open until you click the Close button.

The controls in the Scenario Manager dialog box let you capture and save scenarios, highlight scenario cells, and display the Scenario Summary Report. Click the Update button first to give a name for a group of scenarios and set the baseline capture area where the Scenario Manager tracks changes.

Tip	As a shortcut, you can build a model, then use the Scenario Manager Expert to name and save scenarios. Choose Help|Experts|Scenario to use the Scenario Manager Expert.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Scenario Manager button (Modeling Toolbar)

Dialog Box Controls

Scenarios

Lists scenarios you have captured in the active group of scenarios.

Capture

Takes a baseline snapshot of data. You can use Capture repeatedly to capture changes as scenarios to add to the group.

Delete

Deletes the selected scenario.

Report

Creates a summary report of the change and result cells in each scenario.

Highlight

Turns on and off coloring of change and result cells. You can specify different colors to highlight cells. The default colors are yellow for change cells and green for result cells.

Find

Automatically locates changed cells after you capture the baseline scenario and make changes.

Add

Defines the selected cells as change and result cells. Click Add to identify changed cells manually.

Remove

Excludes the selected change or result cells from the scenario. If you click Find to locate all changed cells, you can use Remove to manually remove cells to better focus the Scenario Report.

Group Management

Lists the scenario groups included in the active notebook.

Update

Defines the baseline capture area for a new group of scenarios, and renames and deletes existing groups.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Tools | Consolidator

Tools|Consolidator displays the Consolidation dialog box, which lets you combine two or more source blocks of data using your choice of statistical @function operators. As you combine blocks, you can sort fields and records using column and row labels.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Consolidator button (Modeling Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

Consolidations

Lists saved consolidation setups. To switch to another consolidation setup, choose a name from this list.

Source Blocks

Lists the blocks the consolidation operates on.

Add

Adds a block to the Source Block list. You can choose a block from another notebook.

Remove

Removes a block from the Source Block list so it will not be part of the consolidation.

Save As

Saves the current consolidation setup (source blocks, destination block, and operator). The saved consolidation setup appears in the Conslidations list. Consolidation setups are saved with the active notebook, not as separate files.

Delete

Deletes the selected setup in the Consolidations list.

Operation

Specifies the operations to perform on the source blocks. Choose between these operations: SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, and VARS. These operations work like @functions of the same name; for a description of the related @functions, see Descriptive Statistical @Functions.

Destination Block

Sets the block to contain the consolidation results. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Output with Formulas

Determines whether consolidation results appear as formulas or values.

Use Labels In Top Row

Matches data from different blocks based on labels in the top row of each block.

Use Labels in Left Column

Matches data from different blocks based on labels in the left column of each block.

Consolidate

Performs the consolidation of the source blocks, placing the results in the specified destination block.

See Also

Using the Consolidator


Tools | Object Order

The Tools|Object Order commands manages the placement of floating objects within front-to-back layers. An object that overlaps another is in a layer in front of the other object.

To reorder the layering of overlapping objects, select an object (it has handles around it when selected) and choose one of these commands:

Bring Forward	Moves the object one layer closer to the top.

Send Backward	Moves the object one layer closer to the bottom.

Bring to Front	Brings the object to the front or top of the layers.

Send to Back	Sends the object to the bottom, or behind all overlapping objects.

See Also

Arranging Object Layers

Creating Floating Objects

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Layering Floating Objects

Moving and Sizing Controls

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Bring Forward

The objects you create (such as floating graphs, graph objects, or dialog controls) or import (such as graphics) can overlap on invisible layers. Tools|Object Order|Bring Forward moves a selected object one layer closer to the front (or top layer) of the notebook, graph, or dialog window.

Tools|Object Order|Send Backward moves the selected object behind an overlapping object.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Bring Forward button (Draw or Align Toolbars)

See Also

Arranging Object Layers

Bring to Front

Moving and Sizing Controls

Send Backward

Send to Back

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Send Backward

The objects you create (such as floating graphs, graph objects, or dialog controls) or import (such as graphics) can overlap on invisible layers. Tools|Object Order|Send Backward moves a selected object one layer closer to the back (or bottom layer) of the notebook, graph, or dialog window.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Send Backward button (Draw or Align Toolbars)

See Also

Arranging Object Layers

Bring Forward

Bring to Front

Moving and Sizing Controls

Send to Back

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Bring to Front

The objects you create (such as floating graphs, graph objects, or dialog controls) or import (such as graphics) can overlap on invisible layers. Tools|Object Order|Bring to Front moves the selected object in front of all overlapping objects.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Brint To Front button (Draw or Align Toolbars)

See Also

Arranging Object Layers

Bring Forward

Moving and Sizing Controls

Send Backward

Send to Back

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Send to Back

The objects you create (such as floating graphs, graph objects, or dialog controls) or import (such as graphics) can overlap on invisible layers. Tools|Object Order|Send to Back moves the selected object behind all overlapping objects.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Send To Back button (Draw or Align Toolbars)

See Also

Arranging Object Layers

Bring Forward

Bring to Front

Moving and Sizing Controls

Send Backward

Working with Controls


Tools | Database Desktop

The Tools|Database Desktop command starts the Database Desktop application so that you can work with external databases in Quattro Pro. Using Database Desktop, you can

view, edit and query databases

copy data from a database into Quattro Pro

link database data to corresponding data in Quattro Pro and have your notebook updated whenever the database changes

query databases from within Quattro Pro and have the results returned directly to the notebook

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Database Desktop button (Modeling Toolbar)

See Also

Database Desktop Help


Tools | Data Modeling Desktop

The Tools|Data Modeling Desktop command starts the Data Modeling Desktop application so that you can create crosstab notebook formats with data from Quattro Pro.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Data Modeling Desktop button (Modeling Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

Cell Block to Send

Specifies the block of data to use when creating crosstab reports.

Cell for Returned Data

Specifies the target block for the results from Data Modeling Desktop.

Data Exchange Method

Specifies whether data will dynamically change when the database is updated. Choose Hot to dynamically update data.

See Also

Data Modeling Desktop Help


Tools | Database Tools

The Tools|Database Tools command displays a submenu of commands you can use to perform database operations:

Form	Creates data entry and query forms without programming.

Query 	Searches the database for records that meet given requirements. Optionally, you can copy the records you find to another part of the notebook, or delete them.

Table Query	Performs a query-by-example operation in an external data table.

Table Link	Establishes a link to an external database table and displays the table in a Quattro Pro notebook.

Aliases	Specifies paths for working and private directories when working with external data tables.


Tools | Database Tools | Form

The Tools|Database Tools|Form command lets you create a form for entering and finding data records without programming. This command displays the Database Form dialog box.

To create a form, enter the coordinates of the database block you want to use as a basis for the form. The block should have field labels in the top row and data in each column. Click OK to display the Edit Records dialog box.

See Also

Using Database Forms


Tools | Database Tools | Query

The Tools|Database Tools|Query command searches a Quattro Pro database to find records that meet your requirements, or criteria. Once you have set up a criteria table the search options tell Quattro Pro to search the database block and highlight all records meeting the criteria, copy all records or just unique records to a different part of the notebook, or delete the records.

Dialog Box Options

Database Block

Specifies the block of data, including field names, to search. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Criteria Table

Specifies the block containing search conditions, including field names.

Output Block

Specifies the block where you want to copy field names and records that meet the criteria.

Locate

Highlights all records that meet the search criteria.

Extract

Copies all records that meet the search criteria to the output block.

Extract Unique

Copies records like Extract, but eliminates duplicate records.

Delete

Deletes all records that meet the search criteria.

Field Names

Assigns block names to fields so you can use them in search formulas.

Reset

Removes all block settings (Database Block, Criteria Table, and Output Block). It does not affect the criteria block or output block in your notebook, only the dialog box settings.

Note:	Press F7 to repeat the last-used Locate, Extract, Extract Unique, or Delete from the Data Query dialog box.

See Also

Copying Matching Records

Deleting Matching Records

Highlighting Matching Records

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database

Using External Databases


Tools | Database Tools | Table Query

The Tools|Database Tools|Table Query command performs a query-by-example (QBE) operation on an external data table. With QBE, you create a particular kind of query in which you make a form that looks like an example of the records you want to search for.

Dialog Box Options

Source of Query

Specifies an external query file (with Query in File) or a block in the active notebook (with Query in Block) as the source of the query text.

QBE File/Block

Specifies the file name (if you specified Query in File) or block coordinates (if you specified Query in Block) of the query text. If running a query from a block, be sure to include all rows in the column that contain text; type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Browse

Lets you choose the external query file to use. See File-Handling Options for details.

Destination

Specifies the target block for the query's Answer table (its results).

If Database Desktop is not already running, Tools|Database Tools|Table Query starts it as a minimized application.

Tip:	To make a query flexible so the same text block searches for different field values, you can replace a selection condition (the part of a query statement that narrows the search) with a cell address. This lets you place the selection condition anywhere in a notebook (outside the query block).

To do this, you edit the cell entry that contains the selection condition to a formula instead of a label, then concatenate the cell address to the end of the query statement.

For example, if a query statement reads

'  |  Check  |

you can edit it to

+"  |  Check" &$B$1&"  |"

The last statement checks for a label in cell B1 and adds it to the selection condition.

See Types of Operators for details on using the & (concatenation) operator.

See Also

Aliases

Database Desktop Help

Querying External Tables with QBE


Tools | Database Tools | Table Link

The Tools|Database Tools|Table Link command establishes a link to an external database table and displays the table in a Quattro Pro notebook.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Table Link button (Modeling Toolbar)

Dialog Box Options

Block

The block where you want the linked table to appear. To show the whole table, type a cell reference for the upper left cell of the block. To show only a portion of the table, specify a block consisting of several columns and rows. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Table

Sets the path and filename of the database table to which you want to establish a link. Choose the Browse button to select a database table from a list. You can use Tools|Database Tools|Aliases to specify a working directory where the tables are most likely to be found.

See Also

@TABLELINK

Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

Table Query


Tools | Database Tools | Aliases

The Tools|Database Tools|Aliases command works with Tools|Database Tools|Table Query. This command lets you specify a private directory to hold temporary files so they won't be overwritten by other users and a working directory where external data tables are most likely to be found.

Dialog Box Options

Private Directory (:PRIV:)

The complete path of your private directory, for temporary files.

Working Directory (:WORK:)

The complete path of your working directory, where external data files are located.

:PRIV: and :WORK: are alias names for those two directories.

See Also

Database Desktop Help

Managing Aliases

Table Link


Tools | Numeric Tools

The Tools|Numeric Tools command displays a submenu of numeric tools commands:

Analysis Tools	Displays a list of advanced statistical, financial, and numerical analysis tools.

Regression	Performs regression analysis on blocks of data to show how one or more independent variables influence a dependent variable.

Invert	Creates an inversion matrix for an existing square matrix (a matrix containing the same number of columns as rows); used with Tools|Advanced Math|Multiply to solve matrix problems.

Multiply	Multiplies the values in two matrixes and displays the results in a third.

What-If	Sets up tables for providing hypothetical formula values.

Frequency	Sets up tables showing the number of values in a block of cells that fall within specified intervals.

Optimizer	Performs linear and nonlinear programming; solves sets of equations or inequalities to find optimum solutions.

Solve For	Calculates a formula backwards, starting with the desired result and solving for a variable that produces that result.


Tools | Numeric Tools | Analysis Tools

The Tools|Analysis Tools command displays a dialog box with a list of Analysis Tools. Select a tool and choose OK.

For details on each tool, see Using the Advanced Analysis Tools.


Tools | Numeric Tools | Regression

Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression creates a regression analysis table showing how one to 150 independent variables can affect a dependent variable.

Dialog Box Options

Independent

Specifies the block containing up to 150 columns of independent variable (x-axis) data. Each variable must be in a separate column; the independent variables can be in noncontiguous columns. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Dependent

Specifies the block (partial column) containing dependent variable (y-axis) data.

Output

Specifies the block where results will be written.

Y Intercept

Specifies whether to force the y-intercept value to zero (choose Zero) or whether to compute it (Compute).

See Also

Performing Regression Analysis


The Regression Output Block

The regression output block is nine rows deep and three columns wider than the number of columns in the independent block. Make sure to leave enough blank space; any underlying data will be overwritten. The output block contains this information:

Constant

The y-intercept value, zero if Y Intercept is set to Zero instead of Compute.

Std Err of Y Est

The estimated standard error of y values; the degree of deviation of observed y values from predicted values.

R Squared

The variance; the degree of relationship between independent and dependent variables. With one independent variable, R Squared is the square of the correlation between the two variables.

No. of Observations

The number of values for each variable; the number of rows in the regression table.

Degrees of Freedom

The number of observations minus the number of independent values being computed by the regression. With Y Intercept set to Zero, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables); with Y Intercept computed, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables + 1).

X Coefficient(s)

The regression coefficients of the independent (x) variables; the slope of the regression line representing the relationship between each independent variable and the dependent variable.

Std Err of Coef.

An error estimate of the X Coefficient above it. Interpret each coefficient as the X Coefficient value plus or minus the Standard Error of Coefficient.

See Also

Performing Regression Analysis

Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression


Y Intercept Settings

You can imagine the relationship between the dependent variable and each independent variable plotted as a graph with an x- and y-axis. The y-intercept is the point where the graph cuts the y-axis.

Compute

Calculates the y-intercept.

Zero

Forces the y-intercept value to zero.

See Also

Performing Regression Analysis

Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression


Tools | Numeric Tools | Invert

The Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert command finds the inverse of a matrix. (When you multiply a matrix by its inverse, the resultant matrix is an identity matrix: all 1s and 0s, with only a single diagonal of 1s.)

Dialog Box Options

Source

Specifies the matrix block you want to invert. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Destination

Specifies the upper left cell of the block where you want to write the inverted matrix. If you specify the same block as the invert block, the inverted matrix overwrites the existing matrix.

See Also

Introducing Matrix Operations

Inverting a Matrix

Solving Matrix Problems

Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply


Tools | Numeric Tools | Multiply

The Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply command multiplies the values in one matrix by the values in a second matrix to obtain a third. The number of columns in the first matrix must equal the number of rows in the second matrix.

Dialog Box Options

Matrix 1

Specifies the first matrix to multiply. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Matrix 2

Specifies the second matrix to multiply.

Destination

Specifies the top left cell of the area where you want to write the resulting matrix.

See Also

Introducing Matrix Operations

Multiplying Two Matrixes

Solving Matrix Problems

Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert


Tools | Numeric Tools | What-If

The Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If command shows how a change in one or two variables affects the rest of your data. It builds "what-if" tables that are separate from your data to show both the substitutions and the effects they have on other cells.

Dialog Box Options

Table Type

Specifies the number of variables in the what-if formulas. Choose One Free Variable to substitute for one variable when building the what-if table; choose Two Free Variables to build a two-variable table.

Data Table

Specifies the block where you want to write the data table, including values for the first variable as the leftmost column and the formula row as the first row. (If you are using two variables, the first row includes one two-variable formula plus values for the second variable.) Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Input Cell/Column Input Cell

Specifies the first (or only) cell referenced by what-if formula(s). If you selected Two Free Variables for the What-If Table Type, the name of this field changes to Column Input Cell.

Row Input Cell

Specifies the second cell referenced by a two-variable what-if formula.

Generate

Builds the table.

Reset

Clears all settings.

See Also

Creating One-Variable "What-if" Tables

Creating Two-Variable "What-if" Tables


Tools | Numeric Tools | Frequency

The Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency command calculates the number of values that fall within given intervals and displays the results in a frequency distribution table.

Dialog Box Options

Value Block(s)

Specifies the block or list of blocks containing values to be counted. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Bin Block

Specifies the block that defines value intervals or "bins" of values to be counted.

Reset

Clears all settings.

See Also

Creating Frequency Distributions


Tools | Numeric Tools | Optimizer

The Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer command finds optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems.

Dialog Box Options

Solution Cell

Specifies the cell that contains a formula you want Optimizer to maximize, minimize, or equal. The default is Max. This entry is optional; if not used, select None.

Target Value

Specifies the value to be reached by the formula in Solution Cell (if there is a Solution Cell entry and it is not set to Max or Min).

Variable Cell(s)

Specifies the cells Optimizer can adjust to reach an optimal solution; problem solutions display in these cells.

Constraints

Defines formulas that limit the Solution Cell formula and/or Variable Cell(s) contents.

Add

Adds a new constraint.

Change

Edits the selected constraint.

Delete

Removes the selected constraint.

Options

Offers calculation settings and methods, loads and saves model settings, and generates reports.

Reset

Clears Optimizer settings.

Revert

Restores original variable and solution cell values in the notebook after you use Solve to generate a set of solution values.

Solve

Finds a solution to the defined problem. If you revise Optimizer settings without saving a solution, and then choose Solve, you will be asked to confirm your action before Optimizer overwrites the existing solution.

Close

Closes the Optimizer dialog box and saves the settings.

Cancel

Closes the Optimizer dialog box without saving the settings.

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer


Optimizer Solution Cell

When using Optimizer, you can enter an optional goal-seeking formula into a notebook cell and enter its location in the Solution Cell input box. Then, you can request Optimizer to maximize, minimize, or reach a target value for that formula. Be sure to include the parts of the formula you want to vary in the list next to Variable Cell(s).

Solution Cell

Specifies the cell whose value you want Optimizer to maximize, minimize, or equal. The solution cell usually contains a formula whose result depends on the variable cells.

Max

Indicates you want to maximize the formula in the solution cell. This is the default.

Min

Indicates you want to minimize the formula in the solution cell.

None

The default; indicates you want to find a solution without considering a solution cell.

To use a target value, enter it in the Target Value input box (or reference a cell containing the target) and check the box in front of Target Value.

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer


Optimizer Variable Cell(s)

Variable cells are cells Optimizer can adjust to reach an optimal solution. Normally, these would be part of the formula in the solution cell. For example, if solution cell B2 contained +E3+F3+G3, then the variable cell block would most likely be E3..G3 (or E3, F3, G3).

To have an effect on the solution, variable cells must be related to the solution cell and to the constraints, either directly or through references. You can assign up to 200 variable cells entered as individual cells or blocks in the Variable Cell(s) input box. You may enter a list of variable cells and blocks separated by commas.

Variable cells should contain realistic values, and must not contain dates, formulas, or text. They must not be protected.

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer


Optimizer Options Dialog Box

The Optimizer Options dialog box offers additional Optimizer settings. They can help you save time or improve accuracy:

Dialog Box Options

Load Model, Save Model

Load and save blocks of Optimizer settings for future use.

Reporting

Generates Answer and Detail Reports.

Assume Linear Model (use Simplex Method)

Indicates whether Optimizer uses linear or non-linear methods to solve the problem.

Show Iteration Results

Indicates whether Optimizer should pause between iterations so you can check the progress of the search. Check it if you want to be prompted whether to continue the search or stop.

Automatic Scaling of Variables

When checked, can help when variable cell and target values differ greatly in size. For example, variable cells can contain investment values of several million dollars, while Optimizer tries to maximize a return-on-investment percentage in the solution cell.

Maximum Time in Seconds

Indicates how long Optimizer can spend looking for the best solution (from 1 to 65,000 seconds; 100 seconds is the default).

Maximum Number of Iterations

Sets the maximum number of iterations, or trials, Optimizer can perform to find the best solution (from 1 to 65,000; 100 is the default).

Allowed Solution Precision

Controls the accuracy of the solution, from 0 to 1. The default is .000001 or 1E-06. The greater the precision (the more decimal places), the more time it takes to find a solution.

Allowed Solution Tolerance

Indicates the maximum percentage a solution can differ from a theoretical optimum integer solution. As you increase the Tolerance setting, Optimizer can produce solutions more quickly, but they may be less accurate.

Estimates

Specifies the approach used to obtain initial estimates of the basic variables in each iteration. Tangent uses linear extrapolation from a tangent vector, while Quadratic uses quadratic extrapolation. Quadratic may be useful in highly nonlinear problems.

Derivatives

Selects Forward (the default) or Central differencing for estimates of partial derivatives. Central requires more iterations but may help if a message indicates a better solution is not available.

Search

Selects a method for computing the search direction. Newton, the default, is a quasi-Newton method and may be faster, but Conjugate can help if you see a message indicating that the objective function is changing too slowly.

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer


Report Output Blocks Dialog Box

You can produce two kinds of Optimizer reports:

Answer Report

This report shows how well the constraints were met. It indicates

Starting and final values for the solution cell

Starting and final values for the variable cells

Value, binding, slack, and dual value for the constraints

If Assume Linear is checked in the Optimizer Options dialog box, the Answer Report also indicates

Gradient, Increment, and Decrement for the variable cells

Right Value, Increment, and Decrement for the constraint cells

Binding status, Yes or No, indicates whether the constraint affects the solution; if No, that constraint can be eliminated.

Slack is the difference between the constraint constant value (Right Value) and the value actually used in the solution.

Variable dual values are sometimes called reduced gradients. They show how a one-unit increase in the variable affects the solution cell.

Constraint dual values, or Lagrange Multipliers, measure the amount by which the solution could be improved if the constraint were relaxed by one unit.

Gradient is the coefficient of the objective function for each variable cell.

Right Value is the constant in a constraint expression, the value of the right-most term.

Increment for variable cells is the amount of increase in the Gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, Increment is the amount of increase in the Right Value (constraint value) before the binding status changes.

Decrement for variable cells is the amount of decrease in the Gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, Decrement is the amount of decrease in the Right Value before the binding status changes.

Detail Report

This report lists the variable and solution cell values at each iteration. You can see how variable cells change throughout the solution process.

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Optimizer Options Dialog Box

Producing Optimizer Reports


Tools | Numeric Tools | Solve For

The Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For command lets you calculate a formula backwards, starting with the result and solving for a variable that produces that result. You just specify the result you want, then indicate which variable Quattro Pro can adjust to reach that result.

Dialog Box Options

Formula Cell

Specifies the cell containing the formula you want to solve. The formula should not contain string functions. Type the cell coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell from the notebook.

Target Value

Specifies the result you want from the Formula Cell.

Variable Cell

Indicates which cell Quattro Pro can change to solve for a desired value.

Max Iterations

Determines how many passes Solve For makes to solve the formula (1 to 1000). The default is 5.

Accuracy

Specifies how close Solve For must get to the Target Value (the default is 0.0005).

See Also

Entering Formulas

Goal Seeking with Solve For


Tools | Toolbar Designer

Lets you create your own custom Toolbars. When you choose Tools|Toolbar Designer, a blank Toolbar window appears and the Main Toolbar changes to provide design tools for creating Toolbars.

The Toolbar Designer is useful for building basic Toolbars with standard buttons, push buttons, bitmaps buttons, and text. For details on how to use the Toolbar Designer, see Building Basic Toolbars.

Note:	If you want to build a complex Toolbar with edit fields, check boxes, and other controls most often found in dialog boxes, use the UI Builder; see Building Complex Toolbars.

See Also

Opening and Closing Toolbars


Tools | UI Builder

Opens a dialog window where you can build dialog boxes and Toolbars for a custom application. The dialog window Toolbar includes tools to help you create each dialog box control.

Tools|Toolbar Designer offers another way to create custom Toolbars. For details, see Building Basic Toolbars.

See Also

Building Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Tools | Object Exchange

The Tools|Object Exchange commands displays a submenu of commands you can use to create and configure Object Exchange messaging accounts:

Manage Pages	Updates notebook pages sent with File|Publish or inserted into your notebook with File|Subscribe.

Address Book	Enters addresses for use with File|Send|OBEX and File|Publish.

Poll Now	Retrieves objects from the outgoing OBEX Object Store (put there by File|Send|OBEX and File|Publish) and transmits them to addressees and subscribers.

See Also

File|Publish

File|Send

File|Subscribe

Workgroup Desktop Topics


Tools | Object Exchange | Manage Pages

This command displays the Manage Inserted Pages dialog box so you can update pages sent with File|Publish and inserted in your notebook with File|Subscribe.


Tools | Object Exchange | Address Book

This command displays the OBEX Address Book Manager so you can enter addresses for use with File|Send|OBEX and File|Publish.

For more information, see OBEX Address Book Manager Help.


Tools | Object Exchange | Poll Now

This command retrieves objects from the outgoing OBEX Object Store (put there by File|Send|OBEX and File|Publish) and transmits them to addressees and subscribers. It also retrieves objects from your OBEX transport accounts and puts them into your incoming Object Store so you can use them with File|Subscribe.

You can poll accounts at any time, even if your messaging accounts are set to poll automatically.

When you use this command, it displays the OBEX Poll Dialog Box.


Graph Window Tools Menu

The Tools menu commands change depending on which Quattro Pro window is active. When the graph window is active, the Tools menu includes the following commands.

Macro	Provides commands for creating, running, and debugging macros.

Spell Check	Checks spelling in notebooks and graphs.

Group 	Places two or more selected objects into a group, where they are treated as one object in subsequent operations.

Ungroup 	Breaks a selected group of objects into its original components.

Align 	Lines up selected objects in any of these ways: left, right, horizontal center, top, bottom, vertical center.

Object Order	Reorders layers of overlapping graph objects.

Import Graphics	Loads pictures in any of these formats: .BMP, .CGM, .CLP, .EPS, .GIF, .PCX, .PIC, .TIF, and .WPG.

Export Graphics	Saves graphs and pictures in any of these formats: .BMP, .EPS, .GIF, .PCX, .TIF.

See Also

Notebook Window Tools Menu

Dialog Window Tools Menu

Custom Toolbar Window Tools Menu


Tools | Group

Tools|Group places selected objects into a single logical unit, or group. You group two or more objects when you want them to be treated as a single object in subsequent operations. For example, you might group all the objects in a complex drawing to ensure that no objects are left behind or shift position when you move them.

To group objects, select them and choose Tools|Group. To nest groups within other groups, select any combination of groups and individual objects, then choose Tools|Group. Once you group objects, you can move and resize them with the mouse. To return a group to its individual components, Ungroup them.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Group button (Align Toolbar)

See Also

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects


Tools | Ungroup

Tools|Ungroup breaks a group into its original components. To use this command, select a group, then choose Tools|Ungroup. If the group had other groups nested within it, these groups remain intact. You must use Tools|Ungroup again to ungroup them.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Ungroup button (Align Toolbar)

See Also

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects


Tools | Align

You can line up the center or edges of two or more objects using Tools|Align. This command opens a menu containing these commands:

Left	Lines up the left sides of the selected figures.

Right	Lines up the right sides of the selected figures.

Horizontal Center	Lines up the centers of the objects as though they are beads on an invisible horizontal string.

Top	Lines up the top edges of the selected figures.

Bottom	Lines up the bottom edges of the selected figures.

Vertical Center	Lines up the centers of the objects as though they are beads on an invisible vertical string.

Horizontal Space	Horizontally spaces elements by the amount of pixels you specify.

Vertical Space	Vertically spaces elements by the amount of pixels you specify.

You can choose more than one of these commands in sequence. For example, to align the right sides and tops of a group of selected objects, choose Tools|Align|Right, and then choose Tools|Align|Top.

When you select an object group as one of the objects to be aligned, Quattro Pro aligns the group as if it were a single object.

You can also use the Snap to Grid option of the Grid property to align objects (see Grid Options for details).

Shortcuts

The Align Toolbar has buttons that perform the same Align submenu commands:

 Align Left	 Vertical Center

 Align Right	 Horizontal Center

 Align Top	 Horizontal Space

 Align Bottom	 Vertical Space

See Also

Aligning Objects


Tools | Import Graphics

Tools|Import Graphics (or the Import button on the graph window Toolbar) brings clip art or drawings from other programs (including non-Windows programs) into the active graph window. The options are the same ones available in standard file-handling dialog boxes (see File Handling Options for details).

You can import files in any of these formats:

.WPG	A graphic format used by WordPerfect Presentations.

.BMP	(Bitmap) The format used in Windows paint programs, like Paintbrush, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CGM	(Computer Graphics Metafile) The most common vector-based clip art format.

.CLP	A graphic format used by Quattro Pro for DOS.

.EPS	(Encapsulated PostScript) The file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .EPS file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Quattro Pro.)

.GIF	(Graphics Interchange Format) A bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards.

.PCX	A bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paintbrush and Quattro Pro for DOS.

.PIC	The graph format used in the DOS versions of 1-2-3.

.TIF	(Tag Image File Format) A bitmap file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

Shortcuts

Toolbar:	 Import button (Graph Toolbar)

See Also

Cropping and Resizing Bitmaps

Importing Graphics

Modifying CGM and .CLP Graphics

Drawing Objects and Creating Text Boxes on the Spreadsheet


Tools | Export Graphics

Tools|Export Graphics saves the entire contents of the active graph window in a different file format. The exported file can then be used in other programs or sent to a 35mm slide service bureau for processing.

Dialog Box Options

Many of the options are the same ones available in standard file-handling dialog boxes (see File Handling Options for details). Additional options are:

TIFF Compression

Choose the compression method that the target application for this file can accept: PackBits or None (no compression).

Bitmap Gray Scale

Converts the colors in the graph to levels of gray. This is useful if you plan to import this file into a program that can accept only gray scale TIF files.

Quattro Pro exports to these file formats:

.BMP	(Bitmap) The format used in Windows paint programs, like Paintbrush, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CGM	(Computer Graphics Metafile) The most common vector-based clip art format.

.EPS	(Encapsulated PostScript) The file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .EPS file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Quattro Pro.)

.GIF	(Graphics Interchange Format) A bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards.

.PCX	A bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paintbrush and Quattro Pro for DOS.

.TIF	(Tag Image File Format) A bitmap file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

If you are exporting a graph to send to a 35mm slide bureau, be sure to set the graph's Aspect Ratio to 35mm Slide.

See Also

Exporting Graphics


Dialog Window Tools Menu

The Tools menu commands change depending on which Quattro Pro window is active. When the dialog window is active, the Tools menu includes the following commands.

Macro	Provides commands for creating, running, and debugging macros.

Align	Lines up, resizes, and controls spacing between dialog elements.

Object Order	Determines sequence of tabbing, returned values, and on-screen layering of dialog elements.

Connect	Connects the values of two different objects.

Links	Sets constants or passes properties to or from objects, and runs commands.

Toolbar Designer	Allows you to create your own custom Toolbars.

See Also

Notebook Window Tools Menu

Graph Window Tools Menu

Custom Toolbar Window Tools Menu


Tools | Align

The Tools|Align commands line up dialog elements.

Left	Aligns elements along the left edge of the leftmost object selected.

Right	Aligns elements along the right edge of the rightmost object selected.

Horizontal Center	Centers elements between the left and right sides of the dialog box.

Top	Aligns elements along the top edge of the topmost object selected.

Bottom	Aligns elements along the bottom edge of the bottommost object selected.

Vertical Center	Centers elements between the top and bottom of the dialog box.

Horizontal Space	Horizontally spaces elements by the amount of pixels you specify.

Vertical Space	Vertically spaces elements by the amount of pixels you specify.

Resize to Same	Resizes all selected controls to the size of the first control selected.

Shortcuts

The Align Toolbar has buttons that perform the same Align submenu commands:

 Align Left	 Vertical Center

 Align Right	 Horizontal Center

 Align Top	 Horizontal Space

 Align Bottom	 Vertical Space

 Resize To Same

See Also

Aligning Controls


Tools | Object Order

Tools|Object Order commands determine sequence of tabbing, returned values, and onscreen layering of dialog elements:

Order Controls	Sets the order in which initial settings are passed to a dialog box by {DODIALOG}.

Order From	Edits the order in which initial settings are passed to a dialog box by {DODIALOG}.

Order Tab Controls	Sets the order in which controls are activated by pressing the Tab key.

Order Tab From	Edits the order in which controls are activated by pressing the Tab key.

Bring Forward	Moves the selected object in front of an overlapping object.

Send Backward	Moves the selected object behind an overlapping object.

Bring to Front	Moves the selected object in front of all overlapping objects.

Send to Back	Moves the selected object behind all overlapping objects.

See Also

Moving and Sizing Controls

Setting a Control's Value

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Order Controls

The Tools|Object Order|Order Controls command changes the order in which control settings appear in the settings block used by {DODIALOG}.

See Also

Setting a Control's Value

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Order From

The Tools|Object Order|Order From command changes the order in which control settings appear in the settings block used by {DODIALOG}. Unlike Order Controls, you can use it to group specific controls within an existing order together.

See Also

Setting a Control's Value

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Order Tab Controls

The Tools|Object Order|Order Tab Controls command determines the order in which the user can tab through controls in the dialog box. You can disable this for a particular control by right-clicking it, choosing the Properties command, and setting the Tab Stop property to No. By default all controls have a Tab Stop property of Yes. To specify the order in which Tab goes from control to control, hold down the Shift key and select each control in the order you want them to cycle. Then choose Tools|Object Order|Order Tab Controls.

See Also

Setting a Control's Value

Setting Tab Order

Working with Controls


Tools | Object Order | Order Tab From

The Tools|Object Order|Order Tab From command provides a shortcut for setting the order in which several controls are activated by the Tab key. This command works in the same way as Tools|Object Order|Order From. You can pull specific controls out of an ordering and group them together using Tools|Object Order|Order Tabs From.

See Also

Setting a Control's Value

Setting Tab Order

Working with Controls


Tools | Connect

The Tools|Connect command provides a quick way to link a dialog control to a notebook cell or another control. Connected controls get their initial value from the cell or element, and copy their final value into the cell or element when the dialog box closes.

Tools|Connect creates link commands for the selected object. You can use Tools|Links to remove or modify these links.

Dialog Box Options

Source

Specifies the name of the control to add link commands to.

Target

Specifies the control name or cell address of the object to get the initial value from. When the dialog box is closed, the value of Source is sent back to this object. Type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

Dynamic Connection

Sends changes from the source to the target whenever the source's value changes, rather than waiting until the user closes the dialog box.

See Also

Connecting Controls to Cells or Other Controls

Creating a Dialog Box

Working with Link Commands


Tools | Links

The Tools|Links command displays the Object Link dialog box where you can attach link commands to a control, to indicate what should happen when the user changes or selects the control. A link command can do many things; it can send a value to a cell in the notebook; it can run a macro; it can close the dialog box; it can change the zoom factor in the notebook.

Link commands will usually specify at least three things: an event, an action, and an object. The event indicates what occurrence should trigger the link command; the action indicates what should happen; the object is what should be acted upon. One control can have many link commands.

Dialog Box Options

The following buttons in the Object Link dialog box create or remove link commands:

Add	creates a new link command below the selected link command.

Insert	creates a new link command above the selected link command.

Delete	removes the selected link command from the control.

Delete All	removes all link commands from the control.

Click Object Link Dialog Box Components for a graphic example of a control with a link command assigned to it. Each row of pick list buttons in the Object Link dialog box is a link command.

See Also

Creating a Dialog Box

Making Menu Commands Act

Working with Link Commands


Tools Menu (Custom Toolbar Window)
Custom Toolbar Window Tools Menu

The Tools menu commands change depending on which Quattro Pro window is active. When the custom Toolbar window is active, the Tools menu includes the following commands.

Assign Macro	Attaches the specified macro to the active Toolbar button.

Dock	Closes the active Toolbar in the Toolbar Designer and appends it below the last Toolbar at the top of the Quattro Pro window, ready to use.

UI Builder	Provides tools for customizing Quattro Pro's user interface (UI).

See Also

Notebook Window Tools Menu

Graph Window Tools Menu

Dialog Window Tools Menu


Tools | Assign Macro

Attaches the specified macro to the active Toolbar button.

Dialog Box Options

Location

Enter the address of the cell containing the macro you want to run, or use the Macros/Named Blocks option to choose the macro. Use full linking syntax ([LIBRARY]A:C2) if the cell address is not in the active notebook (linking is not needed when entering a block name).

Macro Library

If the macro is stored in a notebook designated as a macro library, choose the notebook name here. Macros/Namedblocks changes to display the macros available from the notebook.

Macros/Namedblocks

You can choose the name of a macro to run from this list. Use Macro Library to specify the list displayed.

See Also

Assigning Macros

Toolbar Designer Guidelines


Tools | Dock

Closes the active Toolbar in the Toolbar Designer and appends it below the last Toolbar at the top of the Quattro Pro window, ready to use.

See Also

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Using Custom Toolbars


View Menu

Notebook Window

From a notebook window (including the Objects page), the View menu has these commands:

Spreadsheet	Switches from the Objects Page to a notebook page.

Objects Page	Switches from a notebook page to the Objects Page.

Group Mode	Turns Group mode on or off.

Panes	Splits a window into panes.

Locked Titles	Keeps one or more columns, rows, or both onscreen as you scroll a notebook.

Display	Sets the display characteristics that affect the entire Quattro Pro application and individual notebooks.

Zoom	Reduces or enlarges the displayed size of cells on the current notebook page.

Graph Window

From a graph window or a floating graph selected for editing, the View menu has these commands:

Floating Graph	Changes the graph's aspect ratio to retain the proportions of the floating graph.

Screen Slide	Changes the graph's aspect ratio to give the correct proportions for a graph that appears in an onscreen slide show.

35mm Slide	Changes the graph's aspect ratio to give the correct proportions for a graph sent to a slide service for processing into 35mm slides.

Printer Preview	Changes the graph's aspect ratio to show the graph as it will look when printed with the current page setup.

Full Extent	Changes the graph's aspect ratio to adjust the proportions of the graph to fill the window and fit the area designated for the floating graph.

Light Table Window

From a Light Table window, the View menu has these commands:

Small Slides	Shows all slides in the Light Table window in the smallest size.

Medium Slides	Shows all slides in the Light Table window in medium size (the default).

Large Slides	Shows all slides in the Light Table window in the largest size.

Name Only	Shows only the names of slides in the Light Table window.


View | Spreadsheet

The View|Spreadsheet command switches from the Objects Page to a notebook page. If a notebook page is currently selected, a checkmark appears beside the Spreadsheet command.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Shift+F5

Button:	 SpeedTab button


View | Objects Page

The View|Objects Page command switches from a notebook page to the Objects Page. If the Objects Page is currently selected, a checkmark appears beside the Objects Page command.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Shift+F5

Button:	 SpeedTab button


View | Group Mode

The View|Group Mode command turns Group mode on or off. When Group mode is on, a checkmark appears beside the Group Mode command and a blue line appears below the tabs of notebook pages for all defined groups.

When Group mode is on, any changes you make to one page affect all pages in the group. To define a group, use Notebook|Define Group.

Shortcuts

Keyboard:	Alt+F5

See Also

Creating a Group

Group Mode Tips

Grouping Notebook Pages: Overview


View | Panes

The View|Panes command allows you to split a window either vertically or horizontally.

Dialog Box Options

Horizontal

Splits the window from left to right

Vertical

Splits the window from top to bottom

Clear

Removes the active pane

Synchronize

Makes both panes scroll when you move the selector in one of the panes.

Note:	You can point across panes while entering formulas or using dialog boxes.

See Also

Splitting a Window into Panes

Using Quattro Pro Windows


View | Locked Titles

The View|Locked Titles command locks specific rows and/or columns of a page onscreen as titles. When you scroll the page, the titles remain fixed onscreen while the rows below (or columns to the right) scroll as usual.

See Also

Locking Rows and Columns

Using Quattro Pro Windows


View | Display

The View|Display command sets the display characteristics that affect the entire Quattro Pro application and individual notebooks.

Dialog Box Options

Application Options

Displays or hides the Toolbar, Property Band, status line, input line, scroll indicators, or balloon help.

Notebook Options

To allow more space in a notebook window, or to create a special presentation notebook, you may want to temporarily hide the scroll bars or the page tabs. Uncheck the display elements you want to hide; check them when you want them displayed again.

Clock Display

Displays the date and time on the status line in your choice of formats. Standard displays the date and time as DD-MMM-YY and HH:MM AM/PM; International displays the date and time in the Long International formats specified with the International property. If the time or date displayed is incorrect, you must update your computer's internal clock. You can do this with the Windows Control Panel.

3-D Syntax

Switches between two page notation methods for 3-D blocks. The default method expresses page references first, followed by a colon and the block coordinates. For example, A..C:B4..D9 refers to the block B4..D9 on pages A, B, and C. The alternate syntax refers to the same block by referring to each corner of the block with the page reference included, as in A:B4..C:D9.

Objects

Select Show All to show all objects on the notebook (such as floating graphs), Show Outline to show only the outline of objects, or Hide to hide all objects. By showing only the outline of objects or hiding them, you can save time when scrolling or printing.

See Also

Hiding Parts of the Notebook Display

Setting Display Options


View | Zoom

The View|Zoom command reduces or enlarges the displayed size of cells on the current notebook page. Use Zoom to pull back to see a whole printed page, or focus in on the detail of a few cells.

Dialog Box Options

Zoom Factor

The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer.

Apply To

Select Page to apply the new zoom factor to the active page. Select Notebook to apply the new zoom factor to every page in the notebook.

Note:	The Zoom setting does not affect printed output; use the Print Scaling option in the File|Page Setup dialog box to scale printed documents (see Changing Print Size for details).


View | Floating Graph

The View|Floating Graph command changes the graph's aspect ratio to retain the proportions of the floating graph even when you print the graph or bring it into a graph window. For details on the graph aspect ratio, see Aspect Ratio Property.


View | Screen Slide

The View|Screen Slide command changes the graph's aspect ratio to give the correct proportions for a graph that appears in an onscreen slide show. For details on the graph aspect ratio, see Aspect Ratio Property.


View | 35mm Slide

The View|35mm Slide command changes the graph's aspect ratio to give the correct proportions for a graph sent to a slide service for processing into 35mm slides. For details on the graph aspect ratio, see Aspect Ratio Property.


View | Printer Preview

The View|Printer Preview command changes the graph's aspect ratio to show the graph as it will look when printed with the current page setup. For details on the graph aspect ratio, see Aspect Ratio Property.


View | Full Extent

The View|Full Extent command changes the graph's aspect ratio to adjust the proportions of the graph to fill the window and fit the area designated for the floating graph. For details on the graph aspect ratio, see Aspect Ratio Property.


View | Small Slides

The View|Small Slides command shows all slides in the Light Table window in the smallest size to show more slides onscreen.

See Also

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window


View | Medium Slides

The View|Medium Slides command shows all slides in the Light Table window in medium size (the default).

See Also

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window


View | Large Slides

The View|Large Slides command shows all slides in the Light Table window in the largest size.

See Also

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window


View | Name Only

The View|Name Only command shows only the names of slides in the Light Table window.

See Also

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window


Window Menu

New View	Opens a duplicate window containing the active notebook.

Cascade	Arranges open windows in layers.

Tile	Displays all open windows on the screen at once.

Arrange Icons	Aligns all minimized Quattro Pro windows.

Hide	Removes the specified window from view.

Show	Displays the specified hidden window.


Window | New View

The Window|New View command displays a duplicate copy of the active notebook in a new window. This is useful when you want to look at different pages in the notebook at the same time, or if you want to see distant parts of one page at the same time.

See Also

Duplicating a Window

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Window | Cascade

The Window|Cascade command rearranges all open windows in overlapping layers. The top line of each window is revealed so you can see the name of the notebook, graph, or dialog box it contains.

See Also

Resizing Windows

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Window | Tile

The Window|Tile command displays all open windows without overlapping them. When possible, the windows are all given equal room on the screen.

See Also

Resizing Windows

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Window | Arrange Icons

The Window|Arrange Icons command lines up the icons from minimized Quattro Pro windows at the bottom of the Quattro Pro desktop. If the Objects page. is the active page, Window|Arrange Icons lines up any graph, dialog box, or slide show icons on the page.

See Also

Resizing Windows

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Window | Hide

The Window|Hide command hides an open window from view. This is useful when you have multiple notebooks open, but do not want the screen cluttered with too many windows.

See Also

Hiding and Showing Windows

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Window | Show

The Window|Show command displays windows that have been hidden with the Window|Hide command.

See Also

Hiding and Showing Windows

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Send 3-D Data Dialog Box

The data you have selected extends across multiple pages, and requires an additional dimension in Data Modeling Desktop.

The Data Modeling Desktop will create an additional column to reference this additional "page" dimension, but needs you to provide a meaningful name for this column. Enter the name that best categorizes the dimension.

See Also

Data Modeling Desktop Help


Spell Check Options Dialog Box

The Spell Check Options dialog box controls Spell Checker behavior.

Dialog Box Options

Language

Indicates the language to check in.

Supplementary Dictionary

Displays the selected Spell Checker dictionary; dictionaries have a .SUP extension.

Choose New Dictionary

Lets you browse through your hard disk to find a new Spell Checker dictionary (*.SUP) file.

Ignore Words with Numbers

When checked, the Spell Checker skips labels like M9020.

Ignore UPPERCASE Words

When checked, the Spell Checker skips any word entered in all uppercase letters.

See Also

Using the Spell Checker


Enter Password Dialog Box

The Enter Password dialog box prompts you to enter a password when you change the Password Protection Level of your notebook from None to Low, Medium, or High. Passwords can be up to 15 characters in length. The characters you type show onscreen as pound signs (#####) so they are hidden from view.

Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, if your password entry has a lowercase letter but you type a capital when prompted for a password, Quattro Pro considers these different passwords.

After you enter a password and click OK, you will be asked to verify the password. If the password differs at all from the first one you typed, Quattro Pro displays an error message and cancels the password-protected operation.

Caution: If you forget a file's password, you will not be able to load the file. For this reason, record your passwords when you create them, and store the record in a secure place.

See Also

Assigning a Password to a File


Password Dialog Box

The Password dialog box prompts you for a password when you:

Open a password-protected file

Change the Password Protection Level of a notebook from None to Low, Medium, or High.

Passwords can be up to 15 characters in length. The characters you type show onscreen as pound signs (#####) so they are hidden from view.

See Also

Assigning a Password to a File


Save Consolidation As Dialog Box

The Save Consolidation As dialog box prompts you to name the current consolidation. Consolidation names may be up to 9 characters in length.

See Also

Naming and Saving Consolidations


Add Source Range Dialog Box
Add Source Block Dialog Box

The Add Source Block dialog box prompts you to enter the name of a source block to combine with another source block.

See Also

Source Blocks


Consolidation Options Dialog Box

The Consolidation Options dialog box offers these options:

Output with Formulas

Determines whether consolidation results appear as formulas or values.

Use Labels In

Determines whether data field labels are used in the consolidation.

Top Row matches data from different blocks based on labels in the top row of each block

Top Column matches data from different blocks based on labels in the left column of each block

See Also

Consolidator Options


Scenario Group Settings Dialog Box

The Scenario Group Settings dialog box offers these options:

Group Name

Displays the name of the active group.

Capture Area

Specifies the area where the Scenario Manager tracks data and format changes:

Notebook tracks changes within the entire notebook except the Objects page.

Page tracks changes on the specified page.

Block tracks changes in the specified block. If you select Block, type the block coordinates, or click the Point Mode button [image] to select a block from the notebook.

New

Creates and names a new Scenario Manager group.

Rename

Applies another name to the active group.

Options

Offers Scenario Manager options.

Delete

Deletes the active group and all scenarios in it.

See Also

Scenario Groups

The Capture Area


New Group Dialog Box

The New Group dialog box prompts you to enter a name for the current Scenario Group. Scenario Group names may be up to 19 characters in length.

See Also

Scenario Groups


Group Options Dialog Box

This dialog box indicates whether to update all scenarios in the active group when blocks are moved, inserted, or deleted. When Update on Block Operations is checked, the Scenario Manager tracks all block operations internally; no scenario changes are recorded. If unchecked, the scenarios register any moves, insertions, and deletions. If you are using the Scenario Manager for version control, you will probably want to uncheck this option.

See Also

Tracking Versions


Rename Group Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you rename the active scenario group. Enter the new name in the edit field. Scenario Group names may be up to 19 characters in length.

See Also

Scenario Groups


Capture Scenario As Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you name the current scenario. Enter the name in the edit field and click OK. Scenario Group names may be up to 19 characters in length.

See Also

Naming and Saving Scenarios


Scenario Report Dialog Box

This dialog box offers several options for displaying the Scenario Summary Report. When checked, they have these effects:

Report All Groups

Displays a report for each scenario group, not just the active group.

Use Left Labels

Identifies scenario cells with text in cells immediately to their left.

Use Top Labels

Identifies scenario cells with text above them.

Find Empty Page

Puts the Scenario Summary Report on the first empty page in the notebook. To place it somewhere else, uncheck Find Empty Page and enter a page and block in the edit field.

Since these are check boxes, you can check all, any, or none. Click OK to display the Scenario Summary Report.

If you have checked a labels option or named each changing and result cell, a label or name displays next to each value in the Scenario Summary Report.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Scenario Highlighting Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you change the highlight color used for changing and result cells in your scenario. The options are:

Highlight

When checked, highlight colors are used to differentiate changing and result cells.

Changing Cell

Sets the color used for changing cells when Highlight is checked.

Result Cell

Sets the color used for result cells when Highlight is checked.

See Also

Scenario Cells


Q&E Dialog Box
Q Plus E Dialog Box

The dialog box lets you add, edit, and execute database queries through Q+E:

Add Query

Creates a new query.

Edit Query

Changes an existing query.

Execute Query

Runs the current query.

For more information, press F1 within Q+E to display Q+E Help.


Database Form Dialog Box

The Database Form dialog box lets you search and edit fields in the database you have associated with the current form.

Dialog Box Options

New

Creates a new, blank record added after the last record.

Delete

Erases the active record.

Revert

Cancels any edits and restores original data.

Go Next

Displays the next record.

Go Previous

Displays the previous record.

Search

Displays a search form. The Search button then changes to Edit, and the Delete button changes to Clear.

Close

Enters any changes from the current session and closes the form.

See Also

Using Database Forms


Dialog Window Objects

Dialog window objects are controls used in building applications. If you have not yet selected an object and choose Property|Current Object  in the Property Band, the properties that control the Dialog window appear. See Active Dialog Window Properties for details.

Bitmap Button

Check Box

Color Control

Combo Box

Edit Field

Edit Integer

File Control

Group Box

Horizontal ScrollBar

Label

List Box

Pick List

Push Button

Radio Button

Rectangle

Spin Control

Time Control

Vertical ScrollBar

See Also

Properties in the Dialog Window


Active Dialog Window Properties

The following properties control the behavior of the dialog window:

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the dialog window.

Title	Specifies the title of the dialog box, which the user will see.

Position Adjust	Specifies how the dialog box moves when the Quattro Pro window  is resized.

Grid Options	Shows/hides a grid and sets the number of pixels between grid lines.

Name	Used to identify the dialog box in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Disabled	Disables all controls in the dialog box.

Value	The current setting of the dialog box (a comma separated list of the current control settings of the dialog box).

See Also

Properties in the Dialog Window


Bitmap Button Control

A bitmap button has a graphic image on its face instead of text. It can imitate the behavior of a check box, radio button, or push button. There are several different ways to specify the bitmap that appears on a bitmap button's face:

Right-click the control and choose the Properties command, then choose Bitmap. You will see a list of predefined bitmaps. Select a bitmap from the list (it then appears under Preview) and choose OK.

Choose Browse from the Bitmap property dialog box, specify the name of an external Windows bitmap (BMP) file, and choose OK. The bitmap will be saved with the active notebook.

If the Clipboard contains a bitmap, select the bitmap button and choose Edit|Paste to paste the bitmap onto the button's face. The bitmap will be saved with the active notebook.

Bitmap buttons have the value of whatever button they are imitating. To specify how the button behaves, set the bitmap button's Button Type property.

Bitmap Button Properties

Bitmap	Specifies a bitmap file (.bmp) or an internal Quattro Pro bitmap to appear on a button.

Label Text	Specifies the text appearing on the button.

Text Draw Flags	Defines the location of label text on the bitmap button.

Default Button	Specifies the default button in the dialog box (which button is executed by pressing Enter).

Button Type	Specifies the type of button.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the bitmap button.

Hidden	Specifies whether the bitmap button is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	Specifies the bitmap button's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a bitmap button moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the bitmap button in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the bitmap button can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the bitmap button appears when the dialog box displays.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the bitmap button can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the bitmap button.

See Also

Push Button

Working with Controls


Push Button Control

A push button runs a specified command when the user clicks it. To have a macro run when the user clicks a push button, add a DOMACRO link command to the push button.

Push buttons do not have a value. To make a push button close the dialog box, use the Button Type property.

Push Button Properties

Label Text	Specifies the text appearing on the button.

Text Draw Flags	Defines the location of label text on a button.

Default Button	Specifies the default button in the dialog box (which button is executed by pressing Enter).

Button Type	Specifies the type of button.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the button.

Hidden	Specifies whether the button is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The button's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a button moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the button in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the button can be used. The control appears dimmer to indicate that it is unavailable.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the button appears when the dialog box displays.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the button can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the button.

See Also

Bitmap Button

Working with Controls


Check Box Control

Check boxes present a Yes/No option to the user. The text that appears in this button is stored in its Label Text property. The value of a check box is Yes when it is checked, No when it is unchecked.

Check Box Properties

Draw to Right	Controls the position of check box text.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the check box's value.

Label Text	Specifies the text that appears by the check box.

Text Draw Flags	Defines the location of label text adjacent the check box.

Button Type	Specifies the type of button in the check box.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the check box.

Hidden	Specifies whether the check box is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The check box's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a check box moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the check box in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the check box can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the check box appears when the dialog box displays.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the check box can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the check box.

See Also

Working with Controls


Color Control

A color control lets the user change a color setting. Its value is in the format Red,Green,Blue where Red is the amount of red in the color, Green the amount of green, etc. Each amount is a number from 0 to 255. Each part of a color control's value is a number between 0 and 255. For example, black is 0,0,0; white is 255,255,255; and red is 255,0,0. The current color setting appears in the large rectangle on the right side of the control.

The user can click HSB or CMY (on the color control) to specify the color using a different color model (see Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors for more information on color models). The value of the color control does not change when a different color model is used to specify the color; the control value is always in Red,Green,Blue format.

Color controls are large; make sure the dialog window is large enough to accommodate a color control before you add one.

Color Control Properties

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the color control.

Hidden	Specifies whether the color control is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The color control's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a color control moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the color control in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the color control can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the color control's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the color control can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the color control.

See Also

Working with Controls


Combo Box Control

Combo boxes (also called drop-down list boxes) are a special type of list box that lets the user add items to the list. They consist of an edit field, a down arrow button, and a list box (which only appears when the user clicks the down arrow or presses Down in the edit field.)

The value of the combo box is the value of its edit field. There are several ways users can change a combo box's value:

They can choose the edit field and enter the value. (You can disable this by setting Edit Disabled to Yes.)

They can press the Down key to move through the list, then press Enter on the desired choice. (Pressing Enter also clicks the dialog box's default button, which typically closes the dialog box. To disable this, set Terminate Dialog to No.)

They can click the down arrow button to display the list, then click the desired choice. (To remove a combo box's down arrow button, set Add Down Button to No.)

There are two ways you can specify the items that appear in a list box:

Using the Clipboard. Copy a block to the Clipboard, then select the list box and choose Edit|Paste. Each row of the block becomes one item in the list.

Using the List property. If your list is already in a block in the notebook, right-click the list box and choose the Properties command, then choose List, type or point to the block coordinates, and choose OK.

You can make a combo box store a history list of the entries that have been typed into its edit field. This history displays as the combo box's list.

Combo Box Properties

List	Specifies a block containing a list to appear in the combo box.

Allow Point Mode	Lets the pointer be used to select a block while the dialog box remains in the foreground.

Add Down Button	Adds a down arrow to the right of a combo box.

History List	Adds confirmed entries to the list in the combo box. If you set History List to Yes, you cannot select a predefined list for the List property.

List Length	Specifies the maximum number of history list entries.

Terminate Dialog	If set to Yes, pressing Enter triggers the default button (usually Enter or Exit).

Edit Disabled	Disables typing in the edit field.

Edit Length	Specifies the maximum number of characters in the combo box control.

Ordered	Sorts entries alphanumerically.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the combo box.

Hidden	Specifies whether the combo box is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The combo box's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a combo box moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the combo box in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the combo box can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the combo box appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the combo box's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the combo box can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the combo box.

See Also

Working with Controls


Edit Field Control

An edit field is where a user types specific information. You can use the Field Type property to restrict the type of information an edit field accepts.

Field type	Result

Integer	Restricts user entry to integers. This adds three properties to the edit field Object Inspector (which is renamed Edit Integer). Minimum defines the lowest acceptable value users can enter. Maximum defines the highest acceptable value a user can enter. Default defines the initial value of the edit field.

String	Accepts any text a user enters (including numbers); this is the default edit field type.

Real	Accepts any number or formula.

Block	Accepts only cell addresses or block coordinates.

Hidden	Accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each character instead of the actual character. This is handy when users are entering passwords.

Edit Field Properties

Field Type	Determines the allowable type of input to the edit field (see above).

Edit Length	Specifies the maximum number of characters in the edit field.

Allow Point Mode	Lets the pointer be used to select a block while a dialog box is displayed.

Show Frame	Displays a box around the field.

Terminate Dialog	If set to Yes, pressing Enter triggers the default button (usually Enter or Exit).

Convert Text	Allows insertion of a new line and tabs in an edit field.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the edit field.

Hidden	Specifies whether the edit field is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The edit field's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how an edit field moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the edit field in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the edit field can be used. The control appears dimmer to indicate it is unavailable.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the edit field appears when the dialog box is displayed.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the edit field's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the edit field can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the edit field.

See Also

Working with Controls


Edit Integer Control

The Edit Integer control is an edit field that only accepts integers. You create this control by placing an edit field in your dialog box, and setting the Field Type property to Integer.

Edit Integer Properties

Minimum	Determines the minimum number accepted in the edit field.

Maximum	Determines the maximum number accepted in the edit field.

Default	Determines the default text displayed in the edit field.

Field Type	Determines the type of input that the edit field accepts.

Edit Length	Specifies the maximum number of characters in the edit field.

Show Frame	Displays a box around the field.

Terminate Dialog	If set to Yes, pressing Enter triggers the default button (usually Enter or Exit).

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the edit field.

Hidden	Specifies whether the edit field is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The edit field's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how an edit field moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the edit field.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the edit field can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the edit field appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the edit field's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the edit field can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the edit field.

See Also

Working with Controls


File Control

A file control displays a list of files on disk. From this list, the user can choose a file name, directory, and drive. The value of a file control determines the directory, drive letter, and file name (or wildcard) that appears. For example, the value C:\FILES\*.WB2 means

Drives is set to C:

Directories is set to C:\FILES\

File Name is set to *.WB2

File Types is set to *.WB2 (if a wildcard is specified; otherwise File Types is not affected by the value)

Whenever a user chooses a different directory to view, or a different file name or wildcard to use, the change is reflected in the file control's value.

File controls are large; make sure the dialog window is large enough to accommodate a file control before you add one.

File Control Properties

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the file control.

Hidden	Specifies whether the file control is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The file control's identification number.

Attach Child	Used to group file controls for moving or resizing.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a file control moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the file control in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the file control can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the file control appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the file control's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the file control can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the file control.

See Also

Working with Controls


Group Box Control

A group box usually contains other controls such as radio buttons or check boxes. It looks like a rectangle with a title at the top. When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio button chosen; otherwise, it does not have a value.

Initially, the Process Value of a group box is set to Yes, and the Process Values of radio buttons within the group box are set to No. In addition to the Value property, the group box has a property called Selected that indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is chosen, starting from the top left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom right button.

Group Box Properties

Group Text	Specifies a title for a group box.

Selected	Specifies the number I.D. of a radio button, or a selection in a list box.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the group box.

Hidden	Specifies whether the group box is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The group box's identification number.

Attach Child	Used to group controls for moving or resizing.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a group box moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the group box.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the group box's value.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of a group box.

See Also

Working with Controls


Horizontal ScrollBar Control

Scroll bars let the user pick a value from a fixed range of values. You can use a vertical scroll bar or a horizontal one. The value of a scroll bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers.

Use the Parameters property to restrict the range of values that horizontal and vertical scroll bars accept and specify how manipulating the scroll bar changes its value.

For a complete explanation of scroll bars, scroll boxes, and scroll arrows, see the Windows User's Guide.

Horizontal ScrollBar Properties

Parameters	Controls behavior of scroll bars.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the scroll bar.

Hidden	Specifies whether the scroll bar is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The scroll bar's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a scroll bar moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the scroll bar.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the scroll bar can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the scroll bar appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the scroll bar's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the scroll bar can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the scroll bar.

See Also

Working with Controls


Label Control

A label is simply descriptive text that you place beside another control, to describe the control's purpose to the user. Labels do not have a value. Resizing a label does not increase the text size; it makes a larger background to display the text on.

To see the background of a label, select it. By default, the label text appears in the upper left corner of its background; to specify a different position for the label text, right-click the label and choose the Properties command, then use the Text Draw Flags property. You can also use Text Draw Flags to create a multiple-line label and wordwrap the label text so that it fits in the label background. The options available under Text Draw Flags are:

Option	Description

Apply	Applies the Text Draw Flags properties you have selected.

Wrapping Text	Single Line specifies whether the label converts formatting codes. Uncheck this to allow formatting codes to be entered into the label (discussed next). This also enables the Word Break option. Word Break specifies whether to wrap the text onto a new line in the label background. Check this to enable line wrapping (available only when Single Line is unchecked).

Vertical Position	Top places text flush against the top edge of the label background. Center Vertically centers the text between the top and bottom of the background. It does not affect the horizontal position of the text. Bottom places text flush against the bottom of the background.

Horizontal Position	Left places text flush against the left side of the label background. Center Horizontally centers the text between the left and right sides of the label background. It does not affect the vertical position of the text. Right places text flush against the right side of the label background.

You can enter special text items in a label to change its appearance:

\n makes characters to the right of it display on a second line. This only works when the Single Line option (in the Text Draw Flags property) is unchecked.

\t inserts a tab into the text (a fixed amount of space that is handy for lining up columns of text).

\\ inserts a backslash (\) into the text. You can use this to enter \n or \t into a label as normal text.

& make the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text (the ampersand does not appear). This is handy for naming controls. Use only one & character; if you use two, the & character appears underlined in the text.

Label Properties

Label Text	Inputs text to appear in the label.

Label Font	Determines label format.

Text Draw Flags	Defines where the label text appears in relation to its background.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the label text.

Hidden	Specifies whether the label is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The label text's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a label moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the label text.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the label text appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the label text's value.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the label text.

See Also

Working with Controls


List Box Control

A list box presents the user with a list of items to choose from. Whichever item the user picks becomes the value of the list box. There are two ways to specify the items that appear in a list box:

Using the Clipboard. Copy a block to the Clipboard, then select the list box and choose Edit|Paste. Each row of the block becomes one item in the list.

Using the List property. If your list is already in a block in the notebook, right-click the list box and choose the Properties command, then choose List, type or point to the block coordinates, and choose OK.

List box properties change the way items appear.

List Box Properties

List	Specifies a pre-existing list to appear in a list box, or a block containing a list.

Ordered	Sorts List box entries alphanumerically.

Number of Columns	Allows multiple columns in a list box.

Selection Text	Returns text of item selected in a list box.

Selected	Specifies the number ID of a selection in a list box.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the list box.

Hidden	Specifies whether the list box is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The list box's identification number.

Attach Child	Used to group elements for moving or resizing.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a list box moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the list box.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the list box can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the list box appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the list box's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the list box can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of a list box.

See Also

Working with Controls


Pick List Control

A pick list button displays a list of choices when the user points to it and holds down the left mouse button. If the list is empty, the user can double-click the pick list button and type a setting. The value of a pick list is whichever item the user selects (the value is initially set to the first item in the pick list). To create a pick list,

1.	Enter the items of the pick list as labels in a block in the notebook, one label per row.

2.	Select the block and choose Edit|Copy, or click the Copy button [image] in the Toolbar.

3.	Activate the dialog window you want to add the pick list to.

4.	Choose the Pick List tool from the dialog Toolbar and click in the dialog window to create the pick list button.

5.	Choose Edit|Paste or click the Paste button [image] in the Toolbar to create the list. The first item in the list displays on the pick list button's face.

6.	Use the Title property, if desired, to specify a title to display initially on the pick list button. This title does not have to be an item on the list. You can use a link command to set the Title property whenever the dialog box displays.

Choosing an item from the list changes the value of the list. By default, a pick list button does not resize when a user chooses an item too large to display on the button's face. You can set Resize to Yes to make it expand or shrink, depending on the size of the item the user picks.

Pick List Properties

Title	Determines the title of the pick list displayed to the user.

Selected	Specifies the number ID of a selection in a pick list.

Resize	Adjusts the width of a pick list to match the length of the current string in the list.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the pick list.

Hidden	Specifies whether the pick list is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The pick list's identification number.

Attach Child	Used to group elements for moving or resizing.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a pick list moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the pick list.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the pick list can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the pick list appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the pick list's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the pick list can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the pick list.

See Also

Working with Controls


Radio Button Control

Radio buttons, when placed in a group box with other radio buttons, present a list of mutually exclusive choices to the user--only one radio button can be chosen at a time. When the user chooses one of the radio buttons, it darkens to indicate that it is chosen.

To automatically fill a group box with radio buttons, paste a block stored in the Clipboard into a group box; one radio button is created for each row of the block. You can also hold down Ctrl and drag the lower right handle of the group box to increase its size. When you release the handle, radio buttons appear within. Repeat this process until the desired number of radio buttons appear.

By default, a radio button's Process Value property is set to No, and the group box containing it has Process Value set to Yes. When its Process Value property is set to Yes, a radio button has a value of Yes when chosen, No when not chosen.

Radio Button Properties

Draw to Right	Controls position of radio button's text.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the radio button's value.

Label Text	Inputs text to appear adjacent to a radio button.

Text Draw Flags	Defines the location of label text adjacent to a dialog box element.

Button Type	Specifies the type of button.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the radio button.

Hidden	Specifies whether the radio button is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The radio button's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a radio button moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the radio button.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the radio button can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the radio button appears when the dialog box displays.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the radio button can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the radio button.

See Also

Working with Controls


Rectangle Control

A rectangle can be used to visually organize controls in a dialog box. Rectangles do not have a value.

Rectangle Properties

Rectangle Style	Determines the type of rectangle.

Fill Color	Specifies the color inside a rectangle.

Frame Color	Specifies the color of a rectangle frame.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the rectangle.

Hidden	Specifies whether the rectangle is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The rectangle's identification number.

Attach Child	Used to group rectangles for moving or resizing.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a rectangle moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the rectangle.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the rectangle appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the rectangle's value.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

See Also

Working with Controls


Vertical ScrollBar Control

Scroll bars let the user pick a value from a fixed range of values. You can use a vertical scroll bar or a horizontal one. The value of a scroll bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers.

Use the Parameters property to restrict the range of values that horizontal and vertical scroll bars accept and specify how manipulating the scroll bar changes its value.

For a complete explanation of scroll bars, scroll boxes, and scroll arrows, see the Windows User's Guide.

Vertical ScrollBar Properties

Parameters	Controls the behavior of scroll bars.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the scroll bar.

Hidden	Specifies whether the scroll bar is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The scroll bar's identification number.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a scroll bar moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the scroll bar.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the scroll bar can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the element appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the scroll bar's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the scroll bar can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the scroll bar control.

See Also

Working with Controls


Spin Control

A spin control is an edit field with two arrows on its edge. The user can either click an arrow to increase or decrease the spin control's value, or type the value. The value of a spin control is always an integer. (You can use edit fields to enter decimal numbers.)

Spin Control Properties

Edit Length	Specifies maximum number of characters in the spin control.

Show Frame	Displays a box around the field.

Minimum	Determines the minimum number in the spin control.

Maximum	Determines the maximum number in the spin control.

Default	Determines the default text displayed in the edit field.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the spin control.

Hidden	Specifies whether the spin control is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The spin control's identification number.

Attach Child	Used to group elements for moving or resizing.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a spin control moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the spin control.

Help line	A brief description that appears at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Grayed	Specifies whether the element can be used.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the spin control appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the spin control's value.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the spin control can be activated by Tab.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the spin control.

See Also

Working with Controls


Time Control

A time control shows the user the current time. You can also use a time control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain time of day. Time controls do not have a value.

You can use time controls to display the current time in a dialog box or Toolbar. To add a clock,

1.	Create a time control in the dialog window.

2.	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then set Show Time to Yes. The timer changes into a small digital clock.

3.	Right-click the timer and choose the Properties command, then set Timer On to Yes. This enables the clock.

You can use a time control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain time of day. This is handy for creating Toolbar controls that periodically retrieve current values from the active window. There are two ways to configure a time control for generating regular events: as a Timer and as an Alarm.

As a Timer, it generates the Timer event at regular intervals (for example, every two seconds). Two properties of the time control are used to specify the amount of milliseconds to wait between Timer events, as shown in the following formula:

Wait = Units in Milliseconds X Interval in Units

Units in Milliseconds is set to 1000 by default, so you can use the Interval in Units property to specify how many seconds to wait between Timer events. To make a timer,

1.	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Units in Milliseconds and enter how many milliseconds it takes for one unit to elapse.

2.	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Interval in Units and enter how many units to wait before generating a Timer event.

3.	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Timer On and set it to Yes.

As an Alarm, the time control generates the Alarm event at a certain time of day (for example, at 5:00). The Toolbar must be open; for example, an alarm set for 3:00 will not generate an Alarm event if the Toolbar is not onscreen at 3:00. To make a time control an Alarm,

1.	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Alarm On and set it to Yes.

2.	Right-click the time control and choose the Properties command, then choose Alarm Time and enter the time that the Alarm event should be generated.

A time control can have both of these functions enabled simultaneously. For example, you could have a timer generate Timer events every two seconds and send out an alarm event at 5:00 to signal the end of the work day.

Time Properties

Show Time	Shows time on the face of the time control.

Interval in Units	Determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated.

Units in Milliseconds	Controls Timer intervals together with the Interval in Units property.

Current Time	Fetches the current time. You cannot set this property; it is read only.

Timer On	Turns the timer on or off.

Alarm Time	Instructs the Timer to generate an alarm event at the specified time of day.

Alarm On	Turns the Timer alarm on or off.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the time control.

Hidden	Specifies whether the time control is visible in the dialog box. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

Object ID	The time control's identification number.

Attach Child	Used to group time controls for moving or resizing.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a time control moves when its parent control is resized.

Name	Used to identify the time control in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the time control appears when the dialog box displays.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the time control's value.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Value	The current setting of the time control.

See Also

Working with Controls


Graph Window Objects

You can find or create the following objects in a graph window. The graph window is also an object with properties of its own. (See Graph Window Properties for details.)

Drawn Graph Objects (created with tools on the Toolbar)

Arrows

Blocks

Ellipses

Freehand Polygons

Freehand Polylines

Lines

Polygons

Polylines

Rectangles

Rounded Rectangles

Text Boxes

Fixed Graph Objects

3-D Walls and Base

Area Series

Axis Titles

Bar Series

Bullet Series

Column Graphs

Float Series

Graph Pane

Graph Setup and Background

Graph Subtitle

Graph Title

Legend

Line Series

Pie and Doughnut Graphs

Series Labels

X-Axis

Y-Axis

See Locating Graph Objects to learn where to right-click and display Object Inspectors for fixed graph objects and for the graph window.


Arrows

You use the Arrow tool on the Graph Toolbar to create a straight line with an arrow at the end. Arrows have these properties:

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the arrowhead.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the arrowhead. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the arrowhead.

Border Color	controls the color of the arrow's "tail" and the border of the arrowhead.

Border Style	controls the line style of the arrow's "tail" and the border of the arrowhead.


Blocks

You use the Block tool on the Graph Toolbar to add a linked spreadsheet block to a graph. Blocks have these properties:

Block	specifies the coordinates of a spreadsheet block to add to a graph.

Display	sets options for row and column borders, grid lines, and scaling for a spreadsheet block.


Text Boxes

You create text boxes using the Text tool on the Graph Toolbar. Text boxes have these properties:

Text Color	determines the color of the text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color fills and shadows.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of the text, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Style	sets the fill style for text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Graph Button	turns a text box into a "live" button in a slide show.

Alignment	makes boxed text left-justified, centered, or right-justified.

Box Type	determines the look of the box.

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the box.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the box. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the box.

Border Color	controls the color of the box's border.


Ellipses

The Ellipse tool on the Graph Toolbar creates circles and ovals. Ellipses have these properties:

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the interior of the ellipse or circle.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	controls the color of the outline around the ellipse or circle.

Border Style	controls the line style of the border.

You can also use the Palette Toolbar to change these properties (see Using Color Palettes for details).


Freehand Polygons

The Freehand Polygon tool on the Graph Toolbar creates a closed shape after you drag the mouse to draw the border. Freehand Polygons have these properties:

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the interior of the polygon.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	controls the color of the outline around the polygon.

Border Style	controls the line style of the border.

You can also use the Palette Toolbar to change these properties (see Using Color Palettes for details).


Freehand Polylines

The Freehand Polyline tool on the Graph Toolbar draws a line anywhere you drag the mouse. Freehand Polylines have these properties:

Line Color	lets you choose the color of the polyline.

Line Style	lets you change the thickness of the polyline, or choose one of several dashed line styles.

To quickly change the line color only, select the freehand polyline, then click a square on the Draw palette of the Palette Toolbar (see Using Color Palettes for details).


Lines

The Line tool on the Graph Toolbar draws a straight line when you drag the mouse. Lines have these properties:

Line Color	lets you choose the color of the line.

Line Style	lets you change the thickness of the line, or choose one of several dashed line styles.

To quickly change the line color only, select the line, then click a square on the Draw palette of the Palette Toolbar (see Using Color Palettes for details).


Polygons

The Polygon tool on the Graph Toolbar creates closed shapes with as many sides as you want. Polygons have these properties:

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the interior of the polygon.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	controls the color of the outline around the polygon.

Border Style	controls the line style of the border.

You can also use the Palette Toolbar to change these properties (see Using Color Palettes for details).


Polylines

The Polyline tool on the Graph Toolbar creates lines with as many straight segments as you want. Polylines have these properties:

Line Color 	lets you choose the color of the polyline.

Line Style 	lets you change the thickness of the line, or  choose one of several dashed line styles.

To quickly change the line color only, select the polyline, then click a square on the Draw palette of the Palette Toolbar (see Using Color Palettes for details).


Rectangles

The Rectangle tool on the Graph Toolbar creates rectangles and squares. Rectangles have these properties:

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the interior of the rectangle or square.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	controls the color of the outline around the rectangle or square.

Border Style	controls the line style of the border.

You can also use the Palette Toolbar to change these properties (see Using Color Palettes for details).


Rounded Rectangles

The Rounded Rectangle tool on the Graph Toolbar creates rectangles and squares that have rounded corners. Rounded Rectangles have these properties:

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the interior of the rectangle or square.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	controls the color of the outline around the rectangle or square.

Border Style	controls the line style of the border.

You can also use the Palette Toolbar to change these properties (see Using Color Palettes for details).


3-D Walls and Base

Area Fill properties control the appearance of the walls and base of 3-D graphs. The base and each wall are separate objects; you view and change these properties individually:

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the wall or base.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the wall or base. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the wall or base.

Border Color	controls the color of all edges of the wall or base.

Border Style	controls the line style of all edges of the wall or base.

Note:	Grid lines on the walls are a property of the Y-Axis. Grid lines on the base are properties of the X-Axis.


Area Series

The area series Object Inspector lists all the properties available for customizing each series in an area, surface, shaded surface, or contour graph. To display the Object Inspector, right-click the area that represents the series you want to change and choose the Properties command.

Series Options	control the way the selected series is plotted. By changing series option settings, you can change the data that is plotted or override legend labels. (You cannot add a label series, change the graph type of a selected series, or plot a series on a secondary y-axis in area and surface graphs.)

Analyze	selects the type of analytical graphing.

Fill Color	selects the interior color of the area or surface.

Bkg Color	provides the second color for areas that have a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style	can be none (transparent), a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Border Color	is the color of the lines that surround the selected area.

Border Style	chooses the thickness of the lines that surround an area.


Axis Title

You create titles for the x-axis, the y-axis, and the secondary y-axis using the Graph|Titles command. Titles have these properties:

Title	changes the words in the title.

Text Color	is the fill color of the axis title text.

Text Bkg Color	is the second color for pattern or wash text styles.

Text Font	selects the font family and size of axis title text.

Text Style	determines whether the interior of each letter will be solid, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap. You can also create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.


Bar Series

The bar series Object Inspector lists the properties available for customizing each series in a bar graph. The list of bar series properties varies depending on the type of bar graph; for example, the Riser Style property is available only for 3-D bar graphs and the Hi-Lo Bar Style property is available only for high-low bar graphs. Here is the complete list of bar series properties:

Series Options	control the way the selected series is plotted. You can change the data that is plotted, add series labels, override legend labels, change the graph type of just the selected series, and plot the selected series against the secondary y-axis.

Analyze	selects the type of analytical graphing.

Bar Options	adjust the width, spacing, and overlap of all bars in the graph.

Riser Style	sets the riser type used for 3-D bar graphs.

Hi-Lo Bar Style	determines how high and low values are represented in high-low graphs. There are four styles: bar, I-beam, line, and marker.

Comparison Line	selects the style and color of a comparison line for a stacked or 100% stacked bar comparison graph.

Fill Color	selects the interior color of the bars.

Bkg Color	provides the second color to bars that have a pattern or wash fill style. (You will not see the background color if the bars do not have one of these fill styles.)

Fill Style	makes the interior of the bars transparent (select None), a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Border Color	selects the color of the frame around the bar.

Border Style	chooses the line thickness of the border.


Bullet Series

The bullet series Object Inspector lists all the properties available for customizing each series in a bullet chart. The properties are:

Bullet Style	sets the type and size of bullets.

Bullet Indentation	sets the distance before and after bullets, and turns on or off hanging indentation.

Bullet Color	determines the color of bullets.

Line Spacing	sets the spacing before and after each line of text in the bullet series.

Text Color	determines the color of label text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color fills and shadows.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of label text, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Style	sets the fill style for label text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Note:	To change the text in the bullet series, change the labels in the bullet chart block; see Creating Bullet Charts.


Column Graphs

Column graphs plot a single series. Each value in the series is represented by a section of the column, and section labels usually express values as a percentage of the whole. Negative values are plotted as though they are positive.

To change the appearance of a column graph, right-click a section and choose the Properties command to display its Object Inspector. These five properties apply to every label on the column graph:

Label Options	define a label series, determine how the data label is expressed, and turn tick mark display off and on.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of label text, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Color	determines the color of label text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color fills and shadows.

Text Style	sets the fill style for label text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

These properties apply to the column section you right-clicked:

Fill Color	assigns a color to the interior of the section.

Bkg Color	assigns a second color for a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style	makes the interior transparent, or fills it with a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or an imported bitmapped graphic.

Border Color	controls the color of the perimeter of the section.

Border Style	controls the line style of the perimeter.


Float Series

The float series Object Inspector lists all the properties available for customizing each series in a floating marker graph. The properties are:

Series Options	control the way the selected series is plotted. You can change the data that is plotted, add series labels, override legend labels, change the graph type of just the selected series, and plot the selected series against the secondary y-axis.

Analyze	selects the type of analytical graphing.

Float Style	selects the style of floating marker used in the graph.

Fill Color	selects the interior color of the markers.

Bkg Color	provides the second color to markers that have a pattern or wash fill style. (You will not see the background color if the markers do not have one of these fill styles.)

Fill Style	makes the interior of the markers transparent (select None), a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Border Color	selects the color of the frame around the marker.

Border Style	chooses the line thickness of the border.


Graph Pane

The graph pane is the area bordered by the x- and y-axes in a 2-D graph. Grid lines, and the bars, lines, or areas that represent series are drawn on top of this area. (Horizontal grid lines are a property of the y-axis; vertical grid lines belong to the x-axis.)

To change graph pane properties, right-click the graph pane and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Graph Pane in the Property Band. There are six properties:

Border Options	let you display or hide each edge of the graph pane.

Fill Color	selects the interior color of the graph pane area.

Bkg Color	provides the second color when the graph pane has a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style	makes the graph pane transparent, a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmapped graphic.

Border Color	is the color of the graph pane perimeter.

Border Style	chooses the thickness of the graph pane perimeter.


Graph Setup and Background

The graph background is the area behind the graph title, the legend, the graph itself, and any drawing elements you add. The graph setup and background Object Inspector appears when you right-click the graph background and choose the Properties command or choose Property|Graph Setup in the Property Band. These are the properties:

Graph Type	determines the kind of graph displayed.

Legend Position	specifies where the graph legend appears.

3-D View	changes the way the graph is drawn by adjusting the rotation, elevation, perspective, depth, and height of the graph.

3-D Options	turn wall and base display off and on.

Box Type	changes the style of the box that encloses the graph background.

Fill Color	selects the interior color of the graph background.

Bkg Color	provides the second color when the background has a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style	makes the background transparent, a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmapped graphic.

Border Color	is the color of the box that encloses the graph background.

Graph Button	turns the graph background into a "live" button in a slide show.


Graph Subtitle

The graph title and subtitle appear in a single text box, which is centered above the graph; the subtitle is placed under the title. To change the appearance of the subtitle, right-click it and choose the Properties command to display the subtitle Object Inspector.

Alignment	makes the subtitle left-justified, centered, or right-justified in the title box.

Subtitle Color	determines the color of the text.

Subtitle Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color fills and shadows.

Subtitle Font	determines the font, font size, .and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Subtitle Style	sets the fill style for text, and lets you add a drop shadow.


Graph Title

The graph title and subtitle appear in a single text box above the graph; the title is placed over the subtitle. To change the appearance of the title, right-click it and choose the Properties command to display the title Object Inspector. These are the properties:

Alignment	makes the title left-justified, centered, or right-justified in the title box.

Text Font	determines the font, and font size of the title, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Color	determines the color of the title text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color text fills and shadows.

Text Style	sets the fill style for the title text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Box Type	determines the look of the box.

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the box.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the box. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the box.

Border Color	controls the color of the box's border.


Graph Window

Every graph has its own window; you set properties for each graph window individually. To display the Object Inspector for the active graph window, right-click the title bar (or the window area outside the graph border, if the graph window is maximized), or choose Property|Graph Window in the Property Band. There are two properties:

Aspect Ratio	is the proportion of width to height. Choices are Floating Graph, Screen Slide, 35mm Slide, Printer Preview, and Full Extent.

Grid Options	turn grid display off and on, control the spacing of grid dots, and turn the Snap to Grid feature off and on.


Legend

A legend box appears as soon as you define a legend series in all 2-D graphs (except pie, doughnut, and column graphs), and in some 3-D graphs. To change legend properties, right-click the legend box and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Legend in the Property Band. (Avoid the series markers--a right-click on a series marker accesses series properties.) The properties are:

Legend Position	specifies where the graph legend appears.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of legend label text, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Color	determines the color of legend label text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color text fills and shadows.

Text Style	sets the fill style for text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Box Type	determines the look of the legend box perimeter.

Fill Color	assigns a fill color to the legend box.

Bkg Color	provides a second color for the legend box. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the legend box.

Border Color	controls the color of the legend box's border.

Legend labels in 3-D and multiple graphs

Many 3-D graphs display legend labels along the z-axis. In multiple graphs, the legend label for each series appears as a "title" over the sub-graph that plots the series. Right-click a label and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Legend  in the Property Band to display the Object Inspector for this legend, which lists Text Color, Text Bkg Color, Text Font and Text Style properties.


Line Series

A line series is any data series that is plotted as a line in a line graph, rotated line graph, 3-D ribbon graph, or combination graph. To change line series properties, right-click either the line or the legend marker that corresponds to the line and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series in the Property Band. The properties are:

Series Options	control the way the selected series is plotted. You can change the data that is plotted, add series labels, override legend labels, change the graph type of just the selected series, and plot the selected series against the secondary y-axis.

Analyze	selects the type of analytical graphing.

Marker Style	changes the way each data point appears.

Fill Color	selects the interior color of the markers.

Bkg Color 	provides the second color for markers that have a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style 	sets the interior style of solid markers to None (transparent), a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Line Color 	lets you choose the color of the line that connects the points in the series.

Line Style 	lets you change the thickness of the line that connects the points. You can also choose from several dashed line styles.


Pie Graphs
Pie and Doughnut Graphs

Pie and doughnut graphs plot a single series; each value is a "slice." Negative values in the series are plotted as though they are positive. You can explode a slice (pull it away from the rest of the circle) to emphasize it.

When you define an x-axis series or label series for a pie or doughnut graph, its labels appear next to the percentages. By default, the label for each slice shows what percentage the segment contributes to the whole. A tick mark connects the label and the slice.

To explode a slice, change the appearance of slices or labels, define a label series, or turn tick mark display off or on, right-click a pie or doughnut slice and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

These five properties apply to every label on the pie or doughnut graph:

Label Options	define a label series, determine how the data label is expressed, and turn tick mark display off and on.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of label text, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Color	determines the color of label text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color fills and shadows.

Text Style	sets the fill style for label text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

These properties apply to the slice you right-clicked:

Explode Slice	pulls the slice away from the rest of the circle. You set the distance as a percentage of the radius.

Fill Color	assigns a color to the interior of the slice.

Bkg Color	assigns a second color for a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style	makes the interior transparent, or fills it with a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or an imported bitmapped graphic.

Border Color	controls the color of the perimeter of the slice.

Border Style	controls the line style of the perimeter.


Series Labels

Series labels appear on the bars, markers, or data points that represent each value in a bar graph or line graph. See Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points for details on creating series labels.

To change the properties of series labels, right-click one of the labels and choose the Properties command. There are six properties, which apply to every series label in the graph:

Label Alignment	sets the position of the labels relative to the data points. The graph type determines which alignment options are available.

Format	specifies how labels are displayed (as text, or in a numeric format such as date or currency, for example). See Numeric Format for a description of numeric format options.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of the series label text, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Color	determines the color of the text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for two-color fills and shadows.

Text Style	sets the fill style for text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

To delete series labels, delete the label series.


X-Axis

All graphs, except pie, doughnut, and column graphs, position data relative to two scales: the x-axis and the y-axis. The x-axis is the horizontal scale on standard graphs and the vertical scale on rotated graphs. X-axis divisions typically represent categories or time periods; labels along this axis are provided by the x-axis series.

XY graphs (often called scatter diagrams) plot values against two numeric scales. The x-axis scale in these graphs is determined by the values in the x-axis series. Unlike most other graph types, where the x-axis series contains labels, the x-axis series in an XY graph contains data.

Normal Graph

X-Axis Series	selects the block of labels placed beneath each division of the x-axis.

Tick Options	turn x-axis label display off or on, and choose a method for dealing with overlapping labels.

Text Color	selects the principal color of the x-axis label text.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for pattern and wash Text Styles. The text background color is also the drop shadow color.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of the label text, and whether the text appears bold, italic, underlined, or with strikeout.

Text Style	sets the fill style for labels, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Major Grid Style	selects a style and color for the lines that separate x-axis divisions.

XY Graph (same as Y-Axis Properties)

Scale	controls the range of values plotted on the x-axis and determine the placement of major and minor divisions and scale labels.

Tick Options	control the appearance of tick marks and labels.

Numeric Format	specifies how the numbers on the x-axis scale are expressed (as percentages, as currency, or in scientific notation, for example).

Text Color	selects the principal color of the x-axis labels.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for pattern and wash Text Styles. The text background color is also the drop shadow color.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of the labels, and whether the text appears bold, italic, underlined, or with strikeout.

Text Style	sets the fill style for labels, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Major Grid Style	selects the color and style of the lines that extend from each scale label to the opposite side of the graph.

Minor Grid Style	selects the color and style of the lines that extend from positions between the scale labels on the y-axis to the opposite side of the graph.


Y-Axis
YAxis

All graphs, except pie, doughnut, and column graphs, position data relative to two scales: the x-axis and the y-axis. The y-axis is the vertical scale on standard graphs and the horizontal scale on rotated graphs. Y-axis scale divisions and label positions are initially determined by the data plotted in the graph. The properties are:

Scale	lets you change the range of values plotted on the y-axis and determine the placement of major and minor divisions and scale labels.

Tick Options	control the appearance of tick marks and labels.

Numeric Format	specifies how the numbers on the y-axis scale are expressed (as percentages, as currency, or in scientific notation, for example).

Text Color	selects the principal color of the y-axis labels.

Text Bkg Color	provides the second color for pattern and wash Text Styles. The text background color is also the drop shadow color.

Text Font	determines the font and font size of the labels, and whether the text appears bold, italic, underlined, or with strikeout.

Text Style	sets the fill style for labels, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Major Grid Style	selects the color and style of the lines that extend from each scale label to the opposite side of the graph.

Minor Grid Style	selects the color and style of the lines that extend from positions between the scale labels on the y-axis to the opposite side of the graph.


Objects in the Notebook Window

While a notebook window is active, you can right-click and choose the Properties command or choose Property|Current Object in the Property Band (or press F12) to display the properties of any of the following objects:

Arrow	Controls settings for arrows drawn with the Arrow tool in the Draw Toolbar

Bitmap Object	Controls settings for the selected bitmap

Block	Controls settings for the current block or cell

Ellipse	Controls settings for ellipses drawn with the Ellipse tool in the Draw Toolbar.

Graph	Controls settings for the selected floating graph

Line	Controls settings for lines drawn with the Line tool in the Draw Toolbar

Picture	Controls settings for the selected picture object

Rectangle	Controls settings for rectangles drawn with the Rectangle tool in the Draw Toolbar

Rounded Rectangle	Controls settings for rounded rectangles drawn with the Rounded Rectangle tool in the Draw Toolbar

SpeedButton	Controls settings for the selected SpeedButton

Text Box	Controls settings for text boxes created with the Text tool in the Draw Toolbar

OLE Object	Controls settings for the selected OLE object

Other objects that can be accessed only while a notebook window is active are

Active Notebook

Active Page

In addition, the Objects page of a notebook window supports the following objects:

Graph Icon

Dialog Icon

Slide Show Icon

See Also

Locating Notebook Window Objects

Properties in the Notebook Window


Arrow Properties (Notebook)
Arrow Properties

An arrow created with the Arrow tool in the Draw Toolbar appears in a layer above the cellss in a spreadsheet page.

Fill Color	Assigns a fill color to the interior of the polygon.

Bkg Color	Provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	Assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	Controls the color of the outline around the polygon.

Border Style	Controls the line style of the border.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Active Block Properties

The active block is the currently selected cell or group of cells. Most block properties affect the appearance of cell entries or of rows or columns. The Constraints property affects the ways you can enter data into blocks.

Numeric Format 	Changes display format of values in a block.

Font 	Sets typeface, style, and point size of text for the selected block.

Shading 	Shades blocks of cells with specified color.

Alignment 	Changes alignment of cell entries in a block.

Line Drawing 	Draws lines around cells and blocks.

Text Color	Specifies text color for the selected block.

Row Height	Sets and resets the height of selected rows.

Column Width	Sets and resets the width of selected rows.

Reveal/Hide	Hides and displays columns and rows.

Constraints 	Disables or enables spreadsheet protection for individual blocks of cells, and constrains types of data that can be entered in a block.

Note:	 Although it is tempting to preset block properties in large areas of the notebook, doing so consumes memory. It is more efficient to set properties only in the cells or pages you are currently using. Or, change the Normal style to change default properties.

If you move a cell, its properties move with the data and are removed from the original cell. If you copy a cell, the copy takes on the properties of the original cell. If you paste a copied or cut block with Edit|Paste Special, you can control whether the cell's properties are pasted (see Using Paste Special for details).

See Also

Active Notebook

Active Page Properties


Ellipse Properties (Notebook)
Ellipse Properties

An ellipse created with the Ellipse tool in the Draw Toolbar appears in a layer above the cellss in a spreadsheet page.

Fill Color	Assigns a fill color to the interior of the polygon.

Bkg Color	Provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	Assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	Controls the color of the outline around the polygon.

Border Style	Controls the line style of the border.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Graph Object Properties

A floating graph object appears in a layer above the cellss in a spreadsheet page.

Source Graph	Specifies the graph displayed in the floating object.

Border Color 	Sets the color of the floating graph's border.

Box Type 	Determines the type of box to surround the floating graph.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current floating graph.

See Also

Creating a Floating Graph


Line Properties (Notebook)
Line Properties

A line created with the Line tool in the Draw Toolbar appears in a layer above the cellss in a spreadsheet page.

Line Color	Lets you choose the color of the polyline.

Line Style	Lets you change the thickness of the polyline, or choose one of several dashed line styles.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Active Notebook Properties

Notebook properties control recalculation methods, zoom effects, the color palette, screen display and whether the notebook is a macro library. The settings are saved with the notebook and affect all pages in the notebook.

You can display the notebook Object Inspector by right-clicking the notebook's title bar, or by choosing Property|Active Notebook in the Property Band.

Display	Hides parts of the notebook display (such as scroll bars, page tabs, or floating objects).

Zoom Factor 	Proportionally reduces or enlarges text and graphics onscreen without actually resizing them.

Recalc Settings 	Determines calculation mode, order, and number of iterations for spreadsheet recalculation; toggles formula compilation and ERR or NA source display in cells.

Palette 	Determines the default color palette available for notebook cell colors.

Macro Library	Makes a notebook into a macro library

Password Level	Sets a password and determines the security level of a notebook.

System	Turns a notebook into a system notebook.

See Also

Active Block Properties

Active Page Properties


Page Properties

Most page properties affect the appearance of data or screen elements, with a few exceptions: Name (which enters a page name) and Protection (which turns on overall page protection).

Display	Determines whether or not to display zero values, notebook borders, or the spreadsheet grid.

Zoom Factor	Proportionally reduces or enlarges text and graphics onscreen without actually resizing them.

Name	Names the active page.

Protection 	Sets or removes write-protection for a spreadsheet page.

Conditional Color 	Assigns colors to ERR values and values within, greater than, and less than a specified range.

Default Width	Sets the column width for all columns, except those adjusted individually.

Tab Color	Changes the tab color of the active notebook page.

See Also

Active Block

Active Notebook


Rectangle Properties (Notebook)
Rectangle Properties

A rectangle created with the Rectangle tool in the Draw Toolbar appears in a layer above the cellss in a spreadsheet page.

Fill Color	Assigns a fill color to the interior of the polygon.

Bkg Color	Provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	Assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	Controls the color of the outline around the polygon.

Border Style	Controls the line style of the border.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Rounded Rectangle Properties (Notebook)
Rounded Rectangle Properties

A rounded rectangle created with the Rounded Rectangle tool in the Draw Toolbar appears in a layer above the cellss in a spreadsheet page.

Fill Color	Assigns a fill color to the interior of the polygon.

Bkg Color	Provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	Assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	Controls the color of the outline around the polygon.

Border Style	Controls the line style of the border.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


SpeedButton Properties

A SpeedButton floats above cells in a spreadsheet page and, when pressed, runs a macro.

Macro 	Specifies a macro for the selected SpeedButton to run.

Label Text	Specifies text to display on the selected SpeedButton.

Border Color 	Sets the color of the SpeedButton's border.

Box Type 	Determines the type of box to surround the SpeedButton.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current SpeedButton object.

See Also

Creating Macro SpeedButtons


Text Box Properties (Notebook)
Text Box Properties

A text box created with the Text tool in the Draw Toolbar appears in a layer above the cellss in a spreadsheet page.

Text Color	Determines the color of the text.

Text Bkg Color	Provides the second color for two-color fills and shadows.

Text Font	Determines the font and font size of the text, and adds bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout effects.

Text Style	Sets the fill style for text, and lets you create 3-D text or add a drop shadow.

Alignment	Makes boxed text left-justified, centered, or right-justified.

Box Type	Determines the look of the box.

Fill Color	Assigns a fill color to the interior of the polygon.

Bkg Color	Provides a second color for the interior. (Background color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	Assigns a fill style to the interior.

Border Color	Controls the color of the outline around the polygon.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Bitmap Object Properties

A bitmap object floats above cells in a spreadsheet page and contains a picture in bitmap form.

Border Color 	Sets the color of the object's border.

Box Type 	Determines the type of box to surround the object.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Creating Floating Objects


Picture Object Properties

A picture object floats above cells in a spreadsheet page and contains a picture in the metafile graphics format.

Border Color 	Sets the color of the object's border.

Box Type 	Determines the type of box to surround the object.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Creating Floating Objects


OLE Object Properties

An OLE object floats above cells in a spreadsheet page and links other applications to Quattro Pro.

OLE	Identifies the OLE server, object, and link source (for linked OLE objects), and sets the resizing and updating methods.

Border Color 	Sets the color of the object's border.

Box Type 	Determines the type of box to surround the object.

Protection	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted if page protection has been enabled.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of the current object.

See Also

Changing OLE Object Properties


Graph Icon Properties

Graph icons appear on the Objects page. Each icon represents a specific graph in the active notebook.

Name	Specifies a name for a graph icon.

See Also

The Objects Page


Slide Show Icon Properties

Slide show icons appear on the Objects page. Each icon represents a specific slide show in the active notebook.

Name	Specifies a name for a slide show icon.

Default Effect	Specifies default slide show effects, including transition effect, speed, display time, and other options.

Master Slide	Displays the background style and graph elements used in the master slide (the first slide in a slide show).

Show Pointer	Shows or hides the pointer throughout the slide show.

See Also

Editing a Slide Show

The Objects Page


Dialog Icon Properties

Dialog icons appear on the Objects page. Each icon represents a specific dialog box in the active notebook.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the dialog window.

Title	Specifies the title of the dialog box, which the user will see.

Position Adjust	Specifies how the dialog box moves when the Quattro Pro window  is resized.

Grid Options	Shows/hides a grid and sets the number of pixels between grid lines.

Name	Used to identify the dialog box in macros, link commands, and formulas.

Disabled	Disables all controls in the dialog box.

Value	The current setting of the dialog box (a comma separated list of the current control settings of the dialog box).

See Also

The Objects Page


Objects in the Light Table Window

While a Light Table window is active, you can right-click a slide and choose the Properties command or choose Property|Current Object in the Property Band to display the properties of a slide; see Slide Properties.

The Light Table window is also an object with properties of its own; see Light Table Properties for details.

See Also

Properties in the Light Table Window


Slide Properties

To display the Object Inspector for the active slide, right-click the slide and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Current Object in the Property Band. There are two properties, but the properties differ slightly for slides and master slides:

Slide Properties

Slide Effect	Specifies an effect for selected slides.

Slide Comment	Specifies a description of the slide.

Master Slide Properties

Slide Comment	Specifies a description of the slide.

Master Slide	Specifies which slide to use as the master slide. The master slide determines the template style, common design elements (such as logos), and positioning of bullet chart text.


Light Table Properties

To display the Object Inspector for the active Light Table window, right-click the title bar or any area in the window outside a slide and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Light Table in the Property Band. There are five properties:

Slide Type	Specifies whether to show slides in small, medium, or large size, or to display names only.

Name	Specifies a name for a slide show icon.

Default Effect	Specifies default slide show effects, including transition effect, speed, display time, and other options.

Master Slide	Specifies which slide to use as the master slide. The master slide determines the template style, common design elements (such as logos), and positioning of bullet chart text.

Show Pointer	Shows or hides the pointer throughout the slide show.


Using OLE Automation Features

 Print Group

Quattro Pro's OLE automation features let you create and manipulate objects in other applications that support OLE 2.0 automation as a client. The following topics describe these features and their use.

OLE Automation Overview

OLE Automation Terms

Automation Expression Syntax

OLE Automation Object Functions

OLE Automation and Macros

OLE Automation Examples


OLE Automation Overview

 Print Group

OLE automation lets users operate another application from outside it, just as a remote control unit lets you operate a television at a distance. For this to happen, an object model must be created for the automated application.

In the case of a television, objects might represent the volume control, the power control, the channel selector, and various tuning controls for color quality and image centering. Properties are the settings each object can have to control appearance and other attributes, while methods are the actions you can perform with or on each object.

OLE automation works through automation expressions created with Quattro Pro macro statements.

1.	First, you open an application and create a new object or get an existing object.

2.	Next, you work with macro commands and an application's automation methods to set properties and perform other actions.

3.	Finally, you close the object and exit the application.

To understand the structure of automation expressions, you need to know how certain terms are used for OLE automation in Quattro Pro (see OLE Automation Terms).

Because this is complex material, you might want to print all the topics that describe OLE automation. To do so, click Print Group at the top of this topic below the title.

Also, you can use browse keys to scroll through these Help topics in sequence. Use Shift+left arrow to view the previous OLE automation Help topic and Shift+right arrow to view the next one.

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation and Macros

OLE Automation Examples


OLE Automation Terms

These terms are important for understanding Quattro Pro's OLE automation features. The terms are listed in order, from the most basic to the most complex. For the best understanding, read their definitions in order.

Once you display a definition, you can use Shift+left arrow to view the previous definition and Shift+right arrow to view the next one. Within each definition, terms in italics are defined in other topics listed here. To return to this topic from a definition, choose OLE Automation Terms in the See Also list.

Automation Objects

Collections (OLE Automation)

Methods (OLE Automation)

Properties (OLE Automation)

Values (OLE Automation)

Variables (OLE Automation)

Named Variables (OLE Automation)

Expressions (OLE Automation)

Arguments (OLE Automation)

Automation Expressions

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation and Macros

OLE Automation Examples


Automation Objects

An automation object is a representation of some part of an application or the application itself that has been exposed for OLE automation. Most applications that support OLE automation as clients expose the main application object -- for example, Visio.Application or Excel.Application. Automation objects have properties and methods that can be used to change the attributes of objects and act on them. To learn which objects are exposed for OLE automation, check an application's documentation.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Collections (OLE Automation)

A collection is a group of related automation objects, usually listed as a plural. For example, if MenuItem is an object, MenuItems could be a collection of all menu items. Like objects, collections can have their own sets of properties and methods.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Methods (OLE Automation)

Like properties, methods are associated with automation objects. Methods act on objects and usually return the result of the action. To learn which methods are available for each object, check an application's documentation.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Properties (OLE Automation)

Properties are characteristics of an automation object that describe its current state -- usually either appearance or behavior. You can use methods to change some property settings. Other properties can be changed directly by specifying a different argument.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Values (OLE Automation)

In Quattro Pro OLE automation, a value can be a number, a double-quoted string, an automation object, or empty. Values can be stored as variables and included in expressions.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Variables (OLE Automation)

In Quattro Pro OLE automation, a variable is a place to store a value. A variable can be a cell (used to store a string, a number, or nothing/empty), a member of an automation object, or a named variable (used to store values of any type -- often automation objects -- in constrast to cells, which can only hold strings and numbers).

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Named Variables (OLE Automation)

Named variables are automation expressions created with the {ASSIGN} macro. They can't be used in formulas directly, but can be used indirectly if you first assign them to a cell name or reference. For details, see OLE Automation and Macros.

Named variables last as long as Quattro Pro is running. To delete one before that, use {DELVAR}.

When Quattro Pro parses an expression, names are first assumed to identify cells or blocks, then named variables. This means that a named variable can't have the same name as a cell reference, a block, or a block name in the notebook which contains the currently executed macro. Otherwise, it isn't accessible.

The name of a named variable can't contain any formula operators or leading or trailing spaces, although spaces within the name are acceptable.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Expressions (OLE Automation)

An expression symbolizes a value or variable, depending on its use. An expression can be a string, a number, a cell (cell reference, block coordinates, or block name), the name of a named variable, a formula expression (see Syntax Rules for information about the syntax of @function formulas), or an automation expression.

If an expression is used to express a value and it represents a variable, the value of that variable is returned. For example, if a value is expected from expression A1, the value stored in A1 is used.

If an expression is used to express a variable and it represents a value, that value is converted to a cell or named variable if the value is a string. For example, +"A"&"1" results in a cell variable representing the cell reference A1.

A value expression is an expression of a value.

A variable expression is an expression of a variable.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Arguments (OLE Automation)

An argument is information supplied to part of an automation expression -- to a property, method, or formula.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Automation Expressions

An automation expression is an automation object (or object hierarchy) plus any associated property or method and arguments, if any.

In its simplest form, the syntax is object.property or object.method. Since automation objects are usually found in hierarchies, members of successive hierarchical levels can be used to specify the exact target object. Elements of automation expressions are separated by periods -- for example,

Application.ActiveSheet(1)

Range("RangeName").ClearContents

For syntax details, see Automation Expression Syntax.

Non-syntax errors in automation expressions can be trapped with the {ONERROR} macro command.

See Also

OLE Automation Terms


Automation Expression Syntax

Automation Expression introduces OLE automation expressions and their basic syntax. The full syntax is

starting_object or

starting_object.member_cascade

where

starting_object is an object function or named variable which represents an object.

object function is CreateObject(args) or GetObject(args).

member_cascade is member or object_member.member_cascade.

member is name or name(args) or [unquoted string].

object_member is member representing an object.

args is empty or arg or arg,arg.

arg is a value expression (expression of a value).

OLE automation methods and properties can all be included as member, usually at the end of an expression.

A property or method without arguments can be used without parentheses.

The object connector, shown above as a period (.), is determined by the international setting for a decimal point. The list separator, shown above as a comma (,) -- as in arg,arg -- is determined by the international separator character setting.

For sample expressions derived from these definitions, see OLE Automation Expression Examples.

For details on using CreateObject and GetObject, see OLE Automation Object Functions.

Quattro Pro doesn't support the use of automation expressions in formulas, although there is a way to accomplish the same thing. For details, see {ASSIGN} in the following topic: OLE Automation and Macros.

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation Overview

OLE Automation Terms


OLE Automation Object Functions

Quattro Pro uses two OLE automation object functions too create and retrieve objects from other applications and insert them in Quattro Pro notebooks: GetObject and CreateObject. They perform different tasks depending on the arguments used with them and the application that provides the objects. Both functions accept the progID argument, which is a programmatic identifier registered by an application during its installation -- for example, Excel.Application, Visio.Application. These object functions can be used in OLE automation expressions within Quattro Pro macros.

CreateObject

This object function is not the same as the macro {CREATEOBJECT}.

CreateObject(progID) locates the target application, loads it, creates an object, and returns the object. The application can only be loaded if its path is registered or specified in PATH. For example, CreateObject("Visio.Application") returns a Visio graphics object.

GetObject

This object function retrieves an existing object from somewhere, depending on the given arguments:

GetObject(filename) returns an object from the specified file. The file name should be fully qualified with path and extension. GetObject loads the application which can open that file and returns an object from that file back to the active Quattro Pro notebook. If filename identifies a specific object, such as "c:\excel\a.xls!a1:b10", GetObject returns an object represented by a1:b10 in that file.

GetObject(filename,progID) loads the specified application and returns the specified file. Although this expression seems to work like GetObject(filename), it can return objects such as charts which the other expression can't access. For example, GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1","Excel.Application") returns an Excel chart automation object, but GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1") fails.

GetObject(,progID) or GetObject("",progID) returns the currently running object of the specified application. For example, this expression returns chart 1 from the active Excel notebook: GetObject("chart 1","Excel.Application")

GetObject(object_name) locates an embedded automation object inside Quattro Pro. All of these syntaxes are acceptable:

GetObject("object")

GetObject("page:object")

GetObject("[notebook]page:object")

GetObject("[]page:object")

If GetObject(object_name) fails, then try GetObject(filename).

Note:	All these expressions work with the {ASSIGN} macro to create a named variable that refers to the returned object. For example, the following macro expression creates the variable Chart1 that represents the returned object:

{ASSIGN Chart1,GetObject("chart 1","Excel.Application")}

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

Automation Expression Syntax

OLE Automation and Macros

OLE Automation Examples


OLE Automation and Macros

These macro commands directly support OLE automation in Quattro Pro:

{ASSIGN}	Assigns a value to a variable

{DELVAR}	Deletes the named variable VarName and frees any object assigned to that variable

{EXECAUTO}	Evaluates one or more automation expressions, but drops any returned values from expressions

{GETLABEL}	Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a label in VariableExpression

{GETNUMBER}	Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a numeric value in VariableExpression

{IFAUTOOBJ}	Checks to see if ObjectExpression is an OLE automation object before continuing with the macro

{SETLCID}	Specifies a locale ID for automation expressions to accommodate international localizations

See Also

OLE Automation Macro Tips

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation Object Functions


OLE Automation Macro Tips

1.	Because macro command arguments are value expressions, you can pass an automation expression as an argument to any macro command. For example, if calc.accum represents the accum value of the calc named variable, and excel.ActiveCell.Value represents the current value of the Excel ActiveCell object, then both these macros are valid:

{DOWN calc.accum}

{DOWN excel.ActiveCell.Value}

2.	Quattro Pro doesn't support the use of automation expressions in formula expressions. So, these macros are invalid:

{IF named_variable>0} {do something}

{LET A2, named_variable+A1}

{IF named_variable.member>0}

To solve this problem, assign the value of an automation expression to a cell first, then use that cell in a formula expression:

{ASSIGN A1,named_variable}

{IF A1>0}{do something}

3.	If you use {ASSIGN} to create a named variable, the variable exists until you exit Quattro Pro. To delete a variable before then, use {DELVAR VarName}.

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation and Macros


OLE Automation Examples

OLE automation expressions are used within Quattro Pro macros to perform OLE automation tasks. See these topics for examples of acceptable expression forms and macros that use them:

OLE Automation Expression Examples

OLE Automation Macro Examples

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation and Macros


OLE Automation Expression Examples

Automation Expression Syntax defines acceptable syntax for OLE automation expressions in Quattro Pro. The following acceptable expression forms are derived from the definitions given in that topic:

named_variable

CreateObject(progID) where progID is the program identifier registered for an application during its installation

GetObject(filename and/or progID)

named_variable.member

named_variable.member1.member2(arg1,arg2)

named_variable.member1(arg1,arg2).member2

OLE automation objects, properties, and methods can be included as member; properties and methods usually occur at the end of the expression. For more information on named variables, see Named Variable (OLE Automation).

For details on using CreateObject and GetObject in automation expressions, see OLE Automation Object Functions.

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation and Macros

OLE Automation Macro Examples


OLE Automation Macro Examples

The following examples show how automation expressions are used within macros to work with objects in other applications. Although most work is done invisibly, "behind the scenes", the effects are real.

1.	For example, the following macro opens TEST.XLS and saves it as TEST2.XLS. If you try to assign another variable to TEST2.XLS without using {DELVAR} to delete the variable File that represents TEST2.XLS, you'll be prompted that TEST2.XLS already exists and is open.

{ASSIGN Test,GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!C2:C6")}

{EXECAUTO Test.SaveAs("c:\excel\test2.xls")}

{ASSIGN File,GetObject("c:\excel\test2.xls")}

{ASSIGN Myrange,File.Range("Myrange")}

{IFAUTOOBJ Myrange}{LET G39,"New"}{RETURN}

{LET G39,"Empty"}

2.	This macro opens the graphics application VISIO, creates a new file, draws a rectangle in the workspace, saves the file, and exits VISIO:

{ASSIGN VisioApp,CreateObject("Visio.Application")}

{IFAUTOOBJ VisioApp}{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Documents.Add("")}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActivePage.DrawRectangle(1,7,5,10)}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActiveDocument.SaveAs(TestFile)}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Quit()}

TestFile is the block name for a cell containing this string: C:\DATA\OLE2\VISIAUTO.VSD. The macro statement that saves the active document as TestFile actually creates VISIAUTO.VSD in the specified directory.

3.	The next macro names a variable Test, assigns 0 to it, then prompts for an entry other than 0 and stores it in Test. After assigning the value in Test to VariableValue (the name of a cell) and deleting Test, it evaluates VariableValue and determines whether Test did indeed receive a new value which was assigned to VariableValue.

{ASSIGN Test,0}

{GETNUMBER "Enter a number other than 0:",Test}

{ASSIGN VariableValue,Test}

{DELVAR Test}

{IF VariableValue<>0}{LET A1,"PASS"}{RETURN}

{LET A1,"FAIL"}

For more information on named variables, see Named Variable (OLE Automation).

For details on using CreateObject and GetObject in automation expressions, see OLE Automation Object Functions.

See Also

Using OLE Automation Features

OLE Automation and Macros

OLE Automation Expression Examples


Properties in the Dialog Window

Add Down Button	Adds a down arrow to the right of the combo box.

Alarm On	Instructs the Timer to generate an alarm event at the specified time of day.

Alarm Time	Specifies the time to generate an alarm event (used with Alarm On).

Allow Point Mode	Lets the pointer be used to select a block while a dialog box remains on the screen.

Attach Child	Used to group controls for moving or resizing.

Bitmap	Specifies a bitmap file (.BMP) or an internal Quattro Pro bitmap to appear on the button.

Button Type	Specifies the button's behavior.

Convert Text	Allows insertion of a new line and tabs in an edit field.

Current Time	Fetches the current time. Settings cannot be altered.

Default	Determines the default value displayed in the edit field or spin control.

Default Button	Specifies the default button in the dialog box (which button is executed by pressing Enter). Only one button in a dialog box can have this property set to Yes.

Depend On	Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the control appears when the dialog box displays.

Dimension	Specifies the exact size and position of the control.

Disabled	Behaves like Grayed, but does not dim the control. Set it to Yes to disable the control.

Draw to Right	Controls position of check box and radio button text.

Edit Disabled	Disables typing in the edit field.

Edit Length	Specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in a combo box, edit field, or spin control.

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled. Set it to No to disable the control.

Field Type	Specifies the type of text the edit field accepts.

Fill Color	Specifies the color inside the rectangle.

Frame Color	Specifies the color of the rectangle's frame.

Grayed	Specifies whether the control can be used. Set it to Yes to disable the control. The control appears dimmer to indicate it is unavailable.

Grid Options	Shows/hides a grid and sets the number of pixels between grid lines.

Group Text	Specifies the title for the group box.

Help line	A brief description that appears in the Quattro Pro title bar when the control is active.

Hidden	Specifies whether the control is visible in the dialog box. Set it to Yes to hide the control. The control is hidden to the user; it is still visible when editing.

History List	Lets you set up a combo box that keeps a history of the values entered into its edit field.

Interval in Units	Determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated.

Label Font	Determines label format.

Label Text	Specifies the text appearing on or next to the control.

List	Specifies a pre-existing list to appear in a combo or list box, or a block containing a list.

List Length	Specifies the maximum number of History List entries.

Maximum	Determines the maximum number allowed in the edit field.

Minimum	Determines the minimum number allowed in the edit field.

Name	Used to identify the control in macros, link commands, and @functions.

Number of Columns	Allows multiple columns in a list box.

Object Help	Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Object ID	The control's identification number.

Ordered	Sorts list box or combo box entries alphanumerically.

Parameters	Controls behavior of scroll bars.

Position Adjust	Specifies how a control moves when its parent control is resized.

Process Value	Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the control's value.

Rectangle Style	Determines the type of rectangle.

Resize	Adjusts the width of a pick list to match the length of the text appearing on it.

Selected	Specifies the number I.D. of a radio button in a group box, or a selection in a list box.

Selection Text	Returns the text of the item selected in a list box.

Show	The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user.

Show Frame	Displays a box around the edit field or spin control.

Show Time	Shows time on the face of the time control.

Tab Stop	Determines whether the control can be activated by Tab.

Terminate Dialog	If set to Yes, pressing Enter triggers default button (usually Enter or Exit).

Text Draw Flags	Defines the location of label text on a control.

Timer On	Specifies whether the time control generates time events at regular intervals.

Title	Specifies the title of the dialog box or pick list, which the user sees.

Units in Milliseconds	Controls Timer intervals together with the Interval in Units property.

Value	The current setting of a control. This varies from control to control.

See Also

Application Building

Dialog Window Objects


Add Down Button Property

Adds a down arrow to the right of a combo box.

See Also

Combo Box

Working with Controls


Alarm On Property

Turns the Timer alarm on or off. When set to Yes, the time control generates an alarm event at the time specified by the Alarm Time property.

See Also

Time Control

Working with Controls


Alarm Time Property

Specifies the time of day to generate an alarm event when Alarm On is set to Yes.

See Also

Time Control

Working with Controls


Allow Point Mode Property

Lets the pointer be used to select a block while a dialog box remains on the screen. The Field Type property must be set to a Field Type other than Integer before Allow Point Mode can be enabled.

See Also

Combo Box

Edit Field

Working with Controls


Attach Child Property

Used to group controls for moving or resizing. See Grouping Controls for directions. The Attach Child property is available for many dialog controls.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Bitmap Property

Specifies a bitmap file (.BMP) or an internal Quattro Pro bitmap to appear on a button.

See Also

Bitmap Button

Working with Controls


Button Type Property

Specifies the type of button: Push Button, Radio Button, Checkbox Button, OK Exit Button, or Cancel Exit button. After changing button type, the Object Inspector for the new button type will become available.

Button type	Description

Push button	Acts like a push button. You can use link commands to make it perform operations when a user clicks it.

Radio button	Acts like a radio button, including a radio button's behavior in the group box. (A bitmap button appears recessed when a user chooses it.)

Check box	Acts like a check box button.

OK Exit button	Closes the dialog box like a standard Windows OK button. If the dialog box was displayed by {DODIALOG}, the values for controls whose Process Value property is set to Yes are written back to the setting block.

Cancel Exit button	Closes the dialog box like a standard Windows Cancel button. If the dialog box was displayed by {DODIALOG}, the values for controls whose Process Value property is set to Yes are not written back to the setting block, since the dialog box was canceled.

See Also

Bitmap Button

Check Box

Push Button

Radio Button

Working with Controls

Working with Link Commands


Convert Text Property

Controls the format of text in edit fields. If Convert Text is set to Yes, all characters preceded by a \ are treated as escape sequences. Important: The Convert Text property is valid only if a field's value is set via a macro command or link, and not simply typed into the edit field.

Valid formatting codes for edit field text are:

\n	Displays following text on a new line

\t	Inserts a tab (handy for lining up columns of text within the edit field)

\\	Inserts a backslash (\) into the text. Use \\ when you have to enter \n or \t as normal text into the edit field.

See Also

Edit Field

Working with Controls


Current Time Property

Fetches the current time. Settings cannot be altered.

See Also

Time Control

Working with Controls


Default Property

Determines the default value displayed in a spin control or an edit field control (with Field Type set to Integer).

See Also

Edit Field

Edit Integer

Spin Control

Working with Controls


Default Button Property

Specifies whether a push button or bitmap button is automatically clicked when the user presses Enter in a dialog box or Toolbar. A button configured this way is called the default button. A button defined as the default button displays in the dialog box with a thick black border. Only one button in the dialog box can have this property set to Yes; by default, it is the OK button. Setting a control's Default Button property to Yes automatically sets the other control's Default Button properties to No.

See Also

Bitmap Button

Push Button

Working with Controls


Depend On Property

Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the dialog control is enabled when the dialog box displays. For example, some controls are only appropriate in a graph window. Depend On can be set to Desktop, Notebook, Graph, Dialog/Toolbar, Input Line, or Objects Page. If all of the options are checked, the dialog control is always available. The Depend On property is available for many dialog controls.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Dimension Property

Specifies the exact size and position of the control. See Moving and Sizing Controls for directions. The Dimension property is available for many dialog controls, and is also available for Graph window objects when running Quattro Pro in /D mode.

Note:	If you start Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Dimension property will also be available for drawn graph objects.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Graph Window Objects

Working with Controls


Disabled Property

Disables the dialog control in the same manner as the Grayed property, but does not dim the control. The Disabled property is available for all dialog controls.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Draw to Right Property

Controls position of check box and radio button text. If set to Yes, text is placed to the right of the check box or radio button; if set to No, text is placed to the left. The default is Yes.

See Also

Check Box

Radio Button

Working with Controls


Edit Disabled Property

Disables typing in a combo box.

See Also

Combo Box

Working with Controls


Edit Length Property

Specifies maximum number of characters allowed in an edit field, combo box, or spin control.

See Also

Combo Box

Edit Field

Spin Control

Working with Controls


Enabled Property

Enables dialog controls that have been turned off with the Disabled property or by setting Enabled to No. It is used by link commands and does not appear in the control's Object Inspector.

The Enabled property is available for all dialog controls.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls

Working with Link Commands


Field Type Property

Determines the allowable type of input to the edit field: Integer, String, Real, Block, or Hidden. After changing Field Type to Integer, the Object Inspector changes to Edit Integer.

Field type	Result

Integer	Restricts user entry to integers. This adds three properties to the edit field Object Inspector (which is renamed Edit Integer). Minimum defines the lowest acceptable value users can enter. Maximum defines the highest acceptable value a user can enter. Default defines the initial value of the edit field.

String	Accepts any text a user enters (including numbers); this is the default edit field type.

Real	Accepts any number or formula.

Block	Accepts only cell addresses or block coordinates.

Hidden	Accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each character instead of the actual character. This is handy when users are entering passwords.

See Also

Edit Field

Working with Controls


Fill Color Property

Specifies the color inside a rectangle.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Rectangle

Working with Controls


Frame Color Property

Specifies the color of a rectangle frame.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Rectangle

Working with Controls


Grayed Property

Specifies whether the control can be used. When set to Yes, the control appears dimmer to indicate it is unavailable. The Grayed property is available for many dialog controls.

Note:	When you set the Grayed property for a control to Yes, you also have to set its Disabled property to No.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Grid Options Property

Shows or hides a grid in the dialog or Toolbar window, sets the number of pixels between grid lines, and turns Snap To Grid on or off. The grid is an aid in laying out dialog and Toolbar controls.

See Also

Aligning Controls

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Group Text Property

Specifies a title for a group box.

See Also

Group Box

Working with Controls


Help Line Property

A brief description that appears in the Quattro Pro title bar when the control is chosen by the user. The Help Line property is available for many dialog controls.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Hidden Property

Specifies whether the control is visible in the dialog box. When set to No, the control is hidden to the user but still displays when editing. The Hidden property is available for every dialog control.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


History List Property

Set this to Yes to have a combo box store a history of value entered in its edit field; this supercedes the settings of the List property.

See Also

Combo Box

Working with Controls


Interval in Units Property

Used with the Units in Milliseconds property to specify the interval at which the time control generates the timer event. The Interval in Units property determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated; the Units in Milliseconds property determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit.

See Also

Time Control

Units in Milliseconds Property

Working with Controls


Label Font Property

Determines dialog label typeface and point size, and whether it is bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout.

See Also

Label

Working with Controls


Label Text Property

Specifies the text appearing on a SpeedButton or control. To follow Windows conventions, when a button leads to another dialog box, you should end its text with an ellipsis (...).

See Also

Bitmap Button

Check Box

Label

Push Button

Radio Button

Working with Controls


List Property

Specifies a block containing a list to appear in a combo or list box, or selects one of Quattro Pro's predefined lists: Fonts, DriveList, BitmapList, or BarExt.

If you specify a block and the block contents are changed subsequent to setting the List property, the List settings will not be updated until the dialog box is opened again or an EXECUTE link command is used to refresh the list box.

See Also

Combo Box

List Box

Working with Controls

Working with Link Commands


List Length Property

Specifies the maximum number of history list entries in a combo box.

See Also

Combo Box

Working with Controls


Maximum Property

Determines the highest number that can be entered in a spin control or an edit field (when its Field Type property is set to Integer).

See Also

Edit Field

Edit Integer

Spin Control

Working with Controls


Minimum Property

Determines the lowest number that can be entered in a spin control or an edit field (when its Field Type property is set to Integer).

See Also

Edit Field

Edit Integer

Spin Control

Working with Controls


Name Property (Dialog)

Used to identify a dialog control or drawn graph object. It can also be used by macros, link commands, and @functions to select the object, change its property settings, or read its property settings. The Name property is available for many objects.

Note:	If you start Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Name property will also be available for many graph window objects.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Graph Window Objects

Working with Controls


Number of Columns Property

Specifies how many columns of items appear in a list box. The default is one column.

See Also

List Box

Working with Controls


Object Help Property

Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object.

Object Help Title	Title of the object. This can be identical to the Help Line property text. Note:  The Object Help Title also serves as the balloon help text that appears when you point to a Toolbar button.

Object Help Text	Briefly describes the function of the object.

Winhelp Context	(optional) Specifies the Winhelp context string of the relevant help topic. The context string must be followed immediately by the @ symbol and help file name. For example, the Winhelp Context for the Quattro Pro Help Contents screen is HELP_TOPICS@QPW.HLP.

Note	The combined total of all characters in the three Object Help fields may not exceed 194 characters.

See Also

Help line


Object ID Property

Assigns an identification number for dialog controls and drawn graph objects. It shows the order in which the dialog controls were created. The Object ID property is available for many objects. You can use the Object ID to identify objects in a macro command, link command, or @function. You cannot change the Object ID of an object; it is a read only property.

Note:	If you start Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Object ID property will also be available for drawn graph objects.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Graph Window Objects

Working with Controls


Ordered Property

Sorts list box and combo box entries alphanumerically in ascending order. Setting it to No does not reset the order of a list that has been sorted.

See Also

Combo Box

List Box

Working with Controls


Parameters Property

Controls the range of values a scroll bar accepts, and specifies how quickly the user can change the scroll bar's value.

Option	Description

Min	A horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far left as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the top of the scroll bar.

Max	A horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far right as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the bottom of the scroll bar.

Line	The amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks a scroll arrow.

Page	The amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks above or below the scroll box on a vertical scroll bar, or to the left or right of the scroll box on a horizontal scroll bar.

Time	The amount of time in milliseconds that Quattro Pro waits before moving the scroll box in response to a user action (clicking a scroll bar, holding down the mouse button while pointing to a scroll arrow, and so on).

See Also

Horizontal ScrollBar

Vertical ScrollBar

Working with Controls


Position Adjust Property

Specifies how a control moves when its parent control is resized. (See Grouping Controls for directions). The Position Adjust property is available for every dialog control.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Process Value Property

Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the control's value. See the description of {DODIALOG} for more information. The Process Value property is available for many objects.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Rectangle Style Property

Determines the type of rectangle:

Option	Description

Plain	Draws the rectangle as a solid box without a frame.

Framed	Draws a frame around the rectangle (the default). To set the color of this frame, use the Frame Color property.

Beveled Out	Displays a slightly raised rectangle.

Beveled In	Displays a slightly recessed rectangle.

Transparent	Displays a clear, unfilled rectangle. This is handy for grouping controls together without displaying the rectangle they are attached to. (See Grouping Controls for details on grouping controls).

Engraved	Displays a rectangle with an etched frame.

To change a rectangle's color, right-click the rectangle and choose the Properties command, then choose Fill Color.

See Also

Rectangle

Working with Controls


Resize Property

If set to Yes, makes the pick list automatically resize whenever the text appearing on it is too wide to fit.

See Also

Pick List

Working with Controls


Selected Property

Indicates numerically which radio button in a group box is chosen, or which item in a list box or pick list is highlighted. Numbers are sequential (such as 0,1,2,3,...9). If the first item is chosen or highlighted, Selected is set to 0. Choosing or highlighting the second item sets Selected to 1, and so on.

See Also

Group Box

List Box

Pick List

Working with Controls


Selection Text Property

Returns the text of an item selected in a list box.

See Also

List Box

Working with Controls


Show Property

The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user. It is used by link and macro commands and does not appear in the control's Object Inspector.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Show Frame Property

Displays a box around an edit field or spin control. Default is on.

See Also

Edit Field

Spin Control

Working with Controls


Show Time Property

If set to Yes, shows the system time on the face of the time control.

See Also

Time Control

Working with Controls


Tab Stop Property

Determines whether the control can be activated by Tab. See Setting Tab Order for directions. The Tab Stop property is available for many dialog controls.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Terminate Dialog Property

If set to Yes, pressing Enter triggers the default button (usually OK). This property is available for combo boxes, edit fields, and spin controls.

When set to No, keeps the dialog box from activating its default button when the user presses Enter in an edit field. (See Default Button for further information.) This is important in Toolbars, since activating the default button would close the Toolbar.

See Also

Combo Box

Edit Field

Spin Control

Working with Controls


Text Draw Flags Property

Determines where the text appears in relation to its background (for labels, check boxes, and radio buttons) or in relation to the button itself (for push buttons and bitmap buttons). The options are:

Apply

Applies the Text Draw Flags properties you have selected.

Wrapping Text

Single Line specifies that the text appears on one line. Uncheck Single Line to wrap lines of text and enable the Word Break option. Word Break specifies wordwrapped lines (that is, lines of text that break between words, instead of in the middle of words).

Vertical Position

Top places text flush against the top edge of the label background. Center Vertically centers the text between the top and bottom of the background. It does not affect the horizontal position of the text. Bottom places text flush against the bottom of the background.

Horizontal Position

Left places text flush against the left side of the label background. Center Horizontally centers the text between the left and right sides of the label background. It does not affect the vertical position of the text. Right places text flush against the right side of the label background.

You can enter special text items in a label to change its appearance:

\n makes characters to the right of it display on a second line. This only works when the Single Line option (in the Text Draw Flags property) is unchecked.

\t inserts a tab into the text (a fixed amount of space that is handy for lining up columns of text).

\\ inserts a backslash (\) into the text. You can use this to enter \n or \t into a label as normal text.

& make the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text (the ampersand does not appear). This is handy for naming controls. Use only one & character; if you use two, the & character appears underlined in the text.

See Also

Bitmap Button

Check Box

Label

Push Button

Radio Button

Working with Controls


Timer On Property

Turns on or off the Timer, which specifies whether the time control generates time events at regular intervals.

See Also

Time Control

Working with Controls


Title Property

Determines the dialog box title or pick list title displayed to the user.

See Also

Active Dialog Window Properties

Pick List

Working with Controls


Units in Milliseconds Property

Controls Timer intervals together with the Interval in Units property. The Interval in Units property determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated; the Units in Milliseconds property determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit.

See Also

Interval in Units Property

Time Control

Working with Controls


Value Property

The current setting of a control. This varies from control to control. See the control descriptions for a discussion of their values. Value does not appear in the Object Inspector; you can access it using macros, link commands, or @functions. Most dialog controls have a Value property.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls

Working with Link Commands


Properties in the Graph Window

3-D Options

3-D View

Alignment

Analyze

Aspect Ratio

Bar Options

Bkg Color

Block

Border Color

Border Options

Border Style

Box Type

Bullet Color

Bullet Indentation

Bullet Style

Comparison Line

Display

Explode Slice

Fill Color

Fill Style

Float Style

Format

Graph Button

Graph Type

Grid

Hi-Lo Bar Style

Label Alignment

Label Options

Legend Position

Line Color

Line Spacing

Line Style

Major Grid Style

Marker Style

Minor Grid Style

Name

Numeric Format

Riser Style

Scale

Series Options

Subtitle Bkg Color

Subtitle Color

Subtitle Font

Subtitle Style

Text Bkg Color

Text Color

Text Font

Text Style

Tick Options

Title

X-Axis Series

See Also

Objects in the Graph Window


3-D Options Property

The 3-D Options property affects the appearance of the two walls and the base of 3-D graphs. The options are:

Show Left Wall

Hides or reveals the left wall.

Show Back Wall

Hides or reveals the back wall of the graph.

Show Base

Hides the area under the series display.

Thick Walls

Gives the graph 3-D walls. When thick walls are turned off, the walls look thin, like sheets of paper. This option applies to all walls in the graph.

The property is available from the graph setup and background Object Inspector when a 3-D graph is displayed in a graph window.

When wall or base display is on, you can right-click the wall or base and change its Fill and Border Properties. When display is off, only grid lines are visible, and you cannot display an Object Inspector.

See Also

Changing 3-D Options

Major Grid Style

Minor Grid Style


3-D View Property

The 3-D View property lets you look at a 3-D graph from different vantage points. A sample graph in the dialog box lets you see changes before you apply them to your graph.

Rotation

Pivots the graph on its base. You can adjust the rotation to any angle between zero and 90 degrees. When rotation is set to zero, you look directly at  the front of the graph; when rotation is set to 90, you look directly at the right side of the graph. The default setting is 30.

Elevation

Lets you view a graph from different heights. When elevation is set to zero, you are at the same level as the base of the graph. As you increase the angle toward 90 degrees, your view shifts to see more of the top of the graph. At 90 degrees, you look directly at the top of the graph. The default setting is 30 degrees.

Perspective

Makes objects in the distance appear smaller than objects that are close. As you increase the Perspective setting, graph objects that are closest to your view get larger in proportion to objects that are farther away, and the graph looks somewhat distorted. When perspective is off, you view the graph at an ideal distance, and there is no distortion. When you check Perspective to turn this feature on, a slider bar for adjusting the amount of perspective appears.

Depth

Adjusts the distance between the front and back of the graph. When depth is set to 166, the top and base of a 3-D bar are square. To increase the depth, move the slider to the right. To make the graph appear flatter, or more two-dimensional, move the slider to the left.

Height

Is proportional to width when Quattro Pro draws a graph with the standard 3-D View settings. This height is given the value 100. To increase the proportion of height to width, move the slider to the right. To decrease the height to width ratio, move the slider to the left.

Apply

Changes the view options of the graph without closing the Object Inspector; use this to preview your settings in the graph. If you choose Apply, the Cancel button does not undo the changes you made to the Object Inspector.

Reset

Changes the 3-D View settings back to defaults (this does not affect the graph).

The 3-D View property is available from the graph setup and background Object Inspector when a 3-D graph is displayed in the graph window.


Alignment Property

The Alignment property affects the placement of text within titles, subtitles, and text boxes. The options are:

Text Alignment

Makes text left-justified, centered, or right-justified.

Wordwrap

If checked, text goes to the next line when it reaches the right margin, and the box expands vertically to fit all the text you type. If unchecked, the box expands horizontally as you type; you have to press Enter to start a new line.

Tab Stops

Sets tab stops within the text box at regular intervals you specify.

The Alignment property is available in Object Inspectors for boxed text you create using the Text tool on the Toolbar (see Text Box for details), and for the graph title and subtitle (see Graph Title and Graph Subtitle for more information).

Note:	The Wordwrap and Tab Stops options are not available for graph titles and subtitles.

See Also

Align

Label Alignment


Analyze Property

The Analyze property is available in the area, bar, and line series Object Inspectors in the graph window. It controls the type of analytical graphing in use, if any. The options are:

None	Disables analytical graphing.

Aggregation	Combines, or aggregates, multiple data points and plots them as a single point that may be the sum, average, standard deviation, variance, minimum, or maximum of the data.

Moving Average	Smooths fluctuating data points and highlights trends by plotting progressive averages for a specified number of points.

Linear Fit	Generates a straight line that best fits the data.

Exponential Fit	Generates a curve to fit data that increases or decreases geometrically.

See Also

Area Series

Bar Series

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing

Line Series

Result Tables


Aspect Ratio Property

The Aspect Ratio property in the graph window Object Inspector affects the proportion of width to height in a graph. The options are:

Floating Graph

Retains the proportions of the floating graph, even when you bring this graph into a graph window. This is the default aspect ratio when creating a floating graph using the Graph tool.

Screen Slide

Gives the correct proportions to a graph that will be part of an onscreen slide show. This is the default aspect ratio when creating a graph using Graphics|New Graph.

35mm Slide

Gives the correct proportions to a graph that will be sent to a slide service for processing into 35mm slides.

Printer Preview

Shows the graph as it will look when printed with the current page setup.

Full Extent

Adjusts the graph display to fill the graph window and fit the area designated for the floating graph. Full extent assumes that graphs and drawings are at their proper size when displayed full-screen; these elements are scaled down in smaller views, while fonts stay the same size no matter where they are displayed. This is why graphs with the full extent aspect ratio often look different on a spreadsheet page than they do in a graph window.

Tip:	Choose the aspect ratio for your final output before you begin to change properties or draw objects. A 35mm slide has different proportions than an 8 1/2 by 11 inch sheet of paper, for example. A graph and its labels may look right when the aspect ratio is set to 35mm screen slide, but everything may need to be resized when the aspect ratio is changed to Printer Preview.


Bar Options Property

The Bar Options property is in the Bar Series Object Inspector available when you right-click a bar in a graph and choose the Properties command (or choose Property|Series|series number in the menu bar). These options apply to all bars in the graph:

Bar Width

Controls the thickness of the bars. When Quattro Pro draws a bar graph, it divides the axis spaces evenly between the bars (reserving some of the axis area for spaces between the bars). The initial bar width depends on how many values you plot. To make the bars thinner, move the Bar Width Percentage slider to the left; to make the bars thicker, move the slider to the right.

Bar Margin

Controls the amount of extra space between the bars and the right and left sides of the graph. A bar margin can give your graph a more polished look.

Bar Overlap

Determines how much the bars in a series cover the bars of the previous series. There are three settings: None (bars are placed side-by-side), Partial (bars overlap by 50% of their width), and Full (each series is drawn directly on top of the last one).


Bkg Color Property

The Bkg (Background) Color property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a graph. The background color is visible only if the Fill Style is a pattern or a wash. When the fill style is a pattern, the background color is the color behind the pattern. In a wash, the fill color is distributed over the background color.

See Also

Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors


Block Property

The Block property lets you specify the spreadsheet block you want to appear in a graph. Type the block coordinates, or use Point mode to select a block from the notebook. See Pointing From Dialog Boxes for details on using Point mode.


Border Color Property

The Border Color property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a graph. The border color is the color of the frame or box around the object.

See Also

Border Style

Box Type

Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors


Border Options Property

The Border Options property lets you turn the display of each graph pane border off and on. This property also specifies whether graph grids appear behind or in front of bars, areas, and other graph markers.

To display the grid in front of bars and other graph markers, check Grids On Top.

The four border options--Left Border, Top Border, Right Border, and Bottom Border--appear automatically when you open the Object Inspector. To hide a side of the graph pane, uncheck the border option. To reveal it, check the option.

When a hidden side coincides with an axis, the vertical or horizontal line that represents the axis is hidden, but all other features, such as tick marks and labels, are displayed.

Tip:	If you turn off left and bottom border displays to hide axis lines, you will see a "plus sign" at the junction of the x- and y-axes, where tick marks cross. To eliminate these marks, right-click the x-axis, choose the Properties command, and set Tick Options|Tick Style to None, then do the same for the y-axis.

The Border Options property is available when you right-click the graph pane of a 2-D graph (except a pie graph) and choose the Properties command.


Border Style Property

Border Style sets the style or thickness of the frame around the object. There are nine styles, ranging from transparent to a thick line. Buttons in the dialog box illustrate each style; just click a button to choose a style. The color of the border is controlled by the Border Color property

The Border Style property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a graph, except the graph background and text boxes (these have a similar property; see Box Type for more information).

See Also

Fill and Border Properties


Box Type Property

The Box Type property is available for the graph background, text boxes, and floating graphs. Box type determines the look of the box that borders these objects. The 12 choices range from "no frame" to several 3-D styles. Buttons in the dialog box illustrate each box type; just click a button to choose one. A similar property, Border Style, sets the frame appearance for other graph objects.

See Also

Fill and Border Properties


Bullet Color Property

The Bullet Color property determines the color of bullet characters in a bullet series. Quattro Pro provides three different models for creating new colors: HSB, RGB, and CMY. Only one model displays at a time, but all three update when you change a color setting. For more information, see Creating Custom Colors.

See Also

Customizing Bullet Charts


Bullet Indentation Property

The Bullet Indentation property sets the distance before and after bullets, and turns on or off hanging indentation. The options are:

Before Bullet

Sets the amount of spacing that appears before the bullet character in a series. Type a percentage of average character width (based on the Text Font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 0 to 500.

After Bullet

Sets the amount of spacing that appears after the bullet character in a series. Type a percentage of average character width (based on the Text Font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 0 to 500.

Enable Hanging Indentation

When checked, bullets are separated from their text, making items in the list easier to read. A hanging indent occurs when the first line has an indent less than the indent of subsequent lines.

See Also

Customizing Bullet Charts


Bullet Style Property

The Bullet Style property sets the type and size of bullets. Choose a bullet type from the sample bullets shown, then type a number for the relative bullet size or use the scroll bar to pick a number from 0 to 32. To not show bullets, set bullet size to 0.

See Also

Customizing Bullet Charts


Comparison Line Property

Selects the style and color of a comparison line for a stacked or 100% stacked bar comparison graph. The color and line options are identical to those in line graphs.

See Also

Line Color

Line Style


Display Property

The Display property sets options for row and column borders, grid lines, and scaling for a spreadsheet block added to a graph using the Block tool [image]. The options are:

Row Borders

When checked, shows row borders.

Column Borders

When checked, shows column borders.

Horizontal

When checked, shows horizontal grid lines.

Vertical

When checked, shows vertical grid lines.

Maintain Aspect Ratio

When checked, maintains the same aspect ratio as the cells in the spreadsheet block. Uncheck this option to fit cells in the specified box, making each cell the same width.


Explode Slice Property

The Explode Slice property is available for 2-D and 3-D pie and doughnut graphs, including multiple pie graphs. Pie and doughnut graphs plot a single series; each value is a "slice" of the graph circle. To emphasize a slice, you can explode it (pull it away from the rest of the circle). The options are:

Explode Distance

The amount of space between the pie or doughnut and the exploded slice. The space is measured as a percentage of the radius (the default value is 25%).

Explode

Enables the explode feature.

Multiple 2-D and 3-D pie graphs plot each series as a separate pie. When you explode a slice in one pie, the corresponding slices in the other pies are also exploded.

See Also

Customizing Pie and Doughnut Graphs


Fill Color Property

The Fill Color property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a graph. Fill Color is the interior color of the object. If the Fill Style is a pattern, the fill color is the color of the pattern. If the fill style is a wash, the fill color is distributed over the Bkg Color.

See Also

Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors


Fill Style Property

The Fill Style property is available for every solid object that appears in or on a graph, including bars, areas, line graph markers, and drawn objects such as ellipses and rectangles. The options are:

None

Makes the object transparent.

Solid

Makes the object one solid color (the Fill Color).

Pattern

Gives you a choice of 24 two-color patterns. The color of the pattern is the Fill Color; the background behind the pattern is the Bkg Color.

Wash

Gives you a choice of 6 two-color wash styles. In a wash, the Fill Color is distributed over the Bkg Color.

Bitmap

Lets you fill the object with an imported bitmapped graphic (see Filling an Object with a Bitmap for details).

See Also

Bkg Color

Changing Box or Border Style

Fill Color

Making an Object Solid or Transparent

Selecting a Fill Style


Float Style Property

The Float Style property selects the style of floating marker used in the 3-D floating marker graph. The options are:

Floating Marker Type

Sets the style of floating marker. Choose from one of the marker types pictured.

Cross Section View

Sets the cross section (circle, square, hexagon, or octagon) of the marker type.

Weight

Sets the relative size of the markers. Type a number, or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 8 to 32.


Format Property

The Format property specifies how series labels are displayed (as text, or in a numeric format such as date or currency, for example). See Numeric Format Options for more information.

See Also

Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points


Graph Button Property

The Graph Button property is available for every Text Box and for the Graph Background. This property turns a text box, or the graph background, into a "live" button in a slide show. When clicked, a graph button can run a macro or show a different graph. Graph buttons are active whenever the graph appears in a slide show or when displayed with the Graph|View command. They do not work in a graph window, or in a floating graph on a spreadsheet page.

The background graph button defines what action should be taken if a viewer clicks on any area outside of the defined text-box graph buttons. This invisible button traps random or errant clicks, which makes it well suited for use in slide shows. Each graph can have as many text box graph buttons as you want, but there is only one background button per graph.

See Also

Creating a Background Graph Button

Creating a Graph Button

Turning Graphs into Slide Shows


Graph Type Property

The Graph Type property is available when you right-click the graph background and choose the Properties command when a graph is displayed in a graph window. This property controls how a series is represented in a graph--as a bar, line, area, or some variation of these basic graph types. Quattro Pro divides graph types into six categories. Click one of the topics below to learn about these categories:

2-D Graphs

3-D Graphs

Rotated Graphs

Combination Graphs

Multiple Graphs (found under Combo in the Graph Type dialog box)

Bullet Charts

Blank Graphs

Click one of these topics to learn about specific graph types:

Bar Graphs

Line Graphs

Area Graphs

Pie and Column Graphs

Doughnut Graphs

XY Graphs

High-Low Graphs

Surface Graphs

Radar Graphs

Bullet Charts

Blank Graphs

See Also

Changing the Graph Type

Choosing a Graph Type


Grid Property

Grid is one of two Graph Window Properties. A grid is a series of vertical and horizontal dotted lines spaced at regular intervals. When you draw objects, the grid can help you size and place objects correctly. Grid lines are a design aid only; they do not print or appear in slide shows. The options are:

Display Grid

Turns the grid display on and off.

Grid Size

Controls the distance between the dotted grid lines. The size is measured as a percentage of the graph window area. The default grid size, 4, means the distance between each grid line is 4% of the edge it intersects, with 25 increments in each direction (a 25 x 25 grid). The grid has the fewest guidelines when the grid size is set to 25 (a 4 x 4 grid), and the densest guidelines when the grid size is set to 1 (a 100 x 100 grid).

Snap to Grid

When checked, objects automatically align with the nearest grid point when you create or move them. You can align several objects by placing them close to the same grid line. The grid forces the objects to align with the grid and with each other.

Display Grid and Snap to Grid work independently. For example, you can place objects using Snap to Grid even when the grid display is turned off.

Note:	This property is not related to the grid lines that project from the x- and y-axes on a graph. To learn about these grid lines, see Major Grid Style and Minor Grid Style.


Hi-Lo Bar Style Property

This property determines how high and low values are represented in High-Low Graphs. There are four styles:

Bar

Give you a "bar and whisker" (or "candle") graph. A line connects high and low values. A bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close, the bar is red. (Retain this light/dark relationship if you change fill colors.)

I-Beam

High and low values determine each end of the I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks, respectively.

Line

Connects corresponding high and low values with a line and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.

Marker

Assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.


Label Alignment Property

A label series places labels on the bars, markers, or data points that represent each value in a series. (See Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points for details.) The Label Alignment property is available when you right-click one of these labels and choose the Properties command.

Label Alignment sets the position of series labels relative to the bars or data points. The graph type determines which alignment options are available.

On bar graphs, you have four choices, Above, Top, Middle, and Bottom. Above places the labels above the top margin of each bar. Top, Middle and Bottom place labels on the bars, in different locations. Top places labels near the top margin; middle puts labels over the center of each bar, and bottom places labels just above the x-axis.

On line graphs you can center series labels over the data points, or place each label to the Left, Above, to the Right, or Below the corresponding data point.


Label Options Property

The Label Options property is available when you right-click a slice in a pie or doughnut graph or a section of a column graph and choose the Properties command. The options are:

Label Series

Places text labels next to the data labels. (If you have an x-axis series defined for the graph, the x-axis series appears in this edit field.)

Data Label

Controls the format of the label that displays the value for each slice. Currency shows the values from the spreadsheet page, in dollars. Percent (the default) shows the data as a percentage of the value of the whole series. Value shows the actual data that appears on the spreadsheet page. None means no value labels appear next to the slice.

Show Tick

Turns tick mark display off and on. Be sure to turn this option off if you do not have a label series defined, and if you set Data Label to None.

When you have defined an x-axis series, its block coordinates appear in the Label Series edit field. Either the x-axis series or the label series can provide labels in pie and column graphs. If you specify a new label series, it overrides the x-axis series.

See Also

Customizing Column Graphs

Customizing Pie and Doughnut Graphs


Legend Position Property

The Legend Position Property specifies where a legend box appears on the graph. The left option hides the legend. The middle option creates a horizontal legend and places it below the graph. The right option creates a vertical legend and places it to the right of the graph.

This property is available in the graph setup and background Object Inspector and the legend Object Inspector for all 2D graphs (except pie and column graphs) and for 3D graph types that have legend boxes.


Line Color Property

The Line Color property is available for all line series (including those in Line graphs, XY graphs, High-Low graphs and in line series in combination graphs you create by overriding the graph type of an individual series). This property determines the color of the line that connects the points in a series, the color of outline-style markers, and the border color of solid (filled) markers.

The Line Color property also chooses the color for the lines, polylines, and freehand lines you create using tools on the graph window Toolbar.

See Also

Line Style

Marker Style


Line Spacing Property

The Line Spacing property sets the spacing before and after each line of text in a bullet series. For both the Before Text Line and After Text Line options, type a percentage of line height (based on the Text Font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a number from 0 to 500.

See Also

Customizing Bullet Charts


Line Style Property

The Line Style property is available for all line series (including those in Line graphs, XY graphs, High-Low graphs and in line series in combination graphs you create by overriding the graph type of an individual series). This property determines the thickness of the line that connects the points in a series, the color of outline-style markers, and the border color of solid (filled) markers. You can also choose from several dashed line styles.

Line Style also chooses the style for the lines, polylines, and freehand lines you create using tools on the graph window Toolbar.

See Also

Line Color

Marker Style


Major Grid Style Property

The Major Grid Style property is available for the x-axis and the primary and secondary y-axes of a graph. Major grid lines extend from each major tick on an axis to the opposite side of the graph. The options are:

Line Style

Lets you choose the appearance of the grid lines. The blank selection in the upper left corner turns the grid off.

Color

Lets you select a color from the palette, or use the scales to create a new color (see Creating Custom Color Palettes for more about color scales).

The appearance of the major grid is also affected by the Increment value, which is a Scale property option.

See Also

Minor Grid Style


Marker Style Property

The Marker Style property is available for all line series (including those in line graphs, XY graphs, high-low graphs and in line series in combination graphs you create by overriding the graph type of an individual series). This property specifies the symbol placed at each data point in a series.

There are sixteen marker styles. Eleven of these are outline styles--markers with no interior fill. The other five are solid markers with filled interiors. The color of outline-style markers and the border color of solid markers is determined by the Line Color. The type of line that forms the outline or border is set by the Line Style property.


Minor Grid Style Property

The Minor Grid Style property is available for the x-axis in an XY Graph and in the primary and secondary y-axes of a graph. Minor grid lines extend from each minor tick on an axis to the opposite side of the graph. The Minor Grid Style property selects the line style and line color for these lines. The options are:

Line Style

Lets you choose the appearance of the grid lines. The blank selection in the upper left corner (the default) displays no lines.

Color

Lets you select a color from the palette, or use the scales to create a new color (see Creating Custom Color Palettes for more about color scales).

The appearance of the minor grid is also affected by the No. of Minors value, which is a Scale property option.

See Also

Major Grid Style


Name Property (Graph/Slide Show Icons)

The Name property is available when you view the properties of graph icons and slide show icons on the Objects page. This property lets you rename graphs and slide shows.

Note:	If you start Quattro Pro in Developer Mode (with the /D parameter), the Name property allows you to assign a name to drawn graph objects.

See Also

Graph Icon Properties

Graph Window Objects

Slide Show Icon Properties


Numeric Format Property (Graph)
Numeric Format Property

The Numeric Format property is available for labels on the primary y-axis, the secondary y-axis (which has the same set of properties as the primary y-axis) of a graph, and for the scaling x-axis of XY Graphs.

By default, the Numeric Format setting is General, which means the numbers on the axis scale are displayed exactly as they are calculated from your data. Other formats are available, including formats that add commas, dollar signs, or other characters to your original number.

If the format you choose allows a variable number of decimal places, an edit field appears. If you want to display other than the default number of decimal places (2), enter a number from 0 to 15 in the edit field.

If you choose Date or Time, you must choose a specific date or time format.

If you choose User Defined, you can choose from a list of formats you create yourself (see Defining Custom Numeric Formats for details).

See Numeric Format Options for descriptions and examples of each numeric format.


Riser Style Property

The Riser Style property is available for 3-D bar types. It sets the type of riser used for bar series. The options are:

Riser Type

Sets the style of riser used for the 3-D bar. Choose from one of the riser types pictured.

Cross Section View

Sets the cross section (circle, square, hexagon, or octagon) of the riser type.


Scale Property

The Scale property is available for labels on the primary Y-Axis, the secondary y-axis (which has the same set of properties as the primary y-axis) of a graph, and for the scaling x-axis of XY Graphs. When Quattro Pro draws a graph, it automatically adjusts the axis scale to fit the range of numbers assigned to the axis. You can change this scale to fine-tune the graph or to zoom in on a specific area. The options are:

Scale Type

Sets the scale to Normal or Log (logarithmic). In a normal scale, the value of each major division is exactly the same. In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10 times the value of the previous major division. A logarithmic scale is useful when you are plotting series with wide ranges in magnitude.

Show Units

Simplifies the axis labels where numbers on the axis scale are 1000 or greater. Show Units displays only the first characters of the label and automatically adds the appropriate units title in parentheses along the y-axis: "(thousands)" or "(millions)" for example. (To change the font, color, or other properties of the Show Units title, right-click it and choose the Properties command to display the Axis Title Object Inspector.)

Automatic

Refers to the scale that is automatically calculated from your data. If you change High, Low, Increment, or No. of Minors settings, this option becomes unchecked. If you check it, it clears your changes and resets the scale to Quattro Pro's original settings.

High and Low

Set the highest and lowest values for the axis scale. (To set a descending scale, reverse the high and low values.)

Increment

Sets the increase (or in descending scales, the decrease) in values between major tick marks. This option also affects the spacing between major grid lines.

No. of Minors

Specifies how many minor tick marks and minor grid lines to place between major tick marks. (The default style for minor grid lines is "no lines," so you will not see minor grid lines unless you select a different Line Style option for the Minor Grid Style property.)

Zero Line

Appears as an option of the Scale property only when you right-click the y-axis of a variance graph and choose Properties. The zero line provides the frame of reference for the "variance" that gives this graph type its name. Values less than the zero line setting project below the line; higher values extend above the line.

See Also

Major Grid Style


Series Options Property

Series Options appear in the Line Series Object Inspector, the Bar Series Object Inspector, and the Area Series Object Inspector for 2-D and 3-D graphs. To view the properties of a particular series, right-click the bar, line, or area that plots the series and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series|series number in the menu bar. The options are:

Data Series

Selects or changes the data series to be plotted. See Changing the Data Series details.

Label Series

Places labels over bars in bar graphs, and over data points in line and area graphs. See Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points to create a label series. To adjust the position and appearance of these labels, see Series Label.

Legend

Lets you enter legend text (or the coordinates where legend text is located), to override the legend label that is placed in the graph by the series. See Overriding a Legend Label for instructions.

Override Type

Changes the graph type of the series you right-clicked. Use this option to create a custom combination graph. You can override a series on 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low graphs. (High-low graphs restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.) See Creating a Custom Combination Graph for details.

Y-Axis

Lets you plot the selected series against the primary y-axis or secondary y-axis. This option is available only for 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low graphs. See Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis for instructions.

See Also

Legend


Subtitle Background Color Property

The Subtitle Background (Bkg) Color property is available for graph subtitle text only. This property provides the second color for pattern and wash subtitle styles. The subtitle background color is also the drop shadow color.

See Also

Adding Titles to the Graph

Subtitle Color

Subtitle Font

Subtitle Style


Subtitle Color Property

The Subtitle Color property chooses the color for graph subtitle text. When you select a pattern subtitle style, the subtitle color is the color of the pattern. If you choose a wash subtitle style, the subtitle color is distributed over the subtitle background color.

See Also

Adding Titles to the Graph

Subtitle Bkg Color

Subtitle Font

Subtitle Style


Subtitle Font Property

The Subtitle Font property determines the font and font size of the graph subtitle, and whether the subtitle text appears bold, italic, underlined, or with strikeout.

See Also

Adding Titles to the Graph

Subtitle Bkg Color

Subtitle Color

Subtitle Style


Subtitle Style Property

The Subtitle Style property includes options to fill graph subtitle text with a solid color, a two-color wash, or an imported bitmap. It also lets you add a drop shadow.

See Also

Adding Titles to the Graph

Subtitle Bkg Color

Subtitle Color

Subtitle Font


Text Bkg Color Property

The Text Bkg (Background) Color property is available for all text objects, including titles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the graph window Toolbar. This property provides the second color for a pattern or wash Text Style, and is also the shadow color. The text background color is not visible when the text style is a solid color.

See Also

Text Color

Text Font


Text Color Property

The Text Color property is available for all text objects, including titles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the graph window Toolbar. This property determines the color of solid-colored text. When you select a pattern Text Style, the text color is the color of the pattern. If you choose a wash text style, the text color is distributed over the Text Bkg Color.

See Also

Text Font


Text Font Property

The Text Font property is available for all text objects, including titles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the graph window Toolbar. Text font lets you choose the typeface (Courier, Helvetica, Times Rmn, for example), the type size (in points), and whether the text has a bold, italic, underline, or strikeout feature.

See Also

Text Bkg Color

Text Color

Text Style


Text Style Property

The Text Style property is available for all text objects, including titles, axis labels, and text you create using the Text tool on the Graph Toolbar. This property includes options to fill text with a solid color, a two-color wash, or an imported bitmap. It also lets you use 3-D text (see Creating 3-D Text) or add a drop shadow.

Note:	Wash, Bitmap, and 3-D options are not available for the y-axis and y2-axis in 2-D and 3-D graph types, and for the x-axis in rotated graph types.

See Also

Text Bkg Color

Text Color

Text Font


Tick Options Property

The Tick Options property is available for the X-Axis, the Y-Axis, and the secondary y-axis (which has the same set of properties as the primary y-axis) of a graph. Major divisions on the axis are indicated by tick marks. You adjust the display and placement of tick marks and axis labels through the Tick Options property.

Tick Style

Controls the appearance of tick marks. None means no tick marks are displayed. The Below and Above settings extend tick marks below or above the x-axis, respectively. The Left and Right settings extend tick marks to the left or right of the y-axis, respectively. The Across setting makes tick marks cross the axis.

Display Labels

Turns axis label display off and on.

Number of Rows

Places the labels in a single row, or in two or three staggered rows.

No Overlapping Labels

Eliminates some of the labels when label text would otherwise overlap.

Skip __ Labels

Lets you choose how many evenly-spaced labels to eliminate, to prevent overlap. If you enter 2, for example, the first label is displayed, the second and third labels are skipped, the fourth label is displayed, the fifth and sixth labels are skipped, and so on.

Length Limit

Lets you specify the maximum number of characters displayed in a label. Any additional characters will not appear in the label.

See Also

Major Grid Style

Minor Grid Style

Scale

Text Bkg Color

Text Color

Text Font

Text Style

X-Axis Series


Title Property

The Title property provides an edit field where you can change the text of an x-axis or y-axis title. This property is equivalent to choosing Graph|Titles and changing the entry for the corresponding axis.

See Also

Adding Titles to the Graph

Developer Mode


XAxis Series Property

The X-Axis Series property lets you add or change x-axis labels. This property is equivalent to selecting an x-axis series when you create a graph. To do this,

1.	Enter axis labels in a spreadsheet page, if a suitable block of labels does not already exist.

2.	Right-click the x-axis and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|X-Axis. The X-Axis Series property is already selected in the Object Inspector.

3.	Double-click the Select Range edit field, then point to the block of axis labels on the spreadsheet page. If your labels are not in a continuous row or column, hold down the Ctrl key as you select each cell or subblock.

4.	Press Enter to return to the Object Inspector (or type the coordinates directly in the edit field), then choose OK.

In XY Graphs (scatter diagrams), the x-axis series is data, not labels. Quattro Pro gives the x-axis a scale to match the data.


Properties in the Notebook Window

Block Alignment 	Changes alignment of cell entries in a block.

Border Color 	Sets the color of a floating object's border.

Box Type 	Determines the type of box to surround the floating object.

Column Width	Sets and resets the width of selected columns.

Conditional Color 	Assigns colors to ERR values or to values within, greater than, and less than a specified range.

Constraints (Block) 	Disables or enables protection for individual blocks of cells, and constrains types of data that can be entered in a block.

Default Effect	Specifies default slide show effects, including transition effect, speed, display time, and other options.

Default Width	Sets the column width for all columns, except those that have been adjusted individually.

Display	Hides parts of the notebook display.

Display (Page)	Determines whether or not to display zero values, notebook borders, or the spreadsheet grid.

Font 	Sets typeface, style, and point size of text for the selected block.

Label Text	Specifies text to display on a SpeedButton.

Line Drawing 	Draws lines around cells and blocks.

Macro Library	Turns a notebook into a macro library.

Macro 	Specifies a macro for the selected SpeedButton to run.

Master Slide	Specifies which slide to use as the master slide. The master slide determines the template style, common design elements (such as logos), and positioning of bullet chart text.

Name	Specifies a name for a graph, dialog, or slide show icon in the Objects page.

Name (Page)	Names the active page.

Numeric Format 	Changes display format of values in a block.

Object Name 	Specifies the name of a floating object.

OLE	Identifies the OLE server, object, and link source (for linked OLE objects), and sets the resizing and updating methods.

Palette 	Determines the default color palette available for notebook cell colors.

Password Level	Sets the level of password protection for the active notebook.

Protection (Object)	Sets or removes protection for objects; protected objects cannot be moved, sized, changed, or deleted.

Protection (Page) 	Sets or removes overall write-protection for a spreadsheet page.

Recalc Settings 	Determines calculation mode, order, and number of iterations for spreadsheet recalculation.; toggles formula compilation and display of error sources in cells.

Reveal/Hide	Hides and displays columns and rows.

Row Height	Sets and resets the height of selected rows.

Shading 	Shades blocks of cells with the specified color.

Show Pointer	Shows or hides the pointer throughout the slide show.

Source Graph	Determines the graph displayed in a floating graph.

System	Turns a notebook into a system notebook.

Tab Color	Changes the tab color of the active notebook page.

Text Color	Specifies text color for the selected block.

Zoom Factor 	Proportionally reduces or enlarges cells and floating objects onscreen without actually resizing them.

See Also

Objects in the Notebook Window


Recalc Settings Property

The notebook Recalc Settings property controls how Quattro Pro updates formula results when you change values those formulas depend on. Options are discussed in the following topics:

Setting Recalculation Mode to specify when formulas are recalculated

Setting Recalculation Order to change the sequence in which formulas are calculated (rarely changed)

Limiting Recalculation Iterations to determine how many times formulas are recalculated before calculation is considered complete (rarely changed).

Compiling Formulas to save memory and boost recalculation speed for certain types of notebooks.

Auditing Errors to display the source of ERR and NA values in cells.

See Also

Active Notebook


Zoom Factor Property

The Zoom Factor property lets you pull back to see a whole printed page, or focus in on the detail of a few cells. You can set a Zoom Factor for an entire notebook or for individual pages. Select a standard Zoom Factor setting, or enter a custom setting.

The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer.

Note:	The Zoom Factor setting does not affect printed output; use the Print Scaling option in the File|Page Setup dialog box to scale printed documents (see File|Page Setup for details).

See Also

Active Notebook

Active Page


Notebook Palette Property

The notebook Palette property determines the palette of colors displayed in the block and page properties that set colors, such as the block Text Color property and the page Line Drawing property. The options are:

Notebook Palette

Each color square controls the color displayed in the same location in the corresponding palettes.

Edit Color

Opens a dialog box for modifying the active color square. Select a color from the larger palette of available colors, and/or use the HSB, RGB, and CMY color models to create the exact color you want. See Creating Custom Colors for details on using the color models.

Reset Defaults

Returns the notebook palette to the default Quattro Pro settings.

Caution: Changing any color square in the notebook palette also changes any previous uses of that color square throughout the notebook. For example, if you set the Shading property for a cell with the color square that is initially set to red (the leftmost square in the second row of the palette) and later change the corresponding color square in the notebook palette to green, the shaded cell switches to green.

See Also

Active Notebook


Notebook Display Property

The Display property sets display characteristics for the active notebook. The options are:

Display

To allow more space in a notebook window, or to create a special presentation notebook, you may want to temporarily hide the scroll bars or the page tabs. Uncheck the display elements you want to hide; check them when you want them displayed again.

Objects

Select Show All to show all objects on the notebook (such as floating graphs), Show Outline to show only the outline of objects, or Hide to hide all objects. By showing only the outline of objects or hiding them, you can save time when scrolling or printing.

See Also

Active Notebook

Hiding Parts of the Notebook Display


Macro Library Property

A macro library is a convenient place to store frequently used macros. When you set a notebook's Macro Library property to Yes, Quattro Pro searches it when you try to run a macro that is not in the active notebook.

See Also

Active Notebook


Password Level Property

Sets the level of password protection for the active notebook.

None	Requires no password to open and use the notebook.

Low	Anyone can open the notebook, but only password holders can view and edit formulas. Other users see values instead of formulas. Selected formula cells show asterisks (*****) in the input line.

Medium	The notebook is always hidden once it is saved and closed. Then, only password holders can show it again. All the features of Low protection apply as well.

High	Only password holders can open the notebook. You are prompted for the password following any command that attempts to load the protected file. Remember, you must enter the assigned password in the same combination of lowercase and capital letters as the original entry.

If you need to edit formulas or password settings in a notebook with Low or Medium password protection, you can open the notebook with a startup command when you start Quattro Pro; see Using a Password at Startup for details.

Note:	If you select a password level of Low, Medium, or High, when you click OK in the notebook Object Inspector the Enter Password dialog box appears, allowing you to enter a password of up to 15 characters. Passwords are case-sensitive.

See Also

Active Notebook

Assigning a Password to a File


System Property

A system notebook, when hidden, stays open even when users close all notebooks. Application developers can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Quattro Pro is running.

When you set a notebook's System property to Yes, you make it a system notebook. You can use this property with Window|Hide or the Password Level property, depending on the level of protection you want to apply (Medium level hides the notebook when you save and close it). If you are using a system notebook for macros, you will probably want to apply the Macro Library property, too.

Note:	The /File|Close All command, which is available if you have Quattro Pro for DOS menus enabled (see Using Alternative Menu Systems), closes all open notebooks (even hidden ones), but does not close system notebooks that are hidden.

See Also

Active Notebook

Assigning a Password to a File

Creating System Notebooks

Using Macro Libraries

Window|Hide


Numeric Format Property

The block Numeric Format property controls the displayed appearance of values in the selected cell or block. Ordinarily, the default Numeric Format is General, which displays numbers exactly as you enter them (unless the column width is too narrow). Click Numeric Format Options for descriptions and examples of each numeric format.

Note:	All numeric formats leave the cell values intact; they only affect the way values are displayed.

If the format you choose creates a number too wide for its column, a string of asterisks appears. You can redisplay the number by widening the column.

The format you assign to a cell stays with the cell, even if you delete its contents. If you move the contents, however, the format moves with the data and is removed from the original cell. If you copy a formatted cell, the copy takes on the format of the original cell. If you paste a copied or cut block with Edit|Paste Special, you can control whether the cell's properties are pasted. To erase values and reset a block's properties, use the Edit|Clear command.

See Also

Active Block

Column Width

Using Paste Special

Using Styles


Numeric Format Options

Format	Description	Examples
Fixed	Displays no more than the specified number of decimal places.	46.1 or 0.56 or -34.123
Scientific	Uses scientific notation. Allows only one digit in the integer portion of the number.	2.35E+2 or 4.76E+9
Currency	Displays numbers as currency, using the currency symbol of the country you specify.	$3,467.00 or 35 or ($56.24)
Comma	Separates thousands with commas, and shows negative numbers in parentheses.	15,120.25 or (2,456)
General	Displays numbers as entered, unless they are too long to fit the active cell. Then, they are rounded (if fractional) or translated into scientific notation.	456.9452 or -365 or 0.41 or 1.955E+6
+/-	Transforms values into a horizontal bar graph. Each integer translates into a symbol: + for each positive integer, - for each negative integer, and . for zero.	+ + +  - - - -  . .
Percent	Displays numbers as percentages.	13.40% or -56.44%
Date	Displays numbers as dates in the format you choose:
	DD-MMM-YY	09-Apr-92
	DD-MMM	09-Apr
	MMM-YY	Apr-92
	Long International	04/09/92
	Short International	04/09
Time	Displays numbers as times in the format you choose:
	HH:MM:SS AM/PM	11:31:28PM
	HH:MM AM/PM	05:15AM
	Long International	06:56:10
	Short International	06:56
Text	Displays formulas instead of their results. Displays numbers entered in the block in General format. This is also known as the Show Formulas format.	+B6*C3 or @SUM(B1..B10)
Hidden	Suppresses display of both value and label entries. Entries still appear on the input line when the cell is selected.
User Defined	Lets you choose from a list of formats you create. See Defining Custom Numeric Formats for details.
If the format you chose allows a variable number of decimal places, an edit field appears. If you want to display other than the default number of decimal places (2), enter a number from 0 to 15 in the edit field.

If you have hidden cell contents with the Hidden numeric format, you may want to use the page Protection property to prevent the cells' entries from being accidentally overwritten (see Protection for more information).

Formatting Date Serial Numbers

Quattro Pro stores each date you enter as a five-digit serial number. Quattro Pro uses this date number for calculations. If you enter the date by typing it, the cell is switched to the date format in which you enter it. If you enter the date using @DATE, @DATEVALUE, or @NOW, you must reformat the cells with the Date numeric format. Otherwise, Quattro Pro displays the results as a date serial number.

Precision of Numbers

Numeric formatting does not affect the way Quattro Pro stores values, only the way it displays them. For example, some formats limit the number of digits that appear. This does not affect the precision of Quattro Pro calculations, which are accurate to 16 significant digits. The stored number is displayed on the input line when you select a cell.

A significant digit is any digit that is not a leading zero; decimals, commas, dollar signs, and percent signs do not count as part of the total. For example, the number 1.23 has three significant digits. The number .000123 also has three significant digits because the leading zeros do not count.

Quattro Pro rounds the appearance of numbers to the specified decimal place in the case of Fixed, Scientific, Currency, Comma, and Percent formats. The +/- format truncates decimal numbers to whole integers. The General format rounds off fractional numbers as necessary to fit in the cell.

To round the number actually stored in a cell, use @ROUND..

See Also

International

Using Named Blocks

Using Styles


Block Font Property

The block Font property controls the appearance of entries in the active block. Options are:

Typeface

The list of typefaces available vary depending on the font-scaling software running on your system. If a font has a TT (TrueType) or an a (ATM) symbol beside it, text in that font will appear in print just as it does onscreen. Fonts with a printer symbol will print on your printer, but may not appear in the correct font onscreen. Fonts without a symbol appear accurately onscreen, but may not appear in correct font when printed.

Point Size

Type a point size, or choose one from the list.

Options

Check Bold, Italic, Underline, and/or Strikeout.

If you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to display the tallest letters in the row (unless you have set the row height explicitly; see Row Height for more information).

See Also

Active Block

Defining Styles

Using Styles


Shading Property

The Shading property controls the background color of cells (the color of entries themselves is controlled by the block Text Color property). The shading color is a mixture of two colors: Color 1 and Color 2. The options are:

Color 1

The first color to be mixed.

Color 2

The second color to be mixed.

Blend

Choose the Blend square that provides the mix you want. The square at the far left is the same as the Color 1 selection; the Color 2 selection appears in the far right square.

With most color choices, you need to deselect the block to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details).

Note:	If shading does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

See Also

Active Block

Defining Styles

Text Color

Using Styles


Block Alignment Property

The Alignment property controls the placement of entries within cells. The options are:

Horizontal Alignment

Sets the horizontal alignment of entries within cells. Choose one of the following settings:

General	Right-aligns values and left-aligns labels.

Left	Left-aligns all types of entries.

Right	Right-aligns all types of entries.

Center	Centers all types of entries.

Center Across Block	Centers text across the selected block.

Vertical Alignment

Sets the vertical alignment of entries within cells. Choose Top, Center, or Bottom. To change the row height, set the block Row Height property.

Wrap Text

When checked, entries that do not fit horizontally in a cell wrap onto the next line within the cell. Wrap Text cannot be used with vertically oriented text.

Orientation

Choose either horizontal or vertical orientation.

Tip:	There are two other ways to change alignment of entries. You can

choose General, Left, Right, Center, or Center Across Block from the Alignment list in the Property Band.

precede an individual label with a label-prefix character (see Aligning Labels for more information).

See Also

Active Block

Aligning Cell Entries


Line Drawing Property

The Line Drawing property draw lines around cells in a block. Specify the Line Segments you want to affect first, then choose a Line Color and Line Type. The options are:

Line Segments

Selects the lines you want to affect. Click line segments with the mouse; nibs appear to show which segments are selected. Shift+click to select multiple segments. At least one segment is always selected. To deselect a segment, click it again. You can also click the All, Outline, or Inside buttons to select lines.

All

Selects lines around every cell in the block (not available when defining styles).

Outline

Selects lines around the block but not between cells.

Inside

Selects lines between cells but not around the perimeter of the block (not available when defining styles).

Line Color

Applies a line color to the selected lines; by default, the lines are black.

Note:	If lines do not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details). If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Line Color property, your lines will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

Line Types

Applies a line type to the selected lines. The No Line choice removes previously-drawn lines, and the No Change choice cancels a change you make to a line.

You can combine line drawing options in the same block. For example, you can draw a double-lined border around a block, and single vertical lines between the cells in the block.

See Also

Active Block

Defining Styles

Drawing Lines Around Blocks

Using Styles


Text Color Property

The Text Color property controls the color of cell entries This property controls the color of the characters that make up the data, not the color of the cell shading.

Color Palette

Choose the color you want. If you already changed the cell's shading, make sure the Text Color setting will contrast enough to be visible.

Note:	If text does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details). If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Text Color property, your text will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

Tip:	With most color choices, you need to deselect the block to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

See Also

Active Block

Shading

Using Styles


Row Height Property

The Row Height property adjusts the height of single or multiple rows to an exact size. Select any cell in one or more rows, or select the row borders. The options are:

Row Height

Shows the current height of the active row. Type a new height here.

Reset Height

Resets the active row's height to the default row height (as determined by the largest font used in the row)

Set Height

Changes the active row's height to the Row Height entry.

Unit

Specifies that the Row Height entry be evaluated in Points, Inches, or Centimeters

See Also

Active Block

Column Width Property

Resizing Rows and Columns

Using Named Blocks

Using Styles


Column Width Property

The Column Width property adjusts the width of single or multiple columns to an exact size. Select any cell in one or more columns, or select the column borders. The options are:

Column Width

Shows the current width of the active column. Type a new width here.

Extra Characters

If Auto Width is chosen, type the number of extra characters beyond the widest entry to allow for column width.

Set Width

Changes the active column's width to the Column Width entry.

Reset Width

Resets the active column's width to the default column width (see Default Width for details)

Auto Width

Changes the active column's width to the longest entry in the column plus the Extra Characters entry. See below for details.

Unit

Specifies that the Column Width entry be evaluated in Characters, Inches, or Centimeters

The Auto Width option resizes contiguous columns based on the longest entry. The longest entry is chosen based on your initial column or block selection:

If entire columns are selected, the width is based on the longest entry in each column.

If a multi-row block (or just part of a column) is selected, the width in each column is based on the longest entry in each column of the block.

If a single-row block (or just one cell) is selected, the width is based on the longest entry in that row and all cells below it.

Tip:	If a column you are adjusting contains a long entry that spills over into blank cells to the right, and you do not want the column adjusted to that cell entry's length, specify a multi-row block that stops short of the cell.

See Also

Active Block

Resizing Rows and Columns

Row Height Property


Reveal/Hide Property

The Reveal/Hide property hides rows or columns from view without losing the data they contain. You can later redisplay the rows or columns with the same property. The options are:

Dimension

Choose Rows to operate on active rows; choose Columns to operate on active columns.

Hide

Hides the active rows or columns.

Reveal

Redisplays hidden rows or columns surrounded by the active rows or columns.

No Change

The default setting for the Operation option.

After you use Hide, columns to the right of the hidden columns move left to fill in the empty space, or rows below the hidden rows move up. However, the identifying row numbers and column letters in the borders do not change. In other words, if you hide column B, the columns onscreen are labeled A, C, D, and so on.

If you use Notebook|Extract to save part of a notebook that includes hidden rows or columns (see Extracting Part of a Notebook for details), Quattro Pro saves the hidden rows or columns in the new file, although they will still be hidden from view when you load the file.

To reveal (or hide) all rows and columns on a notebook page, click the Select All button first (or choose Edit|Select All), then set the block Reveal/Hide property.

Tip:	You can also reveal a single hidden row or column with the mouse. To reveal a hidden column, place the mouse pointer slightly to the right of the hidden columns border, then drag. For a hidden row, drag from just below the hidden rows border. The hidden row or column is revealed and sized as you drag. For example, you can use this technique to reveal row 1 and column A when they are hidden.

See Also

Active Block


Block Constraints Property

The block Constraints property turns off protection in the active block, and constrains types of data that can be entered in a block.

Note:	Cell protection has an effect only if you have already turned on overall page protection with the page Protection property (see  Enabling Page Protection for details).

The options are:

Cell Protection

Choose Protect (the default setting) to reprotect a block that you have previously unprotected. Choose Unprotect to remove protection from the active block.

When a cell is protected, you cannot edit, replace, or delete its contents. Nor can you delete a column or row that contains a protected cell.

With page protection enabled, you can move the selector around the entire page, but you can make changes only to unprotected cells. To restrict the selector to unprotected cells only, use Block|Restrict Input (see Restrict Input for details).

Data Input Constraints

Choose General (the default setting) to allow all entries in the block. Choose Labels Only to allow only label entries; if someone tries to enter a date, time, or number, it is converted to a label. Choose Dates Only to allow only date or time entries; if someone tries to type a label or number, an error message appears.

This feature is especially helpful if you are setting up a notebook for others to use. For example, presetting cells for label-only entry makes it easier to enter phone numbers and social security numbers because they contain hyphens that are otherwise interpreted as minus signs.

For the list of acceptable date and time formats, see Entering Dates and Times.

See Also

Active Block

Defining Styles

Using Named Blocks

Using Styles


Page Display Property

Display Zeros

Suppresses the display of any value in the active page that equals exactly zero, whether it was entered directly or calculated with a formula. Select Yes to display zeros, or No to hide them.

Zero suppression does not remove the zero values from the page. They remain in memory and reappear if you set Display Zeros to Yes.

A value must equal exactly zero to be suppressed. For example, a value such as .004 that appears as 0 if decimal precision is 2 or less, will still appear if Display Zeros is set to No, because it is not actually 0.

Caution: When zero suppression is on, it is easy to accidentally write over cells containing formulas that evaluate as zero. Make sure Undo is enabled (see Enabling the Undo Command for more information), or consider protecting the page (see Enabling Page Protection for details).

Border Options

Turns off row and column borders in the active page. Uncheck Row Borders to turn off the numbered row borders at the left of the page. Uncheck Column Borders to turn off lettered column borders at the top of the page.

These options are useful for setting up a page as a form for data input.

Grid Lines

Turns off the spreadsheet grid in the active page. Uncheck Horizontal to turn off grid lines that separate rows. Uncheck Vertical to turn off grid lines that separate columns.

These options are useful for viewing a page as it would look when printed (grid lines are not printed by default).

See Also

Active Page


Page Name Property

The page Name property controls the name of the active page. The name appears on the page's tab and in formulas referring to cells on the page. Pages are initially named with letters of the alphabet in sequence, from A to Z, continuing from AA to AZ, up to IV. The options are:

Page Name

Enter a name up to 63 characters long. You can use letters, numbers, and spaces in the name, as well as the following special characters

~	`	!	%	_	|	\	'	?

You cannot use any other special characters. Also, you cannot use a name you have previously assigned to a group in the same notebook.

Reset

Restores the page name back to its original letter name.

Note:	The Objects page cannot be renamed.

See Also

Active Page

Using Blocks in Formulas


Page Protection Property

The page Protection property turns on protection in the active page. It works in tandem with the block Constraints property and the object Protection property. Use page protection to set up protection for a page, then use block or object protection to unprotect the specific blocks of cells or objects you want to allow to be changed. The options are:

Enable Cell Locking

Protects all cell entries in the active page, except those specifically unprotected with the block Constraints property.

Enable Object Locking

Protects all objects in the active page, except those specifically unprotected with the object Protection property.

To prevent unauthorized access to an entire notebook, protect the it with a password (see Assigning a Password to a File for details).

See Also

Active Page

Protecting Cells


Conditional Color Property

The page Conditional Color property changes the color of specific types of data in the active page: values above or below a specified range, and ERR values. The options are:

Smallest Normal Value/Greatest Normal Value

Lets you enter a range of values you consider normal. Cells with values within this range will appear in the Normal Color. The default settings for Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value are 0 and 1E+300, respectively. You can specify different colors for values above and below this range by clicking the option and clicking a color square in the color palette.

Below Normal Color

Sets the color of cells whose values are below the Smallest Normal Value.

Normal Color

Sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set by Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value.

Above Normal Color

Sets the color of cells whose values are above the Greatest Normal Value.

ERR Color

Specifies the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors.

Enable

Indicates whether to use the conditional colors set with this property.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details).

Note:	If colored entries do not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

See Also

Active Page


Default Width Property

The Default Width property sets the default width of all columns in the active page. By default, columns are wide enough to display approximately nine characters in the default font. The options are:

Column Width

The default column width in characters, inches, or centimeters.

Unit

The measurement system for the Column Width setting.

The Default Width setting does not affect columns that were explicitly adjusted using the Fit button, the block Column Width property, or the mouse. Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width, you must select them and check the Reset Width option of the block Column Width property.

See Also

Active Page

Column Width

Resizing Rows & Columns with the Mouse

Setting Automatic Row & Column Sizes


Tab Color Property

The Tab Color property changes the tab color of the active page. The default tab color of the active page is white.

See Also

Active Page

Creating Custom Colors


Macro Property

Enter Macro

Specifies a macro for the active SpeedButton to run.

Execute Dialog

Makes the SpeedButton display a dialog box. Using this option replaces whatever macro is assigned to the button with a {DODIALOG} command.

See Also

Creating Macro SpeedButtons

SpeedButton


Border Color Property

Border Color specifies a color for the border of the active floating object. The palette of colors used is determined by the Notebook Palette property.

See Also

Box Type


Box Type Property

Box Type specifies the appearance of the border surrounding the active floating object. The options are:

None

No border at all

Thin/Medium/Thick

Increasingly thick borders

Drop Shadow

When checked, a black offset border gives the object a 3-D appearance

Transparent

When checked, the floating graph is transparent, which allows you to see spreadsheet cells beneath the graph. You can also make objects within the graph pane transparent; see Making an Object Solid or Transparent.

See Also

Creating Floating Objects


Object Name Property

Object Name specifies a name for the active floating object. This name can be used in macros that work with this object.

See Also

What Is a Macro?


OLE Property

The OLE property identifies the OLE server, object, and link source (for linked OLE objects), and sets the resizing and updating methods.

Server

Identifies the OLE server used to create the object.

Object

Identifies the OLE object.

Automatic Resizing

When checked, the object is automatically resized.

Link Source

Identifies the source of the linked OLE object.

Automatic Update

When checked, the OLE object always reflects edits in the server application. When unchecked, the object is updated only when you manually update it.


Default Effect/Slide Effect Property

Default Effect specifies a default slide show effects for the slide show icon. Slide Effect specifies the effects used for the active slide in a Light Table. The options are:

Transition Effect

Select one of the transition effects from the list. The speed of the transition effect is controlled by the Slow, Medium, and Fast buttons.

Overlay Previous Slide

When checked, the slide overlays the previous one instead of replacing it.

Use Master Slide

When checked, the slide displays the template style and graph elements used in the master slide (the first slide in a slide show). The master slide also affects the position and color of graph titles and bulleted text in bullet chart slides.

Skip Slide in Presentation

When checked, the slide is not shown when viewing the slide show.

Display Time

Specifies how long the slide remains on screen, in seconds (up to 3600). The default is zero, which causes the slide to stay on screen until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.

See Also

Adding Transition Effects

Changing Effects and Display Times

Creating a Slide Show

Setting Default Effects and Display Times


Name Property (Objects Page Icons)

Specifies a name for the active graph, dialog box, or slide show icon in the Objects page, or the active dialog control in the dialog window. This name can be used in macros that work with these icons or the objects they represent.

See Also

What Is a Macro?


Source Graph Property

The Source Graph property determines which graph is displayed in the active floating graph object.

Select Graph displays a list of graphs in the active notebook. The new floating graph will have the same dimensions as the original floating graph.

See Also

Creating a Floating Graph


Protection Property

The Protection property protects floating objects on the notebook. It works in tandem with the page Protection property. Use object Protection to unprotect floating objects you want to allow to be changed, then use page protection to protect all other floating objects or cells on the page.

To prevent unauthorized access to an entire notebook, protect the it with a password (see Assigning a Password to a File for details).

See Also

Active Page

Protecting Cells


Properties in the Light Table Window

Default Effect	Specifies default slide show effects, including transition effect, speed, display time, and other options.

Master Slide	Sets the master slide used for a slide show. The master slide determines the template style, common design elements (such as logos), and positioning of bullet chart text.

Name	Specifies a name for a slide show icon.

Show Pointer	Shows or hides the pointer throughout the slide show.

Slide Comment	Specifies a description of the slide.

Slide Effect	Specifies effects (transition effect, speed, display time, and other options) for selected slides.

Slide Type	Specifies whether to show slides in small, medium, or large size, or to show names only.

See Also

Objects in the Light Table Window


Master Slide Property

Specifies which slide to use as the master slide. The master slide determines the template style, common design elements (such as logos), and positioning of bullet chart text. The template style and graph elements in the master slide are used in all slides except those that have the Use Master Slide option of the Slide Effect property unchecked (see Slide Effect Property)

The master slide appears in the first slide position in the Light Table window; it does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.


Show Pointer Property

The Show Pointer property shows or hides the pointer throughout the slide show. It is helpful to hide the pointer if your slide show contains no graph buttons for branching to different slides.


Slide Comment Property

The Slide Comment property lets you specify a description of the slide (up to 79 characters).


Slide Type Property

The Slide Type property specifies whether to show slides in small, medium, or large size, or to show names only.

Tip:	You can also change the slide type in the Light Table by using commands on the View menu; see View Menu for more details.


Application Properties

You can display the application properties using one of these methods:

Right-click the Quattro Pro title bar

Choose Property|Application in the Property Band

Press Alt+F12

Properties in the application Object Inspector affect the overall functioning of Quattro Pro. Any changes you make to these properties remain in effect until you change them again, even after you exit and restart Quattro Pro.

Display 	Sets clock display, range syntax, menu style, and screen repaint during macros.

International 	Sets currency, punctuation, date, and time formats. Also determines sort table used, and provides LICS conversion.

Macro	Controls the behavior of macros.

File Options	Sets the startup directory, autoload file, file extension, auto-backup options, and display of the full path of filenames in the notebook window title bar.

General	Enables the Undo command, and sets key compatibility, whether the cell selector moves when you press Enter, whether to save the Toolbar arrangement when you exit, and drag-and-drop delay time.

Note:	If you start Quattro Pro in Developer mode (with the /D parameter), two additional properties are available:

Title	Displays a custom title in the Quattro Pro title bar.

Enable Inspection	Globally enables/disables mouse right-clicking.

See Also

Active Notebook Properties


Application Display Property

The Display property sets display characteristics that affect the entire Quattro Pro application. The options are:

Clock Display

Displays the date and time on the status line in your choice of formats. Standard displays the date and time as DD-MMM-YY and HH:MM AM/PM; International displays the date and time in the Long International formats specified with the International property. If the time or date displayed is incorrect, you must update your computer's internal clock. You can do this with the Windows Control Panel.

Display Options

Displays or hides the Toolbar, Property Band, status line, input line, scroll indicators, or balloon hints (the name that appears when you point at an object, such as a Toolbar button).

3-D Syntax

Switches between two page notation methods for 3-D blocks. The default method expresses page references first, followed by a colon and the block coordinates. For example, A..C:B4..D9 refers to the block B4..D9 on pages A, B, and C. The alternate syntax refers to the same block by referring to each corner of the block with the page reference included, as in A:B4..C:D9.

See Also

International Property

Switching the Page Range Syntax


Application International Property

The International property controls the appearance of currency, punctuation, dates, times, and international characters. It also lets you choose the language to govern sort orders. The initial defaults are standard for the United States. If you are using Quattro Pro in another country, or are doing business with another country, you can change these settings to suit your requirements. The options are:

Currency

Sets the default currency symbol used in the Numeric Format property's Currency setting and in the Currency styles. Also controls whether negative values are preceded with a minus sign (Signed) or are surrounded with parentheses (Parens).

If you choose Quattro Pro currency settings, select a country whose currency you want to use. To change the currency symbol for the selected country, click the Change button. You can also change whether the currency symbol appears before values (Prefix) or after them (Suffix).

Punctuation

Controls the characters used as the thousands separator, the decimal separator, and as argument separators. The options first show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the decimal place, followed by the punctuation mark used to separate arguments in @functions and macros (a1,a2). The last four options specify that a blank space separates thousands in numbers.

Date Format

Determines the international formats given as options for date display from the block Numeric Format property. Each of these options is shown in its long and short versions.

Time Format

Determines the international formats given as options for time display from the block Numeric Format property. Each of these options is shown in its long and short versions.

Language

Sets the language to determine Quattro Pro's sort order.

LICS

Converts Lotus International Character Set characters into standard ANSI characters. LICS characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except in the range 128 through 255, which is usually used for international and graphics characters. When you save the file, Quattro Pro writes these characters back to the LICS equivalents. For more on LICS characters, see the 1-2-3 documentation.

Each Windows Default setting available with these options uses the corresponding setting in the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for details.

See Also

Block Numeric Format

Changing the Sort Order

Choosing a Currency Symbol

Controlling Punctuation

Setting Date Formats

Setting Time Formats


Currency Dialog Box

Currency Symbol

Type a new currency symbol (up to 10 characters). To enter a special ANSI character not on your keyboard, hold down Alt and use the numeric keypad to type 0 and then the ANSI number for that character. For example, to enter a pound sign (£), press Alt and type 0163.

Prefix

Places the currency symbol before values (as in $100).

Suffix

Places the currency symbol after values (as in 500F).


Application Macro Property

The Macro property lets you control macros and alternate menu systems. The options are:

Macro Suppress-Redraw

Controls which parts of the screen redraw while macros are running. Panel prevents redrawing of menus, dialog boxes, the status line, and the input line. Window prevents redrawing of windows only. Both suppresses redrawing of both windows and panels. Suppressing redrawing speeds up macros, since Quattro Pro does not have to stop and draw each of these items used in the macro.

Slash Key

Controls which menu system displays when you press the slash key (/) from Ready mode. Choose Menu Bar (the default), Quattro Pro - DOS, or 1-2-3 / R 2.01.

Startup Macro

Sets the macro to be run every time any notebook containing a macro with this name is opened. See Running a Macro When a File Opens for details.

See Also

Application Building.

DOS Spreadsheet Users

Macros

Setting Macro and Menu Options


Application File Options Property

The File Options property lets you set file-handling options and includes information that is used every time you start Quattro Pro. The options are:

Directory

Sets the directory initially displayed by file-handling commands.

Autoload File

Sets the file to be loaded every time Quattro Pro is started.

File Extension

Sets the default file extension to be used when you do not specify a file extension with file-handling commands.

Auto-backup Time

Sets the time interval at which a Quattro Pro notebooks are automatically backed up. When Activate is checked, auto-backup is turned on.

Enable Full Path Titles

When checked, Quattro Pro displays full path titles of filenames in the notebook window title bar.

WordPerfect File Dialogs

When checked, Quattro Pro uses shared file-handling dialog boxes from WordPerfect or GroupWise, if they are installed. For improved performance, uncheck this option to use the Quattro Pro file-handling dialog boxes.

Enable QuickTemplates

When checked, Quattro Pro displays available QuickTemplates you can use when you choose File|New to create a new notebook. When unchecked, File|New creates a new, blank notebook.

See Also

File Handling Options

Setting the Startup Directory

Using Notebook Templates


Application General Property
Application General Options Property

The General property lets you set general options that affect how you use Quattro Pro. The options are:

Undo Enabled

Makes the Edit|Undo command available after the full range of undoable operations. See Enabling the Undo Command for details.

Compatible Keys

Makes a variety of keys work in the same way as in Quattro Pro for DOS. When unchecked, these keys work as in most Windows applications. See Changing Key Compatibility for details.

Move Cell Selector on Enter Key

With Compatible Keys unchecked, checking this setting makes the selector move down a cell each time you enter data. For details, see Setting Cell Selector Behavior.

Save Toolbars on Exit

The Toolbars property lets you automatically save the current Toolbar arrangement when you exit Quattro Pro. When you restart Quattro Pro, the arrangement will be restored.

Cell Drag and Drop Delay Time

Specifies how long to wait, in milliseconds, before changing from block selection to Drag-and-Drop mode.

See Also

Dragging and Dropping

Opening and Closing Toolbars

Setting Drag and Drop Delay Time

Setting the Startup Directory


Application Title Property

The Application Title property changes the title displayed on Quattro Pro's title bar. This property is only available after starting Quattro Pro in developer mode (with /D parameter).

See Also

Application Building


Application Enable Inspection Property

The Enable Inspection property globally enables/disables mouse right-clicking This property is only available after starting Quattro Pro in developer mode (with /D parameter).

See Also

Application Building


Property Reference

Property Reference Overview

Object Precedence

Identifying Objects

Common Properties

The Color Property

The Dimension Property

The Font Property

Active Object Properties

Menu Command Properties

Dialog Control Properties

Common Graph Object Properties

Fill Style

Text Style

Drawn Graph Object Properties

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Notebook Object Properties

Objects Page Icon Properties

Quattro Pro has a variety of commands and @functions that affect property settings. This help section lists the objects and properties you can manipulate using

@PROPERTY

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{GETPROPERTY}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETPROPERTY}

link commands in a dialog box or menu command

The topics in this help section list the various Quattro Pro objects and describe how to identify the objects in an @function or command.


Property Reference Overview

The property tables in this section are divided into three parts: the Object|Property column, the Argument column, and the Syntax column.

The Object|Property column lists the objects and their properties. The Argument column shows how to enter the property name in an @PROPERTY function or macro command. If a property name is followed by an asterisk (*), it is a hidden property and does not appear in the object's Object Inspector. If a property name is followed by (R), you cannot set it with a macro command or link command; it is a read only property.

The Syntax column shows the layout of special property settings. Italicized items in the Syntax column describe the type of data returned; items in normal type are entered (when setting a property). If vertical bars (|) separate items, then only those items are returned or allowed in the property. For example, "Both | Window | Panel | None" means that the property setting is either Both, Window, Panel, or None; you can enter only one of these items to set the property. Another example is Precision | Type, which indicates that either the type or precision setting is listed in that position. Items in angle brackets (<>) are optional.

See Also

Property Reference


Object Precedence

If a situation arises where a property command could affect multiple objects (because they have the same name), the object highest on this list is identified:

1.	Dialog box

2.	Graph

3.	Floating object

4.	Named block

When the Objects page is active, you cannot identify a dialog box or graph. The icon representing the dialog box or graph is identified instead.

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Identifying Objects

Entering a string into a command (or @function) that specifies the name of an object and property to manipulate is called identifying an object. The following table lists the ID syntax of Quattro Pro objects. In the table, Property is the name of the property setting to read or set. ObjName is the name of the object to manipulate. This name is stored one of the following properties: Name, Object Name, or Object ID.

Object	ID Syntax	Notes

Block (or Cell)	[NBName]BlockAddress.Property	[NBName] is optional

Dialog box	[NBName]DialogName:.Property	[NBName] is optional.

Dialog control	[NBName]DialogName:ObjName.Property	[NBName] is optional. DialogName: is not needed if the dialog box containing the control is active.

Dialog icon	DialogName.Property	Dialog icons can only be identified when the Objects page is selected.

Floating object	[NBName]Page:ObjName.Property	[NBName] and Page: are optional.

Graph	[NBName]GraphName.Property	[NBName] is optional.

Graph icon	GraphName.Property	Graph icons can only be identified when the Objects page is selected.

Graph object	[NBName]GraphName:ObjName.Property	[NBName] is optional. GraphName: is not needed if the graph window containing the object is active.

Menu command	Menupath.Property

Notebook	[NBName].Property	You can change properties of the active notebook using Active_Notebook.Property.

Page	Active_Page.Property	You can only read or set properties of the active page using this syntax.

Slide show icon	none	Set slide show icon properties by selecting the icon with {SELECTOBJECT} and using {SETPROPERTY}.

Toolbar	[ToolbarName].Property

Toolbar control	[ToolbarName]ObjName.Property	[ToolbarName] is not needed if the Toolbar containing the control is active.

See Also

Block Property Example

Control Property Example

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Block Property Example

The following table shows examples of how you can apply the information in the Identifying Objects topic to manipulate a block property: the Numeric Format property of the cell A:A23.

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY B:C32,"A:A23.Numeric_Format"}

Note: The setting is stored in B:C32.

ON Init SET General TO A:A23.Numeric_Format

Note: You can also use ID's with the SEND and RECEIVE link commands. This link command formats A:A23 as General.

@PROPERTY("A:A23.Numeric_Format")

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "A:A23.Numeric_Format","Currency,2"}

Note: This command formats A:A23 as Currency (2 decimal places).

See Also

Control Property Example

Identifying Objects

Property Reference Overview


Control Property Example

The following table shows examples of how you can apply the information in the Identifying Objects topic to manipulate an object property: the Disabled property of a bitmap button named Bitmap1 in a dialog box named Dialog1.

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY B:C32,"Dialog1:Bitmap1.Disabled"}

Note: The setting is stored in B:C32.

ON Init SET Yes TO Dialog1:Bitmap1.Disabled

Note: You can also use ID's with the SEND and RECEIVE link commands. This link command disables the button.

@PROPERTY("Dialog1:Bitmap1.Disabled")

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "Dialog1:Bitmap1.Disabled","No"}

Note: This command enables the button.

{SETPROPERTY} and {GETPROPERTY} work on the selected object, and just take the name of the property to manipulate.

See Also

Block Property Example

Identifying Objects

Property Reference Overview


Common Properties

Many objects contain the same type of property. These are some of the more common object properties:

Color

Dimension

Font

See Also

Common Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


The Color Property

The Color property appears in many Object Inspector menus, but with a variation in title (Border_Color, Line_Color, Text_Color, and so on). The syntax of Color is:

Red,Green,Blue

Red is the amount of red in the color. Green is the amount of green in the color. Blue is the amount of blue in the color. Each of these components is an integer from 0 to 255; 0 indicates that none of the hue is present; 255 indicates maximum saturation for the hue. Black is 0,0,0 and white is 255,255,255.

When setting a color using an Object Inspector menu, you can click HSB or CMY (on a color control) to specify the color using a different color model. Using a different color model does not affect the syntax of the Color property; the Color property is always in Red,Green,Blue format.

You can also retrieve each of these color components individually. The following table lists the argument required to read or set an individual component of a Color property. Item is the word appearing in the Object Inspector (and property tables) that describes what color is being manipulated.

Property	Argument	Syntax

Item_Color	Item_Color	Red, Green, Blue

Red	Item_Color.Red

Green	Item_Color.Green

Blue	Item_Color.Blue

See Also

Common Graph Object Properties

Common Properties

The Dimension Property

The Font Property


The Dimension Property (Property Reference)
The Dimension Property

The Dimension property shows the precise size and position of an object relative to the window containing it. The syntax of Dimension is:

X,Y,Width,Height

X is the distance in pixels between the left edge of the object and the left side of the window. Y is the distance in pixels between the top edge of the object and the bottom edge of the window's title bar (or from the top of the graph background in the case of a drawn object). Width is the width of the object, in pixels. Height is the height of the object, in pixels.

You can also retrieve each of these settings individually. The following table lists the argument required to read or set an individual option of the Dimension property.

Property	Argument	Syntax

Dimension	Dimension	X, Y, Width, Height

X Pos	Dimension.X

Y Pos	Dimension.Y

Width	Dimension.Width

Height	Dimension.Height

See Also

Common Graph Object Properties

Common Properties

The Color Property

The Font Property


The Font Property (Property Reference)
The Font Property

The Font property appears in many Object Inspector menus, but with a variation in title (Font, Label_Font, Text_Font). The syntax of Font is:

Typeface, PointSize, Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikeout

Typeface is the name of the typeface used. The list of typefaces available varies from system to system. PointSize is the size of the text, in points (a point is 1/72nd of an inch). Bold, Italic, Underline, and Strikeout each set one attribute of the text's appearance. Each is set to Yes or No.

You can also retrieve each of options individually. The following table lists the argument required to read or set an individual option of a Font property. Item is the word appearing in the Object Inspector (and property tables) that describes what font is being manipulated.

Property	Argument	Syntax

Font	Font	Typeface, PointSize, Bold,

Italic, Underline, Strikeout

Typeface	Font.Typeface	Typeface

Point Size	Font.Point_Size	PointSize

Bold	Font.Bold	Yes | No

Italic	Font.Italic	Yes | No

Underline	Font.Underline	Yes | No

Strikeout	Font.Strikeout	Yes | No

Item Font	Item_Font	Typeface, PointSize, Bold,

Italic, Underline, Strikeout

Typeface	Item_Font.Typeface	Typeface

Point Size	Item_Font.Point_Size	PointSize

Bold	Item_Font.Bold	Yes | No

Italic	Item_Font.Italic	Yes | No

Underline	Item_Font.Underline	Yes | No

Strikeout	Item_Font.Strikeout	Yes | No

See Also

Common Graph Object Properties

Common Properties

The Color Property

The Dimension Property


Common Graph Object Properties

Two properties are found in many graph objects:

Fill Style

Text Style

See Also

Common Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


The Fill Style Property (Property Reference)
The Fill Style Property

The Fill Style property is common to many graph objects. It determines the color and pattern of objects. If Fill Style is None, leave the Type field empty

Property	Argument	Syntax

Fill Style	Fill_Style	None | Solid | Pattern | Wash | Bitmap, Type

None	Fill_Style	None

Solid	Fill_Style	Solid,Solid

Pattern	Fill_Style	Pattern,Solid

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Tight Dots"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Thick Stripes Down"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Thick Stripes Up"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Vertical Lines"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Horizontal Lines"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Horizontal Grid"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Hatch 1"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Diagonal 1"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Diagonal 2"

Fill_Style	Pattern,Vertical

Fill_Style	Pattern,Horizontal

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Loose Dots"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Medium Dots"

Fill_Style	Pattern,Pepita

Fill_Style	Pattern,Scales

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Diagonal Grid"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Hatch 2"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Fuzzy Stripes Down"

Fill_Style	Pattern,Weave

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Zig Zag"

Fill_Style	Pattern,"Staggered Dashes"

Fill_Style	Pattern,Lattice

Fill_Style	Pattern,Bricks

Wash	Fill_Style	Wash,"Left to right"

Fill_Style	Wash,"Right to left"

Fill_Style	Wash,"Center to left and right"

Fill_Style	Wash,"Top to bottom"

Fill_Style	Wash,"Bottom to top"

Fill_Style	Wash,"Center to top and bottom"

Bitmap	Fill_Style	Bitmap,"Crop to fit" | "Shrink to fit" | "Tile to fit" |

"3-D perspective",BitmapName

Note: 3-D perspective bitmap fill style is available

only for 3-D graph walls

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


The Text Style Property (Property Reference)
The Text Style Property

The Text Style property is common to many graph objects. It determines whether graph text is solid, a washed tone, or a bitmap. If the style is Solid or Wash, leave the BitmapName field empty. Shadow indicates whether text should have a drop shadow (Yes) or no shadow (No).

Property	Argument	Syntax

Text Style	Text_Style	Solid|Wash|Bitmap, WashType,

BitmapName,Shadow

Solid	Text_Style	Solid,None,,Shadow

Wash	Text_Style	Wash,"Left to right",,Shadow

Text_Style	Wash,"Right to left",,Shadow

Text_Style	Wash,"Center to left and right",,Shadow

Text_Style	Wash,"Top to bottom",, Shadow

Text_Style	Wash,"Bottom to top",,Shadow

Text_Style	Wash,"Center to top and bottom",,Shadow

Bitmap	Text_Style	Bitmap,"Crop to fit"|"Shrink to

fit",BitmapName,Shadow

3-D	Text_Style	3-D, Above Left | Above Center | Above Right |

Level Left | Level Center | Level Right | Bottom

Left | Bottom Center | Bottom

Right,,,PerspectiveAmount(0-100),

Shaded?(Yes | No)

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Active Object Properties

There are some situations where you want to view the property settings of an active object without using its exact name. You can use the names in the following table to identify these objects.

Active Object	Description

Active_Block	The selected block.

Active_Notebook	The active notebook window.

Active_Page	The active notebook page.

For example, this formula returns the setting of the Macro Library property in the active notebook window:

@PROPERTY("Active_Notebook.Macro_Library")

You can also use {SETPROPERTY} and {GETPROPERTY} to manipulate to properties of selected objects (blocks, controls, graph objects, floating objects, and so on).

This table lists the properties of active objects.

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Active Block	see Block in topic Notebook Object Properties for a list of block properties
Active Notebook	see Notebook in topic Notebook Object Properties for a list of notebook properties
Active Page

Display	Display	DisplayZeros?(Yes | No),

RowBorders?(Yes | No),

ColBorders?(Yes | No),

HorzGridLines?(Yes | No),

VertGridLines?(Yes | No)

Display Zeros	Display.Display_Zeros	Yes | No

Border Options	Display.Borders	RowBorders?(Yes | No),

ColBorders?(Yes | No)

Row Borders	Display.Borders.Row_Borders	Yes | No

Column Borders	Display.Borders.Column_Borders	Yes | No

Grid Lines	Display.Grid_Lines	HorzGridLines?(Yes | No),

VertGridLines?(Yes | No)

Horizontal Grid Lines	Display.Grid_Lines.Horizontal	Yes | No

Vertical Grid Lines	Display.Grid_Lines.Vertical	Yes | No

Zoom Factor	Zoom_Factor	10-400

Name	Name	Name

Protection	Protection	CellLocking?(Yes | No),

ObjectLocking?(Yes | No)

Enable Cell Locking	Protection.Cells	Yes | No

Enable Object Locking	Protection.Objects	Yes | No

Conditional Color	Conditional_Color	Enable, SmallVal,

GreatVal, BelColor,

Normal, AboveCol,

ERRCol

Enable	Conditional_Color.Enable	Yes | No

Smallest Normal Value	Conditional_Color.Smallest_Normal_Value	SmallVal

Greatest Normal Value	Conditional_Color.Greatest_Normal_Value	GreatVal

Below Normal Color	Conditional_Color.Below_Normal_Color	0-15

Normal Color	Conditional_Color.Normal_Color	0-15

Above Normal Color	Conditional_Color.Above_Normal_Color	0-15

ERR Color	Conditional_Color.ERR_Color	0-15

Default Width	Default_Width	WidthInTwips

Tab Color	Tab_Color	see Color

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Menu Command Properties

Each command on the menu bar has properties you can manipulate (see Changing Command Properties for details). To identify a menu command, enter its path separated by forward slashes (/). Do not include ellipses (...). For example, this formula returns whether Edit|Paste Special is grayed on the menu:

@PROPERTY("/Edit/Paste Special.Grayed")

This table lists some special ways to identify menu commands.

ID Syntax	Description

/<-	The first item on the menu bar. You can include this name at the end of a menu path (for example, /File/<- identifies the first item on the File menu).

/->	The last item on the menu bar. You can include this name at the end of a menu path (for example, /Tools/Macro/-> identifies the last item on the Tools|Macro menu).

/n	The nth item on the menu bar. You can include this name at the end of a menu path (for example, /Help/2 identifies the second item on the Help menu).

This table lists the properties of menu commands.

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Menu Command

   Title *	Title	Title

   Checked *	Checked	Yes | No

   HotKey *	HotKey	HotKey

   Help Line *	Help_Line	HelpLine

   Depend On *	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin,

GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

   Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

   Grayed *	Grayed	Yes | No

   Disabled *	Disabled	Yes | No

   Hidden *	Hidden	Yes | No

   Show *	Show	Yes | No

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Dialog Control Properties

To identify a dialog box (not the objects in it), use its name followed by a colon. For example, @PROPERTY("Dialog1:.Title") returns the Title property of the dialog box Dialog1. To see the property settings of a dialog box outside of the active notebook, enter the notebook name in brackets before the dialog box name:

[NOTEBK1.WB1]Dialog1

You can use this syntax to identify objects in a dialog box:

[Notebook]DialogName:ObjectName.Property

Notebook is the name of the notebook containing the dialog box; it is optional. DialogName is the name of the dialog box containing the object (omit DialogName: if the dialog window containing the object is active). ObjectName is either the object ID number of the object (found in its Object ID property) or the name of the object (found in its Name property). Property is one of the strings listed in the Argument column of the dialog control property tables. For example, this formula returns the Dimension property of the object named Button1 in the dialog box Dialog1:

@PROPERTY("Dialog1:Button1.Dimension")

You can use a similar syntax to identify Toolbars, but the name of the Toolbar must be in brackets ([]). For example, this macro disables the Toolbar QUIKSAVE.BAR:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "[QUIKSAVE.BAR].Disabled","Yes"}

You can use this syntax to identify objects in a Toolbar:

[ToolbarName]ObjectName.Property

ToolbarName is the name of the Toolbar containing the object (omit [ToolbarName] if the Toolbar containing the object is active). ObjectName is either the object ID number of the object (found in its Object ID property) or the name of the object (found in its Name property). Property is one of the strings listed in the Argument column of the dialog property control tables. For example, this formula returns the Dimension property of the object named Button1 in the Toolbar QUIKSAVE.BAR:

@PROPERTY("[QUIKSAVE.BAR]Button1.Dimension")

To view properties, arguments, and syntax for the following dialog and Toolbar controls, choose from the list:

Bitmap Button

Button

Check Box

Color Control

Combo Box

Edit Field

Edit Integer

File Control

Group Box

Horizontal Scroller (HScrollBar)

Label

List Box

Pick List

Radio Button

Rectangle

Spin Control

Time Control (TimeCtrl)

Vertical Scroller (ScrollBar)

For a table of arguments and syntax for the entire dialog box and Toolbar as objects, see Dialog Box and Toolbar Properties.

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Dialog Box and Toolbar Properties

This table shows arguments and syntax for the entire dialog box and Toolbar as objects:

Object	Argument	Syntax

Dialog Box (Dialog) and Toolbar

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Title	Title	Title

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel,

RightRel, BottomRel,

CenterHor, CenterVer

Grid Options	Grid_Options	Gridsize, GridShown,

GridEnabled

Name	Name	Name

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The current settings of all

dialog/Toolbar controls that

have Process Value set to

Yes

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Bitmap Button Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Bitmap Button

Bitmap	Bitmap	BitmapName

Label Text	Label_Text	LabelText

Text Draw Flags	Text_Draw_Flags	Apply, HorCenter,

AlignRight(Yes)orLeft(No),

VertCenter, AlignBottom(Yes)orTop(No),

WordBreak, SingleLine

Default Button	Default_Button	Yes | No

Button Type	Button_Type	Push Button | Radio Button | Check Box | OK

Exit Button | Cancel Exit Button

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	Yes | No

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Button Properties (Dialog)
Button Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Button

Label Text	Label_Text	LabelText

Text Draw Flags	Text_Draw_Flags	Apply, HorCenter, AlignRight(Yes)orLeft(No),

VertCenter, AlignBottom(Yes)orTop(No),

WordBreak, SingleLine

Default Button 	Default_Button	Yes | No

Button Type	Button_Type	Push Button | Radio Button | Check Box | OK

Exit Button | Cancel Exit Button

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Tab Stop	Tap_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	Yes | No

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Check Box Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Check Box

Draw to Right	Draw_to_right	Yes | No

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Label Text	Label_Text	LabelText

Text Draw Flags	Text_Draw_Flags	Apply, HorCenter, AlignRight(Yes)orLeft(No),

VertCenter, AlignBottom(Yes)orTop(No),

WordBreak, SingleLine

Button Type	Button_Type	Push Button | Radio Button | Check Box | OK

Exit Button | Cancel Exit Button

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	Yes | No

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Color Control Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Color Control

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	Red,Green,Blue

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Combo Box Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Combo Box

List	List	List

Allow Point Mode	Allow_Point_Mode	Yes | No

Add Down Button	Add_Down_Button	Yes | No

History List	History_List	Yes | No

List Length	List_Length	Length

Terminate Dialog	Terminate_Dialog	Yes | No

Edit Disabled	Edit_Disabled	Yes | No

Edit Length	Edit_Length	Length

Ordered	Ordered	Yes | No

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The text of the selected item in the combo box

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Edit Field Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Edit Field

Field Type	Field_Type	Integer | String | Real | Range | Hidden

Edit Length	Edit_Length	Length

Allow Point Mode	Allow_Point_Mode	Yes | No

Show Frame	Show_Frame	Yes | No

Terminate Dialog	Terminate_Dialog	Yes | No

Convert Text	Convert_Text	Yes | No

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The text of the edit field

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Edit Integer Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Edit Integer

Minimum	Minimum	MinValue

Maximum	Maximum	MaxValue

Default	Default	DefaultValue

Field Type	Field_Type	Integer | String | Real | Range | Hidden

Edit Length	Edit_Length	Length

Show Frame	Show_Frame	Yes | No

Terminate Dialog	Terminate_Dialog	Yes | No

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The value of the edit field

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


File Control Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

File Control

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Attach Child	Attach_Child	Yes | No

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The full path and filename

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Group Box Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Group Box

Group Text	Group_Text	Text

Selected	Selected	Number

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Attach Child	Attach_Child	Yes | No

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The type of control selected

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Horizontal Scroller Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Horizontal Scroller (HScrollBar)

Parameters	Parameters	Min, Max, Line, Page, Time

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The numeric value for the position

of the scroll thumb

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Label Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Label

Label Text	Label_Text	LabelText

Label Font	Label_Font	see Dimension

Text Draw Flags	Text_Draw_Flags	Apply, HorCenter, AlignRight(Yes) or Left(No),

VertCenter, AlignBottom(Yes)or Top(No),

WordBreak, SingleLine

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Name	Name	Name

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	LabelText

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


List Box Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

List Box

List	List	List

Ordered	Ordered	Yes | No

Number of Columns	Number_of_Columns	Number

Selection Text	Selection_Text	SelectionText

Selected	Selected	NumberSelected

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Attach Child	Attach_Child	Yes | No

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The selected item in the list box

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Pick List Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Pick List

Title	Title	Title

Selected	Selected	Number

Resize	Resize	Yes | No

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Attach Child	Attach_Child	Yes | No

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The selected item in the pick list

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Radio Button Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Radio Button

Draw to Right	Draw_to_right	Yes | No

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Label Text	Label_Text	LabelText

Text Draw Flags	Text_Draw_Flags	Apply, HorCenter, AlignRight(Yes)orLeft(No),

VertCenter, AlignBottom(Yes)orTop(No),

WordBreak, SingleLine

Button Type	Button_Type	Push Button | Radio Button | Check Box | OK

Exit Button | Cancel Exit Button

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	Yes | No

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Rectangle Properties (Dialog)
Rectangle Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Rectangle

Rectangle Style	Rectangle_Style	Plain | Framed | Beveled Out |

Beveled In | Transparent

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Frame Color	Frame_Color	see Color

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Attach Child	Attach_Child	Yes | No

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Spin Control Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Spin Control

Edit Length	Edit_Length	Length

Show Frame	Show_Frame	Yes | No

Minimum	Minimum	MinValue

Maximum	Maximum	MaxValue

Default	Default	DefaultValue

Terminate Dialog	Terminate_Dialog	Yes | No

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Attach Child	Attach_Child	Yes | No

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The current value of the spin control

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Timer Control Properties
Time Control Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Time Control (TimeCtrl)

Show Time	Show_Time	Yes | No

Interval in Units	Interval_In_Units	Number

Units in Milliseconds	Units_in_Milliseconds	Number

Current Time (R)	Current_Time	Hour, Minute, Second

Hour	Current_Time.Hour	Hour

Minute	Current_Time.Minute	Minute

Second	Current_Time.Second	Second

Timer On	Timer_On	Yes | No

Alarm Time	Alarm_Time	Hour, Minute, Second

Hour	Alarm_Time.Hour	Hour

Minute	Alarm_Time.Minute	Minute

Second	Alarm_Time.Second	Second

Alarm On	Alarm_On	Yes | No

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Attach Child	Attach_Child	Yes | No

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Show *	Show	Yes | No

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Vertical Scroller Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Vertical Scroller (ScrollBar)

Parameters	Parameters	Min, Max, Line, Page, Time

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Hidden	Hidden	Yes | No

Object ID (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel,

BottomRel, CenterHor, CenterVer

Name	Name	Name

Help Line	Help_Line	HelpLine

Grayed	Grayed	Yes | No

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Depend On	Depend_On	Desktop, NoteWin, GraphWin, DiaWin,

EditWin, ObjectsPage

Process Value	Process_Value	Yes | No

Tab Stop	Tab_Stop	Yes | No

Object Help	Object_Help	Title, Text, Context

Enabled *	Enabled	Yes | No

Show *	Show	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The numeric value for the position

of the scroll thumb

See Also

Dialog Control Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Drawn Graph Object Properties

Drawn objects in a graph are created by the Graph Toolbar; see Fixed Graph Object Properties for a list of fixed graph objects like the x-axis. To identify a drawn object in a graph, use this syntax:

[Notebook]GraphName:ObjectName.Property

Some properties of a drawn object only appear in an Object Inspector menu when Quattro Pro is loaded with the /D command line switch.

[Notebook] is the name of the notebook containing the graph; it is optional. GraphName is the name of the graph containing the object (omit GraphName: if the graph window containing the object is active). ObjectName is either the object ID number of the object (found in the Object ID property) or the name of the object (found in the Name property). Property is one of the strings listed in the Argument column of the next table. For example, this formula returns the Line Style property of the object named ProfitCallout in the graph YTD1:

@PROPERTY("YTD1:ProfitCallout.Line_Style")

To view properties, arguments, and syntax for the following graph annotation objects, choose from the list:

Arrow

Block

Ellipse

Freehand Polygon

Freehand Polyline

Line

Polygon

Polyline

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

Text Box

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Arrow Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Arrow

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 |

S1W1 | S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Block Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Block

Block	Block	Block

Display	Display	RowBorders?(Yes | No), ColBorders?(Yes | No),

HorzGridLines?(Yes | No), VertGridLines?(Yes |

No), AspectRatio?(Yes | No)

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Ellipse Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Ellipse

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 |

S1W1 | S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Freehand Polygon Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Freehand Polygon

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Line Color	Line_Color	see Color

Line Style	Line_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Freehand Polyline Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Freehand Polyline

Line Color	Line_Color	see Color

Line Style	Line_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Line Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Line

Line Color	Line_Color	see Color

Line Style	Line_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Polygon Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Polygon

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Polyline Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Polyline

Line Color	Line_Color	see Color

Line Style	Line_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Rectangle Properties (Graph)
Rectangle Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Rectangle

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Rounded Rectangle Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Rounded Rectangle

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Text Box Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Text Box

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Graph Button	Graph_Button	GotoSlide?, SlideName, Effect, Duration, Slow

| Med | Fast, Overlay?, RunMacro?,

MacroText

Alignment	Alignment	Left | Right | Center, WordWrap, TabStops

Box Type	Box_Type	No box | Single outline | Rounded corners |

Double outline | Thick outline 1 | Thick

rounded corners | Three dimensional | Thick

outline 2 | Bevel out | Shadowed | Thick

outline 3 | Bevel in

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Name *	Name	Name

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

Object ID * (R)	Object_ID	ObjectID

Value *	Value	Contents of the textbox

See Also

Graph Annotation Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Fixed Graph Object Properties

To set a property of the graph (not the objects in it), use its name followed by a period. For example, this formula returns the Aspect Ratio property of the graph Graph1:

@PROPERTY("Graph1.Aspect_Ratio")

To identify a fixed object in a graph (as opposed to an object created with the Graph Toolbar) use this syntax:

[Notebook]GraphName:ObjectName.Property

Notebook is the name of the notebook containing the graph; it is optional. GraphName is the name of the graph containing the object (omit GraphName if the graph window containing the object is active). For a list of ObjectName options, see Fixed Graph Object Names.

Property is one of the strings listed in the Argument column of the next table. For example, this formula returns the color of the third series of the graph PROFIT.

@PROPERTY("PROFIT:G$Series[3,1].Fill_Color")

To view properties, arguments, and syntax for the following fixed graph objects, choose from the list:

Area Fill

Area Series

Axis Title

Bar Series

Bullet Series

Column Graph

Float Series

Graph Pane

Graph Setup and Background

Graph Subtitle

Graph Title Box

Graph Window

Legend

Line Series

Pie Graph

Series Label

X-Axis

Y-Axis

See Graph Window Properties and Graph Setup and Background Properties for graph properties. For a list of drawn graph objects (such as arrows), see Graph Annotation Object Properties.

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Fixed Graph Object Names

To identify a fixed object in a graph (as opposed to an object created with the Graph Toolbar; see the previous section for a list of drawn graph objects) use this syntax:

[Notebook]GraphName:ObjectName.Property

The following table lists ObjectName settings. See Fixed Graph Object Properties for information on related arguments.

Object|Property	Description

G$Base	Base of a 3-D graph

G$BulletSeries[n]	nth level of bulleted text in a bullet chart; the first level is 1, the second is 2

G$Graph	Background of the graph window

G$LeftWall	Left wall of a 3-D graph grid

G$Legend	Graph legend

G$Series[x,y]	yth data point of the xth series in the graph

G$SeriesLabel	Series labels

G$Title	Title, subtitle, and title box of the graph

G$X1Axis	x-axis

G$X1Title	x-axis title

G$Y1Axis	Primary y-axis

G$Y1Title	Primary y-axis title

G$Y2Axis	Secondary y-axis

G$Y2Title	Secondary y-axis title

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Area Fill Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Area Fill

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Area Series Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Area Series

Series Options	Series_Options	DataBlock, LabelBlock, Legend

Analyze	Analyze	None | Aggregration | Moving Average | Linear

Fit | Exponential Fit,...

Note: If Aggregration, other arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Days |

Weeks | Months | Quarters | Years, Weeks |

Months | Quarters | Years, SUM | AVG | STD |

STDS | MIN | MAX | VAR | VARS

Note: If Moving Average, other arguments

are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Period,

None | Standard

Note: If Linear Fit or Exponential Fit, other

arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1)

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Axis Title Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Axis Title

Title	Title	Title

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Bar Series Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Bar Series

Series Options	Series_Options	DataBlock, LabelBlock, Legend, Bar | Line |

Area | Default, Primary | Secondary

Analyze	Analyze	None | Aggregration | Moving Average | Linear

Fit | Exponential Fit,...

Note: If Aggregration, other arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Days |

Weeks | Months | Quarters | Years, Weeks |

Months | Quarters | Years, SUM | AVG | STD |

STDS | MIN | MAX | VAR | VARS

Note: If Moving Average, other arguments

are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Period,

None|Standard

Note: If Linear Fit or Exponential Fit, other

arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1)

Bar Options	Bar_Options	Width%, Margin%, No | Partial | Full

Riser Style	Riser_Style	Style(1 | 2 | 3 | 4), NumberOfFaces

(0 | 4 | 6 | 8)

Note: Riser Style is available only for 3-D bar

graphs

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Bullet Series Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Bullet Series

Bullet Style	Bullet_Style	BulletStyle, PointSize(0-32)

Bullet Indentation	Bullet_Indentation	IndentBefore(0-500), IndentAfter(0-500),

HangingIndent?(0|1)

Bullet Color	Bullet_Color	see Color

Line Spacing	Line_Spacing	SpaceBefore(0-500), SpaceAfter(0-500)

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Column Graph Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Column Graph

Label Options	Label_Options	LabelSeries, Currency | Value | Percent |

None, ShowTick

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Float Series Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Float Series

Series Options	Series_Options	DataBlock, LabelBlock, Legend, Bar | Line |

Area | Default, Primary | Secondary

Analyze	Analyze	None | Aggregration | Moving Average | Linear

Fit | Exponential Fit,...

Note: If Aggregration, other arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Days |

Weeks | Months | Quarters | Years, Weeks |

Months | Quarters | Years, SUM | AVG | STD |

STDS | MIN | MAX | VAR | VARS

Note: If Moving Average, other arguments

are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Period,

None|Standard

Note: If Linear Fit or Exponential Fit, other

arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1)

Float Style	Float_Style	Style(0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4), NumberOfFaces

(0 | 4 | 6 | 8), Size(8-32)

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Graph Pane Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Graph Pane

Border Options	Border_Options	Left, Top, Right, Bottom, Grids on Top

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Graph Setup and Background Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Graph Setup and Background

Graph Type

2-D	Graph_Type	Bar | Variance | Stacked Bar | HiLo | Line | XY

| Area | Column | Pie | 100 Stacked Bar |

Stacked Line | 100 Stacked Line | Doughnut |

Polar Radar

3-D	Graph_Type	3D Bar | 3D Stacked Bar | 2DHalf Bar | 3D

Step | 3D Unstacked Area | 3D Ribbon | 3D

Area | 3D Column | 3D Pie | 3D Contour | 3D

Surface | 3D ShadedSurface | 3d100 Stacked

Bar | 3D Doughnut | 3D Marker

Rotate	Graph_Type	R3D bar | R2DHalf Bar | R2D Bar | Rotated

Area | Rotated Line | R2D Stacked Bar |

R2D100 Stacked Bar | R2D Stacked Line |

R2D100 Stacked Line | R3D Stacked Bar |

R3D100 Stacked Bar

Combo	Graph_Type	Area_bar | Hilo_bar | Line_bar | Multiple 3D

columns | Multiple 3D Pies | Multiple Bar |

Multiple Columns | Multiple Pies

Bullet	Graph_Type	Bullet

Blank	Graph_Type	Blank

Legend Position	Legend_Position	None | Bottom | Right

3D View	3D_View	Rotation, Elevation, Perspective, Depth,

Height

3D Options	3D_Options	ShowLeft, ShowBack, ShowBase, ThickWalls

Box Type	Box_Type	No box | Single outline | Rounded corners |

Double outline | Thick outline 1 | Thick

rounded corners | Three dimensional | Thick

outline 2 | Bevel out | Shadowed | Thick

outline 3 | Bevel in

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Graph Button	Graph_Button	GotoSlide?, SlideName, Effect, Duration,

Slow | Med | Fast, Overlay?, RunMacro?,

MacroText

Name *	Name	Name

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Graph Subtitle Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Graph Subtitle

Subtitle Color	Subtitle_Color	see Color

Subtitle Bkg Color	Subtitle_Bkg_Color	see Color

Subtitle Font	Subtitle_Font	see Font

Subtitle Style	Subtitle_Style	None|Solid|Wash|Bitmap, Type, Shadow

Solid	Subtitle_Style	Solid,,Shadow

Wash	Subtitle_Style	Wash,"Left to right", Shadow

Subtitle_Style	Wash,"Right to left", Shadow

Subtitle_Style	Wash,"Center to left and right", Shadow

Subtitle_Style	Wash,"Top to bottom", Shadow

Subtitle_Style	Wash,"Bottom to top", Shadow

Subtitle_Style	Wash,"Center to top and bottom", Shadow

Bitmap	Subtitle_Style	Bitmap,"Crop to fit" | "Shrink to fit" |

"Tile to fit", BitmapName, Shadow

3-D	Subtitle_Style	3-D, Above Left | Above Center | Above Right

| Level Left | Level Center | Level Right |

Bottom Left | Bottom Center | Bottom Right,,,

PerspectiveAmount(0-100), Shaded?(Yes|No)

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Graph Title Box Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Graph Title Box

Alignment	Alignment	Left | Center | Right

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Box Type	Box_Type	No box | Single outline | Rounded corners |

Double outline | Thick outline 1 | Thick rounded

corners | Three dimensional | Thick outline 2 |

Bevel out | Shadowed | Thick outline 3 | Bevel in

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Name *	Name

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Graph Window Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Graph Window

Aspect Ratio	Aspect_Ratio	Floating Graph | Screen Slide | 35mm Slide |

Printer Preview | Full Extent

Grid	Grid	GridSize, DisplayGrid, SnapToGrid

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Legend Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Legend

Legend Position	Legend_Position	None | Bottom | Right

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Box Type	Box_Type	No box | Single outline | Rounded corners |

Double outline | Thick outline 1 | Thick

rounded corners | Three dimensional | Thick

outline 2 | Bevel out | Shadowed | Thick

outline 3 | Bevel in

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Dimension *	Dimension	see Dimension

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Line Series Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Line Series

Series Options	Series_Options	DataBlock, LabelBlock, Legend, Bar | Line |

Area | Default, Primary | Secondary

Analyze	Analyze	None | Aggregration | Moving Average | Linear

Fit | Exponential Fit,...

Note: If Aggregration, other arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Days |

Weeks | Months | Quarters | Years, Weeks |

Months | Quarters | Years, SUM | AVG | STD |

STDS | MIN | MAX | VAR | VARS

Note: If Moving Average, other arguments

are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1), Period,

None|Standard

Note: If Linear Fit or Exponential Fit, other

arguments are:

...<Table>, Show in Legend?(0 | 1)

Marker Style	Marker_Style	M00 | M01 | M02 | M03 | M04 | M05 | M06 |

M07 | M08 | M09 | M10 | M11 | M12 | M13 |

M14 | M15, MarkerWeight, AutoSize?(0 | 1)

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Line Color	Line_Color	see Color

Line Style	Line_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Pie Graph Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Pie Graph

Explode Slice	Explode_Slice	Distance, Explode

Label Options	Label_Options	Series, Currency | Value | Percent | None,

ShowTick

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Series Label Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Series Label

Label Alignment	Label_Alignment	Above | Top | Center | Below (for bar graphs);

Above | Center | Below | Left | Right (for area

and line graphs)

Format	Format	Format, Precision | Type

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


X-Axis Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

X-Axis

Scale	Scale	Normal | Log, Automatic, High, Low,

Increment, #Minors, ShowUnits

Note: This property only appears when

inspecting an XY graph

X-Axis Series	X-Axis_Series	SeriesBlock

Tick Options	Tick_Options	None | Below | Above | Across, DisplayLabels,

NumRows, NoOverlap, #OfLabelsToSkip,

Limit

Numeric Format	Numeric_Format	Format, Precision | Type

Note: This property only appears when

inspecting an XY graph

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Major Grid Style	Major_Grid_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1, Red, Green,

Blue

Minor Grid Style	Minor_Grid_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1, Red, Green,

Blue

Note: This property only appears when

inspecting an XY graph

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Y-Axis Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Y-Axis

Scale	 Scale	Normal | Log, Automatic, High, Low,

Increment, #Minors, ShowUnits

Note: An additional setting, ZeroLine, appears

if the graph type is Variance.

Tick Options	Tick_Options	None | Left | Right | Across, DisplayLabels,

LengthLimit, Limit

Numeric Format	Numeric_Format	Format, Precision | Type

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Major Grid Style	Major_Grid_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1, Red, Green,

Blue

Minor Grid Style	Minor_Grid_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1, Red, Green,

Blue

See Also

Fixed Graph Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Notebook Object Properties

You can use this syntax to identify notebooks (not the objects in them):

[Notebook].Property

Notebook is the name of the notebook. Property is the property setting to read or change.

You can use block coordinates or names to set or study block property settings. For example, this formula returns the numeric format of the block A1..A26 on page B of the active notebook:

@PROPERTY("B:A1..A26.Numeric_Format")

You can identify floating objects (graphs, macro buttons, and so on) in the active notebook by using the name of the object (found in its Object Name property). For example, if the active page contains a macro button with its Object Name property set to Button1, this formula returns that macro button's Box Type:

@PROPERTY("Button1.Box_Type")

You can also use PageName:ObjectName to identify floating objects. For example, if the object in the previous example was on page AB, this formula returns the macro button's Box Type:

@PROPERTY("AB:Button1.Box_Type")

To view properties, arguments, and syntax for the following notebook objects, choose from the list:

Arrow

Bitmap

Block

Button

Ellipse

Graph

Line

Notebook

OLE

Picture

Rectangle

Rounded Rectangle

Text Box

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Arrow Properties (Notebook)
Arrow Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Arrow

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Bitmap Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Bitmap

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Box Type	Box_Type	None | Thin | Medium | Thick,

DropShadow?(Yes | No),

Transparent?(Yes | No)

Box Type	Box_Type.Frame_Line_Style	None | Thin | Medium | Thick

Drop Shadow	Box_Type.Drop_Shadow	Yes | No

Transparent	Box_Type.Transparent	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Block Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Block

Numeric Format	Numeric_Format	Format, Precision | Type

Font	Font	see Font

Shading	Shading	Color1, Color2, Blend

Color Blend 1	Shading.Color_1	0-15

Color Blend 2	Shading.Color_2	0-15

Select Color Blend	Shading.Blend	Blend1 | Blend2 | Blend3 |

Blend4 | Blend5 | Blend6 |

Blend7

Alignment	Alignment	General | Left | Right | Center |

Center Across Block, Top |

Center | Bottom, WrapText?(Yes | No),

Horizontal | Vertical

Horizontal	Alignment.Horizontal	General | Left | Right | Center |

Center Across Block

Vertical	Alignment.Vertical	Top | Center | Bottom

Wrap Text	Alignment.WrapText	Yes | No

Orientation	Alignment.Orientation	Horizontal | Vertical

Line Drawing	Line_Drawing	Left, Top, Right, Bottom, Vert,

Horiz, LeftColor, TopColor,

RightColor, BottomColor,

VertColor, HorizColor

Note: The first six settings can

take NoChange | Clear | Thin |

Thick | Double; the last six

settings can take 0-15;

@PROPERTY and

{GETPROPERTY} always return

default Line Drawing property

settings.

Text Color	Text_Color	0-15

Row Height	Row_Height	Operation, Size

Set Height	Row_Height	Set Height, NewSize

Reset Height	Row_Height	Reset Height

Column Width	Column_Width	Operation, WidthInTwips,

ColSpacing

Set Width	Column_Width	Set Width, NewWidthInTwips

Reset Width	Column_Width	Reset Width

Auto Width	Column_Width	Auto Width,, ExtraSpace

Reveal/Hide	Reveal/Hide	Row | Column, Reveal | Hide

Constraints	Constraints	Protect | Unprotect, General |

Labels Only | Dates Only

Protection	Constraints.Protection	Protect|Unprotect

Data Entry Input	Constraints.Data_Entry_Input	General | Labels Only | Dates

Only

Style *	Style	The named style of the active

block

Selection * (R)	Selection	The coordinates of the selected

block

Value *	Value	The contents of the cell (as they

appear on the input line)

Number Value *	Number_Value	The value in the cell

String Value *	String_Value	The label in the cell

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Button Properties (Notebook)
Button Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Button

Macro	Macro	Macro

Label Text	Label_Text	LabelText

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Box Type	Box_Type	None | Thin | Medium | Thick,

DropShadow?(Yes | No)

Box Type	Box_Type.Frame_Line_Style	None | Thin | Medium | Thick

Drop Shadow	Box_Type.Drop_Shadow	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Ellipse Properties (Notebook)
Ellipse Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Ellipse

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Graph Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Graph

Source Graph	Source_Graph	GraphName

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Box Type	Box_Type	None | Thin | Medium | Thick,

DropShadow?(Yes | No),

Transparent?(Yes | No)

Box Type	Box_Type.Frame_Line_Style	None | Thin | Medium | Thick

Drop Shadow	Box_Type.Drop_Shadow	Yes | No

Transparent	Box_Type.Transparent	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Line Properties (Notebook)
Line Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Line

Line Color	Line_Color	see Color

Line Style	Line_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Notebook Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Notebook

Display	Display	VertScroll?(Yes | No),

HorzScroll?(Yes | No),

Tabs?(Yes | No), Objects

(Show All | Show Outline |

Hide)

Vertical Scroll Bar	Display.Show_VerticalScroller	Yes | No

Horizontal Scroll Bar	Display.Show_HorizontalScroller	Yes | No

Page Tabs	Display.Show_Tabs	Yes | No

Objects	Display.Objects	Show All | Show Outline |

Hide

Zoom Factor	Zoom_Factor	10-400

Recalc Settings	Recalc_Settings	Automatic | Manual |

Background, Natural |

Column-wise | Row-wise,

Iterations, <CompileFormulas?(0 | 1)>,

<AuditErrors?(0 | 1)>

Palette	Palette	Color1, Color2, ...,

Color16

Color 1	Palette.Color_1	see Color

Color 2	Palette.Color_2

Color 3	Palette.Color_3

Color 4	Palette.Color_4

Color 5	Palette.Color_5

Color 6	Palette.Color_6

Color 7	Palette.Color_7

Color 8	Palette.Color_8

Color 9	Palette.Color_9

Color 10	Palette.Color_10

Color 11	Palette.Color_11

Color 12	Palette.Color_12

Color 13	Palette.Color_13

Color 14	Palette.Color_14

Color 15	Palette.Color_15

Color 16	Palette.Color_16

Macro Library	Macro_Library	Yes | No

Password Level	Password_Level	None | Low | Medium |

High

System	System	Yes|No

Group Mode *	Group_Mode	On enables Group Mode;

Off disables group mode

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


OLE Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

OLE

OLE	OLE	AutoResize?(Yes | No),

AutoLinkUpdate?(Yes | No)

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Box Type	Box_Type	None | Thin | Medium | Thick,

DropShadow?(Yes | No),

Transparent?(Yes | No)

Box Type	Box_Type.Frame_Line_Style	None | Thin | Medium | Thick

Drop Shadow	Box_Type.Drop_Shadow	Yes | No

Transparent	Box_Type.Transparent	Yes | No

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Picture Properties (Notebook)
Picture Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Picture

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Box Type	Box_Type	None | Thin | Medium | Thick,

DropShadow?(Yes | No),

Transparent?(Yes | No)

Box Type	Box_Type.Frame_Line_Style	None | Thin | Medium | Thick

Drop Shadow	Box_Type.Drop_Shadow	Yes | No

Transparent	Box_Type.Transparent	Yes | No

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Rectangle Properties (Notebook)
Rectangle Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Rectangle

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Rounded Rectangle Properties (Notebook)
Rounded Rectangle Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Rounded Rectangle

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Border Style	Border_Style	S0W1 | S0W2 | S0W3 | S0W4 | S1W1 |

S2W1 | S3W1 | S4W1 | S5W1

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Text Box Properties (Notebook)
Text Box Properties

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Text Box

Text Color	Text_Color	see Color

Text Bkg Color	Text_Bkg_Color	see Color

Text Font	Text_Font	see Font

Text Style	Text_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Alignment	Alignment	Left | Right | Center, WordWrap, TabStops

Box Type	Box_Type	No box | Single outline | Rounded corners |

Double outline | Thick outline 1 | Thick

rounded corners | Three dimensional | Thick

outline 2 | Bevel out | Shadowed | Thick

outline 3 | Bevel in

Fill Color	Fill_Color	see Color

Bkg Color	Bkg_Color	see Color

Fill Style	Fill_Style	see Common Graph Object Properties

Border Color	Border_Color	see Color

Protection	Protection	Yes | No

Object Name	Object_Name	ObjectName

See Also

Notebook Object Properties

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Objects Page Icon Properties

When the Objects page is active you can change the properties of icons on the Objects page instead of the objects they represent. For example, the following macro sets the Show Pointer property of a slide show named Presentation2 to Yes:

{SELECTOBJECT "Presentation2"}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "Presentation2.Show_Pointer", "Yes"}

This table lists properties, arguments, and syntax for Objects page objects:

Object|Property	Argument	Syntax

Graph Icon	Name	Name

Slide show Icon

Name	Name	Name

Default Effect	Default_Effect	Effect, DisplayTime, Slow | Med | Fast,

Overlay?(Yes | No), UseMasterSlide?(Yes | No),

SkipSlide?(Yes | No)

Master Slide	Master_Slide	SlideName

Show Pointer	Show_Pointer	Yes | No

Dialog Icon

Dimension	Dimension	see Dimension

Title	Title	Title

Position Adjust	Position_Adjust	Depend, LeftRel, TopRel, RightRel, BottomRel,

CenterHor, CenterVer

Grid Options	Grid_Options	Gridsize, GridShown, GridEnabled

Name	Name	Name

Disabled	Disabled	Yes | No

Value *	Value	The current settings of all dialog controls that

have Process Value set to Yes

See Also

Property Reference Overview

Property Reference


Printing a Group of @Function Topics

To print a group of @function topics, click one of the following groups:

@Functions Index - A through M

@Functions Index - N through Z

Database @Functions

Date and Time @Functions

Engineering @Functions

Financial @Functions

Logical @Functions

Mathematical @Functions

Miscellaneous @Functions

Statistical @Functions

String @Functions


Printing a Group of Macro Command Topics

To print a group of macro command topics, click one of the following groups:

Macro Commands Index - A through M

Macro Commands Index - N through Z

Keyboard

Screen

Interactive

Program Flow

Cell

File

Command Equivalents

OLE and DDE

UI Building

Object

Analysis Tools

Miscellaneous


Insert Dialog Box

The Insert dialog box lets you insert entire or partial rows, columns, or pages. Wherever you insert, existing data is pushed down, to the right, or to the back of the notebook to make room. The following options are available:

Block

The size of the block to be inserted; the upper left cell is the first cell entry to be shifted right, down, or back

Columns

To insert entire or partial columns, moving existing data in the active block to cells to the right

Rows

To insert entire or partial rows, moving existing data in the active block to cells below

Pages

To insert entire or partial pages, moving existing data in the active block to subsequent pages in the notebook

Entire

To insert whole rows, columns, or pages

Partial

To insert only partial rows, columns, or pages (a block)

See Also

Inserting a File into a Notebook

Inserting Blocks

Inserting Pages

Inserting Rows or Columns


Delete Dialog Box

The Delete dialog box lets you delete entire or partial rows, columns, or pages. Wherever you delete, remaining rows, columns, or pages move to take up the deleted space. The following options are available:

Block

The block to be deleted

Columns

To delete entire or partial columns, moving remaining data from cells to the right into the active block

Rows

To delete entire or partial rows, moving remaining data from cells below into the active block

Pages

To delete entire or partial pages, moving remaining data from subsequent pages in the notebook into the active block

Entire

To delete whole rows, columns, or pages

Partial

To delete only partial rows, columns, or pages (a block)

Caution: If you delete space that is within the boundaries of a named block or a block referenced by a formula, Quattro Pro adjusts all references to the block. However, if one of the deleted cells is a coordinate cell that defines a block, the block becomes invalid and any formulas or names referencing the block show ERR. Any formulas that reference a cell within a deleted column, row, or page also appear as ERR.

See Also

Deleting Blocks

Deleting Pages

Deleting Rows or Columns

Using Named Blocks


SpeedFormat Dialog Box

The SpeedFormat dialog box contains a list of formats you can choose to apply to the active block. Each format consists of a predefined set of properties for different parts of a block.

Dialog Box Options

Formats

Lists predefined and custom formats.

Include

Each format applies settings for Numeric Format, Font, Shading, Text Color, Alignment, Line Drawing and Column Width (Auto-Width option) properties. To prevent SpeedFormat from applying a particular property throughout the block, uncheck that property.

In addition, each format applies properties to these parts of the active block: the Column headings, Column totals, Row headings, Row totals, and Subtotals. To prevent SpeedFormat from applying any properties to a particular part of the block, uncheck that block part.

Example

Shows the effect the current dialog box selections will have on the active block.

Add

Displays the Add Format dialog box so you can add a custom format.

Delete

Displays a prompt to delete the active SpeedFormat. Choose Yes to delete the format, choose No to keep it.

See Also

Using SpeedFormat

Creating Custom Formats


Hotlinks Dialog Box

When you open a file that contains notebook or DDE links, Quattro Pro checks whether all supporting notebooks and/or DDE server applications are open. If not, a dialog box with these options appears:

Open Supporting

Opens all supporting notebooks. If those notebooks contain links to closed notebooks, those notebooks open, too, until all supporting notebooks are open.

Update References

Accesses linked values in closed supporting notebooks without opening them. This takes up less memory than opening the notebooks. If you later decide to open the supporting notebooks, choose Notebook|Update Links|Open Links.

None

Temporarily replaces links to closed supporting notebooks and server applications with the value NA (not available). This lets you examine or edit notebooks when you do not need the linked values. If you later want to replace the NA placeholders with the actual link values from supporting notebooks, use Notebook|Update Links|Refresh Links or Open LInks to update values, or open the notebooks, respectively. You can use these commands at any time for notebook links.

Note:	If you have DDE links in the notebook, selecting either Open Supporting or Update References causes the server application to open and run minimized; if you select None and later want to access DDE links, save the notebook, reopen it, and enable the DDE links when this dialog box appears.

See Also

Creating Links

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Maintaining Links


Edit Palettes Dialog Box

The Edit Palettes dialog box lets you create or change the color palettes available from the Palette List in the Graph Toolbar. The new palette definition is based on the colors in the active palette.

Begin by modifying the color squares in the Graph Toolbar to display the set of colors you want to include in a new or changed palette definition. See Creating Custom Color Palettes for details.

In the edit field at the top of the dialog box, type a new name for a palette, or choose an existing name to modify from the list below.

The Edit Palettes dialog box contains these options:

New

Creates a new palette with the new name.

Replace

Permanently redefines the palette that appears in the edit field.

Delete

Permanently deletes the selected palette.

Caution: Once you replace or delete a palette, you can recover it only by redefining the colors individually. See Creating Custom Colors for details.


Create Slide Show Button

The Create Slide Show dialog box lets you enter a name for a new slide show. If any graph icons are already selected, they are automatically included in the new slide show. After you choose OK, a slide show icon appears on the Objects page so you can edit or run the slide show.

See Also

Creating a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Running a Slide Show

Slide Show Shortcuts


Light Table Window

The Light Table window shows all the graphs in the slide show in miniature form, in the order in which they will appear. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

To move a slide to a new position, drag the miniature of the graph to a new location on the Light Table. When you are rearranging slides in this way, the pointer changes to a hand. When you release the mouse button, the graph moves to the new position. The light table scrolls to reveal more slides if you drag the pointer to the top or bottom edge.

To rearrange slides using the Clipboard, use the Edit|Cut, Copy, and Paste commands.

To delete a graph from the Light Table, select it and press Del or click the Cut button on the Slides Toolbar.

The Light Table is a resizable window that can be tiled or cascaded with other Quattro Pro windows. You can open multiple slide shows at once, and copy slides from one Light Table window to another.

To close the Light Table window, double-click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the window, or press Ctrl+F4.

See Also

Adding Slides to a Slide Show

Creating a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Running a Slide Show

Slide Show Shortcuts


Select Slide Show Dialog Box

The Select Slide Show dialog box lets you choose a slide show to run (if you chose Graphics|Run Slide Show or if you clicked the Run Slide Show button) or edit (if you clicked the Edit Slide Show button).

Choose a slide show name from the list and choose OK. Then the slide show runs, or the Light Table window appears so you can edit the slide show.

See Also

Creating a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Running a Slide Show

Slide Show Shortcuts


File Already Exists Dialog Box

You are about to replace a file on disk with the file currently displayed. Your options are:

Replace

Overwite the file on disk with the file you are working on.

Cancel

Abandon the attempt to save the file you have been working on.


File Not Found Dialog Box

Quattro Pro was unable to find the file you specified in the notebook link. Use this dialog box to locate the file you want to link to. See File-Handling Options for an explanation of the dialog box's controls.


Read/Write Formatted File Dialog Box

You are attempting to load or save a file that is currently in Impress or Allways format. Your options are as follows:

Impress

Loads or saves the file in Impress format, and maintains the file's page layout settings.

Allways

Loads or saves the file in Allways format, and maintains the file's page layout settings.

None

Loads or saves the file in standard .WK1 format, and abandons any page layout specified in the Impress or Allways file.

See Also

Translating Allways Files

Translating Impress Files


Mode and Status Indicators

The following mode and status indicators appear on the status line to provide information about the current state of Quattro Pro:

Indicator	Description

BKGD	Quattro Pro is calculating in the background.

CALC	One or more formulas need to be recalculated. Press F9 to recalculate the notebook.

CAP	The Caps Lock key is on.

CIRC	A formula contains a circular reference (it refers to itself or to another formula that refers back to it).

COPY	You are using the Drag and Drop feature to copy a block (press Ctrl while dragging the block with the mouse).

DATE	You are entering a date value using Ctrl+Shift+D.

DEBUG	Quattro Pro is in Debug mode. If you execute a macro in Debug mode, the Macro Debugger dialog box appears and lets you debug your macro one step at a time.

EDIT	The notebook is in Edit mode, which lets you change the contents of the current cell. (To enter Edit mode, press F2.)

END	The End key is on. Any arrow keys you press will move to the end of an area in the notebook instead of scrolling.

EXT	You are extending a block selection with Shift+F7. When you are finished, choose a command that operates on a block.

FIND	Quattro Pro is searching for entries that match the conditions you specified with the Query command.

FRMT	You are editing a format line during a Parse operation.

INPUT	Input is confined to selected cells with Block|Restrict Input or its command equivalent. Press Esc or press Enter with no data in the input line to return to Ready mode.

LABEL	The entry you are making is text (a label).

MACRO	Quattro Pro is executing a macro.

MOVE	You are using the Drag and Drop feature to move a block.

NAMES	You have pressed F3 to display a pick list of block names.

NUM	The Num Lock key is on.

OVR	You pressed the Ins key, and anything you type will overwrite existing data. (To return to Insert mode, press Ins again.)

POINT	The notebook is in Point mode, letting you specify a cell or block with the cell selector or view a choice list of block names with F3.

PREVIEW	You are previewing your printed notebook.

READY	Quattro Pro is ready for the next entry or command.

REC	Macro recording is in progress.

SCR	The Scroll Lock key is on.

VALUE	The entry you are making is a number or formula.

WAIT	An action is in progress. You must wait before proceeding.


Speech-Recognition System

DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite is a speech-recognition product that lets you run commands by speaking into a microphone. For example, instead of using your mouse or keyboard, you can use speech to start an application, open a document, move within a document, work with menus and dialog boxes, or save and print a document.

If you purchased the WordPerfect Suite suite on CD-ROM, you already have the software necessary to use the DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite speech-recognition system and the electronic version of the DragonDictate Users Guide in Envoy format. You can order the additional items listed below.

DragonDictate Microphone

Required for using the DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite speech recognition system.

Speech Commands Quick Reference Booklet

A collection of speech commands that are task-oriented and specific to the suite product you are working in. For example, the booklet lists, among other things, speech commands for editing cells in a Quattro Pro spreadsheet, navigating in a WordPerfect document, or editing slides in Presentations.

The same collection of Quattro Pro speech commands found in the Quick Reference booklet, are also available online by choosing one of the command categories listed below.

Getting Started Guide

A guide for the user new to speech recognition.

DragonDictate Starter Edition

DragonDictate Starter Edition is a dictation system that allows you to insert or "type" words into the application, using your voice.

For ordering information, please refer to the coupon included with your software package.

Command Categories

For a list of speech commands you can use in Quattro Pro, choose one of the following categories:

Cell and Text Editing Commands

Navigation Commands

Notebook and Window Management Commands

Text and Notebook Attributes Commands


Navigation Commands

To perform basic navigation tasks using DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite,

1.	Find the speech command you want from the table below.

2.	Read into the microphone the appropriate commands, from left to right without pausing.

A command that is surrounded by square braces denotes an optional word or number. For example, the word "[Previous]" in certain speech commands is optional; you can choose to say the word "previous" as part of the command or not. Some commands will require you to say a number (usually one through five) as in, "Up three lines."

3.	If you change your mind after saying a speech command, in most cases you can reverse the action by simply saying, "Undo."

For additional information on using DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite, refer to the DragonDictate User's Guide in Envoy format.

Begin by saying...		Then say...		Followed by...
Beginning of/Top of End of/Bottom of [Previous]		Column Row Page Table* *Table is local set of cells
Up Down Left Right		[1-5]		Cell(s) Column(s) Row(s) Table(s)
Previous Next		Cell Column Row Page
Zoom to		25/50/75/80/90/100/125/150/200 percent
Page		Up Down
Cursor/Scroll		Left Right Up Down		Stop
Find		Next Previous
Find [dialog]
See Also

Cell and Text Editing Commands

Notebook and Window Management Commands

Speech Recognition System

Text and Notebook Attributes Commands


Cell and Text Editing Commands

To perform basic cell and text editing tasks using DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite,

1.	Find the speech command you want from the table below.

2.	Read into the microphone the appropriate commands, from left to right without pausing.

A command that is surrounded by square braces denotes an optional word or number. For example, the word "[Previous]" in certain speech commands is optional; you can choose to say the word "previous" as part of the command or not. Some commands will require you to say a number (usually one through five) as in, "Up three lines."

3.	If you change your mind after saying a speech command, in most cases you can reverse the action by simply saying, "Undo."

For additional information on using Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite, refer to the DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite User's Guide in Envoy format.

Begin by saying...		Then say...		Followed by...
Bold Center [Align] Copy Cut Delete Fill Form Invert* Italicize Left align Multiply* Name Query Regress Reformat Right align Sort Sum Transpose Underline *Table and Selection only		Cell Column Row Selection Table
Select		[1-5] [Previous]		Cell(s) Column(s) Row(s)
Select		1-5 by 1-5 Page Table
Begin End Paste		Selection
Delete Insert		Column Entire column Entire row Row Page
Backspace Undo Redo
See Also

Navigation Commands

Notebook and Window Management Commands

Speech Recognition System

Text and Notebook Attributes Commands


Text and Notebook Attributes Commands

To apply text and notebook attributes using DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite,

1.	Find the speech command you want from the table below.

2.	Read into the microphone the appropriate commands, from left to right without pausing.

A command that is surrounded by square braces denotes an optional word or number. For example, the word "[Previous]" in certain speech commands is optional; you can choose to say the word "previous" as part of the command or not. Some commands will require you to say a number (usually one through five) as in, "Up three lines."

3.	If you change your mind after saying a speech command, in most cases you can reverse the action by simply saying, "Undo."

For additional information on using DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite, refer to the DragonDictate User's Guide in Envoy format.

Begin by saying...		Then say...
Bold Italics Select[ion] Underline		On Off
Set/Change		Alignment Cell properties [Cell] style Column width Font Font size Graph title(s) Graph type Page properties Page size/Paper size Properties Preferences
See Also

Cell and Text Editing Commands

Navigation Commands

Notebook and Window Management Commands

Speech Recognition System


Notebook and Window Managment Commands
Notebook and Window Management Commands

To perform notebook and window management tasks using DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite,

1.	Find the speech command you want from the table below.

2.	Read into the microphone the appropriate commands, from left to right without pausing.

3.	If you change your mind after saying a speech command, in most cases you can reverse the action by simply saying, "Undo."

For additional information on using DragonDictate Talk [image] To WordPerfect Suite, refer to the DragonDictate User's Guide in Envoy format.

Begin by saying...		Then say...
Calculate Close Import New/Create Open Save		Notebook/Spreadsheet
Print		Notebook/Spreadsheet Page Table
Cascade Tile		Notebooks/Spreadsheets Windows
Analysis expert Budget expert Chart expert Consolidator Consolidate expert Database desktop Data model desktop Expert help Help Graph expert Open dialog Performance expert Save dialog Save as dialog Scenario expert Scenario manager Speller What if expert
See Also

Cell and Text Editing Commands

Navigation Commands

Speech Recognition System

Text and Notebook Attributes Commands


Application Basics

The following topics introduce key concepts and skills for all developers of custom applications.

What is an Application

Understanding Application Components

Designing Dialog Boxes

Designing Toolbars

Designing Menus

Designing Macros

Preparing to Build an Application

Using Developer Mode


What is an Application

A Quattro Pro application is a combination of components that work together to make a task easier. The final look and feel of an application can be radically different from the standard Quattro Pro notebook.

When you build an application, you can create custom components, such as:

dialog boxes

Toolbars

menus

After you create these components, you assemble them into an integrated application notebook. This application notebook contains the macros, dialog boxes, and menus that make up the application.

The Developer vs. the User

Notice that the Application Building sections of Quattro Pro documentation address "you" as the developer:

Developer refers to the person who is building an application, and who is interested in creating an application.

User refers to the person who runs a completed application, and who is interested in using the application to perform tasks.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects


Understanding Application Components

In a Quattro Pro application, each component is used for a specific purpose:

Dialog boxes prompt users for information and let the user make choices.

Toolbars give users shortcuts to common application tasks and perform operations that affect the active data. They also display information about the active window or object.

Menus provide custom lists of operations the user can choose from the menu bar. Menu commands usually perform more global operations (like saving a file).

You use macros to assemble these components into an application. You can also use macros to automate Quattro Pro operations, change Quattro Pro's appearance, and display dialog boxes.

You can also use link commands to assign actions or connections to controls in a dialog box or a Toolbar. A link command can get or change an object's property settings, or run macros.

Each part of an application involves specific design issues, as described in the following topics:

Designing Dialog Boxes

Designing Toolbars

Designing Menus

Designing Macros

See Also

Dialog Window Objects


Designing Dialog Boxes

When you want to create a dialog box (or a custom Toolbar) you can choose Tools|UI Builder to work in a dialog window. When a dialog window is active, the Toolbar changes to provide tools that create dialog controls, objects you can create in a dialog box or a Toolbar.

Displaying Dialog Boxes

After you create a custom dialog box, you can display it using the {DODIALOG} macro command. The most important argument in {DODIALOG} is the third argument, which is a block that contains the initial settings of the dialog box controls.

Using Link Commands

Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to events, which are things the user does in an application. For example, a link command can be assigned to a control so it will get an object property when the control is clicked, or display additional controls.

Events recognized by Quattro Pro include

clicking

right-clicking

pressing a key

entering a new value

Link commands also let you quickly connect a control to another control or a notebook cell.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects


Designing Toolbars

When specific tasks are frequently repeated in an application, you can create a custom Toolbar to provide user shortcuts. Toolbars are also suited to operations that affect the current data, and can display information about the current data.

A Toolbar is a special type of dialog box; here is how Toolbars are different from dialog boxes:

Toolbars only display at the top of the Quattro Pro window.

Titles are not displayed in Toolbars.

Toolbars are saved as separate files with a .BAR extension.

The {DODIALOG} macro command cannot display a Toolbar.

Displaying Toolbars

To display a custom Toolbar, click the Toolbar list in the Property Band and choose Append Toolbar, then choose the Toolbar from a list. Another way to append a Toolbar is to right-click the standard Toolbar any place outside a button or field, then choose the Append command from the QuickMenu.

You can also display a Toolbar using the macro commands {Application.SpeedBar} or {Toolbar.Option}. You can either display a custom Toolbar below the standard Quattro Pro Toolbar, or by itself, without the standard Quattro Pro Toolbar.

See Building Complex Toolbars for details on creating, removing, and displaying Toolbars using Tools|UI Builder. (You can also create Toolbars using Tools|Toolbar Designer; see Building Basic Toolbars.)

See Also

{DODIALOG}

Dialog Window Objects


Designing Menus

The operations performed by Toolbars often overlap with the operations performed by menus; try to use menus for operations that affect the data in a global way (like saving a file, printing a database, and so on).

You can add custom menus and menu commands to the menu bar, and replace the menu bar with one command. Menu commands can

initiate actions

run macros

display dialog boxes

display other menus

To create a menu, you describe the menu with a block of labels.The following table lists macro commands you can use to modify menus, menu commands, and the menu bar:

Macro Command	Description

{DELETEMENU}	Removes a menu from the current menu bar (including submenus like Tools|Macro).

{DELETEMENUITEM}	Removes menu commands from the specified menu.

{ADDMENU}	Adds names to the current menu bar.

{ADDMENUITEM}	Adds menu commands to the specified menu.

{SETMENUBAR}	Replaces the active menu bar with the menu described by the block.

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}	Changes existing menu commands.

Note:	You can only add new menus to the left of the Edit menu and to the right of the Tools menu. The area between these menus is reserved for context-sensitive menus that change depending on the active window. Likewise, you cannot delete menus within the context-sensitive area either.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects


Designing Macros

Macros are the heart of every application; they are the primary method you use to pull all of your application components together. In addition to the {DODIALOG} macro command, which displays dialog boxes, macros are most commonly used in an application to

automate tasks

duplicate keyboard and mouse actions

change the active menus

affect the screen display

select, reposition, and resize objects

prompt users for input

The remainder of this topic lists some of the uses of macros in an application.

Notebook Startup Macros

Developers typically use a notebook startup macro to set up the application and present a unique look for the application.

Changing Properties with Macro Commands

Quattro Pro offers numerous macro commands that developers can use to modify the standard look of Quattro Pro or to change property settings.

Some of these macro commands are

{Application.Display}

{GETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{GETPROPERTY}

{Notebook.Display}

{Page.Display}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY}

{SETPROPERTY}

See Also

Dialog Window Objects


Preparing to Build an Application

As a developer, it can be hard to resist jumping right in and building an application. But before doing this, take the time to carefully plan and design the application. This approach makes the application easier to debug and revise.

Planning an Application

As a developer, consider these fundamental issues:

User needs. Start by determining what tasks users need to accomplish. Encourage users to suggest ways to make the proposed application useful to them.

Examples. Find existing features or applications in other products that perform tasks similar to the ones you plan to design. Ask users if they can think of any way to improve these examples.

Simplicity. Try to make the application as easy to use as possible. Try to provide help messages and help lines for users within the application.

Design guidelines

As a developer, consider using the following tips:

Involve users. Let users review your work on the application when early working versions are ready. Use their suggestions to improve and refine the design.

Think small. Keep all macros, dialog boxes, and menus for a single application organized in one notebook. Also, try to limit the number of supporting files (notebooks, Toolbars, graphics, text, and so on). This way, you will have fewer files to install and maintain on user's computers.

Be consistent. Define and follow a set of rules for naming and storing components of your applications. For example, you could begin all component names with the same three-letter code. Also, keep your application files in a specific directory and instruct your users to do the same.

Document your work. Since you might need to update or revise the application later, be sure to include development notes in the application. For example, you can add specific comments and labels to macros, or general comments for an entire notebook page of menu items.

Protect yourself. Limit user access to critical components of the application by hiding UI elements such as the tab cluster or by protecting cells from editing (see Protecting Cells for details). This will keep unexpected maintenance of the application to a minimum.

Avoid traps. If you change the standard menu bar, you might be unable to run a macro by choosing Tools|Macro|Play. When developing applications, run Quattro Pro in Developer mode (see Using Developer Mode); then you can press Ctrl+Shift+N to restore the standard menu bar and reveal hidden UI components. You can also write a macro to restore Quattro Pro to its original state and assign the macro to a key (see Running Macros for details). Handy macros like this one can be saved to a macro library, and the macro library can be open when testing or developing.

Clean up. Remember to restore the standard Quattro Pro settings after users exit your application.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects


Using Developer Mode

Starting Quattro Pro with the command line switch /D runs Quattro Pro in Developer mode. Developer mode adds special properties to Object Inspector menus and lets you use a shortcut key, Ctrl+Shift+N, as described in the following tables. You do not have to be in Developer mode to change or read these property settings; macro commands can always access them.

The application Object Inspector gains two additional properties in Developer mode.

Property	Description

Enable Inspection	Lets you disable right-clicking, the Property list in the Property Band, and the Object Properties key (F12). Use this to disable Object Inspector menus.

Title	Lets you change the text that displays in the Quattro Pro title bar.

In Developer mode, all drawn objects in a graph window gain the following properties.

Property	Description

Dimension	Lets you move and resize graph objects created with the Toolbar in the graph window.

Name	Used by macro commands, link commands, and @functions to read or change property settings.

For a list of all Quattro Pro object properties (including more hidden properties), see Property Reference.

The Developer mode shortcut key, Ctrl+Shift+N, varies in function depending on the current program state:

State of program	Description

Debugging a macro	Stops macro execution and exits Debug mode.

All other states	Restores the standard Quattro Pro menu bar, status line, input line, and Toolbar. Also sets the Enable Inspection property back to Yes, which re-enables Object Inspector menus.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects


Advanced Editing

Grouping Notebook Pages

Creating a Group

Group Mode Tips

Defining Styles

Defining Custom Numeric Formats

Using Numeric Format Codes

Numeric Format Symbols

Date/Time Format Symbols

Miscellaneous Format Symbols

Reformatting Text Entries in a Block

Transposing Columns and Rows

Converting Formulas to Values

Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells

Variations on Pasting

Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted

Pasting Different Data Types

Creating Floating Objects

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Drawing Lines and Shapes on the Spreadsheet

Creating Text Boxes on the Spreadsheet

Arranging Drawn Objects

Moving and Resizing Floating Objects

Protecting Floating Objects from Change

Making Floating Objects Transparent

Adding Drop Shadows to Floating Objects

Changing Floating Object Properties

Layering Floating Objects

Copying Quattro Pro Images


Grouping Notebook Pages

You can act on several notebook pages at the same time by grouping the pages. Then any changes you make to one page affect all pages in the group. For example, you can enter column headings and make formatting changes on multiple pages simultaneously by first grouping the pages.

After you create a group, turn it on and off using View|Group Mode or Alt+F5. The group of pages is indicated by a blue line under the page tabs in the group.

Creating a Group

Group Mode Tips

See Also

Using Named Blocks


Creating a Group

To create a group of notebook pages,

1.	Choose Notebook|Define Group.

2.	In the Define/Modify Group dialog box, type a name for the group. You can use letters and numers in the name, as well as the following special characters:

~	`	!	%	_	|	\	'	?

You can also use spaces, but not as the first character in a name. You cannot use a name you have previously assigned to a page in the same notebook.

3.	Enter the first and last pages of the group in the dialog box. If you preselected a series of pages before choosing the command, they already appear in the dialog box.

4.	Choose OK.

To activate this group, choose View|Group Mode or press Alt+F5. A blue line appears below the page tabs in the group.

From now on, changes made to blocks in the group affect all similar blocks in other pages in the group. Also, if you point to blocks in the group from dialog boxes or in formulas while Group mode is on, the group name is used. For example, a formula would read 1stQtr:A1:A10 instead of Jan..Mar:A1:A10.

To deactivate the group, choose View|Group Mode or press Alt+F5 again. The blue line disappears.

You can have multiple groups in one notebook. Changes to one page in a group affect only the other pages in the same group while you are in Group mode. You cannot have overlapping groups; that is, any given page can belong only to one group.

To modify a group, choose Notebook|Define Group. Then choose the group name and change the entries in the First Page and/or Last Page edit fields. Choose OK.

To delete a group, choose Notebook|Define Group. Then choose the group name and choose Delete. Choose OK.

Using a Group

Any 2-D selection that you make on a page turns into a 3-D selection when you use Group mode.

For example, if you group pages A through D of the same notebook, you can apply a heading style and a currency format style to all pages at once. Just select A1 on any page and choosing Heading 2 from the Style list, and then select A2..B3 on any page and choose Currency from the Style list.

Entering Data into a Group

You can "drill" an entry into the same cell in all grouped pages by combining grouping with the Ctrl and Enter keys.

To drill the label "Income" into cell D1 on pages A through C, select D1 on page A, group pages A through C, and type the label. Instead of pressing Enter to complete the entry, hold down the Ctrl key while you press Enter.

You can also delete through the pages in a group with Ctrl+Del. Just select a cell or block on any page in a group while Group mode is on. All entries in corresponding cells in the group are deleted.

See Also

Group Mode Tips

Using Named Blocks


Group Mode Tips

Remember that every action you take affects all pages in the group when Group mode is on. This means that many operations require you to switch Group mode on and off. For best results, work carefully and be sure that Undo is enabled before you start.

For example, if you are working in Group mode, follow these steps to copy data from one page in a group to the remaining pages in the group,

1.	Choose View|Group Mode or press Alt+F5 to turn off Group mode.

2.	Select the source data to be copied, and click the Copy button [image] in the Toolbar.

3.	Choose View|Group Mode or press Alt+F5 again to turn Group mode back on.

4.	Select the destination cell in any page in the group, and click the Paste button [image] in the Toolbar.

You can also turn Group mode on and off while writing formulas that involve 2-D and 3-D references. Watch the input line as you point to references; with Group mode on, you get 3-D references, with Group mode off, you point to 2-D references.

The SpeedSum button [image] is ideally suited to use with groups. Just select the cells on any page in the group to create the desired totals on that page, then click SpeedSum. The appropriate formula is written into each page in the group.

Other operations that are particularly useful in Group mode are:

most block property settings

most page property settings

column width and row height changes, either with the mouse or the Fit button

Block|Move and Copy within similarly formatted pages

inserting and deleting rows and columns

Caution: Be careful when using Edit|Cut, Clear, or Clear Values when Group mode is on. Data will be deleted from all pages in the group.

See Also

Creating a Group

Undoing Mistakes

Using Named Blocks


Defining Styles

A Quattro Pro style is a combination of Block property settings gathered under a style name. You apply a style by selecting it from the Style list in the Property Band. The predefined styles are described in Using Styles.

You can create entirely new styles, or you can modify Quattro Pro's predefined styles. In either case, you can copy property settings from a formatted cell or from an existing style to add to your new style.

To revise or create a style,

1.	Choose Notebook|Define Style.

2.	To revise a style, choose it from the Define Style For list. To create a new style, type a new name in the Define Style For edit field.

3.	To add or modify properties that make up the style, check the box next to the property name. Then choose the property button, modify the setting, and choose OK. To remove a property from the style definition, uncheck the box next to it.

Note: Only checked properties are included in the style you are defining. The unchecked properties have no effect in the cells to which you apply this new style. This lets you create partial styles that affect only a few properties at a time and apply them in combination with properties already existing in cells.

4.	To copy property settings from a preformatted cell or another style, choose Merge. Then in the Merge Style dialog box, choose Style and choose the style name from the Select Style box to merge another style. Or, choose Cell and point to or type the cell address in the Select Cell box. Then choose OK to return to the Define/Modify Style dialog box.

5.	Choose OK to complete the style definition.

To use the new style, select the cells to which you want to apply it and select the name from the Style list in the Property Band.

If you redefine a style that is already in use in the notebook (such as Normal, which is applied to all cells by default), all cells using that style change to reflect the new property settings. Cells in which you set individual properties with the block Object Inspector do not change.

To delete a style, choose Notebook|Define Style, and choose the style name in the Define Style For box. Then choose Delete and choose OK. Cells to which you had applied the deleted style revert to Normal style. You can delete any style except the Normal style.

To copy a style to another notebook, copy a cell formatted in that style, and paste it into the new notebook. The style name then appears in the Style list for that notebook.

See Also

Active Block Properties

Object Inspector Menus


Defining Custom Numeric Formats

In addition to the numeric formats built into Quattro Pro, you can create your own numeric formats to further customize the appearance of numbers, dates, and times.

To create a numeric format,

1.	Right-click the block to which you first want to apply the format and choose Block Properties to display the block Object Inspector. Numeric Format is already selected.

2.	Choose User Defined and then any format from the Formats Defined list. This format will be the basis from which you create the new format.

3.	Enter a format code, using the symbols and syntax described in Using Numeric Format Codes.

4.	Choose OK to complete the format and apply it to the active block at the same time.

To apply the new format to a block, right-click the block and choose Block Properties to display the block Object Inspector. Choose Numeric Format. Then check User Defined and choose the new format from the Formats Defined list.

Saving Custom Formats

Every time you create a User Defined format, it is saved in the Formats Defined list in the User Defined option of the Numeric Format property (in the block Object Inspector).

The format is also added to the list of all open notebooks. It is saved with any of these additional notebooks only if you apply the format to a cell in that notebook.

If you paste a formatted cell into another notebook, the custom format definition is copied also.

See Also

Block Properties

Date and Time Format Symbols

Miscellaneous Format Symbols

Number Format Symbols


Using Numeric Format Codes

Using special codes, you can create custom formats to display values. You can also create formats that display values differently depending on whether they are positive, negative, or zero. Finally, you can add text at the beginning, middle, or end of your format to be displayed with whatever value is in the formatted cell.

Formats are divided into two groups: Number formats and Date/Time formats. You create these formats using codes that represent formatted values in each character position in the formatted cell.

You can add any other characters, which will be inserted "as is" in the displayed entry within the formatted data.

The following code displays a number to three decimal places:

N9.000

For example, 53.97 would appear as 53.970. The N code begins all Number formats. The 9 code displays as many digits as there are in the value to the left of the decimal point. The zero codes require that three digits to the right of the decimal point be displayed.

The next code displays a date and time:

TWeekday, H:M:S

For example, 1/9/92 at 2:30am would appear as Thursday, 2:30:0. The T code begins all Date/Time formats. The Weekday code displays the name of the day, and the H, M, and S codes display the hour, minute, and second. The colons are not codes at all; they are simply inserted into the formatted value according to their position in the format.

See Also

Date and Time Format Symbols

Miscellaneous Format Symbols

Number Format Symbols


Numeric Format Symbols
Number Format Symbols

Symbol	Action

N or n	Begins a Number format (as opposed to a Date or Time format).

0	Always displays a digit. If the number does not have a digit in this position, a 0 appears. If there are more digits in the number than 0s in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed, and the fraction portion is rounded.

9	Displays a digit if the number has one. If there are more digits in the number than 9s in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed, and the fraction portion is rounded.

%	Displays the number as a percentage.

, (comma)	Inserts a thousands separator (a comma unless specified otherwise with the application International property). If not part of a Number code, the comma is inserted wherever it is positioned in the format.

. (period)	Inserts a decimal separator, which is a period unless specified otherwise with the application International property.

;(semicolon)	Sets up different formats for positive and negative values. If the format contains two parts separated by one semicolon (part1;part2), the first part formats positive numbers or zero and the second part formats negative numbers. If the format contains three parts, the first part formats positive numbers, the second formats zero, and the third formats negative numbers.

E- or e-	Displays the number in scientific notation, preceding negative exponents with a minus sign. If the format includes at least one 0 or 9 following this symbol, Quattro Pro displays the number in scientific notation and inserts E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than 9s or 0s following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.

E+ or e+	Displays numbers in scientific notation, preceding negative and positive exponents with a minus or plus sign, respectively. If the format includes at least one 0 or 9 following this symbol, Quattro Pro displays the number in scientific notation and inserts E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than 9s or 0s following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.

The next table shows examples of user-defined numeric formats.

Number examples

Cell contents	Format code	Appears as

6435	N$9,999.99	$6,435.

4.3	N9,900.99	04.3

234	N9;Nnil;N(9.00)	234

0	N9;Nnil;N(9.00)	nil

-3	N9;Nnil;N(9.00)	(3.00)

556966830	N999-99-9999	556-96-6830

4155554828	N(999)999-9999	(415)555-4828

37.2	N99.00 ft	37.20 ft

102089	NConfidential	Confidential

.75	N9.99%	75.%

.75	N9.99'%'	.75%

1234567	N0E+999	1E+6

See Also

Using Numeric Format Codes


Date/Time Format Symbols

Symbol	Action

T or t	Begins a Date/Time format (as opposed to a Number format).

d or D	Displays the day of the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-31).

dd or DD	Displays the day of the month as a two-digit number (01-31).

wday, Wday, WDAY	Displays the day of the week as a three-character abbreviation all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

weekday, Weekday,WEEKDAY	Displays the day of the week all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

m or M	Displays the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-12). If preceded by an hour code (h, H, hh, or HH), displays the minute as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

mm or MM	Displays the month as a two-digit number (01-12). If preceded by an hour code (h, H, hh, or HH), displays the minute as a two-digit number (01-59).

Mo	Displays the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-12).

MMo	Displays the month as a two-digit number (01-12).

mon, Mon, MON	Displays the month as a three-character abbreviation all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

month, Month,MONTH	Displays the name of the month all lowercase, or with the first letter capitalized, or all uppercase.

yy or YY	Displays the last two digits of the year (00-99).

yyyy or YYYY	Displays all four digits of the year (0001-9999).

h or H	Displays the hour as a one- or two-digit number. If the format includes ampm or AMPM, the number will be between 1-12. If ampm or AMPM is not included, 24-hour format is used (0-23).

hh or HH	Displays the hour as a two-digit number. If the format includes ampm or AMPM, the number will be between 01-12. If ampm or AMPM is not included, 24-hour format is used (00-23).

Mi	Displays the minute as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

MMi	Displays the minute as a two-digit number (01-59).

s or S	Displays the second as a one- or two-digit number (1-59).

ss or SS	Displays the second as a two-digit number (01-59).

AMPM	Displays the time in 12-hour format with characters for morning (AM) or afternoon (PM).

The next table shows examples of user-defined date and time formats.

Date and time examples

Cell contents	Format code	Appears as

2/10/92	TMonth D, yyyy	February 10, 1992

2/10/92	TWeekday	Monday

@TODAY	TMM/DD/YY	02/10/92

@NOW	THH:MM:SS AMPM	02:36:42 PM

See Also

Using Numeric Format Codes


Miscellaneous Format Symbols

Symbol	Action

*	If the formatted entry is shorter than the column width, fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk.

' '	Literalizes characters enclosed in the single quotation marks and displays them wherever they are placed within the format. After you apply a format, single quotation marks are automatically inserted in the format around characters that are not format codes. To make the actual text of a format code appear in a cell (instead of making it act as a code), surround it with single quotation marks (for example, 'WEEKDAY').

\	Works like the quotation mark symbols described above, except it literalizes only the character after the backslash.

See Also

Using Numeric Format Codes


Reformatting Text Entries in a Block

Aligning Entries in Cells describes how you can wrap a long entry into several lines so it fits in a single cell. This is often convenient, but the row height changes to include the whole entry. If this is not what you want, try using Block|Reformat to wrap text over several rows.

Block|Reformat lets you adjust word wrapping in a series of label entries as though they were in a paragraph. You can enter text as a long label or a series of labels, then reorganize the text as a paragraph, taking up as many cells or columns as you want.

To reformat text in a block of cells,

1.	Enter the text in one or more cells of the same column. You can include up to 1023 characters in a single cell. There can be no blank cell between the cells containing text, and the entries must begin in the same column.

2.	Select the cell containing the first cell to reformat, and choose Block|Reformat.

3.	For the Block field, specify the columns or rows where you want the reformatted text to appear. If you specify cells in the active row only, the text fills up as many rows as necessary to display the text within the columns containing those cells. If you specify both columns and rows, Quattro Pro reformats the text within the block if there is enough room. Choose OK.

If an entry is longer than the column width, it overflows into adjoining empty cells and is cut short when it reaches an occupied cell. If you specify the reformat block by indicating cells in the first row only, be sure there are enough blank rows underneath for the reformatted text. If the destination block contains data, the data is moved down out of the way.

Remember, even though the text may appear reformatted in several columns or rows, the data is stored in the leftmost cells of each row.

After you reformat a label, you can reverse the formatting with Edit|Undo, if enabled. You can also reformat the text to fill the same space as it did before (some line breaks may change).

If you reformat entries in different font sizes, the font size of the reformatted text is determined by the size of the entry in the first row. This may cause row heights to change.

Block|Reformat works only on existing text. If you reformat an empty block, it has no effect on data you enter later.

See Also

Undoing Mistakes


Transposing Columns and Rows

Whether you set up a page with entries listed in rows or columns, you can reverse the data in columns and rows with the Transpose button [image] on the Block Toolbar or Block|Transpose.

Block|Transpose copies data to another area and transposes the columns and rows. Although you can transpose to the same location as the existing block, it is not wise because the transposed data will usually take a different shape than the original data and will not overwrite it completely. It is safer to specify a different part of the notebook for the destination of Block|Transpose.

To copy and transpose data, select the block and choose Block|Transpose. For the To edit field, indicate the top left cell of the block to which you want to copy the transposed data, then choose OK. Do not specify a cell within the source block--you will disarrange the data if you do.

Caution: If there is data in the destination block, Quattro Pro overwrites it with the new data. Also, do not transpose cells containing formulas. Cell references are not adjusted properly when you use Block|Transpose.

See Also

Copying and Moving Data


Converting Formulas to Values

The Values button [image] on the Block Toolbar and the Block|Values command copy the values calculated by formulas without copying the formulas. Resulting values are usually numeric, but they can also be string values, depending on your formulas. You can copy these values to another part of the notebook or copy them over the formulas that computed them.

To copy a block of formula values, select the block and click the Values button on the Block Toolbar or choose Block|Values. For the To field, indicate the destination block for the copy. To replace the formulas in the block with their values, specify the same block for the destination block. To copy the values of the formulas to another part of the notebook, specify the top left cell of the block you want to copy them to.

To copy formulas and their values to another part of the notebook, use Block|Copy or Edit|Copy and Paste. To convert a single formula to its result, select the cell containing it, press F2, press F9, then press Enter. The result replaces the formula.

To copy formula values into a separate file, use the Values option with Notebook|Extract.

See Also

Copying and Moving Data

Extracting Part of a Notebook


Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells

To maintain the accuracy of your data, Quattro Pro changes formula references in a logical manner when you move cells containing formulas, or cells referenced by formulas. Here are the specifics:

If you move a formula without moving the cells it references, the references remain intact, regardless of whether they are absolute or relative. Cell references adjust only when you copy a formula. (See Copying Formulas for a discussion of absolute and relative addresses of cells.)

If you move a formula and the cells it references at the same time, the references do adjust. For example, if A2 contains +A1+1, and you move A2 alone to B1, the formula still reads +A1+1. But if you move A1 and A2 at the same time, the formula reads +B1+1.

If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it references, Quattro Pro links the two notebooks so the formula still references the cells in the original notebook. If you move the formula back to the first notebook, the links are removed.

If you move a cell without moving formulas that refer to it, formulas update to refer to the new location, even if you specified the reference as absolute. For example, if you move the contents of cell B4 to B6 in page A, Quattro Pro revises any formula referencing B4 to reference B6. If you move A:B4 into A:B6 of a notebook named TAX, the formula's reference changes to [TAX]A:B6.

If you move a cell from within a block without moving formulas that refer to the block, formulas still refer to the same block and no longer refer to the moved cell. However, if you move one of the block's coordinate cells (the upper left and lower right cells), the references to the block extend or contract to reflect the new location. For example, if you define the block BILLS as B1..B7, then move cell B7 to B12, BILLS changes to B1..B12.

If you move a coordinate (corner) cell into another notebook, references to the block are not adjusted.

If you move an entire named or referenced block, Quattro Pro updates the block name or the reference in formulas.

Moving into a Referenced Block

If you move data into a coordinate cell of a referenced block or into a single referenced cell, the formula containing the reference becomes invalid. References in formulas to the single cell or block are replaced with ERR, and cells containing those formulas display ERR. If you named the block, the block coordinates in the block names list show as ERR.

Tip:	Quattro Pro's error auditing features can help you locate the source of ERR and NA in cells. See Displaying Error Sources in Cells for details.

To reverse a move operation that causes errors, use Edit|Undo immediately after the move. Using Block|Move again to move the data back to where it was will not bring back the formulas.

To move data into a cell referenced by a formula or named block, use Block|Copy, then erase the original data. Block|Copy will not turn cell or block references into ERR values.

See Also

Copying and Moving Data


Variations on Pasting

Quattro Pro uses the Windows Clipboard to copy data and paste it in various forms. By default, using Edit|Copy or Cut followed by Edit|Paste places the most complete version of the data into the pasted area whether it comes from another application or from within Quattro Pro itself.

Sometimes you may want to paste only a subset of the data. You can do this in the following ways:

With Quattro Pro cell data in the Clipboard, you can use Edit|Paste Special to paste only a block's properties instead of its values, or vice versa (see Using Paste Special for details).

With data in the Clipboard from a participating DDE application, you can use Edit|Paste Special|Paste Link to create a live data link. This type of link causes data changes from the other application to be constantly reflected in Quattro Pro.

With data from many other types of applications in the Clipboard, you can use Edit|Paste or Paste Special to create many kinds of data types, including OLE objects, picture objects, and bitmap objects.

You can, of course, paste Quattro Pro data into other applications, as limited by the formats the other application can read. In addition, this section describes how to copy images of blocks of cells into bitmap format and paste them into other applications.

See Also

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Dragging and Dropping

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving


Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted

Ordinarily, when you paste a block, you paste the source block's properties too (such as its font, alignment, and numeric format). To paste the data without the properties, or to control the paste in other ways, follow these steps:

1.	Use Edit|Copy to copy a selection to the Clipboard.

2.	Select the destination for the pasted cells.

Caution: If the destination already contains data, you will overwrite it when you choose OK.

3.	Choose Edit|Paste Special and check one or more settings: Formula Cells, Label Cells, Number Cells, Properties, Avoid Pasting Blanks, Transpose Rows and Columns, and Paste Formulas as Values. For details on these settings, see Paste Special Dialog Box.

4.	To complete the paste, choose OK.

If you copied a block to the Clipboard (instead of cutting it) you can click Link to paste the block and link it to the source block. Then, whenever you update the source, the copy will update as well.

See Also

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Pasting Different Data Types

Using OLE and DDE


Pasting Different Data Types

Ordinarily, using Edit|Paste puts the most complete version of Clipboard data into Quattro Pro. But, depending on what is in the Clipboard, you can use Edit|Paste Special to choose from a variety of types, including:

BIFF3. Excel format data.

WK1. Lotus 1-2-3 versions 2.x format data.

Embedded OLE. A floating object containing data embedded from another application.

Metafile. A graphic format that creates a floating picture object in a notebook.

Bitmap. A graphic format that creates a floating bitmap object in a notebook.

Text. Text data is entered as labels into cells, and numeric data is entered as values.

Linked OLE. A floating object displaying data linked from another application.

Link. A DDE link.

WK3. Lotus 1-2-3 version 3.x format data.

Paradox Table. Paradox for Windows or Database Desktop data.

DIB. A Device Independent Bitmap format that creates a floating bitmap object.

Not all of these formats are available in all situations. Depending on the data copied to the Clipboard and the location within Quattro Pro that is selected, only a subset of the list of formats may be available.

To paste in a particular format, copy the data from the other application to the Clipboard. Then, in Quattro Pro, select the location to paste the data, and choose Edit|Paste Special. After you select the format type from the list, choose OK. Depending on the data type, the data is entered into cells, or as a floating object above the surface of the notebook page.

See Also

Creating Floating Objects

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted


Creating Floating Objects

You can create floating objects containing a variety of data types. These objects exist in a layer above the spreadsheet cells, but are part of the spreadsheet page in which they appear. They obscure entries in cells underneath them, but you can move a floating object to reveal cells underneath by selecting it and dragging it with the mouse.

Although a floating object is not attached to particular cell borders, it prints when the block underneath it is selected, and it is saved with the notebook.

You can create floating objects by using Edit|Insert Object, by pasting Clipboard data, by using Graphics|Insert Graph, using tools in the Toolbar, or by dragging objects from other applications.

Edit|Insert Object creates an embedded OLE object created by an OLE server application that you run from within Quattro Pro.

By pasting Clipboard data, you can create these types of objects:

Embedded OLE or linked OLE objects

Rich Text Format objects

Picture objects (metafile format)

Bitmap objects

Using tools in the Toolbar, you can create floating graphs (see Creating a Floating Graph) and SpeedButtons (see Creating Macro SpeedButtons). You can also create floating graphs with Graphics|Insert Graph. Tools in the Draw Toolbar let you add lines and shapes to the notebook. These are useful for annotating cells and floating objects.

Note:	Another way to create a floating object that contains a bitmap or metafile image is to import the file into a graph window and insert the contents as a floating graph. You can import files in many popular graphics formats. See Importing Graphics for details.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Layering Floating Objects

Using OLE and DDE

Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted


Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

You can draw lines and shapes and add text boxes directly on a spreadsheet using tools on the Draw Toolbar.

Drawn objects are like other floating objects; they exist in a layer above the spreadsheet cells, but are part of the spreadsheet page in which they appear. Drawn objects do not appear as icons on the Objects page. You can edit them in place and change their properties on the spreadsheet.

Tip:	To make a drawn object transparent to see the notebook cells underneath it, right-click the object, choose the Properties command, and set the Fill Style property to None.

The Draw Toolbar

The Draw Toolbar of the notebook window provides tools for drawing and arranging objects on the spreadsheet. To show the Draw Toolbar, click the Toolbar list in the Property Band of a notebook window and choose Draw.

For details on using the tools on the Draw Toolbar, see the following topics:

Drawing Lines and Shapes on the Spreadsheet

Creating Text Boxes on the Spreadsheet

Arranging Drawn Objects

Tip:	To keep the tool selected after you use it, double-click the tool. If you double-click a tool to keep it active, click it again to deactivate it. To identify each tool, point to it.


Drawing Lines and Shapes on the Spreadsheet

You create lines and shapes on the spreadsheet the same way you do in a graph. For details on how to draw lines and arrows, see Drawing Lines and Arrows.

For details on how to draw rectangles and ellipses, see Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Floating Objects

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Creating Text Boxes on the Spreadsheet

To create a text box on the spreadsheet,

1.	Click the Text tool [image].

2.	Drag out a text box to the size you want. When you release the mouse, a blinking insertion point signals that Quattro Pro is ready for you to enter text.

3.	Enter text. As you type, Quattro Pro wraps the text to fit the width of this block, and the depth of the block increases automatically. (The Alignment  property turns this wordwrap feature off and on.)

Tip:	Instead of typing text, you can type a reference to a cell that contains a label; see Referencing a Cell on a Notebook Page. for details.

4.	When you finish entering text, click anywhere outside the text box to deselect it.

Use standard keyboard procedures to edit the text in text boxes. Cut and Copy apply to the text when text is highlighted. When text is not highlighted, but the text box is selected (its handles are visible), you cut or copy the text and the text box.

To delete a text box, select it and click the Cut button [image].

To enhance the look of the text, right-click the text box to change its properties; see Text Box Properties.

Note:	The steps for using the Text tool on the Graph Toolbar to create text boxes in a graph are slightly different; see Creating Text Boxes for more information.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Floating Objects

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Arranging Drawn Objects;Draw Toolbar
Arranging Drawn Objects

You can arrange the order that drawn objects appear by using the commands on the Tools|Object Order cascading menu or the buttons on the Draw Toolbar for arranging objects; see Arranging Object Layers.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Floating Objects

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet


Resizing, Moving and Copying Floating Objects

To resize or move a floating object, click anywhere in the object to select it; handles appear around the border.

To resize only the height or width of an object, drag a side handle. To resize height and width at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

To move an object, drag it from any area except its handles. To copy an object, hold down Ctrl and drag the object as if you were moving it.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Floating Objects

Layering Floating Objects

Protecting Floating Objects from Change


Protecting Floating Objects from Change

If you do not want other notebook users to modify or delete a floating object, you can lock it:

1.	Click anywhere in the object to select it. Then, right-click to display a Quick Menu and choose the Properties command.

2.	Choose Protection in the property list and check Locked (it is checked by default.)

3.	Display the page Object Inspector (right-click the page tab) and choose Protection in the page property list.

4.	Check Enable Object Locking (it is unchecked by default) and choose OK. All floating objects on the page (except those that are specifically unlocked) are protected.

The floating object cannot be moved, resized, edited, or deleted until Locked is unchecked in the active object's Object Inspector or Enable Object Locking is unchecked in the page Object Inspector.

Note:	When page protection of objects is disabled, Quattro Pro ignores the status of objects that have been individually protected or unprotected.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Floating Objects

Layering Floating Objects


Making Floating Objects Transparent

You can make floating objects appear transparent. For objects other than drawn objects, first click within an object to select it. Then, right-click and choose the Properties command to display an Object Inspector. Choose Box Type in the property list and choose Transparent. Now, whatever is behind the floating object is visible through it.

For selected drawn objects, right-click and choose the Properties command. Choose Fill Style in the Property list, then choose None.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Floating Objects

Layering Floating Objects


Adding Drop Shadows to Floating Objects

You can add drop shadows to floating objects to emphasize how they float above the notebook. First, click within an object to select it. Then, right-click and choose the Properties command to display an Object Inspector. Choose Box Type in the property list and check Drop Shadow. You can also check one of the Box Type settings to remove the border around the floating object or change its line weight.

See Also

Changing Floating Object Properties

Creating Floating Objects

Layering Floating Objects


Changing Floating Object Properties

You can right-click floating objects and change their properties. The Object Inspector's title bar identifies the object type. All floating objects contain the Border Color, Box Type, Protection (to prevent objects from being moved, resized, edited, or deleted), and Object Name properties. OLE objects each have one additional property, called OLE. This property identifies the object and linked document (if any) and lets you specify whether the object can be automatically resized by the server if necessary and, if the object is a link, whether the link should be automatically updated when the server document changes.

OLE objects have additional settings you can change by right-clicking. To view these, right-click the object and choose the Object command at the bottom of the QuickMenu.

For linked objects, you see:

Edit, Play, or whatever action is appropriate to the server application. You can run a video, play a sound, edit the object, and so on. When you are finished working in the server application, choose File|Update or File|Exit. For OLE 2.0 objects, Edit activates the object for in-place editing. Use Open to open the server.

Open, to open the server application.

Change Link, to specify a different link path -- if the linked document is moved to a different directory, for example.

Update Link, to refresh the information shown in the linked object.

Convert, to change the linked object to another type of object--a metafile picture, for example.

Embedded objects can have the same commands, except for Change Link and Update Link.

See Also

Graph Object

Layering Floating Objects

Macros

Protecting Floating Objects from Change


Layering Floating Objects

After pasting some types of data, a floating object appears in the notebook page. See Creating Floating Objects for details.

As you include additional floating objects on a page, you can place them in layers one above the other. To manage the placement of floating objects, use Tools|Object Order.

To reorder the layering of overlapping objects, select an object--it has handles around it when selected--and choose one of the Tools|Object Order commands:

Bring Forward moves the object one layer closer to the top.

Send Backward moves the object one layer closer to the bottom.

Bring To Front brings the object to the front or top of the layers.

Send To Back sends the object to the bottom, or the layer closest to the page.

Tip:	You can also right-click the selected object and use Object Order on the QuickMenu, or use tools on the Draw Toolbar to layer floating objects.

See Also

Building Graphs

Macros

Protecting Floating Objects from Change


Copying Quattro Pro Images

When you copy a block to the Clipboard, it is automatically stored in bitmap format in addition to the usual data format. This means you can paste this bitmap image to another application, such as Windows Paintbrush, and enhance it further.

To paste a Quattro Pro image, bitmap or metafile, into Paintbrush:

1.	Select the block you want to include in the image. The block must be contiguous.

2.	Click the Copy button [image] in the Toolbar. (Make no further changes in Quattro Pro until you paste this image.)

3.	Start Paintbrush (or activate it if it is already started).

4.	Choose Edit|Paste.

The image appears in Paintbrush just as it looks in Quattro Pro.

Caution: Be sure to paste the image into the target application immediately afte copying it to the Clipboard from Quattro Pro, before making any changes to the Quattro Pro notebook. Otherwise, the image is invalid--and unavailable.

See Also

Creating Floating Objects

Using Paste Special to Control What is Pasted


Analytical Graphing

Analytical graphing lets you create graphs from analytical calculations based on notebook data. While you can perform several types of analysis and graph the results, your data remains unchanged.

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing

Aggregation

Aggregation Graph Types

Aggregation Options and Time Periods

Series Period

Aggregation Period

Function

Moving Average

Moving Average Options

Linear Fit

Exponential Fit

Result Tables

Multiple Relationships in One Graph

Analytical graphing relates to other Quattro Pro analysis tools. Aggregation uses eight @functions. Moving Average relates to Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools|Moving Average. Linear Fit performs the same analyses as Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools|Regression, and Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression. Exponential Fit is similar to Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools|Exponential Smoothing.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Building Graphs

Customizing Graph Properties

Data Analysis

Enhancing Graphs


Guidelines for Analytical Graphing

When you have decided what data to analyze and the relationship to investigate, follow these steps:

1.	Choose Graphics|New Graph to display the new graph Object Inspector.

2.	Highlight the 1st series edit field, and enter the first block that contains information to analyze.

If you want to analyze additional data blocks, enter them as additional series. Click OK to create the graph.

3.	Choose Graphics|Type and select the type of graph you want. Line graphs are usually appropriate.

4.	When the graph window appears, right-click a graph series and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band to display the series properties Object Inspector.

5.	Click Analyze and choose an analysis type: Aggregation, Moving Average, Linear Fit, or Exponential Fit. None is the default.

6.	Click OK to display the analysis results in the graph window. You can press F11 or choose Graphics|View Graph to view the graph full-screen.

To graph the original values for a series, choose Analyze|None when viewing the series properties Object Inspector.

To create a table of analysis data, choose Analyze when viewing the series properties Object Inspector. Then, enter the upper left cell of the table's location in the Table edit field.

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Result Tables


Aggregation

Aggregation lets you combine multiple data points and plot them as a single point that may be the sum, average, standard deviation, minimum, or maximum of the data. Plotting aggregates transforms a graph series and reveals relationships not immediately apparent in the spreadsheet, such as weekly averages for information recorded daily.

To perform an Aggregation analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical graphing and choose Analyze|Aggregation in the series properties Object Inspector. See Aggregation Options and Time Periods for details on dialog box settings.

You can create a table of the results (see Result Tables for details).

See Also

Aggregation Graph Types

Analytical Graphing

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing


Aggregation Graph Types

Line graphs work well with aggregation because they easily show trends. Bar graphs are also impressive when plotting aggregated data over time, although trends are not as easy to see when you graph multiple series in the same graph. X-axis labels are created in the same way as for line graphs.

When using aggregation with bar or line graphs, Quattro Pro can create x-axis labels but does not aggregate the x-axis series, even if you enter the analyzed series in the X-Axis series edit field. To aggregate the x-axis, enter the block containing data for the x-axis in the X-Axis series edit field and choose Graph Type|XY. Then, right-click the x-axis, choose the Properties command, and choose Analyze in the x-axis properties Object Inspector. Enter the same Aggregation Period, Series Period, and Function settings as you did for the other series in the graph.

See Also

Aggregation Options and Time Periods

Aggregation

Analytical Graphing

Graphics|Type


Aggregation Options and Time Periods

When you choose Analyze|Aggregation in the series property Object Inspector, the dialog box offers these options: Series Period, Aggregation Period, and Function.

The Aggregation commands are based on one day representing a period of 1. For the purposes of aggregation, Quattro Pro uses the following standards:

A week has	A month has	A quarter has	A year has

7 days	30 days	90 days	360 days

4 weeks	12 weeks	51 weeks

3 months	12 months

4 quarters

See Also

Aggregation

Analytical Graphing


Series Period

Series Period indicates what the series values represent, or what period exists in the series. For example, if the series contains weekly information, choose Weeks.

Days (the default) represents a period of 1.

Weeks represents a period of 7.

Months represents a period of 30.

Quarters represents a period of 90.

Years represents a period of 360.

See Also

Aggregation Options and Time Periods

Aggregation

Analytical Graphing


Aggregation Period

Aggregation Period indicates the number of data values to combine for each point on the graph. Choose one of the following or type in a number to use an arbitrary period:

Weeks (the default) shows weekly data, or aggregates by 7.

Months aggregates by 30.

Quarters aggregates by 90.

Years aggregates by 360.

If you enter an arbitrary period, the Series Period is automatically set to Days. You can reset Series Period to another option, if you want. For example, enter 3 to group information in 3-day periods with Series Period set to Days. If you specify a standard Aggregation Period, say 7, the setting will show the standard (Weeks) instead of the number (7).

Arbitrary Aggregation Period

Remember that the aggregation settings are based on a day representing a period of 1, but this does not mean you can use only daily information in an aggregation graph. Regardless of what the series represents (days, weeks, months, quarters, or years) if the period you want is other than one of the settings on the Aggregation Period list, always enter the arbitrary period in terms of days.

For example, if the spreadsheet contains daily data and you would like to see biweekly averages, set Aggregation Period to 14 and press Enter. If you have weekly data and want to see biweekly averages, set Series Period to Weeks, set Aggregation Period to 14 and press Enter.

Note: The aggregation period must be larger than the series period. For example, if you choose Series Period|Months and Aggregation Period|Weeks, an error message tells you the series period interval must be smaller than aggregation period interval.

See Also

Aggregation Options and Time Periods

Aggregation

Analytical Graphing


Function

Function indicates how to transform the data:

SUM (the default) uses @SUM(list) to total the data.

AVG uses @AVG(list) to average the data.

STD uses @STD(list) to calculate the population standard deviation.

STDS uses @STDS(list) to calculate a sample standard deviation.

MIN uses @MIN(list) to specify a series minimum.

MAX uses @MAX(list) to specify a series maximum.

VAR uses @VAR(list) to calculate the population variance.

VARS uses @VARS(list) to calculate a sample variance.

Think of the Aggregation commands as handy standards for simple periodic aggregation. For example, when you choose Series Period|Days, Aggregation Period|Months, and Function|AVG, Quattro Pro will average 30 data points, plot the average, then average the next 30 points, plot the average, and so on.

See Also

@Functions

Aggregation Options and Time Periods

Aggregation

Analytical Graphing


Moving Average

Moving Average analysis smooths fluctuating data points by plotting progressive averages. Starting with the first point in the series, Quattro Pro calculates and plots the average for a specified previous number of points, called a period. At each following point, Quattro Pro maintains the specified period: it drops the oldest value, the one farthest from the new point, so the number of points averaged is always the specified period. Quattro Pro then calculates and plots the new average, and continues in this way.

For example, if daily sales vary widely, you may want to determine a general trend by smoothing data points. With a period of 3,

Quattro Pro starts with the first day's sales and plots this value.

For the second average, Quattro Pro moves to the second day, averages the first and second days' totals, and plots the average.

Quattro Pro moves to the third day and calculates the average of the third, second, and first days' sales, then plots the average.

At the fourth day, Quattro Pro drops the first day's sales and averages the second, third, and fourth days' sales.

With Period set to 3, Quattro Pro averages each day's sales with the previous two. In this way, each point is tempered by previous points and data is smoothed to show a general trend.

To perform a Moving Average analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical graphing and choose Analyze|Moving Average in the series property Object Inspector.You can perform a standard or weighted moving average and can create a table of the results. For details, see Moving Average Options and Result Tables.

Moving Average Graph Types

Line and area graphs are most effective for displaying moving averages. They highlight trends better than bar graphs, although bar graphs are not inaccurate.

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Graphics|Type

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing


Moving Average Options

To perform a Moving Average analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical graphing and choose Analyze|Moving Average in the series property Object Inspector. The dialog box offers these options:

Period	Indicates the number of points to average.

Weight	Lets you select a weighted moving average. The default is None. When you select Standard, Quattro Pro numerically places greater emphasis, or weight, on recent points (closest to the point it is working with) and less weight on older points (farthest from the most recent point).

The oldest point is multiplied by 1, the next multiplied by 2, and so on; the most recent point is multiplied by the specified Period.

For example, with Period set to 3, the oldest point is multiplied by 1, the next one by 2, and the most recent point is multiplied by 3. Then, the weighted moving average is determined by dividing the sum of the weighted points by the sum of the weights (in this case, 1+2+3).

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Moving Average


Linear Fit

Using simple linear regression, Analyze|Linear Fit generates a line that best fits the data. Not only is Linear Fit useful for showing a general trend among fluctuating points, it is easier to grasp regression information in graph form than in a table.

To perform a Linear Fit analysis, follow the guidelines for analytical graphing; choose Line for the graph type.

Linear Fit calculates and plots regression information in a line, even if the data does not have a general trend.

You can create a table of the results and use the table to project hypothetical values.

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Graphics|Type

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing

Result Tables


Exponential Fit

Exponential Fit generates a curve to fit data that increases or decreases geometrically--through multiplication rather than addition. For this feature to work, all values in the series must be nonzero and of the same sign, either all negative or all positive.

To fit data with a curve, follow the guidelines for analytical graphing; choose Line for the graph type.

You can create a table of the results.

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Graphics|Type

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing

Result Tables


Result Tables

Graphs show trends, but sometimes you need exact data for further analysis. Follow these steps to generate a table of analytical graphing results in the spreadsheet:

1.	Right-click the series you want to analyze and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series in the Property band.

2.	Choose Analyze and specify the type of analysis (Aggregation, Moving Average, Linear Fit, or Exponential Fit).

3.	When the Analyze dialog box appears, specify a block for the table in the Table edit field. You can indicate an entire block, or specify only one cell as the top left cell of the table.

If you specify one cell, Quattro Pro extends the block downward as needed.

Caution: Check that there is room for the table; otherwise, Quattro Pro overwrites unprotected existing data. Try specifying a block below and to the right of data.

If you specify an entire block, depending on how you want to view the table values, you can specify a block one row wide, one column wide, or composed of multiple rows and columns. Quattro Pro fills the block as in Block|Fill: it starts with the upper left cell, fills the column, then starts at the top of the next column, and so on.

If the block you specified is too small, Quattro Pro displays only what the specified block will hold. To see all the values, choose Table again and specify either one cell as the top of the table (Quattro Pro then extends the block downward as needed), or specify a larger block.

Note: If the type of analysis is Linear Fit or Exponential Fit and you specify a series block larger than the number of existing data points, Quattro Pro projects additional values based on the plotted line or curve and enter them after the others. This applies only to standard line graphs, not XY graphs.

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing


Multiple Relationships in One Graph

Quattro Pro makes it easy to view more than one relationship in the same graph without redesigning your spreadsheet and without repetitive calculations. Just follow the guidelines for analytical graphing and enter the same block for several series. Then, perform different analyses on each series.

You can view multiple Aggregation relationships in the same graph if you aggregate by the same period for each analysis.

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Guidelines for Analytical Graphing


Data Analysis

These topics describe how to use Quattro Pro's many tools for analyzing notebook data:

Using the Scenario Manager

Using the Consolidator

Creating Frequency Distributions

Setting Up a Frequency Bin Block

Other Basic Analyses

Graphing Frequency Distributions

Performing Regression Analysis

Introducing Matrix Operations

Multiplying Two Matrices

Inverting a Matrix

Solving Matrix Problems

Introducing "What-if" Tables

One-Variable "What-if" Tables

Two-Variable "What-if" Tables

Goal-seeking with Solve For

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Entering and Editing Constraints

Setting Optimizer Options

Loading and Saving Optimizer Models

Producing Optimizer Reports

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Analytical Graphing


Using the Scenario Manager

Models are sets of formulas designed to simulate real situations and conditions. Scenarios are "snapshots" of data models. They show changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result. The following topics give an overview of scenario management in Quattro Pro and explain how to use Tools|Scenario Manager to create and display scenarios:

Scenario Management Overview

Planning Scenarios

Scenario Manager Guidelines

The Capture Area

The Scenario Baseline

Scenario Cells

Finding Scenario Cells Automatically

Manually Identifying Scenario Cells

Naming and Saving Scenarios

Scenario Groups

Displaying and Editing Scenarios

Scenario Summary Report

Deleting Scenarios

Deleting Scenario Groups

Tracking Versions

See Also

Data Analysis


Scenario Management Overview

Scenarios are "snapshots" of data models. They show changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result. For example, a worst-case scenario shows what you can expect from the least desirable set of variable values; a best-case scenario uses the most desirable values as input. The Scenario Manager can also be used for tracking versions of notebooks, with changes as minor as changing the fonts or numeric format of blocks (for details, see Tracking Versions). Several commands, such as Block|Copy and Tools|Scenario Manager, help you set up and save scenarios.

The Model Copy option of Block|Copy lets you copy models to different locations in a notebook without affecting formula references. Then you can change values in each copy to produce different scenarios. The Model Copy method of scenario management is most suitable when you want to build a set of scenarios for further analysis--with Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer or Solve For, for example. You can place each scenario on a separate page labeled with a unique name, perform a variety of analyses, and print the results whenever you like.

For a more powerful and interactive approach to scenario analysis, use the Scenario Manager. It highlights value changes for new data, so it is easy to compare and summarize scenarios. At any time you can name and save scenario variations in report form.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Planning Scenarios

Before using the Scenario Manager, build a data model. Enter formulas in your notebook spreadsheet and add any supporting data. Then,

1.	Decide how much of the notebook to include in the scenario group: a block, a page, or the entire notebook. The Scenario Manager tracks all changes within that area, so it is best not to include more than you need. See The Capture Area for details.

2.	Decide which information to change with each scenario. These are the changing cells.

3.	Determine which formula cells reference the changing cells and contain the results you are interested in. These are the result cells.

See Scenario Cells for more information on the changing and result cells.

4.	If you want, use Block|Names--or press Ctrl+F3--to give each of the changing and result cells a meaningful name. These names become labels in the Scenario Summary Report. If you have column or row labels, you can use those for identification in the Scenario Summary Report without actually naming scenario cells.

See Scenario Summary Report for report details.

See Also

Scenario Manager Guidelines

Using the Scenario Manager


Scenario Manager Guidelines

Follow these steps to set Scenario Manager options; create, display, and delete scenarios; and produce summary reports:

1.	Choose Tools|Scenario Manager or click the Scenario Manager button [image] on the Modeling Toolbar to display the Scenario Manager dialog box.

2.	Set a capture area. Page (the current page) is the default, but you can choose Notebook or Block; adjust other options as needed.

3.	Name and save the scenario baseline.

4.	Name, save, and edit scenarios.

5.	Rename the scenario group (optional); Group1 is the default.

6.	View the Scenario Summary Report.

As a shortcut, you can build a model, then use the Scenario Manager Expert to name and save scenarios.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


The Capture Area

The capture area is the block, page, or whole notebook where the Scenario Manager tracks changes. Once you set the scenario baseline, the Scenario Manager tracks all changes in the capture area and interprets them as changing cells and result cells.

The default capture area, Page, is usually suitable. To verify or change the capture area, click the Scenario Manager dialog box button labeled Modify. The Scenario Group Control dialog box appears, with these Capture Area options:

Notebook	Tracks changes within the entire notebook.

Page	Tracks changes in the active page.

Block	Tracks changes in the specified block (2-D or 3-D).

Caution: If you edit data within the capture area then display an existing scenario, any changes not yet saved to a scenario are lost--unless you immediately use Edit|Undo (or Ctrl+Z) to restore them. Choose a capture area carefully to avoid possible data loss or extra changing and result cells; the capture area applies to all scenarios in the current group.

If you choose Notebook, scenario changes are tracked and displayed on all pages except the Scenarios page and Objects page. Use this setting carefully to avoid unexpected results. For example, suppose you change page B, save a scenario, change page C, then display the scenario you last saved. All data on page B appears but the changes on page C disappear.

Only set Capture Area to Notebook if you are interested in tracking changing and result cells across several pages and do not intend to use the notebook for anything else but storing related scenarios.

Choose Page if you will be changing data on a single page but do not want to specify where. You can choose Page for most purposes.

For maximum control, choose Block then follow the instructions in Scenario Cells to identify scenario changing and result cells. The specified block must be contiguous, either 2-D or 3-D.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


The Scenario Baseline

The Scenario Manager tracks value changes against a baseline. If you are working with an empty notebook, enter any labels and formulas before setting the baseline. If you will be changing data that is already in the notebook, set the baseline before starting the changes.

To set the baseline,

1.	Click the Capture button in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Think of it as a camera that is taking a snapshot of current data in the capture area.

2.	When the Capture Scenario dialog box displays, name the baseline scenario.

The default baseline name is Base Scenario. To use another, type a new name in the Scenario Name edit field. Then click OK.

Now, Quattro Pro tracks all changes within the capture area until you save another scenario.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Scenario Cells

The Scenario Manager tracks two types of scenario cells: changing cells (which generally contain new data entries) and result cells (formula cells that reference the changing cells).

Once you set the baseline, you can identify scenario cells automatically or manually. For details, see

Finding Scenario Cells Automatically

Manually Identifying Scenario Cells

To highlight changing and result cells, click Highlight in the Scenario Manager dialog box and check Highlight. By default, Changing cells are shaded yellow on color monitors; result cells are green. To change these colors, click Highlight, then click a square in either or both color selection panes.

When you save a scenario and generate a Scenario Summary Report, the report includes values in all the shaded cells. You may want to focus on fewer changing and result cells than Quattro Pro has shaded. To exclude extra cells of either type, select them and click the Remove button in the Scenario Manager dialog box.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Finding Scenario Cells Automatically

To find scenario cells automatically, enter new values into the changing cells. Click the Find button in the Scenario Manager dialog box. The Scenario Manager identifies all cells in the capture area that have had direct entries, property changes, or formula edits since the baseline was set. These are changing cells. They can contain values or formulas. Result cells are all cells containing formulas that have had value changes but no formula edits since the baseline was set.

See Also

Scenario Cells

Using the Scenario Manager


Manually Identifying Scenario Cells

To identify scenario cells manually, select one or more changing and result cells, then click the Add button in the Scenario Manager dialog box. All selected cells with values are identified as changing cells; cells with formulas are result cells.

See Also

Scenario Cells

Using the Scenario Manager


Naming and Saving Scenarios

When scenario cells and values are ready to save, click the Capture button in the Scenario Manager dialog box. Enter the new scenario name in the Scenario Name edit field (or use the default name) and click OK. If you have not identified scenario cells manually, the Scenario Manager performs an automatic identification (see Finding Scenario Cells Automatically) and saves the information under the name you entered.

Continue until you have added as many scenarios as you want. They are saved permanently when you save the notebook.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Scenario Groups

A set of scenarios is called a group. Each notebook can have as many scenario groups as you need, each with its own baseline. To create or rename a group, click the button labeled Modify in the Scenario Manager dialog box. The Scenario Group Control dialog box appears. It displays the name of the active group (Group1 is the default name for the first group) and offers these buttons:

New	Adds a new group. Click it, then type the name of the new group in the edit field and click OK. When you create a new group, the first scenario you capture will be the baseline.

Rename	Gives the active group a new name. Click Rename, type the new name in the To edit field, and click OK.

Delete	Erases the active group and all scenarios in it.

Options	Lets you change block tracking (see Tracking Versions for details).

For information on the other settings in this dialog box, see The Capture Area.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Displaying and Editing Scenarios

To display a scenario, click its name in the Scenarios list at the left side of the Scenario Manager dialog box. If you have several scenario groups, select the target group in the Group Management list before selecting the scenario.

When you display a scenario, its changing cell and result cell values replace those currently onscreen. If you want to add or delete changing or result cells, see Scenario Cells. You can change the contents of any cell with standard editing procedures.

To save edits to the active scenario, click the Capture button. When the Capture Scenario dialog box appears, type the name of the active scenario to replace it with current cells and values. You can type another name to replace another existing scenario or create a new one. Click OK to accept the scenario name. Changes appear in the Scenario Summary Report when you click the Report button.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Scenario Summary Report

Each time you add a scenario, its changing and result cell values are stored. You can view and print them whenever you want.

To display a Scenario Summary Report, click the Report button in the Scenario Manager dialog box. The Scenario Report dialog box appears, offering several options. When checked, they have these effects:

Report All Groups	Displays a report for each scenario group, not just the active group.

Use Left Labels	Identifies scenario cells with text in cells immediately to their left.

Use Top Labels	Identifies scenario cells with text above them.

Find Empty Page	Puts the Scenario Summary Report on the first empty page in the notebook. To place it somewhere else, uncheck Find Empty Page and enter a page and block in the edit field.

Since these are check boxes, you can check all, any, or none. Click OK to display the Scenario Summary Report.

If you have checked a labels option or named each changing and result cell, a label or name displays next to each value in the Scenario Summary Report.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Deleting Scenarios

If you want to remove a scenario from the Scenarios list and Scenario Summary Report, select it in the Scenarios list and click the Delete button. If it is in another scenario group, first choose the group name in the Group Management list. If you are viewing the Scenario Summary Report when you delete a scenario, it still displays until you click the Report button to update the report.

See Also

Deleting Scenario Groups

Using the Scenario Manager


Deleting Scenario Groups

To delete a group and all scenarios in it,

1.	Select the group in the Group Management list.

2.	Click the Modify button to display the Scenario Group Settings dialog box.

3.	Click Delete.

See Also

Deleting Scenarios

Using the Scenario Manager


Tracking Versions

Sometimes you need to keep track of different versions of a block, page, or whole notebook--if you are building a complicated budget notebook or macro application, for example.

To use the Scenario Manager for version tracking,

1.	Choose Tools|Scenario Manager to display the Scenario Manager dialog box.

2.	Click the Modify button, then

Set the capture area to suit your tracking needs; keep the area as small as possible, but remember that changes outside that area will not be recorded.

Click Options to change the Update on Block Operations setting. For complete version tracking, you will probably want to uncheck it.

Update on Block Operations indicates whether to update all scenarios in the active group when blocks are moved, inserted, or deleted. When that setting is checked, the Scenario Manager tracks all block operations internally; no scenario changes are recorded. If unchecked, the scenarios register any moves, insertions, and deletions.

3.	Click the Capture button to set the baseline.

4.	Make changes in the capture area until you are ready to save a version, then click the Capture button again and enter a new version name.

If you want to track changes in cell attributes such as shading or fonts, click the Highlight button and uncheck Highlight to turn highlighting off while you are editing.

5.	Continue editing and saving versions until your work session is over. Be sure to save a final version before closing the Scenario Manager dialog box or Quattro Pro.

To view previous versions, choose Tools|Scenario Manager to display the Scenario Manager dialog box, choose the target group in the Group Management list if it's not active already, then choose the target version in the Scenarios list.

Caution: If you have been editing anywhere in the capture area, be sure to save the current version in the Scenario Manager before displaying a previous version. Otherwise, edits may be lost. Remember, if Undo is enabled, you can use Edit|Undo or Ctrl+Z to restore an unsaved scenario as long as no edits have been made since displaying the current scenario.

See Also

Using the Scenario Manager


Using the Consolidator

The Consolidator is similar to Notebook|Combine; it combines data from multiple blocks into one using your choice of @function operators. The following topics give an overview of the Consolidator and explain how to create and use consolidations:

Consolidator Overview

Consolidator Guidelines

Source Blocks

Operators

Destination Blocks

Consolidator Results

Consolidator Options

Naming and Saving Consolidations

Deleting Consolidations

See Also

Data Analysis

Notebook|Combine


Consolidator Overview

The Consolidator is similar to Notebook|Combine; it combines data from multiple blocks into one using your choice of operators. Unlike Notebook|Combine, the Consolidator offers a choice of @functions as operators and lets you save consolidation setups. You can specify source and destination blocks plus the @function operator used to combine them, then name that setup and save it for future use.

While the Consolidator is often used for permanent calculations, its flexibility makes it useful for model analysis. For example, you can define several source blocks, then use any or all of the operators with different destination blocks. If you save each setup, it is easy to change a few values and recompute with a single click.

If you are working with a database, you can choose blocks with field names at the top of the block or to the left and automatically sort combined data in the destination block.

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Notebook|Combine

Using the Consolidator


Consolidator Guidelines

Follow these steps to set up and perform consolidations:

1.	Choose Tools|Consolidator to display the Consolidation dialog box.

2.	Define two or more source blocks and add them to the Source Blocks list.

3.	Choose an operation.

4.	Define a 2-D destination block and enter it in the Destination Block field.

5.	Verify and change option settings.

6.	Name the consolidation and add it to the Consolidations list.

7.	Perform the consolidation.

The following topics contain details on each step.

Source Blocks

Operators

Destination Blocks

Consolidator Results

Consolidator Options

Naming and Saving Consolidations

Deleting Consolidations

As a shortcut, you can use the Consolidator Expert to create and save consolidations. Click the Experts button [image] in the Toolbar and follow the directions.

See Also

Consolidator Overview

Using the Consolidator


Source Blocks

Consolidator source blocks are the blocks you want to combine. For example, you might want to count or average all cells in the source blocks. Since the chosen operator works on equivalent cells in each source block, source blocks usually have the same number of rows and columns.

To add two or more blocks to the Source Blocks list, click the Add button in the Consolidation dialog box. When the Add Source Range dialog box appears, enter the source blocks in the edit field. Click the Browse button to select blocks in another notebook.

Tip:	Remember, to enter discontiguous blocks press Ctrl while selecting cells. Each subblock of discontiguous blocks is treated as a separate block. If you enter a 3-D source block, the block on each page is treated separately and combined with those on the other pages.

To remove a block from the Source Blocks list, select it in the list and click the Remove button.

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Consolidator Overview


Operations

The Operator list offers these operations: SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, and VARS. They work like statistical @functions of the same name on equivalent cells of each source block.

For example, if you choose SUM to perform the consolidation in the following example, the results display in E2..E4.

A	B	C	D	E

1

2	1	4	6	11

3	2	5	7	14

4	3	8	11

5

Cell E2 is the sum of cells A2, B2, and C2; cell E3 is the sum of A3, B3, and C3; and so on. With columns of different lengths, cell E4 is the sum of A4 and C4 only.

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Consolidator Overview


Destination Blocks

You can specify a 2-D destination block to hold consolidation results. Enter the block coordinates into the Destination Block edit field in the Consolidation dialog box.

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Consolidator Overview


Consolidator Results

When you have specified blocks and an operation, click the Consolidate button to perform the consolidation. Results appear in the destination block and overwrite any other data there. By default, consolidation results are formulas. Consolidator Options  describes how to produce them as values.

The dimension of the destination block affects the dimension of the consolidation result. If the source blocks and destination block have the same number of columns and rows, the Consolidator displays all results in their corresponding position in the destination block. For example, the upper left cell of one source block is combined with the upper left cell of a second source block; the results appear in the upper left cell of the destination block. This is true even when those upper left cells are in different rows.

When the source and destination blocks have different dimensions, the Consolidator combines equivalent cells when possible. Cells without equivalents are handled differently depending on the operator. If the destination block is smaller than a source block, results are limited to the size of the destination block.

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Consolidator Overview


Consolidator Options

Option settings determine whether consolidation results are formulas or values and whether data field labels are used in the consolidation.

Displaying Results as Formulas

When Output With Formulas is checked (it's checked by default), the Consolidator enters results as formulas in the destination block. When Output With Formulas is unchecked, results are entered as values.

Consolidating with Labels

Suppose you need to consolidate several blocks of equivalent data entered in different row and column orders. As long as matching data has identical row and/or column labels, the Consolidator can combine it and sort the results in any order you specify.

Check Use Labels In Top Row to use labels in the top row of Consolidator source and destination blocks; check Use Labels In Left Column to use labels in the left column. You can check either or both options.

The Consolidator matches column labels, then matches row labels within columns to find equivalent cells for consolidation. Then it locates cells in the destination block with the same column and row labels and puts the results there. If the destination block does not contain labels, data is entered according to label order in the first source block. The destination block is formatted to match the first source block.

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Consolidator Overview


Naming and Saving Consolidations

To save consolidation setups for future use,

1.	Click the Save As button in the Consolidation dialog box.

2.	When the dialog box appears, type a name in it.

3.	Click OK to enter the name in the Consolidations list.

To reuse a saved consolidation, click its name in the Consolidations list and then perform the consolidation. Current contents of the source blocks are combined; new results appear in the destination block or blocks.

If you want to save a "snapshot" of consolidation source and destination block contents, use the Consolidator within the Scenario Manager; choose Tools|Scenario Manager to display the Scenario Manager dialog box and set a scenario baseline before performing the consolidation (see Using the Scenario Manager for more information).

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Consolidator Overview


Deleting Consolidations

To remove a consolidation setup from the Consolidations list, click the name in the list then click the Delete button in the Consolidation dialog box. Notebook data is not changed, but that consolidation setup is no longer available.

See Also

Consolidator Guidelines

Consolidator Overview


Creating Frequency Distributions

Frequency distributions show how many values in a block fall within given value intervals. To create a frequency distribution table:

1.	Set up a bin of ranges to analyze in a single column with a column of blank cells to the right. The ranges must be in ascending order.

2.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency.

3.	Specify the value block(s), the block of values to analyze; separate multiple blocks with commas ( , ).

4.	Specify the bin block, the block of values you set up in step 1.

5.	Choose OK or press Enter. Quattro Pro calculates the frequency distribution of values within each bin range and enter the results to the right of the bin block.

See Also

Data Analysis

Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency

Setting Up a Frequency Bin Block


Setting Up a Frequency Bin Block

A bin block contains the range of intervals you want analyzed. The block must be a single column with a column of blank cells to its right (where the results will be written).

You can use Block|Fill to create the bin. Numbers must appear in ascending order, from top to bottom of the column.

Each value in the bin block represents all values from it down to the previous value. (The first value represents any value less than or equal to itself.)

The result block will be one cell longer than the bin block. Its last cell contains the number of values found that were greater than the final number in the bin.

See Also

Creating Frequency Distributions

Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency


Other Basic Analyses

You can supplement the statistical information in your notebook with appropriate @functions. For example, you could include these formulas at the end of the weekly sales figures, contained in a block named SALES:

@SUM(SALES)	calculates total sales.

@COUNT(SALES)	calculates the number of sales in the column.

@AVG(SALES)	calculates the average sales amount.

See Also

Creating Frequency Distributions

Statistical @Functions


Graphing Frequency Distributions

To create an XY graph of a frequency distribution, specify the bin block as the x-axis series and the results as the first series of values.

See Also

Creating Frequency Distributions

XY and High-Low Graphs


Performing Regression Analysis

You can create a regression analysis table showing how sets of independent variables can affect a certain set of dependent variables.

1.	Choose the variable data you want to analyze. You can have one dependent variable that you believe is influenced by independent variables; for example, quarterly revenues. You can have up to 150 independent variables that seem to have a positive or negative effect on the dependent variable; for example, advertising expenditures and number of sales calls.

2.	Make sure the data blocks you want to use in the regression analysis have the same number of rows.

3.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression. Quattro Pro displays the Regression dialog box.

4.	Specify the column of dependent data.

5.	Specify the column(s) of independent data; they may be in discontiguous columns.

6.	Specify the upper left cell of the output block where you want Quattro Pro to write the regression information.

7.	If you want to force the y-intercept value to zero, set Y Intercept to Zero.

8.	Choose OK or press Enter.

9.	Regression data displays in the regression output block.

Regression tables are not automatically updated. If you alter the values in the independent and dependent blocks, use Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression again to see the new results.

See Also

Data Analysis

Regression Dialog Box


Introducing Matrix Operations

A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers. Each column in the matrix corresponds to one variable and each row corresponds to a linear constraint.

Matrix operations can help you solve sets of linear formulas and equations. For example, suppose you have these four unique equations describing variables w, x, y, and z:

1w+1x+2y+3z=10

3w+2x+2y+1z=20

1w+0x+3y+4z=15

1w+1x+0y+1z=6

You can express the coefficients of these equations (the numbers multiplying the variables w, x, y, and z) in this "4 by 4" coefficient matrix:

1 1 2 3

3 2 2 1

1 0 3 4

1 1 0 1

And you can express the results in this "4 by 1" constant matrix (the first variable is at the top of the list, the second is next, and so on):

10

20

15

 6

You can use matrix multiplication and inversion to find the value of each variable in the second matrix that satisfies the constraints in the first matrix.

See Also

Data Analysis

Inverting a Matrix

Multiplying Two Matrices

Solving Matrix Problems


Multiplying Two Matrices

Matrix multiplication multiplies the values in two matrices and displays the results in a third. The number of columns in the first matrix must equal the number of rows in the second matrix. To multiply matrices,

1.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply.

2.	Specify Matrix 1, the first matrix you want to multiply.

3.	Specify Matrix 2, the second matrix.

4.	Specify the Destination, the top left cell of the area where you want to write the resulting matrix.

5.	Choose OK or press Enter. Quattro Pro multiplies the two matrices and displays the results in the Destination block.

See Also

Inverting a Matrix

Matrix Multiplication Dialog Box

Solving Matrix Problems


Inverting a Matrix

When you invert a matrix, you create another matrix with this feature. When you multiply a matrix by its inverse, the resultant matrix is an identity matrix (all 1s and 0s, with only a single diagonal of 1s). To invert a matrix,

1.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert. The Invert dialog box displays.

2.	Specify the Source, the matrix block you want to invert.

3.	Specify the Destination, the upper left cell of the block where you want to write the inverted matrix. If you specify the same block as the invert block, the inverted matrix overwrites the existing matrix.

4.	Choose OK or press Enter. Quattro Pro inverts the matrix and writes the results into the Destination block, overwriting any data in the block.

See Also

Matrix Inversion Dialog Box

Multiplying Two Matrices

Solving Matrix Problems


Solving Matrix Problems

You can use matrix arithmetic to solve sets of "square" linear equations, those with the same number of rows and columns in the coefficient matrix. For example, consider this set of linear equations:

2x+3y=31

 x+2y=19

The coefficient and constant matrices are

Coefficent	Constant

2  3	31

1  2	19

Follow these steps to solve them with matrix inversion and multiplication:

1.	Invert the coefficient matrix to get the invert matrix.

2.	Multiply the invert matrix by the constant matrix.

3.	The solution matrix contains the results (x=5 and y=7):

5

7

If you multiply the coefficient matrix by the solution matrix, the result is the constant matrix:

2  3	 5  	31

times	     equals

1  2	 7	19

See Also

Introducing Matrix Operations

Matrix Inversion

Matrix Multiplication


Introducing "What-if" Tables

"What-if" tables show the results of substituting a number of values for one or two variables in a formula.

Also called sensitivity tables, what-if tables can answer questions like these: "What if my company's expenses increase 10%, 20%, 30%? And, what if production increases 10% to 25% at the same time?" What-if tables can also be used to look up values, such as postal charges for different parcel weights.

You can create basic tables that use data you supply, or tables can refer to data already entered in the notebook.

These topics describe how to build what-if tables:

Creating One-Variable "What-if" Tables

Creating Two-Variable "What-if" Tables

Tip:	The easiest way to create what-if tables is to use the What-If Expert.

 Before starting the Whatif Expert, first enter one or more formulas to investigate. You can then enter several formulas that include the same cell (for example, +B2+6, 7*B2, and +B2/8) or enter one formula that refers to two cells (for example, +B2+C3/2).

Next, enter a value in all of the cells that are referenced in the formulas.

Then, display the What-If Expert. Click the Experts button, then click the What-If Expert icon, or choose Help|Experts|What-If. Follow the instructions in the Expert dialog boxes.

See Also

Data Analysis


Creating One-Variable "What-if" Tables

One-variable what-if tables are created by varying a single value that is referenced by one or more "what-if" formulas. You can build a basic table that uses only the data you supply, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the spreadsheet. To create a one-variable what-if table,

1.	Set up a column of values to substitute in one or more formulas.

2.	Set up one or more formulas that refer to a blank cell (the input cell). Enter these in the row above the first substitution value, starting in the first column to the right of the substitution column.

3.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If.

4.	Check One Free Variable to indicate the type of table to build.

5.	Specify the Data Table block containing both formulas and substitution values.

6.	Specify Input Cell, the blank cell referenced in the formulas.

7.	Choose Generate. Quattro Pro calculates each formula using the values in the substitution column and fills in the column below each formula with calculated values.

See Also

Creating Two-Variable "What-if" Tables

Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If Dialog Box

Introducing "What-if" Tables


Creating Two-Variable "What-if" Tables

Two-variable what-if tables show the results of varying two values in a "what-if" formula. You can build a basic table that uses only the data you supply, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the spreadsheet. To create a two-variable "what-if" table,

1.	Create a column of substitution values.

2.	In the row above and to the right of the substitution column, enter a second set of substitution values.

3.	In the top left cell of the table, enter the formula to be used in calculating table values. It should refer to two blank cells.

4.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If.

5.	Check Two Free Variables to indicate the type of table to build.

6.	Specify the Data Table block, including the formula and both substitution ranges.

7.	Specify Column Input Cell and Row Input Cell, the two blank cells referenced in the what-if formula.

8.	Choose Generate to create a table of what-if values to the right of the substitution column, below the substitution row.

See Also

Creating One-Variable "What-if" Tables

Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If Dialog Box

Introducing "What-if" Tables


Goal Seeking with Solve For

Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For lets you calculate a formula backward, starting with the result and solving for a variable that produces that result. You just specify the result you want, then indicate which variable Quattro Pro can adjust to reach that result. To find a solution,

1.	Enter the formula to be solved. It should reference one variable cell.

2.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For.

3.	Choose Formula Cell, and specify the cell containing the formula.

4.	Choose Target Value, and enter the result you want from the formula, or reference a cell containing the target.

5.	Choose Variable Cell, and enter the cell Quattro Pro can vary to achieve the result you want.

6.	Change the calculation options, if necessary: Max Iterations determines how many passes Solve For can make to solve the formula, and Accuracy specifies how close Solve For must get to the Target Value (the default is 0.0005).

7.	Choose OK to solve the formula. The solution displays in the variable cell.

See Also

Creating Formulas

Data Analysis

Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For Dialog Box


Finding Solutions with Optimizer

The Optimizer helps find optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems. You can

evaluate formulas with one or more variables

solve sets of linear and nonlinear equations and inequalities

find a minimum or maximum solution, or meet an exact goal

find values that satisfy limits, or constraints

Once you define a problem, you can save Optimizer settings for future use. You can print reports of interim and final problem solutions.

To solve a problem with Optimizer,

1.	Define the problem. You can

maximize or minimize a single formula, or make it meet a target value

solve a set of equations or inequalities

2.	Assign a cell to each variable in the problem.

3.	If you are solving a single formula, enter it into a cell. The formula should reference any variable cells you have assigned.

4.	If you are solving a set of expressions, enter their left terms into cells; you may enter the right term into adjacent cells, or enter the value into the Optimizer directly when adding constraints.

5.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer.

6.	If you have a goal-seeking problem with one formula, enter its location in the Solution Cell input box. Choose Max to maximize the formula, Min to minimize it, or None if you are not specifying a solution cell. If you want the solution cell formula to reach an exact value, check Target Value and enter the value in the Target Value edit field.

7.	Enter the variable cell or cells in the Variable Cell(s) input box. You can enter them as blocks (A1..A4) or lists (A1, B1, C1).

8.	If you are solving a set of expressions, add them as constraints. You can also enter constraints when goal seeking to set upper and lower limits for the Solution Cell formula. For instructions, see Entering Constraints.

9.	Choose Solve to solve the problem; the solution displays in the variable cells.

For best results, start with reasonable values in the variable cells.

See Also

Data Analysis

Loading and Saving Optimizer Models

Producing Optimizer Reports

Setting Optimizer Options

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer Dialog Box


Entering and Editing Constraints

Constraints are expressions that limit the values of Optimizer solution and variable cells. They require these cells to fall within upper or lower bounds, such as a budgeted figure you cannot exceed or a minimum you must manufacture. Constraints can also specify a target, such as a production order you must fill.

To enter a constraint, choose Add in the Optimizer dialog box. The Add Constraints dialog box appears, with options for entering each part of the constraint:

Cell

The left side of the expression; a cell containing a formula that must be bounded, or that must equal a target value. You can select a single cell, or select a block of cells that must all have the same bound.

Operator

The operator that connects both terms of the constraint and describes their relationship: less than or equal to (<=), equal to (=), greater than or equal to (>=), or Integer (Cell must be a whole number).

Constant (constraint value)

The right side of the expression; a cell that contains the target or bound, or a value you type in the space. If you specify a cell, it must contain a value, not a formula. You can specify a block of cells equal to or larger than the number of cells included on the left side of the constraint. Each cell on the left is compared with the corresponding cell on the right. A single cell on the left is compared with the upper left cell of a block on the right.

To edit a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box and choose Change. To delete a constraint, select it and choose Delete.

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer Dialog Box


Loading and Saving Optimizer Models

The last Optimizer problem you defined is always saved with the notebook. To save more than one problem, or model,

1.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer|Options|Save Model.

2.	Identify a block to hold the model. The block must be three columns wide with enough rows to hold the model. You can specify the cell in the upper left corner of the block.

3.	For convenience, use Block|Names to name the block. Use a meaningful name to make it easier to load when the time comes.

To re-use the model,

1.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer|Options|Load Model.

2.	Specify the block containing the model you want to use.

3.	Choose OK.

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Producing Optimizer Reports

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer Dialog Box


Producing Optimizer Reports

To produce an Answer or Detail Report, or both,

1.	Define the Optimizer problem.

2.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer|Options|Reporting.

3.	Specify a blank block, or just the upper left cell of a blank block where Optimizer can write either or both reports.

4.	Choose OK to return to the Options dialog box. Choose OK to return to the Optimizer dialog box. Choose Solve to generate the report(s).

See Also

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer Dialog Box

Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer|Options|Reporting


Advanced Analysis Tools List

Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools lets you perform a number of advanced statistical, numerical, and financial analysis tasks. For a list of Analysis Tools tasks, see Using the Advanced Analysis Tools.

Available tools are listed below in the order they appear in the Analysis Tools dialog box.

Advanced Regression

Amortization Schedule

Anova: One-Way

Anova: Two-Way with Replication

Anova: Two-Way Without Replication

Correlation

Covariance

Descriptive Statistics

Exponential Smoothing

F-Test

Fourier

Histogram

Mortgage Refinancing

Moving Average

Random Number

Rank and Percentile

Sampling

t-Test

z-Test

Each of the analysis tools has an equivalent macro command.

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Data Analysis


Using the Advanced Analysis Tools

In addition to other Tools menu options and @functions, Quattro Pro offers a number of advanced analysis tools. You can use them to analyze statistical, engineering, and financial data. See Advanced Analysis Tools List for a list of available tools.

To use the advanced analysis tools, choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools to display the Analysis Tools dialog box. These topics describe the analyses and how to perform them:

Analysis Tools Guidelines

Arranging Your Data

Describing Data

Testing the Relationship Of Samples

Correlation

Covariance

Smoothing Data

Creating Histograms

Generating Random Numbers

Ranking Data

Performing Linear Regression

Sampling Data

Testing the Means Of Small Samples

Testing the Means Of Large Samples

Analyzing Variance

Comparing Variances Of Two Samples

Generating an Amortization Schedule

Refinancing a Mortgage

Performing Fourier Analysis


Analysis Tools Guidelines

Follow these steps to use analysis tools in Quattro Pro:

1.	Choose Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools. The Analysis Tools dialog box appears.

2.	Click an analysis tool and choose OK.

3.	In the dialog box for the analysis tool, specify the input block, output block, and other options. You can also click the Help button for information about the dialog box.

4.	Choose OK to generate the output block beginning at the specified cell.

Tip:	In edit fields that require a cell or block address, you can click the Point Mode button [image] to select a cell or block from the notebook.

As a shortcut, you can use the Analysis Expert to perform an analysis. Choose Help|Experts|Analysis Tools and follow the directions.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Arranging Your Data

Before you use an analysis tool, make sure the input block you are analyzing is arranged properly and contains the right kind of data (that is, numeric data, not strings). The analysis tools have varying restrictions on the size and contents of the input block; read the description of the input block option for each tool in the next sections.

For many analysis tools, the input block can contain column or row labels. If the input block you specify contains labels, check the Labels options in the tool dialog box.

Caution: Many of the analysis tools create large output blocks. Make sure you specify the output block in a place where the tool will not overwrite existing data.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Describing Data

Use the Descriptive Statistics tool to characterize a sample. It computes the mean, variance, median, mode, standard deviation, kurtosis, skewness, range, minimum, and maximum of a distribution.

Input Block

The block of data you want to analyze.

Output Block(s)

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table(s).

Nth Largest

Displays a separate row in the output table for the nth largest value. Enter 1 to display the largest value.

Nth Smallest

Displays a separate row in the output table for the nth smallest value. Enter 1 to display the smallest value.

Confidence

Displays the confidence level of the means for the input block; the default is 95%.

Group By

Specifies whether data in the input block is grouped by Row or Column.

Labels

Specifies whether the first row or column of the input block contains labels. If the input block you specified does not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

Summary

Displays the following statistics for each data set in the input block:

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Testing the Relationship Of Samples

You can use the Correlation and Covariance tools to analyze the relationship between two sets of data by producing matrices of correlation and covariance.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Correlation

The Correlation tool computes the correlation coefficient of the numeric values in two or more sets of data. Correlation coefficients range in value from -1.0 to 1.0. A correlation coefficient of zero means that two variables are not correlated. A variable correlated with itself returns a correlation coefficient of 1.0.

Input Block

The block of data to analyze. The block must contain two or more sets of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro starts the resulting output table; the table will extend to the right and downward as needed.

Group By

Specifies whether data in the input block is grouped by Row or Column.

Labels

Specifies whether the first row or column of the input block contains labels. If the input block you specified does not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Covariance

The Covariance tool returns the covariance matrix of two or more data sets. A positive covariance indicates that as values increase in one data set they increase in another (the sets move together). A negative covariance indicates that as values increase in one data set they decrease in another (the sets move apart). Unrelated data sets have a covariance approaching zero.

Input Block

The block of data to analyze. The block must contain two or more sets of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro starts the resulting output table; the table will extend to the right and downward as needed. The diagonal of the output table shows the variance of each range.

Group By

Specifies whether data in the input block is grouped by Row or Column.

Labels

Specifies whether the first row or column of the input block contains labels. If the input block you specified does not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

Note: Covariance, unlike correlation, is scale dependent; related data sets yield different covariances if their scales differ.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Smoothing Data

You can use two analysis tools to smooth out variations in a series of values: Moving Average and Exponential Smoothing.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Moving Average

The Moving Average tool generates forecast values by finding the average over a specified number of preceding intervals for each value in a data set. Unlike an average of all the values in the set, the moving average lets you focus on rising and falling trends in the data.

Input Block

The block of values to analyze. The block must be either a single column or row; it must not contain labels.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro starts the resulting output table; the table will extend to the right and downward as needed. If there are not enough values to forecast a value, Quattro Pro returns NA (Not Available).

Interval

Specifies the number of values to include in the moving average; the default is 3.

Standard Errors

Specifies whether to include a column in the output table for standard error values.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Exponential Smoothing

The Exponential Smoothing tool, like the Moving Average tool, smooths out variations in a data series. After using the Moving Average tool to create a set of forecast values, you can use the Exponential Smoothing tool to smooth each forecast value and adjust for error in the prior period.

Input Block

The block of values to smooth. The block must be either a single column or row; it must not contain labels.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro starts the block of smoothed values. If there are not enough values to forecast a value or calculate a standard error, Quattro Pro returns NA (not available).

Damping Factor

Specifies the constant used to smooth the data. The Damping Factor indicates the percentage for error that the prior forecast can be adjusted; the default is 30%.

Standard Errors

Specifies whether to include a column in the output table for standard error values.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Creating Histograms

You can use the Histogram tool to view the shape of a sample population's distribution. It calculates the probability and cumulative distributions for a sample population, based on a series of bins you define. Histograms are often used to graph the data in frequency distribution tables.

Input Block

The block of data to analyze. The block can consist of one or more columns or rows of numeric values. (The block should not contain labels.)

Bin Block

A block of values that defines the bin ranges for the data. If you do not specify a bin block, bins are distributed evenly from the minimum to the maximum value in the input block, with the number of bins equal to the square root of the number of values in the input block.

Cumulative Percentage

Specifies whether to generate a column for cumulative percentages in the output table.

Pareto

Specifies whether to create an output table with data in both descending frequency order and ascending Bin Block order. (If you do not check Pareto, the output table displays data only in ascending Bin Block order.)

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Generating Random Numbers

The Random Number tool generates random variables from various distributions. You can select one of seven types of distributions.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro starts the resulting output table; the table will extend to the right and downward as needed.

Variables

(Columns) identifies the number of columns in the output block.

Points

(Rows) identifies the number of rows in the output block. (Points is not an option for the Patterned Distribution Type.)

Seed

A starting value for the random number generation algorithm. You can use Seed to generate the same sample of random numbers again.

The remaining options in the dialog box vary depending on the Distribution Type you select:

Distribution	Description

Uniform	Every value has an equal probability of being selected. Specify the upper bound and lower bound limits for the distribution.

Normal	Has the qualities of a symmetrical, bell-shaped curve. Specify two parameters of the distribution: the mean and standard deviation.

Bernoulli	Has two possible outcomes, failure or success, represented by 0 and 1, respectively. Specify the probability of the outcome of the Bernoulli trial.

Binomial	Represents the distribution of successful outcomes in a given number of independent Bernoulli trials; for example, a coin toss experiment produces a binomial distribution. Specify the probability of the outcome of each trial and the number of trials.

Poisson	The distribution of values in any interval depends on the length of the interval and the constant Lambda, the expected number of occurrences in an interval.

Patterned	Produces a pattern of repeated values and sequences. Specify lower and upper bounds for the values, a step value (an increment between the lower and upper bounds), the number of times each number is repeated, and the number of times each sequence is repeated.

Discrete	Generates random numbers drawn from a sample block of values; each sample value has a discrete probability value, and the sum of the probability values equals 1.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Uniform Distribution Options

Every value has an equal probability of being selected. Specify the upper bound and lower bound limits for the distribution.

Lower Bound

A value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 0

Upper Bound

A value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 1

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Generating Random Numbers

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Normal Distribution Options

Has the qualities of a symmetrical, bell-shaped curve. Specify two parameters of the distribution: the mean and standard deviation.

Mean

A value indicating the mean of the set of numbers to generate; the default is 100

Std Deviation

A value indicating the standard deviation of the set of numbers to generate; the default is 10

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Generating Random Numbers

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Bernoulli Distribution Options

Has two possible outcomes, failure or success, represented by 0 and 1, respectively. Specify the probability of the outcome of the Bernoulli trial.

Probability

A value indicating the probability of success on each trial; the value must be greater than or equal to 0% and less than or equal to 100%; the default is 50%

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Generating Random Numbers

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Binomial Distribution Options

Represents the distribution of successful outcomes in a given number of independent Bernoulli trials; for example, a coin toss experiment produces a binomial distribution. Specify the probability of the outcome of each trial and the number of trials.

Probability

A value indicating the probability of success on each trial; the value must be greater than or equal to 0% and less than or equal to 100%; the default is 50%

Trials

The number of trials to run; the default is 10

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Generating Random Numbers

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Poisson Distribution Options

The distribution of values in any interval depends on the length of the interval and the constant Lambda, the expected number of occurrences in an interval.

Lambda

A parameter to the Poisson distribution representing the expected number of  occurrences in an interval; the default is 1

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Generating Random Numbers

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Patterned Distribution Options

Produces a pattern of repeated values and sequences. Specify lower and upper bounds for the values, a step value (an increment between the lower and upper bounds), the number of times each number is repeated, and the number of times each sequence is repeated.

From

A value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 1

To

A value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 100

Step

Increment used to generate numbers between From and To; the default is 1

Number Repeat Rate

The number of times to repeat each value; the default is 1

Sequence Repeat Rate

The number of times to repeat each sequence of values; the default is 1

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Generating Random Numbers

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Discrete Distribution Options

Generates random numbers drawn from a sample block of values; each sample value has a discrete probability value.

Probability Range

A two-column block containing numbers in the first column and probability values (between 0 and 1) in the second column. The sum of the probability values must equal 1.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Generating Random Numbers

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Ranking Data

The Rank and Percentile tool computes the ordinal and percent rank of each value in a sample.

Input Block

The block of data you want to analyze.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Group By

Specifies whether data in the input block is grouped by Row or Column.

Labels

Specifies whether the first row or column of the input block contains labels. If the input block you specified does not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

Note: To determine the relative ranking and the percentage ranking of values in a sample, you can also use the separate @functions @RANK and @PERCENTRANK, respectively.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Performing Linear Regression

The Advanced Regression tool performs linear regression analysis, which shows the relationship between a set of independent variables and a certain dependent variable. In addition to creating a summary output table, the Advanced Regression tool creates output tables for residuals and probability data. For simpler regression analysis, see Performing Regression Analysis.

Y Range

The block of y values (the dependent variables). The y values should be in a single column.

X Range

The block of x values (the independent variables). The x values should be in one or more columns.

Labels

Indicates whether labels are in the first row of both Y Range and X Range.

Confidence

Displays the confidence level of the means for the input block; the default is 95%.

Summary Output

Identifies the upper left cell of the resulting summary table. (When you specify the block, allow at least seven columns.)

Residual Output

Identifies the upper left cell of the resulting residuals output table. (When you specify the block, allow at least four columns.)

Probability Output

Identifies the upper left cell of the resulting probability output table. (When you specify the block, allow at least two columns.)

Residuals

Specifies whether you want to include residuals in the residuals output table.

Std Residuals

Specifies whether you want to include standardized residuals in the residuals output table.

Y-intercept 0

Specifies whether you want the regression line to pass through the y-axis at zero. If you do not specify the y-intercept as a zero, Quattro Pro generates a y-intercept from an internal set of variables.

Note: Output blocks cannot overlap; make sure the ones you specify allow for the recommended number of columns. Try placing output blocks side by side instead of on top of one another.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Sampling Data

The Sampling tool creates a random or periodic sample from a given population of values. Use the Sampling tool to work with a subset of data from a large database. If the population consists of periodic data, you can create a periodic sample to select data from a particular cycle.

Input Block

The block of data to sample. For periodic sampling of an input block with multiple columns, Quattro Pro samples each column in order from left to right.

Output Block(s)

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table(s).

Sample Type

Specifies the type of sample, Random or Periodic; the default is Periodic. In a random sample, every value in the input block has an equal probability of being selected. A periodic sample selects every nth value from the input block.

No. of Samples

(For random sampling only) Specifies the number of values in the output block; the default is 1.

Interval

(For periodic sampling only) Specifies the periodic interval used to sample data; the default is 1. For example, 3 means every third value from the input block is selected.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Testing the Means Of Small Samples

t-Tests test the hypothesis that means from two small samples are equal. Quattro Pro provides t-Tests for samples with matched pairs, for independent samples with equal variances, and for independent samples with unequal variances.

t-Test Type

Specifies the type of t-Test. Select either Paired Two-Sample for Means, Two-Sample with Equal Variances, or Two-Sample with Unequal Variances.

Variable 1 Input

The first column or row of numeric data to compare. The block should be a single column or row.

Variable 2 Input

The second column or row of numeric data to compare. The block should be a single column or row.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Alpha

The significance level of the test; the default is 5%.

Difference

A value indicating the hypothesized difference (the null hypothesis) in the means between Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input; the default is zero. Difference does not display if the t-Test Type is Two-Sample with Unequal Variances.

Labels

Indicates whether labels are in the first row of both Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input. If the input blocks you specified do not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


t-Test:Paired Two-Sample For Means

The t-Test: Paired Two-Sample for Means tool performs a paired two-sample Student's t-Test for means. Each value from one data set is paired with a value from another set; both sets must have the same number of values.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


t-Test: Two-Sample with Equal Variances

The t-Test: Two-Sample with Equal Variances tool performs a two-sample Student's t-Test for means using two independent (rather than paired) samples with equal variances.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


t-Test: Two-Sample with Unequal Variances

The t-Test: Two-Sample with Unequal Variances tool performs a two-sample Student's t-Test for means using two independent (rather than paired) samples with unequal variances.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Testing the Means Of Large Samples

z-Tests test the hypothesis that the means of two large samples (or populations) are equal. The z-Test tool performs a two-sample z-test. You must specify the known variances for each sample.

Variable 1 Block

The first column or row of data to compare.

Variable 2 Block

The second column or row of data to compare.

Variable 1 Variance

A value indicating the variance of Variable 1 Input.

Variable 2 Variance

A value indicating the variance of Variable 2 Input.

Alpha

The significance level for the test; the default is 5%.

Difference

A value indicating the hypothesized difference (the null hypothesis) in the means between Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input; the default is zero.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Analyzing Variance

Analysis of variance (Anova) tools help determine if two or more samples come from the same population by calculating the F-statistic, the ratio of the mean variance between samples to the mean variance within samples. The Anova tools are commonly used in cases involving more than two samples (where t-Tests cannot be used).

Quattro Pro provides three analysis tools for analyzing the variance between data sets:

Anova: One-Way

Anova: Two-Way with Replication

Anova: Two-Way Without Replication

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Anova: One-Way

The Anova: One-Way tool performs a single-factor analysis of variance with equal numbers of observations.

Input Block

The block of data to analyze. The block must contain two or more sets of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Alpha

The significance level at which to evaluate values for the F-statistic; the default is 5%.

Group By

Specifies whether data in the input block is grouped by Row or Column.

Labels

Specifies whether the first row or column of the input block contains labels. If the input block you specified does not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Anova: Two-Way with Replication

The Anova: Two-Way with Replication tool performs a two-factor analysis of variance using more than one sample for each group of data.

Input Block

Must contain two or more sets of data arranged in columns. The first row must contain labels for each group. The first column must contain row labels to indicate the beginning of each sample.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Rows Per Sample

Indicates the number of rows in each sample.

Alpha

The significance level at which to evaluate values for the F-statistic; the default is 5%.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Anova: Two-Way Without Replication

Anova: Two-Way without Replication performs a two-factor analysis of variance using only one sample for each group of data.

Input Block

The block of data to analyze. The block must contain two or more sets of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Alpha

The significance level at which to evaluate values for the F-statistic; the default is 5%.

Labels

Specifies whether the first row or column of the input block contains labels. If the input block you specified does not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Comparing Variances Of Two Samples

The F-test tool compares the population variances of two data sets. If the variances of two data sets are significantly different you can hypothesize the samples were drawn from different parent populations.

Variable 1 Input

The first column or row of numeric data to compare.

Variable 2 Input

The second column or row of numeric data to compare.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Labels

Specifies whether the first row or column of the input block contains labels. If the input block you specified does not contain labels, leave Labels unchecked; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Generating an Amortization Schedule

The Amortization Schedule tool creates a table showing the amortization schedule for a mortgage. The table shows principal and interest payments, and interest paid from start to date and from year to date.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Interest Rate (%)

The yearly interest rate; the default is 12%.

Term (years)

The number of years of the loan; the default is 30.

Original Balance

The original loan balance; the default is $100,000.

Ending Balance

The balance at loan completion; the default is $0.00.

Last Year

The last year through which the amortization table is generated; the default is the value entered for Term, which generates a table through the end of the loan.

You can enter fractions for Term and Last Year to represent months. For example, 18+5/12 represents 18 years and 5 months; 100/12 represents 100 months.

After you choose OK, wait for the tool to generate the amortization table. The table takes longer to generate for long-term loans.

The table consists of two sections. The top section is the input section of the table. Most of the values in the input section correspond to options in the Amortization Schedule dialog box. One additional value, 1st PMT, sets the first payment date for the mortgage. Change any of these input values to customize the bottom section of the table.

The bottom section of the table consists of 10 columns:

Column	Description

Pmt #	Number of payments from 1 to the last payment of the loan or the last one in the last year specified by Last Year.

Date	Date on which the corresponding payment number is due (mortgage payments are typically due on the first day of the month following the month covered by the payment); the default date format is Month-Year (MMM-YY).

Yr Rate	Equivalent yearly interest rate for the period; for fixed rate loans this rate does not change; for variable rate loans, specify an estimated average interest rate when you create the table, then replace individual monthly rate values later by overwriting the calculated values.

P&I Payment	Shows the principal and interest payment for the corresponding payment period. This will not vary for fixed loans, but would vary with variable interest loans or other variable loans such as graduated payment loans. In the case of "graduated payment" loans, you can type in the actual P&I payment to replace the calculated value. Even if this results in a negative amortization, the new Balance and other columns calculate correctly. (Negative amortization occurs when the P&I payment is insufficient to cover the interest charged for the period, and so the loan balance increases by the shortage amount.)

Principal	Principal portion of the P&I payment.

Interest	Interest portion of the P&I payment.

Extra Prin	Amount of extra principal per pay period. If you intend to pay extra principal for some portion of the loan, enter the amount in this column at the row of the corresponding payment number. The extra principal amount is included in every row that follows. If extra principal payments vary month to month, type in the actual extra principal amount wherever it changes.

New Balance	Balance after each payment. The balance decreases with each payment, and eventually reaches zero (or Ending Balance, if it is not zero). The amortization table stops short of zero if Last Year precedes the end of the loan.

Cum. Interest	Cumulative interest paid through the corresponding payment

Yearly Total Int	Cumulative interest paid for each calendar year. Use this column to calculate the yearly interest paid for tax purposes.

When you create the amortization table, you may need to increase the width of columns in the table to display the data. You can use the Fit button [image] in the Main Toolbar.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Refinancing a Mortgage

The Mortgage Refinancing tool creates a table of information allowing you to compare prospective loans with the current mortgage you want to refinance.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Current Loan: Remaining Term

The number of years remaining in the loan; the default is 30.

Current Loan: Balance

The current loan balance.

Current Loan: Rate

The current yearly interest rate.

Candidate Loan: Rate

The annual interest rate on the candidate loan.

Candidate Loan: Fees (%)

Percentage fees ("points") for the candidate loan.

The table created by the Mortgage Refinancing tool consists of two sections: Current Loan and Candidate Loans.

In the Current Loan section, Current Balance, Current Rate, and Rem. Term take values from the Mortgage Refinancing dialog box. If you have paid extra principal at any time during the current loan, overwrite the value calculated for Equivalent P&I with the value of your actual monthly principal and interest. Enter a value for Future Value if the mortgage requires a balloon payment. Enter any loan-related fixed monthly fees in the Fixed Mo. Loan Fees cell, such as private mortgage insurance; do not include taxes or hazard insurance fees, which are not loan-related.

The Candidate Loans section of the table consists of 19 columns:

Column	Description

Loan Description	Name of the candidate loan.

Current Balance	Balance of the current loan.

Cash Out	Cash removed from equity (a positive value), or cash paid up front into the loan to pay down balance or to prevent financing or loan fees (a negative value).

Pct Fees	Percentage fees ("points") charged by the lender (for example, 1.75%).

Fixed Fees	Fixed fees involved in the refinancing; if a loss (for example, a loan prepayment penalty), enter a positive value; if a gain (for example, a prorated return of prepaid Private Mortgage Insurance from payoff of current loan), enter a negative number.

Loan Amount	Amount of the candidate loan.

Rate	Annual interest rate of the candidate loan.

Term (yrs)	Loan term in years.

Future Value	Future value of the candidate loan; enter a positive value if the loan requires a balloon payment.

P&I Payment	Principal and interest payment for each period.

Fixed Mo. Loan Fees	Fixed monthly loan fees (such as private mortgage insurance).

Loan Pmt	Monthly payment (Loan Pmt = P&I Payment + Fixed Mo. Loan Fees).

Savings: Gross	The difference in the monthly payment of the candidate loan and the current loan; if negative, the candidate's monthly payment is higher; if positive, the candidate's monthly payment is lower and all gross savings are applied as extra principal.

Term +/-	Portion of gross savings due to lengthening the term of the loan; if the term is lengthened, Term +/- is negative; if the term is shortened, Term +/- is positive.

Cash I/O	Portion of gross savings due to closing costs paid up front (a negative number), or the amount of gross savings that has already been reduced by cash taken out (a positive number enclosed by "><", which does not affect the Net amount).

Net	Sum of savings from Gross, Term +/-, and Cash I/O.

Payback (Years): When	The initial estimate of the number of years it will take for the candidate loan to pay for the cost of refinancing; displays "Never" if the refinance loses money.

Loan Life	The number of years you plan to keep the property before selling it or refinancing.

Bal chg	The difference in the balance at the end of Loan Life of the candidate loan and the current loan due to extra principal paid on the candidate loan; a negative number represents money saved.

After you create the table, enter values for the candidate loan such as Loan Description, Cash Out (if you removed cash from equity or paid additional principal), Pct Fees (points for the candidate loan), Fixed Fees, Rate, Term, Future Value, Fixed Monthly Loan Fees, and Loan Life. All other values in the table are calculated.

Note: To ensure accurate calculation of the percentage fees and loan amount for the candidate loan, increase the number of recalculation iterations for the notebook from 1 to 5; right-click the notebook's title bar to display the notebook Object Inspector.

In the Payback section of the table, enter a number of years for Loan Life to indicate how long you plan to keep the candidate loan before selling or refinancing. Payback occurs when the balance of the candidate loan would be equal to that of the current loan, that is, when Bal Chg equals zero; for equal comparison of the loans, any cash put into the candidate loan is alternatively considered a lump sum extra principal on the current loan. You can accurately determine the payback period by trying alternate estimates in the Loan Life column until Bal Chg is near zero. (Bal Chg is a negative number when Loan Life is greater than the payback period.)

To compare several candidate loans with the current loan, copy the row for the first candidate loan into one or more rows below it, then enter information for each loan.

Gross savings indicates how much lower the monthly payment is for the candidate loan compared to the current loan; all gross savings are applied as extra principal. Net savings indicates money saved. It is possible for a candidate loan to have a lower monthly payment but still not save money. For example, a candidate loan can have a lower monthly payment simply by lengthening the loan term, but this does not result in net savings.

In general, there are three ways to handle the savings that result from refinancing:

1.	Use the savings to pay extra principal for the life of the candidate loan.

2.	Use some of the savings to pay extra principal on the candidate loan.

3.	Keep the savings and pay no extra principal on the candidate loan.

By default, the Mortgage Refinancing tool uses the first method. The Net savings cell shows the savings for each payment period that is applied as extra principal. To use some of the savings to pay extra principal, reduce the amount in the Gross Savings cell (overwrite the formula). For example, if the Gross savings cell shows a value of $125, enter $100 to use $100 of the savings to pay extra principal each month (the monthly payment of the candidate loan is still $25 lower than the current loan payment). To keep the savings and pay no extra principal, enter zero in the Net savings cell (overwrite the formula).

When you create a table using the Mortgage Refinancing tool, you may need to increase the width of columns in the table to display the data. You can use the Fit button [image] in the Main Toolbar.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Performing Fourier Analysis

The Fourier tool performs a fast Fourier transformation on a block of data. Fourier transforms are commonly used to solve partial differential equations.

Input Block

The block of values to transform. The block can contain real or complex numbers. (Complex numbers can be in x+yi, x+iy, x+yj, or x+jy format.) The number of values in the input block must be a power of 2 (for example, 2, 4, 8, 16,...) between 2 and 1024, inclusive; you can pad the input block with zeros so that the number of values is a power of 2.

Output Block

Identifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table.

Inverse FFT

Specifies whether to perform the inverse transformation on data in the input block. If the input block has already been transformed, check Inverse to set the values back to their original state.

See Also

Advanced Analysis Tools List

Using the Advanced Analysis Tools


Using Array Features

Quattro Pro has a special @function and other features to help you use data arrays, blocks of data you work with as a group.

Working with arrays can save time and memory when you enter formulas repetitively, but be aware that using arrays can lengthen recalculation times. If you plan to share a notebook containing arrays with other users, alert them to the arrays so the notebook is easier to understand.

The following topics explain the use of arrays in formulas and with a new @function, @ARRAY:

Array Formulas

Block Arrays

Array Constants

Arrays as @Function and Macro Arguments


Array Formulas

Array B2..D3 in the next figure contains data in three columns and two rows that can be worked with independently, not just as a whole block.

A	B	C	D

1

2	 3	 5	 7

3	 9	11	13

4	12	16	20

There are two ways you can get column totals for this array. You can enter @SUM(B2..B3) in B4, then copy it to C4 and D4. Or, you can select B4 and type this formula in the input line: +B2..D2+B3..D3.

When you enter the formula, Quattro Pro recognizes you are specifying arrays and converts the formula to an @function, @ARRAY. You can type @ARRAY and its arguments directly, if you prefer.

The formula in B4, @ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3), contains the same information as three @SUM formulas. It tells Quattro Pro to add the values in each column of the array and show the results in the formula cell and the two cells to its right.

Because this formula contains arrays instead of single values, it is called an array formula. The results of an array formula appear in a block of cells, called the output block or output array. The number of columns and rows in the output block depend on the dimensions of the arrays in the array formula. The following sections tell more about the output array and how to limit its size.

The following mathematical and logical operators determine how one value relates to a second: +, -, *, /, ^, =, <>, <=, >=, <, >, #AND#, #OR#, and &. Either or both values can be a block array or array constant.

See Also

@ARRAY

Array Features


Block Arrays

Block arrays are arrays given as variables, block references instead of exact values. To use block arrays in formulas, enter a block and another block or value separated by a mathematical or logical operator. The operator indicates the operation to perform on matching cells of each block or the relationship between them. For example, - (minus) means "subtract each cell of the second block from the equivalent cell of the first block." You need to enter only the first block (preceded by a +), the operator, and the second block. Quattro Pro adds the @ARRAY @function and parentheses. Block arrays can be contiguous or noncontiguous, but they must be 2-D.

When you are working with rows, array results appear in the @ARRAY formula cell. For columns, the results appear beside the @ARRAY formula cell. You can mix columns and rows. You can enter more than two row or column blocks and use multiple operators.

As with other formulas, calculations are performed according to operator precedence: multiplication and division first, then addition and subtraction. For example, the following formula means "multiply C2 by D2 and add B2, multiply C3 by D3 and add B3, then multiply C4 by D4 and add B4:"

@ARRAY(B2..B4+C2..C4*D2..D4)

To change the calculation order, use parentheses.

You can use block names instead of references to specify arrays. If the block name is redefined to cover a different block of cells, then all @ARRAY formulas that reference it will automatically change.

See Also

Array Features

Array Formulas


Array Constants

Arrays can be block references, but they can also be array constants--series of exact values separated by row and column delimiters and enclosed in braces {}. Numbers in the same row are separated by semicolons or the argument separator specified in the application Object Inspector (through the Punctuation selection of the International property). Rows are separated by the pipe symbol (|), Shift+\. For example, the values in the next figure are indicated by this array constant: {1;2;3;4|5;6;7;8|9;10;11;12}.

 1	 2	 3	 4

 5	 6	 7	 8

 9	10	11	12

This array constant specifies values in the second row of the previous figure: {5;6;7;8}. This array constant specifies values in the third column: {3|7|11}.

Array constants can be used together in formulas or mixed with blocks.

See Also

Array Features


Arrays as @Function and Macro Arguments

You can use block arrays and array constants as arguments for other @functions besides @ARRAY. Virtually any @function that accepts block arguments can handle array operations, although different types of @functions handle them differently.

@SUM, @AVG, and other statistical @functions always return a single value, no matter how large an array you specify. For example, @SUM(C4..C8*D4..D8) means "multiply each value in C4..C8 by the equivalent value in D4..D8 and add the results."

The database @functions, such as @DSUM, take three arguments: a database block, the column to operate on, and a search criteria block. The first and third arguments must be blocks, not array constants. The second argument can be an array; the @function is calculated once for each value in the array.

@ABS, @SQRT and many other @functions normally take one argument which is a single value or an expression which results in a single value, not a block. If you enter a block or array constant for these @functions, Quattro Pro converts the @function statement into an argument for @ARRAY and provides a value for each row or column of the array.

Using arrays as arguments for index, lookup, and related @functions can be convenient when writing and debugging macros. For example, @ARRAY(@CELLPOINTER(A1..A16) returns a whole column of information about E1 when you select that cell and press F9 to recalculate; cells A1 through 16 contain @CELLPOINTER target attributes. While the previous formula referes to an attribute list in the notebook, you can also enter attributes as an array constant; for example, {"contents";"type";"prefix"}.

See Also

Array Features


Customizing Graph Properties

To customize graphs, right-click each graph element and display its Object Inspector. Each of the topic jumps listed below displays information on the properties in each Object Inspector.

Displaying Graph Object Inspectors

Graph Setup and Background Properties

Changing the Graph Type

Changing the Legend Position

Adjusting 3-D View

Changing 3-D Options

Changing Graph Background Appearance

Graph Pane Properties

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties

Axis Title Properties

Fill and Border Properties

Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors

Selecting a Fill Style

Changing Box or Border Style

Filling an Object with a Bitmap

Making an Object Transparent

Legend Properties

Changing Graph Series Options

Changing the Data Series

Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points

Changing Label Properties

Overriding a Legend Label

Creating a Custom Combination Graph

Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis

Customizing Bar Graphs

Customizing Line Graphs

Customizing Area and Surface Graphs

Customizing Pie and Doughnut Graphs

Customizing Column Graphs

Customizing High-Low Graphs

Customizing Bullet Charts

Changing Graph Title and Subtitle Properties

Floating Graph Properties

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Building Graphs

Enhancing Graphs


Displaying Graph Object Inspectors

Graph Object Inspectors are available when you are editing a graph (see Editing Graphs). To display an Object Inspector, right-click the part of the graph you want to change and choose the Properties command in a QuickMenu, or select the graph element, then choose Property|Current Object in the Property Band. You can use other commands in the Object Inspector to quickly display the Graph Window, Graph Setup and Background (called Graph Setup in the Property list), Graph Pane, Graph Legend, and X-axis and Y-axis Object Inspectors.

Object Inspectors have a standard format: On the left is a list of the properties available for the selected object. When you choose a property from the list, its options appear on the right. The best way to use an Object Inspector is to select a property from the list, change settings, select another property from the list, change settings, and so on. When you have made all the modifications you want, choose OK to apply all the changes simultaneously. To help you track changes, Quattro Pro highlights the property name in blue whenever you alter an option setting.

For help in locating different graph Object Inspectors, see the following topics:

Locating Graph Objects

Locating 2-D Graph Objects

Locating 3-D Graph Objects

Locating Column Graph Objects

Locating Pie Graph Objects

Locating Bullet Chart Objects


Changing the Legend Position

Once you have specified a legend series for a graph, you can change the legend position. The Legend Position property controls legend display. The left option hides the legend. The middle option creates a horizontal legend and places it below the graph. The right option creates a vertical legend and places it to the right of the graph.

To change the legend position,

1.	Right-click the graph background and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Click Legend Position.

3.	Choose a legend position, then choose OK.

Once you display a legend, you can drag it to any position.

Note:	The legend position cannot be moved for some 3-D graphs (for example, 3-D bar graphs).

See Also

Legend


Changing 3-D Options

You can hide or reveal the walls and base of a 3-D graph by changing 3-D options. To change 3-D options,

1.	Right-click the background of a 3-D graph and choose the Properties command to display the graph setup and background Object Inspector.

2.	Choose 3-D Options. A check mark next to an option indicates that display is on. To turn the option off, uncheck it. When you are finished changing settings, choose OK.

There are four options that toggle off and on:

Show Left Wall hides or reveals the left wall.

Show Back Wall hides or reveals the back wall of the graph.

Show Base hides the area under the series display.

Thick Walls gives the graph 3-D walls. When thick walls are turned off, the walls look thin, like a sheet of paper.

When wall or base display is on, you can right-click the area and choose the Properties command to display its properties, then change style options (see 3-D Walls and Base). When a wall or base display is off, you will not see the wall or the grid lines and you cannot display an Object Inspector.

To hide the wall, but display the grid lines, leave the wall display on (checked). Right-click the wall, choose the Properties command, choose Fill Style in the Object Inspector, then choose None. Choose OK. Grid lines on the walls of 3-D graphs are part of the Y-Axis; grid lines on the base are part of the X-Axis.


Changing Graph Background Appearance

The graph background is the area behind the title, the legend, the graph itself, and any drawing elements you added. Right-click any part of the background not covered by a graph element or drawn object and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Graph Setup in the Property Band to display the Graph Setup and Background Object Inspector. Five properties in this inspector control the appearance of the graph background:

Box Type 	chooses the style of box that encloses the graph background.

Fill Color 	assigns a fill color to the background.

Bkg Color	assigns a second color to the background. (Bkg Color is not visible unless you choose a pattern or wash fill style.)

Fill Style	assigns a fill style to the background.

Border Color	controls the color of the box that encloses the background.

Note:	Floating graph objects also have Box Type and Border Color properties.


Axis Properties Overview

All graphs except pie, column, and text graphs have two references for plotting data, the x-axis and the y-axis. The x-axis is the horizontal line that forms the bottom border of the graph pane. This axis usually has fixed points of reference that are often associated with time.

The y-axis is the vertical line on the left side of the graph. It contains a scale, or range of numbers against which a series is plotted. When you create a graph, Quattro Pro automatically scales the y-axis to include the highest and lowest values in all the series.

There are a few exceptions to this format:

Rotated graphs have a vertical x-axis and a horizontal y-axis. Quattro Pro reverses the axes of rotated graphs automatically.

In XY graphs (scatter diagrams), the x-axis series is data, not labels. Quattro Pro gives the x-axis a scale to match the data. When you right-click the x-axis of an XY graph and choose the Properties command, Quattro Pro displays an Object Inspector that lists the same properties as the y-axis Object Inspector. See Y-Axis Properties for a description of these properties.

If the graph is a 2-D bar, line, or area graph, you can assign any series to a secondary y-axis, which then appears on the right side of the graph (see Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis for details). Quattro Pro scales this axis to accommodate the highest and lowest values in the series.

See Also

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Changing X-Axis Properties

When you right-click the x-axis of most bar, line, and area graphs and choose the Properties command, Quattro Pro displays the x-axis Object Inspector. There are seven properties; see X-Axis for a description of each property. The following topics explain how to use x-axis properties:

Selecting the Axis Label Series

Choosing a Tick Style

Controlling Label Display

Customizing Axis Labels

Choosing Major Grid Style Options

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Selecting the Axis Label Series

If you did not select an x-axis series when you created the graph (see Rearranging Data Series), you can add a label to each x-axis division through the X-Axis Series property.

1.	Enter axis labels in a spreadsheet page, if a suitable block of labels does not already exist.

2.	Right-click the x-axis and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|X-Axis in the Property Band. The X-Axis Series property is already selected in the Object Inspector.

3.	Double-click the Select Range edit field, then point to the block of axis labels on the spreadsheet page. If your labels are not in a continuous row or column, hold down the Ctrl key as you select each cell or sub-block.

4.	Press Enter to return to the Object Inspector (or type the coordinates directly in the edit field), then choose OK.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Choosing a Tick Style

Tick marks are the short vertical lines that separate the major divisions of the x-axis. The Tick Style option controls the display and placement of tick marks and axis labels.

There are four tick styles displayed in the Object Inspector: None, Below, Above, and Across. To change the tick style,

1.	Right-click the x-axis and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Tick Options.

3.	Click a tick style, then choose OK.

The y-axis also has a Tick Style option. The four tick styles for the y-axis are None, Left, Right, and Across.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Controlling Label Display

If you have long labels or plot many series, x-axis labels might overlap. There are several ways to correct this without changing the x-axis series:

1.	Right-click the x-axis and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Tick Options, then use one of these options to adjust label display:

Display Labels toggles label display off and on. To turn label display off, uncheck this option; to turn them on, check it again.

Number of rows places the labels in a single row, or in two or three staggered rows.

No Overlapping Labels eliminates some of the labels when label text would otherwise overlap. The default setting is on (checked). Uncheck this option to activate Skip n Labels.

Skip n Labels lets you choose the number of labels to eliminate, to prevent overlap. For example, if you skip two labels, the first label in the x-axis series is displayed, the second and third labels are skipped, the fourth label is displayed, the fifth and sixth labels are skipped, and so on. To specify the number of labels to skip, uncheck No Overlapping Labels, then type a number in the edit field or click the up and down arrows.

Length Limit lets you specify the maximum number of characters displayed in a label. Any additional characters will not appear in the label. To set a length limit, check this option, then enter the number of characters in the edit field that appears (or use the arrows to the right of the edit field to adjust the limit).

3.	Choose OK.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Customizing Axis Labels

You can change the appearance of axis label text by selecting a new text color, text background color, text font, or text style.

Text Bkg Color

Text Color

Text Font

Text Style

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Choosing Major Grid Style Options

Major grid lines separate the divisions of the x-axis. (They partially or fully cover tick marks.) You control the style and color of these grid lines with the Major Grid Style property. To change this property,

1.	Right-click the x-axis and choose the Properties command.

2.	Choose Major Grid Style. Line style options appear automatically.

3.	Choose a line style. (The choice in the upper left corner turns grid lines off.)

4.	Click Color.

5.	Select a line color from the palette, or use the color scales to create your own (see Using Color Palettes for directions). Then choose OK.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties

Changing Y-Axis Properties

Choosing Major and Minor Grid Styles


Changing Y-Axis Properties

When you right-click the y-axis of a standard graph and choose the Properties command, the y-axis Object Inspector appears. There are nine properties; see Y-Axis for a description of each property. The following topics explain how to use y-axis properties:

Changing the Y-Axis Scale

Setting a Zero Line

Using Show Units

Logarithmically Scaling an Axis

Selecting a Numeric Format

Choosing Major and Minor Grid Styles

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing X-Axis Properties


Changing the Y-Axis Scale

Quattro Pro automatically adjusts the y-axis scale to fit the range of values plotted against it. You can change the High, Low, Increment, and No. (number) of Minors values to fine-tune the graph or to zoom in on a specific area.

High sets the highest value displayed on the scale. (If you set this lower than a value in a data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the top of the graph.)

Low sets the lowest value displayed on the scale. (If you set this higher than a value in a data series, the plot for the value will appear to run off the bottom of the graph.)

Increment determines the numeric "distance" between major y-axis divisions. Y-axis labels, major tick marks, and major grid lines are placed at these divisions.

No. of Minors specifies the number of evenly-spaced minor tick marks and/or minor grid lines between the major y-axis divisions.

To adjust the scale,

1.	Right-click the y-axis and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Y-Axis in the Property Band. Scale options appear automatically.

2.	Select the number in the High edit field, then type the highest number you want to appear on the axis. The new setting overwrites the old. Notice that Automatic is no longer selected.

3.	Select the number in the Low edit field, then type the lowest number you want to appear on the axis.

4.	Select the number in the Increment edit field, then enter the scale distance between major tick marks. Enter a zero if you want Quattro Pro to calculate an increment using the new High and Low settings.

5.	Select the entry in the No. of Minors field, then type over it to enter the number of minor tick marks to place between major tick marks.

6.	Choose OK to apply your changes.

To set a descending axis scale, reverse the high and low values. To reset the scale back to its default setting, check Automatic, then choose OK.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Setting a Zero Line

Zero Line appears as a Scale option when you right-click the y-axis of a variance graph and choose the Properties command. The zero line provides the frame of reference for the "variance" that gives this graph type its name. Values less than the zero line setting project below the line; higher values extend above the line. The zero line can be set, for example, to show how temperatures vary from the freezing point on the Fahrenheit scale.

To change the zero line value, right-click the y-axis of the variance graph and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Y-Axis in the Property Band. The zero line option appears under No. of Minors. Set the zero line to a value no greater than the High scale setting, and no less than the Low scale setting, then choose OK.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Using Show Units

If the numbers on the y-axis scale are 1000 or greater, you can simplify the labels with the Show Units option. Show Units displays only the first characters of the label, and automatically adds the appropriate units title in parentheses along the y-axis; for example, "(thousands)" or "(millions)."

To use this option, right-click the y-axis and choose the Properties command. The scale property is automatically selected. Check Show Units. (To turn this feature off again, uncheck it.) Choose OK.

To change the font, color, or other properties of the Show Units title, right-click it and choose the Properties command to display the axis title Object Inspector (see Axis Titles for details).

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Logarithmically Scaling an Axis

In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10 times the value of the previous major division. This type of scale is useful when you are plotting series with wide ranges in magnitude.

 A logarithmic scale plots a steady increase or decrease as a straight line. Consequently, it is useful for demonstrating the rate of increase or decrease in values, such as population levels.

To use a logarithmic scale, right-click the y-axis and choose the Properties command or choose Property|Y-Axis in the Property Band. Scale options appear automatically in the Object Inspector. Under Scale Type, choose Log, then choose OK.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Selecting a Numeric Format

To change the format of the values on the y-axis scale, right-click the y-axis and choose the Properties command, then choose the Numeric Format property. Select a format option, then choose OK. The options are the same as those presented in the block Object Inspector. See Numeric Format Property for a description of these options.

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Choosing Major and Minor Grid Styles

Major grid lines extend from each major tick point across the graph to the opposite side. Minor grid lines extend from each minor tick on the axis to the opposite side of the graph.

Grid lines appear behind the data series and help the viewer estimate series values.

The Major Grid Style and Minor Grid Style properties select new line styles and line colors for major and minor grid lines. To change a grid line style,

1.	Right-click the axis and choose the Properties command to display the axis Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Major Grid Style or Minor Grid Style. Line style options appear automatically.

3.	Select a line style. (The blank selection in the upper left corner turns the grid off.)

4.	Click the Color option and select a color from the palette, or use the scales to create a new color (see Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors for additional information).

5.	Choose OK.

If major grid lines are too close together, choose the Scale property and increase the increment; if the lines are too far apart, decrease the increment. To change the number of grid lines between labels, increase or decrease the No. of Minors (see Changing the Y-Axis Scale for details).

See Also

Axis Properties Overview

Changing Y-Axis Properties


Fill and Border Properties

Fill and border properties are the fill color, background color, fill style, border color and border style. You find fill and border properties in the Object Inspectors for every solid object that appears in or on a graph.

A solid object has two areas, an interior and a border.  The appearance of the interior is determined by the way fill color, background color and fill style properties are set. The border color and border style (or box type) control the appearance of the perimeter of the object.

Fill Style makes the box transparent (None), or fills it with a solid color, a two-color pattern, a wash, or an imported bitmap graphic.

Fill Color is the interior color of the object. If the fill style is a pattern, the fill color is the color of the pattern. If the fill style is a wash, the fill color is distributed over the background color.

Background (Bkg) Color is visible only if the fill style is a pattern or a wash.  If the fill style is a pattern, the background color is the color behind the pattern. In a wash, the fill color is distributed over the background color.

Border Color is the color of the frame or box around the object.

Border Style sets the style or thickness of the frame around the object. (An object has either a Border Style or a Box Type.)

Box Type determines the look of the box around the object. The 12 choices range from "no frame" to several 3-D styles.

See Also

Changing Box or Border Style

Filling an Object with a Bitmap

Making an Object Solid or Transparent

Selecting a Fill Style

Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors


Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors

To select a fill color, background color, or border color for an object,

1.	Right-click the object and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Select Fill Color to choose the fill color, Bkg Color to select the background color, or Border Color to choose a border color. The Object Inspector displays a color palette, color scales, sliding scales for adjusting the color, and a sample box.

3.	Use this color "as is," or adjust it with the color scales.  (See Using Color Palettes for details).

4.	Choose OK.


Selecting a Fill Style

To select a fill style for an object,

1.	Right-click the object and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Select Fill Style.

3.	Choose a style:

None makes the object transparent.

Solid makes the object one solid color (the Fill Color).

Pattern gives you a choice of 24 two-color patterns. The color of the pattern is the Fill Color; the background behind the pattern is the Bkg Color.

Wash gives you a choice of 6 two-color wash styles. In a wash, the Fill Color is distributed over the Bkg Color.

Bitmap lets you fill the object with an imported bitmapped graphic (see Filling an Object with a Bitmap for more information).

4.	Choose OK.

See Also

Bkg Color

Fill Color

Making an Object Solid or Transparent


Changing Box or Border Style

Every solid object is enclosed by either a box or border. The box or border style is controlled by the Box Type or Border Style property. To select a new box type or border style,

1	Right-click the object and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Select Box Type or Border Style.

If the object has a Box Type property, you will see 12 options, including transparent (the upper left choice), thick-sided boxes, round-cornered boxes, and 3-D styles.

If the object has a Border Style property, you will see 9 options, including transparent (the upper left choice), dashed and dotted line styles, and solid line styles of various thicknesses.

3.	Choose a style, then choose OK.

See Also

Border Color


Filling an Object with a Bitmap

To fill an object with an imported bitmapped graphic,

1.	Right-click the object and choose the Properties command from the QuickMenu to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Fill Style and check Bitmap in the Fill Style pane.

3.	Type the path and name of a bitmap file in the File Name edit field, or choose Browse to search for and select a bitmap file. You can select a file with any of these formats: .BMP, .TIF, .PCX, .GIF.

4.	Check Crop To Fit to crop the drawing (cut out all pieces that do not fit), Tile To Fit to fill adjacent blocks of the object with the same bitmap, Shrink To Fit to shrink or enlarge the drawing to fit it within the object, or 3-D Perspective (for 3-D graph walls only) to adjust a bitmap to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall. For more information about these options, see Cropping, Resizing, and Tiling Bitmaps.

6.	Choose OK.

See Also

Importing Graphics


Making an Object Transparent

To make a background transparent (for example, when you want a text box to disappear so the text appears to float on the graph background),

1.	Right-click the object and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Select Fill Style and click None.

3.	Select Box Type or Border Style (the object will have only one of these properties), click the upper left (blank) selection, and choose OK.


Changing Graph Series Options

Series Options for 2-D and 3-D graphs appear in the Line Series Object Inspector, the Bar Series Object Inspector, and the Area Series Object Inspector. By customizing series options you can

select or change the data to plot (see Changing the Data Series for details)

place labels over bars in bar graphs, and over data point in line and area graphs (see Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points for details)

enter legend text or the coordinates where legend text is located (see Overriding a Legend Label for details)

create a combination graph (see Creating a Custom Combination Graph for details)

plot the series against a secondary y-axis (see Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis for details)

To display the Object Inspector for a particular series, do any one of these:

Right-click the bar, line, or area that plots the series and choose the Properties command in the QuickMenu.

Right-click the marker that represents the series in the legend box and choose the Properties command.

Choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band.

Series Options is the first property in the Object Inspectors, so you see these settings as soon as it appears.


Changing the Data Series

When you right-click a series marker and choose the Properties command or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band, the coordinates of that series appear in the Data Series field. To assign different data to the series,

1.	Click the Point Mode button [image] or double-click the edit field. The dialog box and graph move behind the spreadsheet.

2.	Point to the block on the spreadsheet page that contains the labels and press Enter.

3.	Choose OK. (You can also type the block coordinates directly into the edit field, then choose OK.)

Be sure to enter a block that has exactly the same number of cells as the other series in the graph.

Note:	If you delete the block coordinates in the Data Series edit field, your graph will show a blank area (because you now have a series with no data). To delete a series, see Deleting a Series.

See Also

Adding a Series

Arranging the Legend Series

Graphing Grouped or Linked Data


Changing Label Properties

To change the properties of labels in a label series, right-click one of the labels and choose the Properties command. The label series Object Inspector appears. There are six properties, which apply to every label series in the graph:

Label Alignment sets the position of the labels relative to the data points. The graph type determines which alignment options are available.

On line and ribbon graphs, you can center the labels over the data points, or place each label to the left, above, to the right, or below the corresponding data point.

On 2-D and 3-D bar graphs (except stacked bar graphs), you have four choices: Above places the labels above the top margin of each bar. Top places labels on each bar, near the top margin. Middle puts labels over the center of each bar, and Bottom places labels just above the x-axis.

Format specifies how labels are displayed (as text, or in a numeric format such as date or currency, for example).

Text Color, Text Bkg (background) Color, Text Font, and Text Style change the appearance of labels. These properties are common to all text elements in Quattro Pro; for a description of them, see Changing Text Properties.

See Also

Numeric Format Options


Overriding a Legend Label

You add legend labels to a graph by defining a legend series. These labels appear in the legend box of 2-D graphs (except pie and column graphs), and in some 3-D graphs. In most 3-D graphs, legend labels appear along the z-axis. In multiple graphs, legend labels appear as "titles" of the sub-graphs that represent each series.

The Legend option lets you override the legend label for an individual data series, or enter a label when no legend series exists. To override a legend label, or enter a new one, type the label text or enter the label's cell address (A:E5, for example) in the Legend field, then choose OK.

You can change the font, style, and color of legend text using the Legend Object Inspector.


Creating a Custom Combination Graph

You can create a combination graph by overriding the graph type of a single series. To do this,

1.	Right-click the series and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band. Series Options appear automatically.

2.	Under Override Type, choose Bar, Line, or Area to specify how you want the series to be plotted. You can override a series on 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low graphs, and on rotated bar and line graphs. (High-low graphs restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.)

3.	Choose OK.

To return the series to the original graph type, choose Default.

Creating a multiple line or area graph

You can override the graph type on a multiple bar graph to create a multiple line graph or a multiple area graph. To do this,

1.	Create a graph (see Creating a Graph in a Window for details).

2.	Change the graph type to Multiple Bar (see Changing the Graph Type for details).

3.	Right-click any bar in the graph and choose the Properties command to display the bar series Object Inspector, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band. Series Options are displayed automatically.

4.	Under Override Type, choose Line for a multiple line graph, or Area for a multiple area graph.

5.	Choose OK.

See Also

Area Series

Bar Series

Combination Graphs

Line Series


Plotting Series on the Secondary Y-Axis

You can plot a series in 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low graphs on a secondary y-axis. (High-low graphs restrict this feature to the fifth series or greater.) You may want to do this, for example, when the values in one series are much larger or smaller than those in other series. When there is a wide variation between series, the y-axis scale range may be so large that some series are barely visible above the x-axis. If you plot the series that is very different on the secondary y-axis, the primary y-axis adjusts to accommodate the other series.

You can also use this feature when the data is based on a different kind of scale. For example, in a high-low (open-close) volume graph, you can plot share prices on the primary y-axis, and the volume (number of stocks traded), on the secondary y-axis.

Right-click a series and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band to display Series Options. Click the Secondary setting under Y-Axis and choose OK to plot the selected series against the y-axis on the right side of the graph.

The secondary y-axis has the same properties as the primary y-axis (see Y-Axis).


Customizing Bar Graphs

Bar Series Properties change the appearance of bar graphs. Through this Object Inspector, you can change series options, adjust the width, spacing, and overlap of all bars in the graph, and change the style attributes of bars in an individual series.

To display the Bar Series Object Inspector, right-click a bar in the series you want to change and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band. The properties are:

Series Options control the way the selected series is plotted.

Analyze selects the type of analytical graphing.

Bar Options control the bar width percentage, bar margin percentage, and bar overlap for all bars in the graph.

Fill Color selects the interior color of the bars.

Bkg Color is visible only if the bars have a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style can be none (transparent), a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Border Color is the color of the frame around the bar.

Border Style chooses the line thickness of the border.

Comparison graphs have another property, Comparison Line, which chooses the color and style of the line that connects series boundaries.

3-D bar graphs have an additional bar series property called Riser Style, which sets the type of solid shape used to represent each series. For example, instead of a 3-D bar, you could choose a cylindrical riser style.

See Also

Locating 2-D Graph Objects

Locating 3-D Graph Objects

Locating Graph Objects


Customizing Line Graphs

You can customize each line in a line graph with the Line Series Object Inspector. Right-click a line and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band to display the Object Inspector with these properties:

Series Options control the way the selected series is plotted.

Analyze selects the type of analytical graphing.

Marker Style changes the way each data point is marked.

Fill Color selects the color of the line graph background.

Bkg Color is visible only if the bars in a bar graph have a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style can be none (transparent), a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Line Color lets you choose the color of the line that connects the points in the series.

Line Style lets you change the thickness of the line that connects the points. You can also choose from several dashed line styles.

3-D Floating Marker graphs, which are a type of 3-D line graph showing only 3-D markers, have a float series Object Inspector. You can use the Float Style property to change the size and weight of the floating markers. For example, instead of a cubic floating marker (the default) you could choose a cone shape.

See Also

Locating 2-D Graph Objects

Locating 3-D Graph Objects

Locating Graph Objects


Customizing Area and Surface Graphs

Area Series Properties change the appearance of area, surface, shaded surface, and contour graphs. To display the Object Inspector, right-click the area that represents the series you want to change and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band. The properties are:

Series Options control the way the selected series is plotted.

Analyze selects the type of analytical graphing.

Fill Color selects the interior color of the area.

Bkg Color is visible only if the area has a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style can be none (transparent), a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Border Color is the color of the lines that form a border around the selected area.

Border Style chooses the thickness of the lines that surround an area.

See Also

Locating 2-D Graph Objects

Locating 3-D Graph Objects

Locating Graph Objects


Customizing Pie and Doughnut Graphs

Pie and doughnut graphs plot a single series. Each value in the series is a "slice" of the pie or doughnut, and is usually expressed as a percentage of the whole. To display the pie graph Object Inspector, right-click a slice and choose the Properties command. There are eleven properties:

Explode Slice applies only to the selected slice. (In multiple pie graphs, you explode the corresponding slice in each pie.)

Label Options, Text Color, Text Bkg Color, Text Font, and Text Style apply to the entire graph. (All pies are affected in multiple graphs.)

Fill Color, Bkg Color, Fill Style, Border Color, and Border Style apply only to the selected slice. (In multiple pie graphs, these properties affect the corresponding slice in each pie.)

See Also

Locating Graph Objects

Locating Pie Graph Objects


Customizing Column Graphs

Column graphs plot a single series, and represent each value in the series as a section of the column. Right-click a column section and choose the Properties command to view its properties. There are ten:

Label Options, Text Color, Text Bkg Color, Text Font, and Text Style apply to the entire column graph. (All columns are affected in multiple graphs.)

Fill Color, Bkg Color, Fill Style, Border Color, and Border Style apply only to the selected section. (In multiple column graphs, these properties affect the corresponding section of each column.)

See Also

Locating Column Graph Objects

Locating Graph Objects


Customizing High-Low Graphs

High-low graphs illustrate the difference between corresponding values in two or more series. Though most often used in tracking daily stock prices, high-low graphs can be used whenever you want to compare the difference between pairs of values. To change the appearance of a high-low graph, right-click a high-low marker and choose the Properties command. The bar series Object Inspector appears (see Bar Series for details).

High-low graphs have one property that is unique: the Hi-Lo Bar Style. This property determines how high and low values are represented. There are four styles:

Bar	Gives you a "bar and whisker" (or "candle") graph. A line connects high and low values. A bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close, the bar is red. (Retain this light/dark relationship if you change fill colors.)

I-Beam	High and low values determine each end of an I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks, respectively.

Line	Connects corresponding high and low values with a line, and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.

Marker	Assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.

To change the style of a high-low graph,

1.	Right-click any high-low marker and choose the Properties command (this property is global, so you do not have to select a specific series). The bar series Object Inspector appears.

2.	Choose Hi-Lo Bar Style.

3.	Select a bar style, then choose OK.

When you choose a Marker style high-low graph, you can use the line series Object Inspector to give each marker a different look.

1.	Change the high-low graph type to line

2.	Right-click a series and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band to display the line Object Inspector.

3.	Change the marker style, weight, and appearance.

4.	Repeat this procedure for all the other series.

5.	When you are finished, change the graph type back to High-Low.

See Also

Locating Graph Objects


Customizing Bullet Charts

To change the properties for bulleted items in a bullet chart, right-click a bulleted item and choose the Properties command in the QuickMenu. The bullet series Object Inspector appears.

The bullet series Object Inspector lists eight properties:

Bullet Style sets the type and size of bullets. To not show a bullet, choose the blank bullet (the first bullet style).

Bullet Indentation sets the distance before and after bullets, and turns on or off hanging indentation.

Bullet Color sets the color of bullets.

Line Spacing sets the spacing before and after each line of text in the bullet series.

Text Color, Text Bkg (background) Color, Text Font, and Text Style properties are identical to properties for text boxes. See Text Boxes for details.

Note:	When you change the properties for a bullet series, the properties for all bulleted items in that series change. You can change the bullet style, fonts, and colors used for all major or all minor bullets at once.

To change the title, subtitle, or text for bulleted items in a bullet chart, edit the data in the notebook block used to create the bullet chart. To identify the source block for a bullet chart, select the bullet chart and choose Graphics|Series. The source block for the bullet chart is listed in the 1st Series edit field.

See Also

Locating Bullet Chart Objects

Locating Graph Objects


Changing Graph Title and Subtitle Properties

The graph title and subtitle are enclosed in a single text box. When you create a title, you do not see the text box because its fill style and box type are set to None by default. Click either the title or subtitle to display the handles that mark the boundary of the title/subtitle text box.

The title and subtitle have different Object Inspectors: Graph Title Properties and Graph Subtitle Properties. Click either the title or subtitle to change the mouse pointer to an I-beam, then right-click and choose the Properties command to reach title or subtitle properties, depending on which line the pointer is over.

You change the appearance of the graph title with the Alignment, Text Color, Text Bkg (background) Color, Text Font, and Text Style properties. The graph title properties include options that affect the title/subtitle text box: Box Type, Fill Color, Bkg (background) Color, Fill Style, and Border Color.

The graph subtitle has Subtitle Color, Subtitle Bkg (background) Color, Subtitle Font, and Subtitle Style properties, which have the same effect as the text properties.

Note:	The graph title's Alignment property also sets alignment for the subtitle.


Using Databases

Quattro Pro includes conventional spreadsheet database features and provides direct access to the power of full-fledged database applications with the Database Desktop. Click one of the topics below for spreadsheet database information or click Database Desktop Help to open its help file.

Step-By-Step Directions

What Is a Database?

Setting Up a Database

The Database Block

The Criteria Table

The Output Block

Searching for Records

Highlighting Matching Records

Copying Matching Records

Deleting Matching Records

Using @Functions with a Database

Using Database Forms

Creating and Editing Records

Searching for Records

Editing and Clearing Search Criteria

Using External Databases

Querying External Tables with the Query Command

Querying External Tables with QBE

Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

Managing Aliases

Sorting Data

Sort Keys

Sort Order

SpeedSort Button

Sorting Tips

Limiting Data Entry

Menu Commands

Tools|Database Desktop

Tools|Data Modeling Desktop

Tools|Database Tools

See Also

Translating Database Files

Data Analysis


What Is a Database?

A database is a collection of data records, for example:

An address book or phonebook (each business or person is one record)

A checkbook (each bank transaction is a record)

A notepad (each page is a record)

Each record breaks down into pieces of data called fields. A phonebook entry (record) consists of three fields: name, address, and phone number. Each field has a unique name, as shown in the table below:

Some Database Examples

Database	No. of Fields	Field Names
Phonebook	3	Name, Address, Phone Number
Address book	5	Name, Address, City, State, Postal Code
Checkbook	5	Check Number, Description, Credit, Debit, Balance
Notepad	1	Page

In Quattro Pro for Windows databases, each row is a record and each column is a field. You can use Data Modeling Desktop to create more elaborate crosstab report formats from a basic database.

See Also

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database

Sorting Data


Setting Up a Database

Once you have an idea of the kind of data you want to include in your database, it is fairly easy to set up. The block containing the field names and data is called the database block. To speed data searches, you will need space for a criteria table, which indicates the data you are searching for. You will also need an output block to hold the results of data searches.

These topics describe how to set up each part of a database:

The Database Block

The Criteria Table

The Output Block

See Also

Searching for Records

What Is a Database?


The Database Block

The database block holds a Quattro Pro database, including field names and data records. Follow these rules when creating it:

The database block must be rectangular, although it can contain any number of blank cells.

The database block must be contiguous and all on one page.

Enter the field names in the top row of the database block, one name per column (each column of the database block is a field). Field names must be labels (text), less than 16 characters long, with no blank spaces at the beginning or end.

Make sure field names are different from each other. They should also be different from any block names you are using.

Each row of the database block beneath the field names is a record. Enter the first row of data directly below the field names without inserting a blank line or a row of decorative symbols.

Use the same type of data throughout each column. In other words, do not mix labels and numeric data in the same column.

See Also

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database

Sorting Data


The Criteria Table

A criteria table consists of a row of field names, which must match one or more fields in the database block, and one or more rows of search criteria, either values or logical formulas:

Criteria in the same row indicate an AND query. Data must match all criteria.

Criteria in different rows indicate an OR query. Data can match criteria in one or more rows, but not necessarily all rows.

Criteria tables can combine AND and OR queries.

To create a criteria table:

1. In the first row of the table, copy the names of the fields you want to search through.

2. Underneath the appropriate field name(s), enter the data you want to search for. To search for an exact match, enter the value exactly as it appears in the database. To enter a condition, use a search formula.

If you want more than one criterion met by each record, enter them all in the same row, under the appropriate field names.

To search for records that meet any of the given criteria, use a separate row for each criterion.

See Also

AND and OR Query Example

AND Query Example

OR Query Example

Setting Up a Database

Using Search Formulas in Criteria Tables

Using Wildcards in Search Criteria


AND Query Example

Criteria in the same row indicate an AND query. Data must match all criteria.

AND Query Table

LAST_NAME	FIRST_NAME

Lyter	Kelly

Only records with LAST_NAME=Lyter and FIRST_NAME=Kelly match these criteria.

See Also

Setting Up a Database

The Criteria Table

Using Search Formulas in Criteria Tables

Using Wildcards in Search Criteria


OR Query Example

Criteria in different rows indicate an OR query. Data can match criteria in one or more rows, but not necessarily all rows.

OR Query Table

LAST_NAME	FIRST_NAME

Lyter

Barbara

Any record with LAST_NAME=Lyter or FIRST_NAME=Barbara matches these criteria. Records for Kelly Lyter, Barbara Lyter, and Barbara Wong all match these criteria.

See Also

Setting Up a Database

The Criteria Table

Using Search Formulas in Criteria Tables

Using Wildcards in Search Criteria


AND and OR Query Example

Criteria tables can combine AND and OR queries.

AND and OR Query Table

LAST_NAME	FIRST_NAME

Lyter	Kelly

Barbara

Records for Kelly Lyter and anyone with FIRST_NAME=Barbara match these criteria. These records match the criteria: Kelly Lyter, Barbara Lyter, and Barbara Wong. These records are not matches: Steve Lyter, Kelly O'Toole.

See Also

Setting Up a Database

The Criteria Table

Using Search Formulas in Criteria Tables

Using Wildcards in Search Criteria


Using Search Formulas in a Criteria Table
Using Search Formulas in Criteria Tables

You can use any of these operators and symbols in formulas:

= equals	<> not equal

< less than	> greater than

<= less than or equal

>= greater than or equal

#AND# both expressions must be true

#OR# either the first or the second expressions may be true

#NOT# the first expression is true, the second is false

You can also use wildcards in formulas to search for near matches.

See Also

Setting Up a Database

The Criteria Table

Using Wildcards in Search Criteria


Using Wildcards in Search Criteria

When you are searching for text, you can use special "wildcards" in your search formulas to search for near matches. Quattro Pro supports these wildcard symbols:

?	specifies any single character in a label. For example, "t?p" finds tip, top, or tap, but not tape or stop.

*	specifies any number of characters to the end of a label. For example, "ten*" would find tender, tension, and tent, but not attention.

~	(tilde) searches for all labels in a field EXCEPT those that match the search condition. For example, CITY=~"Boston" finds all records that do not have Boston in the City field.

If you are using database forms, you can use ? and *, but not ~.

See Also

Setting Up a Database

The Criteria Table

Using Database Forms

Using Search Formulas in Criteria Tables


The Output Block

If you intend to copy matching records to another block with either the Extract or Unique command, you must first prepare the area to copy the records to (the output block):

1.	Choose a blank area of the notebook that will not overlap your data or criteria table.

2.	In the first row of the block, copy the name of each field that you want included in the output from the database. You can include as many field names as you want, in any order. Fields that you do not include will not be included in the output.

See Also

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database


Searching for Records

Once you have created a Quattro Pro database, you can review records that meet specific search conditions, or search criteria. This process is called querying or searching a database.

To search a database:

1.	Create a criteria table containing the conditions and exact matches to search for.

2. If you want to copy the matched records to another part of the notebook, set up an output block, an area with enough blank space to hold extracted data plus the names of the fields you are extracting. Then enter the field names in the first row of the output block in whatever order you like.

3.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Query and specify the database block, including field names.

If you want to specify a database block in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies block A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA.

You can also use linking syntax to query a database file created with Paradox. This lets you access database information without having to translate the database into a notebook file first. Just specify any block including the name of the file (and directory if different).

4.	If your search formulas refer to field names, use Tools|Database Tools|Query|Field Names to assign a block name to each field.

5.	Specify the criteria table, including field names and all rows of criteria.

6.	Specify the output block.

7.	Choose a search option: Locate, Extract, Extract Unique, or Delete.

Choose Locate to highlight matching records, Extract to copy them to the Output Block, Extract Unique to eliminate duplicate matching records when copying them, or Delete to erase matching records.

See Also

Copying Matching Records

Tools|Database Tools|Query

Deleting Matching Records

Highlighting Matching Records

Setting Up a Database

Using External Databases


Highlighting Matching Records

To search through the database for all records that meet the conditions specified in the criteria table, choose Tools|Database Tools|Query. Specify the database block, criteria table, and output block. Then, choose Locate.

Quattro Pro highlights the first record in the database block that meets the conditions. If there are no qualifying records, Quattro Pro beeps and returns you to the dialog box.

To highlight other records that meet your criteria, press Up Arrow or Down Arrow. Up Arrow moves to previously found matches, Down Arrow moves to the next match.

Press Esc to return to the Tools|Database Tools|Query dialog box.

See Also

Copying Matching Records

Tools|Database Tools|Query

Deleting Matching Records

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database


Copying Matching Records

You can search through a Quattro Pro database for all records that meet the conditions specified in the criteria table and copy them to an output block:

1.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Query. Specify the database block, criteria table, and output block.

2.	Choose Extract to copy all matching records to the output block. Quattro Pro copies only those fields whose names are written on the first row of the output block.

If you want to eliminate duplicate records (records that are identical in all fields), choose Extract Unique instead.

Caution: Quattro Pro erases all data in the cells beneath the output block before extracting. Don't store notebook data below the output block; it will be lost. To avoid losing data, specify an output block larger than one row; this also limits the number of records the output block accepts.

See Also

Tools|Database Tools|Query

Deleting Matching Records

Highlighting Matching Records

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database


Deleting Matching Records

You can search through a Quattro Pro database for all records that meet the conditions specified in the criteria table and delete them:

1.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Query. Specify the database block and criteria table.

2.	Choose Delete to find and delete all matching records. Quattro Pro erases all qualifying records from the database. Records underneath the deleted records move up to fill in the empty rows.

For best results, use Locate to check the result of a search before using Delete. If you accidentally delete a record, choose Edit|Undo (if enabled) to bring it back.

See Also

Copying Matching Records

Tools|Database Tools|Query

Edit|Undo

Highlighting Matching Records

Setting Up a Database


Using @Functions with a Database

You can use a variety of @functions with Quattro Pro databases. These functions use database blocks and criteria tables like a database search.

Another function, @TABLELINK, links to an external database table and displays it in Quattro Pro.

See Also

@TABLELINK

Database @Functions

Setting Up a Database


Using Database Forms

If your notebook database has a column for each data field and a row for each record, you can create a form for entering and finding data records without programming. See these topics for details:

Creating and Editing Records

Searching for Records

Editing and Clearing Search Criteria


Creating and Editing Records

To edit an existing record or create a new one:

1.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Form.

2.	Specify the database block, including field and record labels.

3.	Quattro Pro generates a form and displays the first record. The field names appear in the first column with edit fields for data beside them.

4.	 Edit the active record or choose another activity:

New creates a new, blank record added after the last record.

Delete erases the active record.

Revert cancels any edits and restores original data for the active record.

Go Next displays the next record.

Go Previous displays the previous record.

Search displays a search form (see Searching for Records for details).

Close enters any changes from the current session and closes the form.

Help displays a help topic.

See Also

Using Database Forms


Searching for Records

To find all records that meet a set of search criteria,

1.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Form and enter the database block.

2.	Click Search to display a search form for that database.

3.	Enter the search criteria for each field. You can find exact matches or look for a range of values. You type an operator followed by a value. These are acceptable operators:

      =     equal to

      <>    not equal to

      >=    greater than or equal to

      >     greater than

      <=    less than or equal to

      <     less than

For example, if Housing is a field, enter >500 beside Housing to find all Housing expenses greater than $500. If you leave a field blank, Quattro Pro finds all instances of that field.

You can search for strings as well as numbers. For example, if Month is a field and you want to find the record for February, type February in the edit field beside Month. Quattro Pro looks for any record that starts with the string February. Enter =February to find an exact match. <February means "Find any record that starts with a letter before F in the alphabet."

You can use DOS * and ? wildcards (for details, see Using Wildcards in Search Criteria).

4.	Click Go Next to find the first record that matches the criteria. Go Next returns the form to Edit mode. You can edit any record when it appears, then click Go Next again to find the second matching record, and so on. Click Go Previous to back up, still in Edit mode.

5.	Click Close to close the form.

See Also

Using Database Forms


Editing and Clearing Search Criteria

To enter new search criteria or clear all criteria, click Search again. Then, edit the criteria or click Clear to end the search. You can click Go Next or Go Previous to display a matching record, or click Close to close the Form dialog box. See Searching for Records for more information on using these buttons.

See Also

Using Database Forms


Using External Databases

While you can use Quattro Pro to search for records in external Paradox or dBASE tables, the Database Desktop provides a variety of features for searching and editing external tables.

Within Quattro Pro, you can

Query external tables with the Query command; see Querying External Tables with the Query Command

Query external tables using QBE (Query By Example); see Querying External Tables with QBE

Display the first 8192 records of an external table in Quattro Pro and create a live link from these records with the Table Link command or @TABLELINK; see Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

Specify paths for working and private directories with the Aliases command; see Managing Aliases

Tip:	To view the first 8192 records in an external database, open it with File|Open. This brings the database into Quattro Pro and displays it as a notebook. You can also insert it into a notebook as linked data using the Table Link command or view it with the Database Desktop.

Caution: If you use File|Open to load an external database file with more than 8192 records, close the file when you are done, but do not save it. If you use File|Save, all records that could not fit into Quattro Pro will be lost.

See Also

Copying Matching Records

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database


Querying External Tables with the Query Command

You can use linking with the Tools|Database Tools|Query options to access information in a database file created with Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE (II, III, and IV). You can extract the information from the database without having to translate the file first.

You can use the Extract and Extract Unique options of the Query command to search external data tables as well as databases in Quattro Pro notebooks. Other options--Locate, Delete, and Field Names--do not work with external data tables. (You can use the Database Desktop to view search results in or delete records from an external table.)

To search an external database with the Query comand,

1.	Set up a criteria table and an output block in a Quattro Pro notebook. Use the exact field names as those in the database file.

2.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Query and specify the database file itself as the database block using linking syntax, for example, [Database]A1..A2. [Database] is the name of the database, including path; for example, [C:\PARADOX\SAMPLE.DB]. The block specified after the file name can be any valid block with at least two rows. A1..A2 acts as a hook into the database. It remains A1..A2, no matter how large the database block actually is.

3.	Specify the criteria table and output block.

4.	Choose Extract. Quattro Pro copies the specified information from the outside database file and writes it into the output block.

To view all the records in an external database, open it with File|Open, or access it directly with the Data|Database Desktop or Tools|Database Tools|Table Query command. To see the Database Desktop help file, click Database Desktop Help.

See Also

Copying Matching Records

Searching for Records

Setting Up a Database


Querying External Tables with QBE

Once you use the Query by Example technique to create a QBE file in Paradox or Database Desktop, you can run that query from within Quattro Pro. To do so,

1.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Table Query.

2.	When the Table Query dialog box appears, indicate the source of the query, a QBE file or a QBE query in a notebook block.

3.	Specify the file or block.

4.	Specify a notebook destination for the query results.

When you click OK, Quattro Pro runs the query and displays any retrieved records in the Destination block.

See Also

Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

Managing Aliases

Querying External Tables with the Query Command

Using External Databases


Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

You can load small files with .DB or .DBF extensions directly into Quattro Pro and edit them as if they were spreadsheets, as long as they don't contain index or memo files. Because Quattro Pro can only handle files with less than 8192 records, data can be lost if files have more records than that. For best results, use Database Desktop to work with external data tables.

Quattro Pro's ability to create .DB and .DBF files is best used to create new files, which can then be edited in Database Desktop, Paradox, or dBASE.

To link directly to an external data table and see updates as they occur, use the Table Link command, the Table Link button [image] on the Modeling Toolbar, or @TABLELINK.

To link to an external data table using the Table Link command,

1.	Click the Table Link button on the Modeling Toolbar, or choose Tools|Database Tools|Table Link.

2.	Select the block where you want the linked database table to appear.

3.	In the Table edit field, type type the path and filename of the database table to which you want to establish a link. Choose the Browse button to select a database table from a list.

4.	Choose OK to display the linked database table in the notebook.

See Also

Managing Aliases

Querying External Tables with QBE

Querying External Tables with the Query Command

Using External Databases


Managing Aliases

When using external data tables, it is often convenient to assign aliases for your private and working directories. A private directory is a location for your temporary answer tables and other nonshared files. A working directory is where a database application or a command such as Table Query looks for your external database tables. An alias is a shortcut name that takes the place of a long path name.

To assign an alias for your private and working directories,

1.	Choose Tools|Database Tools|Aliases.

2.	Type the full path name for each directory in the appropriate edit field, then choose OK.

See Also

Displaying External Tables in Quattro Pro

Querying External Tables with QBE

Querying External Tables with the Query Command

Using External Databases


Sorting Data

Sorting reorders a block, called the sort block, based on sort key columns within it.

The quickest way to sort a block is to use the SpeedSort button [image] on the Toolbar.

Or, use Block|Sort:

1.	Choose Block|Sort.

2.	Specify the block, the cell block containing all the fields of the records you want to sort. (Do not include field names.)

3.	Specify one to five key columns, single-column blocks to be sorted in the order indicated. 1st is the primary sort key, 2nd is the secondary key, and so on. If two entries in the first key column are identical, Quattro Pro looks at the second key, and so on.

4.	Choose Ascending to sort a key in ascending order (from smallest to largest). Or, choose Descending to sort in the reverse order.

5.	Reset the Data and Labels buttons if you need to change the sort order.

6.	When you are ready to perform the sort, choose OK.

See Also

Sort Dialog Box

Sort Keys

Sort Order

Sorting Tips


Sort Keys

Quattro Pro uses specified columns in the sort block to reorder data. These sort keys determine which fields the sort is based on. You may specify up to five sort keys. Sorting begins with the first key. If two entries in in that field are identical, Quattro Pro looks at the second key. If the first two fields are identical, the third key determines sort order, and so on. For example, if LAST_NAME is the first and only sort key, the following list sorts as shown:

Before Sorting:

FIRST_NAME	LAST_NAME

Sam	Wong

John	Fernandez

Herman	Schwartz

Maria	Fernandez

Lawrence	Jones

Alicia	Fernandez

After Sorting:

FIRST_NAME	LAST_NAME

John	Fernandez

Maria	Fernandez

Alicia	Fernandez

Lawrence	Jones

Herman	Schwartz

Sam	Wong

If FIRST_NAME is added as the second sort key, the Fernandez records sort in this order (if Ascending is checked): Alicia Fernandez, John Fernandez, Maria Fernandez.

See Also

Sort Dialog Box

Sort Order

Sorting Data

Sorting Tips

SpeedSort Button


Sort Order

Each sort key you specify can be sorted in ascending or descending order. When you check Ascending, Quattro Pro sorts data in the following order:

blank cells

labels beginning with numbers (in numerical order)

labels beginning with letters and special characters (in ASCII order)

values (in numerical order)

When you uncheck Ascending, Quattro Pro sorts records in descending order.

The Data options (Numbers First, Labels First) specify how to sort columns containing values and labels. If Data is set to Numbers First, the values in a column are sorted and placed as a group before the labels in the column (which are also sorted). If the sort order is descending, the order of the two groups is reversed (values appear after labels). If Data is set to Labels First, the values in a column are sorted and placed as a group after the labels in the column (which are also sorted). If the sort order is descending, the order of the two groups is reversed (labels appear after values).

The Labels options (Character Code, Dictionary) specify how labels sort. Character Code, the default, sorts labels alphabetically according to the character code of their first letters; labels with special characters fall at the end; and uppercase letters sort before lowercase letters. Dictionary disregards case and looks at each letter.

One of the Application properties, International|Language, loads alternate sort tables with different sort orders.

See Also

Sort Dialog Box

Sort Keys

Sorting Data

Sorting Tips

SpeedSort Button


Sorting Tips

Dates are sorted by their date serial numbers; formulas are sorted by their results.

If a sort block contains formulas that reference cells OUTSIDE the sort block (for example, +A2), make them absolute (+$A$2) before sorting.

Pad numbers stored as labels in the sort block with leading zeros or spaces. This ensures they sort in numerical order. For example, '5 and '100 will not sort properly unless they are entered as '005 and '100.

Formulas that refer to cells outside of their own row are not updated when records are resorted. If you have such formulas in your records, use Block|Values to convert them to their end values before sorting them, or edit the formulas to correct the cell references after sorting.

To restore the sort block to its original order after sorting, insert an extra column in the sort block BEFORE you sort it. Use Block|Fill to fill this column with consecutive numbers. Then you can specify this column as the first sort key whenever you want to restore the original order.

If you do not specify ALL the cells of each record you sort, the resulting sorted fields will be mismatched. You will then have to retrieve your file again to restore it, or re-enter the records.

To reverse the effects of a sort operation, use Edit|Undo.

Records you enter after sorting are not entered in sort order. Sort again to include new records where they belong.

See Also

Edit Menu

Sort Dialog Box

Sort Keys

Sort Order

Sorting Data


SpeedSort Button

The quickest way to sort a block is to use the SpeedSort button [image] on the Toolbar:

1.	Select the block to sort.

2.	Hold the Shift+Ctrl keys and click the column to sort by. If you want a second sort key, click that column next, and so on.

For example, if each record contained a last name, a first name, a middle initial, and an employee ID, you would click the first column to sort by last name.

3.	Click the SpeedSort button on the Toolbar to perform the sort and save the sort settings. The top part of the button sorts in ascending order; the bottom sorts in descending order.

To re-sort the same block, click SpeedSort again. The current settings remain until you select a different block and click SpeedSort.

See Also

Sort Dialog Box

Sort Keys

Sort Order

Sort Tips

Sorting Data


Limiting Data Entry

Block|Restrict Input limits selector movement to unprotected cells in a specific contiguous block. This is handy when designing data entry forms in macros. All data is visible, but not accessible, and you cannot use the menus.

To use Restrict Input,

1.	Protect the notebook page (choose Protection|Enable Cell Locking in the page Object Inspector; see Enabling Page Protection).

2.	Unprotect the cells in the block where you want to allow data entry and edits (choose Protection|Unprotect in the Block property list).

3.	Select the block, choose Block|Restrict Input, then choose OK. INPUT appears on the status line.

To return to Ready mode and restore full notebook access, press Esc or press Enter with no data on the input line.

You can also limit the type of data that is entered into cells. Choose Constraints in the block Object Inspector, then in the Data Input Constraints group select General, Labels Only, or Dates Only; see Limiting Data Input Types for more details.

See Also

Block Properties

Page Properties


Building Dialog Boxes and Toolbars

Dialog Box and Toolbar Overview

UI Builder Tools

Tools for Building Dialog Boxes and Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window

Controls Toolbar

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Box Guidelines

Opening a New Dialog Box

Adding Dialog Controls

Labeling Controls

Customizing Controls

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command

Linking Commands to Dialog Controls

Building Basic Toolbars

About Basic Toolbars

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Using Button Palettes

Setting Button Properties

Adding Custom Buttons and Labels

Assigning Macros

Removing Toolbar Objects

Setting Toolbar Properties

Saving Custom Toolbars

Closing Toolbars

Editing Custom Toolbars

Using Custom Toolbars

Exiting Toolbar Designer

Building Complex Toolbars

About Complex Toolbars

Complex Toolbar Guidelines

Opening a New Toolbar

Adding Controls to the Toolbar

Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls

Saving and Displaying the Toolbar

Editing Toolbars

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars

Working with Dialog Boxes

Working with Controls

Selecting Several Controls

Copying and Moving Controls

Moving and Sizing Controls

Using the Dimension Options

Moving Overlapping Controls

Aligning Controls

Repositioning Controls

Setting a Control's Value

Changing a Control's Text

Using the Clipboard with Controls

Assigning a Key to a Control

Setting Tab Order

Group Box Selection Order

Disabling and Hiding Controls

Grouping Controls

Resizing Grouped Controls

Connecting Controls to Cells or Other Controls

Providing Hints

Creating Object Help

Working with Link Commands

Working with Link Commands: Overview

The Object Link Dialog Box

Link Events

Assigning a Link Command to a Control

Link Command Examples

Linking a Dialog Box to Help


Dialog Box and Toolbar Overview

A dialog box is a box of options that you create to prompt the application user for information. It contains various controls, such as check boxes and edit fields.

A Toolbar is a custom tool you create that remains onscreen while an application runs (just like the Quattro Pro Toolbar does). It gives the user shortcuts for commonly used commands and procedures.

Dialog boxes are saved with the notebook; Toolbars are saved as separate files.

From a user's point of view, the main difference between dialog boxes and Toolbars is that dialog boxes appear at specific times during an application; Toolbars usually remain onscreen while the application runs.

Because of this difference, you will tend to put commonly used commands or actions on a custom Toolbar, and reserve dialog boxes for those places in an application where you need specific information from a user.

To create dialog boxes, use Tools|UI Builder. You can create basic Toolbars with Tools|Toolbar Designer or complex Toolbars using Tools|UI Builder.

See Also

Complex Toolbar Guidelines

Dialog Box Guidelines

Dialog Window Objects

Toolbar Designer Guidelines


Tools for Building Dialog Boxes and Complex Toolbars

Dialog boxes and Toolbars are similar in many ways; you use similar commands and tools to build them. When you choose Tools|UI Builder, a dialog window opens that lets you build dialog boxes and Toolbars for a custom application. The default Toolbar for a dialog window is the Controls Toolbar, which includes tools to help you create each dialog box control.

Dialog Window

Controls Toolbar

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Creating a Dialog Box

Dialog Window Objects


Dialog Window

When you choose Tools|UI Builder, you see an empty dialog box within a dialog window. New dialog boxes contain an OK button and a Cancel button, to provide a consistent way for the user to close the dialog box. Also, a default name is automatically assigned.

When you are creating a dialog box in a dialog window, it looks slightly different from how it will appear to the user in a completed application.

The dialog window is the dialog box in an editable form; it contains all the Windows user interface elements for a window: a window border, a Control-menu box, and Minimize and Maximize buttons.

In the dialog window, the name of the dialog box appears in the title bar. You will use this name in a macro to display the dialog box or change its property settings.

This name is different from the title of the dialog box, which is what the user sees when the application runs.

Toolbars do not have titles, but they do have names (which, like dialog box names, appear in the title bar)

See Also

Active Dialog Window Properties

Dialog Window Objects

Tools for Building Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Controls Toolbar

The Controls Toolbar contains tools that are specifically designed to help you build dialog boxes and Toolbars.

When you move the mouse pointer over a tool in the Controls Toolbar, the status line displays the name of the tool. To see an explanation of a tool, point to a tool and Ctrl+right-click to display Object Help.

These tools let you quickly create, copy, move and test controls. Controls are elements you put in a dialog box to gather information from the user or to perform a desired action.

The Cut [image], Copy [image], and Paste [image] buttons are shortcuts for Edit|Cut, Edit|Copy, and Edit|Paste, respectively. You can copy a control to the Clipboard to duplicate it or to move it to another dialog box or Toolbar.

The Test button [image] tests the operation of a dialog box (or Toolbar). In test mode, the dialog box controls behave exactly as they will when the application runs.

The Selection tool [image] lets you select a control in the dialog window to move it, resize it, or change its properties, etc. You can select several controls at a time, to move or size them together. (You can use Edit|Select All to select all controls in a dialog window.)

The remaining tools on the Toolbar let you add controls to a dialog box; they are described individually under Dialog Window Objects topics.

See Also

Building Complex Toolbars

Creating a Dialog Box

Dialog Window

Tools for Building Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Dialog Box Guidelines

Here are the basic steps to follow to create a dialog box:

1.	Choose Tools|UI Builder. A dialog window appears. (See Opening a New Dialog Box.)

2.	Enter a name for the dialog box (later, you will use this name in a macro to make the dialog box appear).

3.	Enter a title for the dialog box (the title is what the user will see).

4.	Add controls to the dialog box. (See Adding Dialog Controls.)

5.	Customize each control, if necessary. (See Customizing Controls.)

6.	Resize the dialog box, if desired.

7.	In the notebook, create a {DODIALOG} command to call the dialog box and pass initial defaults to it. (See Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command.)

8.	Add a link command to each control, if necessary. A link command indicates what should happen when a user manipulates that control in a specific manner. (See Linking Commands to Dialog Controls.)

9.	Test the operation of each control. (See Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars.)

10.	Save the dialog box (by saving the notebook it is in).

See Also

Creating a Dialog Box

Dialog Window Objects

Tools for Building Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Creating Dialog Boxes

The following topics describe how to create a dialog box.

Opening a New Dialog Box

Adding Dialog Controls

Labeling Controls

Customizing Controls

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command

Linking Commands to Dialog Controls

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Opening a New Dialog Window

The first stage in building a dialog box is opening a blank dialog box and giving it a name and a title.

There are two ways to reach the dialog window. Typically, you will choose Tools|UI Builder from within a spreadsheet page (you could click the dialog icon from the Objects page instead).

1.	Starting from a new notebook, choose Tools|UI Builder. You will see a new dialog window.

2.	To give this new dialog box a name, right-click the dialog box background and choose Dialog Properties, then choose Name. Type a name and choose OK. Notice that the title bar of the dialog box shows its new name.

3.	Next, create the dialog box title. Right-click the dialog box background and choose Dialog Properties, then choose Title. Type the title and choose OK. (You will not see any visible change here; the Title is what a user sees.)

4.	Dialog boxes are stored within their notebook. To save this dialog box, save its notebook--click anywhere in the notebook, choose File|Save As, then enter a file name.

There is an alternative way to create a dialog box: From the notebook, choose the Objects page, then select the New Dialog tool [image] from the Objects Toolbar.

See Also

Adding Dialog Controls

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Window Objects


Adding Dialog Controls

Once you have named a dialog box and given it a title, the next stage is to add the desired controls to it.

Use the Controls Toolbar to add controls to a dialog box. When you move the mouse pointer over a tool in the Controls Toolbar, the status line displays the name of the tool. To see an explanation of a tool in the Controls Toolbar, Ctrl+right-click to display Object Help for a tool.

Quattro Pro offers a variety of different controls; each control is best suited for presenting (or receiving) a certain type of information. Each control displays a setting, and provides a way for users to change that setting.

Following is a brief description of the most commonly used controls (see Dialog Window Objects for full descriptions of controls and their properties).

Push Button	A push button performs a specific action when the user clicks it. The developer determines what that action is.

Check Box	Check boxes present a Yes/No choice to the user. The user checks the check box to accept the choice. Check boxes often are placed within group boxes, to present the user with mutually exclusive choices.

Radio Button	Radio buttons (also called option buttons) are usually grouped, to give the user a mutually-exclusive list. When a user clicks a radio button, its button darkens to indicate that it is chosen.

Label	A label clarifies to the user what a specific control does.

Edit Field	An edit field is where a user types specific information.

Spin Control	A spin control lets the user click an arrow to increase or decrease the value it displays (the user can also type a value instead).

Rectangle	A rectangle embellishes a dialog box or groups two or more controls together.

Group Box	A group box usually contains other controls such as radio buttons or check boxes. It looks like a rectangle with a title at the top.

To add controls to a dialog box, follow these steps:

1.	To go to the dialog window, select the Objects page and double-click the dialog icon. If you do not have a dialog window open, choose Tools|UI Builder.

2.	Choose a tool from the Controls Toolbar.

3.	Position the pointer near the upper left corner of the dialog box (leave room for a label on the left). Click to drop the control into place. The control appears, with its top left corner at the position you clicked.

4.	To make the control bigger, drag one of the control's handles.

Note:	You can create a control and size it all in one step: Instead of clicking the mouse button, move to the position where you want the control to start, then drag the pointer until the control is the desired size.

Tip: There is a fast way to fill a group box with radio buttons--just hold down the Ctrl key while you resize the group box.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Labeling Controls


Labeling Controls

Labels help explain to the user what each control in a dialog box does. To label a control, follow these steps:

1.	Choose the Label tool from the Controls Toolbar.

2.	Move the pointer just to the left of a control, then click. (Move the control to the right if you need more room).

3.	Next, add text to the label: Double-click the label, type the label text, and press Enter.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Customizing Controls

Dialog Window Objects


Customizing Controls

After you have added controls to a dialog box, right-click on the controls and use the Properties command to customize them. (For full descriptions of controls and their properties, see Dialog Window Objects.)

The following topics provide examples of how to customize controls:

Customizing an Edit Field

Customizing a Spin Control

Customizing Radio Buttons and Group Boxes

When you are finished customizing the controls, save your work. Click anywhere in the Objects page, then choose File|Save. Your dialog box is saved with the notebook.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Window Objects

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command


Customizing an Edit Field

This example shows how to customize an edit field and give it a range of 1000-30000:

1.	Right-click an edit field in a dialog box, then choose the EditField Properties command. You will see its Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Field Type, then choose Integer.

3.	Right-click the edit field again and choose the EditField Properties command. Choose Minimum, type 1000, and choose OK.

4.	Right-click the edit field again and choose the EditField Properties command. Choose Maximum, type 30000, and choose OK.

The edit field will not accept text strings or alphabetical characters, or values above 30000 or below 1000.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Customizing Controls

Dialog Window Objects

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command


Customizing a Spin Control

This example shows how to limit a spin control to the range 1-5:

1.	Right-click a spin control in a dialog box, then choose the SpinCtrl Properties command. Choose Minimum, type 1 and choose OK.

2.	Right-click the spin control button again, then choose the SpinCtrl Properties command. Choose Maximum, type 5 and choose OK.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Customizing Controls

Dialog Window Objects

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command


Customizing Radio Buttons and Group Boxes

This example shows how to add descriptive text to radio buttons and group boxes:

1.	Double-click a radio button, type a description of the option, and press Enter.

2.	Repeat this process for other radio buttons.

3.	To give a group box a title, double-click the group box title, type the title, and press Enter.

To size the dialog box, grab a lower left corner of the dialog box and drag it upward, then release the mouse button.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Customizing Controls

Dialog Window Objects

Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command


Displaying a Dialog Box using the {DODIALOG} Command

After you are finished creating a dialog box and customizing the controls in it, the next step is to create a macro that displays the dialog box and stores the user's choices in cells in the notebook. The macro sends initial values to each control in the dialog box. If the user changes a setting in the dialog box, that change is sent back to a cell in the notebook when the user closes the dialog box.

First, set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the dialog box. For example, in the following table for a loan payment dialog box, B1..B5 is a block that defines the initial dialog box settings:

A	B

1	Pay_Every	Month

2	Loan_Amount	100000

3	Int_Rate	12.5

4	Term	30

5	End_Of_Period	No

This sets the default payment period to month, the default loan amount at 100,000, the default interest rate at 12.5%, the default term at 30 years, and specifies payment at the start of the month.

After the initial dialog box settings have been entered in the notebook, enter a macro command that will display the dialog box and send the user's choices back to the notebook. Use the {DODIALOG} command to do this. The {DODIALOG} command has several arguments, which are noted as follows:

The first argument is the name of the notebook that contains the dialog box you want to display, and the name of the dialog box. The name of the notebook is optional if the dialog box is stored in the active notebook.

The second argument specifies a cell that will store a value indicating how the user closed the dialog box. If the dialog box was canceled, 0 is stored in the cell; if the dialog box was closed by Enter or OK, 1 is stored.

The third argument specifies a block that contains initial values for the dialog box controls and receives final values from the dialog box controls when the user closes the dialog box.

The fourth argument (1 or 0) specifies whether the user should manipulate the dialog box (1) or if the macro should manipulate it (0); the default is 1.

Each cell in the block (starting at the upper left cell and proceeding row-wise to the lower right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the user cancels the dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged.

Here is an example of a {DODIALOG} macro used to display a loan payment dialog box using the initial settings in B1..B5:

{DODIALOG "LoanData",B6,B1..B5,1}

This command displays the dialog box and passes the initial values in cells B1 through B5 to the dialog box controls. It also sends a value of 0 to cell B6 if the user cancels the dialog box; otherwise, 1. The final argument of the command specifies that the user can manipulate the dialog box.

To make this dialog box dynamic, so that the user's changes are immediately reflected in the notebook, add link commands to each control.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Window Objects

Linking Commands to Dialog Controls


Linking Commands to Dialog Controls

Link commands are statements you attach to each control, to indicate what should happen when the user changes the control.

The {DODIALOG} command brings changed values back to the notebook when the user closes the dialog box. However, if you set up a dynamic link you do not have to close the dialog box to see the changed values. You accomplish this with link commands.

For example, you might want to add a link command to an edit field to make it write changes back to cell B2 immediately. To add the link commmand to an edit field, follow these steps:

1.	Double-click the edit field.

2.	Choose Tools|Links. The Object Link dialog box appears.

3.	Choose Add.

Basically, you enter link commands as statements, specifying "when a happens, do b to c." The statement reads something like a "what, when, where" statement:

"When the user changes a setting, send the new value back to a specific cell in the notebook."

For a list of link events in the Object Link dialog box, see Link Events. For complete information about link commands, see Working with Link Commands.

For an example showing how to add link commands to dialog box controls, see Adding Link Commands to an Edit Field.

By the way, there is a fast way to create a dynamic link; use Tools|Connect.

After you add link commands, test each control to see if the dynamic links work.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Window Objects

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Adding Link Commands to an Edit Field

Here is an example showing how to add link commands to an edit field:

1.	First, specify what event triggers the command (a "when" statement): Move to the first button, which is labeled Init. This is the Event pick list button.

Hold down the left mouse button, drag to Valuechanged, then release. (You want a value sent back to the notebook when it has been changed.)

2.	Next, specify the action that should occur (a "what" statement): Move to the second button, labeled RECEIVE. Hold down the mouse button, drag to SEND, then release. (You want to send the change back to the notebook).

The third button reads Value; since this is correct, leave it as is (you want to send the new value back to the notebook).

Move to the fourth button, beside TO. This is the Object pick list button, where you specify the object to be acted upon. Hold down the mouse button, and choose <POINT>.

If you are still on the Objects page, click the SpeedTab button [image] to return to the notebook.

Move the Object Link dialog box out of the way if you need to.

3.	In the notebook, click cell B2 (where you want the value sent). You return to the Link dialog box.

Finally, hold down the last button, drag to Value, then release. This indicates what you want done to the cell--set its value.

4.	Choose OK.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Window Objects

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Building Complex Toolbars

Toolbars are not associated with a particular notebook (no icon is created on the Objects page), so you can build a Toolbar from any notebook.

Read each of the following topics in turn to learn how to create a Toolbar.

About Complex Toolbars

Complex Toolbar Guidelines

Opening a New Toolbar

Adding Controls to the Toolbar

Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls

Displaying the Toolbar

Editing Toolbars

Note:	If you want to build a basic Toolbar with standard buttons, use Tools|Toolbar Designer; see Building Basic Toolbars.

See Also

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Window Objects

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


About Complex Toolbars

If you need to create more complex Toolbars with edit fields or other controls besides basic buttons, use Tools|UI Builder. Creating a Toolbar in the dialog window is similar to creating a dialog box. You can apply any of the controls available on the Controls Toolbar, then use link commands to activate them.

See Also

Building Complex Toolbars

Complex Toolbar Guidelines


Complex Toolbar Guidelines

Here are the steps to follow to create a Toolbar with Tools|UI Builder:

1.	In the notebook, select the Objects page (click the SpeedTab button).

2.	Choose Tools|UI Builder. After the new dialog window appears, choose Dialog|New Toolbar. A long, narrow dialog window appears--this is the blank Toolbar. (See Opening a New Toolbar.)

3.	Add controls to the Toolbar. (See Adding Controls to the Toolbar.)

4.	Customize each control as necessary.

5.	Add a link command to each control, to indicate what should happen when the user clicks this control. (See Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls.)

6.	Test each control to make sure that it works properly. (See Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars.)

7.	Save the Toolbar. Since Toolbars are saved as separate files, you can use a Toolbar with different notebooks. (See Saving and Displaying the Toolbar.)

8.	Display the Toolbar using the Toolbar Control menu. (See Saving and Displaying the Toolbar.)

Note:	You can build basic Toolbars with standard buttons using Tools|Toolbar Designer; see Building Basic Toolbars.

See Also

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Tools for Building Dialog Boxes and Complex Toolbars


Opening a New Toolbar

To open a new Toolbar, first, open a blank dialog window:

1.	Select the Objects page.

2.	Choose Tools|UI Builder. After the new dialog window appears, choose Dialog|New Toolbar. A long, narrow dialog window appears--this is the blank Toolbar.

Unlike dialog boxes, Toolbars do not contain an OK and Cancel button.

3.	Name and save this new Toolbar (Toolbars are saved as external files with the extension .BAR): Choose Dialog|Save Toolbar As, type the file name, then choose OK. This name appears in the dialog window's title bar.

If you are making a Toolbar for a specific notebook, consider giving the Toolbar the same name as the notebook, adding the file extension .BAR. This helps you keep track of which Toolbar belongs with which application. Next, add controls to the Toolbar.

See Also

Adding Controls to the Toolbar

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects


Adding Controls to the Toolbar

To add controls to a Toolbar, choose a tool on the Controls Toolbar and then click on the Toolbar.

To see an explanation of tools in the Controls Toolbar, Ctrl+right-click to display Object Help for a tool.

Here is an example showing how to add two buttons to a new Toolbar.

1.	Choose the Push Button tool on the Controls Toolbar. Then click near the left end of the Toolbar.

2.	Double-click this push button and enter Save as the button title.

3.	To create a bitmap button beside the Save button, choose the Bitmap Button tool on the Controls Toolbar, then click to the right of the Save button in the Toolbar.

4.	To replace the OK image on this button's face with a small box, right-click it and choose the BitmapButton Properties command, then choose Bitmap, choose new_g_rectgl from the list box and choose OK. The button is a little too large to fit in the Toolbar, so drag one of its top handles down to shrink it, then move the button up.

5.	Click the Toolbar's background to deselect the bitmap button. Then hold down the Shift key, click the Save button, and click the bitmap button. Both buttons are now selected.

6.	To align these two buttons, choose Tools|Align.

This menu offers several commands to help you visually align controls in dialog boxes and Toolbars.

7.	Choose Horizontal Space, type 10 and choose OK. The buttons should now be evenly spaced. Choose Tools|Align|Top to line up the tops of the controls.

8.	Click the Toolbar's background to deselect the objects.

Next, add link commands to the Toolbar controls.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls


Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls

After adding controls to a Toolbar, you can add links to the controls. Link commands are statements that indicate what happens when a user changes or selects a control.

To add a link command to a control, follow these steps:

1.	Double-click the control.

2.	Choose Tools|Links. The Object Link dialog box appears.

3.	Choose Add.

For a list of link events in the Object Link dialog box, see Link Events. For complete information about link commands, see Working with Link Commands.

For example, consider a new Toolbar that has two buttons, a Save button and a bitmap button. The following examples show how you can make the Save button save the active file and the bitmap button draw a box around the active block.

Linking a Save Button to the Save Command

Linking a Button to a Command That Draws a Box

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Saving and Displaying the Toolbar

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Linking a Save Button to the Save Command

1.	Select the Save button and choose Tools|Links. Then choose Add to create a link command.

2.	Indicate which event should initiate an action--in this case, a mouse click by the user. The event pick list already reads Clicked.

3.	Specify what will happen when the user clicks the button: a macro should run.

Pull down the action pick list (which currently reads RECEIVE) and choose DOMACRO.

4.	Then enter the macro commands that should run when the button is clicked. The remaining pick list buttons change to an edit field, where you enter the macro command you want this button to perform.

Type {FileSave Backup} in the edit field. This macro will save the file and create a backup of the previous version.

5.	Choose OK to save the link command and return to the dialog window.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Displaying the Toolbar

Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls

Working with Link Commands


Linking a Button to a Command That Draws a Box

1.	Select the bitmap button, choose Tools|Links, then choose Add.

2.	Indicate which event should initiate an action--in this case, a mouse click by the user. The event pick list already reads Clicked.

3.	To indicate the action that should happen when the user clicks the button, pull down the action pick list (RECEIVE appears on it) and choose SET (to set the Line Drawing property of a block).

4.	In the edit field type:

Thin,Thin,Thin,Thin,NoChange,NoChange,3,3,3,3,0,0

This property setting draws a think black line around the selected block.

5.	Specify that the link command will change a property in the active block when the button is clicked: Pull down the object pick list (<POINT> appears on it) and choose Active_Block.

6.	To indicate that this setting should go to the active block's Line Drawing property, pull down the last pick list and choose Line_Drawing.

7.	Choose OK to save the link and return to the Toolbar.

Next, save the Toolbar and display it.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Linking Commands to Toolbar Controls

Saving and Displaying the Toolbar

Working with Link Commands


Saving and Displaying the Toolbar

To save a custom Toolbar,

1.	Choose Dialog|Save Toolbar. (If you are using the Toolbar Designer to create a basic Toolbar, choose Toolbar|Save.)

2.	Type a name for the Toolbar, then choose OK.

To display the Toolbar, use the Property Band or the Toolbar Control menu:

To display a Toolbar using the Property Band, click the Toolbars list on the Property Band. Then, choose Append Toolbar.

To display a Toolbar using the Toolbar Control menu, right-click the standard Toolbar any place outside a button or field. Then, choose Append to add the Toolbar below the standard Toolbar.

Note:	To remove a custom Toolbar, click the Close Toolbar button. (You can also remove a Toolbar using the Toolbar Control menu: right-click the Toolbar any place outside a button or field, then choose Remove.)

You can also display a Toolbar using the {Toolbar.Option} macro command.

To hide the standard Toolbar, choose View|Display, and uncheck the Show Toolbar option. You can also use the following macro command to hide the standard Toolbar:

{Application.Display.Show_Toolbar "No"}

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Editing Toolbars

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Editing Toolbars

To edit a Toolbar,

1.	Choose Tools|UI Builder.

2.	Choose Dialog|Open Toolbar.

3.	After making any changes, choose Dialog|Save Toolbar.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Dialog Window Objects

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars

Testing Dialog Boxes

Follow these procedures to test the link commands for a dialog box:

1.	Choose the Test button [image] from the Controls Toolbar (or choose Test from the dialog window's Control menu). The dialog box will look just as the user will see it (except TEST MODE appears next to the dialog box title).

In Test mode, you cannot activate any other windows unless you have configured a control in the dialog box to do so.

2.	Move the dialog box to the left or right, so that you can see the cells in the notebook.

3.	Change the settings of controls in the dialog box and see if the notebook cells change simultaneously. For example, if the dialog box has an edit field, enter a value in the field and check to see that the linked notebook cell has changed.

4.	To end Test mode, choose OK.

5.	To save your work, click any cell in the notebook and choose File|Save.

Testing Toolbars

Follow these same procedures to test a Toolbar created using Toolbar Designer or the UI Builder:

1.	Click the Test button [image] in the Controls Toolbar (or choose Test in the Toolbar's Control-menu). The active Toolbar enters Test mode. You can restore minimized notebooks, then see if buttons or other controls work as expected.

2.	To end Test mode, double-click the Control-menu box to resume Edit mode.

You can also choose Stop from the Toolbar's Control menu, or click the Cancel button to exit Test mode. Pressing Esc is the same as clicking Cancel. If the Toolbar has link commands that run when Cancel is clicked, those link commands will run.

3.	Make any necessary edits, then test and save the Toolbar as before.

In Test mode Toolbars are not locked to the top of the Quattro Pro window. You can use Test mode to create "floating" Toolbars. Unlike dialog boxes, multiple Toolbars can be in Test mode at the same time.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Creating a Dialog Box

Dialog Window Objects


Working with Dialog Boxes

You can create, rename, or copy dialog boxes on the Objects page. Work with icons on the Objects page to perform operations listed in this table:

Operation	Step(s)

Edit	Double-click the dialog box icon. Right-clicking the icon and choosing the Dialog Properties command lets you set various dialog box properties.

Rename	Right-click the dialog box icon, choose the Dialog Properties command, then choose Name. Enter the new name.

Delete	Click the dialog box icon and choose Edit|Clear (or press Del).

Copy to another	Click the dialog box icon, choose Edit|Copy, select the destination notebook's Objects page, and choose Edit|Paste. If both the source and the destination notebook appear on the Quattro Pro desktop, you can copy the dialog box by selecting the source notebook's Objects page and dragging the dialog box icon into the destination notebook window.

Duplicate	Click the dialog box icon, choose Edit|Copy, then choose Edit|Paste. A duplicate cannot have the same name as the original, so a unique name is automatically generated.

Move to another	Select the dialog box icon, choose Edit|Cut notebook to select the destination notebook's Objects page, then choose Edit|Paste.

See Also

Creating a Dialog Box

Dialog Window Objects


Working with Controls

The information in this section applies, generally, to all controls used in dialog boxes. Most of these topics also apply to Toolbar controls.

Selecting Several Controls

Copying and Moving Controls

Moving and Sizing Controls

Using the Dimension Options

Moving Overlapping Controls

Aligning Controls

Repositioning Controls

Setting a Control's Value

Changing a Control's Text

Using the Clipboard with Controls

Assigning a Key to a Control

Setting Tab Order

Group Box Selection Order

Disabling and Hiding Controls

Grouping Controls

Connecting Controls to Cells or Other Controls

Providing Hints

Creating Object Help

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Creating Dialog Boxes

Dialog Window Objects


Selecting Several Controls

You can select more than one control at a time to move them as a group:

1.	Choose the Selection tool [image] from the Controls Toolbar.

2.	Hold down Shift and click each control you want to select. Handles surround each control as you select it.

To deselect a control, click it again.

Another way to select multiple controls is to choose the Selection tool and drag a selection frame around the controls. You can also use Edit|Select All to select all controls in a dialog window.

To deselect a group of controls, choose the Selection tool and click the dialog window background.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Copying and Moving Controls

To move a control to a different dialog box (or Toolbar), select the control, choose Edit|Cut to move it to the Clipboard, then choose Edit|Paste to copy it into another dialog window in another notebook. (The target notebook and dialog box must be open and active.) Each time you choose Edit|Paste a new copy of the control is created.

Caution: Deselect any controls in the active dialog window before using Edit|Paste, so the selected control is not changed (see Using the Clipboard with Controls for details).

To copy a control to the Clipboard without removing it from the active dialog window, select it and choose Edit|Copy.

Copying Parent Controls

Copying a parent control to the Clipboard copies any controls attached to it as well; removing the parent control from the dialog window also removes the attached controls. See Grouping Controls for details.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Moving and Sizing Controls

To resize or move a control,

1.	Choose the Selection tool.

2.	Select the control by clicking it.

3.	To move a control, point to it and drag it. To resize a control, drag one of its handles.

If multiple controls are selected, dragging one control moves all the controls; dragging the handle of one control also resizes the other selected controls.

Selecting multiple controls (by holding down Shift while clicking them) and choosing Tools|Align|Resize to Same resizes the selected controls to the same size as the first control selected.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Moving Overlapping Controls

Using the Dimension Options

Working with Controls


Using the Dimension Options

To specify a precise size and position for a control, right-click the control and choose the Properties command, then choose Dimension. The next table lists Dimension options:

Option	Description

X Pos	Distance in pixels between the left edge of the control and the left side of the dialog box.

Y Pos	Distance in pixels between the top edge of the control and the bottom edge of the dialog box's title bar.

Width	Width of the control, in pixels.

Height	Height of the control, in pixels.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Dimension Property

Moving and Sizing Controls

Moving Overlapping Controls

Working with Controls


Moving Overlapping Controls

The next table lists commands on the Tools|Object Order menu that let you display a control that is beneath another control.

Command	Description

Bring Forward	Brings the selected control one step forward.

Send Backward	Sends the selected control one step backward.

Bring to Front	Places the selected control over any controls that covered it previously.

Send to Back	Places the selected control beneath any controls it covered previously.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Moving and Sizing Controls

Using the Dimension Options

Working with Controls


Aligning Controls

To align controls, right-click the dialog window background and choose the Dialog Properties command, then choose Grid Options. There are three settings that help align controls.

Setting	Description

Grid Size	Lets you specify the distance in pixels between grid points.

Show Grid	Makes the grid visible. Dots appearing in the background represent each grid point. (Users will not see this grid.)

Snap to Grid	Enables a hidden grid. Controls will align with the grid as you move them.

See Also

Aligning Multiple Controls

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Aligning Multiple Controls

You can use commands on the Tools|Align menu to align or reorder multiple controls.

Command	Description

Left	Aligns controls along the left edge of the leftmost object selected.

Right	Aligns controls along the right edge of the rightmost object selected.

Horizontal Center	Centers controls between the top and bottom of the dialog box.

Top	Aligns controls along the top edge of the topmost object selected.

Bottom	Aligns controls along the bottom edge of the bottommost object selected.

Vertical Center	Centers controls between the left and right sides of the dialog box.

Horizontal Space	Horizontally spaces controls by the amount of pixels you specify (the vertical position of the controls remains the same). It also reorders the controls based on the order in which you selected them (see Repositioning Controls for details).

Vertical Space	Vertically spaces controls by the amount of pixels you specify (the horizontal position of the controls remain the same). It also reorders the controls based on the order in which you selected them (see Repositioning Controls for details).

Resize to Same	Sets all selected controls to the same size as the first control selected.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Repositioning Controls

The commands Horizontal Space and Vertical Space let you evenly space and arrange controls in a dialog box.

The following example shows how to reposition controls using the Horizontal Space command.

1.	Open a dialog box and use Shift+click to select controls to arrange. The first control you select appears at the left after repositioning, the next appears to the right of it, and so on.

2.	Choose Tools|Align|Horizontal Space.

3.	Set their new spacing, in pixels. The default is 5.

4.	Click OK.

Vertical Space behaves like Horizontal Space, but the first control you select moves to the top, the second control moves just below the first, and so on.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Setting a Control's Value

Each control stores one setting; the user manipulates the control (by clicking a scroll arrow, typing text, and so on) to change that setting.

There are several ways to set a control's value:

through initial settings you pass using a {DODIALOG} command

by a user changing a setting from within the dialog box

through the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command

with rough link commands from any dialog control (see Working with Link Commands for details).

For example, the following macro command uses the Value property to enter Spanish into an edit field:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "Dialog1:EditField3.Value","Spanish"}

See the following topics for details on how to set a control's value:

Setting a Control's Initial Value

Changing the Order in Which You Pass Initial Values

Editing the Setting Order

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Setting a Control's Initial Value

The macro command {DODIALOG} displays the specified dialog box.

Here is an example of a {DODIALOG} command:

{DODIALOG "LoanData", Result, B1..B5}

This command displays the LoanData dialog box, places the results of how the user closed the dialog box in the cell named Result, and passes the values in cells B1 through B5 to the controls in the dialog box, in order.

If a control's Process Value property is set to No, it will not receive an initial value from the block specified in the {DODIALOG} command.

For example, if your dialog box has six controls, but you have set the Process Value property of the third control to No, your setting block should be only five cells long. The values in the first two cells will be passed to the first two controls. However, the value in the third cell will go to the fourth control, and the values in the fourth and fifth cells will go to the fifth and sixth controls, respectively.

Controls that do not have a Process Value property will receive no value from a {DODIALOG} command.

See Also

Changing the Order in Which You Pass Initial Values

Dialog Window Objects

Editing the Setting Order

Setting a Control's Value

Working with Controls


Changing the Order in Which You Pass Initial Values

By default, the order in which you created the controls is the order in which you must pass each control's value (through the {DODIALOG} command). In other words, the first cell in the specified block sends its value to the first control you created no matter where it is positioned within the dialog box.

For example, the last argument in the command {DODIALOG "LoanData", Result, B1..B5} specifies that cells B1 through B5 contain initial values for the controls in the dialog box. Cell B1 must contain the initial value for the first control you created, cell B2 must contain the value for the second one, and so on.

To change the order of the controls in the dialog box to match the order of the values in the setting block:

1.	Click the dialog window background to deselect its controls.

2.	Hold down the Shift key and, in the order in which you want to pass initial settings, click each control.

3.	Choose Tools|Object Order|Order Controls.

The first control you clicked will receive its initial value from the first cell of the block, the second control you click will receive its initial value from the second cell of the block, and so on, regardless of their arrangement within the dialog box.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Editing the Setting Order

Setting a Control's Initial Value

Setting a Control's Value

Working with Controls


Editing the Setting Order

If you have many controls in your dialog box, you can use a shortcut to re-order the controls to match the order of the values in the setting block. Use Tools|Object Order|Order From to place related controls together in the setting order.

For example, suppose you have six controls in this order:

 1 2 3 4 5 6

But the setting block in your notebook already has the values in this order:

 1 2 5 4 3 6

The only controls that are out of order are 4 and 3; you want them to follow 2. You can re-order the controls to match this order:

1.	Click the dialog window background to deselect its controls.

2.	Hold down the Shift key, then click control 2, then control 3, then control 4.

3.	Choose Tools|Object Order|Order From.

See Also

Changing the Order in Which You Pass Initial Values

Dialog Window Objects

Setting a Control's Initial Value

Setting a Control's Value

Working with Controls


Changing a Control's Text

If a control has a Label Text property, which is set to the title appearing on the control, you can set the property by double-clicking the control, typing the new text (or editing the existing text) and pressing Enter.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Using the Clipboard with Controls

When the Clipboard contains text from Quattro Pro or another Windows application, you can paste the text into these controls:

Control	Effect

Buttons	The text becomes the button title.

List Boxes	The text becomes the list; each line becomes one item. The first item becomes the initial title.

Combo Boxes	same as List Boxes

Pick Lists	same as List Boxes

Group Boxes	Creates radio buttons in the group box; each line becomes the title of one radio button.

Edit Fields	The text becomes its new value.

If the Clipboard contains a bitmap, you can select a bitmap button and choose Edit|Paste to paste the bitmap onto the button's face. This bitmap is saved with the dialog box.

You can also select a dialog control and choose Edit|Copy to copy control titles, lists, or bitmaps to the Clipboard to paste them into other areas of Quattro Pro and other Windows applications.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Assigning a Key to a Control

An underlined letter in the text of a control acts as a shortcut key; it indicates that the user can press Alt and that letter to activate the control. To specify this underlined letter,

1.	Double-click the control's text.

2.	Move the insertion point to just before the letter to underline.

3.	Type an ampersand (&). For example, B&utton sets the title to Button.

4.	Press Enter.

You can also assign a shortcut letter to a control that has no title (such as an edit field or a list box):

1.	Right-click the control and choose the Properties command.

2.	Choose Name.

3.	Move the insertion point to just before the letter to use. You can type a new name for the control if needed.

4.	Type an ampersand (&). Then press Enter.

When a control does not have a title, you can place a shortcut key in the control's label. Just double-click the label and type an ampersand to the left of the letter you want to use as the shortcut. Press Enter to save the new label text. Use only one ampersand character in the label; if you add more than one, the first is recognized as a shortcut key designation, and the remaining ones will appear in the label as text.

You can add alternative shortcut keys to controls using link commands. See Link Events for details on the event key, which you can use to run a link command when a specific key is pressed.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Setting Tab Order

A user can press Tab to cycle through each control in a dialog box. To disable this feature for a particular control, right-click the control, choose the Properties command, and set the Tab Stop property to No.

To specify the order in which Tab moves from control to control, hold down the Shift key and select each control in the order you want them to cycle. Then choose Tools|Object Order|Order Tab Controls to save the new order.

You can pull specific controls out of the tab order and group them together using Tools|Object Order|Order Tab From. For example, suppose the following numbers represented the existing tab order:

 1 2 3 4 5 6

If you select items 2, 4 and 6, choosing Order Tab From would change the tab order as follows:

 1 2 4 6 3 5

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Group Box Selection Order

When check box buttons are placed in a group box, the user can activate one of the check boxes and then use Tab or arrow keys to select the next check box (the user can then press Space to check the active check box button). To change the order in which the check boxes are selected,

1.	Choose the Selection tool [image] from the Controls Toolbar.

2.	Click the dialog window's background to deselect any selected controls.

3.	Hold down Shift and then click each check box, in the order in which you want the user to scroll through them.

4.	Drag the check boxes until the pointer changes to a small hand. This saves the new order.

When radio buttons are placed in a group box, the user can activate one of the radio buttons and then use arrow keys to select and choose the next radio button. You can set this selection order in the same way as check boxes: Select the radio buttons in the order you want the user to scroll through them and then move them slightly to save the new order.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Disabling and Hiding Controls

Dialog controls have a variety of properties that you can use to temporarily hide or disable them. You can use these properties in conjunction with link commands to hide unneeded controls or reveal special settings.

Properties to hide or disable dialog controls:

Property	Purpose

Grayed	Specifies whether the control can be used. When set to Yes, the control appears dimmer, to indicate it is unavailable, and is disabled.

Disabled	Specifies whether the control can be used, like Grayed, but does not dim the control when it is set to Yes.

Depend On	Specifies the states of Quattro Pro in which the control is enabled. (See Using the Depend On Property.)

Enabled	The opposite of Disabled (setting this property to No disables the control). It is used by link commands and does not appear in a control's Object Inspector.

Hidden	Setting this property to Yes hides the control when the dialog box displays. (The control still appears in the dialog window while you are editing.)

Show	The opposite of Hidden (setting this property to No hides the control). It is used by link commands and does not appear in the control Object Inspector.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Using the Depend On Property

The most useful property for disabling controls is Depend On. Use it to specify the areas of Quattro Pro in which the control is disabled. For example, some controls are appropriate only when a graph window is active; to create a control that will be available only when a graph window is active,

1.	Right-click the control and choose the Properties command, then choose Depend On.

2.	Uncheck all check boxes except Graph to specify that this control is available only when a graph window is active.

Each check box button controls one area of Quattro Pro, as shown in the next table.

Quattro Pro areas:

Area	When its check box is checked

Desktop	Enables the control when no windows are open.

Notebook	Enables the control when a notebook window is active.

Graph	Enables the control when a graph window is active.

Dialog	Enables the control when a dialog window is active.

Input Line	Enables the control when the input line is active (when typing a new entry or editing a cell).

Objects Page	Enables the control when a notebook window is active and the Objects Page is selected.

If all options are checked, the dialog control is always available.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls


Grouping Controls

Some dialog controls have an Attach Child property that makes controls dragged on top of them become attached. The control on top is then a child of the control beneath it, which is the parent. Grouping controls provides many advantages to the developer:

Moving the parent control moves any attached elements.

Copying the parent control copies any attached elements.

Hiding the parent control hides any attached elements.

Disabling the parent control disables any attached elements.

Resizing the parent control resizes any attached elements proportionally.

Child controls must cover the parent control only; controls partially covering one another will not attach. Here is an example of grouping controls together:

1.	Choose Tools|UI Builder to display a new dialog window.

2.	Use the Rectangle tool to create a rectangle that is big enough to contain the OK button.

3.	Move the OK button into the rectangle. The OK button is now attached to the rectangle.

4.	Move the rectangle; the OK button stays with the rectangle.

5.	Right-click the rectangle and choose the Rectangle Properties command, then choose Disabled and set it to Yes.

6.	Choose the Test button [image] to test the dialog box's operation.

7.	Click the OK button; nothing happens, since the rectangle (its parent control) is disabled.

8.	Click the Cancel button to exit Test mode and return to the dialog window.

To prevent an object from becoming a parent control, right-click it and choose the Properties command, then set the Attach Child property to No. This does not affect controls already attached.

All controls in a dialog window are child controls of the dialog box (or Toolbar), which is the parent control. To disable all controls in a dialog box, right-click the dialog box and choose the Dialog Properties command, then set Disabled to yes.

Nesting Grouped Controls

You can nest attached controls (for example, you can move a parent control on top of another control to attach them). The attached controls still stay associated with the original parent control, not that control's new parent.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Resizing Grouped Controls

Working with Controls


Resizing Grouped Controls

Moving a parent control moves any child controls with it. (Moving child controls does not affect the parent.) You can use a child control's Position Adjust property to specify how it moves (or resizes) when the parent control containing it is resized.

By default, a child control moves when a handle on the left or top side of its parent control is dragged. If you right-click a child control and choose the Properties command, then choose Position Adjust, and check Depend on parent, each edge of the child control is locked into place so that when the parent control is resized, the child control resizes proportionally.

When a handle of the parent control is dragged while Position Adjust is enabled, an edge of the child control is pushed or pulled, as shown by the arrows in the next figure.

Dragging a corner handle affects two sides of the child control. For example, dragging the lower right handle would affect the bottom and right edges of the child control.

If the edge of a parent control is pushed toward or pulled away from an edge of the child control that is locked, the child control is resized.

You can use the check boxes in the Position Adjust dialog box to unlock edges of the child control. If an edge of the parent control is pushed toward or pulled away from an unlocked edge, the child control moves instead of resizing.

You can check Center Horizontally to center the control between the left and right sides of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized. Check Center Vertically to center the control between the top and bottom edges of the parent control.

Click Position Adjust Example for step-by-step directions.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Grouping Controls

Working with Controls


Position Adjust Example

This example shows how to use Position Adjust:

1.	Choose Tools|UI Builder to display a new dialog window.

2.	The OK and Cancel buttons are child controls of the dialog box. Right-click the OK button and choose the Button Properties command, then choose Position Adjust. Check Depend on Parent to enable automatic positioning. Choose OK to save the setting.

3.	Repeat the previous step for the Cancel button.

4.	Drag the lower right corner of the dialog window to shrink the dialog window. Notice that both buttons shrink proportionally.

To make the Cancel button move instead of resizing,

1.	Right-click the Cancel button and choose the Button Properties command, then choose Position Adjust.

2.	Check Top Relative and Left Relative to unlock the top and left edges of the Cancel button.

3.	Choose OK to save the change and drag the lower right corner of the dialog window to shrink it.

Notice that the OK Button still shrinks, but the Cancel button moves. Now whenever the right or bottom edge of the dialog box is dragged, the Cancel button moves instead of shrinking.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Grouping Controls

Resizing Grouped Controls

Working with Controls


Connecting Controls to Cells or Other Controls

The Tools|Connect command is a quick way to link a control to another control or to a notebook cell. This command exchanges settings by creating a link command in the selected object. Use Tools|Links to modify "connected" link commands.

To connect a control:

1.	Select the control you want to connect.

2.	Choose Tools|Connect, then select the cell (or control) you want to link to. The linked object's name or address appears in the Target edit field; the control's name appears in Source.

3.	If you want to send changes in the control's value to the target cell or control immediately, check Dynamic Connection; otherwise, the target object will only be updated when the dialog box is closed.

4.	Choose OK to save the connection and return to the dialog window.

This example connects a scroll bar to a notebook cell:

1.	Select cell A1 of the notebook and enter 16. This will be the initial value for the scroll bar.

2.	Choose Tools|UI Builder.

3.	Create a vertical scroll bar.

4.	Choose Tools|Connect. Click cell A1, then choose OK.

5.	To test the link, choose the Test button. The scroll box on the scroll bar will jump to a new position after receiving its initial value from cell A1.

6.	Drag the scroll box; the value stored in cell A1 changes.

7.	Choose OK to exit Test mode.

Note:	To delete a "connected" link, choose Tools|Links, select the correct link, then click Delete.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Controls

Working with Link Commands


Providing Hints

When a user activates a control, a brief description of the control appears on the title bar. To create this hint, right-click the control and choose the Properties command, then choose Help Line, type the hint, and choose OK.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Help Line Property

Working with Controls


Creating Object Help

Object Help identifies Toolbar buttons and dialog box controls. To display Object Help for a control, you point to the control and press Ctrl as you right-click the mouse.

To create Object Help for a control, follow these steps:

1.	Right-click the control and choose the Properties command.

2.	Choose Object Help. The Object Help dialog box appears.

3.	For Object Help Title, type the title of the control. For Object Help Text, type a description of how the control functions.

4.	If you have created a Windows Help file for your custom application, and you want the Object Help window to display a Help button, type the context string of the relevant Help topic in the WinHelp Context field. The context string must be followed by the @ symbol and the Help file name. The name of the Help file cannot include a path; the file must be located in the Quattro Pro directory. For example, the WinHelp context for the Quattro Pro Help Contents screen is HELP_TOPICS@QPW.HLP.

5.	Choose OK.

6.	To test Object Help, choose the Test button, then point to the control and press Ctrl as you right-click the mouse.

Note:	The combined total of all characters in the three Object Help fields may not exceed 194 characters.

For information about creating Windows Help files, see the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Object Help Property

Working with Controls


Working with Link Commands: Overview

Link commands are statements you attach to a control, to indicate what should happen when the user changes or selects the control. A link command can do many things; it can send a value to a cell in the notebook; it can run a macro; it can close the dialog box; it can change the zoom factor in the notebook.

Link commands will usually specify at least three things: an event, an action, and an object. The event indicates what occurrence should trigger the link command; the action indicates what should happen; the object is what should be acted upon. One control can have many link commands.

The following topics explain link commands in detail.

The Object Link Dialog Box

Link Events

Assigning a Link Command to a Control

Link Command Examples

See Also

Dialog Window Objects


The Object Link Dialog Box

To add link commands to a control, select the control and choose Tools|Links.

Buttons in the Object Link dialog box:

Button	Purpose

Add	creates a new link command below the selected link command.

Insert	creates a new link command above the selected link command.

Delete	removes the selected link command from the control.

Delete All	removes all link commands from the control.

See Object Link Dialog Box Components for a graphic example of a control with a link command assigned to it. Each row of pick list buttons in the Object Link dialog box is a link command.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Making Menu Commands Act

Working with Link Commands


Link Events

A link command runs in response to some event that occurs in a dialog box (or Toolbar). The first pick list button in a link command (the Event pick list button) shows what specific event you want to trigger the link command.

Note:	A control can have more than one link command respond to the same event. The order in which the link commands appear in the Object Link dialog box is the order they will run.

The next table lists each event and what it detects.

Event	Will trigger the link command when...

Init	The dialog box is about to appear. Use this to set initial settings.

Init_Complete	Available only when adding a link command to the dialog box itself, this event occurs immediately after all controls have run all link commands that respond to Init.

OKExit	The user closes the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.

CancelExit	The user cancels the dialog box. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.

Clicked	The user clicks the control.

Right_bdown	The user right-clicks the control.

Left_bdown	The user points to the control and is holding down the left mouse button. Releasing the button generates a Clicked event.

Doubleclick	The user double-clicks the control.

Valuechanged	The user changes the value of the control. This event occurs anytime the value is changed (by the user, by a link command, or by a macro command).

key:keystroke	The user presses the key keystroke. When you choose key from the event pick list, it flashes to indicate that you must press a key. Press the key you want to generate the event. The key displays after key: in the pick list button when it is set. For example, key:Ctrl+F5 indicates that the link command is triggered by Ctrl+F5.

Activate	The user has chosen the control for manipulation. For example, clicking an edit field generates this event. Use Valuechanged to trap the final result.

Deactivate	The user has chosen another control, leaving this control inactive.

Enter	The user presses Enter (for edit field controls only).

Lineup	The user increases the scroll bar's value by clicking a scroll arrow (available only on scroll bar controls).

Linedown	The user decreases the scroll bar's value by clicking a scroll arrow (available only on scroll bar controls).

Pageup	The user increases the scroll bar's value by clicking it between a scroll arrow and the scroll box (available only on scroll bar controls).

Pagedown	The user decreases the scroll bar's value by clicking it between a scroll arrow and the scroll box (available only on scroll bar controls).

Thumb	The user clicks or drags the scroll bar's scroll box (scroll bar controls only).

Editdynamic	The user is inserting or deleting characters in the combo box's edit field (combo box controls only).

Trigger	This event cannot be generated by any user action; use it to set link commands that can only be run by other link commands. You can use the link command TRIGGER to generate this event.

Alarm	The time of day specified in the timer's Alarm Time property has been reached (time controls only).

Timer	The amount of time indicated in the timer's Timer Interval property has elapsed (time controls only).

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Link Commands


Assigning a Link Command to a Control

To add a link command to a control,

1.	Select the control, then choose Tools|Links.

2.	Choose Add to create a new link command.

3.	Point to the first pick list button (the Event pick list). Hold down the left mouse button, drag to the event that should initiate the link command, then release.

4.	Point to the second button (the Action pick list). Hold down the mouse button, drag to the desired command, then release.

5.	The remaining pick list buttons change, depending on which action you chose in step 4. Set the remaining buttons as needed.

6.	Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional link commands.

7.	Choose OK to save the link commands and return to the dialog window.

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Linking a Dialog Box to Help

Working with Link Commands


Linking a Dialog Box to Help

You can link a dialog box or a Help button in a dialog box to a Help topic in a Windows Help file that you have created. When the dialog box is active, you can press F1 or click a Help button to display a Help topic.

To link a dialog box to Help, follow these steps:

1.	Select the dialog box and choose Tools|Links.

2.	Choose Add and create the following link command:

On Init Set HelpContext@HelpFile To Help Context

In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string following by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the Help file cannot include a path; the file must be located in the Quattro Pro directory. For example, the WinHelp context string for the Quattro Pro Help Contents screen is HELP_TOPICS@QPW.HLP.

Note: When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list, choose <Enter> and type Help in the edit field.

3.	Choose OK to save the link command.

4.	To test the link, choose the Test button, then press F1. The Help topic you specified appears.

Linking a Help button to Help

To link a Help button to Help, follow these steps:

1.	Select the Help button and choose Tools|Links.

2.	Choose Add and create the following link command:

On Init Set HelpContext@HelpFile To Help Context

In the edit field to the right of Set, type the WinHelp context string following by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file.

Note: When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list, choose <Enter> and type Help in the edit field.

3.	Choose Add again and create the following link command:

On Clicked Execute Help Context

4.	Choose OK to save the link command.

5.	To test the link, choose the Test button, then click the Help button. The Help topic you specified appears.

For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).

See Also

Dialog Window Objects

Working with Link Commands


Enhancing Graphs

The following topics describe how to add drawn objects, graphics, and text to graphs, and import and export graphics in a variety of formats.

Drawing

Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Drawing Freehand Shapes

Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

Working with Objects

Selecting Objects

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

Arranging Object Layers

Aligning Objects

Moving and Resizing Objects

Changing Object Properties

Text Boxes and Spreadsheet Blocks

Creating Text Boxes in a Graph

Referencing a Cell on a Notebook Page

Entering Text from the Clipboard

Adding Bullets to Text

Changing Text Properties

Presetting Text and Box Properties

Creating 3-D Text

Adding Spreadsheet Blocks to a Graph

Using Color

Using Color Palettes

Creating Custom Colors

Creating Custom Color Palettes

Importing, Exporting, and Modifying Graphics

Importing Graphics

Cropping, Resizing, and Tiling Bitmaps

Modifying .CGM and .CLP Graphics

Exporting Graphics

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Building Graphs

Customizing Graph Properties

Printing Graphs


Creating Lines and Shapes
Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes

You can draw lines and shapes in any graph with the tools on the Graph Toolbar. Here are a few rules and tips:

Pick the correct Aspect Ratio for a graph before you begin to draw; otherwise, you may have to resize, reposition, or even redraw elements to fit the final format.

To draw a shape, choose a tool on the Toolbar. To keep the tool selected after you use it, double-click the tool. If you double-click a tool to keep it active, click it again to deactivate it. To identify each tool, point to it.

To select fill color and background colors, fill pattern (if any), and border color and style of an object before you draw it, choose a color from the Palette Toolbar, then choose the drawing tool from the Graph Toolbar. To cycle through available Toolbars, press Ctrl+Shift+T.

To change the color and pattern of an object after you create it, right-click the object and choose the Properties command to display its Object Inspector.

You can also use the Palette Toolbar to change an object's attributes after you create it. You can change the palette displayed in the Palette Toolbar, or create and save your own custom palettes (see Creating Custom Color Palettes).

Use the Draw palette (available from the palette list box in the Palette Toolbar) to add color to lines, polylines, freehand lines, and arrows, either before or after you draw them. Choices from this palette also make filled objects appear borderless because the fill color and border color are the same.

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Drawing Freehand Shapes

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

Enhancing Graphs


Drawing Lines and Arrows

Use the Line tool [image] on the Graph Toolbar to draw straight lines anywhere on a graph. Use the Arrow tool [image] to draw a straight line with an arrowhead at the end.

The Line and Arrow tools on the Draw Toolbar lets you create lines and arrows in a layer above the spreadsheet.

To draw a line or arrow, click the Line tool or the Arrow tool and drag from where you want the line to start to where you want it to end. If you are using the Arrow tool, the arrowhead appears at the end of the line where you release the mouse button.

To customize a Line or Arrow, right-click it, choose the Properties command, and change its properties.

Note:	The properties for lines and arrows that you draw on a spreadsheet differ from the properties of lines and arrows drawn in a graph window.

See Also

Drawing Freehand Shapes

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

Enhancing Graphs

Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes


Drawing Polylines and Polygons

The Polyline tool [image] draws lines that have more than one segment. The Polygon tool [image] creates closed shapes with as many sides as you want. To draw a polyline or polygon,

1.	Click the Polyline tool or the Polygon tool.

2.	Place the pointer on the part of the graph where you want the line or segment to begin.

3.	Drag to the point where you want the first segment or side to end and the second segment or side to begin, then release the mouse button.

4.	Create additional segments or sides by dragging the mouse and releasing the mouse button at the end of each segment.

5.	When you are ready to create the last side, double-click or right-click. Quattro Pro completes the shape for you. You can also close the polygon by clicking very close to the starting point.

To customize the Polyline or Polygon, right-click it, choose the Properties command, and change its properties.

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Drawing Freehand Shapes

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

Enhancing Graphs

Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes


Drawing Freehand Shapes

The Freehand Polyline tool [image] draws a line anywhere you drag the mouse. The Freehand Polygon tool [image] creates a closed shape; you drag the mouse to draw the shape's border. To draw a freehand line or polygon,

1.	Click the Freehand Polyline tool or the Freehand Polygon tool.

2.	Position the mouse pointer where you want the figure to begin.

3.	Hold down the mouse button and drag to draw the figure.

4.	Release the mouse button to complete the polyline or polygon.

To customize the Freehand Line or Freehand Polygon, right-click it, choose the Properties command, and change its properties.

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

Enhancing Graphs

Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes


Drawing Rectangles and Ovals
Drawing Rectangles and Ellipses

The Rectangle tool [image] on the Graph Toolbar draws squares and rectangles. The Rounded Rectangle tool [image] creates squares and rectangles with rounded edges. The Ellipse tool [image] draws circles and ovals.

The Rectangle, Rounded Rectangle, and Ellipse tools on the Draw Toolbar lets you create rectangles and ellipses in a layer above the spreadsheet.

To draw any of these shapes,

1.	Click the tool you want to use.

2.	Drag the mouse to create a figure of the shape and size you want, then release the mouse to complete the figure.

Tip:	To create a perfect square or circle, press Shift while you drag the mouse to create the shape.

To customize the Ellipse, Rectangle, or Rounded Rectangle, right-click it, choose the Properties command, and change its properties.

Note:	The properties for rectangles, rounded rectangles, and ellipses that you draw on a spreadsheet differ from the properties of the same objects drawn in a graph window.

See Also

Drawing Freehand Shapes

Drawing Lines and Arrows

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Drawing Polylines and Polygons

Enhancing Graphs

Tips for Creating Lines and Shapes


Selecting Objects

You do not have to select an object to change its properties (just right-click it and choose the Properties command to display its Object Inspector). Before you can move or resize an object, though, you must select it.

To select a single object, click the Selection tool [image], then click the object.

To select an object group, click the Selection tool, then click any object in the group.

To select every object in an area, click the selection tool, place the mouse pointer just outside one corner of the area, then drag diagonally until the selection box encloses all the objects.

To select several objects individually, click the Selection tool, then hold down Shift while you click each object. To deselect an object, click it again while you still hold down Shift.

To select all objects in a graph window, choose Edit|Select All.

When an object is selected it has handles at its corners and sides.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs

Grouping and Ungrouping Objects


Grouping and Ungrouping Objects

You group two or more objects when you want them to be treated as a single object in subsequent operations. For example, you might group all the objects in a complex drawing to ensure that no objects are left behind or shift position when you move them.

To group objects, select them and choose Tools|Group. To nest groups within other groups, select any combination of groups and individual objects, then choose Tools|Group. Once you group objects, you can move and resize them with the mouse.

To break a group into its original components, select it and choose Tools|Ungroup. If the group had other groups nested within it, these groups remain intact. You must use Tools|Ungroup again to ungroup them.

To change the properties of every object in a group in one operation, right-click an object in the group (NOT an area between objects) and choose the Properties command to display the group Object Inspector, then adjust property settings and choose OK. To change the fill color, background color, fill style, border color and border style of all solid objects in the group simultaneously, click the group, then click a color on the Toolbar palette.

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Enhancing Graphs


Arranging Object Layers

The objects you create can overlap on invisible layers. To change the order of these layers, select the object (or group of objects), then choose one of these commands from the Tools|Object Order submenu:

Bring Forward	Moves the selected objects forward one layer.

Send Backward	Moves the selected objects backward one layer.

Bring to Front	Places the selected objects on top of all other objects in the stack.

Send to Back	Places the selected objects behind all other objects in the stack.

Tip:	You can also arrange object layers using tools on the Align Toolbar. To show the Align Toolbar, click the Toolbar list in the Property Band of a graph window and choose Align.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Aligning Objects

You can line up the center or edges of two or more objects using Tools|Align. This command has eight options:

	Left lines up the left sides of the selected figures.
	Right lines up the right sides of the selected figures.
	Horizontal Center lines up the centers of the objects as though they are beads on an invisible horizontal string.
	Horizontal Space spaces elements by the amount of pixels you specify.
	Top lines up the top edges of the selected figures.
	Bottom lines up the bottom edges of the selected figures.
	Vertical Center lines up the centers of the objects as though they are beads on an invisible vertical string.
	Vertical Space spaces elements by the amount of pixels you specify.
You can choose more than one of these commands in sequence. For example, to align the right sides and tops of a group of objects, choose Tools|Align|Right and then choose Tools|Align|Top.

When you select an object group as one of the objects to be aligned, Quattro Pro aligns the group as if it were a single object.

You can also use Snap to Grid to align objects (see Grid Options for details).

Tip:	You can also align objects using tools on the Align Toolbar. To show the Align Toolbar, click the Toolbar list in the Property Band of a graph window and choose Align.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Moving and Resizing Objects

Once an object or group of objects is selected, you can resize or move it at will. An object is selected when it has handles.

To move the object, drag any area except its handles.

To resize only height or width, drag a top, bottom, or side handle.

To change the height and width at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Changing Object Properties

The easiest and most efficient way to customize the appearance of any object is to right-click it and choose the Properties command to display its Object Inspector. (You do not have to select the object first.) Make changes to as many properties as you want, then choose OK to apply the changes all at once.

Drawn objects have many of the same properties as graph objects. For example, the rectangle Object Inspector lists properties that are also found in the graph pane and bar series Object Inspectors. Object Inspectors for drawn objects, like those for graphs, can be displayed only in the graph window.

When objects are grouped, you can right-click any object in the group (NOT the area between the objects) and choose the Properties command to display the group Object Inspector. This inspector lets you make changes that are applied to the entire group.

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Enhancing Graphs


Creating Text Boxes in a Graph

The Text tool [image] on the Graph Toolbar lets you place boxed text anywhere on a graph. To set text and text box properties before you create a text box, right-click the Text tool on the Toolbar and choose the Text Box Properties command to display its Object Inspector. Choose a text font and size, set the alignment (or change any of the other Text Box properties), then choose OK.

To create a text box,

1.	Click the Text tool.

2.	Drag out a text box to the size you want. When you release the mouse, a blinking insertion point signals that Quattro Pro is ready for you to enter text. (If you click the graph instead of dragging the mouse, a default-size text box appears.)

3.	Enter text. As you type, Quattro Pro wraps the text to fit the width of this block, and the depth of the block increases automatically. (The Alignment  property turns this wordwrap feature off and on.)

4.	When you finish entering text, click the Selection tool [image], click another tool from the Toolbar, or click outside the text box to deselect it.

Use standard keyboard procedures to edit the text in text boxes. Cut and Copy apply to the text when text is highlighted. When text is not highlighted, but the text box has handles around it, you cut or copy the text and the text box. To delete a text box, cut it, or move the cursor to the end of a line and press Delete.

To enhance the look of the text, change its properties (see Changing Text Properties for details).

Tip:	You can create text boxes on a spreadsheet page using the Text tool on the Draw Toolbar; see Creating Text Boxes on the Spreadsheet for details.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Referencing a Cell on a Notebook Page

Instead of entering text with the Text tool, you can type a reference to a cell. You can then revise the text in the text box by simply changing the label in the referenced cell. The cell reference appears when you are editing the text; the label contained in the cell appears when you are not.

To enter the cell reference, type a backslash (\), then a forward slash (/), followed by the cell reference (for example, A1) and a closing backslash. For example, if you enter \/A:A1\ in a text box and cell A1 contains the label First Qtr Sales, the text First Qtr Sales appears in the text box when you show the graph.


Entering Text from the Clipboard

You can use the Windows Clipboard to paste text into a new or existing text box:

1.	Copy text to the Clipboard (from a word processing program, for example).

2.	Create a new text box with the Text tool [image], or click the Selection tool [image], then click at the point in an existing text box where you want to insert the text.

3.	Click the Paste button [image] on the Toolbar.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Adding Bullets to Text

You can add special bullet characters to text boxes by entering a bullet code within backslash characters (\). The bullet code appears when you are editing the text, but the bullet itself appears when you are not. For example, if you enter \blt1\Sales Report in a text box, when you show the graph, a square bullet is displayed to the left of Sales Report.

These are the available bullets and the codes that create them:

Note:	You can also create bullet charts, graphs that consist of bulleted lists. Bullet charts are easier to revise because the text in them is based on spreadsheet data; see Creating Bullet Charts for details.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Changing Text Properties

To change text properties, right-click a text box to display its Object Inspector. Text boxes have these properties:

Text Color sets a color for the text. When you select a pattern fill style, the text color is the color of the pattern. If you choose a wash fill style, the text color is distributed over the text background color.

Text Background (Bkg) Color provides the second color for pattern and wash fill styles. The text background color is also the shadow color.

Text Font determines the font and font size, and whether the text appears bold, italic, underlined, or with strikeout.

Text Style includes options to fill text with a solid color, a two-color wash, or an imported bitmap. It also lets you add a drop shadow.

Graph Button turns a text box into a "live" button in a slide show. When clicked, a graph button can run a macro or show a different graph (see Creating a Graph Button for more information).

Alignment makes the text left-justified, centered, or right-justified. It also turns wordwrap off and on, and sets tab stops at regular intervals. When wordwrap is on, text goes to the next line when it reaches the right margin, and the box expands vertically, if necessary, to fit all the text you type. When wordwrap is off, the box expands horizontally as you type; you must press Enter to start a new line.

Box Type determines the look of the box around the text. There are 12 choices, ranging from "no frame" to several 3-D styles.

Fill Color assigns a fill color to the text box.

Bkg (Background) Color provides a second color to the background when the fill style is a pattern or a wash (for other fill styles, the background color is invisible). If the fill style is a pattern, the background color is the color behind the pattern. If the fill style is a wash, the fill color is distributed over the background color.

Fill Style makes the text box transparent (None), or fills it with a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or an imported bitmap.

Border Color sets the color of the frame around the text box.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs

Filling an Object with a Bitmap


Presetting Text and Box Properties

To preset text and text box properties before you create text boxes,

1.	Right-click the Text tool [image] on the Graph Toolbar to display its Object Inspector, which lists all the text box properties.

2.	Make any changes you want, then choose OK.

To create "unboxed" text, set Fill Style to None, and choose the blank (upper left) Box Type.

To preset just the Fill Color, Fill Style, and Border Color of a text box, click a color square on the Palette Toolbar before you choose the Text tool on the Graph Toolbar.

Note:	The default text box Fill Color, Fill Style, and Border Color change whenever you click a palette color on the Palette Toolbar, even if you previously used theText tool Object Inspector to preset these properties.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Creating 3-D Text

All graph text objects (including titles, labels, bullet series, and text boxes) can be three-dimensional. Use the Text Style property to specify the type of 3-D text, perspective, and shading.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Adding Spreadsheet Blocks to a Graph

The Block tool [image] on the Graph Toolbar adds a picture of a linked spreadsheet block to a graph. When the data in the spreadsheet block changes, the linked picture of the block in the graph window is dynamically updated.

To add a linked spreadsheet block to a graph,

1.	Double-click a floating graph to edit it, or open a graph in a graph window.

2.	Click the Block tool on the Graph Toolbar.

3.	Drag over the area of the graph window where you want the spreadsheet block to appear. When the rectangle has been defined, release the mouse button. If a block is currently selected on a notebook page, a linked picture of it appears in the graph. If only a single cell is selected on a notebook page, the Create Block dialog box appears.

4.	Specify the block you want to appear in the graph, select whether you want to display column or row borders or grid lines for the block, and check whether you want to maintain the same aspect ratio used on the spreadsheet. Then, choose OK.

The block in the graph updates with any changes you make to the data or properties of the spreadsheet block.

After you add a spreadsheet block to a graph, you can change the block selection. Right-click the block in the graph, choose the Properties command, and select a new block for the Block property.

Note:	You cannot select noncontiguous blocks with the Block tool.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Importing Graphics

You can bring clip art or drawings from other programs (including non-Windows programs) into the graph window with the Tools|Import Graphics command. To import graphics,

1.	Open the graph window where you want to import the drawing. (To import the drawing onto a new, blank graph, see Creating a Blank Graph.)

2.	Choose Tools|Import Graphics. You can also click the Import button [image] on the Graph Toolbar. The Import dialog box appears.

3.	Locate the graphics file you want.

4.	Choose OK. The imported graphic appears in the graph window, ready to be moved or resized.

Quattro Pro imports graphics files in any of these formats:

.WPG	A graphic format used by WordPerfect Presentations.

.BMP	(Bitmap) The format used in Windows paint programs, like Paintbrush, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CGM	(Computer Graphics Metafile) The most common vector-based clip art format.

.CLP	A graphic format used by Quattro Pro for DOS.

.EPS	(Encapsulated PostScript) The file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .EPS file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Quattro Pro.)

.GIF	(Graphics Interchange Format) A bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards.

.PCX	A bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paintbrush and Quattro Pro for DOS.

.PIC	The graph format used in the DOS versions of 1-2-3.

.TIF	(Tag Image File Format) A bitmap file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because .TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

See Also

Cropping, Resizing, and Tiling Bitmaps

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Enhancing Graphs

Modifying CGM and .CLP Graphics


Cropping, Resizing, and Tiling Bitmaps

When you import a bitmap graphic file (.BMP, .EPS, CIS .GIF, .PCX or .TIF format), Quattro Pro places the graphic in a rectangle. Right-click the bitmap and choose the Rect Properties command to display the rectangle Object Inspector. When you select Fill Style, you will see the name of the file you imported in the File Name edit field.

You can also fill any object in a graph window or a drawn object on the spreadsheet with a bitmapped graphic. Just right-click the object, choose the Properties command, select Fill Style, choose a bitmapped graphic file, then choose OK.

A bitmap fill style has four options:

Crop To Fit displays only the part of the graphic that fits within the object.

Tile To Fit fills adjacent blocks of the object with copies of the same bitmapped graphic.

Shrink to Fit (the default) shrinks or enlarges the bitmap to fit within the object.

3-D Perspective (for 3-D graph walls only) adjusts a bitmap to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall.

To resize the object or imported bitmap, select it, then drag one of the handles. To resize only height, drag a top or bottom handle; to resize only width, drag a side handle. To change the height and width at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

To crop a bitmap,

1.	Right-click it and choose the Properties command to display the Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Fill Style.

3.	Select Crop to Fit and choose OK.

4.	Select the bitmap to reveal the handles.

5.	Drag one of the handles. As you decrease the size of the box, Quattro Pro eliminates parts of the bitmap. (The bitmap will not expand if you increase the size of the rectangle beyond its original dimensions.)

Note:	The upper left corner of the bitmap is a reference point that cannot be changed or eliminated. If you drag a handle on the left or top side of the bitmap, Quattro Pro crops the right or bottom side of the bitmap, respectively.

Tip:	You can use the Border Color and Border Style properties in the rectangle Object Inspector to give the bitmap a fancy border.

See Also

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Enhancing Graphs

Filling an Object with a Bitmap


Modifying .CGM and .CLP Graphics

If your imported graphic file has a .CGM or .CLP file format, you can ungroup the graphic, then modify the properties of individual sections of the graphic. To do this,

1.	Select the graphic.

2.	Choose Tools|Ungroup. Handles appear around the individual objects that comprise the graphic.

3.	Right-click any component and choose the Properties command to display and change properties such as the Fill Color and Border Style.

4.	When you are finished, select all the components and choose Tools|Group to make the graphic a single object again.

See Also

Customizing Graph Properties

Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet

Enhancing Graphs


Exporting Graphics

You can export the entire contents of a graph window into other file formats. The exported file can be used in other programs or sent to a 35mm slide service bureau for processing. Quattro Pro exports to these file formats:

.BMP	(Bitmap) The format used in Windows paint programs, like Paintbrush, and the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper.

.CGM	(Computer Graphics Metafile) The most common vector-based clip art format.

.EPS	(Encapsulated PostScript) The file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output plus a bitmap of the image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .EPS file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Quattro Pro.)

.GIF	(Graphics Interchange Format) A bitmap format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards.

.PCX	A bitmap format supported by many programs, including Paintbrush and Quattro Pro for DOS.

.TIF	(Tag Image File Format) A bitmap file format often used for scanned on gray scale images. Because TIF files can be large, they are often compressed.

To export a graph and any drawn objects, imported graphics, or text boxes associated with the graph,

1.	Make sure the graph you want to export is the active graph window, then choose Tools|Export Graphics. The Export dialog box appears.

2.	Choose a destination and file name. Be sure to use the file-name extension that matches the type of file you want to create.

3.	If you are exporting to a .TIF file, you can choose a compression method: PackBits or None (no compression). There are many types of TIF files; make sure the application to which you are exporting can accept the compression method you choose.

4.	At the bottom of the dialog box is an option for Bitmap gray scale. Check this option if you want to convert the colors in the graph to levels of gray. This is useful you are going to import this file into a program that can only accept gray scale TIF files. The Bitmap Gray Scale option is not available for .EPS files.

5.	Choose OK. Quattro Pro creates the file and returns you to the graph window.

If you are exporting a graph to send to a 35mm slide bureau, be sure to set the graph's Aspect Ratio to 35mm Slide.

See Also

Enhancing Graphs


Using Color Palettes

The Palette Toolbar, which is available when you edit a graph in a window or on a notebook page, displays a color palette you can use to change the fill and border properties of graph elements and drawn objects. To show the Palette Toolbar, click the Toolbar list in the Property Band and choose Palette.

Each palette square has these properties:

Fill Color selects the interior color of the object.

Background (Bkg) Color provides the second color for objects that have a pattern or wash fill style.

Fill Style makes an object transparent (None), or fills it with a solid color, a pattern, a wash, or a bitmap graphic.

Border Color sets the color of the lines that form the boundary of the object.

Border Style sets the thickness of the lines that form the boundary of the object.+

The large square to the right of the palette displays the active palette selection. Objects you create with a drawing tool display the Fill Color, Background Color, Fill Style, Border Color and Border Style shown in this square. To create an object with different properties, choose another palette color, then click a drawing tool and begin drawing.

To change the color of an existing object, select the object, then choose a color from the palette. Remember, the object acquires the Border Color and Border Style shown in your selection. If you want to change an object's Fill Color but not its Border Color and Border Style, or vice-versa, right-click it and choose the Properties command to display its Object Inspector, then make changes to the individual properties. This technique applies to all graph objects, not just drawn ones.

Quattro Pro has several predefined color palettes gathered by theme. For example, the colors in the Summer palette are mostly bright and sunny, those of Winter are dark, the Washes palette displays different colors distributed over a white background, and so on. There is also a Monochrome palette that offers 20 distinctive black-and-white pattern choices.

To select a color palette, pick it from the list box. The palette's selections appear on the Toolbar. You can use colors from any number of palettes in the same graph.

See Also

Creating Custom Color Palettes

Creating Custom Colors

Customizing Graph Properties

Enhancing Graphs


Creating Custom Colors

Quattro Pro provides three different models for creating new colors: HSB, RGB, and CMY. Only one model displays at a time, but all three update when you change a color setting.  The model to use is purely a matter of preference.

HSB	stands for Hue, Saturation, and Brightness. Hue is the basic color: red, yellow, orange, or green, for example. Saturation refers to the amount of white mixed with the hue. Brightness is the amount of light energy present. When brightness is zero, no light is present, and the result is black for every hue and saturation value. By adjusting the saturation and brightness scales in the HSB model, you can easily control the amount of gray in a color.

RGB	is named for its primary colors, Red, Green, and Blue. Using this model, you mix different amounts of red, green, and blue to form all other colors.

CMY	stands for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. You mix different amounts of these colors to form all other colors. Commercial printing houses often use this model to mix colors.

Once you display the Object Inspector and choose the property you want to change (Fill Color, Background Color, or Border Color, for example), use this procedure to adjust the color:

1.	Select the color closest to the one you want.

2.	Choose a color model.

3.	Use the sliders on the color scales to adjust the color. The sample color reflects the changes as you make them.

4.	When you are satisfied with the color, choose OK.

See Also

Creating Custom Color Palettes

Enhancing Graphs

Using Color Palettes


Creating Custom Color Palettes

When you cannot find the color you want in any of the existing palettes, you can define your own. Once you define new colors you like, you can save them in your own palettes.

Defining a New Color

To define a new color,

1.	Right-click a color square on the palette to display its Object Inspector. The Fill Color property is selected, and the scales for changing this color appear to the left.

2.	Change the Fill Color, Bkg Color (which shows only when you have a pattern or wash fill style selected), the Fill Style, the Border Color and the Border Style, or any combination of these properties.

3.	Choose OK.

Saving Modified Colors in a New Palette

To save the modified colors in a new palette,

1.	Choose <Edit> in the palette list. The Edit Palettes dialog box appears.

2.	Type a new palette name in the edit field, then click New.

The new palette is saved with Quattro Pro, not with the notebook, so you can use it anytime you are working in a graph window.

Changing Colors of an Existing Palette

To permanently change the colors of a palette that has already been defined (including any of the ones that come with Quattro Pro),

1.	Define the new color(s).

2.	Choose <Edit> in the palette list. The Edit Palettes dialog box appears.

3.	Choose a palette name from the list, and click Replace.

Deleting a Palette

To delete a palette,

1.	Choose <Edit> in the palette list.

2.	Choose the palette name from the list in the Edit Palettes dialog box, and click Delete.

See Also

Creating Custom Colors

Customizing Graph Properties

Enhancing Graphs

Using Color Palettes


Basic Editing Tasks

These topics describe how to perform basic data editing tasks:

Selecting Cells and Blocks

Editing Entries

Erasing Entries

Copying and Moving Data

Dragging and Dropping

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Using the Abs Key (F4)

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving

Using the Model Copy Option

Model Copy Option Settings

Moving Pages

Inserting

Inserting Rows or Columns

Inserting Pages

Inserting Blocks

Deleting

Deleting Rows or Columns

Deleting Pages

Deleting Blocks

Using Named Blocks

Naming Blocks

Using Block Names in Formulas

Maintaining Block Names

Naming Blocks from Labels

Naming Multicell Blocks Automatically

Making a Table of Named Blocks

Deleting Block Names

Using the Go To Command

Extending Blocks with Go To

Tracing Errors with Go To

Finding and Replacing Data

Find and Replace Options

Using the Spell Checker


Selecting Cells and Blocks

Before you can enter data or perform an action in a notebook, you need to select the cell or block(s) you want to affect.

To select

a cell, click the cell.

a block, drag it by clicking a cell in one corner, holding down the left mouse button, moving to the opposite corner and releasing the mouse button. Or click one corner, hold down the Shift key, and click the opposite corner.

a noncontiguous block (a selection consisting of more than one disconnected block of cells), hold down the Ctrl key while you drag blocks. See Using Noncontiguous Blocks.

every cell in a given row or column, click the corresponding row number or column letter in the border.

all cells in the active notebook page, click the Select-All box at the intersection of the row and column borders.

a cell on another page, click the page tab, then click the cell you want.

a 3-D block (a block with the same coordinates in multiple pages), first select the block in the first page in the block, then hold down the Shift  key while clicking the tab of the last page for the block. A black line appears under the tabs of the selected pages. See Using 3-D Blocks.

You can also use the keyboard to select in a notebook (see Point Mode Keys and Selecting Blocks with Go To for more information).

When you select a block, the active cell within the selected block contains the selector, while the remainder of the selected block is highlighted.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Editing Entries


Editing Entries

There are two ways to change the data in a cell:

Select the cell and type a new entry. When you press Enter or click the checkmark in the input line, the new entry replaces the old.

Select the cell and edit the existing entry.

When you edit an entry, you can insert or delete characters without retyping the whole entry. Begin by selecting the cell you want to change. Then use one of the following methods to enter Edit mode:

double-click the cell

click anywhere in the input line

press F2

The EDIT indicator appears on the status line, and the contents of the active cell appear in the input line. The insertion point appears on the input line at the place you clicked.

You can move the insertion point by clicking in the cell or input line or by using the arrow keys. Backspace deletes characters to the left of the insertion point, and Del deletes characters to the right. You can also drag to select characters.

Once you select characters, you can press Del to erase the selection, or start typing or pointing to replace the selection. See Using Blocks in Formulas for more information on pointing. You can also use the Clipboard commands on your selection (see Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard for details).

All of the common editing keys work just as you would expect them to work in a word processor. For details, see Edit Mode Keys.

When you first enter Edit mode, you are also in Insert mode . Any characters you type are inserted to the left of the insertion point. To write over existing characters, press Ins to switch to Overtype mode. (OVR appears on the status line.) Press Ins again to return to Insert mode.

Quattro Pro does not store your changes in the cell until you click the checkmark or press Enter. Until then, you can click the X button or press Esc to return the entry to its original state.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Erasing Entries


Erasing Entries

There are several ways to erase data.

Erasing without Changing Block Properties

To erase the contents of a selected block, but leave the block's properties (alignment, numeric format, font, and so on) unchanged, use one of the following methods:

click the Clear Values button [image] on the Block Toolbar

choose Edit|Clear Values

press Del

Erasing and Removing Block Properties

To erase the contents of a selected block and remove property settings, use one of the following methods:

click the Clear button [image] on the Block Toolbar

choose Edit|Clear

press Shift+Del

For more information on block properties or the Normal style, see Changing Block and Page Properties.

Erasing and Moving Data to the Clipboard

To erase and move the contents of a selected block to the Clipboard, use one of the following methods:

click the Cut button [image] on the Toolbar

choose Edit|Cut

See Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard for more information.

Deleting Rows, Columns, or Pages

To remove the data and the cells containing it by deleting entire or partial rows, columns, or pages, use one of the following methods:

click the Delete button [image] on the Toolbar

choose Block|Delete

See Deleting for more information.

Undoing an Erase

If you accidentally erase data, use the Undo button [image] on the Toolbar or Edit|Undo to restore it.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Editing Entries

Undoing Mistakes


Copying and Moving Data

There are three ways to copy and move blocks in Quattro Pro:

Use the Drag and Drop feature to drag a block of cells anywhere on a page, between pages, and between notebooks.

Use the Clipboard commands. Use Edit|Copy and Paste in combination to copy blocks, or use Edit|Cut and Paste in sequence to move blocks.

Use Block|Copy or Move, commands that are familiar to users of DOS spreadsheets.

You can also move entire pages (see Moving Pages for more information).

Choosing a method

The advantage of Drag and Drop copying or moving is its ease and visual nature (see Dragging and Dropping for details).

The advantages of the Clipboard commands are (see Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard for details):

You can copy or move text within the input line or to other text objects.

You can paste the same block to many different destinations without reselecting the source.

You can copy data to other Windows applications.

The advantages of the Block menu commands are (see Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving for details):

You can specify blocks to be copied or moved by name.

If you are already familiar with these commands, or if you have macros that use them, they are more convenient.

Block menu commands work a bit faster than the Clipboard commands.

The Block|Copy command provides a unique, time-saving feature called Model Copy. Use it to copy blocks that contain absolute references to cells within the copied block.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying Formulas


Dragging and Dropping

For a quick and simple way to copy or move a block of cells, use Drag and Drop. To move a cell or block,

1.	Select the cell or block.

2.	Click anywhere in the selected block, hold down the left mouse button for a moment without moving the mouse. The mouse pointer changes to a hand, and a colored outline appears.

3.	Drag the block to where you want to move it, using the colored outline as a guide. Be careful; unprotected data under the colored outline will be overwritten.

4.	Release the mouse button to "drop" the block into place.

To copy a block, follow the steps above, except hold down the Ctrl key after selecting the block in step 1.

While Drag and Drop can move and copy single cells as well as blocks, it does not work on noncontiguous blocks, and you cannot make multiple copies. Depending on which one of these things you want to do, use the Clipboard commands, or Block|Copy or Move.

You can use the General property in the application Object Inspector to adjust the length of time before the hand icon appears.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells

Moving Pages

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving


Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Edit|Copy and Edit|Cut place copies of the current selection (the source) to the Clipboard in preparation for being pasted elsewhere (the destination). While Copy leaves the source intact, Cut erases it.

The Clipboard commands in Quattro Pro work as in other Windows applications. In Quattro Pro, however, they are available as Toolbar buttons:

1.	Select the source you want to copy or move.

2.	Click the Copy button [image] (to copy data) or Cut button [image] (to move data).

3.	Select the destination. The destination can be a cell on this or another page, a cell in another notebook, or characters in the input line or in a text box. If you choose a cell, the entire source is pasted, using that cell for the upper left position of the pasted copy.

Caution: If the destination already contains data, you will overwrite it when you choose Paste. Be careful that you allow enough space for the complete source to be pasted.

4.	Click the Paste button [image] to paste the data into the destination.

Pasting Multiple Copies

If the source is a single cell, column, or row, you can make multiple copies of it by selecting a block as the destination.

You can also make multiple copies of data you have cut. The first time you click the Paste button (or choose Edit|Paste), the source is simply moved. Clicking or choosing Paste the second time copies the source throughout the destination area.

Copying Noncontiguous Blocks

If the source is a set of noncontiguous blocks, imagine the noncontiguous blocks contained by one large block. Choose the new position for the upper left corner of that large block for the destination.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying Formulas

Dragging and Dropping

Moving Pages

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving


Copying Formulas

When you copy data, whether you use Drag and Drop, Block|Copy, or Clipboard commands, Quattro Pro adjusts formulas to correspond to their new positions. This is helpful in most situations, but there are times when you should avoid adjusting references.

Relative addresses

Unless you specify otherwise, cell references in a formula are relative. Quattro Pro finds each cell reference by its position in relation to the cell containing the formula, not by its address.

For example, if you enter +A1+A2 in cell A3, Quattro Pro interprets it as "Add the values in the two cells directly above this one." When you copy this formula to cell B4, Quattro Pro adjusts the formula to add the values in cells B2 and B3 (the two cells directly above).

Absolute addresses

To prevent a cell reference from adjusting when you copy a formula, make the reference absolute by entering dollar signs ($) before the column and the row coordinates. An absolute cell reference always refers to the original cell address, regardless of where you copy the formula. You can also make a page reference absolute if you are copying from one page to another.

Tip:	Use the Abs key (F4) while in Edit mode to quickly make the selected cell reference absolute. See Using the Abs Key (F4) for details.

For example, if you enter +$A$1+$A$2 in cell A3, Quattro Pro reads this as "Add the values in the cells A1 and A2." When you copy this formula to cell B4, Quattro Pro still refers to cells A1 and A2.

You can specify all or part of a cell address as absolute. Just insert a dollar sign ($) before the coordinate you want to remain fixed. For example,

$A$1 makes both coordinates of address A1 absolute.

$A1 locks the address into column A, but lets the row coordinate adjust.

A$1 locks the address into row 1, but lets the column coordinate adjust.

$A:A$1 locks the address into page A and row 1, but lets the column coordinate adjust.

When copying between pages, you can make page references absolute also. Include a dollar sign before the page name. If you omit the page reference in a formula, it will adjust to refer to the current page, wherever it is copied.

To specify a named block as absolute, precede its name with a dollar sign. To specify a block as partially absolute, use its coordinates, not its name.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Dragging and Dropping

Moving Pages

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving


Using the Abs Key (F4)

In Edit mode, the Abs key (F4 ) makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute (instead of relative) by entering dollar signs ($) before the column and row coordinates. Press F4 when a cell address is highlighted in the input line. Press F4 repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations.

The next table shows the effect of each repeated press of F4.

Press F4	Cell reference	Block name

starting reference	B6	SALES

1x	$A:$B$6	$SALES

2x	$A:B$6	SALES

3x	$A:$B6

4x	$A:B6

5x	$B$6

6x	B$6

7x	$B6

See Also

{ABS}

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying Formulas


Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving

Use Block|Copy or Block|Move to copy or move a cell or a block. With Block|Copy, you can also copy noncontiguous blocks. To copy or move data or objects other than cell blocks, use the Clipboard commands.

Copying

To copy a block of cells,

1.	Choose Block|Copy or click the Model Copy button [image] on the Block Toolbar.

2.	The current selection appears in the From box, which contains the coordinates of the source block (what you want to copy). If this entry is correct, skip to step 4.

3.	To change the From entry, double-click in the From field (or click the Point Mode button next to the edit field), then point to the cells you want to copy. Instead of pointing, you can type new coordinates, or press F3 to choose from a list of block names (see Naming Blocks for more information). The source block can be the following types of references:

Cell or block references; either named or not (such as B4..B4 or C5..D10 or INCOME)

Noncontiguous blocks (such as B4..B4,C5..D10 with Block|Copy)

Blocks in other pages in the same notebook (such as C:B4..B6)

Blocks in other notebook files (such as [C:\BUDGETS\SALES]B:D10..D15)

When you are finished pointing, click the Maximize button in the title bar of the reduced dialog box (see Pointing from Dialog Boxes for details).

4.	Select or double-click the To entry. Then to make a single copy, point to (or type the address of) the upper left cell of the destination block (where you want to place the copy).

Caution: If the destination already contains data, you will overwrite it when you choose OK.

5.	If appropriate, check the Model Copy option. (Use the Model Copy option if you are copying a block that contains absolute references to cells within the copied block; see Using the Model Copy Option for details.) Then choose OK.

Moving

Block|Move moves the contents of a block from one location to another. It overwrites existing data in the new location. To move a block,

1.	Choose Block|Move.

2.	Enter the source block in the same way as for Block|Copy except that you cannot move a noncontiguous block. Specify the upper left cell of the destination block.

Caution: If the destination already contains data, you will overwrite it when you choose OK.

3. Choose OK.

The data is pasted along with its block properties.

If you move a cell at either corner of a named or referenced block, it affects the block definition or reference. For details, see Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Dragging and Dropping

Moving Pages


Using the Model Copy Option

As explained in Copying Formulas, relative and absolute addresses let you control how formulas adjust when you copy them. The Model Copy option of Block|Copy offers another way to control how formulas adjust; it is useful when the block you are copying contains absolute references to other cells within that block. Model Copy can save painstaking and error-prone minutes of editing formulas.

Click Model Copy Examples for an example that shows a small model containing a formula to figure the monthly payment for a 30-year loan at different interest rates. The reference to the loan amount had to be absolute so that when the formula was copied, it continued to refer to cell B1.

You might want to calculate monthly payments for a different loan amount. To do so, copy the block, change the loan amount entry, and expect to see the new monthly payment values. But as shown in the example, without using Model Copy, the absolute reference inappropriately refers to row 1.

One solution is to edit each formula individually to refer to B6 instead of B1. An easier solution is to check Model Copy before copying; then even absolute references adjust to the new location of the referenced cell. Although the absolute reference adjusts, it remains absolute to make future copies absolute. In the previous example, should you want to make more copies of the formula for interest rates below 8% for a $150,000 loan, the reference to cell B6 is still absolute.

Several options help you use Model Copy more precisely. For details, see Model Copy Option Settings

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying and Moving Data

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard


Model Copy Option Settings

These options are available when you check Model Copy in the Block Copy dialog box. You can check as many as you want. When checked,

Formula Cells copies all formula cells in the source block.

Label Cells copies all labels in the source block.

Number Cells copies all numeric values in the source block.

Properties copies all block properties applied to each source block cell.

Objects copies all SpeedButtons, floating graphs, and other objects in the source block.

Row/Column Sizes makes the destination block rows and columns the same sizes as those in the source block.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Using the Model Copy Option


Moving Pages

You can move pages within a notebook or between notebooks to reorder them. With the mouse, you can directly manipulate the pages, similarly to the Drag and Drop feature used on cells:

1.	Click the tab of the page you want to move and drag in any direction until the tab separates from the page and a + appears on it.

2.	Drag right or left along the row of other tabs, moving the highlighted tab that appears. Release the mouse button when the highlighted tab is just before the tab where you want to place the moved page.

The moved page drops into place.

Tip:	If you hold down Ctrl when dragging a page to another notebook, the page is copied instead of moved.

If you move a page into or out of grouped page while Group mode is on (the blue line appears under the tabs), the page moves alone, and the group expands or shrinks accordingly. If you move the first or last page in a group, the group expands to include all new pages enclosed by the moved page.

If you drag a page that is part of a selected 3-D block (the black line appears under the tabs), all pages in the 3-D block move together.

You can also move pages with Notebook|Move Pages. From the dialog box, enter the page name to be moved and the page name before which you want the page placed. Then choose OK. The page or pages appear to the left of the page named in the To Before Page edit field.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying and Moving with the Windows Clipboard

Copying Formulas

Dragging and Dropping

Grouping Notebook Pages

Using 3-D Blocks

Using Block Commands for Copying and Moving


Inserting

You can insert blank columns, rows, or pages anywhere in the notebook. You can also insert partial rows, columns, or pages. Wherever you insert, existing data is pushed down, to the right, or to the back of the notebook to make room.

You can also insert from another file onto a new page.

Note:	If inserting spaces pushes a named block or cell reference beyond the limit of a page (beyond column IV or row 8192), or beyond page IV, the reference becomes ERR.

Inserting Rows or Columns

Inserting Pages

Inserting Blocks

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Inserting a File into a Notebook


Inserting Rows or Columns

To insert an entire row, click the row border just below where you want the row inserted and click the Insert button [image] in the Toolbar. To insert an entire column, click the column border just below where you want the column inserted and click the Insert button.

To insert multiple rows or columns, select as many row or column borders as you want to insert.

You can also insert a row or column by choosing Block|Insert. As with the Insert and Delete buttons, select the row below or the column to the right of where you want to insert before choosing the command.

If you insert a column or row within the boundaries of a named block or a block referenced by a formula, Quattro Pro expands block references to include the new column or row.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Inserting Blocks

Inserting Pages


Inserting Pages

To insert a blank page,

1.	Click the tab of the page you want to follow the new page.

2.	Click the Insert button. The Insert dialog box appears.

3.	For Dimension, select Pages.

4.	For Span, select Entire.

5.	Choose OK.

To insert more than one page, select the corresponding number of pages in step 1. (To select multiple pages, click the first page tab, then hold down Shift while you click the last page tab you want. A black line appears under the tabs.) For example, to insert two pages before page B, select pages B and C before following steps 2 and 3; the data in page B moves to page D.

You can also insert pages before the active page by choosing Block|Insert and selecting Pages and Entire in the dialog box. To insert only one page, enter the page to insert before, and any cell on the page, such as B:B12. To insert multiple pages, enter a 3-D block starting with the page to insert before and spanning the same number of pages you want to insert. For example, to insert three pages before page B, enter B:A3..D:A3 (it does not matter which cell you reference).

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Inserting Blocks

Inserting Rows or Columns


Inserting Blocks

Instead of inserting an entire row, column, or page, you can insert partial ones (a block). Data in adjacent cells shifts to accomodate the inserted cells. When you insert a partial page, data shifts to the next page.

To insert a block,

1.	Select a block in the same location where you want to insert space; make sure the upper left corner of the block you select contains the first cell entry you want shifted right, down, or back. The block you select should be the same size as the amount of space you want to insert.

2.	Click the Insert button. The Insert dialog box appears.

3.	For Span, choose Partial.

4.	Choose Rows if you want the selected entries to shift down out of the way. Choose Columns if you want them to shift to the right. Choose Pages if you want them to shift to the next page.

5.	Choose OK.

You can also insert a block by choosing Block|Insert. A dialog box appears. In the Block edit field, enter the coordinates of the block to be shifted down (for rows), to the right (for columns), or to the next page (for pages). For Dimension, select Columns, Rows, or Pages. Then select Partial for the Span option, and choose OK.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Inserting Pages

Inserting Rows or Columns


Deleting

You can delete entire or partial columns, rows, or pages anywhere in the notebook. Deleting space is different from erasing (or blanking) data with Edit|Clear, Clear Values, or the Del key. Deleting with the Delete button [image] in the Toolbar or Block|Delete makes remaining rows, columns, or pages move to take up the deleted space.

Caution: If you delete space that is within the boundaries of a named block or a block referenced by a formula, Quattro Pro adjusts all references to the block. However, if one of the deleted cells is a coordinate cell that defines a block, the block becomes invalid and any formulas or names referencing the block show ERR. Any formulas that reference a cell within a deleted column, row, or page also appear as ERR.

Deleting Rows or Columns

Deleting Pages

Deleting Blocks

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying Formulas


Deleting Rows or Columns

To delete an entire row, click the row border and click the Delete button. To delete an entire column, click the column border and click the Delete button.

To delete multiple rows or columns, select as many row or column borders as you want to delete.

You can also delete a selected row or column by choosing Block|Delete.

See Also

Deleting Blocks

Deleting Pages

Deleting


Deleting Pages

To delete a page,

1.	Click the tab of the page to be deleted.

2.	Click the Delete button [image]. The Delete dialog box appears.

3.	For Dimension, choose Pages.

4.	For Span, choose Entire.

5.	Choose OK.

You can also delete a page by clicking its Select-All box (to select all cells) and clicking the Delete button or by clicking its tab and choosing Block|Delete.

To delete more than one page, select the corresponding number of pages in step 1. (To select multiple pages, click the first page tab, then hold down Shift while you click the last page tab you want. A black line appears under the tabs.) For example, to delete pages B and C, select them before following steps 2 and 3. The data in page D moves to page B.

See Also

Deleting Blocks

Deleting Rows or Columns

Deleting


Deleting Blocks

Instead of entire rows, columns, or pages, you can delete partial ones--also known as blocks. Data in surrounding cells shift to take up the deleted space.

When you delete a partial page, data moves forward from the next page.

To delete a block,

1.	Select the block you want deleted.

2.	Click the Delete button. The Delete dialog box appears.

3.	For Span, choose Partial.

4.	For Dimension, choose Rows to shift entries up into the selected block, choose Column to shift entries left, or choose Pages to shift from the next page.

5.	Choose OK.

You can also delete a selected block by choosing Block|Delete. A dialog box appears; select Columns, Rows, or Pages for Dimension, then select Partial for Span and choose OK.

See Also

Deleting Pages

Deleting Rows or Columns

Deleting


Using Named Blocks

Instead of referring to a single cell or a block by its coordinates, such as B10 or C15..F21, you can assign a specific name. This has several advantages:

Names are easier to remember than coordinates.

If you move the contents of a named block, Quattro Pro still associates the name with the same data, regardless of the new block coordinates.

Referencing block names in a formula makes the formula easier to understand. For example, +PRICE - COST is more intuitive than B15 - D8.

Using block names increases accuracy. If you mistype a block name, Quattro Pro alerts you to the error. If you mistype block coordinates, you operate on the wrong block.

When you link to another notebook, you will not need to open the other notebook to find the block coordinates.

Consider the following formula, which calculates a monthly mortgage payment:

@PMT(B3,B4/B6,B5*B6)

Here is the same formula using named blocks:

@PMT(PRICE,INTEREST/MONTHS,TERM*MONTHS)

The following topics explain how to create block names and how block names operate with formulas.

Naming Blocks

Using Block Names in Formulas

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying Formulas


Naming Blocks

Using Named Blocks explains how assigning names to blocks can be more convenient than using block coordinates. To assign a name to a block of cells,

1.	Select the block you want to name.

2.	Choose Block|Names.

3.	Type a name for the block in the Name field. Enter a name not included on the list of existing names at the left, and choose Add. For a list of rules to follow when naming blocks, see Guidelines for Naming Blocks.

4.	Choose Close to close the Block Names dialog box.

To change the block assigned to a name, choose Block|Names and choose the name from the list. Then enter new coordinates in the Block(s) edit field and click Add.

To change the name of a block, delete the existing name first, then assign the new name to the block.

Caution: If you use Block|Move to alter the contents of the upper left or lower right cells of a named block, the name becomes invalid. Formulas referencing the named block display ERR to indicate the formulas no longer reference the data they did before. Deleting any of the two coordinates of a block makes any reference to that block display ERR, also. See Moving Formulas or Referenced Cells for details.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying Formulas

Deleting Block Names

Using Block Names in Formulas


Guidelines for Naming Blocks

Keep the following guidelines in mind when naming blocks:

Block names can be up to 63 characters long.

Use any keyboard characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, spaces, punctuation marks, and some special characters such as %, or ~). Accented characters such as Â and Ä are also allowed if they are available on your keyboard.

Avoid using operator characters (+, -, *, /, ^, =, <, >, #, or &), $, and open and close parentheses.

Uppercase and lowercase letters are equivalent; in other words, INCOME is the same as income. Block names always appear in uppercase letters in formulas.

Do not use numbers alone (such as 327) or valid cell addresses (such as G1) as block names.

Block names can define overlapping areas. For example, the following group of block names is acceptable:

HOTEL	B3..B7

TRANS	C3..C7

MEALS	D3..D7

TOTAL	B3..D7

See Also

Naming Blocks

Basic Editing Tasks


Using Block Names in Formulas

To reference a named block, type the block's name or choose it from a choice list.

To display a choice list while writing or editing a formula, use one of these methods:

Click the Navigate button in the input line. A drop-down list of block names appears.

Press F3. The Block Names dialog box appears.

Tip:	The Navigate button provides quick access to the list of named blocks. Use F3 if you need to know block coordinates as well as names.

To display the list while entering or editing a formula, the insertion point must be to the right of an operator or open parenthesis. For example, in the formula

+C7*@SUM(B6..D19)

you can display a list of block names whenever you can enter Point mode (see Pointing to Blocks for details).

If you use the F3 key to display the Block Names dialog box, you can expand the list of names to show their coordinates by pressing the Expand key (+). To remove the coordinates, press the Contract key (-). Press F3 again to expand the names list to full screen or shrink it back down.

Note:	The Choices key, F3, has different purposes in other situations. In Value or Edit mode, Alt+F3 displays a list of @functions and Shift+F3 displays a menu of macro categories. These two key combinations are equivalent to clicking the @Functions button and the Macros button in the input line.

For information on an automated way to name blocks, delete block names, and view a table of block names, see Maintaining Block Names.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Copying Formulas

Naming Blocks


Maintaining Block Names

As explained in Using Named Blocks, you can create names for blocks of cells and later refer to those names instead of using cell references. This saves time and promotes accuracy in formula references. The following topics describe the commands available for maintaining lists of block names in notebooks.

Naming Single-Cell Blocks from Labels

Naming Multicell Blocks Automatically

Making a Table of Named Blocks

Deleting Block Names

See Also

Naming Blocks

Using Block Names in Formulas


Naming Single-Cell Blocks from Labels

With Block|Names, you can name single-cell blocks using the labels adjacent to them. This is useful in data entry forms, where cells usually have identifying labels beside them, and in macros, where subroutines are named.

To assign names to cells using adjacent labels,

1.	Select the labels you want to use as names and choose Block|Names. The Block Names dialog box appears.

2.	Click the Labels button. The Create Names From Labels dialog box appears.

3.	Indicate the position of the cells you want to name in relation to the labels. For example, if the cells you are naming are below the labels, choose Down.

4.	Choose OK. Then, choose Close to close the Block Names dialog box.

Quattro Pro uses each label in the specified block (up to 64 characters) as a name for the adjacent cell. It ignores numeric values in the block; you can use only labels as block names.

Later changes to the labels themselves do not affect the block names.

Before you use Block|Names, check the labels you plan to use. If there are duplicate labels or labels that duplicate existing block names, Quattro Pro overwrites previous assignments. Use a choice list, or make a table of named blocks to see a list of existing block names.

Note:	If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the block name. For example, a name that appears as "INCOME" may have been entered as "INCOME  " (with a space at the end).

You can also use the Create Field Names option of Tools|Database Tools|Query to assign names to the cells in the first row of a database.

See Also

Naming Multicell Blocks Automatically

Searching for Records


Naming Multicell Blocks Automatically

To automatically name blocks with more than one cell,

1.	Choose Block|Names. The Block Names dialog box appears.

2.	Click the Generate button. The Generate Block Names dialog box appears.

3.	Specify the block to name, including labels.

4.	Check the location of the cells to name; you can check more than one, depending on whether the labels are in the top row, the leftmost column, the bottom row, or the rightmost column of the block.

If you want to name individual cells, check at least two of the location boxes, then check Name Cells At Intersections.

5.	Click OK. Choose Close to close the Block Names dialog box.

Quattro Pro uses each label in the specified block (up to 64 characters) as a name for the adjacent cell. It ignores numeric values in the block; you can use only labels as block names. Later changes to the labels themselves do not affect the block names. For an example of how to automatically name blocks using Block|Names, click Example.

Before you use Block|Names, check the labels you plan to use. If there are duplicate labels or labels that duplicate existing block names, Quattro Pro overwrites previous assignments. Use a choice list, or make a table of named blocks to see a list of existing block names.

Note:	If there are leading or trailing spaces in a label, they are included in the block name. For example, a name that appears as "INCOME" may have been entered as "INCOME  " (with a space at the end).

You can also use the Create Field Names option of Tools|Database Tools|Query to assign names to the cells in the first row of a database.

See Also

Naming Single-Cell Blocks from Labels

Searching for Records


Example: Naming Multicell Blocks Automatically

The label in each row or column is applied to a block containing all selected cells in that row or column. If you checked more than one location box, a set of names is created for each set of labels. For example, if you select block A1..C4 in the next figure and check the first two boxes in the Generate Block Names dialog box, Quattro Pro creates five blocks: Jan., B2..B4; Feb., C2..C4; Housing, B2..C2; Utilities, B3..C3; and Food, B4..C4.

A	B	C

1	Jan.	Feb.

2	Housing

3	Utilities

4	Food

If you check Name Cells at Intersections, each cell has an additional name created by combining the two sets of labels. Each name can have up to 64 characters. Here is a table of cell names for this example.

Cell	Name

B2	JAN._HOUSING

B3	JAN._UTILITIES

B4	JAN._FOOD

C2	FEB._HOUSING

C3	FEB._UTILITIES

C4	FEB._FOOD


Creating a Block Name Table

In addition to using a choice list to see a list of named blocks (see Using Block Names in Formulas for details), you can create a table that lists the same information as a permanent part of the notebook.

To create a table of named blocks,

1.	Choose Block|Names. The Block Names dialog box appears.

2.	Click the Output button. The Name Table dialog box appears.

3.	Select the top left cell of the block where you want the table, and choose OK.

Caution: Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each block name. Quattro Pro overwrites existing data in cells it uses for the table.

A two-column table appears. The first column lists block names alphabetically. The second indicates the corresponding block coordinates.

Quattro Pro does not update a named block table. If you add, change, or delete block names, you must re-create the table to reflect the changes. Putting a SpeedButton next to this table is a handy way of updating the table quickly.

See Also

Creating SpeedButtons

Macros


Deleting Block Names

You can delete a block name without affecting the block itself. Formulas referencing the name then change to reference the block's coordinates; their results do not change.

For example, if a formula references a block named TOTAL, such as @SUM(TOTAL), and you delete TOTAL from the list of names, the formula adjusts to reference the cell coordinates: @SUM(B1..B20).

To delete a block name,

1.	Choose Block|Names. The Block Names dialog box shows a list of existing names.

2.	Choose a name from the list, or type a name in the Name box, then click Delete.

To delete all block names in the notebook, choose Block|Names, then click Delete All. Choose Yes to confirm that you want to delete all block names.

Although choosing Block|Names and clicking Delete All deletes all block names in the notebook from memory, the notebook data is not affected. Formulas that reference named blocks change so they refer to block coordinates instead of names.

See Also

Using Named Blocks


Using the Go To Command

Edit|Go To is useful for quickly moving to named blocks (to identify or modify them) or for moving quickly to distant parts of the notebook, or for selecting a noncontiguous block in disparate parts of a notebook. The selector moves to whatever location you choose with the command.

To move the selector to any location quickly,

1.	Choose Edit|Go To (or press F5).

2.	Choose the target block name from the list, or type the target cell address in the text box. If the cell is on another page, add the page prefix preceded by a colon. For instance, to move to cell Z36 on page D, type D:Z36. If the cell is in another notebook, add the notebook prefix. For instance, to move to the corresponding cell in the Budget notebook, type

[Budget]D:Z36

3.	Choose OK.

The indicated block is selected.

You can also point out blocks and trace errors with Go To. For instructions, see Extending Blocks with Go To and Tracing Errors with Go To.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Mouse Techniques


Extending Blocks with Go To

To select a block with Edit|Go To or the Go To key, move to the upper left corner of the block, then choose Edit|Go To or press F5 and specify the lower right corner. Press Shift, then press Enter or click OK. The selector moves to that corner and selects the block defined by both corners.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Using the Go To Command


Tracing Errors with Go To

To audit, or trace the source of, errors with the Go To command or key, select a cell containing NA or ERR then press F5 or choose Edit|Go To. The original source of the error appears in the Reference edit field. Click OK or press Enter to select that cell and display its contents in the input line.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Displaying Error Sources in Cells

Using the Go To Command


Finding and Replacing Data

To find or replace entries,

1.	Select the block or blocks you want to search.

2.	Choose Edit|Find And Replace. The Find And Replace dialog box appears. In the edit fields at the top of the dialog box, enter

the block or blocks to search

the text or value to find

the replacement text or value

3.	Specify any Look In or Options settings you want.

4.	To begin the search, choose Find Next or Previous. If a match is found, choose Find Next, Previous, Replace, Replace All, Reset, or Close. See Find and Replace Options for more details.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Searching for Records


Find and Replace Options

Edit|Find And Replace lets you find or alter multiple cell entries with a single command. It searches for the specified value or string and finds each match, which you can choose to replace with a new value.

The dialog box offers these options:

Block(s) is the block or blocks to search. To search the entire page, this edit field should be blank.

Find is the group of characters to be found in labels, values, or formulas. These characters are called the find string.

Replace is the group of characters to substitute for characters found. This is called the replacement string.

The first two Look In options determine how Quattro Pro treats formulas during its search. The last option lets you set conditional searches through all types of entries.

Formula looks at the formulas as they appear in the input line.

Value looks at the results of the formulas, as they appear in the cells.

Condition treats the find string as a conditional expression. To search starting from the active cell (which is usually the upper left cell), substitute a question mark for the cell address; for example, ?>500 finds the next cell that is greater than 500.  See Types of Operators for details on the logical operators that can be used in conditional find strings.

Note:	If you are using a conditional expression, you can only find values; they are not replaced when found.

Columns First sets the search path. By default, this option is unchecked for searching across rows starting with row 1. When checked, searching occurs down columns starting with column 1.

Match Whole determines whether the find string must be all or part of a cell entry. By default, this option is unchecked for searching for partial as well as whole entries. For example, if the find string is cat, catamaran and scatter are found as well as cat.

Note:	If you are searching for a label with Match Whole checked, you must either include the label prefix or set Look In to Value.

Case Sensitive controls whether entries must exactly match the find string. By default, this option is unchecked for searching for strings regardless of capitalization. For example, if the find string is HARPER, Harper, harper, and HaRpEr are found as well as HARPER.

The Find Next button begins or resumes a forward search without replacing found entries.

The Previous button begins or resumes a backward search without replacing found entries.

The Replace button lets you decide on an individual basis whether to replace each string found.

The Replace All button replaces all found strings without stopping.

The Reset button removes any entries in the dialog box and reinstates the defaults.

The Close button cancels the find operation without making a change.

You can also use Tools|Database Tools|Query to search a database.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks

Finding and Replacing Data

Searching for Records


Using the Spell Checker

The Spell Checker checks the spelling of text in the selected object, whether notebook block or graph.

To use the Spell Checker,

1.	Choose Tools|Spell Check. The Spell Checker dialog box appears. It is a modeless dialog box; it stays open, ready for use, until you close it.

2.	Select the block or graph to check. To check a whole page, click the Select-All button at the intersection of the row and column borders to select it. To check an entire multipage document, select one cell.

3.	Click Start. (The button name then changes to Replace All.)

4.	Possible misspellings appear in the Misspelled field. Suggested corrections, if any, appear in the Suggestions field.

5.	Decide how to handle each questionable word, then click an action button:

Replace changes the word to the word in the Replace With edit field. If none of the suggested words is correct, type the correct spelling in the Replace With field, then click Replace.

Replace All changes all occurrences of the word to the word in the Replace With edit field, whether selected from the list or typed.

Skip Once leaves the word unchanged.

Skip Always leaves the word unchanged and ignores all other occurrences of it in the selection.

Add leaves the word unchanged and adds it to the dictionary, so it will not appear in the Misspelled field again.

6.	To cancel a spelling check, click Stop. When you are ready to close the Spell Checker dialog box, click Close.

Note:	If you choose Skip Always, the Spell Checker follows that instruction as long Quattro Pro remains open.

You can choose from several spell checker options. For details, see Spell Checker Options.

See Also

Basic Editing Tasks


Spell Checker Options

To verify and set Spell Checker options, click the Options button in the Spell Checker dialog box. The Options dialog box appears.

You can:

Choose the language to check in.

Choose a custom dictionary; click Choose New Dictionary.

Check either or both spelling options. When checked,

-	Ignore Words with Numbers skips labels like M9020.

-	Ignore UPPERCASE Words skips any word entered in all uppercase letters.

See Also

Using the Spell Checker


Entering Data

These topics describe how to enter data into Quattro Pro notebooks:

Entering Labels, Numbers, Dates, and Times

Basic Data Entry

Types of Data

Entering Labels

Aligning Labels

Entering Numbers in Labels

Entering Wide Labels

Repeating Characters in Labels

Entering Numbers

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas

Formula Basics

Types of Formulas

Using Values in Formulas

Using Operators in Formulas

Types of Operators

Using @Functions in Formulas

Using the @Functions Button

Input Line Parenthesis Matching and Closing

Creating Totals

Adding Comments to Entries

Using Array Features

Blocks

Using Blocks in Formulas

Pointing to Blocks

Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Using Noncontiguous Blocks

Using 3-D Blocks

Using SpeedSelect, the Navigation Tools, and Zoom To Fit

Filling a Block with Data

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Filling with Dates or Times

Using SpeedFill

Using SpeedFill with a Seed Value

Using SpeedFill on an Empty Block

Using SpeedFill on Page Tabs

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series


Basic Data Entry

When you start Quattro Pro, a blank notebook appears, ready for data entry. To enter data in a cell, click the cell (or use the arrow keys to move the selector to the cell) and type the entry. The characters you type appear in the cell and on the input line below the Property Band.

Use Backspace to erase mistakes as you type or use the mouse to move the insertion point, then type new characters from that point. To replace characters with new ones, highlight the original data with the mouse (click at the beginning of the area to correct and drag to the end) then type the new data. When your entry is complete, click the checkmark button in the input line, press Enter, or press one of the arrow keys to put it into the cell. You can click the X button to clear the input line and cancel your changes, @ to display a list of @function categories, or {} for a list of macro categories.

If you are entering a formula, you can click the Navigate button (the first button in the input line) to insert block names into the formula; see Using Block Names in Formulas.

Unless you use an arrow key, the selector stays at the cell with new data when you complete an entry. There are two ways to make the selector move to another cell. One way is to select a row or column of empty cells before you start entering data. Then, when you complete an entry, the selector moves to the next cell in the row or column. Setting Cell Selector Behavior describes another way, a setting you can change so the selector always moves to the next cell in the column.

If the entry is a formula, the result of the formula appears in the cell. See Types of Data for a description of what you can enter into a cell.

Here are some other basic features:

Error Messages

Quattro Pro displays an error message if it discovers a problem with an entry, such as an invalid character. After you click OK to clear the error message, you enter Edit mode, with the insertion point positioned at the problem character in the input line. Quattro Pro will not accept the entry until you correct the problem. To cancel the entry, click the X button or press Esc.

Error Correction

If you make a mistake while entering data or want to take back a command, use Edit|Undo. See Undoing Mistakes.

Multipage Entries

Finally, you can drill an entry into several pages at once using Group mode. For information, see Grouping Notebook Pages.

Input Line

If you need more room onscreen or want to close the input line for any other reason, choose View|Display and uncheck Show Input Line. You can still enter and edit data directly in the cell.

Precalculating Values

You can calculate values before you enter them. Type a formula on the input line, but press F9 instead of Enter. For example, if you type 8*9 on the input line, then press F9, Quattro Pro replaces the formula with the result, 72. Press Enter or click the checkmark button to write the result into the cell.

See Also

Editing Entries

Entering Data

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers


Types of Data

There are two types of data in a notebook page: labels and values.

A label is a text entry such as "Total."

A value is a number, a date, a formula, or a formula's result. Formulas usually refer to numbers in other cells to calculate a value, such as the difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column. You can also use @functions and numeric values in formulas.

Quattro Pro automatically determines whether data is a label or a value. It replaces the READY indicator on the status line with LABEL for text or VALUE for numbers, dates, or formulas. After you enter the data, the READY indicator reappears.

See Also

Basic Data Entry

Entering Data

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas

Entering Labels

Entering Numbers


Entering Labels

A label is a text entry. It can begin with any letter or punctuation mark except the following:

/	slash

+	plus symbol

-	minus symbol, or hyphen

$	dollar sign

(	open or left parenthesis

@	At symbol

#	pound or number symbol

.	period

=	equal sign

If you want to start a label with a number or with any of the above special characters, see the Aligning Labels subtopic below; other label topics follow.

Aligning Labels

Entering Numbers in Labels

Entering Wide Labels

Repeating Characters in Labels

You can also force cells to accept only labels; see Limiting Data Input Types for more information.

Note:	In addition to the characters on your keyboard, you can enter any ANSI character. This includes international characters such as Ä and Â, and special symbols such as ¶.

See Also

Basic Data Entry

Entering Data

Types of Data


Aligning Labels

When you enter a label, it is positioned within the cell according to the default label alignment, which is usually left-aligned. To align a label differently from the default alignment, follow the instructions in Aligning Entries in Cells or precede the label with a label-prefix character.

Note:	When you use a label-prefix character to align a label that is wider than the cell, the label spills into the cell to the right, even if it is right-aligned or centered. Quattro Pro's default label alignment spills long label text to the right if the label is left-aligned, to the left if the label is right-aligned, and to both left and right if the label is centered.

Label-prefix characters appear in the cell when you double-click to edit it, and appear on the input line when you select the cell.

Label-prefix character	Alignment
' (apostrophe)	Left-aligned
^ (caret)	Centered
" (quotation mark)	Right-aligned
To begin a label with one of the label-prefix characters, precede it with another label-prefix character indicating the alignment you want. For example, to enter the label

"Lefty" Grove

and left-align it, enter the label as follows:

'"Lefty" Grove

You can align text across several cells. For instructions, see Centering Text Over Blocks.

See Also

Entering Data

Entering Numbers in Labels

Entering Wide Labels

Repeating Characters in Labels


Entering Numbers in Labels

When you enter information into Quattro Pro, the application checks to see if it contains any characters that are not numbers. If it finds one, it checks to see if the entry is a date. If it is not a valid date, Quattro Pro assumes the entry is a label--unless it starts with a formula prefix character (+ - ( @ # $ =). If the entry starts with a formula prefix character, Quattro Pro tries to interpret it as a formula. If the entry is a valid formula, Quattro Pro evaluates it. Otherwise, it displays the Syntax Error message.

This means that you can enter street addresses and telephone numbers without a special prefix character. They will be treated as labels. If you actually want to subtract a four-digit number from a three-digit number, precede the entry with an = or +. Otherwise, Quattro Pro enters it as a phone number.

For example, these entries are treated as labels:

145 Howard Street

408-726-3670

12/72/94

These entries are treated as formulas and a date:

=408-726-3670

+12/72/94

12/24/94

The first entry evaluates to -3988, the second evaluates to 0.001773, and the third is December 24, 1994 (with a date serial number of 34692, as explained in Entering Dates and Times.)

See Also

Aligning Labels

Entering Data

Entering Wide Labels

Repeating Characters in Labels


Entering Wide Labels

When a label exceeds the width of the cell, the text spills into blank cells  to the right, left, or both depending on the alignment setting--Left, Right, or Center. When the label runs into a cell that contains an entry, Quattro Pro truncates the displayed appearance of the label, but still stores all of it.

To see all of a truncated entry, select the cell. The entire label appears in the input line. Be sure to select the leftmost cell (the one that actually contains the entry). To fully display a truncated entry in its own cell, widen the column containing it (see Resizing Rows and Columns for details), or erase the cells to the right of it.

If you prefer, you can format a cell so text wraps within it instead of overflowing into other cells; see Aligning Entries in Cells for more details. You can also control the width of text overflows (see Reformatting Text Entries in a Block).

Note:	If you check Compatible Keys (a General property setting in the application Object Inspector) or use an alignment character, label display changes. Then, labels always extend to the right until they reach an occupied cell.

See Also

Aligning Labels

Entering Data

Entering Numbers in Labels

Repeating Characters in Labels


Repeating Characters in Labels

You can repeat one or more characters to fill a cell by preceding the character(s) with a backslash (\). For example, to fill a cell with hyphens, type

\-

To repeat a series of characters in a pattern, enter the first set of characters to be repeated after the backslash, such as \abc.

If you want a label to begin with a backslash, but you do not want to repeat the characters after it, precede the backslash with a label-prefix character.

See Also

Aligning Labels

Entering Data

Entering Numbers in Labels

Entering Wide Labels


Entering Numbers

When you begin typing a number, the word VALUE appears on the status line. After you complete the entry, the indicator changes to READY. By default, numbers appear right-aligned in the cell. To change alignment, choose a setting from the Alignment list in the Property Band or change the Alignment property setting (see Aligning Cell Entries for details).

Keep these rules in mind when entering numbers:

A number entry can contain only numerals (0 to 9), a leading negative (-) sign, a leading positive (+) sign, a single decimal point, a trailing percent sign (%), or an E (if you are using scientific notation).

Do not use parentheses to indicate a negative number. Use a minus sign (-) instead. However, if you change the numeric format to Currency or Comma, negative numbers appear in parentheses (see Setting Numeric Format for information on numeric formats).

Do not include commas when entering numbers. You can display them by changing the numeric format.

Do not include spaces in the entry.

Do not substitute a lowercase l ("el") for 1 (one) or an uppercase O ("oh") for 0 (zero).

An entry that does not follow these rules will be interpreted as a label, formula, or date. See Entering Numbers in Labels for details.

Note:	If you want to surround negative numbers with parentheses, to add commas, or to otherwise change the appearance of numbers, you can use the Style list on the Property Band or set the Numeric Format property (see Setting Numeric Format for details).

You can use scientific notation (for example, 2.35E+8) to enter a number. If the calculated number fits in the cell (and the numeric format makes it possible), it appears in full. You can also automatically enter a sequence of numbers into a block (see Entering a Sequence of Numbers for more information).

Length

Like a label, a number can be longer than a cell is wide. If a number is wider than a cell, however, it does not spill into adjacent cells as labels do. Instead, it appears either in scientific notation or as a row of asterisks (*********), depending on the cell's numeric format and width. The full number appears when you widen the column (see Resizing Rows and Columns for details).

See Also

Entering Data

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas


Entering Dates and Times

A date or a time is a type of value entry as long as it is entered in one of the legal date or time formats. To enter a date or time into a cell, enter the date or time in one of the following formats:

DD-MMM-YY (04-Mar-92)

DD-MMM (04-Mar, assumes current year)

MMM-YY (Mar-92, assumes first day of the month)

the Long International date format--the current application International property setting, ordinarily MM/DD/YY

the Short International date format--the shortened version of the current application International property setting, ordinarily MM/DD

HH:MM:SS AM/PM (01:42:30 PM)

HH:MM AM/PM (01:42 PM)

the Long International time format--the current application International property setting, ordinarily HH:MM:SS

the Short International time format--the shortened version of the current application International property setting, ordinarily HH:MM

The four International date and time formats correspond to the International property settings in the application Object Inspector (see Setting International Options for details). If you change those settings, you must then conform to the new settings when you enter dates or times in one of the international formats.

Once you enter a date or time, you can change to another date or time format with the block Numeric Format property (see Setting Numeric Format for details).

To enter a formula that resembles a date format, use a + before the formula (for example, +4/12).

You can force a block to accept only dates or times; see Limiting Data Input Types for details.

Date Calculations

Dates and times are represented on the input line by serial numbers. For dates, the serial number is an integer ranging from -109,571 (for January 1, 1600) to 474,816 (for December 31, 3199; 0 is December 30, 1899). The serial number for times is a decimal fraction between 0.000 (for 00:00:00) and 0.99999 (for 23:59:59). Mixed numbers indicate the date and time: 2.5 represents January 1, 1900 at 12:00 noon.

Serial numbers let you use date or time values in formulas. For example, subtracting 10/1/92 from 10/8/92 results in 7. For more information on date and time serial numbers, see Date and Time @Functions.

See Also

Entering Data

Entering Formulas

Entering Numbers


Entering Formulas

You can enter a value with a formula. Quattro Pro formulas are like algebraic formulas. They combine values and operators to calculate a single value. See the following subtopics for specific information on formulas:

Formula Basics

Types of Formulas

Using Values in Formulas

Using Operators in Formulas

Types of Operators

Using @Functions in Formulas

Using the @Functions Button

Input Line Parenthesis Matching and Closing

Creating Totals

Adding Comments to Entries

Using Array Features

See Also

@Functions

Entering Data

Using Arrays in Formulas

Using Blocks in Formulas


Formula Basics

You can use numbers, cell coordinates, or block names for the values in formulas. For example,

+A1 - 3

subtracts three from the value in cell A1.

The result of a formula appears in the cell. The formula appears on the input line when you select the cell and on the status line when you are editing the entry.

You can include spaces between operators and values, but Quattro Pro deletes them when you click the checkmark button or press Enter to complete the formula. A formula must begin with one of the following characters:

. + - ( @ # $ =

By default, Quattro Pro calculates formulas when you enter them, and recalculates them each time you change the data involved. If a notebook contains many complex formulas, you may want to delay recalculation (see Setting Recalc Options for details) to save time.

Note:	To begin a formula with a letter, such as for a cell address or block name, precede it with a plus sign so the entry is considered a value, not a label.

Tip:	The Formula Composer can help you build simple and complex formulas. Its dialog box helps you choose the right @functions and enter their arguments correctly. For details, see Using the Formula Composer.

See Also

@Functions

Entering Formulas

Types of Formulas


Types of Formulas

Quattro Pro works with three different kinds of formulas:

Arithmetic formulas, such as +B3+421.3, calculate numeric values. These are the most commonly used formulas.

Text formulas are any formulas that have a textual result. For example, +C4&" Review" enters the text in cell C4 and adds a space and the word Review. Text formulas include those created with string @functions or an @IF function that results in a text string.

Logical formulas are true/false statements concerning values in other cells; for example, +C3<10. Quattro Pro checks the spreadsheet to see if the statement is true or not. If true, it enters a 1 in the cell; if false, it enters a 0.

Quattro Pro uses relative addressing to keep track of cells referenced in formulas.

See Also

@Functions and Formulas

Entering Formulas


Using Values in Formulas

Values in a formula can be any of the following:

Numbers (for example, 948, -84, 43.23).

Coordinates of other cells or blocks (for example, B12, G29..G31, B:A3..D6, or [NOTEBK2]A:A1).

Block names which are names you give to a cell or block (for example, EXPENSES). Among other things, block names make rereading formulas easier. See Maintaining Block Names for more information.

@Functions (for example, @SUM(B1..B24)). Quattro Pro @functions are a set of standard formulas used to simplify complex calculations.

Text surrounded by double quotation marks (for example, "PROFIT" or "Dear Mr.").

When you use a cell address, Quattro Pro refers to the values in the cells. For example, the formula +B6+C1 adds the values in those two cells and displays the result.

See Also

Creating Totals

Entering Formulas

Types of Formulas

Using @Functions in Formulas

Using Blocks in Formulas

Using Operators in Formulas


Using Operators in Formulas

Formulas use operators, such as +, -, *, and /, to act on two or more values. Often formulas contain several operators, as in

+C5 - D12 + F24 * 0.123

The result of a formula depends on the order in which the arithmetic operations are performed. Quattro Pro assigns each operator a precedence and performs the operations in order of precedence. Multiplication has higher precedence than addition, therefore

+5 + 1 * 3 = 8, not 18

Operations with equal precedence are performed from left to right.

The next table lists the operators and the precedence assigned to each. Operators with the highest precedence (7) are performed first.

Quattro Pro Operator Precedence

Operator 	Description = Precedence

& 	String combination = 1

#AND#,  #OR#	Logical AND, logical OR = 1

#NOT# 	Logical NOT = 2

 =, <> 	Equal, not equal = 3

<, >	Less than, greater than = 3

<= 	Less than or equal = 3

>= 	Greater than or equal = 3

-, + 	Subtraction, addition = 4

*, / 	Multiplication, division = 5

-, + 	Negative, positive = 6

^ 	To the power of (exponentiation) = 7

To quickly remember the order of precedence of the common arithmetic operators, use the phrase "My Dear Aunt Sally" (multiplication, division, addition, and subtraction).

You can override operator precedence by including parentheses in formulas. Enclose in parentheses the portion of a formula you want calculated first. You can nest parentheses inside other parentheses; Quattro Pro calculates the innermost part first. For example,

+4 * 2 + 3 = 11

+4 * (2 + 3) = 20

(4*2) + (3 + 5) * 4 = 40

((4*2) + (3 + 5)) * 4 = 64

See Also

Creating Totals

Entering Formulas

Types of Formulas

Types of Operators

Using @Functions in Formulas

Using Blocks in Formulas

Using Values in Formulas


Types of Operators

Arithmetic operators, such as + and * used in +B3*1.3, perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, and exponentiation. These are the most commonly used operators:

-   +   *   /   ^

The & (concatenation) operator is a text operator. You can use it to append text strings, whether each string is typed into the formula or pulled from a cell reference. For example, to concatenate a label from a cell to a string,

1.	Type a plus sign (+) to begin the formula.

Enter the first string by pointing to the cell containing it (the cell must contain a label).

2.	Type an ampersand (&).

3.	Enter the second string by surrounding it with quote marks. If you want a space between strings, be sure to type it within the quote marks.

4.	Click the check mark or press Enter  to complete the formula.

Logical operators determine whether expressions are true or false. For example, +A1<10 determines whether the value in A1 is less than 10. If the statement is true, the cell displays 1; if false, it displays 0.

These are logical operators:

<   >   <=   >=   <>   =   #NOT#   #AND#   #OR#

See Also

Entering Formulas

Types of Formulas

Using @Functions in Formulas


Using @Functions in Formulas

Quattro Pro provides many built-in functions, called @functions because they begin with an @ sign. @Functions are special commands that perform particular calculations and return results. You enter them into spreadsheet cells, either alone or within formulas.

Quattro Pro has more than 370 built-in @functions. Some of the most commonly used @functions are mathematical @functions like @SUM and @AVG. @SUM totals the contents of the blocks you reference, and @AVG counts the number of values in the referenced block and returns the average of the values.

@Functions have these parts:

the name of the @function (such as @SUM, or @AVG)

the arguments (the values, blocks, or text strings to be operated on)

the commas that separate multiple arguments

the parentheses around the arguments

All of these parts and the order in which they are used are called the syntax. Each @function has its own particular syntax.

Note:	If you change the Punctuation setting of the application International property, other characters besides commas can be used to separate arguments (see Controlling Punctuation for details).

To see how @functions work, here are some examples:

@SUM(A1..A4,B1) is equivalent to +A1+A2+A3+A4+B1

@AVG(A5..A8) finds the average of the values in A5 through A8

@ROUND(A9,2) rounds the value in A9 to two decimal places

@ROUND(@AVG(A5..A8),3) rounds the average of the values in A5 through A8 to three decimal places

See Also

@Functions

Entering Formulas

Input Line Parenthesis Matching and Closing

Types of Formulas

Using the @Functions Button

Using the Formula Composer


Using the @Functions Button

Quattro Pro provides the @Functions button to help you enter @functions. The @Functions button appears in the input line whenever you are entering or editing a cell entry.

To enter an @function into a cell,

1.	Select the cell.

2.	Type + or click in the input line to begin entering the formula.

3.	Click the @Functions button or press Alt+F3.

4.	Choose a category and double-click the @function you want from the list.

5.	The @function name and a left parenthesis appear in the input line. The complete syntax of the @function appears in the status line. The first argument appears in uppercase.

6.	Enter the value, block references, or text string as the first argument.

7.	If the syntax of the @function you are entering requires more than one argument, type a comma. The next argument in the syntax in the status line turns to uppercase.

8.	After you enter all remaining arguments, type a close parenthesis, and press Enter.

You can also enter @functions into cells by typing them; keep an eye on the status line to follow the correct syntax.

See Also

@Functions

Entering Formulas

Types of Formulas

Using @Functions in Formulas


Input Line Parenthesis Matching and Closing

An input line display feature helps you enter formulas, links, and macros. If you type one of these characters-- ( [ { --it is colored red in the input line until you type the matching character-- ) ] }. Then, they both turn green. If you forget to type a matching parenthesis in a complex formula with several sets of parentheses or brackets, for example, it is easy to pinpoint the error. Press F2 or double-click the cell to display the selected formula in Edit mode, then move the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red. You can check the formula and insert the matching character where it belongs. You know when you are right--the new character and its match both turn green. If a parenthesis is missing when you press Enter, Quattro Pro adds one at the end of the formula.

See Also

@Functions

Entering Formulas

Types of Formulas

Using @Functions in Formulas


Using Blocks in Formulas

A block is any rectangular group of cells (a block can also be a single cell). Many formulas operate on blocks containing more than one cell. For example, to total the values in a column, type @SUM(B1..B7).

To specify the coordinates of a block, type the address of the top left cell, followed by one or two periods (..) and the address of the bottom right cell. For example, the block C3..D6 refers to cells C3, D3, C4, D4, C5, D5, C6, and D6. You can enter the addresses of any two cells in opposite corners in any order. Quattro Pro rewrites the block coordinates to list the top left cell followed by the bottom right cell.

When specifying a block, you can enter just one dot (period) instead of two; for example, F4..F11 and F4.F11 indicate the same block.

Note:	However, you must enter two periods in block coordinates if you specified a period as the argument separator in the Punctuation setting of the application International property (see Controlling Punctuation for details).

To refer to a block in another page in the same notebook, type the page name and a colon before the block reference (for example, B:B4 refers to cell B4 in page B). For information on referring to a block that spans multiple pages, see Using 3-D Blocks.

Note:	If you rename a page, you can use the new name on its tab in the block reference or the page letter. Also, if you group pages, you can refer to them by their group name instead of by their individual page names.

To refer to a cell in a different notebook, type the file name in brackets and the page name before the block reference (for example, [SALES]C:B5 refers to cell B5 of page C in the SALES notebook file. See Creating Links for details).

You can also specify a block by entering the name you have assigned a block (see Block|Names for details).

See Also

Entering Formulas

Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Pointing to Blocks

Setting Display Options

Using Noncontiguous Blocks


Pointing to Blocks

The easiest way to enter single cell or block references into formulas is to point to them. If you click the cell, or move the selector to the cell you want to include, you enter Point mode.

For example, to enter the formula +B3*(B4-B5) into cell B6 by pointing,

1.	Select cell B6.

2.	Type + to begin the formula.

3.	Click cell B3 or press Up until the selector is in B3. (The indicator changes to POINT.)

4.	Type an asterisk (*) to indicate multiplication. Quattro Pro enters an asterisk after +B3 and returns the selector to B6.

5.	Type an open parenthesis, (.

6.	Select cell B4 and type a minus (-).

7.	Select cell B5 and type a close parenthesis, ).

8.	Press Enter. Quattro Pro writes the formula into B6.

To enter Point mode, the insertion point must be after one of these characters:

an arithmetic operator [+ - / * ^]

a text operator [&]

the last character of a logical operator [< > = #]

an open parenthesis [(]

a comma [,]

a semicolon[;] (or whatever character you have chosen as an argument separator through the Punctuation setting of the application International property; see Controlling Punctuation for details)

You can also enter Point mode if a cell or block reference is selected in the input line. Otherwise, if you click another cell or press an arrow key, Quattro Pro enters the formula into the cell and returns to Ready mode.

Instead of only pointing to cells, you can point to blocks by dragging them.You can also point to blocks using the keyboard.

See Also

Entering Formulas

Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Using Blocks in Formulas


Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Point mode is useful from dialog box edit fields that require cell references. In the case of commands requiring cell references, you can make the dialog box temporarily collapsed to make pointing easier.

When you first choose a command, the active cells are highlighted in the primary edit field. When you click and drag to point to a block, you enter Point mode, and the dialog box is reduced to its title bar until you release the mouse button. The coordinates of the block you point to appear in the edit field.

You can also enter Point mode from a dialog box using any of these methods:

click the Point Mode button

press Up, Down, or F2

double-click the contents of the edit field

In these cases, the dialog box remains collapsed until you exit Point mode or until you expand it with the Minimize/Maximize button.

You can exit Point mode by pressing F2 (which enters the block in the edit field), or by pressing Esc (which restores the previous entry in the edit field).

See Also

Setting Display Options

Using Blocks in Formulas


Using Noncontiguous Blocks

Noncontiguous blocks are separate blocks that you operate on at the same time.You can write formulas that refer to many noncontiguous blocks at once, or you can act on noncontiguous blocks with commands.

To point to noncontiguous blocks, select the first block, hold down the Ctrl key, and select additional blocks. When every block you want to refer to or act on is highlighted, complete the formula or command.

To type references to noncontiguous blocks into a formula, separate each block with a comma, as shown in this example:

A2..A5,B7,D5..E12

Most commands can work on noncontiguous blocks.

See Also

Setting Display Options

Using Blocks in Formulas


Using 3-D Blocks

A 3-D block is the same two-dimensional block selected on a series of consecutive notebook pages. For example, the block A2..B5 on pages A through D is a 3-D block.

To point to a 3-D block, first select the "2-D" block on the first page of the series. Then hold down the Shift key while you click the tab for the last page in the series. A black line appears under the tabs. Complete the formula that refers to this block, or choose the command to act on it. This block remains selected only until you select elsewhere in the notebook.

To type a reference to a 3-D block, include the page references first, followed by the block coordinates. For example,

A..D:A2..B5

refers to a block on pages A, B, C, and D.

If the same pages were grouped under the name Receipts (see Grouping Notebook Pages for details), the same 3-D reference would look like this:

Receipts:A2..B5

Another way to type a reference to a 3-D block is to visualize it as a cube. Type the page and block coordinates of the cube's front upper left corner, followed by two periods, then the back lower right corner. For instance, you can refer to the same block as in the previous example by typing

A:A2..D:B5.

Either 3-D syntax is correct, but by default, all references you point to or type are converted to the first method. If you prefer the second method, you can switch to it with the application Display property.

See Also

Setting Display Options

Using Blocks in Formulas


Using SpeedSelect, the Navigation Tools, and Zoom To Fit

If you want to select an entire block of data--to apply properties or SpeedFormats, for example--SpeedSelect and the navigation tools can help.

To automatically select a data block with SpeedSelect, click one cell within the block of data. Next, open the Toolbar list in the Property Band (by default, it says Main) and choose Modeling. Then, click the SpeedSelect button [image]. Quattro Pro automatically determines the corners of the table and selects the whole block for you.

To move to a corner of a data block, select one cell within it and click one of the navigation tools:

Top Left of Table button

Top Right of Table button

Bottom Left of Table button

Bottom Right of Table button

The selector moves in the direction of the arrow to a corner of the block.

To enlarge a block of data for closer viewing, select the block or one cell within it, then click the Zoom To Fit button [image], to the right of the navigation tools in the Modeling Toolbar. The block of data enlarges to fill the screen. If you selected just one cell, Quattro Pro uses SpeedSelect to find the boundaries of the block, then zooms it. To restore the screen to its normal display, pull down the Zoom Factor list in the Property Band and choose 100%.

See Also

Toolbars

Zooming In or Out


Creating Totals

Quattro Pro includes SpeedSum, a way to quickly total columns and rows of numbers. The SpeedSum button [image] on the Toolbar uses @SUM to add the values of the specified block. You can use it to total a single row or column, multiple rows or columns, all the rows and columns in a block, or 3-D blocks.

To use SpeedSum,

1.	Select a block that includes the data to total plus a blank cell (or cells) beneath or to the right to contain the results.

2.	Click the SpeedSum button.

The entries added depend on what you select before clicking SpeedSum:

To total several cells in a column, select the data plus one blank cell below. For example, to total the values in the column A1..A3, select A1..A4. The total appears in cell A4.

To total several cells across a row, select the cells plus one blank cell to the right.

To total many columns, select the data and a blank row below.

To total many rows, select the data and a blank column to the right.

To total all rows and columns and create a grand total at the same time, select the block of data with a blank column to the right and a blank row below. Click SpeedSum Example for details.

To total all cells on multiple pages onto a blank page, select the 3-D block of data and the same block on an extra blank page.

To create totals outside all rows and columns on multiple pages, select a 3-D block with a blank row and column around the data.

You can also use SpeedSum without selecting the data you are totaling. This is useful for totaling large blocks of data that are time-consuming to select. Just select the blank cells where you want the totals placed (the blank cells must be adjacent to the data), and click SpeedSum. Quattro Pro guesses which cells you want totaled by the extent of the data above (if you selected cells in a row), to the left (if you selected cells in a column), or on previous pages (if you selected a block). After clicking SpeedSum, check each @SUM formula to make sure it actually refers to the appropriate cells.

Note:	SpeedSum adds values only. Any label entries in the selected block are treated as zero values.

See Also

@SUM

Entering Formulas


Adding Comments to Entries

You can attach hidden explanatory comments to value entries. Just type a semicolon (;) after the entry and type your comment. The semicolon and the characters after it are stored with the cell, but they do not appear in the cell. You can see the comment on the input line when you select the cell.

Hidden comments do not appear in a printed notebook unless you check Cell Formulas in the Options dialog box of File|Print or format the cell with Numeric Format set to Text.

Tip:	To hide an entire entry, use the Hidden setting of the Numeric Format property (in the block Object Inspector); see Setting Numeric Format for details.

See Also

Editing Entries

Entering Data

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas

Entering Numbers


Entering a Sequence of Numbers

You can use the SpeedFill button [image] or command to fill a block according to one or more seed values or series lists. For instructions, see Using SpeedFill.

Or, use Block|Fill to specify rules for filling the selected block. You can use numbers, dates, times, or even formulas.

To fill a block with sequential values using Block|Fill,

1.	Select the block or blocks to fill. If you select a noncontiguous block, Quattro Pro fills it in the order selected.

2.	Choose Block|Fill.

3.	Enter a Start value for the first cell. You can enter a number, a formula, a date, or a time. If you enter a date or time, see instructions at the bottom of this screen.

4.	Enter a Step value. This is the constant value to add (or multiply or use as an exponent) with the Start value or the previous value. If you want the values to decrease, enter a negative number and a Stop value lower than the Start value. The Step value can also be a formula.

5.	The default stop value is 8191. Enter a different value if you want a higher or lower limit for the fill values.

6.	Choose column or row order. The initial setting is Column, so the fill sequence moves down columns, starting with the leftmost column. Choose Row to fill across rows instead, starting with the top row.

7.	Choose the type of series you would like to govern the fill. For details on using date series, see Filling with Dates or Times.

8.	If the Start value is a number or a formula, you can choose Linear (addition), Growth (multiplication), or Power (exponentiation). Linear adds the Step value to the previous value (defined at first to be the Start value). Growth multiplies the Step value by the previous value. Power uses the Step value as the exponent of the previous value.

9.	Choose OK.

See Also

Entering Data


Filling with Dates or Times

To fill a block with dates or times, choose Block|Fill and enter the beginning date or time in the Start field. The date or time format you use is repeated in subsequent cells.

For the Stop value, enter a number larger than 50000, or if you want to stop at a particular date, enter the date.

For the Series option, the fill operation works linearly (Step values are added), but you can add cells in units of years, months, weeks, weekdays (thereby skipping weekends), or in days, hours, minutes, or seconds.

For the Step value, enter the number of years, months, and so on to add. If you are filling with dates instead of times, only the integer part of the Start, Step, and Stop values are used; the fractional part is ignored.

For example, with a Start value of 6/20/92, a Step value of 2, a Stop value of 50000, and Series set to Day, the second cell in the series contains 6/22/92.

If the Start value is a number that is not formatted as a date (for example, if you enter 33764 instead of 09-Jun-92), cells are filled with different date or time-related information depending on the Series setting. If you choose Month, only month names are entered. If you choose Year, 4-digit year values appear. Choosing Week, Weekday, or Day fills with days incremented by the appropriate interval, and choosing Hour, Minute, or Second displays times with the corresponding level of detail.

See Also

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Entering Data

Entering Dates and Times

Using SpeedFill


Using SpeedFill

Based on the entries in one or more cells, you can quickly fill a block with a sequence of entries. You can do this either by continuing a pattern or using a predefined series with the SpeedFill button [image] or command. You can fill a block with numbers, a combination of letters and numbers, or with specific types of labels, such as days of the week or months of the year.

You can use SpeedFill with a seed value or on an empty block. You can also use SpeedFill to name page tabs and can create custom series to use with SpeedFill. For more information, click a topic.

Using SpeedFill with a Seed Value

Using SpeedFill on an Empty Block

Using SpeedFill on Page Tabs

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series

See Also

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Entering Data

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas


Using SpeedFill with a Seed Value

To use SpeedFill with a seed value,

1.	Select the cell to act as a seed value for the sequence plus the blank cells to fill with entries. For details, see SpeedFill Seed Values.

2.	Click the SpeedFill button [image] or right-click and choose SpeedFill in the QuickMenu.

You can extend a sequence in any direction, using these rules:

You can have one seed value, or many.

The blank cells to be filled must be contiguous with the seed value(s), extending down the column or across the row to the right.

You can fill a 3-D or noncontiguous block, but each page or subblock must have its own seed value(s) for its own filled sequence.

You can extend in two directions at once by selecting a block with seed values next to the upper left cell.

You can create your own sequences of values and labels to enter with SpeedFill. For details, see Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series.

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Entering Formulas


Using SpeedFill on an Empty Block

To fill an empty block with an existing series of dates, numbers, or labels:

1.	Select the block.

2.	Click the SpeedFill button [image] or right-click and choose SpeedFill in the QuickMenu.

3.	Choose a series in the Series Name list. A list of its elements appears in the Series Element field.

4.	Indicate how to fill the block: Check Columns to fill to the bottom of the first column in the active block, then continue at the top of the second column. Check Rows to fill the first row in the active block, then the second. This procedure is similar to using Block|Fill.

You can create your own sequences of values and labels to enter with SpeedFill. For details, see Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series.

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Entering Formulas


Using SpeedFill on Page Tabs

To fill page tabs with an existing series of dates, numbers, or labels:

1.	Select one empty cell.

2.	Click the SpeedFill button [image] or right-click and choose SpeedFill in the QuickMenu.

3.	Choose a list series in the Series Name list. A list of its elements appears in the Series Element field.

4.	Check Tabs to fill the page tabs.

All tabs are filled until the series is complete. If you only want to use part of the series, modify the series and save it under another name, then use the new series to fill the tabs. To modify the series, see Modifying SpeedFill Series.

You can create your own sequences of values and labels to enter with SpeedFill. For details, see Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series.

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Entering a Sequence of Numbers

Entering Formulas


Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series

You can create your own sequences of values and labels to enter with SpeedFill. You can create new series by entering lists or formulas and by modifying existing series. For details, choose a topic:

Creating New List Series

Creating New Formula Series

Modifying SpeedFill Series

Deleting SpeedFill Series

Renaming SpeedFill Series

See Also

Using SpeedFill


Creating New List Series

SpeedFill list series are entered from lists, not generated from formulas. To create a new list series,

1.	Select one empty cell, then use one of the following methods:

click the SpeedFill button

right-click and choose SpeedFill in the QuickMenu

choose Notebook|Define Series

2.	Click Create to display the Create Series dialog box.

3.	Enter a descriptive name for the series in the Series Name field.

4.	Check List in the Series Type group. Check Repeating if you want the series to start again when every element has been entered once.

5.	Enter the first element of the list in the Value field. Then, click Add to add the element to the list.

6.	Enter the remaining elements the same as the first. To insert an element above an existing element, highlight the existing element, type the new element in the Value field, then click Insert.

7.	To delete an element from the list, select it and click Delete.

8.	To modify an element, select it, edit it in the Value field, then click Modify.

9.	To add elements from a list in the notebook, click Extract and specify the block of cells that contain the new series elements. Check Override Existing Values to replace any existing elements with those in the notebook.

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series


Creating New Formula Series

SpeedFill formula series are generated from a formula, not entered from a list. To create a new formula series,

1.	Select one empty cell, then use one of the following methods:

click the SpeedFill button

right-click and choose SpeedFill in the QuickMenu

choose Notebook|Define Series

2.	Click Create to display the Create Series dialog box.

3.	Enter a descriptive name for the series in the Series Name field.

4.	Check Formula in the Series Type group.

5.	Enter the first number in the series into the Seed Value field. This value is used as a constant in the formula. A string seed value is evaluated as 0.

6.	Enter the formula into the Formula field. Use the Seed, Previous, and Iteration buttons to insert the seed value, previous value, and iteration number into the formula. For details on entering the formula, see Formula Definition Options.

For example, this formula produces a series that starts with 5 and increases by 5 (5, 10, 15, 20, and so on): #SEED#+(5*#ITER#).

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series


Modifying SpeedFill Series

To modify a SpeedFill series,

1.	Select one empty cell, then use one of the following methods:

click the SpeedFill button

right-click and choose SpeedFill in the QuickMenu

choose Notebook|Define Series

2.	When the SpeedFill or Define Series dialog box appears, select the series you want to change.

3.	Click Modify to display the Modify Series dialog box.

4.	If you selected a list series, the Modify Series dialog box includes Series Elements Options. Change the list values as described in Creating New List Series.

If you selected a formula series, the Modify Series dialog box includes Formula Definition Options. Change the formula as described in Creating New Formula Series.

5.	Click OK when the modifications are complete.

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series


Deleting SpeedFill Series

To delete a SpeedFill series,

1.	Select one empty cell, then use one of the following methods:

click the SpeedFill button

right-click and choose SpeedFill in the QuickMenu

choose Notebook|Define Series

2.	When the dialog box appears, select the series you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete to display a prompt. Choose Yes to remove the series and No to keep it.

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series


Renaming SpeedFill Series

To rename a SpeedFill series,

1.	Choose Notebook|Define Series.

2.	When the Define Series dialog box appears, select the series and click Rename.

3.	Enter the new name and click OK.

See Also

Using SpeedFill

Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series


SpeedFill Seed Values

These are the types of entries you can use as SpeedFill seed values, along with the resulting sequence:

Seed values(s)	Continued sequence

1st	2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th...

Qtr 1	Qtr 2, Qtr 3, Qtr 4, Qtr 1...

1st Quarter	2nd Quarter, 3rd Quarter...

Jan	Feb, Mar...

January	February, March...

Mon	Tue, Wed, Thu...

Monday	Tuesday, Wednesday...

Week 1	Week 2, Week 3...

P1, P2, Total	P3, P4, Total, P5, P6, Total...

Jan 89, Feb 89	Mar 89, Apr 89...

100 Days	101 Days, 102 Days, 103 Days...

100 Days, 200 Days	300 Days, 400 Days, 500 Days...

1, 3, 5	7, 9, 11, 13...

1, 3, 6	8.333333, 10.83333, 13.33333...

04/05/92	04/06/92, 04/07/92...

The last example shows the seed value formatted as a date. To create your own sequences for SpeedFill, see Creating and Modifying SpeedFill Series.

See Also

Entering Data

Entering Dates and Times

Entering Formulas

Using SpeedFill


Using the Formula Composer

The Formula Composer is a visual tool for creating, editing, and debugging formulas. You can use the Formula Composer to build a formula from scratch or to edit an existing formula. To use the Formula Composer, click the Formula Composer button [image] on the Main Toolbar, or choose Tools|Formula Composer.

The Formula Composer dialog box provides multiple views of a formula, including

an outline pane to examine the structure of a formula, edit parts of the formula, and trace cell refererences and block names

an @function pane to make entering @functions easy

a calculator pane to perform calculations within a formula

Choose one of the following topics for more details on using the Formula Composer:

Formula Composer Guidelines

Editing Expressions

Working in the Outline Pane

Formula Composer QuickMenu Commands

Tracing Formula Cell References

Working in the @Function Pane

Nesting @Functions in the Formula Composer

Using the Calculator

See Also

Formula Basics

Using @Functions


Formula Composer Guidelines

To use the Formula Composer,

1.	Select a cell that contains a formula, or select a blank cell to create a new formula.

2.	Click the Formula Composer button [image] on the Main Toolbar, or choose Tools|Formula Composer. The Formula Composer dialog box appears.

3.	Edit the formula using one or more of these methods:

Revise the formula by typing in the Expression edit field. See Editing Expressions.

Use the outline pane to select part of the formula, expand or collapse the formula outline, or go to referenced cells. See Working in the Outline Pane.

Use the @function pane to enter an @function. See Working in the @Function Pane.

Use the calculator to perform calculations within the formula. See Using the Calculator.

4.	Choose OK [image] to enter the formula in the current cell.

The Formula Composer dialog box has two help buttons.

The help button with a question mark provides help for each part of the Formula Composer.

The help button with the @ symbol and question mark provides help on the currently selected @function in the Expression edit field.

Tip:	You can resize the Formula Composer dialog box to make it smaller or larger. Just drag a side or corner of the dialog box to change its size. To resize the panes within the Formula Composer dialog box, drag the vertical pane divider to the left or right.


Editing Expressions

You can create or revise formulas, or parts of a formula, directly in the Expression edit field. An expression is any isolated part of the formula that you choose in the formula outline. To edit the entire formula, select the first expression in the formula outline. To edit part of the formula, select any other expression in the outline.

There are three buttons near the Expression edit field that help you edit a formula:

To insert an @function in the formula, click the @Functions button. A dialog box appears that lets you select an @function from several categories.

To insert a block name in the formula, click the down arrow and select a block name from the drop-down list.

To insert a cell or block reference, click the Point Mode button. When you click the Point Mode button, the Formula Composer dialog box shrinks to show only its title bar until you make a selection.

The @Functions, Block Names, and Point Mode buttons are also used to enter @function arguments in the @function pane.

Tip:	To clear the Expression edit field, press Ctrl+Backspace.

See Also

Pointing from Dialog Boxes

Using Blocks in Formulas


Working in the Outline Pane

The outline pane of the Formula Composer works like the Windows File Manager. You can expand or collapse parts of the outline to focus on the part of the formula you want to edit. Folder icons to the left of the outline indicate whether expressions have been expanded or collapsed. Expressions that cannot be expanded such as values have a node (a small yellow circle) to the left of them. The outline can consist of several levels, with each level containing a different expression. By default, the outline pane shows one level of the outline expanded.

To select part of the formula outline, use one of these methods:

Click an expression in the outline

Press Alt+C to make the outline the focus of the dialog box, then use the up and down arrow keys to select part of the outline.

When you select part of the formula outline, the Expression edit field changes to show the expression you selected. If the selected expression is an @function, the right side of the dialog box changes to the @function pane. If the selected expression is a value, operator, cell reference, or block name, the right side of the dialog box changes to the calculator.

To expand or collapse part of the formula outline, double-click it or select it and press Enter. You can also expand or collapse part of the formula outline by using the Expand or Collapse QuickMenu commands.

Note:	If an expression is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, an @function might be missing an argument), a red question mark icon appears to the left of the outline. The red question mark icon is a helpful debugging tool. It alerts you when something is wrong with part of a formula.

See Also

Formula Composer QuickMenu Commands

Using the Calculator

Working in the @Function Pane


Formula Composer QuickMenu Commands

When you right-click part of the formula outline, a QuickMenu appears showing several available commands:

Command	Shortcut	Description

Expand	Ctrl++	Expands the outline one level; equivalent to double-clicking a collapsed expression.

Full	Ctrl+*	Fully expands the current expression of the outline.

Collapse	Ctrl+-	Collapses the current expression of the outline; equivalent to double-clicking an expanded expression.

Follow	Ctrl+F	Goes to a referenced cell in the formula.

Back	Ctrl+B	Returns to the previous cell containing a formula that references the current cell.

Value	Ctrl+E	Converts the current expression to a value.

Function	Ctrl+O	Replaces the current expression with an @function. When you choose Function, a dialog box appears that lets you select an @function from a list.

Point	Ctrl+P	Switches to Point mode to specify a cell reference by pointing to a cell (or cells) on a notebook page. In Point mode, the Formula Composer dialog box is reduced to show only its title bar until you make your selection.

Name	Ctrl+N	Replaces the current expression with a block name. When you choose Name, a dialog box appears that lets you select a block name from a list.


Tracing Formula Cell References

Use the Follow and Back QuickMenu commands to examine a cell's relationship with other cells on the spreadsheet. When you trace cells references using the Follow and Back commands, you can determine how cells that are referenced in the formula depend on other cells. For complex formulas with nested levels of cell references, the Follow and Back commands serve as basic spreadsheet auditing tools.

When you trace cell references in a formula, the referenced cells appear in the Formula Composer title bar. For example, if cell A:A1 contains the formula +B1, when you use the Formula Composer to follow to cell A:B1 the title bar of the dialog box changes to Formula Composer - A:A1->A:B1. (The cell you first started to follow from is always displayed on the far left of the list, and the current cell is always displayed on the far right.) To go back to cell A:A1, choose Back from the QuickMenu or press Ctrl+B.

Tip:	For a nested series of cell references contained in multiple formulas, use the shortcut keys Ctrl+F and Ctrl+B to follow and backtrack, respectively, through a stack of cell references.

Note:	If a cell reference is not selected in the formula outline, the Follow and Back commands are unavailable. When you choose Follow for a block reference, the Formula Composer goes to the first cell in the block; for example, if you choose Follow for the block A:A1..C4, the Formula Composer goes to cell A:A1.

See Also

Formula Composer QuickMenu Commands


Working in the @Function Pane

When you type an @function--for example, @SUM--in the Expression edit field of the Formula Composer, the right side of the dialog box changes to the @function pane. The @function pane works like Quattro Pro's Experts; it provides an alternative method to entering @functions, and displays helpful information about the @function and its arguments.

The upper part of the @function pane provides a description of the @function with some examples of its use. The lower part of the @function pane provides entry fields for the @function arguments.

For further help about an @function displayed in the @function pane, click the @Functions Help button.

Tip:	For a short description of each @function argument, click the label to the left of the argument. The description also indicates if an argument is optional or required. If you enter a value for an optional argument, you must also enter values for all preceding optional arguments.

In the arguments section of the @function pane there are three buttons that help you enter each argument:

To nest an @function in the formula, click the @Functions button. A dialog box appears that lets you select an @function from several categories.

To insert a block name in the formula, click the down arrow and select a block name from the drop-down list.

To insert a cell or block reference, click the Point Mode button. When you click the Point Mode button, the Formula Composer dialog box shrinks to show only its title bar until you make a selection.

See Also

Using @Functions


Nesting @Functions in the Formula Composer

When you nest @functions, the @function pane always displays the selected @function from the formula outline. For example, the following @function formula contains a nested @AVG @function:

@ROUND(@AVG(C14..F24),2)

To edit the @AVG @function in the @function pane of the Formula Composer, select the @AVG expression in the formula outline.

See Also

Nesting @Functions

Working in the Outline Pane


Using the Calculator

Use the Formula Composer's calculator to perform calculations within a formula. To display the calculator in the right pane of the Formula Composer dialog box, select an expression in the outline that is either an operator (for example, a plus or minus sign) or an operand (a value, cell reference, or block name, but not an @function).

The calculator contains the following buttons:

Button	Description

CE	Clears the expression.

(	Inserts a left parenthesis.

)	Inserts a right parenthesis.

Inserts an @SQRT function, which returns the square root of the selected value.

x^2	Inserts "^2", which squares the selected value.

0,1,2,...9	Inserts the corresponding digit.

,x,+,-	Inserts the corresponding arithmetic operator.

Inserts an @SUM function, which returns the sum of values.

%	Inserts a percent sign, which turns the selected value into a percentage.

1/x	Inserts "1/", which returns the recipricol of the selected value.

+/-	Changes the sign of the expression.

Inserts a decimal point.

=	Calculates the formula in the expression field.

Note:	The default action of the calculator is to insert the operator or number at the insertion point in the Expression edit field. To replace an expression, select it first and then use the calculator.

See Also

Types of Operators

Using Operators in Formulas

Using Values in Formulas


Using Files

These topics describe how to work with files in Quattro Pro:

Opening, Saving, and Closing Files

File-Handling Options

Loading Files

Creating a New File

Opening a File

Saving Files

Closing Files

Using Passwords

Assigning a Password to a File

Using a Password At Startup

Using Notebook Templates and Workspaces

Using Notebook Templates

Creating a New QuickTemplate

Using Workspaces


File Handling Options
File-Handling Options

Whether you are saving or loading a file, commands that operate on files require the name of a file to work on. When you choose one of these commands, you will see a dialog box with the options described below.

If the file name you want is already displayed, double-click it. To display file names in other drives or directories, use these controls:

Directories

Highlights the current directory. The driv eor directory that contains the current directory appears above it; any subdirectories are listed below it. To change to a different directory, double-click a directory "folder".

Drives

Lets you switch to another drive. Click the arrow at the right of the box and click the drive name you want to switch to.

File Types

For File|Save and File|Open, List Files of Type controls the file names that are listed in the File name list box above it. Initially, the dialog box is set to display all files with any extension beginning with .W, but you can choose another popular file type by clicking the arrow and choosing a type from the list.

Important: For File|Save As, Save File as Type controls the file format. Regardless of the file name and extension you enter, the file is saved in the selected format.

File Name

Lets you choose the file to be saved or loaded, either by typing it in the edit field or clicking it from the list below. You can also control the types of files displayed using DOS wildcards, as explained later. For this version of Quattro Pro, the default file extension for notebooks is .WB2.

Protection Password

Lets you enter a password to protect your notebook from unauthorized use. This option is only available in the File|Save As dialog box. If you have not set a password level in the notebook Object Inspector, entering a password here sets the level to High. For more information on password levels, see Assigning a Password to a File.

About Directories

When you first open the dialog box, it displays files in the startup directory. The startup directory is initially the directory from which you start Quattro Pro, but you can change it with the Directory option in the application File Options property.

If you save or load a file in a directory other than the startup directory, this last-used directory becomes the default directory. Then the next time you choose a command to save or load a file, the default directory initially appears in the dialog box. The last-used directory is always the default directory displayed until you restart Quattro Pro, when the startup directory again appears.

About Wildcards

You can use DOS wildcard characters (* and ?) in any part of the File Name edit field to limit the files displayed. For instance, *.PRN lists all files with the extension .PRN, and BUDGET9?.WB2 lists all notebooks that begin with BUDGET9 followed by one character before the .WB2 extension. An asterisk causes Quattro Pro to look for any number of characters in its position; a question mark stands for any single character in its position.

About Read-Only Files

If you are working on a network and the file you are trying to open or retrieve has already been opened by another user, you will view a Read-only prompt. You can choose to open the file with read-only rights (able to save it under a different name) or cancel the operation.

About Alternate File Handling Dialog Boxes

If you have installed Quattro Pro as part of Corel WordPerfect Suite, you will see a different dialog box when you use File|Open or File|Save As in Quattro Pro. The buttons on the right side of the dialog box offer many helpful file handling features

Tip:	If you prefer to use the original Quattro Pro file handling dialog boxes, see Using WordPerfect or Quattro Pro File Dialog Boxes.

You will also see an alternate dialog box if you are using a document managing system that is compliant with the Open Document Management API (ODMA) standard.

See Also

File Menu

Setting File Options

Using Files


Loading Files

Saving a notebook writes it to a file. You can redisplay it anytime by loading the file into a window. You can also load files created with other notebook programs; Quattro Pro translates them automatically.

These File menu commands open a window or load a file into a window:

New creates a new, blank notebook window or a notebook based on a QuickTemplate, overlaying existing windows (see Creating a New File for details).

Open creates a new window and loads the file you specify into it, overlaying existing windows (see Opening a File for details).

Note:	Although Quattro Pro has other types of windows (graph windows and dialog box windows), notebook windows are the ones loaded, created, and saved with the File commands.

See Also

Closing Files

Saving Files

Using Files


Creating a New File

To create a new notebook window without closing the active notebook, use File|New or click the New button [image] on the Toolbar.

Use File|New to create a blank notebook or one based on a template.

Use the New button to create a new, blank notebook.

If you use File|New, the New File dialog box appears. Click Plain Notebook to create a new, blank notebook, or click From QuickTemplate to create a notebook based on a selected QuickTemplate. See Using Notebook Templates for details.

Note:	If the Enable QuickTemplates option in the application File Options property is unchecked, QuickTemplates are not available when you choose File|New; instead, a new, blank notebook appears (see Enabling QuickTemplates).

The new notebook, which overlays existing windows, is named NOTEBK#.WB2, where # is the number of windows you have opened since starting Quattro Pro. You can change the name when you save the file.

You can have multiple windows open at a time, with different notebooks in each. Each new window overlays other open windows. You can reselect an open window by clicking any visible part of it, or by selecting it from the list at the bottom of the Window menu.

Saving a notebook writes it to a file (see Saving Files). Once a file is saved, you can close it without losing data.

To save part of a notebook as a separate file, use Notebook|Extract. See Extracting Part of a Notebook.

See Also

Using Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Opening a File

To work with another existing notebook without putting away the active notebook window, use File|Open:

1.	Choose File|Open or click the Open button [image] on the Toolbar.

2.	Choose the file name you want.

3.	If the file has a password, a dialog box appears with space for entering it. Type the password and choose OK.

If the password is incorrect, Quattro Pro displays an error message and cancels the Open command.

Automatically Opening a File

When you start Quattro Pro, a blank notebook appears. However, if you have specified an autoload file, this file is opened automatically. This feature lets you immediately display the notebook you use most often.

An autoload file is a notebook specified with the Autoload File option of the File Options property in the application Object Inspector (see Opening a File at Startup for more information). Initially, this default is QUATTRO.WB2, and any notebook with that name in the startup directory is opened automatically if no other is specified. You can change this default to any file you like.

If you use a template (a notebook you created with the characteristics you use most often), you can display it automatically instead of a blank notebook. For more information, see Creating a New QuickTemplate.

Opening from the Command Line

You can start Windows and Quattro Pro and open a notebook all at the same time.

To load a specific notebook, type WIN C:\OFFICE\QPW\QPW (depending on the directory in which you installed Quattro Pro), followed by a space and the name of the file you want to open. There is no need to type the notebook's file-name extension unless it differs from the default extension (which is .WB2), or if you are translating a file from another program. For example, to load the BUDGET.WB2 file from the current directory, type the following from the DOS prompt:

WIN C:\OFFICE\QPW\QPW BUDGET

To load a file from a directory other than the current directory, include the path name with the file name. For example,

WIN C:\OFFICE\QPW\QPW C:\COMPANY\BUDGET

If Quattro Pro cannot find the directory or the file you specify, it opens a new notebook by that name.

You can also load a file and Quattro Pro at the same time using Program Manager's Run command. For example, in the Run dialog box, type

C:\OFFICE\QPW\QPW BUDGET

See Also

File-Handling Options

Translating Files

Using Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Using Workspaces


Saving Files

There are two commands that save notebooks to disk:

Save saves the notebook to the name under which you last saved it. If the notebook has not yet been saved, choosing Save opens the same dialog box used by Save As. You can also use the Save button [image] on the Toolbar to save notebook files.

Save As saves the notebook under a new name you specify.

If you are using Save with a notebook for the first time, or if you use Save As, the Save File dialog box appears:

1.	Choose File|Save As.

2.	Enter the file name you want, as described in File-Handling Options.

3.	Set the Save File As Type option to the type of file you want to save. The default file type is QPW v6 (*.WB2). Regardless of the file name and extension you enter, the file is saved in the selected format.

4.	Choose OK.

5.	If the file name you enter already exists, Quattro Pro warns you and gives you these options:

Replace overwrites the existing file.

Cancel stops the command and returns you to the notebook.

Quattro Pro saves the notebook, storing the data along with all its properties. Quattro Pro also saves any named blocks, graphs, slide shows, and dialog boxes you have created. You can also protect the file with a password (see Assigning a Password to a File for details).

After you name a notebook, you can store changes to it with File|Save. Quattro Pro assumes you want to save the file under the same name.

To save a notebook for use with another program, such as Paradox, dBASE, Reflex, or 1-2-3, include the programs data file extension when you save the notebook and be sure the File Type field is set to the appropriate type (see Translating Files for more information).

Like all legal DOS file names, Quattro Pro file names can be up to eight characters long and can consist of both letters and numbers. You can enter file names using either uppercase or lowercase letters. You cannot use spaces in a file name. However, you can use the underscore character to simulate spaces; for example, 92_SALES.

Caution: If you assign a name longer than eight characters, Quattro Pro shortens it to the first eight characters.

Unless you are saving a file for use with another program, it is best if you do not include an extension with the file name. Quattro Pro then adds the default extension, initially .WB2. (To change the default extension, see Setting the File Extension for more information.)

See Also

Using Files

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Assigning a Password to a File

A notebook property lets you set security limits so only password holders can view formulas, show hidden notebooks, or open an entire notebook.

To apply password protection,

1.	Right-click the notebook title bar to display the active notebook Object Inspector. Then choose Password Level.

2.	Check Low, Medium, or High and click OK. The box at the bottom of the Object Inspector pane summarizes each option. See Protection Options for details.

3.	The Enter Password dialog box appears. Type a password and click OK. You are prompted to type the password again for verification.

4.	When you click OK, Quattro Pro compares both entries and only accepts the password if both are identical.

Passwords are case-sensitive. For example, if the second password entry has a lowercase letter where the first entry had a capital, Quattro Pro considers these different passwords.

Caution: Be sure to write down the password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose it, you are locked out of part or all of the protected notebook.

Once you save and close a notebook with Low or Medium password protection, Password Level is no longer available in the notebook Object Inspector. Then, only password holders can change or remove this protection. For access information, see Using a Password at Startup.

See Also

Using Files


Protection Options

The Password Protection Level pane offers these Password Protection Level options:

None	Requires no password to open and use the notebook.

Low	Requires a password to view formulas in the notebook.

Medium	Requires a password to show the notebook and view formulas in it.

High	Requires a password to open the notebook. This option is suitable for most purposes.

See Also

Assigning a Password to a File


Low Protection

If Low is checked, anyone can open the notebook, but only password holders can view and edit formulas (see Using a Password at Startup for details). Other users see values instead of formulas. Selected formula cells show asterisks (*****) in the input line.

As usual, entering data into formula cells overwrites the original formulas. If you plan to assign Low or Medium protection to a notebook, it is wise to protect formula cells first or shade them so they are easily distinguishable from data cells.

See Also

Protection Options


Medium Protection

If Password Protection Level is set to Medium, the notebook is always hidden once it is saved and closed. Then, only password holders can show it again. All the features of Low protection apply as well. See Using a Password at Startup for information on showing hidden notebooks with Medium protection.

See Also

Protection Options


High Protection

With Password Protection Level set to High, only password holders can open the notebook. You are prompted for the password following any command that attempts to load the protected file. Remember, you must enter the assigned password in the same combination of lowercase and capital letters as the original entry. You can also open the notebook with a startup command (see Using a Password at Startup for details).

Once the notebook is open, you can hide and show it or edit its formulas without restriction. You can also change the password protection level.

See Also

Protection Options


Using a Password At Startup

If you need to edit formulas or password settings in a notebook with Low or Medium password protection, exit Quattro Pro, then start it again with a special startup command. Choose File|Run in the Program Manager, then enter this in the Command Line edit field and click OK:

   path\QPW filename /Spassword

For example, if Quattro Pro is in C:\OFFICE\QPW, you could enter this command line to open MYFILE.WB2 in subdirectory DATA with password SESAME:

   C:\OFFICE\QPW\QPW C:\OFFICE\QPW\DATA\MYFILE.WB2 /SSESAME

If MYFILE.WB2 had Medium password protection, you could choose Window|Show to display it again.

See Also

Assigning a Password to a File


Using Notebook Templates

A template is a notebook file you can save to serve as a basis for other notebooks. Templates are handy to use for spreadsheets whose data changes regularly (for example, monthly budgets, expense reports, and invoices), but whose format and formulas remain the same. Use templates to simplify the task of creating and formatting notebooks.

QuickTemplates

A QuickTemplate is a predesigned notebook template you can use to serve as the basis for a new notebook when you choose File|New. Many of the QuickTemplates that come with Quattro Pro provide the formatting and structural skeleton for common spreadsheets and data entry forms used in business and at home. You can create your own customized QuickTemplates.

Using QuickTemplates

To create a new notebook based on a QuickTemplate,

1.	Choose File|New. The New File dialog box appears.

2.	Click From QuickTemplate, then select a template from the QuickTemplates list. To create a new QuickTemplate, select QuickTemplate Builder; see Creating a New QuickTemplate for details.

3.	Choose OK to create a new notebook based on the QuickTemplate.

Note:	If the Enable QuickTemplates option in the application File Options property is unchecked, QuickTemplates are not available when you choose File|New; instead, a new, blank notebook appears (see Enabling QuickTemplates).

Using the Template Tools Toolbar

The QuickTemplates have a secondary Toolbar named Template Tools, which help you enter, print, save, clear, and highlight data. For information about the tools on the Template Tools Toolbar, click the Tips button, then click Toolbar Utilities.

See Also

Creating a New File

Saving Files


Creating a New QuickTemplate

To create a new QuickTemplate,

1.	Choose File|New. The New File dialog box appears.

2.	Click From QuickTemplate, then select QuickTemplate Builder from the QuickTemplates list.

3.	Choose OK to create a new QuickTemplate.

4.	Click the Instructions page tab of the new QuickTemplate. The Instructions page describes the 5 step process of creating a fully functional QuickTemplate:

Modify the Custom page of the QuickTemplate by adding text, formulas, and formatting.

Use the Store feature to give your new template a version name.

Configure the Highlight feature by naming data-entry cells.

Optionally, customize Tips messages to suit your QuickTemplate.

Add your QuickTemplate to the template list in File|New.

Creating Simple Templates

You can also create simple templates that don't use the Store, Recall, Highlight, and Tips features of the Template Tools Toolbar. Create your notebook template with the text, formulas, and formatting you prefer. Erase any nonstandard data you've entered (using Edit|Clear Values), and save the notebook to the \TEMPLATE subdirectory. To display the new template in the QuickTemplates list in the New File dialog box, edit a text file named TEMPLATE.INI in the \TEMPLATE subdirectory using any text editor that saves ASCII text files (like Notepad). Enter the new template using the following syntax:

Filename=Name,Description

Save the TEMPLATE.INI file. The next time you start Quattro Pro, the new template appears in the QuickTemplates list when you choose File|New.

Tip:	The list of QuickTemplates in the New File dialog box appears in the order in which they are listed in the TEMPLATE.INI file. You can arrange the QuickTemplates in TEMPLATE.INI in a way that's convenient for you. For example, if you use a QuickTemplate frequently, you might want to place it at the top of the list.

See Also

Creating a New File

Enabling QuickTemplates

Saving Files

Using Notebook Templates


Closing Files

When you close a file, you remove the notebook, all its associated graph and dialog windows, and all its views (created with Window|New View) from the desktop. To close files,

1.	Choose File|Close.

2.	If a notebook has unsaved changes, a dialog box appears asking you if you want to save your changes. To save the file first then close, choose Yes. Choose No to close the file without saving it.

3.	Quattro Pro closes the window, revealing any windows underneath.

To close all windows and exit Quattro Pro at the same time, choose File|Exit.

To close a particular window (without closing related views), choose Close from the window's Control menu or press Ctrl+F4.

See Also

File|Close

File|Exit

Saving Files

Using Files


Using Workspaces

The arrangement of windows onscreen is called a workspace. It includes the position and size of all notebook windows and the names of the files contained in each window. The positions of graph and dialog windows are not saved as part of a workspace.

To save a workspace,

1.	Choose File|Workspace|Save.

2.	Enter the file name you want, as described in File-Handling Options. Do not include a file-name extension; Quattro Pro includes the .WBS extension for workspace files.

Caution: Saving a workspace does not save the contents of the files within it; use File|Save or Save As for this. Also, if you use File|Save As, you must use File|Workspace|Save afterward so that Quattro Pro can load the correct file the next time you try to retrieve the workspace.

To retrieve a workspace,

1.	Choose File|Workspace|Restore.

2.	Choose the file you want from the list, or type in a name and choose OK.

Quattro Pro overlays any existing windows with the windows stored in the workspace file, then retrieves the appropriate file for each.

Quattro Pro always retrieves the latest saved version of files when you retrieve a workspace. If you leave the workspace and save a file included in the workspace, Quattro Pro retrieves the updated version of the file the next time you choose File|Workspace|Restore.

See Also

Saving Files

Using Files


Browsing in the Consolidator

Use this dialog box to choose a block in another file to use in a consolidation.

If the file name you want is already displayed, double-click it. To display file names in other drives or directories, use these controls:

Directories	Displays the startup directory below the directory or drive containing it and above its subdirectories. To change to a different directory, double-click it.

Drives	Lets you switch to another drive. Click the arrow at the right of the box and double-click the drive name you want to switch to.

File Types	Controls the file names that are listed above it. Initially, the dialog box is set to display all files with a .WB2 extension, but you can choose another popular file type by clicking the arrow and choosing a type from the list. To choose a file type not in the Files Type listed, replace the current entry in the File name input box at the top of the dialog box.

File Name	The file containing the source block you want to use in the consolidation. You can control the types of files displayed using DOS wildcards, as explained later.

Block	The source block for the consolidation.

You can use DOS wildcard characters (* and ?) in any part of the File Name edit field to limit the files displayed. An asterisk causes Quattro Pro to look for any number of characters in its position; a question mark stands for any single character in its position.

Note: If you are working on a network and the file you are trying to open or retrieve has already been opened by another user, you will view a Read-only prompt. You can choose to open the file with read-only rights (able to save it under a different name) or cancel the operation.

See Also

Using the Consolidator


Global Properties

Global properties include the properties that affect the entire Quattro Pro application and properties associated with each notebook.

Changing Global Properties

Application Properties

Setting Display Options

Setting International Options

Setting Macro and Menu Options

Setting File Options

Setting General Options

Active Notebook Properties

Hiding Parts of the Notebook Display

Setting the Zoom Factor

Setting Recalculation Options

Changing the Notebook Color Palette

Making a Notebook a Macro Library

Assigning a Password to a File

Creating System Notebooks


Changing Global Properties

Global properties include the properties that affect the entire Quattro Pro application and properties associated with each notebook.

Application properties (those of Quattro Pro itself) include various display, international, macro, file, and general options.

Use notebook properties to control the display of parts of a notebook, reduce or enlarge notebook display, set recalculation options, change the palette of default colors, make a notebook a macro library, change the notebook password level, or create a system notebook.

You can change the Quattro Pro application or notebook properties by right-clicking or by clicking Property in the Property Band and choosing a property.

To change Quattro Pro application properties, do one of the following:

Right-click the application title bar.

Choose Property|Application in the Property band.

To change notebook properties, first select the notebook by choosing it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of the window. Then do one of the following:

Right-click the notebook title bar.

Choose Property|Active Notebook in the Property band.


Setting Display Options

The Display property sets clock display options, shows or hides portions of the Quattro Pro window, and switches between 3-D syntax schemes.

To change a Display property setting, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar (or choose Property|Application in the Property band) then choose Display. Change the settings you prefer and choose OK.

Setting Clock Display

Hiding Parts of the Window

Switching the Page Range Syntax


Setting Clock Display

The Clock Display option displays the date and time on the status line in your choice of formats.

By default, None is selected--the clock does not display. To display the date and time, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar. Display is already selected. Then choose Standard or International.

Standard displays the date and time in standard format (DD-MMM-YY and HH:MM AM/PM); International displays date and time in the formats specified with the International property.

If the time or date displayed is incorrect, update your computer's internal clock using the Windows Control Panel.

See Also

International Property


Hiding Parts of the Window

To allow more space in the Quattro Pro window, you can hide the Toolbar, Property Band,, status line, input line, or scroll indicators. You can also choose not to show balloon hints when you point at a Toolbar button.

To hide any of these features, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose Display (or choose View|Display in the menu bar), then uncheck it in the Display Options group. After you choose OK, the parts you unchecked disappear.

To show a hidden feature, follow the same procedure but check it instead.

Show Toolbar controls only the main Toolbar at the top of each window. See Saving a Toolbar Arrangement for information on hiding and showing secondary and custom Toolbars.

See Also

Notebook Display Property


Switching Page Range Syntax

Quattro Pro provides two ways to refer to a 3-D block in a formula. The default method uses page notation for cell references. The page references are expressed first, followed by a colon and the block coordinates. For instance,

A..C:B4..D9

refers to the block B4..D9 on pages A, B, and C.

An alternative 3-D syntax is available that refers to each corner of the block with the page reference included. For instance,

A:B4..C:D9

refers to the same block in the alternative syntax.

The default syntax makes group references more concise. For example, a reference to 1stQtr:A1..A10 in the default syntax would switch to January:A1..March:A10 in the alternative syntax.

You can always type a 3-D reference in either syntax, but Quattro Pro displays the reference according to the setting in the 3-D syntax option.

To switch to the alternative syntax, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose Display (or choose View|Display in the menu bar), then choose the A..B:A1..B2 option. After you click to select a new cell, all existing 3-D references in formulas in open notebooks switch to the new syntax.

See Also

Grouping Notebook Pages


Setting International Options

The International property controls the appearance of currency, punctuation, dates, times, international characters, and negative values. It also lets you choose international sort orders. These options affect the appearance of values, how the date and time on the status line appear, how you enter arguments in @functions, and how certain international characters appear.

The initial defaults are standard for the United States. If you are using Quattro Pro in another country, or are doing business with another country, you can change these settings to suit your requirements.

To change an International property setting, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar (or choose Property|Application in the Property band) and choose International. Change the settings you prefer and choose OK.

Choosing Currency or Negative Symbols

Controlling Punctuation

Setting International Date Formats

Setting Time Formats

Changing the Sort Order

Converting LICS Characters


Choosing Currency or Negative Symbols

When you set the block Numeric Format to Currency or choose Currency or Currency0 in the Style list, Quattro Pro initially displays currency values with a dollar ($) sign preceding the number. Also, it initially indicates negative values by surrounding them with parentheses instead of preceding them with a minus sign. You can change these specific characteristics, or you can make the settings depend on a Windows setting.

To change the currency or negative symbol,

1.	Right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose International. Then select Currency in the Selection group.

2.	To make settings depend on the International Currency Format in the Windows Control Panel, select Windows Default in the Currency group. Otherwise, continue with the remaining Quattro Pro settings in steps 3 through 4.

3.	Select a country whose currency symbol you want to use. To change the currency symbol for a country (including whether the symbol is placed before or after values), click the Change button.

4.	In the Negative Values group, select Signed to precede negative values with a minus sign, or select Parens to surround them with parentheses.

When you set the block Numeric Format to Currency, you can use the default currency symbol or choose a currency symbol from a different country. This allows you to use multiple currencies in one notebook. See Setting Numeric Format.


Controlling Punctuation

Punctuation settings specify the characters used to

Separate thousands in numbers (for display only--usually a comma in North America)

Designate a decimal separator in numbers (usually a period in North America)

Separate arguments in @function statements and macro commands (usually a comma or semicolon)

By default, Quattro Pro uses commas as thousands separators, a period as a decimal separator, and a comma as an argument separator.

You can change to another combination of settings, or to Windows Default, which uses the International Number Format settings in the Windows Control Panel.

To change Punctuation settings, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, choose International, and select Punctuation in the Selection group. Then choose one of the alternative punctuation settings listed.

These options show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the decimal place, followed by the punctuation mark used to separate arguments in @functions and macros (a1,a2). The last four options specify that a blank space separates thousands in numbers.

Note:	Regardless of the punctuation setting, semicolons are always accepted as argument separators.


Setting International Date Formats

The International property's Date Format option does not directly determine how dates appear. Rather, it determines the international date formats given as options for date appearance. To set the actual appearance of dates, use the block Numeric Format property.

By default, Quattro Pro displays dates in long form as MM/DD/YY (06/18/92, for example) and in short form as MM/DD (06/18, for example).

You can change to another long and short form combination, or to Windows Default, which uses the International Date Format settings in the Windows Control Panel.

To change the setting, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose International. Then select Date Format in the Selection group, and choose one of the alternative formats.

Each of these options is shown in long and short versions. The short form is shown in parentheses. The format you choose here appears (in both long and short form) as a choice in the block Numeric Format property. Quattro Pro uses the long version of the format as the international clock setting (see Setting Clock Display for more information).

See Also

Block Numeric Format


Setting Time Formats

The International property's Time Format option determines the international time formats given as options for time display. To set the actual appearance of times, use the block Numeric Format property.

By default, Quattro Pro displays times in long form as HH:MM:SS (09:32:30, for example) and in short form as HH:MM (09:32, for example).

You can change to another long and short form combination, or you can choose Windows Default, which uses the International Time Format settings in the Windows Control Panel.

To change the setting, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose International. Then select Time Format in the Selection group, and choose one of the alternative formats.

Each of these options is shown in its long and short versions. The format you choose here appears (in both long and short form) as a choice in the block Numeric Format property. Quattro Pro uses the long version of the format as the international clock setting (see Setting Clock Display for more information).

See Also

Block Numeric Format


Changing the Sort Order

If you use data written in languages other than American English, you can tailor Quattro Pro's sort order to match that language.

By default, the Language setting is Windows Default, which makes Quattro Pro use sort rules as specified by the International Language setting (or, in the case of Windows 3.0, the International Country setting) in the Windows Control Panel.

To change sort order to that of a different language:

1.	Right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose International.

2.	Then select Language in the Selection group.

3.	Choose Quattro Pro in the Language group, and choose one of the languages from the list.

Note:	Quattro Pro may sort international characters in a slightly different order than products such as Paradox, dBASE, and Database Desktop do. Windows supports a richer character set than DOS products, so the results of sort operations in these products may be slightly different.

See Also

Sorting Data


Converting LICS Characters

Quattro Pro provides a way to access Lotus International Character Set (LICS) characters from 1-2-3 .WK1 spreadsheets. To convert these characters into standard ANSI characters, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose International. Then check LICS in the Conversion group. When you save the file, Quattro Pro writes these characters back to the LICS equivalents.

LICS characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except in the range 128 through 255, which is usually used for international and graphics characters. For more on LICS characters, see the 1-2-3 documentation.

See Also

Translating Files


Setting Macro and Menu Options

With Macro property settings, you can control what the screen displays as macros are running. You can also make alternative menu systems available thorugh the use of the slash key and specify a macro to run when a notebook is opened.

To change a Macro property setting, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar (or choose Property|Application in the Property band) then choose Macro. Change the settings you prefer and choose OK.

Controlling Macro Redrawing

Using Alternative Menu Systems

Running a Macro When a File Opens


Controlling Macro Redrawing

The Macro Suppress-Redraw settings control which parts of the screen redraw while macros are running. The default setting, Both, suppresses redrawing of both notebook windows and panels (menus and dialog boxes), including the status line and the input line, until the macro is finished. This speeds up macros, since Quattro Pro does not have to stop and draw each of these items used in the macro.

To change screen redrawing, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose Macro. In the Macro Suppress-Redraw group, choose one of these options:

Panel suppresses redrawing of menus, dialog boxes, the status line, and the input line.

Window suppresses redrawing of windows only.

None redraws everything during macros.

See Also

Macros


Using Alternative Menu Systems

Instead of using commands from the menu bar, you can run Quattro Pro for Windows using an alternative menu system. The Slash Key setting controls which menu system displays when you press the slash key (/) from Ready mode. For example, you can use Quattro Pro - DOS or 1-2-3 (release 2.01) menus.

To use one of the alternate menu systems, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, choose Macro, and choose the menu system name from Slash Key options.

After you click OK, you can press the slash key to open menus in the chosen menu system. Then choose the commands that appear. You can also replace the menu bar with your own custom menu system. See Building Menus for information.

See Also

1-2-3 Macros

DOS Spreadsheet Users

Macros

Quattro Pro for DOS Macros


Running a Macro When a File Opens

Every time you load a notebook, Quattro Pro looks in it for a macro named _NBSTARTMACRO and runs it, if found. If that macro is not found, Quattro Pro looks for the name entered in the Startup Macro option in the application Macro property. If it exists, that macro runs immediately. By default, \0 is the startup macro.

To make another macro run automatically instead, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose Macro. Then enter the new name for the Startup Macro edit field.

To run a startup macro every time you start Quattro Pro, include it in the notebook named in the Autoload File option; see Opening a File at Startup. You can also create macros that run when you close a notebook or start Quattro Pro; see Startup and Exit Macros.


Setting File Options

The File Options property includes information that is used every time you start Quattro Pro.

To change a File Options property setting, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar (or choose Property|Application in the Property band) then choose File Options. Change the settings you prefer and choose OK.

Setting the Default Directory

Opening a File at Startup

Setting the File Extension

Creating Temporary Backup Files

Enabling Full Path Titles

Using WordPerfect or Quattro Pro File Dialog Boxes

Enabling QuickTemplates


Setting the Default Directory

The default directory is the drive and directory initially displayed when you open any command to save or load a file at the beginning of a Quattro Pro session. You should make this the directory where you keep most of your notebook files.

When you first start Quattro Pro, the default directory is the drive and directory from which you started Quattro Pro.

To specify a new default directory, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose File Options. Then, in the Directory edit field enter the path, including the drive letter, of the new default directory.

When you save or load a file in another directory, the last-used directory becomes the default directory for the duration of the Quattro Pro session.

See Also

File Handling Options

Setting File Options


Opening a File at Startup

Each time you start Quattro Pro it looks for a file named QUATTRO.WB2 and loads it if it exists.

To make another file open automatically instead, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose File Options. Then enter the new file name in the Autoload File edit field. If the file is not in the default directory specified in the Directory option (just above Autoload File), include the full path name of the file.

You can also automatically open a notebook file if you start Quattro Pro with the Run command from the Windows Program Manager; see Opening a File for details.

See Also

Running a Macro Automatically

Setting File Options


Setting the File Extension

If you do not specify a file-name extension when saving or accessing files, .WB2 is used.

To specify a different default extension, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose File Options. Then enter one to three letters in the File Extension edit field.

See Also

File Handling Options

Setting File Options


Creating Temporary Backup Files

To help prevent data loss, you can set Quattro Pro to save a temporary backup file periodically. Then, in the event of a power failure or other unexpected disruption, you can recover work that might otherwise be lost.

To activate this backup feature, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose File Options. Then, set a time interval under Auto-backup Time (from 1 to 59 minutes) and check Activate. For example, if you set the time to 5 and check Activate, Quattro Pro saves the active notebook to a temporary backup file every 5 minutes.

If you exit Quattro Pro unexpectedly with Auto-backup activated, you will be prompted to recover any open files the next time you start Quattro Pro.

See Also

Setting File Options


Enabling Full Path Titles

You can assign the same name to more than one notebook, as long as they are in separate directories. This can be confusing unless you show the directory path in the title bar for each notebook.

To show full directory paths in title bars, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose File Options. Then, check Enable Full Path Titles. When you click OK, full paths appear.

See Also

Setting File Options


Using WordPerfect or Quattro Pro File Dialog Boxes

By default, if you have certain applications such as WordPerfect or GroupWise installed on your system, you see alternate file-handling dialog boxes when you use File|Open or File|Save As. These WordPerfect-style dialog boxes have convenient features for locating files, but if you prefer to use the original Quattro Pro dialog boxes you can restore them with one of the File Options application property settings.

To use Quattro Pro file dialog boxes, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar (or choose Application in the Property list on the Property Band), and choose File Options in the property list. Uncheck WordPerfect File Dialogs. To restore the WordPerfect-style dialog boxes, check that setting again.

See Also

File Handling Options

Setting File Options


Enabling QuickTemplates

When QuickTemplates are enabled, you can use File|New to create a new notebook based on a predesigned notebook template. To enable QuickTemplates, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose File Options. Then, check Enable QuickTemplates (it's checked by default).

To disable QuickTemplates, uncheck Enable QuickTemplates. When QuickTemplates are disabled, File|New creates a new, blank notebook without letting you choose a template.

See Also

Setting File Options

Using Notebook Templates


Setting General Options

The General applications property enables Undo, determines key behavior, saves the current Toolbar arrangement, and sets Drag and Drop delay time.

To change a General property setting, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar (or choose Property|Application in the Property band) then choose General. Change the settings you prefer and choose OK.

Enabling the Undo Command

Changing Key Compatibility

Setting Cell Selector Behavior

Saving a Toolbar Arrangement

Setting Drag and Drop Delay Time


Enabling the Undo Command

When you want to reverse the effects of the last operation you perform, you can choose Edit|Undo. Most operations are reversed immediately.

You can always undo the following actions whether Undo is enabled or not:

Entering data into a cell.

Changing any properties except Block or Page property settings.

Changes to the Move, Align, Resize, ResizeToSame, and Create controls in graphic elements or dialog boxes you create.

Changes to a graph type or graph title.

Importing or exporting bitmaps into either a floating object or a graphic element.

To enable Undo for all other types of undoable actions, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar, and choose General. Then choose Undo Enabled.

See Also

Undoing Mistakes


Changing Key Compatibility

By default, certain keys work in ways that take the most advantage of Windows capabilities. For example:

When editing a cell, the Up and Down keys move the insertion point between lines in a multiline entry (instead of completing the entry and moving the selector to the adjacent cell).

When editing a cell, the Ctrl+Left and Ctrl+Right keys move the insertion point to the beginning of the previous or next word, respectively (instead of moving the insertion point five characters to the left or right).

In selected blocks, Enter moves the selector to the next row and Tab moves it to the next column; Shift+Enter moves up a row, while Shift+Tab moves back one column.

With one cell selected, Tab and Shift+Tab work like the Left and Right keys.

After you display the list of @functions (with the @Functions button), macros (with the Macros button), or block names (with F3), you can type a letter to highlight the first item in the list beginning with that letter (instead of having that item entered immediately in the input line). For example, in the @functions list with the All category selected, typing F highlights FACT, and typing V highlights VALUE.

By changing the Compatible Keys setting, you can edit entries in the input line using keys described in Editing Entries and Edit Mode Keys. These keys are compatible with Quattro Pro for DOS.

To produce this compatibility, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose General. Then check Compatible Keys.

See Also

Setting Cell Selector Behavior


Setting Cell Selector Behavior

Normally, the selector does not move when you enter data from the input line into a single cell. If you are entering data in one column at a time, you can set Quattro Pro so the selector moves down a row each time you press Enter.

To set Quattro Pro for columnar data entry, right-click the Quattro Pro title bar and choose General. Then, check Move Cell Selector On Enter Key. Before you can change this setting, Compatible Keys--the setting above it--must be unchecked.

See Also

Changing Key Compatibility


Saving a Toolbar Arrangement

A standard Toolbar appears at the top of each Quattro Pro window. You can remove that Toolbar with View|Display or the Display property in the application Object Inspector; see Hiding Parts of the Window. You can add and remove other (secondary) Toolbars with the Property Band or Toolbar Control menu.

To save the current Toolbar arrangement as the default,

1.	Right-click the Quattro Pro application title bar.

2.	Choose General in the application Object Inspector, then check Save Toolbars On Exit.

3.	Choose OK.

With this setting checked, all Toolbars onscreen when you exit will appear in the same order the next time you start Quattro Pro.

See Also

Opening and Closing Toolbars

Toolbar Control Menu


Setting Drag and Drop Delay Time

When you use Drag and Drop to move cells and blocks, you select one or more cells, then click in the selected block and wait until a hand icon and blue outline appear. At that point, Drag and Drop is activated and you can move or copy the selected block. If the activation interval is too fast or slow, you can adjust it.

To change the Drag and Drop delay time,

1.	Right-click the Quattro Pro application title bar.

2.	Choose General in the application Object Inspector, and enter a new interval time in milliseconds in the Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time edit field.

3.	Choose OK.

The default interval for Cell Drag And Drop Delay Time is 500 ms.

See Also

Dragging and Dropping


Hiding Parts of the Notebook Display

You can use the notebook Display property to hide scroll bars, page tabs, or floating objects.

Hiding Scroll Bars or Page Tabs

To allow more space in a notebook window, or to create a special presentation notebook, you may want to temporarily hide the scroll bars or the page tabs.

To hide scroll bars or tabs, right-click the notebook title bar and choose Display. Then uncheck Vertical Scroll Bar, Horizontal Scroll Bar, or Page Tabs. After you choose OK, the scroll bars and/or page tabs disappear.

To restore them, right-click the notebook title bar, choose Display and check the items you want redisplayed.

Hiding Floating Objects

Floating objects (such as graphs, OLE objects,, drawn objects, and bitmaps) can slow down the scrolling of a notebook page. Each time you scroll, the floating object must be redrawn.

To improve scrolling of a notebook page, you can hide floating objects or show only their outline. Right-click the notebook title bar and choose Display. In the Object group, select Show Outline to show the outline of floating objects or Hide to hide them.

To restore floating objects, right-click the notebook title bar, choose Display and select Show All in the Objects group.

See Also

Hiding Parts of the Wiindow


Setting the Zoom Factor

See Zooming In or Out for details on how to reduce or enlarge the displayed size of cells on a page with View|Zoom or the Zoom Factor page property. These features let you pull back to see a whole printed page, or focus in on the detail of a few cells.

To change the size of the cell display for an entire notebook, choose View|Zoom and adjust the Zoom Factor setting. The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer. In the Apply To group, select Notebook to apply the zoom setting to the entire notebook.

Note:	The Zoom Factor setting does not affect printed output; use the Scaling option in the File|Page Setup dialog box to scale printed documents (see Changing Print Size for details).


Setting Recalculation Options

Recalculation refers to how Quattro Pro updates formula results when you change values those formulas depend on. If you need to change the way recalculation works, right-click the notebook title bar. Recalc Settings is already selected.

Setting Recalculation Mode

Setting Recalculation Order

Limiting Recalculation Iterations

Compiling Formulas to save memory and boost recalculation speed for certain types of notebooks.

Displaying Error Sources in Cells to display the source of ERR and NA values in cells.


Setting Recalculation Mode

Recalculation time is minimized by Quattro Pro's method of intelligent recalculation, which recalculates only those formulas that need to be recalculated.

Quattro Pro's default recalculation mode is Background, which recalculates formulas between keystrokes. It does not interrupt your work and recalculates automatically. Quattro Pro always finishes recalculation before saving, extracting, or printing the notebook.

To choose one of the other two modes of recalculation, right-click the notebook title bar and choose Recalc Settings. Then choose one of these options:

Automatic, which also recalculates formulas automatically, but pauses until recalculation is finished. Use Automatic if you have complex formulas that Background calculation does not handle fast enough.

Manual, which recalculates the formulas you enter or edit, but does not recalculate the entire notebook until you press F9. For example, if you enter +B3-C16 in a cell, Quattro Pro displays the resulting value, but the value is not updated if the values in B3 or C16 change. If a formula needs to be recalculated,  CALC appears on the status line to remind you that the displayed results of formulas may not be accurate. Press F9 to recalculate all formulas.

Either Background or Automatic is the recommended mode; both ensure that your data is always accurate. Manual mode is appropriate as a temporary break from recalculation while you adjust crucial cells in large notebooks that take a long time to recalculate.

In Manual mode, floating graphs do not adjust automatically; press F9 to replot after supporting values change. To recalculate a single cell in Manual mode, select the cell, press F2, then press Enter. (This works only if the formula is not dependent on other formulas.)

In Background mode, when you want to pause your work in the notebook to finish recalculation in the background, press F9.

See Also

Limiting Recalculation Iterations

Setting Recalculation Order


Setting Recalculation Order

By default, Quattro Pro recalculates data in Natural order. This means that cells are calculated in dependency order. Formulas without dependencies are calculated first, followed by formulas that depend on them.

To change recalculation order, right-click the notebook title bar and choose Recalc Settings. Then choose one of these options:

Column-wise starts recalculation in cell A1 of the first page and proceeds down column A, ignoring formulas in other columns. When A is finished, recalculation continues in B1, and on down column B. This continues to the end of the page (column IV), and on to the last page in the notebook.

Row-wise also starts recalculation in cell A1, but proceeds by rows, starting at 1 and continuing through row 8192, through to the last page.

Note:	If you specify Column-wise or Row-wise order of recalculation, you should set the number of iterations to at least two (see Limiting Recalculation Iterations). Otherwise, the notebook may be inaccurate.

Column-wise and Row-wise recalculation are provided for special purposes, such as for a series of formulas that create circular references to solve a problem or attain a goal. If you are not trying to solve problems such as these, use Natural recalculation order.

See Also

Setting Recalculation Mode


Limiting Recalculation Iterations

Elaborate formulas, such as those involving complicated engineering problems, require multiple evaluations to attain an acceptable degree of accuracy. These formulas are deliberately constructed to contain circular references, references that eventually refer back to the original formula. For such applications, you can set the number of iterations, or cycles of recalculation, to be performed when the notebook is recalculated.

To change number of iterations, right-click the notebook title bar and choose Recalc Settings. Then enter any number up to 255 for the # of Iterations option.

If the notebook contains no circular references and recalculation order is set to Natural, the iteration count is ignored.

Note:	Before constructing elaborate formulas requiring limited iterations, see if Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer or Solve For can find solutions to your problems.

See Also

Creating Formulas

Finding Solutions with Optimizer

Goal-seeking with Solve For

Setting Recalculation Mode

Setting Recalculation Order


Compiling Formulas

If you work with large notebooks containing many numerical formulas, using compiled formulas can often boost recalculation speed. For maximum performance gains, you need a system with a numeric coprocessor (387 or 486) and an extra megabyte of RAM available for calculations.

To use compiled formulas, right-click the notebook title bar to display the active notebook Object Inspector. Choose Recalc Settings and check Compile Formulas near the bottom of the window.

With this setting checked, recalculations can be slower initially while formulas are compiled; they can be up to 100 to 200 percent faster afterwards.

Tip:	If you are uncertain about using compiled formulas, choose Help|Experts|Performance or click the Experts button, then click Performance Expert. The Performance Expert analyzes your hardware and how you use spreadsheet notebooks, then recommends a choice.

See Also

Experts


Displaying Error Sources in Cells

The Audit Errors option in the active notebook Object Inspector highlights the source of error for each cell containing NA or ERR. To use it,

1.	Right-click the notebook title bar to display the notebook Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Recalc Settings.

3.	In the Advanced group, check Audit Errors.

4.	Choose OK.

If necessary, use the Fit button [image] to adjust the width of columns containing asterisks (******).

Now, each problem cell displays the page and cell reference where the problem started. The notebook name is included if the cell is in another notebook.

See Also

Tracing Errors with GoTo


Changing the Notebook Color Palette

Many Quattro Pro controls use a color palette for changing colors. For example, you can change colors with the block Text Color and Shading properties. The contents of each color square on those palettes is determined by the notebook palette.

To change the notebook palette contents,

1.	Right-click the notebook title bar and choose Palette.

2.	Choose the color square you want to change and choose Edit Color (or just double-click the color square).

3.	Click the color square in the top part of the dialog box closest to the color you want to create, or use any one of the color models to create the exact color you want. For information on color models, see Creating Custom Color Palettes.

4.	Choose OK to install the new color into the notebook palette. Edit any other color squares, and choose OK when you are finished

The new color palette appears when you select other color controls in Quattro Pro.

Caution: Changing any color square in the notebook palette also changes any previous uses of that color square throughout the notebook. For example, if you set the Shading property for a cell with the color square that is initially set to red (the leftmost square in the second row of the palette) and later change the corresponding color square in the notebook palette to green, the shaded cell switches to green.

To return the notebook palette to the default Quattro Pro settings, right-click the notebook title bar, and choose Palette. Then choose Reset Defaults.


Making a Notebook a Macro Library

A macro library is convenient place to store frequently used macros. When you set a notebook's Macro Library property to Yes, Quattro Pro searches it when you try to run a macro that is not in the active notebook.

To make a notebook a macro library, right-click its title bar and choose Macro Library. Then choose Yes and choose OK.

See Also

Using Macro Libraries


Creating System Notebooks

If you are developing applications with Quattro Pro, you can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Quattro Pro is running. System notebooks are generally hidden from user view and access, and they stay open even when all standard notebooks are closed.

To designate a notebook as a system notebook,

1.	Right-click the notebook title bar to display the active notebook Object Inspector.

2.	Choose System, then set System Notebook to Yes.

3.	You will probably want to designate the notebook as a macro library, too. If so, choose Macro Library in the notebook Object Inspector and set the property to Yes.

4.	System notebooks are hidden from user view and access. Choose one of these methods to hide the notebook:

You can open the notebook in your application, then use Window|Hide to hide it. To use this method, click OK to close the active notebook Object Inspector and apply the new property settings. Then, follow the instructions in Hiding and Showing Windows to hide it in your application.

You can use the active notebook Password Level property (see Assigning a Password to a File for details). If you apply the Medium protection level, the notebook will be hidden each time it is opened without a password. Choose the appropriate password protection level, then click OK to close the active notebook Object Inspector and apply the new property settings.

If you are using a system notebook for macros, you will probably want to apply the Macro Library property, too.

Note:	The /File|Close All command, which is available if you have Quattro Pro for DOS menus enabled (see Using Alternative Menu Systems), closes all open notebooks (even hidden ones), but does not close system notebooks that are hidden.

See Also

Active Notebook

Using Macro Libraries

Window|Hide


Building Graphs

There are three basic methods for creating a graph:

Use the Graph Expert to create a graph directly on the spreadsheet (a floating graph), or in a graph window ready for editing.

Use the Graph tool [image] on the Main Toolbar to create a floating graph.

Use Graphics|New Graph to create a graph in its own window.

Click a topic below to learn more about graphs.

Getting Started with Graphs

Graph Basics

The Graph Window

The Objects Page

Creating Numeric Graphs

Using the Graph Expert

Creating a Floating Graph

Creating a Graph in a Window

How Series are Plotted

Choosing Graph Styles

Using the Graph Gallery

Graph Gallery Categories

Graph Color Schemes

Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors

Assigning a Graph Type

Choosing a Graph Type

2-D Graphs

3-D Graphs

Rotated Graphs

Combination Graphs

Multiple Graphs

Bullet Charts

Blank Graphs

Changing the Graph Type

Choosing Data Series

Rearranging Data Series

Adding a Series

Graphing Grouped or Linked Data

Deleting a Series

Adjusting Legend and X-Axis Series

Editing, Saving, Deleting, and Copying Graphs

Adding Titles to the Graph

Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points

Saving Graphs

Editing Graphs

Renaming Graphs

Deleting Graphs

Copying Graphs Within a Notebook

Copying Graphs Between Notebooks

Copying Graphs Using Drag and Drop

Inserting an Existing Graph on a Page

Moving and Resizing Floating Graphs

Building Bullet Charts and Blank Graphs

Creating Bullet Charts

Creating a Blank Graph

See Also

Analytical Graphing

Customizing Graph Properties

Enhancing Graphs

Printing Graphs


Graph Basics

Using graphs to analyze your data is faster and easier than examining the data cell-by-cell. A graph presents a set of data as a picture. It may uncover a trouble spot, display a trend, or illustrate a correlation between categories of data in your notebook.

A single graph can appear in three places in Quattro Pro: as a floating graph on the spreadsheet page, in a separate graph window, and as an icon on the Objects page.

Create a floating graph directly on the spreadsheet page when you want to view or print your graph on the same page as your data. To enhance the floating graph, double-click it to edit the graph on the spreadsheet.

Create a graph in a graph window when you want the graph to appear in a slide show or on a printed page, but not on the spreadsheet. The Graph Toolbar has tools you use to add text boxes, draw objects, or import graphic elements such as pictures and logos. You can also customize all parts of the graph using Object Inspector menus.

Each time you create a graph, an icon appears on the Objects page to represent the new graph. The Objects page is always the last page of the notebook. To quickly display it, click the SpeedTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window. (When you have finished, you can click it again to return to the page you left.)

Click a topic below to learn about building graphs.

Creating a Floating Graph.

Creating a Graph in a Window

Creating a Blank Graph


The Graph Window

To bring a graph into a graph window for editing, use one of these methods:

Right-click the floating graph on a spreadsheet page, and choose Open from the QuickMenu.

Double-click the graph icon on the Objects page.

Choose Graphics|Edit Graph anywhere in the notebook, select the graph name from the list that appears, and choose OK.

Create a new graph in a window; see Creating a Graph in a Window. You can then inspect its properties immediately.

You can also edit a floating graph directly on a notebook page instead of in a graph window. See Editing Graphs.

From a graph window, the Tools menu lists the commands needed to arrange graphics, such as Align, Group, Ungroup, and Object Order. The Tools menu also has Tools|Import Graphics and Tools|Export Graphics commands for exchanging graphics files with other applications.

The Graph Toolbar

The Graph Toolbar includes a set of quick-access tools and buttons:

The Cut button [image], Copy button [image], and Paste button [image] transfer objects to and from the Windows Clipboard.

The Import button [image] provides quick access to importing a file.

The Selection Tool [image] switches to selection mode after you finish using a drawing tool.

The Text tool [image] creates text boxes.

The following drawing tools create shapes:

Line tool

Arrow tool

Polyline tool

Freehand Polyline tool

Polygon tool

Rectangle tool

Rounded Rectangle tool

Ellipse tool

Freehand Polygon tool tool

To make drawing easier, maximize the graph window.

The graph window has properties for setting the aspect ratio and grid options; see Graph Window Properties.

To close a graph window, double-click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the window, or press Ctrl+F4.

See Also

Creating a Graph in a Window

Enhancing Graphs

The Objects Page


The Objects Page

The Objects page displays an icon for every graph and slide show in the notebook. It also displays icons for any custom dialog boxes you build. On the Objects page you can

cut and copy graph icons (to cut or copy graphs)

double-click a graph icon to edit a graph (or double-click any icon to edit its object)

rename a graph (see Renaming Graphs)

print a single graph, a group of graphs, or a slide show (see Printing Graphs)

use tools on the Toolbar to create graphs, slide shows, dialog boxes, and Toolbars

In addition to the standard Toolbar buttons, the Objects Toolbar has the following buttons:

 New Graph - Creates a graph in a window (equivalent to selecting Graphics|New Graph--see Creating a Graph in a Window).

 Create Slide Show - Creates new slide shows (see Creating Slide Shows).

 New Dialog - Builds a new dialog box (equivalent to Tools|UI Builder--see Creating Dialog Boxes).

 Run Slide Show - Runs the selected slide show, or displays a dialog box showing a list of slide shows to choose from (the button is equivalent to choosing Graphics|Run Slide Show--see Running a Slide Show).

The Objects page is always the last page of the notebook. To quickly display it, click the SpeedTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook window. When you have finished you can click it again to return to the page you left.


Using the Graph Expert

To create a graph with the Graph Expert,

1.	Select a block of numeric data to graph. If you want to use adjacent column and row labels as X-axis and legend labels, select them with the data.

2.	Click the Experts button [image] and choose Graph Expert, or choose Help|Experts|Graph.

3.	Your graph appears in the Expert window with any labels you selected. The initial graph type depends on the number of data points and the number of series (rows or columns) in the graph block.

4.	Follow the instructions in each Expert pane to experiment with graph types and enter titles. You can click the Tip and Help buttons for more information at any time.

5.	As you finish each step, click the Next Step button. Choose Previous Step to return to a previous Expert pane.

6.	When you reach step 5, check Notebook Page to create a floating graph in your spreadsheet. Check Graph Window to display the graph in a window, ready for editing.

7.	Click Create Graph to create the graph and close the Graph Expert.

Once the Graph Expert is closed, you can change the graph's type or customize it.


Creating a Floating Graph

To create a floating graph on a spreadsheet page,

1.	Select the block of data you want to plot. If surrounding cells contain explanatory labels you want to use as axis or legend labels, include them in the block selection.

2.	Click the Graph tool [image] in the Toolbar, then drag over the area of the spreadsheet page where you want to place the graph. (If you click the spreadsheet page--instead of dragging the mouse--Quattro Pro creates a floating graph of a default size.)

3.	Release the mouse button. A floating graph appears.

Use Graphics|Type to change the graph type.

Use Graphics|Series to add, delete, or rearrange the data series.

Use Graphics|Titles to add a main title, subtitle, and axis titles.

Double-click the floating graph to edit it on the spreadsheet. To edit the graph in a window, choose Graphics|Edit Graph, then select the floating graph you want to edit.

Right-click the floating graph and choose the Properties command to display floating graph properties, which include the color and style of the graph border.

To create a floating blank graph (to which you can add drawings and text) see Creating a Blank Graph for details.

See Also

Adding Titles to the Graph

Changing the Graph Type

Choosing a Graph Type

Customizing Graphs

Enhancing Graphs

How Series Are Plotted

Rearranging Data Series


Creating a Graph in a Window

Use the Graphics|New Graph command to create a graph directly in a window when you do not want the graph to appear on a spreadsheet page. A graph created in a window can be printed separately from the spreadsheet page, displayed in a slide show, and inserted on the spreadsheet as a floating graph later, if you want. You also get the opportunity to change or rearrange data series before you build the graph.

Graphics|New Graph is available from a spreadsheet page, from the Objects page, and when a graph window is active.

1.	Choose Graphics|New Graph. (If the Objects page is active, click the New Graph button [image] on the Toolbar, instead.) The Graph New dialog box appears.

2.	Enter a name for the graph in the Graph Name edit field. If you do not type a new name, Quattro Pro assigns the default name shown in the edit field.

3.	Assign data blocks to as many series as you want, including the X-Axis and Legend series. You can select a single cell, a contiguous block, or a noncontiguous block. Type the block coordinates in the series edit fields, or use the Point Mode button [image] to point to a block on the spreadsheet.

4.	Check Reverse Series or Row/Column Swap, if appropriate. For a complete description of these features, see Rearranging Data Series.

5.	Choose OK. A graph window opens and displays the new graph (its type depends on the number of data points and series you entered).

Creating a Fast Graph

You can also let Quattro Pro define the series for you. This procedure is similar to the Fast Graph command in Quattro Pro for DOS. To create a fast graph,

1.	Select the cells containing the data you want to plot, including any explanatory labels.

2.	Choose Graphics|New Graph. A dialog box appears.

3.	Enter a name for the graph. If you do not type a new name, Quattro Pro assigns the default name shown in the dialog box.

4.	Check the series assignments to be sure the data is plotted the way you want it.

5.	Choose OK. A graph window opens and displays the new graph (its type depends on the number of data points and series you entered).

See How Series Are Plotted to understand how a block of data is divided into series.

Once you create the graph, you can

Use Graphics|Graph Gallery to select a style and color scheme for one or more graphs (see Using the Graph Gallery).

Use Graphics|Type to change the graph type (see Changing the Graph Type for details).

Use Graphics|Titles to add a graph title, subtitle, and axis titles to the graph (see Adding Titles to the Graph for details).

Use Graphics|Series to change the way series are plotted (see Rearranging Data Series for details).

Change the properties of any part of the graph using Object Inspectors (see Customizing Graph Properties for details).

Use the tools on the Graph Toolbar to enhance the graph with drawings and text annotations (see Enhancing Graphs for details).

See Also

Choosing a Graph Type


How Series Are Plotted

The way Quattro Pro plots your data depends on the dimensions and contents of the block you select before you create the graph.

When a block contains more rows than columns, or when there are an equal number of rows and columns in the selected block,

Quattro Pro plots each column as a single series.

If the first series contains labels, the labels are placed along the x-axis. This column of labels is called the x-axis series.

If the first row contains labels, these labels are used in the graph legend. This row is called the legend series.

When a block contains more columns than rows,

Quattro Pro plots each row as a single series.

If the first row (the first series) contains labels, it automatically becomes the x-axis series.

If the first column contains labels, these labels become the legend series.

Caution: Blank columns and rows in the block of data can create a series of zero values that may throw off the graph. Delete them (or select the data as a non-contiguous block) before you create the graph.

If you select a noncontiguous block, Quattro Pro uses the dimensions of the first sub-block you select to determine whether to plot rows or columns. See Using Noncontiguous Blocks for a description of noncontiguous blocks, and how to select them.

If you select a 3-D block (a block from a spreadsheet page that is grouped to other pages), Quattro Pro starts the block with the row or column from the first page, then appends the corresponding blocks from succeeding pages to form the series. For example, if you select the block A..C:B3..D11, the first series is A..C:B3..B11, the second series is A..C:C3..C11, and the third series is A..C:D3..D11. For more information about 3-D blocks, see Using 3-D Blocks.

Pie graphs, doughnut graphs, column graphs, and 3-D area graphs plot negative numbers as positive values.

See Also

Rearranging Data Series


Using the Graph Gallery

The Graph Gallery is a collection of predesigned graph templates and color schemes that make formatting graphs easy. Instead of changing the properties of individual graph elements, you can quickly change the overall look of a graph using the Graph Gallery's visual tools. Use the Graph Gallery to format multiple graphs and slides, making them attractive and uniform-looking.

To choose a graph style and color scheme using the Graph Gallery,

1.	Select one or more graphs. You can use the Graph Gallery to format selected floating graphs, graph icons on the Objects page, a graph window, or graphs in the Light Table window of a slide show.

2.	Choose Graphics|Graph Gallery, or from a graph window click the Graph Gallery button [image]. If you selected a slide in the Light Table window, choose Slide Show|Graph Gallery. The Graph Gallery dialog box appears.

3.	Select a graph category, a style, and a color scheme. If you need help deciding on the right style for a graph or graph background, click the Advisor button. When you are finished making your selections, choose OK.

Note:	If you have multiple graphs selected when you choose Graphics|Graph Gallery, the graph that appears on the right side of the Graph Gallery dialog box is a picture of the first graph selected. Also, the Advisor button does not appear.

Selecting a Template for a Bullet Chart or Blank Graph

If you have a bullet chart or a blank graph selected when you choose Graphics|Graph Gallery, the Graph Gallery dialog box lets you select a template style for the graph. You can click the Advisor button to show suggested template styles based on stylistic criteria you specify.

See Also

Graph Gallery Categories

Graph Gallery Color Schemes

Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors


Graph Gallery Categories

The Graph Gallery offers six graph categories from which to select a graph style. Bar, Rotated Bar, Pie, Line or Area, and Specialty are categories for plotting numeric series. The Templates category provides different template styles used to format master slides and graphs.

Category	Description

Bar	Shows each series as a bar plotted against the y-axis scale (vertically). The taller the bar, the greater the value. When you plot more than one series, the bars appear side by side, so you can easily compare series.

Rotated Bar	Shows each series as a bar plotted against the x-axis scale (horizontally). You might use this category when you want to emphasize that values "move forward," rather than increase.

Pie	Plots a single series, and shows each value in the series as a percentage of the whole. Includes variations on a pie graph such as doughnut graphs and multiple pie graphs.

Line or Area	Line graphs plot series values as points, then connect the points in each series with a line. Area graphs plot cumulative rather than individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is plotted on top of the second, and so forth. Shows the progression of values over time--to track sales, for example.

Specialty	Includes graphs that mix two different graph types, such as Line-Bar and Area-Bar, and Radar graphs.

Templates	Displays a template used for a slide (such as a master slide in a slide show) or graph.

Some basic graph styles are equivalent to graph types. You can also choose Graphics|Type to change a graph type.

See Also

Choosing a Graph Type

Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors

Graph Gallery Color Schemes


Graph Gallery Color Schemes

The Graph Gallery color schemes apply colors to all elements of numeric graphs, including the background, graph pane, titles, text, legends, axis and series labels, graph walls, and series. If you select a Templates style in the Graph Gallery dialog box, or if the selected graph is a bullet chart or blank graph type, Color Scheme is unavailable. To select a graph style without using a color scheme, choose No Change for Color Scheme.

Tip:	You can also choose a color scheme for a graph from the Property Band. From a graph window or a floating graph activated for editing, click the third button from the left in the Property Band and choose a different color scheme.

If you want to change the color of individual graph elements, use the Palette Toolbar; for more information, see Using Color Palettes.

Note:	The graph color scheme does not affect the color of drawn objects, such as text boxes, lines, and shapes, that you add to a graph. To change the color of drawn objects, see Selecting Fill, Background, and Border Colors.

See Also

Graph Gallery Categories

Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors


Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors

The Graph Gallery offers Advisors, an alternative method for choosing a style for a graph or master slide in a slide show. The Advisors present a selection of styles that match the stylistic criteria you specify.

To choose a graph style using Advisors,

1.	Select one graph or master slide. If you select multiple graphs, the Advisor button does not appear in the Graph Gallery dialog box.

2.	Choose Graphics|Graph Gallery. If you selected a slide in the Light Table window, choose Slide Show|Graph Gallery. The Graph Gallery dialog box appears.

3.	Select a graph category, then click the Advisor button. The appropriate Advisor dialog box appears depending on which graph category you selected.

4.	Specify the constraints you want to use, then click the Advise button to generate a selection of suggested styles.

5.	Select one of the suggested styles, then choose Apply.

If you choose the Advisor button from the Graph Gallery dialog box, you leave the Graph Gallery. To return to the Graph Gallery, choose Apply or Cancel to close the Advisor dialog box, then choose Graphics|Graph Gallery.

See Also

Using the Graph Gallery

Graph Gallery Categories

Graph Gallery Color Schemes


Choosing a Graph Type

Quattro Pro builds many different graph types automatically. The type of graph you choose usually depends on the analysis you want to perform. Certain graphs are best suited for plotting certain types of data:

Bar graphs - compare values of different items at specific points in time--to contrast monthly commissions for each sales representative, for example.

Line graphs - show the progression of values over time--to track sales, for example.

Area graphs - show the relationship of each value to the total over time--how each sales representative contributed to total sales over a 12 month period, for example.

Stacked bar graphs - show the relationship of each value to the total--how total sales are divided between regions, for example. 100% stacked bar graphs show the percentage each series contributes to the total.

Comparison graphs - have lines connecting the boundaries between series. This makes it easier to compare series values or proportions from one bar to the next.

Pie or column graphs - compare individual values to other values and to the whole--how yearly expenses break down into categories, for example. Use them to focus on the individual values in a single series.

Doughnut graphs - like pie and column graphs, plot a single series with each value plotted as a percentage of the whole. You can add text or graphics to the interior "hole" with graph window drawing tools.

XY graphs - plot values in one series against those in another--to show the relationship between salary and length of employment, for example.

High-low graphs - illustrate the difference between corresponding values in two series. Though most often used in tracking daily stock prices, high-low graphs can be used whenever you want to compare the difference between pairs of values.

Surface graphs - plot rows and columns as intersecting lines on a surface that is suspended in a 3-D frame. Surface graphs are useful for plotting functions such as f(x) and f(x,y), and parametric curves (x(t), yt(t)).

Radar graphs - show x-axis values as imaginary lines radiating from a common center, like spokes of a wheel, with y-axis values plotted on each "spoke." They are useful for highlighting trends, depending on the shapes drawn by the plot lines, or simplifying series comparisons.

Bullet charts - show bulleted lists based on spreadsheet data. Bullet charts are often used in presentations and slide shows.

Blank graphs - show drawings and text instead of values. They are useful for slide shows and view graph presentations.

Each of the basic graphs can be drawn in various ways. Quattro Pro divides these variations, or graph types, into the following categories:

2-D Graphs

3-D Graphs

Rotated Graphs

Combination Graphs

Multiple Graphs, which plot each series as a separate sub-graph, are found under Combination (Combo) in the Graphics|Type dialog box, and in the graph setup and background Object Inspector.

Bullet Charts

Blank Graphs


2-D Graphs

2-D graphs (except pie, doughnut, and column graphs) position data relative to two scales: the x-axis and the y-axis. The x-axis is the horizontal line at the bottom of a graph. It shows progression of values and often represents time (days, weeks, quarters, and so on). The vertical line is the y-axis. Y-axis scale values, which serve as reference points for the placement of bars, lines, and markers on the graph, are determined by the data plotted in the graph.

XY graphs (often called scatter diagrams) plot values against two numeric scales. The x-axis scale is determined by the values in the x-axis series. (Unlike in most other graph types, where the x-axis series contains labels, the x-axis series in an XY graph contains numeric data.) The y-axis scale is determined by the values in all the other series.

2-D pie, doughnut, and column graphs do not have axes at all. Pie and doughnut graphs illustrate the values of a single series as slices in a circular whole. Column graphs also illustrate only a single series, and show values as sections of a column.

Quattro Pro offers the following 2-D graph types. To learn more about a graph type, click one of the following topics.

Bar Graphs

Line Graphs

Area Graphs

Pie and Column Graphs

Doughnut Graphs

XY Graphs

High-Low Graphs

Radar Graphs


3-D Graphs

3-D graphs (except pie, doughnut, and column graphs) plot multiple series against a background of two walls and a base. You can thicken the walls, or hide the base and walls, through the 3-D Options property in the graph setup and background Object Inspector (see Changing 3-D Options for details). The first series is plotted at the back of the graph, from left to right. Successive series are drawn, in order, in front of the first. Legend labels appear along the z-axis in most 3-D graphs.

You can adjust the viewpoint and the amount of perspective applied to these graphs with the 3-D View property in the graph setup and background Object Inspector. 3-D View also lets you control the height and depth of the graph. See Adjusting 3-D View for more information.

3-D pie, doughnut, and column graphs are drawn in perspective, and like their 2-D counterparts, they represent a single series. There are no axes or walls in these graphs, and 3-D view options are not available.

Quattro Pro offers these different 3-D graph types. To learn more about a graph type, click one of the following topics:

Bar Graphs

Line Graphs have 2 3-D versions, the 3-D Ribbon graph and the 3-D Floating Marker graph

Area Graphs

Pie and Column Graphs

Doughnut Graphs

Surface Graphs


Rotated Graphs

Rotated graphs are plotted with the axes reversed. The x-axis is the vertical axis, and the y-axis is the horizontal axis. Quattro Pro offers the following rotated graph types. To learn more about a graph type, click one of the following topics:

Bar Graphs

Line Graphs

Area Graphs


Combination Graphs

Combination graphs mix bars, lines, and areas in the same graph, to highlight a series or to provide a contrast between different series in the graph. Quattro Pro builds three combination graphs automatically:

	Line-Bar graphs plot the first series as a line, and plot all other series as bars.
	Area-Bar graphs plot the first series as an area, and plot all other series as bars.
	High Low-Bar graphs plot corresponding data points in the first four series as "bar and whisker" graphs to track daily stock prices; all other series are plotted as lines (see High-Low Graphs for more information).
You can create your own custom combination graphs by overriding the graph type for any series in 2-D bar, rotated bar, 2-D line, rotated line, and variance graphs (see Changing Graph Series Options for details).

See Also

Multiple Graphs


Multiple Graphs

Multiple graphs (found under Combo in the Graphics|Type dialog box) plot each series as a separate graph. You can graph as many series as you like--each part of the graph scales down in size to fit the entire graph on the screen or page.

Although it looks like several different graphs, a multiple graph is a single graph. When you change a property (the label font, for example) on one part of a multiple graph, all the other parts change accordingly. If you define a legend series, the legend label for each series becomes the "title" of the small graph that represents that series.

Quattro Pro offers these multiple graph types:

Bar Graphs include the Multiple Bar graph type

Pie and Column Graphs include Multiple 2-D Pie, Multiple 3-D Pie, Multiple 2-D Column and Multiple 3-D Column graphs

You can also create a multiple line graph or a multiple area graph by right-clicking any bar in a multiple bar graph, choosing the Properties command to display an Object Inspector, then overriding the graph type for the series with a line or area type (see Creating a Custom Combination Graph for details).

See Also

Combination Graphs


Bar Graphs

Bar graphs represent each value in a series as a bar. Values are plotted against the y-axis scale; the taller the bar, the greater the value. You can customize bar graph features such as bar width, bar margins, and bar colors, using the bar series Object Inspector. See Customizing Bar Graphs for more information.

	2-D Bar graphs show each series value as a bar plotted against the y-axis scale. When you plot more than one series, the bars appear side by side, providing a good comparison of corresponding values in different series.
	Variance graphs show how the values in each series deviate from the zero line, which is an arbitrary baseline you choose through the Scale property in the y-axis Object Inspector.
	Stacked Bar graphs plot the corresponding values of different series in vertical stacks, showing both the total reached by the combined values, and the way each value contributes to that total. The first series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order. Stacked Bar graphs may be 2-D or rotated 2-D.
	100% Stacked Bar graphs show the relationship of each value to the total by displaying the percentage of the total contributed by each series. They may be 2-D, rotated 2-D, 3-D, or rotated 3-D.
	Comparison graphs have lines connecting the boundaries between series. This makes it easier to compare series values or proportions from one bar to the next. They may be stacked bar or 100% stacked bar graphs, 2-D and 2-D rotated.
	3-D Stacked Bar graphs also show individual and cumulative values. The first series is plotted on the base of a three-dimensional grid; additional series are stacked on top. The 3-D Stacked Bar graph may also be rotated.
	3-D Bar graphs plot series as columns with square tops and bases on a three-dimensional grid. The first series is plotted across the front of the graph, from left to right. Bars that represent additional series are plotted, in order, in front of the first.
	2.5-D Bar graphs are similar to 3-D bar graphs, except the bars of all series are drawn next to each other (rather than in front of each other) on the three-dimensional grid. Each bar projects all the way to the back of the grid.
	Step graphs look similar to 3-D bar graphs, but adjacent bars touch, to emphasize the progression of values in the series. In this way, the step graph serves the same purpose as a 3-D unstacked area graph (see Area Graphs for details), but the steps give greater emphasis to individual values.
	Rotated Bar graphs plot values as horizontal bars. You might use this graph type instead of a standard bar graph when you want to emphasize that values "move forward," rather than increase. This is also a good bar graph choice if you have long x-axis labels.
	Rotated 3-D Bar graphs display series values as horizontal columns on a three-dimensional grid. The first series is plotted at the back of the graph, and additional series are drawn in front of the first. Unlike standard 3-D bar graphs, which display legend text along the z-axis, a rotated 3-D bar graph has a legend box.
	Rotated 2.5-D Bar graphs plot the values in each series as horizontal plates that project from the front to the back of a three-dimensional grid. The first value in the first series is plotted on the base of the graph, and corresponding values of additional series are layered on top, in order.
	Multiple Bar graphs plot each series in its own small bar graph, to provide side-by-side comparisons of different sets of data. Even though each series looks like a separate graph, a multiple bar graph is really one graph. Each unit displays the same y-axis scale, x-axis divisions, and so forth. Any changes to one graph unit are reflected in all the others. You can plot as many series as you like in a multiple bar graph, but the plot for each series gets smaller as you add new series.
To create a multiple line graph or multiple area graph, right-click any bar in a multiple bar graph, choose the Properties command to display an Object Inspector, then override the graph type for the series with a line or area type (see Creating a Custom Combination Graph for details).


Line Graphs

Line graph types plot series values as points, then connect the points in each series with a line. You can customize markers, line styles, and other properties using the line series Object Inspector (see Customizing Line Graphs for details).

	2-D Line graphs show how values change over time. Since it is so simple, the 2-D line graph is the easiest graph to read when there are many data series plotted.
	XY graphs (often called scatter diagrams) plot all series against the x-axis series, to display a correlation between series as a function of the x-axis data. XY Graphs describes how to create an XY graph.
	Ribbon graphs are essentially line graphs plotted on 3-D grids, with each line flattened out into a segmented ribbon. Ribbon graphs are good for showing trends over time, but individual points are less visible than on standard line graphs.
	Rotated Line graphs, like standard line graphs, show the pattern of values over time, but the x-axis and y-axis positions are reversed. The rotation leaves more room for long x-axis labels.
	3-D Floating Marker graphs use floating solid shapes (cubes, spheres, pyramids, diamonds, hexa-diamonds, or octa-diamonds) to plot a series against a 3-D grid. The 3-D Floating Marker graph clearly shows each point in a series, though the individual points are not connected as they are on a standard line graph.


Area Graphs

Area graphs (except 3-D unstacked area graphs) plot cumulative rather than individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is graphed on top of the second, and so forth. You can customize area graphs using the area series Object Inspector (see Customizing Area and Surface Graphs for more information).

	2-D Area graphs best show how each series affects the whole over time. Although only the first line plotted is an accurate pattern (a dip in a further series might appear as a rise if values beneath it are high), the size of the area corresponding to each series represents its contribution to the whole.
	3-D Area graphs are like 2-D area graphs, except series are plotted as three-dimensional areas inside a frame of two walls and a base.
	Rotated Area graphs reverse the x-axis and y-axis, so areas are stacked side-by-side. The width of an area indicates the series contribution to the whole.
	3-D Unstacked Area graphs plot actual series values, not cumulative values. The first series is plotted at the back of the graph; additional series are drawn in front of it. Like line graphs, 3-D unstacked area graphs are useful for showing changes over time.


Pie and Column Graphs

Pie and column graphs plot a single series. Each value is plotted as a percentage of the whole. You can change pie and column graph properties using Object Inspector menus (see Customizing Pie and Doughnut Graphs and Customizing Column Graphs for more information).

	Pie graphs plot each value in a series as a "slice" of the "pie."
	3-D Pie graphs have a thicker look for a more dramatic appearance, but otherwise are exactly like 2-D pie graphs.
	2-D Multiple Pie graphs display different data series as side-by-side pie graphs. Use this graph type to provide a comparison of how individual values in the series affect the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series.
	3-D Multiple Pie graphs display data a little more dramatically than the 2-D version, but you use them in the same way, to provide comparisons of how each value in a series affects the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series.
	Column graphs represent values as sections of a vertical rectangle. The first value in the series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order.
	3-D Column graphs plot series values as sections of a column. Like the 2-D version, 3-D column graphs plot series values from the bottom up.
	2-D Multiple Column graphs display each series as an individual column graph. Like multiple pie graphs, multiple column graphs provide a comparison of how individual values in the series affect the whole, and how these proportions change from series to series. In addition, the column arrangement leaves more room for labels.
	3-D Multiple Column graphs plot each series as individual 3-D column graphs. They have the same purpose as 2-D multiple column graphs.
	Doughnut graphs are like pie graphs with holes. For details, see Doughnut Graphs.


Surface Graphs

Surface graphs plot rows and columns as lines that form a "mesh" on a 3-D frame. When you graph a square array of spreadsheet cells, values in columns correspond to mesh lines from left to right. Rows of data correspond to mesh lines from front to back. Each data point is represented by an intersection of two mesh lines. The way the surface of the mesh is shaded depends on the type of surface graph (3-D Surface, 3-D Contour, or 3-D Shaded Surface) you choose.

	3-D Surface graphs shade the area between each series with a different color.
	3-D Contour graphs have shading that follows the grid lines, making it easy to compare points on the surface with values on the y-axis scale.
	3-D Shaded Surface graphs shade a single-colored surface as though a light is shining down from directly above the graph. Flat areas, where values are the same from series to series, or from one point to another in the same series, are lightest. Places where there are great differences between adjacent values have the darkest shading.
You can customize surfaces in these graph types using the area series Object Inspector (see Customizing Area and Surface Graphs for details).


XY Graphs

XY graphs plot data against two scaling axes. The x-axis scale is determined by the x-axis series, which in XY graphs contains numeric data, not text labels. The y-axis scale is calculated from the data in all the other series you plot.

Each series value is plotted as a pair of coordinates. The first coordinate is an x-axis series value. The second coordinate is the corresponding value in the series you are plotting.

The first coordinate determines where the data point is placed relative to the x-axis. The second coordinate gives the data point's position in relation to the y-axis.

To create an XY graph:

1.	On the spreadsheet page, select all series except the x-axis series (Quattro Pro will automatically designate an x-axis series only if the series contains labels). You can also select legend labels if you want.

2.	Choose Graphics|New Graph.

3.	To select the x-axis series, click the Point Mode button [image] to the right of the x-axis series edit field, point to a block on the spreadsheet, then press Enter.

4.	Choose OK.

XY graphs are useful for illustrating statistical trends. Graphing Frequency Distributions describes how to plot a frequency distribution using an XY graph.

Note:	If the x-axis series contains dates, the XY graph plots the data against the date serial number of each date.


High-Low Graphs

The usual purpose of high-low (open-close) graphs is to track daily stock prices. You need at least two series to create the graph (the two series represent the highest and lowest price a stock reached each day); to create a "bar and whisker" style high-low graph, you need at least four series (the two additional series represent the opening and closing prices for the stock each day).

If the high-low bar style is an I-beam, each I-beam corresponds to a pair of values in the first two series. The top of each I-beam shows the high value (the highest price the stock reached that day), and the bottom of the I-beam shows the low value (the lowest price of the day).

The way Quattro Pro plots additional series depends on how many series you assign to the graph.

When you plot only three series, the third series contains the close data (the price of the stock at the end of the business day). This data is shown as a tick mark to the right of the I-beam.

When you plot four series, the third series contains the open data (the price of the stock at the beginning of the day), and the fourth series contains the close data. Each open value is plotted as a tick mark to the left of the I-beam, and each close value is shown as a tick mark to the right of the I-beam.

When you plot more than four series in a high-low graph, the additional series are plotted as lines (as though they are part of a line graph).

To create a high-low graph,

1.	Choose Graphics|New Graph.

2.	Assign blocks to each series by pointing, then choose OK.

3.	Choose Graphics|Type.

4.	Choose 2-D.

5.	Choose the High-Low icon (the last icon in the first row), then choose OK.

Adding a volume series

A common use for the fifth series is to display the volume data, or number of shares of stock that changed hands that day. Volume data is usually much larger than high-low (open-close) data, so the high-low data does not show up well in the graph. The High Low-Bar graph has special formatting to deal with this problem. High Low-Bar graphs plot the first four series like regular high-low graphs. The fifth series, however, is plotted as bars against the secondary y-axis. The secondary y-axis scale is adjusted to plot the bars on the lower one-quarter of the graph, where the bars are unlikely to cover the high-low (open-close) values. To do this, Quattro Pro calculates the High and Increment values for the secondary Y-Axis then multiplies them by four (the Increment adjustment makes the scale less crowded.) To create a High Low-Bar graph with volume series:

1.	Choose Graphics|New Graph.

2.	Assign blocks to each series by pointing, then choose OK.

3.	Choose Graphics|Type.

4.	Choose Combo.

5.	Choose the High Low-Bar icon (the second icon in the first row), then choose OK.

You can change the volume series from bars to a line or area by overriding the graph type for the series (see Changing Graph Series Options for details).

High-Low Styles

Quattro Pro offers four different high-low styles:

Bar style (the default) give you a "bar and whisker" or "candle" graph. A line connects high and low values. A bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close, the bar is red. (Retain this light/dark relationship if you change fill colors).

I-Beam style shows high and low values at each end of an I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks, respectively.

Line style connects corresponding high and low values with a line, and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.

Marker style assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.

To change the style of your high-low graph:

1.	Right-click any high-low marker and choose the Properties command (this property is global, so you do not have to select a specific series). The bar series Object Inspector appears.

2.	Choose Hi-Lo Bar Style.

3.	Select a bar style, then choose OK.

Tip:	You can use the line series Object Inspector to give each marker in the Marker high-low bar style a different look. Change the graph type to line, right-click a series and choose the Properties command to display an Object Inspector, then change the marker style, weight, and appearance. When you are finished, change the graph type back to High-Low.


Doughnut Graphs

Like pie and column graphs, doughnut graphs plot a single series. Each value is plotted as a percentage of the whole. Doughnut graphs can be 2-D or 3-D. The only difference is that 3-D graphs have height as well as diameter. You can add use the drawing tools in the graph window to add graphics and text to the interior "hole."

To change doughnut graph properties, right-click any part of the graph and choose the Properties command to display its Object Inspector. As with pie graphs, you can "explode" any section.

See Also

Pie and Column Graphs


Radar Graphs

Radar graphs are circles with a line for each x-axis value extending from the center to the edge, like the spokes of a wheel. Y-axis values for each series are graphed on the spokes.

Radar graphs can highlight trends. Growth trends show as outward spirals; static or fluctuating values look more like circles or stars. Radar graphs can also simplify series comparisons; the series with the highest values occupies the most area.

To display a radar graph, choose Graphics|Type|2-D, then click the Radar button.

You can customize radar graph markers and lines. To change radar graph properties, right-click any part of the graph and choose the Properties command (or choose Property|Series|series number in the Property Band) to display an Object Inspector.

See Also

Customizing Line Graphs

Line Graphs


Bullet Charts

Bullet charts, like numeric graphs are based on spreadsheet data, but use labels instead of numeric values. A bullet chart uses a two- or three-column block of labels to create a chart consisting of bulleted items. Bullet charts are often used in presentations and slide shows.

You can use the Slide Show Expert to create multiple bullet charts for a slide show; see Using the Slide Show Expert for details.

See Also

Creating Bullet Charts


Blank Graphs

Blank graphs are not based on spreadsheet data; they are empty graphs that serve as the foundation for text and pictures you add using the tools on the Graph Toolbar. See Creating a Blank Graph.

Boxed text can create interesting effects on a solid-colored background. To create text, see Creating Text Boxes in a Graph. To change the properties of text and text boxes, see Changing Text Properties.

You can also use imported graphics to enhance a blank graph. See Importing Graphics for instructions.


Changing the Graph Type

When you create a graph, Quattro Pro chooses a graph type depending on the number of series and points in your data block. Certain graphs are best suited for plotting certain types of data. To change the graph type:

1.	Choose Graphics|Type to display the Graph Types dialog box.

2.	Click a graph category from the list at the left: 2-D, 3-D, Rotate, Combo, Bullet, or Blank. Then, click an icon to choose a graph type from that category. The name of the graph type you select appears below the graph icons.

3.	Choose OK. Quattro Pro rebuilds your graph using the new graph type.

You can also change the graph type from the graph setup and background Object Inspector:

1.	Activate a graph for editing (double-click a floating graph on a spreadsheet or a graph icon on the Objects page). See Editing Graphs.

2.	Right-click the graph background and choose the Properties command or choose Property|Graph Setup in the Property Band. Graph Type options are displayed when the graph setup and background Object Inspector appears.

3.	Click a graph category from the list, then click an icon to choose a graph type from that category. The name of the graph type you select appears below the graph icons.

4.	Choose OK. Quattro Pro rebuilds your graph using the new graph type.


Rearranging Data Series

The Graphics|Series command lets you change how data is plotted in the graph. To use this command, select the graph, then choose Graphics|Series. The Graphics|Series dialog box has these features:

Edit fields (X-Axis, Legend, 1st, 2nd, and so on) display the block coordinates of the series. A series block can be a single cell, a contiguous block, or a noncontiguous block. Type the block coordinates in the series edit fields, or use the Point Mode button [image] to point to a block on the spreadsheet. (You can also double-click an edit field to activate Point mode.

Add and Delete buttons let you insert a series after the selected series, or remove the selected series.

Reverse series plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order to plot the first series last. This feature is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked area graphs, for example, when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the graph, obscuring other series.

Row/column swap plots columns as series when the series you have selected are rows, and plots rows as series when the series you have selected are columns. Row/column swap also puts x-axis series labels in the legend, and places legend series labels along the x-axis.

To assign a data block to a series:

1.	Select the graph, then choose Graphics|Series.

2.	Click the Point Mode button to the right of a series edit field or double-click the edit field. The graph and the dialog box move behind the spreadsheet. The current block coordinates for the series are highlighted on the spreadsheet.

3.	Drag the mouse to select the block. To select a noncontiguous block, hold down the Ctrl key as you select the parts of the block.

4.	To return to the dialog box, click the maximize arrow in the dialog box title bar (which appears over the Toolbar), or press Enter.

5.	Change as many series assignments as you want, then choose OK.

See Also

Adding a Series

Deleting a Series

Graphing Grouped or Linked Data


Adding a Series

To add a new series to a new or existing graph,

1.	Choose Graphics|New Graph or Graphics|Series.

2.	Select the series you want to precede the new series.

3.	Choose Add. The new series is added after the selected series. If no series is selected (or if the x-axis series or legend series is selected), the series you add becomes the last one in the graph.

Once you create the series, you can assign a block by pointing, or by typing block coordinates into the series edit field.

Adding a new first series

The Graphics|New Graph and Graphics|Series commands give you complete control over what is plotted in the graph. You can plot rows, columns, and noncontiguous blocks in a single graph (or in a single series). But since a new series is always added after the selected series, you have to do a little rearranging to add a new first series:

1.	Select the current first series.

2.	Choose Add. A new, blank series is added after the first series.

3.	Enter the block coordinates currently assigned to the first series into the edit field for this new second series. (The first and second series should now have the same data block coordinates.)

4.	Choose new data for the first series, either by pointing to a block, or by deleting the old block coordinates and typing in the new.

Adding series through the Clipboard

In the graph window, you can also add one or more series directly to a graph by cutting and pasting data through the Clipboard.

1.	On the spreadsheet page, select the block you want to assign to the series.

2.	Click the Copy button [image].

3.	Use Graphics|Edit Graph to display the graph in the graph window.

4.	Select the insertion point for the series:

To insert the new series after an existing series, select the bar, line, or area that represents the series.

To add the block as the first series in the graph, select the graph pane (the area bounded by the x-axis and y-axis).

To add the block as the x-axis series, select the x-axis. (This method is especially useful for adding a numeric x-axis series to an XY graph.)

5.	Click the Paste button [image].

The new series are always plotted to match the existing row/column arrangement of the graph. For example, if you copy a row of four cells to the Clipboard, then paste it into a bar graph where columns are plotted as series, you will see four new bars plotted at the first x-axis division, because you have just added four new series, of one value each, to the graph.

Adding series to a floating graph using Drag and Drop

You can add one or more series directly to a floating graph using the Drag and Drop feature. Select a block, place the mouse pointer anywhere in the block, then hold down the mouse button, and wait till the mouse pointer changes to a hand. Drag the block over a floating graph; when the pointer moves over the graph, it changes from a hand to a graph with a plus symbol. Release the mouse button while the pointer is over the floating graph to add the series to the graph.

Caution: If you "drop" the series while the mouse pointer is not over a floating graph, you move the block.

See Also

Adjusting the Legend and X-Axis Series

Graphing Grouped or Linked Data


Graphing Grouped or Linked Data

When you assign a 3-D block to a series, Quattro Pro starts the block with the row or column from the first page, then appends the corresponding blocks from succeeding pages to form the series. For example, if you select the block A:B3..C:B5, the series has 9 values, in this order: A:B3, A:B4, A:B5, B:B3, B:B4, B:B5, C:B3, C:B4 and C:B5. See Using 3-D Blocks for details.

When a graph appears in one notebook, and some or all of the data for the graph is located in another notebook, the graph is linked to the data. To assign data located in a different notebook to a series, either type the block coordinates in the form [Notebookname]Pagename:Block Reference, or assign blocks by pointing.

This is one method for managing windows as you point to blocks in different notebooks:

1.	Open all the notebooks that contain data you need for the graph; close all notebooks you do not need. (This makes it easier to see the data you do need.)

2.	Click the notebook where you want to place the graph, to make its window the active window.

3.	Choose Graphics|New Graph.

4.	Choose a series button, then point to a block of data and press Enter to define the series. To switch notebooks, choose a notebook from the Window menu, or use Ctrl + F6 to cycle through the notebooks.

5.	Choose OK when you have finished assigning blocks to series.

Each time you open a notebook, Quattro Pro checks whether all notebooks that provide data for its graphs are open. If they are not, a dialog box with three options, Open Supporting, Update References, and None, appears. See Loading Supporting Data for an explanation of these options.


Deleting a Series

To delete a series from a graph,

1.	Choose Graphics|Series.

2.	Click the edit field to select the series.

3.	Choose Delete, then choose OK.

In a graph window or a floating graph activated for editing, you can also select a bar, area, or line directly on the graph, then click the Cut button [image] on the Toolbar or press the Del key to delete the series.

See Also

Adjusting the Legend and X-Axis Series


Adjusting the Legend and X-Axis Series

When you add or delete a data series, the legend series (if one is defined) does not change automatically. If you insert a new series into the graph, or delete a series from the graph, you also have to insert or delete an entry in the appropriate position in the legend series. The easiest way to do this is to delete the old legend series and define a new one:

1.	Choose Graphics|Series.

2.	Click the Legend button to activate point mode.

3.	While holding down the Ctrl key, point to the legend label for each series, in order.

4.	Choose OK.

You can also enter legend label text (or label cell coordinates) for individual series through the series Object Inspector (see Overriding a Legend Label for details).

Note:	You do not have to change the x-axis series when you add another series to the graph. Additional series just add another bar, line marker, or area boundary point at each x-axis division. If you see new x-axis divisions without labels after you add a series, it means the new series has a greater number of data points than the other series in the graph. Select the series again, and assign a block that has the correct number of values.


Adding Titles to the Graph

The Graphics|Titles command creates a title and subtitle for any numeric graph type, but not for bullet charts and blank graphs. This command can also place titles on the graph axes. On 2-D graphs, you can add titles for the x-axis, the primary y-axis (the left, or Y1 axis) and for a secondary y-axis (the right, or Y2 axis). 3-D graphs will not display secondary y-axis titles.

To add titles to a graph,

1.	Select the graph.

2.	Choose Graphics|Titles.

3.	Enter text in the appropriate edit fields, and choose OK.

You can reference a cell containing text in a title edit field. Instead of title text, type the cell reference preceded by a backslash (\). For example, entering \G8 in a title edit field displays the text in G8 as the title. You can use @STRING and other string @functions with numeric formulas to create dynamic titles that change along with your data. For example, the following formula in G8 creates a string that displays the average of cells C5..C9 after the equal sign:

+"Five-Year Mileage Average = "&@STRING(@AVG(C5..C9),0)

Tip:	If your y-axis scale labels are greater than 1000, you can use the Show Units option to simplify the scale and add an appropriate title--"(thousands)" for example--between the y-axis title and the axis itself. Show Units is one of the Scale property options in the y-axis Object Inspector.

You can change the font, color, or other properties of the Graph Title and Graph Subtitle through their Object Inspectors. You can edit the main title and subtitle text directly on the graph, or change the title or subtitle in the edit fields of the Graphics|Titles dialog box.

You must edit axis title text in the Graphics|Titles dialog box, or in the Axis Title Object Inspector. This Object Inspector also lets you change the font, color, and other properties of axis titles.


Adding Labels to Bars and Data Points

A label series places labels on the bars, markers, or data points that represent each value in a series.

To define a label series,

1.	Enter a series of labels into a block on the spreadsheet, if suitable labels do not already exist.

2.	Right-click the bar, line, or area that represents the series and choose the Properties command. The Series Options property is automatically selected.

3.	Click the Point Mode button [image] to the right of the Label Series edit field, then point to the block on the spreadsheet page that contains the labels and press Enter.

4.	Choose OK. (You can also type the block coordinates directly into the edit field, then choose OK.)

The block you specify as the label series can contain text or data. For example, if you assign the same block to the data series and the label series of a bar graph, Quattro Pro places a label that shows the actual data value over each bar in the series.

To change the properties of these labels, see Series Label. To delete labels, delete the label series.


Saving Graphs

When you save a notebook, Quattro Pro automatically saves every graph you have created in that notebook. To see these graphs, click the SpeedTab button [image] at the bottom of the notebook page to turn to the Objects page, or choose View|Objects Page.

Caution: Many Quattro Pro graphics features are supported only in Quattro Pro version 6.0. To avoid losing formatting and other features, save the notebook in Quattro Pro version 6 file format. In the Save File dialog box, the Save File As Type option should read, QPW v6 (*.WB2).

See Also

Deleting Graphs

Renaming Graphs

Selecting Graphs for Editing


Renaming Graphs

When you create a new graph in a window, you can either accept the default name Quattro Pro assigns, or enter a new one. When you create floating graphs, Quattro Pro automatically gives them the default names of Graph1, Graph2, and so on, according to the order in which they are created in the notebook. If you rename the graph, to give it a more descriptive name, it is easier to find the graph in dialog box lists and on the Objects page.

You can rename a graph only from the Objects page. To change the graph name,

1.	Click the SpeedTab button [image] to display the Objects page.

2.	Right-click the icon of the graph you want to rename. Then, choose Icon Properties|Name.

3.	Type the new name in the dialog box that appears, and choose OK.

See Also

The Objects Page


Editing Graphs

You can use Graphics menu commands to change the graph type, add graph titles, rearrange the data series, and view the selected graph full-screen. To change other features, use Object Inspectors

Before you can edit a graph using any method, you must select it. On a spreadsheet page, select the floating graph by clicking it. On the Objects page, select a graph by clicking its icon.

To edit a floating graph directly on a spreadsheet page instead of in a graph window, double-click it, or right-click the floating graph and choose Edit from the QuickMenu. A blue, hatched border appears around the floating graph to indicate that you can change its properties or enhance it with drawings and text.

When you edit a floating graph on a spreadsheet page, graph window properties are still available. The graph window properties let you control the proportion of width to height and whether to display a grid while editing--the grid is helpful for aligning graph objects. To change graph window properties for a floating graph you are editing, choose Properties|Graph Window in the Property Band.

Note:	When you double-click a floating graph that is only partially visible in the notebook window, the window scrolls automatically to display the entire graph. If the floating graph cannot fit in the window, Quattro Pro opens it for editing in a graph window. If a source graph on the Objects page is already opened in a graph window, when you double-click the related floating graph Quattro Pro switches to the graph window.

You can also edit graphs in a graph window; see The Graph Window.


Deleting Graphs

To delete a graph, choose Graphics|Delete Graph, select the graph name from the list that appears, and choose OK. If you have the Objects page selected, you can choose an icon, then click the Cut button [image] on the Toolbar or press Delete to delete the graph.

If you select a floating graph, then click the Cut button on the Toolbar, the graph is erased from the spreadsheet. If there are no other copies of the floating graph other than the source graph on the Objects page, you will be prompted whether you want to delete the source graph too.

See Also

Renaming Graphs

Saving Graphs

Selecting Graphs for Editing


Copying Graphs Within a Notebook

There are three ways to copy a graph within a notebook: use the Drag and Drop feature (see Copying Graphs Using Drag and Drop), use the Windows Clipboard, or copy and paste a selection of graph attributes using the Copy and Paste Special commands.

Copying Graphs Using the Clipboard

To copy a graph through the Windows Clipboard,

1.	Select the graph.

In the graph window, choose Edit|Select All or use the Selection tool [image] in the Graph Toolbar to select all graph objects.

On a spreadsheet page or the Objects page, click the floating graph or graph icon. (All graph objects are selected automatically.)

2.	Click the Copy button [image] on the Toolbar, or choose Edit|Copy.

4.	Select the page where you want to paste the graph.

To place the copy as a floating graph on a spreadsheet page, select the page.

If you want the graph to appear only in a window and on the Objects page, click the SpeedTab button [image] to display the Objects page. (You cannot paste a graph directly into a graph window.)

5.	Click the Paste button [image], or choose Edit|Paste.

Copying Selected Attributes of a Graph

The Edit|Paste Special command lets you copy the attributes of a graph, including the style, data, and annotation objects, from one graph to another. You can use the Paste Special command to copy some or all attributes of a graph template to several graphs at a time.

Note:	The destination graph for the Paste Special command must be an existing graph; you cannot use Paste Special to create a new graph.

To copy and paste selected graph attributes,

1.	Select a floating graph or a graph in a window. This graph is the source of the style, data, and annotation objects you choose to copy. If you select a graph in a window, choose Edit|Select All to select the entire graph.

2.	Click the Copy button [image] in the Toolbar, or choose Edit|Copy.

3.	Select one or more floating graphs or one graph in a window.

4.	Choose Edit|Paste Special. The Paste Special Graph dialog box appears.

5.	Check any combination of items to copy. To omit an item from the procedure, uncheck it. When you are done, choose OK.

Style	copies the graph type, and series override types. For example, if you choose a dotted line style for the y-axis grid, remove the box around the legend, and plot the fourth series on a secondary y-axis, all these changes are transferred to the target graph when you copy the style.

Positions	copies the position of all graph objects.

Titles	copies x-axis and legend series, legend label overrides, label series, and graph title, subtitle, and axis title text (but not the style of this text). If you are pasting a bullet chart, the Titles option is unavailable; titles and subtitles for bullet charts are based on the data series.

Data Series	builds the destination graph from the same data as the source graph. When you choose this option, Quattro Pro copies a reference to the data used in the source graph. (Data is not physically copied to a different location in the notebook.) Any changes you subsequently make to the data affect the source graph and all copies. If you are pasting a bullet chart, Data Series copies a reference to the bullet chart block, which includes the title and subtitle.

Background	copies the graph background (not the template)

Color Scheme	copies the colors of graph elements, but not colors associated with drawn objects, such as text boxes.

Annotations	copies all text and drawn objects you created for the source graph using the drawing tools on the Graph Toolbar. Annotations also includes any graphics you imported.

Caution: To preserve annotation objects already existing in the destination graph, uncheck Annotations. Annotations erases all annotation items in the destination graph, even when there are none to copy from the source graph.

The options you choose in the Paste Special Graph dialog box can produce quite different results:

If you check all options, Quattro Pro builds an exact copy of the source graph. (You can copy the source graph through the Clipboard to get the same results.)

If you uncheck Data Series, but check all other options, Quattro Pro builds a graph that has the same graph type and properties as the source graph, but uses the data of the destination graph. (The source graph serves as a style template for the destination graph.)

Note:	Paste Special does not copy annotations drawn on a blank graph type or graph templates selected with the Graph Gallery.

See Also

Copying Graphs Between Notebooks


Copying Graphs Between Notebooks

You can copy graphs between notebooks using the Windows Clipboard, the Edit|Paste Special command, or the Drag and Drop feature.

These methods give the destination notebook a record of where the original data is located. (The data is not physically copied.) Each time you open the destination notebook, Quattro Pro checks whether the source notebook is open. If it is not, a dialog box offers three options, Open Supporting, Update References, and None. See Loading Supporting Data for explanations of these options.

If the destination notebook already has a graph with the same name, the newly made copy is given a default name (Graph6, for example).

See Also

Copying Graphs Within a Notebook

Copying Graphs Using Drag and Drop


Copying Graphs Using Drag and Drop

You can use Drag and Drop to copy floating graphs on a notebook page or graph icons on the Objects page. To copy a graph using Drag and Drop, press Ctrl while you drag a floating graph or graph icon. Release the mouse to "drop" the copied graph. A new floating graph or graph icon appears.

To use Drag and Drop to copy a graph to another notebook, open the source notebook and destination notebook. Then, choose Window|Tile to make sure that both notebooks are visible. To copy graphs from the Objects page, click the SpeedTab button [image] at the bottom of each window to display the Objects page for both notebooks. Press Ctrl while dragging the graph from the source notebook to the page of the destination notebook. Release the mouse to "drop" the graph onto this page.

Note:	If you drag a floating graph or graph icon without pressing Ctrl, you move the graph instead of copying it.

See Also

Copying Graphs Within a Notebook

Copying Graphs Between Notebooks


Inserting an Existing Graph on a Page

To place any graph in the notebook as a floating graph on a spreadsheet page,

1.	Go to the page where you want the graph to appear.

2.	Choose Graphics|Insert Graph.

3.	Select a graph from the list that appears.

4.	Choose OK. The mouse pointer changes to a miniature graph.

5.	Click the upper left corner of the area where you want the graph to appear, or drag the mouse to specify the size and placement of the graph.

6.	Release the mouse button.

If the graph appears to have too much background area, change the Aspect Ratio to Floating Graph.

You can insert the same graph in more than one place in the notebook. Any time you make changes to a graph, all floating graphs associated with that graph reflect the changes.

To replace a floating graph with a different graph see Source Graph.


Moving and Resizing Floating Graphs

To change the size or position of a floating graph, first click anywhere inside the frame to select it. Square handles appear at eight positions on the border of the graph.

To move the floating graph, drag any area of the graph except its handles.

To resize only height or width, drag a top, bottom, or side handle.

To change the height and width of the rectangle at the same time, drag a corner handle diagonally.

To learn about floating graph properties, see Graph Object.


Creating Bullet Charts

Bullet charts are graphs that list bulleted items. A bullet chart consists of a title, followed by major bulleted items and, if needed, minor bulleted items. Bullet charts help emphasize major points in a speech or presentation.

You create bullet charts similar to the way you create graphs of numeric data. First, create a bullet chart block, a block of labels that the bullet chart references for the title, subtitle, and bulleted text. Then, choose the Graph tool [image] on the Toolbar or Graphics|New Graph to create a bullet chart from the data. To revise the text in a bullet chart, simply change the labels in the bullet chart block.

Note:	You can also create bulleted text in a blank graph using text boxes. However, bullet charts are easier to create and revise because they are based on spreadsheet data.

A bullet chart block consists of up to three columns of labels: the first column contains the bullet chart title and, optionally, the subtitle; the second column contains major bullets; and the third column contains minor bullets. The third column is optional; you can create a bullet chart with only one level of bulleted items. However, you cannot create a bullet chart with more than two levels of bulleted items.

Note:	Quattro Pro uses only the text contained in the bullet chart block to create bullet charts. Block properties such as fonts and colors do not affect the bullet chart. However, the block Numeric Format property does affect how numeric values appear in the bullet chart.

To create a bullet chart,

1.	Type the title of the bullet chart in a notebook cell, for example, cell A1. If the bullet chart has a subtitle, type it in the cell directly below the title.

2.	Select the cell one row below and one column to the right of the title/subtitle cells, for example, cell B2. Type the text for a major bullet.

3.	If the bullet chart contains minor bullets, select the cell one row below and one column to the right of the major bullet, for example, cell C3. Type the the text for the first minor bullet. Type other minor bullets in the same column as needed.

If the bullet chart contains only major bullets, enter other major bullets in the same column as the first.

4.	Continue typing major and minor bullets in cells until you are finished typing the text of the bullet chart.

5.	Select the bullet chart block, then choose Graphics|New Graph. The Graph New dialog box appears.

6.	Type a name for the graph in the Graph Name edit field, then choose OK. A graph window opens and displays the new bullet chart.

To choose a template for the bullet chart, choose Graphics|Graph Gallery; see Using the Graph Gallery.

To create and format multiple bullet charts for a slide show, use the Slide Show Expert; see Using the Slide Show Expert.

You can change the bullet style, fonts, colors, and line spacing used in a bullet chart by changing the properties of the bullet series. For information on customizing a bullet chart, see Customizing Bullet Charts.


Creating a Blank Graph

Blank graphs are empty graphs you can use to create custom graphs and slides by adding graphics, text boxes, and other drawn objects. Unlike numeric graphs and bullet charts, blank graphs do not plot data; instead, you build them from scratch using tools on the Graph Toolbar.

You can use blank graphs in slide shows, as areas to display a bulleted list of text, as vehicles for original art, or as temporary scratchpads where you create a drawing before cutting and pasting it to a different graph. You can also import a graphic image from another application and insert it as a floating graph on the notebook page.

Like other types of graphs, blank graphs can exist as floating graphs on the notebook page, or they can appear solely in a graph window.

Creating a Floating Blank Graph

To create a floating blank graph,

1.	Select an empty cell and click the Graph tool [image] in the Toolbar.

2.	Click and drag over the area of the spreadsheet page where you want to place the graph. When you release the mouse button, the graph appears.

Once you create the empty floating graph, you can edit it using one of three methods:

Double-click the graph to edit it on the spreadsheet.

Select the graph and choose Graphics|Edit Graph.

Right-click the floating graph and choose Open from the QuickMenu to bring the floating graph into a graph window.

Creating a Blank Graph in a Window

To create a blank graph in a window,

1.	Choose Graphics|New Graph. The Graph New dialog box appears.

2.	Enter a name for the graph in the Graph Name edit field. If you do not type in a new name, Quattro Pro assigns the default name shown in the dialog box.

3.	Do not assign data blocks to a series. If any series edit fields contain block coordinates, delete them.

4.	Choose OK. A blank graph appears in a graph window.

To create a blank graph in a window from the Objects page, press the New Graph button [image] on the Toolbar, enter a graph name, and choose OK.

See Also

Creating Lines and Shapes

Creating Text Blocks

Exporting Graphics

Importing Graphics


Linking Notebooks

Why Use Links?

Creating Links

Typing Links

Pointing Out Links

Pasting Links

Naming Links

Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks

Linking to Closed Notebooks

Moving and Copying Links

Loading Supporting Data

Maintaining Links


Why Use Links?

A notebook link is a reference to a cell or block in another notebook. The reference is live; which means Quattro Pro updates the link results when the referenced data changes, as if the data were in the same notebook.

Notebook links are identical to page and block references except that they begin with the name of the notebook to link to. Quattro Pro provides commands for keeping notebook links accurate even if one of the notebooks is closed.

If you want to create a dynamic link to another application, see Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro for details.

There are several advantages to setting up notebook links instead of multipage notebooks:

To build models that fit into memory. By dividing an application over several notebooks and accessing only the linked values from closed notebooks, you can build larger models.

To share information. By linking pertinent information in different notebooks, you can eliminate redundancy. Since Quattro Pro updates primary formulas when you make a change, your data is always up to date. And by using one formula for several notebooks, you save disk space.

To divide work among several people. If you use linked notebooks for a single application, you can divide the application's work among several people.

To preserve portability to non-3-D spreadsheets or databases. Since only one page of a notebook is translated when you save it in some other formats, you may want to link the first pages of different notebooks instead of pages within the same notebooks.

See Also

Creating Links

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Translating Files


Creating Links

Links are formulas with file names in them. The file name precedes the page reference and is enclosed in brackets; for example, +[BUDGET]B:A15.

There are four ways to create a notebook link, explained in these topics:

Typing Links

Pointing Out Links

Pasting Links

Naming Links

In addition, the following topics include important linking information:

Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks

Linking to Closed Notebooks

Note:	The primary notebook must be a Quattro Pro version 6 (.WB2), version 1 or 5 (.WB1), .WQ2, or .WQ1 file. The supporting notebooks can be in any spreadsheet format Quattro Pro translates; see Translating Files. For information about linking to Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE database tables, see Using External Databases.

See Also

Creating Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Loading Supporting Data

Maintaining Links

Moving and Copying Links


Typing Links

To create a notebook link by typing, type the link as a page reference and cell reference preceded by the notebook name in brackets. Use this format:

+[Drive:\Path\File name.Extension]Page:Cell reference

For example, the following formula enters the value from cell B9 on page C in the BUDGET.WB2 file from the C:\ARCHIVE directory into the active cell,

+[C:\ARCHIVE\BUDGET.WB2]C:B9

The plus sign is needed only if the link is the first item in a cell entry (otherwise, Quattro Pro regards the reference as a label).

Drive identifies the drive containing the file. This is necessary only if the notebook you are referencing is not on the same drive as the primary notebook.

Path is the DOS path to the directory containing the file. This is necessary only if the notebook is not in the same directory as the primary notebook.

File name is the name of the file.

Extension is a three-letter suffix separated from the file name by a period (.). It is necessary only if the file has a different extension from the primary notebook.

Page is any valid page name, page range, or group name (such as C, Sales, or D..F, or YearToDate).

Cell reference is any valid cell address, pair of block coordinates, or block name. However, block coordinates or a block name are valid only if the link contains an @function to operate on the block. The link in the example above (beginning with +) simply links the active cell with the referenced cell.

You can enter all parts of the link in either uppercase or lowercase. Do not include blank spaces in any part of the reference.

If you keep all linked notebooks in the same directory and use the same extension for each, you only have to enter a file name for links. This is because the default drive, path, and extension are the same as the primary notebook. Also, if you move all linked notebooks to a different directory, you will not need to edit the references.

See Also

Naming Links

Pasting Links

Pointing Out Links


Pointing Out Links

When entering formulas, it can be easier to point to a block rather than to type its address.

To point out a link,

1.	If the notebook you want to reference is not open, use File|Open to access it.

2.	After typing +, or at the appropriate place in the formula, activate the target notebook you want to reference. You can do this in one of these ways:

Click anywhere in the notebook.

Open the Window menu and choose the window from the numbered list at the bottom of the menu. You can click Window in the menu bar or use the shortcut Alt+W.

Press the Next Window key, Ctrl+F6, until you are in the notebook you want.

3.	By default, the last-selected cell in the target notebook appears in the formula. To change the reference to another cell or block, point elsewhere in the notebook.

4.	If there is more to the formula, finish typing it. Press Enter.

The selector returns to its original place in the primary notebook and enters the block (along with the linked file's name) in the input line.

If you are entering an @function (such as @SUM) that allows multiple block references, you can enter a comma after the first block reference (which returns you to the primary notebook), then point to the next block in any notebook. After the last one, type ) (close parenthesis) to complete the @function, then press Enter to complete the formula. For example, your formula might look like this:

@SUM([NOTEBK1]A:A1,[NOTEBK2]A:B1)

See Also

Loading Files

Naming Links

Pasting Links

Typing Links

Using Windows


Pasting Links

After you copy a block to the Clipboard, using Edit|Paste Special|Link in another notebook (or even in the same notebook) creates an individual link to each cell in the copied block.

To create these links,

1.	Select the block of cells to which you want to link. The selection can even be a noncontiguous block.

2.	Click the Copy button [image] in the Toolbar.

3.	Select the upper left cell of the destination block for the links.

4.	Choose Edit|Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box appears.

5.	Click the Link button.

Each pasted cell contains a formula beginning with a plus sign followed by

the notebook name in brackets (if different from the active notebook)

the page name and a colon (if different from the active page)

the cell address

See Also

Edit|Paste Special

Naming Links

Pointing Out Links

Typing Links


Naming Links

If you often link to a certain block, you can store the reference in a named block (either in the active notebook or in a separate one) to simplify the process. This offers several advantages:

To reference a different file or block, you only need to edit the reference in the named block instead of editing each individual link.

If the link statement is long, you can reference a short named block instead of typing the entire link.

When you move a named block in a supporting notebook while the primary notebook is closed, the primary notebook is updated to reflect the change the next time you open it. With links that refer to cell addresses, the primary notebook is not updated.

For example, suppose you often reference the total of cells F12..F36 on page B in the file BUDGET. Instead of typing @SUM([BUDGET]B:F12..F36) wherever you want that sum, you can name a cell TOTAL, and enter @SUM([BUDGET]B:F12..F36) in it. This way, wherever you want that sum, just enter +TOTAL instead of typing the full link.

See Also

Pasting Links

Pointing Out Links

Typing Links


Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks

If you are consolidating information from several notebooks that have the same layout, you can use wildcards to link to the same place in all of them.

Choose File|Open to open the primary notebook and all its supporting notebooks. Then, close all notebooks you do not want to reference. To reference corresponding values in all open notebooks, use a wildcard character in place of the notebook names in the link. See Wildcard Link Examples for sample links.

As soon as you finish entering the link, the formula is revised to include specific file names. This means that if you open new notebooks after using a wildcard in a link, they are not referenced in the formula.

You can use ? and * wildcards in links. As in DOS, a question mark (?) stands for any single character, and an asterisk (*) stands for any number of characters. See How Wildcards Work in Links for examples.

See Also

Creating Links

Loading Files

Using Workspaces


Wildcard Link Examples

These examples show wildcard characters used in notebook links:

Link	Effect

@SUM([*]A:A1)	adds the values in A1 in page A of all open notebooks (except the active one), and places the result in the active cell.

@AVG([*]BUDGET:B3..C10)	finds the average of all values in block B3..C10 in the page named BUDGET of each open notebook.

@SUM([*]TOTALS)	sums the values of all cells in the block TOTALS in any open notebooks with a block named TOTALS. These blocks need not be the same size, or in the same relative positions.

See Also

Creating Links

Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks


How Wildcards Work in Links

You can use ? and * wildcards in links. As in DOS, a question mark (?) stands for any single character, and an asterisk (*) stands for any number of characters. This table shows how different wildcard characters work in notebook links:

Link

syntax	Effect

[]	Looks in the active notebook.

[*]	Links to all open notebooks.

[AB*]	Links to all open notebooks whose names begin with AB.

[A*B]	Links to all open notebooks whose names begin with A and end with B.

[A?B]	Links to all open notebooks with three-character names that begin with A and end with B.

[AB???]	Links to all open notebooks with five-character names that begin with AB.

See Also

Creating Links

Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks


Linking to Closed Notebooks

A notebook does not have to be open for you to link to it. You can type a link to a closed notebook. When you open a primary notebook, you can also choose Update References from the dialog box that appears. This loads only the linked values from supporting notebooks, leaving the supporting notebooks closed. This is useful if all your linked notebooks will not fit into memory.

Linking closed notebooks has one disadvantage: You cannot update closed files. For best results, structure linked notebooks hierarchically, with links that flow only one way. Then you can work on notebooks one at a time. As long as you start with the notebook at the bottom of the hierarchy and proceed upward (choosing Update References for each notebook you open), the notebook values will always be correct.

If you are revising notebook A on a network and someone else is revising B or C, choose Notebook|Update Links|Refresh Links after that person saves and closes B or C to update the links in notebook A.

See Also

Creating Links

Loading Supporting Data

Shortcuts for Linking Notebooks


Moving and Copying Links

These rules apply when you copy and move notebook links:

When you copy a link, relative cell references in the formula adjust like other cell addresses: relative cell references change to reference position, while absolute cell references stay the same.

When you copy a link from one notebook to another, the link remains, even if you copy it into the notebook it references. However, if you move a link into the notebook it references, Quattro Pro removes the link, leaving only the page and block reference.

If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it references, Quattro Pro creates a link to the original notebook.

When you move a block in a supporting notebook, any links to it in open primary notebooks adjust accordingly. However, links in closed notebooks are not updated. To avoid this problem, use block names in links when possible. Each time you open a primary notebook, block names that have been moved are updated.

See Also

Copying Formulas

Creating Links

Maintaining Links

Using Named Blocks


Loading Supporting Data

When you open a file that contains links, Quattro Pro checks whether all supporting notebooks are open. If not, a dialog box with these options appears:

Open Supporting opens all supporting notebooks. If those notebooks contain links to closed notebooks, those notebooks open, too, until all supporting notebooks are open.

Update References accesses linked values in closed supporting notebooks without opening them. This takes up less memory than opening the notebooks. If you later decide to open the supporting notebooks, choose Notebook|Update Links|Open Links.

None temporarily replaces links to closed supporting notebooks with the value NA (not available). This lets you examine or edit notebooks when you do not need the linked values. If you later want to replace the NA placeholders with the actual link values, use Notebook|Update Links|Refresh Links or Open Links to update values, or open the supporting notebooks, respectively. You can use these commands at any time.

See Also

Creating Links

Maintaining Links


Maintaining Links

Use the Notebook|Update Links command to maintain notebook links. Choose from these commands:

Open Links	opens any or all supporting notebooks linked to the active notebook.

Refresh Links	links to recalculate data in the active notebook based on data in closed supporting notebooks.

Delete Links	deletes all link references to any supporting notebook.

Change Links	switches all links that reference one supporting notebook to a different notebook.

See Also

Creating Links

Moving and Copying Links


Opening Supporting Notebooks

If the active notebook contains links to one or more closed notebooks, you can use Notebook|Update Links|Open Links to open any or all supporting notebooks:

1.	Choose Notebook|Update Links|Open Links. Quattro Pro displays a list of unopened notebooks referenced in the active notebook.

2.	Select the notebook you want to open. You can select multiple notebooks by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual notebooks) or the Shift key (as you click the last notebook in a range to be selected).

3.	Choose OK. Quattro Pro opens the selected notebooks. The active notebook remains active.

Notebook|Update Links|Open Links opens only notebooks that are directly linked to the active notebook. If additional notebooks are linked to those directly linked, you need to activate the directly linked notebooks and choose Open Links again. For example, suppose Notebook A refers to Notebook B, which refers to Notebook C. Activating Notebook A and choosing Open Links lists only Notebook B. To open Notebook C, activate Notebook B and choose Open Links.

See Also

Changing Notebook Links

Creating Links

Removing Links

Updating Link Values


Updating Link Values

If a notebook is linked to values in closed notebooks, you can use the Notebook|Update Links|Refresh Links command to access values in any or all supporting notebooks:

1.	Choose Notebook|Update Links|Refresh Links. Quattro Pro displays a list of unopened notebooks referenced in the active notebook.

2.	Select the notebook whose values you want to access. You can select multiple notebooks by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual notebooks) or the Shift key (as you click the last notebook in a range to be selected).

3.	Choose OK. Quattro Pro reads linked values from the selected notebooks into the active notebook.

Notebook|Update Links|Refresh Links is similar to the Update References option offered when you access a primary notebook, except you can use it at any time, and you can specify one notebook at a time from which to access values.

Refresh Links is also useful when you are working on a network. While you are using one notebook, others can be working on supporting notebooks (which remain closed to you). If people announce over the network when they save or close a file, you can use Refresh Links to access updated values in the primary notebook.

See Also

Changing Notebook Links

Creating Links

Loading Supporting Data

Removing Links


Removing Links

You can delete all links to any or all supporting notebooks with one command:

1.	Choose Notebook|Update Links|Delete Links. Quattro Pro displays a list of notebooks referenced in the active notebook.

2.	Select any notebook whose links you want to delete. You can select multiple notebooks by holding down the Ctrl key (as you click individual notebooks) or the Shift key (as you click the last notebook in a range to be selected).

3.	Choose OK. Quattro Pro replaces all link references to the selected notebooks with ERR values, but does not remove any formulas containing ERR values. You can edit them to replace the ERR values with valid references.

Caution: Edit|Undo cannot restore deleted links.

See Also

Changing Notebook Links

Creating Links

Moving and Copying Links

Updating Link Values


Changing Notebook Links

You can use Notebook|Update Links|Change Link to unlink the active notebook from a supporting notebook and link it to another. This is useful after you rename a notebook.

To switch links from one notebook to another:

1.	Choose Notebook|Update Links|Change Link. Quattro Pro displays a list of notebooks referenced in the active notebook.

2.	Select the notebook whose links you want to change. In the To edit field, type the name of the notebook you want to change links to.

3.	Choose OK. In the active notebook, all link references to the selected notebook change to the new notebook name.

Note:	The new supporting notebook must have the same layout as the previous one because the same relative cells are referenced. If it does not, formulas that reference linked cells may show errors or produce meaningless values. To avoid this, enter all links as block names so the correct values are included.

See Also

Creating Links

Removing Links

Updating Link Values


Using Macros

What Is a Macro?

Creating Macros

Planning Macros

Recording Macros

Recording Relative Cell References

Macro Recording Tips

Typing Macros

Macro Typing Tips

Macro Syntax and Arguments

Entering Macro Commands

Using Macro Subroutines

About Command Equivalents

About DDE Macro Commands

About Object Macro Commands

Accessing Other Notebooks in Macros

Self-modifying Macros

Using Macro Libraries

Running Macros

Attaching Macros

Creating SpeedButtons

Using Startup and Exit Macros

Notebook Startup Macros

Notebook Exit Macros

Application Startup Macros

Quattro Pro for DOS Macros

1-2-3 Macros

Debugging Macros

The Debug Window

Setting Breakpoints

Specifying Trace Cells

Exiting Debug Mode

See Also

Macros


What Is a Macro?

A macro is a sequence of commands Quattro Pro runs automatically. When running a macro, Quattro Pro performs the actions listed in it. You can store macros in the notebook they apply to or in a macro library file for use by other notebooks. You can also attach macros to buttons, and you can run macros from another application using Dynamic Data Exchange.

Macros can reproduce the behavior of keys on the keyboard, mouse actions, and menu commands. Special macro commands can perform actions such as prompting the user for input, looping a macro repeatedly, or controlling other Windows applications. Use them to automate complex or repetitive command sequences (like printing a standard report), to enter frequently used labels with a keystroke, or to build complete applications for use by people with little Quattro Pro experience.

See Also

Creating Macros

Macros

Running Macros

Using Macros


Creating Macros

Quattro Pro offers two main ways to create macros:

Recording Macros as you perform a task

Typing Macros directly into a notebook page

It is often helpful to combine these methods. You can record a command sequence, then paste it into a macro you are typing.

See Also

Macros

Planning Macros

Using Macros


Planning Macros

Whether you record or type a macro, try these tips:

Plan your macro carefully. Making it efficient saves you the trouble of modifying it later to add new functionality. If it involves menu commands, step through them first, writing down each action involved. If it involves special macro commands, know exactly what you are going to enter as the command arguments. Keep track of the selector after each macro command; its position can affect the macro's behavior.

Try sketching a flow chart of your macro before entering it. A flow chart is a diagram showing the actions and decisions a macro steps through while running. Boxes in the chart contain an action the macro performs. Diamonds contain decisions the macro must make to determine the next step; for example, a cell achieving a certain value or the selector reaching a specific location. Arrows show where to go after a step is completed. Arrows exiting a diamond have a decision listed next to them dictating the next step. If a decision is not listed, the step at the end of the arrow is always the next step. Flow charts do not show actual macro commands; they show the planning and logic behind the macro.

See Also

Creating Macros

Macros

Using Macros


Recording Macros

With Quattro Pro, you can record actions as you perform them. Recording converts actions into macro commands and stores them as labels in a block. To record a macro,

1.	Choose Tools|Macro|Record.

2.	Select the block to store the macro in. If there is no chance of overwriting data in cells below, select a single cell; Quattro Pro fills the cells below as necessary. Selecting a block larger than a cell confines recorded commands to that block only, and stops recording when the block is full.

3.	Choose OK to place Quattro Pro in recording mode (noted by the REC indicator on the status line).

4.	Perform your task. Quattro Pro records each action, writing it as one or more macro commands in the first column of the block previously specified.

5.	Choose Tools|Macro|Stop Record to finish recording. The macro is now stored in the block.

6.	Move to the first cell of the macro, and choose Block|Names. The Block Names dialog box appears. In the Name text box, enter a name for the macro and choose Add, then choose Close.

For best results, follow the suggestions in Macro Recording Tips.

By default, Quattro Pro records macros as command equivalents with normal cell references (like A1..B26). If you like, you can record with relative cell references. Choose Tools|Macro|Options to change the default settings.

See Also

Macros

Running Macros

Using Macros


Recording Relative Cell References

By default, addresses in macro commands use standard cell addressing like A1..C6. By choosing Relative from the Tools|Macro|Options dialog box, you can record macro commands that use relative references.

Relative references are cell addresses specified as an offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector's relative reference is []P(0):C(0)R(0). The first piece of the reference, ([]), specifies that you are referring to the active notebook. The second piece, P(0):, is the number of pages from the selector (in this case, zero); it is optional (except when selecting an entire row or column, which is discussed next). The third piece, C(0), is the number of columns from the selector. The final piece, R(0), is the number of rows from the selector. The cell below the selector is []C(0)R(1), the cell to the right of it is []C(1)R(0), and the cell beneath the selector (on the next notebook page) is []P(1):C(0)R(0).

Caution: If [] does not precede a relative reference, the relative reference is offset from the cell containing the macro command, not the cell selector. For example, if {BLANK C(1)R(0)} was stored in A:A16, running it would erase the cell to the right of it (A:B16).

You can precede a relative reference with a colon (:) to affect the same cell, but on the active page. For example, if {BLANK :C(1)R(0)} was stored in A:A16, running it when page B is active erases the cell B:B16.

You can omit C( ) or R( ) to select entire rows or columns. For example, {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(0)} selects the column containing the active cell; {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):R(0)} selects the row containing the active cell. To select the three columns to the right of the active cell, use {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(1)..C(3)}.

Relative references can use negative or positive offsets. For example, if the selector is in cell A2, you could use []C(0)R(-1)..C(2)R(1) to specify the block A1..C3.

Using relative references increases macro portability, but hinders readability, since it is harder to track which blocks the macro affects. If your macros use @CELLPOINTER frequently, try relative references.

See Also

Accessing Other Notebooks in Macros

Macros

Recording Macros

Using Macros


Macro Recording Tips

Here are some handy tips to make macro recording easier:

Use the shortest steps possible to perform your task. The longer a recording session goes, the more errors can result.

Use any method available to choose menu commands when recording. The resulting macro reads the same when recorded logically.

You cannot record a macro that pauses for user input. If you want the macro to pause, edit it after recording it. (See Typing Macros for details.)

See Also

Macros

Recording Macros

Using Macros


Typing Macros

You can type macros directly into cells as labels instead of recording them. This method requires precision (one incorrect keystroke can invalidate a macro). Some macros can only be typed, such as those that prompt for user input or that use Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) to communicate with other Windows applications.

To type a macro,

1.	Move to the first cell of the block where you want to store the macro.

2.	Enter the macro commands that perform your task. You can enter multiple macro commands in the same cell, or in the cell below the last command entered. If using more than one cell, be sure the entries proceed downward (A1, A2, A3) with no empty cells between them. Each cell must contain a label or a text formula.

3.	Leave an empty cell, {QUIT}, or {RETURN} at the end of the macro. Otherwise the macro interprets labels below it as macro commands.

When you finish entering a macro, name its first cell using Block|Names. Then you can run the macro by choosing its name from the Tools|Macro|Play dialog box or pressing a Ctrl key shortcut (see Running Macros for details). Block names make macros more readable and easier to remember. Give your macros names reflecting their task. For example, PERCENT could be the name of a macro that changes the numeric format of the current cell to percentage.

Caution: When naming macros, avoid names that duplicate macro commands. Otherwise the macro commands become invalid. For example, if you name a macro READLN, which is the name of a predefined macro command, and then try to read a line from a file into cell A6 using {READLN A6}, Quattro Pro assumes you are running the READLN macro instead of running the predefined {READLN} command.

See Also

Creating Macros

Entering Macro Commands

Macro Syntax and Arguments

Macro Typing Tips

Self-Modifying Macros


Macro Typing Tips

Here are some suggestions to follow when typing macros:

Use Tools|Macro|Record to create sections of a macro that consist of menu choices. This speeds entry time and reduces errors.

Add comments to your macros to make them easier to understand and debug.

List block names to the left of the macros or cells they reference; then you can use Block|Names to create the block names quickly.

Place macros in an area unaffected by macro commands. For example, do not place macros to the right of a block where rows will be inserted or deleted. The ideal place for a macro depends on what operations it performs. If you want to use a macro with many notebooks, place it in a macro library (see Using Macro Libraries for more information). If only one notebook uses the macro, add a page named Macros to that notebook and place the macro there.

See Also

Macros

Typing Macros

Using Macros


Macro Syntax and Arguments

Macro commands are like @functions in that they have specific grammatical rules, or syntax. The syntax for macros is fairly straightforward:

{COMMANDNAME Argument1,Argument2,Argument3...}

COMMANDNAME is the exact name of the command. Arguments are values providing instructions to the command. Not all macro commands require arguments; when they do, they require a specific type of information. Some examples of macro commands are

{Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29}

{BlockCopy A1,A2..A37}

{Search.Find "3rd Quarter Profits"}

{BEEP 3}

{GETNUMBER "How old are you?",AGE}

{CONTENTS E15,F15,15}

Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name.

See Macro Syntax Rules and Macro Command Arguments for descriptions of allowable macro structures and arguments.


Macro Syntax Rules

The syntax rules for macro commands are as follows:

The command must begin and end with braces { }.

There must be a space between the command name and the first argument. For example, {GETNUMBER"Number?",A1} results in a syntax error; {GETNUMBER "Number?",A1} works correctly.

Separate multiple arguments with commas. By changing the Punctuation option of the International property in the Application Object Inspector, you can use semicolons or periods instead.

Arguments must be the correct type; if a string is required, the argument must be a valid character string or a syntax error occurs.

If an argument contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in quotation marks. For example,

{GETLABEL "Hello, world",A4}

is allowed, but not

{GETLABEL Hello, world,A4}

You must enter the entire macro command in a single cell.

You can enter the command in any case (upper or lower).

You can include more than one macro command in a cell. For example,

{BEEP}{GETLABEL "Hello, world",A4}{QUIT}.

Because macro commands are labels, Quattro Pro will not recognize a syntax error when you type it in; an error occurs when you try to run the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro commands as you enter them and record macros whenever possible.


Macro Command Arguments

Arguments in macro commands require specific information to be supplied with the command. There are four types of arguments: numbers, strings, locations, and conditions.

Number arguments require any numeric value, entered as

an actual number (such as 2 or 0.45)

a formula resulting in a number (such as A3*15)

a cell address or named block containing a numeric value or formula (such as C10, where C10 contains a valid number or formula)

String arguments require a text string, entered as

an actual string in quotation marks ("Corel")

a reference to a cell or named block containing a label

a comma-separated list of property or command equivalent settings, enclosed in quotation marks ("Currency,2"). If a setting in the list would normally take a single quotation mark, enter two quotation marks ("Prefix,""Windows Default"",No"). If a setting contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in two sets of quotation marks.

a formula resulting in a label, such as @UPPER("hello") (See Types of Formulas for a discussion of text formulas. See String @Functions for a discussion of string @functions.)

Location arguments require a reference to a cell or a block. The reference can be

a block name

coordinates for a block containing one or more cells; for example, A1, A1..A4 or A..B:C4..D22

the relative reference (see Recording Relative Cell References) of a block containing one or more cells; for example, []C(0)R(0), []P(-2):C(0)R(22), or []C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10)

coordinates for a noncontiguous block, enclosed in parentheses; for example, (A1,B1..B7,C1..C7) or (A1,B:C27..C52)

a label or text formula resulting in any of these options; for example, +"A"&"2", which results in A2

Condition arguments require a logical expression; that is, a formula that can be evaluated as either true or false; for example, +C4 > 500.

Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types. For example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the argument type.

Caution: Unlike @functions, block references in macros are not updated when the macro is copied. If you move the contents of a cell, or insert or delete a row or column, the macro reference might be wrong. For this reason, use block names whenever possible. Quattro Pro updates block names to reference the correct location.


Entering Macro Commands

Each macro is a sequence of macro commands. These commands include command equivalents (which emulate menu commands) and unique functions you cannot do directly in Quattro Pro, such as sounding the computer's speaker, pausing for a fixed length of time, or prompting for input. Macro Command Index describes each macro command.

You can enter macro commands by typing them, using the Macros button on the input line when it is active, or using the Macros key (Shift+F3). This displays a menu of command categories (see Macros for descriptions of each category and their commands).

To insert a macro command with the Macros key:

1.	Press Shift+F3 (or click the input line and choose the Macros button) to display a list of macro command categories.

2.	Choose the category containing the desired command.

3.	Choose the command to insert.

Quattro Pro inserts the macro command name on the input line. When a list of categories or commands is displayed, you can search for an item in the list by pressing F2 and typing the first few letters of the item's name. Quattro Pro highlights the first item in the list that begins with the text you type.


Using Macro Subroutines

A subroutine is a macro stored separately from the macros using it. You name the subroutine just like other macros. You can call the subroutine from another macro, and Quattro Pro runs the subroutine's macro commands. After running the subroutine, the command immediately following the call (in the main macro) runs. Using subroutines makes the macro more readable and easier to debug.

To call a subroutine from within a macro, type its name inside braces. For example, {go_right} calls the subroutine named go_right.

You can pass arguments to a subroutine for use by its commands. These arguments are stored in cells referenced by the subroutine. For example,

{set_cost C10,36}

calls the subroutine set_cost and passes two arguments (C10 and 36) to it. In order for the subroutine to know what to do with the arguments, you must define them within the subroutine using {DEFINE}, which tells Quattro Pro where to store the arguments and whether they should be interpreted as values or labels.

Whenever you call a subroutine, Quattro Pro stores the return point in an internal list called a stack. One return point on this stack clears when the subroutine encounters a {RETURN} command or empty cell. If you do not clear all of these locations, the stack fills up, causing the error Too Many Nesting Calls.

Use {BRANCH} instead of a subroutine when a macro

does not need to pick up where it left off after calling the subroutine

needs to return to a different point in the macro than the point right after the subroutine call

calls the main macro as a subroutine

{BRANCH} can move to or return from any cell in a macro.

See Also

{Subroutine}


About Command Equivalents

The commands in this category perform operations normally done with menus or dialog boxes. Options normally set in a dialog box are passed as arguments to a command equivalent, like passing them to a subroutine (see Using Macro Subroutines). Command equivalents make macros easier to read and understand, and let the macro run in any Quattro Pro menu system.

Menu commands containing many settings (such as File|Print and Block|Fill) have a set of command equivalents that emulate their operation. The next example shows a macro that emulates Edit|Find And Replace:

search_string	Fri

\s	{GETLABEL "Search For? ",+search_string}

{Search.Reset}

{Search.Block ""}

{Search.Find +search_string}

{Search.ReplaceBy +search_string}

\n	{Search.Next}

Notice that each command equivalent sets one option in the Edit|Find And Replace dialog box. You do not have to set each option every time; if one of the command equivalents is omitted, the default setting is used. The final command ({Search.Next}) performs the find operation. You can use command equivalent names with @COMMAND to find current Quattro Pro settings. For example, @COMMAND("BlockFill.Series") returns the current setting of Series in Block|Fill.

Menu commands with a few settings (such as Block|Move and Block|Copy) have one command equivalent to emulate them. Command equivalents without a period are typically of this type. For example, the following macro command emulates Block|Copy:

{BlockCopy A1,A2..A36}

If you specify a command equivalent with a question mark (?) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the user can manipulate. If the name of the command equivalent contains a period, use only the part of of the command name that precedes the period. For example, {BlockFill?} displays the Block|Fill dialog box for the user to manipulate. When the user chooses OK, the fill occurs and macro resumes running.

If you specify a command equivalent with an exclamation mark (!) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the macro can manipulate. You can make the dialog box revert to user control at any point in the macro using the command {PAUSEMACRO}.

Caution: Make sure that a dialog box is displaying or that Quattro Pro is in INPUT or FIND mode when the macro command runs {PAUSEMACRO}; otherwise the macro waits until it is stopped by Ctrl+Break.

The next example shows a macro that uses {PAUSEMACRO} and {RestrictInput} to display a small form for the user to enter a name and phone number.

new_name	Nick Piercherd

new_phone	(804) 555-2315

get_record	{BLANK A:E28..E29}

{RestrictInput.Enter A:D28..F29}

{PAUSEMACRO}

{IF #NOT#@ISSTRING(E28)}{RETURN}

{IF #NOT#@ISSTRING(E29)}{RETURN}

{LET new_name,E28}

{LET new_phone,E29}


About DDE Macro Commands

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) lets Windows applications communicate with one another. Use {INITIATE} to open a channel of communication with another application. This is called initiating a conversation. Every DDE conversation consists of a client and a server. The application initiating the conversation is the client; the other application is the server. Once you have initiated a conversation, you can use {POKE} to send data, {REQUEST} to receive data, or {EXECUTE} to run macros in the server. {TERMINATE} ends the conversation.

The data source that a DDE conversation connects with in the server application is called a topic. Many DDE applications support the topic System and items available from it.

Other DDE applications can call Quattro Pro as their server; to do so, use the server name QPW and specify System or the file name of an open notebook as the topic. When a notebook is the topic, you can enter cell addresses or block coordinates as the item to request, or run Quattro Pro macro commands. When System is the topic, you can run Quattro Pro macros or request these items:

Item	Returns

SysItems	A list of the items you can request from System.

Topics	A list of topics currently available from the server application.

Status	The current status of the application. In Quattro Pro this is the text of the status line indicator (READY, WAIT, LABEL and so on).

Formats	A list of Clipboard formats supported by the application.

Selection	The coordinates of the active block.

Note:	You can also request any property from Quattro Pro. The property must be enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks, for example, "(Application.Display)".


About Object Macro Commands

Object commands can create Quattro Pro objects, change their property settings, or move them to new positions. Object commands can create three types of objects:

Drawn objects are objects in a graph window that you would normally create using the Graph Toolbar. When you are creating a drawn object with a macro command, the position for the object is specified by stating how many pixels it should appear from the upper left corner of the graph background. A pixel is the smallest dot that Windows can display on your screen. You can create drawn objects with {CREATEOBJECT}. The following command activates a graph window and creates a line near the upper left corner of the graph:

{GraphEdit "PROFITS"}

{CREATEOBJECT "Line",0,0,25,25}

Dialog controls are objects in a dialog window. When creating a dialog control using a macro command, the position is also specified by stating how many pixels it should appear from the upper left corner of the dialog window. You can create dialog controls with {CREATEOBJECT}. For example, this command creates a push button in the active dialog window:

{CREATEOBJECT "Button",43,41,58,77}

Floating objects are SpeedButtons and floating graphs. Unlike graph objects and dialog controls, the position of a floating object is specified as an offset from a cell in the notebook. The offset is specified in twips; each twip is 1/1440th of an inch. You can create floating objects with {FLOATCREATE}. For example, the following macro command creates a SpeedButton that is half an inch from the left edge of A:A1:

{FLOATCREATE "Button",A:A1,720,0,A:B2,720,360,"Bt1"}

In this example, A:A1,720,0 specifies that the upper left corner of the button is in A:A1, and is 720 twips from the left side of the cell (half an inch), as well as 0 twips from the top of the cell. A:B2,720,360 specifies that the lower left corner of the button is in A:B2, 720 twips from the left side of A:B2, and a quarter inch (360 twips) from the top of A:B2.

After creating an object with a macro command, use {SETPROPERTY} to set its name or {GETPROPERTY} to store its name in a cell; then you can change its properties with macro commands at any time.

Selecting, positioning, and sizing objects

After creating a dialog control or floating object, they are selected, so you can reposition them or change their property settings. There are three commands that select Quattro Pro objects:

1.	You can use {SELECTBLOCK} to select a block and change or read its properties.

2.	You can use {SELECTOBJECT} to select graph objects or dialog controls. When a graph object or dialog control is selected, you can use {MOVETO} and {RESIZE} to move and resize it.

3.	You can select a floating object with {SELECTFLOAT}. When a floating object is selected you can use {FLOATMOVE} and {FLOATSIZE} to move and resize it.

Changing/reading property settings

You can use {SETPROPERTY} and {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to change property settings of Quattro Pro objects. For example, the following macro selects a block and changes its text color:

{SELECTBLOCK A:A1..C22}

{SETPROPERTY "Text_Color",5}

You can also change a property setting without selecting the block using the following command:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "A:A1..C22.Text_Color",5}

You can use {GETPROPERTY} and {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} to read property settings. {GETPROPERTY} reads settings of the selected object; {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} lets you read property settings without selecting an object.


Accessing Other Notebooks in Macros

You can use links in macros just as you would in formulas. Macros can run macros in other notebooks, access data from them, or store user input in them.

If you run a macro that is in a different notebook, such as a macro library, the macro behaves as though it were stored in the active notebook; block coordinates entered in dialog boxes refer to the active notebook. However, coordinates stored in the macro as arguments to a macro command refer to the macro library. For example, {BRANCH A1} branches to cell A1 of the macro library, not the active notebook. To refer to a block in a different notebook, use linking. For example, the following command branches to page B, cell A1 of the notebook MACROS:

{BRANCH [MACROS]B:A1}

To refer to a block in the active notebook, precede its coordinates with empty brackets. For example, {BRANCH []A1} branches to cell A1 in the active notebook.

See Also

Linking Notebooks

Relative references

Using Macro Libraries


Self-Modifying Macros

You can use macro commands and text formulas to create self-modifying macros (also called dynamic macros) that alter themselves while running. For example, to save the active notebook under the name ACCTx.WB1, where x is a value stored in cell A5, enter the following text formula into a cell:

+"{FileSaveAs ""ACCT"&@STRING(A5,0)&".WB1""}"

The result of this formula runs as a macro command. For example, if cell A5 contains the value 5 in the previous example, Quattro Pro runs {FileSaveAs "ACCT5.WB1"}; if cell A5 changes to 10 and the notebook recalculates, Quattro Pro runs {FileSaveAs "ACCT10.WB1"}.

You can also use macro commands to change a portion of the macro while it is running. The next example shows a macro that uses {GET} to convert user keystrokes into macro actions.

cell_type	b

type_indic	{INDICATE @UPPER(@CELLPOINTER("type"))}

{LET cell_type,@cellpointer("type")}

{IF cell_type="l"}{INDICATE LABEL}

{IF cell_type="b"}{INDICATE BLANK}

{IF cell_type="v"}{INDICATE VALUE}

{GET next_key}

{IF @UPPER(next_key)="{ESC}"}{BRANCH clear_indic}

next_key	{Esc}

{BRANCH type_indic}

clear_indic	{INDICATE}

{QUIT}

You can use these concepts to create powerful macros that completely change themselves based on their environment. See Types of Formulas for more information on text formulas.


Using Macro Libraries

The best way to store macros is in a macro library, a special notebook reserved for macros. You can use it to store macros you want to access from any notebook. There are many advantages to storing macros in a library:

It simplifies linked access.

It makes it easier to keep track of where the macros are.

If Quattro Pro cannot find the macro you specify within the active notebook, it searches through all open macro libraries until it finds it.

The macros do not interfere with the notebook data and vice versa.

Using one set of macros for a group of notebooks saves disk space.

If there is a set of macros you do want to insert into individual notebooks, you can store them in a library, then copy the macros into notebooks as you need them.

You can have a separate set of macros for each application or type of notebook you work with.

To create a macro library,

1.	Open a new notebook. (You can also use an existing notebook.)

2.	Create the macros to store in it (or copy them to it from another notebook).

3.	Right-click the notebook title bar and choose Macro Library.

4.	Choose Yes to define the active notebook as a macro library.

5.	Choose OK to save the change.

6.	Choose File|Save to save the macro library.

Note:	It is a good idea to keep only one macro library open at a time. If two open libraries contain a macro with the same name, it is difficult to predict which macro will run. Quattro Pro searches only open macro libraries for macros; closed libraries are ignored.

Use Window|Hide (or the macro command that emulates it, {WindowHide}) to hide a macro library. You can also use Medium password protection to ensure that a macro library is always hidden; see Assigning a Password to a File. This prevents novices from altering the macro library. If a hidden macro library is also a system notebook, it remains open even when all other notebooks have been closed; see Creating System Notebooks.

See Accessing Other Notebooks in Macros for a discussion of how addressing is handled in a macro library.

See Also

Linking Notebooks

Relative References

Running Macros


Running Macros

To run a macro,

1.	Choose Tools|Macro|Play.

2.	If desired, use Macro Library to specify the name of the notebook containing the macro. This displays a list of macros available under Macros.

3.	Choose the name of the macro to run from Macros or choose Location and enter the macro's block coordinates. If the macro is in another notebook, use full linking syntax (for example, [LIBRARY]A:C26).

4.	Choose OK to run the macro.

The MACRO indicator appears on the status line while a macro runs. When Quattro Pro runs a macro, it begins with the first cell in the macro block. It continues down through the column, interpreting everything it encounters as part of the macro, until it finds

an empty cell

a cell containing a value

the {QUIT} macro command

the {RETURN} macro command

an invalid macro entry

At that point, the macro stops and control returns to the user. Leave an empty cell, {QUIT}, or {RETURN} after each macro in a notebook, or the macro will try to interpret labels below the macro as commands.

If the macro contains an error, Quattro Pro beeps, displays an error message, and stops the macro. You can use the debugger to pinpoint and correct macro errors.

To stop a macro while it is running, press Ctrl+Break and choose OK to clear the break message and return to Ready mode.

Note:	If the Ctrl+Break key has been disabled with {BREAKOFF}, you will not be able to interrupt the macro. If you need to use {BREAKOFF} in the macro, add it as a last step after debugging the macro.

Suppressing screen redraw

By default, Quattro Pro does not show the actions a macro performs while it is running (this makes the macro run faster). To see the actions a macro performs, right-click the application title bar and choose None from the Macro property's Macro Suppress-Redraw option. For a complete discussion of screen suppression, see {PANELOFF} and {WINDOWSOFF}.

Running macros from Windows

You can run a macro as you load Quattro Pro by specifying its name after you enter QPW and a file name from the Program Manager or the DOS command line. For example, the following DOS command starts Windows, loads Quattro Pro, retrieves the notebook named EXPENSE, and runs the macro named \F:

WIN QPW EXPENSE \F

Only QPW EXPENSE \F is necessary when using the Program Manager's File|Run command. Windows applications that support Dynamic Data Exchange can make Quattro Pro run macro commands; see their documentation for more details.

See Also

About DDE Macro Commands

Attaching Macros

Quattro Pro for DOS Macros

Using Startup and Exit Macros


Attaching Macros

Many objects in Quattro Pro can have macros attached to them that run when the user performs some action (clicks a button, activates a control, changes a value). There are two ways to assign a macro to an object:

Using properties. You can use the properties of SpeedButtons and graph buttons to specify what macro should run when they are clicked. See Creating SpeedButtons and Creating a Graph Button for details.

Using link commands. Many objects in a dialog window can run macros using link commands. See Working with Link Commands for a complete discussion of object linking and the DOMACRO link command. You can also attach link commands to menu commands created by {ADDMENU} and {ADDMENUITEM}. See Making Menu Commands Act for details.

Attaching a macro to a key

If the macro you are creating is used often, you can give it a special block name that makes it easier to run: name it with a backslash (\) followed by a letter of the alphabet (A-Z). (Use the naming methods described in Typing Macros.) Then you can run the macro from the keyboard by pressing Ctrl and that letter (in either uppercase or lowercase). Because there can be only 26 of these macros (one for each letter of the alphabet), reserve them for macros you use often. Note that some of these macros may override accelerator keys like Ctrl+X and Ctrl+C.

Note:	Macros assigned to Alt keys in the DOS version of Quattro Pro run in the Windows version using the Ctrl key.

See Also

Running Macros


Creating SpeedButtons

You can use the SpeedButton tool [image] on the Main Toolbar to add buttons (called macro buttons or SpeedButtons) that run macros in a notebook. To create a SpeedButton,

1.	Choose the SpeedButton tool from the Main Toolbar.

2.	To create the SpeedButton in a default size, just click. The button appears, with its top left corner at the position you clicked.

To create the control in a specific size, hold down the left mouse button and drag the pointer. As you drag, a bounding box indicates the size of the button; release the mouse button to create the SpeedButton.

3.	There are two ways to change the appearance of the button:

You can paste a graphic image onto the button: copy a Windows bitmap into the Clipboard, select the SpeedButton (to select a SpeedButton, right-click it and press Esc), and choose Edit|Paste.

You can change the text appearing on the button: right-click it and choose the Properties command, choose Button Properties, then choose Label Text, and enter the text to display on the button. Choose OK to set the new button title.

4.	Right-click the SpeedButton and choose the Properties command, choose Button Properties, then choose Macro. Enter the macro commands to run when the button is clicked. You can use {BRANCH} or {Subroutine} to run a macro in a notebook. Choose OK to save the macro.

See {FLOATCREATE} for information on creating SpeedButtons using macro commands.

Once a SpeedButton is created, you can right-click it, choose the Properties command, and choose Button Properties to change the properties listed in the following table:

Property	Description

Macro	Macro commands to run when the button is clicked. For example, {BEEP}{SHIFT+DOWN 3}. You can use Execute Dialog to specify a dialog box to display (discussed next).

Label Text	The text titling the button.

Border Color	The color of the button's border.

Box Type	The thickness of the button's border, and whether it has a shadow.

Object Name	The name of the object. Used in object linking to manipulate its properties.

You can use the Execute Dialog option of the Macro property to make the SpeedButton display a dialog box. Using this option replaces whatever macro is assigned to the button with a {DODIALOG} command. To display a dialog box with a SpeedButton,

1.	Right-click the SpeedButton and choose the Properties command, choose Button Properties, then choose Macro.

2.	Click Execute Dialog.

3.	Choose the name of the dialog box to display from the Activate Dialog list box.

4.	Choose Result Cell and point to a cell in the notebook. After the dialog box is closed, this cell contains 1 or 0. The value 1 means the dialog box was closed by OK; the value 0 means it was canceled.

5.	Choose Values Block and point to a block in the notebook that contains initial settings for the dialog box. When the dialog box is closed, its final settings are written back into this block. (See Setting a Control's Value for more information on the setting block.)

6.	Choose OK to create the {DODIALOG} command that displays this dialog box.

7.	Choose OK to save the macro.

You can make a text box in a graph run macros during a slide show (making it into a graph button) using its Graph Button property; for more information on creating graph buttons, see Creating a Graph Button.

See Also

Attaching Macros

Creating a Graph Button

Quattro Pro for DOS Macros

Using Startup and Exit Macros


Using Startup and Exit Macros

Sometimes it is helpful to run a macro each time you open or close a notebook. For example, you can "stamp" the current date and time or open another notebook after closing one. You can also run a macro each time you start Quattro Pro. For details, see these topics:

Notebook Startup Macros

Notebook Exit Macros

Application Startup Macros


Notebook Startup Macros

To create a notebook startup macro, enter the macro into a notebook and name it _NBSTARTMACRO. Each time you open a notebook, Quattro Pro looks for a macro with that name and runs it, if found. If that macro is not found, Quattro Pro looks for the startup macro name entered as a Macro property in the application Object Inspector; \0 is the default. (See Running a Macro When a File Opens for information on changing the startup macro name.)

When the startup macro is renamed in the application Object Inspector, the old startup macro name no longer runs automatically in any notebook. For example, if you set the startup name to AUTOSTART, macros named \0 would no longer run automatically; they would have to be renamed AUTOSTART.

Note:	To ensure that a startup macro runs in a notebook regardless of whether it is linked to another, begin the macro with {ESC}. This cancels the dialog box that appears when opening a notebook containing links. You can use Notebook|Update Links to access linked values or to load supporting notebooks after accessing the file.

See Also

Using Startup and Exit Macros


Notebook Exit Macros

Notebook exit macros run after you give the command to close a notebook. To create a notebook exit macro, enter the macro into a notebook and name it _NBEXITMACRO. When you close a notebook containing a macro with that name, Quattro Pro branches to the macro before closing. It is up to the macro to make sure any ongoing operations are completed and ready for exit before it closes the notebook.

See Also

Using Startup and Exit Macros


Application Startup Macros

There are two ways to launch a macro each time you start the application. You can specify an autoload file and the startup macro it contains in the application Object Inspector (see Notebook Startup Macros), or you can define a startup macro in QPW.INI. The .INI method is useful for linking add-ins and performing other procedures at startup without loading an autoload file.

To use the .INI method,

1.	Open QPW.INI in a text editor (make a backup copy first).

2.	Type the expression InitMacro= followed by a series of macro statements (up to 255 characters). To launch a longer macro, use the {BRANCH} command following InitMacro=.

3.	Save QPW.INI as an unformatted text file.

For example, this statement loads two add-ins, DLL1 and DLL2:

InitMacro={DLL.LOAD DLL1}{DLL.LOAD DLL2}

InitMacro expressions can be used with {ADDMENUITEM}, {ADDMENU}, {MESSAGE}, and similar macro commands to change the application interface or deliver information to users when they start Quattro Pro.

See Also

Using Startup and Exit Macros


Quattro Pro for DOS Macros

If you have written macros using menu-equivalent commands such as {/ Block;Copy} in the DOS version of Quattro Pro, you can run them in Quattro Pro without modification. (See the Quattro Pro for DOS User's Guide for more information on menu-equivalent commands.)

To run Quattro Pro for DOS macros written with keystrokes, such as /EC,

1.	Right-click the application title bar.

2.	Choose Macro, then click the Slash Key combo box and and select Quattro Pro - DOS.

3.	Choose OK to save the change and return to the active window.

This also lets you press the slash key (/) to display a menu system that is keystroke compatible with Quattro Pro for DOS.

Macros assigned to Alt keys in the DOS version of Quattro Pro run in the Windows version using the Ctrl key.

See Also

1-2-3 Macros


1-2-3 Macros

To run keystroke macros written for 1-2-3 (release 2.x and 3.x) within Quattro Pro,

1.	Right-click the application title bar.

2.	Choose Macro, then click the Slash Key combo box and select 1-2-3/R 2.01.

3.	Choose OK.

4.	To run a macro, choose Tools|Macro|Play from the Quattro Pro menu, or press the slash key (/) and choose Worksheet|Macro|Execute.

Macros assigned to Alt keys in 1-2-3 run in Quattro Pro using the Ctrl key.

1-2-3 menus will display as the macro issues commands. For example, /GT displays the 1-2-3 menu's graph types. However, Quattro Pro dialog boxes will appear where appropriate.

Note:	Be alert when executing 1-2-3 macros containing {?} statements--you may want to change those statements to {MENUCALL} statements, and create macro menus for the corresponding 1-2-3 menu choices. This ensures that the macro will still run within 1-2-3.

If Quattro Pro encounters a macro command it cannot understand, or that is not supported, an error message appears.

See Also

Quattro Pro for DOS Macros


Debugging Macros

Debugging is the process of isolating and fixing problems in a macro. Quattro Pro contains a powerful utility for debugging macros. With the debugger, you can

run macros in slow motion (step by step), pausing as long as you want between steps

set breakpoints to pause a macro when it reaches a given cell or satisfies a given condition

run macros at full speed until reaching a breakpoint, then either continue in slow motion or at full speed until the next breakpoint

monitor, or trace, changes to specific cells as a macro runs

Isolating a problem in a long macro is not simple at regular speed. For this reason, the debugger uses a special mode called Debug. In Debug mode, Quattro Pro runs a macro step by step, pausing for a signal from the mouse or keyboard before going on to the next step. This way, you can monitor each phase of the macro.

To run a macro in Debug mode, choose Tools|Macro|Debugger (or press Shift+F2 or the Pause key). This activates Debug mode and displays the DEBUG indicator on the status line. Then run the macro to debug.

See Also

Running Macros

Setting Breakpoints

Specifying Trace Cells

The Debug Window


Debug Window
The Debug Window

When running a macro in Debug mode, a debug window appears in the bottom half of the screen. The first cell of the macro appears in the middle of the debug window, and the MACRO indicator appears on the status line.

The debug window is divided into two sections:

The top (macro) section contains at most three rows. The middle row displays the macro cell running. The top row displays the previous macro cell, if any, and the third row displays the next macro cell, if any. The macro command about to run is highlighted.

The bottom (trace) section displays the contents of trace cells specified using Trace, and it shows how the macro affects them. See Specifying Trace Cells for more about trace cells.

The debug menu

The menu bar at the top of the debug window shows the following debug commands:

Breakpoints	lets you specify up to four cells or blocks where you want to pause the macro.

Conditional	lets you specify up to four cells that contain logical formulas, such as +A3=10; when the formula becomes true, the macro returns to running step-by-step.

Trace	lets you specify up to four cells whose contents you want to monitor while a macro is being debugged.

Edit	lets you change the macro you are debugging without leaving DEBUG mode.

Go	runs the macro until it reaches a breakpoint or finishes.

Terminate	stops the macro and removes the debug window from the screen (this is the same as pressing Ctrl+Break).

Reset	removes breakpoints and trace cells set with the Breakpoints, Conditional, and Trace commands.

Stepping through a macro

To run the first command of the macro, click in the debug window or press Spacebar. Clicking repeatedly steps through each macro command until an error is pinpointed. To run the rest of the macro at full speed, choose Go or press Enter.

See Also

Running Macros


Setting Macro Breakpoints

If you know most of a macro is correct, you can use breakpoints to run parts of a macro at full speed and then enter Debug mode. Standard breakpoints pause the macro when the breakpoint cell is reached. Conditional breakpoints pause the macro when the result of a logical formula in the conditional breakpoint cell is true. Up to four standard breakpoints and four conditional breakpoints can be set at one time.

Standard breakpoints

When debugging a macro containing a standard breakpoint, Quattro Pro runs the macro at full speed until it reaches a breakpoint, then pauses the macro. To resume stepping through the macro, click in the debug window; to continue at full speed until the next breakpoint or the end of the macro, choose Go.

Note:	If there are several macro commands in the breakpoint cell, you may need to choose Go more than once to make the macro run at full speed.

To set a standard breakpoint,

1.	Choose Breakpoints. Quattro Pro displays four breakpoints.

2.	Choose the breakpoint to set.

3.	Choose Location and specify the cell or block where you want the macro to stop. If you specify a block, Quattro Pro uses its first cell.

4.	Sometimes a problem appears after many repetitions of the same commands in a loop macro. If this is the case, you can set a pass count to indicate how many times to pass through the breakpoint before stopping. Choose Pass Count and specify the number of passes. The default, 1, tells Quattro Pro to stop every time it passes through the breakpoint. Setting it to 2 makes Quattro Pro stop every other pass. Choose OK to set the breakpoint and return to the debug window.

5.	Repeat steps 1 through 4 to set additional breakpoints.

Breakpoints in action

The following macro includes a loop that continuously increments a single-cell block called COUNTER.

counter	0

is_done	+COUNTER>=100

\m	{LET counter,0}

again	{; increment counter}

{LET counter,counter+1}~

{BRANCH again}

If you specify the cell containing {BRANCH again} as the first breakpoint and leave the pass count at 1, the macro stops at the {BRANCH} command each time it goes through the loop. When you choose Go, it continues, incrementing the counter cell by one. In the top of the debug window, the selector highlights the {BRANCH} command, indicating that it is the next command.

If you specified a pass count of 5 for the first breakpoint in this example, then every time you choose Go, five loops occur, and the counter increments from 0 to 5 to 10 and so on.

Conditional breakpoints

Conditional breakpoints stop the macro when the result of a logical formula becomes true. In the previous figure, the cell is_done contains a logical formula. (The cell containing the formula is formatted so that the formula, rather than the value calculated, appears.) is_done is false (has a value of 0) until 100 or more loops occur. If this cell is specified as a conditional cell, the macro pauses when the counter reaches 100.

You can set up to four conditional breakpoints per notebook. To set a conditional breakpoint,

1.	Choose Conditional to display a menu of conditional breakpoints.

2.	Choose the conditional breakpoint to set.

3.	Specify the cell containing the condition, and choose OK to set the breakpoint and return to the debug window.

4.	Repeat steps 1 through 3 to set additional conditional breakpoints.

Conditional breakpoints can be extremely valuable. Suppose you have a macro loop that does some date calculations and you want it to pause whenever December is reached. If the date is in cell A5, assign the first conditional breakpoint to a cell containing the following formula:

@MONTH(A5)=12

As long as the formula in the condition cell is true (has a value of 1), the macro runs in step-by-step mode. Once the formula is false (has a value of 0), choose Go to let the macro continue until the next conditional formula evaluates as true. This process repeats until all conditional breakpoints are passed.

Clearing trace cells and breakpoints

To remove all breakpoints (standard and conditional) and trace cells set for the notebook, choose Reset from the debug window. You can remove a standard breakpoint by setting its pass count to 0.

See Also

Debugging Macros


Specifying Trace Cells

Macros often affect the contents of one or more cells. By tracing these cells, you can see what the macro is doing. Quattro Pro lets you specify up to four trace cells, whose addresses and current values show during debugging in the debug window. Quattro Pro updates the debug window as the contents of the trace cells change.

To set a trace cell,

1.	Choose Trace from the debug window.

2.	Choose the trace cell to set (1st Cell through 4th Cell).

3.	Specify the cell to trace and choose OK to set the trace cell and return to the debug window.

To specify additional trace cells, repeat these steps.

Editing macro cells

Once you have pinpointed a problem, you can correct it by

1.	Choosing Edit from the debug window.

2.	Pointing to or entering the address of the cell to edit using Cell.

3.	Editing the contents that display in Content.

4.	Choosing OK to save the changes and return to the debug window.

See Also

Debugging Macros


Exiting Debug Mode

When a macro finishes running in Debug mode, the debug window closes, but Debug mode remains in effect, as shown by the DEBUG indicator. To exit Debug mode, choose Tools|Macro|Debugger, press Shift+F2, or press Pause.

To stop a macro before debugging finishes, choose Terminate from the debug window or press Ctrl+Break. Then you can debug another macro or exit Debug mode.

Note:	When the debug window displays, part of the notebook is obscured. You can move the debug window to see the data it covers.

See Also

Debugging Macros


Building Menus

Quattro Pro offers a variety of macro commands to add and delete menus and menu commands from the active menu bar. The following topics give details:

What is a Menu?

Adding Menus to the Menu Bar

Replacing the Menu Bar

Using Command Definitions

Naming a Menu Command

Making Menu Commands Act

Menu Hints and Help

Assigning a Shortcut Key

Graying Menu Commands

Inserting Check Marks

Deleting Menus

Adding and Deleting Menu Commands

Changing Command Properties

Menu Design Tips


What is a Menu?

A menu is a collection of onscreen lists that manipulate an application. Each list contains menu items the user can choose to perform commands (such as saving a file) or display other menus (called submenus or cascading menus). The following table lists terms associated with menus:

Term	Meaning

menu bar	A line at the top of the application window that displays menu commands

menu	An onscreen list of items the user manipulates to communicate with the program.

menu command	An item on a menu the user can choose to perform actions (such as displaying a dialog box, saving a file, or displaying another menu).

menu path	The sequence of menu commands chosen to perform an action or display a dialog box. To enter menu paths in a macro command, enter the sequence of menu commands separated by forward slashes. For example, /File/Save As.

dimmed	Describes a menu command that shows in a lighter color (usually gray instead of black) and is not selectable. Also known as an unavailable or grayed menu command.

divider line	A horizontal line in a menu that separates groups of menu commands.

hint	A line of text appearing on the title bar to provide help when a menu command is highlighted.

link command	An action performed by a menu command when chosen.

shortcut key	A keystroke listed to the right of a menu command's name that the user can press to choose it. Also known as an accelerator.

underlined letter	An underlined character in a menu command's name. The user can press this letter to choose the menu command (if its menu is displayed). Also known as a mnemonic.

Included with Quattro Pro is a file called QUIKSAVE.WB2. This file contains a macro that replaces the standard File|Save command. The notebook page named Complete in QUIKSAVE.WB2 contains the macro and information that creates the new menu.

The other topics in this section use QUIKSAVE.WB2 to help explain creating menus and menu commands.

Note:	You can use the macro commands {MENUBRANCH} and {MENUCALL} to produce pop-up menus that disappear once an item is selected.

See Also

Building Menus

Designing Menus


Adding Menus to the Menu Bar

Changing the menu bar is a process of removing unneeded menus and menu commands with {DELETEMENU} and {DELETEMENUITEM} and then adding your own with {ADDMENU} and {ADDMENUITEM}.  The macro _add_menu below uses {DELETEMENUITEM "/File/Save"} to remove the standard Save command from the File menu. The command {ADDMENU "/File/Save As",A1..G6}} adds the new Save command to the File menu ("/File/Save As" indicates that the menu is to be inserted above Save As on the File menu).

_add_menu	{DELETEMENUITEM  "/File/Save"}

{ADDMENU "/File/Save As",A1..G6}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Depend_On","No,Yes,No,No,No,No"}

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Help_Line","Save the active notebook"}

{WindowHide}

{ADDMENU} uses a menu block to construct the menu added. The menu block contains labels that define the menu; the block Complete:A1..G6 in QUIKSAVE.WB2 is a menu block. The first row of the menu block contains the title of the menu to create. This title is preceded by MENU. In QUIKSAVE.WB2, MENU &Save specifies that the name of this menu is Save. Each row in the menu block (except for the first) defines one menu command using a command definition. Each cell within a command definition specifies one aspect of the command to add; every command definition is a row of six adjacent cells.

The first row of a menu block defines the menu command that displays the menu. Any command definitions that begin in the first column of the menu block display on this menu. In the page named Complete in QUIKSAVE.WB2, cell A1 defines the command that displays the menu as Save. The commands Replace and Backup (defined by the labels in row A2..F2 and A3..F3) are on the Save menu because their definitions start in the same column as MENU &Save.

To make a command in the menu block display a menu, start the command definitions below it one column to its right. For example, in QUIKSAVE.WB2, starting the definitions of Same Directory, Backup Directory, and Options in the second column of the menu block has these results:

makes Backup a command that displays a menu

places Same Directory, Backup Directory, and Options on the Backup menu

Starting the command definition of Backup Directory in the third column would make Same Directory a menu containing the Backup Directory command.

Note:	You can only add new menus to the menu bar on either side of the Edit and Tools menus--that is, one position to the left or right of the Edit menu and one position to the left or right of the Tools menu. The area between these menu positions is reserved for context-sensitive menus that change depending on the active window. Likewise, you cannot delete menus within the context-sensitive area, either. You can add menu items to menus between the Edit and Tools menus, but the new menu items will be swapped out of the menu when the context changes.

See Also

Building Menus


Replacing the Menu Bar

You can make a menu block the active menu bar using {SETMENUBAR}, which takes one argument (the menu block). The commands on the menu replace any commands on the menu bar; the command defined in the first row of the menu block is ignored. To restore the original menu bar, use the macro command {SETMENUBAR} without an argument. If Quattro Pro is in Developer mode you can press Ctrl+Shift+N to restore the original menu bar.

See Also

Building Menus

Using Developer Mode


Using Command Definitions

The following topics describe how to work with the six settings (cells) that make a command definition.  Because many of these cells contain long labels, the sample file QUIKSAVE.WB2 breaks down the menu block setting-by-setting, starting with the notebook page Names. The page Complete shows the actual menu block used by the macro _add_menu.

Naming a Menu Command

Making Menu Commands Act

Menu Hints

Assigning a Shortcut Key

Graying Menu Commands

Inserting Check Marks

See Also

Building Menus


Naming a Menu Command

The first cell of a command definition contains the name of the command. Its underlined letter is preceded by an ampersand (&). (The user can press this key to choose the command.) For example, entering &File makes the menu command name display as File in the menu. See the page named NAMES in QUIKSAVE.WB2 for examples.

You can use {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to change a menu command's name after it is created. See Changing Command Properties for details.

See Also

Building Menus

Using Command Definitions


Making Menu Commands Act

The second cell of a command definition contains a link command similar to those in dialog boxes (see The Object Link Dialog Box) or the name of a macro to run when the menu command is chosen. See the page named LINKS in QUIKSAVE.WB2 for examples.

To run a macro stored in a notebook, enter MACRO MacroName into the cell, where MacroName is the name of the macro to run. For example, the menu command Backup Directory shown below uses the label MACRO [QUIKSAVE]floppy_backup to make the menu command run the macro floppy_backup when chosen.

A	B	C

1	MENU &SAVE

2	&Replace	ON Clicked DOMACRO {FileSave}

3	&Backup

4	&Same Directory	MACRO [QUIKSAVE]local_backup

5	&Backup Directory	MACRO [QUIKSAVE]floppy_backup

6	&Options...	MACRO [QUIKSAVE]set_options

Menu commands can display the dialog boxes in Quattro Pro's normal menus using command equivalents. For example, the following link command makes the menu command behave like Block|Copy:

ON Clicked DOMACRO {BlockCopy?}

In menu commands, a link command is typed instead of specified with a dialog box (see Working with Link Commands for information on link commands in dialog boxes, which are created by Tools|Links). The following table lists the events a menu command's link command can detect:

Event	Description

Clicked	The user chose the command from the menu.

Init	The menu containing the menu command is about to display.

Activate	The menu command has just been highlighted.

Deactivate	The menu command has just been unhighlighted.

You can attach multiple link commands to the same menu command; enclose the first command in quotation marks, and separate the link commands with commas in the cell. If you do not want to assign any actions to a menu command, leave the second cell of its definition blank.

The remainder of this section lists the syntax of link commands that you can enter into a menu block. In each link command, event is one of the events listed above, Object.ObjectProperty is a string identifying the object and property setting to change or read, and Property is the name of a property in the menu command. See Changing Command Properties for more information on the syntax of Object.ObjectProperty and Property.

EXECUTE

Format: ON event EXECUTE Object.Action

Performs Action on Object when event occurs. Object is a dialog box or dialog control.

DOMACRO

Format: ON event DOMACRO MacroText

Runs the macro MacroText when event occurs. MacroText is a series of macro commands. The following link command saves the active notebook when the menu command is chosen:

ON Clicked DOMACRO {FileSave}

RECEIVE

Format: ON event RECEIVE Property FROM Object.ObjectProperty

Sets the menu command's Property property to Object's ObjectProperty when event occurs. ObjectProperty and Property do not have to be the same. The following link command enables the menu command whenever Tools|Macro is enabled:

ON Init RECEIVE Enabled FROM /Tools/Macro.Enabled

SEND

Format: ON event SEND Property TO Object.ObjectProperty

Sends the current setting of the menu command's Property property to Object's ObjectProperty when event occurs. ObjectProperty and Property do not have to be the same. The following link command stores the menu command's title in the the current cell:

ON Clicked SEND Title TO Active_Block.Value

SET

Format: ON event SET Setting TO Object.ObjectProperty

Sets Object's ObjectProperty to Setting when event occurs. Setting is a value appropriate to the property (for example, Yes or Beveled Out). The following link command sets the active notebook's zoom factor to 150 percent:

ON Clicked SET 150 TO Active_Notebook.Zoom_Factor

See Also

Building Menus

Using Command Definitions


Menu Hints and Help

The third cell of a command definition contains a brief help message that displays on the title bar when the menu command is highlighted. Use these hints to make the menus easier to understand. See the page named HINTS in QUIKSAVE.WB2 (in the \SAMPLES directory) for examples.

You can also use the third cell of a command definition to link the command to a Help topic in a Windows Help file that you have created. When the command is highlighted, you can press F1 to display the Help topic.

To link the command to Help, add a backslash after the hint message and type the WinHelp context string for the Help topic followed by an at-sign (@) and the name of the Help file. The name of the Help file cannot include a path; the file must be located in the Quattro Pro directory. For example, the following hint links the Replace command to a Help topic with the context SAVE_REPLACE in the Help file QUIKSAVE.HLP:

Overwrite the notebook file on disk\SAVE_REPLACE@QUIKSAVE.HLP

For details on how to create Windows Help files, refer to the Microsoft Windows Software Development Kit (SDK).

See Also

Building Menus

Using Command Definitions


Assigning a Shortcut Key

The fourth cell of a command definition contains a shortcut key that the user can press to choose the command. If an item does not need a shortcut key, leave the fourth cell blank. See the page named HOTKEY in QUIKSAVE.WB2 for examples.

Separate each component of the keystroke with the plus sign (+). For example, if a shortcut key is comprised of Alt and the F2 key, enter it as Alt+F2. If a shortcut key is used by Quattro Pro for some other operation, that operation occurs first.

You can assign shortcut keys to existing commands using {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}; see Changing Command Properties for details.

See Also

Building Menus

Using Command Definitions


Graying Menu Commands

The fifth cell of a command definition specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the menu command is available. Enter Yes or No for each area, separated by commas, in the following order: Desktop, Notebook, Graph window, Dialog window, Input line, Objects page. The string must be enclosed in quotes. A menu command dims when it is not available and the user cannot select it. To make a command available in all areas, leave this cell of the definition blank. See the page named DEPENDENCIES in QUIKSAVE.WB2 for examples. The new Save menu in QUIKSAVE.WB2 is only available when a notebook window is active.

You can also disable an existing menu command with {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}; see Changing Command Properties for details.

See Also

Building Menus

Using Command Definitions


Inserting Check Marks

The sixth cell of a command definition contains Yes if the menu command should appear checked when it is displayed. If this cell is blank (or contains No), the item displays unchecked. You can check or uncheck a menu command after its creation using {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}; see Changing Command Properties for details.

See Also

Building Menus

Using Command Definitions


Deleting Menus

You can remove a menu from the menu bar using {DELETEMENU}, or hide it using {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}. For example, the following macro removes the Data menu:

{DELETEMENU "/Data"}

See Changing Command Properties for information on using {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to hide menu commands.

Note:	You cannot delete menus on either side of the Edit and Tools menus--that is, one position to the left or right of the Edit menu and one position to the left or right of the Tools menu. The area between these menu positions is reserved for context-sensitive menus that change depending on the active window.

See Also

Building Menus


Adding and Deleting Menu Commands

{ADDMENUITEM} uses the same information as a command definition but adds a single menu command to the menu bar. Each of the six settings discussed earlier is passed as a separate argument to {ADDMENUITEM}.

You can use {DELETEMENUITEM} to remove a single menu command from the menu bar. {DELETEMENUITEM} only removes menu commands that do not display a menu; use {DELETEMENU} to remove menus. You can hide a menu command using {SETOBJECTPROPERTY}; see Changing Command Properties for details.

Note:	You can add and delete menu items from any menu, but if you change a context-sensitive menu (all menus between Edit and Tools on the menu bar), the change only applies to the menu in the active window. For example, suppose you use a macro to change the View menu when the notebook window is active. If you then open a graph window, the graph View menu appears--without the change. If you want the change to apply to that View menu as well, you must run the macro again.

See Also

Building Menus


Divider Lines

You can use divider lines to group related commands in a menu. The horizontal line between Define Group and Combine in the Tools menu is an example of a divider line. To insert a divider line in a menu block, insert a row between the definitions of the two menu commands it divides. In this row (and in the same column as the names of the command being divided) enter eight hyphens (-) as a label. You can also add divider lines with {ADDMENUITEM}. For example, to place a divider line before Update Links in the Notebook menu, use

{ADDMENUITEM "/Notebook/Update Links","--------"}

See Also

Building Menus


Changing Command Properties

Each command on the menu bar has properties you can manipulate. To identify a menu command in @PROPERTY or a macro command, enter the menu path separated by forward slashes (/). Do not include ellipses (...). For example, the following formula returns whether Edit|Paste Special is dimmed on the menu:

@PROPERTY("/Edit/Paste Special.Grayed")

Each menu command has the following properties:

Title is set to the name of the menu command; the command's underlined letter is preceded by an ampersand (&). Use this property to rename a command or change its underlined letter. For example, the following command changes the underlined letter of File to i:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File.Title","F&ile"}

Checked is set to Yes when a check mark is displayed by the command. Use this property to check and uncheck menu commands. For example, the following command checks Edit|Copy:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/Edit/Copy.Checked","Yes"}

HotKey is set to the shortcut key that you want to invoke the command with. For example, the following macro assigns Shift+F11 to File|Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.HotKey","Shift+F11"}

Help line is set to the hint that appears on the title bar. For example, the following command removes the hint from File|Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Help_Line",""}

Depend On is set to the areas in which the menu command is available, using the same syntax as dependencies in a menu block (see Graying Menu Commands for details). For example, the following command makes File|Close available everywhere except the desktop:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Close.Depend_On", "No,Yes,Yes,Yes,Yes,Yes"}

Grayed is set to Yes to dim the menu command and disable it. For example, the following command dims File|Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Grayed","Yes"}

Enabled is set to No to disable a menu command without dimming it. For example, the following command enables File|Save:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/File/Save.Enabled","Yes"}

Disabled behaves like Enabled, but it is set to No to enable the menu command and Yes to disable it.

Hidden is set to Yes to hide the menu command. For example, the following command hides Tools|Numeric Tools:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "/Tools/Numeric Tools.Hidden","Yes"}

Show is the same as Hidden, but it is set to No to hide the menu command and Yes to display it.

See Also

Building Menus


Menu Design Tips

Building a menu is fairly easy, but designing one can present challenges to the novice UI builder. Here are some design guidelines for creating a menu:

Keep menus short. Users lose track after about eight menu commands. Use submenus to put more commands in a menu.

Make menus on the menu bar shallow. Count how many steps it takes to choose a command; keep it down to two or three.

Group menu commands logically. Keep related commands near each other (for example, do not put Save As in the Windows menu when Save is in the File menu). If menu commands are often chosen in sequence, arrange them in the order you choose them, from the top down. Use divider lines to separate groups visually.

Put the most common menu commands at the top. Putting common menu commands at the top makes them easier to find.

Keep it short. The text of menu commands should be as short as possible without being cryptic.

Try to make the first letters of menu commands unique. Then you can make the first letter of each menu command its underlined letter (see Naming a Menu Command). This is easier for the user to remember.

Use ellipses (...) correctly. If a menu command leads to a dialog box, its text should end with an ellipsis. By Windows convention, an ellipsis means a dialog box follows, both in menu commands and in dialog boxes.

Only dim menu commands when appropriate. A menu command should be dimmed when it is irrelevant to what the user is currently doing. See the description of {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} for information on dimming menu commands.

Do not tamper with File, Edit, and Help too much. Windows users expect a consistent set of items in these menus.

See Also

Designing Menus

Preparing to Build an Application


New Features
New Features in Quattro Pro 6.0 for Windows

New Notebook Features

New Graphics Features

Menu Command Changes


New Notebook Features

OLE 2.0 support

Quattro Pro supports OLE 2.0 as both a client and server. You can use in-place editing of linked and embedded objects and drag and drop objects between Quattro Pro and other OLE 2.0 applications; see Using OLE and DDE.

1-2-3 compatibility

You can run Quattro Pro using 1-2-3 (Release 2.01) menus; this also lets you run 1-2-3 keystroke macros within Quattro Pro; see Using Alternative Menu Systems and 1-2-3 Macros.

Integrated messaging

File|Send, Publish, and Subscribe let you send messages, notebooks, and other files and objects with a variety of available transports: MAPI, VIM, MHS, MCI, cc:Mail, LAN, and NGM; see Workgroup Desktop Topics.

A new look

For easier use, Quattro Pro has a new look. Menus are simplified and commands regrouped; see Menu Command Changes. A new Property Band speeds up formatting. Border arrows point to the current row or column. When you scroll a notebook page, scroll indicators show which row or column is represented by the position of the scroll thumb. Tab scroll controls, which act like VCR controls, simplify page scrolling. In all list boxes, type the first letter of an item to scroll the list.

Command additions and changes

Edit|Paste Special includes Paste Format and Paste Link, depending on what you are pasting. Table Query accesses external data tables without using Database Desktop and includes SQL support. A new command, Table Link, inserts an external data table in the notebook. (@TABLELINK is the equivalent @function.) Block|Insert now works on rows, columns, and pages; use Notebook|Insert for files. The Spell Checker and Scenario Manager work with modeless dialog boxes instead of Toolbars. For a list of other changes, see Menu Command Changes.

Drag and Drop enhancements

Drag and drop graph series and graphs; drag and drop of slides from one slide show to another; drag and drop objects between applications; Ctrl+drag to copy an object, Shift+drag to link an object.

New Experts

Three new Experts help you create budgets, what-if tables, and textual slide shows.

New Coaches

Several new Coaches help you use new features.

Formula Composer

Helps you build complex formulas with @functions; see Using the Formula Composer..

Online Help enhancements

You can print multiple @function and macro command help topics at once; see Printing a Group of Reference Topics.

Autobackup

A new application property, Autobackup, lets you automatically save to a temporary backup file as you work. Then, if there should be a power failure or other system problem, you can recover your work as it was last saved; see Creating Temporary Backup Files.

In-cell data entry and editing

You can still press F2 to enter Edit mode, but the easiest way to edit data is to point to the cell where it was first entered and double-click. Then, add and delete characters as usual; press Enter when done. See Editing Entries.

In-cell word-wrap and alignment

In-cell formatting simplifies text display. You can enter long text strings into narrow columns without truncation or use of label prefix characters, then control alignment within each cell. You can also align and orient text vertically as well as horizontally; see Aligning Entries in Cells.

Multiple currencies

You can format numbers as different currencies in the same notebook. For example, you can show one block of currency values in dollars ($) and another block in pounds (£); see Setting Numeric Format.

Renaming page tabs

Double-click a page tab to rename it.

Block name enhancements

Blocks names can be up to 64 characters long and can include spaces. Any upper- or lowercase letters used when naming a block will be preserved, but block names are not case-sensitive in formulas. See Using Named Blocks.

Date parsing

Lets you enter dates directly without Ctrl+Shift+D; use a + before formulas that resemble dates (for example, +4/12). See Entering Dates and Times.

Navigation tools

The Navigate button in the input line helps you use block names in formulas or go to a named block in the notebook. See Using Block Names in Formulas.

Navigation tools on the Modeling Toolbar help you select and zoom blocks automatically. See Using SpeedSelect, the Navigation Tools, and Zoom To Fit.

Colored line drawing

The Line Drawing property settings now include Line Color. Use the Shading property in the block Object Inspector to change data and cell colors; see Drawing Lines Around Blocks.

Improved SpeedFill customization

Dialog boxes let you define and use custom series from lists or formulas, or Quattro Pro can fill a block for you based on a seed value in the upper left corner of the block; see Using SpeedFill.

Custom formats for SpeedFormat

You can create new formats based on example blocks in a notebook, then apply them to other blocks. SpeedFormat now recognizes subtotals; see Using SpeedFormat.

Notebook templates

When you create a notebook with File|New, you can now apply a notebook template to the file. Templates are provided for a range of financial tasks. You can also create your own custom templates. See Using Notebook Templates.

A new default file extension

The default file extension for this version of Quattro Pro is .WB2. You can open files in other formats, but will be prompted to save them back in the .WB2 format to preserve any special formatting or OLE objects created in the current version.

Enhanced file-handling dialog boxes

When certain other applications are loaded--such as WordPerfect, WordPerfect Office, GroupWise, or an ODMA-compatible document management system--Quattro Pro uses different dialog boxes for opening, saving, and linking to files. For details, click the Help button in the dialog box.

Floating object enhancements

Graphs, text boxes, OLE objects, and other floating objects in notebooks can be locked (protected from being moved, resized, edited, or deleted); see Protecting Floating Objects from Change. They also can have drop shadows and be transparent (notebook cells are visible through them); see Adding Drop Shadows to Floating Objects and Making Floating Objects Transparent. To increase speed when printing and displaying notebooks with many floating objects, you can choose to hide floating objects or display placeholders instead; see Hiding Parts of the Notebook Display.

Used-file list

The last five files you opened or created appear at the bottom of the File menu. To open one, just click its name.

Paths in title bars

Notebook title bars can now include path names, so you can distinguish among files from different directories with the same name; see Enabling Full Path Titles.

New @TABLELINK function

There is one new @function, @TABLELINK, which is equivalent to Tools|Database Tools|Table Link.

New macro commands

There are several new macro commands. See New Macro Commands for a list; see Macro Command Index for the full list of commands.


New Graphics Features

Graph Gallery

Format graphs using predefined graph templates and color schemes; see Using the Graph Gallery.

Graph Advisors

Choose from selected styles of graphs and graph templates that match your stylistic criteria; see Choosing Graph Styles Using Advisors.

Bullet charts

Create graphs and slides with bulleted lists based on spreadsheet data; see Creating Bullet Charts.

In-place graph editing

Double-click a floating graph to edit it directly on the notebook page instead of in a graph window; see Editing Graphs.

Notebook draw layer

Draw lines and shapes, and create text boxes, on a layer above the notebook page; see Drawing Objects on the Spreadsheet.

Light Table window enhancements

You can resize the Light Table window, edit multiple slide shows at the same time, show slides in different sizes, or show slide names only; see Editing a Slide Show.

Master slides

Select a master slide to serve as the background for all slides in a slide show; Selecting a Master Slide.

Master Slide Gallery

Use a collection of predesigned templates to format a master slide; see Using the Master Slide Gallery.

Cell-referenced text in text boxes

To simplify editing of text in text boxes, type a reference to a notebook cell containing a label; see Referencing a Cell on a Notebook Page.

3-D text

Show any graph text object in three dimensions; see Creating 3-D Text.

New 3-D Floating Marker graph type

Plot a series of numbers using floating 3-D shapes against a 3-D grid; see Line Graphs.

New riser style for 3-D bar graphs

Change the solid shape used to represent each series in a 3-D bar graph; see Customizing Bar Graphs.

New bitmap fill styles

In addition to Crop To Fit and Shrink To Fit, use Tile To Fit and 3-D Perspective (for 3-D graph walls) bitmap fill styles; see Filling an Object with a Bitmap.

New Block tool on the Graph Toolbar

Add a picture of a linked spreadsheet block to a graph; see Adding Spreadsheet Blocks to a Graph.


Menu Command Changes

Some Quattro Pro 1.0 and 5.0 commands have moved to new menus in this version. They have new command equivalents, but the original command equivalents still run in macros. Menus change depending on the active window. Choose a menu to view its changes:

File menu

Edit menu

Block menu

Data menu

Tools menu

Graph menu

Draw menu

Toolbar menu

Dialog menu

Window menu

The Property menu has been moved to the Property Band. To view it, click Property on the Property Band (or press Alt+P).

The Help menu is unchanged.

A new menu, View, shows different views of the current window or activated object. Another new menu, Slide Show, appears when the Light Table is open.


File Menu Changes

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

File|Printer Setup	File|Print|Select Printer

File|Named Settings	File|Print|Page Setup

These commands have been removed in Quattro Pro 6.0 for Windows:

File|Retrieve

File|Close All

File|Save All

See Also

File Menu


Edit Menu Changes

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Edit|Clear Contents	Edit|Clear Values

Edit|Paste Link	Edit|Paste Special|Paste Link

Edit|Paste Format	Edit|Paste Special

Edit|Goto	Edit|Go To

Edit|Search and Replace	Edit|Find and Replace

Edit|Define Style	Notebook|Define Style

See Also

Edit Menu

Notebook Menu


Block Menu Changes

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Block|Insert|File	Notebook|Insert

Block|Move Pages	Notebook|Move Pages

Block|Insert Break	Edit|Insert Break

Block|Object Order	Tools|Object Order

See Also

Block Menu

Notebook Menu

Edit Menu

Tools Menu


Data Menu Changes

The Data menu has been removed. Its commands are now on the Block, Tools, Notebook, and File menus.

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Data|Sort	Block|Sort

Data|Restrict Input	Block|Restrict Input

Data|Form	Tools|Database Tools|Form

Data|Query	Tools|Database Tools|Query

Data|Table Query	Tools|Database Tools|Table Query

Data|Parse	Notebook|Parse

Data|What-If	Tools|Numeric Tools|What-If

Data|Frequency	Tools|Numeric Tools|Frequency

Data|Database Desktop	Tools|Database Desktop

Data|Data Modeling Desktop	Tools|Data Modeling Desktop

Data|Workgroup Desktop	File|Send, File|Publish, File|Subscribe,

Tools|Object Exchange|Manage Pages,

Tools|Object Exchange|Address Book,

Tools|Object Exchange|Poll Now

See Also

Block Menu

Tools Menu

Notebook Menu

File Menu


Tools Menu Changes

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Tools|Define Group	Notebook|Define Group

Tools|Combine	Notebook|Combine

Tools|Extract	Notebook|Extract

Tools|Import	Notebook|Text Import

Tools|Update Links	Notebook|Update Links

Tools|Analysis Tools	Tools|Numeric Tools|Analysis Tools

Tools|Optimizer	Tools|Numeric Tools|Optimizer

Tools|Solve For	Tools|Numeric Tools|Solve For

Tools|Advanced Math|Regression	Tools|Numeric Tools|Regression

Tools|Advanced Math|Invert	Tools|Numeric Tools|Invert

Tools|Advanced Math|Multiply	Tools|Numeric Tools|Multiply

See Also

Tools Menu

Notebook Menu


Graph Menu Changes

The Graph menu is now the Graphics menu. Some options have been renamed.

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Graph|Type	Graphics|Type

Graph|Series	Graphics|Series

Graph|Titles	Graphics|Titles

Graph|New	Graphics|New Graph

Graph|Edit	Graphics|Edit Graph

Graph|Insert	Graphics|Insert Graph

Graph|Delete	Graphics|Delete Graph

Graph|Copy	Edit|Copy, Edit|Paste Special

Graph|View	Graphics|View Graph

Graph|Slide Show	Graphics|Run Slide Show

See Also

Graphics Menu

Edit Menu


Draw Menu Changes

The Draw menu doesn't appear in this version of Quattro Pro. Its commands appear on the Tools menu.

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Draw|Group	Tools|Group

Draw|Ungroup	Tools|Ungroup

Draw|Bring Forward	Tools|Object Order|Bring Forward

Draw|Send Backward	Tools|Object Order|Send Backward

Draw|Bring to Front	Tools|Object Order|Bring to Front

Draw|Send to Back	Tools|Object Order|Send to Back

Draw|Align	Tools|Align

Draw|Import	Tools|Import Graphics

Draw|Export	Tools|Export Graphics

See Also

Tools Menu


Toolbar Menu Changes

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Toolbar|Dock	Tools|Dock

Toolbar|Assign Macro	Tools|Assign Macro

See Also

Toolbar Menu

Tools Menu


Dialog Menu Changes

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Dialog|Connect	Tools|Connect

Dialog|Links	Tools|Links

Dialog|Align	Tools|Align

Dialog|Order	Tools|Object Order

See Also

Dialog Menu

Tools Menu


Window Menu Changes

Quattro Pro 1.0/5.0 Command	Quattro Pro 6.0 Command

Window|Panes	View|Panes

Window|Locked Titles	View|Locked Titles

See Also

Window Menu

View Menu


Using OLE and DDE

This section explains how to use two Windows features--Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) and Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)--to share information among applications and ensure automatic updating when information changes.

Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts

Embedding Information

Linking Information

Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Dragging Objects

Pasting Objects

Inserting Objects

Using and Changing Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

Playing, Editing, and Opening Objects

Updating OLE and DDE Links

Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects

Using OLE Automation Features

Creating and Using Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

Note:	Besides using OLE and DDE to share data among applications, you can also use notebook links to share data between Quattro Pro notebooks; for details, see Linking Notebooks You can also share information with others using mail systems and networks; for details, see Workgroup Desktop Help.


Embedding and Linking with OLE and DDE

You can use data and objects from one application in a different application, either by embedding or linking. Linking and embedding work through two Windows features--OLE and DDE. This version of Quattro Pro supports OLE 2.0 as a container (client) and server, so you can edit OLE objects in place and drag and drop objects across applications to move or copy them. Quattro Pro also acts as a client and server for OLE 1.0 and DDE.

Several Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and conduct DDE exchanges, called conversations. For details, see OLE and DDE Macro Commands.

Application developers can use Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as a client. For details, see Using OLE Automation Features.

See Also

Dragging Objects

Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts


OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts

OLE object

An OLE object is a notebook block, text selection, graph, drawing or other document element that is inserted into a document (file) in another application by OLE embedding or linking, or DDE linking.

Server application

A server application is the application that provides, or is the source, of OLE or DDE objects inserted into another application.

Container application

A container application (or client) is the application that receives an OLE or DDE object provided by the server. Container applications are also called compound documents because they contain objects from other applications.


Embedding Information

Embedding information is inserting actual data into a container application's file, usually by pasting it with Paste Special or using Insert Object. The embedded information is saved in the containers data file. In contrast, when you link information, you only insert a reference to the information--the actual information remains in the server application. Quattro Pro uses OLE to embed (and link) data, pictures, sound clips, video clips, and other objects.

When you embed data, it is fully contained in the container application. If you give someone else a disk containing the container file, the data is included. However, if changes are made to the original source file, the embedded data is not updated.

If the server application is installed on your system and supports in-place activation for editing, you can edit OLE 2.0 objects in place or in the server application (see Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications for details). Embedded OLE 1.0 objects look similar, but when you double-click one, the whole server application loads for editing; in-place activation for editing is not available.

Choose embedding for information that is not likely to change, such as your company logo or a graph of last year's sales that uses final, unchanging figures. Or you might use embedding for data that does not need to be updated every time it changes. Since linked data updates when the source document changes, it is more convenient to use linking for information that needs to stay current. You might also want to choose embedding to ensure that data is stored with a certain type of object instead of in a source document.

You can only embed objects from applications that support OLE, and you can only embed Quattro Pro objects in applications that can act as OLE containers.

See Also

OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts

Linking Information


Linking Information

You can link information from one application to another. Linking does not insert the actual information--it inserts references to it. This enables links to be updated automatically whenever information changes. Unlike embedded objects, linked objects cannot be edited in place.

Choose linking (instead of embedding) for information that changes frequently, such as weekly sales figures. If linked files are open in both the container and server application, when you change data in the server application, the data in the container file is updated immediately. If the source data changes while the container is closed, the linked information is automatically updated as long as you checked Automatic Update when you created the link. Otherwise, you must update the linked information manually. For details, see Updating OLE and DDE Links.

You might also want to link to a very large object such as a bitmap, especially if it is used several places in a notebook. This can help keep the container file size smaller because the object is stored in the source file, not the container.

When you link data, the information itself remains in the server application data file, even though a copy appears in the container.

You can create links using OLE or DDE. OLE links are similar to DDE links--with both a container and server application open, when you change linked information in the server application, it is updated in the container. But OLE links can be created from within the container object, not just copied there. You can update OLE links by starting the server application from within the container. The linked document is immediately opened for editing. To update DDE links, you must start the server application in the usual way, then open the linked document manually.

When you open a file that contains DDE links, Quattro Pro checks whether all supporting DDE server applications are open. If not, the Hotlinks dialog box appears.

See Also

OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts

Embedding Information


Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

You can use Quattro Pro as a container for linked OLE objects and DDE links that update whenever you change data in an open server application. With OLE 2.0, you can also create or edit embedded OLE objects within Quattro Pro using commands and tools provided by the server. For example, suppose you insert an illustration from a standalone graphics application into Quattro Pro as an embedded OLE object. When you double-click the illustration, the menu bar and Toolbar change to offer commands and tools provided by the server so you can edit the illustration. The server application negotiates with the container--in this case, Quattro Pro--to determine which editing features appear. The results are different for each container-server combination. For more about in-place editing, see Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications. For embedded OLE objects, data is stored with the container, not the server.

Once you create an object you can move or resize it, lock it so it cannot be edited or deleted, change its border color and box type, add a drop shadow, or make it transparent.

You can also use QuickMenus to edit or open OLE objects and DDE links, change and update links, convert OLE objects or DDE links to another format (such as a bitmap), and play sound or multimedia objects. For details, see Using and Changing Objects and Links in Quattro Pro.

The following sections explain how to create OLE objects and DDE links in Quattro Pro.

Dragging Objects

Pasting Objects

Inserting Objects

See Also

Moving and Resizing Floating Objects

Protecting Floating Objects from Change

Making Floating Objects Transparent

Adding Drop Shadows to Floating Objects


Dragging Objects

To create an OLE object in Quattro Pro by dragging, select an object--text, data, or graphics--in another application and drag it into position in Quattro Pro. The application providing the object must support OLE 2.0. Each application has different control keys or settings that let you cut, copy, or link the object by dragging. Frequently, dragging without a key moves the object, while you can copy it by pressing and holding Ctrl while you drag the object. If you press Shift and drag the object, it is usually linked instead of embedded. For details, refer to manuals and Help for each application you are using.

See Also

Inserting Objects

Pasting Objects


Pasting Objects

To create an OLE object or DDE link in Quattro Pro by pasting,

1.	Copy text, data, or graphics from another application to the Clipboard--usually with Edit|Copy or the Copy button.

2.	Select a cell in Quattro Pro to indicate the placement of the upper left corner of the object.

3.	Choose Edit|Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box appears.

4.	To create a link between the server application and Quattro Pro, choose Paste Link. To create an embedded object or perform an ordinary paste operation, choose Paste.

5.	Depending on the type of object in the Clipboard and whether you chose Paste or Paste Link in step 4, youll see a list of formats in the As field.

To create an OLE object, choose the format labeled Object or Document. Usually this format contains the name and version number of the server application.

Choose any other format to create a DDE link (if you chose Paste Link in step 4) or to perform an ordinary Paste operation (if you chose Paste in step 4).

6.	Sometimes its convenient to display an object as an icon. Then, it takes up very little space until you double-click it or right-click it and choose Open or Edit. To display an object as an icon, check Display As Icon.

7.	Choose OK to paste the object in the requested format.

See Also

Dragging Objects

Inserting Objects


Inserting Objects

You can create OLE objects in Quattro Pro using the Insert Object button [image] on the Draw Toolbar or the Edit|Insert Object command. You can create a brand new embedded object or create an embedded object or link from an existing file. To insert objects,

1.	Select a cell in the spreadsheet page approximately where you want to place the object (you can always move it later).

2.	Click the Insert Object Button on the Draw Toolbar, or choose Edit|Insert Object. The Insert Object dialog box appears.

3.	Decide whether you want to create a new embedded object, or create a linked or embedded object from an existing file. Choose Create New or Create From File, depending on your decision.

If you choose Create New, the Object Type field lists the types of objects you can create. These are OLE servers available on your system. Choose one. To display the new object as an icon, check Display As Icon. This option can be convenient if you want to save space onscreen and do not need to view the information at all times.

If you choose Create From File, you can type the file path and name in the File field or choose Browse to locate it visually. By default, the inserted object is embedded. Check Link to create a linked object. To display the object as an icon, check Display As Icon.

4.	Choose OK.

If you chose Create From File, the file appears in the notebook as an OLE object. It is selected but not activated for in-place editing. To edit the object, double-click it.

If you chose Create New, a new blank object appears. If the server application supports in-place activation for editing, the object is activated for in-place editing. Otherwise, a new window opens; the server is running in it. Use the server's editing commands and tools to create and manipulate the data you want.

When you are finished with in-place editing, click outside the object to deactivate it, then save the file as usual. If the entire server appeared for editing, choose File|Update or File|Exit in the server application. (If you use File|Exit, be sure to reply Yes to the update prompt.)

The server's commands and tools go away and an embedded OLE object appears in the notebook page. Now you can move or resize the object or change its properties; see Changing Floating Object Properties. To restore the OLE server's editing features, double-click the OLE object in Quattro Pro.

See Also

Dragging Objects

Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

Pasting Objects


Using and Changing Objects and Links in Quattro Pro

When you right-click an OLE or DDE object, a QuickMenu appears. The Properties command at the top lets you change the objects properties; see Changing Floating Object Properties for details. The command at the bottom is different for each object. Depending on the type of object, this command lets you "play," edit, and open objects and object servers; update links; or convert objects to other formats. These options are also available through the last command on the edit menu when an embedded or linked object is selected.

The following sections describe these actions.

Playing, Editing, and Opening Objects

Updating OLE and DDE Links

Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects


Playing, Editing, and Opening Objects

When you display the QuickMenu for an embedded or linked object and choose the command at the bottom, you will probably see Edit and Open. You might also see Play for a video, animation, or sound object. These commands let you edit, view, or use the object, depending on what the server defines as appropriate actions for it:

Edit activates an OLE 2.0 object for in-place editing, or opens the server for other editable objects. When you are through editing in place, click outside the object to deactivate it and preserve the changes.

Open opens the server so you can edit or view the object. When you are finished working in the server application, choose File|Update or File|Exit.

Play activates the object and makes it perform. Sometimes you need to wait until the object completes the action. Or, you might be able to choose a control within the application or click outside to close it.

See Also

Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects

Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

Updating OLE and DDE Links


Updating OLE and DDE Links

If you choose the last QuickMenu command for a linked object, these options appear on the submenu:

Change Link lets you specify another file and path as the source of the link. For example, if the linked file is moved to a different directory, choose this to relink to the file in its new location. For information on using this standard file handling dialog box, see File-Handling Options.

Update Link copies the latest data from the server application.

See Also

Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects

Playing, Editing, and Opening Objects


Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects

You can convert most embedded objects into other formats. For example, you can usually convert a graph into a bitmap or other picture format. Linked objects usually must be converted in the source document.

You can also change the activation effect for many objects, especially those that can be "played" as well as edited.

To convert an object format or change the activation effect, right-click the object and choose the last QuickMenu command and choose Convert.

To permanently change the object format, choose Convert To. Then, choose one of the formats in the Object Type list. If you want the selected object to appear as an icon, check Display As Icon. When you choose OK, the object is permanently converted to the selected format. For example, if you change an embedded OLE object to a picture object, you will not be able to edit the object in the server anymore.

Tip:	You can use Convert To when you want to change an object to display as an icon, or restore it from an icon to its original format. Choose Convert To and check or uncheck Display As Icon, but do not change the format in the Object Type field.

Some objects can appear in more than one server for editing when activated. If more than one activation choice is available forthe object you can choose Convert To, then check Activate As to change the current activation effect. When you choose OK, the object is set to activate in the selected server.

See Also

Changing Object Formats and Activation Effects

Playing, Editing, and Opening Objects

Updating OLE and DDE Links


Creating and Using Quattro Pro Objects in Other Applications

To create embedded and linked Quattro Pro OLE objects in container applications, start the application, then follow a procedure similar to those used to create embedded objects in Quattro Pro. If you are using the Clipboard, you will usually use Edit|Paste Special. Insert|Object or Edit|Insert Object are often used to create objects in other applications.

To drag and drop a new object, use a procedure similar to that described in Dragging Objects. Select an object in Quattro Pro--a graph or block of text, for example--and drag that object into the other application. Use Ctrl while dragging to copy the object. Use Ctrl+Shift while dragging to link it.

To paste an object, use a procedure similar to that described in Pasting Objects. Copy data or a graph from Quattro Pro to the Clipboard, switch to the client application, then use its Paste Special command to choose one of the Quattro Pro formats to paste.

To insert an object, the steps are similar to those given in Inserting Objects. Use the container application's Insert Object command, choose Quattro Pro Notebook or Quattro Pro Graph from the server list, then choose Update or Exit in Quattro Pro's File menu.

See Also

Creating and Using Objects and Links in Quattro Pro


Editing OLE Objects in Container Applications

You can edit OLE 2.0 objects in place or in the server application. OLE 1.0 objects are edited in the server application, but you can open the server application by double-clicking an object in the container. DDE links are edited in the server application, started from outside the container application.

Editing Objects in Place

To edit an embedded Quattro Pro OLE object in a container application, double-click it. If the application supports OLE 2.0, Quattro Pro tools and editing commands appear so you can modify the object. This is called in-place activation. While you are editing an embedded object in place, it appears with a crosshatched border around it.

When you finish editing in place, close the object by clicking outside its border within the container document. Quattro Pro editing tools and commands are removed and appropriate container application features are restored. To save the edits, save the container document.

Editing Objects in the Server Application

You can also open the server application from within the container and edit objects in it. To do this with Quattro Pro as the server, select a Quattro Pro object in the container document. Try right-clicking to display a menu. If the container supports this feature, you will see commands similar to these--"Open OLE Object" and "Edit OLE Object." Otherwise, look for similar commands on the Edit menu. Choose the Open command to open Quattro Pro with the active object ready to edit. Choose the Edit command to edit the Quattro Pro object in place.

When you are editing an embedded Quattro Pro object in Quattro Pro, it appears in its own window and looks like any Quattro Pro notebook or graph except for its name. Instead of the usual notebook or graph name, the edited object's title bar indicates the type of object and the container file's name. When you finish editing, close the object as you would a notebook.

When you are editing an embedded Quattro Pro object within Quattro Pro--not in place--these command changes appear in the File menu: Save changes to Update (if you edit the notebook, Update transfers the changes to the container file), and Save As changes to Save Copy As.

You can choose Update to immediately show your edits in the container application. Or, you can wait until you are finished editing and are closing the embedded object. To save your edits to the embedded object in the container, choose File|Save from the container (not from Quattro Pro, the server application).

To save a snapshot of the embedded object to another file, choose File|Save Copy As from Quattro Pro. You can only save a copy--the original belongs to the container.

If you're editing a linked OLE object, the menus don't change. Changes in the server notebook are immediately reflected in Quattro Pro, unless Quattro Pro is set for manual updating. Updating also occurs each time you load a file containing an OLE link to Quattro Pro; Quattro Pro runs in the background to update all links. This may take a few seconds.

See Also

OLE and DDE Terms and Concepts


Importing and Exporting Files

These topics describe how to use and create files in other formats:

Translating Files

Translating Allways Files

Translating Impress Files

Translating 123 Release 2 or 3 Files

Translating Multiplan Files

Translating Database Files

Saving Text Files

Importing Text

Files with Commas and Quotes

Breaking Text into Data Fields (Parsing)

Using Format Lines

Using Input and Output Blocks

Inserting a File into a Notebook

Combining Files

Copying Combined File Data

Operating on Combined File Data

Extracting Part of a Notebook


Translating Files

Quattro Pro can translate many spreadsheet and database program formats. The table below shows the types of files Quattro Pro can translate--in addition to its default format, .WB2--and the file extensions to use for each type. Quattro Pro looks at the extension to determine the type of translation to perform.

To save a file for use with one of these programs, include the appropriate extension when you save it and make sure the File Type field is set to the appropriate type. For example, to save the notebook MYFILE for use with Symphony version 1.2, use File|Save As and specify the file name MYFILE.WRK.

To load a file created by one of the following programs, include the file's extension when you choose File|Open.

Extension	Program

.WB2	Quattro Pro for Windows, version 6.0

.WB1	Quattro Pro for Windows, version 1.0 and 5.0

.WQ1	Quattro Pro for DOS

.WQ2	Quattro Pro for DOS, version 5.0*

.DB	Paradox, version 3.5 - 5.0

.DB2	dBASE II

.DBF	dBASE III, III+, and IV

.XLS	Excel

.WKS	1-2-3, version 1A

.WK1	1-2-3, version 2.x

.WK3	1-2-3, version 3.x, 1-2-3 for Windows

.WKE	1-2-3, educational version

.WRK	Symphony, version 1.2

.WR1	Symphony, version 2.0

.RXD	Reflex, version 1

.R2D	Reflex, version 2

.DIF	VisiCalc

.SLK	Multiplan (SYLK)

.TXT	tab-delimited text

* = Open only, not save

If you have Quattro Pro for DOS, you can load SQZ files by saving them as .WQ1 files first.

Caution: Only the contents of the current page (or if it is empty, the first nonempty page) of a notebook are saved when translating to all formats except 1-2-3 3.x (.WK3).

If you are loading a .WK3 file, Quattro Pro also loads any Impress file it includes. If you are loading other 1-2-3 files, Quattro Pro loads any included Impress or Allways files.

If you omit the file-name extension while loading a file, Quattro Pro looks for the file name you specify with the following extensions in this order: the File Extension setting in the File Options property (in the application Object Inspector), .WB2, .WB1, .WQ2, .WQ1, .WK1, .WK3, .WKS, and .XLS. This means you can load a file from some spreadsheet products without specifying the extension as long as a file with the same name does not exist with a higher-ranking spreadsheet extension.

Quattro Pro supports the DIF file format developed by Software Arts Products Corporation, which is used by VisiCalc. Although other programs may import/export DIF files, they are not necessarily the same file format. Consequently, they may not be compatible with Quattro Pro.

Caution: If you use unique Quattro Pro features like linking or presentation-quality graphics, you may see a warning when you try to save the file to a format other than Quattro Pro Version 6 format. The warning states which features will be lost when the file is translated. If you do not want to lose the features, save the file as a QPW v6 (*.WB2) file (Quattro Pro Version 6 format).

See Also

Tools|Database Tools|Query

Importing and Exporting Files

Importing Text Files

Setting the File Extension

Translating 123 Release 2 or 3 Files

Translating Allways Files

Translating Database Files

Translating Impress Files

Translating Multiplan Files


Translating Allways Files

Spreadsheets created with 1-2-3 version 2.x and designed using Allways can be loaded directly into Quattro Pro. When you load a .WK1 file that has a corresponding .ALL file, the Allways formatting is automatically added to the file.

Quattro Pro imports only .ALL files (not .AFS, .ALS, or .ENC files). To import multiple saved formats or font sets, create a separate .WK1 file for each saved format with a corresponding .ALL file. Quattro Pro imports the following Allways options:

These Format options: font selection, line style (the Layout|Options|Line-weight setting is used to gauge overall line thickness), shading, boldface, underline, and font colors. Quattro Pro converts up to 255 different combinations of font, boldface, underline, and italic. Any additional combinations convert to the font specified as Normal style.

Layout options: margins, titles, borders, line weight, paper type, and grid on printing.

The Print range option.

Worksheet options: column width and row heights.

Quattro Pro does not import the following:

Inserted graphs (because Allways only points to a graph stored in a separate .PIC file in its "inserted" graphs).

These Worksheet options: page breaks, column page breaks, and display zoom.

Label alignment with spillover to the left (usually found in centered labels).

The display (screen) colors.

These Layout options: page size and borders on the bottom.

These Print options: printer type, orientation, print settings, and port bin print options.

To save an Allways formatted file you previously imported, use File|Save to automatically save it with an Allways file, or use File|Save As to choose Impress or None (no format file).

See Also

For DOS Spreadsheet Users

Translating 123 Release 2 or 3 Files

Translating Files

Translating Impress Files


Translating Impress Files

Quattro Pro can now import 1-2-3 files created with either the WYSIWYG or Impress add-in.

When you retrieve a .WK1, .WKS, or .WK3 file that has a corresponding .FMT or .FM3 file, Quattro Pro asks if you want to read the .FMT or .FM3 file and apply the WYSIWYG/Impress formatting to it.

When retrieving a .WK1 or .WKS file, if there is a corresponding .ALL file in the current directory, you can choose to open it instead. If there is a corresponding .FMT file, Quattro Pro chooses it automatically, and asks you  to confirm the choice. The .ENC and .CNF files created by WYSIWYG/Impress are not imported.

Quattro Pro retrieves and applies some graph formats as well as text formats. Not all graph formats are retained, however. Quattro Pro imports the following WYSIWYG/Impress formats:

These Format commands: assigned fonts, lines (except shadow), shading, boldface, underline (except double or wide), italics.

Quattro Pro converts up to 255 different combinations of font, boldface, underline, and italic. Any additional combinations convert to the font used in Normal style in Quattro Pro.

Inserted graphs.

Blank graphs (usually containing annotations).

Named styles, but the descriptions are not preserved.

These Print settings: range, configuration/orientation, layout/compression (which converts to Print-To-Fit), layout margins, layout titles, and grid on printing.

Label Alignment (except left-side spillover).

The following Worksheet settings: row height, page breaks.

Colors (global negative, lines, text color).

Grid display.

Quattro Pro does not import the following formats:

Column page breaks.

Label alignment with left-side spillover.

Formatting embedded in text.

These Display options: colors, mode, font directory, rows, and options.

These Format options: line shadow and colors (except global negative, line, double or wide underline, and text color).

These Print Layout settings: page size and borders on bottom.

These Print settings: frame and settings.

The Print Configuration settings (printer type, port bin, and so on).

See Also

DOS Spreadsheet Users

Translating 123 Release 2 or 3 Files

Translating Allways Files


Translating 1-2-3 Release 2 or 3 Files

When loading a 1-2-3 version 2.x file, linking is converted to Quattro Pro's syntax, as shown in the following example:

+<<BUDGET.WK1>>B4 changes to +[BUDGET.WK1]B4

To import a 1-2-3 version 3.x file into Quattro Pro, just specify the .WK3 extension when you open or retrieve it.

If the only version 3-specific features in the 1-2-3 file are a 3-D worksheet or LMBCS characters, Quattro Pro opens it and converts it. If, however, there are other version 3-specific features in the 1-2-3 file, any of the following might happen:

Any @function not in Quattro Pro converts to the value of the original cell (string or numeric).

Any .WK3 graph feature not supported in Quattro Pro is lost.

Due to the way Quattro Pro stores numbers, any extremely large number (larger than 10 raised to the power of 308) converts to ERR, and any number smaller than 10 raised to the power of negative 308 converts to 0.

Numeric format of Automatic, Negative Color, Label and Parenthesis convert to the Quattro Pro format General.

Numeric formatting of blank cells will not be identical to the original once converted.

To export a Quattro Pro file to 1-2-3 version 3 format, save it with the .WK3 file extension and set the Save File As Type option in the Save File dialog box to 1-2-3 v3.x (*.WK3).

See Also

DOS Spreadsheet Users

Translating Allways Files

Translating Impress Files


Translating Multiplan Files

Since Multiplan does not save its files in .SLK format by default, you must do the following in Multiplan before translating the files in Quattro Pro:

1.	Choose Transfer|Options|Symbolic.

2.	Choose Transfer|Save, and save the file with the extension .SLK.

Alternatively, you could do the following to save the file in 1-2-3 format in preparation for translating to Quattro Pro:

1.	Choose Transfer|Options|Other.

2.	Choose Transfer|Save, and save it with the extension .WK1 or .WKS depending on your version of Multiplan.

See Also

Translating Files


Translating Database Files

Quattro Pro can translate files to and from dBASE, Paradox, and Reflex formats. You specify the file format you want by selecting its extension in the Save As dialog box.

dBASE II, dBASE III, and dBASE IV use the same file-name extension (.DBF) but different file formats. To save Quattro Pro files in different dBASE formats, select the format from the Save File As Type list.

When you load any database file into Quattro Pro, it converts database field names to spreadsheet labels that serve as column headings and assigns block names to the cells beneath each name.

When you save a Quattro Pro notebook in Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE format, a dialog box appears with options for ordering the spreadsheet data into a database file structure:

The Fields box lists database field names based on the data in the first row of the first spreadsheet page. If the first row contains data that is invalid as a database field name--for example, containing numbers, spaces, symbol characters, or duplicate labels--Quattro Pro uses the spreadsheet column letters to represent the field names. To change a field name, choose the default name in the Fields box and type a new name in the Name edit field.

To mark a field to be deleted, highlight it on the list and press Del. An asterisk appears next to the field name. To restore it, press Del again.

Use the Type settings to change the type of data contained in the column. The default setting is based on the spreadsheet data. If the Type is Numeric, you can specify a number of decimal points for the field.

Use the Width edit field to specify the number of characters in the structure for that field name.

The Write button proceeds with the translation to the database file format corresponding to the Save File As Type option you selected in the Save File dialog box.

See Also

Combining Files

Extracting Part of a Notebook

Translating Files


Saving Text Files

You can save the current page of a notebook as a tab-delimited text file. Choose File|Save or File|Save As and type the file name with extension .TXT in the File Name edit field and set Save File As Type to Text (*.TXT). To load it again, choose File|Open or Notebook|Combine.

To save an entire notebook as an undelimited ASCII file, see Printing to an ASCII File.

See Also

Combining Files

Translating Files


Importing Text

Importing Tab-delimited Text Files

To import a tab-delimited text file, use File|Open. A text file can have any extension except one reserved for other file formats.

File|Open loads the specified text file into a new notebook. To combine data in a tab-delimited text file with data in the active notebook, use Notebook|Combine. To insert a tab-delimited file into the active notebook without combining data, use Notebook|Insert.

Importing Text Files Without Tabs

Notebook|Text Import copies a text file into the active page of a notebook. Quattro Pro can import three types of text files with these dialog box options:

ASCII Text File imports a plain, unformatted text file. Quattro Pro converts the data into a single column of labels. Each line in the file becomes a label in a single cell.

Comma & " Delimited File imports a file that uses commas and quotes to separate text in rows. The delimiters are used to set up columns in the spreadsheet page.

Only Commas imports a file delimited only with commas.

Parse Expert imports a plain ASCII file and breaks it into columns, such as database fields, at the same time. Depending on how the text file is organized, if you use Parse Expert you might need to do some editing when the import is complete.

Note:	Do not use Notebook|Text Import to load Paradox, dBASE, Reflex, 1-2-3, Symphony, VisiCalc, or Multiplan files. Instead, use File|Open or Notebook|Insert File and specify the appropriate file extension (see Translating Files for details).

To import a text file,

1.	Select the upper left corner of the block where you want to place the imported data.

2.	Choose Notebook|Text Import.

3.	Choose the appropriate option: ASCII Text File, Comma & " Delimited File, Only Commas, or Parse Expert.

4.	Choose the file name you want using the techniques described in File Handling Options.

The data from the text file is copied into the active page starting with the active cell.

To export a tab-delimited text file, see Saving Text Files.

Plain Text Files

Text files contain straight, unformatted text. Before you import a text file, remove any special formatting characters such as bold, underlining, or centering.

Caution: Make sure no lines in the file are longer than 1022 characters, the maximum size of a cell. Characters beyond the 1022-character limit will not be imported.

Quattro Pro enters each line from the text file as a label in the first column of the indicated block (using columns to the right for spillover display). You can then break the long labels into a more usable format with Notebook|Parse. Blank lines in the imported file become empty cells.

Note:	Many word-processing programs produce files that contain special characters you may not be able to see. These characters may produce unwanted results. If your word processor has an option for creating plain text files, use it to create files you intend to import.

See Also

Breaking Text into Data Fields (Parsing)

Files with Commas and Quotes

Importing and Exporting Files

Translating Files

Using Format Lines

Using Input and Output Blocks


Files with Commas and Quotes

A comma-and-quote delimited file has the following characteristics:

Data is entered in lines, much like the rows of a spreadsheet page.

Types of data are separated (or delimited) on each line with commas.

Text strings are surrounded by quotation marks.

When Quattro Pro imports a comma-and-quote delimited file, it stores each delimited group of data in a separate cell. Data groups that are strictly numbers become value entries, data groups surrounded by quotes are stored as labels, and other entries are ignored.

Importing a file with the Commas Only option is similar to importing a comma-and-quote delimited file. Instead of requiring quotes around labels, Quattro Pro determines whether to enter the data as a label or a value depending on its first character.

See Also

Breaking Text into Data Fields (Parsing)

Importing and Exporting Files

Notebook|Text Import


Breaking Text into Data Fields (Parsing)

After importing a text file, you may need to parse the data into individual cells. Imported text files often require parsing because each line of text translates into a single label. Plain text files without commas, quotes, or other delimiters can usually be parsed with Parse Expert; try it first before you try this procedure (for details, see Importing Text).

The basic procedure for parsing a file is as follows:

1.	Select the first label to be parsed (the top left cell in the block of labels).

2.	Choose Notebook|Parse.

3.	Use the Create and Edit buttons to set up one or more format lines to indicate how you want to divide the labels.

4.	Use the Input edit field to specify the column of labels you want to parse, including all format lines.

5.	Use Output to specify the destination for the parsed labels and choose OK.

6.	If necessary, resize columns to display the data fully.

See Importing Text for information on the Parse Expert; it imports and parses text at the same time.

See Also

Importing and Exporting Files

Using Format Lines

Using Input and Output Blocks


Using Format Lines

You should place a format line in a new inserted row above the data to be parsed. It uses the following symbols to indicate how text below it will be translated into separate fields:

Symbol	Purpose

|	Begins a format line (shown in the input line only).

V	Begins a value.

L	Begins a label.

T	Begins a time value translated into a serial number.

D	Begins a date value translated into a serial number.

>	Continues an entry.

*	Indicates blank spaces that can be filled in by longer entries underneath the first.

S	Indicates to skip the character in this position, thereby deleting it from the parsed data (this symbol can be entered only by editing the format line).

Quattro Pro bases the format line on the first row of data. You can edit the line to parse the labels differently, and you can insert additional format lines to parse specific areas differently.

Creating Format Lines

To create a format line, select the first cell containing a label to be parsed, choose Notebook|Parse, and choose Create. A format line appears, moving the existing rows down. Click Format Line Example for details.

Tip:	Choose the block Font property to put the format line and the text to be formatted into a monospace font, such as Courier. This helps you make sure that the text in each column starts at the same position.

Editing Format Lines

To edit a format line, select the first cell containing the format line and choose Edit from the Notebook|Parse dialog box. Quattro Pro opens a dialog box containing a box for editing format lines.

Edit the format line in the edit field by clicking where you want to make a change and using standard editing techniques. The first line of the data is displayed so you can revise the format line to match the data properly. Choose OK to finish editing.

Using Multiple Format Lines

In some cases, you must use more than one format line. To create an additional format line,

1.	Select the top left cell of the data to be formatted with the new format line, and choose Create from the Notebook|Parse dialog box.

2.	A format line appears above the data, interpreting the numbers as values and the row headings as labels.

You can insert as many format lines as necessary. Each format line affects the text below it down to the next format line or to the end of the input block.

See Also

Breaking Text into Data Fields (Parsing)

Using Input and Output Blocks


Using Input and Output Blocks

Before you can parse data, you must indicate which block of data to parse and where to copy the parsed data. The input block is the column that contains the text you want to parse and the format line(s) used to parse it. (Remember that labels reside in a single column, even though they may spill over several.)

To specify the input block, click in the Input edit field of the Notebook|Parse dialog box, and select or type the block to parse. Make sure you include all format lines.

The output block is the destination block for the parsed data. To specify the output block, click in the Output edit field and select or type the top left cell or the entire block where you want the data to begin.

Quattro Pro uses whatever space the parsed data needs, overwriting cells if necessary. To be safe, first specify an output block in another part of the page or notebook where there is no data to be overwritten. Then, after you obtain the results you want, replace the original data with Block|Move or with the Clipboard commands.

Performing the parse

After importing the data, creating and editing format lines, and specifying input and output blocks, choose OK from the Notebook|Parse dialog box to perform the parse. Resize columns as necessary to reveal their full contents.

See Also

Block|Copy Command

Breaking Text into Data Fields (Parsing)

Edit|Cut Command

Edit|Paste Command

Using Format Lines


Inserting a File into a Notebook

You can copy an entire file into a notebook, pushing existing pages back to make room. Only pages containing data are inserted. To insert a file,

1.	Make sure the file you want to insert is closed.

2.	Select any cell on the page before which you want to insert the file.

3.	Choose Notebook|Insert.

4.	Choose the file name you want, using the techniques described in File Handling Options. If you want to insert a file translated from another program, include its file-name extension (see Translating Files for details).

5.	Choose OK.

6.	If the file has a password, a dialog box appears with space for entering it. Type the password and choose OK.

Every page in the inserted file that contained data is placed on a new page in the active notebook. If only one page is inserted, the page is given the name of the inserted file. If multiple pages are inserted, the new pages are named in the default letter sequence.

If the file is inserted within the boundaries of a named block or a block referenced by a formula, Quattro Pro expands block references to include the new pages.

Note:	If inserting a file would expand a named block or cell reference beyond the limit of a notebook (beyond page IV), the reference becomes ERR.

See Also

Combining Files

Extracting Part of a Notebook

Importing and Exporting Files


Combining Files

Notebook|Combine lets you copy all or part of a notebook into any area of the active notebook. Notebook|Combine does not erase the active notebook; it affects only the portion of the pages covered by the inserted block.

You can also perform arithmetic operations with Notebook|Combine, to add, subtract, multiply, or divide cells from one notebook to another.

Note:	If you make changes to a file to be combined into another file, save it first before combining. Notebook|Combine reads data from the stored notebook file, whether it is open or not.

If you prefer, you can copy cells directly from one notebook to another with Block|Copy or with the Clipboard commands. You can also perform arithmetic operations between cells with notebook links (see Linking Notebooks for details).

To combine files,

1.	If you intend to combine only part of a file with the active one, make sure you know the exact block name or coordinates from the source file.

2.	Select the receiving notebook. Then select the cell where you want the upper left of the source file to begin being copied. Make sure you have enough space so data will not be overwritten unexpectedly.

3.	Choose Notebook|Combine, and choose the appropriate option in the dialog box:

Copy inserts the exact contents of the incoming file.

Add adds the incoming values to the existing values.

Subtract subtracts the incoming values from the existing values.

Multiply multiplies the incoming values by the existing values.

Divide divides the existing values by the incoming values.

4.	Also in the Combine dialog box, choose Entire File to copy the entire file (including all pages) into the existing one, or choose Block(s) to copy a specified block (or blocks) from the file. If you choose Block(s), enter a block name or coordinates in the edit field. You can also specify a noncontiguous block by separating the subblocks with commas. (Because the block names are from another file, you cannot display a list of the names.)

5.	Choose the file name you want. See File Handling Options for details.

The contents of the specified file or block appear in the active notebook. If you copied the data, Quattro Pro also copies any properties such as alignment and numeric format. Column widths in the receiving notebook do not automatically adjust to correspond to the copied data; you can do this explicitly with the Fit button.

Notebook|Combine copies the contents of named blocks, but to avoid confusion with names in the active notebook, it converts references to named blocks into block coordinates.

Caution: Notebook|Combine overwrites any cells in the destination block, even if they are protected.

See Also

Adding Combined File Data

Block|Copy Command

Copying Combined File Data

Edit|Cut Command

Edit|Paste Command

Importing and Exporting Files


Copying Combined File Data

The Copy option of Notebook|Combine copies data directly from a file into the active notebook. The data is inserted starting at the position of the selector. If you specify the entire file, Quattro Pro copies only the block that contains data.

Tip:	If you create a notebook consisting of headings for particular pages in your notebooks, you could copy the headings into other notebooks and avoid having to retype the headings. To avoid overwriting data in the target notebooks, you would reserve the first few rows in all notebooks for headings, and enter the headings in those reserved rows in your headings notebook.

To insert the headings into the new notebook:

1.	Select cell A1 in the notebook where you need the headings.

2.	Choose Notebook|Combine.

3.	Choose Copy. Choose Entire File.

4.	Enter the name of the file containing the headings.

The headings are added to the top of the notebook.

With the Copy option of Notebook|Combine, references in formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even if they are absolute. If a formula refers to cells outside of the block being copied, the result may be inaccurate. To copy formulas' resulting values instead of the formulas themselves, use Block|Values on the file you are combining to copy them to another page first (see Block|Values for details). Then choose the Blocks option of Notebook|Combine to copy only the page with the values.

See Also

Combining Files

Importing and Exporting Files

Operating on Combined File Data


Operating on Combined File Data

The Add option of Notebook|Combine combines values in the inserted block with existing values in the notebook and calculates the sum.

The inserted block can contain formulas as well as values. However, the receiving notebook should contain only values--if it contains formulas, convert them to values (with Block|Values) before using the Add option. Addition will not occur in cells with formulas or labels.

Note:	Another way to add values between files is to create notebook links (see Linking Notebooks for details).

The Add option of Notebook|Combine is useful for combining files for a cumulative total; for example, to compile year-to-date figures from monthly notebooks. You could load one file, select cell A1, and combine the other files with the Add option of Notebook|Combine. A cumulative notebook showing year-to-date expense totals would be created.

Before you use the Add option, select the cell where you want the added data to start. Data will be added to values below or to the right of the selector.

If you add an entire file, Quattro Pro adds all cells that contain values. If you specify a block to add, Quattro Pro adds the values from that block only.

When adding values, make sure the source and destination areas are set up similarly; for example, put headings in the same position. The incoming data assumes the properties of the active notebook, except that it retains its numeric format.

Caution: Accurate selector placement is critical when adding combined values. If the selector is one cell off from proper alignment when you combine the files, the combined data may be useless. For this reason, save the active notebook before combining data. Then, if you do not get the results you want, you can retrieve the original file and try again.

When you add values with the Add option of Notebook|Combine, Quattro Pro follows these rules:

In the active notebook, cells that contain labels, formulas, ERR, or NA are not altered by the incoming data.

Value entries in the destination block of the receiving notebook are replaced by the sum of the original and incoming values.

When adding incoming values to those existing in the notebook, all incoming formulas convert to their end values, and labels and blank cells are ignored. Formulas resulting in ERR, NA, or strings are ignored also.

Subtracting, multiplying, or dividing data

The Subtract option of Notebook|Combine subtracts incoming values from values in the active notebook. The Multiply option multiplies the values together, and the Divide option divides active notebook values by the incoming values. Subtract, Multiply, and Divide have the same requirements and rules as Add.

See Also

Combining Files

Copying Combined File Data

Importing and Exporting Files


Extracting Part of a Notebook

Notebook|Extract saves part of a notebook to a separate file, leaving the original file intact.

If you prefer, you can open a blank notebook in a new window and copy a block of data to it with the Clipboard commands or with Block|Copy rather than extracting the block.

Notebook|Extract is similar to Block|Copy, with two major differences:

With Extract you can choose to copy values only. When you choose its Values option, the actual formulas are not copied--just the resulting values.

Extract saves the notebook's block names and graphs along with the specified block. Some block names or graphs may not be meaningful if they refer to cells outside the extracted block. You can delete them, reassign them, or ignore them.

The Notebook|Extract dialog box has Formulas and Values options. Formulas saves an exact copy of the block, including formulas. Values converts formulas to their end values.

When you load a file saved with the Formulas option, formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even if they are absolute.. If a formula refers to cells outside the block being saved, its results may be inaccurate. In this case, it is best to use the Values option.

To extract part of a notebook,

1.	Choose Notebook|Extract.

2.	In the Block(s) edit field, enter the block name or coordinates to be saved. You can specify a noncontiguous block by separating the subblocks with commas.

3.	Choose Formulas to save the block exactly as is, or choose Values to save the resulting values instead of the original formulas.

4.	Enter the file name you want using the techniques described in File Handling Options.

The extracted data begins at cell A1, regardless of its position in the original file.

If you include the file-name extension used by a different program, the file is translated into the appropriate file format. For a list of acceptable extensions, see Translating Files. To create a tab-delimited text file, use the extension .TXT and set the File Type to Text (*.TXT); see Saving Text Files.

For the extracted data to work with the program, the extracted block must be set up in a way that makes sense to the program. For example, to extract data to a Paradox file, the block should list related data in columns (which are interpreted as fields), and should contain column headings, (which are interpreted as field names).

See Also

Block|Copy Command

Combining Files

Edit|Cut Command

Edit|Paste Command

Importing and Exporting Files


Printing

These topics describe how to preview and print notebook data and graphs:

Setting Up a Printer

Printing Notebooks

Guidelines for Notebook Printing

Selecting a Print Area

Setting Paper Type and Print Orientation

Entering Headers and Footers

Setting Margins

Inserting Page Breaks

Changing Print Size

Adding Headings

Making Printouts More Like Notebooks

Printing Cell Contents

Restoring and Saving Default Print Settings

Saving Print Settings

Previewing a Print Job

Printing to a Binary File

Printing to an ASCII File

Printing Graphs


Setting Up a Printer

Before printing from Quattro Pro, use the Windows Control Panel to specify the printers available; the Control Panel also enables printing from all Windows applications. If multiple printers are attached to your system, you can specify which printer to use, as follows:

1.	Choose File|Print or click the Print button [image] in the Toolbar.

2.	Choose Select Printer. The Printer Setup dialog box appears.

3.	Select the printer to use from the Printer and Port list box.

4.	If desired, use Setup to configure the printer (this is discussed next).

5.	Choose OK.

Print defaults

By choosing the Setup command from the Printer Setup dialog box, you can specify default print settings such as:

paper type (wide, letter, envelope)

paper source on the printer (manual, bin 1, bin 2)

print orientation (landscape, portrait)

output size using a percentage (50%, 200%, and so on)

pen colors in a plotter

number of copies

fonts available in the printer (cartridge fonts, soft fonts, internal fonts)

output resolution (300 dpi, 150 dpi)

color or black-and-white printing

the amount of memory in the printer

Since many of these settings are printer-specific, they will not all be available for your printer. Consult your Windows documentation and printer manual for more information on these and additional settings.

Note:	Changes made to print defaults affect printing in all Windows applications. You can use File|Page Setup or the Options dialog box of File|Print to set many of these options (output size, paper type, number of copies) for only Quattro Pro.

See Also

Printing

Printing Notebooks


Printing Notebooks

When a notebook window is active, you can use File|Print (or click the Print button [image] on the Toolbar) to print out parts of the notebook. You can print a simple list or a sophisticated multiple-page report, embellished with headers, footers, and page numbers.

File|Page Setup and the Sheet Options and Page Setup dialog boxes of File|Print govern how output is arranged and produced on the printed page. When Quattro Pro prints, "what you see is what you get." You can use the Property Band and Object Inspectors to format notebooks with lines, new typefaces, shading and a number of other enhancements before you print.

See Also

Guidelines for Notebook Printing

File|Page Setup Command

File|Print Command

Formatting Blocks and Pages

Printing


Guidelines for Notebook Printing

To print a notebook, follow these steps:

1.	Use the Property Band and Object Inspectors to format your data.

2.	Choose File|Page Setup (or choose File|Print and click Page Setup) to adjust print settings: paper size, print orientation, headers and footers, margins, and headings. If you want, you can set soft page breaks, scale output to fit on one page, and save named groups of settings for each type of report you print.

3.	Choose File|Print, or click the Print button [image] in the Toolbar to display the Spreadsheet Print dialog box:

Select a print area: Current Page, Block Selection, or Notebook. If only one cell is selected, Current Page is the default--Quattro Pro finds and prints all data on the active page.

To print part of a document (for example, to print pages 3 through 7 of a twenty-page document), check From and enter the starting page in the edit field next to it. Click the edit field to the right of To and enter the ending page. The default is All Pages. In this case, pages are pages of printed output, not separate pages of the notebook.

Specify the number of copies to print in the Copies edit field.

Use Select Printer to choose a different printer.

If desired, use Sheet Options to add headings, gridlines, or row and column borders to the document. You can also print formulas instead of values.

Use Print Preview to check data formatting.

Use Print to print the data. (If you would like to print the data later, choose Close to save the current print settings.)

Quattro Pro displays a message showing Quattro Pro's progress while sending information to the Print Manager. If you want to stop the print job, choose Cancel, or use the Windows Print Manager to delete the print job after Quattro Pro sends it. If your printer has a large memory buffer, printing may continue for a few moments after cancellation.

Print settings are saved with the notebook, so subsequent printing is easier. In most cases, you can just choose Print from the File|Print dialog box. You can also store print settings under a name for easy retrieval.

See Also

Adding Headings

File|Print Command

Saving Print Settings

Printing


Selecting a Print Area

You can choose to print all data on a page, all data in a notebook, or only a selected block--contiguous or noncontiguous. To specify a print area, choose File|Print or click the Print button [image] in the Toolbar. Check a Print Area option:

If only one cell is selected when you choose File|Print, Current Page is the default setting. Quattro Pro scans the active page from left to right, top to bottom, and prints the smallest area that covers all the data.

If two or more cells are selected when you choose File|Print, Block Selection is the default setting. The coordinates of the selected block appear in the edit field. This setting lets you choose which part of a page to print.

To print a selection different from the one in the edit field, click the Point Mode button next to the edit field and point to the block to print. When you press Enter, the new coordinates appear in the edit field.

You can select 3-D and noncontiguous blocks; see Selecting Cells and Blocks.

Tip:	If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells onscreen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise only part of the entry will print.

When checked, Notebook prints all data in the entire active notebook.

If Block Selection is checked, but you want to print all data on the active page or notebook, check Current Page or Notebook instead. You do not need to delete the selection from the edit field.

When you print a selection, Block Selection appears as the default setting the next time you choose File|Print. The previous selection appears in the edit field. You can use these defaults, select a different block of cells to print, or check another Print Area setting.

Centering Print Blocks

By default, the first column of each contiguous block within the print block prints flush against the left margin.To center each block between the left and right margins, choose File|Print. Then, click Sheet Options and check Center Blocks in the Print Options group.

Note:	Extra blank columns on the right side of a print block will affect centering by printing the visible data in the block closer to the left margin. Do not include these blank columns in the print block if you want the data in the block to appear centered.

Printing Noncontiguous and 3-D Blocks

Each subblock of a noncontiguous block or page of a 3-D block prints as though it was selected individually. To specify how much space to leave between each subblock or page in the printout, choose File|Print and click Sheet Options. Then, check Lines in the Print Between Blocks group or Print Between 3D Pages group and specify the number of lines to put between each block. (Each line is a sixth of an inch.) To start each subblock or page on a new printed page, check Page Advance in the appropriate dialog box group.

Printing Floating Objects

Any floating objects (graphs, SpeedButtons,, drawn objects) in the print block are printed with the notebook data. Only the selected portion prints; if the floating object covers a page break, the image splits, printing on multiple pages.

See Also

File|Print Command

Printing

Setting Margins


Setting Paper Type and Print Orientation

Usually, Quattro Pro prints data on 8.5" by 11" paper and orients it vertically, so the narrower side of the page is at the top and bottom.

To change paper size or orientation,

1.	Choose File|Page Setup (or choose File|Print and click Page Setup).

2.	Select Paper Type at the left side of the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box (it is the default).

3.	Choose a paper size from the list.

4.	Check the orientation setting you want--Portrait (vertical) or Landscape (horizontal). To set another type of print option, check it in the list at the left.

5.	Choose OK.

If you change print orientation, margins change to match. For example, the top margin stays with the top of the notebook data printed, along with the header and top heading (if any).

See Also

Entering Headers and Footers

File|Print Command

Printing


Entering Headers and Footers

Headers and footers are lines of text that print at the top and bottom of each page.

You can also print specific rows or columns on each printed page as headings; see Adding Headings for details.

Quattro Pro separates headers and footers from the notebook data by the amount of space specified in the Header and Footer margin controls, minus the height of the header or footer text. Unless you specify otherwise, headers and footers are left-aligned.

Note:	Unchecking Break Pages (in the Print Margins pane of the File|Page Setup dialog box) disables the header and footer, along with their margins.

To enter a header or footer,

1.	Choose File|Page Setup (or choose File|Print and click Page Setup). Then select Header/Footer at the left side of the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box.

2.	Enter the text you want to appear as the header and/or footer. Use Backspace or other editing keys to correct mistakes as you type.

3.	If you want, click Header Font and/or Footer Font and specify a typeface, font size, and font option. You can make different settings for the header and footer; see Select Font Dialog Box for details. Click OK when your settings are complete.

4.	Select another setting option in the list at the left, or click OK to save the new header and/or footer.

To change a header or footer, select Header/Footer again and edit or retype the entry.

Formatting Header and Footer Text

The following table lists special characters you can use in headers and footers to insert dates, times, file names, calculations based on the page number, and multiple lines of text.

Code	Description

|	(vertical bar) Determines the position of the text: left-aligned, right-aligned, or centered.

#d	Enters the current date in the short format specified in the Date Format option of the International property in the application Object Inspector.

#D	Enters the current date in the long format specified in the Date Format option of the International property in the application Object Inspector.

#ds	Enters the current date in Short Date format

#Ds	Enters the current date in Long Date format.

#t	Enters the current time in the short format specified in the Time Format option of the International property in the application Object Inspector.

#T	Enters the current time in the long format specified in the Time Format option of the International property in the application Object Inspector.

#ts	Enters the current time in Short Time format.

#Ts	Enters the current time in Long Time format.

#p	Enters the current page number.

#p+n	Enters the current page number plus the number n.

#P	Enters the number of pages in the document.

#P+n	Enters the number of pages plus the number n.

#f	Enters the name of the notebook printing with no path (BUDGET.WB2).

#F	Enters the name of the notebook printing, including the path (C:\DATA\BUDGET.WB2).

#n	Prints the remainder of the header or footer on a second line.

#	(number sign) Enters the current page number. Use for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS.

@	Enters the current date (per your computer's calendar). Use for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS.

Note:	If you want a # or @ character to appear in your header or footer instead of being treated as a header or footer code, type a backslash (\) character before the # or @.

The vertical bar character | works like a tab; one preceding vertical bar centers the text; two preceding vertical bars || right-align the text. To enter this character on most keyboards, hold down Shift and press the backslash key (\). On some keyboards, the vertical bar character appears broken in the middle.

You can also use | characters to align parts of the header or footer. Up to two vertical bar characters can be in a header or footer line.

See Also

Adding Headings

Changing Print Size

Previewing a Print Job

Printing

Setting Margins


Setting Margins

You can change margins to best present your data--to center a small block of data on the page, for example.

Note:	Use File|Page Setup or the Page Setup option of File|Print to set margins. You can also set margins by dragging margin lines in a print preview. See Previewing a Print Job for more details.

To change the margin settings,

1.	Choose File|Page Setup (or choose File|Print and click Page Setup) to display the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box. Then choose Print Margins at the left side of the dialog box.

2.	Choose the margin you want to adjust: Top, Bottom, Left, Right, Header, or Footer. Highlight the current margin measurement.

3.	As you highlight a measurement, a line darkens in the drawing at the lower right corner of the dialog box. It shows the margin you are setting.

For Top and Bottom margins, enter the distance between the top or bottom of the paper and the header or footer.

For Left and Right margins, enter the distance from the edge of the paper to the data.

For Header, specify the distance between the header and the first row of data; for Footer, the distance between the last row of data and the footer.

Use inches if in is displayed next to the default margin settings; use centimeters if cm is displayed. Use decimals to indicate partial inches or centimeters, such as 0.5 for half.

4.	Choose OK to save the new margin settings.

The following list describes all the margin settings available. Defaults are given in inches. (Scroll down for information on using centimeters to specify margins.)

Top	Specifies how much room to leave between the top of each printed page and the header. The default is a third of an inch.

Bottom	Specifies how much room to leave between the bottom of each page and the footer. The default is a third of an inch.

Left	Specifies how much room to leave between the left edge of the paper and the first column of data. The default is four-tenths of an inch.

Right	Specifies how much room to leave between the right edge of the paper and the last column of data (if it fills the page horizontally). The default is four-tenths of an inch.

Header	(in Margins) Specifies how much room to leave between the top margin and the first row of data. The header prints in the top of this space. The default is half an inch.

Footer	(in Margins) Specifies how much room to leave between the bottom margin and the last row of data (if it fills the page vertically). The footer prints in the bottom of this space. The default is half an inch.

Break Pages	When unchecked, disables soft page breaks, headers, footers, and all margins but the right and left margins. Hard page breaks are not affected. Uncheck Break Pages if you are printing a long printout to continuous-form paper.

Using Centimeters or Inches to Specify Margins

Quattro Pro uses the measurement system specified in the Windows Control Panel to determine whether to use inches or centimeters for margin measurements. You can override the default for a particular margin by entering in (for inches) or cm (for centimeters) after its value. The default suffix is displayed next to each default margin setting. For example, to set the left margin to three centimeters when the default measurement system is inches, choose Left Margin and enter 3 cm. Quattro Pro then converts the entry into the default measurement system.

Note:	Some printers are not able to print to the edge of the paper, and many print drivers do not allow 0" margins.

See Also

Entering Headers and Footers

File|Print Command

Printing


Inserting Page Breaks

There are two kinds of page breaks that occur in printing with Quattro Pro: soft page breaks and hard page breaks.

Quattro Pro breaks the notebook data up and prints it on separate pages to avoid running text off the bottom or right of the page. These breaks, called soft page breaks, free you from having to insert hard page breaks to print.

Hard page breaks are those you enter yourself by

Typing the characters |:: into a cell in the first column of a print block.

Selecting a cell in the first column of a print block and choosing Edit|Insert Break. This also inserts a new row into the notebook.

You can enter hard page breaks into the first column of any block included in the print block.

Caution: Do not add any data into a row containing a hard page break. The data will not print.

Disabling Page Breaks

To print data without soft page breaks, choose File|Page Setup (or choose File|Print and click Page Setup). Then, check Print Margins at the left side of the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box and uncheck Break Pages.

Disabling page breaks is useful for producing long printouts on continuous-form paper. Unchecking Break Pages also disables headers, footers, and all margins but the right and left margins. Hard page breaks are not disabled.

Printing Large Notebooks

Quattro Pro will not print unless at least one cell fits on the printed page. If the data in the print block will not fit on one printed page, Quattro Pro fits as many columns as possible across the first page, and prints all rows in those columns using as many pages as necessary. Then, Quattro Pro returns to the first row of data and picks up at the column where it left off, until all data in the block has printed. You can combine the pages to create one large notebook.

Quattro Pro will not split a column. If the full column will not fit, it prints on the next page. Use File|Print Preview to see where your pages will break.

See Also

Changing Print Size

Previewing a Print Job

Printing

Setting Margins


Changing Print Size

You can increase or decrease the size of printed material without changing fonts or making other adjustments in the notebook. You can adjust output size by an exact size, or request Quattro Pro to choose a size.

To change print size,

1.	Choose File|Page Setup (or choose File|Print and click Page Setup).

2.	Select Print Scaling at the left side of the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box.

To adjust by an exact percentage (1 to 1000), change the Scaling setting. Choosing 110% enlarges output by 10%; choosing 90% reduces it by 10%.

To let Quattro Pro choose a size, check Fit To Print. This setting shrinks notebook printing so it fits on as few pages as possible. To enlarge text, use the Scaling setting. Print To Fit ignores (and does not change) the current setting of Scaling, if any.

3.	Choose OK to save the settings.

For both Scaling and Print To Fit, only header and footer margins change; other margins remain the same.

See Also

Entering Headers and Footers

Previewing a Print Job

Printing

Setting Margins


Adding Headings

In addition to headers and footers, you can specify column or row headings to print on each page. Row headings print down the left edge of the page and are called left headings; column headings print at the top of each page, below any specified headers, and are called top headings. To print top or left headings on each page,

1.	Choose File|Print, then choose Sheet Options in the Spreadsheet Print dialog box. The Spreadsheet Print Options dialog box appears.

2.	Specify a Top Heading (for a row of headings) or Left Heading (for a column of headings):

To specify a top heading, select the address of any cell in the row to use; the entire row is used regardless of which cell you select.

To specify a left heading, select the address of any cell in the column to use; the entire column is used as the heading regardless of which cell you select.

Selecting a block makes all columns (for a left heading) and all rows (for a top heading) in the block print as headings.

3.	Choose OK to save the new headings.

Caution: Do not include top or left headings in the print block, or they will print twice. For example, if you have specified A2..G2 as a top heading, and you want to print all data through row 30, specify A3..G30 as the print block.

See Also

Changing Print Size

Previewing a Print Job

Printing

Setting Margins


Making Printouts More Like Notebooks

To print the gridlines that normally appear on the notebook page, Choose File|Print, then click Sheet Options in the File Print dialog box. Then, check Gridlines in the Print Options group of the Spreadsheet Print Options dialog box. If Gridlines is unchecked, only lines added using the Property Band or the Line Drawing block property will print.

You can check Row/Column Borders to print the row and column borders that appear on a notebook page.

See Also

Adding Headings

Changing Print Size

Entering Headers and Footers

Inserting Page Breaks

Printing

Printing Cell Contents

Setting Margins


Printing Cell Contents

You will usually print data as it appears onscreen. You can, however, print each cell's contents instead. To do this, choose File|Print and click Sheet Options. Then, check Cell Formulas in the Print Options group.

This setting lists the contents of each cell, one per line, just as they appear on the input line when you select a cell. This includes each cell's address and contents as entered, as well as any comments you have added to the regular cell contents. The information is printed in the font specified under Header Font (in the File|Page Setup dialog box).

When you print using Cell Formulas, the following print features are disabled:

Center Blocks

Left and Top Heading

Gridlines

Row/Column borders

See Also

Adding Comments to Entries

Entering Formulas

Printing

Restoring and Saving Default Print Settings


Restoring and Saving Default Print Settings

If you change settings in either the Spreadsheet Print Options dialog box or Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box then want to restore the original settings, click the Load Defaults button at the bottom of the dialog box. Current settings change back to the defaults.

Initially, these are defaults set when Quattro Pro is installed. To save new defaults for either dialog box, enter the Page Setup or Print Options settings to use as defaults. Then, choose Save Defaults. The next time you choose Load Defaults, the saved defaults appear instead of the original settings.

When you save print defaults, a new Print Settings group appears in QPW.INI (in the Windows directory). If you save defaults, then want to restore the original settings shipped with Quattro Pro, delete the Print Settings group from QPW.INI and save the file as unformatted text. Now, when you choose Load Defaults, the original defaults appear again.

If you print several different types of reports, you can create and use named settings for each report type; see Saving Print Settings for details. Choosing Load Defaults does not clear named settings.

See Also

Adding Headings

Changing Print Size

Entering Headers and Footers

Inserting Page Breaks

Printing

Setting Margins


Saving Print Settings

Many notebooks contain more than one report. You can store print settings for each report and save them with the notebook. Saved settings include all options in the following dialog boxes:

Spreadsheet Print (choose File|Print)

Spreadsheet Print Options (choose File|Print|Sheet Options)

Spreadsheet Page Setup (choose File|Page Setup or File|Print|Page Setup).

To store the current print settings as a named group,

1.	Choose File|Page Setup (or the Page Setup options of File|Print) to display the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box.

2.	Select Named Settings at the left side of the dialog box.

3.	To add the current settings as a new group, enter its name in the New Set edit field and click Add.

4.	Click OK to save the settings.

Now, whenever you want to print using the named settings, display the Spreadsheet Page Setup dialog box and check Named Settings in the list at the left. Then, choose the group of settings to use and click Use. When you click OK, current print settings are replaced with those stored under the chosen name.

To update an existing group, follow the same procedures as when using a group. Select the name in the list and click Update.

To remove a name from the list, follow the same procedures used to update or use a named group. Choose the name to delete, then choose Delete to remove it. Click OK to make the change.

Since named settings are saved with the notebook, use File|Save to save your file after changing them.

See Also

Printing

Restoring and Saving Default Print Settings


Previewing a Print Job

You can use File|Print Preview (or the Print Preview button in the File|Print dialog box) to see an onscreen preview of how the document will appear.

The current zoom level displays to the right of Zoom. When previewing, left-click the page or click the Zoom In button [image] to zoom in a level, increasing detail; right-click the page or click the Zoom Out button [image] to zoom out a level, decreasing detail. You can use scroll bars to adjust the section of the page viewed.

The Toolbar provides a variety of tools for controlling a document while previewing. When you point to a tool, its name appears in a yellow box. For more information, display Object Help. Point to a Toolbar object, hold down Ctrl, and right-click the mouse. To end the preview, click the End Preview button (the X) on the Toolbar.

See Print Preview Window Keys for a list of keys you can use while previewing.

See Also

Printing Graphs

Printing Notebooks

Printing


Printing to a Binary File

If you want to print from a machine that does not have Quattro Pro installed, or if you take your printing to a service bureau with high quality printers, you can store the document in a file using the Redirect Output To File option in the Printer Setup dialog box (choose File|Print, then click Select Printer).This file, called a binary file, contains instructions in the printer's native language for creating the document. For example, if your printer is a PostScript printer, Quattro Pro creates a PostScript file. If your printer is an HP LaserJet, it creates a PCL (Printer Control Language) file.

To create a binary file,

1.	Choose File|Print and click Select Printer. The Printer Setup dialog box appears. Select the printer that the document will eventually be sent to.

2.	Check Redirect Output To File.

3.	Enter the file name in the edit field. If you do not specify a file extension, the extension .PRN is used. To store the file in a directory other than the default, or on a floppy disk, include the complete DOS path.

4.	Choose OK.

Printing in Quattro Pro now sends the output to the binary file (overwriting the old file each time), not the printer. Choose File|Print, click Select Printer again, and uncheck the check box for Redirect Output To File to return to normal printing.

To print a binary file from DOS, use the DOS COPY command with the /B parameter:

COPY filename.PRN /B LPT1

This sends a binary file (/B) to the LPT1 printer port. If your printer is connected to a different port (such as COM1 or PRN), specify it instead of LPT1.

See Also

Printing

Setting Up a Printer


Printing to an ASCII File

Sometimes you need to prepare an ASCII, or plain text, file of Quattro Pro output. For example, you might want to import Quattro Pro data into an application whose format is not available thorugh File|Save.

To print to a text file,

1.	Change to the alternative menu system:

Right-click the Quattro Pro title bar to display the application Object Inspector.

Choose Macro in the property list.

Click the arrow under Slash Key to display the alternative menu list and choose Quattro Pro - DOS.

Click OK to close the dialog box and load the alternative menu system.

2.	Press /P to display the Print menu.

3.	Choose Destination|Text File.

4.	Enter the file name, including path, and click OK.

5.	Verify the other print settings, including Block, and choose Spreadsheet Print.

Output prints to the file you specified. To restore the default Quattro Pro for Windows menus, perform the alternative menu selection steps listed previously, but choose Menu Bar instead of Quattro Pro - DOS.

Tip:	This method is useful for sending small portions of your notebook to an ASCII text file. See Saving Text Files for another way to create a text file.


Printing Graphs

Printing a graph is the same as printing notebook data, except:

You can set the graph's aspect ratio before printing (see Graph Window Properties for details).

When you choose File|Print or click the Print button [image] in the Toolbar, a simplified dialog box appears when a graph window is active, a floating graph is selected, or an icon in the Objects page is selected; certain controls in File|Page Setup are dimmed to indicate they are unavailable.

You can print multiple graphs from the Objects page by selecting their icons before printing. You can also print all graphs in a slide show by selecting its icon first.

Printing multiple graphs

You can select multiple graphs and print them one after the other:

1.	Select each floating graph on a notebook page, each graph icon on the Objects page, or each slide in a Light Table window (by holding down the Shift key while clicking each of them). You can also select a slide show icon to print all the graphs in it.

2.	Use File|Page Setup to adjust print settings, if you want to make changes.

3.	Click the Print button [image] in the Toolbar or choose File|Print. Then, click Print to print the graphs in the order in which they were selected.

To print all graphs in a slide show, select the slide show icon on the Objects page, then choose File|Print.

See Also

Entering Headers and Footers

Previewing a Print Job

Printing

Printing to a Binary File

Saving Print Settings

Setting Margins


Formatting Blocks and Pages

Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band

Setting Type Fonts and Sizes

Aligning Labels and Values

Centering Text Over Blocks

Multiple Entries with Block Centering

Underlining Blocks

Zooming the Display

Using Styles

Using SpeedFormat

Resizing Rows and Columns

Changing Block Properties

Setting Numeric Format

Choosing a Font

Shading Blocks of Cells

Aligning Entries in Cells

Drawing Lines Around Blocks

Changing Text Color

Setting Exact Column and Row Sizes

Hiding Rows and Columns

Limiting Data Entry in Cells

Protecting Cells

Limiting Data Input Types

Changing Page Properties

Suppressing Zeros

Removing Row and Column Borders

Hiding Spreadsheet Grid Lines

Zooming In or Out

Naming a Page

Enabling Page Protection

Coloring Conditional Cells

Setting Default Column Width

Changing Page Tab Color


Formatting with the Toolbar and Property Band

Toolbar buttons and Property Band lists help you format single cells and cell blocks without menus or Object Inspectors. You can

Set type to bold, italic, or bold italic

Set type font and point size

Align labels and values in cells: left, right, centered, or centered over blocks

Underline blocks

Apply styles to labels and values

Apply formats to blocks of data and labels

Resize columns and rows

In each case, you are using shortcuts to set properties or groups of properties.

See Also

Property Band

Toolbars


Setting Type Fonts and Sizes

You can quickly switch the selected block to bold or italic, or change its font size with controls on the Toolbar and Property Band.

Click [image] to choose bold, [image] for italic. To toggle bold or italic off, click the button again.

To increase or decrease the font size, click the Size list on the Property Band, then choose one of the point sizes listed there. If you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to display the tallest letters in the row (unless you have set the row height explicitly); see Row Height for details.

To assign a font to the selected cell or block, click the Font list on the Property Band and choose from the list. You can use the block Object Inspector to set other font options.

See Also

Choosing a Font

Using Styles


Aligning Labels and Values

When you enter data into a cell, Quattro Pro aligns it according to the default alignment setting, which is called General. This setting right-aligns values and left-aligns labels, formulas, and dates.

To align a label differently from the default alignment, select it then click the Align list (if set to the default, it reads General) on the Property Band and choose an option: Left, Center, or Right. You can also choose Center Across Block to span several cells; see Centering Text Over Blocks.

To set the default alignment of all labels to be entered in the page, choose Edit|Select All to select the entire page, then click the Align list on the Property Band.

You can also wrap text within cells and display it vertically as well as horizontally. See Aligning Entries in Cells for more details.

You can also align an individual label by preceding it with a label-prefix character (see Aligning Labels for more information).

See Also

Using Styles


Centering Text Over Blocks

It is easy to center text over a block of cells, for example, a table:

1.	Type the text to be centered in the leftmost cell of the block to center across. If you are centering text in row 12 across columns C, D, and E, type the text to be centered in C12.

2.	Highlight the block to center within, starting with the cell containing the text: C12..E12, in this example.

3.	Click the Align list in the Property Band and choose Center Across Block.

The text moves to the center of the selected block. To display the centered text in the input line, click the cell where the text was originally entered.

For another method of centering across blocks, see Aligning Cell Entries.

Preformatting For Centered Text

You can format blocks for centered text before entering the text.

1.	Highlight the block to center text across.

2.	Click the Align list in the Property Band and choose Center Across Block.

3.	Enter the text in the leftmost cell of the block.

Shading Formatted Blocks

If you have used block centering, shading applied to the leftmost cell appears in the rest of the block. For example, if cell C12 in the previous figure is shaded red, D12 and E12 also are red.

See Also

Aligning Labels

Entering Data


Multiple Entries with Block Centering

If you enter text in a second cell within a center-formatted block, the first entry is centered over formatted cells to the left of the next entry. The position of the next entry depends on the alignment character typed before it, as shown in the next figure:

If ', the new text is left-aligned in its entry cell.

If ", the new text is right-aligned in its entry cell.

If ^, the new text is centered over the remaining blank cells in the formatted block.

See Also

Aligning Cell Entries

Aligning Labels

Block Centering

Entering Data


Underlining Blocks

To draw an underline at the bottom of the selected block, click the Underline list on the Property Band (if set to the default it reads No Line), then choose Thin Line, Double Line, or Thick Line. To remove the underline, select the same block, click the Underline list, then choose No Line.

To draw grids and other more elaborate line patterns or change the line color, use the Line Drawing property; see Drawing Lines Around Blocks.


Zooming the Display

The Zoom Factor list on the Property Band lets you enlarge or reduce the active page by the chosen percent. You can choose Selection to expand the current block to fill the screen. Zoom Factor affects only onscreen display, not printed output. For other ways to change the Zoom Factor or set page and notebook defaults, see Zooming In or Out.


Using Styles

Quattro Pro contains several predefined styles, each of which is a specific property setting (or settings) identified by a name. Applying the style is faster than using the block Object Inspector to make each setting.

To apply a style, click the Style list on the Property Band (the default is Normal) and choose one from the list.

If a style includes properties previously set with the Object Inspector, the previous settings are changed to those defined in the style.

The styles included with Quattro Pro are as follows:

Comma	Sets Numeric Format to Comma with two decimals

Comma0	Sets Numeric Format to Comma with no decimals

Currency	Sets Numeric Format to Currency with two decimals

Currency0	Sets Numeric Format to Currency with no decimals

Date	Sets Numeric Format to User Defined (with the date format specified; see Defining Custom Numeric Formats for more information)

Fixed	Sets Numeric Format to Fixed with two decimals

Heading 1	Sets Font to Arial (or Helvetica) 18 point bold

Heading 2	Sets Font to Arial (or Helvetica) 12 point bold

Normal	Sets Numeric Format and Alignment to General; sets Font to Arial (or Helvetica) 10 point regular; sets Shading to White; sets Line Drawing to None; turns Protection on; and sets Text Color to Black.

Percent	Sets Numeric Format to Percent

Total	Inserts a double line above the active cell

See Also

Defining Styles


Using SpeedFormat

Instead of setting properties in individual cells, you can choose a predefined set of properties for different parts of an entire block. This set of properties is called a format, which you apply with the SpeedFormat button [image] in the Toolbar. You can create custom formats.

The different parts of the block that a format can affect are:

column headings (cells in the top row).

column totals (cells in the bottom row).

row headings (cells in the left column).

row totals (cells in the right column).

subtotals (column and row totals occurring within the block).

the body (remaining cells in the block).

A format consists of a series of property settings for each of the parts of a block. You can apply a format to the body and selectively to any of the other parts.

You can also control which properties of a format to apply. Only the checked properties are applied in the body and in the checked parts of the block.

To apply a format,

1.	Select the block to be formatted and click the SpeedFormat button.

2.	Choose a format from the SpeedFormat dialog box.

3.	Uncheck any properties you do not want applied in the block.

4.	Uncheck any parts (column headings, row headings, column totals, row totals, or subtotals) you do not want included as part of the format.

5.	Choose OK.

The format is applied to the body and to any of the other parts you checked.

When you use SpeedFormat to apply a format, properties checked in SpeedFormat override existing property settings. For example, suppose you shade an entire block with the block Object Inspector. If you use SpeedFormat, choose a partially-shaded format and check Shading, the original shading will be removed and recolored to match shading settings for the chosen format.

You can create custom SpeedFormats or revise existing ones. See Creating Custom Formats.

See Also

Deleting Formats

Defining Styles

Using Styles


Creating Custom Formats

You can create custom formats and apply them with the SpeedFormat button [image] in the Toolbar.

To create a custom format,

1.	Format a block of data--a table, for example--with any of these block properties you want to use: Numeric Format, Font, Shading, Text Color, Alignment, Line Drawing, and Column Width (Auto-Width setting on or off).

You can format each of these areas separately: column headings, column totals, row headings, row totals, subtotals, and the body of the table. This block serves as an example of the format you want to create.

2.	Select the example block--data and headings--and click the SpeedFormat button, or right-click and choose SpeedFormat.

3.	When the SpeedFormat dialog box appears, click the Add button to display the Add Format dialog box.

4.	Enter the name of the new format in the Format Name field.

5.	Enter the coordinates of the example block in the Example Block field.

6.	Choose OK to save the format. Now, it is available in the SpeedFormat dialog box and you can apply it to other tables.

See Also

Using SpeedFormat

Deleting Formats


Deleting Formats

To delete a predefined or custom format in the SpeedFormat dialog box,

1.	Select a blank cell and click the SpeedFormat button [image] in the Toolbar, or right-click and choose SpeedFormat in the QuickMenu.

2.	When the SpeedFormat dialog box appears, select the format to delete in the Formats list.

3.	Click the Delete button, respond Yes to the prompt, then click OK.

See Also

Using SpeedFormat


Resizing Rows and Columns

There are several ways to change the width of columns or height of rows. You can

use the Fit button [image] in the Toolbar to tailor column width to the longest entry in the column. See Setting Automatic Column Width for details.

drag the row or column border with the mouse. See Resizing Rows & Columns with the Mouse for details.

specify an exact numerical setting with the block Column Width and Row Height properties. See Setting Exact Row & Column Sizes for details.

You can also hide rows or columns from being displayed, yet retain the data for other cells to reference for calculation in the notebook.

Finally, you can set a global width for all columns in the active page with the page Default Width property (see Setting Default Column Width for details).

See Also

Using Styles


Setting Automatic Column Width

You can adjust column width to one character wider than the longest entry in a given column. To do this, click the column border and click the Fit button [image] in the Toolbar. You can also select multiple columns at the same time (they must be contiguous columns) and click Fit to adjust them simultaneously.

To adjust a column based on a group of cells, select them and click Fit. To adjust based on the longest entry in a cell or any cell in the same column below it, select the cell and click Fit.

To further tailor a column's width, you can specify the amount of space to add to the longest entry, using the Column Width property (see Setting Exact Row & Column Sizes for details).

See Also

Resizing Rows & Columns with the Mouse


Resizing Rows & Columns with the Mouse

You can easily change column or row size by dragging its border. You can use this method to resize single or multiple rows or columns.

To resize a single row or a single column, move the cursor over the right edge of the column border to be resized, or over the bottom edge of the row border to be resized. The pointer turns into a double-arrow: (the left pointer is for resizing rows, the right pointer for resizing columns). Then drag the pointer until the row or column has reached the size you want.

You can also resize several rows or several columns in the same page to a uniform size. Select contiguous rows or columns (by dragging in their borders), or select noncontiguous rows or columns (by clicking their borders while holding down the Ctrl key). Decide on a row or column within the selection that you want to govern the uniform size. Then drag the double-arrow at the right of the governing column (or if you are resizing rows, drag the double-arrow at the bottom of the governing row). All the rows or columns are resized to the same dimension even if they started out with different sizes.

See Also

Setting Automatic Column Width

Setting Exact Row & Column Sizes


Changing Block Properties

Most block properties affect the appearance of cell entries or of rows or columns. To set block properties directly,

1.	Select the block you want to affect.

2.	With the mouse pointer anywhere in the selected block, click the right mouse button. Or choose Property|Current Object in the Property band.

The block Object Inspector lets you change many properties at the same time. It provides an example of what your changes will look like before you choose OK.

The coordinates of the selected block appear in the title bar of the block Object Inspector. This helps you confirm which block you are affecting.

Note:	Although it is tempting to preset block properties in large areas of the notebook, doing so consumes memory. It is more efficient to set properties only in the cells or pages you are currently using. Or, change the Normal style to change default properties.

If you move a cell, its properties move with the data and are removed from the original cell. If you copy a cell, the copy takes on the properties of the original cell. If you paste a copied or cut block with Edit|Paste Special, you can control whether the cell's properties are pasted (see Using Paste Special for details).

See the following topics for details on changing block properties:

Setting Numeric Format

Choosing a Font

Shading Blocks of Cells

Aligning Labels and Values

Drawing Lines Around Blocks

Changing Text Color

Setting Exact Column and Row Sizes

Hiding Rows and Columns

Limiting Data Entry in Cells


Setting Numeric Format

When you enter a number in an unformatted cell, Quattro Pro displays it according to the numeric format setting determined by the Normal style. By default, this setting is General, which displays numbers exactly as you enter them (unless the column width is too narrow). A number of other formats are available, including formats that add commas, dollar signs, or other characters to your original number.

Note:	All numeric formats leave the cell values intact; they only affect the way values are displayed.

To quickly change to one of the more common numeric formats, choose from the styles in the Property Band's Style list. The predefined styles in the Style list differ slightly from the corresponding numeric format options in that they are preset to display a certain number of decimal places. With the numeric format options, you can choose any number of decimal places to be displayed. Only some of the styles in the list affect the numeric format; the others set other properties. See Using Styles for a description of styles supplied with Quattro Pro.

To choose one of the other numeric formats available,

1.	Select the cells you want to format, then right-click.

2.	Choose Block Properties in the QuickMenu to display the block Object Inspector. Numeric Format is already selected.

3.	Choose one of the formats listed.

If the format you chose allows a variable number of decimal places, an edit field appears. If you want to display other than the default number of decimal places (2), enter a number from 0 to 15 in the edit field.

If you choose Currency, you must choose the country whose currency symbol you want to use.

If you choose Date, you must choose a specific date format.

If you choose Time, you must choose a specific time format.

If you choose User Defined, you can choose from a list of formats you create yourself. For instructions on creating numeric formats, see Defining Custom Numeric Formats.

4.	Choose OK.

If the format you choose creates a number too wide for its column, a string of asterisks (********) appears. You can redisplay the entire number by widening the column.

If you have hidden cell contents with the Hidden numeric format, you may want to use the Protection property (in the page Object Inspector) to prevent the cells' entries from being accidentally overwritten.

Click Numeric Format Options for descriptions and examples of each numeric format.

See Also

Column Width

Formatting Date Serial Numbers

Precision of Calculations

Using Paste Special


Formatting Date Serial Numbers

Quattro Pro stores each date you enter as a five-digit serial number. Quattro Pro uses this number for calculations. If you enter the date by typing, the cell is switched to the date format in which you enter it. If you enter the date using @DATE, @DATEVALUE, or @NOW, you must reformat the cells with the Date numeric format. Otherwise, Quattro Pro displays the results as a date serial number. For example, 33857 appears instead of 10-Sep-92.

See Also

Date and Time @Functions

Precision of Calculations

Setting Numeric Format


Precision of Calculations

Numeric Formatting does not affect the way Quattro Pro stores values, only the way it displays them. For example, some formats limit the number of decimal places that appear. This does not affect the precision of Quattro Pro calculations, which are accurate to 16 significant digits. The stored number is displayed on the input line when you select a cell.

A significant digit is any digit that is not a leading zero. Decimals, commas, dollar signs, and percent signs do not count as part of the total. For example, the number 1.23 has three significant digits. The number .000123 also has three significant digits because the leading zeros do not count.

Quattro Pro rounds the appearance of numbers to the specified decimal place in the case of Fixed, Scientific, Currency, Comma, and Percent formats. The +/- format truncates decimal numbers to whole integers. The General format rounds off fractional numbers as necessary to fit in the cell.

To round the number actually stored in a cell, use @ROUND.

See Also

Formatting Date Serial Numbers

Setting Numeric Format


Choosing a Font

Setting Type Fonts and Sizes describes how to make most font settings with the Toolbar and Property Band. Some options are only available through the block Object Inspector. To set them,

1.	Right-click the selected block.

2.	Choose Block Properties in the QuickMenu.

3.	Choose Font in the Object Inspector.

4.	Choose the Font, Font Size, and Options you want to use.

5.	Choose OK.

If a font has a TT (TrueType) or a (ATM) symbol beside it, text in that font will appear in print just as it does onscreen. Fonts with a printer symbol will print on your printer, but may not appear in the correct font onscreen. Fonts without a symbol appear accurately onscreen, but may not appear in correct font when printed.

If you enlarge or reduce the font size, the row height changes to display the tallest letters in the row (unless you have set the row height explicitly; see Row Height for details.

See Also

Using Styles


Shading Blocks of Cells

The Shading property controls the color of cells. The shading color is a mixture of two colors: Color 1 and Color 2. You use seven the Blend squares to control how much of each color to include in the mix.

To shade a block,

1.	Right-click the block, choose Block Properties, then choose Shading in the Object Inspector.

2.	Choose the two colors to be mixed by clicking color squares in Color 1 and Color 2.

3.	Choose the Blend square that provides the mix you want. For single-color shading, choose the first or last Blend square.

With some color choices, you need to deselect the block to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details).

Note:	If shading does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

See Also

Using Styles


Aligning Entries in Cells

Aligning Labels and Values describes how to align data horizontally at the right or left edge of a cell, centered within a cell, or centered over a block. These alignments are basic--if the entry is wider than the cell, it spills over into adjacent cells. You can use the Alignment property options to wrap data within a single cell, align data vertically, and display entries vertically.

To perform these special alignments, right-click the selected block, choose Block Properties, then choose Alignment in the block Object Inspector.

Horizontal Alignment

General alignment right-aligns values and left-aligns labels. Left, Right, and Center perform left-alignment, right-alignment, and centering of entries, respectively. Center Across Block centers text across the selected block.

Vertical Alignment

Vertical Alignment options position data from top to bottom within a cell.

Wrapping Text

By default, when you enter long labels into cells, they extend into adjoining cells on the right, the left, or both, depending on the alignment setting for each cell. To make text wrap within a cell without spilling over into other cells, check Wrap Text. This feature works only on text, not numeric data.

Orientation

Normally, text displays horizontally within a cell, from left to right. The Orientation alignment option offers vertical orientation, so text displays from top to bottom. Click the horizontal or vertical letters to indicate your choice.

See Also

Using Styles

Entering Wide Labels


Drawing Lines Around Blocks

Underlining Blocks describes how to draw lines at the bottom of cells with the Underline list on the Property Band. With the Line Drawing property, you can draw lines around the sides and tops of cells too. You can also set their thickness and color.

To draw lines in a block, right-click the block, choose Block Properties, then choose Line Drawing in the Object Inspector. As shown in the Line Draw Property Example, first choose a line segment on the left, then click a line type or line color. You can also apply the chosen line type in a preset pattern by clicking one of the three pattern boxes.

Tip:	Use Shift+click to select more than one line in the Line Segments block.

The lines you draw in the sample box indicate where lines will be drawn in the selected block. For example, clicking the outer edges of the sample box draws lines only on the outside of the selected block; clicking the inner lines in the sample box draws lines between every row or column in the selected block.

You can combine line drawing options in the same block. For example, you can draw a double-lined border around a block, and single vertical lines between the columns in the block.

To remove lines, click the lines you want to remove in the sample block, then choose the No Line type.

If you change your mind as you are specifying lines, click the line you recently changed, then click the No Change line type. It returns the line to the line type in effect when you last chose OK. To cancel all changes, choose Cancel.

The default line color is black. To change the line colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details). If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Line Color option, your lines will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

See Also

Using Styles


Changing Text Color

The Text Color property controls the color of cell entries This property controls the color of the characters that make up the data, not the color of the cell shading.

To change the color of cell entries in a block, right-click the cells,choose Block Properties, then choose Text Color in the Object Inspector. Choose the color you want. If you already changed the cell's shading, make sure the Text Color setting will contrast enough to be visible.

Note:	If text does not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details). If you create a new color for the palette that is dithered and later choose it for the Text Color property, your text will appear in a substitute, nondithered color. You can use dithered colors for other elements besides text and drawn lines.

Tip:	With most color choices, you need to deselect the block to see the new shading. This is because selected cells are shown in reverse color.

See Also

Using Styles


Setting Exact Column and Row Sizes

Resizing Columns and Rows with the Mouse describes ways to set approximate column widths and row heights. You can set them to exact sizes with block properties.

With the Column Width and Row Height properties, you can adjust single or multiple columns, or single or multiple rows to an exact size. You can also resize rows or columns back to their default size. In the case of columns, you can set an automatic width based on the longest entry plus the amount of space you choose.

Columns Widths

To adjust columns to exact sizes,

1.	Select any cell in each column you want to resize, or select their borders. You can also select noncontiguous columns.

2.	Next, right-click the selected block, choose Block Properties, then choose Column Width in the block Object Inspector.

3.	Check Set Width. Then, check Characters, Inches, or Centimeters, and enter the number you want in the Column Width edit field.

To return column width to the default, choose Reset Width instead of Set Width.

To resize contiguous columns based on the longest entry instead of an exact measurement, check Auto Width instead of Set Width. If entire or partial columns are selected, the width is based on the longest entry in the selection. If a single-row block (or just one cell) is selected, the width is based on the longest entry in that row and all cells below it. For more information, see Auto Width below.

4.	When settings are complete, click OK.

Note:	The setting of the page Default Width property determines the default column width. Columns whose widths you have explicitly adjusted (with the Fit button, the mouse or the Column Width property) are not controlled by the Default Width property (see Setting Default Column Width for details).

Auto Width

Auto Width works like the Fit button [image] in the Toolbar, but it goes one step further: you can specify the amount of extra column width space to be added beyond the longest entry. Enter that number in the Extra Characters edit field. The default is 1.

The longest entry is chosen based on your initial column or block selection:

If entire columns are selected, the width is based on the longest entry in each column.

If a multi-row block (or just part of a column) is selected, the width in each column is based on the longest entry in each column of the block.

If a single-row block (or just one cell) is selected, the width is based on the longest entry in that row and all cells below it.

To use the Auto Width option, select in the notebook as described above, then right-click the block and choose Block Properties. Choose Column Width and Auto Width in the Object Inspector. Then choose Characters, Inches, or Centimeters and enter the number of extra characters to add to the longest entry.

Tip:	If a column you are adjusting contains a long entry that spills over into blank cells to the right, and you do not want the column adjusted to that cell entry's length, specify a multi-row block that stops short of the cell.

Row Heights

To resize rows, right-click them, choose Block Properties, then choose Row Height. Click Points, Inches, or Centimeters, and enter the number you want in the Row Height edit field. To return the row height to the default (as determined by the largest font used in the row), choose Reset Height instead.

See Also

Resizing Rows & Columns with the Mouse

Setting Automatic Column Width


Hiding Rows and Columns

You can temporarily remove rows or columns of data from view and from printouts, but still use the data in calculations. With the Reveal/Hide property, you can hide rows or columns from view without losing the data they contain. You can later redisplay the rows or columns with the same property.

To hide rows or columns from view, select a cell in the row or column you want to hide. If you want to hide multiple rows or columns, select a block that encompasses them. Right-click the block, choose Block Properties, and choose Reveal/Hide in the Object Inspector. Choose Rows or Columns and choose Hide.

Columns to the right of the hidden columns move left to fill in the empty space, or rows below the hidden rows move up. However, the identifying row numbers and column letters in the borders do not change. In other words, if you hide column B, the columns onscreen are labeled A, C, D, and so on.

If you use Notebook|Extract to save part of a notebook that includes hidden rows or columns (see Extracting Part of a Notebook for details), Quattro Pro saves the hidden rows or columns in the new file, although they will still be hidden from view when you load the file.

To return one or more hidden rows or columns to the screen, right-click a block containing cells on both sides of the hidden area, choose Block Properties, and choose Reveal/Hide. Then choose Rows or Columns and choose Reveal.

To reveal (or hide) all rows and columns on a notebook page, click the Select All button first (or choose Edit|Select All), then set the block Reveal/Hide property.

Tip:	You can also reveal a single hidden row or column with the mouse. To reveal a hidden column, place the mouse pointer slightly to the right of the hidden columns border, then drag. For a hidden row, drag from just below the hidden rows border. The hidden row or column is revealed and sized as you drag. For example, you can use this technique to reveal row 1 and column A when they are hidden.


Limiting Data Entry in Cells

You can use the Constraints block property to protect cells from changes or to limit the type of data that can be entered. To display the Constraints dialog box, right-click the selected block and choose Block Properties. Then, choose Constraints in the property list.

Protecting Cells

Limiting Data Input Types


Protecting Cells

The Protection page property (see Enabling Page Protection) lets you protect cells and objects on entire pages. You can then remove protection from individual cells or blocks with the Constraints property (in the block Object Inspector). That way, you can enter data in those cells, leaving the remainder of the page protected.

To remove cell protection on a page that has already been protected with the Protection page property, right-click the selected cell or block of cells and choose Block Properties. Then, choose Constraints in the block Object Inspector, and uncheck Unprotect. Now you can enter data into the unprotected cells.

When a cell is protected, you cannot edit, replace, or delete its contents. Nor can you delete a column or row that contains a protected cell.

Note:	When you disable cell protection with the Protection page property, no cells are protected, even those you protected individually by checking Protect in the Constraints block property pane.

With page protection enabled for cells, you can move the selector around the entire page, but you can make changes only to unprotected cells. To restrict the selector to unprotected cells only, use Block|Restrict Input.

See Also

Limiting Data Input Types

Using Styles


Limiting Data Input Types

You can force a block of cells to accept only labels or only dates and times. This feature is especially helpful if you are setting up a notebook for others to use.

To choose the type of data that can be typed into a cell, right-click the block and choose Block Properties, then choose Constraints in the block Object Inspector. Set Data Input Constraints to General, Labels, or Dates Only to indicate the type of data the block can accept. (Dates Only restricts entries to dates or times; for the list of acceptable date and time formats, see Entering Dates and Times.)

If someone types a date, time, or number in a label-only cell, it is converted to a label. If someone tries to type a label or number into a date-only cell, an error message appears.

To return to unlimited data entry, right-click the limited block, choose Block Properties, then then set Data Input Constraints to General in the Constraints property pane.

See Also

Protecting Cells

Using Styles


Changing Page Properties

To change page properties, do one of the following:

Right-click the page tab.

Select the page tab with the left mouse button, then choose Property|Active Page in the Property band.

You can use page properties to

Set display options--suppress the display of zero values, hide and show page borders and grid lines

"Zoom"--enlarge and shrink the page display

Name pages

Set cell and object protection for a page

Set default conditional cell color and column width for a page

Color-code page tabs

See the following topics for details on changing page properties:

Setting Page Display Options

Suppressing Zeros

Removing Row and Column Borders

Hiding Spreadsheet Grid Lines

Zooming In or Out

Naming a Page

Enabling Page Protection

Coloring Conditional Cells

Setting Default Column Width

Changing Page Tab Color


Setting Page Display Options

You can use the Display page property to suppress or display zeros, and hide or show notebook borders and grid lines.

Suppressing Zeros

Removing Row and Column Borders

Hiding Spreadsheet Grid Lines


Suppressing Zeros

To stop zeros from displaying on a page, right-click the page tab and choose Display, then check No in the Display Zeros group. All values that equal exactly zero are suppressed. For example, a value such as .004 that appears as 0 if decimal precision is 0, will still appear even if Display Zeros is set to No, because it is not actually 0.

Zero suppression does not remove zero values from the page. They remain in memory and reappear if you set Display Zeros to Yes.

Caution: When Display Zeros is set to No (zeros are suppressed), it is easy to accidentally write over cells containing formulas that evaluate as zero. Make sure Undo is enabled (see Enabling the Undo Command for more information), or consider protecting the page (see Enabling Page Protection for details).


Removing Row and Column Borders

If you do not need the row and column borders (for example, if your page is set up as a form for data input), you can remove them from the screen.

To remove borders from a page, right-click its tab and choose Display. Then uncheck Row Borders (numbers) and/or Column Borders (letters) in the Border Options group. To show them again, follow the same procedure and check the type of border to show.


Hiding Spreadsheet Grid Lines

The spreadsheet grid displays by default. It separates rows and columns; each rectangle in the grid is a cell. If you do not want to display the grid, you can remove it.

To remove grid lines from a page, right-click its tab and choose Display. Then uncheck Horizontal and/or Vertical in the Grid Lines group. To show grid lines again, follow the same procedure and check the type of lines to show.

Note:	The Grid Lines setting affects only onscreen display. Grid lines do not print. Use the Line Drawing block property to produce printed grids; see Drawing Lines Around Blocks.


Zooming In or Out

You can reduce or enlarge the displayed size of all cells on a page. View|Zoom and the Zoom Factor page property let you pull back to see a whole printed page, or focus in on the detail of a few cells.

To change the size of the active page display with a menu command, choose View|Zoom and adjust the Zoom Factor setting. The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer. In the Apply To group, select Page to apply the zoom setting to the active page.

Note:	The Zoom Factor setting does not affect printed output; use the Scaling option in the File|Page Setup dialog box to scale printed documents (see Changing Print Size for details).


Naming a Page

Pages are initially named with letters of the alphabet in sequence, from A to Z, continuing from AA to AZ, up to IV. To assign a descriptive name to a page, double-click its tab. Type the new name, then press Enter. You can use up to 64 characters--letters and numbers--in the name, as well as these special characters:

~   `   !   %   _   |   \   '   ?

You can also use blank spaces within a name (not at the beginning), but you cannot use a name previously assigned to a group in the same notebook.

After you press Enter, the new name appears on the tab. Formulas that refer to the renamed page adjust to use the new name. When you point to cells in this page from other pages to build formula references, the new page name appears in the input line.

If, after assigning a page name, you want to rename it to its original letter name, right-click its tab. Then, click Reset in the Name property pane of the page Object Inspector. Click OK to use the letter name. You can also enter a new name in the Page Name edit field, but double-clicking the page tab is usually easier.

Note:	The Objects page (the last page in the notebook) cannot be renamed.

See Also

Using Blocks in Formulas


Enabling Page Protection

With the page Protection property, you can prevent cell entries and floating objects from being changed.

To prevent unauthorized access to an entire notebook, protect it with a password (see Assigning a Password to a File for details).

Protecting Cells

The Protection page property setting Enable Cell Locking works with the Constraints block property (see Protecting Cells). When Enable Cell Locking is checked, all cells on a page are protected against edits or data entry. Use page cell protection to set up protection for a page, then use block cell protection (set through the Constraints block property) to unprotect specific blocks of cells where changes are allowed.

To protect cells on an entire page, right-click the page tab and choose Protection. Check Enable Cell Locking. To unprotect an entire page, uncheck Enable Cell Locking. When page protection of cells is disabled, Quattro Pro ignores the status of blocks protected or unprotected with the Constraints block property.

Protecting Floating Objects

You can use the Protection page property to protect all floating objects on an entire page from being moved, resized, edited, or deleted. Protected objects include floating graphs and graphic objects, linked and embedded DDE and OLE objects, drawn objects, and SpeedButtons.

To protect objects on an entire page, right-click the page tab and choose Protection. Check Enable Object Locking. To unprotect an entire page, uncheck Enable Object Locking.

Note:	Individual objects also have a Protection property which can be set with the objects' specific Object Inspector. When page protection of objects is disabled, Quattro Pro ignores the status of objects that have been individually protected or unprotected.

See Also

Protecting Floating Objects from Change


Coloring Conditional Cells

With the page Conditional Color property, you can change the color of specific types of data: values above or below a specified range, and ERR values. For example, you can use it to display all negative values in red or all values greater than 1000 in green. Choose from these settings in the Conditional Color property:

Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value let you enter a range of values you consider normal. Cells with values within this range will appear in the Normal Color. The default settings are 0 (smallest) and 1E+300 (largest). You can specify different colors for values above and below this range by clicking the option and clicking a color square in the color palette.

Below Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values are below the Smallest Normal Value.

Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set by Smallest Normal Value and Greatest Normal Value.

Above Normal Color sets the color of cells whose values are above the Greatest Normal Value.

ERR Color specifies the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors.

Enable indicates whether to use the colors set with this menu.

To turn off conditional colors, uncheck Enable.

To change the colors available, use the notebook Palette property (see Palette for details).

When the page Conditional Color property is enabled, changing the block Text Color property does not change the color of normal values.

Note:	If colored entries do not appear on your printout, you may need to choose a darker color. Light colors print as white on some printers.

See Also

Changing Text Color


Setting Default Column Width

By default, columns are wide enough to display approximately nine characters in the default font. You can adjust the width of all columns in the active page by changing the Default Width property setting.

To change the default width of columns for a page, right-click its tab and choose Default Width. Choose Characters, Inches, or Centimeters and enter the number of units in the Column Width edit field.

The Default Width setting does not affect columns that were explicitly adjusted using the Fit button, the block Column Width property, or the mouse. Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width, you must select them and check the Reset Width option of the block Column Width property.

See Also

Resizing Rows and Columns


Changing Page Tab Color

Color-coding page tabs can help organize your notebooks. For example, all pages for a sales region or calendar quarter might be the same color.

The default page tab color is white. To change the color,

1.	Point to a tab and inspect it to display the active page Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Tab Color.

3.	Point to the color you want and click the mouse.

4.	Click OK to apply that color to the active page.

You can create custom colors. For details, see Creating Custom Colors.


Creating and Running Slide Shows

The following topics describe how to create slide show presentations from graphs, change slide show properties, and add graph buttons to slides.

Creating Slide Shows

Creating a Slide Show

Using the Slide Show Expert

Setting Default Effects and Display Times

Adding Transition Effects

Adding Slides to a Slide Show

Running a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window

Selecting a Master Slide

Using the Master Slide Gallery

Changing Slide Show Effects and Display Times

Editing a Slide

Closing the Light Table Window

Slide Show Shortcuts

Using Graph Buttons

Creating a Graph Button

Creating a Background Graph Button


Creating a Slide Show

Quattro Pro's slide show features let you present your graphs in a full-screen display with special transition effects.

If you are creating a slide show that consists mainly of bullet charts, use the Slide Show Expert; see Using the Slide Show Expert.

If you are creating a slide show that has a mix of bullet charts and numeric graphs, use tools on the Objects Toolbar of the Objects page.

To create a slide show,

1.	Click a blank area of the Objects page to deselect all graph icons (this prevents you from accidentally adding graphs to the slide show), then click the Create Slide Show button [image] on the Objects Toolbar. A dialog box appears.

2.	Type a name for the slide show into the edit field and choose OK. The Light Table window for the slide show appears.

3.	Right-click the Light Table title bar and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Light Table in the Property Band. Choose Default Effect and set the default visual transition effect, display time, and other properties; see Setting Default Effects and Display Times.

4.	Add slides to the slide show from either the Light Table window or the Objects page. You can add the same graph to the slide show more than once, if you need to. For more information, see Adding Slides to a Slide Show.

You can select a master slide to serve as the background template for all slides in a slide show; see Selecting a Master Slide.

You can choose a template style for the master slide with the Master Slide Gallery; see Using the Master Slide Gallery.

5.	Click the Run Slide Show button [image] or choose Slide Show|Run Slide Show to start a test run. Write down any changes you want to make to the slide order, transition effects, or display times. If slides have graph buttons, be sure to test them, too. After the slide show is finished running, the Light Table window appears again.

6.	Rearrange the slide order and change transition effects, effect speed, and display time for individual slides.

7.	Repeat the last two steps until you are satisfied with your slide show.

See Also

Editing a Slide Show

Enhancing Graphs

Running a Slide Show

Slide Show Shortcuts


Using the Slide Show Expert

The Slide Show Expert helps you create and format slide shows that consist primarily of bullet charts, slides with bulleted lists. (For more information on bullet charts, see Creating Bullet Charts.) To use the Slide Show Expert,

1.	Create a block of data that contains separate columns for the title/subtitle, major bullets, and minor bullets of several bullet charts. A blank row or an entry in the title column of the block indicates the start of each new bullet chart.

2.	Click the Experts button [image] and choose Slide Show Expert, or choose Help|Experts|Slide Show.

3.	Follow the instructions in each Expert pane. In separate screens, you select a slide show block, a master slide (optional), the name of the slide show and a transition effect used for all slides.

Tip:	If you need help creating bullet charts, click the Coach button. A Coach guides you through the steps of creating bullet charts, then returns you to the Slide Show Expert.

4.	As you finish each step, click the Next Step button. Choose Previous Step to return to a previous Slide Show Expert pane.

5.	At the last step, click Create Show to create a slide show and close the Slide Show Expert. The Light Table window appears showing all of the bullet charts created for the slide show.

To run the slide show, click the Run Slide Show button [image] on the Toolbar.


Setting Default Effects and Display Times

Quattro Pro has special transition effects and timing parameters you set to make slide show presentations more interesting. When you want to assign the same effect and display time to the majority of slides in your presentation, change the default settings before you add slides to the slide show. (Changes to slide show defaults affect only those slides added after the settings are changed.)

To adjust slide show defaults,

1.	Right-click the slide show icon and choose the Properties command to display an Object Inspector.

2.	Choose Default Effect.

3.	Make any changes you want in the Default Effect dialog box (see the settings described below), then choose OK.

To change these settings for individual slides, edit the slide show in the Light Table; see Changing Slide Show Effects and Display Times.

The following options appear in the Default Effect dialog box:

The Transition Effect you assign to a slide controls the way that slide makes its appearance on the screen. (The way the graph disappears from the screen depends on the Transition Effect assigned to the next slide in the slide show.)

The speed of the transition effect is controlled by the Slow, Medium, and Fast buttons. Try each effect at the Fast speed initially, then slow it down if necessary. One or two slow effects can be dramatic; many slow effects can be tedious.

When Overlay Previous Slide is checked, the selected slide overlays the previous one instead of replacing it.

When Use Master Slide is checked, the selected slide displays the template style and graph elements used in the master slide (the first slide in a slide show). The master slide also affects the position and color of graph titles and bulleted text in bullet chart slides.

When Skip Slide In Presentation is checked, the selected slide is not shown when viewing the slide show. This option lets you skip a slide without removing it from the slide show.

The Display Time specifies how long the slide remains on screen, in seconds (up to 3600). Enter zero when you want the slide to stay on screen until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.

See Also

Light Table Properties

Slide Show Icon Properties


Adding Transition Effects

By default, each slide immediately wipes right to the next in a slide show. You can choose a different effect from the Effect list at the bottom of the Light Table dialog box. This list contains all the visual transition effects available. The effect you assign to a graph controls the way that graph makes its appearance on the screen. (The way the graph disappears from the screen depends on the transition effect of the next slide in the slide show.)

The names of the effects in the list box describe what the effect does. When the Overlay box is checked, the second image overlays the first instead of replacing it. The best way to choose a visual effect is to try as many as you can, then select the most appropriate one. Here are some tips on using visual effects:

Use wipes to simulate turning a page because the second slide appears to be underneath the first one. Use tilts to give the effect of one image pushing away another.

Avoid slower effects like the dissolve--2x2 pixels unless there is good reason to keep your viewers waiting (perhaps to increase suspense). Moderate dissolves and fade out/fade in can be restful, but fast dissolves (when run at full speed) can appear almost violent.

Use overlays to build slides from other ones. This is often effective when discussing a list of bulleted items. The first slide shows only the first bulleted item. The second slide then builds on the first by adding the second item. The subsequent slides continue building until all items are onscreen.

Take care to match the effects to the overall tone of your presentation. Showy effects like spirals, sides to center, center to sides, vertical stripes, or diamonds are best in small doses; they can look out of place in serious board rooms.

The speed of the transition effect is controlled by the Slow, Medium, and Fast buttons.

If you want the slide to remain on the screen for a set number of seconds (up to 3600) instead of waiting for the viewer to click or press a key, enter a number in the Display Time edit field. Entering 0 (the default) means the slide stays on the screen until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.

See Also

Creating a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Enhancing Graphs

Running a Slide Show


Adding Slides to a Slide Show

There are several methods you can use to add slides to a slide show:

Adding Slides When you Create a Slide Show

If any graph icons were selected when you clicked the Create Slide Show button [image], they are automatically added to the slide show in the order in which they were selected.

Dragging and Dropping Slides

You can drag and drop graphs and slides to add them to a slide show using any of these methods:

Drag one or more slides in a Light Table window and drop them into another Light Table window. Use Ctrl+drag to copy slides and drag to move them.

Drag one or more graph icons or slide show icons on the Objects page and drop them on a slide show icon.

Drag one or more graph icons on the Objects page and drop them into a Light Table window.

Note:	You can also drag slides from the Light Table window onto a notebook page to create a floating graph.

Inserting a Slide

To insert an existing graph as a slide, select a slide in the Light Table, then choose Slide Show|Insert Slide. A dialog box appears showing a list of all graphs on the Objects page. Select one and choose OK. The slide is inserted before the currently selected slide.

Creating New Slides

To create a new slide from the Light Table window, click the New Slide button [image] on the Slides Toolbar or choose Slide Show|New Slide. The Graph New dialog box appears. For information about the options in this dialog box, see Creating a Graph in a Window.

Adding Slides Using the Clipboard

To copy graphs and slides into a slide show using the Clipboard,

1.	Select one or more floating graphs on a notebook page, graph or slide show icons on the Objects page, or slides in a Light Table window. (If you select a slide show icon, all slides in the slide show are selected.)

2.	Click the Copy button [image] on the Toolbar, or choose Edit|Copy.

3.	Open the Light Table for the slide show you want to add the slide.

From the Objects page, choose Graphics|Edit Slide Show.

From the Light Table window, click the Edit Slide Show button [image] on the Toolbar, or choose Slide Show|Edit Slide Show.

4.	Select the slide after which you want to add the slide(s).

5.	Click the Paste button [image], or choose Edit|Paste. The slide(s) is added after the selected slide.


Running a Slide Show

To begin a slide show, choose Graphics|Run Slide Show (or Slide Show|Run Slide Show from a Light Table). Choose a slide show name from the list, then choose OK.

To start a slide show from the Objects page, select a slide show icon, then either choose Graphics|Run Slide Show or click the Run Slide Show button [image] on the Toolbar.

When a slide show is running, the following actions have special meaning:

Action	Result

Left-click+right-click	Go to a selected slide

Press F5	Go to a selected slide

Left-click	Go to next slide

Right-click	Go to previous slide

Press Backspace	Go to previous slide

Press Esc	Cancel slide show

Click a graph button	(or type its first letter) Perform the actions defined in the graph button

Press any other key	Go to next slide

Note:	Quattro Pro for Windows will run Quattro Pro for DOS slide shows, which are built on the spreadsheet. After you open the DOS file, highlight the range that contains slide show information, choose Graphics|New Slide Show, give the show a name, and choose OK. (You can also highlight the range and choose Graphics|Run Slide Show to simultaneously create the slide show and run it.) Sound files will be ignored. An icon appears on the Objects page to represent the slide show. You can edit the slide show on the spreadsheet page, or use the procedure in Editing a Slide Show.

See Also

Creating a Background Graph Button

Creating a Graph Button

Creating a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Enhancing Graphs

Slide Show Shortcuts


Editing a Slide Show

Editing a slide show is easy because Quattro Pro displays the slides as though they were laid out on a light table. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

To edit a slide show, double-click its icon on the Objects page, or select the slide show icon and choose Graphics|Edit Slide Show. When a slide show is open, you can edit other slide shows by clicking the Edit Slide Show button [image] on the Toolbar. The Light Table window appears.

The Light Table shows all the graphs in the slide show in miniature form, in the order in which they will appear. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.

To move a slide to a new position, drag the miniature of the graph to a new location. When you are rearranging slides in this way, the pointer changes to a hand. When you release the mouse button, the graph moves to the new position. The light table scrolls to reveal more slides if you drag the pointer to the top or bottom edge.

To rearrange slides using the Clipboard, use the Edit|Cut, Copy, and Paste commands.

To delete a graph from the Light Table, select it and press Del or click the Cut button [image] on the Slides Toolbar.

The Light Table is a resizable window that can be tiled or cascaded with other Quattro Pro windows. You can open multiple slide shows at once, and copy slides from one Light Table window to another.

The Slides Toolbar

When the Light Table is open, the Slides Toolbar replaces whichever Toolbar you were using. The Slides Toolbar contains additional tools for editing slide shows and formatting slides.

Editing Slides Using the Property Band

You can edit selected slides using controls on the Property Band. The Property Band for the Light Table contains pull-down lists and controls for changing slide effects and display times. To see what each Property Band control does, point to it.

See the following topics for more information about editing a slide show:

Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window

Selecting a Master Slide

Using the Master Slide Gallery

Changing Slide Show Effects and Display Times

Editing a Slide

Closing the Light Table Window

See Also

Creating a Slide Show

Enhancing Graphs

Running a Slide Show

Slide Show Shortcuts

Toolbars


Changing the Slide Type in the Light Table Window

The Light Table view has four different slide types: Small, Medium, Large, and Name Only; the default slide type is Medium. To change the slide type in the Light Table view, choose a slide type from the View menu (for example, View|Medium Slides). Another way to change the slide type is to right-click any area in the Light Table outside of a slide, choose the Properties command, then edit the Slide Type property.

See Also

Light Table Properties


Selecting a Master Slide

The first slide position in the Light Table window is reserved for the optional master slide. The master slide maintains common elements (such as a corporate logo and other graph annotations) and renders a common background style for all slides in a slide show. When the master slide is a bullet chart, it also affects the position, size, and color of graph titles, bullets, and bulleted text in all bullet chart slides in the slide show.

The master slide does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide. You can use any graph on the Objects page as a master slide, including graphs not in the slide show. You can customize a blank bullet chart to create a master slide template.

To select a master slide,

1.	Right-click the Light Table window anywhere outside a slide, or choose Property|Light Table in the Property Band. The Light Table Object Inspector appears.

2.	Choose Master Slide, then select a graph from the list.

3.	Choose OK.

You can also create a master slide from the Light Table. Choose Slide Show|New Master Slide. A graph window for a bullet chart appears. The window displays sample text to show where the titles and bulleted items will appear in each slide. To customize the bullet chart, right-click the title box or sample bullet text and choose the Properties command, or use the Master Slide Gallery to choose a template style.

Tip:	If you do not want a slide to use the master slide as its template, turn off the User Master Slide option before you select a master slide. To turn off the Use Master Slide option, select the slide and click the Use Master Slide control in the Property Band. Select Ignore Master. If you want to use some of the attributes of the master slide, copy the master slide to the Clipboard, select the slide you want to change, then choose Edit|Paste Special. (The Paste Special command does not copy graph templates or annotations drawn on a blank graph type.) For more information on the Paste Special command, see Copying Graphs Within a Notebook.

The master slide's background and graph annotations are rendered in other slides, but its graph elements are not. For example, if the master slide is a pie graph, the pie graph does not appear in each slide.

If a slide has the Use Master Slide option checked, the master slides's background and graph annotations are rendered first, and then the slide is drawn. Any graph elements, such as the graph pane, that have a defined fill color will overlay the master slide background. If the slide has a colored background fill style, the Use Master Slide option is automatically turned off.

See Also

Light Table Properties

Using the Master Slide Gallery


Using the Master Slide Gallery

Once you have selected a master slide, you can use the Master Slide Gallery to choose a template style. The Master Slide Gallery provides a collection of predesigned slide templates.

Note:	You do not have to choose a template style from the Master Slide Gallery. The master slide you selected might already serve as an appropriate template.

To use the Master Slide Gallery, choose Slide Show|Master Slide Gallery from a Light Table window. The Master Slide Gallery dialog box appears. Select a background style for the master slide, then choose OK.

Note:	The template styles in the Master Slide Gallery are identical to the ones available in the Graph Gallery.

See Also

Using the Graph Gallery


Changing Slide Show Effects and Display Times

To change the transition effect or timing parameters for one or more slides,

1.	Select the slide(s) in the Light Table.

2.	Choose Property|Current Object in the Property Band. You can also right-click the selected slide(s) and choose the Properties command from the QuickMenu.

3.	Choose the Slide Effect property and select a different transition effect or display time.

See Setting Default Effects and Display Times for a description of the transition effects and timing parameters you can set.

See Also

Slide Properties.


Editing a Slide

To edit any slide in the Light Table window, including the master, double-click the slide or choose Slide Show|Edit Slide to open the slide in a graph window.

If you selected a master slide for the slide show and the slide you are editing has the Use Master Slide option checked, the slide displays elements from the master slide such as the background color and graph annotations. However, you can edit only those graph elements contained within the specific slide. If you choose a colored background fill style for the slide, the Use Master Slide option is automatically turned off.

Note:	When you edit a slide, you actually edit the graph on which the slide is based. You can also edit the graph in a graph window or directly on a notebook page; see Editing Graphs.

See Also

Changing Slide Show Effects and Display Times

Editing Graphs

Selecting a Master Slide


Closing the Light Table Window

To close the Light Table window, double-click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the window, or press Ctrl+F4.

See Also

Editing a Slide Show


Slide Show Shortcuts

If you are in a hurry and do not want to bother with some of the fine points of putting together a slide show, there are several ways to accelerate the process:

To get a fast idea of what your graphs will look like full-screen, select the graph icon and choose Graphics|View Graph. To see several graphs in sequence, select their icons and choose Graphics|View Graph or Graphics|Run Slide Show. Graph buttons work when you display graphs in this way.

To quickly assign graphs to a slide show, select their icons--in the order you want them shown--before you click the Create Slide Show button [image]. The current default effects are applied to these graphs.

To create a new blank graph while you are working in the Objects page, click the New Graph button [image] on the Toolbar or choose Graphics|New Graph. Leave all the series blank in the dialog box that appears and choose OK to begin editing a new blank graph.

See Also

Creating a Slide Show

Editing a Slide Show

Enhancing Graphs

Running a Slide Show


Creating Graph Buttons

Graph buttons are a special type of text box that can greatly enhance the usefulness of a graph. A graph button can

Branch to another graph, using visual transition effects if desired

Run a macro

Run a macro and then branch to another graph

Graph buttons are most useful in slide shows, where they let you construct branching presentations driven by the viewer's clicks. This hypertext-like ability offers virtually unlimited possibilities. For example, you can set up a self-running slide show that starts by asking what the viewer wants to learn.

To make a graph button,

1.	Display a graph in a graph window, or double-click a floating graph to edit it on the spreadsheet.

2.	Create a text box with the desired wording (the box can have no text if you want).

3.	Right-click the text box and choose the Properties command. The text box Object Inspector appears. Choose the Graph Button property.

Check the Execute Macro box if you want the graph button to run a macro when it is clicked. Enter a macro into the Macro edit field. You can either enter a named macro that you have already defined in the notebook, like {MYMACRO}, or enter macro statements of up to 160 characters, like {SlideShowRun.Goto_Slide "BUDGET"}.

Check Select Graph to pick the graph you want the graph button to display after it is finished running the macro. If you do not want it to display a different graph, uncheck this box. You can also choose a transition effect, speed, and duration. You can also check Overlay if you want to display this graph over the previous one in a slide show, and check User Master if you want the graph to use the slide show's master slide.

4.	Click OK.

Graph buttons are active whenever the graph appears full-screen--in a slide show or when displayed with the Graphics|View Graph command. They are not "live" in a graph window or in a floating graph on a spreadsheet page.

See Also

Creating a Background Graph Button

Enhancing Graphs


Creating a Background Graph Button

The Graph Button property in the graph setup and background Object Inspector turns the graph background into a graph button. To create a background graph button,

1.	Right-click the background of the graph and choose the Properties command, or choose Property|Graph Setup in the Property band. The graph setup and background Object Inspector appears.

2.	Choose Graph Button.

Check the Execute Macro box if you want to run a macro whenever the background is clicked. Enter a macro into the Macro edit field. You can either enter a named macro that you have already defined in the notebook, like {MY MACRO}, or enter a macro statement of up to 160 characters, like {Slide.Goto_Slide "BUDGET"}.

Check the Select Graph box, then choose the name of the graph you want the graph button to display after it is finished running the macro. If you want a clicked background to redisplay the current graph, pick the current graph name from the list.

When Select Graph is checked, you can choose a visual transition effect, speed, and duration. You can also check Overlay if you want to display this graph over the previous one in a slide show, and check Use Master if you want the graph to use the slide show's master slide.

3.	Click OK.

See Also

Creating a Graph Button

Enhancing Graphs


Building Basic Toolbars

The following topics explain how to build basic Toolbars with the Toolbar Designer:

About Basic Toolbars

Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Using Button Palettes

Setting Button Properties

Adding Custom Buttons and Labels

Assigning Macros

Removing Toolbar Objects

Setting Toolbar Properties

Saving Custom Toolbars

Closing Toolbars in the Toolbar Designer

Editing Custom Toolbars

Using Custom Toolbars

Exiting Toolbar Designer

Opening and Closing Toolbars

Toolbar Control Menu

See Also

Building Complex Toolbars

Building Custom Applications

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


About Basic Toolbars

The Toolbar Designer offers a simple way to create custom Toolbars for features you use the most--even special macros. You can choose standard buttons from palettes or build your own. Each button has its own Object Help for easy identification. Standard buttons even link to detailed Help topics for more information.

If you are building an application, you can use the Toolbar Designer to create a custom Toolbar with user shortcuts. Toolbars are also suited to operations that affect the current data, and can display information about the current data.

The Toolbar Designer is useful for building basic Toolbars with standard buttons, push buttons, bitmaps buttons, and text. To add edit fields, check boxes, and other controls most often found in dialog boxes, use the UI Builder; see Building Complex Toolbars.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars


Toolbar Designer Guidelines

Follow these steps to create a custom Toolbar with standard buttons:

1.	Choose Tools|Toolbar Designer to display a blank Toolbar and Toolbar design tools.

2.	Display one or more standard button palettes.

3.	Click a button on the palette two times (the first click activates the palette), then click the new Toolbar two times to copy the button and position it.

4.	Move new buttons into final position.

5.	Save the new Toolbar.

6.	Test the new Toolbar to make sure it works the way you expect. Edit the buttons if necessary.

Once you have created a Toolbar with standard or custom buttons, you can copy its buttons to other custom Toolbars. If you want to build a custom Toolbar that is similar to another, you can edit an existing custom Toolbar and save it under another name.

Note:	If you want to build a complex Toolbar with edit fields, check boxes, and other controls most often found in dialog boxes, use the UI Builder; see Building Complex Toolbars.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars


Using Button Palettes

The Toolbar Designer includes a number of standard button palettes based on activities performed with the main menu options. They are named in the Button Palette list.

Loading Button Palettes

To load a button palette, choose it in the Button Palette list. If it hides an open Toolbar, choose Toolbar|Tile.

As you point to each button on a palette, its name appears at the top of the window. For a description, point to the button, hold down Ctrl, then right-click to display Object Help.

Copying Buttons

To copy a button from the a button palette to a custom Toolbar,

1.	Click the button palette to activate it.

2.	Click a button in the palette to copy it.

3.	Click the custom Toolbar to activate it.

4.	Click at the location in the custom Toolbar where you want to place the new button. The new button appears.

To move the button, click it and and drag it to a new position. You can copy buttons from one custom Toolbar to another the same way.

If you start to copy a button and change your mind, click the Selection tool [image] in the Controls Toolbar to cancel the operation.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Setting Button Properties

A copied button has the same properties as the original. You can change the properties of any custom button or label on a custom Toolbar. To inspect or change the properties of a selected custom object, right-click it and choose the Properties command. The Object Inspector lists some of the properties in the following table, depending on whether the object is a push button, bitmap button, or label.

Property	Settings

Bitmap	Bitmap to display on the bitmap button; choose Browse to search for other bitmaps

Dimension	Distance of the object's upper left corner from the left edge and top of the Toolbar; the object's width and height (all in pixels)

Help line	Name or hint text to display at the top of the window when the button is pointed to

Label Font	Typeface, size, and style of text for the label object

Label Text	Text to display on the button or label

Object Help	Title and text to display in the object's Object Help window; developers with Winhelp generation capability can specify a help topic jump

Text Draw Flags	Word-wrapping toggle, vertical and horizontal alignment; check Apply to add text as specified

You can also view and set properties of the Toolbar itself. For details, see Setting Toolbar Properties.

See Also

Adding Custom Buttons and Labels

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Adding Custom Buttons and Labels

Besides standard buttons, you can add these objects to custom Toolbars:

Push buttons are rectangular buttons with text.

Bitmap buttons are rectangular buttons with bitmaps and optional text.

Labels are text for description and identification.

To add an object to a custom Toolbar,

1.	Click one of the object tools in the Controls Toolbar, then click the custom Toolbar. The new button or label appears surrounded by handles.

2.	Move the selected object, if necessary.

3.	Right-click the selected object, choose the Properties command, and set its properties.

4.	If the object is a push button or bitmap button, make it perform the desired action by assigning a macro to it as described in the next section.

See Also

Assigning Macros

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Setting Button Properties


Assigning Macros

Push buttons and bitmap buttons work by activating assigned macros. The macro can be complex--for example, an application involving several linked notebooks--or simple, even a single command equivalent such as {WindowTitles "Clear"}, which clears locked titles.

To assign a macro to a Toolbar object, click the object. Then choose Tools|Assign Macro to display the Assign Macro dialog box. Enter the page, block, and notebook location of the macro to assign, then click OK.

If you assign a macro to a standard button, it performs its standard operation then runs the macro. For example, you can assign a cell containing {BEEP} to the Paste button from the Edit palette. Then, each time you use that button, it beeps when the paste operation is finished.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Removing Toolbar Objects

To remove a button or label from a custom Toolbar, click the object then press Del or click the Cut button [image] in the Controls Toolbar.

Standard buttons are always available for reuse but before you delete a button you have created, consider saving it to a scrap Toolbar first. Choose Toolbar|New to open a new Toolbar, then copy the unwanted button to it. Save that Toolbar to a meaningful name--SCRAP.BAR, for example--and keep obsolete custom buttons there for future use or redesign.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Setting Toolbar Properties

You can also set properties for the entire Toolbar. To inspect or change the properties of a selected custom Toolbar, right-click its title. The Object Inspector lists these properties:

Property	Settings

Dimension	Toolbar size and location; only Height (in pixels) applies when the Toolbar is docked

Title	Name to display in the Toolbar title bar

Position Adjust	Specifies how the Toolbar moves when the Quattro Pro window is resized; does not apply when the Toolbar is docked

Grid Options	Shows/hides a positioning grid and sets the number of pixels between grid lines

Name	Used to identify the Toolbar in macros, link commands, and formulas

Disabled	Disables all controls in the Toolbar

You can also set properties for custom Toolbar buttons and labels.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Setting Button Properties


Saving Custom Toolbars

To save a custom Toolbar, choose Toolbar|Save. Use Toolbar|Save As to copy a custom Toolbar by saving it under another name.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Closing Toolbars in the Toolbar Designer

To close a Toolbar you are building or editing, make sure it is selected then choose Toolbar|Close. If you have not saved that Toolbar yet, you will see a confirmation prompt. Click OK to delete the Toolbar without saving it.

If you prefer, click the Control-menu box in the upper left corner of the active Toolbar and choose Close, or double-click the Control-menu box.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Editing Custom Toolbars

To edit a closed Toolbar, choose it in the Custom Toolbar list or open it using Toolbar|Open. To search other directories, click <Browse>. Then, add and delete tools just as if you were building a new Toolbar.

When you are done, choose Toolbar|Save. Choose Toolbar|Save As to save the edited Toolbar under another name.

If you want, you can continue editing custom Toolbars in the UI Builder. Click the UI Builder button [image] to display its Toolbar and use its features.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Building Custom Applications

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Using Custom Toolbars

While editing Toolbars, you can "dock" the selected bar--install it for use--without leaving the Toolbar Designer. Choose Tools|Dock or choose Dock in the Control-menu box for that Toolbar. The new bar appears near the top of the Quattro Pro window; it is no longer in Edit mode and is ready to use. When the Controls Toolbar is closed, you can dock a custom Toolbar by displaying a Toolbar Control menu and choosing Append, Insert, or Replace (see Toolbar Control Menu for details).

After docking a custom Toolbar, you can instantly return it to Edit mode. Display its Toolbar Control menu, then choose Customize. The Controls Toolbar appears at the top of the window and the custom Toolbar is "undocked" and ready to edit.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars

Testing Dialog Boxes and Toolbars


Exiting the Toolbar Designer
Exiting Toolbar Designer

When you have finished with the Toolbar Designer, exit by closing all custom Toolbars or activating another type of window. For example, you can use Toolbar|Close All to exit the Toolbar Designer, or you can click the minimized notebook icon at the bottom of the window.

See Also

Building Basic Toolbars

Building Complex Toolbars


Opening and Closing Toolbars

A standard Toolbar displays at the top of each Quattro Pro window. You can remove that Toolbar with the Display property in the application Object Inspector (see Hiding Parts of the Window). You can add and remove other (secondary) Toolbars with the Toolbar Control menu.

Secondary Toolbars have a Close Toolbar button, the red X at their right edge. You can click it to close the Toolbar, or use the Toolbar Control menu.

To display the current arrangement of Toolbars as the default, right-click the application title bar to display the application Object Inspector. Choose General and check Save Toolbars On Exit. The next time you start Quattro Pro, the same Toolbars will appear at the top of the notebook window.

Tip:	To quickly cycle through the standard Toolbars for any area of Quattro Pro, press Ctrl+Shift+T.

See Also

Saving a Toolbar Arrangement


Toolbar Control Menu

The Toolbar Control menu lets you switch to a different standard Toolbar, or add and remove custom Toolbars below the standard Toolbar.

To display the Toolbar Control menu, right-click the Toolbar any place outside a button or field. The blank space toward the right end of the Toolbar is convenient.

The top portion of the Toolbar Control menu lists other standard Toolbars available for the active window; a checkmark appears beside the active Toolbar. To switch to another standard Toolbar, click one of the standard Toolbars in the list. For a list of Toolbars available for each Quattro Pro window, see Toolbars.

The following additional commands appear on the Toolbar Control menu. (For standard Toolbars, only the Append command appears.)

Append	adds a Toolbar below the active bar.

Insert	adds a Toolbar above the active bar.

Replace	closes the active Toolbar and replaces it with another.

Remove	closes the active Toolbar. It is often easier to close Toolbars by clicking the red X at the right end of the Toolbar.

Customize	When selected, this option displays the Controls Toolbar and puts the active Toolbar into Edit mode (for details, see Building Basic Toolbars.

When you choose Append, Insert, or Replace, a list of custom Toolbars appears. Choose from the list or click <Browse> to search another directory. You can display as many Toolbars as you like; however, you can display only one standard Toolbar at a time.

To save the current Toolbar arrangement as the default, use the Save Toolbars On Exit option of the General property in the application Object Inspector.

See Also

Opening and Closing Toolbars

Saving a Toolbar Arrangement


Using Quattro Pro Windows

These topics describe how to use Quattro Pro's Window menu and View menu to select and handle windows within Quattro Pro:

Selecting a Window

Duplicating a Window

Resizing and Arranging Windows

Hiding and Showing Windows

Splitting a Window into Panes

Resizing Panes

Unsynchronizing Panes

Closing the Second Pane

Locking Rows and Columns


Selecting a Window

If you have more than one window open, you can select the one you want to work in with commands in the Window menu. When a window is selected, it is referred to as the active window. The window with the highlighted title bar is active.

There are three ways to select an open window:

Click any part of the window.

Choose the document window from the list at the bottom of the Window menu. A checkmark appears next to the name of the active window.

Press Ctrl+F6 to move to the next document window. If that window is beneath other windows, it moves to the top.

Note:	To move to the next non-document window, such as the Spell Check or Scenario Manager dialog boxes, press Alt+F6.

See Also

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Window Menu


Duplicating a Window

To display a duplicate copy of the active notebook in a new window, choose Window|New View.

This is useful when you want to look at different pages in the notebook at the same time, or if you want to see distant parts of one page at the same time. You can create as many duplicate views of a notebook as you want. These views are titled with the name of the notebook followed by a colon (:) and the number of the view. To remove an extra view, close it with the Control-menu box or press Ctrl+F4.

The duplicate window appears full size in front of other open windows, with cell A1 selected on the first page. Now you can resize the windows so you can see parts of both of them (see Resizing Windows for details). Then scroll them or select different pages as desired.

Most changes you make to either view (whether changes to data or to most properties) are shown in all views. Only changes to remove grid lines or borders (using the page Object Inspector), setting up locked titles, creating panes, or changing the zoom factor (using the notebook Object Inspector) are not shown in all views.

You can also see two parts of a notebook at the same time by splitting a window into two panes, as described in Splitting a Window into Panes. Unlike duplicate views, however, you can have only two panes.

See Also

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Window Menu


Resizing and Arranging Windows

You can use standard Windows techniques to resize Quattro Pro windows. For instructions on dragging corners or borders of windows with the mouse, choosing commands in the Control menu, or using the Maximize, Minimize, and Restore buttons, see the Windows documentation.

Tiling Windows

The Window|Tile command displays all open windows without overlapping them. When possible, the windows are all given equal room on the screen.

Cascading Windows

The Window|Cascade command rearranges all open windows in overlapping layers. The top line of each window is revealed so you can see the name of the notebook, graph, or dialog box it contains.

Arranging Icons

After minimizing several windows and moving their icons around in the Quattro Pro desktop, you can quickly place the icons in neat rows with the Arrange Icons command.

After you choose Window|Arrange Icons, the icons are lined up in a row along the bottom of the screen.

See Also

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Window Menu


Hiding and Showing Windows

You can hide open windows from view. This is handy when you are working with linked notebooks, but do not want the screen cluttered with too many windows. It also affords you confidentiality when you need it.

To hide a window, select it (see Selecting A Window for details) and choose Window|Hide.

To show a hidden window, choose Window|Show. Then choose the name of the window to show, and choose OK.

See Also

Using Quattro Pro Windows

Window Menu


Splitting a Window into Panes

To view different parts of the same notebook, you can duplicate the window, or split the window into two panes. The panes can be vertically or horizontally split.

To divide the window into panes,

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the lower-right corner of the window over the pane splitter.

2.	The pointer changes to a black double-arrow. Depending on where you position the mouse pointer, the double-arrow points horizontally or vertically.

3.	For horizontal panes, display the vertical double-arrow and drag up. Release the mouse button when the dotted line reaches the separation point you would like. For vertical panes, follow the same procedure, but use the double-arrow that points horizontally and drag left.

You can also split a window into panes using View|Panes. The window is split at the position of the selector.

The active pane is the one containing the selector. To select the other pane, click anywhere in the pane, or press the Pane key, F6. After you unsynchronize the panes (see Resizing Panes for details), you can scroll the panes independently to display different parts of the notebook.

The following topics explain how to control panes:

Resizing Panes

Unsynchronizing Panes

Closing the Second Pane

See Also

Duplicating a Window

Using Quattro Pro Windows

View Menu


Resizing Panes

To resize panes,

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the pane splitter at the lower right of the left or top pane until the double-arrow appears.

2.	Drag to the new position where you would like the first pane to end.

You can also split the window into panes using View|Panes. The window is split at the position of the selector.

1.	Select the row or column where you want the window to be split.

2.	Choose View|Panes.

3.	Choose Horizontal to split the window horizontally at the active row. Choose Vertical to split the window vertically at the active column.

Note:	You can point across panes while entering formulas or using dialog boxes.

Some display changes you make in one pane do not affect the appearance of the other pane:

Display and Default Column Width properties (in the page Object Inspector)

Row Height, Column Width, and Reveal/Hide properties (in the block Object Inspector)

Creating locked titles with View|Locked Titles

For example, if you change column widths in one pane, the previous widths remain in the other. When you return the window display to one pane, Quattro Pro retains column width changes only if they were made in the top or left pane.

See Also

Closing the Second Pane

Duplicating a Window

Splitting a Window into Panes

Unsynchronizing Panes

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Unsynchronizing Panes

By default, panes are synchronized; when you scroll one pane, the other scrolls at the same time. Horizontal panes are synchronized horizontally (columns scroll together) and vertical panes are synchronized vertically (rows scroll together).

You can change this so each pane scrolls independently of the other. This lets you view one part of the notebook in one pane, while you scroll to another part in the other.

To synchronize or unsynchronize panes, choose View|Panes (either before or after splitting the window). Then uncheck Synchronized to be able to scroll the panes independently, or check it to restore synchronization.

See Also

Closing the Second Pane

Duplicating a Window

Resizing Panes

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Closing the Second Pane

To remove the second pane, choose View|Panes, then choose Clear.

You can also remove the second pane with the mouse:

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the pane splitter between the first and second pane so a black double-arrow appears.

2.	Drag the double-arrow back to the top or bottom edge of the window (for horizontal panes) or to the left or right edge (for vertical panes).

The pane on the bottom or right disappears, and the top or left pane again takes up the entire notebook window. Any column width changes, locked titles, or columns that were hidden or revealed in the top or left pane remain in effect.

See Also

Duplicating a Window

Resizing Panes

Unsynchronizing Panes

Using Quattro Pro Windows


Locking Rows and Columns

The View|Locked Titles command locks specific rows and/or columns of a spreadsheet page onscreen as titles. When you scroll the spreadsheet, the titles remain fixed onscreen while the rows below (or columns to the right) scroll as usual.

Locking titles has no effect when printing. To repeat column or row titles on each page of a printed notebook, use the Top and Left heading options in the Options dialog box of File|Print.

To lock titles onscreen,

1.	Scroll the spreadsheet so the column(s) or row(s) you want as titles are visible at the upper left of the window. You cannot adjust the position of the titles after they are locked.

2.	To lock rows, select the row below the last row to be locked. To lock columns, select the column to the right of the last column to be locked. To lock rows and columns at the same time, select the top left cell of the part you want to remain scrollable.

3.	Choose View|Locked Titles.

4.	Choose Horizontal to lock all rows above the selector, Vertical to lock all columns to the left, or Both to lock both rows above and columns to the left.

Any previous View|Locked Titles setting is cleared, and Quattro Pro locks the specified columns or rows in place as titles.

To unlock titles without specifying new ones, choose View|Locked Titles and choose the Clear option.

Before you can edit data within a locked title, you must choose Edit|Go To and specify a cell within the locked title area. This creates an adjacent duplicate copy of the locked areas. Any changes you make to the duplicate cells are reflected in the locked titles.

To remove a duplicate column, scroll the window horizontally until it disappears. To remove a duplicate row, scroll vertically.

Note:	As with hidden and widened columns, locked titles affect the active pane only. If the window is divided into two panes, locked titles are retained after you close the second pane only if you create them in the top or left pane.

See Also

File|Print Command

Using Quattro Pro Windows

View Menu